Ernest Guenther - Essential Oils Vol II PDF

68074 >
OSMANIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARY

Call Nob& 3
"
ACC. No.
'
.
OSMANIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARY
Call No. ^^ ccessi n Nq.
V
Author
Oils
This book should be returned on or before the date
last marked below.
The
Essential Oils
BY
ERNEST GUENTHER, Pn.D,

Vice President and Technical Director
Fritzsche Brothers, Inc. y New York, N. Y.
VOLUME Two
THE CONSTITUENTS OF
ESSENTIAL OILS
Co-author
DARRELL ALTHAUSEN, PH.D.
Manager, Clifton Factory
Fritzsche Brothers, Inc., Cli/ton, N. J.
1949
D. VAN NOSTRAND COMPANY, INC.
TORONTO NEW YORK LONDON

NKW YORK '
\ "*!
I). Van Nostrarid Company, Inc., 250 Fourth Avenu^ Nc\v York 3
*
TORONTO
D. Van Nostrarid Company (Canada), Ltd., 228 Bloor Street, Toronto
LONDON'
Macrnillan & Company, Ltd., St. Martin's Street, London, W.C. 2
CoPYKHJMT, 1919, I5Y
D. VAN NOSTKANI) COMPANY, INC.
Published simultaneously in Canada by

I). VAN NosTKAM) (COMPANY (Canada), LTD.
All Ifii/htx Iff nerved
Thin hook, or any parts thereof, tnai/ not he,
r<- />roilncc<l in amj form irithoitt trrittcn pcr-

from the authors and the pill/Ushers.
I'KINTKI) IN THE UNITKD STATIC OF AMKRICA

Dedicated
to MR. FREDERICK II. LEOMIAKDT,

President of
Fritzschc Brothers, Inc.,
whose vision and generosity made Ihis
work possible
AUTHORS OF CHAPTERS
ERNEST GUENTHER, Ph.D.
Vice President and Technical Director of Fritzsche Brothers,
Inc., New York, N. Y.
DARRELL ALTHAUSEN, Ph.D.

Manager, Fritzsche Brothers, Inc., Clifton Factory, Clifton,
N. J.
FRANCES S. STERRETT, Ph.D.

Research Chemist, Fritzsche Brothers, Inc., New York, N. Y.
PREFACE
In the course of the last century, hundreds of organic compounds have
been identified among the natural compounds of essential oils. Some of
these compounds are extremely rare, having been found in only one oil;
others are common, and have been observed in a number of oils.
The task of the scientist in the field, whether he be a research worker or
a laboratory analyst, has naturally increased in difficulty as the number of
such compounds has mounted and information about them has swelled the
literature on the subject. More and more of the chemist's time must now
be spent on preliminary searches of such literature before he can undertake
his own creative work.
The present volume, the second in a series on THE ESSENTIAL OILS, repre-
sents an attempt to eliminate at least some of the tedious "spade-work"
necessarily performed by the essential oil chemist. To this end, data on
several hundred of the most important natural constituents of essential oils
have been assembled into one volume, in the form of monographs, and brought
as nearly up-to-date as possible. The structural formulas, occurrence,
methods and identification, and physico-chemical properties of
of isolation
these compounds have been described. Succeeding volumes of this series
will deal with individual essential oils and their chemical composition, and
frequent reference will be made to the monographs contained in this volume.

A secondary aim of the present work is to stimulate further research in
the particularly on essential oils of which the chemical composition
field, is,
so far, either only partially elucidated or entirely unknown.

The task of writing this book has been a complicated one, requiring years
of work a result, among other things, of the confusion existing in older
literature, particularly inregard to stereoisomeric compounds. The diffi-
culties of compiling material for the volume were further increased by the
fact that during the Second World War scientific literature from continental
Europe, the U.S.S.R., Japan and other parts of the world was not available.
Even today much of it is accessible only in abstract form through "Chemical
Abstracts," for example.
For some of the older data presented in this work, the authors are indebted
to Gildemeister and Hoffmann's classical work, "Die Atherischen Ole,"
Third Edition, as a point of departure. Even where this is so, however,
original references quoted in their work have been verified, and the material
has been carried up-to-date.
vi PREFACE
Chemical research in scientific and on without
industrial laboratories goes
interruption, so that there is, unfortunately, no particular moment at which
an author may lay down his manuscript with a happy sense of having covered
every important aspect of his field right up to that moment. The printing
of such a work as the present one has alone required more than a year, during
which time new discoveries have been made, some of them of fundamental
importance. The authors have endeavored, where it was possible, to in-
corporate such new material into their work. Some deadline had finally to
be set, however!
ERNEST GUENTHER
DARRELL ALTHAUSEN
September, 1948
New York, N. Y.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors of the present volume are deeply grateful to a number of
co-workers on the staff of Fritzsche Brothers, Inc., New
York, N. Y., and to
several friends and prominent experts in the essential oil field abroad as
well as in the United States who willingly and diligently helped them in the
difficult task of preparing this work. May the authors, therefore, express
theirprofound gratitude to:
Dr. Frances S. Sterrett, Research Chemist of Fritzsche Brothers, Inc., New
York, N. Y., for her chapter, "The Preparation of Derivatives of Essential
Oil Constituents."
Mr. Edward E. Langenau, Director of Analytical Laboratories, Fritzsche
Brothers, Inc., New York, N. Y., for his numerous suggestions on many
points in the text.
Mr. W. P. Leidy, Chief Librarian, and Mr. Anthony Hansen, Jr., Librarian
of Fritzsche Brothers, Inc., New York, N. Y., for their thorough bibliographic
work.
Mrs. Ann Blake Hencken, Miss Catherine McGuire, and Mrs. Agnes
Clancy Melody, Secretarial Staff of the authors in New York, for their intense
interest in, and most diligent execution of, their tedious task.
Without the untiring efforts of all these co-workers and friends this work
could not have been accomplished.
The authors are indebted, further, to Dr. A. J. Haagen-Smit, Professor,
Bio-organic Chemistry, California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, Cali-
fornia; Dr. T. F. West, Research Laboratories of Drug Houses of Australia,
Ltd.,Melbourne; Dr. Yves-Rend Naves, Research Laboratories of Givaudan
& Cie, Geneva, Switzerland; and Dr. H. Schinz, Research Laboratories of
Firmenich et Cie., Successeurs de Chuit, Naef et Cie., Geneva, Switzerland,
who offered valuable suggestions and contributions to several monographs on
newly discovered essential oil compounds.
Sincere thanks are also due to the staff of the New York Public Library,
and of the Libraries of the Bronx Botanical Garden and the Chemists' Club,
New York, N. Y.
ERNEST GUENTHER
DARRELL ALTHAUSEN
Vll
NOTE
All temperatures given in this work are expressed in degrees Centigrade
unless otherwise specified in the text.
CONTENTS
THE CONSTITUENTS OF ESSENTIAL OILS PAGE
INTRODUCTION 1
I. HYDROCARBONS
A. ALIPHATIC HYDROCARBONS 7
(a) Paraffins 7
(b) Olefins 7
(c) Olcfinic Terpenes 7
B. AROMATIC HYDROCARBONS 12
C. CYCLIC TERPENES 18
(a) Monocyclic Terpenes 18
(b) Bicyclic Terpenes 49
(c) Series of Lower Terpcne Homologues 79
D. SESQUITERPENES 81
(a) Aliphatic Sesquiterpcnes 83
(b) Monocyclic Sesquiterpenes 84
(c) Bicyclic Sesquiterpenes 9l
(d) Tricyclic Sesquiterpenes 112
E. DITERPENES 125
F. AZULENES 127
II. ALCOHOLS
A. ALIPHATIC ALCOHOLS Ill
(a) Saturated Aliphatic Alcohols 141
(b) Unsaturated Aliphatic Alcohols 158
(c) Aliphatic Terpene Alcohols 166
B. CYCLIC TERPENE ALCOHOLS 184
(a) Monocyclic Terpene Alcohols 184
(b) Bicyclic Terpene Alcohols 229
(c) Tricyclic Terpene Alcohols 257
C. SESQUITERPENE ALCOHOLS 258
(a) Aliphatic Sesquiterpene Alcohols 258
(b) Monocyclic Sesquiterpene Alcohols 261
(c) Bicyclic Sesquiterpene Alcohols 263
ix
x CONTENTS
PAGE
(d) Tricyclic Sesquiterpene Alcohols 280
(e) Sesquiterpene Alcohols of Doubtful Constitution 281
D. AROMATIC ALCOHOLS 290
E. MISCELLANEOUS ALCOHOLS 299
III. ALDEHYDES
A. ALIPHATIC ALDEHYDES 305
(a) Saturated Aliphatic Aldehydes 307
(b) Unsaturated Aliphatic Aldehydes 318
(c) Aliphatic Terpene Aldehydes 326
B. CYCLIC TERPENE ALDEHYDES 342
C. AROMATIC ALDEHYDES 350
D. HETEROCYCLIC ALDEHYDES 367
IV. KETONES
A. ALIPHATIC KETONES 373
(a) Saturated Aliphatic Ketoncs 373
(b) Unsaturated Aliphatic Ketones 381
B. CYCLIC TERPENE KETONES 388
(a) Monocyclic Terpene Ketoncs 388
(b) Bicyclic Terpene Ketones 418
C. SESQUITERPENE KETONES 448
D. THE IONONKS 458
E. THE IRONES 466
F. AROMATIC KETONES 474
G. MISCELLANEOUS KETONES 480
H. LARGE RING KETONES 489
I. KETONES OF DOUBTFUL CONSTITUTION 494
V. PHENOLS AND PHENOL ETHERS 499
VI. QU1NONES 549
VII. ACIDS
A. ALIPHATIC ACIDS 560
(a) Saturated Aliphatic Acids 560
(b) Unsaturated Aliphatic Acids 583
(c) Dibasic Aliphatic Acids 592
(d) Aliphatic Hydroxy Acids 593
B. AROMATIC ACIDS 596
C. MISCELLANEOUS ACIDS 606
D. ACIDS OF DOUBTFUL CONSTITUTION 612
E. ANHYDRIDES 613
CONTENTS xi
VIII. ESTERS PAGE

A. ALIPHATIC ESTERS 618
B. TERPENE ESTERS 620
C. AROMATIC ESTERS 635
D. ESTERS CONTAINING NITROGEN 651
IX. LACTONES, COUMARINS, AND COUMARONES 659
X. FURAN DERIVATIVES 699
XI. OXIDES 707
XII. COMPOUNDS CONTAINING NITROGEN AND SULFUR

A. CYANIDES 721
B. AMINO AND IMINO COMPOUNDS 725
C. SULFIDES 729
D. MUSTARD OILS 734
TERPENES, SESQUITERPENES, AND DERIVATIVES OF

UNKNOWN CONSTITUTION
I. HYDROCARBONS
A. TERPENES 745
B. SESQUITERPENES 747
(a) Bicyclic 747
(b) Tricyclic 749
(c) Unknown 750
C. AROMATIC HYDROCARBONS 753
II. ALCOHOLS
A. TERPENE ALCOHOLS 754
B. SESQUITERPENE ALCOHOLS 755
(a) Monocyclic 755
(b) Bicyclic 755
(c) Tricyclic 759
(d) Unknown 760
III. KETONES 765
IV. PHENOLS 766
V. LACTONES 767
VI. MISCELLANEOUS COMPOUNDS 768

xii CONTENTS
THE PREPARATION OF DERIVATIVES OF ESSENTIAL
OIL CONSTITUENTS
y Frances S.
by Sterrett, Ph.D.
PAGE
INTRODUCTION 771
I. HYDROCARBONS 774
A. OXIDATION 774
1 Dchydrogenation
. 776
B. ADDITION PRODUCTS 776
1. Addition of Water (Hydration) 776
2. Addition of Hydrogen (Hydrogenation) 777
3. Addition of Hydrogen Halide 778
4. Addition of Halogen (Halogenation) 780
5. Addition of Nitrogen-containing Compounds 781
6. Addition of Maleic Anhydride 786
7. Addition of Sulfuric Acid (Sulfonation) 787
8. Addition of Picric Acid and Related Substances 788
II. ALCOHOLS 791

1 .
Dehydration Products 791
2. Calcium Chloride Addition Products 792
3. Esters 792
4. Urethanes 798
5. Xanthates (Xanthogenatcs) 802
III. ALDEHYDES AND KETONES 804

A. REACTIONSAND REACTION PRODUCTS OF HELP IN THE DIF-
FERENTIATION OF ALDEHYDES FROM KETONES, AS WELL AS
IN THE IDENTIFICATION OF ALDEHYDES 805
1. Oxidation 805
2. Condensation 805
B. REACTIONS AND REACTION PRODUCTS OF HELP IN THE IDEN-
TIFICATION OF ALDEHYDES AND KETONES 808
1. Reactions Typical Only of Aldehydes and Certain Ke-
tones (Methj'l Kctones and Ketomethylene Com-
pounds) 808
2. Reactions Characteristic of Both Aldehydes and Ke-
tones 809
(a) Reactions with Hydroxylamine (Oximation) .... 809
(b) Reactions with Hydrazine Compounds 810
(c) Reactions with Sodium (or Potassium) Cyanide
and Ammonium Carbonate (to Form Hydantoin
Derivatives) 820
CONTENTS xiii
PAGE
IV. PHENOLS AND PHENOL ETHERS 823
V. ACIDS 827
VI. ESTERS 831
VII. LACTONES AND ANHYDRIDES 833
OTHER CONSTITUENTS
VIII. 833
INDEX 835
INTRODUCTION
The treatises on essential oils published by Semmler in 1907, Wallach in
1914, Parry in 1919, Simonsen in 1931,* and Gildemeister and Hoffmann in

the years 1928-1931, for a long time composed an invaluable source of informa-
tion on the constituents of these oils, and on numerous synthetic aromatic
compounds.
The chemical two decades has added much material
literature of the last
to that mentioned above, however, and has enriched our knowledge of the
structural formulas and properties of essential oil constituents, with the result
that a more up-to-date presentation such as that undertaken in this work
is indicated.
has been the authors' aim to be as comprehensive as possible to present
It ;
both old and new data where they appear to be reliable and important. Some
editing has been necessary, of course, for chemical literature abounds with
references to compounds which are either of obvious impurity or derived from
oils of dubious botanical origin. Where such has been the case, the authors
have preferred to do no more than briefly describe the compound, with
indicative reference to the original literature in which it is more fully dis-
cussed.
In this volume, special emphasis has been laid upon the natural constituents
of essential oils. Nevertheless, a limited number of synthetic products struc-
turally related to certain natural isolates, and of interest to the essential oil
chemist, have been added.

In the main, the nomenclature followed here is that employed in "Chemical
Abstracts." In certain instances, however, well-established common names
have been preferred for compounds, since they may serve to identify such com-
pounds more easily both in the trade and in the literature.
The following abbreviations have been used (the reader should bear in
mind that temperatures given are in degrees centigrade, unless otherwise
specified) :
m. Melting point.
cong.pt. Congealing point.
f .p. Freezing point.
b. Boiling point at atmospheric pressure (about 760 mm.) for exam- ;
ple: b. 150 would mean that a liquid boils at 150 C., at atmos-
pheric pressure.
* A new edition of volume I of this work was published in 1947.
1
2 INTRODUCTION
bx Boiling point at "x" mm. pressure; for example: bio 100 would
mean that a liquid boils at 100 C. if the pressure is reduced to
10 mm. Hg.
d Specific gravity, without indication of temperature. Wherever pos-
sible, the temperature of measurement is recorded as given in the
5
original literature. For example: d} would mean a specific
gravity determined at 15 C. and referred to water at 4 C.
In most cases the older literature omits the temperature of the
water; for instance, di5 would mean that the specific gravity of
the compound was determined at 15 C., without indicating the
15
temperature of the water. Often this is written as d .
OLD Optical rotation of a compound in a 10-cm. tube and in sodium

light, oil) would mean that the measurement was made at a
temperature of 20 C. In most cases (except for certain citrus
oils) the temperature does not exercise a marked influence upon
the optical rotation of an essential oil.*
[]D Specific optical rotation.* In many instances the literature and

especially the older literature does not distinguish clearly be-
tween optical rotation and specific optical rotation. Where no
clear distinction has been made, the authors have copied the
symbol as originally reported.

no Refractive index as determined for the D-line of the sodium spec-
trum, n?? would include a temperature of 20 C. at which the
determination was carried out in this example.*
With a view to aiding the research worker by presenting him with the most
reliable old and recent data on essential oil constituents, the authors have
adopted the following scheme of arrangement:

(a) Occurrence
(b) Isolation
(c) Identification
(d) Properties
(e) Use.
Wherever has been established, or postulated upon good authority, the
it
structural formula for a compound is included. This may be followed by a

brief introduction, before the section on "Occurrence." In most cases, the
authors have not listed all the oils in which a constituent is known to occur,
as such listing would have carried the monographs to inordinate length. Only
the most important sources are cited, in certain cases including very recently
discovered ones. It should be remembered that these compounds will be
further discussed in succeeding volumes, in the monographs on individual oils.
* "The Examination and Analysis of Essen-
For further information see Vol. I, Chapter 4,
tial Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates."
INTRODUCTION 3
Detailed procedures on "isolation" are included where the data lend them-
selves to the separation of a pure isomer or where special precautions must be
exercised due to sensitivity of the compound.
Whereas the older works in the field did not pay too much attention to
identifying a particular stereo form characteristic derivatives, a definite
by
attempt has been made in the following text to describe these isomers in their
purest form.
In respect to the derivatives of compounds enumerated in this work: for
purposes of identification, derivatives of high-melting point are in general
preferable to those of low-melting point. Wherever possible, derivatives dis-
tinct for each form, and special methods of characterizing stereoisomers are
included. In some cases a state of dynamic equilibrium may exist between
stereo forms in the fraction isolated, or the fraction may consist merely of a
mixture of isomers.
Color tests have, in the main, proved unreliable; they have, therefore, been
largely excluded from this text.
Not much emphasis isplaced in this work upon spectro-photomctric data
as they are still too meager to be of much practical use. However, the reader
will find numerous literature references to publications in this field, which deal
with the elucidation of structure.
Wherever possible, data and references have been checked against the
original literature. This has resulted in the correction of many errors carried
in previous works.
Quantitative methods of assaying the more important constituents of essen-

tial oils are given in Vol. I, Chapter 4, "The Examination and Analysis of
Essential Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates."
I. HYDROCARBONS
A. ALIPHATIC HYDROCARBONS
(a) Paraffins. The lowest member group C n H2n +2 identi-

of the paraffin
fied so far in essential oils, according to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 1 is n-hep-
tane C 7 Hi 6 b. 98.5-99, di 5 0.6880, which has been found in a few pine
,
needle oils.*
The higher members of the paraffin and probably also of the olefin series
occur quite frequently in plants, usually in the form of wax-like secretions or
coatings of leaves, flowers, and seeds. Because of their low solubility, and
low volatility, these waxes are rare in essential oils as obtained by steam dis-
tillation.In the case of some oils, the wax content, usually a mixture of
homologues, is so high that the oil congeals at room temperature as, for
example, in the case of rose and chamomile oils. Waxes occur also in the
evaporation residues of expressed citrus oils and, in large percentages, in the
concrete natural flower oils, as obtained by extracting flowers with volatile
solvents such as petroleum ether or benzene.
When purified, these waxes consist
of odorless, white, often laminated,
crystalline masses, almost insoluble in cold alcohol but readily soluble in hot
alcohol and other organic solvents. They are highly resistant to concen-
trated acids and oxidizing agents.
(b) Olefins. The only olefmic hydrocarbon, C nll2 n ,
so far found in vola-
tile oils (in lemon oil and bergamot oil), according to Gildemeister and
in
123-124, d 0.7275, n D 1.4060. Octylene probably

2
Hoffmann, is octylene, b.
occurs also in linaloe oil.
The hemiterpene C 5 H8
genetically related to the terpenes, has
isoprene ,
been observed as a decomposition product of natural rubber and turpentine

oil. According to several authorities, the terpenes, sesqui-, di-, and triter-
penes, also natural rubber, originate in plant metabolism by a joining of iso-
prene molecules.
v{c) Olefinic Terpenes.Open-chain hydrocarbons of the general formula
C n H 2n 4, and containing three ethylenic linkages, occur in some essential
oils. Although complying with the empirical molecular formulas of.alicyclic
(hydroaromatic) hydrocarbons as cyclic terpenes, these open-chain olefinic
terpenes may be distinguished from the former by their lower specific gravity
and refractive index. The olefinic terpenes, as they were named by Semmler,
are very prone to resinify, especially on distillation at atmospheric pressure.
1
"Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 301.
2
Ibid.
*
Haagen-Smit, Redemann and Mirov [J. Am. Chem. Soc. 69 (1947), 2014] recently
identified heptane, nonane and n-undecane in the gum turpentine from Torrey pine.
7
8 HYDROCARBONS
SUGGESTED ADDITIONAL LITERATURE
ArthurVogel, "Physical Properties and Chemical Constitution. Aliphatic Hydro-

I.
carbons," /. Chem. Soc. (1946), 133. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 3390.
v
p-Myrcene
C 10 H 16 Mol. Weight 136.23
2-Methyl-6-methylene-2,7-octadiene
H3 C
C=CH CHo CHo C CH=CHo
H3 C
/ ii
CH 2
Myrcene same carbon skeleton as linalool. The structural
possesses the
formula of /5-myrcene was definitely established by Ruzicka and Stoll, 1 and
2
by Dupont and Desreux.
Occurrence. Power and Kleber 3 found substantial quantities of myrcene
4
in bay oil (Myrcia acris D.C.) ;myrcene occurs also in oil of hops, verbena
galbanum oil, Formosan and West Indian lemongrass
5
oil (Lippia citriodora) ,
oil, etc.
According to Power and Kleber, bay oil is treated with sodium hydrox-
6
Isolation.
ide solution and the remaining undissolved portion repeatedly fractionated in vacuo.
Identification. (1) Reduction with sodium and alcohol yields dihydromyrcene
CioHis which is identical with Hnaloolene, only two hydrogen atoms thus being taken
up. According to Semmler and Enklaar, dihydromyrcene on bromination gives
7 8
tetrabromodihydromyrcene m. 88. For the hydrogenation of /3-myrcene with hydro-

gen and platinum as catalyst to tetrahydromyrcene, see Dupont and Desreux.
9
(2) By heating to 250-260 in a sealed tube, myrcene is converted into a diter-

pene C2oHs2, viz., a-camphorene, which occurs also in blue camphor oil. a-Camphorene
tetrahydrochloride melts at Semmler and Jonas. 10
129-130, according to
For this purpose, myrcene is heated for 4 hr. and the content of the sealed tube
fractionated in vacuo. The fraction bg 175-195 is dissolved in absolute ether and
saturated with dry hydrogen chloride at low temperature. The separating crystals of
a-camphorene tetrahydrochloride after several hours are filtered off under suction,
washed with cold alcohol, rubbed on a clay plate and recrystallized from absolute
alcohol.
Myrcene forms an addition compound with a-naphthoquinone, m. 80-81.5,
(3)
according to Arbusov and Abramov.
11
(4) Diels and Alder, Ruzicka 13 and Lindsay, Briggs and Sutherland 14 prepared
12
the adduct of myrcene and maleic anhydride and described the melting points of
several derivatives of this addition compound:
Adduct 34- 35 "
Dicarboxylic acid 122-123 12 13 -

14
Dicarboxylic acid anhydride 206-207 12

and 215 18
Sulfone di- and tetrabromides have been prepared by Backer, Strating and
(5)
Kool; the sulfone dibromide (CioHieBÔjtS) m. 105, the tetrabromide m. 131.
18
ALIPHATIC HYDROCARBONS 9
Properties. Due
to the ease of polymerization of this unsaturated hydro-
carbon, variations in the physicochemical data recorded to date are not to
be considered too seriously. The most definitive constants seem to be those
reported by Palkin and Wells, and Dupont and Desreux
16 17
as listed here.
However, myrcene has also been characterized by Semmler and Mayer,
18
Lebedev,
19
Chapman,
20
Enklaar,
21
Eijkman,
22
Schimmel & Co.,
23
and Petrov
and Chel'tsova. 24
b. 166-167 16
df 0.791 17
55
b 25 72- 73 17
dl 0.7966 16
21
b 20 65-66 16
n, 1.470' 17
16
1 . 4650
Myrcene, in general, is considerably more stable than its isomer ocimene.

On standing myrcene undergoes polymerization both to a dimyrcene C 2 oH 32
and also to a polymyrcene (Ci H 16 ) x According to Harries, 25 both these
.
polymerides form nitrosites, the latter melting at 163.

When
treated with aqueous potassium permanganate, myrcene is oxidized
to succinic acid, according to Power and Kleber. 26
Polymerization of myrcene causes a lowering of its solubility in alcohol;
this is the chief reason that, on aging, West Indian lemongrass oils lose their
originally good solubility in alcohol. East Indian lemongrass oils contain no

myrcene and retain their solubility better.
27
Delaby and Dupin oxidized myrcene with selenium dioxide to myrcenol,
myrcenal, and myrcenic acid.
Use. /3-Myrcene has not found any noteworthy use in the perfume and
flavor industries.
1
Helv. Chim. Ada7 (1924), 272.
*Bull. soc. chim. [5|, 4 (1937), 422.
3
Pharm. Rundschau New York 13 (1895), 60.
4
Chapman, J. Chem. Soc. 83 (1903), 506. J. Inst. Brew. 36 (1929), 247. Semmler and
Mayer, Ber. 44 (1911), 2009.
6
Barbier, Bull. soc. chim. [3], 26 (1901), 691.
6
Ber. 34 (1901), 3126.
8
"Over Ocimeen en Myrceen," Inaug. Diss. Utrecht (1905).
Compt. rend. 203 (1936), 733.
" Ber. 46 (1913), 1566.
Ber. 67 (1934), 1944.
Liebigs Ann. 470 (1929), 81.
12
13
Helv. Chim. Ada 19 (1936), 423.
14
J. Organic Chem. 7 (1942), 397.
16
Rec. trav. chim. 68 (1939), 783.
16
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1933), 1554.
17
Butt. soc. chim. [51, 4 (1937), 425.
Ber. 44 (1911), 2009.
19
/. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 46 (1913). 1324.
80
J. Chem. Soc. 83 (1903), 506.
10 HYDROCARBONS
Rec. trav. chim. 26 (1907), 166.
22
Chem. Weekblad 3 (1906), 653, 685, 701; 4 (1907), 41.
23
Ber. Schimmel &
Co., April (1895), 11.
24
Bull. acad. sci. U.R.S.S. Classe sci. chim. (1940), 267. Chem. Abstracts 35 (1941), 4730.
Ber. 36 (1902), 3264.
27
Atti X congresso intern, chim. 3 (1939), 120. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 8194.
W. Runckel and L. A. Goldblatt, "Inhibition

J. of Myrcene Polymerization During
Storage," Ind. Eng. Chem. 38, No. 7 (1946), 749.
Ocimene
Mol. Weight 136.23
2,6-Dimethyl-l ,5,7-octatriene
H2 C
C CH2 CH2 CII=C CH=
H3 C CH 3
According to Dupont and Desreux, this structural formula of a-ocimene,
1
established by Enklaar, 2 does not apply to ocimene as it occurs in nature.

Studying the Raman spectrum of an ocimene of van Romburgh, these au-
3
thors suggested the following structural formula of /3-ocimene:
2,6-Dimethyl-2 5 7-octatriene
; ;
H3 C
C=CH CH2 CH=C CH=
H3 C CII 3
configurations of the a- and

The divergent - structure of this
hydrocarbon,
however, might possibly be a result of the method of isolation.
Occurrence. First isolated by van Romburgh 4 from the Javanese oil of
Ocimum basilicum L. var. Selasih besar, ocimene occurs also in Ocimum gratis-
5 6 7
simum. Lahey and Jones reported it in Evodia littoralis, Huzita in oil of
Orthodon linalooliferum Fujita, and Penfold 8 in the ethereal oil from the
leaves and twigs of Eriostemon myoporoides D.C. It also occurs in a few other
9
oils,probably in estragon oil. Crabalona reported the presence of ocimene
in the first fractions of French lavender oil.
Isolation. The essential oil distilled from the fresh leaves of Ocimum basilicum var.
Selasih besar treated with sodium hydroxide solution, whereby the eugenol (30% to
is
46% of the oil) is removed. From the undissolved portions of the oil, and by repeated
vacuum fractionation, van Romburgh 10 thus obtained ocimene as a main constituent.
ALIPHATIC HYDROCARBONS 11
Identification. Ocimene does not yield any characteristic crystalline compounds.

Identification
is, therefore, accomplished:
(1) By reduction with sodium and alcohol to dihydromyrcene, and bromination.

Tetrabromodihydromyrcene m. 88 (Enklaar).
(2) By hydration with sulfuric acid (50%) in glacial acetic acid solution, according
to Bertram and Walbaum, 11 an alcohol, viz., ocimenol, is obtained. Ocimenol phen-
ylurethane m. 72 (Enklaar).
(3) Oxidation of ocimene with potassium permanganate either in alkaline or in
acetone solution results in very complete degradation and in the formation of acids,
the lead salts of which crystallize in rhombic form whereas myrcene, if treated in the
;
same manner, yields a lead salt crystallizing in needle form. Myrcene can thus be
identified in the presence of ocimene.
12 13
Properties. Van Romburgh and Enklaar reported the following
properties:
12 12
b. 17G-178 (with decomposition) d 22 0.794
13 13
b 30 81 dis 0.8031
12 18
b 2i 73-74 n}? 1.4857
These properties have been confirmed in the recent work of Asahina 14 on

an a-ocimene obtained from the fruit of Evodia rutaccarpa Hook.
Ocimene oxidizes most readily and, on short exposure to air, forms a yel-
low resin. In the absence of oxygen, however, ocimene can be preserved
unaltered.
15
Enklaar found that, on heating for a few hours in a neutral atmosphere,
ocimene is converted into an isomeric hydrocarbon, viz., a//o-ocimene.
IT 3 C
C=CH CH=CH C=CH CH 3 - -
H3 C CH 3
A//o-ocimeno
bia 81
dis 0.8182
6
nL 1.5296
Enklaar's structural formula for aô-ocimene was confirmed by Dupont

and collaborators 16 through Raman spectra determinations.
Two of the four possible stereoisomers of a//o-ocimene have been described
17
by Hopfield, Hall and Goldblatt as follows:
Q
m. 6 20 dl nf?
-21to-20.6 89.0 0.8060 1.5446
-35.4 to -34.0 91.0 0.8118 1.5446
Both yield an adduct with maleic anhydride melting at 83-84.

12 HYDROCARBONS
Use. Ocimene has not found any noteworthy use in the perfume or flavor
industries.
*
Bull chim. [5], 5 (1938), 337.
soc.
2
Rec. trav. chim. 26 (1907), 157; 27 (1908), 422; 36 (1917), 215; 45 (1926), 337.
3
Proc. K. Acad. Wetensch. Amsterdam 3 (1900), 446. Ber. Schimmel &
Co., April (1901), 11.
*
Ibid.
6
Roberts, /. Soc. Chem. Ind. 40 (1921), 164 T. Chiris, Parfums France 7 (1929), 186.
6
Univ. Queensland Papers, Dept. Chem. 1, No. 13 (1939). Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 2133.
7
/. Chem. Soc. Japan 62 (1941), 424. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 6743.
*/. Proc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales 59 (1925), 208.
9
Recherches 2 (1938), 155. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 4374.
10
Proc. K. Acad. Wetensch. Amsterdam 3 (1900), 446. Ber. Schimmel & Co. April (1901), 11.
11
/. prakt. Chem.
[2], 49 (1894), 1.
12
Proc. K. Acad. Wetensch. Amsterdam 3 Schimmel & Co. April (1901 ),
(1900), 446. Ber. 11 .
13
Rec. trav. chim. 26 (1907), 161; 27 (1908), 422; 36 (1917), 215; 45 (1926), 337.
14
Ada Phytochim. Japan 1 (1922), 67. Chem. Zentr. Ill (1923), 248.
15
Rec. trav. chim. 26 (1907), 157; 27 (1908), 422; 36 (1917), 215; 46 (1926), 337.
16
Bull. soc. chim. [5], 6 (1938), 322.
17
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1944), 115.
v
Cryptotaenene
C 10 H 16 Mol. Weight 136.23
The
structural formula of this terpene remains uncertain, and further re-
search is indicated before any formula may be acceptable. Investigations in
the past suggest either 2-methyl-2,4,8- or 2,6,8-nonatriene as a tentative
structure.
1
Occurrence. First observed by Hirano in the steam-distilled oil of Crypto-
taenia japonica Hassk. fam. Umbelliferae.
Properties.
9 8
bw 67-68 Mi '
+2 40'
5
df 0.8128 ng 1.47476
Use. Cryptotaenene has not found any use in the perfume or flavor in-
dustries.
1
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. Japan 29 (1926), 48. Chem. Abstracts 20 (1926), 1070.
B. AROMATIC HYDROCARBONS
Naphthalene
C 10 H 8 Mol. Weight 128.16
Occurrence. Naphthalene has been found in oil of clove stems, orris root,
and styrax.
AROMATIC HYDROCARBONS 13
Isolation. By (See also next section.)

fractional distillation.
Identification. Naphthalene forms molecular addition compounds with a large
number of compounds. These are useful as a means of identifying this hydrocarbon
and include the following recommended derivatives :
(a) 1,1-Complex with 3,5-dinitrobenzoic acid, m. 182 (Sinomiya ).

l
(b) 1,3-Complcx with a-dinitroaniline, m. 154 (Sinomiya ).

2
(c) Complex with 3,5-dinitro-o-cresol, m. 94 (Dermer and Smith ).

3
(d) Complex with ethyl-3,5-dinitrosalicylate, m. 78 (Dermer and Smith ).

4
(e) Complex with 2,4,6-trinitrobenzaldehyde, m. 136.5 (Dermer and Smith ).

6
(f) Complex with styphnic acid, m. 168-169 (Ma, Hsia and Sah 6 ).
(g) Complex with picric acid, m. 150.5 (Huntress and Mulliken ).
7
(h) Complex with sym-trinitrobenzene, m. 155.2-155.8 (Jones and Neuworth

8
).
These and similar addition compounds are also quite often useful as a means of
isolating and purifying naphthalene.
Properties. The following properties have been reported in the course of

careful on naphthalene by Burriel, 9 Timmermans and Burriel, 10
studies
11 12 13 14 15 16
Michel, Mortimer and Murphy, Marti, deBeule, Eppley, von Steiger,
and Deffet and Vlerick: 17
9
m. 80.06
o 10, 11, 12, 13
80 10
14
80.21 -80.23 (from ether)
9 10 ' 13
b. 217.96 -
15
217.973
8 16
d?' 0.9757
d 80
' 01 17
0.97865 (liquid)
(variation per degree 82 -+ 115 0.000811)

d 60 1.141 0.004 17
(solid)
16
1.58996
The values recorded by Eppley 18

over a wide range of vapor pres-
for t
sures were determined from this equation: log tp = 0.20248 log p 1.755102. +
reported the initial temperature of sublimation at 762 mm. as 50
19
Illari
and that at 7 mm. as 22.

20
Naphthalene is easily volatile with steam. According to Mitchell, 0.022
g. of the hydrocarbon will dissolve per 100 g. of water at 15. The solubility
in hexane is reported by Ward 21 as
0.2 g. in 2.035 g. of hexane at 8.7,
3.0 g. in 0.367 g. of hexane at 72.5.
Naphthalene is sparingly soluble in cold petroleum ether; moderately sol-

uble in methyl alcohol and in cold ethyl alcohol; and readily soluble in most
other organic solvents.
Use. Naphthalene as such is not used in the perfume or flavor industries.
14 HYDROCARBONS
1
2
Ibid.
3
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 748.
4
Ibid.
6
Ibid.
6
Science Repts. Natl. Tsing Hua Univ. 2 (1933), 151. Chem. Abstracts 28 (1934), 3692.
7
"Identification of Pure Organic Compounds," Order I, 507. See also Mulliken "Iden-
tification of Pure Organic Compounds," Method I (1904), 201.
8
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1944), 1499.
9
Anales quim. 29 (1931), 89.
soc. espafi. fis.
10
Chimie & Industrie, Spec. No. 25 (1931), 196.
11
Bull. soc. chim. Belg. 48 (1939), 135.
uind. Eng. Chem. 15 (1923), 1140.
13
14
/fad. 40 (1931), 195.
16
/. Franklin Inst. 205 (1928), 392.
16
Ber. 65 (1922), 1972.
17
Bull. soc. chim. Belg. 51 (1942), 237. Chem. Abstracts 38 (1944), 4500.
18
/. Franklin Inst. 205 (1928), 391.
19
Ann. chim. applicata 21 (1931), 127.
20
/. Chem. Soc. (1926), 1336.
21
/. Phys. Chem. 30 (1926), 1326.
Iserman, "The Relationship of the Chemistry of Perfumes to Other Branches of the

Organic Chemical Industry," Prog. Perfumes and Cosmetics (1938), 37.
Styrene
C 8 H8 Mol. Weight 104.14
Styrol. Styrolene. Vinylbenzene. Phenylethylene
Occurrence. This simple aromatic hydrocarbon probably originates in es-

sential oils by the degradation of cinnamic acid. It occurs in various styrax
oils and in the oil from Honduras balsam.
Isolation. By fractional distillation in vacuo.

Identification. the preparation of the dibromide CeHsCHBr-CH^Br, m. 74-75
By
(from 80% alcohol), according to van Duin, 1 and Reed and Reid. 2
In order to prepare this dibromide, Evans and Morgan, 3 using a modified Zincke 4
method, recommended:
"To a
solution of 48.5 g. (1 mol.) of freshly distilled styrene in 400 cc. of pure
ether were added 126.8 g. of bromine dissolved in 600 cc. of ether. The solution of
styrene was placed in an open beaker surrounded by ice water and it was kept in
constant motion by a mechanical stirrer. The rate of flow of the bromine solution
was regulated by the discharge of color, from red to a very light yellow. The whole
operation was most advantageously carried on in direct sunlight."
The crude product obtained by distilling off the ether is purified by recrystallization
from alcohol.
Steinkopf and Kiihnel prepared the pseudonitrosite m. 133 by action of nitrosyl
6
chloride on styrene. Alder, Pascher and Vagt 6 condensed styrene with dimethyl ester
of acetylene dicarboxylic acid. These authors report that a tetramethyl ester m.
107-108 is derived from this reaction, and a dianhydride m. 260.
Properties. Styrene is a colorless, strongly refractive liquid possessing a

characteristic and peculiar odor, reminiscent of illuminating gas.
The properties of a highly reliable sample of styrene have been reported
by Waterman and deKok.
7
f.p. -33 d? 0.9090

05
m. -33 n^ 1.54633
b. 145-145.8
o
boo 48
A publication by Wood and Higgins

8
at the U. S. National Bureau of
Standards summarizes reliable data recently gathered on this hydrocarbon.
These authors report:
*
f.p. -30.6 d 20 0.9056
b. 145.2 ng 1.5443
On
storing outside the refrigerator and especially on heating or on contact
with acids, styrene polymerizes to metastyrene (C 8 8 ) n a transparent, color- H ,
9
less, and odorless mass. According to Stobbe, an equilibrium is finally
reached: styrene ^ metastyrene.
Use. Styrene is not much used in the perfume or flavor industries.
1
Rec. trav. chim. 46 (1926), 354.
*J. Chem. Soc. (1928), 1488.
3
J. Am. Chem.
Soc. 35 (1913), 56.
*Liebigs Ann. 216 (1883), 288. Radziszweski, Ber. 6 (1873), 493.
5
Ber. 76B (1942), 1327.
6
Ber. 76B (1942), 1514.
7
Rec. trav. chim. 53 (1934), 1134.
8
India Rubber World 107 (1943), 475.See Letter Circular LC-710 U. S. Dept. of Commerce,
National Bur. Stds., Washington, D. C., Dec. 9, 1942.
9
Ber. 47 (1914), 2701.
Rolf E. Schneider (to the Lummus Co.), "Styrene Distillation," U. S. Patent No.
2,385,235, September 18, 1945. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 359.
* Patnode and Scheiber, Am. Chem.
Values for d are given from to 145 C. Cf. /.
Soc. 61 (1939), 3449.
16 HYDROCARBONS
Agropyrene
Ci 2 H 12 Mol. Weight 156.22
Occurrence. Agropyrene hydrocarbon with an ethylenic and an

is the first
1
acetylenic linkage observed in nature. According to Treibs the volatile oil
derived from the root of Agropyrum repens (Triticum repens) consists almost
entirely (95 per cent) of agropyrene.
Isolation, By fractional distillation in vacuo.

Identification. determination of the physicochemical properties, and by hy-
By
drogenation to hexahydroagropyrene Chilis (= n-phenylhexane).
Properties.
o
b 10 140-143
d20 0.9744
ng> 1.5695
When freshly distilled, agropyrene is a light-yellowish liquid, which on

standing and on exposure to light, rapidly assumes a deep yellow color. The
odor is characteristic, lasting and sweetish, reminiscent of methyl chavicol
and isochavibetol. When
heated to boiling temperature at atmospheric pres-
sure, agropyrene polymerizes rapidly to a viscous brown mass.
Use. Agropyrene is not used in our industries.
1
Chem. Ber. 80, No. 2 (1947), 97.
v
^-Cymene
"Cyme!"
C 10 H 14 Mol. Weight 134.21
l-Methyl-4-isopropylbenzene
CHa
;H
H C CH
3 3
Occurrence. p-Cymene occurs in numerous volatile oils for example, in

Swedish and Russian turpentine oil, in oil of lemon, sage, thyme, origanum,
savory, coriander, ajowan, angelica, cumin, olibanum, nutmeg, star anise,
cinnamon, etc. In many cases where p-cymene has been reported in an oil,
it may have been formed by conversion from cyclic terpenes such as pinene,
terpinene, or from terpene derivatives, for instance, carvone, dihydrocarvone,

carvenone, thujone, cuminyl alcohol, etc.
citral, sabinol,
The so-called commercial "thymene" consists mainly of p-cymene.
Isolation. By fractional distillation. The p-cymene fraction can be freed from
terpenes of similar boiling point by oxidation with dilute potassium permanganate
solution in the cold, p-cymene being quite resistant to this oxidizing agent. Any
cineole present in the same fraction is removed through its hydrobromide.
Identification. p-Cymene may be characterized by several methods :
(1) Oxidation with a hot and concentrated solution of potassium permanganate

yields p-hydroxyisopropylbenzoic acid m. 155-156. Wallach l recommended this
procedure:
"Reflux on the steam bath 2 the purified hydrocarbon with a solution of

g. of
12 g. of potassium permanganate in 330 g. of water and shake frequently. After
completion of the oxidation, evaporate the solution, freed from Mn02, to dryness
and extract the salt residue with boiling alcohol. Decompose the alcohol-soluble
potassium salt with dilute aqueous sulfuric acid and recrystallize the separating acid
from alcohol."
Meyer and Rosicki found that, on heating with dilute hydrochloric acid, the
2
p-hydroxyisopropylbenzoic acid loses water and forms p-isopropenylbenzoic acid m.
Schorger reported that p-cymene, when treated with fuming sulfuric acid,
3
(2)
yields simultaneously 1,2,4- and 1,3,4-cymenesulfonic acid and a disulfonic acid.
From the 1,2,4-sulfonic acid isolated first from the reaction mixture, a sulf amide
m. 115, may be prepared and carvacrol on melting with alkali. The 1,3,4-sulfonic acid
gives a sulfamide m. 149.9, and on melting with alkali, thymol, according to Phillips.
4
Properties. p-Cymene a colorless liquid, optically inactive, possessing

is
an odor typical of the aromatic hydrocarbons.

Bert 5 reported for a pure p-cymene prepared from thymol:
b. 175-176
df 0.857
1.4917
6
International Critical Tables report b. 175.9.
7
Richter and Wolff prepared p-cymene by various methods and observed
these properties:
p-Cymcnc from m. b. (corr.) d

Camphor -72.3 177.3-177.4 0.8570 1.4904
Finnish cellulose (-67.7) 177.3 0.8570 1.4904
German cellulose ... 177.4-177.6 0.857 1.4894
Ajowanoil ... 177.4M77.5 0.85G 1.4899

18 HYDROCARBONS
The cymene from camphor to be regarded as the most nearly pure. 8
is
On treatment with dilute nitric acid and with chromic acid mixture, p-cy-
mene is oxidized to p-toluic acid and finally to terephthalic acid.
Use. p-Cymene is widely used for the scenting of soaps and all kinds of
technical preparations where it serves to overcome undesirable odors. p-Cy-
mene also forms an important constituent in the compounding of certain
imitation essential oils.
l
Liebigs Ann. 264
(1891), 10.
2
Ibid. 219 (1883), 282.
3
J. Ind. Eng. Chem. 10 (1918), 258. Cf. Glaus, Ber. 14 (1881), 2140.
4
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 46 (1924), 686.
6
Butt. soc. chim. [4], 37 (1925), 1251.
6
Vol. Ill, 347.
''Ber. 63 (1930), 1721.
8
Refer also to the statement of Timmcrmans, Bull. soc. chim. Bclg. 30 (1921), 65; Pcrkin,
J. Chem. Soc. 69 (1896), 1194; and Karvonen, Ber. 56 (1923), 1824.
E. Boedtker, "Cymene, a By-product in the Manufacture of Sulfite Cellulose,"

/. pharm. chim. [8], 9 (1929), 417. Chem. Abstracts 24 (1930), 78.
"
Irvin W. Humphrey (to Hercules Powder Co.), "Cymene, U. S. Patent No. 1,746,-
532, February 11, 1930. Chem. Abstracts 24 (1930), 1653.
C. E. Senseman and J. J. Stubbs, "Catalytic Oxidation of p-Cymene in the Liquid
Phase/' Ind. Eng. Chem. 24 (1932), 1184. Chem. Abstracts 26 (1932), 5924.
Yasuji Fujita and Saburo Ohashi, "Oxidation of p-Cymene with Hydrogen Per-
oxide," J. Chem. Soc. Japan 63 (1942), 93. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 3174.
Brun, "Preparation of Cymenes," Butt. soc. chim. 12 (1945), 452. Chem. Abstracts
40 (1946), 847.
Washington Hull (to American Cyanamid Co.), "Preparation of p-Cymene by the
Vapor-Phase, Dehydrogenation of Monocyclic Terpenes," U. S. Patent No. 2,388,359,
November 6, 1945. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 1879.
Chas. T. Lester and Carroll F. Bailey, "Studies in p-Cymene. The Saponification
Rate of Isomeric Benzoates Derived from p-Cymene," /. Am. Chem. Soc. 68 (1946),
375.
C. CYCLIC TERPENES
(a) MONOCYCLIC TERPENES.

Introduction. Structurally, these terpenes have as their parent substances
homologues of cyclohexane from which they are derived by varying degrees
of dehydrogenation. Usually, a methyl-isopropylcyclohexanol is described
as the parent molecule, and the monocyclic terpenes are thus theoretically
derived from one of the three isomeric menthanes (ortho, meta or para).
CYCLIC TERPENES 19
CH 3 CH CH3
CH CH CH CH3
/ \CH HC CH CH
2 2
H2 C CH CH CH 2 H2C CH2 CHg

\CH/ \CH \CH \CH/
2 3 2
CH
HC
3 CH 3
m-Menthane p-Menthane o-Menthane
(l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexane)
For convenience, our description will be confined to the p-isomer, as it is

architecturally related to several important natural terpenes. However, par-
allel conclusions may often be drawn for the ortho and meta compounds,
which are primarily synthetic.

Theoretically, then, various degrees of dehydrogenation of the para men-
thane will yield the menthenes, the menthadienes and p-cymene or rare tri-
enes, some
of which, either in themselves or as derivatives, are found as im-
portant ingredients in many natural products. Several skeletal isomers are

illustrated here.
p-Menthane
(l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexane)
*A A" A" A
p-Menthenes
*
Although the use of "A" to illustrate the existence of a double bond in the carbon system
recognized, and pictured here only for convenience, this practice is lately generally
is still
discouraged, and thus will not be further encountered in these pages on the raonocyclic
terpenes.
20 HYDROCARBONS
All members have been synthetically characterized but the
of this group
3
most important, as related to the essential oils, is A -menthene which is a
natural constituent of thyme oil and closely related to menthol, principal
constituent of peppermint oil.
The second degree dehydrogenation of p-menthane produces the di-

of
hydro-p-cymenes or p-menthadienes. Only a few of the many theoretically

possible isomers have been encountered in natural products but these few
belong to some of the most important constituents of essential oils. More-
over, many of their derivatives, too, are of major importance for example,
the menthols, terpineols, and piperitols. The following represent plane figure
compounds of this group, illustrating isomers by shifting of the double bonds:
A
A 1 - 3 1(7) ,3 K7),2
(a-Terpinene) (/3-Terpinene) (a-Phellandrcne) (/8-Phellandrene)
VIII
1,4(8)
A2 4 -
(Terpinolene)
XII XIII XIV
1(7) ,8(9) 2,5 2,4(8)
7?-Menthadienes
Of this group, a- and 7-terpinene, a- and /3-phellandrene, terpinolene, and

limonene are most frequently encountered in essential oils. They will be
described in detail later for purposes of identification in essential oils.
'CYCLIC TERPENES 21
One important feature should be considered in

any diagnostic study under-
taken in connection with monocyclic terpenes, i.e., some configurations allow
for the existence of isomers. Such molecules theoretically permit several
forms.
"Chair" or "Z" "Boat" or "C"
form form
CHa
C
L2V^
[
X%H V^XX
R R R' HC2
H R *CH
H CH
H C X X CH 3
3
I. Strainless ring isomers II. Stereo-

isomers
d-, 1-, and dl-
CHa CaH; CH< H
H H H C3H 7
ds- trans-
III. Geometric isomers
The worker, therefore, should ever be on the alert for complications that
may beset his work of identifying menthanes, menthenes, or menthadienes.
Although cyclic hydrocarbons are generally more stable than the corre-
sponding acyclic substances, the monocyclic terpenes isomerize, oxidize, and
polymerize quite readily, 1 especially when distilled at atmospheric pressure.
Thus, it remains questionable whether any of these terpenes have ever been
prepared in absolutely pure form.
1
In this connection, sec Dupont, Jnd. chim. beige 11 (1940), 3. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940)
2353.
Arne Fredga and Esa Leskinen, "Configuration of Terpenes," Arkiv. Kemi, Min-
eral. Geol. B19, No. 1 (1944), 6. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 1616.
Theo Lennartz, "Biogenesis of Terpenes," Z. Naturforsch. 1 (1946), 684. Chem.
Abstracts 41 (1947), 5175.
22 HYDROCARBONS
v
Limonene
C 10 H 16 Mol. Weight 136.23
1 ,8 (9)-p-Menthadiene. l-Methyl-4-isopropenyl-l-cyclohexene
CH3
C
H2 C
/ \CH
H/î
2\j ^2
r^TT
CH
C
\
Occurrence. Limonene one of the most widely distributed terpenes, oc-
is
curring in many volatile oils, in some as the main constituent, especially in

the citrus oils.
d-Limmiene (formerly called carvene or citrene) has been identified in oil

of orange (about 90 per cent), lemon, mandarin, lime, grapefruit, bergamot,
neroli, petitgrain, elemi, caraway (40 per cent), dill, fennel, celery (60 per
cent), erigeron, orthodon oils, etc.
l-Limonene occurs in several pine needle oils, the cone oil of Abies alba,
Russian turpentine oil, star anise, American wormseed, peppermint, spear-
mint, cajuput, Eucalyptus staigeriana, Congo copal resin, etc.
In many cases in which limonene has been recorded as a constituent of
essential oils, the optical rotation is not given.
Isolation. Limonene may be isolated from volatile oils by fractional distillation

and by redistillation over metallic sodium. The crude limonene is finally purified,
according to Godlevski, by the preparation of its tetrabromide and by the reduction
1
of the tetrabromide with zinc dust in alcoholic solution.

Another method for bromination is that of Gaponenkov 2 (see below), whereas for
reduction the technique of von Braun and Lemke 3 with metallic magnesium in ether
may be employed. This latter procedure has been used by Rule and Chambers 4 to
prepare a pure sample of limonene.
Where the isolation is complicated by the presence of conjugated dienes, the tech-
nique of Johnston may be helpful through a fumaric acid reaction at 160-185.
6
Conjugated hydrocarbons are thereby removed from the nonconjugated products.

An entirely different method, but yielding only 35% limonene, is that of Peleato 6
which treats the limonene fraction in ether solution with mercuric acetate for 48 hr.
The precipitate formed is then decomposed with aluminum and sodium carbonate,
and the limonenes fractionated.
Identification. In order to identify limonene, Wallach 7 suggested preparing its
tetrabromide. However, only oily products are obtained if the reagents used are not
CYCLIC TERPENES
o
o
*
rH
H
Q
a
w
H
24 HYDROCARBONS
8
completely anhydrous. Baeyer obtained crystalline tetrabromides by brominating
the terpene fraction in a solution of equal parts of amyl alcohol and ether and by
evaporating the ether slowly. Godlevski recommended adding the solution of the
9
terpene fraction in a mixture of equal parts of amyl alcohol and ether, drop by drop, to
an ice-cold solution of bromine in ether. The mixture must be kept ice-cold throughout
the reaction. Gaponenkov 10 has recently stated that the reaction is best carried out
by reversing this order of addition, using the same solvents.
The optically active tetrabromides m. 104-105 crystallize best from ethyl acetate;
[O:]D 73 0' (in chloroform solution). The tetrabromide is either dextro- or laevorota-
tory, depending upon the optical rotation of the parent hydrocarbon.
Limonene gives a positive reaction with Bezssonoffs reagent n [Mo(V WOa-Ôs)!?
2H20 dissolved in 5% H^SO^, whereby a blue color results in the presence of very
small concentrations and serves to differentiate this terpene from many others.
The nitrosochlorides are also useful and have been amply described.
With organic primary or secondary bases the limonene nitrosochlorides yield mono-
molecular crystalline nitrolamines which are very well adapted for the identification
of limonene. There exist six nitrosochlorides of limonene, viz., d-, /-, d/-a-nitroso-
chloride and d-, 1-, cK-/3-nitrosochloride. Thus each corresponding nitrolamine should
also exist in six modifications. A number of these suitable derivatives are summarized
below (Wallach, 12 Wallach and Conrady, 13 Wallach, 14 ' 16
DuPont and Barraud, 16
Wallad!,
17 18 - 19
-
Hell and Ritter, 20 Baeyer, 21 Wallach, 22 and Hultzsch 23
):
Properties. Apparently it has been difficult to prepare limonene free from

isomers, for which reason the observations made by several authors are not
always in good agreement. Limonene has been the subject of several im-
24 25
portant investigations, having their inception in the Born-Gans theory,
-
relative to the determination of rotatory power. 26>27>28 Naves and Angla 29

have already applied the principle of solvent effect on rotation in a method
aiming at identifying terpenes, in particular limonene.
Properties listed below have been reported, after careful studies of both
30
natural and synthetic isolates, von Braun and Lemke, 31 Pigulev-
by Lecat,
ski,
32
Padmanabhan and Jatkar, 33 Staudinger and Geiger, 34 Pickett and Peter-
35 36 37 38
son, Timmermans, Auwers, Roth and Eisenlohr, Richter and Wolff,
von Rechenberg, 39 Perkin, 40 Bruhl, 41 Godlevski and Roshanovitch, 42 Rule
and Chambers, 43 and Peleato. 44
After experimenting on the oxidation of limonene with ozone, Escourrou 45
expressed the opinion that limonene always contains some terpinolene and
a-terpinene; in other words, that limonene is a mixture of isomeric hydro-
carbons difficult to separate. Thus the product examined by Escourrou con-
sisted of80 per cent limonene, 12 per cent terpinolene, and 8 per cent a-ter-
pinene. The later work of Richter and Wolff, 46 however, would seem to in-
dicate that, after elimination of the terpinolene contaminant, a limonene of
high purity can be prepared.
Limonene is a colorless oil possessing a pleasant orange-like odor. When
protected against access of air and light, limonene is comparatively stable;
otherwise it oxidizes readily. It can be distilled at atmospheric pressure
without decomposition.
CYCLIC TERPENES 25
Mixing of d- and /-limonene yields the optically inactive dipentene. The

latter is formed also if optically active limonenes are heated or treated with
acids. Thus, limonene or dipentene, when treated with hydrogen chloride
in the presence of moisture, yields dipentene dihydrochloride m. 50-51
(from methyl alcohol). This dihydrochloride is best prepared by saturating

a well-cooled solution of the terpene in glacial acetic acid, with hydrogen
chloride. The action of acids in the cold may cause hydration, and forma-
tion of terpineol and terpin hydrate, but on heating these alcohols may be
dehydrated again to hydrocarbons. On heating with mineral acids, limonene
is converted to terpinene and some p-cymene. Oxidizing limonene with very
47
dilute potassium permanganate solution, Wagner obtained p-menthane-
1,2,8,9-tetrol (limonetrite), m. 191.5-192. Milas and Sussman 48 later ob-
tained this same tetraol, in 35 per cent yields, by oxidation with hydrogen
peroxide in tertiary butyl alcohol in the presence of perosmic acid. Blumann
and Zeitschel 49 showed that oxidation of limonene by moist air yields dl-
50
carveol and dJ-carvone, and, according to Sword, 8(10)-p-menthene-l,2-
diol, m. 67.5.
Autoxidation of limonene to carvone and carveol under the influence of
air and moisture most probably is one of the principal factors in the spoilage
of poorly stored oils that contain a high percentage of limonene citrus oils,
26 HYDROCARBONS
for example. particularly noticeable in old orange oils by a peculiar
This is
caraway-like by-note, whereas in lemon oil this off-note is masked by an odor

of p-cymene originating perhaps from the oxidation of isocitral (see "Citral")-*
Stronger oxygen concentrations, e.g., ozone, yield a solid ozonide m. 60-65,
51 52
according to Neresheimer, but Spencer and co-workers find both mono-
and diozonides of d-limonene and dipentene to be liquids.
Use. Limonene widely employed for the scenting of cosmetics, soaps
is
and all kinds of technical goods, as well as for the flavoring of pharmaceuti-
cals. A very important use is in imitation citrus oils, and generally in imi-
tation essential oils.
In any contemplated use of limonene, however, the manufacturer should

be aware that certain preliminary investigations are recommended since this
63 64
product has been reported as the cause of dermatitis and should be
handled and compounded properly.
1
J. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 31 (1899), 203. Chem. Zentr. I (1899), 1241.
2
J. Gen. Chem. U.S.S.R. 7 (1937), 994. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 5340.
8
Ber. 56 (1923), 1562.
4
/. Chem. Soc. (1937), 152.
6
Patent to Amer. Cyan. Co. No. 2,290,054, July 14, 1942.
U. S.
Trabajos lab. Uoquim. quim. apt. [2], 1 (1940), 121. Chem. Abstracts 38 (1944), 2329.
6
Liebigs Ann. 226 (1884), 318; 239 (1887), 3; 262 (1889), 145.
7
8
Ber. 27 (1894), 448.
9
Chem. Ztg. 22 (1898), 827.
10
/. Gen. Chem. U.S.S.R. 7 (1937), 994. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 5340.
Riechstoff Ind. 13 (1938), 84.
11
Liebigs Ann. 262 (1889), 111, 116, 118, 121, 126, 146. Cf. Wallach, "Terpene und Cam-
12
pher," Leipzig (1914), 271-282.

13
Ibid. 252 (1889), 111, 145. Cf. Wallach, "Terpene und Campher," Leipzig (1914), 271-282.
14
Ibid. 245 (1888), 270. Cf. Wallach, "Terpene und Campher," Leipzig (1914), 271-282.
16
Ibid. 270 (1892), 175, 181-188. Cf. Wallach, "Tcrpene und Campher," Leipzig (1914),
271282
" Butt. soc. chim. [4], 36 (1924), 630.
17
Ann. 227 (1885), 278.
Liebigs
18
246 (1888), 224.
Ibid.
19
Ibid. 226 (1884), 318.
20
Ber. 17 (1884), 1978, 2610.
21
Ibid. 26 (1893), 2863.
Liebigs Ann. 281 (1894), 144 Anm.
22
23
Ber. 72B (1939), 1181.
24
Born, Physik. Z. 16 (1915), 251. Ann. Physik [4], 66 (1918), 177.
26
Cans, Z. Physik. 27 (1924), 164. Ann. Physik [4], 79 (1926), 547.
28
Wolf and Volkmann, Z. physik. Chem. Abt. B3 (1929), 139.
27
Beckmann and Cohen, J. Chem. Physics 4 (1936), 784.
28
Rule and Chambers, J. Chem. Soc. (1937), 145.
29
Compt. rend. 213 (1941), 570.
80
Rec. trav. chim. 46 (1926), 623.
81
Ber. 56B (1923), 1563.
82
J. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 64 (1924), 299.
83
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1935), 334.
84
Helv. Chim. Ada 9 (1926), 555.
86
Ind. Eng. Chem. 21 (1929), 325.
*
This theory, recently advanced by Strausz (Perfumery Essential Oil Record 38 (1947),
260), requires experimental proof, however. The authors.
CYCLIC TERPENES 27
86
Bull chim. Belg. 27 (1913), 334. Chem. Zentr. I (1914), 618.
soc.
87
Liebigs Ann. 373 (1910), 271.
38
Ber. 63 (1930), 1724.
39
"Einfachc und Fraktionierte Destination," 2nd Ed. (1923), 249.
40
J. Chem. Soc. 81 (1902), 315.
41
/6zYl 91 (1907), 121.
42
/. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 31 (1899), 209.
43
/. Chem. Soc. (1937), 152.
44
Trabajos bioquim. quim. apl. [21, 1 (1940), 121. Chem. Abstracts 38 (1944), 2329.
lab.
46
Bull. soc. chim. [41, 43 (1928), 1204.
"Ber. 63B (1930), 1721.
47
Ber. 23 (1890), 2315.
48
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 59 (1937), 2345.
49
Ber. 47 (1914), 2623.
60
J. Chem. Soc. 127 (1925), 1632.
61
Chem. Zentr. II (1916), 993. Harries and Adam, Ber. 49 (1916), 1035.
62
.7. Organic Chem. 5 (1940), 610.
"Schwartz, Arch. Dermatol. Syphilol. 37 (1938), 631.

64
Riedel, Klin. Wochschr. 19 (1940), 1034. Rev. Current Lit. Paint Colour Varnish and Allied
Ind. 15 (1942), 164. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 7127.
Audriean, "Chemical Properties of Limonene," Bull. inst. pin (1927), 33-34, 55-56,
91-92, 183-190. A survey.
Yasuji Fujita and Saburo Ohashi, "Dehydrogenation of Limonene with Chloranil,'*-
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 63 (1942), 1443. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 3175.
Morris S. Kharaseh and Wm. B. Reynolds (to Research Corp.). "Limonene,"
U. S. Patent No. 2,382,041, August 14, 1945. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 607.
V. N. Ipatieff, Herman Pines, Vladimir Dvorkovitz, R. C. Olberg, and Michael
Savoy, "Studies in the Terpene Series. Cyclic Isomerization of Limonene," J. Org.
Chem. 12 (1947), 34.
Dipentene
(d/-Limonene)
Dipentene, the optically inactive (racemic) form of limonene,

Occurrence.
does not seem to be as widely distributed in nature as limonene. Also di-
pentene, wherever reported in an essential oil, may not be present as such,
but may have been converted, by heating, fractionating, or by chemical ac-
tion, from limonene or pinene.
Dipentene occurs in the following essential oils: in turpentine oils of various
origin, in Siberian pine needle oil, and in oil of lemongrass, citronella, palma-
rosa, cardamom, pepper, cubeb, star anise, nutmeg, cinnamon leaves, cam-
phor, bergamot, neroli, myrrh, olibanum, elemi, coriander, cumin, fennel, and
many others.
Isolation. When
trying to separate dipentene from a mixture with limonene by the
preparation of derivatives, it should be kept in mind that the dipentene derivatives
usually separate first. When fractionating a mixture of hydrocarbons, or a volatile
dipentene, according to Wallach, will be found in the fraction boiling slightly
1
oil,
higher than limonene.

28 HYDROCARBONS
Dipentene can be isolated for example, from Manila elemi oil by fractional
distillation. A good grade of dipentene is obtained by heating dipentene dihydro-
chloride with aniline or by treating dipentene tetrabromide with zinc dust and glacial
acetic acid. For this purpose Wallach 2 suggests heating 10 g. of dipentene dihydro-
chloride with 20 g. of aniline above a low flame until the reaction starts and, at the
most, 2 or 3 min. longer. Add 20 cc. of glacial acetic acid and steam distill the mixture.
Free the distillate from aniline by shaking repeatedly with oxalic acid solution and
by steam distillation. Dry the product over anhydrous potassium carbonate and
rectify over metallic sodium.
Other findings relevant to the isolation of this compound will be found in connection
with limonene.
Identification. The compound most suitable for the identification of dipentene is
its (optically inactive) tetrabromide m. 124- 125 which may be prepared as de-
scribed under limonene tetrabromide. Characteristic also is the nitrosochloride 3 m.
78 which, on further heating, may solidify and melt again at 103-104. When
treated with alcoholic potassium hydroxide, the nitrosochloride yields c^-carvoxime
m. 93. When treated with benzylamine and alcohol, the nitrosochloride gives a-
nitrolbenzylamine m. 110.
4
For details, see "Limonene." The derivatives of
dipentene are optically inactive; they differ from those of limonene by a slight variation
in the melting points.
In regard to its physicochemical properties, dipentene differs

Properties.
from limonene only by its optical inactivity. The odor of dipentene is or-
ange- lemon-like.
Comparative summary of the properties of dipentene may be observed in
6
connection with limonene. Those reported by Richter and Wolff are given
here and represent a carefully prepared sample:
b. 178
b 15 64.4
8
n{) 1.4727
Dipentene is relatively stable but heating causes polymerization. When

heated with sulfuric acid in alcohol solution, dipentene is converted into ter-
pinene. The action of 55 per cent sulfuric acid (1 part dipentene plus 6
parts sulfuric acid) at G yields terpin; whereas concentrated sulfuric acid
gives p-cymene. When acted upon with halogen acids, dipentene and li-
monene form the same dihydrohalide compounds. (For the preparation, see
"Limonene.") Dihydrochloride m. 49-50, dihydrobromide m. 64, dihy-
droiodide m. 77-81. By removal of hydrogen halide, dipentene may be
regenerated. When shaking the dihydrohalide compounds with dilute al-
kali solutions, a-terpineol and terpin hydrate are obtained.
Use. The use of dipentene is similar to that of limonene.
Liebigs Ann. 286 (1895), 138. Ber. 40 (1907), 600.

1
2
Ber. 40 (1907), 603.
8
Liebigs Ann. 246 (1888), 267; 270 (1892), 175.
Ibid. 262 (1889), 126.
6
Ber. 63 (1930), 1724.
CYCLIC TERPENES 29
Isolimonene
C 10 H 16 Mol. Weight 136.23
2,8(9)-p-Menthadiene. l-Methyl-4-isopropenyl-2-cyclohexene
CH3
CH
HC
/ \ CH
2
HC 2 CH
\ /
CH
C
H2 C
\
Occurrence. This laevorotatory terpene was first observed in American
wormseed oil Chenopodium ambrosioides var. anthelminticum by Kremers and
*
3
by Nelson, and by Henry and Paget.
2
later investigated
Isolation. By fractional distillation.

Identification. By the preparation of the tetrabromide m. 117 which is optically
inactive.
Properties. The wide

difference in the physicochemical characteristics as
noted below indicates that the terpene has not been obtained in pure form
by some of the workers. This compound has been studied by Henry and
4 5 6 7 8
Paget, Slobodin, Tschugaev, Mereshkovski, Pigulevskii, et al. The var-
iant properties recorded by these authors follow:
b. 177-178 4
HD -140 35'
b. 173-174 8
HD -5 55' 8
6
b. 172.5M73.5 6
[]}> -57 0' 4
7 4
b 75 8.6 171-173 nf? 1.484
7 7
df 0.8230 nf? 1.4606
6 5
df 0.8370 nf? 1.46693
8 6
d 19 6 .
0.8390 n^ 1.47043
4 9 5 '
8
d 15 0.847 nj) 1.4750
Use. As such, isolimonene has not found any use in the perfume or flavor
industries.
1
Pharm. Rev. 26 (1907), 155.
8
J. Am. Chem. Sac. 42 (1920) 1204.
3
J. Chem. Soc. 119 (1921), 1714; 127 (1925), 1649.
4
Ibid., 1723.
30 HYDROCARBONS
fi
/. Gen. Chem. (U.S.S.R.) 6 (1936), 129. Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 4828.
6
7
Bull. soc. chim. IV, 37 (1925), 1184.
G. V. Pigulevskii and I. Gorbunova, "The Isolimonene of Tschugaev," Compt. rend,

acad. sci. (U.S.S.R.) 54 (1946), 499 (in French). Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 6551.
Terpinolene
C 10 H 16 Mol. Weight 130.23
l,4(8)-p-Menthadiene. l-Methyl-4-isopropylidene-l-cyclohexene
CH 3
C
HC
/ \CH
> ^
c
II
c
HC3 CH 3
Occurrence. In Manila elemi 1
according to Clover; probably in cori-
oil,
ander oil; in orange oil (?); and in the oil derived from Monterey cypress
(Cupressus macrocarpa, Hartweg [syn. C. Lambertiana, Carr]), according to
2
Briggs and Sutherland.

According to Wallach, terpinolene on treatment with bromine
3
Identification. (1)
yields a dibromide m. 69-70, and a tetrabromide, viz., 1,2,4,8-tetrabromo-p-men-
thane m. 116 (119 and 122, according to Henry and Paget 4 ).
(2) Wallach
6
found that terpinolene, on cautious oxidation with ice-cold potassium
permanganate solution, is oxidized to an erythritol, viz., p-menthane-l,2,4,8-tetrol
m. 149- 150. These findings have been confirmed by Briggs and Sutherland. 6
For the preparation of the erythritol 7 g. of the hydrocarbon are shaken in a copper
still with 33 g. of crystalline potassium permanganate, 14 g. of potassium hydroxide,
400 g. of ice, and 400 cc. of water. The undigested hydrocarbon is distilled off, the
oxidation liquid filtered from Mn02, and on the steam bath evaporated to dryness in
a current of carbon dioxide. The residue is then extracted with alcohol and, after
removal of the alcohol, dissolved in a little water and repeatedly extracted with ethyl
acetate. The ester thereby extracts a neutral product which separates from the
solvent, first in syrup form, but which may be brought to congealing by agitating
CYCLIC TERPENES 31
with cold ethyl acetate. After repeated recrystallization from ethyl acetate and water
containing solvents, the product has a melting point ranging from 90 to 100 (with
gas development). If dried slowly at 145, the product has a melting point ranging
from 149 to 150.
(3) Hultzsch
7
found that the adduct with maleic anhydride (Ci 4 2 oO4) melts at H
182 after numerous recrystallizations from ethyl acetate.
The
properties of this terpene have been reported by Semmler
Properties.
8
and Schossberger, Krestinski and Szolodki, 9 Pickett and Peterson, 10 Baeyer, 11
Wallach 12 and Zelinsky and Lewina: 13
b. 186M87 09 df 0.8628 13
b. 183-185 011 HD 1.4802 13
8 13 10
fan 75 -
nb 1.4809
b 10 G7-G8 8
At atmospheric be distilled without polymeri-

pressure, terpinolene cannot
zation to high boiling compounds and, therefore, without considerable losses.
In the presence of mineral acids, terpinolene is very unstable and isomerized
to terpinene; when
treated in the cold with halogen acids in glacial acetic
14
acid, dipentene dihydrohalides are obtained, according to Wallach.
Use. As a mixture with other terpenes, synthetic terpinolene, a secondary
product in the manufacture of terpineol, is used for the scenting of all kinds
of technical preparations.
1
Am. Chcm. J. 39 (1908), 613.
2
/. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 399.
Liebigs Ann. 227 (1885), 283.
3
4
J. Chem.Soc. (1931), 25.
Liebigs Ann. 368 (1909), 10, 13.
5
6
/. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 397.
7
Ber. 72 (1939), 1182.
8
Ber. 42 (1909), 4044.
9
Zhur. Prikladnoi Khirn. 2 (1929), 337. Chem. Zc.ntr. II (1929), 2383.
1
Ind. Eng. Chem. 21 (1929), 325.
11
Ber. 27 (1894), 448.
Liebigs Ann. 291 (1896), 361.
12
"Ber. 62 (1929), 341.

14
Liebigs Ann. 239 (1887), 24.
32 HYDROCARBONS
Sylvestrene
(dZ-Sylvestrene = Carvestrene)
C 10 Hi 6 Mol. Weight 136.23
l,8(9)-ra-Menthadiene. 1-Methyl- 6,8(9)-m-Menthadiene. 1-Methyl-

3-isopropenyl-l-cyclohexene 3-isopropenyl-6-cyclohexene
C C
H2 C
/ \CH CH3 and HC
/ \CH CH 3
2
H2 C
I I
CH C
/ I
H2 C CH C
/
\CH/ \CH \CH/ \ CH
2 2 2 2
The numerous investigations of several workers, especially Haworth and

prove conclusively that sylvestrene must be regarded as a mixture
1
Perkin,
of the two hydrocarbons described above, in which either the one or the other
form predominates. Sylvestrene exists in a dextro- and laevorotatory modi-
fication. The optically inactive (dl-) form is also called carvestrene.
Occurrence. Sylvestrene was formerly believed to occur in Swedish pine
needle oil, in Finnish oil of turpentine, in the oil from the roots of various
pins species, and in cypress oil. Later Rao and Simonsen 2 proved that syl-
vestrene, as such, did not exist in nature, but that it is formed from either
A 3 - or A 4 -carene during the process of isolation through the dihydrochloride.
When passing gaseous hydrochloride through carene or a carene-containing
fraction, sylvestrene dihydrochloride is formed. Sylvestrene, therefore, can
no longer be regarded as a natural plant product.
According to Wallach, sylvestrene may be isolated in fairly pure form

3
Isolation.
by preparing the dihydrochloride from a carene-containing fraction and by decompos-
ing the dihydrochloride through boiling with aniline, with diethylaniline, or with
sodium acetate and glacial acetic acid. For this purpose the fraction should first be
diluted with an equal volume of anhydrous ether and saturated with absolutely dry
gaseous hydrogen chloride. After two days of standing, the ether is driven off and the
residue brought to crystallization at low temperature. The crystalline mass may be
freed from adhering oil on porous clay plates. After recrystallization in the same
weight of alcohol, the dihydrochloride is submitted to fractional crystallization. It
is less soluble in ether than the corresponding dipentene compound. Dihydrochloride
m. 72. It should be kept in mind, in this connection, that the presence of dipentene
or other terpenes yielding dipentene dihydrochloride with gaseous hydrochloride causes
the formation of dihydrochloride mixtures. Their melting points will be lower, the
higher the content of dipentene dihydrochloride. The sylvestrene separated through
its dihydrochloride closely resembles limonene in regard to physicochemical properties.
CYCLIC TERPENES 33
Identification. Sylvestrene forms, with solutions of glacial acetic acid hydrogen

halides, the following compounds :
Melting Points, Isomers

Derivative d I dl
Dihydrochloride 72 72 52
Dihydrobromide 72 ... 48-50
Dihydroiodide 66-67
Unlike dipentene dihydrochloride, which is optically inactive, the dihydrochloride

of sylvestrene shows dextrorotation. On elimination of hydrogen chloride, the re-
generated sylvestrene is optically active. The dihydrobromide cannot be obtained
readily in crystalline form
other terpenes are present. if
On addition of a drop of concentrated sulfuric acid, the terpene dissolved in acetic

acid anhydride gives a very characteristic and intense methylene blue coloration.
The nitrosochloride m. 106-107 which, according to Wallach, 4 can be obtained
by the action of amyl nitrite and hydrochloric acid on pure sylvestrene, is bimolecular,
like limonene nitrosochloride, and dextrorotatory.
Properties. a colorless mobile oil possessing an agreeable

Sylvestrene is
limonene-like odor. The following table summarizes properties of the dif-

ferent stereoisomeric forms as reported by Wallach, 5 and Haworth, Perkin
and Wallach; 6 for d-sylvestrene regenerated from its hydrochloride by Schim-
mel & Co.,
7
applying to the dextroisomer. The laevo- form has been in-
all
8
vestigated by Haworth and Perkin, and a particular type regenerated from
its dihydrochloride by Schimmel & Co.
9
The d/-isomer or carvestrene has
been the subject of work by Baeyer. 10
Constants of the Isomers

*
, >
Property d I dl
9 10
b. ... 172-180 178
7 8
b. 178-182 176-178
6
b 75 i 175
5
d 20 0.848
8
di 9 ... 0.848
7 9
d}| 0.8659 0.8604
... -6812' 8
-f 66 19'
6
(in CHC13 )
6
[a] D +83 II'
7 9
ng* 1. 47936 1.47838
Sylvestrene one of the most stable terpenes; when heated to 250 it

is
polymerizes but is not isomerized by heating or by the action of alcoholic

sulfuric acid.
34 HYDROCARBONS
Use. Sylvestrene, as such, has not found any noteworthy use in the per-
fume or flavor industries.
1
Chem. Soc. 103 (1913), 2225. Cf. Bacycr, Ber. 27 (1894), 3490.
/.
2
Ibid. 127 (1925), 2494.
^Liebigs Ann. 230 (1885), 241; 239 (1887), 25.
Ibid. 246
(1888), 272.
*Ibid. 252 (1889), 149.
6
Ibid. 399 (1913), 159.
7
Schimmel & Co., April (1914),
Ber. 48.
8
/. Chem. Soc. 103 (1913), 2234.
g
Ber. Schimmel & Co., April (1914), 48.
10
Ber. 27 (1894), 3491.
The Terpinenes
Ci H 16 Mol. Weight 136.23
The term "terpinene" refers to three monocyclic terpenes which, on treat-

ment with hydrogen chloride, yield 1,4-dichloro-p-men thane (terpinene di-
hydrochloride) true that sabinene arid thujene, too, give terpinene
. It is
dihydrochloride but these terpenes are bicyclic and can easily be distinguished
from the terpinenes. Of the three terpinenes, viz., a-, /3-, and 7-terpinene
only the a- and 7- isomer have been found in nature. Neither the a- nor
the y- form has been isolated in absolutely pure form as any terpinene frac-
tion consists of a mixture of a- and 7-terpinene which are very difficult to
separate.
Terpinene can be obtained artificially with great ease and by a multitude
of reactions, from cyclic terpenes such as pinene, dipentene, phellaridrene,
sabinene, etc., or from oxygenated compounds like gcraniol, linalool, ter-
pineol, terpinenol, terpinene terpin, terpin hydrate, dihydrocarveol, cineolc,

etc. The resulting terpinene is always a mixture of several (usually a- and
7-) isomers, the composition of which varies with the method of preparation.
Terpinene possesses a great similarity to dipentene for example, in re-

gard to their halogen derivatives. Of the existing cis- and trans- modifica-
tions, only the latter are useful for identification, the former being liquid.
Isolation and The fraction best suited for the identification of

Identification.
terpinene is that boiling from 175-185 at 760 mm. The presence of terpinene sug-
gests itself by the formation of terpinene dihydrochloride m. 52 when gaseous hydro-
gen chloride passed into the hydrocarbon dissolved in glacial acetic acid. Thujene,
is
sabinene, terpinenols, and terpinene terpin yield the same hydrochloride, but the
boiling points of these compounds are partly lower, partly higher than those of the
terpinenes.
Use. The terpinenes are used in the compounding of certain synthetic

essential oils, and in conjunction with other aromatics for the scenting of all
kinds of technical preparations.
No comment -about the use of the terpinenes would be complete without
mention of the interest displayed by industry in its polymers formed with
CYCLIC TERPENES 35
a- and /3- unsaturated compounds. Numerous patents l

have been granted
on the use of complexes, from "terpinene" and maleic anhydride or fumaric
acid, etc., for plasticizers, rubber substitutes, lacquers and varnishes, resins,
and many other technical products.
example see: Hercules Powder Co., German Patent No.
625,903, Feb. 20, 1936.
Hercules Powder Co., German Patent No. 633,420, July 27, 1936. Hercules Powder Co.,
German Patent No. 627,783, Mar. 23, 1936. Hercules Powder Co., U. S. Patent No.
1,993,025, Mar. 5, 1935. E. I. duPont de Nemours, U. S. Patent No. 2,144,464, Jan.
17, 1939.
a-Terpinene
1 ,3-p-Menthadiene. l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-l ,3-cyclohexadiene

CH 3
C
H2 C
/ \CH
H2 C CH
\C
CH
H3 C
/ \CH
3
Occurrence. a-Terpinene is the main constituent of "terpinene." It oc-

curs in oil of savin, American wormseed, coriander, Ocimum viride, Ceylon
cardamom, etc.
Isolation. a-Terpinene can be isolated by fractional distillation for example,

from Ceylon cardamom oil and by the preparation of terpinene dihydrochloride m.
52. This is obtained, according to Wallach, by treating the fraction b. 170-220
1
with hydrogen chloride in ether solution. The dihydrochloride may be decomposed

by heating with aniline as follows :
Heat 10 g. of terpinene dihydrochloride with 20 cc. of aniline until the reaction

starts. Add 20 cc. of glacial acetic acid and steam distill the mixture. Shake the
distillate, which contains considerable quantities of aniline, with oxalic acid solution.
Drive off the hydrocarbon from the acid solution by steam distillation, shake the dis-
tillate once more with oxalic acid, and repeat the process until the distillate is abso-
lutely free from aniline. Separate the hydrocarbon, dry, and distill over metallic
sodium. The product thus obtained will also contain some 7-terpinene.
Another method of isolation that has yet to be tested upon a diverse number of
mixtures but seems to be worthy of careful consideration is recommended by Tish-
chenko and Bogomolov 2 who report that the adduct of a-terpinene and maleic anhy-
dride may be converted to the barium salt and decomposed by heating to recover all
but 7% of the original hydrocarbon; the residue is lost as p-cymene. These authors
suggest that this reaction be used to separate a-terpinene from other mixtures and
36 HYDROCARBONS
other terpinenes. They have pointed out also the possibilities of the acrolein addition
product bio 116-119 dl 0.9691, which is decomposed completely
, into the original
substances by distillation at ordinary pressures.
8
Gascoigne has further confirmed the usefulness of the diene synthesis as a means
of separation. He observed that the a-terpinene-maleic anhydride reaction
proceeds
quantitatively at room temperature, and thus may be used specifically to detect and
characterize this hydrocarbon.
Alder and Richert *
earlier suggested the acetylene dicarboxylic acids as a general
method of analysis of conjugated cyclohexadienes.
Identification. (1) Treatment of a-terpinene with nitrous acid yields a nitrosite
m. 155. In fact, the designation a-terpinene is reserved for that terpene which gives
The percentage of a-terpinene present in a mixture can be estimated
this nitrosite.
approximately by the yield of the nitrosite which, however, may fail to form if the
percentage of a-terpinene is low, or in mixtures with 7-terpinene. In such cases, the
presence of a-terpinene can be proved by oxidation (see below), as the substituted
adipic acid may be isolated and readily identified.
Modifying the procedure of Wallach, 6 the nitrosite can be prepared as follows:
Mix 3 cc. of the corresponding hydrocarbon fraction b. 175-185 with 1.5 cc. of
glacial acetic acid and 4.5 cc. of water. Add to this mixture a concentrated aqueous
solution of 1.5 g. of sodium nitrite in small portions and at a low temperature. A
reddish-yellow color will appear when the nitrous acid has been completely absorbed.
Inoculate with a small crystal of pure nitrosite. Wash the crystals, which separate after
a short time, with petroleum ether and water, and finally recrystallize from alcohol.
Treatment of the terpinene nitrosite with bases such as piperidine and benzylamine
yields nitrolamines: nitrolpiperidine m. 153-154, nitrolbenzylamine m. 137. The
benzoyl derivative of the nitrosite melts at 77-78.
(2) A positive method of distinguishing a-terpinene from 7-terpinene is by oxidation
with potassium permanganate to a,a'-dihydroxy-a-methyl-a'-isopropyladipic acid m.
188-189. The lactone of this acid melts at 72-73. Wallach 6 suggested the follow-
ing procedure:
Place a mixture of 7 g. of the hydrocarbon, 33 g. of
potassium permanganate, 14 g.
of potassium hydroxide, 400 g. of ice, and 400 cc. of water in a
copper flask and shake
on a machine for an hour. Distill off the excess of hydrocarbon, separate the man-
ganese oxide by filtration, and saturate the filtrate with carbon dioxide while it is
being evaporated to dryness. Extract the residue with alcohol, evaporate the alcoholic
filtrate to dryness, dissolve this residue with a small
quantity of hot water, and set
the solution aside for crystallization. Separate the crystalline mass, wash with a
little cold water, dry on porous plates, and recrystallize from 15 to 20 times its
weight
of 25% alcohol. The erythritol Ci Hi 6 (OH) 4 thus formed by the oxidation of 7-
terpinene melts at 235-236, or at 237-238 if heated rapidly. The erythritol is
sparingly soluble in ether, ligroine, ethyl acetate and chloroform; not readily soluble
in cold alcohol or water, but more readily in hot alcohol or water. In order to
identify
a-terpinene, the mother liquor from the erythritol is extracted with ethyl acetate and
supersaturated with sulfuric acid at low temperature. Extract this acid liquid once
with ether and exhaust it by extracting with ethyl acetate. This will take
up an acid
which crystallizes on proper concentration of the solvent. After recrystallization from
about 6 times its own weight of water, the
a,a'-dihydroxy-a-methyl-a'-isopropyladipic
acid will melt at 189 with elimination of water.
Recently Diels, Koch and Frost 7 questioned this oxidative step with potassium
permanganate as a method of structure proof for a-terpinene, and attempted the use
of the diene synthesis as a corroborative reaction.
However, they found the action
with maleic anhydride complex and, according to Alder, 8
unnecessary.
CYCLIC TERPENES 37
A which distinguishes it from 7-terpinene is the fact

characteristic of a-terpinene
that, upon oxidation with Beckmann's chromic acid reagent, brown resinous flakes
separate immediately, whereas with 7-terpinene this is a delayed reaction. This
feature was first observed by Baeyer and9
later confirmed by Richter and Wolff. 10
The capability of complete oxidation in the cold with Beckmann's chromic acid mix-
ture may be used to remove terpinene from a mixture with pinene, camphene, limonene,
terpinolene, cineole, and pinol, as these compounds are quite resistant against the
action of Beckmann's chromic acid mixture in the cold.
n obtained 2
Elson, Gibson and Simonsen l,4-oxido-A -p-menthene and 30% p-
cymene by action of benzoyl hydroperoxide on a-terpinene.
12
(3) With halogen acids a- terpinene, according to Wallach, readily forms crystalline
derivatives :
Dihydrochloride m. 51-52
Dihydrobromide m. 58-59
Dihydroiodide m. 76
These melting points are somewhat higher than those of the corresponding dipentene
derivatives.
(4) The adduct with maleic anhydride should be a characteristic derivative; this
istrue also of the derived acid compounds. However, the variant properties thus far
reported suggest that the nature of starting products remains questionable. (Litt-
man, Diels,
13
Koch and Frost,
14
Sfiras,
18
Goodway and West, 16 Gascoigne, 17 Briggs
and Sutherland, 18 and Ipatieff and Pines. 19 )
Adduct with Derived Dicarboxylic

Maleic Anhydride Acids
m. 60-61 17
158 (m) 14
203 (trans)
14
61-62 18 147-148 18
16 16
62 134
64-65 la
127-128 19
65-66 15
66-67 14
4
bis 195 >
b5 155-165 18
bi 152-154 13
13
df 1.100
7 13
nj, 1.4913
(5) An addition compound with benzoquinone in alcohol is formed in 2 hr. Gas-

coigne
20
reports m. 87-
Properties. a-Terpinene is a colorless oil possessing a somewhat lemon-

like odor. As
stated, a-terpinene has probably never been obtained in ab-
solutely pure form, as it always contains at least a small portion of the 7-
isomer. Thus, the observed properties of a-terpinene have naturally varied.
21
Wallach reported these properties:
b. 174-179 and 179-181

d 22 0.842
d 20 0.846
nD 1.4719 and 1.4789
38 HYDROCARBONS
Schimmel & Co. 22 found the following properties for a fraction of coriander
oil, consisting of a- and 7-terpinene:
b. 177-178
dli 0.8485
ng> 1 .47650
23
Auwers recorded for a carefully prepared a-terpinene:
b. 180-182
5
dj 0.8484
6
n{f 1.48133
24
Richter and Wolff prepared a-terpinene by the action of aniline on ter-
pinene dihydrochloride arid found these somewhat different properties:
b 755 173.5-174.8
df 0.8375
7
n}?' 1.477
a-Terpinene resembles dipentenc in many ways for example, in regard to

the hydrogen halide derivatives. It polymerizes and resinifies quickly, es-
pecially when exposed to air and a-Terpinene is easily converted

sunlight.
into p-cymene for instance, by dehydrogenation with sulfur, according to
25
Ruzicka, Meyer and Mingazzini.
Liebigs Ann. 360 (1906), 148.
l
2
Byull. Vsesoyuz. Khirn. Obshchcstra im. D. I. Mendelceva (1939), No. 3-4, 35. Khirn.
Referal. Ztmr. (1939), No. 7, 26. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 4386.
3
J. Proc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales 74 (1910), 353.
4
Her. 70B (1937), 1364.
*Liebigs Ann. 239 (1887), 35.
Ibid. 362 (1908), 297. See also Henry and Paget, /. Chem. Soc. 123 (1923), 1878.
iBer. 71B (1938), 1163.
*Ber. 71B (1938), 2210.
9
Ber. 27 (1894), 815.
Ber. 60 (1927), 477.
11
J. Chem. Soc. (1929), 2732.
^Liebigs Ann. 360 (1906), 145; 366 (1907), 198.
13
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1935), 586.
14
Ber. 71B (1938), 1168.
15
Recherches (Roure-Bertrand fils and Jules DuPont) 2, No. 7 (1938), 111. Chem. Abstracts
36 (1941), 8210.
16
J. Chem. Soc. (1940), 702.
17
18
/. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 402.
19
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1944), 1120.
20
v-Liebigs Ann. 350 (1906), 149; 362 (1908), 301.
CYCLIC TERPENES 39
22
Gildemeister and Hoffmann, "Die Xtherischen Die," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 332.
Ber. 42 (1909), 2428.
Ber. 63 (1930), 1720.
26
Helv. Chim. Ada 6 (1922), 356.
''
fi-Terpinene
1 (7),3-p-Menthadiene. l-Methylene-4-isopropyl-3-cyclohexene
CH2
II
C
\
H2 C CH
\C
CH
HC CH
Occurrence. This terpene has not been found in nature.
/3-Terpinene differs from both a- and 7-terpinene in yielding a

Identification.
crystalline tetrabromide which is formed on addition of bromine to a well-cooled ether-
alcohol solution of the terpene. The tetrabromide crystallizes from ethyl acetate in
prisms m. 154- 155.
Properties. Wallach *
reported these physicochemical properties for
/3-terpinene:
b. 173-174
d 22 0.838
1.4754
The molecularrefraction of /3-terpinene, as can be expected from its con-

stitution, shows a marked exaltation (observed 45.72, calculated 45.24).
0-Terpinene oxidizes very easily and, on exposure to air and sunlight,
forms dihydrocuminaldehyde and cuminaldehyde.
1
LieUgs Ann. 357 (1907), 69; 362 (1908), 288, 292.
40 HYDROCARBONS
^y-Terpinene
C 10 H 16 Mol. Weight 136.23
CH 3
C
H2 C
/ \CH
HC CH2
\ /
C
CH
/ \CH t
HsO 3
Occurrence. y-Terpinene forms a minor constituent of ordinary "terpin-

ene." (See "a-Terpinene.")
7-Terpinene has been found in oil of coriander, lemon, cumin, and Ocimum
viride. Probably free from admixture with its a- isomeride, 7-terpincne oc-
curs in oil of ajowan, thyme, Eucalyptus dives,
1
Crithmum maritimum (oil of
samphire or seafennel), and Mosla japonica.

When first observed in the two last-named oils, 7-terpinene was not iden-
tified as such, but was mistaken for other terpenes, and named crithmene and
2
moslene, respectively. However, Richter and Wolff proved conclusively
that both crithmene and moslene are identical with y-terpinene. Richter and
Wolff also showed that the terpene fraction from ajowan oil, commercially
known as "thymene," consists mainly of 7-terpinene.
This hydrocarbon is reported to predominate in the earlier stages of de-
velopment in Trachyspermum copticum,* and a small percentage has recently
been identified in orthodon oils,
4
and those from Cupressus macrocarpa. 6

According to Richter and Wolff, 7-terpinene may be charac-
6
Identification. (1)
terized by the preparation of a nitrosate m. 116, a nitrosochloride m. 111, a nitrol-
piperidine m. 149, a crystalline tetrabromide m. 128, a dihydrochloride in. 52.

(2) In the presence of other terpenes, especially a-terpinene, 7-terpinene can be
identified more definitely by the oxidation with potassium permanganate to the
erythritol Ci H 16 (OH) 4 p-menthantetrol

, (1,2,4,5), m. 237-238, according to Wal-
7
lach In case 7-terpinene is present in quantity, the identifica-
(see "a-Terpinene").
tion through the nitrosate or nitrosochloride should prove more convenient.
Most of these derivatives have been confirmed in the recent work of Briggs and
Sutherland. 8
CYCLIC TERPENES 41
Properties. y-Terpinene has not yet been obtained in absolutely pure form.
Richter and Wolff 9 reported these properties for a characteristic 7-terpin-
ene isolated from "thymene":
b. 183 df 0.849
bi 8 72.5 df 0.853
4 5
-
nj) 1.4765
7-Terpinene oxidizes very easily on exposure to air, with accompanying

liberation of hydrogen peroxide and formation of p-cymene.
Beckmann's chromic acid solution reacts upon 7-terpinene only slowly,
thus differentiating it from its a- isomer.
1
Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1930), 42.
2
Ber. 60 (1927), 477; 63 (1930), 1714.
3
Nilov, Bull. App. Bot. Genetic Plant Breeding, U.S.8.R., Sor. II, No. 13 (1936), 5. Chem.
Abstracts 31 (1937), 3102.
4
Huzita, J. Chem. Soc. Japan 61 (1940), 729. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 6753.
6
Briggs and Sutherland, J. Organic Chem. 7 (1942), 397.
6
Ber. 60 (1927), 477; 63 (1930), 1719.
7
Liebigs Ann. 362 (1908), 297.
*J. Organic Chem. 7 (1942), 397.
9
Ber. 63 (1930), 1714.
a-Phellandrene
CioHie Mol. Weight 136.23
CH3
C
HC
/ \CH
HC CH2
\ CH/
H3C CH 3
Occurrence. d-a-Phellandrene occurs in oil of
cinnamon, gingergrass,
Manila elemi, bitter fennel, Schinus molU, Spanish dill herb (wild growing),
etc.
Its optical enantiomorph l-a-phellandrene has been found in oil of Eucalyp-
tus dives, E. phellandra, star anise, pimento, bay, pepper, etc.
Isolation. A fraction containing principally a-phellandrene may be isolated from

essential oils for example, from Eucalyptus dives oil by fractional distillation in
42 HYDROCARBONS
vacuo. The most often contaminated with closely related
fractions so obtained are
isomers whose removal is not readily effected by distillation. Thus it seems unlikely
that absolutely pure a-phellandrene has so far been isolated from essential oils. A
crystalline derivative from which this terpene may be regenerated unchanged is as
yet unknown. Moreover, the nitrosites, ordinarily used in the past to characterize
a-phellandrene, have been shown to have dubious value as criteria of purity.
Identification. Wallach and-Gildemeister developed a rapid test for determining
1
the presence of phellandrene:

Dissolve 5 cc. of the oil or of the fraction in question in 10 cc. of petroleum ether.
At the same time, prepare a solution of 5 g. of sodium nitrite in 8 cc. of water. Care-
fully layer the second solution beneath the first one in a test tube, and add gradually
with shaking the quantity (5 cc.) of glacial acetic acid necessary for the development
of nitrous acid. Under suction, filter off the precipitated voluminous crystalline mass
consisting of a mixture of both a- and /3-nitrosites, wash first with water, then with
methyl alcohol, and finally purify by repeatedly dissolving in chloroform and pre-
cipitating with methyl alcohol. However, by this method the most soluble of the
nitrosites is lost.
Modified methods for detecting the presence of phellandrene, by the nitrosite

formation, have also been offered by Baker and Smith, Smith, Hurst and Read, and
2 3
the U.S. P. XIII (p. 217). All of these tests, however, arc concerned merely with the
demonstration of the presence or absence of nitrosite crystals, not with the separation
and characterization of the a- and f3- forms of the nitrosite.
Wallach 4 himself suggested a method of differential separation of these isomers
by means of acetone and water. Smith, Carter and Read also developed a technique
5
of distinguishing these a- and /^-nitrosites by taking advantage of their marked differ-

ence in solubility in carbon bisulfide. It is, however, only recently that the proper
procedure for isolation of the untransformed a- and /3- forms has been published by
Berry, Macbeth and Swanson.
6
This method is based upon the fact that the (3- form
is thermo-sensitive.
The a- and /3-nitrosites of a-phellandrene were early described by Schreiner, 7 and
Wallach. 8 Read 9 and collaborators studied their preparation and mutarotatory clmr-
10
acteristics in some remained, however, for Berry et al. to show that the
detail. It
|3- compound is sufficiently labile to undergo transmutation into the a- compound,
under conditions ordinarily used for purification in the past. From these investiga-
tions, it appears that the properties of the nitrosites of d- and /-a-phellandrene, isolated
under conditions of maximum stability and purity, are:
d-a l-a
() 08) (a) (P')
m. 119 ">
100 10
120M21 9
96 10
-13348' 10
+211 10
+ 142 36' 8 9 -
-260 6' 10
inCHCl 3 (c= 1.265) (c=1.15) (c=1.25)* (c

= 1.25)
[a^ for d- and l-a-Phellandrene-a-nitrosites

in Different Solvents
10 9 - 10-
-d-a .
l-a
Chloroform -133 48' (c = 1.265) +142 36' (c = 1.25) +141 36' (c = 1.264)
Acetone -168 24' (c = 1.253) +165 54' (c = 1.25) +175 36' (c - 1.247)
Benzene -217 (c
= 1.255) +234 24' (c = 1.25) +240 48' (c = 1.171)
*
Wallach reported [a]$ + 142 36' (c
= 12.2, chloroform).
CYCLIC TERPENES 43
10
Transmutation of d-a-Phellandrene-ft-nitrosite into -a-nitrosite
m. 100 m. 118
a ]20 _j_ 200 0' Refluxed 5 min. - 132 30'
[
a
(in chloro- j n acetone (in chloro-
form) form)
Read and Storey n(1930) reported the melting point of a-nitrosite of ^-a-phellan-
drene as 113. Carter 12 (1926) writes "the a- and /3-nitrosite of d/-a-phellandrene have
melting points almost identical with those of the respective nitrosites derived from
the optically active forms of a-phellandrene." One may thus conclude that ~113
and ^105 are the melting points to be assigned to these derivatives. It should not
be overlooked, however, that these findings precede the observation of Berry and co-
workers 13 (1939) regarding the lability of the fi- form.
Unlike terpinene nitrosite, the phellandrene nitrosites cannot be converted, with
bases, to nitrolamines. When treated with sodium alcoholate, a-phellandrene nitrosite
yields nitro-a-phellandrene which, by reduction with zinc and glacial acetic acid,
gives carvotanacetone and dihydrocarvylamine. Wallach and Lauffer
u showed that
both nitrosites are bi molecular.
A new method for identifying o*-phellandrene by means of its maleic anhydride
developed in the last few years. Diels and Alder first prepared this
1B
adduct has been
addition compound (m. 126-127) from the active isomers. Birch 16 utilized this
reaction to develop a neat method for the determination of relative amounts of d-
and /- isomers as well as to establish the presence of the racemic form by means of
mixed melting points of the adduct.
d
/ ,
l , d
%d 20 40 50 60 80 100
% / 100 80 60 50 40 20
m. 127 113 100 93 100 113 11-7
Kaufman, Baltes and Josephs, 17 and Goodway and West 18 describe the determina-
tion of the "diene number" for the phellandrenes, which may be a most useful index
of purity, as it has been found that this figure and the optical rotation are linear
variants. 19
Goodway and West 20
also determined the proper conditions under which only the
a-phellandrenes would react with maleic anhydride while the/3- compound would not;
they were thus able to prepare separative derivatives for this terpene. These authors
recommend :
Reflux 10 g. of /-a-phellandrene with 5 g. of maleic anhydride in 20 cc. of ether for

30 min. Recrystallize the adduct from methyl alcohol, m. 126, [a]f^ 8 54' in
CHC1 3 (c
= 12.59).
The d-a- compound is prepared in the same way, in. 126, [a]?? +9 24' in CHCls
(c
= 8.655).
The racemic mixture melts at 91-94.
A
characteristic gold complex m. 158-163 has been prepared by Nakatsuchi 21
from the sulfur derivative of a-phellandrene.

developed an empirical equation in terms of specific constants for mix-
22
Fawsitt
tures of cineole, pinene, and /-a-phellandrene that may be useful in analyzing mixtures
of these components where they are known to occur as impurities in a solution with
^-a-phellandrene .
Where /3-phellandrene may be a contaminant, and for purposes of removing this

44 HYDROCARBONS
isomer from a phellandrene system, West 23 recommends a method for preparation of
the nitrosochloride wherein the a-phellandrene does not form; the conditions are:
Dissolve the mixture in methyl alcohol and ethyl nitrite, cool to 5 C., add drop-
wise, over a period of 40 min., a well-cooled mixture of 5N HC1 in methyl alcohol. The
nitrosochloride of /3-phellandrene forms under these conditions and may be removed.
A compound of the formula C2oH2oO, m. 139-140, unique to a-phellandrene, has
been prepared by Salfeld 24 who condensed /3-naphthol with this terpene. This con-
densate yields a characteristic p-nitrobenzoate m. 164- 165.
Properties. a-Phellandrene is a colorless mobile oil possessing a somewhat

peculiar, but not unpleasant, odor.
As pointed
out, a-phellandrene has been observed in the dextro- and laevo-
rotatory, and also in the optically inactive forms. Gildcmeister and Hoff-
mann 25
recorded the following properties for- l-a- and d-a-phellandrene:
l-a-Phellandrene (from oil of Eucalyptus amygdalina and E. dives)
b 754 173-175 [a]f? -112 46'
b 22 67-68 WD -140 25' 26
b5 50-52 njg 1.4725
df 0.8425 nf? 1.4769
dig 0.8480
These characteristics were, in a large measure, confirmed in the work of

27
Smith, Hurst and Read on a very carefully purified /-a-phellandrene ob-
tained from Eucalyptus dives oil.
A sample of this type of oil \vas exhaustively fractionated by Ilancox and
Jones 28 to obtain an optically pure product for which they report:
d 20 0.8324 no 1.4724
[]f? -177 24' Dicne No. found 186.3

Diene No. calc. 186.6
d-a-Phcllandrene (from oil of gingergrass and elemi) as reported by Gilde-

meister and Hoffmann does not seem to have been obtained in as high a state
of purity as /-a-phellandrene.
b 754 175-176 dio 0.844

29
bn 61 d\l 0.8565, 0.847
5 /29
b4 44-45 [a]J) +115
n{? 1.4732
d/-a-Phellandrene is described by Wallach, 30 and by Read and Storey

31
as
follows:
b. 175M76 30
d 22 0.841 30
2
bis.6 63-65 31
n? 1.4760 30
5 31
n{?' 1.4772
CYCLIC TERPENES 45
The molecular refraction of a-phellandrene shows

exaltation (observed little
45.61, calculated 45.24), which quality tends to confirm the accepted constitu-
tion of this terpene.
Phellandrene is a rather unstable compound, except when stored under
conditions that exclude air and light. It polymerizes and resinifies readily,
especially when heated to its boiling point at atmospheric pressure. On ex-
posure to air its rotatory power diminishes rapidly. With acids, phellandrene
is converted into optically inactive isomers; with hydrogen halides into di-
pentene; with alcoholic sulfuric acid into terpinene.

Investigating the terpenes contained in oil of Eucalyptus cneorifolia,
32
Berry observed that on treatment with bromine a-phellandrene formed a
heavily brominated mixture of unknown
composition, but containing con-
siderably more bromine than was required to form the dibromide. Simul-
taneously cymene was formed, together with large amounts of hydrogen
bromide, the latter accounting for about 25 per cent of the bromine used.
Use. a-Phellandrene is used in scents which serve to overcome objection-
able odors in technical products. It is also employed for the compounding
of artificial essential oils or oil imitations.
1
Liebigs Ann. 246
(1888), 282.
2
"A Research on the Eucalypts," 2<1 Kd., Sydney (1920), 413.
3
J. Chem. Soc. 123 (1923), 1657.
4
Liebigs Ann. 336 (1904), 13.
6
J. Chem. Soc. 126 (1924), 930.
Ibid. (1939), 466, 1418.
7
Pharm. Arch. 4 (1901), 90. Ber. Schimmel <fc Co., April (1901), 66.
8
Liebigs Ann. 336 (1904), 9.
9
/. Chem. Soc. 123 (1923), 1657 (Smith, Hurst and Read). Ibid. 126 (1924), 930 (Smith,
Carter and Read).
10
J. Chem. Soc. (1939), 466, 1418 (Berry, Macbeth and Swanson).
11
/. Chem. Soc. (1930), 2781.
12
Dissertation St. Andrews (1926).
13
Chem.
J. Soc. (1939), 466, 1418.
"Liebigs Ann. 287 (1895), 384; 313 (1900), 345.
Liebigs Ann. 460 (1928), 98.
16
16
/. Proc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales 71 (1937), 54; 71 (1938), 261.
17
Ber. 70 (1937), 908.
18
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 67 (1938), 37T.
19
Hancox and Jones, Univ. Queensland Papers, Dept. Chem. 1, No. 14 (1939). Proc. Roy.
Soc. Queensland 60 (1938), 14.
20
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 66 (1937), 472T.
21
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. Japan 38 (1935), Suppl. bind. 617. Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 1372.
22
J. Chem. Soc. 116 (1919), 790.
23
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 68 (1939), 122T.
24
Ber. 73 (1940), 382.
26
"Die A" therischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 338.
26
Ber. Schimmel &
Co. (1930), 165.
27
J. Chem. Soc. 123 (1923), 1657.
28
Univ. Queensland Papers, Dept. Chem. 1, No. 14 (1939). Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland
60 (1939), 14.
29
30
Liebigs Ann. 369 (1908), 283.
3l
J. Chem. Soc. (1930), 2781.
32
Australian Chem. Inst. J. and Proc. 14 (1947), 373.
46 HYDROCARBONS
p-Pheilandrene
Ci H 16 MoL Weight 136.23
1 (7),2-p-Menthadiene. l-Methylene-4-isopropyl-2-cyclohexene
CH9
C
H2 C CH
H2 C CH
\CH/
CH
HC
/ \
3 CHa
Occurrence.Like a-phellandrene, /3-phellandrene occurs in dextro- and
laevorotatory form: eh3-phellandrene in oil of star anise, water fennel, an-
gelica, African ginger, etc.; /-/3-phellandrene in Japanese pepper oil, in the
turpentine oil of Pinus contorta, Canada balsam, etc.
0-Phellandrene of unknown rotation has been observed in oil of lemon,

Seychelles cinnamon, Schinus molle L., Eucalyptus amygdalina, and Italian
seafennel; it may occur also in coriander and cumin oil, etc.

Identification. /3-Phellandrene may be characterized by the preparation of various
derivatives:
(1) The nitrosites occur in two (a- and (3-) crystalline forms and may be prepared
according to the method described under a-phellandrene. Investigating the nitrosite
reaction of /3-phellandrene, Gaporienkov l obtained the best yields in the
cold, with
petroleum ether and ether (1 1) as +
solvent, and without an excess of glacial acetic
acid. Thus, 2.0 g. of /3-phellandrene dissolved in 4.0 cc. of the
petroleum ether-ether
mixture, and treated with 2.0 g. of sodium nitrite in 4.0 cc. of water and 1.65 cc. of
glacial acetic acid, after cooling to 10, yielded 0.95 g. of nitrosite.
5
/3-Phellandrene-a-nitrosite m. 102, [ajjf- -159 18' (in chloroform solution).
j3-Phellandrene-j8-nitrosite m. 97-98, optically almost inactive.
Berry, Macbeth and Swanson 2 reported that, unlike the mutarotation of a-phellan-
drene nitrosite, that of d-/?-phellandrene-a-nitrosite is not wide. Similar observations
were made by Smith and West 3 who reported for /-0-phellandrene-nitrosite (3.85% sol.
in CHC1 3 ) an original rotation of -f 157 54'; after one day -f 110; after three days
+83; and after four days +60.
When treating either the a- or j3-nitrosite of /3-phellandrene with sodium ethylate
at 30-40, Wallach 4
obtained nitro-0-phellandrene. This on reduction with zinc
dust in glacial acetic acid solution yielded the nitro compound of
dihydrocumaldehyde
and dihydrocuminylamine, whereas reduction with sodium and alcohol gave tetra-
hydrocuminylamine and cuminylamine.
CYCLIC TERPENES 47
According to Francesconi and Sernagiotto, /3-phellandrene, on treatment with

6
(2)
ethyl nitrite in alcoholic solution and in presence of alcoholic hydrochloride, gives a
nitrosochloride, the yield percentage of which is inverse to the rotatory power of the
terpene. By fractional crystallization the nitrosochloride, CKD 206 0', can be sepa-
rated into two isomers :
a-nitrosochloride m. 101-102, a D -175 0';
^-nitrosochloride m. 100, a D -285 0'.
The discovery of the nitrosochloride has provided a valuable method for distinguish-
ing between a- and 0-phellandrene, the former yielding a liquid nitrosochioride; the
latter, crystalline compounds as described above. West was able to use this deriva-
6
tive to differentiate between the a- and /3- forms. This author reported that /3-phellan-
drene, methyl alcohol, and ethyl nitrite mixed and cooled below 5 and a 5 normal
solution of hydrochloric acid in methyl alcohol, added dropwise with constant stirring,
yielded a crystalline nitrosochloride, whereas no crystalline material could be obtained
under the same conditions from a-phellandrene.
(3) According to Waliach, /3-phellandrene on oxidation with a 1% potassium per-
7
manganate solution at yields a viscid glycol bio 150. When heated with dilute
sulfuric acid, the glycol gives dihydrocumin alcohol and tetrahydrocumaldehyde
(phellandral) This aldehyde may be identified by the preparation of its semicarbazone
.
m. 204-205.
According to Goodway and West, the Kaufman method may be employed to
8
(4)
characterize the phellandrenes which yield a particular diene value when heated in a
sealed tube with maleic anhydride dissolved in toluene, followed by addition of potas-
sium iodide and potassium iodate, and titration of the liberated iodine with sodium
thiosulfate.
(5) The active tetrabromides, according to Berry and Macbeth. 9
/-/3-Phellandrene yields d-tetrabromide (recrystallized from ethyl alcohol) :
m. 118-119, [a] +54 (in ethyl acetate)
d-/3-Phellandrene yields J-tetrabromide:
m. 118-119, [a] -53.
Properties. /3-Phellandrene is a liquid possessing a peculiar, but not dis-

agreeable, odor. Waliach 10 and Pesci n reported the following properties for
the d- modification:
b 766 171-172 " [a] D +14 45' to +18 32' 10
bn 57 10
WD +1738' n
10 10
d20 0.8520 nf? 1.4788
10 8 10
d 18 0.848 n{> 1.4759
dio 8558 u
Francesconi and Sernagiotto 12 expressed the opinion that pure /9-phellan-

drene has an optical rotation of about D +
65 0', the much lower values
usually reported being caused by admixture of cM-/?-phellandrene.
48 HYDROCARBONS
l3
Smith and West reported -/3-phellandrene derived from Canada balsam
oil as having the following properties:
b 768 178-179 WD -50 36'
b 24 78 ng> 1.480
d \l 0.8497
14
Berry, investigating the terpenes contained in the oil of Eucalyptus cneo-
rifolia, debrominated the tetrabromide of j8-phellandrene and prepared this
terpene in a state of purity higher than previously obtained:
b. 172-174
dS5 0.843
[a]f? -74 24'
n|? 1.4826
46.3 Obs.
Mol. refr. 45.24 Calc. This marked exalta-
tion was to be expected.
The nitrosochloride m. 109 exhibited mutarotation.

On under atmospheric pressure, the /3-phellandrene underwent
distillation
polymerization which was accompanied by inversion of the optical activity.

jS-Phellandrene is quite unstable; on prolonged boiling and even on distill-
ing at atmospheric pressure, it polymerizes to diphellandrene. On aerobic
oxidation in the presence of sunlight, /3-phellandrene gives 4-isopropyl-2-cyclo-
hexen-1-one. When
acted upon with hydrogen chloride in alcoholic solution,
15
0-phellandrene, according to Francesconi and Sernagiotto, is converted in-
to terpinene dihydrochloride.
Use. Not being easily available, /3-phellandrene is rarely used in the per-
fume and flavor industry.
1
Chem. U.S.S.R. 6 (1935), 1485. Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 3587.
J. Gen.
2
/. Chem. Soc. (1937), 1448.
3
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 66 (1937), 300.
'Liebigs Ann. 336 (1904), 44; 340 (1905), 1; 343 (1905), 39.
*Gazz. chim. ital. 46, I (1916), 119.
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 68 (1939), 122T.
'Liebigs Ann. 340 (1905), 12.
8
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 67 (1938), 38T.
9
Nature 166, No. 3954 (1945), 175.
10
Liebigs Ann. 340 (1905), 2; 336 (1904), 43.
11
Gazz. chim. 16 (1886), 225.
ital.
"Ibid. [2], 44 (1914), 456; 46, I (1916), 119.

13
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 66 (1937), SOOT.
14
"Gazz. chim. ital. 44, II (1914), 456; 46, I (1916), 119.
CYCLIC TERPENES 49
P. A. Berry and A. K. Macbeth, "/3-Phellandrene Tetrabromide," J. Chem. Soc.

(1947), 1039.
(b) BICYCLIC TERPENES.
Introduction. This group of hydrocarbons comprises some of the most im-

portant terpenes for example, a- and /3-pinene. The bicyclic monoterpenes
have a tendency to undergo molecular rearrangement; shifting of the double
bonds may take place; oxidation, dehydrogcnation, and hydrogenation occur
quite readily; treatment with acid may open the rings, a- and /3-Pinene may
thus pass, by ring fission, into dipentene and, by molecular rearrangement,
into borneol.
A 3-Carene
C,oH
10*116 Mol. Weight 136.23
Isodiprene
CH a
H CH*
CHa
C
H CHa
Occurrence. The investigations of Simonsen and collaborators have shown

l
that Indian turpentine (Pinus longifolia Roxb.) does not contain d-sylves-
oil
3
trene, as formerly believed, but a bicyclic hydrocarbon, d-A -carene, which,
when treated with hydrogen chloride, yields a mixture of d-sylvestrene dihy-
drochloride and dipentene dihydrochloride. Later Joffre 2 contributed fur-
3
ther to this information by the report that A -carene not only constitutes 38
per cent of Indian oil of turpentine from Pinus longifolia but that it is a mix-
ture of a- and ft- isomers with the following formulas:
CHa
a-A 3 -Carcnc
(See "Sylvestrene")
50 HYDROCARBONS
d-A 3 -Carene has been identified in many volatile oils for instance, in
Swedish and Finnish turpentine oils, in German pine needle oils such as Pinus
pumilio, P. sylvestris, etc.
l-A?-Carene has been identified in galanga root oil (Kaempferia galanga),
in oil of Pinus sylvestris, and other pinus oils.
The 5,6-epoxide of the I- isomer has been recognized in oil from Zieria
smithii.*

Identification. A 3-Carene may
be identified by the following means :
(1) The preparation of the sparingly soluble carene nitrosate m. 147.5 (with de-
composition). This compound readily forms and separates even if A -carene is present
3
only in small quantities.

(2) Its nitrosochloride m. 101-102 (with decomposition). Lagache 4 suggested
that the nitrosochloride be prepared by adding, drop by drop, 4 to 5 cc. of hydro-
chloric acid to a cooled (+5) mixture of 5 5 cc. of acetic acid, 5 cc. of
cc. of carene,
95% alcohol, and 10 cc. of ethylnitrite. The very instable nitrosochloride will separate
after 1 to 2 hr. The nitrosochloride can be further characterized by the preparation
of the nitrolmethylamine in. 180, the nitrolethylamine m. 155, and the nitrolaniline
m. 143-144. When heated on the steam bath with sodium carbonate and 95%
alcohol, the nitrosochloride is converted into nitrosocarene m. 89-90.
(3) A characteristic adduct has been prepared by Diels, Koch and Frost, with
6
maleic anhydride in the ratio of 1:1 of the hydrocarbon and acid anhydride. The
boiling point recorded by these authors at 10 mm. is 195 and the derived dicarboxylic
acid has a melting point of 184. Hultzsch 6 reported a maleic anhydride addition
product of m. 183 and formula Ci4ll2o04. Good way and West point out, however,
7
that addition products at variance with these findings may be due to differences in
the isomeric nature of the products investigated by different workers.
Properties. A 3 -Carene is a colorless oil possessing a peculiar, sweet odor.

Simonsen,
8
Lagache,
9
Dupont,
10
and Panicker, Rao and Simonsen n reported
these characteristic properties:
d- Isomer I- Isomer
10
b. 170
8
b 70 5 168-169
b 685 166-167
8
b 20 o 123-124
10
bio 70
8
dig 0.8586 0.8606
9
d25 0.8635
10
di 6 0.8668
OD +7 41"
W578 + 17 6"
[]g -5 43'
8 11
nf? 1.469 1.4684
9
1.4678
CYCLIC TERPENES 51
A 3 -Carene oxidizes with remarkable ease and rapidly on ex-

resinifies quite
12
posure to air. Oxidation may be inhibited, at least for a time, by the addi-
tion of a trace of pyrogallol.
3
According to Simonscn and Ran, oxidation of A -carene with potassium
13
permanganate in acetone solution or with Beckmann's chromic acid mixture

yields a complex mixture of acids, among them cis- and trans- caronic acids
m. 174-175 (with decomposition) and 213, respectively, and a dibasic
acid Csi1i2^4t viz., cis- homocaronic acid m. 136-137.
When treated with anhydrous hydrogen chloride, A 3 -carene yields sylves-
trene dihydrochloride, but when treated with aqueous hydrochloric acid,
A 3 -carcne gives dipcntcne dihydrochloride.
Use. Due to the difficulty of preparing quantities of A 3 -carenc, this ter-
pene, as such, has not found any noteworthy use.

1
J. Chcm. Soc. 117 (1920), 570; 121 (1922), 2292; 123 (1923), 549; 127 (1925), 2494; (1928),
359; (1929), 305.
2
Bull, itist. pin |2], 13 (1931), 79.
Penfold, Hamage and Simonscn, Chcm. Soc. (1939), 1490.
3
/.
4
Bull. inst. pin (1927), 233, 255.
*Btr. 71B (1938), 1103.
Ber. 72B (1939), 1173.
7
J. Chcm. Soc. (1940), 702.
6
Ibid. 117 (1920), 570; 127 (1925), 2494.
9
Bull. inst. pin (1927), 233.
10
Ann. chim. [10], 1 (1924), 2(i8.
11
,/.Indian Inst. Sci. [A|, 9 (1920), 137. Cfiem. Zrntr. I (1927), 053.
12
Sec also Owen and Simonscn, ./. Chcm. Soc. (1931), 3001.
13
/. Chem. Soc. 123 (1923), 549. Sec also ( ubson and Simonscn, ,/. Chem. Soc. (1929), 305,
909.
A 4 -Carene
( A 2 -C 'arenc)
OioHie Mol. Weight 136.23
Pinoncne
CHa
c
C
/ \CH
QH
\o / \
Vi
H
Occurrence. d-A*-Carene occurs in many volatile oils, for example, in

Swedish and Finnish turpentine oil, also in German pine needle oil (Pinus
sylvcstris L.). Simonsen found that the oil distilled from the grass Andro-
l
4
pogon iwarancusa contains about 24 per cent A -carene. This hydrocarbon
52 HYDROCARBONS
2
has also been reported by Rao, Shintre and Simonsen in the ethereal oil
from the fruit of Piper cubeba L.

4
Neither the laevo-rotatory nor the optically inactive A -carene has been
detected in plant oils. On the other hand, both have been synthetically de-
4
rived and characterized. The compound suggested as -A -carene was ob-
by Menon and Simonsen in the distillation of /-caryl methyl xan-
3
tained
4
thogenate. This work was questioned by Ruzicka and needs further study.
The dl- isomer was prepared by the Wolff-Kishner reduction of piperitenone
5
hydrazone and described by Naves and Papazian.
Identification. (1) When

oxidized with potassium permanganate in acetone solu-
tion, A -carene, according to Simonsen, gives in good yield a liquid ketonic acid
4 6
CioHieOa, viz., d-l 1 -dimethyl-2-7-ketobutylcyclopropane-3-carboxylic acid. This acid

,
can be characterized by the preparation of its oxhne, m. 124-125, and its semi-
carbazone m. 119-120.
(2) Oxidation with Beckmann's chromic acid mixture, according to Gibson and
Simonsen, yields mainly /-favms-caronic acid m. 202-203.

7
(3) By the action of hydrogen chloride in glacial acetic acid, A -carene is converted
4
into dipentene dihydrochloride m. 48-50, and sylvestrene dihydrochloride m. 72,

the cyclopropane ring undergoing fission.
If present only in small quantities, A -carene
4
is somewhat difficult to identify, as it
yields no crystalline derivative.
4
Properties. e?-A -Carene is a colorless mobile oil possessing a rather pleas-
8
ant odor suggestive of p-cymene. Simonsen reported these properties:
b 7 )7
( 1()5.5-167 [a]'n +62 12'
1
dsS 0.8552 n ?? 1.474
A 4 -Carene shows a marked exaltation (+0.5) due to the conjugation of

the ethylenic linkage with the cyclopropane ring.
4
By oxygen or on exposure to air, A -carene is much more slowly oxidized
3
than A -carenc.
Use. Due to the difficulty of preparing quantities of A 4 -carene, this ter-
pene, as such, has not found any noteworthy use.
!/. Chem. Soc. 119 (1921), 1644; 121 (1922), 2292. /. Soc. Chcm. hid. 42, (1923), 29A.
2
J. Soc. Chem. hid. 47 (1928), 93T. Chem. Zentr. I (1928), 2414.
3
/. Indian hist. Set. [A], 10 (1927), 2, 4. Chem. Zentr. II (1927), 1473.
4
Helv. Chim. Ada 15 (1932), 957.
6
Ibid. 26 (1942), 984. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 1709.
6
/. Chem. Soc. 119 (1921), 1644; 121 (1922), 2292. /. Soc. Chem. Ind. 42 (1923), 29A.
1
J. Chem. Soc. (1929), 909.
8
Ibid. 121 (1922), 2292.
CYCLIC TERPENES 53
"Thujane
C 10 H 18 Mol. Weight 138.24
Sabinane
HaC CH3
HC
CH
CH 3
Years ago, Seyler l isolated from sage oil a terpene b. 142- 145 which he
named "salvene"; he assigned to it the formula now known to be that of thu-
jane. The actual constitution of Seyler's "salvene" has not been elucidated.
d-Thujane (tanacetanc or dihydrosabinene) was first prepared syntheti-
cally by Tschugaev and Fomin.
2
More recently Guha and co-workers 3
have effected a total synthesis of this terpene.
Occurrence, In oil of sage (?).

Identification. The identification of thujane is difficult as this hydrocarbon yields
no characteristic crystalline derivatives from which it may be regenerated.
Properties. ^-Thujane is a colorless, mobile oil possessing a faint odor.

Tschugaev and Fomin reported these properties for d-thujane prepared
4
from d-a-thujene and c?-/3-thujene by catalytic hydrogenation:
Derived from d-a-Thujene Derived from d-0-Thujene

b 75 8 157 b 759 157
8
df 0.8139 di 0.8191
dl 0.8161 [a] D +34 43'
[a] D +02 2' nl? 1.44102

nb 1 .43759
In other literature on this compound, similar discrepancies regarding opti-

cal rotation appear, depending on the source of the production. Products
obtained by the reduction of sabinene seem to be particularly erratic. These
have been critically investigated by Richter, Wolff and Presting, 6 who recom-
mend care in drawing conclusions as to the nature of the compound obtained
54 HYDROCARBONS
6
by catalytic reduction. Tschugaev and Fomin and the above-mentioned
authors observed for the dihydrosabinenes:
100
b. 157-158 6
+ 1240 /5
bis 50.4-50.7 5
Mb + 1834' 6
8 5 5
dl 0.8150 1.4409
7 6 6
d} 0.8190 nfJ 1.44393
Thujanes produced from /3-thujone by Kishner, Richter, Wolff and Prest-

7
ing, and Guha and Nath

8 9
yielded these characteristics:
b. 155-156 9
WD +48 0'
8
8
157.2-157.7 -H23' 7
157 7
MS +49 24' 9
8 9
is 46.2-46.8 ng> 1.4435
7 7
0.8171 1.440
9 8
0.8120 1.442
5 8
dl 0.820
The completely synthetic preparation of Guha and Nath had these prop-
erties:
b. 156-157 Hi? +8 29'
df 0.8140 nf? 1.4410
Use. Thujane is not used in our industries.

1
Ber. 35 (1902), 550.
2
CompL rend. 151 (1910), 1058. See also Richter, Wolff and Frosting, Ber. 64 (1931), 87G.
3
Ber. 70B (1937), 931, 2112.
4
Compt. rend. 161 (1910), 1060.
6
Ber. 64 (1931), 876.
6
Compt. rend. 161 (1910), 1061.
7
/. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 43 (1911), 586; 44 (1912), 1760.
8
Ber. 64 (1931), 876.
9
Ber. 70 (1937), 935.
a-Pinene
CHfo
HC CH
HsC-C-CH;
C
H
This parent hydrocarbon occupies a focal position among the terpenes and
has been the subject of many investigations, the discussion of which would
CYCLIC TERPENES 55
lead too far for our purpose. a-Pinene is also of great commercial interest
as it forms the starting material for synthetic camphor, borneol, terpineol,
etc. However, we shall confine ourselves, in these pages, to only the most
important reactions connected with the isolation and identification of this
hydrocarbon. The reader interested in further details is referred to Simon-
sen's treatise: "The Terpcnes," Vol. II (1932), p. 88.
Occurrence. Several stereoisomeric forms of this terpene are found in
natural products. a-Pinene
present in many oils distilled
is from leaves,
barks, and woods. It forms the principal constituent of the turpentine oils
distilled from the olcoresin of several genera and species belonging to the
family Pinaccac.
d-a-Pinenc. occurs in Greek turpentine oil (Pinus halcpcnsis Mill.) (about
95 per cent), in Russian turpentine oil (Pinus sylvestris) (about 81 per cent),
in hinoki wood oil (about 70 per cent), in the oil distilled from the wood of
Chamaccyparis lawsoniana Parl. (about GO per cent); smaller quantities are

found in American turpentine oil, and in numerous other essential oils.
l-a-Pincne occurs in Spanish turpentine oil (Pinus laricio monspeliensis
Hort.) (about 90 per cent), in Austrian turpentine oil (Pinus laricio var.
austriaca Endl.) (about 90 per cent), in French and American turpentine oil,
in Pinus pumilio oil, in the leaf oil from A bics alba, and in many other essen-
tial oils.
dl-a-Pincne has been found in oil of lemon, olibanum, coriander seed, cu-
min seed, American peppermint, etc.
a- and
/3-Pinene probably occur as mixtures in many pinene-containing
oils, the rotatory power of the fractions most likely being determined by the
preponderance of the d- or /- modification. This feature is important in the

isolation of the optically active forms from essential oils or from their fractions.
Isolation. a-Pinene can be isolated from essential oils by fractional distillation and
subsequent further purification.
d-a-Pincne may be obtained, for example, from Greek turpentine oil by first warming
the oil with solid potassium hydroxide, steam distilling, and then refractionating the
terpene over metallic sodium.
/-a-Pinene may be obtained from French turpentine oil by treating the oil with
alkali carbonate, and then further purifying it by fractional distillation, collecting the
main fraction that distills near 156 at 760 mm.
a-Pinene is one of the few terpenes which can be obtained in relatively, but not
optically, pure form. To obtain the inactive a-pinene resort should first be made to
the nitrosochloride derivative (cf. Tilden )- This dl- product can be decomposed,
1
2
according to Wallach, by boiling with aniline in alcoholic solution, whereby the ter-
pene is regenerated. For this purpose, reflux 10 g. of pinene nitrosochloride, 30 cc. of
aniline, and 80 cc. of alcohol and steam distill after the violent reaction has subsided.
Free the cold distillate from aniline by repeated extraction with an excess of aqueous
acetic acid. The a-pinene thus obtained will always be optically inactive.
Optically inactive a-pinene can also he prepared by decomposition of the methyl-
pinocamphylxanthate m. 60.5-61, through heating to 170-190, according to
3
Tschugaev.
56 HYDROCARBONS
Methods for the preparation of the active nitrosochlorides of this terpene and sub-
sequent isolation of the active forms of the hydrocarbon have been successfully worked
out. As several details influence the success and yield of the reaction, the final pro-
cedure adapted by Thurber and Thielke 4
is described below :
"To 40 cc. of Z-a-pinene, 40

methyl alcohol (containing 10 per cent water
cc. of
by volume) and 40 cc. ethyl nitrite were added. The mixture was placed in a wide-
mouthed bottle closed with a stopper bearing thermometer and mechanical stirrer,
and was kept at a temperature of 20 during the addition of the theoretical
amount of hydrochloric acid. The hydrochloric acid solution was prepared by pass-
ing hydrogen chloride gas into 90 per cent methyl alcohol until an approximately
5N solution was obtained. It was found to be advisable to introduce the cold
alcohol-acid solution below the surface of the liquid and to cool the addition tube
through which the acid flowed in order to prevent local superheating. A period of
approximately two and one-half hours was required for the addition. After all of
the acid had been added the reaction mixture was allowed to stand for a short time
and was then filtered to remove the inactive derivative which had precipitated.
The filtrate was immediately cooled to 20 and another 200 cc. of cold 90 per cent
methyl alcohol added to it. The mixture was then allowed to stand for twenty-four
hours, the temperature being maintained at 20, to insure complete precipitation
of the active nitrosochloride. Some crystals usually appeared almost immediately
after the addition of the cold 90 per cent alcohol. The crystals were removed by
filtration and purified by recrystallization from 1:2 mixture of chloroform and
methyl alcohol."
The dextro compound was obtained by a similar type of reaction. These authors
obtained the following constants on the nitrosochlorides of the a-pinenes:
dl- d- l-
m. 115 89.5 90
jf? (in benzene) +390 12' -366 48'
Lynn had earlier investigated these products and reported the d- and I- modifica-
5
tions with m. 81-81.5 and ao 322 0' (in chloroform solution). These variations
may be explained if an analogy is drawn from the findings of Berry, Macbeth and
Swanson relative to the effect of heat and solvent on the a- and (3- forms of the
nitrosochlorides of a-phellandrene. In this latter case, solution in benzene yields a
much higher optical rotation than solution in chloroform. Furthermore, certain
methods of purification used serve to separate an unstable and stable form. Other
peculiarities in connection with a-pinene nitrosochloride preparations have been
observed by many authors besides those cited above, among them Kremers, 7 Tilden, 8
Schimmel & Gildemeister and Kohler, 10 and Fuzita. 11 Much study is still neces-
Co.,
9
sary to interpret the significance of the data on these compounds and their derivatives,
in the opinion of Earl and Hazelwood, 12 Leach, 13 Wallach, 14 Lynn, 15 Briggs and Suther-
16
land, and Earl and Kenner.
17
The method of Tilden 18 or Wallach 19 serves for regenerating the d- and Z-a-pinene
from these optically active nitrosochlorides.
In order to isolate the optically active modifications of a-pinene, it is advisable to
start with an a-pinene fraction possessing a high optical rotation, taking into considera-
tion, however, the possibility that the high rotation may be caused by the presence of
camphene. The portions boiling below 160 at 760 mm. are purified by fractional
distillation over metallic sodium until the boiling point and the other properties of
the hydrocarbons thus obtained coincide with those of optically inactive a-pinene.
CYCLIC TERPENES 57
For the purification of this terpene from /3-pinene as a contaminant, the worker is
referred to the data of Austerweil 20

who recommends the use of differential solubility
in alcohol, in addition to rectification as a means of separating the /3-isomer.
Solubility in 100 Volumes Ethyl Alcohol
% Ale.
Concen tration \'olu Dies Sol u ble
0- a-
95 35.8 30.4
90 13.0 9.75
85 8.25 5.1
80 6.0 2.3
70 1.6 0.2
60 0.5 trace
Identification. a-Pincne can be characterized by several methods:

(1) The
preparation of the optically inactive nitrosochloride.
Wallach 21 suggested the following method for preparing the optically inactive
nitrosochloride :
Cool a mixture of 50 g. each of turpentine oil (dextro- or laevorotatory, but not

with too high a rotation), 50 g. of glacial acetic acid and 50 g. of ethyl nitrite (or
preferably amyl nitrite) in a freezing mixture and gradually add 15 cc. of crude, 33%
hydrochloric acid. The nitrosochloride soon separates in crystalline form and may be
obtained in a fairly pure state by filtering it off with a suction pump and by washing
it thoroughly with alcohol. From the filtrate more nitrosochloride separates on
standing in the cold.
Tilden 22 also prepared this compound later and found a melting point of 115 for
an apparently stable form after a thorough washing with alcohol and recrystallization
from chloroform. This has been confirmed by subsequent investigators.
The ethyl nitrite necessary for this reaction is easily obtained by allowing a mixture
of 200 g. of concentrated sulfuric acid, 1.5 liters of water, and 100 g. of alcohol to flow
into a solution of 250 g. of sodium nitrite in 1 liter of water and 100 g. of alcohol. The
ethyl nitrite which forms and volatilizes at once during this reaction must be con-
densed in a well-cooled receiver. In order to obtain a good yield of nitrosochloride, it
is advisable to work with small quantities only. It will thus be possible to keep the
temperature low, a feature important for the success of the reaction. As a by-product,
large quantities of pinol CioIIieO are formed.
A better yield of nitrosochloride is obtained, according to Ahlstrom and Aschan, 23
if the mixture of turpentine oil, glacial acetic acid, and ethyl nitrite is saturated, at
very low temperature, with a current of dry hydrochloric acid.
Another method well suited for the preparation of terpene and sesquiterpene nitroso-
chlorides is that of Ehestiidt. 24 A quantity of oil of turpentine is diluted with an equal
volume of petroleum ether, glacial acetic acid, or ether. The nitrosyl chloride gases
are conducted into this solution, well cooled with a freezing mixture. Prepare them
by permitting a concentrated sodium nitrite solution to drop slowly into (32%) crude
hydrochloric acid. The quantity of hydrochloric acid should be 1^ times the theo-
retically necessary quantity. The hydrochloric acid must not flow into the sodium
nitrite solution as this will give a very low yield. After about one-third of the sodium
nitrite solution is consumed, the pinene nitrosochloride will separate in the form of
58 HYDROCARBONS
crystals,but toward the end of the reaction the mixture will consist of a mash. The
contributions by Thurber and Thielke 26 may also be helpful in this connection. (See
previous section.)
(2) A further confirmatory derivative is the chloride. The preparation of the d-, /-,
and dl- compounds with normal behavior has been reported by Thurber and Thielke. 26
They noted these properties :
m. C. [a]??
(corr.) (1% alcohol solution)
e//-a-pinene hydrochloride 132
d-a-pinene hydrochloride 132 +33 31'
/-a-pinene hydrochloride 132 -33 14'
27
(3) a-Pinene forms a crystalline adduct with maleic anhydride that Hultzsch
describes as m. 169.
(4) The
presence of a-pinene may be established by oxidation of the tcrpene with
potassium permanganate to pinonic acid.
For this purpose Thurber and Holl 28 recommend an economical and convenient
method :
"An emulsion 300 cc. of water was gradually added to 120

of 50 g. of pinene in
g. of potassium permanganate contained in a liter of water. The mixture was cooled

in an ice bath and stirred continuously during the addition. After completion of the
oxidation the manganese sludge was removed by filtration; the filtrate saturated
with carbon dioxide gas and distilled with steam to remove unoxidized products.
The liquid was evaporated in a current of carbon dioxide to a volume of 400 cc. and
then extracted with two 50 cc. portions of ether. The pinonic acid was set free
from the potassium salt by the addition of dilute sulfuric acid. After extraction
with ether and recrystallization from petroleum ether the acid melted at 68 C."
Oxidation of d- and /-a-pincne thus yields the optically active pinonic acids m. 67-
5
69, [a& +890' and [a]' -90 33' '(in chloroform solution), according to Barbier
and Grignard 2<J whereas the oxidation of (//-pinene, according to Dupont and Brus, 30
;
yields (//-pinonic acid in very good yield. The dl- acid m. 1 03-104 (Briggs and Suther-
land 31 m. 104-105, bs 155-ir>l) is the cis- acid, while the liquid acids that are always
obtained simultaneously arc a mixture of the cis- and trans- modifications, according
to Perkin and Simonsen. 32 Konippa and Beckmann 33 expressed the opinion that
pinonic acid is actually a-cainpholonic acid.
For the definite identification of the pinonic acid, it is advisable to prepare the
characteristic semicarbazone which was first described by Tiemann and Kerschbaum. 34
The d- and /-semicarbazone melts at 204, the (//-semicarbazone at 20G-207.
For the identification of a-pinene, it suffices to oxidize the terpene to pinonic acid
and to prepare the semicarbazone of the latter. But if optically active and inactive
a-pinene must be identified side by side, it will be necessary to fractionate the acids
in vacuo, bi2 168, to isolate them in pure form, and to characterize the isomers as
described above.
(5) For the identification of small quantities of a-pinene, Agnew and Croad
35
sug-
gested oxidizing it with mercuric acetate to sobrerol m. 131, and to 8-hydroxy-
carvotanacetone, which may in turn be characterized by the preparation of its semi-
carbazone m. 175.
Lead tetracetate on pinene also gives (//-sobrerol (pinol hydrate) m. 130-130.5,
according to Ward.
36
The active forms: m. 150, [a] D 150 0'.
CYCLIC TERPENES 59
Properties. a-Pinene is a colorless, mobile oil which, like most terpenes,

partly resinifies on exposure to air.
This hydrocarbon has a tendency to isomerize under the influence of heat,

acids, or catalysts. Certain data of Thurber and Johnson, 37 and Brus 38 in-
dicate that varied natural sources yield a-pinene fractions of varied physical
properties. These factors may in part account for the inability of investi-
gators to obtain concordant results in measurements made on preparations
of a-pinene. Nevertheless the following properties of a-pinene appear to
have been substantiated in recent investigations. The pinenes were ob-
tained by some cases,
fractionation over sodium in and by regeneration from
the nitrosoch lor ides in others, and from various sources (Thurber and Roll, 39
Schorger,
40 41
Thurber and Thielke, 42 Frankforter and Frary, 43 Conant and
'
44 45 46 47
Carlson, Brus, Darmois, Waterman, van't Spijker and van Westen,
Austerwcil,
48
and Ross and Somerville 49 ):
d I dl
39 40 44 4l 47
b. 156-156.5 - -
156-157 150.2
42 42 42
155-156 155-156 155-156
m. -57 45 48
-
-55 46 - 120.2 49
39 42 44 42 43
d 20 0.8584-0.8600 - -
0.8590-0.8598 -
42 47
d? ... ... 0.8582-0.8592 -
40
dis 0.8G31
[]?? -f518' 42
-5117' 42
42 44 42 42 47
nb 1 .4658-1 .4603 -
1 .4662-1 .4670 1 .4658-1 .4664 -
5 40
n{> 1.4684
Although higher optical rotations on pinenes from American sources rang-

ing up to +53 55' and 54 2' have been reported by Lynn, 50 Thurber
52
et al., 51 and Schorger, nevertheless there remains a question whether these
exalted values for [a]]) may not be due to solvent effects. It has been shown
53 54
in the work of Thurber and Thielke, and of Naves, that solutions of pi-
nene in certain solvents display higher rotations than the homogeneous com-
pound. This apparent exaltation is especially true of alcohols, the type of
solvent reported to have been used in several of the above determinations.
These optimum optical values appear to have been obtained from pinenes of
varied natural origin and by diverse methods of purification. Competent
workers abroad continue to record values near 48 0', the maximum figures
55
reported on several natural a-pinenes being of similar magnitude (Brus
for a-pinene from Greek turpentine oil +48 51', and Smith 56 for a-pinene
from Australian eucalyptus oil [a]J> 48 38').
Like other bicyclic terpenes, a-pinene shows a marked tendency toward
molecular rearrangement leading to substances with a different ring structure,
60 HYDROCARBONS
this may be caused by oxidation, hydrogenation, hydration, or by the action
of acids, catalysts, or heat, etc.These reactions have become of great tech-
nical importance in the synthesis of bomcol, camphor, and other products.
Interesting as they are, unfortunately they cannot be discussed in these re-

stricted pages. A number of literature references to them, however, have
been appended to this section.
Use. The principal use of a-pinene is manufacture of synthetic
in the
borneol, camphor, and terpineol. a-Pinene also serves as an important con-

stituent in many artificial (imitation) essential oils.
Fractions containing a- and /3-pinene are widely used as solvents, and as
odor adjuncts in many technical preparations bath salts, room sprays, dis-
infectants, insecticides, etc. Lately a- and /3-pinene are being used for the
synthesis of artificial white pine oil.
1
Chem. Soc. 28 (1875), 514; 85 (1904), 760.
J.
Liebigs Ami. 252 (1889), 132; 268 (1890), 343.
z
*J. Russ. Phys. Chcm. Soc. 39 (1907), 1330.

4
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 53 (1931), 1030.
6
41 (1919), 364.
Ibid.
6
J. Chem. Soc. (1939), 466, 1418.
7
Proc. Wis. Phann. Assocn. (1891), 39; (1892), 66, 72.
8
J. Chem. Soc. 85 (1904), 759.
9
Ber. Schimrnet <(: Co., April (1910), 164.
w Wallach
Festschrift (1909), 432.
u J. Chem. Soc. Japan 57 (1936), 578. Chcm. Abstracts 30 (1936), 7560.
/. Chem.. Soc. (1937), 374.
13
Ibid. 91 (1907), 1.
"Liebigs Ann. 245 (1888), 253; 252 (1889), 130, 132; 258 (1890), 343; 268 (1892), 216.
.7. Am. Chem. Soc. 41 (1919), 361.
15
16
J. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 402.
" Chem. Soc. (1927), 1269.
J.
18
Ibid. 85 (1904), 759.
^Liebigs Ann. 252 (1889), 132; 258 (1890), 343.
20
Chimie <fc i?idustrie, Spec. No. 603, Sept. (1926). Chem. Abstracts 21 (1927), 818.
21
IMigs Ann. 245 (1888), 251. Wallach and Otto, ibid. 253 (1889), 251.
22
/. Chem. Soc. 85 (1904), 761.
23
Ber. 39 (1906), 1445, footnote.
24
25
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1931), 1030.
2fi
Ibid. 1032.
27
Ber. 72B (1939), 1181.
28
Ind. Eng. Chem. 19 (1927), 739.
29
Bull. soc. chim. [4], 7 (1910), 551, 556.
Ann. chim. IX, 19 (1923), 186.
31
/. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 402.
32
J. Chem. Soc. 96 (1909), 1174.
33
Ber. 69 (1936), 2783.
34
Ber. 33 (1900), 2664. Cf. Gildcmeister and Hoffmann, "Die Xthcrischen Ole," 3d Ed.,
Vol. I, 352.
35
Analyst 37 (1912), 295.
36
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 60 (1938), 325. Cf. Armstrong and Pope, J. Chem. Soc. 69 (1891), 317.
37
Ibid. 52 (1930), 786.
38
Bull. inst. pin (1929), 271.
CYCLIC TERPENES 61
39
Ind. Eng. Chem. 19 (1927), 740.
"Ibid. 6 (1914), 631.
41
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 39 (1917), 1042.
uibid. 63 (1931), 1030.
"Ibid. 28 (1906), 1461.
"Ibid. 61 (1929), 3467.
46
w#. zrwtf. pin (1929), 276.
46
Cora?*, rend. 149 (1909), 732.
47
7fc?c. trav. chim. 48 (1929), 1195.
48
Chimie & Industrie, Spec. No. 603, Sept. (1926). C%em. Abstracts 21 (1927), 818.
49
/. Chem. Soc. (1926), 2777.
60
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 41 (1919), 361.
*IUd. 63 (1931), 1030. Ind. Eng. Chem. 19 (1927), 740.
62
Ind. Eng. Chem. 6 (1914), 631.
63
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1931), 1030.
64
Compt. rend. 213 (1941), 570.
Bw#. ins*, pin (1929), 276.
66
/. JVoc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales 32 (1898), 203.

Prilezhaev and Vershuk, 'The Composition of Turpentine Oil: Oxides of a- and
S-Pinene," Chem. Zentr. II (1929), 2556.
N. Prilezhaev and V. Vershuk, "The Oxide of a-Pinene in the Grignard Reaction,"
*
Georges Dupont and Jean Crouzet, "The Oxidation of Pinenes in Presence of Cata-
lyzers," Bull. inst. pin (1929), 101.
P. Lipp (with H. Witgert), "Pinane. The Determination of Nopinene," Ber. 63B
(1930), 411.
Marcel Del6pine, Jean Reisman. and Edouard Suau, "The Action of Several Or-
ganic Acids on rf-a-Pinene," Bull. soc. chim. [4], 47 (1930), 966.
Paul Adrien Mulcey, "Isomerization of Pinene in Presence of Alumina," Bull. inst.
pin (1931), 177, 201.
B. A. Arbusov, "Isomerization of a-Pinenc to Aliphatic Terpcne," Chem. Zentr. II
(1933), 2125.
G. Dupont, J. Allard, and R. Dulou, "Oxidations by Selenium Oxide in the Terpene
Series," Bull. soc. chim. [4], 53 (1933), 599.
T. Mochida, "Terpenes and Camphors. Isomerization of a-Pinene by Activated
Charcoal," /. Pharm. Soc. Japan 53 (1933), 936; Abstracts (in German), 172.
Hans Meerwein and Julius Vorster, "Pinene Hydrochloride," J. prakt. Chem. 147
(1937), 83.
Ralph W. Charlton and Allan R. Day, "Hydration and Isomerization of Pinene,"
Ind. Eng. Chem. 29 (1937), 92.
Donald H. Sheffield (to Hercules Powder Co.), "Recovery of Terpenes from Mix-
tures," U. S. Patent No. 2,097,743, November 2, 1938.
G. Dupont and R. Dulou, "The Pyrolysis of Pinene. I. The Pyronenes," Atti X
congr. intern, chim. 3 (1939), 123 (in French). Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 9312.
L. A. Goldblatt and S. Palkin, "Vapor Phase Thermal Isomerization of a- and j8-
Pinene," /. Am. Chem. Soc. 22 (1941), 3517. P. C. Guha and A. N. Roy, "II. Con-
version of a- and /3-pinenes into bornyl acetate by acetic acid in presence of catalysts."
"III. (a) Catalytic isomerization of a-pinene and /3-pinene to camphene. (b) Synthesis
of camphor from pinene and pinene-camphene mixture," /. Indian Inst. Sci. 23A
(1941), 208, 217. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 4967.
62 HYDROCARBONS
Wm. Kirkpatrick (to Hercules Powder Co.), "Isomerization of Pinene to Cam-
J.
phene," U. S. Patent No. 2,385,711, September 25, 1945. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946),
607.
G. A. Rudakov, "Catalytic Transformation of Terpenes. Catalytic Transformations
of a-Pinene in the Presence of Activated Clays." /. Gen. Chem. U.S.S.R. 16 (1946),
261. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 114.
V. M. Nikitin (Arkhangel Forest Inst.), "Products of Thermal Isomerization of
a-Pinene. Influence of Temperature on the Isomerization Process," /. Gen. Chem.
U.S.S.R. 16 (1946), 1041 (in Russian). Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 2712.
V. M. Nikitin, "Products of Thermal Isomerization of a-Pinene. Mechanism of the
Isomerization," J. Gen. Chem. U.S.S.R. 16 (1946), 1475 (in Russian). Chem. Ab-
stracts 41 (1947), 5487.
R. Lombard, "The Autoxidation-polymerization of Pinene," Bull. Soc. Chim. France
(1947), 251. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 6550.
p-Pinene
(Nopinene)
C 10 Hi 6 _
CIl2
Mol. Weight 136.23
CH 2
X!'
H
Occurrence. /3-Pinene often accompanies a-pinene in turpentine oils, al-
though usually only in small quantities. French turpentine oil is especially
rich in /3-pinene, which occurs also in other essential oils for example, lemon,
nutmeg, hyssop, coriander and cumin seed, etc.

d-p-Pinene has been identified in sulfaturpentine oil and in the oil distilled
from the ripe fruit of Ferula galbaniflua.
l-fi-Pinene present in Oregon balsam, in the needle oil of the Douglas
is
fir (48 per cent) and of various abies and pinus species, in the oil of petitgrain,
etc.
dl-0-Pinene has been reported by Rutovskii and Vinogradova, as associ-

1
ated with the racemic form of the a- isomer, in Ferula galbaniflua.
Isolation. recommended method of

Fractional distillation continues to be the
separation from a-pinene. Dupont
2
prepared very pure /3-pinene by fractionating
French turpentine oil in a column 2 m. high.
Austerweil 3 suggested separating /3-pinene from a-pinene by taking advantage of
the greater solubility of /3-pinene in alcohol. One hundred volumes of alcohol of 80%
strength dissolve only 2.3 volumes of a-pinene, but 6 volumes of /3-pinene. In alcohol
of 70% strength, the solubility is 0.2 and 1.6 volumes, respectively, at 15.
CYCLIC TERPENES 63
Otherwise, /3-pinene resembles a-pinene closely in its general reactions, for which
reason the separation of the two hydrocarbons is difficult.
Identification. The methods developed so far for the identification of /3-pinene
cause a substantial change in the molecule, and do not lend themselves to small quan-
tities. Low yield and the separation of numerous by-products increase the difficulties
connected with the chemical identification of this terpene. The worker may be faced
with products of oxidative degradation such as pinocarvone, nopinic acid, myrtenols,
(Dupont, Rutovskii and Vinogradova, Lipp, Dupont, Allard and Dulou, 7
4 6 8
etc.
Dupont, Zacharewicz and Dulou, and Schmidt. ) Therefore, it is preferable, for

8 9
qualitative identification simply to isomerize the hydrocarbon and to characterize it

by derivatives of the isomer. For instance, the isomerization of 38.5 g. of /3-pinene
b 758 164.5-165.8, a D -21 36', nf? 1.4790, by a palladium catalyst and hydrogen,
gives 37 g. of the a-isomer b 758 156.6-156.8, a D -40 0', n?? 1.4647 (Richter and
Wolff 10
). The a-pinene
yields several derivatives in which contaminants are not so
frequent, nor the yields so low as is the case in chemical treatment of the /3-compound
per se. (See "a-Pinene" and Addenda to this section.)
u
Gasopoulos suggested distinguishing /3-pinene from a-pinene by the following
reaction:
a- or /3-pinene is added to an alcoholic solution of mercuric acetate, the mixture
If
containing /3-pinene will remain clear even after 2-3 days, whereas the mixture con-
taining a-pinene will separate mercurous acetate, with oxidation of a-pinene to sobreroi
and hydroxyhydrocarvone.
12
Properties. Dupont et al. characterized Z-/3-pinene obtained by frac-
tional distillation of French turpentine oil:
m. -50 aD -22 6'
b. 164 nf? 1.4872

di 5 0.8740
Isolating Z-/3-pinene from hyssop oil, Schimmel & Co. 13 found the following
properties:
b. 1G4-166 aD -19 29'
dli 0.8650 nf? 1.47548
The d-/3-pinene of Rutovskii and Vinogradova 14 was observed to boil at

15
162-163, confirming findings of both Austerweil and Wallach 16 on the
I- isomer. The dl-p- form has not been characterized.
Use. (See "a-Pinene.")
1
J. prakt. Chem. 120 (1929), 41.
2
Chimie &
Industrie 8 (1922), 549. Ann. chim. [10], 1 (1924), 184.
3
Chimie &
Industrie Spec. No. 603, Sept. (1926).
4
Bull. inst. pin (1929), 269.
5
Trans. Sci. Chem. Pharm. Inst. Moscow No. 22 (1930), 72. Chem. Abstracts 24 (1930), 5932.
6
Ber. 63 (1930), 411.
7
Bull. soc. chim. [4], 63 (1933), 599.
8
Compt. rend. 198 (1934), 1699.
9
Ber. Schimmel &
Co. (1941), 70. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 4715.
10
Ber. 69 (1926), 1736. See also Lipp, Ber. 63 (1930), 411.
11
Ber. 69 (1926), 2184.
64 HYDROCARBONS
12
Bull. soc. chim. [4], 63 (1933), 602. See also Bull. inst. pin (1932), 110.
13
14
Trans. Sci. Chem. Pharm. Inst. Moscow, No. 22 (1930), 72.
16
Chimie & Industrie Spec. No. 603, Sept. (1926).
Liebigs Ann. 363 (1908), 10.
N. D. Zelinskii and R. J. Levina, "Irreversible Catalysis of Unsaturated Cyclic

Hydrocarbons. Contact Transformations of Nopinene, Terpinene and Terpinolene,"
I. Univ. Moskau. Ber. 62 (1929), 339.
G. Austerweil, "Quelques Notes sur 1'Hydratation du Nopinene. Hydratation par
des Acides a 1'Etat naissant," Bull. soc. chim. [4], 47 (1930), 1157.
Sabinene
Mol. Weight 136.23
CH*
Occurrence. d-Sabinene occurs as the main constituent (about 30 per cent)

in oil of savin (Jwiipcrus sabina L.). It is present also in Ceylon cardamom,
marjoram, and orthodon oils.
/-Sabinene is found in the oil distilled from the seeds of Xantfioxylum bu-
drunga Wall., in savin oil,and Vitex negundo, Linn.

^/-Sabinenc occurs in cubeb oil, and in the oil from the leaves of Murraya
koenigii Spreng.
Isolation. By fractional distillation of savin oil, for example.

Sabinene cannot be purified through any crystalline derivative. It
Identification.
is best characterized by:
(1) Its very low specific gravity.

(2) Oxidation with potassium permanganate, in the presence of free sodium hy-
droxide, yielding the sparingly soluble sodium salt of sabinenic acid. According to
Wallach, the free acid melts at 57 and can be oxidized to sabinaketone CgHi 4 0, the
1
semicarbazone of which melts at 141-142.

According to Semmler c?-sabinene glycol CioHigOa, too, may be used for the char-
2
acterization of sabinene. This dextrorotatory glycol m. 54, bis 148-150, is obtained

CYCLIC TERPENES 65
by the oxidation of sabinene with potassium permanganate under carefully controlled

conditions.
(3) Formation of a hydrate, characterized by Semmler 2
and Wallach 3
as follows:
5
m. 38-39, b. 195-201, [ajL +53 40' (in ether).
Properties. The
physical properties of sabinene, as recorded in literature,
4
vary considerably. Simonsen recorded the following average values:
d-Sabinene
b. 163-165 WD +80 10'
d 20 0.842 no 1.465
l-Sabinene
b 70 5 161.5-163 WD -46 11'
dig 0.8407 n?? 1.465
Subsequent publications by Huzita, and Padmanabhan and Jatkar note

5 6
certain comparable properties for the active forms and report as optima:
b 30 06 6
HD +89 4' 6
b 20 57-58 5
nf? 1.4460 6
3(
df
4 0.8430 6
Theexaltation of the molecular refraction (+1.34) is one of the highest ob-

served in the terpene group. It must be ascribed to the conjugation of the
exocyclic bond with the cyclopropane ring.
Sabinene has a tendency to pass into derivatives of a-terpinene; for ex-
ample, on shaking with dilute sulfuric acid in the cold, sabinene is transformed
into optically active terpinen-4-ol and 1,4-terpin. On boiling with dilute
sulfuric acid, sabinene passes into terpinene. With hydrohalogens, sabinene
forms terpinene dihalogenides.
Use. Sabinene, as such, is not used in our industries.
*Liebigs Ann. 359 (1908), 270. Cf. Semmler, Ber. 33 (1900), 1465.
2Ber. 33 (1900), 1463.
3
Ann. 367 (1907), 64, 77.
Liebigs
4
"The Terpenes," Vol. II (1932), 17, Cambridge, The University Press.
*J. Chem. Soc. Japan 62 (1940), 431. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 6754.
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1935), 336.
66 HYDROCARBONS
v
Camphene
HC2 _I_.
CH 2
CHs
HC2 -C
Camphene isthe only Collie crystalline hydrocarbon found so far in es-

sential oils. Due to its crystalline nature it has been obtained in pure form
and from isomers, which cannot be claimed of other hydrocarbons. How-
free
ever, in only a few cases has it been possible to isolate camphene from essen-
tial oils in crystalline form for example, from Siberian pine needle oil.
Camphene is a bicyclic terpene of considerable interest and capable of

many tends to undergo intramolecular rearrangements. Cam-
reactions as it
phene, therefore, has been the subject of numerous investigations, the dis-
cussion of which would lead too far in these pages. Suffice it to mention
only that camphene can be prepared synthetically by the elimination of hy-
drogen chloride from bornyl chloride, or from isobornyl chloride, or even
more conveniently by dehydration of isoborneol with zinc chloride. How-
ever, in this case a mixture of several hydrocarbons will be obtained.
Occurrence. d-, I- and d/-Camphene occur in nature quite widely distrib-
uted:
d-Camphcne has been identified in Siberian pine needle oil, in oil of cypress,
camphor, lemon, orange, spike lavender, Eucalyptus globulus, nutmeg, gin-
ger, etc.
I'Camphene is also found in Siberian pine needle oil, in the oil distilled from
the needles of Abies concolor, of Pinus palustris, in American and Russian
turpentine oil, in Ceylon citronella oil, valerian oil, etc.
dl-Camphene, too, has been found in numerous volatile oils.
Isolation. As pointed out, the isolation of camphene from essential oils by mere
crystallization has been possible only in a few instances. In most cases it will be
necessary to resort to fractional distillation, or to employ an indirect method of isola-
tion from the corresponding camphene fraction of an essential oil by converting the
hydrocarbon into its chloride (with the theoretical amount of hydrogen chloride in
ethereal solution), and by regenerating the camphene with alkali (see
"Identification").
Identification. Camphene may be identified by several methods.
If the essential oil contains sufficient
(1) quantities of camphene, this terpene may
be separated in crystalline form, the crystals melting at 51-52. It is, however,
always advisable to confirm the identity of camphene by hydrating it to isoborneol
m. 212, whereby some borneol is also formed. The isoborneoi can be further character-
ized by the preparation of its bromal compound m.
71-72, its phenylurethane m.
CYCLIC TERPENES 67
138-139, and its p-nitrobenzoate m. 129. (See "Isoborneol" and "Borneol," and
their identification.)
For the hydration of camphene to isoborneol, Bertram and Walbaum l recommended
the following procedure:
Heat 100 parts of the camphene fraction for 2 to 3 hr. and at 50-60 with 250 parts
of glacial acetic acid and 10 parts of 50% sulfuric acid, and shake frequently. The
mixture will first separate into two layers but finally become homogeneous and develop
a slightly reddish color. After completion of the reaction add water, separate the
acetate, wash it repeatedly with water, and saponify the acetate by heating with a
solution of 50 g. of potassium hydroxide in 250 g. of alcohol. Remove the alcohol and
add water. The isoborneol will precipitate as a crumbly mass. Purify by recrystalliza-
tion from petroleum ether. The determination of the melting point of isoborneol
(about 212) must be undertaken in a sealed capillary tube, as otherwise the isoborneol
would sublime.
When following Bertram and Walbaum's procedure, it should be kept in mind
that, in addition to isoborneol, some borneol is formed. According to Aschan, the
2
isoborneol prepared by this reaction contains about 20% of borneol. The phen-
ylurethancs of both borneol and isoborneol melt at 138-139; therefore other deriva-
tives should be used for their identification (see above).
(2) Meerwein and van Emster 3 found that, on treatment with the theoretical quan-
tity (but no excess) of hydrochloric acid in methyl alcoholic or ethereal solution, cam-
phene forms true camphene hydrochloride in the form of snow-white crystals m.
125-127. The true camphene hydrochloride possesses a strong, menthol-like odor
and is extremely unstable: it cannot be recrystallized without profound change.
Jf camphene is further treated with hydrochloric; acid, in other words, with excess
hydrochloric acid, the resulting product will be isobornyl chloride m. 150-158, in

somewhat impure form.
Camphene can be regenerated from true camphene hydrochloride and from isobornyl
chloride by the action of alkali. Both true camphene hydrochloride and isobornyl
chloride are optically active in the opposite sense to the camphene from which they
had been prepared. This method of identifying or isolating camphene will be successful
only if the corresponding fraction of the oil contains a high percentage of camphene.
(3) If only small quantities of camphene are present in an essential oil, its identifica-
tion may be difficult. The best method in this case is to oxidize the hydrocarbon with
potassium permanganate solution in acetic acid to camphenilone CgHnO which can
be characterized through its semicarbazone m. 224. (See "Camphenilone/')
(4) Lipp, and lluckel et al. have used the co-nitrocamphenes satisfactorily to char-
4 5
acterize this hydrocarbon. Lipp reported the d/-co-nitrocamphene as m. 64 and the

I- as m. 84-85, [o:]n 146 24' (in benzene), whereas Hiickel and co-workers in their
studies on an optically homogeneous camphene recently prepared d-co-nitrocamphene
with these properties (after recrystallization from petroleum ether): in. 85; [a]i>' 8
+ 153 24' (in benzene), [a]?,3 5 +184 24' (in alcohol); a sample (purified in methyl
-
/
alcohol) m. 85-86 gave rotational values of +149 36' (in benzene) and -f-1760
(in alcohol).
Properties. Camphene is a white, crumbly, crystalline mass possessing a

faint camphoraceous odor. It sublimes and is more resistant against the
influence of air and light than the other terpenes.
As camphene may be obtained crystalline and free from adhering impuri-
ties by solution in alcohol and precipitation with water, this hydrocarbon
should lend itself to isolation in a high state of purity. However, inspection
68 HYDROCARBONS
of the several widely variant physical properties reported by many authors
(including Pariselle,
6
Ross and Somerville, 8 Kachler and Spitzer, 9
Lecat,
7
10 n
Tschugaev, and Eijkman ) for this hydrocarbon encourages a disbelief in
the purity as well as optical homogeneity of most of the compounds studied.
Although the d-, 1-, and dl- stereoisomers derived from various sources have
been described, the constants reported on the natural isolates are not as high
as those observed on the synthetically derived hydrocarbons. In the table
below the optical rotation of the isomers exhibits a fair degree of homogeneity.
The other properties may, therefore, also be considered optima.
PROPERTIES
Isomers
12
Aschan studied the properties of d-camphene derived from American
13
turpentine oil, while Tsakalotos and Papaconstantinou gave constants on
the hydrocarbon from Greek turpentine; the /-camphene reported by Wallach
and Gutmann, 14 Golubev, 15 and Schindelmeiser 16
were obtained from Siberian
pine needle oil. The sample of hydrocarbon examined by Hiickel et al.
17
was described as optically homogeneous. This is proved by its high optical

CYCLIC TERPENES 69
rotation as workers have reported [Q:]D values on the optical enantiomorphs

from +52 to +104, and melting points from 39 to 52. dl- Products of
Bertram and Walbaum, 18 and Lipp 19 were derived from isoborneol; those of
20
Langlois from cu-camphene carbonic acid, and the I- isomer of Briihl 21
from /-bornyl chloride.
When calculated upon a temperature of 20, the value of d would be about
0.870, and that of n D about 1.470.
As pointed out, camphene shows a marked tendency to undergo intramo-
lecular rearrangements. Although camphene contains an ethylenic linkage
itdoes not react easily or smoothly with chlorine or bromine. The action of
"
halogen acids, especially hydrochloric acid, has been discussed under Iden-
tification." Hydration under usual conditions yields the secondary alcohol
isoborneol and some borneol, an intermediate product of the hydration being
the tertiary alcohol camphene hydrate m. 150-151, b. 20G-207.5, phenyl-
urethane m. 89.
22
According to Wagner, the oxidation of camphene with dilute potassium
permanganate yields camphene glycol CioH 1G (OH) 2 m. 199.5-200, and ,
several acids, among them camphenic acid Ci and isomeric

Hi 6 O4 (dibasic
with camphoric acid), and an a-hydroxy acid, viz., camphenylic acid, m. 170-
172, this acid giving on further oxidation camphenilone CgHnO. For de-
tails, see Simonsen's "The Tcrpenes," Vol. II (1932), 240.
One of the most interesting of the properties of this terpene is its tendency
to form azeotropic binary mixtures with numerous compounds, which char-
acteristic may be used to advantage in connection with identification (cf.
Vol. V, Beilstein E
II, 106).
Use. Synthetic camphene and camphene-containing fractions of essential
oils are quite widely used in low-priced mixtures serving for the scenting of
all kinds of technical preparations.
1
J. prakt. Chem. II, 49 (1894), 1.
2
Ber. 40 (1907), 4923.
3
Ber. 63 (1920), 1824; 65 (1922), 2500.
*
Liebigs Ann. 382 (1911), 296; 399 (1913), 241; 402 (1914), 343.
6
6
Corn-pi, rend. 180 (1925), 1832.
7
Rec. trav. chim. 46 (1927), 243.
*J. Chem. Soc. (1926), 2775.
Liebigs Ann. 200 (1880), 350.
9
10
Z. physik. Chem. 76 (1911), 471.
11
Chem. Zentr. II (1907), 1210.
Liebigs Ann. 398 (1913), 301.
12
13
Chem. Zentr. II (1916), 1015. /. pharm. chim. [VII], 14 (1916), 97.
Liebigs Ann. 357 (1907), 80.
14
16
/. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 36 (1904), 1107; 41 (1909), 1004.
16
Ibid. 35 (1903), 76. Chem. Zentr. I (1903), 835.
17
Liebigs Ann. 649 (1941), 186. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 1907.
18
J. prakt. Chem. II, 49 (1894), 8.
19
Liebigs Ann. 382 (1911), 282.
70 HYDROCARBONS
20
Ann. chim. [9], 12 (1919), 334.
*Ber. 25 (1892), 147, 162.
22
Ber. 23 (1890), 2311. See Tiemann, Ber. 29 (1896), 124. Aschan, Liebigs Ann. 375
(1910), 336; 383 (1911), 52.
Otto Diels and Kurt Alder with Siegfried Beckmann, "Syntheses in the Hydro-
aromatic Series. Diene Syntheses of Anthracene. Anthracene Formula," Liebigs Ann.
486 (1931), 191. Chem. Abstracts 25 (1931), 3646.
P. Lipp and G. Stutzinger, "Racemization Phenomena with Camphene and Their
Mechanism," Ber. 65 (1932), 241.
Morizo Ishidate, Noboru Inouye, and Hiroyuki Fukushima, "Oxidation of Camphene
with Lead Tetracetate," Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan 17 (1942), 491. Chem. Abstracts 41
(1947), 4474.
Hirokichi Kumagae, "The Oxidation of Camphene," /. Chem. Soc. Japan 65 (1944),
337. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 4474.
G. A. Rudakov and L. I. Gulyaeva, "Catalytic Transformation of Terpenes. Cat-
alytic Transformations of Camphene in the Presence of Activated Clays," /. Gen.
Chem. U.8.S.R. 16 (1946), 251. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 114.
Walter Hiickel and Hans Gtinter Kirschncr, "Ring Expansion in the Oxidation of
Camphene," Ber. 80 (1947), 41. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 3078.
The Fenchenes
The occurrence of fenchene in nature has been reported but not definitely
proved, although it may be present in some essential oils. Bouchardat and
Tardy claimed that they isolated from oil of Eucalyptus globulus a terpene
1
which, on heating with benzoic acid, yielded fenchyl alcohol. Later Auster-
2
weil showed that a- and 0-pinene, too,on heating with organic acids give
fenchene and fenchene derivatives. Both a- and /3-pinene on hydration
yield fenchyl alcohol. It is, therefore, quite possible that the formation of
fenchyl alcohol, as observed in the above-mentioned case of Eucalyptus glob-

ulus oil, was due to a- and /3-pinene and not to fenchene.
The chemistry of fenchene and its isomers, especially their nomenclature,
isquite complicated and confused. Since space does not permit a discussion,
the reader is referred to the excellent account of Simonsen in his work "The
Terpenes/' Vol. page 437, Cambridge, The University Press, 1932.
IT,
It is possible to prepare from fenchone four isomeric bicyclic hydrocarbons
and a tricyclic hydrocarbon:
I. a-Fenchene (Wallach's D-Z-fenchene or L-c?-f enchene) .
II. /3-Fenchene (Wallach's D-d-i enchene or L-Z-f enchene).
III.7-Fenchene.
IV. 6-Fenchene.
V. Cyclofenchene (Aschan's /3-pinolene).
CYCLIC TERPENES 71
The fenchenes can be prepared by three general methods, viz.:

(a) Direct dehydration of fenchyl or isofenchyl alcohol.
(b) Distillation of methyl fenchyl or isofenchylxanthates.

Cleavage of hydrogen chloride from fenchyl or isofenchyl chlorides.
(c)
The reactions, however, do not proceed smoothly and are accompanied by
molecular rearrangement which results in the formation of several hydro-
carbons. Thus it seems quite possible that none of the fenchenes has ever
been obtained in pure form. According to the method of preparation, var-
ious isomers will be formed which possess different physicochemical prop-
erties.
l
Compt. rend. 120 (1895), 1418.
*Chem.Ztg. 60 (1926), 5, 33.
/. a-Fenchene
a-Fenchene is known both in the dextro- and laevorotatory forms and is

1
probably the fenchene originally prepared by Wallach.
a-Fenchene can be characterized

Identification. :
(1) According to Wallach arid Virck, by the preparation of its crystalline dibromide.
2
The d- and /- forms melt at 87-88, [a] D +42 50' (in ethyl acetate). The dl- form
melts at 62.
According to Bertram and Helle, a-fenchene, on hydration with glacial acetic
3
(2)
acid and sulfuric acid, yields isofenchyl acetate. The free alcohol melts at 61.5-62 >
its phenylurethane at 10(3-107.
Properties.a-Fenchene possesses a camphor-like odor. The following

properties have been reported:
l-a-Fenchenc (prepared from /-fenchyl alcohol), according to Ruzicka and
4
Liebl:
b 72 o 153-154 WD -38 0'
df 0.870 n{? 1.4750
d-a-Fenchene (prepared from d-fenchylamine), according to Wallach and

5
Virck:
b. 155-156
+29 0'
72 HYDROCARBONS
[Isopinene] (dehydration of 3,7,7-trimethyl-bicyclo-[2,2,l]-
dl-a-Fenchene
6
heptan-3-ol), according to Komppa and Roschier:
b. 154-156
df f\f^
0.8660
1.4705
The hydrochloride melts at 35-37. This product isomerizes, according

to Komppa and Nyman, to the /?- and 7- form when heated with potassium
7
bisulfate for a few minutes.

Use. a-Fenchene, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Liebigs Ann. 263 (1891), 129.
2
Ibid. 362 (1908), 182, 190. Cf. Quist, ibid. 417 (1918), 299.
3
J. prakt. Chem. II, 61A (1900), 293. Ber. Schimmel &
Co., Oct. (1898), 55; April (1900), 57.
4
Helv. Chirn. Ada 6 (1923), 270.
6
Liebigs Ann. 362 (1908), 199.
Chem. Zentr. I (1917), 751.
Liebigs Ann. 543 (1940), 111.
7
77. /3-Fcnchene
C 10 H 16 Mol. Weight 136.23
H C=C
2 C CH 2
H
d-/3-Fenchene was first prepared by Bertram and Helle
l
by dehydration of
Z-isofenchyl alcohol.
Identification. d-/3-Fenchene can be characterized by the preparation of its crystal-

line dibromide m. 81-82, or its nitrosochloride m. 120, according to Quist. 2
Properties. When
prepared by the cleavage of hydrogen chloride from l-
isofenchyl chloride with o-toluidine, d-/3-fenchene had these properties ac-
3
cording to Quist:
5
b. 150.5-153.5 C& +62 27'
8
df 0.8599 nf> 1.4645
Onhydration /3-fenchene yields isofenchyl alcohol.

The racemic form has also been prepared but its purity remains question-
able inasmuch as it has been derived by destructive distillation methods
4
(Komppa and Roschier ) :
b. 151-153
df 0.8596
1.4658
Use. /3-Fenchene, as such, is not used in our industries.

CYCLIC TERPENES 73
1
J. prakt. Chern. II, 61 (1900), 303.
*Liebigs Ann. 417 (1918), 315.
Ibid. 470 (1929), 139. Chern. Zentr. I (1918), 622.
///. y-Fenchene
CinH
10*116 Mol. Weight 136.23
HC
H 2
Identification. According to and Beckmann, 1 7-fenchene yields a nitro-

Komppa
soc-hloride m. about 150, and a nitrosate in. 146-147 (with decomposition).
One of the most useful derivatives for diagnosing the 7- or 6-fencbenes in mixtures
is that of the phenylazide. With this reagent Alder et al. 2 have reported:
a-fenchene fails to react

?
jS-fenchene
(
7-fenchene adducts: I m. 148-149, II m. 177

6-fenchene adducts: I m. 122, II m. 128M29*
Properties. On
dehydrating a-fenchyl alcohol with potassium hydrogen
sulfate, a hydrocarbon fraction b. 145-147, df 0.8547, n{J 1.46072, is ob-
tained which contains 7-fenchene as main constituent.
Use. 7-Fenchene, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Liebigs Ann. 603 (1933), 130.
2
Ibid. 601 (1933), 28; 616 (1935), 177.
IV. 5-Fenchene
(Fenchylene or Isofenchene)
Mol. Weight 136.23
HC
HC- -CH 2
6-Fenchene is also known as fenchylene and isofenchene. It has not been

prepared in pure form.
5-Fenchene can be characterized by the preparation of a nitroso-

Identification.
chloride m. 142, and a nitrosate m. 163. (See "7-Fenchene" re phenylazide.)
74 HYDROCARBONS
Properties. When
obtained by the distillation of Z-isofenchylxanthate,
6-fenchene had these properties, according to Nametkin and Ruschentzev:
l
b. 139-140 MD -68 46' (in alcohol)

20
df 0.8381 1.4494
Use. 5-Fenchene, as such, is not used in our industries.
J. prakt. Chem. II, 106 (1923), 35.
V. Cyclofenchene
CinH
10*116 Mol. Weight 136.23
Cyclofenchene (Aschan's /3-pinolene) is usually found in the lowest boiling

fractions of the fenchcne mixture obtained by any of the methods mentioned
in the introduction to this section on fenchenes.
Identification. When treated with bromine, cyclofenchene yields a-fenchene di-

bromide m. 8G-87; with hydrogen chloride cyclofenchene forms a hydrochloride m.
2G-29 which is somewhat unstable.
Cyclofenchene is the only one of the fenchene isomers which

Properties.
has been prepared in pure form because it is very slowly attacked by potas-
sium permanganate. By shaking it with this oxidizing agent for several
hours, at 60-80, cyclofenchene may thus be freed from unsaturated hydro-
carbons.
According to Nametkin and Bryusov, cyclofenchene has these properties:
1
143.0-143.5
d 0.8603
1.4515
On hydration, cyclofenchene yields isofenchyl alcohol.

Use. Cyclofenchene, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Liebigs Ann. 459 (1927), 160. J. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 60 (1928), 290.

Gust. Komppa and R. H. Roschier, "Fenchene Series. Ozonization and Constitution
of the Fenchenes," Liebigs Ann. 470 (1929), 129. Chem. Abstracts 23 (1929), 3693.
CYCLIC TERPENES 75
Gust. Komppa and G. A. Nyman, "Fenchene Series. The Reaction Mechanism in

the Dehydration of Fenchyl Alcohol," Liebigs Ann. 635 (1938), 252. Chem. Abstracts
32 (1938), 8396.
N. J. Toivoncn, V. Alfthan, L. H. Book, M. I. Erich and E. K. Heino, "Chemistry of
Synthetic Diterpenes. Dimerization of Fenchene with Clay Catalysts: /3-Difenchene,"
/. prakt. Chem. 169 (1941), 70. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 4064.
W. R. Littiejohn, "The Fenchenes," Perfumery Essential Oil Record 39 (1948), 220.
a-Thujene
C 10 H 16 Mol. Weight 13G.23
CEb
HC' CH
H.C \ CH 2
C'
CH
CH 3
According to Simonsen, d-a-thujene is the main constituent
1
Occurrence.
in the terpene fraction of the oil distilled from the gum-oleoresin of Boswellia
scrrata Roxb., and in the oil from the leaves of the Formosa Hinoki tree. It
has also been reported by Iluzita 2 in orthodon oils. Birch and Earl 3 proved
that the "origanene" found by Birch 4 in oil of Eucalyptus dives is actually a
mixture of d- and dZ-

Identification. a-Thujene may be characterized:
(1) By its low specific gravity.
(2) By its conversion into terpinene dihydrochloride through the action of hydrogen
chloride.
According to Wallach, and Kondakov and Skvorzov, a-thujene, on oxidation
5 6
(3)
with potassium permanganate (and depending upon the conditions), yields either
a-thujaketonic acid m. 75-76 (semicarbazone m. 182-183, oxime m. 174-176),
the stable d-a-thujadicarboxylic acid m. 141-142, or d-/3-thujadicar boxy lie acid m.
116-118. On oxidation with dilute permanganate solution and at low temperature,
only a-thujaketonic acid is obtained (but this in quantitative yield).
Properties. d-a-Thujene is a colorless oil possessing a somewhat sharp

odor, quite different from that of a-pinene.
7
According to Simonsen, natural d-a-thujene has these properties:
b 699 152.0-152.5 [a]?? +37 41'
dlSJ 0.8314 nf? 1.4502

8
These observations confirm the earlier findings of Tschugaev and Fomin,
and Ostling. 9
76 HYDROCARBONS
laevorotatory form has also been derived from decomposition of cer-
The
10
tain synthetic thujyl derivatives, according to Tschugaev.
The cyclopropane ring of a-thujene is unstable and readily undergoes fis-
sion. The action of hydrogen chloride and hydrogen bromide in acetic acid
solution yields the corresponding terpinene dihalogenides. a-Thujene is only
very slowly attacked by oxygen.
Use. a-Thujene is not used in our industries.
1
Indian Forest Records 9 (1923), 289.
2
3
*Ibid. 71 (1938), 330.
Liebigs Ann. 350 (1906), 166. Sec also Tiemann and Scmmler, Ber. 30 (1897), 431.
6
6
/. prakt. Chem. II, 69 (1904), 181. See also Thomson, /. Chem. Soc. 97 (1910), 511. Tschu-
gaev, Ber. 37 (1904), 1484.
7
9
Ber. 46 (1912), 1297.
9
J. Chem. Soc. 101 (1912), 471.
Ber. 34 (1901), 2279; 37 (1904), 1482.
p-Thujene
C 10 H 16 Mol. Weight 136.23
CH
HC
3 CH 3
2
/3-Thujene was described by Tschugaev, and by Kondakov and Skvorzov.
1
Occurrence. /3-Thujene has not yet been reported to occur in nature, but
Huzita 3 recently identified the a- isomer in oil of Orthodon hirtum Hara and
75 per cent "thujene" in Orthodon punctulatum Ohwi. Therefore, the pres-
ence of /3-thujene in the orthodon oils seems likely.
4
Properties. Tschugaev and Fomin reported these properties:
b 739 147 HD +110 47'
df 0.8208 nf? 1.44708
On oxidation, -thujene yields d/-homothujadicarboxylic acid C 10 H 16 O 4 ,
m. 146-147.
Use. 0-Thujene is not used in our industries.
CYCLIC TERPENES 77
1
Ber. 37 (1904), 1483.
2
J. prakt. Chem. II, 67 (1903), 574; II, 69 (1904), 176.
3
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 61 (1940), 729; 62 (1941), 134. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 6752.
4
Ber. 45 (1912), 1297.
Bornylene
C 10 H 16 Mol. Weight 136.23
HI..C
This unsaturated bicyclic hydrocarbon was prepared synthetically by Wag-

ner and Brickncr, 1 and by Tschugaev. 2
Occurrence. Bornylene does not occur in nature. However, it is an im-
portant isomerization product in diagnostic reactions of the borneols (cf.
4
Shavrygin
3
and Kharasch, Engelmann and Urry ).
According to Henderson and Heilbron, bornylene can be char-

5
Identification.
acterized by its nitrosite m. 163, prepared by the action of nitrous acid on bornylene.
Achmatowicz 6 has prepared the halogen acid addition products of bornylene.
These are best obtained, according to this author, by reaction of the hydrohalide with
the hydrocarbon in chloroform at C.
m. 149-149.5 [a] D +15 26'
Ci H 17 Br m. 124-125 [a] D +6 31'
CioH 17 I m. 22-25 [a] D +55 11'
Properties.Although crystalline, bornylene is readily volatile. The fol-
lowing properties have been reported:

7
d-Bornylene, according to McAlpine:
m. 113
8
b 750 146.5 (Tschugaev and Budrick )
56 (in benzene, c = 8.23)
r
+23
9
l-Bornylcnc (Bredt and Hilbing )
m. 113
b 7 45.5 146
-23 56' (in benzene, c = 8.23)
dl-Bornylene does not seem to have been described in literature.

Use. Bornylene, as such, is not used in our industries.
78 HYDROCARBONS
*
Ber. 33 (1900), 2121.
*J. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 32 (1900), 332.
3
J. Gen. Chem. U.S.S.R. 10 (1940), 807.
,7. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1944), 365.
4
6
J. Chem. Soc. 99 (1911), 1896.
6
Roczniki Chem. 8 (1928), 55.
7
J. Chem. Soc. (1932), 545.
*Liebigs Ann. 388 (1912), 288.
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 84 (1911), 782.

Stotherd Mitchell and B. Cormack, "Rotation Dispersion and Circular Dichroism
S.
of Bornylene Nitrosite," J. Chem. Soc. (1932), 415. Chem. Abstracts 26 (1932), 3729..
Orthodene
c
H
-_
r-_ n'-^
cH
CH
Occurrence. Fujita
l
found that the oil distilled from the herb Orthodon
lanceolatum Kudo
(fam. Labiatae) contains 7 per cent of a dicyclic terpenc
which Fujita named orthodenc.

Through its properties. Oxidation with permanganate gave a keto
Identification.
acid CioHieOs m. 129-130, semicarbazone m. 116-118; further reaction with
sodium hypobromite yielded bromonorpinic acid m. 76-77. Guha and Rao, 2 in the
course of investigating Fujita's acid, concluded that this product was the cis- com-
pound.
3
Properties. Fujita reported these properties of orthodene:
b 75 7 168-170 (corr.) af? +32 36'
df 0.8430 n?? 1.4670
Use. Orthodene is not used in our industries.

1
,7.Chem. Soc. Japan 64 (1933), 1181.
2
Ber. 71 (1938), 1591.
3
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 64 (1933), 1184.
CYCLIC TERPENES 79
Camphane
CinH
10-nis Mol. Weight 138.24
<"CH 3
HC2
(6)
C-
(1) (2)
CH 2
|
HC3 C CH 3 <8>
I
(5) (4) (3)
Hi-C -c
H
Being the parent hydrocarbon of the camphor group, this saturated bi-
cyclic terpene merits a brief description in these pages.
Camphane has been prepared synthetically by several workers, among
them Semmler, Aschan, 2 Kishner, 3 and Wolff. 4
1
Occurrence. Camphane does not occur in nature.

Properties. Camphane possesses a faint odor similar to that of borneol,
and is very volatile even at room temperature. Optically inactive, m. 156-
157, b. 157-159 (Biilmann, Jensen and Bak ). Camphane is extremely
5
resistant to the action of reagents, except to dilute nitric acid at 145-150
whereby nitro derivatives are formed, according to Konovalov and Kikina, 6

and Nametkin. 7
Use. Camphane has not found any practical use in our industries.
1
Ber. 33 (1900), 777, 3424.
2
Ber. 33 (1900), 1009; 45 (1912), 2395. Liebigs Ann. 316 (1901), 234.
3
J. RILSS. Phys. Chem. Soc. 43 (1911), 582.
4
Liebigs Ann. 394 (1912), 95.
6
Ber. 69B (1936), 1947.
6
7
Ibid. 47 (1915), 409.
(c) SERIES OF LOWER TERPENE HOMOLOGUES.
Santene
(Norcamphene)
C Mol. Weight 122.20
Santene occurs in East Indian sandalwood oil, also in Siberian,

Occurrence.
German and Swedish pine needle oil, in the oil distilled from the needles of
Abies alba and a few other volatile oils.
80 HYDROCARBONS
Identification. Santene can be and Aschan: 2
identified, according to Miiller,
1
(1) By the preparation of its a-nitrosochloride which crystallizes in the form of

blue needles m. 109-1 10. On exposure to the air the a- form passes into the colorless
18- form. The latter is possibly bimolecular since, on heating to 90, it is converted
into the blue a- modification.
(2) Bythe preparation of the nitrosite which crystallizes in the form of blue prisms
m. 123-126 and which, according to Deussen, 3 with alcoholic potassium hydroxide
yields the colorless form m. 104.
With hydrogen chloride in ethereal solution, santene forms a crystalline hydro-
(3)
chloride m. about 80. On digestion with aniline, santene may be reconverted from
this hydrochloride. When treated
with milk of lime at 70-80, the hydrochloride
yields santene hydrate C 9 Hi 6 (see
"Santene Hydrate").
(4) On treatment with bromine, santene yields a tribromide m. 62-63 according
to Miiller, 4 but m. 77-78 according to Aschan 6 who
expressed the opinion that the
melting point of the tribromide varies according to the origin of the santene.
(5) On careful oxidation of santene with potassium permanganate in acetone solu-
tion, Semmler and Bartelt
6
obtained a diketone C 9 Hi 4 2 bw 119-124; disemicar- ,
bazone m. 216.
7
Santene, according to Deussen, reacts with mercury salts to form characteristic
(6)
derivatives. With the acetate, a hydroxy mercuric acetate m. 126-127 is
obtained,
while the iodide yields the corresponding derivative melting at 130-131.
(7) Deussen
8
reports that catalytic reduction yields a dihydro derivative boiling
at 150-152, di8. 6 0.8712, n}? 6 1.4636.
Properties. Santene is an oil of somewhat unpleasant odor. It is difficult

to obtain in pure form and resinifies quite readily.
Aschan, Semmler, Schimmel & Co., 11 and Mtiller 12 all appear to be
9 10
in
good agreement on the following range of properties reported for santene:
b 770 140-141 011 OD

b. 139-140 012 -
9 2
n L? 1. 46436 n
2
b 15 35-37 12
n{?- 1.46960 9
b9 31-33 10
nD 1.46878 9
10
d 20 0.863 1.46658 10
dJi 0.869 n
12
di 5 0.8710
5 9
d] 0.8735
Santene is not affected by the action of alkali, but it can easily be hydrated
either with acetic acid-sulfuric acid (Bertram-Walbaum
method), by treat-
ment with formic acid, or with sulfuric acid in ethereal solution. The product
of hydration will be santenol C 9 Hi 6 O
(see "Santenol").
Use. Santene as such is not used in our industries.
1
Arch. Pharm. 238 (1900), 369, 380.
2
Ber. 40 (1907), 4920.
3
J. prakt. Ghent. 114 (1926), 116.
SESQUITERPENES 81
4
Arch. Pharm. 238 (1900), 372.
6
Ber. 40 (1907), 4920.
6
Ber. 41 (1908), 128. Cf. Semmler, Ber. 40 (1907), 4596.
7
/. prakt. Chem. 114 (1926), 112, 114.
8
Ibid.
9
0versikt Finska Vetenskaps-Soc. Forh. 53A, 8 (1910-11), 5.
10
Ber. 40 (1907), 4595.
11
Ber. Schimmel & Co., Oct. (1910), 98.
12
Arch. Pharm. 238 (1900), 369, 380.
D. SESQUITERPENES
Introduction. Many essential oils contain in the fractions b. 250-280

hydrocarbons of the empirical molecular formula Ci 5 H 2 4 which have been
named sesquiterpenes. Hundreds of sesquiterpenes are described in litera-
ture but only in the case of relatively few has it been possible to declare them
homogeneous substances and to identify them by derivatives. Being un-
saturated hydrocarbons, the sesquiterpenes form halogen compounds, hydro-
gen halides, nitrosochlorides, nitrosites and nitrosates, some of them crystal-
line and therefore helpful in the identification of the parent sesquiterpene.
Most of these hydrocarbons are of faint odor, more viscous than the terpenes,
sparingly soluble in alcohol, b. 250~280, d 0.84-0.93 (usually above 0.90).
Like the terpenes Collie, they resinify quite readily.
Semmler, and Schreiner and Kremers classified the sesquiterpenes into
1 2
four main groups, each group characterized by considerable constancy in the
specific gravity of its members.

d 15 ng [RL]D
Acyclic (four ethylenic linkages) . 84 1 . 53 69 5 .
Monocyclic (three ethylenic linkages) . 89-0 .87 1 . 51-1 .49 67 8 .
Bicyclic (two ethylenic linkages) . 92-0 .90 1 . 51-1 .50 66 . 1
Tricyclic (one ethylenic linkage) . 935-0 .91 1 . 50-1 .49 64 4 .
The first general formula for the sesquiterpenes was advanced by Wallach 3
who suggested that a sesquiterpene molecule is composed of three isoprene
nuclei, but real progress in the chemistry of the sesquiterpenes was made
4
only about twenty-five years ago when Ruzicka and collaborators provided
an experimental basis for work on the elucidation of the structure of the ses-
quiterpenes. In the course of their investigations Ruzicka and Meyer 5 were

able to show that cadinene, on dehydrogenation with sulfur, yields a naph-
thalene hydrocarbon, viz., cadalene (l,6-dimethyl-4-isopropylnaphthalene).
The same is true of calamene, zingibcrene, isozingiberene, and a few other
6
sesquiterpenes. Ruzicka, Meyer and Mingazzini proved that selinene on
dehydrogenation with sulfur yields another naphthalene hydrocarbon, viz.,
eudalene (l-methyl-7-isopropylnaphthalene). The same is true of eudesmol,
82 HYDROCARBONS
eudesmene, and a few other sesquiterpenes. These reactions take place ac-
cording to the following equation:
CisH 2 4 -f" 3S >

CisHig + 3H2S
Cadalene
Ci 5 H 24 + 3S -> C 14 H 16 + 2H2 S + CH SH 3
Eudulene
The formation of eudalene thus entails tre cleavage of one methyl group
from the parent sesquiterpene molecule.
CH 3
C CH CII CH
HC
/ \ C
/ \ CH H3 C HC
/ \ C
/ \
CH
I II I \n ||
HC C C CH 3 C C
1
, C CH
\C / \CH/ H3 C
/ \CH/ \C/
CH CH3
H3 C
/ \CH
3
Cadalcno Eudalene
These two naphthalene hydrocarbons have the following properties:

Mol.
b. d UD Refr.
Cadalene b 720 291-292 df 0.9792 nj? 1.5851 67.7
7
Eudalene b 720 280-281 dj 0.9734 n" 1.5847 63.31
Both cadalene and eudalene can be characterized by the preparation of

crystalline addition compounds: picrates may be prepared by adding the
naphthalene hydrocarbon to a hot saturated alcoholic solution of 1 mol of
picric acid. Styphnates precipitate form of yellow needles if an alco-
in the
holic solution of 1 mol of trinitroresorcinol is added to the naphthalene hy-
drocarbon.
Cadalene picrate m. 115
Eudalene picrate m. 90-91
Cadalene styphnate m. 138
Eudalene styphnate m. 119-120
Cadalene and eudalene are the only naphthalene hydrocarbons obtained

by dehydrogenation of sesquiterpenes and sesquiterpene derivatives. This
reaction, however, does not represent a general method of determining the
ring structure of the sesquiterpenes. It is of limited use with monocyclic
SESQUITERPENES 83
and bicyclic sesquiterpenes, and useless with tricyclic sesquiterpcnes and ses-
quiterpene derivatives. In these cases other methods have to be resorted to
in order to determine the ring structure of the parent sesquiterpene.
1
Ber. 36 (1903), 1037.
2
"The Sesquiterpenes," Milwaukee, 1904. Cf. Simonsen, "The Terpenes," Vol. II (1932),
486.
3
Liebigs Ann. 238 (1887), 78; 239 (1887), 49.
4
See Ruzicka, "t)ber Konstitution und Zusammenhange in der Sesquiterpenreihe" (1928).
6
Helv. Chim. Ada 4 (1921), 505, 508.
6
Ibid. 6 (1922), 345, 363.
PL A.
Plattner, A. Fiirst und K. Jirasek, "Zur Kenntnia der Sesquiterpene. tlber
das Bicyclo-[0,3,5]-decan," Helv. Chim. Ada 29 (1946), 730.
PL A. Plattner, A. Fiirst, Hellerbach, "Sesquiterpenes. The Stereochem-
and J.
istry of l,3-Dimethyl-2-Cyclohexanols," Helv. Chim. Ada 30 (1947), 100 (in German).

Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 3768.
(a) ALIPHATIC SESQUITERPENES.
Sesquicitronellene
C 16 H 2 4 Mol. Weight 204.34
CH 3
C CH 2
II 2 C
/ \ /
CII
\ CH
H2 C H2 C C CH3
\CH \CH/
C
H3 C
/ \CII
3
Sesquicitronellene is an acyclic sesquiterpene containing four ethylenic

linkages. This type of structure suggests the hydrocarbon to be one of the
four possible geometric isomers of the farnesenes.
Occurrence. In the sesquiterpene fraction of Java and Ceylon citronella
oil, according to Schimmel & Co., and Semmler and Spornitz.
1 2
The fraction b. 268-270 of Java citronella oil is extracted several

Isolation.
times with 60-70% alcohol (in order to remove the isoeugenol), and repeatedly frac-
tionated over metallic sodium at reduced pressure.
Identification. Reduction with sodium and alcohol yields dihydrosesquicitronellene
,
d 20 0.8316, a D 0, n D 1.4800.
84 HYDROCARBONS
Although the original workers did not prepare further derivatives of this dihydro
compound, subsequent investigators have obtained dihydrogenated farnesenes that
yield characteristic derivatives. Jones and Haenke obtained a hexabromide m. 131
3
from the dihydrofarnesene isolated from the nerolidol fraction in Queensland oils,
whereas Farmer and Sutton 4 obtained a trihydrochloride salt m. 52 from a synthetic
dihydrofarnescne. However, this hydrocarbon did not yield a crystallizable bromide.
The physical properties of the dihydrofarnesenes thus far isolated do not agree with
those observed by Seinmler and Spornitz. However, the two types of derivatives, i.e.,
the hexabromide and trihydrochloride, are recommended for diagnostic purposes in
the case of scsquicitronellcne.
Properties. The following properties have been reported by Semmlcr and

Spornitz:
by 138-140 HD +036'
d 20 0.8489 nD 1.53252
On digestion with concentrated formic acid, scsquicitroncllenc yields a mono-

cyclic compound b 15 129-132, d 20 0.8892, ,> +50 0', n D 1.5009, which
should consist mainly of bisabolene, if scsquicitroncllenc is actually identical
with farnesenc. However, literature does not mention that a crystalline tri-
hydrochloride was prepared.
Use.Scsquicitronellcne, as such, is not used in our industries except as
part of certain high boiling citronella oil fractions which serve as fixatives in
the scenting of soaps and technical preparations.
1
Rchimmel & Co., Oct. (1899), 19.
Ber.
*Ber. 46 (1913), 4025.
3
Proc. Roy. Hoc. Queensland 48 (1937), 44.
*J. Chem. Soc. (1942), 116.
(b) MONOCYCLIC SKSQUITKHPKNKS.
Bisabolene
(Limene)
Mol. Weight 204.34
CH CH,
I
C Clio OIL
*/ \
HO CH CH 2 H,C CH OIL
H2 C CH 2 0--CII 3 CII 2 C CH 3
CH CTI
,
CH
\CH/
C
HC CH 3 HC
/ \ CH
3 3
tt-Bisubolene /9-Bisabolene
SESQUITERPENES 85
CH
C CH 5
HoC
\C CH
HoC CH 2 CH 3
OH CI-I
7-Bisabolene
According to Ruzicka and van Veen,

1
monocyclic sesquiterpene con-
this
taining three ethylenic linkages consists of a mixture of three isomers viz.,

a-, /?- and 7-bisabolene, the latter largely predominating. All three isomers
can be transformed into the same trihydrochloride. This applies to the
natural as well as to the synthetic bisabolene.
Occurrence. Bisabolene occurs Avidely distributed in nature. It is present
in oil of Bisabolmyrrh (opopanax), lemon, lime, bcrgamot, camphor, in Si-
berian pine needle oil, Chinese star anise, cardamom, sandalwood oil, etc.
Isolation. Bisabolene can be isolated from Bisabol myrrh oil, for example, by
fractionation, by twice redistilling the fraction bi2 110-140 over metallic sodium,
and by converting the scsquiterpene in ethereal solution into its trihydrochloride
C^l I24-3IIC1. On boiling with sodium acetate and glacial acetic acid, the trihydro-
chloride is decomposed and the bisabolene regenerated.
Jackson and Short 2 have found in certain instances, as in star anise oil, that the
oxygenated compounds are eliminated only by treatment with metallic potassium and
that careful recrystallization of the trihydrochloride is necessary to eliminate cadinene
which occurs with the bisabolene.
Identification. Bisabolene can be characterized by the preparation of several
derivatives :
(1) The trihydrochloride m. 79-80 (recrystallized in alcohol) is most conveniently

obtained by passing gaseous hydrogen chloride into an ethereal solution of the sesqui-
terpene.
(2) The trihydrobromide melts at 84, according to Wallach. 3
(3) The hexabromide melts at 154, according to Schmidt andWeilinger. It is 4
prepared with bromine in the presence of sodium acetate and acetic acid and purified
from acetone. Asahina and Tsukamoto 5 also isolated two other isomers from this
same reaction, m. 142 and 130-132.
Properties. Bisabolene is a colorless viscid oil.
When regenerated from its trihydrochloride, bisabolene has these charac-

6
teristic properties, according to Gildemeister and Miiller, and Ruzicka and
7
Capato:
86 HYDROCARBONS
6
b 75 i 261-262 D =tO 6
7 1
bi 2 133-134 n?) 1.4923 7
7 6
df 0.8717 no 1.4901
6
d\! 0.8759
Several bisabolene fractions of varying optical activity have thus far been
isolated. The rotatory power displayed by the regenerated bisabolenes is
8
regarded by Jackson and Short as a measure of the content of a- and /5-
isomers. The
7- product, believed to predominate in nature, is inactive,
whereas that of the original isolate may be to a degree a function of con-
taminants.
9
Gildemeister and Miiller reported a laevo-bisabolene fractionated from
lemon oil:
b4 110-112 aD -41 31'
d}i 0.8813 ng* 1.49015
The
trihydrochloride therefrom and the bisabolene regenerated from this
product, however, were found to be optically inactive. On the other hand,
10
Short et al. isolated a dextrorotatory sesquiterpene fraction ([] D +716' to
+9 53') from star anise oil that yielded an inactive trihydrochloride and yet
regenerated a laevorotatory bisabolene with these properties:
bi2 138.5-139.5 (corr.) []}? -14 56'
d? 0.8727 ng 1.4937
Dndehydrogenation with sulfur, bisabolene does not yield a naphthalene

derivative. By heating of this reaction product with sodium dichromate and
sulfuric acid, Ruzicka and van Veen ll obtained terephthalic acid.
Use. Bisabolene, as such, is not used in our industries.
Liebigs Ann. 468 (1929), 133, 143.

1
2
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 66 (1936), 8T
3
Liebigs Ann. 368 (1909), 20.
4
Ber. 39 (1906), 657.
6
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 46 (1926), 98. Chem. Zentr. I (1927), 1843.
6
Ber. Schimmel &
Co., Oct. (1909), 50. W
attach Festschrift, Gottingen (1909), 448.
7
Helv. Chim. ActaS (1925), 274.
8
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 65 (1936), 8T.
9
Ber. Schimmel & Co., Oct. (1909), 50. Wallach Festschrift, Gottingen (1909), 448.
10
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 60 (1931), 410T; 66 (1936), 8T.
Liebigs Ann. 468 (1929), 136, 137.
11
and M. Liguori, " Poly ter penes and Polyterpenoids.

L. Ruzicka A New Synthesis of
Bisabolenes," Helv. Chim. Acta 16 (1932), 3. Chem. Abstracts 26 (1932), 4592.
SESQUITERPENES 87
Zingiberene
CH3
CH CH2
HC
/ \ /
CH
\ CH
HC CH2 C CH3
\CH \CH/
2
C
HC
/ \CH
3 3
We owe our knowledge of the constitution of this monocyclic sesquiterpene

chiefly to the work of Ruzicka and van Veen. The natural hydrocarbon
1
isolated from oil of ginger root is actually a mixture of zingiberene and some
bisabolene; nevertheless, in this description the name zingiberene will be re-
tained for the natural product. More recently, Soffer et al., 2 studying the
structural formula of isozingiberene in connection with that of cadinene,
arrived at the conclusion that zingiberene possesses the configuration pic-
tured above, and not that originally proposed by Ruzicka and van Veen.
Occurrence. Zingiberene is the main constituent of ginger root oil (Zingi-
ber officinale Roscoe). The hydrocarbon has also been identified in the oil
from the roots of the Curcuma Zcdoaria Rose, by Rao, Shintre and
Simonsen. 3
Identification. Zingiberene can be characterized by several methods: (1) Most

conveniently by conducting gaseous hydrogen chloride into an ethereal solution of
zingiberene whereby isozingiberene dihydrochloride m. 169-170 is formed. Remov-

ing hydrogen chloride, Semmler and Becker
4
obtained a bicyclic hydrocarbon, viz.,
isozingiberene b 8 120-123, d 20 0.9150, [a] D -41 0', nD 1.5034. Zingiberene and

isozingiberene are isomers.
(2) When treated with hydrogen bromide, zingiberene yields a dihydrobromide m.
175, which, like the dihydrochloride, is a derivative of isozingiberene.
According to Schreiner and Kremers, the nitrosochloride of zingiberene melts
5
(3)
at 96-97. It is prepared by dissolving zingiberene in an equal volume of glacial
acetic ether and ethyl nitrite, and by slowly adding a solution of hydrogen chloride
in glacial acetic acid.
(4) The nitrosite of zingiberene melts at 97-98. However, Schreiner and Kremers
6
reported separation of the nitrosite as it occurs in two forms, one melting at 120-121,
and the other at 105. The nitrosite is prepared by the interaction of zingiberene,
sodium nitrite, and glacial acetic acid in petroleum ether.
88 HYDROCARBONS
(5) The nitrosatc of zingiberene, according to the same authors, melts at 86-88
(with decomposition). It is prepared from zingiberene ethyl nitrite and nitric acid in
glacial acetic acid solution.
(6) Semmler and Becker
found that on reduction with sodium in alcoholic solution,
7
zingiberene yields monocyclic dihydrozingiberene b? 122-125, whereas reduction

with platinum and hydrogen yields monocyclic hexahydrozingiberene bu 128-130.
Properties. Zingiberene is a colorless oil which tends to resinify, especially

on storing.
8
The following properties have been reported by Schrciner and Kremers,
9 10 n
Ruzicka, Meyer and Mingazzini, Semmler and Becker, and Moudgill:
8 9
b. about 270 (with decomposition) <XD 60 0'
b 32 100 101 8
[a] D -7322 /8
b 17 137- 139 9
Ho -73 42' u
10
b9 128-129 ri L) 1.49399 8
10
d 30 0.8090" 1.495C0
d 20 0.868-1 10
n?? 1.4916 n
8 9
0.8731 n{? 1.4984
df 0.8733 9
[RL ] D 08.37 (C 15 H 24 F3 = 07.80)
These properties point toward a monocyclic terpene containing three ethyl-

enic linkages, two of which are conjugated. This conclusion is borne out by
the large molecular exaltation.
Contrary to bisabolene, zingiberene on dehydrogcnation with sulfur gives
cadalene in very good yield.
Use. Zingiberene, as such, is not used in our industries.
Licbigs Ann. 468 (1929), 143.

l
2
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1944), 1520.
3
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 47 (1928), 17 IT.
4
Ber. 46 (1913), 1818.
6
Pharm. Arch. 4 (1901), 63, 141, 161. Of. Simonsen, "The Terpcncs," Vol. II (1932), 498.
6
Ibid.
7
Ber. 46 (1913), 1814.
8
Pharm. Arch. 4 (1901), 63. Ber. Schimmel <fc Co., Oct. (1901), 29.
9
Helv. Chim. Ada 6 (1922), 359.
w Ber. 46
(1913), 1814.
11
J. Indian Chem. Soc. 6 (1928), 255.
SESQ UITERPENES 89
The Curcumenes
C, 5 H 22 Mol. Weight 202.33
CHa
I
a CH- CH*- ell* CH a - C=CH 8
2-Methyl-6-0?-tolyl) -1-heptene
_ CH CH2-CH, CH = C
I
CII , CHa
CH 3
2-Methyl-6- (p-tolyl) -2-heptene
Occurrence. The oil occurring in the root (rhizome) of Curcuma aromatica

Salisb. contains a mixture of sesquiterpenes b 6 127-129, 0.8760-0.8764,
djJS
[a]?? -19 24' to -25 54', n 1.4929-1.4940. According to the early work
of Rao and Simonscn, 1
this isolate was described as a mixture of two mono-
cyclic hydrocarbons ('151124, viz., /-a- and /-0-curcumene. This continued

to be the status of our knowledge relative to this terpcnic product even as
late as 1927 when Gtittenberg 2 isolated the product and characterized it.
3
However, Simonsen and co-workers completed the investigation of the
later
curcumcrics, establishing their structure both by degradation and synthesis

of the racemic form. Their investigation confirmed the view that the for-
mula of the olefins contained in the natural isolate should be that delineated
above.
Isolation. It was not

until recently that the isolation of this olcfin was satis-
factorily carried out through fractional distillation. However, the most satisfactory
method is that of Simonscn et al., 4 by purification through crystalline derivatives.
Fractional distillation can also be employed.
The original sesquiterpene yielded a nitrosate m. 101, a nitrol-
Identification.
benzylaminc in. 102-104, and, when treated with hydrogen chloride in acetic acid
solution, a liquid monohydrochloride bg 150-155 and a crystalline trihydrochloride
m. 84-85. On
treatment with sodium acetate in acetic acid solution, the liquid
monohydrochloride gives J-a-curcumene, while the crystalline trihydrochloride yields
Z-/3-curcumene.
90 HYDROCARBONS
In addition to the above characteristics, Carter, Simonsen and Williams 5 reported
in more recent investigations on this olefin that the nitrosate of the dl isomer melts
at 114 with decomposition.
Properties.Based upon isolates from the decomposition of the hydro-

chloride, a very pure sample of the Z-a-curcumene is reported by Carter, Copp,
6
Rao, Simonsen and Subramaniam; it has the properties shown in the fol-
lowing tabulation. These same authors have likewise studied the Z-6-cur-
cumene obtained from the decomposition of the trihydrochloride salt, whereas
7
Carter, Simonsen and Williams published the properties of the racemic
form also listed tabularly below:
l-a-Curcumenc l-(3-Curcumene dl-Curcumene

ig 142
137
134
d25
25 0.8670
i20.6
U20 0.8802
i20
0-20 0.8821
M5461 -34 18' -48 12'

20
1.4989 1.491 1.5002
Titrations with per-benzoic acid in chloroform serve very satisfactorily to

indicate the presence of one very active double bond. Hydrogenation of the
other unsaturated linkages in the aromatic nuclei have been found to proceed
very slowly even with palladium catalysts.
Use. Curcumene is not used in our industries.
1
J. Chem. Soc. (1928), 2496.
2
Z. ges. exptl. Med. 64 (1927), 642. Chem. Abstracts 22 (1928), 4174.
3
J. Chem. Soc. (1939), 1504; (1940), 451.
*Ibid.
6
Ibid. (1940), 451.
6
Ibid. (1939), 1504.
7
Ibid. (1940), 451.
SESQUITERPENES 91
(c) BICYCLIC SESQUITERPENES.
"Cadinene
CH 3 CH,i
2
y
C
\H CU
c&
Ns
CH 2
H
HaC
Ruzicka's a-Cadinene Ruzicka's /3-Cadincnc
= Isozingibcrenc,
according to Soffer
CH
CH CH2
H.C CH CH 2
A /^
X
CII.
ci
CH 3
H 3
Cadinciie dihydrochloridc, according to Ruzicka, but Isozingibcrene dihydrochloride,

according to Soffer
Cl CH CH
-2
HC2 CH CH 2 HC CH CH
C1
HiC CH c
/ II
\/
CH
\/
CH
\
CH 2 8 H CH 2 CHs
CH H
HaC CH 3
Cadinene dihydrochloride, Cadinene, according to
according to Soffer Campbell and Soffer
Ruzicka and Stoll expressed the opinion that the naturally occurring cad-
l
inene and the cadinene regenerated from its dihydrochloride have either one
of the two structural formulas pictured above or that cadinene is a mixture
of these two isomers which these authors named a- and /3-cadinene. Later
Kimura and Mizoshita 2 advanced a second formula for this sesquiterpene.
More recently Soffer and collaborators 3 showed that Ruzicka's formula for
92 HYDROCARBONS
/3-cadinene actually that of another sesquiterpene, viz., isozingiberene, and
is
that Ruzicka's formula for cadinene dihydrochloride represents the structure

4
of isozingiberene dihydrochloride. Campbell and Soffer proved that the
ethylenic linkages of cadinene are in the 1,2 and 6,7 positions.
Several sesquiterperies occurring in nature have been regarded as optically
active forms of cadinene. The rotatory power of cadinene varies greatly in
different products. however, by no means certain whether those ses-
It is,
quiterpenes were actually cadinene, or whether they were transformed into

cadinene derivatives by the action of hydrochloric acid as, for example, the
sesquiterpenes occurring in West Indian sandalwood oil or in African copaiba
balsam oil. The tricyclic dextrorotatory sesquiterpene copaene contained in
this oil, on treatment with hydrochloric acid, is converted into laevorotatory
cadinene dihydrochloride. On the other hand, the dextrorotatory sesquiter-
pene present in Atlas cedarwood oil yields derivatives of c?-cadinene when
treated with hydrochloric acid.
Occurrence. Cadinene is one of the most widely distributed sesquiterpenes.
d-Cadinenc occurs in Atlas cedarwood oil, probably in West Indian sandal-
wood oil, in oil from wood of Junipcrus oxycedrus, etc.
l-Cadincne is found in oil of cade (hence the name cadinene), cypress, cu-
beb, etc.
In a great many cases, literature gives no indication as to the optical rota-
tion. Thus, cadinene has been found cedarwood, cedar leaves, Pinus
in oil of
pumilio, juniper berries, savin, pepper, camphor, lemongrass, ylang ylang,

olibanum, patchouly, galbanum, etc.
Isolation. Cadinene may be obtained in pure form by the preparation of its di-
hydrochloride from which the parent sesquiterpene may be regenerated either by the
action of aniline, according to Wallach, 6 or with sodium ethylate, according to Hen-
derson and Robertson. 6
For this purpose, the essential oil is fractionated in vacua, and the fraction bi2
125-140 diluted with one-third its volume of glacial acetic acid and treated with a
current of gaseous hydrogen chloride. The cadinene dihydrochloride m. 118-118.5
so obtained is decomposed as described above.
Lepeschkin suggested that cadinene be prepared in pure form by decomposing the
7
dihydrochloride with sodium ethylate and not with sodium acetate in boiling glacial
acetic acid solution, as this treatment would yield also the isomeric isocadinene.
Identification, Wallach 8 suggested a simple color reaction that may indicate the
presence of cadinene.
Dissolve cadinene in excess chloroform or glacial acetic acid; add a few drops of
concentrated sulf uric acid and shake the test tube. The solution will first be intensely
;
green, later blue, and red on warming.

A determination of the physical properties, too, may be helpful, but for definite
identification it is advisable to prepare derivatives of cadinene:
(1) The nitrosate melts at 105-110, according to Schreiner and Kremers.
9
(2) The nitrosochloride, according to the same authors, melts at 93-94.

(3) An important derivative, serving for both the isolation and characterization of
cadinene is its dihydrochloride m. 118-118.5. In order to prepare this compound,
SESQUITERPENES 93
10
Gildemeister and Hoffmann suggested diluting the fractions b. 260-280 with twice
their volume of ether, and saturating them at low temperature with a current of hy-
drogen chloride. After prolonged standing, the ether is partly distilled off and partly
allowed to evaporate. The crystals of dihydrochloride thus obtained are dried on
porous plates, washed with alcohol to remove oily impurities, and recrystallized from
ether in which they readily dissolve on heating. The pure compound is optically
active [a]v 37 27' (in 5% chloroform solution).
The dihydrochloride can also be prepared with the aid of glacial acetic acid which
has been saturated with hydrogen chloride. This modification will be particularly
adapted to the preparation of the dihydrobromide and the dihydroiodide. The glacial
acetic acid solution of the halogen acid is added to the glacial acetic acid solution of the
sesquiterpene.
It should be kept in mind that not only cadinene but other structurally related
sesquiterpenes, too, on treatment with hydrochloric acid may yield cadinene dihydro-
chloride.
(4) The dihydrobromide melts at 124-125, D -368'. M
(5) Dihydroiodide m. 105-106, [a] D -48 0'.
Properties. Cadinene a colorless, somewhat viscid oil. The following

is
characteristic properties have been reported for this sesquiterpene:
d-Cadinene
(a) From West Indian sandalwood oil, according to Deussen.

11
b 13 138M40 D +38 43'

5
d 16 . 6 0.9260 nj?' 1.50934
(b) From Atlas cedarwood oil, according to Grimal

12
(regenerated from
the dihydrochloride) :
b. 273-275 HD +48 '
d 15 0.9224 n 1.5107
(c) From cubeb oil, according to Wallach 13 (regenerated from the dihydro-
chloride): b. 274-275.
(d) From the oil of the wood of Junipcrus oxyccdrus by Mousseron, Gran-
14
ger and Ronayroux (separated by distillation at reduced pressure):
b 20 144 [a] 67 9 +08 39'

d 25 0.9186 [a] 54 o +80 23'
1.5136
l-Cadinene (regenerated from the dihydrochloride):
(a) From cubeb oil, according to Henderson and Robertson:

15
bn 134-136 []&! -125 12'
df 0.9189 nf? 1.5079

94 HYDROCARBONS
16
(b) From various oils, according to Wallach:
b. 274-275 WD -98 34'

d 20 0.918 nD 1.50647
As can be seen, the optical rotation of cadinene varies greatly with the
different products.
(c) From cade oil (regenerated from the dihydrochloride), according to

17
Campbell and Softer:
6
bn 13G-138 []f> -113 0'
df 0.9199 n? 1.5071
(d) From the oil of Ocimum gratissimum (Madagascar and Comoro Is-
18
lands) isolated by rectification over metallic sodium, according to Chiris:
bi2 123-125 <XD -133

di 0.902 n{? 1.5100
Cadinene is a very stable cannot be reduced with so-

sesqtiiterpene. It
dium in alcoholic solution. Cadinene reacts readily with halogens but does
not seem to yield any crystalline derivatives. On dehydrogenation with
sulfur, cadinene gives cadalene.
Ruzicka and Stoll 19 found that cadinene not altered when digested with
is
a 10 per cent solution of sulfuric acid in alcohol but, when treated with the
Bertram-Walbaum mixture (glacial acetic acid -f- sulfuric acid), cadinene is
isomerized to isocadinene.
20
Kafuku, Ikeda and Fujita investigated the high boiling fractions of Java-
type citronella oil distilled in Formosa and isolated a sesquiterpene to which
they assigned the name 7-cadinene. It had these properties:
b 757 266 df 0.9089

b4 117-119 nf? 1.5021
These authors assigned to their 7-cadinene this structural formula:
CH 3
CH CH2
/ \CH/ \
H^C CH-2
HC CH C=CH2
\C/ \CH/
2
CH
\
7-Cadinene
SESQUITERPENES 95
Plattner and Markus 21

an unusual cadinene from Java
identified citronella
oil; it yields a dihydrochloride m. 117.5, and has these properties:
bia 108-112 nf? 1.5098

df 0.9231 M.R. calc. 66.14
found 66.18
Cadinene as such is not used in our industries, but fractions of cer-

Use.
tain essential oils which contain cadinene citronella, for example occa-
sionally serve for the scenting of soaps and technical preparations.
1
Helv. Chim. Ada 1 (1924), 84.
2
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 61 (1930), 518.
3
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 417; 66 (1944), 1520.
*
64 (1942), 417.
Ibid.
Liebigs Ann. 238 (1887), 78.
6
6
/. Chem. Soc. 125 (1924), 1994.
''Chem. Ztg. 38 (1914), 276.
Liebigs Ann. 238 (1887), 87.
*
9
Pharm. Arch. 2 (1899), 300.
10
11
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 120 (1929), 121.
12
Compt. rend. 135 (1902), 582, 1057.
w Liebigs Ann. 238 (1887), 80.
" Compt. rend. 208 (1939), 1411.
i6
/. Chem. Soc. 125 (1924), 1992.
" Liebigs Ann. 252 (1889), 150; 271 (1892), 297, 303.
17
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 420.
18
Parfums France 7 (1929), 186.
19
Helv. Chim. Ada 7 (1923), 92.
20
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 53 (1932), 636.
21 Helv. Chim. Ada 25 (1942), 1678.
Isocadinene
C 15 H 24 Mol. Weight 204.34
CH3
CH CH 2
H2 C
/ \C / \CH
2
C C
CH
/ \ CH
s
CH
\
As the name implies, this sesquiterpene an isomer of cadinene and can
is
be obtained by treating cadinene with the Bertram- Walbaum mixture (gla-

96 HYDROCARBONS
Ruzicka and Capato 1 prepared isocadinene
cial acetic acid -f sulfuric acid).
2
synthetically from nerolidol and bisabolene. Troeger and Feldmann, and
3
Lepeschkin isolated isocadinene from oil of cade.
The various products thus obtained had the folloAving properties:
20
Isocadinene 124-12G 0.914 1.515

Cade oil sesquiterpene 124-128 0.918 1.515
Synthetic sesquiterpene 125-126 0.916 1.509
On dchydrogenation, isocadinene, like cadinene, yields cadalene, but un-

like cadinene, isocadinene does not form a crystalline hydrochloride. Hen-
4
derson and Robertson suggested for isocadinene the structural formula pic-
tured above, but gave no proof for their contention.
Use. Isocadinene is not used in our industries.
1
Chim. Ada 8 (1925), 259.
Jlelv.
2
Arch. Pharm. 236 (1898), 692.
4
/. Chem. Soc. (1926), 2811.
Sesquiterpene from Camphor Oil

C 15 H 24 Mol. Weight 204.34
Komatsu, Fujimoto and Tanaka isolated from camphor oil a sesquiter-

!
pene bi 2 157-1()0, which on dehydrogenation with sulfur yielded cadalene.

Komatsu, Fujimoto and Tanaka suggested for this sesquiterpene the follow-
ing structural formula:
CHo
C CHo
H2 C
/ \CII/ \CH
2
HC2 CH C CH3
\C / \ /
CH 2
C
II 3 C
/ \CH
3
T
f 6Y ;
. not used as such in our industries but the frac-
This sesquiterpene is
tions of camphor oil containing this hydrocarbon find wide application for
the scenting of all kinds of technical preparations.
1
Mem. Coll. Sci. Kyoto Imp. Univ. A, 14 (1931), 149. Chem. Zentr. II (1931), 3469.
SESQUITERPENES 97
Sumbulene
CH 3 CII 3
CII CH2 CH CIT 2

/ \ / \ / \ / \
HC CH CH2 EC CH CH
II
or || ||
HC CH C-CH 3 HC CH C-CH 3
\ / \ / \ / \ /
CH CH CH CII 2
CH CH
/ \ / \
H3 C CII 3 II 3 C CII 3
1
Occurrence. Sumbulene was first reported in muskroot oil by Bauer,
2
According to Dyson, it is the active odoriferous constituent of the volatile
oil derived from the sumbul root (Ferula sumbul Hook., fam. Umbclliferae).
Dyson suggested either one of the structural formulas pictured above.
Identification. On treatment with hydrochloric acid, sumbulcne yields cadinene

hydrochloride.
Properties. Sumbulene is a clear, colorless liquid with an odor reminiscent

3
of animal musk (?). Bauer reported the following properties of sumbulcne:
. 5 120-130 WD +10 21'
d 20 0.8999 nD 1.49618
Use. Sumbulene is not used in our industries.
1
Breslau Dissertation (1915). Chem. Abstracts 15 (1921), 2151.
2
Perfumery Essential Oil Record, Special No. (1936), 6. Cf. Ber. Rchimmd & Co. (1937), 83.
3
Broslau Dissertation (1915). Chem. Abstracts 15 (1921), 2151.
98 HYDROCARBONS
Sesquibenihene

CH 3
CH CH2
/ \ / \
H^C CII C=
H2 C CII CH 2
\ / \ /
CH .
CH 2
C
Occurrence. In the volatile oil from the root of Chamaccyparis formosensis

Matsum.
Isolation. By repeated fractional distillation.

Identification. By the physicochemical properties.
l
Properties. Katsura reported these properties of scsquibenihene:
b 10 130 HD 29
-4 7'
df 0.9560 nf? 1.5033
Almost ten years prior to this work of Katsura, Kafuku and lehikawa 2
had investigated the chemical composition of the oil derived from the wood of
Chamaecyparis formosensis Matsum and found that it contains a new bi-
cyclic sesquiterpene CisH^ viz., d-sesquibenihene which seemed to be
closely related to cadinene. The sesquibenihene isolated by Kafuku and

lehikawa had these properties:
4
bio 127M31 af) +35 42'
4 4
d} 0.91G2 n? 1.5088
Dihydrochloride m. 103-104, dihydrobromide m. 112-114, dihydro-

iodide m. 117-118.
Use. Sesquibenihene, as such, is not used in our industries.
!/. Chem. Soc. Japan 63 (1942), 1460, 1465, 1470, 1477. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 3447.
2
Ibid. 64 (1933), 1021.
SESQUITERPENES 99
Orthodonene
This sesquiterpene belongs to the eudalene type.

Fujita found that the oil distilled from the herb Orthodon
l
Occurrence.
lanceolatum Kudo (fam. Labiatae) contains 2 per cent of a sesquiterpene with
two double bonds, and he named this hydrocarbon orthodonenc.

Identification. Orthodonene gives a nitrosite m. 152- 154.
2
Properties. Fujita reported these properties of orthodonene:
b 770 254 aj? -13 17'
df 0.9017 n?? 1.4947
Use. Orthodonene is not used in our industries.
!/. Chem. Soc. Japan 64 (1933), 1181.

2
Ibid.
The Caryophyllenes
C 15 H 24 Mol. Weight 204.34
"Caryophyllene" the term applied in the trade to a particular fraction

is
of a number of essential oils, principally clove; this fraction most often yields
evidence of being a mixture of Ci 5 H24 hydrocarbons, primarily bicyclic ses-
quiterpenes.
The literature discloses that to date at least three isomeric hydrocarbons
have been derived from this commercial product, chiefly through their reac-
tions, as they do not respond wholly to other separative means. These in-
dividual isolates possess particular properties and are universally referred to
as a-, /3- and 7-caryophyllenes.
Although the chemical relationship of these particular sesquiterpenes is
not yet clear, researches in the last decade have enabled workers to advance
structural formulas for some of these caryophyllencs.
These formulas incorporate a gem-dimethyl cyclobutane ring, the presence
of which has been proved by oxidation of caryophyllene to caryophyllenic
acid and to norcaryophyllenic acid, and through the synthesis of the latter
by Rydon. The nature of the second ring and the number of its ring mem-
1
bers, as well as its substituents, are still in doubt. At the present time, evi-
dence favors a formula with a fused 4- and 6-membered ring suggested by
Ruzicka. 2 Ramage and Simonsen, 3 after earlier explorations into the nature
of the j8- isomer, came to the conclusion that Ruzicka's formula is probably
100 HYDROCARBONS
correct and that and 7-caryophyllene are stereoisomers. On the basis of
ft-
Ruzicka's representation of /3-caryophyllene, the two stereoisomers would

have the following relationship:
CH
/CH,>
.
HaCL / \ HaCL \C
CH C CH 3 >C CH CH 3
H ^C
I I II HaC-^l | ||
H*C CH CH H*C CH CH
r c*
!H
/3-Caryophyllene 7-Caryophyllene
No commentary on the structure of the a- compound is justified at this

writing.
Occurrence. a-CaryopJiyHcne occurs in clove bud and stem oil, and in hop
oil; a content of 30 per cent has recently been reported by Kimura
4
in Alpinia
chinensis Roscoc, in Egyptian hashish by Simonsen and Todd. 5 Huzita c
discovered this sesquiterpcrie in orthodon oils.
^-Caryophyllene occurs in oils of clove bud and clove stem, in African, Para
and Maracaibo copaiba balsam, in Ceylon cinnamon and possibly cinnamon
leaf, and in West Indian sandalwood oil. McElvain, Walters and Bright
7
8
reported 14 per cent in oil of catnip; Itikawa and Yamasita identified the
hydrocarbon in the volatile oil from Vitcx nccjundo Linn.
A mixture of unidentified isomcrs of caryophyllcnc has been found in oils
of lavender, thyme, pepper, pimenta and many others.*
Isolation. The most convenient starting material for the isolation of this mixture
of sesquiterpenes is clove bud and clove stem oil. However, the crude caryophyllene
fraction obtainedby mere fractional distillation from clove bud oil contains also some
acetyieugenol which can he removed by saponification with alcoholic potassium
hydroxide. The crude caryophyllene obtained by the fractionation of clove stem oil
does not contain acetyieugenol.
For the isolation of crude caryophyllene, Semmler and Mayer 9
employed the
following procedure:
"Shake clove oil with a slight excess of a 7 per cent soda solution in order to
remove most of the eugenol, extract the aqueous solution with ether, and concentrate
the ether extract on a steam bath until the ether is evaporated. Free the crude
caryophyllene from remaining eugenol by repeated treatment with a 5 per cent
soda solution, and distill the crude caryophyllene with steam."
*
According to Naves [Hclv. Chim. Ada 31 (1948), 380], laryophyllene not a natural,
is
biological constituent of clove bud oil, but originates under the influence of boiling water
in the course of steam distillation (cf. "Caryophyllene Oxide").
SESQUITERPENES 101
When working with larger quantities, it will be preferable to isolate the caryophyllene
by fractional distillation from clove bud or clove stem oil, and to remove any eugenol
remaining in the caryophyllene fraction by treatment with sodium hydroxide solution.
A fraction boiling from 250-260 will include the caryophyllenes from most sources.
Mere fractionation does not accomplish the resolution of these sesquiterpene dis-
tillates into chemically pure substances; however, the fractions thus obtained represent
substantial yields of the isomers, as determined by the preparation of derivatives.
The product, identified as the /3- isomer through its derivatives, ordinarily consti-
tutes the principal portion of the caryophyllene fraction and may be obtained from
the cut bg-io 118-120 with D
/
~ 80
the almost optically inactive fraction
ba ~ ;
100 constitutes the a- isomer (boiling points determined in different laborato-

ries). In both cases yield and properties of known characteristic derivatives will give
an indication as to the percentage composition of these fractions. In this regard, see
"
also next section on Identification."
10
y-Caryophyllene is best isolated, according to Deussen, by distillation of the
reaction product after treatment of the blue /3-nitrosite with hot alcohol.
Identification. As the caryophyllenes are admittedly not homogeneous, diagnostic
tests must necessarily take account of yield as well as properties of derivatives formed ;
these facts recommend the preparation of several compounds to serve as confirmatory

evidence of composition.
The nitrogen derivatives most often used to characterize caryophyllenes, according
to Deussen, 11 12 13 14 Deussen, Loesche and Klemm, 16 Deussen and Lewisohn, 16 Kamage
' ' '
and Simonsen 17 and Chapman, 18 arc summarized in the following tabulation, indicating
melting points and optical rotations :
ft- 7-
I 122
Nitrosochloridc 177 150 []n + 1443' lfi - 17
-084'i II 147
[] D -3341
/16
I (Blur) 115
-HGGG'O' 12 -"
[a]n
(in petroleum ether)
16
Nitrosite 116 13 Does not form
II (White) 134
4
+1120' n
[afe
(in 1.8% benzene solution)
Nitrol-
18 * 14,10 14.16
benzylamine 130 172 172
18
Nitrolpiperidine 153
18
Nitrosate 163
Nitrosobromide 144-145 12
Many of these compounds are photolytic and thermosensitive and thus care should
be exercised in order to insure isolation of the expected derivative. This is especially
20
true of the nitrosite (cf. Hoffmann, 19 and Deussen 2l ).
also Valenzuela and Daniels
Aside from the melting point, the optical rotation, too, may serve as a guide in
identifying the sesquiterpene: the nitrosochlorides of the a-, ft- and 7- compounds
yield significantly different values for []D, while the blue nitrosite of the /3- isorner is
remarkable in its high value.
*
Prepared from the nitrosochloride.
102 HYDROCARBONS
using one of these nitrogenous derivatives, recommended the follow-
22
Deusscn ct al.,
ing sensitive test for the presence of /3-caryophyllene :
When refluxed with ligroinc, 0-caryophyllene nitrosite forms dehydrocaryophyllene

nitrosate, as well as anothercompound which can be purified by solution in acetone
and precipitation with petroleum ether. The pure substance crystallizes in the form
of white needles m. 1 59. The same compound can be obtained if gaseous nitrous acid
is conducted into an ethereal solution of caryophyllene. The solution will turn blue
and, after saturation with gaseous nitrous acid, precipitate a voluminous whitish yellow
substance, while the blue color disappears. After carefully redissolving in acetone or
warm ethyl acetate, the compound can be obtained in the form of characteristic white
silk-like needles in. 159-U)0
(with decomposition).
A further reaction to identify these sesquitcrpenes and to distinguish a- and /?-
isomers is the hydration of the caryophyllene fraction whereby a- and /3-caryophyllene
alcohols CisIIêO are obtained. This can be achieved by using the Bertram- Walbaum
reagent:
Dissolve 25 g. of the hydrocarbon in a mixture of 1000 g. of glacial acetic acid, 25 g.
of concentrated sulfuric acid and 40 g. of water, and warm the mixture for some time
on a steam bath Remove the more volatile products by steam distillation, and distill
the pure alcohol.
Asahina and Tsukamoto 23
suggested hydrating caryophyllene by using Aschan's
reagent (sulfuric acid monohydrate in ethereal solution) which reacts quicker and is
easier to employ. From the mixture of (3- and a-caryophyllene alcohol, the former may
be separated by distillation in soda-alkaline solution, while the a- form may be isolated
by acidifying the residue and distilling it. a-Caryophyllerie alcohol has these proper-
ties :
m. 117 [a] D
bio 143- 152 njj 1.5010
7
dl 0.9S60 Phenylurethane m. ISO
On dehydration, a-caryophyllene alcohol yields clovene but no isoclovcne, and in

from /^-caryophyllene alcohol.
this respect differs
The /3-caryophyllene alcohol has been isolated by Wallach and co-workers, 24 and
Asahina and Tsukamoto: 2fi
m. 94-96 24
b. 287-289 24
HD -548' 25
Phenylurethane m. 13G-137 24
The 7- product also melts at 95-96, according to Deussen.

26
Another derivative that in time may be most useful is the adduct, prepared in vary,
27
ing yields from the commercial caryophyllenes, with maleic anhydride: CigHêOa-
m. 98, and the derived dicarboxylic acid CigH^sO^ m. 208. However, the quanti-
tative studies conducted by Ruzicka et al., 28 as well as the investigations by Goodway
and West, 29 and Naves and Perrottet, 30 indicate that in the sftldition compound the
nature of the original sesquiterpene fraction remains still questionable; thus the exact
correspondence to an a-, /3- or 7- isomer is not clear.
SESQUITERPENES 103
A similar type of derivative has been prepared by Plattner and Werner 31 from the
dimethyl ester of acetylene dicarboxylic acid. This ester, upon hydrolysis, yields an
acid derivative m. 122-123 and a prepared 2ran.s-dianilidc m. 228. These authors
also secured the adduct of caryophyllene with azodiformic ethyl ester C2iH 34 N 2 04,
m. 139.
A further compound frequently used to characterize the j3- isomer is the dihydro-
chloride, which obtained, according to Robertson, Kcrr and Henderson, by treat-
is 32
ing an ethereal solution of the caryophyllene with dry hydrogen chloride gas at 0,
whereby the dextrorotatory dihydrohalide m. 60, fa]u -f 67 12' (in alcohol), is formed
in nearly quantitative yields. That the 7- product gives a dihalogen derivative of
similar melting point was earlier confirmed by Deussen. 33 a-Oaryophyllene, on the
other hand, does not yield a crystalline dihydrochloride, differing thereby from the
other isomcrs.
Properties. As indicated above, all evidence points toward the chemical

impurity of the "caryophyllenos." The following properties describe iso-
lates obtained by Walbaum and Iliithig, 31 Schimmel & Co., :i5 Deussen, 36
Ramage and Simonsen, 37 Deussen, 38 Chapman, 39 Robertson, Korr and Hen-

40 41
derson, Gibson, Robertson and Sword, Ruzicka, Iluber, Plattner, Desha-
42 43 44 45
pande and Studer, Naves and Perrottet, Goodway and West, Rydon,
Ruzicka and Wind 46 and Seidel, Miiller and Rchinz: 47
104 HYDROCARBONS
These data represent constants from several sources. Walbaum and
Huthig
34
isolated their product from Ceylon cinnamon oil; Schimmel & Co., 35
and Naves and Perrottet 43 distilled their fractions from clove oil, whereas
the a- products came from both hop and clove oil. All 7-caryophyllenes
were derived through the /3-caryophyllene nitrosite.
A most valuable index as to what the tradeproducing in several quarters

is
may be had by reference to a recent publication by Ruzicka et al. who re-

48
port the following constants determined simultaneously on lots of current

industrial distillations:
It has already been mentioned that the caryophyllenes can be hydra ted to
alcohols possessing characteristic properties.
An exhaustive investigation on hydrogenation has been carried out by
49
Naves and Perrottet.
Lastly, where diagnosis demands support from oxidative products of deg-

50
radation, the worker should be guided by the findings of Rydon, Ruzicka
et al.,
51
and Evans et al. 52 These researches have not only supplied the key
to the structure of the /3- and 7- isomers but also demonstrated certain proved
oxidation products (caryophyllenic and norcaryophyllenic acids) as charac-
the natural caryophyllenes. A flow sheet of the possibilities in
teristic of
this scheme of derivatives is illustrated here. Ozone and nitric acid are
ordinarily used to obtain these oxidation products:
SESQUITERPENES 105
8
CD
Q>
,0
<M CD
(N
<M co
10 IO
-f-
CD
(N IO
* 00
00 CO
04
CD 10
CM
O
LO
O
CD CD
o
rH
1
00
S
O
CO
O
SH
l-H
Q
*
o
i
.
Caryophyllene fractions are quite widely used for the scenting of
cosmetics and soaps, andôf many technical preparations.
1
/. Chem. Soc. (1936), 593; (1937), 1340.
2
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 64 (1935), 509. Cf. Ruzicka and Zimincrmann, Helv. Chim. Ada 18
(1935), 219.
3
/. Chem. Soc. (1938), 1208. Cf. Ibid. (1937), 73; (1936), 741; (1935), 532, 1581; (1934),
1806. Naves and Perrottet (Helv. Chim. Ada 24 (1941), 789) consider caryophyllene
homogeneous hydrocarbon. In a recent publication on caryophyllene oxide,
principally a
Treibs (Chem. Ber. 80, No. 1 (1947), 56) presented some chemical evidence against
Ruzicka's caryophyllene formula.
106 HYDROCARBONS
4
/. Pharm. Soc. Japan 60 (1940), 145; Abstracts (in German) 51. Chem. Zentr. II (1940),
2504.
6
J. Chem. Soc. (1942), 188.
6
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 60 (1939), 1081; 61 (1940), 137. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 6312
6752.
7
/. Am. Chem.
Soc. 64 (1942), 1828.
8
Chem. Soc. Japan 61 (1940), 787. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 7241.
/.
9
Ber. 43 (1910), 3452. Sec also Schreincr and Kremers, Pharm. Arch. 2 (1899), 280.
10
J. prakt. Chem. 145 (1936), 31. Liebigs Ann. 359 (1908), 251.
11
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 114 (1926), 109.
12
Ibid. 146 (1936), 31.
13
Ibid. 120 (1929), 140; [2], 83 (1911), 484.
Liebigs Ann. 388 (1912), 136.
14
16
Ibid. 369 (1909), 48.
16
Ibid. 359 (1908), 245; 356 (1907), 8.
17
/. Chem. Soc. (1938), 1208.
18
Ibid. (1928), 785.
19
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 56 (1934), 1894.
20
Philippine J. Sci. 34 (1927), 187.
Liebigs Aim. 388 (1912), 155.
21
22
J. prakt. Chem. II, 90 (1914), 324. Liebigs Ann. 388 (1912), 138.
23
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan No. 484 (1922), 463; see also 49 (1929), 186, 1202. Cf. Simonsen,
'The Terpenes," Vol. II (1932), 527.
Liebigs Ann. 271 (1892), 288; 279 (1894), 393.
24
25
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan No. 484 (1922), 463. Chem. Abstracts 16 (1922), 3312.
20
/. prakt. Chem. 145 (1936), 31.
27
Ruzicka and Zimmerman, IIclv. Chim. Ada 18 (1935), 219.
28
Helv. Chim. Acta 24 (1941), 1219.
29
/. Chem. Soc. (1939), 1853.
30
Helv. Chim. Acta 24 (1941), 789.
31
32
J. Chem. Soc. 127 (1925), 1945.
33
Z. angew. Chem. 36 (1923), 348. Liebigs Ann. 388 (1912), 155.
34
/. prakt. Chem. II, 66 (1902), 54.
35
38
J. prakt. Chem. II, 90 (1914), 324.
37
/. Chem. Soc. (1938), 1208.
Liebigs Ann. 359 (1908), 246, 252.
38
39
J. Chem. Soc. (1928), 785.
40
/Wa. 127 (1925), 1945.
41
Ibid. 129 (1926), 165.
42
Helv. Chim. Acta 22 (1939), 722.
"Ibid. 24 (1941), 796.
44
/. Chem. Soc. (1939), 1853.
45
/for/. (1939), 537.
46
Helv.Chim. Acta 14 (1931), 427.
47
Ibid. 27 (1944), 738.
48
Helv. Chim. Acta 24 (1941), 1219.
"Ibid. 24 (1941), 789.
M J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 54 (1935), 315. J. Chem. Soc. (1936),
593; (1937), 1340.
61
Ilelv. Chim. Acta 14 (1931), 423; 18 (1935), 219; 19 (1936), 343; 26 (1943), 966.
62
J. Chem. Soc. (1934), 1806; (1935), 532, 1581; (1936), 741. Ramage and Simonsen,
ibid. (1937), 73.

W. R. Littlejohn, "The Caryophyllenes," Perfumery Essential Oil Record 39 (1948),
190.
SESQ UITERPENES 107
Humulene
Although our present knowledge does not permit advancing a structure

for this compound, it is apparent that humulene and a-caryophyllene are
very closely related. The exact nature of this relationship still awaits chemi-
cal clarification. Among some investigators these products are regarded as
isomeric forms of the same molecule (cf. Deussen, and Evans,
1
Ramage and
2
Simonsen ), a possibility that seems not unlikely.
Occurrence. Chapman 3 first isolated humulene from oil of hops, later from
clove oil but in much smaller proportion.
Isolation. By fractional distillation of oil of hops: b. 256-261, b 60 168-173, and

rectification over sodium.
4
Identification. Chapman recorded the following information relative to derivatives
prepared from humulene:
Dihydrochloride Crystalline form not isolated

Nitrosochloride m. 176
Nitrolpiperidine m. 153
Nitrolbenzylamine m. 136
Nitrosate m. 163
Nitrosite m. 114
6
Properties. Chapman found these properties for purified humulene:
(1895) (1928)
b. 2G3-266 b3 99-100
d}i 0.9001
d|g 0.8977 d$ 0.8923
M?? -0 30' to +1 30' WD -fl 42'
n{? 1.5021 ng> 1.5001
Use. Humulene is not used in our industries.
1
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 83 (1911), 483; [2], 120 (1929), 133.
*J. Chem. Soc. (1934), 1806.
3
Ibid. 67 (1895), 54, 780; (1928), 785; (1929), 359.
4
Ibid. (1928), 785.
6
Ibid. 67 (1895), 54, 780; (1928), 785; (1929), 359.

Stotherd "Asymmetric Photochemical Decomposition of Humulene
Mitchell,
Nitrosite by Circularly Polarized Light," /. Chem. Soc. (1930), 1829-34.
108 HYDROCARBONS
Selinene
24 Mol. Weight 204.34
CH 3 GIL
C CH 2 H GH 3 C CH CH,
\ / \ C /C / \CH/ \C
HC CH HoC C
nc C
I
CII
\ CII HoO C
I
CH 2
\ CH
2 2 2 2
\ / \ CII/
H C H2 C CH 2
2 2
CH 3 CH 3
tt-Seliriene /3-Selinone
This bicyclic sesquiterpene containing two ethylcnic linkages was first ob-
served in oil of celery seed by Ciamician and Silber L and later identified by
Schimmcl & Co. 2 Scmmler and Rissc 3
expressed the opinion that the natu-
rally occurring scsquiterpene is a mixture of a- and /3-selinene in which the
|3-form largely predominates. The same authors found that the natural
sesquiterpene and that regenerated from its hydrochloridc differ in regard
to their physical properties; they named the former /3-selinene and the latter
a-selinene. Huzicka and collaborators 4 made the important observation
that /3-selinene on dehydrogenation yields eudalene and postulated the struc-
tural formulas shown above for the two isomers.
Occurrence. The oil distilled from the seed of celery (Apiwn gravcolcns)
contains about 20 per cent of seliriene.
Isolation. Celery seed oil is first freed from phenolic constituents by slinking it
with an aqueous 5% sodium hydroxide solution; the then fractionated, the frac-
oil is
tion b. 265--273 consisting mainly of selinene. The sesquiterpene may be purified
by the preparation of its dihydrochloride and by regenerating selinene from the di-
hydrochloride.
Identification. Selinene can be characterized by its dihydrochloride m. 72- 74,
[oi\D +18 0' (in chloroform), which is formed from both the a- and the /?- isomer by
conducting a current of gaseous hydrochloric; acid (diluted with 3 parts of air) through
an ethereal solution of the sesquiterpene.
Ruzicka, Wind and Koolhaas reported that the freshly prepared dihydrochloride
6
has a melting point of 52, [|o 70 0' (in chloroform), but that on keeping for some
years it changes into a higher melting dihydrochloride m. 72-74. When heated
with milk of lime at 95, the dihydrochloride is converted into selinenol or a-eudesmol
m. 78-79, H
D +38 0' (in chloroform). (See "Kudcsmol" or "Selinenol.")
Properties. The
following properties have been reported for selinene:
ci-Selinene (regenerated from the dihydrochloride):
128-132 +01 30'

20
20 0.9190 1.50920
SESQUITERPENES 109
6
Semmler and Risse obtained this product by treating its dihydrochloride
with potassium hydroxide in methyl alcoholic solution. When using sodium
ethylate for the regeneration from the dihydrochloride, Schimmel & Co.
7
obtained a-selinene having these properties:
b. 2(>8-272 aD +49 30'
dljj 0.9232 nb 1.50483

d 2() 0.9196
(3-Selincnc (natural product), according to Semmler and Risse:
biy 136-139 01, +31 30'
d 20 0.9107 nb 1.50311
Selinene structurally related to dipentene: like dipcntene, a-selinene can

is
be isomerized readily by treatment with sulfuric acid in alcoholic solution,

8
whereby, according to Ruzicka and Stoll, a hydrocarbon, probably either
4 4
6- or e-selinene, b i2 130, d} 0.9234, a }) +194 18', nj 1.5107 is obtained.
This hydrocarbon no longer forms a crystalline dihydrochloride.
Use. Selinene, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Ber. 30 (1897), 492, 490, 501.
*Bcr. Rchimmd & Co., April (1910), 96.
3
Ber. 45 (1912), 3301, 3725; 46 (1913), 599.
4
Uelv. Chim. Ada 5 (1922), 363, 926; 6 (1923), 846.
5
1 hid. 14 (1931), 1147.
6
Ber. 46 (1912), 3301, 3725; 46 (1913), 599.
7
Ber. Schimmel &
Co., April (1910), 96.
8
Uelv. Chim. Ada 6 (1923), 850.
Eudesmene
C 15 H 24 Mol. Weight 204,34
Baker and Smith, and Penfold 2 isolated from the oils of several Eucalyptus
1
and Lcptospcrmum species a bicyclic scsquiterpene CisH24 which was named

eudesmene. Semmler arid collaborators 3 prepared eudesmene by dehydra-
tion of eudesmol, a bicyclic sesquiterpene alcohol frequently occurring in
4
eucalyptus Ruzicka, Meyer and Mingazzini
oil. obtained eudesmene by
boiling eudesmol with concentrated formic acid. However, according to
Ruzicka, Wind and Koolhaas, the naturally occurring sesquiterpene to which
5
the name eudesmene had been assigned is not identical with the synthetic
eudesmene but rather with one of the sclinenes. (See also "Selinene.")
Occurrence. In several Eucalyptus and Leptospermum oils (?).

110 HYDROCARBONS
The eudesmene prepared by Semmler and collaborators 6 and
Properties.
regenerated from the dihydrochloride m. 79-80 had these properties:
b7 122-124 [] D +54 6'
d 20 0.9196 nD 1.50874
7
Ruzicka, Meyer and Mingazzini reported for their synthetic eudesmene:
bis 132-136 D +52 36'
df 0.9175 nj? 1.5134
Ruzicka, Wind and Koolhaas 8

reported for eudesmene dihydrochloride a
melting point of 74-75.
Use. Eudesmene is not used in our industries.
1
/. Proc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales 46 (1911), 267.
*Ibid. 64 (1920), 197; 66 (1921), 170; 66 (1922), 82, 162. Perfumery Essential Oil Record
13 (1922), 82.
3
Ber. 46 (1913), 2029, 2303.
4
Helv. Chim. Ada 6 (1922), 362.
6
Ibid. 14 (1931), 1132, 1139.
Ber. 46 (1913), 2029, 2303.
7
Helv. Chim. Ada 6 (1922), 362.
*Ibid. 14 (1931), 1132, 1139.
Briggs and Short, "Sesquitcrpene Alcohol of the Oil of Eucalyptus nova-anglica,"

J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 47 (1928), 323T.
L. Ruzicka, PI. A. Plattner and A. Fiirst, "Degradation of Dihydroeudesmol with
Chromic Acid," Helv. Chim. Ada 25 (1942), 1364.
Aromadendrene
H
H 2
9^ Vc^ CH 2
JCH-CH
CH 2
This structural formula of aromadendrene, a sesquiterpene containing one

ethylenic linkage, was suggested by Radcliffe and Short, and later was con-
1
firmed by Naves and Perrottet. 2

3
Occurrence. According to Smith, aromadendrene the principal sesqui-
is
terpene occurring in several eucalyptus oils for example, E. globulus, E. ran-

SESQUITERPENES 111
florctjE. nova-anglica, and in the oils derived from various Lepiospermum

species. In the majority of eucalyptus oils, aromadendrene occurs associated
with eudesmol.

Identification. The presence of aromadendrene is indicated by the following color
reaction:
Dissolve two drops of aromadendrene in 2 to 3 cc. of glacial acetic acid and conduct
bromine vapors into the test tube. On shaking, the solution will assume a crimson
color which soon changes to violet and indigo blue if aromadendrene is present. As
this color reaction is likewise displayed by guaiene and eudesmene, its value remains
questionable.
According to Radcliffe and Short, aromadendrene, on oxidation with varying
4
amounts of potassium permanganate, yields aromadendrone C^HÔ, m. 84.5-85

(recrystallized from ice cold methanol), aromadendrene glycol CisHêC^, m. 118, and
traces of an acid m. 175-175.5 (decomp.). The glycol can be further oxidized to
aromadendrone, a saturated ketone which reacts with benzaldehyde, yielding a mono-
benzylidene derivative m. 66-66.5; p-nitrophenylhydrazone m. 131; semicarbazones,
a- m. 195-19G (decomp.), /3- m. 201.5-202.5 (decomp.).
5 6
Properties. Briggs and Short, and Naves and Pcrrottct reported these
properties for aromadendrene:
bio 121 5
D +448' 6
b6 114 06 []|?7 -66' 5
5 5
df 0.9110 ng> 1.4978
6 6
df 0.9166 nf? 1.4982
These latter authors likewise reported other properties such as the para-
chor and spectral data.
Radcliffe and Short 7 recorded the following properties of sesquiterpene
fractions from eucalyptus oils containing aromadendrene:
Q
Source bio d% WSTTO n i3
E. rariflora 122-127 0.9122-0.9197 +1 4' to +15 41' 1.4991-1.5024
E. globulus 120-125 0.9159 +0 48' to +2 4' 1.4990-1.5004
Dehydrogenation of aromadendrene yields S-guaiazulene, picrate m. 122.

Use. Aromadendrene, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
/. Chem. Soc. (1938), 1200.
2 Helv. Chim. Ada 23 (1940), 912.Chem. Abstracts 36 (1941), 109.
*J. Proc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales 36 (1901), 124. Baker and Smith, "A Research on the
Eucalypts," 2nd Ed. (1920), 416. See also Briggs and Short, J. Chem. Soc. (1928), 2524.
4
J. Chem. Soc. (1938), 1200.
6
Ibid. (1928), 2527.
6
Helv. Chim. Ada 23 (1940), 914.
7
J. Chem. Soc. (1938), 1200.
112 HYDROCARBONS
Calamene
C 15 H 2 4 Mol. Weight 204.34
The constitution of this hydrocarbon has not been determined. It was

named calamcne by Semmler and Spornitz who isolated it from calamus root
1
oil. Ruzicka and collaborators 2 found that on dehydrogenation with sulfur,

calamene is reduced to cadalene. From this and the fact that calamene on
catalytic hydrogenation yields tetrahydrocalamcne CisH^s, it may be as-
sumed that calamene is a bicyclic sesquiterpene of the cadinene group, con-
taining two ethylenic linkages. However, it would appear from the recent
publications of Bohmc that this hydrocarbon needs considerably more study
3
in order to elaborate its structure, as this author has reported an empirical

H
formula of Ci 5 2 2 and a boiling range of 137-139 at 12 mm. for a calamene-
like sesquiterpene.
Occurrence. Calamene occurs in the oil distilled from the rhizomes of
Acorus calamus L.
Isolation. By fractional distillation in racuo of calamus root oil; the fraction bi2
130-135 contains the sesquiterpene.
Identification. Calamene does not yield any crystalline derivatives. It cannot be
hydrated.
Properties. Distilling the sesquiterpene over metallic sodium, Semmler and

4 5
Spornitz obtained calamene with the following properties; Ruzicka also
reported on calamene:
bi4 127-130 r'

D +5 0'
4
b 10 . 6 123-126 4
nf? 1. 50572 4
4 B
dig 0.9224 n}? 1.5023
5
d}? 0.9231
Use. Calamene is not used in our industries.

l
Ber. 46 (1913), 3700.
2
Helv. Chim. Ada 6 (1922), 348, 358.
3
Arch. Pharm. 278 (1940), 1.
4
Ber. 46 (1913), 3700.
6
Helv. Chim. Ada 5 (1922), 348, 358.
(d) TRICYCLIC SESQUITEUPENKS.
The Santalenes
C 15 H 24 Mol. Weight 204.34
Before discussing these tricyclic constituents of East Indian sandalwood

oil, it seems advisable to describe briefly the teresantalic acid to which these
substances can be degraded.

SESQUITERPENES 113
Teresantalic Acid
Mol. Weight 166.21
This tricyclic acid occurs free and as ester in East Indian sandalwood oil.
The following structural formulas were assigned to it:
H
HC' -C-CHy(io)
or HsC-C-COOH
JCOOH a) 0)
\H <3
>C
Teresantalic acid
1
Ruzicka and Stoll, however, pointed out that both formulas are struc-
turally identical, differing merely in regard to their spatial arrangement.
2
According to Asahina, Ishidate and Momo.se, tercsantalic acid melts at
f
158, b 20 155-156, [a]]f -74 \2 (in benzene). It is extremely resistant

to oxidizing agents, but readily attacked by hydrogen chloride with resulting
ring fission and formation of a hydrochloride rn. 199. On reduction, this

3
hydrochloride, according to Semmler arid Bartelt, yields dihydroteresantalic
acid m. 226.
1
Ilelv. Chim. Ada 6 (1922), 928.
2
Bcr. 68 (1935), 87. Cf. Hupe and Toini, Bcr. 49 (1916), 2563; and Ruzicka and Thomarm,
IIclv. Chim. Ada 18 (1935), 355.
3^^.40 (1907), 3102.
a- and P-Santalene
The two scsquiterpenes occurring in East Indian sandalwood oil, viz., a-

and /3-santalene, have been the subject of many investigations. The struc-
tural formula of a-santalene, a tricyclic sesquiterpcne, has been established,
whereas that of /3-santalerie, a bicyclic sesquiterpene, has only been suggested
by Ruzicka and Thomann who point out that these products are related to
}
one another as tricyclene and camphene. The two hydrocarbons can be

separated only by prolonged fractional distillation; therefore, it is doubtful
whether either one has been obtained in pure form. Moreover, other "san-
talenes" have been obtained synthetically but little is known about their
constitution.
1
Ilelv. Chim. Ada 18 (1935), 355.
114 HYDROCARBONS
a-Santalene
a-Santalene is a derivative of teresantalic acid and, in another sense, of

eudalene (see also "a-Santalol").
CH ,CH 3
.CHa
HC=C X
CHs
Occurrence. In East Indian sandalwood oil.
Isolation, repeated fractional distillation of East Indian sandalwood oil.

By
Identification. a-Santalene can be characterized by the preparation of its nitroso-
chloride. It is advisable to use the method of Ehestadt, 1 Wallach's method not being
well suited for this purpose.
A
concentrated sodium nitrite solution is added very slowly (drop by drop) to one
and a half of the theoretically necessary quantity of 32% hydrochloric acid, and the
gases thus created are conducted into an ice-cold ethereal solution (1 1) of a-santalene. :
The nitrosochloride will have a melting point of 112-117.

Or, a solution of nitrosylchloride in petroleum ether is added, at low temperature,
to a solution of a-santalene in petroleum ether. According to Guerbet, 2 the melting
point of the nitrosochloride, in this case, is 122. The nitrosochloride yields a nitrol-
piperidine m. 108-109.
Properties. The following properties have been reported for a-santalene by

Schimmel & Co. 3
and Semmler: 4
3 4
252 -20 0.8984
b9 118-120 4
0.9132 3
b7 118 3
Oil) -3 34' 3
3
1.49205
Values reported for ar> vary from 3 to 15, indicating that the isolate
is a mixture of the a- and /?- form, a fact confirmed by Ruzicka and Thomann. 5
For a 93 per cent pure a-santalene, Guha and Bhattacharyya 6
reported
these properties:
b7 117 df 0.9102
WSTSO +2 4' (calc. for pure compound +6 290 nf? 1.4900
On treatment with hydrogen chloride, a-santalene gives a liquid dihydro-

chloride b . 55 140-142, d 20 1.076, n D 1.4976, whereby fission of the cyclo-
7
propane ring takes place (Semmler ).
SESQUITERPENES 115
On hydration, a-santalene yields a tertiary alcohol CÎêO, b 5 _ 6 154-157,

d}| 0.9787, 1.51725, which on dehydration with formic acid gives a
n&
sesquiterpene not identical with a-santalene.
Use. a-Santalene, as such, is not used in our industries.
l
Schimmel <fc Co., Oct. (1910), 107; April (1910),
Ber. 165.
*Compt. rend. 130 (1900), 1324.
*Ber. Schimmel tfc Co., Oct. (1910), 107.
*Ber. 40 (1907), 3321; 43 (1910), 1898.
6
Helv. Chim. Ada 18 (1935), 355.
6
/. Indian Chem. Soc. 21 (1944), 270.
7
Ber. 43 (1910), 446.
(3-Santalcne
H
C 1524
CH 3
HC 2
k
H 3(
ii
Isolation. By repeated fractional distillation.

Identification. With nitrosylchloride, /3-santalene yields two nitrosochlorides rn.
106 and 152. These nitrosochlorides give two nitrolpiperidinos in. j()l, an<l 104-
105 (von Soden 0-
Properties. The following properties have been reported for /3-santalene

2 3
by Guerbet, Semmler, Schimmel & Co. 4 and Ruzicka and Thomann: 5
b. 2(>3-2G4 2
(corr.) -45 0' 6
b9 125-127 3
-413 /4
4
b7 125-126 1.49460 4
3 4
d 20 0.892 and 0.894 -
For an 88 per cent pure /3-santalenc, Guha and Bhattacharyya 6

reported
these properties:
b7 125 df 0.8940
-49 compound -56
}
54' (calc. for pure 3f/) ng 1.4941
On
treatment with hydrogen chloride, 0-santalene gives a dihydrochloride
which is probably identical with that obtained from a-santalerie.
On hydration, 0-santalene yields an alcohol Ci 5 H 2 6O, b 6 1GO-165, di 5
7
0.978 (Simonsen ).
116 HYDROCARBONS
On
dehydrogenation with sulfur, 0-santalene does not give a naphthalene
hydrocarbon.
Use. 0-Santalene, as such, is not used in our industries.
i
Arch. Pkarm. 238 (1900), 365.
9 28 (1900), 217, 640.
Compt. rend. 180 (1900), 417, 1324. Bull. soc. chim. (3J,
Ber. 40 (1907), 3321; 43 (1910), 1893.
4
Helv. Chim. Acta 18 (1935), 361.
J. Indian Chem. Soc. 21 (1944), 270.
7
"The Terpcnes," Vol. 2 (1932), 551.
Cedrene
Ci 6 H2 4 Mol. Weight 204.34
Despite the researches of many chemists in the past and the thorough in-
vestigations of Ruzicka et al., and Naves and co-workers
1 2
in very recent
years, the structures of the cedrenes still remain indeterminate. However,

present knowledge now recognizes both an "artificial" and "natural" prod-
uct. The so-called "artificial" hydrocarbon is chemically derived from ce-
drol by dehydration, whereas the "natural" terpene is obtained as a direct
isolate from oil of red cedar wood and is chiefly a mixture of isomeric
cedrenes.
Cedrene has been found, from 60-70 per cent, in American
Occurrence.
red cedarwood oil (Junipcrus virginiana L.) by Chapman and Burgess. 3
4
Rutovski, Guseva and Koroleva found it in Junipcrus polycarpos Kock.;
Kondo 6 in Junipcrus sincnsis L. Rutovski and Vinogradova 6 in Juniperus
;
excelsa M.B. = J. sabina L. var. taurica Tall.; Ikeda and Fujita 7 in Cunning-
hamia konishi Hayata; Kawamura 8 in Sciadopitys verticillata] Machado, da
9
Silverra and Peixoto in Ptorodon pubescens Benth. and Borodichia virgilioides
H. Bk.
Isolation. By fractional distillation and over metallic sodium.

redistillation
Identification. As a preliminary step, determination of the physical properties may

be helpful in the identification of cedrene.
A few diagnostic reactions have resulted from the work of Blumann et al., 10 Treibs, 11
Naves et al., 11 Antoine Chiris, 18 Semmler et al., 14 Ruzicka and van Melsen, 16 and
Huzicka et al. 16 These reactions may serve at the present time for possible identifica-
tion through degradation. Yet the derivatives thus obtained may be of only limited
use as they have been developed by various investigators in the course of research on-
the composition and structure of cedrene which is still being conducted.
The most easily accomplished reaction is the preparation of the cedrene-glycol.
The worker interested in the identification of the cedrenes should be aware of the
possibility that his tests may be complicated by the presence of isomers, especially
cis- and trans- isomers. These, together with homologous structural types, should
account for the parallel development of the cedrene vs. norcedrene series of derivatives
that have been isolated and are illustrated in the diagram.
4
I
2
s .2
a a5 w
ilcSe^
s
I
called
only
fc
e
cs "8
2
S ^
%
i>
% 1 1
fc/^ 03
ISM
UO s
a A
oU
O
0)
CO
o
IM t l
8
S
. 6 ^18
f
O ^
CO
94
0)
Jy ^
'a O Ô
-.
<u o5 *.ga
*S D
w 8ttf2 CJ
rt "O
3
o 4
a
S t
w
118 HYDROCARBONS
Properties. The
following table summarizes the physical properties of ce-
drene "natural" (a fraction of cedarwood oil) as well as of cedrene "artificial"
(resulting from dehydration of cedrol). Both are colorless, syrupy oils.
17 18
Treibs, and Naves and co-workers studied the behavior of natural and
artificial cedrene toward sulfuric acid (the portion of insoluble product var-
ies)and concluded that the natural cedrene contains a constituent, an iso-
meric form which, in the artificial cedrene, is only present in very small
amounts or not at all. This would explain the difference in physical proper-
ties. Notwithstanding physical difference, chemical reactions prove
this
that the same oxidation products are obtained from artificial cedrene and
from natural cedrene. However, the yields of the oxidation products are
different when derived from artificial cedrene and from natural cedrene.
The following properties have been reported by Scmmler and Mayer, 19
von Soden and Rojahn, 20 Treibs, 21 Semmler and Hoffmann, 22 Ruzicka and
van Melsen, 23 Glichitch and Naves, 24 Naves, Papazian and Perrottet, 25
Schimmel & Co., 26 Naves and Perrottet, 27 Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 28 Blu-
mann and Schulz, 29 and Dcussen et al. 30 The wide variation in CKD for the
natural cedrene might well be expected from its nature as a "solution" of
sesquiter penes.
Natural Cedrene Artificial Cedrene
26
b. 264
20
b?50 262-263
21
biz 129-132 129-132 21
25 27
bs.5 101.5 100
25 19 25 27 - 28
0.9338-0.9346 0.9340-0.9345 ' -
20 28 26 28
0.9350-0.9385 -
0.9366 -
OD -470'to -61 O' 28 -85 O' 19 ' 29
-52 48' 23
-85 12' 27
-55 0' 22 -85 32' 26
-58 39' to -66 26' 24

-86 13' to -86 18' 26
-60 0' to -67 0' 2l

20
-60 52'
30
-65 49'
-68 19' to -71 18' 28

n
nD 1.49834-1.50127 22 24 25 28
- ' -
1. 49798-1. 49822
25 26 ' 28' 29
Cedrene-containing fractions of essential oils, especially of American

Use.
cedarwood oil, are used for the scenting of soaps and all kinds of technical
preparations.
i
Helv. Chim. Ada 25 (1942), 85. 3
Proc. Chem. Soc. (1896), 140.
4
*Ibid. 26 (1943), 302. Riechstoff hid. 8 (1933), 161.
SESQUITERPENES 119
6
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan (1907), 236. Ber. Schimmel &
Co., Oct. (1907), 41.
6
Trans. Sci. Chem. Pharm. Inst. Moscow 17 (1927), 146.
7
8
Bull. Imp. Forestry Expt. Sta. Japan 31 (1931). Chem. Abstracts 26 (1932), 4679.
9
Riv. soc. bras. quim. 7 (1938), 7, 15. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 6396.
10
Ber. 62 (1929), 1697; 64 (1931), 1540.
11
Ber. 70B (1937), 2060.
12
Helv. Chim. Ada
26 (1943), 302.
13
Parfums France 3 (1925), 168, 353.
14
Ber. 45 (1912), 355, 786, 1384, 1553.
Liebigs Ann. 471 (1929), 40.
18
16
Helv. Chim. Acta 25 (1942), 95.
" Ber. 68B (1935), 1041.
Helv. Chim. Acta 26 (1943), 302.
19
Ber. 45 (1912), 1384, 1554.
20
Ber. 37 (1904), 3353.
21
Ber. 68 (1935), 1045.
22
Ber. 40 (1907), 3521.
23 Ann. 471 (1929), 40.
Liebigs
24
26
7/eto.CTum. Acfa 26 (1943), 303.
26
27
Helv. Chim. Acta 24 (1941), 800.
28
"Die Atherischen Die," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 393.
29 M
Ber. 64 (1931), 1541. /. praR CTiem. [2], 117 (1927), 295.
The Gurjunenes
The obtained by the distillation of gurjun balsam, according to Deussen

oil
and Philipp, 1 consists of a mixture of two sesquiterpenes, a- and /8-gurjunene

which Semmler and Spornitz, 2 and Semmler and Jakubowicz 3 separated by
prolonged fractionation into approximately 67 per cent of a strongly laevo-
rotatory a- isomer and about 33 per cent of a strongly dextrorotatory /3-
isomer of cedrene type. Both isomers are considered to be tricyclic.
4
More recently, Treibs suggested for a-gurjunene the following probable
structural formula:
OH 3
;H, H 2
NK
I
N]
ti a a H
;H 3
o-Gurjunenc (?)
Occurrence. a- and /3-Gurjunene are the principal constituents of the oil
distilled by steam from the oleoresin of various Dipterocarpus species.

120 HYDROCARBONS
Isolation. The two isomers cannot be completely separated and purified by mere
The lower boiling, laevorotatory a-gurjunene thus obtained is fairly pure but not
quite free from its /3- isomer, as on strong oxidation a sample still gives a small quantity
of gurjunene ketone (see below), derived from the /3- product, while the a- isomer is
completely degraded.
Semmler and collaborators 6 observed that the higher boiling dextrorotatory $-
gurjunene can be obtained in pure form by repeated mild oxidation of the sesquiterpene
mixture with chromic acid in acetic acid solution, and finally with potassium perman-
ganate in acetone solution at until no further change in the rotatory power can be
observed. The laevorotatory a- form is thereby more easily degraded and only the
dextrorotatory /?- form remains. (The original laevorotation of the product to be
oxidized changes after oxidation to dextrorotation.) The /3-gurjunene can finally be
obtained pure by distillation over metallic sodium.
Identification. On oxidation with chromic acid or potassium permanganate, /3-
gurjunene yields a ketone m. 43, bio 163-166, d 20 1.017, a D +123 0', n D 1.52700.
This gurjunene ketone CisIIÔ is isomeric but not identical with cedrone. On reduc-
tion with sodium and alcohol, the ketone yields an unsaturated alcohol m. 104, bn
155-159, d 1.001, D +34 0', nD 1.51859.
Gurjunene ketone can be characterized by the preparation of its semicarbazone m.
237 from which the ketone may be regenerated in solid form by treatment with
phthalic anhydride. /3-Gurjunene can be regenerated from the semicarbazone of the
ketone by reduction with sodium ethylate.
Properties. The following properties have been reported by Semmler and

6
collaborators:
a-GurJune tic (obtained by repeated fractionation of Gurjun Balsam Oil)
bio 114-116 6
<* D -95 0';
6
-90 (Treibs, see below)
6 6
d 20 0.918 nD 1.5010
7
Contrary to /3-gurjunene, the a- isomer gives the Turner color reaction.
On treatment with hydrogen chloride, a-gurjunene yields a liquid mono-
hydrochloride.
When treating the tricyclic a-gurjunene with hot glacial acetic acid con-
8
taining sulfuric acid, Treibs obtained a bicyclic strongly laevorotatory ses-
quiterpene which he named iso-a-gurjunene.
p-Gurjuncne (freed from the a- isomer by careful oxidation)

b 13 120M23 06 aD +74 30' 6
d 20 0.9348 6
+70 30' 8
6
nD 1.50275
On dehydration with sulfur, /3-gurjunene, according to Ruzicka, Pontalti

and Balas, 9 does not yield a naphthalene hydrocarbon and therein resembles
other tricyclic sesquiterpenes.
Use. The gurjunenes, as such, are not used in our industries.
SESQUITERPENES 121
Liebigs Ann. 374 (1910), 105.

l
2
Ber. 47 (1914), 1029.
9
Ber. 47 (1914), 1141.
4
Ber. 68 (1935), 1751.
6
Ber. 47 (1914), 1029, 1141, 2253.
6
Ber. 47 (1914), 1029, 1141, 2253.
7
Cf. Liebigs Ann. 374 (1910), 110. Ber. 47 (1914), 1142.
8
Ber. 68 (1935), 1751.
9
Helv. Chim. Acta 6 (1923), 864.
C 15 H 24 Mol. Weight 204.34
1
This tricyclic sesquiterpene was first described by Simonsen. Bradfield,
2
Francis and Simonsen suggested as probable the formula pictured above.
Occurrence. Longifolene occurs in Indian turpentine oil (Pinus lonyifolia,
P. khasya, and P. merkusii). It has also been reported by Hirao 3 in the oil
steam distilled from the wood of Chamaecyparis obtusa.
Isolation. repeated fractional distillation of Indian turpentine oil.

By
Identification. Longifolene can be characterized by the preparation of the hydro-
chloride m. 59-60, M
D +7 6' (in chloroform), of the hydrobromide m. 69-70,
and the hydroiodide m. 71.
Properties. c?-Longifolene is a colorless, somewhat viscid oil with these

properties:
b 706 254-256 [a] D +42 44'
b 36 160M51 n?? 1.4950
d^ 0.9284 Mol. refr. 64.15
Use. Longifolene is not used in our industries.

1
J. Chem. Soc. 117 (1920), 570, 578; 123 (1923), 2642. Indian Forest Records 9 (1922),
pt. 4; 10 (1923), pt. 4.
*/. Chem. Soc. (1934), 188. See Simonsen, Sci. J. Roy. Coll Sci. 4 (1934), 60.
3
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 58 (1937), 222. Chem. Abstract* 31 (1937), 3468.

T. F. West, "Indian Turpentine Oil," Perfumery Essential Oil Record 29 (1938), 170.
122 HYDROCARBONS
Copaene
C 15 H 24 Mol. Weight 204.34
CH 3
,C CH 2
HaC'/ CH
Years ago Semmler and Stenzel 1 found that copaene is a tricyclic sesqui-
terpene containing one ethylenic linkage, and yielding bicyclic -cadinene di-
hydrochloride on treatment with hydrogen chloride. Recently Briggs and
2
Taylor reinvestigated the structure of copaene and arrived at the conclusion
that its configuration is actually that pictured above, and not that suggested
earlier by Semmler and Stenzel.
Occurrence. This comparatively rare constituent of essential oils has been
observed in the oil of the African copaiba balsam (Oxystigma mannii Harms)
by Schimmel & Co. in the oil of supa (Sindora wallichii Benth.) by Hender-
3
;
son, McNab and Robertson

4
to the amount of 70 per cent in oil of papina
;
5
(Sindora inermis) from the Philippines (Davao) by Huzita, and 35 per cent
in the oil from the East Indian mahogany tree (Cedrela toona) by Pillai and
Rao ;
6
in the oil of 7
Dysoxylum fraseranum by Penfold and in the oil of the
;
New Zealand tree Phyllocladus trichomanoides by Briggs and Sutherland.

8
Isolation. repeated fractional distillation in vacuo, separating the fraction bio

By
114-115 obtained in a 20 plate column.
Identification. Copaene can be characterized as follows:
(1) On
conducting gaseous hydrogen chloride into an ethereal solution of copaene,
laevorotatory cadinene dihydrochloride m. 117-118, [a]o 36 14' is obtained.
(2) Dehydrogenation of copaene with palladized charcoal yields cadalene.
(3) Oxidation with ozone or potassium permanganate leads to the monobasic copaene
ketonic acid CiJÔs which can be identified by means of its semicarbazone m. 222.
The methyl ester of this ketonic acid, too, yields a semicarbazone m. 194-196 (Briggs
and Taylor 9).
Properties. These last named authors, and Schimmel & Co. 10 reported
the following properties of copaene:
10
b. 246-251
3 5
b 10 119-120 10
[a]J>
-
-0 26' to
9 5
9
114-114.5 (20 plate column) ng 1.4880-1.4895
9 10
df 0.9055 (constant) ng> 1.48943
10
dJ 0.9077
SESQUITERPENES 123
Copaene a colorless viscid oil possessing a faint odor.

is
Use. Copaene, as such, is not used in our industries, but the fractions of
African copaiba balsam oil containing this sesquiterpene find application in
the scenting of soaps, cosmetics and technical preparations.
1
Ber. 47 (1914), 2555. 3
Ber. Schimmel &
Co., April (1914), 44.
2 4
J. Chem. Soc. (1947), 1338. .7. Chem. Soc. (1926), 3077.
6
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 50 (1931), 220T.
7
8
Forthcoming publication.
9
/. Chem. Soc. (1947), 1338.
10
C 15 H 24 Mol. Weight 204.34

.C< GIL
HoC C
T
C' ^CH*
TH-C^CH.
\^
^cn
X12O U
H H
suggested the above structural formula for clovene; but this
x
Rydon still
awaits experimental proof.

Occurrence. Although this sesquiterpene has not been identified with cer-
tainty in volatile oils, it has been detected in residues during several diag-
nostic operations on the caryophyllene fractions of essential oils (cf Hender- .
son, McCrone and Robertson 2

).
Identification. No derivatives, of clovene have been described; it has, therefore, to

be characterized through its properties. Oxidative degradation yields a dicarboxylic
acid (Ruzicka and Gibson 3 ) described as clovenic acid Cisll^C^ m. 182; anhydride
m. 50-5l and diammonium salt (Blair ) m. 168-170.
Properties. Clovene was first prepared through dehydration of caryophyl-

lene alcohol by Wallach and Walker 5 who reported these properties:
b. 261-263 nj? 1.50066

d 18 0.930 Mol. refr. 64.77
These a large measure confirmed in later work by Asahina

figures are in
and Tsukamoto 6 and likewise by Henderson, McCrone and Robertson. 7
Use. Clovene has not found any use in our industries.
Chemistry Industry 67 (1938), 123.

1
*J. Chem. Soc. (1929), 1368.

3
Helv. Chim. Acta 14 (1931), 570.
4
/. Chem. Soc. (1935), 1297.
Liebigs Ann. 271 (1892), 294.
6
6 /. Pharm. Soc. Japan No. 484 (1922), 463. Chem. Abstracts 16 (1922), 3312.
>J. Chem. Soc. (1929), 1368.
124 HYDROCARBONS
Heerabolene
Ci 5 H24 Mol. Weight 204.34
Occurrence. This probably tricyclic sesquiterpene was found by von Fried-

l
richs in heerabol myrrh oil.
Isolation. By alkaline treatment of the oil-ether extract and fractionation.

Identification. The only derivative that has been described and by which the
sesquiterpene could be in a measure identified is a dichloride m. 98-99.
Properties. Von Friedrichs 2

reported these properties for heerabolene:
bie 130-136 nf? 1.5125

d 20 0.943 Mol. refr. 64.98
af? -14 12'
Use. Heerabolene has not found any use in our industries.

1
Arch. Pharm. 246 (1907), 441.
2
Ibid.
Vetivene
Vetivene, as isolated from vetiver root oil, consists of several bicyclic and
tricyclic sesquiterpenes. This mixture of hydrocarbons has been investi-
2
gated by Genvresse and Langlois, Semmler, Risse and Schroter, and Ruzicka,
1
3
Capato and Huyser, but the constitution of these sesquiterpenes has not
been established.
The bicyclic hydrocarbon isolated has these properties:
bi2 132-133
5
dj 0.9339
5
n{> 1.5179
On dehydrogenation it yields cadalene.

The tricyclic hydrocarbon has these properties:
b 12 126-127
5
di 0.9372
6
n}> 1.5143
Use. Vetivene, as such, is not used in our industries.
Compt. rend. 136 (1902), 1059.

1
2
Ber. 46 (1912), 2347.
3
Rec. trav. chim. 47 (1928), 372.
DITERPENES 125
E. DITERPENES
Introduction. Diterpenes (20^132) seem to occur but occasionally in vola-

tile oils and only a few of the naturally existing diterpenes and derivatives so
far have been thoroughly investigated. On the other hand, numerous diter-
penes have been prepared synthetically by all kinds of reactions, the discus-
sion of which would not contribute to this study of essential oils.
It will serve our purpose to mention here that natural diterpenes are either
highly viscid oils or solids, only sparingly volatile with steam, boiling at about
300 (atmospheric pressure) with a specific gravity (at 20) ranging usually
from 0.92 to 0.95. According to Kondakov and Saprikin, 1 they belong mostly
to the hydrogenated naphthalene and phenanthrene derivatives.
The property of low vapor pressure may inhibit the passage of many of
these heavier hydrocarbons during distillation of volatile oils, although they
do occur as natural ingredients in plants. Their absence in steam distilled
oils their presence in several extracted oils partly explain the marked
and
variance observed in certain properties of a few important products. Thus
the role played by these diterpenes may be although the natural di-
critical
terpenes have been less frequently encountered than other hydrocarbons.

Moreover, this class of compound is only now being investigated more thor-
oughly and it remains uncertain how many of the diterpenes and oxygenated
derivatives thus far isolated and recorded are actually pure substances. For
this reason not too much attention will be devoted in these pages to C2oll32
compounds and derivatives.
Review articles by Klingemann, 2 Kondakov and Saprikin, 3 and Briggs 4
merely serve to emphasize the lack of data and knowledge regarding inter-
relationship in this field. A
study of the literature shows that tentative for-
mulas have been offered only in the case of the camphorenes, phyllocladenes,
rimuene and sclareol. However, the worker may occasionally be required to
characterize, at this state of our knowledge, other products, described as di-
terpenes, that are certainly of infrequent occurrence and on which there now
exist only the most meager data. In this case reference should be made to
the latest literature. These compounds include the a- and 0-podocarprenes,
totarene, cupressene, mirene, kaurene, a- and /3-cryptomerene, "iso"-hydro-
carbons, dicitronella oxide (a diterpene product from oil of citronella Java),
and even lesser known constituents of essential oils obtained by distillation
with superheated steam.
Any data sufficient to merit consideration for diagnostic purposes are sum-
marized in the table facing page 126. However, several diterpenic deriva-
tives already recorded in the literature have not been included in this table
because these compounds are either chemically derived from natural wood
resins, a class of isolates not connected with this work, or because there ap-
126 HYDROCARBONS
pear at present to be insufficient data to characterize them definitely. Only
in the case of the camphorene fractions has any wide technical use been
heralded.
1
Bull. soc. chim. [4], 37 (1925), 1045.
2
Z. angew. Chem. 36 (1923), 317.
3
Bull. soc. chim. [4], 37 (1925), 918.
Rept. Meeting Australian New Zealand Assocn. Adv. Sc. 23 (1937), 45.
4
C. Brandt, "Chemistry of Phyllocladene and Rimuene," New Zealand J. Sci.

W.
Tech. 20 (1938), 8. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 551.
L. Ruzicka and G. Firmenich, "Synthesis of the Aliphatic Diterpene Alcohol,
Geranyl Geraniol," Helv. Chim. Ada 22 (1939), 392.
L. Ruzicka and E. Bernold, "Degradation of Agathenedicarboxylic Acid with
Potassium Permanganate," Helv. Chim. Acta 24 (1941), 931.
N. J. Toivonen, V. Alfthan, L. H. Book, M. I. Erich and E. K. Heino, "Chemistry
of Synthetic Diterpenes. Dimerization of Fenchenc with Clay Catalysts: /S-Difcn-
chene," /. prakt. Chem. 169 (1941), 70. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 4064.
L. Ruzicka and L. Sternbach, "Synthesis of 8-Azaretene," Helv. Chim. Acta 25
(1942), 1036.
Camphorene
C 2 oH3 2 Mol. Weight 272.46
a- Camphorene
According to Semmler and Rosenberg, a-camphorene is a monocyclic di-

1
terpene. The structural formula pictured above was advanced by Ruzicka

and Stoll; 2 they found a-camphorene to be a p-di- substituted hydrobenzene
derivative.
Occurrence. The highest boiling fractions of camphor oil contain two di-
terpenes, viz., a-camphorene and jS-camphorene.
a-Camphorene can be isolated in pure form from the highest boiling

Isolation.
fractions of camphor oil by passing a current of gaseous hydrogen chloride through an
ethereal solution of these fractions. The tetrahydrochloride m. 129-131 is then
decomposed and the a-camphorene regenerated in 98% yield, according to Kafuku,
AZULENES 127
Oyamada and Nishi, 3 by heating for 7 hr. with 10% alcoholic potassium hydroxide.
The hydrochloride of /3-camphorene is liquid.
Identification. By the preparation of the tetrahydrochloride (see above), or of the
tetrahydrobromide m. 133-134, and by determination of the properties of cam-
phorene.
Properties. a-Camphorene, purified through its tetrahydrochloride, has

these properties, according to Ruzicka and Stoll, 4 Semmler and Rosenberg, 5
6
and Kafuku, Oyamada and Nishi:
bia 190VL92 04 D 6
b6 177M78 05 1
nf, 1.4998 6
6 B
b4 . 5 178 nD 1.50339
6
df 0.8864
6
d 20 0.8870
^-Camphor cue has the following properties:

5
b7 170-180 D 6
5 8
d 20 0.930 nD 1.518
Use.Camphorene, as such, has not found any use in our industry, but
the high boiling fractions of camphor oil containing this diterpene are widely
applied as fixatives in the scenting of soaps and all kinds of technical prepa-
rations.
1
Ber. 46 (1913), 768.
2
Helv. Chirn. Acta 7 (1924), 271.
3
Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan 8 (1933), 144.
4
Helv. Chim. Acta 1 (1924), 271.
Ber. 46 (1913), 768.
6
Bull Chem. Soc. Japan 8 (1933), 144.
Kinzo Kafuku, Taichiro Oyamada and Masura Nishi, "A New Diterpene. -y-Cam-
phorene." Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan 8 (1933), 144. ,/. Chem. Soc. Japan 64 (1933),
364. Chem. Abstracts 27 (1933), 4228.
F. AZULENES
GENERAL PART.
The term "azulene" was introduced by Piesse 1
who
suggested it for the
blue-colored constituent of chamomile oil. Since then, azulenes have been
found in several essential oils for example, in oil of cubeb,
camphor, vale-
rian, galbanum, and wormwood, in the oils of several Eucalyptus species, etc.
Oil of chamomile (German and Roman)* contains a substantial amount (up
to 15 per cent) of azulene.
128 HYDROCARBONS
Azulenes are blue to violet even green colored compounds of various
structure. The so-called "natural" azulenes occur in the oils either as such,
their presence lending the oils a distinct color, or in the form of colorless ses-
quiterpene precursors which, by physical or chemical action, can be trans-

formed into colored azulenes. This may be achieved by mere heating, by
treatment with acids, by dehydration, or dehydrogenation.
The azulenes have been the object of numerous investigations but it is
only recently that the constitution of some of these highly interesting com-
pounds was elucidated. The terms chosen for the various azulenes are de-
rived from the names which these complex hydrocarbons oc-
of the plants in
cur, or from which they are obtained chemically. We thus speak of chama-
zulene (from the Latin word Chamomilla for camomile), of vetivazulene
(from vetiver guaiazulene (obtained by dehydration and dehydrogena-
oil), of
tion of guaiol), and elemazulene (by chemical treatment of elemol). The
fungus of the true orange agaric (Lactarius dcliciosus L.) contains lactarazu-
lene and verdazulene, the latter named after its green color. The various
azulenes can be distinguished by their color which is either pure blue, blue-vio-
let, violet, red-violet, or even green (verdazulene). In case the azulenes are
obtained by dehydration (or dehydrogenation), the method thereby employed
may influence the color of the azulene. For example, dehydration and de-
hydrogenation of guaiol with sulfur yield the pure blue S-guaiazulene, and
like treatment with selenium produces the violet Se-guaiazulene. Several
azulenes obtained from various essential oils by dehydrogenation belong to
the type guaiazulene. The exact constitution of cham-, lactar-, elem- and
Se-guaiazulene remains unknown. In pure form most azulenes are well
crystallized substances, their melting points ranging from 40-100.
According to Plattner and Pfau, the parent substance of all azulenes is a
2
bicyclic hydrocarbon CioH 8 commonly called "azulene" (m. 98.5-99), of

,
the following formula: TT
Trinitrobenzene derivative m. 1G6.5-167.5; trinitrotoluene derivative m.

99.5-100. In regard to its physical and chemical behavior, the parent azu-
leneshows many analogies with the isomeric naphthalene. The carbon skele-
ton of this hydrocarbon presents a combination of a completely conjugated
five-membered ring with a seven-membered ring, which feature in part ac-
counts for the strong absorption of light displayed by the azulenes.
The azulenes are closely related to the sesquiterpenes, both types of hydro-
carbons possessing the empirical molecular formula Ci 5 Hi 8 .These hydro-
carbons may be formed in nature possibly by cyclization of a previously
formed chain of three isoprene molecules, according to Ruzicka's 3 farnesol
AZULENES 129
hypothesis. Ruzicka and collaborators and the Swiss school of workers, 4 in

general, have contributed most of our present-day knowledge pertaining to
6
azulenes. Thus, Ruzicka, Rudolph and Haagen-Smit investigated cham-
.
azulene, guaiazulene, Se-guaiazulene, and elemazulene. Pfau and Plattner 6

isolated vetivazulene from vetiver oil and, along with Coats and Cook, 7 syn-
thesized this terpene and elucidated its constitution. The most convincing
proof for the relationship between sesquiterpenes and azulenes is given by
the fact that several sesquiterpenes and sesquiterpene derivatives can be de-
hydrogenated or dehydrated to azulenes. Thus vetivone yields vetivazu-
lene, while guaiol, ledol, and aromadendrene give guaiazulene, according to
the following scheme:
riHo C H3
H 2 H H
HC
3 HaC H
\:c=
CH
H C"
3
H
CH*
Vetivone Vetivazulene
OH
CH 3 H CHs
H H 2 H2
H 2(
\XTc C CH
J--OH
HsC CH 3
Guaiol Aromadendrene
H
HC
J^
" G^~ C
\CH
NV
Y /
C^C ^C=C
A
In the case of vetivone and guaiol, the carbon skeleton of the correspond-
ing azulenes is already present, the formation of azulene taking place by mere
dehydrogenation, but the formation of guaiazulene from the tricyclic ledol
must be explained, according to Komppa and Nyman, 8 by bursting of the
trimethylene-ring and simultaneous formation of the five- and seven-mem-
130 HYDROCARBONS
bered ring system of guaiazulene. A similar transformation of the ring sys-
tem takes place, according to Radcliffe and Short, 9 when aromadendrene is
dehydrogenated to guaiazulene.
A number of azulenes have been synthesized by various methods and by
several workers, among them Pfau and Plattner, 10 Plattner and co-workers,
11
12 13 14
Wagner-Jauregg and collaborators, Coats and Cook, and Arnold. For
details the reader is referred to the original literature and to reviews by
16 16
Hiiter, "Natural and Synthetic Azulenes" (in German), and by Arnold,
"The Azulenes" (in German).
Isolation and Identification. The azulenes can be isolated and purified by several
methods :
17
One of the oldest and most practical is by Sherndal for the isolation
that developed
of azulenes from oil of cubeb and camphor. This method is based upon the fact that
the azulenes react readily with strong mineral acids, such as phosphoric or sulfuric
acid, forming thereby addition compounds. These can easily be decomposed with
water whereby the azulenes are regenerated. Thus an addition product of azulenes
can be prepared by shaking a well-cooled solution of azulenes in petroleum ether
with 85% phosphoric acid. On dilution with ice water, the pure azulenes will sepa-
rate from the phosphoric acid layer.
Herzenberg and Huhemann, and Ruhemann and Lewy
18 19
suggested shaking the
azulenes with an aqueous solution of ferrocyanic acid the ferrocyanate thus formed can
;
be decomposed with a dilute solution of sodium hydroxide and the azulene regenerated.
Sherndal,
20
and Ruzicka and Rudolph 21 recommended the use of picrates and
styphnates for the isolation and characterization of azulenes. Like the trinitrotoluene
(trotylates) and trinitrobenzene derivatives of the azulenes, the picrates and styphnates
are crystalline compounds of sharp melting points from which the azulenes can be
regenerated in pure form for example, from the picrates by treatment with dilute
alkalies. The
trotylates and trinitrobenzoates are prepared by heating the azulenes
with excess trinitrotoluene or trinitrobenzene and alcohol, by cooling, and recrystalliza-
tion from alcohol.
A more modern and milder method, introduced by Plattner and Pfau, 22 is the
chromatographic separation of the trinitrobenzene compounds when dissolved in cyclo-
hexane and filtered through an aluminum oxide column. It lends itself particularly
well to the more sensitive azulenes.
Kaiser and Frey 23 suggested for the isolation of chamazulene from chamomile oil a
combination of the ferrocyanic acid and chromatographic methods.
These same authors 24 also described a colorimetric method by which the content of
pure azulene can be determined in the fluid extracts and in the volatile oil of chamomile.
Highly characteristic of the azulenes are their absorption spectra which lie in the
visible field. The measuring of these spectra, as carried out by Susz, Pfau and Platt-
ner 2B on azulene, vetivazulene, and S-guaiazulene, and by Willstaedt 26 on guai-,
lactar-, and chamazulene have been of great help in the determination of the number
and position of substituents in the azulene ring system. For details the reader is
referred to the comprehensive paper by Plattner, "Constitution and Color of the
Azulenes." 27 Plattner thus was able to classify the azulenes into three groups. The
practical value of correlation between light absorption, number, and position of the
substituents can be seen from this example :
As pointed out above, dehydration or dehydrogenation of guaiol or guaiene, accord-

ing to the method applied (sulfur or selenium), yields either a blue or a violet azulene.
AZULENES 131
The blue S-guaiazulene is a l,4-dimethyl-7-isopropyl-azulene. Vetivazulene is a

4,8-dimethyl-2-isopropyl-azulene and, in regard to its absorption spectra, closely
resembles the violet Se-guaiazulene. The latter, contrary to S-guaiazulene, therefore
carries one substituent, probably in the 2-position. Plattner 28 thus came to the con-
clusion that the dehydrogenation of guaiene with selenium is connected with a migra-
tion of the methyl group from the 1-position to the 2-position.
From the foregoing, it becomes evident that the measuring of the absorption spectra
permits a much clearer insight into the constitution of the delicate azulenes than
chemical degradation. Oxidative degradation, for example, yields substances of such
low order that conclusions as to the original structure of the azulene can no longer be
drawn.
29
According to Plattner, the color of azulene cannot be predicted from a comparison
of its formula with those of similarly constituted compounds in the naphthalene and
fulvene series. The five successive conjugated double linkages of azulene which permit
it to be regarded as a mesomeric system are, however, in complete accordance with its
optical properties.
From the optical measurements of Plattner, far reaching and interesting conclu-
sions as to the as yet unknown constitution of cham-, lactar-, and Sc-guaiazulenes can
be made, and this method can also be employed for the identification of the azulenes.
Use. The azulenes, as such, are not used in our industries, but further
research may well find a place for some of the azulenes in medicinal prepa-
rations.
Compt. rend. 67 (1863), 1016. Chem. News 8 (1863), 245, 273.

1
2
Helv. Chim. Ada 20 (1937), 224. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 4284.
3
Angewandte Chemie 61 (1938), 5.
4
See Pfau and Plattner, Helv. Chim. Ada 19 (1936), 858. Plattnor and Pfau, ibid. 20
(1937), 224. Plattner and collaborators, ibid. 20 (1937), 469; 23 (1940), 897, 907; 24
(1941), 191, 283E, 483; 26 (1942), 581. Willstaedt, Ber. 69B (1936), 997.
6
Helv. Chim. Ada 9 (1926), 120; 14 (1931), 1104.
9
Ibid. 19 (1936), 858, 861.
7
J. Chem.Soc. (1942), 559.
8
C. R. Trav. Lab. Carlsberg, Ser. chim. 22 (1938), 272.
J. Chem.Soc. (1938), 1200.
10
Helv. Chim. Ada 19 (1936), 866; 20 (1937), 224; 22 (1939), 202.
11
Ibid. 23 (1940), 897, 907; 24 (1941), 483; 25 (1942), 581, 590, 1077; 26 (1943), 905.
12
Ber. 74B (1941), 1522; 75B (1942), 1293; 76B (1943), 694, 1157.
13
J. Chem. Soc. (1942), 559.
14
Ber. 76B (1943), 777.
15
Deut. Parfiimerieztg. 28 (1942), 153.
16
"Die Chemie," 66 (1943), 7.
17
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 37 (1915), 167, 1537.
18
Ber. 68 (1925), 2249.
19
Ber. 60 (1927), 2459.
20
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 37 (1915), 167, 1537.
*Helv. Chim. Ada 9 (1926), 118, 132, 133.
22
Ibid. 20 (1937), 230, 231.
23
Deut. Apoth. Ztg. 63 (1938), 1385, 1402.
24
Ibid. 54 (1939), 882; 67 (1942), 155, 163. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 5548.
26
Helv. Chim. Acta 20 (1937), 469.
* Ber. 69 (1936), 999.
27
Helv. Chim. Acta 24 (1941), 283E.
28
Ibid.
132 HYDROCARBONS
Harry Willstaedt (Univ. Stockholm), "Fungus Dyes. Two New Fat-soluble Dyes
from Genuine Orange Agaric (Lactarius deliciosus L.)," Svensk. Kem. Tid. 68 (1946),
81 (in German). Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 6460.
P. A. Plattner, A. Fiirst, J. Wyss and R. Sandrin, "2-Isopropyl-Azulen," Helv. Chim.
Acta 30 (1947), 689.
P. A. Plattner and E. Heilbronner, "Die Absorptionskurven des Azulens und der
fiinf Monomethyl-azulene im sichtbaren Bereich," ibid., 910.
E. Heilbronner and K. Wieland, "Spektrographischc und thermochemische Unter-
suchungen an dampfformigem Azulen," ibid., 947.
P. A. Plattner, A. Fiirst and A. Studer, "tlber neuere Synthesen des 5-Methyl-
azulens," ibid., 1091.
P. A. Plattner, E. Heilbronner and A. Fiirst, "Die spektroskopische Priifung ver-
schiedener Praparate von 5-Methyl-azulen," ibid., 1100.
P. A. Plattner, A. Fiirst and K. Jirasck, "Im Fiinfring mehrfach substituierte Azu-
lene," ibid., 1320.
J. H. Clark, "The Azulenes," Am. Perfumer 61 (1948), 38.
P. A. Plattner and E. Heilbronner, "Die Ultraviolett-Absorptionsspektren der fiinf
Monomethyl- und einiger mehrfach substituirter Azulene," Helv. Chim. Acta 31 (1948),
804.
SPECIAL PART INDIVIDUAL AZULENES.
Briefly we shall describe some of the so-called "natural" azulenes (see also
above); others will be discussed under the essential oils in which they occur.
Chamazulene
The structural formula of chamazulene has not yet been definitely estab-
lished, neither has this azulene been prepared synthetically.
Occurrence. Blue azulene fractions from essential oils, described as simi-
lar to the colored hydrocarbon from chamomile, have been reported in a sum-
2
by Wolf and Htiter as derived from a number of sources. However,
1
mary
chamazulene most frequently encountered in oil of chamomile, imparting
is
to it the characteristic blue color. Kaiser and Frey 3 reported that this azu-
lene, in terms of their new colorimetric method, should be present in chamo-

mile oil to the extent of 1 per cent, and in the oil distilled from prime, fresh
flowers from 1.3 to 1.5 per cent. An oil distilled from dried Spanish chamo-
mile flowers contained 15.2 per cent azulene, from German (Taunus) flowers
12.3 per cent, from Hungarian flowers 4.8 per cent.
Ruhemann and Lewy 4 came to the conclusion that chamazulene does not
exist preformed in the plant but is possibly formed from the sesquiterpenes
by enzyme action. A similar view was expressed by Koch who found that,
5
AZULENES 133
contrary to the observations of other authors, chamazulene is not present in

chamomile flowers as azulene but in some other form. Graham 6 came to the
same conclusion about milfoil.
Isolation. the methods described in the general part on azulenes. A solution

By
of chamazulene can be prepared by chromatography, on aluminum oxide, of a petro-
leum ether solution chamomile oil.
of
Identification. According to Ruzicka and Rudolph 7 and Ruzicka and Haagen-
Smit, chamazulene may be characterized by the preparation of a picrate m. 115
8
(120, according to Miiller ), and a styphnate m. 95-96. Pfau and Plattner 10

9
reported m. 132 for the trinitrobenzene compound of chamazulene.
Properties. Ruzicka and Haagen-Smit ll

found these properties of cham-
azulene:
bn 159
df 0.9881
5
d] 0.991
Chamazulene, as such, is not used, but infusions and fluidextracts

Use.
of chamomile flowers have been a well-known household medicine for a long
time, as chamazulene has a strong anti-inflammatory action, a fact estab-

lished by Heubner and collaborators, 12 by Arnold, 13 and by Jarctzki and Neu-
wald. 14 Indeed, the anti-inflammatory action of chamomile oil seems to be
due entirely to one constituent, viz., chamazulene, according to the work of
Pommer. 15
1
47 (1940), No. 3, 122.
Felte u. Seifen
2
Deut. Parfumerieztg. 28 (1942), 153.
s
Deut. Apoth. Zlg. 64 (1939), 882; 67 (1942), 155, 163. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 5548.
4
Ber. 60 (1927), 2459.
B
Arch. Pharm. 280 (1942), 424.
7. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 22 (1933), 819.
7
Helv. Chim. Ada 9 (1926), 118.
8
Ibid. 14 (1931), 1104.
9
J. prakt. Chem. 166 (1940), 184.
10
Private communication to Willstaedt, Ber. 69B (1936), 997.
11
Helv. Chim. Acta 9 (1926), 118; 14 (1931), 1104.
12
Arch, exptl. Path. Pharmakol. 171 (1933), 329; 192 (1939), 383; 193 (1939), 619.
13
Ibid. 123 (1927), 129.
"Arch. Pharm. 277 (1939), 50.
n Arch. exptl. Path. Pharmakol. 199 (1942), 74. Chem. Zentr. T (1942), 3227.
134 HYDROCARBONS
Vetivazulene
Mol. Weight 198.29
r
H
Vetivazulene
The experimental work leading to the synthesis and formulation of the

structure of vetivazulene was carried out by Pfau and Plattner, 1 and Coats
and Cook. 2
Occurrence and Isolation. Vetivazulene can be obtained by dehydrogenating the

fraction bi 140-160 of Java vetiver oil with selenium (see also general description
of the azulenes).
Identification. According to Pfau and Plattner, vetivazulene
3
may be characterized
by the preparation of these derivatives:
Picrate m. 121.5-122
Trinitrobenzoate m. 151.5-152
Trotylate m. 80.5-81.
Properties. The same authors also reported for crude vetivazulene:

b 2 140-180, m. 32-33.
Use. Vetivazulene is not used in our industries.
1
Helv. Chim. Acta 19 (1936), 858; 20 (1937), 224, 469; 22 (1939), 202.
2
J. Chem. Soc. (1942), 559.
3
Helv. Chim. Acta 19 (1936), 858; 20 (1937), 224, 469; 22 (1939), 202.
Guaiazulene
As pointed out
in the general description of azulenes, dehydration of guaiol
or dehydrogenation of guaiene, according to the method employed (sulfur or
selenium), yields either the blue S-guaiazulene or the violet Se-guaiazulene.
Birrell l expressed the opinion that Se-guaiazulene is probably identical and
not isomeric with S-guaiazulene, but this view, in the light of later work,
seems rather questionable.
AZULENES 135
S-Guaiazulene
CH3 H CH
H3 C CII 3
(Kessazulene), (Gurjunazulene), (Eucazulene)
This structural formula of S-guaiazulene was established by Pfau and Platt-

ner. 2 The same authors also showed that S-guaiazulene is identical with
eucazulene (from eucalyptus oil). Previously, Ruzicka and Haagen-Smit 3
4
had proved that the "kessazulene" obtained by Asahina and Nakanishi
from kcssyl alcohol is identical with S-guaiazulene. Shortly afterward, Asa-
hina and collaborators 5 confirmed that "kessazulene" and guaiazulene have
similar properties.
Occurrence and Isolation. repeated fractionation, Pfau and Plattner isolated

6
By
the higher boiling portions of oil of Eucalyptus globulus Labill., gurjuri balsam, Reunion
geranium, Geranium macrorrhizum L., and patchouly, and on dehydrogenation with
sulfur obtained S-guaiazulene. The product of dehydrogenation was extracted with
ether and distilled. A solution of the distillate in 5 volumes of petroleum ether was
shaken at low temperature with 95% phosphoric acid until decolorized. After re-
peated washing with ether, peroxide-free ether was added to the phosphoric acid
extract, the S-guaiazulene liberated by addition of ice water, and steam distilled.
Distillation over metallic sodium gave practically pure S-guaiazulene (about 16% of
the oil used). Purification was also accomplished by chromatographic passage of a
solution of the crude product in petroleum ether over aluminum oxide (AÔs).
Taira 7 prepared S-guaiazulene from the sesquiterpene alcohol isolated from fusel
oil of cane molasses and sweet potatoes.
Identification. From S-guaiazulene, Pfau and Plattner 8 prepared the picrate m.

122-122.5, the styphnate m. 105-106, both stable only in the presence of excess
reagent. The same authors, furthermore, described the trinitrobenzene derivative
m. 151-151.5, and the trinitrotoluene derivative m. 89. The latter two compounds
are more stable and better suited for purification and identification of S-guaiazulene
and are readily decomposed by ammonium sulfide.
9
Properties. Ruzicka and collaborators reported for S-guaiazulene these
properties:
9
b 12 167-168 d} 0.9728
8
bn 164 dj 0.9759
136 HYDROCARBONS
10
According to Birrell, S-guaiazulene forms blue-violet orthorhombic plates,
b 17 176, m. 31.5.
Se-Guaiazulene
The absorption spectrum of Se-guaiazulene closely resembles that of vetiv-

11
azulene. Plattner, therefore, came to the conclusion that during the de-
hydrogenation of guaiene with selenium, thermal rearrangements take place

by which the methyl group moves from the 1-position (in guaiazulene) to the
2-position.
The structural formula of Se-guaiazulene is not definitely established but
it is possibly 2,4-dimethyl-7-isopropyl-azulene.
H CH 3
C C=CH
\C /
H3C C |
CH
C
C
/ \ C -- C
H3 C
/ \CH
3
Se-Guaiazulene (?)
Ruzicka and Haagen-Smit 12 reported for Se-guaiazulene b 13 170-171,

df 0.970G. It forms a picrate m. 114-115, 110 and a styphnate m. 92,
83.
Use. The guaiazulenes are not used in our industries.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1934), 1248.
2
Helv. Chim. Ada 19 (1936), 858.
3
Ibid. 14 (1931), 1104.
4
/. Pharm. Soc. Japan 48 (1928), 1.
*Ibid. 62 (1932), 1.
6
Helv. Chim. A eta 19 (1936), 858.
7
/. Agr. Chem. Soc. Japan 11 (1935), 594. Chem. Abstracts 29 (1935), 7007.
8
Helv. Chim. Ada 19 (1936), 858.
9
Ibid. 9 (1926), 134; 14 (1931), 1112.
10
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1934), 1248; 67 (1935), 893.
" Helv. Chim. Ada 24 (1941), 283E.
*Ibid. 14 (1931), 1115.
S6bastien Sabetay and Hermine Sabetay, "A

Color Reaction for Azulene Sesquiter-
penes," Compt. rend. 199 (1934), 313. Chem. Abstracts 28 (1934), 6721.
Kenneth S. Birrell, "Investigation of Azulenes," J. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1935), 893.
AZULENES 137
B. Susz, Alexandra St. Pfau and PL A.

Plattner, "Volatile Plant Constituents. Ab-
sorption Spectra of Azulene, Guaiazulene and Vetivazulene," lido. Chim. Acta 20
(1937), 469. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 5681.
Alfred L. Sklar, "Theory of Color of Organic Compounds." J. Chem. Phys. 5 (1937),
669. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 7758.
Arno Miiller, "Test for Terpene Chromogens, Especially Azulenogenic Compounds
and a New Color Reaction for Ethereal Oils," J. prakt. Chem. 161 (1938), 233. Chem.
Abstracts 33 (1939), 1880.
PL A. Plattner and L. Lemay, "Sesquiterpenes. Carbon Skeleton of Guaiacol and of
Guaiazulene," Helv. Chim. Acta 23 (1940), 897. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 7884.
E. Perrottet, W. Taub and
E. Briner, "Comparative Energy States of Azulenic and
Napthalenic Nuclei," Helv. Chim. Acta 23 (1940), 1260. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1941),
2497.
K. Koch, "Azulene Content of Yarrow and Its Colorimetric Estimation," Deut.
Apoth. Ztg. 66 (1940), 758. Chem. Abstracts 35 (1942), 2674.
Milton S. Schechter and II. L. Haller, "The Formation of an Azulene on Zinc-Dust
Distillation of Pyrethrosin," /. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 3507.
Y. R. Naves, "Recent Developments in the Chemistry of Odorous Substances De-
rived from Hydroazulenes," Parfumerie I (1943), 70. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 3228.
PL A. Plattner and A. Fiirst, "Zur Kenntnis der Sesquiterpene. tlber den Einfluss
der Substitution auf die Farbe der Azulene; 2-Athyl-azulen," Helv. Chim. Acta 28
(1945), 1636.
PL A. Plattner, A. Fiirst and H. Schmid, "Zur Kenntnis der Sesquiterpene. Uber
den Einfluss der Substitution auf die Farbe der Azulene; 1, 3, 4, 8-Tetramethyl-azulen,"
Helv. Chim. Acta 28 (1945), 1647.
P. Karrer, H. Ruckstuhl and E. Zbinden, "tlber Lactaroviolin, einen Farbstoff aus
Lactarius deliciosus," Helv. Chim. Acta 28 (1945), 1176.
PL A. Plattner, A. Fiirst und K. Jirasck, "tlber eine neue Azulen-Synthese," Helv.
Chim. Acta 29 (1946), 740.
PL A. Plattner und A. Studer, "Zur Kenntnis der Sesquiterpene. Uber 6-Methyl-
azulen," Helv. Chim. Acta 29 (1946), 1432.
PL A. Plattner und G. Buchi, "Uber eine einfache, von Cycloheptanon ausgehende
Azulen-Synthese," Helv. Chim. Acta 29 (1946), 1608.
PL A. Plattner, A. Fiirst, and K. Jirasek (Tech. Hochschule, Zurich), "Sesquiter-
penes. Bicyclo-[5, 3, OJ-decane," Helv. Chim. Acta 29 (1946), 730 (in German). Chem.
Abstracts 40 (1946), 4701.
PL A. Plattner, R. Sandrin, and J. Wyss, "2-Phenylazulene. The Migration of Sub-
stituents on the Azulene Nucleus," Helv. Chim. Acta 29 (1946), 1604 (in German).
Hermann Hippchen, "The Preparation of an Azulene of the Guaiazulene Type from
m-Cymene," Z. Naturforsch. 1 (1946), 325. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 5497.
PL A. Plattner and E. Heilbronner, "Die Absorptionskurven des Azulens und der
fiinf Monomethyl-azulene im sichtbaren Bereich," Helv. Chim. Acta 30 (1947), 910.
E. Heilbronner and K. Wieland, "Spektrographische und thermochemische Un-
tersuchungen an dampfformigem Azulen," Helv. Chim. Acta 30 (1947), 947.
F. Sorm and J. Fajkos (Inst. of Technol., Prague, Czechoslovakia), "The Synthesis
of 6-Methylazulene," Collection Czech. Chem. Commun. 12 (1947), 81. Chem. Ab-
stracts 41 (1947), 4140.
PL A. Plattner, A. Ftirst and K. Jirasek, "Im Funfring mehrfach substituierte
Azulene," Helv. Chim. Acta 30, No. 5 (1947), 1320.
II. ALCOHOLS
A. ALIPHATIC ALCOHOLS
Introduction. Essential oils contain only a few saturated monohydroxy al-

cohols of the paraffin series, most of them being esterified with fatty acids.
The lower members occurring in free form are probably formed by the hy-
drolysis of esters in the course of steam distillation. This is equally true of
the lower fatty acids occasionally found in volatile oils. The lowest mem-
bers of the saturated aliphatic alcohols, especially methyl alcohol, frequently
occur in the distillation waters of volatile oils, and are often associated with
furfural and
diacetyl. It may be assumed that these substances are formed
by degradation of complex but unstable carbon compounds in the plant ma-
terial during distillation. Because of their great solubility, they readily dis-
solve in the distillation water. Therefore, they do not usually occur in the
separating direct oil, but may accumulate in the oil of cohobation which is
obtained by redistillation of the distillation water. This holds true also of
ethyl alcohol which may be a product of fermentation of plant starches pre-
vious to distillation. Similar phenomena have been observed in the case of
rose distillation if the petals have undergone a slight fermentation.
Aliphatic alcohols may be isolated from essential oils by fractional distilla-
tion, some through their calcium chloride compounds, others through the
acid phthalates, or p-hydroxybenzoates. They are identified by the prepara-
tion of crystalline derivatives such as phenylurethanes, naphthylurethanes,
allophanates, p-nitrobenzoates, 3,5-diriitrobenzoates, etc.
(a) SATUKATKD ALIPHATIC ALCOHOLS.
Methyl Alcohol
CH 4 O Mol. Weight 32.04
Methanol
CH 3 OH
Occurrence. Methyl alcohol occurs in the distillation waters of many vola-
tile oils, and also in the oils of cohobation.
Isolation. By fractional distillation. As methyl alcohol does not form a constant

boiling mixture with water, it may be concentrated effectively by this means. From
aqueous solutions the alcohol can be salted out with potassium carbonate. Pesce
l
recommends that be made by distillation from calcium hydride.

final purification
Identification. Methyl alcohol can be characterized by the preparation of numerous

derivatives, among which the following are most useful:
(1) p-Nitrobenzoate m. 96 (crystallized from dilute alcohol), according to Hen-
stock.* Methyl alcohol can thus be detected in a 0.25% aqueous solution.
141
142 ALCOHOLS
3,5-Dinitrobenzoate m. 108
(2) (crystallized from 95% alcohol or petroleum
Lipscomb and Baker reported that this reagent may
3 4
ether), according to Bryant.
be effectively used to identify methanol in solution without necessity of isolation per se,
when the alcohol arises in the saponification process.
Acid phthalate m. 82.4-82.7 (corr.), according to Goggans and Copenhaver. 5
(3)
(4) To identify methanol in small quantities, Gakenheimer and Hartung
6
recom-
mend mixing, dropwise, solutions of 5% phosphoric acid, 5% potassium permanganate,
and the test solution. The mixture is allowed to stand a minute and is then decolorized
with a little solid sodium bisulfite, after which 4 cc. of 72% sulfuric acid and a little
finely powdered chromotropic acid are added. The mixture is well shaken and heated
to 60 for 10 min. A violet color, intensifying on cooling, indicates the presence of as
much as 0.1% methanol.
Properties. The following properties are those listed in the International

Critical Tables, 7
and reported by Pesce, 8 and Wojciechowski: 9
7 8
m. -94.9 ni|76 1.32643
9 ' 5 7
b. 64.509 nib 1.32875
8 4 5
-
7
df 0.78662 n}> 1.33118
7
df 0.79134
Methyl alcohol is miscible with water, alcohol, or ether.

Use. Methyl alcohol is used in our industries mainly as a solvent for ex-
traction purposes.
1
Gazz. chim. ital 70 (1940), 710. Chem. Abstracts 35 (1941), 5091.
*J. Chem. Soc. (1933), 216.
3
J. Am. Chem.Soc. 64 (1932), 3760.
4
64 (1942), 179.
Ibid.
6
Ibid. 61 (1939), 2909.
6
/. Am. Pharm. Assam. 30 (1941), 49.
7
Vol. Ill, 27, 45; Vol. VII, 34 79. (N. Y., McGraw-PIill Co., 1928-29).
8
Gazz. chim. ital. 70 (1940), 710. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1941), 5091.
*J. Res. Natl. Bur. Stds. 17 (1936), 724.

L. Zepalova-Mikhatlova, "Ebulliometric Investigation of Pure Liquids/' Trans.
Inst. Pure Chem. Reagents U.S.S.R. No. 16 (1939), 51. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 3960.
G. J. W.
Ferrey, ''Tests for Acetone and Ethyl Alcohol, with Special Reference to
Methyl Alcohol," Quart. J. Pharm. Pharmacol. 18 (1945), 193. Chem. Abstracts 40
(1946), 1279.
Ethyl Alcohol
C 2 H6 O Mol. Weight 46.07
Ethanol
CHs CH2 OH
Occurrence. Ethyl alcohol is a normal genetic constituent of volatile oils
in only a few cases; it is, however, frequently encountered as an adulterant.
The analysis of an oil should, therefore, always include a test for the presence
ALIPHATIC ALCOHOLS 143
of ethyl alcohol. Moreover, ethanol occurs in the distillation waters of many

oils, therefore, also in the oils of cohobation as the result of biological activity
upon the plant material. Several essential oils styrax oil, for example
contain ethyl alcohol in ester form.
Isolation. By fractional distillation, and preparation of the calcium chloride com-

plex.
On slow distillation with hydrogen iodide (d 1.7), ethyl alcohol forms ethyl iodide
b. 72 which, according to Oettler et al., 1 may be used for the isolation and identifica-
tion of ethyl alcohol in extreme dilution (0.0025%).
Identification. Ethyl alcohol can be characterized by the preparation of several
derivatives:
p-Nitrobenzoate m. 57 (crystallized from alcohol), according to Henstock.
2
(1)
(2) 3,5-Dinitrobenzoate m. 92 (crystallized from alcohol or petroleum ether),
3
according to Orchin.
(3) Acid phthalate m. 47-48 (difficult to crystallize), according to Goggans and
4
Copenhaver.
(4) Ethoxy derivative from pseudosaccharin chloride. Pseudosaccharin chloride is
prepared in 80% yield from saccharin and phosphorus pentachloridc heated at 175
for 1.5 hr. The alcohol reacts readily with the chloride to yield the ethoxy derivative
after 10 min. of heating, m. 219, according to Meadoe and Reid. 6
2,4-Dinitrophenylcarbamate m. 110, according to van Ginkel.
6
(5)
7 8
Properties. Zepalova-Mikailova, Wojciechowski, and International Criti-
cal Tables 9 recorded these properties for 100 per cent ethanol:
8
b. 78.325
5 7
d] 0.79357
9
nf? 1.3610 (99.9%)
Ethyl alcohol is miscible with water, ether, petroleum ether, glyccrol, etc.
With water it forms a binary, constant boiling mixture b. 78.5 containing
95.57 per cent ethyl alcohol by weight.
Whenheated with iodine, potassium iodide solution, and dilute sodium
hydroxide solution, ethyl alcohol yields iodoform m. 119.
Use.Ethyl alcohol is most widely used in our industries as a solvent for
perfume and flavor compounds, and for extraction purposes. However, spe-
cial methods of purification may be required on many commercial stocks
when intended for these purposes.
1
J. Am. Chern. Soc. 64 (1932), 1476.
*J. Chem. Soc. (1933), 216.
3
/. Assocn. Official Agr. Chem. 25 (1942), 839.
4
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 2909.
6
Ibid. 66 (1943), 457.
6
Rec. trav. chim. 61 (1942), 149. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 6252.
7
Trans. Inst. Pure Chem. Reagents U.S.S.R., No. 16 (1939), 51. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940)
3960.
8
/. Res. Natl Bur. Stds. 17 (1936), 724.
9
Vol. VII (1930), 12.
144 ALCOHOLS
G. J. W.
Ferrey, "Test's for Acetone and Ethyl Alcohol, with Special Reference to
Methyl Alcohol," Quart. J. Pharm. Pharmacol 18 (1945), 193. Chem. Abstracts 40
(1946), 1279.
Ti-Butyl Alcohol
C 4 H 10 O Mol. Weight 74.12
n-Butanol
CH2 CH2 CH2 *

OH
Occurrence. n-Butyl alcohol occurs as ester in Roman chamomile oil.
Isolation. By fractional distillation and through the acid phthalate.

Identification. By the preparation of derivatives :
p-Nitrobenzoate m. 35.3, according to Armstrong and Copenhaver.

1
(1) This
derivative permits identifying n-butyl alcohol even in 0.25% aqueous solutions,
2
according to Henstock.
(2) Acid phthalate m. 73.1-73.5 (corr.), according to Goggans and Copenhaver.
3
(3) 2,4-Dinitrophenylcarbamate m. 94 (from petroleum ether), according to van

Ginkcl. 4
S-Benzylthiuronium n-butyl sulfate: Add 5 drops of the n-butyl alcohol to
(4)
a mixture of 4 drops of chlorsulfonic acid and 5 drops of dioxane, arid warm the mix-
ture with shaking. Add 1 cc. of water and 1 cc. of a saturated aqueous solution
or a 15% alcoholic solution of S-benzyl thiuronium chloride. Cool the mixture.
M. lOOMOl according to Bair and Suter.
,
6
Properties. Timmermans and Martin, 6 Wojciechowski, 7 Huston and

8
Agett, and Longtin, Randall and Weber 9 reported these properties:
7 8
b. 1 17.720 nf? 1.3993
8 9
df 0.8070 nf? 1.39949
6 5 6
df 0.8096 nk 1.40118
n-Butyl alcohol is soluble in about 11 volumes of water at 15. From

aqueous solutions the alcohol can be salted out with calcium chloride or po-
tassium carbonate. With water, n-butyl alcohol forms a constant boiling
mixture b. 92.25 containing 63 per cent by weight of n-butyl alcohol.
On oxidation with chromic acid-sulfuric acid, n-butyl alcohol yields n-butyr-
aldehyde and n-butyric acid.
Use. n-Butyl alcohol is used in our industries for the preparation of esters
which have attained considerable importance in the flavor industry.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 65 (1943), 2252.
*J. Chem. Soc. (1933), 216.
3
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 2909.
4
6
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 1978.
fl
J. chim. phys. 26 (1928), 427. 8
/. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 128.
7
J. Res. Natl. Bur. Stds., 17 (1936), 724. J. Phys. Chem. 46 (1941), 340.
William N. Lipscomb and Robert H. Baker, "Identification of Alcohols in Aqueous

Solution," /. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 179.
Isobutyl Alcohol
Isopropylcarbinol. 2-Methylpropanol
H3C
CH-CH 2 -OH
H3 C
Occurrence. Isobutyl alcohol has been identified in the distillation waters
of Eucalyptus amygdalina. Bohnsack l
recently reported it in raspberry oil.

Identification. By the preparation of derivatives:
p-Nitrobenzoate m. 69.5, according to Armstrong and Copenhaver.
2
(1) Through
this derivative isobutyl alcohol can be identified even in 0.25% aqueous solution.
3,5-Dinitrobenzoate m. 87, according to Bryant. Lipscomb and Baker
3 4
(2)
recommend this derivative for the identification of isobutyl alcohol in aqueous solu-
tion without the necessity of isolating the alcohol per se.
(3) S-Benzylthiuronium isobutyl sulfate: The alcohol is converted to the corre-
sponding acid sulfate, which in turn is reacted with S-benzylthiuronium chloride.
Derivative m. 136-137, according to Bair and Suter. 6
6
(4) 2,4-Dinitrophenylcarbamate m. 100, according to van Ginkel.
8
Properties. Timmermans and Martin, 7 and Brunei, Crenshaw and Tobin
reported these properties:
7 8
b. 108.1 n 1.3939
8 5 7
df 0.79801 nf> 1.39768
7
df 0.80196
Isobutyl alcohol is soluble in 10 parts of water at 15. With water it forms

a constant boiling mixture b. 89.2 containing 66.8 per cent by weight of iso-
butyl alcohol and 33.2 per cent of water.
Onoxidation with dilute alkaline potassium permanganate in the cold, iso-
butyl alcohol yields isobutyric acid.
Use. Isobutyl alcohol is used in our industries for the preparation of
esters which have attained considerable importance in the flavor industry.
4
1
Ber. 76B(1942), 72. Ibid. 64 (1942), 179.
2
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1943), 2252. 6
Ibid. 1978.
3
Ibid. 54 (1932), 3760.
146 ALCOHOLS
6
7
/. chim. phys. 25 (1928), 429.
8
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 43 (1921), 575.

L. Zepalova-Mikhallova, "Ebulliometric Investigation of Pure Liquids," Trans.
Inst. Pure Chem. Reagents U.S.S.R., No. 16 (1939), 51. Khim. Referat. Zhur., No. 6
(1939), 70. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 3960.
n-Amyl Alcohol
1-Pentanol
CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH -
Occurrence. Amyl alcohol has been identified in the ethereal oil derived
from apples, and in cotton herb oil.
Isolation. By fractional distillation and through the acid phthalate or the p-

hydroxybenzoate.
(1)Acid phthalate m. 75.4-75.6 (corr.), according to Goggans and Copenhaver. 1
(2) S-Bcnzylthiuronium w-amyl sulfate The alcohol is converted to the correspond-

:
ing acid sulfate, which in turn is reacted with S-benzylthiuronium chloride. Deriva-
tive m. 85-86, according to Bair and Suter. 2
(3) 2,4-Dinitrophenylcarbamate m. 84, according to van Ginkel

3
who prepared
this derivative from the l-(2,4-dinitrophenyl)-3-methyl-3-nitrourea.
Properties. Wojciechowski,
4
and Timmermans and Ilennaut-Roland 5
re-
ported these properties:

5 B
m. -73.85 df 0.80704
4 5
b. 138.06 df 0.81837
5 5
n{> 1.41 173
n-Amyl alcohol is soluble in 5 volumes of water at 30. With water it
forms a constant boiling mixture b. 95.8 which contains 45.0 per cent of
n-amyl alcohol and 54.4 per cent of water.

Oxidation of n-amyl alcohol with chromic acid-sulfuric acid yields n-valer-
aldehyde, and finally n-valeric acid.
Use. Amyl alcohol is used in our industries as a solvent and for the prep-
aration of esters which have attained considerable importance in the flavor
industry.
1
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 2909.
2
Ibid. 64 (1942), 1978.
3
4
/. Research Natl. Bur. Stds. 17 (1936), 724.
6
J. chim. phys. 29 (1932), 539.

"Standard Specifications for Amyl Alcohol (Synthetic)/' Amer. Soc. Testing Ma-
terials, Standards, 1940, Supplement Part II, Non-Metallic (Constr.), 158.
Isoamyl Alcohol
3-Methylbutanol
H3 C
CH.CH2 -CH2 .OH
H3 C
Occurrence.Isoamyl alcohol occurs free in oil of Java citronella, Rdunion
geranium, lavender, French peppermint, Eucalyptus globulus, and E. amygda-
lina. As ester isoamyl alcohol occurs in oil of cognac, Roman chamomile,
Eucalyptus globulus, raspberry, and a few other essential oils.
Isolation. The between the rates of chlorination offers a means of
differential
separating isoamyl alcohol from optically active amyl alcohols. According to Birun,
1
the rate of formation slower for the active alcohols.

is
(1) 3,5-Dinitrobenzoate m. 61-C2, according to Reichstein.

2
(2) Acid 3-nitrophthalate m. 165-166 (crystallized from water), according to

Nicolet and Sachs. 3
a-Naphthylurethane m. 67, according to Huston and Agett.
4
(3)
(4) Isoamyloxy derivative from pseudosaccharin chloride m. 64, according to
Meadoe and Reid. 6
Properties. The following properties have been reported by Timmermans

6
and Hennaut-Roland:
b. 132
df 0.80918
n{? 1.40851
Isoamyl alcohol a cough provoking liquid of somewhat disagreeable odor.

is
Water dissolves at room temperature 3.3 volumes of isoamyl alcohol. Iso-

amyl alcohol forms with water a constant boiling mixture b. 95.15 contain-
ing 50.04 per cent by weight of isoamyl alcohol and 49.60 per cent of water.
Use. Isoamyl alcohol is used for the preparation of esters which have
attained considerable importance in the flavor industry.
1
Nauch. Zapiski Inst. Narodnogo Khoz. im. Plekhanova (1938), No. 1, 120. Chem. Ab-
stracts 34 (1940), 1969.
2
Helv. Chim. Acta 9 (1926), 802.
3
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 47 (1925), 2349.
/. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 128.
6
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1943), 457.
Anales soc. espan. fts. quim. 27 (1929), 460 (in French). Chem. Abstracts 24 (1930), 54.
148 ALCOHOLS
n-Hexyl Alcohol
C6 H 14 O Mol. Weight 102.17
1-Hexanol
CHs CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 OH

n-Hexyl alcohol has been identified in oil of Heracleum
Occurrence. gi-
ganteum and a few other essential oils where it occurs as ester.
Isolation.-By fractional distillation and through the p-hydroxybenzoate, according
to Olivier. 1
Identification. the preparation of derivatives:
By
(1) 3,5-Dinitrobenzoate m. 60-61, according to Sutter.
2
(2) S-Benzyithiuronium n-hexyl sulfate: The alcohol is converted to the correspond-

ing acid sulfate, which in turn is reacted with S-benzylthiuronium chloride. Deriva-
tive m. 85-86, according to Bair and Suter. 3
(3) a-Naphthylurethane m. 60-61, according to Bohnsack. 4

5
(4)
Properties. The following properties have been recorded by Hovorka,

Lankelma and Stanford: 6
b. 157.04 0.2 nf? 1.4158
df 0.8193 (Olivier) n{? 1.4198
n-Hexyl alcohol is slightly soluble in water at 25 (0.624 per cent by weight).

On oxidation with potassium bichromate and sulfuric acid, n-hexyl alcohol
yields n-caproic acid.
Use. n-Hexyl alcohol is used in our industry for the preparation of a few
esters.
1
Rec. trav. chim. 66 (1936), 1034.
2
Helv. Chim. Acta 21 (1938), 1267.
3
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 1978.
4
Ber. 74B (1941), 1575.
6
6
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 60 (1938), 823.
3-Methyl-l-pentanol
0,0-Methylethylpropyl Alcohol
CH3
CH3 .CH2 .CH.CH2 .CH2 -OH
Occurrence. Esterified with angelic acid, this optically active hexyl alco-
hol occurs in Roman chamomile according to van Romburgh and Blaise.
oil,
l 2
3
Bohnsack reported the dextro isomer in Reunion geranium oil, the laevo
isomer in the foreruns of Java citronella oil.
Isolation. By fractional distillation, and by means of the acid phthalate (cf . Levene
and Marker, and Bohnsack
4 6
).
Identification. Oxidation of the naturally occurring alcohols with chromic acid

mixture yielded optically active caproic acid b. 196-198, amide m. 123.5-124,
according to van Romburgh and Bohnsack. Bohnsack 8 obtained the pure laevo-a-
6 7
naphthylurethane m. 97-98.
Properties. The natural optically active hexyl alcohol isolated from Roman
chamomile oil has these properties:
b. 154
dis 0.829
WD 2
+8 12'
The purified isolate from Reunion geranium oil was reported by Bohnsack 9
as follows:
b. 154 djf 0.826
b9 52-54 [a]$ +2 24'
Employing the combined borate and phthalate method, Bohnsack

10
iso-
lated a laevorotatory 3-methyl-l-pentanol from Java citronella oil:
b. 154-156 d?J 0.8270

5
bio 52-54 [a]L approx. -2
Synthetic d-3-methyl-l-pentanol has been prepared by Levene and Marker
ll
and purified by means of the acid phthalate. It had these characteristics:

b 25 72 []g +3 37'
df 0.822 ng 1.4182
12
Synthetic -3-methyl-l-pentanol has been prepared by Veibel et al. Levene
and Rothen 13 reported its specific optical rotation as [ajff 3 12'.
Regarding properties and identification of synthetic 3-methyl-l-pentanol in
14 15 16
general, see Hovorka, Lankelma and Schneider, Bohnsack, and Sutter.
Use. Nothing is known in literature about the use of 3-methyl-l-pentanol.
1
Rec. trav. chim. 6 (1886), 219; 6 (1887), 150.
2
Bull. soc. chim. Ill, 29 (1903), 327.
3
Ber. 74B (1941), 1575; 76B (1942), 502; 76B (1943), 564.
*J. Bid. Chem. 91 (1931), 77.
6
Ber. 74B (1941), 1575; 76B (1942), 502.
6
Rec. trav. chim. 6 (1887), 150.
7
Ber. 74B (1941), 1575.
8
Ber. 76B (1943), 564.
9
Ber. 74B (1941), 1575; 76B (1942), 502.
10
Ber. 76B (1943), 564.
" /. Biol. Chem. 91 (1931), 85.
12
Biochem. Z. 252 (1932), 401. Bull soc. chim. [51, 6 (1939), 990.
13
J. Biol. Chem. 115 (1936), 426.
14
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1940), 1096.
16
Ber. 74 (1941), 1575; 76 (1943), 564.
16
Helv. Chim. Ada 21 (1938), 1266.
150 ALCOHOLS
2-Heptanol
C 7 H 16O Mol. Weight 116.20
TÂmylmethylcarbinol. sec.-Heptyl Alcohol
H
CH3 (01X2)4 C CHs
OH
Occurrence. This heptyl alcohol was identified by Masson l

in clove oil.
Isolation. By and through the acid phthalate (see below).

fractional distillation
Identification. The naturally occurring n-amylmethylcarbinoi was characterized
as follows:
(1)Oxidation with chromic acid mixture yielded methyl-n-amylketone; the latter
identified by the preparation of its semicarbazone m. 122-123.
(2) By the preparation of the pyruvic ester, the semicarbazone of which melted at
The
acid phthalate of e#-2-heptanol melts at 57-58, according to Pickard and
2
Kenyon, that of the d- or I- form melts at 76.5, the brucine salt thereof at 137-138,
and the strychnine salt at 203-204.
3
Properties. Masson reported for 2-heptanol, isolated from clove oil:
b. 157-158
d 0.8344
The synthetic products of Pickard and Kenyon 4

had these properties:
Regarding derivatives and properties of cM-2-heptanol, see Huntress and

5 6
Mulliken, and Heilbron.
Use. 2-Heptanol is not used in our industries.
1
Compt. rend. 149 (1909), 630.
*/. Chem. Soc. 99 (1911), 60, 61, 63, 65,
8
Compt. rend. 149 (1909), 630.
/. Chem. Soc. 99 (1911), 60, 61, 63, 65.
6
"Identification of Pure Organic Compounds," Order I (1941), 447.
"Dictionary of Organic Compounds," Vol. II (1943).
n-Octyl Alcohol
1-Octanol
CH3 (CH 2
-
)6
-
CH 2 OH
Occurrence. This alcohol occurs free and as acetate in oil of Heracleum gi-
Takei, Sakato and Ono in 1936 observed the alcohol in oil of
1
ganteum.
green tea. In ester form, n-octyl alcohol is present also in a few other essen-
tial oils.
Mikhaflova, Nikolaeva and Bel'skaya recommend oxidation of Hera-

2
Isolation.
cleum oil with 10% potassium permanganate and subsequent hydrolysis with 25%
potassium hydroxide. The hydrolyzate is steam-distilled, and the nonaqueous layer
dried and fractionally distilled to give a 60% yield of pure octanol.
Generally this alcohol may be obtained by fractional distillation and through the
3
p-hydroxybenzoate, according to Olivier.
Identification. (1) By the preparation of derivatives:
(a) 3,5-Dinitrobenzoate m. 60.8, according to Malone and Reid.
4
(b) a-Naphthylurethane m. 66, according to Huston and Agett.

6
(c) Phenylurethane m. 74, according to Dewey and Witt.

6
(d) 2,4-Dinitrophenylcarbamate m. 76, according to van Ginkel, from the 1-

7
(2,4-dinitrophenyl)-3-methyl-3-nitrourea.
Takei, Sakato and Ono reported the urethane as m. 147.
8
(e)
(2) Oxidation of n-octyl alcohol yields n-octyl aldehyde, the /3-naphthocinchoninic
acid compound m. 234.
These properties of n-octyl alcohol have been reported by
Properties.
9
Dorough, Glass, Gresham, Malone and Reid:
m. -15.0 df 0.8224
b. 195 dj 0.8394
b 3 oo 164 ng 1.4275
bioo 135 MD 40.68

b 20 100.7
n-Octyl alcohol is only sparingly soluble in water at 25 (0.0586 per cent

by weight).
Use. Synthetic octyl alcohol is used as a modifier in the compounding of
synthetic flower oils for example, rose and lilac. It serves well in orris
root compositions and in many perfumes of fancy character.
1
Bull. Inst. Phys. Chem. Research Tokyo 15 (1936), 626; 16 (1937), 7. Chem. Abstracts 31
(1937), 6814.
*Org. Chim. Ind. U.S.S.R. 6 (1939), 594. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 5047.
*Rec. trav. chim. 56 (1937), 256.
,7. Am. Chem. Soc. 51 (1929), 3426.
4
6
J. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 128.
6
Ind. Eng. Chem., Anal. Ed. 12 (1940), 459.
152 ALCOHOLS
7
8
Bull. Inst. Phys. Chem. Research Tokyo 16 (1937), 7. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 6815.
'/. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 3102.
3-Octanol
Ethyl-n-amylcarbinol
H
C2Hs C CsHi i
OH
Occurrence. This secondary octyl alcohol has been found in Japanese mint
oil (Mentha arvensis) by Schimmel & Co.,
1
likewise by Naves,
2
free and as
acetate in European pennyroyal oil.
Isolation. By fractional distillation, and through the acid phthalate.

Identification. The urethane of Z-3-octanol is reported by Levene and Walti 8
as
melting at 79-80, and that of d-3-octanol by Gildemeister and Hoffmann
4
as melting
at 81-82. (Also see section on "Properties.")
According to Schimmel & Co., the natural alcohol from Japa-

5
Properties.
nese mint oil, purified through its acid phthalate, has these properties:
b. 178.5M79.5 aD +6 17'
b3 . 5 56 nf? 1.42775
dljj 0.8279
The d-3-octanol isolated from oil of Mentha pulegium L. by Naves

6
is de-
scribed as follows:
b 732 176-176.5 M +7 56' (homogeneous)
b2 . 2 52-53 +9 16' (c = 20, alcohol)
df 0.8246 nf? 1.42682

RM D obs. 40.52
calc. 40.67
A synthetic laevorotatory 3-octanol is described by Levene and Walti

7
as
follows:
b 24 82
D 4 39' (homogeneous)
[a]g -7 24' (abs. ale.)
Optically inactive ethyl-n-amylcarbinol was prepared by Schimmel & Co.,

8
and by Pickard and Kenyon. 9 Its acid phthalate melted at 65-65.5. A

10
patented catalytic procedure by I. G. Farbenindustrie yields a product b.
180-181. Murahashi u reported the p-iododiphenylurethane of dihydro-
matsutake alcohol, identical with 3-octanol as m. 158.5-159.3. Unless
racemization occurs, this derivative has approximately the same melting point
for all forms of the alcohol.
A
recent careful study of racemic 3-octanol by Dorough, Glass, Gresham,
Malone and Reid 12 yielded these properties:
m. -45 df 0.8169
b. 173 d4 0.8361
5
bsoo 140.5 nib 1.4209
bioo 110.2 MD 40.41

b 20 75.9 Sol. 1.252 g. of octanol are sol-
uble in 1 kg. of water
Use. This alcohol is not used in our industries.
1
*Helv. Chim. Ada 26 (1943), 1034.
3
J. Biol Chem. 94 (1931), 596.
4
"Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. Ill, 838.
6
6
Helv. Chim. Acta 26 (1943), 1034.
7
/. Biol. Chem. 94 (1931), 593.
8
Ber, Schimmel & Co., April (1913), 79.
J. Chem. Soc. 103 (1913), 1945.
10
French Patent 656, 178, June 21, 1928.
11
Sci. Papers Inst. Phys. Chem. Research Tokyo 30 (1936), 263; 34 (1938), 155. Chem. Ab-
stracts 32 (1938), 3755.
u J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 3102.
n-Nonyl Alcohol
1-Nonanol
OH;r (CH 2 ) 7 .CH 2 -OH
Occurrence. As caprylate in sweet orange oil.
Isolation. By fractional distillation and through the acid phthalate, or p-hydroxy-

benzoate.
Identification. n-Nonyl alcohol can be characterized by the preparation of several
derivatives:
3,5-Dinitrobenzoate m. 52.0, according to Spath, Pailer and Schmid.
1
(1)
(2) Acid phthalate m. 42.4-42.6 (corr.), according to Goggans and Copenhaver.*
(3) Phenylurethane m. 60, according to Dewey and Witt.
3

4
(4)
154 ALCOHOLS
n-Nonyl alcohol possesses an odor slightly reminiscent of rose.
Properties.
6 6
Stephan purified the alcohol through the acid phthalate, Olivier through
the p-hydroxybenzoate m. 40.5-41.3. The following properties have been
7
reported by these authors, by Ellis and Reid, and by Nametkin and Shaga-
8
lova:
6 7 5
b. 213-213.5 '
D
5 8
bw 98-101 nf? 1.435
7 5 5
df 0.82303 n{> 1.43582
6- 8
df 0.827 1
On oxidation n-nonyl alcohol yields nonyl aldehyde and nonylic (pelargonic)

acid m. 12.5.
Use. Small quantities of n-nonyl alcohol are used in rose compositions and
in artificial orange oils.
(1941), 1555. Cf. Malone and Reid, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1929), 3426.
74B
1
Ber.
2
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 2909.
3
Ind. Eng. Chem. Anal. Ed. 12 (1940), 459. Cf. Stephan, J. prakt. Chem. II, 62 (1900), 532.
4
*J. prakt. Chem. II, 62 (1900), 532.
6
Rec. trav. chim. 66 (1937), 256.
7
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1932), 1678.
8
Sintezy Dushistykh Veshchestv, Sbornik Statel (1939), 274. Khim. Referat. Zhur., No. 4
(1940), 118. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 3781.
2-Nonanol
Methyl-n-heptylcarbinol
H
CHs C CH2 (0^(2)5 CHs
OH
Occurrence. A
secondary laevorotatory nonyl alcohol was found by Mas-
son l
in oil of clove, and by Power and Lees 2 in Algerian rue oil. The opti-
cal antipode of this alcohol occurs in the volatile coconut oil, according to
Haller and Lassieur. 3
Isolation. By fractional distillation, and through the phthalic esters.

Identification. The
laevorotatory methyl-n-heptylcarbinol can be characterized :
(1) By oxidation to methyl-n-heptyl ketone which may be identified by the prepara-

tion of semicarbazone m. 118-119.
its
(2) With pyruvic acid this alcohol forms an ester bie 126-127, the semicarbazone
of which melts at 117.
Thedextrorotatory alcohol, on treatment with phthalic anhydride, yields an acid

ester, according to Pickard and Kenyon, m. 58-59, [<*]D +46 4' (in ethyl alcohol),
4
the inactive form melting at 42-44. The brucine salt of the d- acid phthalate melts
at 140-142, the strychnine salt at 142-143.
5
Properties. Power and Lees recorded these properties for laevorotatory
methy 1-n-hepty Icarbinol :
b 76 5 198-200
d\l 0.8273
aD (50 mm. tube) -3 44'
6
Masson reported for the alcohol isolated from clove oil:
b. 195-196
d 0.8399
The
dextrorotatory modification of this secondary nonyl alcohol as de-
rived from volatile coconut oil was described by Haller and Lassieur: 7
df 0.823
D +2 &
1
no 1.4249
d-Methyl-n-heptylcarbinol, prepared synthetically by Pickard and Ken-

8
yon, had these properties:
b 19 105 []}? +8 59'
df 0.8202 ng 1.4299
df 0.8230
'"- 1
0.8281
Regarding d-2-nonanol, its properties and derivatives, see Huntress and

Mulliken,
9
and Heilbron. 10
Use. 2-Nonanol is used very little, if at all, in our industries.
1
Compt. rend. 149 (1909), 630.
2
Chem. Soc. 81 (1902),
/. 1592.
3
Compt. rend. 161 (1910), 697.
*J. Chem. Soc. 99 (1911), 60, 61, 63.
6
Ibid. 81 (1902), 1592.
6
Compt. rend. 149 (1909), 630.
7
Ibid. 161 (1910), 697.
8
/. Chem. Soc. 99 (1911), 55, 70.
9
10
"Dictionary of Organic Compounds," Vol. II (1943), 724.
156 ALCOHOLS
1-Decanol
C 10 H 22 . Mol. Weight 158.28
n-Decyl Alcohol
CH3 -(CH 2 8 .CH2 -OH

)
Occurrence. Decyl alcohol occurs in oil of ambrette seed.

Identification. By
the preparation of derivatives:
(1) Acid phthalate m. 37.9, according to Goggans and Copenhaver.
1
(2) Acid m-nitrophthalate m. 122.7-122.8 (corr.), according to Dickinson, Crosson

and Copenhaver. 2
S-Benzylthiuronium n-decyl sulfate: The alcohol is converted to the corre-
(3)
sponding acid sulfate, which in turn is reacted with S-benzylthiuronium chloride.
Derivative m. 73-75, according to Bair and Suter. 3
Dinitrophenylcarbamate m. 70, according to van Ginkel.
4
(4)
Properties. Hoerr, Harwood and Ralston,

6
and Kao and Ma 6
recorded
these properties:
5 6
f.p. 6.88 df 0.8292
6 s
b. 231 nf? 1. 43682
n-Decyl alcohol is a somewhat viscid oil of characteristic odor, slightly

reminiscent of orange.
On oxidation with potassium permanganate and dilute sulfuric acid, it
yields n-capric acid.

Use. n-Decyl alcohol is used quite widely but most sparingly as a modifier
of citrus scents. As such, it serves in flavors as well as in perfumes.
!/. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 2909.

'/. Am. Chem. Soc. 69 (1937), 1095.
*Ibid. 64 (1942), 1978.
4
/. Org. Chem. 9 (1944), 267.
6
Science Repts. Natl. Tsing Hua Univ. Scr. A, 1 (1932), 181. Chem. Zentr. II (1932), 3076.
2-Hendecanol
C n H 24 O Mol. Weight 172.30
Methyl-n-nonylcarbinol. Undecan-2-ol
H
CHa (CH 2 )g C CHs
Oil
Optically active secondary undecyl alcohols of this formula

Occurrence.
have been identified in Algerian rue oil by Power and Lees, 1 in trawas
2
leaf oil by van Romburgh, and in the ethereal coconut oil by Haller and
Lassieur. 8
Isolation. By fractional distillation and through the acid phthalate (see below).
Identification. The acid phthalate of d/-undecan-2-ol melts at 49-50; the active
form at 31-32, according to Pickard and Kenyon; brucine salt m. 113-116;
4
strychnine salt m. 144-145.

On
oxidation of the naturally occurring alcohol Power and Lees 6 obtained methyl-
n-nonyl ketone, the oxime of which melted at 46-47, the semicarbazone at 122.
Properties. The same authors reported these properties for the alcohol
from oil of rue:
b. 231-233
D (25mm. tube) -118'

6
Haller and Lassieur found for the undecan-2-ol isolated from ethereal
coconut oil:
df 0.827
1.4336
7
Pickard and Kenyon reported for the purified synthetic d-methyl-n-nonyl
carbinol these properties:
ir
1.43G9
The compound has been reported

synthetic dl- recently by Dreger, Keim,
8
Miles, Shedlovsky and Ross, m. 0, b 27 136.
Use. 2-Hendecanol is not used in our industries.
i/. Chem. Soc. 81 (1902), 1592.

*
Kon. Akad. Wetensch. Amsterdam, Meeting Oct. 28, 1911, 325.
3
Compt. rend. 161 (1910), 697.
*/. Chem. Soc. 99 (1911), 60, 61, 63; 105 (1914), 850.
81 (1902), 1588, 1593.
Ibid.
6
Compt. rend. 161 (1910), 697.
7
/. Chem. Soc. 99 (1911), 55, 70; 106 (1914), 850.
*Ind. Eng. Chem. 36, No. 7 (1944), 612.
158 ALCOHOLS
(b) UNSATURATED ALIPHATIC ALCOHOLS.
3-Hexen-l-ol
0,7-Hexenol. "Leaf Alcohol"
CH2 CH=CH CH2 CH2 OH
The problem regarding the stereoisomerism of this unsaturated primary

alcohol has been the subject of a polemic between Takei and collaborators l
on the one hand, and Stoll and Rouv6 2
on the other. These latter workers
claimed that the naturally occurring alcohol has the "cis-" form and that it
is identical with the synthetic product prepared by them, whereas Takei
et al. maintain that the natural product, which they isolated from green tea
oil, represents the "trans-" isomer and that the synthetic "cis-" form is odor-
less. More recently Ruzicka, Schinz and Susz 3 suggested that natural
3-hexen-l-ol obtained through saponification of the high boiling fraction from
Japanese mint oil has the cis- form, while natural 3-hexen-l-ol isolated from
ethereal violet leaf possesses the trans- configuration.
oil
4
Occurrence. According to van Romburgh, this alcohol forms the main
constituent of the oil distilled from freshly fermented tea leaves, whereas
Takei et al. 6 recognized this hexenol in the fresh green tea only. Walbaum 6
found that leaf alcohol occurs as phenylacetic ester in the last runs of Japa-
nese mint oil (Mentha arvensis). Ruzicka and Schinz 7 isolated 3-hexen-l-ol
from ethereal violet leaf oil. Spanish thyme oil contains free 3-hexen-l-ol.
Takei and collaborators 8 reported that the volatile oil of Thea chinensis con-
tains 25 to 35.3 per cent of 3-hexen-l-ol, oil of Eurya japonica 14 per cent,
oil of Parthenocissus thunbergii Nakai 18.1 per cent, oil of Fatsia japonica
Decne et Planch. 12.7 per cent, oil of Trifolium rcpens L. 22.2 per cent, oil
of Robinia pseudacacia L. 50 per cent, oil of Morus bombycis Koidz. 50 per
cent, and oil of Raphanus sativus L. 30 per cent. This alcohol*

probably is
present in many types of green leaves, herbs, and grasses, according to Franzen
and co-authors 9 who gathered organoleptic evidence from forty types.
10
Bohnsack identified 3-hexen-l-ol in natural raspberry oil, in Java oil of cit-
11 12
ronella, and in R6union geranium oil.
Isolation. Leaf alcohol can be isolated from essential oils:
(1) Through its acid phthalate.

(2) On benzoylation in
pyridine solution, leaf alcohol forms a benzoate be 134-136,
from which the alcohol can be regenerated by saponification.
13
(3) Ruzicka, Schinz and Susz purified the natural 3-hexen-l-ol (from Japanese
mint oil) through the allophanate m. 139-140.
*
According to Gildemcister and Hoffmann ("Die Atherischen Ole," 3rd ed., Vol. Ill,
840) the leaf alcohol described by Curtius and Franzen is at, /3-hexenol, not ft, 7- as found
by Walbaum in Japanese mint oil.
Identification. Leaf alcohol may be characterized by means of several derivatives.

The worker, however, should take note of the variance in melting points as reported
by different authorities, and recognize that these variations may as easily be attributed
to the existence of cis~ and trans- forms rather than impurities, such as isomerized
hexenols.
DERIVATIVES, MELTING POINTS
Properties. Walbaum 21
reported these properties for leaf alcohol isolated
from the last runs of Japanese mint oil, after saponification:
b. 156-157 0.8508
b9 55-56 -0 10'
20
1.4803
160 ALCOHOLS
22
Ruzicka, Schinz and Susz purified and described as the cis- isomer a
natural 3-hexen-l-ol (from Japanese mint oil) through its allophanate m.
139-140 and found these properties:
b 12 58-58.5 nf? 1.4380
df 0.8495
M.R.
fObs. 30.92
[Calc. 30.96
23
whereas Stoll and Rouve" reported the following properties of a synthetic
product which they consider as cis-3-hexen-l-ol:
bw.6 59-61
6
df' 0.8478
HD 1.4373
24
Ruzicka, Schinz and Susz prepared and purified the synthetic alcohol
through its allophanate I, m. 143-144 (see above), and on cleavage obtained
synthetic 3-hexen-l-ol:
bi2 58.5-60
df 0.8480
nf? 1.4376
Properties of products from other sources appear to approximate these very

25
closely (cf. Takei and co-workers, von Rechenberg, 26 Curtius and Franzen, 27
van Romburgh, 28 and Werner 29 and Bohnsack 30 ).
Treff
On dilution leaf alcohol has an odor characteristic of grass and fresh green
leaves. The odor is strong, but not as pungent as that of leaf aldehyde.
Synthetic leaf alcohol is used in high quality perfume compositions
Use.
where a note of grass and of green leaves is desired.
i
Ber. 68B (1935), 953. J. Agr. Chem. Soc. Japan 14 (1938), 709. Ber. 73B (1940), 950.
8
Helv. Chim. Ada 21 (1938), 1542. Ber. 73B (1940), 1358.
8
Ibid. 27 (1944), 1561.
4
Verslag Plantentuin te Buitenzorg (1895), 119; (1896), 166. Ber. Schimmel &
Co., April
(1897), 42; April (1898), 53. Koninkl. Akad. Wetensch. Amsterdam, Wisk. en Natk. Afd.
28 (1919), 83. Chem. Zentr. I (1920), 83.
6
Bull. Inst. Phys. Chem. Research (Tokyo) 14 (1935), 303; 16 (1937), 773. Chem. Abstracts
29 (1935), 8229; 32 (1938), 5155.
6
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 96 (1917), 245.
7
Helv. Chim. Ada 18 (1935), 381.
8
9
Sitzb. Heidelberg Akad. Wiss. Math. Nat. Klass Abt. A (1920). Cf. Ber. Schimmel Co. &
(1920), 137. Z. physiol. Chem. 112 (1920), 301. Liebigs Ann. 390 (1912), 109; 404 (1914),
129. Chem. Zentr. II (1912), 722.
10
Ber. 75B (1942), 72.
11
Ber. 76B (1943), 564.
"Ber. 74B (1941), 1575.
18
" "Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. Ill, 226.
18
16
Helv. Chim. Acta 27 (1944), 1561. Chem. Abstracts 39
(1945), 3117.
17
Ber. 74B (1941), 1575.
18
Ber. 73B (1940), 1358. See Takei et al., Ber. 73 (1940), 951.
Ber. 68B (1935), 953.
20
#eto. Chim. Ada 21 (1938), 1542.
21
/. prakt. Chem. II, 96 (1917), 245.
22
ffefo. Chim. Acta 27 (1944), 1561. Chem. Abstracts 39 (1945), 3117.
23
Ibid. 21 (1938), 1547.
*Ibid. 27 (1944), 1561. C/tem. Abstracts 39 (1945), 3117. See Ruzicka and
Schinz, Helv.
Chim. Acta 17 (1934), 1602.
26
Ber. 68B (1935), 953. Bull. Inst. Phys. Chem. Research
(Tokyo) 14 (1935), 303. Chem
Abstracts 29 (1935), 8229.
K J. prakt. Chem.
[2], 101 (1921), 120.
27
Liebigs Ann. 404 (1914), 128.
28
Koninkl. Akad. Wetensch. Amsterdam, Wisk. en Natk. Afd. 28 (1919), 83. Chem Zenir
I (1920), 83.
29
Ber. 68B (1935), 640.
30
Ber. 74B (1941), 1575.
l-Octen-3-ol
Z-n-Amylvinylcarbinol . Matsutake-alcohol
CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2
.
CPI OH=OH 2
Oil
was found by Murahashi in the so-called Matsutake, a

l-Octen-3-ol l
fungus, viz., Armillaria matsutake I to and Imai (fam. Agaricaceae). This

fungus is a parasite growing in Japanese forests on the root hairs of Pinus
densiflora. l-Octen-3-ol b. 165-175, b 12 68-71, [a\\$ -7 49', was char-
acterized by the preparation of its p-iododiphenylurethane m. 165.5-166.
Murahashi 2 also found that the octeriol previously identified in hinoki leaf
oil is in reality l-octen-3-ol.
l
Sci. Papers Inst. Phys. Chem. Research Tokyo 30 (1936), 263; 34 (1938), 155. Chem.
Zentr. I (1937), 1958; II (1938), 1249, Chem, Abstracts 32 (1938), 3755.
2
Ibid.
Methyl Heptenol
C 8 Hi 6 O Mol. Weight 128.21
2-Methyl-l-hepten-6-ol 2-Methyl-2-hepten-6-ol
H2 C H3 C
^C CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH CH 3
\ C=CH
- . -
CH 2 CH 2 CH CH3
-
H3 C OH H3 C OH
a-Methyl Heptenol 0-Methyl Heptenol
Digesting geraniol with concentrated alcoholic potassium hydroxide at

150, Grignard and Doeuvre 1 obtained methyl heptenol which, on treatment
162 ALCOHOLS
with ozone and the oxonides, proved to be a mixture of 10 per cent
fission of
of a-methyl heptenol and 90 per cent of /3-methyl heptenol. (Cf the mono- .
graph on 'Methyl Heptenone.")

Occurrence. As far as the natural methyl heptenol isconcerned, small
quantities have been shown to occur in the volatile oil derived from the wood
of theMexican and Cayenne linaloe tree (by Schimmel & Co. 2 ), in East Indian
4
lemongrass oil (by Elze ), and in West Indian lemongrass oil (by Naves ).
3
Isolation. Schimmel &

Co. 8 isolated methyl heptenol from Mexican linaloe wood
oil by boiling the fraction b2-s 57-59 of the oil with phthalic anhydride on a water
bath for 4 hrs. The acid phthalate thus obtained was separated and saponified by treat-
ment with sodium hydroxide solution. Finally, alcohol thus freed was removed by
steam distillation.
Elze,
6
used the phthalic ester method, starting from the fraction b4 65-70 of
too,
East Indian lemongrass oil, while Naves 7 employed the boric ester method.
Identification. (1) By the preparation of derivatives:
Naves prepared the allophanate m. 98-99 (crystallized from absolute alcohol)
8
of naturally occurringmethyl heptenol.

(2) By oxidation ofmethyl heptenol with chromium trioxide (in glacial acetic acid
solution) to methyl heptenone which can be identified by the preparation of its semi-
carbazone m. 135-136 (Schimmel & Co., 9 and Elze 10 ), m. 137-138 (Schimmel &
Co.").
Properties. Methyl heptenol isan oil with an odor reminiscent of octyl

alcohol and methyl heptenone. Schimmel & Co., 12 Elze, 13 and Naves 14 re-
ported these properties for the naturally occurring methyl heptenol:
12 12 ' 13
b. 178-180 di 5 0.8579
14 14
b. 176 (corr.) d 15 0.8581
b 759 178M80 013 D -20 /13
b 12 76-78 14
-134 /12
b3 58-59 12
-115' 14
14
nf? 1.4506
12
1.4495
The fraction of
Cayenne linaloe oil, in which Schimmel & Co. 15 identified
methyl heptenol, had these properties:
5
d} 0.8655
<XD -11 40'
So far as synthetic eM-2-methyl-2-hepten-6-ol is concerned, it has been
prepared by several workers and by various methods for example, by reduc-

tion of 2-methyl-2-hepten-6-one (Wallach 16), by boiling of geranic acid nitril
with alcoholic potassium hydroxide (Tiemann and Semmler 17), by digestion
of geraniolwith alcoholic potassium in an autoclave for 8 hr. (Tiemann 18),

and by catalytic hydrogenation of methyl heptenone (Grignard 19 ).
Digesting geraniol with alcoholic potassium hydroxide, or heating ordinary
methyl heptenone with alcoholic potassium hydroxide under pressure at 140,
Doeuvre M obtained synthetic c?/-2-methyl-2-hepten-6-ol with these properties:
b. 177-178 (corr.) df 0.855

4
b 24 88-89 nj> 1.5411
bi7 83-84 Allophanate m. 99-100

b 14 78-79<kO
Levene and Haller 21 prepared the optically active forms of methyl heptenol
from the dl -form via the acid phthalate and its brucine salt :
d- form
b4 60-61, [a]$ +19 (Ether, c = 8)
I- form
b 22 87, a g-13 45', [afe
3
-16 12' (Ether, c = 20)
22
Neuberg and Lewite obtained methyl heptenol (in small yield) by the
action of fermenting yeast on methyl heptenone and observed optical rota-
tions of -6 30' and +2 4'.
Use. Methyl heptenol, as such, is very little, if at all, used in our in-
dustries.
1
Bull soc. chim. [4j, 41 (1927), 999.
2 Ber. Schimmel & Co., Oct. (1908), 78; Oct. (1911), 60.
3
4
6
Ber. Schimmel &
Co. Oct. (1908), 78.
6
7
8
Ibid.
9
Ber. Schimmel & Co., Oct. (1908), 78; Oct. (1911), 60.
10
11
Ber. Schimmel &
Co., Oct. (1911), 60.
12
Ibid., Oct. (1908), 78.
13
14
16
^Liebigs Ann. 276 (1893), 171.
17
Ber. 26 (1893), 2720.
"Ber. 31 (1898), 2991. Cf. Barbier, Compt. rend. 126 (1898), 1423; 128 (1899), 110
Grignard and Doeuvre, Bull. soc. chim. [4], 41 (1927), 999.
19
Bull. soc. chim. [4], 43 (1928), 473. Cf. Bull. soc. chim. Belg. 37 (1928), 41.
20 46 (1929), 353, 358, 359.
Bull. soc. chim. [4],
21
/. chem. 83 (1929), 181.
biol.
22
Biochem. Z. 91 (1918), 263.
164 ALCOHOLS
2 ,6-Nonadien-l-ol
"Violet Leaf Alcohol"
CH3 CH 2 CH=CH CH2 CH 2 CH=CH CH 2 OH

- . - -
Occurrence. This primary alcohol was discovered by Ruzicka and Schinz 1

in the ethereal oil derived from violet leaves by extraction with volatile sol-
vents and by steam distillation of the concentrated extract. Later, Ruzicka 2
found that the ethereal oil derived from violet flowers contains about the same
percentage of 2,6-nonadien-l-ol as the corresponding leaf oil. More recently,
3
Ruzicka, Schinz and Susz suggested that the natural 2,6-nonadien-l-ol from
violet leaves has the 2(trans)-fi(cis)- form, whereas the synthetic alcohol pre-
pared from synthetic 3-hexen-l-ol has the 2(trans)-fi(trans)- configuration.
On the other hand, the 2,G-nonadien-l-ol prepared from natural 3-hexen-l-ol
(which occurs as phenylacetic ester in the higher boiling fractions of Japanese
mint oil [Mentha arvensis]) also has the 2(trans)-,(\(cis)- form; therefore, the
2,6-nonadien-l-ol from violet leaves and violet flowers seems to be identical
with the 2,6-nonadien-l-ol prepared from naturally occurring 3-hexen-l-ol.
Isolation. Takei and Ono 4

an alcohol from cucumbers which they de-
isolated
scribed as 2,6-nonadienol b4 80-100 and named "cucumber alcohol." These authors
found that this dienol gave the same derivatives as a synthetic nonadienol which Takei
et al. 8 had previously prepared from leaf alcohol and which they reported as 2(2rans)-,6-
(trans).
Ruzicka and Schinz isolated 2(rans)-,6(cis)-nonadien-l-ol from ethereal violet leaf
6
oil through the acid phthalate. The alcohol can be purified through its benzoate and
by fractionation.
Ruzicka, Schinz and Susz
7
Identification. identified the purified synthetic 2-
(raris)-,6(nms)-nonadien-l-ol (prepared from synthetic 3-hexen-l-ol) by means of
these derivatives:
(a) Allophanate m. 145-14S.
(b) a-Naphthylurethane m. 73-74.
On the other hand, the 2(ra?w)-,6(a's)-nonadien-l-ol prepared from natural 3-hexen-
l-ol (as derived from Japanese mint oil), after purification through the benzoate and
fractionation, gave an allophanate m. 134- 135.

The natural "violet leaf alcohol," 2(/rans)-,6(m)-nonadienol, may be oxidized by
chromic acid to "violet leaf aldehyde" and identified by its semicarbazone m. 157-
158.
Takei and co-workers found a 2,6-nonadienol considered as 2(trans)-,6(trans) to yield
(a) Allophanate 140
(b) 4'-Iododiphenylurethane 137.
8
Properties. Ruzicka, Schinz and Susz reported for this 2(trans)-,6(cis)-
nonadien-1-ol the following properties:
bn 96-100
df 0.8622
1.4631
The same authors found for purely synthetic 2(2rans)-,6(Zrans)-nonadien-l-ol

prepared from synthetic 3-hexen-l-ol, and purified through the benzoate, these
properties :
bn 95.5-100
df 0.8604
n'g 1.4598
Use. Synthetic 2,6-nonadien-l-ol is used in high-grade perfume composi-

tions for imparting delicate violet notes.
l
Helv. Chim.Ada 18 (1935), 381.
2
Perfumery Essential Oil Record 29 (1938), 174.
*Helv. Chim. Ada 27 (1944), 1561.
4
J. Agr. Chem. Soc. Japan 16 (1939), 193. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 6524; 34 (1940), 1811.
6
6
Helv. Chim. Ada 18 (1935), 381.
7
8
Ibid.
Androl
This alcohol was formerly thought to be a terpene alcohol Ci 2 oO con- H

taining a tertiary hydroxy group as it does not yield cither a ketone or an al-
dehyde on oxidation. Later, Presting declared it a primary alcohol Ci H 2 oO,
1
but in 1936 Wienhaus and Striegler 2 established the constitution of androl as

a laevorotatory l-nonen-3-ol of the following structure:
H
CH 3 (CH 2 ) 5 C CH==CH 2
.OH
3
Occurrence. Androl has been found in the oil of water fennel (Phellan-
drium aquaticum) .
Identification. The alcohol forms a phenylurcthane m. 42-43 and an a-naphthyl

ur ethane m. 80.5.
Properties. Androl is an oil with a typical odor reminiscent of water

fennel. Schimmel & Co. 4
b. 197-198 D -7 10'
d}f 0.858 nf? 1.44991
Use. Androl is not used in our industries.
Inaugural Dissertation, Univ. Leipzig (1931). Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1932), 134.
1
Inaugural Dissertation of A. Striegler, Univ. Leipzig (1936). Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1937),
2
91.
3
4
Ibid.
166 ALCOHOLS
10-Hendecen-2-ol
CnH 22 O Mol. Weight 170.29
l-Undecen-10-ol
H
CH 2 =CH (CH 2 ) 7 C CH 3
OH
Occurrence. This unsaturated aliphatic alcohol occurs in the oil derived
from trawas leaves (Litsea odorifera Valeton).
Isolation. the usual methods of isolating alcohols.

By
Identification. On oxidation with chromic acid and sulfuric acid, l-undecen-10-ol
yields a ketone, the semicarbazone of which melts at 113; whereas on oxidation with
potassium permanganate the alcohol gives 2-ketodecylic acid.
Properties. According to van Romburgh, 1 l-undecen-10-ol has these

properties:
b. 233
dio 0.835
[] D -5 10'
Use. No report is made in the literature about the use of this alcohol.
1
Koninkl. Akad. van Wetensch. Amsterdam, Wish, en Natk. Afd. 20 (1911), 194. Chem.
Zentr. II (1911), 1863.
(c) ALIPHATIC TERPENE ALCOHOLS.
Bupleurol
Ci H 20O Mol. Weight 156.26
2-Methyl-6-methylenoctan-8-ol(?)
H3C
CH CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 C CH 2 CH 2 OH(?)
-
/ II
CH 2
H^C
The constitution of this terpene alcohol has not been definitely established
and seems worthy of further study.
Occurrence.Francesconi and Sernagiotto 1 reported the presence of bu-
pleurol, an isomer of citronellol, in the oil distilled from the flowers and leaves
of Bupleurum fruticosum L.
Isolation. The alcohol was isolated from the oil through its amorphous acid
phthaiate.
Identification .
(1) By the preparation of its crystalline phenylurethane m. 45 (from low boiling

petroleum ether).
(2) By the crystalline silver salt of the acid phthaiate m. 135 (from a mixture of
benzene and methyl alcohol). The melting is accompanied by decomposition.
Properties. Bupleurol is a colorless liquid possessing a faint rose-like odor.

Francesconi and Sernagiotto 2 reported the following properties; these do
not appear, however, to be in close agreement with those observed by Rutov-
3
skii, Vinogradova and Kondratski. This divergence may possibly be ex-
plained by the variation of the isolates.
2 2
b 762 209-210 D
df 0.861 1 3
<*o -22 II' 3
2 3
di 7 0.8490 HD 1.4748
2
nD 1.4508
Use. Bupleurol is not used in our industries.
1
Atti accad. Lincei 22, I (1913), 34, 148.
2
Ibid.
3
Arbeiten Chem.-Pharmazeut. Inst. Moskaus Lief. 11 (1925), 59. Chem. Zentr. I (1926),
1304.
v
Linalool
3,7-Dimethyl-l ,6-octadien-3-ol
HC3 OH
C=CH CH 2 CH 2 C CH=CH2
H3C CH 3
3,7-Dimethyl-l, 7-octadien-3-ol
H2 C OH
\C
CH2 CH2 CH2 C CH==
*
HC
/ i
CII 3
3
The unsaturated tertiary terpene alcohol linalool consists very probably of

a mixture of two structural isomers, neither of which has so far been obtained
168 ALCOHOLS
in pure form. The difficulties connected with the elucidation of its constitu-
tion have been increased by the ease with which linalool is isomerized to
geraniol.
Occurrence. Linalool and its esters, especially the acetate, are widely dis-
tributed in nature and form the main constituent of several volatile oils. Un-
like geraniol and nerol, linalool occurs in nature in dextro- and laevorotatory
form.
d-Linalool has been found in Mexican linaloe seed oil, in oil of bois de rose
(80-85 per cent), nutmeg, sweet orange, Canadian snake root, coriander,
Orthodon linalolifcrum Fujita (82 per cent), and in other orthodon oils.
l-Linalool occurs in Japanese ho (shiu) oil (80-90 per cent), in Mexican
linaloe wood oil (60-80 per cent), in oil of lavender, spike-lavender, lavandin,
clary sage, bergamot, ncroli, petitgrain, lemon, lime, French and German
type Reunion geranium, rose, Ceylon cinnamon, etc.
basil,
Linalyl acetate is the main constituent of lavender and bergamot oil, etc.
Isolation. any definite crystalline derivative from which it

Linalool does not yield
can be regenerated quantitatively and in absolutely pure form. For practical purposes
linalool is, therefore, best isolated by careful fractional distillation of the saponified
volatile oil.
Tiemann suggested purifying linalool through the sodium salt of the acid phthalate
l
which can be obtained by the action of phthalic anhydride upon the sodium compound
of linalool. should be kept in mind, however, that, according to Semmler, 2 the
(It
action of sodium on linalool yields a hydrocarbon to which Semmler assigned the name
linaloolene, but which was later shown to be identical with dihydromyrcene.) The
acid linalyl phthalate is saponified with alcoholic potassium and the regenerated
linalool removed from the alkaline solution by extraction with ether as it would be
decomposed by steam distillation.
Deppe Sohne and Zeitschel 3 suggested for example, from ho
isolating linalool
(shiu) oil by preparing (with acetoboric anhydride) the acid borate of linalool and
by separating the other constituents from this ester through distillation. The borate
is then purified by rccrystallization, and the linalool regenerated by saponification.
Identification. Linalool can be identified:

(1) By the preparation of derivatives:
Phenylurethane m. 65-66, according to Walbaum and Hiithig.
4
(a)
(b) a-Naphthylurethane m. 53, according to Schimmel & Co.
5
(2) On oxidation with chromic acid mixture, linalool yields citral which can be
characterized through its semicarbazone m. 171, and through the a-citryl-j8-naphtho-
cinchoninic acid m. 198-200 (see ''Citral").
For the quantitative determination of linalool, see also Vol. I, Chapter 4, "The
Examination and Analysis of Essential Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates," p. 276.
Properties. Linalool is an oil possessing a pleasant odor reminiscent of

lily of the valley. The physicochemical properties of linalool vary quite
widely and depend greatly upon its origin. The following range of proper-
ties has been reported in the literature for the active isomer (Gildemeister, 6
7
Stephan, Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 8 Semmler, 9 Rosanov, 10 Barbier, 11 Tie-
mann and Schmidt, 12 Schimmel & Co., 13 and Tiemann 14 ):
b. 198-199 6
D (Winalool) -3 0' to - 18 0' 8
6
bi 3 88.3-89.5 from lime oil
5
bio 85-87 7
[a]{) (Winalool) -20 T 8
8
b4 69-71 from lime oil
d20 0.8622-0.8733 9 10 14
- -
<* D (d-linalool) +9 0' to + 13 0'
8
8
d}| 0.866-0.873 from orange oil
d 0.8820 n MD (d-linalool) + 1918' 7
from orange oil
9 10 12 - 18 14
nf? 1. 461 1-1 4673
.
' ' '
Particular mention should be made, however, of properties observed by

Schimmel & Co. 15 on the laevo isoiner that had been carefully purified through
the phenylurethane:
b. 199-200 aD -17 41'
d\l 0.8666 njb 1.46238
The low optical rotation reported in most cases probably refers to mixtures
of both optical modifications whereby one predominates.
dl-Linalool does not seem to occur in nature but may be obtained
by isom-
erization of geraniol, or by reduction of a dehydrolinalool (Wallach and
16 17 18
Naschold, Gildemeister and Hoffmann, and Ruzicka and Fornasir ):
b 72 o 194M97 018 di 5 0.865 18
18
bis 86-88 n{? 1.4658 16
Sol. Soluble in 10-15 vol. of 50% alcohol, in

4-5 vol. of 60% alcohol, in 1-2 vol. of
17
70% alcohol
Being a tertiary alcohol, linalool is very sensitive to the action of organic

acids; with acid reagents in general, linalool easily isomerizes to geraniol.
For the same reason the esters of linalool cannot be obtained in pure form
by the ordinary methods. When heated with glacial acetic acid and acetic
anhydride, linalool converted into a mixture of esters of geraniol, terpineol
is
(d-a-terpineol from Minalool), and nerol. This explains the formation of cit-
ral on oxidation of linalool with chromic acid mixture. Similar reactions
take place when linalool is treated with formic acid in the cold, but with for-
mic acid at room temperature, or with concentrated sulfuric acid at 60-70
linalool willbe dehydrated to terpinene and dipentene. When shaken with a
5 per cent solution of sulfuric acid, linalool is hydrated to terpin hydrate.
As an unsaturated alcohol containing two ethylenic linkages, linalool ab-
sorbs 2 mols of bromine yielding an unstable, liquid tetrabromide. The ac-
170 ALCOHOLS
tion of halogen acids leads to the formation of a chloride C 10 Hi 7 Cl, be 94-96,
and linalyl or geranyl bromide Ci Hi 7 Br, be 102-103. The same com-
pounds originate either from linalool or from geraniol.
When
treated with very dilute potassium permanganate, linalool is oxidized
to acetone and laevulinic acid, with chromic acid mixture to citral, methyl
heptenone, acetone, laevulinic acid, etc.
19
With sodium according to Dupont and Labaune, yields
bisulfite, linalool,
a crystalline, but very hygroscopic derivative CioIIi 8 0, 2NaHSOa. Priles-
chaev 20 showed that, with benzoylhydroperoxide, linalool is oxidized to lina-
lool monoxide Ci Hi 8 0, b 25 95, d^ 0.9507, [a] D -4 59', n{? 1.4554, and
linalool dioxide Ci Hi 8 2 b 25 131-133, d} 1.0423, [] D +5 20', nj? 1.4616.
,
Linalool monoxide has been found in oil of linaloe; it is probably formed by

aerial oxidation while the oil is still in the tree.
Use. Linalool is one of the most important aromatic isolates, used widely
in the perfume, cosmetic, soap, and flavor industries. The esters of linalool,
especially the acetate, are equally important. (See "Linalyl Acetate/')

1
Ber. 31 (1898), 837.
2
Ber. 27 (1894), 2520.
3
British Patent No. 252570 Q925).
4
/. prakt. Chetn. II, 67 (1903), 325.
6
Ber. Schimmd & Co., Oct. (1906), 32.
6
Arch. Pharm. 233 (1895), 179.
7
J. prakt. Chem. II, 68 (1898), 110; 62 (1900), 529.
8
"Die Atherischen Olc," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 423.
9
Ber. 24 (1891), 206.
10
" Bull. soc. chim. [3], 9 (1893), 914.
12
Ber. 31 (1898), 834.
13
Ber. Schimmd & Co., April (1904), 51.
14
Ber. 31 (1898), 834.
16
Ber. Schimmd & Co., Oct. (1911), 139.
16 Ber. Schimmd & Co., April (1898), 25.
'7
" Helv. Chim. Ada 2 (1919), 188.
19
Sci. Ind. Kept. Roure-Bertrarid Fits 7 (1913), 3.
20
Ber. 42 (1909), 4813.
Yoshiharu Ogata, "Reaction Products of Linalool by the Catalytic Action of

Reduced Copper," /. Chem. Soc. Japan 63 (1942), 416. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947),
3039.
Koshiro Ishimura and Kaneo Tamira, "The Catalytic Action of Reduced Nickel in
the Hydrogenation of Geraniol, Citronellol, and Linalool," Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan 18
(1943), 194. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 4445.
M.
F. Carroll, "Structure of Certain Acyclic Isolates," Perfumery Essential Oil
Record 38, No. 7 (1947), 226.
Y. R. Naves, A. V. Grampoloff and P. Bachmann, "Etudes dans les Series des
Me'thyl-3-linalols, des Me*thyl-3-citrals et des Me"thyl-6-ionones," Helv. Chim. Acta 30
(1947), 1599.
"Geraniol
C 10 H 18 Mol. Weight 154.24
The structure of geraniol, like that of citronellol, has been the subject of
much controversy which still continues.
Geraniol, an unsaturated primary terpene alcohol, contains two ethylenic
linkages. An isomer of linalool Ci Hi 8 0, geraniol differs from it by optical
inactivity, a higher boiling point and higher specific gravity. Geraniol is
also isomeric with nerol since these two diolefinols are related as geometric
forms. Moreover, geraniol is at present generally regarded as not of uniform
composition but as composed of:
2,6-Dimethyl-l ,G-octadien-8-ol and 2,6-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-8-ol
H2 C HC 3
\C CH2 CH2 C CH 3
\ C=CH
-
CII 2 - - -
CH 2 -
CII 2 C CH 3
-
H3 C
/ II
H-C-CH 2 OH H3 C
/ II
H-C-CH2 OH
a-Form 0-Form
It seems probable that geraniol occurs in nature as a mixture of these two

structural isomers in which either the one or the other form may pre-
dominate.
Workers in the field of spectroscopy now usually define these two isomers
as "a" and "fi." 2,6-Dimethyl-l, 6-octadien-8-ol is thus classified as the a-
form, and 2,6-dimethyl-2,6-octadien-8-ol is described as the /3- form.
1
Occurrence. Geraniol and its esters are widely distributed and occur in
many volatile oils, forming the main constituent in some. Thus geraniol
has been found in oil of palmarosa (up to 95 per cent), rose, geranium (40-50
per cent), citronella (30-40 per cent), lemongrass, Eucalyptus staigeriana,
E. macarthurii, linaloe, lavender, coriander, ylang ylang, neroli, petitgrain,
etc.
Isolation. Geraniol can readily be isolated in pure form from volatile oils or
(1)
fractions by taking advantage of the fact that it yields a crystalline derivative with
anhydrous calcium chloride. This compound is insoluble in ether, petroleum ether,
benzene, or chloroform, and may be decomposed with water into geraniol and calcium
chloride. Bertram and Gildemeister 2 suggested the following procedure:
Equal parts of carefully dried oil and finely pulverized anhydrous calcium chloride
are mixed and thoroughly ground in a mortar. Once the reaction starts the tempera-
ture of the mixture will rise to 30-40. It is then placed in a desiccator and set aside
for several hours in a cool place. The resulting solid mass is triturated, ground with
anhydrous ether, benzene, or low boiling petroleum ether, placed on a suction filter,
washed rapidly with ether and freed from constituents which have not reacted with
calcium chloride. The resulting mixture of geraniol, calcium chloride complex and
172 ALCOHOLS
excess calcium chloride decomposed with water, the separated oil rapidly washed
is
with warm water and finally steam distilled.

This process has been investigated recently by Jones and Wood 3 as a means of
preparing pure geraniol.
(2) Geraniol can also be isolated and purified, but much less conveniently, through
its solid acid phthalate m. 47 (see also "Citronellol") which forms a crystalline silver
salt. By fractional crystallization of its acid phthalate, geraniol may be separated
from citronellol. However, this method suggested and modified by Tiemann and
Kriiger, Erdmann and Huth, Flatau and Labbe", and Stephan, yields a product not
4 6 6 7
as pure as that obtained by the calcium chloride process (see above).

The principle of this method aims at preparing first the acid phthalate of geraniol
by either permitting phthalic anhydride to react with the sodium compound of crude
geraniol, or by warming geraniol on a steam bath with phthalic anhydride without
solvent, or in benzene solution. The acid phthalate of geranioi itself, or its sodium
salt, which can be obtained in pure form from the crystalline silver salt, is finally
saponified with alcoholic potassium hydroxide.
(3) For the assaying of geraniol in a mixture with citronellol the total alcohol con-
tent of the mixture should first be determined by acetylation. In another test the
geraniol is destroyed by formylation with strong formic acid. Citronellol is thereby
not attacked and can be determined alone (see Vol. I, Chapter 4, "Examination and
Analysis of Essential Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates," p. 278).
Identification. (1) Geraniol may be most conveniently characterized, especially in
small quantities, by the preparation of its diphenylurethane (CoIIs^N-CO-O-CioIIn,
m. 82.2. Erdmann and Huth 8
suggested preparing this ester by heating 1.0 g. of
oil with 1.5 g. of diphenylcarbamyl chloride and 1.35 g. of pyridine on a steam
bath.
Geraniol can also be identified as a-naphthylurethane m. 47-48, as di-/3-naphthyl-
urethane m. 105-107 ; and as phenylurethane m. 124, according to Gildemeister and
/
Hoffmann. 9 Takei, Sakato and Ono 10 prepared the 4 -iododi phenylurethane m. 119
with geraniol isolated from oil of
green tea.
u
(2) Gildemeister and Hoffmann suggested further characterizing geraniol by oxida-
tion to citral and by conversion of the citral to a-citryl-jS-naphthocinchoninic acid m.
199-200 (see "Citral") However, by this procedure linalool, too, yields citral if the
.
oxidation is carried out with chromic acid mixture.

12
(3) Naves and Grampoloff used the allophanate in order to differentiate and iden-
tify the isomeric alcohols, nerol, and geraniol. Geranyl allophanate m. 124-124.5
and nerol allophanate m. 84-84.5.
(4) Lennartz 13 characterized geraniol through its 3-nitrophthalate m. 109-109.5,
Fieser and Gates 14 by its reaction product with leucoisoriaphthazarin m. 1 10-111.5
Properties. Geraniol is a colorless oil,possessing an agreeable rose-like

odor. The following properties have been recorded by Bertram and Gilde-
16 18
meister, Tiemann and Semmler, 16 Erdmann, 17 and Stephan:
15 17
b. 230 df 0.8812
16 18
big 121 dis 0.880-0.883
16 18
b 17 120.5M22.5 <* D
15 16
b 10 110-111 nf? 1.4766
18
nfj 1.4766-1. 4786
19
Gildemeister and Hoffmann reported these properties for geraniol manu-
factured on a large scale:
b 757 229-230 djf 0.883-0.886

b 12 114-115 nf? 1.476-1.479
Sol. Soluble in 8 to 15 vol. of 50% alcohol and
in 2.5 to 3.5 vol. of 60% alcohol
When exposed to air, geraniol discolors and its odor gradually deteriorates
due to absorption of oxygen.
Because of the two ethylenic linkages, geraniol is a highly reactive sub-
stance. With sodium bisulfite it forms a stable compound Ci Hi 8 O,2NaHSO3
from which the alcohol cannot ,be regenerated with alkali. The action of
mineral acids and dehydrating agents on geraniol is very diverse and depends
greatly on the experimental conditions. When shaken with a 5 per cent sul-
furic acid solution, geraniol yields mainly terpin hydrate. Treatment with
phosphoric acid, gaseous hydrogen chloride, etc., causes the formation of di-
pentene and other tcrpenes. The action of acid reagents may bring about
cyclization and formation of cyclogeraniol. Under the influence of concen-
trated formic acid, potassium bisulfate or phosphoric acid anhydride, water is
cleaved off. In general, however, geraniol is more stable toward acids, es-
pecially organic acids, than linalool, which feature facilitates the preparation
of esters. In the cold, alkalies do not easily act on geraniol. Oxidation of
geraniol with chromic acid mixture gives mainly citral, also /3-methyl hepte-
none. Oxidation with very dilute potassium permanganate solution yields
first a polyhydric alcohol and finally various products of complete degrada-
tion, according to the experimental conditions employed. For details of

these many reactions the reader is referred to Simonsen's 'The Terpenes."
Use. Geraniolone of the most widely used aromatic isolates, indispen-
is
sable in the compounding of rose scents. In fact, it forms part of almost

any perfume compound. Thus, geraniol serves extensively in the perfume,
cosmetic, soap, and flavor industries.

1
See in this connection Doeuvre, Bull. soc. chim. [4], 45 (1929), 403. Also Dupont, Desreux,
Dulou, Bull. soc. chim. [5], 4 (1937), 2016.
2
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 53 (1896), 233; 56 (1897), 507.
3
Ind. Eng. Chem. 34 (1942), 488.
4
Ber. 29 (1896), 901.
6
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 66 (1897), 15.
Compt. rend. 126 (1898), 1725. Bull soc. chim. [31, 19 (1898), 633.
6
ij. prakt. Chem. [2], 60 (1899), 248.

8
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 56 (1897), 8.
9
10
Bull. Inst. Phys. Chem. Research Tokyo, 16 (1937), 7. Pub. with Sci. Papers Inst. Phys.
Chem. Research Tokyo 13 (1937), Nos. 671-5. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 6815.
Helv. Chim. Acta 25 (1942), 1500.
174 ALCOHOLS
i*Ber. 76B (1943), 248.
14
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 2948.
1s
/. prakt. Chem. II, 56 (1897), 608.
iBer. 26 (1893), 2711.
*J. prakt. Chem. II, 56 (1897), Ber. 31 (1898), 359.
3.
M/. praR Cftem. II, 68 (1898), 110; 60 (1899), 244.
L. S. Glichitch and Y. R. Naves, "The Determination of Citronellol and Rhodinol

in Presence of Geraniol and Nerol," Parfums France 8 (1930), 326. Chem. Abstracts 25
(1931), 1033.
Koshiro Ishimura and Kaneo Tamira, "The Catalytic Action of Reduced Nickel in
the Hydrogenation of Geraniol, Citronellol, and Linalool," Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan 18
(1943), 194. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 4445.
V. N. Guha Roy, and M. N. Goswami, "Geraniol and Geraniol Esters," Indian
Soap /., April to June (1945).
Y. R. Naves, "Identification of Citronellol in the Presence of Geraniol and Nerol,"
Helv. Chim. Acta 29 (1946), 1450. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 7657.
M. F. Carroll, "Structure of Certain Acyclic Isolates," Perfumery Essential Oil
Record 38, No. 7 (1947), 226.
Nerol
2,6-Dimethyl-l ,6-octadicn-8-ol
H2 C
\C
CH2 CH2 CH2 C CHs
HC
/ HO-H2 C-C-H
ii
2,6-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-8-ol
H3 C
C=CH *
CHo CH2 C CHo *
H3 C
/ HO-H2 C-C-H
ii
This unsaturated, primary terpene alcohol, a stereoisomer of

Occurrence.
geraniol, very probably occurs in nature as a mixture of the 1,6- and 2,6-
form in which the 2,6- isomer predominates.
Nerol and its acetic ester have been found in several volatile oils, for in-
stance, in oil of helichrysum (30-50 per cent), neroli bigarade, petitgrain,
rose, linaloe, lavender, bergamot, Ceylon citronella, etc. Nerol was discov-
ered in neroli bigarade oil by Hesse and Zeitschel. 1
According to von Soden and Zeitschel, neroi can be isolated from

2
Isolation. (1)
oil of helichrysum or petitgrain by the following process:
Oil of petitgrain is fractionated, and the linalool and terpene fractions are removed.
The fractions containing primary alcohols are then saponified and the primary alcohols
transformed into acid phthalates or other acid esters of dibasic acids. After purification
and saponification with alkali, a geraniol-nerol mixture containing about 40% nerol
and 60% geranioi is obtained. The greater part of the geraniol may be removed by
treatment with calcium chloride. The crude nerol is rectified by dry distillation in
vacuo or by steam distillation. The yield of pure nerol will be about 2 to 3% as cal-
culated upon the weight of the petitgrain oil.
(2) According to German Patent No. 209,383, September 22, 1907 (Heine & Co.),
nerol may be obtained in a similar way, viz., through the acid phthalate, from heli-
chrysum oil. The esters are dissolved in dilute soda solution and purified by extracting
the soda solution with ether, petrol ether, etc., or by fractional steam distillation.
Since oil of helichrysum contains no geraniol, this oil offers a better starting material
than petitgrain oil and facilitates the isolation of pure nerol. However, the oil must
first be saponified as it contains most of the nerol in ester form.
(3) According to von Soden and Treff, nerol can be separated quite easily from the
3
terpene alcohol fraction of volatile oils, after most of the geraniol also present in this
fraction has been removed with calcium chloride. The crude nerol, which usually
still contains 25-30% of geraniol, is converted into its crystalline diphenylurethane.
After purification by crystallization from methyl alcohol and light petrol ether, the
diphenylurethane melts at 52-53. Hydrolysis with alcoholic potassium hydroxide
solution yields pure nerol.
According to von Soden and Treff, and Be*hal, nerol is most readily
4 6
Identification.
characterized by the preparation of its tetrabromide m. 116-118, by its allophanate
m. 101.5, and by its diphenylurethane m. 52-53. The diphenylurethane is often
slow in forming crystals, but the addition of a few geranyl-diphenylurethane crystals
may accelerate the process.
Frank and Reclaire 6 reported the tetrabromide as melting at 119-121. Miiller 7
has found recently that the "EM
"-reagent serves very satisfactorily as an index of
purity for nerol.
Properties. Nerol is an oil possessing a pronounced rose-like odor, but

more refreshing than that of geraniol. It is very difficult to obtain nerol in
absolutely pure form. Von Soden et al. found these properties for an es-
8
pecially well purified nerol:
b 755 224-225 d^ 0.8813

b 25 125 D
9
Be"hal reported for a nerol obtained by saponification of the allophanate:
V\ 11 t\ 1 17^ i /"\o
dig 0.881 nD 1.47539
10
Frank and Reclaire observed on a pure nerol:
d}i 0.8771-0.8788 nf? 1.462

176 ALCOHOLS
Contrary to geraniol, nerol does not form a crystalline compound with
calcium chloride, which fact serves to separate these two terpene alcohols at
least approximately. The diphenylurethanes of nerol and geraniol differ by
their solubility in certain solvents such as petroleum ether and methyl alco-
hol. Nerol resembles geraniol in regard to many chemical reactions. Oxi-
dation of nerol gives citral or an aldehyde of similar odor. Both geraniol
and nerol, on oxidation with potassium permanganate, followed by chromic
acid mixture, give the same products, viz., acetone and laevulinic acid, in
identical yields. Shaking of nerol with dilute sulfuric acid results in the for-
mation of terpin hydrate. Nerol, like geraniol, is very sensitive to the action
of formic acid at elevated temperatures.
Use. Nerol is used as a valuable constituent in synthetic rose and orange
blossom compounds. However, the high price of nerol restricts its use in
cosmetics and soaps.
1
J. prakt. Chem. [21, 66 (1902), 502.
2
See also Ber. 36 (1903), 265.
8
Ber. 39 (1906), 909.
Ibid. See also Chem. Ztg. 27 (1903), 897.
6
Bull. soc. chim. [4], 25 (1919), 452.
6
Seifensieder-Ztg. 68 (1941), 479, 491. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 6410.
7
8 Ber. 39 (1906), 910. Chem. Ztg. 27 (1903), 897.

Bull. soc. chim. [4], 25 (1919), 452.
10

L. S. Glichitch and Y. R. Naves, "The Determination of Citronellol and Rhodinol in
Presence of Geraniol and Nerol," Parfums France 8 (1930), 326.
G. Dupont, V. Desreux and R. Dulou, "Spectrographic and Chemical Study of
Aliphatic Terpenes. Alcohols and Aliphatic Aldehydes," Bull. soc. chim. [5], 4 (1937),
2016.
Y. R. Naves, "Identification of Citronellol in the Presence of Geraniol and Nerol/'
Lavandulol
2,6-Dimethyl-5-methylol- 2-Isopropenyl-5-methyl-4-
2,6-heptadiene hexen-1-ol
0)CH a CHs
r* TJ/^XJ r* ^l) r*
>X \ XlUl2V/v y/^.
HC( 3 ) CH3 HG(2) CH 2
According to Schinz and Seidel, and Seidel, Schinz and Miil-

1
Occurrence.
2
ler, rotatory lavandulol occurs free and as ester (mostly acetate), to the
I-
amount of about 1 per cent, in French oil of lavender (Lavandula vera).
Isolation. The same authors isolated lavandulol from

lavender by regenerating
oil of
this primary alcohol from the acid phthalic ester prepared from the free alcohol and
from the hydrolyzed ester fraction of the oil. Lavandulol was separated as allophanate
and recrystallized from a mixture of organic solvents such as cyclohexane and ethyl
acetate. The free alcohol is obtained by hydrolysis with about fourfold excess of 10%
aqueous sodium hydroxide on a boiling water bath for a period of 1 hr.
Identification. Lavandulol can be characterized by the preparation of the following
derivatives:
(1) Allophanate m. 117M18 119-120, ,
if highly purified.
(2) 3,5-Dinitrobenzoate m. 59-60.
(3) Anthraquinone /3-carboxylic ester m. 62-63.
Properties. The above-named authors reported the following properties of

lavandulol:
bi 3 94-95 a -10 12'
7
dl 0.8785 n{J 1.4683
Although the physicochemical properties of lavandulol resemble those of

geraniol, lavandulol is distinguished from the latter primary alcohol through
the formation of an acid phthalic ester even at temperatures as high as 200
without decomposition. Lavandulol furthermore differs from geraniol by the
fact that it does not form a calcium chloride addition compound.
The odor of lavandulol resembles that of geraniol but possesses a somewhat
spicy note. The acetate of lavandulol has an odor closely allied to that of
linalyl acetate rather than geranyl acetate but the odor of the lavandulol es-
ter is reported to be finer and more delicate than that of linalyl acetate.
178 ALCOHOLS
Lavandulol has been synthesized by Ruzicka and Roethlisberger, 3 and
Schinz and Bourguin, 4 and by Schinz and Schappi. 6
Use. Nothing has been reported yet in literature about the use of syn-
thetic lavandulol in perfume compositions or in artificial lavender oils.
>
Helv. Chim. Acta 26 (1942), 1572.
2
Ibid. 27 (1944), 663.
8
Ibid. 18 (1935), 439.
*
Ibid. 25 (1942), 1591.
6
Ibid. 30 (1947), 1483.
H. Schinz and P. H. "Synthese eines aliphatischen Sesquiterpenalkohols mit

Miiller,
unregelmassiger Isoprenkette," Helv. Chim. Acta 27 (1944), 57.
CH*OH
or
Delicate farnesol-like odor
This synthesis is based apparently on the good results with lavandulol.
H. Schinz, "Lavandulol, a New Monoterpenic Alcohol from Lavandula vera,"

H. L. Simon, Ad. Kaufmann, Jr., and H. Schinz (Eidg. Techn. Hochschule, Zurich),
"Synthesis of dZ-/3,7-Dihydrolavandulol," Helv. Chim. Acta 29 (1946), 1133 (in Ger-
man). Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 85.
Citronellol
(Rhodinol)
Mol. Weight 156.26
The structure of citronellol and rhodinol has been the subject of numerous
investigations and a prolonged controversy which still continue. Today it
is generally agreed that these two important terpene alcohols are functionally
identical but that both are mixtures of the following isomers:
2,G-Dimethyl-l-octen-8-ol
HaC
\C CH2 CH2 CH2 CH CH 2 CH 2 OH
- -
H2C CH3
Limonene or "a" form (Isopropenyl form)
and
2,6-Dimethyl-2-octen-8-ol
H3 C
C=CH CH 2 CH2 CH CH 2 CH2 OH
-
HsC CH3
Terpinolene or "0" form (Isopropylidene form)
Formerly it was believed that the natural d- and d/-citronellol consisted

mainly of the limonene form, the natural J-citronellol (rhodinol) mainly of
the terpinolene form. Later Grignard and Doeuvre 1 submitted proof that
rf-citronellol as well as i-citronellol occurs in essential oils originally as a mix-
ture of about 80 per cent terpinolene form and about 20 per cent limonene
form. The so-called rhodinol, according to these authors, is a citronellol
composed of equal parts terpinolene form and limonene form. This compo-
sition, however, attained only on isolation through the acid phthalate or
is
benzoate, whereby the components are isomerized. Later investigations seem

to incline toward the conclusion that the natural isolates are composed wholly
of the /3- Thus, the discussion regarding the constitution of citronellol
form.
and rhodinol cannot yet be regarded as closed. For details, see the papers
by Savard, Doeuvre, Kuhn and Roth, Lagneau, Angla, Naves et al.,
2 3 4 6 6 7
and Simonsen. 8 It should also be mentioned that the commercial "rhodinol,"

as isolated from Reunion geranium oil, is not always identical with the rhodi-
nol of the scientific literature. The commercial product frequently contains
geraniol and some d-citronellol, aside from /-citronellol.
Occurrence. Citronellol occurs naturally in d-, dl- and I- form. The latter
is also called rhodinol.
been found in Java type citronella oil, in oil of geranium,

d-Citronellol has
Spanish verbena, savin, Eucalyptus citriodora, etc.

A most unusual source has been reported by Fester, Bertuzzi and Pucci 9
in "yacarol" or the musk from the glands of the crocodile. The
secretion
d-citronellol isolated therefrom is unique for, although yielding all other
characteristics similar to isolates from various natural sources, it possesses a
higher rotatory power, i.e., +6 50'. This alcohol supposedly originates

through decomposition of cholesterol in this source.
l-Citronellol occurs as main constituent in Reunion geranium oil (35-40
per cent, together with some d-citronellol), likewise in large amounts in pink
10
geranium (Pelargonium roseum Willd.), in Bulgarian rose oil (10-35 per
cent and more), in Eucalyptus citriodora oil, etc.
Isolation. can be isolated by repeated treatment, for example, of Java

d-Citronellol
citronella oil with alcoholic potassium hydroxide at 160 and by subsequent decom-
position of the alcoholate.
180 ALCOHOLS
l-Citronellol be isolated by fractional distillation of Reunion geranium oil and
may
by separating it from geraniol and other terpene alcohols through the acid phthalate,
or according to the phosphorus trichloride method.
(1) Tiemann's phthalic ester method of separating citronellol from geraniol is carried
out as follows:
A mixture of geraniol and citronellol, when heated with an equal weight of phthalic
anhydride, will dissolve at about 150. On raising the temperature of the clear liquid
to 200, the geraniol will be decomposed under formation of a hydrocarbon. Comple-
tion of the reaction requires about 2 hr. The acid phthalate of citronellol thus formed
is taken up with dilute potassium hydroxide solution and repeatedly shaken with
ether in order to remove all neutral impurities. The citronellol can then be regenerated
from its potassium phthalate by heating with strong alkali hydroxide solution; or the
acid phthalate may first be isolated by acidifying and extracting with ether, and by
saponification with alcoholic potassium hydroxide at ordinary or at slightly elevated
temperature.
The phosphorus trichloride method, developed by Tiemann and Schmidt, 11 is
(2)
based upon the fact that citronellol in ethereal solution by the action of phosphorus
trichloride (not phosphorus oxychloride) forms a chloro-citronellyl-phosphoric acid
ester which can be dissolved in aqueous solution as sodium salt. Geraniol, under the
experimental conditions, is converted partly into hydrocarbons, partly into geranyl
chloride which fact permits its removal from the alkaline solution by extraction with
ether. The complex citronellyl ester can readily be separated from the other com-
pounds and on saponification yields citronellol. Best results are obtained if 2 mols of
phosphorus trichloride are used for 3 mols of alcohol. Tiemann and Schmidt 12 sug-
gested the following procedure:
Add a well-cooled solution of 100 parts of the alcohols (including geraniol) to be
examined for citronellol, dissolved in 100 parts of absolute ether, to a mixture of 60
parts phosphorus trichloride and 100 parts of absolute ether, the mixture to be cooled
to 10. Make
the addition slowly and in small portions so that the temperature of
the solution never rises above 0. Set the mixture aside for four to five days at room
temperature. At the expiration of this time, pour it upon well crushed ice and wash
the separated ether layer once with ice water. Shake the ether solution with dilute
sodium hydroxide which absorbs from it a chlorine-containing citronellyl-phosphoric
acid ester and leaves in the ether a mixture bis 90-105 (in pure state bi5 98-103),
consisting of geranyl chloride and a hydrocarbon. Free the water solution of the
sodium salt of the citronellyl-phosphoric acid ester from every trace of adhering
neutral impurities by shaking with ether. Saponify the salt of the phosphoric acid
ester by the addition of strong alkali with subsequent heating on a water bath. Sepa-
by steam distillation. This technique, however, has not
rate the citronellol thus freed
been acceptable to Glichitch and Naves. 13
(3) Walbaum and Stephan recommended separating citronellol from geraniol
14
by heating the mixture with strong formic acid whereby geraniol is decomposed while
citronellol forms citronellyl formate.
16 citronellol
Identification. (1) According to Grignard and Doeuvre, can easily be
identified by the preparation of the allophanate m. 105-106.
(2) In the absence of geraniol, citronellol can be characterized by the preparation
of liquid citronellyl acid phthalate which yields a crystalline silver salt m. 125-126.
(3) In the presence of geraniol, citronellol may be characterized, according to

Bouveault and Gourmand, 16 by the conversion to the citronellyl ester of pyruvic acid,
the semicarbazone of which melts at 110-111 .
(4) On oxidation with

chromic acid, citronellol yields citronellal, the semicarbazone
of which melts at 82.5 and 84, according to Tiemann and Schmidt. 17 Or, citronellal
may be converted, with jfr-naphthylamine and pyruvic acid, to citronellyl-/3-naphtho-
cinchoninic acid m. 225, according to Doebner. 18
Properties. Citronellol is a colorless oil possessing a typical rose-like odor.

The following properties are noted in the literature :
d-Citronellol, isolated from Java citronella oil (Gildemeister and Hoff-

mann 19
) :
b 20 119-121 (Doeuvre) D +2 7' to +2 32'

b7 109 aS +2 14' (Doeuvre)
2
b5 103 n?, 1.45651-1.45791
df 0.866 (Doeuvre) nJJ 1.4617 (Doeuvre)
dlt 0.8604-0.8629
20
Prepared by reduction of citronellal (Tiemann and Schmidt ) :
7 5
bi 7 117-118 [a]},
'
+40'
di7. 5 0.8565 nD 1.45659
No at hand, however, to indicate the degree to which these

evidence is
properties represent either a homogeneous citronellol or a mixture of "a" or

Naves, Brus and Allard
21
"/8" forms. employed spectroscopic methods to
determine whether the various isomers occur in pure form or as mixtures.
These authors prepared four kinds of citronellol (I) by the reduction of
ethyl citronellate derived from Java citronella oil; (II) reduction of a citronel-
lal isolated from Java citronella oil by cold tributoxy aluminum; (III) re-
duction of citronellal-geraniol mixtures from oil of citronella by means of a
nickel catalyst; and (IV) purified "rhodinol" fraction from Reunion geranium
oil by means of the benzoate. The processing of types II and III gave wholly
/3-citronellol with these properties:
II III
bn 105-105.5 b 10 103-104
df 0.8550 df 0.8528
[a]j +4 28' [a]j +3 27'
nf? 1.4559 ng> 1.4550
whereas type and the laevorotatory IV were shown to be mixtures

I of a-
and /3- isomers with the 0- form predominating:
/
bio 103-104 [4 +5 7'
df 0.8551 nf? 1.4562

182 ALCOHOLS
l-Citronellol, isolated from Reunion geranium oil (Gildemeister and Hoff-
mann) :
b 764 .5 225-226 <* D Slightly laevorotatory up to -2

d\l 0.862-0.869 ng> 1.459-1.463
Sol. Soluble in 1.5 vol. of 50%, and in 3-4 vol. of 60% alcohol
A citronellol isolated from Reunion geranium oil by Naves, Brus and Al-
22
lard, purified through the benzoate and shown to be a mixture of a- and 0-
forms, principally 0-, had these properties:
bio 103-104 [4 -2 24'
df 0.8562 nf? 1.4560
Similar findings have been reported by Doeuvre 23 on the alcohol obtained

by reduction of citronellal from Bourbon geranium oil by ethoxymagnesium
chloride.
Isolated from rose oil by the phosphorus trichloride process (Tiemann and
24
Schmidt ):
bi 5 113-114 <* D -4 20'
d 20 0.8612 nD 1.45789
Z-Citronellol possesses a much finer rose odor than d-citronellol.

25
Grignard and Escourrou recorded for c^-citronellol:
b 20
di 3 0.8516
1.4516
Citronellol is much more stable than geraniol. Heating with water to 250,
boiling with alkalies, treatment with phosphorus trichloride in the cold, etc.,
do not affect citronellol fundamentally. A singularly interesting observation
26
in connection with the thermal stability of citronellol is made by Bosart in
his studies on the change in specific gravity of essential oils per degree tem-
perature. This author notes a higher value for Java citronella oil than for
Ceylon oil and states that "evidently there are two forms of citronellol, one
of which appears to be very unstable and is readily changed to the other
form on heating. The Java oil contains the unstable one, Ceylon oil the
stable form." Tiemann and Schmidt 27 found that oxidation with chromic
acid mixture yields citronellal, isopulegol and citronellic acid. According to
Labbe* 28 citronellol dissolves in a neutral solution of sodium bisulfite, and
gives a crystalline but highly hygroscopic compound Ci H 2 oONaHS03.
Citronellol can be mixed with 50 per cent sulfuric acid without marked change
while stronger acids cause mainly polymerization. By boiling with acid an-
hydrides, citronellol is easily esterified. Anhydrous formic acid acts upon
ALlftiATW ALVUHULS 183
citronellol even in the cold but this action is not confined to the formation
of citronellyl formate. Pfau 29 found that considerable quantities of citronel-
lyl glycol formates are formed as side reaction.
Miiller 30 noted that the "EM" reagent 31 fails with citronellol; thus it
may be used to detect contaminants (such as geraniol, which gives a pro-
nounced color reaction).
Use. Citronellol is one of the most important aromatic isolates used
widely in perfumes, cosmetics, and soaps. It a main constituent in syn-
is
thetic rose compounds. Rhodinol, too, is extensively used for the same pur-
poses but, because of its higher price, to a more limited extent.
1
Compt. rend. 187 (1928), 270, 330. Bull. soc. chim. [4], 46 (1929), 352.
2
Bull soc. chim. [4], 46 (1929), 327.
3
Ibid. [41, 46 (1929), 710. Parfums France 12 (1934), 197. Bull soc. chim. [51, 3 (1936),
612.
4
Ber. 65 (1932), 1285.
5
Compt. rend. 198 (1934), 166.
6
Ibid. 2242.
7
200 (1935), 1112. Perfumery Essential Oil Record 37 (1946), 120.
Ibid.
/. Chem. Soc. (1935), 781.
9
Ber. 70 (1937), 37. Chem. Zentr. I (1937), 1964.
10
Vorontsov, Bull. App. Dot. Genetics Plant Breeding V.ti.X.R., Huppl. 77 (1936), 7.
"Ber. 29 (1896), 921.
" Ibid.
13
14
Ber. 33 (1900), 2307.
15
Compt. rend. 187 (1928), 270, 330. Bull. soc. chim. [4], 46 (1929), 352. See also Doeuvrc,
Compt. rend. 208 (1939), 1658. Bull. soc. chim. [51, 7 (1940), 139.
" Compt. rend. 138 (1904), 1699.
i7
Ber. 30 (1897), 34; 31 (1898), 3307.
"Ibid. 27 (1894), 354, 2026.
19
"Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 442. See also Doeuvre, Bull. soc. chim. [41, 46
(1929), 262.
**Ber. 29 (1896), 906.
Compt. rend. 200 (1935), 1112.
21
22
Ibid.
23
Compt. rend. 208 (1939), 1658.
24
Ber. 29 (1896), 923.
25
Bull. soc. chim. [41, 37 (1925), 547.
26
27 Ber. 30 (1897), 32.

28
Bull. soc. chim. [3], 21 (1899), 1079. See also Dupont and Labaune, Bull. Roure-Bertrand
Fits, April (1913), 3.
29
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 102 (1921), 276.
80
Seifensieder-Ztg. 68 (1941), 478. Chem. Zentr. II (1942), 348. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943),
6410.
31
For composition of "KM" Reagent see Deut. Parfumerieztg. 26 (1940), 239. Chem. Ab-
stracts 37 (1943), 2513.
A. Reclaire, Riechstoff Ind. (1926), 229. Chimie & indmtrie 19 (1928), 109. A
review, Chem. Abstracts 22 (1928), 1346.
V. Grignard and J. Doeuvre, "Determination of the Constitution of Citronellol and
184 ALCOHOLS
of Rhodinol by the Method of Quantitative Ozonization," Bull. soc. chim. [4], 45
(1929), 809. Chem. Abstracts 24 (1930), 1077.
Sebastian Sabetay, "Color Reaction of Geranium Oil and Certain Commercial
Rhodinols," Riechstoff Ind. 8 (1933), 26. Chem. Abstracts 27 (1933), 2530.
Gustavo A. Fester, "Isomerism in the Citronellol Group," Anales soc. dent, argentina,
Seccidn Santa Fe 7 (1935), 49. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 1004.
Ignaz Hcrold, "Geraniol and Citronellol," Seifensieder Ztg. 62 (1935), 389, 409. A
review, Chem. Abstracts 29 (1935), 5069.
Koshiro Ishimura arid Kaneo Tamira, "The Catalytic Action of Reduced Nickel in
the Hydrogenation of Geraniol, Citronellol, and Linalool," Butt. Chem. Soc. Japan 18
(1943), 194. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 4445.
Y. R. Naves, "Sur Identification du Citronellol (Rhodinol) au Moyen de Son
Allophanate," Helv. Chim. Ada 29 (1946), 1447.
Y. R. Naves, "Sur 'Identification de Citronellol en Presence de Geraniol et de
1
Nerol." Helv. Chim. Acta 29 (1946), 1450.
B. CYCLIC TERPENE ALCOHOLS
(a) MONOCYCLIC TERPENK ALCOHOLS.
Perillyl Alcohol
CioIIieO Mol. Weight 152.23
1 ,8 (9)-p-Menthadien-7-ol 4-Isopropenyl-l-cyclohexenecarbinol.
CH 2 OH
C
H2 C
/ \CH
H2C CH 2
\CH/
C
H2 C/
\
Oils
Occurrence. This alcohol occurs, free and as ester and in both optical modi-
fications, in oil of gingergrass (Andropogon schocnanthus L.). It has also
been found in oil of bergamot, savin, Monarda fistulosa, lavandin and spear-
mint, in the latter mostly as ester.
Isolation.In gingergrass oil, for example, perillyl alcohol occurs associated with
geraniol from which it can be separated only with some difficulty. For this purpose
the geraniol is destroyed by heating the alcohol mixture with formic acid. Thus,
perillyl alcohol may be isolated from gingergrass oil, according to Schimmel & Co.,
1
by first saponifying the oil and by separating the geraniol-perillyl alcohol fraction bio
CYCLIC TERPENE ALCOHOLS 185
106. The geraniol is decomposed by heating the alcohol mixture on the steam bath
at 80 with two parts of formic acid (99%). Saponification of the perillyl formate
yields perillyl alcohol.
Identification. be identified:
Perillyl alcohol may
(1) Through its naphthylurethane m. 146-U7.
(2) By oxidation with chromic acid to dihydrocuminic aldehyde (semicarbazone in.
198-198.5) and to dihydrocuminic acid m. 130-131, according to Semmler and
Zaar. 2
Properties. Perillyl alcohol is a rather viscid oil with an odor reminiscent

of linalool and terpineol. The rotatory power of perillyl alcohol shows con-
siderable variation in different samples. Walbaum and Hiithig
3
reported for
perillyl alcohol isolated from gingergrass oil:
d-Medification l-Modification
b 755 228-229 b 767 22G-227
b4 -5 94-96 b5 92-93.5
dJi 0.9536 dJJ 0.9510
D (1
= 100 mm.) +12 5' aD (1
= 100 mm.) -13 18'
nf? 1.49761 nf? 1.49629
Semmler and Zaar reported the following properties for perillyl alcohol
from gingergrass oil. 4 They also characterized a perillyl alcohol obtained
5
by reduction of perillaldehyde, []D 146 0'.
107M10 04 WD -70 /4
-6830' 5
j 4
4
d 20 0.946 ng 1.4968
5 5
d 20 0.964 nD 1.4996
These figures show no close accord with those given by Walbaum and
Hiithig (see above), which fact is due very likely to the difficulties of purifi-
cation.
6
Naves has reported the presence of /-perillyl alcohol in oil of lavandin,
with these properties:
b2 . 8 88-89 c* D -18 25'
df 0.953 ng> 1.4963
Use. Perillyl alcohol has not found much use in the perfume or flavor
industries.
i
Ber. Schimmel & Co., April (1904), 52; Oct. (1904), 41.
*
Ber. 44 (1911), 56,460.
3
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 71 (1905), 466.
4
Ber. 44 (1911), 460.
5
Ber. 44 (1911), 54.
'Helv. Chim. Ada 28 (1945), 1224.
186 ALCOHOLS
Dihydro-o-terpineol
Ci H 20 O Mol. Weight 156.26

8-p-Menthanol
CH3
CH
Hc<
2^
r^TJ
OH2
\CH/
C OH
/ \
Occurrence. Zeitschel and Schmidt found that American wood turpentine
l
or pine oil contains the trans- modification of dihydro-a-terpineol.
Isolation. Isolation accomplished by repeated fractional distillation of pine oil,

is
isolating the cut b. 205-220; treatment of this fraction with boric acid and removal
of the nonesterified portion in vacuo; recovery of alcohols from residual borates by
saponifi cation; separation of the secondary alcohols by fractional esterification with

boric acid; and final treatment of the tertiary alcohols with potassium permanganate
to eliminate any contaminating terpineol.
Identification. By the preparation of the phenylurethane m. 117-118, according
to Wallach, and Zeitschel and Schmidt; 3 m. 115, according to Keats;
2 4
p-nitroben-
zoate m. 96-97, according to Hlickel and Nerdel. 6
6
Properties. Zeitschel and Schmidt reported the following properties for
the natural trans- isomer:
m. 34.6-35.2 (in needles from petroleum ether)

b. 209.3-209.5
df 0.8962 (Keats)
dU 0.901 (undercooled)
nt? 1.4630
Flowery terpineol odor
The cis-modification of dihydro-a-terpineol has been obtained syntheti-

7 8
cally by Behal, and by Zeitschel and Schmidt but the purity of these prod-
ucts is questioned by Keats
9
who reports the synthesis of cts-8-hydroxy-p-
menthane from the ethyl ester of low melting hexahydrotoluic acid; it has
these properties:
m. 25
b an 110
d 0.9025
Phenylurethane m. 114
Odor similar but more faint than transform
Use. Dihydro-a-terpineol is not used in our industries.
1 6
Ber. 60 (1927), 1372. Ber. 60 (1927), 1372.
*Liebigs Ann. 381 (1911), 55.
7
Compt. rend. 150 (1910), 1762.
3 8
Ber. 60 (1927), 1372. Ber. 60 (1927), 1372.
4 9
/. Chem. Soc. (1937), 2003. J. Chem. Soc. (1937), 2003.
5
Liebigs Ann. 528 (1937), 57.
The Terpineols
Mol. Weight 154.24
When the glycol terpin or its hydrate is dehydrated for instance, with
dilute sulfuric acid four isomeric unsaturated alcohols CioHigO may be
theoretically formed. Of these four isomers, only three are known namely,
a-, 0-, and 7-terpineol.
'Ha
OH
HC 2 CH 2
Terpin
* CH 2
CH
HaC CH
CH 3
H 2
\H GH 2
HC 2 CH 2
Y-OH CH
/C H
HsC CH 3 HC 2 CH, HC 3 CH 3
a-Terpineol /3-Terpineol y-Terpineol
188 ALCOHOLS
The liquid terpineol of commerce, obtained from pine oil by various proc-
is not uniform but a mixture of several isomeric unsaturated tertiary
1
esses,
alcohols, viz., a-terpineol m. 35, /3-terpineol m. 32, and of liquid terpinen-
l-ol.
1
Among many patents, sec U. S. Patent No. 1,743,403, Jan. 14, 1930, L. T. Smith to
Hercules Powder Co.
a-Terpineol
l-p-Menthen-8-ol . 1 -Methy 1-4-isopropy 1- 1 -cyclohexen-8-ol
CH 3
C
IIoC
/ \
CH
CH2
\CH/
C Oil
II 3 C
/ \CH
3
Occurrence. a-Terpineol is the only one of the terpineol isomers found in

nature.
a-Terpineol occurs in volatile active (d- and 1-), and inac-
oils in optically
tive (dl-), modifications, free as well as in ester form. Crystalline a-terpineol

has been identified in numerous oils:
d-a-Terpineol in oil of Russian turpentine, Malabar cardamom, sweet
orange, petitgrain, neroli, lovage, in laevorotatory Mexican linaloe oil, etc.
l-a-Terpineol in several pine oils, in oil of camphor, Oregon balsam, cinna-
mon leaves, lemon, lime, niaouli, in dextrorotatory Mexican linaloe oil, etc.
dl-a-Terpineol in oil of
geranium, cajuput, etc.
Liquid a-terpineol too, has been isolated, for example:
y
d-a-Terpineol from marjoram oil
l-a-Terpineol from Canadian snakeroot oil
dl-a-Terpineol from oil of mace, erigeron, etc.
Crystalline terpineol can be isolated from an oil by fractional distillation.

Isolation.
For this purpose the fractions boiling from 215 to 220 at atmospheric pressure are
cooled, and inoculated with a terpineol crystal. Terpineol may be separated from
other alcohols and isolated according to the method of Zeitschel. 1 The alcohol mixture
is treated with boroacetic acid anhydride and the alcohols are regenerated by saponifi-
cation of the borates.

Since the primary alcohols react quicker with this acid anhydride
than the secondary ones, and the secondary alcohols quicker than the tertiary ones,
the alcohols may thus be separated from one another.
Identification. a-Terpineol can be characterized by the preparation of several com-
pounds:
(1) By the nitrosochlorides.
For their preparation, Wallach 2
recommended adding
11 cc. of ethyl nitrite to a
solution of 15 g. of terpineol in 15 cc. of glacial acetic acid. After cooling in a salt
brine mixture, a solution of 6 cc. of hydrochloric acid in 6 cc. of glacial acetic acid is
added drop by drop and with shaking. After completion of the reaction, the nitroso-
chloride precipitated with ice water, whereby the nitrosochloride separates first in
is
oily form but crystallizes soon. The solid product can be purified by recrystallization
from hot ethyl acetate or methyl alcohol. The d- or I- form melts at 107-10S, the
dl- form at 120-122.
(2) Morecharacteristic derivatives for the identification of a-terpineol are the nitrol-
piperidines as prepared from the crystalline nitrosochlorides.
The inactive (dl-) form melts at 159-160, the active (d- and /-) form at 151-152.
Wallach 3
also suggested the nitrolaniline m. 155-156 for the identification of a-
terpineol.
(3) Provided no linalool is present, a-terpincol may be characterized by the prepara-
tion of its phenylurethane.
4
According to Wallach, the hydroxy group of terpineol reacts with phenylisocyanate
when both compounds are mixed and permitted to react at room temperature for some
time. Occasionally crystals of diphenylurea (carbanilide) m. 230 separate at first,
from which the liquid mixture is separated by extraction with cold anhydrous ether or,
better, with low boiling petroleum ether. After careful evaporation of the solvent,
the di phenylurethane separates in fine needles. Recrystallized from alcohol, the inac-
tive compound melts at 113. The diphenylurethane obtained from optically active
terpineol is also active; melts at 109.5.
it
Schimmel & compound m. 147- 148 for

Co. recommended the a-naphthylurethane
6
the identification of a-terpineol. Neuberg and Hirschberg 6 reported m. 151-152.

(4) According to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, a-terpineol can be characterized,
7
provided no linalool is present, by converting it into terpin hydrate m. 116-117.

This may be accomplished simply by shaking a-terpineol for several days with dilute
(5%) sulfuric acid. In case linalool is present, the mixture is carefully heated with
strong formic acid which decomposes mostly linalool.
(5) The same authors suggested a method of identifying a-terpineol in mixtures
with other alcohols. By bcnzoylating in the presence of pyridene, terpineol can be
separated from the other alcohols. Only primary and secondary alcohols react with
the benzoyl group, whereas tertiary alcohols like terpineol and linalool do not react,
and may be separated by steam distillation from the high boiling, mostly nonvolatile
benzoates of the other alcohols. One and one-half parts of benzoylchloride are care-
fully added, drop by drop, and at low temperature (freezing mixture) to 1 part of
alcohol fraction dissolved in 3 parts of pyridene. The excess benzoylchloride is de-
composed with water, also at low temperature.
(6) According to Wallach, a-terpineol can be characterized by the preparation of
8
its dihydroiodide (dipentene dihydroiodide) m. 77-78, which is obtained by shaking
a-terpineol with concentrated hydriodic acid.

(7) According to Naves and Grampoloff, 9 the allophanate of a-terpineol,
Ci2H2oN203, m. 133-134, may be used to characterize this terpene alcohol.
Regarding the quantitative determination of a-terpineol, see Vol. I, Chapter 4,
"The Examination and Analysis of Essential Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates," p. 276.
190 ALCOHOLS
Properties. The
properties of the natural crystalline a-terpineol reported
in literature, especially the rotatory powers, vary within rather wide limits,
which may be due in part to the large potential number of isomers of this
compound.
10
d-a-Terpineol was derived from sweet orange oil by Stephan, from oil of
11
neroli bigarade by Hesse and Zeitschel, and from turpentine oil by Fla-
12
vitski:
m. 38-40 10
HD +95 9' 10
b. 219-221 10
[a] D +3130' n
9JS
b 25 115-116 011 [a]f) +4824' 12
5 12 8 10
df' 0.9189 ni 1.48322
12
dj 0.9335
18
l-a-Terpineol, from linaloe oil, as recorded by Schimmel <fe Co., and from
14
pinene hydrate by Wallach:
m. 37-38 14
[a]n
- 10(> 14
(in ether p = 16.34)
b. 219-221 13
[a] D -2720' 13
13 13
b3 _ 4 85 njb 1.48131
Crystalline dl-a-terpincol possesses the characteristic lilac odor of the liquid

16 16
modification only to a small degree. Wallach, Stephan and Helle, Gilde-
meister and Hoffmann, 17 and Kay and Perkin 18 reported the following prop-
erties:
m. 35-36 015 -
16
dg 0.9256 18
(fused)
16 18
b 762 218.8-219.4 djg 0.9282 (fused)
18 18
b 25 120-122 d|i 0.9355 (surfused)
16
bio 98-99 dig 0.935 16
17 16
b3 85 d{i 0.939
18
d}S 0.9415 (surfused)
nf? 1 .48268"
The synthetic (liquid) terpineol of commerce consists mainly of a-terpineol,

some j3-terpineol and According to the "Specifications and
terpinen-1-ol.
Standards" of the Essential Oil Association of the United States, 19 the physico-
chemical properties of commercial terpineol vary between these limits:
b. 214-224, 90% distill within 5 aD -0 10' to +0 10'
dis 0.936-0.941 nf? 1.4825-1.4850

Cong. pt. All products should crystallize when seeded at +2

Sol. Soluble in 2 and more vol. of 70% alcohol, in 4 and more vol. of 60%
alcohol, in 8 and more vol. of 50% alcohol
Water dissolves approximately 0.5% terpineol
Terpineol dissolves approximately water. 5%(Terpineol is clearly
miscible with any volume of petroleum ether, which means that
the product contains less than 1% of water. The Authors.)
The
optically active as well as the inactive modification of a-terpineol gives
the same chemical reactions, and the melting points of some of the derivatives
are not markedly different:
Inactive Active
Form Form
Melting point 35 37- 38
Nitrosochloride 112-113 107-108
>o
Nitrolpiperidine 159M60 151 M52*
Being a unsaturated cyclic terpene alcohol, a-terpineol forms ad-

tertiary,
dition compounds with bromine, nitrogentetroxide and nitrosylchloride, some
of which compounds may prove useful in connection with the identification
of a-terpineol.
The liquid dibromide, on treatment with hydrogen bromide-glacial acetic
an oily
acid, yields tribromide and, on further bromination, dipentene tetra-
bromide m. 124.
Under the influence of inorganic and organic on warming,
acids, especially
a-terpineol is quite unstable, dehydration producing a mixture of hydro-
carbons. 20 With potassium bisulfate, for example, the main product will be
dipentene; with formic acid and aqueous oxalic acid, chiefly terpinolene; with
phosphoric acid, mainly terpinolene, also some terpinene and cineole. In
fact, considerable quantities of terpinene are formed in every case. When
boiling a-terpineol with dilute sulfuric acid, the products of dehydration will
be terpinene, and some dipentene and cineole. Dipentene is formed also by
the action of acetic acid anhydride, especially on heating. Thus, terpineol
cannot be esterified quantitatively without special precautions which must
be considered in the analytical assaying of terpineol (see Vol. I, Chapter 4,
"The Examination and Analysis of Essential Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates").
The esters may be prepared in good yield by starting from the potassium salts
21
of the acids. Thus, Fuller and Kenyon prepared <#-a-terpinyl acid phthal-
atem. 117-118.
When shaken with dilute mineral acids, a-terpineol, according to
Aschan,
22
is hydrated to terpin, the reaction proceeding quantitatively with sulfuric

acid (40 per cent) at 0.
192 ALCOHOLS
23 24
Wallach, and Tiemann and Semmler found that, with dilute potassium
permanganate solution, terpineol is first oxidized to p-menthane-l,2,8-triol,
inactive compound m. 121-122.
CH 3
C OH
H2 C
/ \C /HOH
II 2 C CH2
\ CH/
C OH
H3 C
/ \CH
3
On
treatment with chromic acid mixture, this glycerol Ci 2 o03 is oxidized H
to a ketonic lactone CioHieOs, viz., homoterpenyl methyl ketone. The melt-
ing point of the optically active compound is 4G-47, that of the inactive
compound 64. This ketone can be characterized by the preparation of its
oxime m. 80-81, and its semicarbazone m. 200.

Use. one of the most important compounds used in the per-
Terpineol is
fume, cosmetic, and soap industries. Because of its typical lilac odor and
the low price of the synthetic product, terpineol is widely used in many
preparations.
i
German Patent No. 444,640 (1924), A. Deppe Sohne.
*Liebigs Ann. 277 (1893), 120; 360 (1908), 90 Cf. Simonsen, "The Terpenes," Vol. II
(1932), 231.
Liebigs Ann. 360 (1900), 90.
*
*Ibid. 230 (1885), 268; 276 (1893), 104.

8
Ber. Schimmd &
Co., Oct. (1906), 33.
*
Biochem. Z. 27 (1910), 345.
7
"Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I (1928), 460. Cf. Deninger, Ber. 28 (1895), 1322.
*Liebigs Ann. 230 (1885), 265.
9
Helv. Chim. Acia 26 (1942), 1503.
'/. prakt. Chem. [2], 62 (1900), 530.
11
Ibid. [2], 66 (1902), 497.
"Ber. 20(1887), 1958.
18
"Liebigs Ann. 360 (1908), 89.
u Ibid. 275 (1893), 104.
6
Ber. 36 (1902), 2149.
7
w/. Chem. Soc. 89 (1906), 851.
19
January 10, 1947.
20
Among many papers on this subject, see Dupont, Le"vy and Marot, Bull. soc. chim.
[4], 63 (1933), 393.
* J. Chem. Soc. 126 (1924), 2309.
* Bidrag til Kannedom af Finnland 77 Chem. Abstracts 13 (1919), 2759.
(1918), 30.
Ber. 28 (1895), 1775. Liebigs Ann. 275 (1893), 150; 277 (1893), 110.
24
Ber. 28 (1895), 1778.
Tessaku Ikeda and Shosaburo Takeda, "A New Method for the Determination of
Linalool, Cineole and Terpineol," J. Chem. Soc. Japan 57 (1936), 442. Chem. Ab-
stracts 30 (1936), 5907.
V. I. Varentsev, "Determination of Terpineol in Aqueous Solutions by the Surface-
Tension Method," /. Applied Chem. (U.S.S.R.) 11 (1938), 142 (in German 145).
(3-Terpineol
C 10H 18 O Mol. Weight 154.24
8(9)-p-Menthen-l-ol. l-Methyl-4-isopropenylcyclohexan-l-ol
CH3
C OH
H2 C CH2
H2 C CH2
\CH/
C
HC
\
2
Occurrence. This tertiary, unsaturated terpene alcohol has not been found
in nature.
Isolation. be prepared by cooling the fraction b. 212-215 of

/3-Terpineol may
commercial (liquid) terpineol to a low temperature.
/3-Terpineol has been identified by Stephan and Heile, and Wallach
1
Identification.
and Schmitz 2 by means of the following derivatives:
o
(1) Nitrosochloride m. 103
(2) Nitrolpiperidine m. 108
(3) Nitrolaniline m. 110
(4) Phenylurethane m. 85
(5) Nitrosate m. 125
(6) Nitrosite m. 78?o
Thenitrosochloride does not react very easily with bases; the most satisfactory
derivative is the nitrolaniline.
194 ALCOHOLS
Properties. Optically inactive 0-terpineol, isolated from commercial
(liquid) terpineol, possesses an odor reminiscent of hyacinth. Stephan and
8 4
Helle and Eijkman reported these typical properties:
8
m. 32-33 8
20 8
b?62 209-210 3
(superfused) 1.4747
3
bio 90
4
0.8703
3
(superfused) 0.919
3
dli (superfused) 0.923
Theoretically, /3-terpineol should exist in cis- and trans- modification, but

only one form is known.
By hydration with dilute sulfuric acid, /3-terpineol yields terpin hydrate,
according to Wallach, but much more rapidly than a-terpineol.
5
6 7
Stephan and Ilelle, and Wallach found that, on oxidation with dilute
potassium permanganate, a primary product a crystalline
/3-terpineol gives as
glycerol, viz., p-menthane-l,8,9-triol, m. 118-118.5 which, on further oxi-
dation with chromic acid, yields a hydroxy-ketone big 140-145 (semicarba-
zone m. 195-196), together with an unsaturated ketone b4 68.5-70 (semi-
carbazone m. 160).
Use. As a constituent of commercial (liquid) terpineol, /3-terpineol is very
"
widely used (see a-Terpineol").
Ber. 35 (1902), 2148.
8
Liebigs Ann. 345 (1906), 128. Cf. Wallach, "Terpene und Campher," 2d Ed. (1914), 305.
*
Ber. 35 (1902), 2148.
4
Chem. Weekblad 8 (1911), 673.
Liebigs Ann. 360 (1908), 101.
6
Ber. 36 (1902), 2149.

J
Liebig8 Ann. 324 (1902), 87; 381 (1911), 90. Perkin and Wallach, ibid. 374 (1910), 206.
y-Terpineol
isO Mol. Weight 154.24
4 (8) -p-Menthen- 1 -ol. 1 -Methy 1-4-isopropy lidenecy clohexan- 1 -ol

CH 3
C OH
H2 C CH 2
CH2
\c /
c
H3 C
\CH
3
Occurrence. Whether this unsaturated, tertiary, cyclic terpene alcohol oc-

curs in nature has not yet been definitely proved. According to Simonsen,
1
small quantities are probably present in the oil distilled from Cupressus toru-
losa Don.
Identification. (1) The same author expressed the opinion that the most satisfactory
derivative for characterization is apparently the dibromide m. 114-115.
(2) y-Terpineol be identified by the preparation of its acetate, whose blue
may also
monomolecular nitrosochloride melts at 81-82 (Baeyer and Blau 2 ).
3
(3) Wallach found that, with dilute (1%) sulfuric acid, y-terpineol can be hydra ted
most readily to a mixture of cis- and trans- terpins. On dehydration with formic acid,
terpinolene is obtained.
(4) Whenoxidized with dilute potassium permanganate solution, this alcohol yields
a glycerol, viz., p-menthane-l,4,8-triol, m. 110-112 which, by the action of hydrogen
bromide, gives a tribromide.
Properties. y-Terpineol, like a-terpineol, possesses a lilac-like odor.

4
Simonsen and Eijkman 5 observed the following characteristics:
m. 68-70 4
nf 1.4628 5
6
d 80 0.8948 n^ 1.4730 5
The acetate of y-terpineol boils from 110-120 at 16 mm.

Use. This terpene alcohol is not readily available hence y-terpineol has ;
not found any practical employment.
Indian Forest Records 10 (1923), 1. Cf. "The Terpenes," Vol. I (1947), 271.
2
Ber. 28 (1895), 2292.
3
Ber. 40 (1907), 578.
4
"The Terpenes," Vol. I (1947), 272.
*Chem. Weekblad 8 (1911), 673.
196 ALCOHOLS
The Terpinenols
Mol. Weight 154.24
The unsaturated, cyclic, tertiary terpene alcohols CioHigO, to which the

name terpinenols has been assigned, result from the cleavage of one mol of
water from terpinene-terpin (1,4-terpin), whereby four isomeric alcohols are
theoretically obtained. Thus, these four alcohols bear the same relationship
to terpinene-terpin as do the terpineols to terpin. Only one of the four iso-
mers, viz., terpinen-4-ol, has been found in nature, while terpinen-1-ol occurs
in commercial (liquid) terpineol.
CH 2
-OH
H ;H 2
Terpinene-terpin
2
,CH (1,4-Terpin)
f OH
HC 3 CH 3
-Hs.0
H 3
H 2 0\H
2 CL CH 2
C OH
HaC CH 3 HaC CHa H3C

A CH3
Terpincn-4-ol Terpinen-1-ol Not described y-Tcrpineol
Terpinen-1-ol
3-p-Menthen-l-ol. l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-3-cyclohexen-l-ol. Terpinenol-(l)
CH 3
C OH
HC
/ \
CH
2 2
H2 C CH
\ /
C
CH
HC
/ \ CH
3 3
This tertiary, unsaturated, cyclic terpene alcohol has not been

Occurrence.
found in nature. Wallach l isolated it from the low boiling fraction of com-
.mercial (liquid) terpineol.
Identification. (1) With hydrogen chloride in acetic acid solution, terpinen-1-ol
yields terpinene dihydrochloride in. 51-52.

(2) Terpinen-1-ol may also be characterized by its products of oxidation (see below).
Properties. Terpinen-1-ol is a liquid that does not crystallize at low tem-

perature. Wallach and Meister 2 reported for the synthetic product these
typical properties:
b. 208-210
di 8 0.9265
8
n{> 1.4781
On oxidation with cold dilutepotassium permanganate, terpinen-1-ol

yields a glycerol, viz., p-menthane-l,3,4-triol m. 120-121 which, on further
oxidation, gives a,S-dihydroxy-a-methyl-S-isopropyladipic acid. When heated
with dilute mineral acids, the glycerol is converted into a mixture of p-cymene
and dJ-piperitone (l-menthen-3-one). This ketone may be identified by the
preparation of its semicarbazone m. 224-225.
Use. Being a constituent of commercial (liquid) terpineol, terpinen-1-ol
is used widely (see "a-Terpineol") .
1
Liebigs Ann. 366 (1907), 218; 362 (1908), 269.
2
Ibid. 356(1907), 218.
198 ALCOHOLS
Terpinen-4-ol
C 10Hi 8 Mol. Weight 154.24
l-p-Menthen-4-ol. l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-l-cyclohexen-4-ol. Terpinenol- (4) .
"Origanol"
CH 3
C
H2 C
/ VCH
H2C CH2
\ /OH
C
CH
H3C
/ \CH
3
Occurrence. This tertiary, unsaturated terpene alcohol occurs in oil of cy-

press, juniper berry, Ceylon cardamom, nutmeg, marjoram, thyme, and a
few others. The dl- form has been reported by Kafuku, Nonoe and Hata l
in the volatile oil of Liquidambar formosana.
Isolation. The separation from essential oils is difficult because

of pure terpinen-4-ol
this alcohol does not yield any crystalline derivatives from which it could be recovered.
The only method of isolating terpinen-4-ol is, therefore, by fractional distillation.
2
Identification. According to Nagai, active terpinen-4-ol may be identified by the
preparation of several derivatives:
(1) Nitrosochloride m. lll-112

(2) Nitrolpiperidine m. 172-174
(3) Phenylurethane m. 71-72
(4) a-Naphthylurethane m. 105.5- 100.5
Briggs and Sutherland prepared a naphthylurethane m. 107-108. Penfold

3 4
obtained a highly characteristic naphthylurethane m. 104-105, and a crystalline

nitrosochloride m. 115-116.
Simonsen, however, maintains that terpinen-4-ol is difficult to identify and probably
6
may be characterized most readily by oxidation to the glycerol (described below) and ,
by its conversion into terpinene dihydrochloride on treatment with hydrogen chloride.

According to the same author, terpinen-4-ol does not yield a phenylurethane, the al-
cohol being dehydrated by the action of phenyl isocyanate with the formation of a
hydrocarbon, which seems to be a-terpinene.
Hancox and Jones 6 prepared a new derivative of this terpene alcohol: the gases
generated by adding a saturated sodium nitrite solution dropwise to concentrated
hydrochloric acid are passed through a solution of 4-terpinenol in dry ether cooled
in a freezing mixture. The terpinenol solution rapidly becomes green and deposits a
copious precipitate which, after filtration and repeated washing with ether, yields a
complex of the formula CioHisÔsCl, m. 105-106.
Kafuku, Nonoe and Hata, 7 prepared a nitrolpiperidine from the cW-terpene alcohol
isolated from Liquidambar formosana. By recrystallization from alcohol this nitrol-
piperidine was found to be a mixture of a- and 0- forms: pure a- form m. 155-156,
pure 0- form m. 181-182.
Properties. Terpinen-4-ol possesses a less agreeable odor than terpineol.

It is known only in liquid form, remaining liquid even at low temperature.
9 10
Wallach, Simonsen, and Briggs and Sutherland
8
reported the following
properties of the d- form:
b. 209-212 8
aD +25
b 10 86-87 10 [a]?* +2122 /10 '
10 5 10
df 0.9285 nf> 1.4765
d 19 0.9265 9
nf? 1.4786 8
Wallach u and Semmlcr I2

also described the synthetically prepared dl-
form:
b. 212-214 u d 20 0.920 12
bn 93-9G 12 D u
nD 1.48033 12
Oxidation of terpinen-4-ol with dilute potassium permanganate solution

yields a glycerol, viz., p-mcnthane-l,2,4-triol, m. 128-129, which, on warm-
ing with dilute hydrochloric acid, gives carvenone. By further oxidation the
glycerol is converted into o;,5-dihydroxy-a;-methyl-6-isopropyladipic acid.
Use. Except as a constituent of commercial (liquid) terpineol, terpinen-4-ol
has not found any noteworthy use in the perfume or flavor industries.
i/. Chem. Soc. Japan 65 (1934), 244. Chem. Abstracts 28 (1934), 3524.
Investigations of the Sh6-Gyu and Yu-Ju oils produced in Formosa, Monopoly Bureau,
2
Government Formosa, Taihoku (1914). Ber. Srhimmel & Co., Oct. (1914) to April (1915),
43.
3
/. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 397.
4
6
"The Terpenes," Vol. I (1947), 278..
6
Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland 60 (1938), 40.
7
*Liebigs Ann. 366 (1907), 215.
9
i/. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 403.
Liebigs Ann. 360 (1906), 155.
12 Ber. 39
(1906), 4421.
200 ALCOHOLS
The Terpins
CioH 2 oO 2 Mol. Weight 172.26
Terpin
p-Menthane-l,8-diol. l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexane-l ,8-diol.

1,8-Terpin.
CH 3
C OH
H2 C CH2
HO 2v^/
OTT
v>Xl2
CH
C OH
H3C CH 3
1 2
Occurrence. Opinions vary among writers (cf. Semmler, Simonsen, Kar-
rer 3 and Francesconi 4 ) as to whether this glycol which is so important in
the elucidation of the constitution of certain terpenes and in the manufactur-
ing of terpineol occurs as such in nature, or results from secondary reactions.
However, its presence has been reported in some essential oils in the past,
and again quite recently by Machado 5
in the oil of Myrocarpus sylvestris to
the extent of 65.8 per cent.
Isolation. 1,8-Terpin exists in both the cis- and trans- modifications. The a's-isomer
is easily obtained in the hydra ted form, viz., as-terpin hydrate. The trans- terpin does
not form a hydrate. Terpin forms quite readily if oil of turpentine is kept in contact
with water which contains acids, for crystals of terpin hydrate are deposited, a's-
Terpin (hydrate) can be obtained most readily by the hydration of pinene. For this
purpose, 1 part of turpentine oil is thoroughly shaken, for 90 hr., with 2 parts of 25%
sulfuric acid in an atmosphere of nitrogen or carbon dioxide. According to Marchand, 6
the yield of crystalline terpin hydrate will then be almost quantitative. Publications,
including several patents, give evidence that the hydration of pinene is readily effected
with other reagents. 7 Terpin can also be obtained by the cyclization of geraniol,
linalool, and nerol.
Identification. The terpins maybe recognized by means of their halogen acid
derivatives which exist in the corresponding as- and transform; they are synonymous
with dipentene 6is-hydrohalides:
M. C.
as trans
Dipentene fo's-hydrochloride ~ 25 9
50 8
38-40 9
64 lo - u
Dipentene ta's-hydrobromide
Several methods of isolating and estimating this substance in drugs are available
(cf. Official and Tentative Methods of Analysis A.O.A.C., 5th Ed., 1940). Numerous
color reactions exist for the identification of terpin hydrate (cf. Petenkoefer Reac-
13
tion,
12 vanillin hydrochloride test, p-dimethylaminobenzaldehyde reaction, 14 and
15
phosphomolybdic acid test ).
cis-Terpin hydrate crystallizes from water in rhombic pyra-

Properties.
mids m. 116-117, according to Wallach. 16 However, Perkin 17 observed
higher melting points (120-121 decomp.) as the result of temperature meas-
urements of "instantaneous melts"; Schoorl 18 reported this melting point as
123. The latter author also observed the eutectic mixture of the hydrate-
anhydrous terpin with 10 per cent of the hydrate as m. 95. This divergence
of melting point serves to illustrate the extent to which that constant is in-
fluenced by the presence of water. The
on the anhydrous effect of pressure
19
product is substantial, as Sollazzo observed m. 89 at 2000 meters, vs.
104-10G at sea level. When heated, loss of water takes place, with forma-
tion of m'-tcrpin m. 104-105, b. 258 (corr.), according to Wallach, 20 Per-
kin 21
and the U. S.
22
On
exposure to the air, the anhydrous
Dispensatory.
cis-tcrpin absorbs water and cis-terpin hydrate is reformed.
23
trans-Tcrpin crystallizes in monoclinic prisms m. 15(>-158 (Baeyer ).
As has been pointed out, the trans- modification does not form a hydrate.
Otherwise, the two isomers show little difference in their properties. None
is easily oxidized not with potassium permanganate at room temperature,
for example. However, when heated with potassium permanganate solution,
complete degradation to oxalic and acetic acids takes place.
The
action of dehydrating agents results in the formation of terpineols,
and several hydrocarbons, especially dipentene.
Use. Terpin hydrate forms an important intermediary product in the
manufacture commercial terpineol. Moreover, terpin hydrate is widely
of
employed in pharmaceutical preparations. However, it is not regarded with

complete favor in the U. S. Dispensatory.
!"Die Atherischen Ole," Vol. Ill (1906), 64.
2
"The Tcrpencs," Vol. I (1947), 300.
"
"Organic Chemistry Trans, by Mee (1938), 628.
3
Profumi italici 3 (1925), 195. Chimie & Industrie 16 (1925), 971.

4
5
Rev. quim. ind. (Rio dc Janeiro) 10, No. 112, 14 (1941), 266. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942),
1441.
6
British Patent No. 153,606.
7
In this connection see: (a) Paris, Acta Commentationes Univ. Tartu (Dorpat A16, No. 1,
3 (1930). (b) Shumeiks, Zhur. Prikladnol Khim. 3 (1930), 541. (c) Hirao and Takano,
/. Chem. Soc. Japan 68 (1937), 213. (d) Kimura, J. Soc. Chem. Ind. (Japan) 40, Suppl.
binding (1937), 237. (e) Fichter and Schetty, Helv. Chim. Acta 20 (1937), 1304. (f)
Asharya and Wheeler, /. Univ. Bombay 6, Part II (1937), 134. (g) Aschan, Bidrag
Kann. Finlands naturoch folk. 77 (1918), 30.
8
List, Liebigs Ann. 67 (1848), 369.
9
Baeyer, Ber. 26 (1893), 2863.
Wallach, Liebigs Ann. 239 (1887), 18.
10
11
Wanscheidt and Moldavski, Ber. 64 (1931), 921,
202 ALCOHOLS
12
Bull pharm. Bordeaux 60 (1922), 49. See U. S. Disp., 23rd Ed., 1119.
soc.
Rosenthaler, Pharm. Ztg. 76 (1931), 775.

18
14
van Urk, Pharm. Weekblad 66 (1929), 101.
16
Perelman, Pharm. Ztg. 77 (1932), 1204. Chem. Abstracts 27 (1933), 4024.
Liebigs Ann. 230 (1885), 248.
7
J. Chem. Soc. 86 (1904), 668.
i8
Natuurw. Tijdschr. 14 (1932), 35.
10
Bo//, chim.farm. 79 (1940), 1. Cfcew. Abstracts 34 (1940), 7681.
Liebigs Ann. 230 (1885), 248.
2
J. C%em. Soc. 86 (1904), 668.

22
23rd Ed. (1943), 1119.
.26 (1893), 2866.
Terpinene- Terpin
Ci H 20 2 Mol. Weight 172.26
p-Menthane-l,4-diol. l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexane-l,4-diol. 1,4-Terpin
CHo
C OH
\
CH2
\C/OH
CH
/ \
Occurrence. Terpincne-terpin has not been identified in nature.
Isolation. Wallach l
found that
can be obtained quite readily by the hydration
it
of sabinene, a-thujene, or terpinen-4-ol with dilute sulfuric acid.

Identification. On dehydration, terpinene-terpin yields 1,4-cineole, terpinen-4-ol
and terpinen-1-ol. The mono-p-nitrobenzoate m. 117 and the di-p-nitrobenzoate m.
172 of the cis-l,4-terpin have been characterized by Paget. 2
3 4
Properties. Simonsen and Wallach reported the following properties:
m. 137M38 (trans)
8
3
m. 116-117 (CM)
4
b. 250 (uncorr.)
Use. Terpinene-terpin, as such, has not found any use in the perfume or
flavor industries.
1
Ann. 366 (1907), 200.
Liebigs
*/. Chem. Soc. (1938), 832.
3
*Ber. 40 (1907), 578.
x
Carveol
3i 6 Mol. Weight 152.23
6,8(9)-p-Menthadien-2-ol. l-Methyl-4-isopropenyl-6-cyclohexen-2-ol
CH3
C H
-/ \ /OH
HC C
H2 C CH 2
CH
C
\
This alcohol isa product of the autoxidation of d-limonene.
Occurrence. Small quantities of carveol occur in caraway seed oil.
Isolation. The most suitable method appears to be that used by Johnston and
Read wherein the crude
l
carveol is converted to the corresponding 3,5-dinitrobenzoate
or p-nitrobenzoate and purified by fractional recrystallization from alcohol-ethyl
acetate mixtures.
Identification. Although several derivatives have been reported, the exact configura-
tion of the carveol to which they correspond is still obscure in most cases. The most
detailed work on completely defined derivatives of this alcohol is that of Johnston and
Read 2
who report the characteristics of optically homogeneous samples as follows:
d I
p-Nitrobenzoate, m.
3,5-Dinitrobenzoate, m.
Properties. Carveol is a colorless oil. A amount of information

limited
by Blumann and Zeitschel, Gen-
3
on this terpenic alcohol has been gathered
4 5 6
vresse, Ponndorf, and Nagasawa, but the most detailed study on optically
7
pure samples is that of Johnston and Read. These latter authors reported
the several forms of carveol -as follows:
204 ALCOHOLS
o
2 |
: : 2
1
o oQ o^
<N
(N
O CO
op (N
^
00
?
2
3
Js. g
GO
'C
"5 Sl
(N
O
H 1 rH
jS *%*
V)
c *
(N O i
T ^
d
J 6 T3 d
Oxidation of carveol with chromic acid yields carvone.

Use. Carveol is not readily available and, therefore, has not attained any
noteworthy use in the perfume or flavor industries.
1
/. Chem. Soc. (1934), 233.
2
Ibid.
3
47 (1914), 2626.
Ber.
*Compt. rend. 132 (1901), 414.
6
Z. angew. Chem. 39 (1926), 138.
6
Repts. Imp. Ind. Research Inst., Osaka, Japan 19, No. 4 (1938). Chem. Abstracts 34
(1940), 219.
7
J. Chem. Soc. (1934), 233.
Dihydrocarveol
8(9)-p-Menthen-2-ol. l-Methyl-4-isopropenylcyclohexan-2-ol
CH3
CH H
H2 C C OH
H2 C CH2
CH
C
H2 C
-/ \CH
3
Occurrence. Schimmel & Co. 1 isolated dihydrocarveol from caraway seed

2
oil; Nelson found it as acetate in American vspearmint oil.
Isolation. The fraction

caraway seed oil b e 94-97.5 is benzoylated with benzoyl
of
chloride in pyridine, the product submitted to steam distillation, and the residue
saponified.
Identification. Dihydrocarveol may be identified:
(1) By the preparation of its phenylurethane, optically active form m. 87, inactive
form m. 93.
(2) the oxidation of dihydrocarveol with chromic acid in glacial acetic acid to
By
dihydrocarvone, and by the preparation of the oxime, optically active form in. 88-89,
inactive form m. 115-116, according to Wallach et al. 3 (see below).
(3) Through the p-nitrobenzoate m. 37, and the 3,5-dinitrobenzoate m. 121.5-
122 prepared from d-dihydrocarveol by Johnston and Read. 4
Dihydrocarveol is an oil possessing a terpineol-like odor.

Properties.
Containing three asymmetric carbon atoms, dihydrocarveol can theoretically
exist in eight optically active and four externally compensated modifications.
206 ALCOHOLS
When prepared artificially for instance, by the reduction of d- or /-carvone
dihydrocarveol is usually a mixture of stereoisomers.

5
Wallach et al. early reported the characteristics of this alcohol obtained
by reduction of d-carvone; these data were later confirmed by Tschugaev. 6
By a like reduction, Johnston and Read 7
carefully prepared dihydrocarveol
bis 106.8M07.2 [a]}? +34 12'

6
d 0.9223 n 1.4784
8
The analog of this isomer was obtained by Tschugaev et al.
This compound, however, bears resemblance to that described later as

9
"neodihydrocarveol" by Johnston and Read:
b 18
4
aj -33 13'
4
nL 1.4812
that yields a 3,5-dinitrobenzoate m. 138-138.5, and a p-nitrobenzoate m.

107.
10
Tschugaev, employing the decomposition of
dihydrocarvylxanthogenam-
ide, isolated yet another isomer (closely related to that of Wallach) which
he described as "d-a-dihydrocarveol":
b 74 9 222.5-223 WD +33 52'
df 0.9204 nf? 1.47818
As concerned, Schimmel & Co. found these

11
far as the natural product is
properties for dihydrocarveol isolated from caraway seed oil:
b 7 -8 100-102 D -6 14'
dJJ 0.9368 nf> 1.48364
12
Tschugaev obtained the antipode of the Schimmel dihydrocarveol through
the xanthogenamide decomposition and described it as "d-/3-dihydrocarveol"
b 20 120 WD +7 38'
df 0.9266 nf? 1.48087
More work necessary to demonstrate the intramolecular spatial relation-

is
ships between the products of these different reactions and the extent of their
purity.
When oxidizing dihydrocarveol with chromic acid in glacial acetic acid,
Wallach et al. 13 obtained dihydrocarvone b. 221-222, d 19 0.928, n D 1.47174.
The dihydrocarvone from c?-dihydrocarveol was thereby laevorotatory, the
dihydrocarvone from Z-dihydrocarveol dextrorotatory. The corresponding
optically active and inactive dihydrocarvoximes have been described above.
Wallach and collaborators 14 also showed that the oxidation of dihydro-

carveol with potassium permanganate yields a glycerol, viz., p-menthane-
2,8,9-triol which, with dilute sulfuric acid, is converted into an unsaturated
oxide b 2 o 95, d 0.9647, no 1.4844. This oxide, in turn, yields a crystalline
dibromide m. 58, and with hydroxylamine two isomeric hydroxylamino-
derivatives m. 111-112, and 164-165, respectively. These derivatives
may be used for the characterization of dihydrocarveol.
The acetate of dihydrocarveol possesses an odor typical of spearmint.
Use. Dihydrocarveol has not found any noteworthy use in the flavor or
perfume industries.
1
2
3
U. S. Dept. Agr., Bureau of Chemistry, Circ. No. (1912). M
Liebigs Ann. 276 (1893), 115.
*J. Chem. Soc. (1934), 236.
5
Liebigs Ann. 275 (1893), 111.
6
Ber. 33 (1900), 735. J. Russ. Phys. Chem. floe. 36 (1904), 992.
7
J.Chem. Soc. (1934), 236.
/. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 39 (1907), 1333. Chem. Zenlr. I (1908), 1180. Zeit. physik.
Chem. 76 (1911), 471.
9
J. Chem. Soc. (1934), 236.
iBer. 35 (1902), 2479. /. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 36 (1904), 1001.
11
12
Ber. 35 (1902), 2479. J. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 36 (1904), 1001.
Liebigs Ann. 275 (1893), 111.
13
"Ibid. 277 (1893), 151; 279 (1894), 386; 324 (1902), 91. Cf. Simonsen, "Tho Torperms,"
Vol. I (1947), 280.
Pulegol
CjoIiisO Mol. Weight 154.24
4(8)-p-Menthen-3-ol. l-Methyl-4-isopropylidenecyclohexan-3-ol
CH
H2 C
/ \CH*
I I/H
II 2 C C OH
\C/
C
HC
/ \CH
3
This alcohol has not yet been observed in nature, due prob-
Occurrence.
ably and partly to its marked chemical sensitivity. However, biological ex-
periments by Teppati have demonstrated that pulegone can give rise to
l
208 ALCOHOLS
pulegol both in vivo and in vitro. Since pulegol constitutes an intermediate
in the formation of menthol, its occurrence at least in combined form in es-
sential oils seems quite likely.
Isolation andIdentification. The fraction containing the alcohol mixture as isolated

by steam distillation is treated with phthalic anhydride in the cold to obtain the acid
phthalates; these are separated by fractional crystallization. The properties of the
acid phthalate corresponding to that of /-pulegol are: m. 212, [a] D 86 48', accord-
2
ing to Paolini.
3
Properties. obtained an Z-pulegol by a sodium-alcohol reduction
Paolini
of d-pulegone, and purified it by the phthalate method:
m. 46-47
b. 209-210
[] D -54 3'
A d-pulegol
has been reported by Doeuvre and Perret 4 by the reduction of
d-pulegone with isopropyl aluminum and purification through fractional dis-
tillation:
8
bi 2 91.5 nL 1.4714
8
di 0.909 47.24
o.ier. jCalc.
8
[]S +70 0' J 0bg4737
Use. Pulegol, as such, is not used in the perfume or flavor industries.
1
Arch, intern, pharmacodynamie 67 (1937), 440. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 5504.
2
Atti accad. Lined [5] 28 (1919), 238.
3
Ibid., 190, 230.
*
Bull. soc. chim. [5] 2 (1935), 305.
Isopulegol
8 (9)-p-Menthen-3-ol. l-Methyl-4-isopropenylcyclohexan-3-ol
CH
<N
*/ CH2
>
HzC OH
\H
Tiemann and Schmidt reported that the acetate of isopulegol is formed

l
by the treatment of citronellal with acetic acid anhydride. Semmler 2 pre-

pared isopulegol by the action of acetic acid anhydride on the enolic form of
citronellal.
3
Occurrence. Naves
reported the occurrence of isopulegol in lemongrass
oil of French equatorial Africa. Penfold 4 identified the alcohol in Lepto-
spermum liversidgei var. B. However, the remarks of Naves are particularly
worthy of note in connection with all observations as to the natural occur-
rence of this alcohol. This author points out that isopulegol occurs only in
those oils of which citronellal is also a constituent. This aliphatic aldehyde
readily isomerizes to isopulegol, which fact may account for the presence of the
latter compound in an oil.
According to Wallach, isopulegol can be characterized by oxi-

6
Identification. (1)
dation to isopulegone and by preparing the oxime thereof. The optically active
oxime melts at 121; at 125-126, according to Sakurai; 6 the optically inactive
oxime at about 140.
The semicarbazone, too, may serve for the identification of the derived isopulegone.
The semicarbazone from the optically active forms is usually reported as melting near
172. However, Doeuvrehas shown that the two semicarbazones corresponding to
7
the stereoisomeric alcohols formed from d-citronellai have these properties :
I m. 172-173 Hl? 8 -29 58'
II m. 156 Hl? 8 +4 30'
The optically inactive semicarbazone m. 182- 183.

(2) According to Behal, isopulegol can also be characterized
8
by the preparation of
its allophanate m. 219.
(3) The naphthylurethane of d-isopulegol melts at 112-113 (cf. Penfold 9).
(4) The p-toluene sulfonic ester of the active form melts at 95, according to Stoll. 10
Properties. a colorless liquid possessing an odor which re-

Isopulegol is
sembles menthol; it appears to be a mixture of stereoisomeric alcohols. Theo-

retically this hydroxy compound can exist in four stereoisomeric pairs of el-
and I- rotatory compounds. The system is comparable to the menthols.
The scheme of nomenclature proposed for application thereto has been sug-
gested by Pickard, Hunter, Lewcock and de Pennington
ll
who recorded the
following properties on certain of these isopulegols:
210 ALCOHOLS
Isopulegols
<rans-(CH 3 ,C 3 H 5 )
d-a-isopulegol Msopulegol
|19.5
0.9172 94
5461 +34 30' bio

19.5
[a]fT +29 18' d 20 0.9110
(contains 10% Z-isopulegol)

r 120
Mr>461 -25 54'
20
nD 1 .4723
fObs. 47.41
Mol. refr.
[Calc. 47.16
Forms the more soluble acid Forms the sparingly soluble acid
phthalate: phthalate:
m. 117; HD +30 6' (in ale. m. 106;
5
W~| 893 -23 33' (in ale.
c = 5) c = 5)
Mg m. 111; []&,
salt +18 12'
Strychnine salt m. 205
Reduced by Pd to d-neomenthol: Reduced by Pd to /-menthol:
55
'
m. 42; []# -49 24'
Products obtained by Tiomann and Schmidt, 12 Semmler, 13 Wegscheider and

14 15
Spath, and later Doeuvre are admittedly mixtures, and all display very
small rotations, []D <2.
Use. Isopulegol has found limited use in the scenting of soaps and tech-
nical preparations.
1
Ber. 29 (1896), 913; 30 (1897), 27.
J
Ber. 42 (1909), 2016.
8
*/. Proc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales 65 (1932), 185.
*LieMg8 Ann. 365 (1909), 251.
8
/. Pharm. Soc. Japan 65 (1935), 86. Chem. Abstracts 29 (1935), 7581.
7
Bull. soc. chim. [41, 63 (1933), 589.
8
Ibid. [4] 26 (1919), 479.
1
Z. physiol. Chem. 246 (1937), 9.
/. Chem. Soc. 117 (1920), 1248.

tf Ber. 29 (1896), 914.
i*Ber. 42 (1909), 2014.
i. 30 (1910), 825.
l. soc. chim. 63 (1933), 589.
Riki Horiuchi, "Transformation of Aliphatic Terpenes into Monocyclic Terpenes.

Synthesis of Menthol," Takasago Perfumery Co. Mem. Coll. Sci. Kyoto Imp. Univ.
Series A, 11, No. 3 (reprint) 171-97 (1928). Chem. Abstracts 22 (1928), 3886.
Y. R. Naves, "Some New Aspects of the Chemistry of Isopulegol," Parfums
France 6 (1928), 191, a review.
Piperitol
l-p-Menthen-3-ol. l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-l-cyclohexen-3-ol.
CH 3
C
H2 C
/ \CH
I I/H
H2 C C OH
CH
CH
H3 C
/ \CH
3
Occurrence. This secondary alcohol does not seem to be widely distributed

in nature. Z-Piperitol has been found in a few eucalyptus oils, especially in
d-Piperitol was reported by Simonsen
l
oil of Eucalyptus radiata Sieb. in
the oil from an unidentified species of Andropogon growing in the Etawah
district, U.P., India.

Identification.Oxidation of piperitol with chromic acid yields piperitone, l-p-
(1)
menthen-3-one, which may be easily characterized.
(2) The dinitrobenzoate m. 84-85, [a]}} -300' (c
= 0.1 in CHC13 ) has been
prepared by Read and Walker. 2
Properties. Piperitol is a viscid oil with a pleasant odor. The properties

set forth in the following table have been reported by Baker and Smith, 3
Read and Walker, 4 Simonsen, 5 and Read and Storey:
6
212 ALCOHOLS
Since piperitol contains two asymmetric carbon atoms, it can exist in four
optically active isomeric forms. Read 7 expressed the opinion that the natu-
rally occurring piperitol possesses the cis-configuration.
Use. Piperitol has not found any noteworthy use in the perfume or
flavor industries.
1
2/. Chem.Soc. (1934), 312.
3
"Research on the Eucalypts," 2d Ed. (1920), 373.
</. Chem.Soc. (1934), 308.
6
J.Chem.Soc. (1930), 2770.
7
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 49 (1930), 1008.
Carvomenthol
(Tetrahydrocarveol)
2-p-Menthanol. l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexan-2-ol
CH 3
*CH
H2 C
/ \*/H
C OH
H2 C CH 2
\ /
*CH
CH
H3 C
/ \CH
8
Occurrence. Although this cyclic saturated secondary alcohol has not yet
been definitely identified in essential oils, it is closely related genetically
to other natural products, i.e., carvone and carvacrol. The work of
Johnston and Read *
has conclusively demonstrated the existence of dynamic
equilibria among members of this series which fact may in part account for
the failure specifically to assay this alcohol. Products isolated in the past
as carvomenthols are at best mixtures of stereoisomers.
The carvomenthols are stereochemically similar to the menthols, by virtue
of the three asymmetric carbon atoms, and should be capable of existing in
214 ALCOHOLS
3 CO
Po
5
a}
. ^5
d ^J
^7 ^?
o U
d oo K ffl <M
a o
O o
> o o
~5
g
o
<N
!?
^
.
cs ^ rH
O
10
c
i rH I I
0) S
Q r i ^
co"
d C C L__I
^ CO
O o o
2 g oo W
O O -H
O
n O iO
H 1
fc o
W rH
05 co i
00
5 . rB ja
Q d ^J
SQ -Z-. S A
Oi
<N u5
O CO
(N CO
co oo
0)
co
CO <0 co CO CO co
Tt<
Q
d
00
S -
d d fl fl "fl "d d
8
pH
IH
.8 3
I
a,
o O
o o
CO
ot i
58 O
fc
a 8 1 8
8 d 8
eight optically active and four racemic forms. The nomenclature likewise
follows the pattern of the menthols.
Carvomenthol d, I, dl
Isocarvomenthol d, Z, dl
Neocarvomenthol d, I, dl
Neoisocarvomenthol d, I, dl
The compounds result from isomerism around the atom Ci and the
"iso"
"neo" derivatives from that around 03. Details as to the specific configura-
tions to be assigned to these classes will be found in the literature. From these
studies, certain well-defined derivatives have been developed which may be

used for the isolation and identification of stereochemically homogeneous
forms.
Isolation and For the stereoisomers and

Identification. their derivatives, Johnston
and Read 2
reported the properties tabulated on page 214.
3
by Johnston and Read, attention has been given to se-
Since the study
lected members of the carvomenthol series by Nagasawa, 4 Palfray and Sabe-
5 6 7 8
tay, Huckel and Wilip, Palfray, and Dodge and Kremers. However,
these workers apparently did not prosecute the purification of their several
isomers as vigorously as did Johnston and Read; thus there is reason to be-
lieve,from the physical data, that the reported isomers are not optically
homogeneous.
Use. Carvomenthol, as such, is not used in our industries.
'/. Chem.Soc. (1935), 1138.
2
Ibid.
3
Ibid.
4
Repts. Osaka Imp. Ind. Res. Inst. 19, No. 4 (1938). Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 219.
6
Bull. soc. chim. [5], 6 (1938), 1423.
6
/. prakt. Chem. 168 (1941), 21.
''Bull. soc. chim. [5], 7 (1940), 401.
*/. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 31 (1942), 525.
216 ALCOHOLS
Menthol
3-p-Menthanol. l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexan-3-ol
CH 3
*CH
/ \
H2C CH2
I I/H
H2 C *C OH
*CH
CH
The work on the stereoisomerism of this cyclic, saturated, secondary alco-

hol and the preparation of the pure stereoisomers, an extremely difficult prob-
lem, has been shared by many prominent workers. The present monograph
will deal primarily with the isolation and identification of those stereoiso-
meric menthols that occur naturally in essential oils. Thus, after a general
introduction to the menthols, isomenthols, neomenthols, and neoisomenthols,
detailed attention will be given to ^-menthol and d-neomenthol which, among
the possible stereoisomers, are the only ones so far encountered in nature.
The very important ^-menthol occurs as a main constituent in peppermint oil
(Mentha piperita) and Japanese type mint oil, while small quantities of the
isomeric liquid d-neomcnthol accompany the Z-menthol in the Japanese mint
oil (Mentha arvensis) . With the improved methods of isolation now at hand,
other of the isomers, too, may be found in nature.
Menthol contains three asymmetric carbon atoms; therefore, it can exist
in four externally compensated and eight optically active forms. Moreover,
the configuration of the molecule allows of geometric isomerism. For an ap-
preciation of the atomic spatial arrangement in these twelve forms, the reader
-
should consult original literature on the subject. However, the relationship
between the various members is clearly illustrated in the following "family
l
tree."
J-Menthone
[Z-Menthone]
/ \
--
d-isoMenthone dZ-Menthone
/
Menthone
> [dZ-Menthone] <
\
dZ-isoMenthone
[d-Menthone]
/
d-Menthone
\
Z-isoMenthone
>|f "^ >r v ^ v

fZ~Menthol fd-isoMenthol fdJ-Menthol ( dWsoMenthol fd-Menthol fWsoMenthol
\ d-neoMenthol \d-neoisoMenthol \dJ-neoMenthol \dZ-neoisoMenthol \J-neoMenthol \Z-neoisoMenthol
The resolution of these many forms and the determination of indices of

purity have been beset with many complications. It will be obvious, from
a study of the physicochemical properties, that these isomers do not lend
themselves readily to separation by rectification because of the close simi-
larity of their boiling points. Nor is the melting point 2 an altogether safe
guide unless the investigator considers the mixed-crystal systems and poly-
8
morphism that exist among certain of these compounds. Findings, relating
to optical properties, further complicate the physical data of the menthols.
In this connection, Hiickel and Niggemeyer 4 have shown that the solvent
has a pronounced effect on optical rotation, most marked with the neoiso-
and isomenthols.
The difficulties attendant upon separation may in part account for the wide
difference in physical and organoleptic characteristics of commercial samples.
In spite of these peculiarities, however, workers have devised methods for
,thelaboratory preparation and characterization of the various menthols,

sometimes in a high state of purity. Bliss and Glass, 6 and Macht 8 investi-
7
gated the physiological effects of the isomers. Iluggett has developed
determinants for mixtures, while many other workers ascertained the physical
properties of the isomers. The more pertinent data obtained in these investi-
gations are reproduced in the tables below.
The properties shown below have been reported by Read, Rob-
in the table
ertson and Cook, 8 Bchal, 9 Read and Grubb, 10 Haller and Martine, 11 Zeitschel
and Schmidt, 12 Vavon and Couderc, 13 Pickard and Littlebury, 14 Grubb and
16 17
Read, Huggett, Kondakov and Bachtschiev, Beckmann, Barney and
16 18
Hass,
19
Hiickel and Tappe, 20 Read and Grubb, 21 Shelswell and Williams, 22
Huggett,
23
Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 24 Read and Grubb, 26 Read, Grubb
and Malcolm, 26 Read, Robertson and Cook, 27 Abbot, Christie and McKen-
28 29 30 31 32
zie, Blagden and Huggett, van Gelderen, Schmidt and Schulz, Harms,
Hiickel and Reimer, 33 Hiickel and Niggemeyer, 34 Williams, 35 Woodward,
Kohman and Harris, 36 Kobe, Okabe, Ramstad and Huemmer, 37 Kenyon and
38
Pickard, and Wright: 3S>
218 ALCOHOLS
8 00
CO
O
o
10 S
00 rH
S
O CO
25
$>
o +*
i i
erivat
OH
3
<5
U^
CO"
CO
O
Q T-H
to
d
10
ja
a
I
0?
I
2 CM
O
O
CM
CM
CM
CO
CO
00
<0
CM
00
o
o
o>
&
4^
&
>
220 ALCOHOLS
o
iO
CO
o
CO
CO
o d
rH o
CO a
a
8
TO
s^>
^ rj
S T?
s i a
o>
o
H d d
3 .2 .2
H a
9 a
.50
*" O
5 03
^-H
W^
r <5
222 ALCOHOLS
O
00
CO
d
03
o
00
O 1
a a
c?
0)
Cfl
d
r>>
rH
d
g
>^
>^
>
.
Q}
s
I
3
S
H1
s-slH
-4-5
CO +3 ^
*X ^ -S
d &
CU
^d
^0)
^H "2
r>
^3
^ t^
r**
CL^
^^^
^. O .-
100 # ctf-MenthoI
52 46 41 34 27 20 24 32 40 47 53.5
100% dl-mo- 100% dl-iao-
Melting point diagram of the system dZ-Menthol, dZ-neoMenthol, dWsoMenthol. The

numerals indicate the melting point in C. 40
Huggett, Quart. J. Pharm. & Pharmacol. 15 (1942), 218.

1
2
Re: melting point data see: (a) Scrini, Pharm. Ztg. 78 (1933), 979; (b) Wright, J.Am. Chem.
Soc. 39 (1917), 1515; (c) Bridgrnan, Proc. Am. Acad. Arts Sci. 72 (1938), 227; (d) Waters
and Beal, J. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 34 (1945), 52.
3
Re: rotatory properties of menthyl compounds, (a) Rule and McLean, J. Chem. Soc.
(1932), 1400; McLean, (1934), 351; (1935), 229; (b) Rule and Dunbar, /. Chem. Soc.
(1935), 1043; (c) Beckmann and Cohen, /. Chem. Physics 4 (1936), 784.
4
Ber. 72B (1939), 1354.
6
J. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 29 (1940), 171.
6
Arch, intern, pharmacodynamie 63 (1939), 43.
Quart. J. Pharm. & Pharmacol. 16 (1942), 218.
7
8
/. Chem. Soc. (1927), 1279.
9
Bull. soc. chim. [4], 26 (1919), 479.
10
/. Chem. Soc. (1934), 315.
" Compt. rend. 140 (1905), 1301.
12
Ber. 69B (1926), 2298.
13
Compt. rend. 179 (1924), 405.
14
/. Chem. Soc. 101 (1912), 109.
16
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 63 (1934), 52T.
*Ibid. 60 (1941), 67T.
17
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 63 (1901), 61.
18
Ibid. [2], 66 (1897), 18, 30.
19
Ind. Eng. Chem. 36 (1944), 85.
Liebigs Ann. 637 (1939), 113, 128.
21
/. Chem. Soc. (1933), 167.
**Biochem. J. 34 (1940), 693.
Quart. J. Pharm. & Pharmacol. 16 (1942), 218.
23
24
25
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 61 (1932), 329T.
26
/. Chem. Soc. (1933), 170.
27
76w*. (1927), 1280.
28
Ber. 71B (1938), 9.
29
/. Chem. Soc. (1934), 317.
80
Rec. trav. chim. 62 (1933), 974.
31
Ber. Schimmel &
Co. (1934), 97.
224 ALCOHOLS
Z. physik. Chem. Abt. B, 30 (1935), 440.
J. prakt. Chem. 149 (1937), 81.
"fier. 72B (1939), 1354.
"Biochem. J. 33 (1939), 1519.
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 120.
87
Ibid. 63 (1941), 3251.
J. Chem. Soc. 107 (1915), 46.
J. Am. Chem.Soc. 39 (1917), 1517.
40
Huggett, Quart. J. Pharm. &
Pharmacol. 15 (1942), 226.
/-Menthol
Occurrence. This most important of

menthols occurs in oil of pepper-
all
mint (Mentha piperita) (50-65 per cent), and Japanese mint oil (Mentha
arvensis) (75-90 per cent); small quantities have been found in a few other
volatile oils, and traces in Reunion geranium oil, etc.
Isolation. The most suitable starting material for the isolation of natural J-menthol
is oil of Mentha arvensis. The oil is cooled to +15 and the menthol crystals are cen-
trifuged off the liquid oil. The then cooled to -f 5 and the crystals again
latter is
removed by centrifuging. The
process is repeated a third time at 10. Starting
from a natural oil containing about 85% J-menthol, the residual oil, after the third
treatment, will still contain from 40 to 50% natural Z-menthol and some menthone.
According to Beckmann, this ketone can be removed from the mixture by conversion
1
into its oxime and by extracting the oxime from the ethereal solution through shaking
with dilute sulfuric acid. The J-menthol will be obtained in solid form. The menthone
may be reduced by various chemical means to several stereoisomers of menthol.
Where the isolation is carried out from synthetic mixtures of the isomeric menthols,
or optically pure samples are desired, the techniques employed are the subject of many
patents. However, a few of the published methods are apparently superior. Earlier
directions were dependent on the use of acid phthalates and succinates, as introduced
by Pickard and Littlebury, 2 but improved separative reagents are now in use. Re-
cently Puetzer and Moran reported that pure /-menthol can be obtained in an overall
3
yield of 61% of the theoretical from ^/-menthol by employing Z-ephedrine as the

resolving agent for the acid succinates. Read et al. recommend the fractional crystal-
4
lization of the Z-menthyl esters of the d-camphor-10-sulfonic acid as an effective means

of isolating J-menthol from d-menthol or from d- or Z-isomenthols. When neo com-
pounds are a contaminant, conversion to and separation of the menthyl esters of:
(1) menthoxyacetic and (2) nitrobenzoic acids will permit most successful separation.
6 fl
The presence of the neoiso compounds is detected, according to Read and Grubb, 7 by
the use of Huggett's 8 menthol-phosphoric acid complex [(CioEkoOJs HaPO^ combined
with p-nitrobenzoate recrystallization. Hiickel and Niggemeyer 9 use a combination
of nitro- and aminobenzoates to advantage.
Identification. Numerous derivatives of Z-menthol have been reported in the liter-
ature but of other stereoisomers in the menthol series only a limited number of deriva-
tives has so far been investigated. Since the physical properties of many of these
compounds resemble one another closely, however, the constants of any derivative
used for purposes of identification must be most accurately defined.
Among the many compounds of diagnostic value cited previously in the property
tables of the menthols, those generally preferred for differential identification are:
(1) 3,5-dinitrobenzoate, (2) p-nitrobenzoate, (3) phosphoric acid complex, (4) menthoxy
acetate, (5) d-camphor sulfonate and (6) acid phthalate.
Regarding the quantitative determination of menthol, see Vol. I, Chapter 4, "The
Examination and Analysis of Essential Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates."
Properties. /-Menthol possesses a powerful peppermint-like odor and a

cooling taste. Natural Z-menthol crystallizes in hexagonal needles or prisms.
The following characteristic properties are reported by Zeitschel and
10 11 12 13
Schmidt, Power and Kleber, Long, Gildemeister and Hoffmann, Beck-
14 15 16 17
mann, Huckel and Reimer, Huggett, and Kenyon and Pickard:
m. 42-43 010 ' 12 13 ' 14

'
Hff -49 52' l2

(fused)
14
b. 216 10
[a]f? -49 21' (in 20% alcoholic solution)
b 758 215.5 n -50 14

[df 35' (in 10% alcoholic solution)
12 16
b 742 212.5 1$ 1.4461
15 10
dgi.4 0.8523 n?? 1.46096
15
d 62 0.8682
16
d 30 0.8911
l7
df 0.9007
Menthol, a saturated secondary alcohol, can be converted by dehydrating

agents (potassium bisulfate, zinc chloride, boiling with very dilute sulfuric
acid, etc.), into 3-p-menthene, Ci Hi 8 b. 165-168. ,
18
oxidation with chromic-sulfuric acid mixture
According to Beckmann,
yields almost quantitatively the corresponding -menthone, whereby practi-
cally no conversion occurs. This reaction is used to advantage as the basis
for the micro method and Schneider. 19 When oxidizing menthol
of Ullrich
with potassium permanganate in acid solution, Arth 20 observed degradation
to several low fatty acids together with /-ketonic acid and probably /3-methyl-
adipic acid m. 86-87.5.
Use. Menthol is employed widely in pharmaceutical preparations where
it serves as a local anesthetic, as a relief for headache, and as an antiseptic
of the respiratory tract. It is also used in tooth pastes, mouth washes, and
similar oral preparations. Menthol also serves for the flavoring of candies
and chewing gums, and for the flavoring of certain brands of cigarettes.
1
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 65 (1897), 17.
/. Chem. Soc. 101 (1912), 109.
*J Am. Pharm. Assocn. 35 (1946), 127.
*J. Chem. Soc. (1933), 170.
6
Read and Grubb, /. Soc. Chem. Ind. 51 (1932), 329T. Cf. British Patent No. 397,212,
August 24, 1933.
226 ALCOHOLS
Read and Grubb, Chem. Soc. (1933), 167.
J.
7
Ibid. (1934), 313. Blagden and Huggett, ibid., 317.
Quart. J. Pharm. & Pharmacol. 16 (1942), 218. J. Chem. Soc. (1934), 317.
8
9
Ber. 72B (1939), 1354.
10
Ber. 69 (1926), 2302.
" Pharm. Rundschau, New York, 12 (1894), 162. Arch. Pharm. 232 (1894), 647.
12
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 14 (1892), 149.
Liebigs Ann. 250 (1889), 327. /. prakt. Chem. II, 66 (1897), 15.
i*
15
/. prakt. Chem. 149 (1937), 81.
"Quart. J. Pharm. & Pharmacol. 15 (1942), 218.
"J. Chem. Soc. 107 (1915), 46.
Liebigs Ann. 250 (1889), 325.
18
Z. physiol. Chem. 246 (1937), 181.

Ann. chim. [6], 7 (1886), 456.
Y. R. Naves, "Production of Synthetic Menthols," Mfg. Chemist 17 (1946), 525.

Wallace R. Brode and Robert W. van Dolah, "Synthesis of Racemic Menthol,"
Ind. Eng. Chem. 39, No. 9 (1947), 1157.
Y. R. Naves and U. Korpi, "Sur la Polymorphic de 1'Oxalate de d,J-Merithyle,"
Helv. Chim. Acta 30, No. 5 (1947), 1219.
Neomenthol
Ci H20 Mol. Weight 156.26
3-p-Menthanol. l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexan-3-ol.
CH,
CH
\
I/H
HC2 C OH
\CH/
CH
HC
/ \
CH
3 3
Occurrence. Pickard and Littlebury l

found small quantities of df-neo-
menthol in oil of Mentha arvensis. d-Neomenthol, a liquid at room tempera-
ture, remains in the dementholized oil after ^-menthol has been partly re-
moved by freezing (see "^-Menthol").
Isolation. By fractional distillation and as acid phthalate m. 142-144.

An improved procedure, if optically pure isolates are desired, is that of Read and
Grubb, -
who prepared the menthoxy esters by reaction with d- or J-menthoxy acetyl
2 3
chloride in pyridine. The purified neomenthols are regenerated, the p-nitrobenzoates

prepared and fractionally recrystaliized. This process yields highly pure com-
pounds.
Details regarding this separative process of fractional-distillation, -crystallization,
-saponification will be found in British Patent No. 297,019 (re: fractional esterification)
and German Patent No. 568,085 (1926) (re: fractional recrystallization and saponifi ca-
tion).
Identification. Neomenthol may be characterized by many derivatives, several of
which are summarized in the following table: (Hiickel and Tappe, 4 Williams, 5 Read
and Grubb, 6 7 and Pickard and Littlebury 8).
-
Properties. Neomenthol a liquid possessing a menthol-like odor. The

is
following properties of this alcohol in one or more of its stereoisomeric forms

have been reported by Grubb and Read, 9 Haller and Martine, 10 Kondakov
and Bachtschiev, 11 Beckmann, 12 Pickard and Littlebury, 13 Zeitschel and
14 15
Schmidt, Huggett, Vavon and Couderc
lfi
and Barney and Haas. 17 How-
9
ever, those recently observed by Read and Grubb for the d- compound were
obtained on an optically pure sample and should thus be characteristic:
228 ALCOHOLS
d-Neomenthol
m. -22 09 a{? + 17 48' (in ale.) 9
10 14 15
b. 212-212.5 -
Mr? +20 0' (in ale.)
b 20 107-108 16
Mi? + 1941' 13
13 9
b 16 98 nj? 1.4448
9 15
b8 87 1.4450
15 2 22 14 ' 15 16
d30 0.8917 (supercooled) nD 1.4594-1.4603 -
16
df 0.8970 n}J 1.4617
14
d{S 0.903
l-Neomenthol
b 21 105 13
[a]{? -1937' 13
bio 97.6 9
Mi> -20 42' (in ale.)
9
13 2
df 0.8995 nD 1.4603"
13 2
dj 0.91 24 n^ 1.4638
dl-Neomenthol
16
m. 50-52 12-13,14.15,17
^30 0.8917
b 753 211.4-211.8 14
df 0.9052 n
103-1 05"
f
bic ni 1.4450"
15
b 12 98-100 ll
ng* 1.4600 (supercooled)
11
nD 1.4645
Use. rf-Neomenthol is used in mixtures of menthol isomers which serve

as substitutes for /-menthol.
1
/. Chem. Soc. 101 (1912), 109-27.
2
Ibid. (1933), 167.
8
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 63 (1934), 52T; 51 (1932), 329T.
4
Ann. 637 (1939), 128.
Liebigs
5
Biochem. J. 34 (1940), 694.
/. Chem. Soc. (1933), 167.
7
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 53 (1934), 52T.
8
/. Chem. Soc. 101 (1912), 123.
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 63 (1934), 52T. J. Chem. Soc. (1933), 167.
10
Compt. rend. 140 (1905), 1301.
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 63 (1901), 61.
/6id. [2],55 (1897), 30.
18
J. Cte. Soc. 101 (1912), 122.
" Ber. 69B (1926), 2298.
Chem. Ind. 60 (1941), 67T.
J. Soc.
18
Compt. rend. 179 (1924), 405.
"Ind. Eng. Chem. 36 (1944), 85.
(b) BICYCLIC TERPENE ALCOHOLS.
The Santenols
CH 3
H
HaC
HuC C-H
H C-
2
Years ago Schimmel & Co. 1 isolated from East Indian sandalwood oil a
bicyclic terpene alcohol CgHi 6 0, m. 58-62 which they named santenone
alcohol since, on oxidation with chromic acid, it yielded santenone. As the
'
constitution of this ketone (see 'Santenone") is well established, the sante-
none alcohol occurring in East Indian sandalwood oil most probably has the
structural formula pictured above.
A number of synthetic hydroxy terpenes 2
that are isomeric with this "san-
tenone alcohol" have been described in the literature since the original inves-
tigation by Schimmel & Co. of the natural hydroxy compound CgHi 6 O
from sandalwood. Nevertheless the exact structural relationship between
these many products remains unclarified and, as a consequence, the nomen-
clature is most confused state. The laboratory "santenols" will be
in a
found in various publications under several names, as 7r-norborneol, 7r-noriso-
borneol, a-santenol, /3-santenol, 7-santenol, and santene hydrate with melt-
ing points varying from 58-106. Thus the recommendation of Simonsen 3
to maintain the name "santenone
alcohol" as applicable alone to the natural
isolate seems most logical and should apply until such time as a uniform sys-
tem of nomenclature is accepted in this series or its exact relationship to a
properly identified synthetic is established.
Occurrence. Santenone alcohol has been obtained from East Indian san-
dalwood oil.
Isolation. fraction bg 76-90 of East Indian sandalwood oil is freed from

The
santenone and boiled with concentrated formic acid. The alcohol set free by saponi-
fication is heated with phthalic anhydride to 140 and the hydroxy compound subse-
quently regenerated.
Although there no certainty as to the stereochemical relationship, Komppa, 4 when
is
investigating the synthetic "santenols," found the use of diphenic anhydride to be a

method of isolation superior to that of the phthalic technique of Schimmel & Co. 6 re-
commended above.
Identification. On
oxidation with chromic acid, the natural santenol yields a
santenone, according to Schimmel & Co., which can readily be characterized by the
preparation of a semicarbazone m. 223-225 (see also Ishidate and Sano and Komppa
6
and Nyman 7 regarding other santenone semicarbazones).

230 ALCOHOLS
Properties. Thesantenols possess an odor resembling that of borneol.
As mentioned previously, the melting points of the several "santenols"
reported in the literature show considerable variations, caused probably by
incomplete purifications or more likely by the formation of stereoisomers in
the particular method used. The naturally occurring hydroxy terpene (san-
tenone alcohol) melts at 58-62. However nothing is known as to its purity;
it boils at 196-198. Komppa 8 purified the synthetic santcnol referred to
above (obtained through hydration of santene) by the preparation of crystal-
line santenyl acid diphenate m. 1 19-120, and by hydrolysis of this compound.
The santenol thus obtained melted at 86.
On oxidation with potassium permanganate in alkaline solution, a santenol
readily yields a santenic acid m. 170-171. The anhydride of this acid melts
at 115-116, according to Komppa and Hintikka. 9
Use. The santenols as such are not used in our industries.
1
Her. Schimmel & Co., Oct. (1910), 100.
2
In connection with this subject consult: (a) Semmlor and Bartelt, Ber. 40 (1007), 4467;
41 (1908), 128. (b) Aschan, Ber. 40 (1907), 4923. (c) Diola and Aider, Liebigs Ann. 486
(1931), 202. (d) Komppa and Beckman, Liebigs Ann. 622 (1930), 137. (e) Komppa and
Nyman, Ann. Acad. Sci. Fennicae A46, No. 1 (1935). Chcm. Abstracts 31 (1937), 6644.
3
"the Terpenes," Vol. II (1932), 213.
4
Ber. 62 (1929), 1751.
5
Ber. Schimmel <fc Co., Oct. (1010), 100.
6
Ber. 74B (1941), 1189.
7
Ann. Acad. Sci. Fennicae A46, No. 1 (1935). Chern. Abstracts 31 (1937), 6644.
8
Ber. 62 (1929), 1751.
9
Bull. soc. chim. [4], 21 (1917), 17.
Occurrence. d-Sabinol occurs free and as acetate in savin (Juniperus

oil of
sabina L.), probably also in cypress oil. The sabinol isolated by Paolini and
Rebora 1 from savin oil was homogeneous.
Isolation. Sabinol can be isolated bysaponification of savin oil with potassium

hydroxide in alcoholic solution, by steam distillation, and fractionation of the steam
distillate.
Identification. be characterized by several reactions:

Sabinol may
(1) According to Semmler and Fromm, 3 sabinol on oxidation with cold dilute
2
potassium permanganate solution yields sabina glycerol m. 152-153 which, on

further oxidation, gives a-thujadicarboxylic acid m. 140-142.
(2) By the preparation of the p-nitrobenzoate m. 76.
(3) By the preparation of the crystalline acid phthalate m. 94-95, according to
Paolini and Rebora. 4
(4) Wallach
6
found that on treatment of sabinol (in alcoholic solution) with sulfur
dioxide, a sulfonic acid CioHisSOaH, m. 98-99 is obtained.
Properties. d-Sabinol is an oil of faint, agreeable odor.

d-Sabinol purified through its crystalline acid phthalate had these typical
properties:
b. 208 [] D +7 50'
8
dlf 0.9518 riL 1.4895
Sabinol shows a marked exaltation of the refractive index (+1.5).

Fromm 6 found that the action of halogen acids on sabinol causes ring fis-
7
sion and dehydrogcnation to p-cymene. According to Wallach, ring fission
also occurs when sabinol is shaken with a 5 per cent sulfuric acid solution,
l-p-menthene-4,6-diol being thereby formed.
Use. Sabinol, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Atti. accad. Lined [5], 25 (1916), [2], 377.
2
Ber. 33 (1900), 1459.
*Ber. 31 (1898), 2030.
4
Atti. accad. Lined [51, 25 (1916), [2], 380.
5
Nachr. Ces. Wiss. Oottingen 3 (1919), 321. Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1920), 143.
6
Ber. 31 (1898), 2030; 33 (1900), 1208.
7
Liebigs Ann. 360 (1908), 99.
Harry Schmidt, "Rearrangement of Pinocarveol and of Sabinol," Ber. 62B (1929),

103.
Pinocarveol
H
HC3
H
Occurrence. The laevorotatory form of this bicyclic secondary alcohol oc
curs in the high boiling fractions of Eucalyptus globulus oil.
232 ALCOHOLS
0) 0> *H
* 1> 3 ^ ._, ^
Tf 3O s
O
h
18
a> ,fi
..
^ a;
S
v
o
-x O i o o
c *H : If
<3|
d<
O - 3
_
-S
J3
r
3
CO" 10 CO"
00
CO S
o
iO
o <N O
o o o
^ o5
2
O
o
oo
00 00
8
d %
o O 00
o
cfi
ô
iO iO
Oh
H
O w* <N
O O
o S <N CO
\ S
a
U
d d
eo
oo
co
O
kT
oo O
a ;
Ow
J3.S d
o
1-4
~L a g
-
8 globul
8 *
r
g*so3
*"t
-^
9- s
ypt 8
III
a T3 0) 3
w
8
'53
a
o
fl
I"
H
S g
Isolation. (1) recommends the isolation of pinocarveol by successive

Schmidt l
treatment with boric acid and phenyl thiocyanate. This method, according to the
author, is an improvement over the phthalic ester method of Wallach, and permits
2
the isolation of pinocarveoi from the various products obtained either by the autoxida-
tion of /3-pinene, or by the reduction of pinocarvone with aluminum tri-isopropylate.
Identification and The

naturally occurring pinocarveol is a
Properties.
syrupy oil with a terpene-like, pleasant odor, if the product is pure. Schmidt
3
has devoted particular attention to a study of the pinocarveols and classified

the natural isolates, as well as the synthetic products. These data are sum-
marized above to emphasize and clarify the relations in the several products.
The natural laevorotatory product is described as very pure. No considera-
tion will be given to the properties of the dl- form, as the data originally gath-
ered on this racemate and its derivatives by Wallach 4 and Schmidt 5 are not
beyond question in view of recent research on the properties of the active
6 7 8 9 10
forms. Schmidt, Joshel and Palkin,
' - -
and Stallcup and Hawkins 11 re-
ported the characteristics tabulated on page 232.
Use. Pinocarveol, as such, is not used in our industries.
l
Ber. 62 (1929), 2945; 63 (1930), 1129.
2
Liebigs Ann. 346 (1906), 227.
3
Ber. 62 (1929), 2945; 63 (1930), 1 129; 77B (1944), UJ7. Ber. Schimmel A Co. (1941), 56.
Liebigs Ann. 277
4
(1893), 149.
*Ber. 63 (1930), 1131.
6
Ber. 62 (1929), 2945.
7
Ber. 63 (1930), 1129.
8
Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1941), 56. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 4714.
9
Ber. 77 (1944), 167.
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 1008.
11
Ibid., 1807.
Myrtenol
CH.OH
,CHi
Occurrence. The dextrorotatory form of this primary, unsaturated, bi-

cyclic alcohol was found by von Soden and Elze to occur mainly as acetate
l
inmyrtle oil distilled from the leaves and flowers of Myrtus communis L.
The d-form has been identified also in the last runs of Spanish eucalyptus oil
(E. globulus). Laevorotatory myrtenol is present in myrtle oil of Spanish
origin.
234 ALCOHOLS
Isolation. Myrtenol be isolated by saponifying the higher boiling fractions of
may
myrtle oil with alcoholic alkali and by treating these fractions with phthalic anhydride
whereby the crystalline acid phthalate is readily formed. From the latter the alcohol
can be regenerated in pure form by hydrolysis with alkali.
Identification. Von Soden and Elze,
2
Paolini,
3
Dupont and collaborators,
4
Tenfold,
Ramage and Simonsen, and Schmidt 5
identified myrtenol among its several isomcric
forms by a number of crystalline derivatives.
(1) By the preparation of the acid phthalate which has been reported for the
d-isomer
m. 116 2
[a] D +21 15' (in alcohol) 4
1 15- 1 16 3
+21 22' (in alcohol) 4
114-115 04 ' 6
dl-isomer
m. 120M20.5 04
(2) By the preparation of the phenylurethane
d-isomer
m. 58-59 5
(3) By the preparation of the a-naphthylurethanc
d-isomer l-isomer
m. 92-93 5
m. 92-93 6
(4) Byoxidation of the alcohol with chromic acid to d-myrtenal. This aldehyde
can be characterized by the preparation of several derivatives for example, the semi-
carbazone m. 230, and the oxime m. 71-72 (see "Myrtenal")-
Properties. The properties of myrtenol have been variously reported by

several authors. Paolini 7 suggests these differences as due to hitherto un-
8
recognized isomers. Dupont and Zacharewicz prepared myrtenols from
pinenes, and observed that this process is further complicated by the presence
of geometric isomers.In spite of the varying sources of material, the data of
these authors would appear to confirm the earlier findings of Semmler and
Bartelt 9
who prepared a c/-myrtenol (purified through its acid phthalate)
b. 222-224 d 20 0.9763
b9 102.5 <* D +45 45'
nD 1.49668
Von Soden and Elze 10

reported a d-myrtenol isolated from myrtle oil as
follows :
b 75 i 220-221 dis 0.985

b3 . 5 79.5-80 D +49 25'
Paolini " found for Z-myrtenol occurring in Spanish myrtle oil :
b. 220
d 15 0.981
[a] D -3 50'
12
Schmidt obtained a /-myrtenol by the oxidation of pinene in the presence
of cobalt siccative; this isomer had the following properties:
b. 221-222 D -46 16'
d 15 0.985 nD 1.49677
Meager information is at hand on the inactive form of this terpene alcohol

prepared by Dupont, Zacharewicz and Dulou
13
who found:
d 0.9849
nj? 1.4963
Use. Myrtenol, as such, is not used in our industries.
H. Rupe and Alwin "Influence of the Constitution upon the Optical

IleYitier,
Activity of Optically Active Substances. Optically Active Myrtenyl Derivatives,"
1
Chem. Ztg. 29 (1905), 1031.
2
Ibid.
3
Gazz. chim. ital. 63 (1933), 666.
4
Bull. soc. chim. [5], 2 (1935), 533. Sec also Compt. rend. 198 (1934), 1699.
6
.7. Proc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales 68 (1934), 36.
6
Ber. Schimmel &
Co. (1941), 56, 70. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 4714, 4715.
7
Gazz. chim. ital. 63 (1933), 666.
8
Butt. soc. chim. [5], 2 (1935), 533. See also Compt. rend. 198 (1934), 1699.
9
Ber. 40 (1907), 1366.
10
Chem. Ztg. 29 (1905), 1031.
11
Gazz. chim. ital. 63 (1933), 666.
12
Ber. Schimmel &
Compt. rend. 198 (1934), 1699.
236 ALCOHOLS
HC
Occurrence. This unsaturated, bicyclic alcohol occurs in the volatile oil
distilled from the gum resin of olibanum (Boswellia Carteri).

Isolation. The alcohol CioHieO, a natural isolate, was originally called olibanol,
but Blumann and Schulz l later showed it to be a mixture of d-verbenone and d-
verbenol. The time be obtained in pure form, due to experi-
latter could not at that
mental difficulties. However, more recently, the Raman spectra have served in
preparatory work (cf. Dupont and Zacharevicz ) to assure the purity of closely
2
related compounds such as the above, and have thus eliminated much of the confusion
surrounding the isolation and structural determinations of products derived from, and
isomeric with, verbenol.
Schmidt, Schulz and Doll prepared the p-nitrobenzoates from the
3
Identification.
cis- and trans- isomers of d-verbenol. From the compound which they described as
the highly purified trans- isomcr, they obtained a p-nitrobenzoate m. 83.5-84,
[]D +197 0' (in 10% benzene solution). The compound which they assumed to be
the cis- isomer, according to the Auwers-Skita rule (obtained in a purity of about 90%),
yielded a p-nitrobenzoate m. 98-99, [CK]D +14 0' (in 10% benzene solution).
Properties. The
various physical properties reported for verbenol may be
attributed to the nonhomogeneous character of the isolates obtained from
by Blumann
5 4
several different sources Suzuki, and Schmidt, Schulz and
et al.,
Doll. 6 These latter authors, however, prepared two isomeric forms of ver-
benol and obtained derivatives thereof. The properties reported by Schmidt
et al. are enumerated below. The compound which they assumed to be the
trans- isomer was prepared from turpentine oil by air oxidation in the presence
Trans- Cis-
cong. pt. 24.0 cong. pt. 15.5
bio 92 bio 90
df 0.9657 d 20 0.9724
[] D +168 45' df 0.9684

1.49078 [] D +65 30'
ng 1.49120
nf? 1.49320
of cobalt siccative. The

isomer (only about 90 per cent pure) was de-
cis-
rived by reduction of verbenone with aluminum isopropylate and
isopropyl
alcohol.
Blumann and Zeitschel 7
described a laevorotatory isomer b t2 100-104,
derived from French turpentine oil.
Use. Verbenol is not used in our industries.
Liebigs Ann. 478 (1930), 303.

1
2
Bull. soc. chim. [5], 2 (1935), 533.
3
Schimmel & Co. (1940), 38. Ckern. Zentr. II (1940), 3037. Cf. Schulz and Doll,
Ber.
Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1942-43), 50.
4
Liebigs Ann. 453 (1927), 48. See also Ber. 46 (1913), 1195.
6
Bull. Inst. Phys. Chem. Research Tokyo 14, 179. Sci. Papers Inst. Phys. Che?n. Research
Tokyo 26, Nos. 560-565 (1935), 14.
6
Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1940), 38. Chem. Zentr. II (1940), 3037. Cf. Schulz and Doll, Ber.
Schimmel & Co. (1942-43), 50.
7
Ber. 46 (1913), 1198.
Pinocampheol

3-Pinanol
CH.
II
H
HC' C OH
H C C-CHs
3
CH 2
Occurrence. Rutovskii and Vinogradova l found the laevorotatory form of

this bicyclic secondary alcohol to occur in oil of hyssop (Hyssopus officinalis).
Isolation. By fractional distillation of oil of hyssop, preparation of the phenyl-

urethane and regeneration of the alcohol.
2
Identification and Properties. Rutovskii and Vinogradova reported for
natural Z-pinocampheol:
m. 56-57 -45 38'

20
0.9509 1.4888
Studying the stereochemistry of pinocampheol, which is similar to that of

the menthols, Schmidt and Schulz 3 reported the derivatives and properties
given in the following table.
238 ALCOHOLS
* Determined in
superfused state.
t For 20% solutions in alcohol.
Kuwata 6
in 1937 reported a number of properties on synthetic stereo-
isomers of this These are in every case, however, slightly variant
series.
from the cis-trans forms enumerated above. Thus it is possible that they are
isomeric with and not identical with the pinocampheols of Schmidt, a possi-
bility not overlooked in the publication of Kuwata.
Schmidt 6 also described a synthetic "neopinocampheol" diastereoisomeric
with the d-j l-trans modifications found in the course of his earlier work.
Moreover the discovery that the pinocamphones assume dynamic equilibria
under the influence of acids, alkalies and catalysts suggests the same possi-
bility for the alcohols of this series. Such an assumption might account for
the lack of uniformity in the properties of a number of these alcoholic isolates.
The organoleptic properties of the stereoisomeric pinocampheols vary
the cis- compounds resemble fenchol; the trans- isomers, borneol, according
to Schmidt. 7
Use. Pinocampheol, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Trans. Sd. Chem. Pharm. Insl. Moskow 10 (1924), 22. Chern. Abstracts 23 (1929), 1717.
8
4
"Terpene und Camphor/' 2cl Ed. (1914), 244.
*/. Am. Chem. Sac. 59 (1937), 2509.
*Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1940), 38. Chem. Zentr. II (1940), 3037.
7
H. Schmidt, "Konfiguration der Stereoisomeren Pinocampheole," Ber. 77 (1944),

544. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 5413.
H. Schmidt, "Pinocarvon und die beiden diastereomeren Pinocarveole," Ber. Schim-
mel & Co. (1944/47), 79.
^Borneol
Mol. Weight 154.24
Bornyl alcohol. 2-Hydroxycamphane. 2-Camphanol

CH 3
,H
H C-
2 -C
CH 3 C CH 3
H.C -C- CH S
H
Borneol one of the most important hydroxy compounds of the terpene
is
series. Although it has been chemically known for nearly a century, studies
still continue on the relationship existing between this bicyclic alcohol and
its structural relative, isoborneol. Interest on the part of some recent work-
ers has centered around the evidence for an endo-exo type of configuration to
account for the isomerism between borneol and isoborneol:
OH
H
""
Exo" structure 'Endo" structure
Investigations of others suggest that this isomerism is more fundamental than

may be explained by a difference in configuration of the hydroxylated carbon
atom.
A proper perspective of these recent views on the structural relations exist-
ing in the borneol-isoborneol series and their closely allied tautomers may be
obtained in publications by Meerwein and van Emster, 1 Vavon and Peignier, 2
Hiickel et al., 8 Lipp, 4 Asahina and Ishidate, 6 Komppa and Beckmann, 6 Asa-
7 8
hina, Ishidate and Sano, Krestinski and Eshchenko, Bartlett and Pockel,
9
and Yamada. 10
Theoretical conclusions drawn from these investigations have greatly con-
tributed to our present-day knowledge of terpene chemistry. New deriva-
tives helpful in the identification and analysis of borneol and isoborneol
have been developed, and physicochemical properties of highly purified isomers
have been determined accurately.
Occurrence. Borneol occurs in nature quite widely distributed as d- and
I- modification, free and in ester form. When esterified, borneol is mostly
laevorotatory.
d-Borneol ("borneo-camphor") forms the principal constituent (crystalline
separation) of the oil from Dryobalanops camphora, D. longifolia and D. be-
240 ALCOHOLS
cam, trees native toSumatra and Borneo. d-Borneol also occurs in oil of
nutmeg, olibanum, rosemary, lavender and spike-lavender, etc.
l-Borneol is present in the needle oil of Abies concolor and Pinus palustris,
in oil of citronella, thuja, coriander, valerian root, Canadian snakeroot, in
yellow pine oil, Lippia adoensis from Senegal, etc.

Borneol has also been identified in many other oils but no optical rotation
was reported.
Bornyl acetate is an important constituent of several pine needle oils, for
instance of Abies alba, Pinus pumilio, Pinus sylvestris, etc. Siberian pine
needle oil contains 30-40 per cent of bornyl acetate.
Isolation. Borneol can be isolated from Siberian pine needle oil, for example, by
first saponifying the oil, removing the terpenes through distillation, and by cooling
the borneol fraction b. 205-215. Most of the borneol will separate as a crystalline
mass, and the borneol remaining liquid can be isolated as acid phthalate.
A mixture of borneol and camphor may be separated, according to the method sug-
gestedby Haller: u
The mixture heated for several hours with succinic anhydride, thereby converting
is
the borneol into the acid succinate, the sodium salt of which is soluble in water and
thus can readily be separated from the camphor. Instead of succinic anhydride,
phthalic anhydride may be used. The benzoic and stearic esters of borneol, which
can be prepared by heating the borneol with the corresponding anhydrides, are only
sparingly volatile, which fact permits the separation of any camphor from these esters
by simple steam distillation. On the other hand, the camphor may be converted into
its oxime and the latter separated from the mixture by shaking with dilute (25%)
sulfuric acid.
In order to determine the borneol in such a mixture quantitatively, a highly con-
centrated solution of the mixture in a suitable solvent such as xylene is acetylized, and
the alcohol content calculated by the usual methods (see Vol. I, Chapter 4, "The
Examination and Analysis of Essential Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates," p. 276).
In case a mixture contains borneol and isoborneol, the latter may be converted into
camphene by heating with benzoic acid, benzoic anhydride or stearic acid, as well as
several other dehydrating agents. The borneol can be regenerated by hydrolysis of
its ester."
Bertram and Walbaum showed that when a fraction containing borneol and iso-
13
borneol is heated for 15 to 30 min. with a mixture of 20% sulfuric acid and 80%
methyl alcohol, only the isoborneol will be converted into the methyl ether.
As a convenient method of separating borneol from isoborneol, Tschugaev 14 recom-
mended preparing the methylbornylxanthate from which borneol can be regenerated
by hydrolysis, while methylisobornylxanthate is dehydrated to camphene.
d- and ^-Methylbornylxanthate m. 56-57, [a] D +33 41' and -33 23'; dl- form
m. 28.5-29.
For the purification of borneol and its separation from isoborneol, Pickard and
Littlebury suggested this convenient method:
Digest the mixture with zinc chloride in benzene solution. The isoborneol will be
dehydrated to camphene and is removed. Purify the borneol through its crystalline
acid phthalate.
Yamada and Yamada 16
recommended as the best method of separating borneol
from isoborneol, that the mixtures of these alcohols be esterified with 4 mols of phthalic
anhydride at 80-85 for 25 hr. Ikeda and Fujita 17 report that pure borneol is ob-
tained after processing with phthalic anhydride by extracting the reaction mixture with
petroleum ether in which the phthalic acid ester is insoluble. Then dissolve the
insoluble part in sodium hydroxide and steam distill. Melting point of d- or /-bornyl
acid phthalate: 164.5-165.5 (corr.).
18
Ross and Somerville 19 found that the
racemic mixture depressed the melting point of the active form only a few degrees.
Several other methods have been suggested for this purpose. The reader will find
literature references to a few of these at the end of this chapter, and others will be
indicated in the section on derivatives as space does not permit considering all of them.
Identification. Borneol can be characterized in many ways, the simplest being
by fractionating the oil and cooling the fraction b. 205-215. The active borneol
will, in most cases, separate in the form of crystals m. 203-204.
Frequently it will be necessary to identify borneol by the preparation of derivatives

(many of which are described in the literature) ;
it is, however, exceptional to find the
properties of the same derivative pertaining to every single and individual stereoisomer
of borneol. For this reason the bornoxy acetates, fumurates, tartrates, malonates
and glucosides are generally of little practical use, although in isolated cases of certain
stereoisomers they offer good possibilities both for isolation and identification.
In many cases it may be sufficient to differentiate between borneols and isoborneols
in general, rather than to identify a particular stereoisomer within the groups. For
this purpose quite a number of derivatives are available, but often their melting points
are too close to be of much practical help. In this group belong the phenyl urethanes,
the a-naphthyl urethanes, the acid phthalates, succinates, oxalates and formates.
Among the derivatives whose characteristics are both known and possess a wide
melting point differential, those offering the most promise to distinguish isomers in
both the borneol and isoborneol series are the nitrobenzoates, a number of which were
20
recently reported by Htickel et al., also Asahina, Ishidate and Sano, 21 and the a-
22
naphthylamine addition products by Bredt-Savelsberg and Bund.
Borneol Isoborneol
Active Inactive Active Inactive
ra-dinitrobenzoate 154 trans ... 138

155 CM
p-nitrobenzoate 130 2
... 120 20
131M32 2
3,5-dinitrobenzoate 156-157 ao ... 139 20

132-133 20
a-naphthylamine
addition product
of 3,5-dinitro-
benzoate 140.5 22
... 148 "
For purposes of identification and differentiation, the reaction of borneol and iso-
borneol with nitric acid (d 1.4 free from NC>2) may be used. The former yields cam-
phor, the latter a liquid reaction mixture.
Differentiation of borneol and isoborneol may be simplified by the fact that bornyl
derivatives are, in general, less soluble than the isobornyl derivatives.
In order to distinguish between borneol, isoborneol, and camphene hydrate, Aschan 23
suggested dissolving the alcohols in acetic acid, adding sulfuric acid (50%), and boiling
the solution for a few seconds. On cooling, the borneol crystallizes unchanged, whereas
the isoborneol solution becomes milky at 10 and clarifies at 18 to 20. The camphene
hydrate solution yields two layers because camphene hydrate is rapidly dehydrated to
camphene.
242 ALCOHOLS
When the worker isconcerned only with d-, I- or <f/-borneol, several specific reactions
and derivatives are important the d- tartrates should be very useful in this case, as
they yield individual properties for each form; however, they are not quickly prepared.
The fumarates and malonates are likewise solid derivatives that have been prepared
for the d-) /- and d/-borneols by Abbot and co-workers ." who
reported these
melting points:
d I dl
Monobornyl d- tartrate 2
130.5-131.5 157.5-158.5 140-145
Monobornyl malonate 2 65-66 65-66 7l-72
26
Dibornyl fumarate 106-107 106 131
With Beckmann's chromic acid mixture, borneol is oxidized to camphor which may
be characterized by the preparation of its oxime m. 118-119.
On acetylation, d- or /-borneol yields d- or /-bornyl acetate m. 29. The optically
inactive esters are liquid.
With chloral or bromal, borneoi forms addition products, according to Haller 27
and Minguin. 28 The chloral addition compound of d-, /-, or d/-borneol melts at 55-
28
56; 27 the bromal compound of d- or /-borneol at 105-109, and that of (//-borneol
at 79-82. 28 Bertram and Walbaum 29 reported a melting point of 98-99 for the
bromal compound prepared from "ordinary" borneol, and 71-72 for that of iso-
borneol.
About the quantitative determination of borneol, see Vol. I, Chapter 4, "The
Examination and Analysis of Essential Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates," p. 276.
Properties. Borneol crystallizes (petroleum ether) in the form of hexagonal

leaflets or plates. Its odor is camphor-like, but sharper.
The following properties have been found characteristic of this alcohol in
30 31
early as well as recent investigations by Pelouze, Yamada, Clark and
32 33 34 35>36>37 Pickard and
Read, Asahina, Ishidate and Sano, Beckmann, Haller,
Littlebury,
38
Keffler and Guthrie, 39 Ross and Somerville, 40 Bertram and Wal-
41 42
baum, and von Sobbe:
d-Borneol l-Borneol
31 - 32 > 42 34
m. 204-205 204
40
206.5
33
204 (trans)
33
278 (CM)
30 41
b. 212 '
212
40
207.2
MD +37 22' to +37 55' 34 35 38

[]g -38 7' 39
35
MD +37 6' to +37 19' 36 40 -
MD -37 46'
[a]}? +38 6'

31
(CM) (ale.) [a]^
15
-37 50' 37
(c
= 7.7
in toluene)
MD +38 26' 81
(CM) (benz.) Mo'
5
-37 30' 40
(c
= 8, in
toluene)
The borneol contained in essential oils is usually more or less racemized.

The melting point of the racemic form has been found by Haller 43 as 210.3,
whereas that for the d- and forms has been recorded by several workers in
/-
the range 206-208. However, this figure is not at the same time associated
with optima in optical properties and there exists some reason to believe, ac-
44
cording to McKenzie, that d-borneol and Z-isoborneol form solid solutions
a fact which may account for observed variations.
Borneolvery readily oxidized to camphor for example, by distillation
is
over copper oxide, or by the action of chlorine either in presence or absence

of water.
Against dehydrating agents such as zinc chloride or dilute sulfuric acid,

borneol is quite stable and thereby differs from isoborneol.
Although a saturated alcohol, borneol forms loose addition compounds
with bromine and hydrogen halides which, however, are not suitable for its
identification. With hydrogen halides, as well as with phosphorus halides,
the corresponding borneol lialides can be obtained, but it is better to prepare
them from a-pinene. Thus, bornyl chloride may be prepared easily by treat-
ing a-pinene, dissolved in chloroform, with hydrogen chloride at 0. With
.sodium, borneol yields the corresponding sodium derivative.
Use. Borneol is used for the scenting of all kinds of technical preparations.
Much more important, however, arc its esters, particularly bornyl acetate,
which, due to its typical pine needle odor, serves widely for the perfuming of
soaps, bath preparations, inhalants, room sprays, etc. Some bornyl esters
are employed in medicinal preparations.
1
Ber. 53 (1920), 1821; 66 (1922), 2506.
2
Bull soc. chim. [4] 39 (1926), 925.
3
Liebigs Ann. 477 (1930), 157. Nachr. Akad. Wiss. Cottingen Math, physik. Klasse (1941),
59. Chem. Zentr. I (1942), 2007.
4
Ibid. 480 (1930), 298.
6
Ber. 68 (1935), 555.
Liebigs Ann. 622 (1936), 137.
8
7
Ber. 69 (1936), 343.
8
/. Gen. Chem. U.S.S.R. 7 (1937), 415.
9
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 69 (1937), 820.
10
Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan 16 (1941), 187. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 759.
11
Compt. rend. 108 (1889), 1308.
12
Gildemeister & Hoffmann, "Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 480.
13
/. prakt. Chem. II, 49 (1894), 8. See also Hesse, Ber. 39 (1906), 1144.
14
/. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 36 (1904), 1035. See also Pickard and Littlebury, J. Chem.
Soc. 91 (1907), 1973.
15
/. Chem. Soc. 91 (1907), 1973.
16
17
Bull. Inst. Phys. Chem. Research Tokyo 7 (1928), 257. Chem. Abstracts 22 (1928), 3406.
18
Vavon and Peignier, Bull. soc. chim. [4], 39 (1926), 937.
J. Chem. Soc. (1926), 2770.
Liebigs Ann. 649 (1941), 186 (Brit. Chem. Phys. Abstracts (1942), A II, 201); 650 (1942),
20
269.
Ber. 69 (1936), 343.
244 ALCOHOLS
22
J. prakt. Chem. 131 (1931), 45.
*
Liebigs Ann. 410 (1915), 238.
* Ber. 71B (1938), 16.
25
Ber. 71B
(1938), 9.
*J. Chem. Soc. 91 (1907), 1225. Ber. 70 (1937), 163.
*
Compt. rend. 112 (1891), 145.
*Ibid. 116 (1893), 889.
29
/. prafa. Ctero. [2], 49 (1894), 5.
30
Compt. rend. 11 (1840), 366.
a Buff. C/tem. Soc. /apan 16 (1941), 187. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 759.
32
/. CAm. oc. (1934), 1773.
33
Ber. 69B(1936), 343.
34
Liebigs Ann. 250 (1889), 353. J. prakt. Chem. [2], 65 (1897), 33.
36
CompJ. rend. 109 (1889), 30.
36
Ann. chim. phys. [6], 27 (1892), 395.
*
Compt. rend. 112 (1891), 143. Ann. chim. phys. [6], 27 (1892), 425.
38
/. Chem. Soc. 91 (1907), 1973.
89
/. /%. CAero. 31 (1927), 58.
40
/. Chem. Soc. (1926), 2773.
/. prafa. CAem. [2], 49 (1894), 3, 15.
Ibid. [2], 77 (1908), 511.
43
Compt. rend. 105 (1887), 66.
44
/. Chem. Soc. 91 (1907), 1225.
C. Neuberg, K. P. Jacobson and J. Wagner, "Formation and Cleavage of Glucosides

as a Method for the Chemical and Biochemical Separation of Racemic Alcohols into
Their Optically Active Forms," Fermentforschung 10 (1929), 491. Chem. Abstracts 23
(1929), 4207.
P. P. Shoruigin and Ya. Makarov-Zemlyanskii, "Tribornyl Borate and Its Use in
Separation of Borneol from Camphor," /. Russ. Phys.-Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 2047.
T. S. Patterson, Janet H. Blackwood and J.McWhinnie Stewart, "Depression of the
Melting Point of r-Isoborneol, /-Borneol and d-Camphor Oxime by Various Sub-
stances," J. Chem. Soc. (1933), 93. Chem. Abstracts 27 (1933), 1625.
K. Alder and G. Stein, "tlber den sterischen Verlauf von Additions und Substitu-
tions-reaktionen. Zur Stereochemie der Dien-Synthesc. tJber endo-exo-Isomerie,"
Liebigs Ann. 614 (1934), 197, 211.
Baji Vinajak Thosar and Bawa Kartar Singh, "Raman Spectra of d-, /- and dl-
Forms of Borneol and Camphor," Proc. Indian Acad. Sci. 6A (1937), 105. Chem.
Abstracts 32 (1938), 48.
B. P. Osanov and A. Zarakovskaya, "Methods for analyzing camphor," Leso-
I.
khimicheskaya Prom. 1939, No. 12, 27. Khim. Referat. Zhur. No. 5, (1940), 79. Chem.
Abstracts 36 (1942), 3749.
Seiichi Yamada, "Camphor, borneol, and allied substances," Bull. Chem. Soc.
Japan 16 (1941), 336. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 4474.

Y. R. Naves, "Volatile Plant Substances. Application of Selective Formylation of
Borneol, 3-Octanol and Benzyl Alcohol in the Presence of Linalool and Its Esters in
the Analysis of Essential Oils," Helv. Chim. Acta 27 (1944), 942 (in French). Chem.
Abstracts 39 (1945), 1017,
v
Isoborneol
Mol. Weight 154.24
CHa
Occurrence. Isoborneol (see "Borneol") does not occur in nature. How-

ever, as it appears in so many reactions associated with its naturally occurring
and important isomer, viz., borneol, consideration must, therefore, be given
to this hydroxy terpene.
Isolation and Identification. Regarding the isolation and identification of isoborneol,

see "Borneol."
Besides those compounds cited in connection with borneol that are primarily of use
to differentiate between the stereoisomers borneol vs. isoborneol, two additional
derivatives may be mentioned that are of limited use only and are to be recommended
when borneol is not present in substantial quantities.
Isoborrujl Acid Phthalates
(Pickard and Littlebury ')
Isomer m. []D
dl 168
+ 76
'
d 167 53'
I 167 -76 5(5'
Isoborn yl-l-menthylcarbam ate

Isomer m. [O]D
dl 120 -55 48'
d 128
I 118
Properties. The properties shown

below have been re- in the tabulation
ported by Pickard and Littlebury, Kenyon and Pickard, Vavon and Peign-
2 3
4 6 6
ier, Haller, Bertram and Walbaum, Kondakov,
7
Henderson and Heilbron, 8
9 10
Peignier, and Yamada:
d I dl
B - 10
m. ... 212-213 (sealed tube) 212 6- 7
(sealed tube)
2 2
(214) (214)
8 8
(217) (217)
9
(218) (corr.)
+34 15' 2
-34 25' 10
(ale.)
+33 53' 3
-34 20' 2
578 -34 0' 4

(c = 0.05 in abs. ale.)
246 ALCOHOLS
Particular attention should be given to selection of the solvent when meas-
urement of [O\D is being made, as Peignier u has cited the fact that values
ranging from 39 42' to 20 18' have been obtained for laevo-isoborneol
12
in various organic solvents, whereas Haller found 33 32' to 18 57'.
l3
Kenyon and Pickard obtained similar results for dextro-isoborneol, record-
14
ing +33 53' to +20 20'; Pickard and Littlebury reported +34 2' to
+21 19'.
Some
variation has also been observed in the melting point of the active
isomers of isoborneol which has been reported ranging from 212-218.
However, these variations may be due in part to the rate of heating as this
product readily sublimes and it is necessary to determine the melting point
in a sealed tube to obtain uniform results.
The treatment of camphenc with a mixture of sulfuric acid (50 per cent)
and glacial acetic acid, according to the method of Bertram and Walbaum, 15
yields isobornyl acetate which on hydrolysis gives an almost completely
racemizcd rfMsoborneol. Most general methods employed for the prepara-
tion of borneol yield also some isoborneol. Borneol and isoborneol resemble
one another in regard to their general reactions, but isoborneol is more easily
dehydrated to camphene. On oxidation by the action of air, or by oxygen
in the presence of catalysts, or by ozone, nitrogen oxides, nitric acid or potas-
16
sium permanganate, d-isoborneol gives /-camphor, whereas Z-isoborneol
yields d-camphor. When distilled over copper oxide, isoborneol is not oxidized
to camphor and thereby differs from borneol.
Use. The esters of isoborneol, especially the acetate, have attained great
technical importance, being used in cosmetic and bath preparations, in room
sprays, and for the scenting of soaps. They possess a characteristic odor of
pine needles.
i
J. Chem. Soc. 91 (1907), 1978.
*Ibid., 1975, 1980.
8
Ibid. 107 (1915), 59.
4
Compt. rend. 181 (1925), 184. Bull. soc. chim. [4],39 (1926), 927.
6
6
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 49 (1894), 2.
7
Ibid. 66 (1902), 227.
[2],
8
Proc. Chem. Soc. 29 (1913), 381.
9
Thesis (1926). Parfums France 4 (1926), 196.
Nancy
1
Bull Chem. Soc. Japan 16 (1941), 187. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 759.
11
Thesis Nancy (1926). Parfums France 4 (1926), 196.
i3
Chem. Soc. 107 (1915), 59.
/.
"Ibid. 91 (1907), 1978.
i6
/. prakt. Chem. II, 49 (1914), 1.
16 In
certain literature, dextrorotatory isoborneol is defined as Z-isoborneol, and laevo-
isoborneol as d-isoborneol. This results from the fact that the derived camphors of active
isoborneols are opposite in sign. Publications are inconsistent in their nomenclature on
this point. Heilbron and Beilstein maintain the anomaly, whereas the International
Critical Tables do not.
E. Puxeddu, "The Constitution of Isoborneol," Gazz. chim. ital. 69 (1929), 59. Chem.
Abstracts 23 (1929), 3668.
Ossian Aschan, "Studies in the Reactions Involved in the Formation of Synthetic
Camphor," Finska Kemistsamfundets Medd. 38 (1929), 94. Chem. Abstracts 24 (1930),
1636.
Tsutomu Kuwata and Shizuka Tategai, "Catalytic Action of Silica Gel in the Re-
action of Camphene and Oxalic Acid. A Synthesis of Isoborneol," J. 8oc. Chem. Ind.
Japan 35, Suppl. binding 303, (1932). Chem. Abstracts 26 (1932), 5552.
Karl Stephen, "Esters of Isoborneol," German Patent No. 580,514, July 13, 1933.
Camphene Hydrate
Mol. Weight 154.24
H
H*
Occurrence. Camphene hydrate does not occur in nature but is an inter-

mediate product in the hydration of camphene to isoborneol and borneol, a
1
fact proved by Aschan.
This hydrated terpene has been conveniently isolated by treating

Isolation.
camphene hydrochloride with milk of lime. By this same operation, bornyi chloride
and isoborriyl chloride, too, yield camphene hydrate.
Identification. Camphene hydrate forms several characteristic derivatives; the
most useful are apparently the benzoates. Meerweiii et al.
2
report the m-nitro-
benzoate as melting at 86-86.5. Hiickel et al. 3 characterized the p-nitro compound
as m. 96, 54' in ethyl alcohol; the p-benzarnidobenzoate, m. 129, [a]
[Q;]D 24
12 48' in benzene; the 3,5-dinitrobenzoate as m. 112, [a]o 24 54' in absolute
alcohol. Aschan prepared the phenylurethane m. 89. Moreover, camphene hydrate
4
can be readily dehydrated; camphene is thus regenerated. This hydrocarbon lends

itself to rather easy characterization. Dehydration may be effected by shaking
camphene hydrate with warm dilute mineral acids, by boiling in glacial acetic acid,
in some cases even by mere distillation.
Camphene hydrate is a hard, crystalline mass which, accord-

Properties.
ing to Aschan and German patent No. 2 19,243, after sublimation melts at
B 6
149M51 b. 204-207.5, [] D -21 48'. 6 Its odor is menthol-like with a

,
musty note. An
has been reported by Meerwein and van Emster. 7
isolate
Use. Camphene hydrate, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Medd. Vetenskapsakad. Nobelinst. 6, No. 8 (1919), 19.
2
Liebigs Ann. 453 (1927), 16.
3
Ibid., 549 (1941), 186.
248 ALCOHOLS
4
410 (1915), 222.
Ibid.,
6
Liebigs Ann, 383 (1911), 18, 37.
6
Chem. Zentr. I (1910), 1074. Friedlanders Fortschritte der Teerfarbenfabrikation (Berlin)
9, 1140.
*Ber. 63 (1920), 1822.
J. Bredt, "Cis- and as-Jrcws-Camphenehydrate-meso-carboxylic Acid and the

Racemic o- and p-Isoborneolcarboxylic Acids," J. prakt. Chem. 131 (1931), 137. Chem.
Abstracts 26 (1931), 5156.
Thujyl Alcohol
(Tanacetyl Alcohol)
Mol. Weight 154.24
JH H
X
HC V-OH
CH 3
Thujyl alcohol can exist theoretically in eight optically active and four ex-
ternally compensated modifications. The naturally occurring alcohol con-
sists of a mixture of stereoisomers which differ in their physical properties.
Some of them have been isolated by Paolini and collaborators, and by Tschu- 1
2 3
gaev and Fomin. However, Short and Read, realizing the lability and
existence of dynamic equilibria in the thujonc series, from which these alco-
hols are primarily derived, devised new methods for the preparation of the
firstoptically homogeneous thujyl alcohols and applied a scheme of nomen-
clature to these isomers, patterned along lines of the menthol-isomenthol
4
series.
Occurrence. This bicyclic secondary alcohol occurs in the free state (about
10 per cent) and as ester (about 14 per cent) in oil of wormwood (Artemisia
absinthium L.), furthermore in oil of Thuja plicata and Artemisia camphorata
(about 40 per cent as free alcohol, and about 12 per cent in ester form).
Huzita 8 reported the presence of thujyl alcohol in the orthodon oils, and
Covello 6 found 21.77 per cent free and 5.95 per cent combined alcohol in
Artemisia verlotorum Lamotte.
Isolation. According to Schimmel & Co.,

7
thujyl alcohol can be isolated, from
wormwood oil, by first from thujone by treatment with
freeing the oil bisulfite solu-
tion, then saponifying, and repeatedly fractionating the remaining oil.

Paolini, and Tschugaev and Fomin found the acid phthalates to be very effective
8 9
agents for the purification of the isomeric thujyl alcohols; they also recommended the
strychnine and chinchonine salts of this acid ester.
For the preparation of optically homogeneous samples Read and Short
fractionally
10
crystallized either the p-nitrobenzoates or the 3,5-dinitrobenzoates of the alcohols.

Short and Read u found that
Identification. optically homogeneous samples of
Z-thujyl alcohol and d-isothujyl alcohol, obtained either from the hydrogenated a-
thujone in thuja oil or from /3-thujone in tansy oil, yielded the following characteristic
derivatives :
Isomers of Thujyl Alcohol
Derivative I d-iso
p-Nitrobenzoate m. 101 m. 78
5
[a]L -32 15' [a]{? +107 0'
(c
= 2 in CHC1 3 ) (c = 1 in CHC1 3 )
3,5-Dinitrobenzoate .m. 106 m. 92
7
[a]}? -24 30' 1
[a], , +96 45'
(c
= 2 in CHC1 3 ) (c
= 2 in CHC1 3 )
Oxidation of /-thujyl alcohol yields /-thujone (a-thujone) bg 74.5, a}? 19 56';
while a similar reaction with d-isothujyl alcohol gives d-isothujone (0-thujone) bio
76, D 4-72 27'. These ketones yield 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazones melting respec-
tively at 186-188 and 116. The acid phthalate of a relatively pure cMsothujyl
alcohol melts at 120, according to Paolini. 12
Properties. The fractions of essential oils described as thujyl alcohol arc
syrupy oils with an odor similar to that of carvomenthol. As pointed out,

natural thujyl alcohol is regarded as a mixture of stereoisomeric forms, the
fractions (from thuja and French wormwood oil) possessing this range of
13
properties, according to Paolini and Divizia, and Rose and Livingston: 14
b. 208~210 12
WD 5
+22 20' 12
13 13
b 757 210-220 [afe +2948'
12 5 13
d 0.938 no 1.40207
13 6 12
d 25 0.9266 n}> 1.4791
Due to the presence of the cyclopropane ring, the molecular refraction of

thujyl alcohol shows marked exaltation (-f-0.62).
The stereochemically homogeneous samples of Short and Read 16 are re-
ported as follows:
d-Isothujyl alcohol, a sweet smelling, syrupy liquid obtained by hydrogen-
ating a- or /3-thujones with sodium and alcohol, and purified through the 3,5-
dinitrobenzoate, had these properties:
bi 6 103
4
{> +106 42'
1.4627
250 ALCOHOLS
16
The same was obtained
alcohol in the course of investigations by Paolini,
and Tschugaev and Fomin: 17
b. 206 " (regenerated from the [a] D + 1 14 40' 16
acid phthalate) WD +116 56' 16
16 6
df 0.9187 n{> 1.4625
l-Thujyl alcohol, derived from catalytic hydrogenation of a-thujone and

purified by the p-nitrobenzoate, is reported as:
m. 66-67
6
[a]L -20 30' (c = 1 in methyl alcohol)
5
[a]}, -22 30' (c = 1 in ethyl alcohol)
Thujyl alcohol a quite stable substance. Unlike thujone, it does not

is
undergo isomerization on heating. Due to the tendency for hydrocarbon

formation, esterification of thujyl alcohol does not take place smoothly.
Nevertheless, a few esters have been described.
Use. Thujyl alcohol, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Alii accad. Lined [5], 20 (1911), I, 765, 769; [5], 21 (1912), I, 570. Gazz. chim. ital. 42
I (1912), 41.
2
Ber. 45 (1912), 1293.
3
J. Chem. Soc. (1938), 2016.
4
Synonyms in nomenclature of thujyl alcohols:
Z-thujyl-alcohol Z-tanacetyl-alcohol a-thujyl-alcohol

d-isothujyl-alcohol d-tanacetyl-alcohol /0-thujyl-alcohol
7-thujyl-alcohol
5-thujyl-alcohol
6
Bull. orto. botan. univ. Napoli [2], 15 (1941), 61-71. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 4855.
7
*Atti accad. Lincei [5], 20 (1911), I, 765, 769; [5], 21 (1912), I, 570. Gazz. chim. ital. 42,
I (1912), 41.
9
Ber. 46 (1912), 1293.
10
/. Chem. Soc. (1938), 2016.
11
Ibid., 2019.
12
Atti accad. Lincei [5], 20 (191 1), I, 769.
/6ia. [51,21 (1912), I, 571.
14
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 34 (1912), 202.
16
/. Chem. Soc. (1938), 2019.
16
Atti accad. Lincei [5], 20 (1911), I, 765.
Ber. 45 (1912), 1293.
Fenchyl Alcohol
(Fenchol)
Mol. Weight 154.24
2-Fenchanol
CHa
* I *
HaC C OH
H 2
HC 2
The fenchols are readily formed by hydrogenation of fenchone. However,

because of the configuration of the fenchone molecule, reduction of the opti-
cally active fenchones may theoretically result in two types of fenchols, differ-
ing in regard to the spatial arrangement of the hydroxyl group. Thus, two
series of alcohols, now described 1>2
as a- and 0-fenchols, should arise. In such
a bicyclic molecule these geometric isomers are related as an "exo" and "endo"
type of structure, the question of spatial arrangement of the hydroxyl group
being still a problem awaiting final decision.
CHa OH
CH3
H OH
CH 3 CHa
"Kxo"' structure "Endo" structure
The presence of the asymmetric carbons allows for a d- }

I- and dl- form in
both the a- and ($- series.
3
It was primarily the work Kenyon and
Priston, and Schmidt and
of
Schulz 4 that accomplished the complete separation of these stereoisomers.
8
Kenyon and Priston reduced optically active fenchone with sodium and
alcohol a method originally employed by Wallach 6 and obtained a mixture
of stereoisomeric fenchols. This procedure, however, yields fenchols primarily
of the a-series. Taking advantage of the lesser solubility of the a-phthalates
and of the /3-p-nitrobenzoates, these authors succeeded in separating the
l-a- and Schimmel & Co. reduced the fenchones catalytically,
/3-fenchols.
using a nickel catalyst, and obtained principally the labile /3-isomers. Later,
Hiickel, Kindler and Wolowski refined this method and confirmed much of
7
the earlier data on the optically active fenchols.

252 ALCOHOLS
According to Schimmel & Co., Komppa and Beckmann,
8 9
Occurrence.
Zeitschel and Todenhofer, 10 and Humphrey, 11 d/-a-fenchyl alcohol occurs in
the oil distilled from old roots of Pinus palustris (yellow pine oil).
A fenchyl alcohol has also been reported by Spoelstra
12
in the essential
oil distilled from Baeckea frutescens L. and Dalbergia parviflora Roxb., and
13
by Lobo
*
in Spanish fennel oil.
Isolation. The fraction b. 197-204 of yellow pine oil is treated with phthalic
anhydride and the acid phthalate saponified with an alcoholic solution of potassium
hydroxide.
Nametkin,
14
and Schimmel &
Co. 16 suggested a preliminary treatment of fenchol-
containing fractions with phthalic acid in order to remove any contaminating tertiary
alcohols. Patented processes 16 recommend iodine, Fuller's earth, or activated car-
bon for the same purpose. After the treatment of the fenchol-containing fraction
with phthalic anhydride, the acid phthalate is purified in alcohol, and the pure fenchol
may be obtained by hydrolysis of the acid ester.
"
Hunger purified the alcohol by esterifi cation of fenchol fractions with the calcu-
lated amount of boric acid, by and hydrolysis.
recrystallization,
Identification. Fenchyl alcohol can be characterized by the preparation of several
derivatives, but the most complete data on isomers of known type is that gathered on
the fenchyl phenylurethanes and acid phthalates by Schimmel & Co. 18
The derivatives shown in the table below have been reported by Schmidt and
Schulz, Kenyon and Priston, Komppa and Beckmann, Zeitschei and Todenhofer,
19 20 21 22
24 26
Nametkin, Imoto, Quist, and Huckel, Kindler and Wolowski:
23 2
(See p. 253.)
Properties. dl-Fenchyl akohol, a solid at room temperature, possesses a

peculiar, musty odor. The product as isolated relatively pure from yellow
27
pine oil by Zeitschel and Todenhofer had these properties:
m. 38-39
b 770 201.4
WD -0 12'
These, in a large measure, confirm those recorded earlier by Gildemeister and

Hoffmann. 28
Studying the stereoisomery Schmidt and Schulz 29 re-
of fenchyl alcohol,
ported properties for the various isomers of fenchol. (See p. 254.) These
30
figures confirm earlier findings of Nametkin on a sample of very pure
Z-a-fenchol and those of Kenyon and Priston 31 on the l-a- and /3- alcohols, and
32
agree well with later observations by Huckel, Kindler and Wolowski on
very pure 2-0-fenchol. Schmidt and Schulz noted a marked difference hi the
odor of the stereoisomers. The a-fenchols possess a marked camphoraceous
odor, whereas the /?- isomers display a musty and mouldy smell.
On oxidation with chromic or nitric acid, fenchyl alcohol yields fenchone.
Use. Fenchyl alcohol is used as an odor adjunct primarily in low priced
technical preparations, soaps, bath salts, and room sprays of pine character.
254 ALCOHOLS
a .2
*"
o bO
1
Komppa and Roschier, Ann. Acad. Sci. Fennicae [A], 7 (1915), 1. Chem. Abstracts 11
(1917), 3041.
2
Schimmel & Co. (1935), 97.
Ber.
*J. Chem. Soc. 127 (1925), 1472.
4
6
J. Chem. Soc. 127 (1925), 1472.
Liebigs Ann. 263 (1891), 143; 272 (1893), 104.
7
Ber. 77B (1944), 220. Chem. Abstracts 39 (1945), 3273.
8
9
Ber. 68 (1935), 10.
10
J. prakt. Chem. 133 (1932), 374.
11
Trans. Inst. Chem. Eng. 9 (1931), 40.
n Rec. trav. chim. 60 433.
(1931),
13
Ion 3 (1943), 410.
14
J. prakt. Chem. N.F. 106 (1923), 28.
15
16
See U. S. Patent No. 1,887,171, Nov. 8, 1933, L. T. Smith to Hercules Powder Co.;
U. S. Patent No. 1,932,183, Oct. 24, 1934, I. W. Humphrey to Hercules Powder Co.
17
Seifensieder Ztg. 67 (1940), 377.
18
19
Ibid.
20
/. Chem. Soc. 127 (1925), 1472.
21
Ber. 68B (1935), 10.
22
/. prakt. Chem. 133 (1932), 374.
23
Ibid. 106 (1923), 25.
24
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. Japan 41, Suppl. binding 211, 1938. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 7438.
25
Liebigs Ann. 417 (1918), 295.
26
Ber. 77B (1944), 220.
27
Chem. 133 (1932), 374.
/. prakt.
28
"Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 484. See also Wallach, Liebigs Ann. 272 (1893),
107.
29
30
J. prakt. Chem. N.F. 106 (1923), 25.
31
/. Chem. Soc. 127 (1925), 1472.
32
Ber. 77B (1944), 220.
Walter Hiickel and Heinz Wolowski, "Transformation of a-Fenchylamine with

Nitrous Acid," Ber. 80 (1947), 39. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 3077.
Isofenchyl Alcohol
(Isofenchol)
CHa
HO<
i
.i
|
^CHa
H
Occurrence. This alcohol has not been found in nature.
256 ALCOHOLS
Isolation. Bertram and Helle 1
prepared the /- form by hydrating J-a-fenchene
with sulfuric-acetic acid mixture. Wallach 2 obtained the d- form by hydrating d-a-
fenchene and Z-/3-fenchene.
Alder, Stein and Richert, and Schmidt and Todenhofer accurately
3 4
Identification.
characterized this terpene alcohol by several isomeric derivatives, a number of which
are summarized in the following table recording melting points:
/ d dl
Phenylurethane 106-107 *
liquid 03) 94-95 4
3
101 08)
Acid Phthalate 149-150 4
155-156 (a)
4
80 03)
*
104-105 (J3)
3
4
Benzoate 70 (a) liquid (J8)
4
67 4
a-Naphthylurethane 114 (a)

4
126 (0)
4
Properties. The racemic isomer has been prepared by Aschan from cy- 5
clofenchene, and the l-a- and 0- forms have been studied by Schmidt and
6
Todenhofer. Investigating the stereoisomerism of optically active isofenchyl
alcohol, Schmidt and Todenhofer confirmed in a large measure certain earlier
findings of Bertram and Helle, 7 Wallach and Vivck, 8 Qvist 9 and Nametkin
10 n characterized the dl-
et al. Alder, Stein and Rickert products obtained
from catalytic reduction of isofenchone. The constants recorded by some of
these workers are tabularly summarized herewith:
Property I d dl
6
m. 61-62 (a) 8 (0)
6
42-43 6
6
b. 202-203
6 8
b 755 200-201 (a) 196-197 (0)
b 15 89 08)
6
d? 0.9533
6
dlJ 0.952 08)
D -25 0' (a)

6
+1425'(/3)
6
[a] D -26 10
'
(a)
6
+15 20' (0) 6
(10% ale.) (10% ale.)

6
nf? 1.47556
6 6
n{? 1.48005 (a) 1.47259 (0)
Use. Isofenchyl alcohol, as such, is not used in our industries.

1
J. prakt. Chern. II, 61 (1900), 300.
*Liebigs Ann. 367 (1907), 56; 363 (1908), 5.
*Liebigs Ann. 625 (1936), 221.
4
Bar. Schimmel &
Co. (1937), 113. Cf. Aschan, Liebigs Ann. 387 (1912), 48.
*Liebigs Ann. 387 (1912), 43.
8
7
/. prakt.Chem. [2], 61 (1900), 300.
Liebigs Ann. 362 (1908), 192.
8
9
Ibid. 417 (1918), 313.
10
/. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 49 (1917), 423; 61 (1919), 153. /. prakt. Chem. [2], 106 (1923),
31. Chem. Zentr. Ill (1923), 756.
11
Liebigs Ann. 526 (1936), 221.
(c) TRICYCLIC TERPENE ALCOHOLS.
Teresantalol
C i0 H 16 Mol. Weight 152.23
H
H< V-
2
' CHaOH
C
\-
II
According to Schimmel
Occurrence. & Co.,
1
teresantalol occurs in East
Indian sandalwood oil.
Identification. The
literature does not suggest that this alcohol has yielded itself
any too readily to useful derivatives. Semmler and Bartelt 2 reported the acetate as:
b9_io 102-103 D +21 0'
d 20 1.019 HD 1.470
Both the d- and dl- isomer of this alcohol have been charac-
Properties.
terized. The racemic form has been studied by Asahina and Ishidate, 3 and
the active form by Semmler and Bartelt, 4 and by the Schimmel chemists: &
Property d dl
4 3
m. 113 118
6
b. 210-220
b 10 97-98 8
b9 95-98 4
+ 1158' 4
(inabs. ale.)
Use. Teresantalol is not used in our industries.
1
Ber. Schimmel & Co., Oct. (1910), 106; April (1911), 105.
2
Ber. 40 (1907), 3103.
3
Ber. 68 (1935), 952.
4
Ber. 40 (1907), 3103.
6
Ber. Schimmel & Co., Oct. (1910), 106; April (1911), 105.
258 ALCOHOLS
C. SESQUITERPENE ALCOHOLS
(a) ALIPHATIC SESQUITERPENE ALCOHOLS.
Farnesol
3,7,ll-Trimethyl-2,6,10-dodecatrien-l-ol
C=CH CH2 CH 2 C=CH CH 2 CH 2 C=CH CH OH

-
2
H3 C
or
3,7, 1 l-Trimethyl-2,6, 1 1-dodecatrien-l-ol
C CH2 CH 2 CH 2 C=CH CH2 CH2 C=CH CH OH 2
H2 C
This acyclic primary sesquiterpene alcohol containing three ethylenic link-
ages consists undoubtedly of a mixture of the two structural isomcrs pictured
above. According to Ruzicka, 1 each metamcr may be a mixture of four
theoretically possible stereoisomeric modifications so that farnesol could con-
sist ofeight isomeric alcohols. This may explain the fact that the various
farnesols isolated from different sources show considerable variations in their
physical properties.
Occurrence. Farnesol occurs in several volatile oils and in extracted flower
oils for example, oil of ambrette seed, neroli bigarade, rose, cananga, Cey-
lon citroriella, lemongrass, palmarosa, in Peru and tolu balsam oil, and the
flower oils of acacia, reseda, cyclamen, jasmine, etc.
Isolation. Farnesol can be isolated, for example, from ambrette seed oil as follows:
According to Harmann and Reinier, 2 the oil is fractionated in vacuo, the fraction
b2o 150-200 saponified, and treated with phthalic anhydride in benzene solution.
As a primary alcohol, farnesol forms an acid phthalate from which it can be regenerated
in pure form.
Identification. Farnesol may be characterized by oxidation with chromic acid to
H
farnesal Ci 6 2 4O, b J4 173-174, d w 0.893, n D 1.4991. Farnesal can be identified by
the preparation of its semicarbazone m. 133-135.
Lennartz 3 has recently prepared the 3-nitroorthophthalate m. 93-93.5 by long-
time boiling of the alcohol with 3-nitroorthophthalic acid in benzene solution.
Spath and Vierhapper 4
found the di-/3-naphthylurethane m. 70-71 suitable for
identification of farnesol.
SESQUITERPENE ALCOHOLS 259
Properties. Farncsol is a colorless, somewhat mobile oil with a pleasant

floral odor reminiscent of lily of the valley.
As pointed out, the properties of farnesol show variations and depend upon
its origin.
5
Illustrative figures reported by Kerschbaum, von Soden and Treff,
6
Schim-
mel & Co.,
7 8 9
Ruzicka, and Ruzicka and Firmeriich are:
5 8
bio 100 df 0.8908 (synthetic)
6 9
b4 149 df 0.8871
7 8
b 3 -4 140-141 df 0.8954
8 5
b .5 125 (synthetic) di 8 0.885
8 7
b .3 120 d}J 0.8934
9
b .2 110-113 d 15 0.894 6
9
1.4870
8
1.4877 (pure)
7
1.48991
8
1.4890 (synthetic)
8
1.4924
10
Lennartz reported these properties for a farnesol prepared by polymeriza-
tion of isoprene:
bo.02 106-112
5
df' 0.9004
5
i$- 1.4881
3-Nitrophthalate m. 93-93.5.
On 11
keeping for a long time, farnesol, according to Ruzicka, slowly decom-
8
poses, thereby forming a-farnesene, a colorless mobile oil bi 2 128-130, d^
0.8385, no 1.4965, which might be identical with sesquicitroncllene (see
"Scsquicitronellene") .
On oxidation with potassium permanganate, farnesol is completely de-

graded, acetone being formed.
Use. Farnesol is used in high-grade perfumes, especially in compositions
of floral type.
1
Helv. Chim. Ada 6 (1923), 495.
2
German Patent No. 149,603.
3
Ber. 76B (1943), 248, 831.
4
Ber. 71B (1938), 1672.
6
Ber. 46 (1913), 1732.
6
Ber. 37 (1908), 1095.
7
Ber. Schimmel &
Co., April (1914), 71.
8
Helv. Chim. Ada 6 (1923), 492, 497. 10
Ber. 76B (1943), 838.
9
Ibid. 22 (1939), 392. " Helv. Chim. Ada 6 (1923), 498.
260 ALCOHOLS
Y. R. Naves, "New Sources of Nerolidol and Farnesol," Perfumery Essential Oil

Record 38, No. 6 (1947), 191.
Nerolidol
3,7,ll-Trimethyl-l,6,10-dodecatrien-3-ol
H3C CH3 CH 3
C=CH CH2 CH2 C=CH CH CH C CH=CH2
-
2
-
2
H3 C OH
and
3,7,ll-Trimethyl-l,6,ll-dodecatrien-3-ol
H3 C CH3 CH8
C CH2 CH2 CH2 C=CH CH2 CH2 C CH==CH2
H2 C OH
This sesquiterpene alcohol may be viewed as the "linalool of the sesqui-
terpene series."
Occurrence. Nerolidol occurs in oil of nerolibigaradc, in balsam Peru oil,
in oil of ylang ylang and in several other volatile oils. Oil of cabreuva (prob-
ably Myrospermum erythroxylon Fr. Allem.) contains 75-80 per cent of nero-
lidol.
Isolation. In order to isolate nerolidol from balsam Peru oil, or from neroli bigarade
oil, Schimmel & Co. suggested saponifying the high boiling fractions of the oil with
1
alcoholic potassium, and fractionating in vacuo the sesquiterpene alcohols thus ob-
tained.
Divide 5 kg. of balsam Peru into three portions of 1 %
kg. each, and dissolve each
portion in 1.5 liters alcohol. Add to each portion 800 g. of a concentrated potassium
hydroxide solution (3 parts of potassium hydroxide in 2 parts of water), shake and
heat on a steam bath for several hours. Remove the ethyl alcohol by steam distilla-
tion, and extract the residue repeatedly with ether.
2
According to Ruzicka, this
treatment will yield altogether about 1 kg. of a brown oil which, on fractionation
bo.4 98-102, will give 94 g. of a fraction consisting of nerolidol.
Identification. d-Nerolidol can be characterized by the preparation of its phenyl-
urethane m. 37-38. According to Schimmel & Co., 3 this compound, however, is
formed only if the d-nerolidol is kept standing with phenylisocyanate for three to four
weeks.
dl-Nerolidol, on oxidation with chromic acid mixture, yields farnesal which, in turn,
is identified by the preparation of its semicarbazone, m. 133, according to Ruzicka. 4
Properties. a syrupy oil of a faint, agreeable floral note. The

Nerolidol is
following properties, reported by Hesse and Zeitschel, Ruzicka,

5 6 7
and Jones -
8
and Harvey, are characteristic of the isomeric forms whether chemically de-
rived or originating from neroli, Peru balsam or Melaleuca oil:
d I dl
6
b. 276-277
8
b3 110
b .2 96-98 6
... b .3 98-100 7
6
df 0.8778
8 7
d 15 . 5 0.8816 ... df 0.8788
5
<XD +1332'
+ 1336' 6
[a] D + 1530' 6
6
ng 1.4786
8
nf? 1.4795
7
... ... 1.4801
Use. Nerolidol is used in small quantities for the compounding of high-

grade perfume compositions.
1
Ber. Schimmel cfc Co., April (1914), 75.
2
Helv. Chirn. Ada 6 (1923), 483, 488, 492.
3
4
Helv. Chim. Ada 6 (1923), 483, 488, 492.
/. prakt. Chcm. [2], 66 (1902), 503.
9
Helv. Chim. Ada 6 (1923), 483, 501.
7
Ibid., 501.
Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland 47 (1936), 92. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 1957.

Y. R. Naves, "Etudes sur les matieres ve*g6tales volatiles. Presence de ne*rolidol dans
les huiles essentielles de papilionace'es," Helv. Chim. Ada 30 (1947), 275, 278.
Y. R. Naves, "New Sources of Nerolidol and Farnesol," Perfumery Essential Oil
Record 38, No. 6(1947), 191.
Y. R. Naves, "Presence de Nerolidol dans les huiles essentielles de papilionace'es,"
Helv. Chim. Ada 31 (1948), 408.
(b) MONOCYCLIC SESQUITERPENE ALCOHOLS.
Zingiberol
This sesquiterpene alcohol was isolated by Brooks from ginger root 1

oil.
Zingiberol bi 4 5 154-157 is apparently a derivative of zingiberene or

.
iso-
262 ALCOHOLS
zingibercne. On dehydration, zingiberol yields a hydrocarbon Ci 5 H 24 which,
in turn, gives zingiberene dihydrochloride (or isozingiberene dihydrochloride)
when treated with hydrogen chloride.
i
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 38 (1916), 430.
Elemol
CH
C CH 2 CIIc
HoC
/ \CH/ \C /H C/OH
H3C C CH CH
H,C CH
CHc
Occurrence. Elemol occurs in the high boiling fractions of Manila elemi

oil and Java citronella oil.
Isolation. By fractional distillation. The

alcohol can be purified according to
Ruzicka and Pfeiffer by benzoylation, fractionation of the benzoate at 0.25 mm.
1
pressure, and saponification of the benzoate.

Elemol may also be purified through its crystalline phenylurethane, but the alcohol
regenerated from it has a somewhat higher melting point than that obtained from the
benzoate (see Ruzicka and van Veen 2 ).
Doll and Nerdel 3 published directions for isolation of this alcohol by means of the
p-nitrobenzoate and the 3,5-dinitrobenzoate. Both were obtained in good yields
from the original oils. For the isolation of elemol from citronella oil, the alcohol was
first extracted from the elemol-containing fraction of the oil through the borate. Then
500 g. of the crude elemol thus obtained were dissolved in 2 liters of pyridene, treated
with 500 g. of p-nitrobenzoyl chloride, and allowed to stand for 24 hr. at room tem-
perature. The p-nitroberizoate of elemol, fractionally recrystallized from alcohol and
petroleum ether, melted at 74-76, [a] D -2 40' (in benzene), -7 48' (in chloroform).
The 3,5-dinitrobenzoate of elemol melted at 122-123, [a] D (in benzene),
- 10 0'
(in chloroform).
The elemol is regenerated from these compounds by boiling the nitrobenzoates for
30 min. with an excess of alkali in methyl alcohol.
Identification. Elemol can be characterized by the preparation of the nitrobenzoates
as described above or, according to Glichitch, 4 by the preparation of the phenyl-
urethane m. 112-113 .
Properties. When
purified through the phenylurethane, elemol has these
B
properties, according to Ruzicka and van Veen:
5
m. 51-52 d 0.9400
b 15 144-145 1.5042
6
Doll and Nerdel reported for elemol isolated and purified through the
nitrobenzoates:
m. 52 dg 0.922
133 HD -9 35' (in benzene)
[a] D -4 21' (in chloroform)
As a tertiary alcohol, elemol does not react with phthalic anhydride. On

dehydrogenation with selenium, elemol yields eudalene and some azulene.
Use. Elemol, as such, is not used in our industries, but the fractions of
oil of elemi and citronella containing elemol find considerable application in
the scenting of soaps and all kinds of technical products. Because of high
boiling points, these fractions act as odor fixatives.
1
Helv. Chim. Ada 9 (1920), 841. 4
2 5
Liebigs Ann. 476 (1929), 88. Licbig* Ann. 476 (1929), 88.
*Ber. Schimmd & Co. (1940), 46. 6
Ber. Schimtnel & Co. (1940), 46.
(c) BICYCLIC SESQUITERPENE ALCOHOLS.
Sesquibenihiol
Mol. Weight 220.34
CH;
HoC CIT 5
HC
2 C
H2 C CH CII C CII 2 OH
/
\C / \CH II
CH2
2
CH 2
Occurrence. In the volatile oil distilled from the root of Chamaccyparis
formosensis Matsum.
Isolation. repeated fractionation of the oil.
By
Identification. The ozonization product of sesquibenihiol, according to Katsura, 1 is a
monoketomonocarboxylic acid C^HigOs, the methyl ester of which yields a semi-
carbazone m. 235-237.
Properties. The same author reported these properties for sesquibenihiol:
b3 137 [] D +8 50'
df 0.9977 nD 1.5220
Use. Sesquibenihiol as such is not used in our industries.

1
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 63 (1942), 1460, 1465. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 3447.
264 ALCOHOLS
The Betulenols
(Betulol)
Von Soden and Elze l

first bud oil of Betula alba L.
isolated from the leaf
a bicyclic primary sesquiterpene alcohol containing two ethylenic linkages

which they named "betulol." The alcohol was also investigated by Semmler,
Jonas and Richter, 2 and by Schimmel & Co., but its constitution was not
3
4
determined. More recently Treibs showed that the volatile leaf bud oil of
Russian Betula lenta L. consists mainly of three closely related sesquiterpene
alcohols all of empirical formulas 16 H
2 40, which he designated a-, /?- and 7-
betulenol. The old term "betulol," according to Treibs, is now untenable,

as these alcohols more closely resemble a sesquiterpene Ci 5 H 2 4 that has been
found in birch bud oil and which is itself closely related to caryophyllene.
The term "betulenene" should be applied, according to Treibs, to the hydro-
carbon C 151X22 that has also been isolated from the Thus, these sesqui-
oil.
H
terpene alcohols Ci 5 2 40 from the C^H^ birch hydrocarbons then become
betulenols and those closely related to C^H^
should be named betulenenols.
The name "betulene" should be restricted for the Ci 5 24 product. H
Occurrence. The betulenols occur free and as esters in the volatile oil dis-
5
tilled from the leaf buds of the birch. Treibs found that this oil contains
16 per cent free, and 34 per cent esterified, betulenols.
Isolation. a- and /3-Betulenol readily form acid phthalates, but the 7- isomer does
not react with phthalic anhydride. a-Betulenol is most readily attacked; thus treat-
ment a betulenol mixture with an insufficient amount of phthalic anhydride for
of
complete esterification yields the a- derivative. A secondary reaction after removal

of the a- ester yields the acid phthalate of /3-betulenol and the 7- is isolated from the
oily residue. The sesquiterpene alcohols may be regenerated from the phthalates.
Identification. The betulenols can be characterized by their physical properties
and by the products of oxidation. On vigorous oxidation all three betulenols are
oxidized to the same monocyclic dicarboxylic acid CioHieC^, viz., betulenolic acid,
a viscous oil, which forms a dimethyl ester 020 140-145, dis 1.041, <*D +49 0', no
1.4506. Betulenolic acid identical with naturally derived homocaryophyllenic acid,
is
and may be characterized through conversion of its dimethyl ester into cis- and trans-
dianilides m. 180 and 279 (cf. Ramage and Simonsen 8
).
Properties. The physicochemical properties, especially the optical rota-

tion, of "betulol" reported by the earlier investigators differ considerably
from those recorded by Treibs. 7 These variations might have been due
either to different methods of working up the original birch bud oil, or to the
presence in varying proportions of several closely related compounds in the

so-called pure "betulol," a fact proved later by Treibs. 8 This author re-
ported for the betulenol isomers:
a-Betulenol 154-156 0.978 1.5148 -19 30'
/3-Betulenol 155-157 0.975 1.5132 -36 0'
7-Betulenol 157-158 0.969 1.5102 -19 30'
Use. Betulenol is not used in our industries.

1
Ber. 38 (1905), 1636.
2
Ber. 51 (1918), 417.
3
Ber. Schimmel &
Co. (1918), 8.
4
Ber. 69 (1936), 41; 71 (1938), 612.
6
Ibid.
6
/. Chem. Soc. (1937), 74.
7
Ber. 69 (1936), 41; 71 (1938), 612.
8
Ber. 71 (1938), 614.
The Santalols
Santalol, the main constituent of East Indian sandalwood oil, consists of a

mixture of two primary sesquiterpene alcohols, viz., a- and /3-santalol, the
a- form predominating. The santalols have been the subject of thorough
among them Semmler, Ruzicka, 2
1
investigations by prominent authorities,
Simonsen and collaborators. 3
Being primary alcohols, a- and /3-santalol react with phthalic anhydride
in benzene solution. The "santalol" resulting from the hydrolysis of the
acid phthalates, on fractional distillation, yields fractions with different ro-
tatory powers, but the a- and #-santalols cannot be completely separated by
ordinary distillation methods.
266 ALCOHOLS
a-Santalol
Mol. Weight 220.34

CH CH 3
CH 3
HC-
\^X
CH 2OH
CH 2
HC
2 CH 2
H
CH3 According to Semmler
4
or
JHs
CH3
CH CH CH
2 2 =C CH 2OH
HC 2
According to Ruzicka and Stoll
Occurrence. a-Santalol is the main constituent of East Indian sandalwood

oil; it has been observed also in West Australian sandalwood oil.
Isolation.In order to isolate the crude santalols (mixture of a- and /3-santalol),

6 kg. of sandalwood oil are mixed with a solution of 0.6 kg. of potassium hydroxide
(or the equivalent quantity of sodium hydroxide) in 2 kg. of 90% alcohol and heated
on the steam bath for 2 to 3 hr. The saponified oil is washed with water and repeatedly
fractionated in vacua.*
For further purification of the santalols (mixture of a- and 0-santalol), Schimmel
& 6
Co. suggested the following method:
Digest 100 g. of East Indian sandalwood oil, 100 g. of phthalic anhydride, and 100
g. of benzene for one hour on the steam bath at 80. Shake the acid esters thus
formed with a soda solution, and dissolve the alkali salt in a large quantity of water.
In order to remove the nonalcoholic constituents, extract the aqueous solution three
times with ether. Liberate the acid esters by acidification with dilute sulfuric acid
(a little more than theoretically required), separate and saponify with alcoholic
potassium. Purify the santalol thus liberated by washing with water in order to
remove any excess alkali and alcohol.
not possible to obtain a-santalol in pure form by ordinary fractional distillation,

It is
a-santalol boiling only about 10 lower than jS-santalol. However, Bradfield, Tenfold
and Simonsen 7 report the isolation of santalols of high purity through the use of a still
head of special design (see Bradfield 8 ), the progress of the separation being followed
by observation of the optical rotation and by oxidation with percamphoric acid (cf.
Milas and Cliff 9).
These authors discourage the use of the strychnine salts of the acid phthalates as
10 Their experience shows this method to be of
practiced by Paolini and Divizia.
little value, except in final purification, as mixed crystals are formed.
Tsukamoto and Ichibashi n suggested separating a- and /3-santalol by the following
method:
Boil a mixture of sandalwood ether and mercuric acetate solution for several
oil,
days. Isolate the mercuric compound of 0-santalol by the addition of sodium carbon-
ate or sodium chloride, purify the mercuric compound and regenerate /3-santaiol by
the action of hydrogen sulfide. The mercuric compound of a-santalol remains in the
ether layer. Decompose this compound with hydrogen sulfide and separate the
a-santalol.
a-Santalol can be characterized by several methods:

Identification.
(1) According to Semmler and Bode,
12
by oxidation with chromic acid to santal-
H
aldehyde (santalal) Ci 5 22 0, bio 152-155, d 20 0.995, a D +13 0', n D 1.51066. This
aldehyde may be identified by the preparation of its semicarbazone m. 230. (Schim-
mel & Co. 13 observed on several occasions m. 215-219.)
Allophanate m. 162-163, according to Bradfield, Penfold and Simonsen. 14
(a)
(b) Strychnine salt of the acid phthalate m. 144-145, [a] bm -5 37' (c
= 4.68
in benzene), by the same authors.
Monosantalyl mucate m. 136, by Kariyone and Morotomi.
15
(c)
Properties. When purified by a special fractionation method in vacuo and

in an atmosphere of carbon dioxide, a-santalol, according to Bradfield, Pen-
16
fold and Simonsen, has these properties:
>14 166-1G7 a 54 f,i +10 18'

1 25 A rwrrv
0.9770
25
1.5017
125 nf?
These properties are similar to those reported by Guha and Bhattacharyya 17

both for a-santalol from Indian sandalwood and that from d-tricycloekasan-
talol:
d-a-Santalol
Synthetic Natural
b5 148 b5 148
b4 145
WSTSO +9 36' [a] 578 o +9!'

MMOO +11 6' [a] 546 o +10 24'
Properties previously reported by Paolini and Divizia, 18 by Guerbet, 19 and

20
by von Soden must be regarded as those pertaining to mixtures. This
is evidenced by the low optical rotation observed by these workers.
Semmler and Bode 2l found that, on oxidation with potassium permanga-

nate in acetone solution, a-santalol yields mainly tricycloekasantalic acid
CioHi 6 O2, m. 71-72, a reaction which may serve also for the characteriza-
tion of a-santalol.
268 ALCOHOLS
22
According to Ruzicka and Stoll, a-santalol is a derivative of eudalene;
in fact, a-santalol stands between eudalene and cadalene.
(3-Santalol
Mol. Weight 220.34
H 3
CH CH 2 CH
2
- - = fC CH 2OH
H
**
According to Bradfield, Penfold, and
Simonsen 28
or
CH 3
HC2 CH 2
HaC
:C=CH CH2
H.C
According to Ruzicka and Thomann 24
Occurrence. In the santalol fraction of East Indian sandalwood oil.
Isolation. By special means of fractional distillation (see also "a-Santalol").

26
Identification. (1) According to Bradfield, Penfold and Simonsen, the allophanate
melts at 159M60 .
The strychnine salt

(2) of the acid phthalate, according to the same authors, melts
at 134-135, [aJ546i -37 30' (c = 2.68 in benzene).
Properties. When by a special fractionation method and in

purified first
an atmosphere of carbon dioxide, and subsequently through the strychnine
salt of its acid phthalate, /3-santalol, according to Bradfield, Penfold and
26
Simonsen, had these properties:
177-178 5461 -87 6'

1 25
0.9717 1.5100
jS-Santalol is a derivative of cadalene.

Use. The medicinal value of sandalwood oil is due mainly to the santalols.
1
Ber. 40 (1907), 1132; 43 (1910), 1893; 46 (1913), 2306.
8
Helv. Chim. Ada 18 (1935), 355.
/. Chem. Soc. (1935), 309.
4
These formulas are structurally identical and differ only in their spatial arrangement.
6
Heine & Co., German Patent No. 110,485, Jan. 4, 1898.
6
7
J. Chem. Soc. (1935), 309.
8
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 64 (1935), 6T.
9
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 65 (1933), 352.
10
Atti accad. Lincei [5], 23 (1914), II, 226. Chem. Abstracts 9 (1915), 1324.
11
/. Pharm. Soc. Japan 48 (1928), 416. See also Pharm. J. 123 (1929), 420.
12
Ber. 40 (1907), 1126, 1127.
13
14
/. Chem. Soc. (1935), 309. See also Penfold, J. Proc. Royal Soc. N. S. Wales 62 (1928), 60;
66 (1932), 240.
15
/. Pharm. Soc. Japan 49 (1929), 170.
16
J. Chem. Soc. (1935), 309.
17
J. Indian Chem. Soc. 21 (1944), 267, 284.
18
Atti accad. Lincei [5], 23 (1914), II, 226. Chem. Abstracts 9 (1915), 1324.
19
Compt. rend. 130 (1900), 1326.
20
Arch. Pharm. 238 (1900), 362.
21
Ber. 40 (1907), 1133.
22
Helv. Chim. Ada 6 (1922), 923. See also Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1923), 185; (1936), 75.
23
/. Chem. Soc. (1935), 309.
24
Helv. Chim. Acta 18 (1935), 355.
25
/. Chem. Soc. (1935), 314.
*Ibid., 310.
The Fusanols
The
constitution of these probably bicyclic sesquiterpene alcohols contain-
ing two ethylenic linkages remains obscure, although studies have been made
as to their individual identity by Rao and Sudborough, 1 May, 2 Penfold, 3
4 5 6
Venkatesaiya and Watson, Simonsen, and Youngken.
Occurrence. In West Australian sandalwood oil (Eucarya spicata Spr. and
Summ., syn. Fusanus spicatus Br., Santalum spicatum D.C., S. cygnorum Mig.)
(cf. Marr,
7
and Penfold 8 ).
Isolation. Rao and Sudborough 9
originally reported the isolation of the "fusanols"
through their acid phthalates; they thus separated the alcohol mixture by fractional
distillation into a- and /3-fusanol.
10
According to Penfold,
Identification. the fraction rich in "fusanols" yields an
allophanate m. 148- 152. The fusanols do not yield santalenic acid upon oxidation.
Properties. Rao and Sudborough observed these properties:
a-Fusanol
5
b5 146-149 [a& +5 42'
5
dl| 0.9775 nf> 1.5060
P-Fusanol
5
b6 153-155 [a& +2 36'
d}f 0.9753 ng 1.5100

270 ALCOHOLS
The meagerphysical data available to characterize these isomeric sesqui-
terpene alcohols leave still some doubt as to their individuality.
Since they reacted with phthalic anhydride in benzene solution, they are
most by these authors. In fact a
likely not secondary alcohols as suggested
n showed that
reinvestigation of West Australian sandalwood oil by Penfold
the alcohol fraction consisted of a mixture of primary and secondary alcohols.
The primary alcohols contained santalols (allophanate m. 1G2-163), and
another alcohol b 4 - 5 IGOMGl d 20 0.942, D,
5 0', n^ 1.5030. It is pos-
12
sible that the fusanols of Rao and Sudborough were a mixture of this alco-
hol and the santalols.
13
Penfold also described a strongly laevorotatory alcohol isolated pri-
marily from Santalum lanceolatum b 5 163-165, d 0.9474, a

oil of 66 42',
14
nf? 1.5074; allophanate m. 114. Venkatesaiya and Watson, and Jones
and Smith, 15 too, observed the presence of an alcohol with high laevorotation
and boiling higher than santalol in the West Australian oil. This product
was subsequently shown by Bradfield, Francis, Penfold and Simonsen 16 to
be identical with a primary sesquiterpene alcohol from Santalum lanceolatum
which they named lanceol.
The secondary alcohol mentioned above yielded an acid phthalate at 140,
and after reconversion had these properties:
bi 146-150 D +27 12'
d}f 0.995 nf? 1.5100
The chemistry of these alcohols is apparently still under investigation by

Penfold. 17
Use. The fusanols, as such, are not used in our industries.
1
J. Ind. Inst. Sci. 5 (1922), 163.
*
Pharm. J. 120 (1928), 368.
*J. Proc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales 62 (1928), 60.
4
J. Soc. Chern. hid. 47 (1928), 322T.
6
"The Terpenes," Vol. II (1931), 591.
6
Am. Perfumer 42, March (1941), 36.
7
Chemist Druggist 113 (1930), 821.
8
9
J. Ind. Inst. Sci. 6 (1923), 163.
10
J. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.
S. Wales 62 (1928), 60.
11
Ibid., 70; 66 (1932), 242.
12
/. Ind. Inst. Sci. 6 (1923), 163.
13
14
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 47 (1928), 322T.
16
Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland 41 (1929), 17. Chem. Abstracts 24 (1930), 3604.
16
/. Chem. Soc. (1936), 1619.
17
Australasian J. Pharm. (1937), 154.
Sesquiterpene Alcohols from Camphor Oil
(Sesquicamphenol)
The sesquiterpene alcohol CisHÔ, first described by Semmler and Rosen-

berg and named sesquicamphenol, was shown by Ruzicka and Stoll 2 to
l
consist of a mixture of one primary, two secondary, and two tertiary alcohols.
Occurrence. In the high boiling fraction of camphor oil.
Isolation. treatment of the fraction bi2 140-170 with phthalic anhydride,

By
and by preparing the benzoate b2 175-176 from the fraction bi2 145-165. Thus
the primary alcohol was separated from the secondary and tertiary alcohols by treat-
ment with phthalic anhydride in benzene solution. It is probably bicyclic. The
secondary alcohols were separated by treatment with phthalic anhydride at 130.
They consisted apparently of two bicyclic alcohols, viz., CisH^cO and CisHÔ. The
tertiary alcohols which did not react with phthalic anhydride were purified by the
preparation of the benzoate and by hydrolysis. The mixture of tertiary alcohols con-
sisted of at least two bicyclic alcohols.
Identification. Through determination of the properties.
3
Properties. Ruzicka and Stoll reported for their sesquiterpene alcohols
isolated from camphor oil:
(1) Primary bicyclic alcohol C^HÔ.

A colorless viscid oil having these properties:
bi 2 158-159
4
dl 0.9566
4
nj 1.5020
On dehydrogenation with sulfur, this primary alcohol does not yield a

naphthalene hydrocarbon.
(2) Secondary bicyclic alcohols Ci 5 H 26 and Ci 5 H 24 0.
A colorless viscid oil which had these properties:
bw 154-155 C 15 H26 0: b J2 160M62

Ci 5 H24 0:
6
dl 0.9608 b 12 154-155
n{? 1.5054
On dehydrogenation with sulfur, this mixture of unsaturated secondary

alcohols yields cadalene. At least one of these alcohols, therefore, belongs
to the cadinene type. O
Ci5H 28 is obtained upon hydrogenation.
(3) Tertiary bicyclic alcohol Ci 5 H26 O.
272 ALCOHOLS
A colorless viscid oil which after purification through the benzoate had
these properties:
bia 156
df 0.9665
nf? 1.5050
On dehydrogenation with sulfur, this mixture of tertiary alcohols yields

both cadalene and eudalene; therefore, the mixture must consist of at least
two alcohols which belong to the cadinene and eudesmol type.
4
Komatsu, Fujimoto and Tanaka isolated from blue camphor oil a tertiary
sesquiterpene alcohol Ci5lI 26 O for which they suggested the following formula:
CH 2
C CH 2
H2C
/ \CII/ \ CH
2
H2 C
I I
CH I/H
C<
X
\ /
C
\CH/ CH
2
l\
HC OH
/ \
Except for the similarity in their boiling points (see "Properties") there is
no indication that this alcohol is identical with any of the above described
5
tertiary sesquiterpene alcohols of Ruzicka and Stoll.
The tertiary sesquiterpene alcohol of Komatsu, Fujimoto and Tanaka 6
bw 157-160 WD +35 30'

5
df 0.9501 n?> 1.5040
On dehydrogenation with sulfur it yields cadalene.

A few years earlier, Ono 7 had isolated from the high boiling fractions of
camphor oil a bicyclic sesquiterpene alcohol Ci5H 2 eO with these properties:
b 10 170-174
[a] D 4-66 35'
1.5084
(Regarding a secondary, tricyclic sesquiterpene alcohol Ci 5 H26 0, see "Sho-

junol.")
Use. The
sesquiterpene alcohols of camphor oil are not used as such in
our industries but the high boiling fractions of camphor oil in which these
alcohols occur serve widely for the scenting of all kinds of technical products.
1
Ber. 46 (1913), 770.
2
Helv. Chim. Ada 7 (1924), 260.
8
Ibid., 267, 269.
4
/. Chem. Soc. Japan 61 (1930), 498.
6
Helv. Chim. Ada
7 (1924), 260.
6
/. Chem. Soc. Japan 61 (1930), 498.
7
Mem. Coll. Set. Kyoto 8[A] (1925), 1. Chem. Abstrads 20 (1926), 1987.
Cymbopol
15 H26 Mol. Weight 222.36
CH
CH CH 2
\ on/ \
Hc on 2
H0 OH OH-CH 2 OH
\ /
OH
OH
According to Kafuku, Ikeda and Fujita, the high boiling fractions (15
1
per cent) of the oil of Java type citronella cultivated in Formosa contain 10
per cent of a primary sesquiterpene alcohol Ci 5 II 26 O, viz., cymbopol, which
has these properties:
2
292 ab -8 24'
d 0.9515 n?? 1.495
These authors established the above-pictured structural formula for
cymbopol.
Aside from 10 per cent cymbopol, the high boiling fractions of Formosa
Java type contain 15 per cent geraniol, 15 per cent 7-cadinene,
citronella oil
50 per cent elemol, and 10 per cent 7-cadinol.
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 63 (1932), 645. Chem. Abstrads 27 (1933), 280.

274 ALCOHOLS
Eudesmol
(Selinelol)
CH3 CH
C H CH 2 GIL C H CTT 2 TT CH
\l/ \ //
?
C C OH HC
/ C C OH
HC C 2 C
H2 C C CII 2
\CH II 2 C C CH 2 CH 3
3
\
HoC CH 2 II 2 C CH a
CH a CII 3
a-Eudesmol /3-Eudesrnol
The
structural formula of this bicyclic, tertiary sesquiterpene alcohol con-
taining one ethylenic linkage was established by Ruzicka and collaborators.
1
Although apparently homogeneous, eudesmol is a mixture of isomers.

Occurrence. Eudesmol has been identified in the oils distilled from several
species of eucalyptus, the best source for its isolation being the oil of E. ma-
carthuri.
Isolation. By fractional distillation of the oil derived from E. mac.arthuri.

Identification. When treated with hydrogen chloride in acetic acid or ethereal
solution, eudesmol yields a dihydrochloride m. 74-75, [O:]D -f2()0' (in chloroform).
This compound is identical with selinene dihydrochloride (see "Selinene"). Reduction
yields a dihydro derivative m. 84-85, [a]n+l70' (in chloroform), according to
Ruzicka, Wind and Koolhaas. The allophanatc m. 174 likewise may be used to
2
characterize this compound.

3
Properties. Semmler and Tobias reported these characteristic properties
for eudesmol:
m. 78 Mi? +31 21' (in 12% chloroform
bio 150 solution)

d 20 0.9884 nb 1.516
On dehydrogenation with sulfur or selenium, eudesmol yields eudalene.

On acetylation, eudesmol forms eudesmyl acetate bn 165-170, d 2 o 0.9933,
[ag? +31 0', nf? 1.49204.
Use. Eudesmol, as such, is not used in our industries.
i
Helv. Chim. Ada 5 (1922), 362; 14 (1931), 1132. Liebigs Ann. 453 (1927), 62.
*Hdv. Chim. Ada 14 (1931), 1140, 1143.
3
Ber. 46 (1913), 2026.

A. Plattner, A. Fiirst and J Hellerbach, "liber einige Abbauprodukte des
PI.
Eudesmols," Helv. Chim. Ada 30 (1947), 2158.

Torreyol

CH3
CH 2 CH
H2 C
/ \CII/ \CH
2
HsC -C CH CH2
HO
/ \CH/ \C /
2
C
H3C
/ \CH
3
This structural formula of torreyol was suggested by Nisida and Uota. 1

Occurrence. Torreyol occurs in the oil obtained by steam distillation from
the leaves of Torreya nucifera.
Isolation. By fractional distillation. Torreyol can be purified by sublimation.
2
Properties. Nisida and Uota reported these properties for torreyol:
m. 139-140
[] D +107 8'
Onoxidation with potassium permanganate in benzene solution, torreyol

H
yields a dihydroxy derivative Ci 5 28 O 3 m. 78-79, [] ,
-11 19'. This
derivative crystallizes with 1.5 mols of water which is lost on drying at 65
in vacuo.
Dehydrogenation of torreyol with selenium gives cadalene.
When heated with formic acid, torreyol yields torreyene Ci5H 24 bi 89-90, ,
Mb +46 df
0.9206, ng 1.50591.
40',
Torreyene resembles cadinene.
Use. Torreyol is not used in our industries.
1
/. Soc. CJwm. Ind. Japan 43, Suppl. Bind. (1940), 64; 44, Suppl. Bind. (1941), 1 19. Chem.
Abstracts 34 (1940), 6936; 38 (1944), 4262.
2
Ibid.
276 ALCOHOLS
Cadinol
CH CH
CH CH CH CH 2
HC
\H/ \
C CII 2 H2 C
/ \H/
C
\CH
H2 C C C CH 3 HoC C C CH 3
\C /H\CH \C /H\CH
2
HO CII HO CH
HC CH 3 HC CH 3
a-Cadinol 0-Cadinol
CH
CH CH 2
/ \H/
C
\
2C CH2
HC C C OH
/\
\C/H\CH
CH
HC CH 3
y-Cadinol
From the experimental evidence gathered to date it seems probable that

cadinol may be represented by one or all of the three isomeric bicyclic ter-
pene alcohol formulas represented above and that in nature it occurs more
often as a mixture.
Occurrence. d-Cadinols primarily have been isolated from galbanum oil,
Formosa Pinus pentaphylla (Sebe *), the leaf oil of Chamaecyparis obtusa for-
mosana, Hayata or Arisan-Hinoki (Kafuku and Nozoe ), and West Indian
2
sandal wood oil (Ruzicka, Capato and Huyser, 3 and Deussen 4 ).

I'Cadinols are predominant in the alcohols occurring in cubeb oil, in the
volatile and empyreumatic oil of cade (Juniperus oxycedrus), in Java citron-
ella oil, and in oil of Cedrela toona Roxb.
Isolation. By fractional distillation in vacuo for instance, of galbanum or cubeb

oil.
Identification.Cadinol can be characterized by the preparation of cadinene dihydro-

chloride m. 118-119 (see "Cadinene"). Dehydrogenation of cadinol gives cadalene
which yields a definitive picrate m. 115, and a styphnate m. 139.
Properties. Cadinol is a colorless oil having these properties:

d-Cadinol from galbanum oil and composed of a-, /?- and 7- isomers with
the a- and ft- forms in predominance (Ruzicka and Stoll 5 ) :
bi 2 155-156 <* D +7 42'

4
d} 0.9665 n# 1.5054
A
product isolated from Pinus pentaphylla by Sebe
6
and described as pre-
dominantly a 7- isomer had the following properties:
m. 135.5
b8 162.5
[]f? +99 30'
by Henderson and Robertson, and from

7
l-Cadinol derived from cubeb oil
8
oil of juniper by Mousseron, Granger and Ronayroux:
8
b 20 106 [] -54 O' 7
bio 153M55 07 W 546 o -64 56' 8
d 25 0.9700 8
[a] 579 -5653' 8
7 8
d 20 0.9727 nf? 1.50741
7
nf? 1 -508
These latter authors, in their isomer isolated from Junipcrus

study of the I-
oxycedrus L., prepared the dihydro derivative and recorded its properties as:
b 20 155 M 57 9o -29 32'
d 25 0.9563 [a] 546 o -33 28'
1.49680
A laevo cadinol of uncertain structure has been recently isolated from Java
citronella oil by Plattner and Markus. 9 It may be related either to the prod-
uct of Sebe 10
or to the solid cadinol of Nisida and Uota u isolated from Tor-
reya nucifera which they considered to be a l,6-dimethyl-4-isopropylidene-6-
hydroxynaphthalene and named torreyol. Plattner and Markus found for
this cadinol:
m. 72.5
[a] D -39 24' (c = 1.32 in CHC1 3 )

and further that it yielded a dihydro derivative Ci 5 H 2 8O with m. 124.5,
HD -72 30'.
Being a tertiary alcohol, cadinol does not react with phthalic anhydride at
110.
Use. Cadinol, as such, is not used in our industries.
278 ALCOHOLS
1
2
Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan 6 (1931), 118. Chem. News 143 (1931), 21. Chem. Zentr. I (1932),
84.
3
Rec. trav. chim. 47 (1928), 370.
4
J. prakt. Chem. II, 120 (1929), 123.
6
Helv. Chim. Ada 7 (1923), 94.
6
7
/. Chem. Soc. (1926), 2811.
8
Compt. rend. 208 (1939), 1411.
9
Helv. Chim. Acta 26 (1942), 1674.
10
/. Chem. Soc. Japan 61 (1940), 1269.
11
J. Soc. Chem. Iwl. Japan 43 (1940) Suppl. Binding, 64 (1940) in German. Chem. Ab-
stracts 34 (1940), 6936.
Ci 5 H 26 O Mol. Weight 222.36
-CH 2
i H3
CH3
The
constitution of this apparently bicyclic tertiary sesquiterpene alcohol
has been the subject of many investigations but final confirmation of the
structural formula was achieved by Plattner and Magyar. 1
Occurrence. Schimmel & Co. 2 first isolated guaiol from guaiac wood oil
(Bulnesia sarmienti Lor.). The alcohol seems to occur also in a few other
essential oils.
Isolation. By fractional distillation and fractionation of the high boiling portions

of guaiac wood oil.
Identification -Through its properties and by the dinitrobenzoate m. 137-137.5

according to Plattner and Lamay.
3
(corr.),
Properties. Guaiol is a solid mass crystallizing in prisms m. 91-93

4 5
(Semmler and Mayer, Eyken, Ruzicka, Pontalti and Balas, Ruzicka and
6
7 8
Haagen-Smit, and Gildemeister and Hoffmann ). It possesses a faint but
lasting odor. The following properties have been reported by Gadamer and
9 10
Amenomiya, Wallach and Tuttle, Semmler and Mayer, 11 and Gildemeister
and Hoffmann: 12
10
b. 288 Ml? -29 48' (in alcohol)
b9 147-149 n nj? 1.4716 n

ll 11 - 12
dJ8 0.9074 nf? 1.5100
df 0.9714 u * 12
Mol.refr. 68.35 n -
12
When
dehydrating guaiol with potassium hydrogen sulfate, Gadamer and
13
Amenomiya obtained guaiene CisH^, a bicyclic sesquiterpene with these
properties:
b9 123-124 [a]?? -40 21'
df 0.9085 nf? 1.50049

Mol. refr. 66.2
H
Ruzicka, Pontalti and Balas reported for guaiene which they obtained
by digesting guaiol for a short time with formic acid:
bi2 128-130 aD -16 48'
df 0.9115 nJJ 1.5022
On
dehydrogenation with sulfur, guaiene yields the deep blue guaiazulene
s
Chilis, bn 104, d\ 0.9759. This hydrocarbon is related to azulene and
can be characterized by the preparation of a picrate m. 122, and of a styph-
nate m. 105-106 (cf. "Guaiazulene").
The tertiary character of the hydroxyl group in guaiol indicated by is
the fact that guaiol does not react with phthalic anhydride at 130, and that
it cannot readily be acetylated. Furthermore, guaiol yields a stable chro-
15
mate, according to Scholz.
Use. Guaiol, as such, has not found any noteworthy use in our industries.
1
Helv. Chim. Ada 24 (1941), 191; 26 (1942), 581.
2
Ber. Schimmel & Co., April (1892), 42; April (1893), 33.
3
Helv. Chim. Acta 23 (1940), 902.
4
Ber. 46 (1912), 1391.
6
Rec. trav. chim. 25 (1906), 40.
6
Helv. Chim. Ada 6 (1923), 862.
7
Ibid.14 (1931), 1126.
8
"Die Xtherischen Olc," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 494.
9
Arch. Pharm. 241 (1903), 43.
Liebigs Ann. 279 (1894), 395.
10
11
Ber. 46 (1912), 1391.
12
"Die Xtherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 494.
13
Arch. Pharm. 241 (1903), 43.
" Helv. Chim. Ada 6
(1923), 861.
15
Inaugural Dissertation, University Leipzig (1930). Cf. Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1931), 174.
See Wienhaus, Ber. 47 (1914), 330.
"Calameone"
This compound has been investigated in the past by Schimmel & Co., 1 by
von Soden and Rojahn, 2 and by Thorns and Beckstroem, 3 but its constitu-
tion was not established. However, advances have been made more re-
cently. Simonsen 4 offered the opinion that the designation "calameone" is
ill chosen, as there exists no evidence that this substance is a ketone. This
280 ALCOHOLS
view finds ample support in the recent work of Bohme 6 who described this
compound as an unsaturated bicyclic sesquiterpene alcohol containing two
hydroxy groups and belonging to the cadalene series.
Occurrence. In the high boiling fractions of calamus root oil.
according to Thorns and Beckstroem.

6
Isolation. By fractional distillation,
Bohme 7 found that the product sublimes in a high vacuum (.006 mm.) at 65-75.
Identification. On treatment with hydrogen chloride, "calameone" yields an addi-
tion compound CisH^CVHCl; m. 119.
Benzoate m. 155.
Bohme prepared the "dihydrocalameone" m. 133.
Properties. "Calameone" melts at 168 (Thorns and Beckstroem), 169

(Bohme); []f? -8 68' (in 5% alcoholic solution).
On
oxidation with potassium permanganate, "calameone" yields calame-
onic acid CislÔ^HaO; m. 153.
Bohme found that the corresponding hydrocarbon calamene (C^H^), bi 2
137-139, when heated with sulfur for 6 hr., yielded cadalene.
Use. "Calameone" is not used in our industry.
1
2
Pharm. Ztg. 46 (1901), 243.
3
Ber. 34 (1901), 1021; 36 (1902), 3187. Ber. 36 (1902), 3195.
4
"The Terpcnes," Vol. II (1932), 588.
6
Arch. Pharm. 278 (1940), 1.
6
Ber. 34 (1901), 1021; 36 (1902), 3187. Ber. 36 (1902), 3195.
7
Arch. Pharm. 278 (1940), 1.
(d) TRICYCLIC SESQUITERPENE ALCOHOLS.
Ledol
(Ledum Camphor)
Ci5H 26 O Mol. Weight 222.36
The constitution of this tricyclic tertiary sesquiterpene alcohol was inves-

2
by Hjelt and Collan, Rizza, Semmler and Mayer, Wienhaus, 4
1 3
tigated
5 6
Komppa, and Komppa and Nyman. Since ledol is an alcohol, the old
designation ledum camphor should be abandoned. Komppa and Nyman
7
suggested the following structural formula for ledol:

HaC OH
or
CH H3C CH,
(Preferred ) Ledol
Occurrence. In marsh teafrom the leaves and flowering tops

oil, distilled
of Ledum palustre L., groenlandicum and columbianum. Observed by Hasen-
8
fratz in the leaves of Sphacele parviflora L. from Colombia.
Isolation. By fractional distillation and fractionation of the high boiling parts of

marsh tea oil.
Through its properties. Wienhaus

9
Identification. prepared a crystalline chromate
(Ci 6 H 5)2-Cr0
2 4, m. 92, [a] (Llred +30 0'.
>
Ledol crystallizes in colorless needles m. 104-105, which

Properties.
readily sublime below their melting point.
The following properties have been reported by the above-mentioned
authors:
m. 105 5
[] D +759 M
2 10 3
b. 292 (corr.) n> 1.46G7
3
dg 0.9094
5
d 20 0.9814
Ledol is very resistant to oxidation by potassium permanganate. Other-

wise ledol is somewhat unstable and readily loses water, yielding on treat-
ment with potassium bisulfate a sesquiterpene Ci5H 2 4, viz., ledene, b 752 264,
b 6 115-118, d20 0.9233, d 19 0.9237, ng> 1.50273. When dehydrogenated
with selenium, ledol and ledene yield azulcne and some cadalene. Dehydro-
10
genating ledol with selenium or sulfur, Nyman and Mikander obtained
two different azulenes, viz., Se-ledum azulene and s-ledum azulene, both of
which form characteristic molecular addition compounds with trinitroben-
zene: Se adduct m. 146-147, S adduct m. 152-153.5.
Use. Ledol is not used in our industries.
1
Ber. 16 (1882), 2500. See also Hjclt, Ber. 28 (1895), 3087.
2
J. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 16 (1883), 362; 19 (1887), 324. Ber. 16 (1883), 2311.
3
Ber. 46 (1912), 1391.
4
Ber. 47 (1914), 330.
6
Z. angew. Chem. 46 (1932), 588. Kgl. Norske Videnskab. Selskabs Skrifter, No. 1 (1933).
6
Compt. rend. trav. lab. Carlsberg Ser. chim. 22 (1938), 272. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 6234.
7
Ibid.
8
Compt. rend. 187 (1928), 903.
9
Ber. 47 (1914), 330.
10
Suomen Kemistilehti 14B (1941), 3. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1941), 4755.
(e) SESQUITERPENE ALCOHOLS OF DOUBTFUL CONSTITUTION.
Vetivenols
(Vetiverols)
The sesquiterpene alcohols contained in oil of vetiver have been investi-

among them Ruzicka, Capato and Huyser, Pfau
1
gated by several workers,
282 ALCOHOLS
and Plattner, 2 and Sabetay and Trabaud, 3 but the chemical constitution of
these alcohols has not yet been fully established.
At least 60 per cent of the sesquiterpene alcohols present in Java vetiver
oil seem to consist of a mixture of primary alcohols CigHÔ. This mixture
of primary alcohols was obtained by heating the sesquiterpene alcohol frac-
tion with phthalic anhydride to 90, and then by separating and hydrolyzing
8
the resulting acid phthalates. A tricyclic alcohol b J2 170-172, dj 1.0228,
D +29 36', n{? 1.5255, largely predominates, whereas the distillate recog-
nized as bicyclic alcohols b J2 152-154, dj7 0.9851, n}J 1.5241, amounts to
only about 10 per cent of the mixture of primary alcohols. On dehydrogena-
the bicyclic alcohols yielded eudalene and cadalene. An esterified pri-
tion,
mary tricyclic alcohol was also described by Ruzicka, Capato and Huyser, 4
5
b 12 160-162, df
1.0186, n{) 1.5251.
The which do not react with phthalic an-
tertiary sesquiterpene alcohols
hydride likewise seem to be a mixture. On warming with formic acid, only
a part of these alcohols could be dehydrated to bicyclic sesquiterpenes. On
dehydrogenation, these sesquiterpenes gave cadalene. The tertiary sesqui-
terpene alcohols amount to about one-third of the total sesquiterpene alcohol
fraction of vetiver oil. They seem to contain one representative of the hy-
drated naphthalene derivatives belonging to the cadinene type.
The tertiary alcohol unaltered by phthalic anhydride and obtained fairly
pure was bicyclic, b 12 150-155, df 0.9910, n{? 1.5185.
Reunion oil contained somewhat similar Ci 5 24 O fractions. H primary A
9
bicyclic alcohol was isolated b 12 150-160, d 4 0.9805, nj? 1.5242, which
yielded eudalene with sulfur, and a tricyclic tertiary vetiverol b J2 165-170,
7
d\ 1.0182 was also observed in the oil.
Oxidizing vetiverol (free from vetiverone) with potassium chromate and

sulfuric acid, Sabetay and Trabaud 5 obtained crude vetiveral bio 138-145,
d 16 1.003, an +40 33', ng* 1.5132, containing 64.1 per cent of vetiveral
CisH22 O. Vetiveral is said to possess an incense-like odor.
Use. The vetivenols or vetiverols and their acetates are used quite widely
in the compounding of high-grade perfumes, especially of oriental character.
The odor of these alcohols is pleasant, mild and lasting, whereas the acetates
possess a somewhat dry character.
4
1
Rec. trav. chim. 47 (1928), 370. Rec. trav. chim. 47 (1928), 370.
2
Helv. Chim. Ada 22 (1939), 640. B
Bull. soc. chim. [5], 6 (1939), 740.
8
Bull. soc. chim. [5], 6 (1939), 740.
Calamenenol
This sesquiterpene alcohol was investigated by Semmler and Spornitz, 1

and by Ruzicka, Meyer and Mingazzini, 2 but its constitution has not been
elucidated. In remains doubtful whether this alcohol has ever been

fact, it
obtained in pure form and free from asarone, another constituent of calamus
oil.
Occurrence. In the oil distilled from the rhizomes of Acorus calamus L.
Isolation. Byrepeated fractionation of calamus root oil.

Identification. Calamenenol does not yield any crystalline derivatives; therefore
it has to be characterized through its properties.
Properties. The following properties have been reported for calamenenol

by the above-named investigators:
2
bis 160-165
d 28 0.961 15 !
nD 1.5098 1
Calamenenol is somewhat unstable and readily loses water with formation

of calamenene Ci5lI 2 2, a hydrocarbon possessing these properties:
bis 13G-143 01
dfj 0.9324 1
nD 1.52317 *
On dehydrogcnation with sulfur, calamenenol yields cadalene.

Use. Calamenenol is not used in our industries.
1
Ber. 46 (1913), 3704.
2
Helv. Chim. Ada 6 (1922), 358.
Cedrenol
The
constitution of cedrenol, a primary sesquiterpene alcohol, is dependent
upon that of the hydrocarbon, cedrenc, since it has been shown by various
investigators that, on oxidation of cedrene, cedrenol is formed (see "Cedrene").
Occurrence. Found in the higher boiling fractions of American cedarwood
by Semmler and Mayer.
1
oil
Isolation. By fractional distillation, treatment of the fraction with phthalic an-

hydride in benzene solution, and hydrolysis, cedrenol is obtained. For further
purification Semmler and Mayer suggested the conversion into cedrenol acetate; on
hydrolysis of the acetate with alkali, cedrenol is formed.
Cedrenol can be identified by its physical properties and by the
Identification.
following methods:
Dehydration is readily effected, according to Ruzicka, Plattner and Kusserow, by
2
acetic anhydride to obtain a hydrocarbon, cedrenene, with these properties: bn 122,

df 0.9432, an +138 0', nf> 1.5202. This unsaturated compound smoothly undergoes
a diene reaction with dimethyl ester of acetylene dicarboxylic acid to form an adduct :
C2iH 2 80 4 m. 132-132.5, which is hydrolyzed to a characteristic free acid C^HÔ^

,
m. 230.
284 ALCOHOLS
Onbromination under carbon dioxide, cedrenene yields almost quantitatively ce-
drenene dibromide m. 93-95.
Several oxidative degradation products may also be used in connection with other
reactions of cedrene, for purposes of diagnosis.
Properties. The following properties were reported by Ruzicka, Plattner

3 4
and Kusscrow, Blumann, Hellriegel and Schulz, and Semmler and Mayer: 5
3 5
m. 103.5-104 (crystallized from d 20 1.0083
6
petroleum ether) a??
4 5
103-104 nf? 1.5212
5
b9 . 5 1GG-1G9
Use. Due to their high fixation value cedrenol-containing fractions of

cedarwood oil are used for the scenting of soaps and all kinds of technical
preparations.
. 46 (1912), 786.
2
Helv. Chim. Ada 26 (1942), 85.
3
Ibid.
*Ber. 62 (1929), 1697; 64 (1931), 1541.
6
Ser. 46 (1912), 786.
Cedrol
(Cedar Camphor or Cypress Camphor)

The constitution of cedrol, a tertiary sesquiterpene alcohol, is related to

that of the hydrocarbon, cedrene, since it has been shown by various investi-
gators that, on dehydration, cedrol yields cedrene (see "Cedrene").
Occurrence. Cedrol has been found in oil of Juniperus virginiana L. by
Chapman and
l
Burgess; in oil of cypress (Cuprcssus scmpcrvirens L.) and
Juniperus procera Hochst. by Schimmel & Co.;
2
in Juniperus polycarpos
Koch by Rutovski, Gusseva and Koroleva; 3
in Juniperus chincnsis L. by
Kondo, and So Uchida; 5 in Juniperus excelsa M.B. = /. sobina L. var.
4
taurica Tall, by Rutovski and Vinogradova, 6 in Cunninghamia konishi Ha-
yata by Ikeda and Fujita; and in Smyrna origanum oil.

7 8
It is possible that some of the oils, such as Juniperus chinensis or Smyrna
origanum had been adulterated with a fraction of cedarwood oil from which
the cedrol or cedrene content originated.
Isolation. By fractional distillation, then freezing out and recrystallization from

methanol and petroleum ether.
Rabak 9 suggested a method based on the insolubility of cedrol in cold dilute alcohol:
"One hundred parts of oil are agitated vigorously with 6 parts of 65 per cent
alcohol for one to two minutes. Sudden and complete solidification of the emulsion
thus formed usually results, if the oil contains a sufficient quantity of cedrol. If
not, solidification may be accomplished by adding a small quantity of crystalline

cedrol to the emulsion, then placing it in a refrigerator for several hours. The solidi-
fied mass placed upon a force filter, the fine silky crystals are washed with a few
is
drops of cold 98 per cent alcohol, and the dry crystals weighed. The cedrol may be
purified by dissolving it in hot alcohol, then cooling and filtering the mass."
This method is suggested for the quantitative determination of cedrol, but the re-
sults give only comparative values.
Identification. Cedrol can be characterized by its derivatives and by its dehydration
product, viz., cedrene:
Cedrol phenylurethane m. 106-107 (crystallized from dilute alcohol), according to
Schimmel & Co. 10
Cedrol chromate (crystallized from petroleum ether) in. 115, as described by Wien-
u results from the action of chromic acid on cedrol in carbon tetrachloride solution.
haus,
Being a tertiary alcohol, cedrol is very easily dehydrated by the action of formic
acid, phosphorus pentoxide, zinc chloride, and other dehydration agents. The result-
ing cedrene can then be identified as such.
Cedrol forms white crystals, the odor of which is persistent,

Properties.
pleasing and suggestive of cedar wood.
Cedrols separated from various oils show a marked variation in their op-
tical rotatory power, but it is usually dextrorotatory.
12
The following properties have been reported by Naves and co-workers,
Schimmel & Co.,
13 14 15
- -
Rabak,
16
and observed by Fritzschc Brothers, Inc.: 17
12
m. (iromJuniperusproccralloohst.) 8f)-86.5
13 16
(from oil of cypress) 8G-87 -
14
(from oil Smyrna origanum) 85.5-87
(from oil ccdarwood Juniperus
17
virginiana) 86.6-87
13
b. (from oil of cypress) 290-292
13
bs (from oil of cypress) 135
13
C*D (from oil of cypress) inactive
+0 5G' 17
(c
= 10 in chloroform)
., , , JN +931' 13
(c= 11. 2 in chloroform)
(from oil of cedarwood);
v \
+ 10^ rt
30'
^, ie
15
,
(c
= 10 in chloroform)
+8 48' 14
(c
= 10 in chloroform)
18
Naves and co-workers (from oil of Juniperus procera):
[]{? + 13 4' (c
= 5.5 in absolute alcohol)
+8 46' (c
= 10 in benzyl alcohol)
+ 14 16' (c = 10 in dioxane)
19
According to So Uchida cedrol from Juniperus chinensis L. (Byakushin)
has an optical rotation as high as D +85 23'.
286 ALCOHOLS
Use. Due to its high boiling point and faint, pleasant odor, cedrol is used
mainly as a fixative in perfumes, cosmetics, and soaps.
1
Proc. Chem. Soc. (1896), 140.
2
Ber. Schimmel &
Co. I (1910), 36; II (1904), 20; II (1911), 105.
4
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan (1907), 236. Ber. Schimmel &
Co., Oct. (1907), 41.
6
6
Trans. Sci. Chem. Pharm. Inst. Moscow 17 (1927), 146.
7
8
Ber. Schimmel & Co. Oct. (1906), 72.
9
Am. Perfumer 23 (1929), 727.
">
Ber. Schimmel & Co. II (1906), 72; I (1910), 36.
" Ber. 47 (1914), 330.
12
Helv. Chim. Ada 26 (1943), 314.
13
Ber. Schimmel & Co. II (1904), 19.
"Ibid. II (1906), 72.
16
Ibid. I (1910), 36.
10
Am. Perfumer 23 (1929), 727.
17
Laboratory report.
18
Helv. Chim. Ada 26 (1943), 314.
19
Globulol
Ci 5 H26 O Mol. Weight 222.36
The
constitution of this scsquiterpene alcohol remains obscure, except for
the fact that, according to Ruzicka, Pontalti, and Balas, 1 it is a derivative
of cadalene. This holds true also of the sesquiterpenes occurring in oil of
Eucalyptus globulus.
Occurrence. Schimmel & Co. 2 found globulol in oil of E. globulus.
Isolation. The last runs in the fractionation of oil of E. globulus separate crystals
on standing. After drying on porous clay plates, they are recrystallized from 70%
alcohol.
3
Identification. According to Scholz, globulol forms a stable chromate.
Properties. Globulol crystallizes in the form of shiny, almost odorless

needles:
m. 88.5
b 755 283
[] D -35 29' (in 12% chloroform solution)
On dehydration globulol yields two different sesquiterpenes.

Use. Globulol, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Helv. Chim. Ada 6 (1923), 861.
2
Ber. Schimmel & Co., April (1904), 45. See also Semmler and Tobias, Ber. 46 (1913), 2026.
3
Inaugural Dissertation, Univ. Leipzig, 1930. Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1931), 174.
Cubebol
The constitution of this sesquiterpene alcohol has not been elucidated.

According to Henderson and Robertson, "cubeb camphor" as described in
1
the early literature has not been found to be identical with their cubebol.
Occurrence, The authors cited in the foregoing paragraph first isolated
this terpenic alcohol from the higher boiling fractions of oil of false cubebs
and named it "cubebol."
Isolation. Separated from the higher boiling fractions (bio 153 155) of hydrolyzed
false cubeb oil, the alcohol is obtained in pure form by hydrolysis of its phenylurethane
derivative (yield 4%).
Identification. Cubebol can be characterized by the preparation of several deriva-
tives :
(1) o-naphthylurethane m. 197-198.5

(2) phenylurethane m. 186, [a]JJ 61 +58 54' (in 5% chloroform)
The dibromide of the phenylurethane melts at 7G-80.
Properties. Cubebol melts at 61 - 62. When treated with hydrogen chlo-

ride, cubebol does not yield cadincne dihydrochloride.
Use. Isolated cubebol, as such, is not used in our industries.
J. Chem.Soc. (1926), 2811.
Patchouly Alcohol
(Patchouly Camphor)
C 15 H 26 Mol. Weight 222.36
The constitution of this apparently tricyclic tertiary, sesquiterpene alco-

hol has not been established, despite several investigations by Wallach, 1
Gadamer and Amenomiya, 2 and Semmler and Mayer. 3
Occurrence. In oil of patchouly.
Isolation. By fractional distillation of the high boiling portions of patchouly oil.
Identification. Through its properties.
Wienhaus prepared a stable chromate of patchouly alcohol. According to Scholz

4 5
this chromate crystallizes in the form of shiny, carmine red leaflets m. 117-118
(with decomposition).
Properties. Patchouly alcohol separates in the form of odorless crystals

m. 56, according to the authors listed above. The following properties have
been reported by Semmler and Mayer 6 and Schimmel & Co. 7 :
b8 ~ 140 7
HD -97 42' (in chloroform) 7
6 6
dig 0.9924 ng 1.5029
6 6
a? 1.0284 nf? 1.5245
288 ALCOHOLS
Patchouly alcohol cannot be acetylated quantitatively by the usual
method.
On distillation at atmospheric pressure, or on treatment with dehydrating
agents, patchouly alcohol readily loses water, yielding thereby patchoulene,
a sesquiterpene with these properties (cf. Schimmel & Co.,
8
and Gadamer and
9
Amenomiya ) :
8
b. 255-256 df 0.9296 9
bi2-i2. 5 112-115 9
Mr? -38 5"
9
nf? 1 .49835
No crystalline derivatives of patchoulene arc known.

Use. Patchouly alcohol, as such, is not used in our industries.
Liebigs Ann. 271 (1892), 299; 279 (1894), 394.

1
2
Arch. Pharm. 241 (1903), 22.
3
Ber. 46 (1912), 1391.
*
Ber. 47 (1914), 330.
6
Inaugural Dissertation, Univ. Leipzig (1930). Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1931), 173.
6
Ber. 45 (1912), 1391.
7
8
Ibid., 75.
^
Arch. Pharm. 241 (1903), 41.
Kessyl Alcohol
Fromthe data collected mainly by Asahina and co-workers, it may be con-

cluded that kessyl alcohol is a saturated tri cyclic secondary sesquiterpene al-
cohol. One oxygen as ring member. On dehydrogena-
of the rings contains
tion this oxygen bridge is opened with resulting formation of kessazulene,
which is identical with guaiazulene (Asahina et al., 1 and Ruzicka and Haagen-
Smit 2 ). Kessyl alcohol, therefore, possesses a carbon skeleton closely allied
to that of guaiol. It is distinguished from this sesquiterpene alcohol by the
absence of a double bond, the presence of an oxide ring (Asahina and Kongo 3 ),
and a secondary instead hydroxyl group (Asahina and Naka-
of a tertiary
nishi 4). The positions of the different groups have not been established and
it remains uncertain whether there exists a direct chemical relation between
kesso glycol and kessyl alcohol.

Occurrence. The acetate of kessyl alcohol occurs in kesso oil derived from
the roots of Valeriana Miq., which plant in
officinalis L. var. angustifolia
Japan is called Kesso kano-koso. Japanese workers reported the acetate

also in Valeriana officinalis L. var. latifolia Miq. In a variety grown at To-
yana Pharmaceutical College, kessyl alcohol or acetate was practically absent,
but the oil contained kesso glycol diacetate which, on hydrolysis, gave kesso
5 6
glycol and acetic acid (Asahina and Nakanishi, and Kaneoka and Tutida ).
Kessyl alcohol can be characterized by the determination of its

Identification.
physicochemical properties and by the preparation of the urethane which, according
to Asahina and Kongo, 7 melts at 168.
8
Properties. The same authors, Bertram and Gildemeister, 9 and Gilde-
meister and Hoffmann, 10 reported these properties of kessyl alcohol:
m. 85 9 10
-
bn 155M56 9 10
-
3
b. 300-302 9 10
'
Mb -4443' 8
Kessyl acetate contains 1 mol water (CiyH^gOa -j- 1H 2 0).

of crystallization
Bertram and Gildemeister, 11 Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 12 and Asahina and
13
Nakanishi reported the following properties:
m. 60-61 13 [a] D -700 M1 -

12
b 754 280-283 13
[a]}? -62 44' (-65 6' for the anhy-
12 13
bi5-i 6 178-179 l1 -
drous compound)
13
b4 . 5 148-150
14
Kesso C^TêOs, has been described by Asahina and
glycol, Nakanir>hi,
and by Kaneoka and Tutida: 16
m. 58-59 14
(?)
15
128
3
Mb -24 23' 15
Kesso glycol can be characterized by the preparation of its dibenzoate m.

179, []gf -48 5'.
The same authors reported for kesso glycol diacetate CiQH 30 O 5 :
m. 119 14
[a]f? -68 53' (in alcohol) 15
b 750 259 14
[a]}? -58 9' 14
Use. Kessyl alcohol, as such, is not used in our industries.

1
Pharm. Soc. Japan 62 (1932), 1. Chem. Abstracts 26 (1932), 2972.
/.
2Helv. Chim. Acta 14 (1930), 1122.
*J. Pharm. Soc. Japan No. 506 (1924) 227. Chem. Abstracts 18 (1924), 2510.
4
/. Pharm. Soc. Japan No. 536 (1926), 823. Chem. Abstracts 21 (1927), 2263.
6
7
8
9
Arch. Pharm. 228 (1890), 488.
10
"Die Atherischen Olc," 3d Ed., Vol. Ill, 942.
11
Arch. Pharm. 228 (1890), 490.
12
"Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. Ill, 942.
18
14
Ibid.
16
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 61 (1941), 6. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1941), 4773.
290 ALCOHOLS
D. AROMATIC ALCOHOLS
Some aromatic alcohols are important constituents of essential oils.
Benzyl Alcohol
Phenylcarbinol
CH 2 -OH
Occurrence. Benzyl alcohol occurs free in oil ofylang ylang, in acacia and
tuberose flower oils, etc.As acetate in oil of ylang ylang, in jasmine and
gardenia flower oils, etc. As benzoate in oil of ylang ylang, balsam Peru,
balsam Tolu, in tuberose flower oil, etc. As cinnamate in oil of sty rax, bal-
sam Peru and balsam Tolu, etc. In various oils benzyl alcohol also occurs
combined with other acids.
This alcohol has been observed also as a natural constituent in the vola-
tile flavoring oil of kirsch cherry ferments (cf. Mohler and Hammerlc ).
1
Isolation. (1) By fractionation of the original or saponified oils.
(2) By formation of complex salts: benzyl alcohol, on shaking with anhydrous cal-
cium chloride in dry ether, forms a crystalline addition product from which the parent
alcohol is regenerated by the addition of water. This procedure, however, has only
limited use as many other primary alcohols form such a complex salt, but advantage
may be taken of the volatility (see below).
(3) By difference in the rate of reaction with p-nitrobenzoyl chloride in aqueous
solvents (see below).
Identification. Benzyl alcohol can be characterized by several methods:
(1) By the preparation of derivatives.
2
(a) Prepared
from the l-(2,4-dinitrophenyl)-3-rnethyl-3-nitrourea.
(b) Acid phthalate. Schimmel & Co. 3 reported m. 106-107, Bischoff and von
Hedenstrom 4 m. 104, Hoejenbos and Coppens 6 m. 106.
(c) p-Nitrobenzoate m. 85, according to Meisenheimer.
6
Meisenheimer and
Schmidt used the difference in the rate of formation of this ester as a means of separa-
7
ting benzyl alcohol from other alcohols.

(d) p-Toluene sulfonate m. 55. Prepared by Tipson from p-toluene sulfonyl
8
chloride and the alcohol in pyridine solution at 5.

(2) On oxidation with chromic oxide and sulfuric acid, or with potassium perman-
ganate, benzyl alcohol yields benzoic acid. Callaway and Reznek used this latter
9
method for the quantitative determination of small amounts when the benzyl alcohol
is not contaminated by other alcohols.
AROMATIC ALCOHOLS 291
For detecting small quantities, Pfau 10 suggested identifying benzyl alcohol as

(3)
dibenzyloxalate m. 79-81.
To about 0.03 g. of powdered anhydrous potassium carbonate add 10 drops of the
fraction containing benzyl alcohol (more, the amount of benzyl alcohol expected is
if
less than 50%), and 5 drops of diethyloxalate. Warm in a test tube slightly over a
low flame. After about 1 min. slightly cool the solid or yellow reaction mixture, add
2 cc. of water and warm the mixture until the solid compound (dibenzyloxalate) is
dissolved again. After cooling in ice, the crystals formed can be recrystailized from
methyl alcohol, m. 79-81.
If no other primary alcohols are present, which form liquid oxalates soluble in alcohol
and, therefore, hinder the crystallization of dibenzyloxalate, 30% benzyl alcohol can
be detected quite easily. Otherwise, it is advisable to isolate benzyl alcohol first with
phthalic anhydride.
ll
(4) Leonhardt and Wasicky identified benzyl alcohol in essential oils in the
presence of methyl alcohol and ethyl alcohol through the formation of the crystalline
addition product with anhydrous calcium chloride formed by these products and taking
advantage of the lower volatility of the benzyl alcohol from the complex-water mixture
of these three alcohols.
(5) The
use of the ultraviolet absorption spectra has been found quite helpful in
connection with the determination of this compound. Mohler and Hammerle 12 used
this method to evaluate the percentage of benzyl alcohol in aqueous media, as in bitter
almond water. These same authors 13 likewise employed this technique to evaluate
benzyl alcohol in an alcoholic medium, as in cherry brandy.
Benzyl alcohol is a colorless liquid which in very pure form

Properties.
possesses a faint aromatic odor. The following properties have been re-
ported by Timmermans and Hennaut-Roland, Gildemcister and Hoffmann,
14 15
Hesse and Zeitschel, 16 Kahlbaum, 17 Deffet, 18 and Lauffer: 19
m. -15.3 014 -
18
df 1. 03705 14
f .p. - 15.7 19
(1% water content lowers this d]
5
1 .04927 14
14
figure by several degrees) d!J 1. 00095
16 l4
b 762 205.50 n{? 1. 54259
14
b. 205.45
b 25 107 016
17
b 10 92.0
Sol. Soluble in 8 to 9 vol. of 30% alcohol, in 1.5 vol. of 50% alcohol;
15
soluble in about 35 vol. of water
On
exposure to air, benzyl alcohol oxidizes slowly to benzaldehyde (odor
then resembling that of bitter almond oil) and finally to benzoic acid (forma-
tion of crystals in the oil). Benzyl alcohol is only sparingly volatile with
steam. The commercially available synthetic product should be free from
chlorine and contain not more than a trace of benzaldehyde.
Use. widely used by the perfume, cosmetic, and soap
Benzyl alcohol is
industries in the compounding of all kinds of scents, especially of synthetic

292 ALCOHOLS
flower such as jasmine, gardenia, and tuberose. It also serves as an
oils,
important fixative, as a solvent of crystalline or highly viscid substances,

and as a general diluent of perfume mixtures. Occasionally benzyl alcohol
is encountered as an adulterant of a^sential oils.
1
Mitt. Lebensm. Hyg. 30 (1939), 284.
2
8
Ber. 35 (1902), 4093.
6
Rec. trav. chim. 50 (1931), 1046.
Liebigs Ann. 442 (1925), 193.
7
Ibid. 476 (1929), 157.
8
/. Org. Chem. 9 (1944), 238.
9
10
11
Arch. Pharm. 270 (1932), 249. Ztsch. Untcrschung d. Lebensmittd, June (1936), 597.
Deut. Parfumerieztg., October (1932), 364. Chem. Abstracts 26 (1932), 3870.
12
Z. anal Chem. 122 (1941), 202.
18
Mitt. Lebensm.. Hyg. 30 (1939), 284. .
14
/. chim. phys. 32 (1935), 519.
15
"Die Atherischcn Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 447.
16
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 64 (1901), 256.
17
Z. physik. Chem. 26 (1898), 583.
n Butt. soc. chim. Belg. 49 (1940), 223. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 322.
19
Am. Perfumer 25 (1930), 301.
Phenylethyl Alcohol
C 8 H 10 O
#
Mol. Weight 122.16
jS-Phenethyl alcohol. Benzylcarbinol. 2-Phenylethanol
Occurrence.
/3-Phenylethyl alcohol occurs in several essential oils for ex-
ample, in Bourbon geranium oil, in Aleppo pine oil, and probably as tiglate
in Kivu geranium oil. Because of its relatively good solubility in water, the
oilsobtained by steam distillation contain much less phenylethyl alcohol
than the corresponding natural flower oils extracted with volatile solvents
or with hot fat (maceration). This is the case with oil (otto) of rose and con-
crete or absolute of rose, with neroli bigarade oil and concrete or absolute of
orange flowers, most of the phenylethyl alcohol remaining in the distillation

water (rose water and orange flower water). Oil of rose and oil of neroli
seem to contain phenylethyl alcohol, also as esters of benzoic and phenyl-
acetic acid. Interesting is the fact that dried rose petals contain considerable
quantities of phenylethyl alcohol.
Isolation. (1) By fractionation.

(2) Hesse and Zeitschel l suggested isolating phenylethyl alcohol (if no other primary
alcohols are present) by preparing the crystalline addition product with anhydrous
calcium chloride; this method may also serve for the purification of phenylethyl alcohol
since it is easily regenerated from the calcium chloride compound by the addition of
water.
(3) Britton 2 suggested isolating phenylethyl alcohol by the preparation of its acid
phthalate with benzene as a solvent and by further reaction with an excess of sodium
Report of Odorgraphia Committee
3
hydroxide (cf. ).
4
Klipstein purified phenylethyl alcohol by the action of boric, phthalic, maleic,
fumaric, succinic, or oxalic acid. Phenylethyl alcohol is thereby converted into stable
relatively nonvolatile esters, the impurities are removed by vacuum distillation and
the pure phenylethyl alcohol is recovered by hydrolysis of the esters.
Identification. /3-Phenylethyl alcohol can be characterized by several methods:
Diphenylurethane m. 98.5-99.5, according to Hoejenbos and Coppens.
6
(a)
(b) Acid phthalate in. 188-189, according to von Soden and Rojahn. 9
3,5-Dinitrobenzoate m. 108, according to Ashworth and Burkhardt.
7
(c)

8
(d)
(2) Walbaum found that on oxidation with 2 parts of potassium permanganate in
9
about 60 parts of water, phenylethyl alcohol yields benzoic acid m. 122-123; with
chromium trioxide and sulfuric acid, phenylethyl alcohol gives phenylacetaldehyde
and phenylacetic acid m. 77 (cf. Shumeiko 10 ).
(3) For the detection of small amounts (see also "Benzyl Alcohol"), Palfray,
n
Sabetay and Sontag suggested the following procedure:
Heat about 5 drops of the fraction to be tested with 0.1 g. of anhydrous oxalic acid
for 1 to 2 min. over a free flame, add 1 cc. of water, then 2 cc. of alcohol; warm to dis-
solve the formed crystals, and allow to crystallize.
This method gives a good yield of di-(/3-phenylethyl) oxalate m. 51-51.5 (after
recrystallization from 80% alcohol).
Properties. /3-Phenylethyl alcohol is a colorless liquid, possessing a char-

acteristic rose-like odor. Volatile with steam. The following properties have
been reported by Cotton and Mouton, 12 Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 13
14 15
Leonard, Grignard, Report Odorgraphia Committee, Associated Manu-
facturers of Toilet Articles, 16 and Lauffer: 17
17 16
m. -25.8 (with 1% water df 1.018
13 16
m. -30.7) dJI 1.024 -
16 16
b. 217.5-218.5 nf? 1.531
8
b 25 116-118 014 ni?' 1.5337 12
15
bM 104-105
16
b 10 99-99.5
13
b6 93
Sol. Soluble in 2 vol. of 50% alcohol; in about 60 vol. of
13
water
The commercial synthetic product should be free from chlorine.

294 ALCOHOLS
Use. Phenylethyl alcohol is one of the most important aromatics used in
the perfume, cosmetic, soap, and flavoring industries. It serves in all kinds
of scents and is indispensable in rose compounds.
1
Chcm, [21, 66 (1902), 489.
J. prakt.
2
U. S. Patent No. 1,752,365 (to Dow Chcm. Co.), 1930.
*Ind. Eng. Chcm. News Ed., 11 (1933), 114.
4
U. S. Patent No. 2,068,415, Jan. 19, 1937 (to Calco Chem. Co.).
6
Rec. trav. chim. 50 (1931), 1047.
Ber. 33 (1900), 1723.
7
/. Chem. Soc. (1928), 1798.
8
9
Ber. 33 (1900), 2300.
10
J. Applied Chem. (U.S.S.R.) 14 (1941), 93. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 436.
11
Ann. chim. anal. chim. appl. 16 (1933), 338. Chem. Abstracts 27 (1933), 5030.
12
Ann. chim. phys. [81, 28 (1913), 214.
13
14
/. Am. Chem. ffor. 47 (1925), 1779.
16
Ann. chim. phys. [8], 10 (1907), 28.
16
Ind. Eng. Chem. News Ed. 11 (1933), 114.
17
Am. Perfumer 25 (1930), 301.
Phenylpropyl Alcohol
Hydrocinnamyl alcohol. 7-Phenyl-rc-Propyl Alcohol. 3-Phenyl-l-propanol
CH 2 -CH -CH 2 -OH

a
Occurrence. Esterified with cinnamic acid, this alcohol occurs in several
resins,gums, and balsams for example, in Asiatic and American styrax; as

acetate probably in oil of cassia, etc. Frequently 7-phenyl-n-propyl alcohol
is accompanied by cinnamyl alcohol.
Isolation. By fractionation.
However, phenylpropyl alcohol thus obtained from
resins, gums, and balsams cannot be freed entirely from accompanying cinnamyl
alcohol by mere fractionation. Schimmel & Co. 1 purified the alcohol by heating the
mixture with an equal amount of concentrated formic acid, whereby cinnamyl alcohol
while phenylpropyl alcohol is converted into the formate. Phenylpropyl
resinifies,
alcohol can then be obtained pure by steam distillation and saponification.
Carr6 and Libermann 2
found it possible to recover 50% of the alcohol from the
sulfite(C 6 H6C 3 H 6 0) 2 SO, bn 248-254, which decomposes smoothly at 310 to give
an equimolecular mixture of 3-phenylpropene and 3-phenylpropanol. Other members
of the sulfite series of lower molecular weight distill readily at atmospheric pressure.
Identification. y-Phenyl-n-propyl alcohol may be characterized by several methods:
(a) 3,5-Dinitrobenzoate m. 92, as recorded by Huntress and Mulliken. 3
p-Nitrophenylurethane m. 104, according to Hoeke.

4
(b)
(c) 3-Nitrophthalate m. 117, according to Huntress and Mulliken.
6
6
(2) By oxidation. 'Riigheimer found that 7-phenyl-n-propyl alcohol, when cau-
tiously oxidized with chromium trioxide and acetic acid, yields hydrocinnamic acid.
y-Phenyl-n-propyl alcohol is a colorless, somewhat viscid liq-

Properties.
uid possessing a faint odor, reminiscent of cinnamic alcohol and certain species
of hyacinthus. The
following properties have been reported by Law,
7
Va-
von,
8
Briihl,
9
Huston and Agctt, 10 and Gildemeister and Hoffmann: n
7 10
b. 235 df 1.006
b 740 233-235 10
df 1.0079 9
8 10
b 13 120-121 n'g 1.5351
9
n? 1. 53565
Sol. Soluble in about 3 vol. of 50% alcohol; in

1.5 vol. of 00% alcohol; miscible in all
proportions with 70% alcohol; soluble
n
only in more than 300 vol. of water
Use. -y-Phenyl-n-propyl alcohol and are used quite widely in

its esters
the perfume, cosmetic, soap, and flavoring industries for the compounding
of all kinds of scents and flavors, especially in synthetic flower oils.
*
Chem. Zentr. I (1901), 69; German Patent 116,091. [Cf. Kailan and Adler, Monatsh. 63
(1933), 155.]
*Bull. soc. chim. [5], 1 (1934), 1248. Compt. rend. 198 (1934), 274.
3
4
Rec. trav. chim. 64 (1935), 513.
6
6
Liebigs Ann. 172 (1874), 123.
7
/. Chem. Soc. 101 (1912), 1030.
8
Compt. rend. 164 (1912), 361.
9
Liebigs Ann. 200 (1879), 191.
10
J. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 128.
11
"Die Atherischen Cle," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 450.
Cinnamyl Alcohol
Cinnamic alcohol. 7-Phenylallyl alcohol. 3-Phenyl-2-propen-l-ol.

CH=CH-CH -OH 2
Free cinnamyl alcohol has not yet been observed in nature

Occurrence.
but as ester it occurs in several essential oils, gums, balsams, and resins.
296 ALCOHOLS
Cinnamyl cinnamate (styracine), for example, is an important constituent of
styrax, balsam Peru, and other balsams and resins, whereas the acetate occurs
in cassia oil.
Isolation. The ester for instance, cinnamyl cinnamate in styrax

saponified is first
and the free cinnamyl alcohol purified through its calcium chloride addition product.
According to Endoh, this compound m. 157 (uncorr.) may be prepared by dissolving
1
cinnamyl alcohol in dry ether, by adding powdered anhydrous calcium chloride, and
by letting the mixture stand for 24 hr. The calcium chloride addition compound is
finally hydrolized. Hill and Nason used this method for the separation of cinnamyl
2
alcohol from hydrocinnamyl alcohol.

Kharasch, May and Mayo obtained 90% yields of the organic sulfonate by the
3
action of aqueous bisulfite with cinnamyl alcohol in the presence of oxygen or nitrites.
This sodium salt may be recrystallized from alcohol and serves only as a means of
separating the alcohol.
Identification. Cinnamyl alcohol can be characterized by several methods:
(1) Bythe preparation of derivatives:
(a) 3,5-Dinitrobenzoate m. 121, according to Huntress and Mulliken.
4
(b) Phenylurethane m. 90-91.5, according to Pauly, Schmidt and Bo'hme, and

5
Schimmel & Co. 6

a-Naphthylurethane m. 114, according to Bickel and French; m. 119-120,
7
(c)
according to Neuberg and Hirschbcrg.
8
(2) By oxidation, Bohme 9

reported the use of phthalic monoperacid as effective
for the quantitative estimation of cinnamyl alcohol.
Properties. alcohol, which theoretically may exist as cis- or

Cinnamyl
trans- isomers, crystallizes in long, fine, white needles. Its odor resembles
that of hyacinths. The following properties have been reported by (Lauffer
10 11 12 13
and Odorgraphia Committee, Perkin, Briihl, and Gre*dy
Ingalls) for
the commercial product which, according to the latter author, consists mostly
of the trans- isomer:
10 > 13 10
m. 33 dJJ 1.0338
u 12
b. 257.5 (corr.) df 1.0440
13 12
b 17 142 nf? 1. 58190
Sol. Soluble in 3.2 vol. of 50% alcohol at 25, in
4.2 vol. of 50% alcohol at 15, in about 2
vol. of 60% alcohol 10
The liquid cis- isomer is colorless and highly refractive. According to

Gre*dy, this isomer synthetically prepared has these properties:
bio 127
df 1.041
nf? 1.5710
Cinnamyl alcohol and its esters are quite widely used in the perfume,
Use.
cosmetic, and soap industries where they serve as excellent fixatives, also to
impart floral, hyacinth-like notes to all kinds of scents.
1
Rec. trav. chim. 44 (1925), 871.
*J. Am. Chem. Soc. 46 (1924), 2245.
3
J. Org. Chem. 3 (1938), 175.
4
6
Ber. 67 (1924), 1329.
6
7
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 48 (1926), 749.
8
Biochem. Z. 27 (1910), 343.
9
Ber. 70B (1937), 379.
"Ind. Eng. Chem. News Ed. 11 (1933), 114.
11
J. Chem. Soc. 69 (1890), 1228.
^Liebigs Ann. 236 (1886), 17.
13
Bull. soc. chim. [5], 3 (1936), 1098.
Cuminyl Alcohol
Mol. Weight 150.21
Cuminic alcohol. Cumic alcohol. p-Isopropylbenzyl alcohol
H,-OH
Occurrence. Cuminyl alcohol seems to be a minor constituent only of a

few essential oils where it occurs in free and in esterified form. Seidel, Schinz
and Miiller l
isolated small quantities of free cuminyl alcohol from French
lavender oil. Penfold 2 observed the presence of this alcohol (as ester) in
the volatile oil derived from the leaves of Eucalyptus Bakeri Maiden.
Isolation. fractional distillation of the essential oil in vacuo, preparation of the

By
acid phthalate, and repeated fractionation of the regenerated alcohol. The curainyl
alcohol may be purified through its allophanate (see below).
Identification.In the course of their research on the composition of French lavender
3
oil, Seidel, Schinz and Miiller noted that the melting points of certain derivatives of
cuminyl alcohol given by earlier workers differed from their own findings. To clarify
these discrepancies, Seidel, Schinz and Miiller 4 purified the natural alcohol (from
298 ALCOHOLS
lavender oil) most carefully, also synthesized cuminyl alcohol by several different
methods, and prepared pure derivatives by repeated crystallization in various solvents:
(1) Allophanate m. 184-185 (after four recrystallizations from cyclohexane-
petroleum ether). Earlier, Mastagli had reported a melting point of 201.
6
(2) 3,5-Dinitrobenzoatc m. 95-96 (after two recrystallizations from cyclohexane-

petroleum ether). Earlier, Cooke had recorded a melting point of 107.
6
(3) Phenylurethane m. 55 (after three recrystallizations from methyl alcohol).

8
Earlier, Cookc, as well as Mastagli, had noted a melting point of 62.
7
Properties. Cuminyl alcohol is a colorless to yellowish oil. The following

9
properties have been reported by Perkin, Semmler,
10
von Rechenberg, n
12 13 14
Kraut, Bert, Palfray, Sabetay and Mastagli, Anschiitz and Reiter, 16
16 17
Mastagli, and Seidel, Schinz and Miiller:
9 9
b. 248.4-248.9 (corr.) dg 0.9753
246.6 n 12 16
84 '
14 16
' '
d} 0.9818 -
13 12
246.0 (corr.) d 15 0.9775
13 9
b 20 140 d}^ 0.9805
14 16 4 13
b 13 122.5 -
dl 0.983
124 017 0.9796"
15 9
bw 130.2M30.4 dj 0.9869
121-124 17 d 0.978 10
5
bn 120-121 17 nj?' 1.5210 14 - 16
4 17
n{> 1.5183
1.528"
10
nD 1.5217
Use. Little is known about the use of cuminyl alcohol in our industries.
1
Helv. Chim. Ada
27 (1944), 663.
2
J. Proc. Hoy. Soc. N. S. Wales 61 (1927), 179.
3
Helv. Chim. Ada 27 (1944), 671.
4
Ibid., 672.
6
Ann. chim. [11], 10 (1938), 302.
6
/. Chem. Soc. (1938), 1825.
7
Ibid.
*Ann. chim. [11], 10 (1938), 302.
J. Chem. Soc. 69 (1896), 1198.
10
#er. 33 (1900), 1461.
11
"Einfache und fraktioniertc Destination in Theorie und Praxis," Schimmel & Co.,
Leipzig (1923), 262.
*Liebigs Ann. 192 (1878), 224.
13
Compt. rend. 177 (1923), 452. Bull soc. chim. [4], 37 (1925), 1577.
14
Compt. rend. 203 (1936), 1523.
15
"Die Destination unter vermiiidertem Druck," 2d Ed. (1895), through von Rechenberg,
"Einfache und fraktioniertc Destination in Theorie und Praxis," Schimmel & Co.,
Leipzig (1923), 299.
u Ann. chim. 10 (1938), 281.
[11],
17
Helv. Chim. Ada 27 (1944), 672.
MISCELLANEOUS ALCOHOLS 299
E. MISCELLANEOUS ALCOHOLS
Cryptol
4-Isopropyl-2-cyclohexen-l-ol
H
C OH
H2 C
/ \CH
H2 C CH
CH
CH
HC CH
Galloway, Dewar and Read prepared Z-cryptol by the reduction of Z-cryp-
*
tone (see "Cryptone") with the Ponndorf reagent. Purified through its p-
nitrobenzoate in. 84, []D 168 30' (c = 2.1 in chloroform), /-cryptol had
these properties:
bg 97
[a] D -139 20' (c = 2 in ale.)
1.4771
It could be characterized by the preparation of these derivatives:

(1) 3,5-Dinitrobenzoate m. 115 (Galloway, Dewar and Read)
Phenylurethane m. 105 (Gillespie, Macbeth and Swanson )
2
(2)
a-Naphthylurethane m. 118 (Gillespie, Macbeth and Swanson).

(3)
Macbeth and Winzor 3 prepared d-cryptol from d-cryptone by a similar
method and noted these properties:
72
[]>
5
+ 146 24' (c = 2.2 in ale.)
nf? 1.4796
4
Wienhaus and reported the probable occurrence of c?-4-isopro-
Striegler
pyl-2-cyclohexen-l-ol (d-cryptol) in the oil derived from water fennel (Phel-
landrium aquaticum L.).
1
/. Chem. Soc. (1936), 1595.
8
Ibid. (1938), 1820.
*Ibid. (1939), 264.
4
Ber. Schimmel &Co. (1937), 91.
300 ALCOHOLS
16
a- and p-A -Androstenol
Mol. Weight 274.43
CH 3
HO''
H H
Alcohol F Alcohol G
1 6 18
,-
-androsten-3-ol) (0-A -androsten-3-ol)
16
Occurrence. a- and /3-A -Androstenol occur in the testes of swine.
Isolation. By chroma tographic separation on aluminum oxide in petroleum

ether-benzene (1:1) mixture.
16
According to Prelog and Ruzicka, and
1
Properties. a- /3-A -androstenol
have these properties:
Alcohol F
m. 142.5M43
MD 2
+13 6' (2)
Akohol G
m. 123
20
I) +6 30' (2)
The odor of a- and #-A 16 -androstenol resembles that of musk but is more
animal-likeand closer to natural musk than the purified ring ketones cive-
tone and muscone which possess a somewhat sweet and flowery note. The
odor of the a- alcohol is stronger than that of epimer /?-; the latter has
its
even been described as odorless. The corresponding ketones smell stronger

than the alcohols and are more offensive.
The relation of a- and -A 16-androstenol to civetone is interesting in so far

as these epirneric alcohols can be visualized as derived from civetol by ring
MISCELLANEOUS ALCOHOLS 301
closures; thus they could correspondingly be named as dimethyl tetracyclo-

civetol or dimethyl tetracycloheptadecenol.
Civctone
Ruzicka and Weiland 2 succeeded in synthesizing a- and /3-A 10 -an-

Prelog,
drostenol from androstan-ol-17j(3-one-3-hexahydrobenzoate.
Use. The literature does not reveal details of the use of 3-a- and 0-A 16-
androstenols.
1
Helv. Chim. Ada 27 (1944), 65.
2
Ibid. 27 (1944), 66.
III. ALDEHYDES
A. ALIPHATIC ALDEHYDES
Introduction. With the exception of citral and citronellal, which will be

described in more detail, these aldehydes do not play an important role in
H
/
essential oils. The lowest members of this series, viz., formaldehyde II C=O,
H
/
and acetaldehyde CIl3-C=O, occur frequently in the distillation waters of
volatile oils; they are probably products of decomposition and degradation
of more complex compounds in the course of steam distillation. Due to
their solubility in water, these aldehydes remain dissolved in the distillation
water but may accumulate in the oil of cohobation if the distillation waters
are redistilled (cohobated).
It isnot the purpose of this work to record all properties and methods of
isolation pertaining to the lower aliphatic aldehydes as these data may be
obtained readily in any modern standard book on organic chemistry or quali-
tative organic analysis. Special mention may be made of certain recent
volumes that should prove to be particularly useful as adjuncts to this phase
of diagnosis. Huntress and Mulliken's excellent work, ''Identification of
Pure Organic Compounds," Wiley, 1941; and Heilbron's three-volume trea-
tise, "Dictionary of Organic Compounds," revised in 1943, are especially to
be recommended for their extended lists of derivatives and for general prop-
erties of organics; Karrer's treatise, "Organic Chemistry," on general reac-
tions is a valuable aid; Meyer's "Analyse und Konstitutions-Ermittlung or-
ganischer Verbindungen" relates to analytical methods. It will suffice, there-
fore, to touch on the members of this group only briefly. Propionaldehyde

H H
(propanal) C2H 5 -C=O, butyraldehyde (butanal) C3ir 7 -C=O, valeraldehyde
II
/
(pentanal) C 4 Il9-C=O, iso valeraldehyde, and caproaldehyde (hexanal)
H
occur in the foreruns of several volatile oils, for example, in
eucalyptus and peppermint oils. Because of their irritating, cough-provok-
ing vapor, they tend to impart to the oil a disagreeable character and should,
therefore, be removed by fractionation of the crude oil. Heptaldehyde (hep-
tanal, enanthal) possesses a pronounced fatty odor.
305
306 ALDEHYDES
Much more important are the higher aliphatic aldehydes, especially n-octyl-
H
/
aldehyde (octanal, caprylaldehyde) C7Hi5'C=O, n-nonylaldehyde (nonanal,
H II
/ /
pelargonaldehyde) C 8 Hi 7 -C=O, and n-decylaldehyde (decanal) C9Hi 9 -C=0.
Owing to their powerful and characteristic odor, these aldehydes play a very
definite role in the odor and flavor of an oil, although the oil may contain
only traces of these aldehydes. Such

the case, for example, with nonyl-
is
aldehyde occurring in orris root, rose, and probably lemon oil, with decylal-
dehyde in oil of neroli bigarade, sweet orange, and coriander seed. In some
cases the immature plant coriander, for instance contains a much larger
percentage of these aldehydes than the matured plant (seed in this case); in
other words, the aldehyde seems to be a precursor in the biochemical reac-
tions leading to terpene alcohols and esters. If such plants or parts of plants
are distilled prematurely, the odor and flavor of the resulting oil may be en-
tirely differentfrom that of the oil derived from well matured plants (seed);
in fact, such an oil may be completely unusable. Due to their powerful
odor, even a slight excess of these aldehydes above the normal content, which
is usually very small, may completely change the odor characteristics of the
oil. Most of these aldehydes are now obtainable by synthetic methods;
therefore, they form valuable adjuncts in the compounding of artificial oils,
flavors, and scents in general.

Unsaturated lower aliphatic aldehydes, too, occur in some essential oils,
the most important representative probably being a, /3-hexenal (/5-propyl-
H
/
acrolein) CH3 .CH 2 .CH 2 -CH=CH.C=0, the so-called leaf aldehyde which
has been obtained by steam distillation of green leaves and which possesses
a pronounced odor of green foliage.
In general, these compounds give all the ordinary reactions of the aliphatic
aldehydes, viz., formation of cyanohydrins, bisulfite complexes, oxidation to
acids (reduction of ammoniacal silver and copper solutions), polymerization
(especially lower members of the series), and reduction to alcohols. All these
reactions may play an important role in connection with isolation or diag-
nostic procedures.
Moreover, these compounds readily yield many crystalline derivatives

from the carbonyl group as oximes, semicarbazones, anilides, and substituted
hydrazones. These latter compounds have been particularly well investi-
gated in the recent past and now appear as preferred derivatives because of
their insolubility, high melting points, and speed of reaction. In this re-
gard they have now replaced the oximes and semicarbazones so often met
ALIPHATIC ALDEHYDES 307
with in earlier analytical studies, in fact the nitrophenylhydrazones have even

found a basis in quantitative chemical analysis of several organics.
E. C. Horning and M. G. Horning, "Methone Derivatives of Aldehydes/' J. Org.

Chem. 11 (1946), 95. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 3097.
(a) SATURATED ALIPHATIC ALDEHYDES.
Formaldehyde
CH2 O Mol. Weight 30.03
H
II -
C=O
Occurrence. Formaldehyde has been reported to occur in several volatile
oils and their distillation waters, but in most cases this aldehyde was charac-
terized by simple color reactions. Curtius and Franzen 1 claimed that for
the definite identification of formaldehyde in essential oils or their distilla-
tion waters it would be necessary first to remove the volatile acids and sub-
sequently to oxidize the formaldehyde with silver oxide into formic acid
which can be determined as such.
Isolation. The method to be be conditioned by the surrounding

employed will
medium as this aldehyde is readily volatile with steam and depolymerized with
aqueous acids; therefore, trial should first be made to obtain its solutions of the aqueous
monomer by steam distilling in presence of phosphoric acid. The aqueous layer may
be used to evaluate the formaldehyde by precipitation of the phloroglucinol complex
2
(cf. Meyer ) or by hydrogen peroxide titration (cf. Assocn. of Official Agricultural
3
Chemists ).
Identification. Formaldehyde can be characterized by several methods:

(1) By color reactions:
(a) Formaldehyde reduces Fehling's solution, and forms a silver mirror with Tollen's
reagent. It gives the rcsorcin and phenolphthalein reactions, both of which yield red
to violet tinted condensation products.
(b) Whenqualitative tests of high sensitivity are required, the phenylhydrazine
hydrochloride, Hehner, phloroglucinol or Leach tests may be employed (cf. Assocn.
4
of Official Agricultural Chemists ).
(a) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 181-182 (yellow needles from benzene), according
to Bamberger. 5 Even dilute solutions of formaldehyde react with p-nitrophenyl-
hydrazine hydrochloride on standing or warming.
(b) 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 167 (from alcohol), according to Bryant."
Properties. Pure formaldehyde gas boils at 21, d_ 2 o 0.8153. An

aqueous solution containing 30 per cent formaldehyde forms a constant boil-
ing mixture b. 98.8. It has a sharp odor irritating the mucous membranes.
308 ALDEHYDES
Soluble in water. The 40 per cent solution in water is commercially known
7
as "Formalin" (cf. Walker ).
Use. Formaldehyde is used as a powerful disinfectant in numerous in-

dustrial products and pharmaceutical preparations.
1
Ber. 46 (1912), 1715.
"Analyse und Konstitutions-Ermittlung organischer Verbindungen," 3d Ed. (1916).
2
3
"Methods of Analysis," 1940 Ed., 68.
4
Ibid. 460.
6
Ber. 32 (1899), 1807.
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1932), 3760.
7
Ind. Eng. Chem. Ind. Ed. 23 (1931), 1220. /. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1933), 2821.
Acetaldehyde
H
CH 3 C=O-
Occurrence. Acetaldehyde has been observed in the first fractions of sev-

eral essential oils and in their distillation waters for example, in oil of anise,
caraway, camphor, orris root, and peppermint.
Isolation. Through the bisulfitecompound, with quantitative assay effected by

titration of excess bisulfite with iodine according to Ripper, Fiirth and Charnass, 2 1
and Parkinson and Wagner. 3

Identification. Acetaldehyde can be characterized by several methods:
(a) Acetaldehyde reduces Fehling's solution, or Tollen's reagent.
(b) On treatment with 10% sodium nitroprusside solution and piperidine, acetalde-
hyde gives a deep blue color (Simon's test). According to Lewin, 4 propionaldehyde
and acrolein, too, develop this color whereas formaldehyde does not give the reaction.
p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 128.5, according to Hyde.
5
(a)
(b) p-Iodobenzoylhydrazonc m. 224 (corr.), by Sah and Hsli. 6
In dilution acctaldehyde has a rather agreeable odor but in

Properties.
concentrated form it irritates the mucous membranes. The following prop-
8
erties have been recorded by Maass and Boomer, 7 and de Leeuw:
m. - 123.3 8
dj
1
0.809 7
7 8 8
b. 20.8 nj 1.3392
Acetaldehyde is miscible with water but can be salted out with calcium
chloride; miscible with alcohol or ether. Readily volatile with steam.
Use. Acetaldehyde, as such, is sparingly used in the flavor industry.
1
Monatsh. 21 (1900), 1079.
2
Biochem. Z. 26 (1910), 207.
8
Ind. Eng. Chem. Anal. Ed. 6 (1934), 433. Cf. Meyer, "Analyse und Konstitutions-
Ermittlung organischer Verbindungen" (1916).
*Ber. 32 (1899), 3388. Cf. also van Urk, Pharm. Weekblad 62 (1925), 2. Chem. Zentr. I
(1925), 993.
5
Ber. 32 (1899), 1813.
6
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 349.
7
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 44 (1922), 1718.
8
Z. physik. Chem. 77 (1911), 302, 311.
Propionaldehyde
H
CH 3 -CH2 .C=0
Occurrence. Propionaldehyde has been observed in the first runs of Finnish
pine oil ("Kienol").
Isolation. With saturated aqueous sodium bisulfite, propionaldehyde yields a

crystalline bisulfite compound sparingly soluble in ethyl alcohol which may be used
for the quantitative determination of this aldehyde.
Identification. (1) Colorimetric reaction:
Propionaldehyde gives the silver mirror test with Tollen's reagent.
(a) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 125 (yellow needles from 50% alcohol), according
to Bauer and Strauss. 1
(b) 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 155, according to Allen. 2
p-Iodobenzoylhydrazone m. 196 (corr.), by Sah and Hsii.
3
(c)
4
Voellmy, Linnemann, and Walden
5 6
Properties. recorded these properties:
1
m. -81 6
df 0.8074 5
5 4
b 739 48.1-49.1 nj|b 1.3695
Propionaldehyde is soluble in 5 parts of water at 20. Volatile with steam.

The odor resembles that of acetaldehyde.
1
Ber. 66 (1932), 311. Cf. also Griebel and Weiss, Mikrochemie 6 (1928), 157. Chem.
Zentr. I (1928), 385. Cf. Harries and Oppenheim, Chem. Zentr. II (1916), 991.
2
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 2957.
8
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 349.
4
Z. physik. Chem. 127 (1927), 345.
6
Liebigs Ann. 161 (1872), 22.
Z. Physikal. Chem. 66 (1906), 220.
310 ALDEHYDES
n-Butyraldehyde
C4 H8 O Mol. Weight 72.10
(Butanal)
H
CH3 CH2 CH2 C=O
Occurrence.Butyraldehyde has been identified in oil of cajuput, Califor-
nia Eucalyptus globulus, and Monarda fistulosa.
Isolation. Through the bisulfite compound which n-butyraldehyde forms with

sodium saturated aqueous solution, and which
bisulfite in may be used for the
quantitative determination of this aldehyde.
p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 91-92, according to Dakin.
1
(1)
2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 123 (from alcohol), according to Bryant.
2
(2)
3
(3)
4 5
Properties. Timmermans, and Hartung and Adkins recorded these
properties:
4
b. 74.7
5
df 0.7988
5
1.3750
n-Butyraldehyde soluble in 27 parts of water.

is With water it forms a
constant boiling mixture. Oxidation with alkaline potassium permanganate
yields n-butyric acid.
1
J. Biol. Chem. 4 (1908), 235. Cf. Harries and Oppenhcim, Chem. Zentr TI (1916), 992.
2
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1932), 3760.
3
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 349.
4
6
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 49 (1927), 2520.
n-Valeraldehyde
H
CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 C=O
- -
Occurrence. This aldehyde probably occurs in oil of iva.
Isolation. With sodium bisulfite in saturated aqueous solution, this aldehyde yields
a sparingly soluble bisulfite compound.
(1) 2,4-Dinitrophenymydrazone m. 98 (crystallized from alcohol),* according to
Allen. 1
*
According to Airs, Firth and Garner, valeraldehyde yields a 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone
m. 107.6 (corr.), variously given as 88, 98 and 106.5-107. J. Chem. Soc. (1946), 1089.
(2) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 74-75, by Schmidt, Peterson and Fred. 2

3
(3)
(4) Hydrazone from l-methyl-3-carbohydrazidopyridinium p-toluene sulfonate m.
by Alien and Gates.
4
142 (corr.),
5 6
Simon, Bruylants and Ernould, and Zander
7
Properties. reported these
properties:
5 6
m. -91.5 df 0.80952
7 7
b. 103.4 dn.2 0.8185
5 6
103.7 nf? 1.39436
5
1.40800
n-Valeraldehyde is sparingly soluble in water. With water it forms a con-

stant boiling mixture b 747 80.6 containing 86 per cent of n-valeraldehyde by
volume. The odor of n-valeraldehyde is sharp and penetrating.
1
J. Am. Chem.
Soc. 62 (1930), 2957.
2/. Biol. Chem. 61 (1924), 170. Sen, Biochem. Z. 140 (1923), 452.
*Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 349.
4
/. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 599.
5
Bull. soc. chim. Bdg. 38 (1929), 56.
6
Bull. sci. accul. roy. Belg. [5] 17 (1931), 1174.
7
Liebigs Ann. 224 (1884), 81.
Isovaleraldehyde
2-Methyl-n-butyraldehyde. 3-Methylbutanal
H3 C H
\CII-CH -C=0
/
2
II 3 C
Occurrence. This aldehyde occurs in several volatile oils and usually can
be recognized by its disagreeable cough-provoking vapor. For this reason
the aldehyde should be removed by fractionation of the oils. Isovaleralde-
hyde has been observed in American and French peppermint oils, in oil of
Eucalyptus globulus, cajuput, niaouli, clove, Java citronella, East Indian san-
dalwood, and in a few other volatile oils.
Through the sparingly soluble bisulfite compound which isovaleraldehyde

Isolation.
forms with sodium bisulfite in saturated aqueous solution.
By
(1) 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 123 (crystallized from alcohol), according to
Allen. 1
p-Iodobenzoylhydrazone m. 218-219 (corr.), by Sah and Hsii.
2
(2)
159 (corr.) by Allen and Gates. 8
312 ALDEHYDES
6
Properties. Harries and Oppenheim, 4 and Bhagwat recorded these prop-
erties:
5
b 684 88.5-89.5
4
dig 0.7845
5
d 0.8212
4
n?? 1.39023
Oxidation of isovaleraldehyde yields isovaleric acid.

1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 2957.
2
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 349.
3
J.Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 599.
4
Chem. Zentr. II (1916), 992.
*J. Chem. Soc. 123 (1923), 1805.
n-Caproaldehyde
C 6 IIi 2 O Mol. Weight 100.16
Caproic aldehyde Hexanal.
H
CH 3 -(CH2 )4 .C==0
Occurrence. n-Caproaldehyde occurs in oil of Eucalyptus globulus and in

the oils derived from other eucalyptus species. Together with butyralde-
hyde and isovaleraldehyde it causes the disagreeable cough-provoking prop-
erty of certain eucalyptus oils which should be eliminated by rectification
of the crude oils.
Through the sparingly soluble bisulfite compound which n-caproaldehyde

Isolation.
forms with sodium bisulfite in saturated aqueous solution.
2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 106-107, according to Newman.
1
(1)
(2) p-Iodobenzoylhydrazone m. 148-149 (corr.), by Sail and Hsii. 2
(3) Hydrazone from l-methyl-3-carbohydrazidopyridinium p-toluene sulfonate in.
153 (corr.), by Allen and Gates. 3
Properties. Bachman 4
and Bruylants 5
4 5
b. 126-129 df 0.8139
B 5
128.1 nf? 1.4039
n-Caproaldehyde readily oxidizes to n-caproic acid even on exposure to

air.
1
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1935), 734.
2
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 349.
*J. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 599.
"Organic Syntheses," Coll. Vol. II, New York,
4
John Wiley, p. 324.
5
Enanthaldehyde
n-Heptaldehyde. Heptanal
H
CH 3 '(CH 2 5 .C=0 )
Occurrence. This aldehyde does not seem to occur as such in essential

oils although its occurrence in certain oxidized and pyrolyzed fatty oils is
recognized.
Isolation. Through the crystalline bisulfite compound which enanthaldehyde forms

with sodium bisulfite in saturated aqueous solution, and which may be used also for
the quantitative determination of this aldehyde.
Hydrazone from l-methyl-3-carbohydrazidopyridinium p-toluene sulfonate,
(1)
m. 160 (corr.), by Allen and Gates. 1
(2) p-Iodobenzoylhydrazone m. 190-191 (corr.), by Sah and Hsu.
2

3
Campbell.
Properties. Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 4 Hartung and Adkins, 5 and Def-

6
fet reported the following properties:
6 6
m. -43.3 nb 1.4077
4 4
b 759 153-155 nj? 1.412-1.414
6
df 0.80902
5 6
d] 0.82162
6
dj 0.83423
Sol. Soluble in about 12 vol. of 50% alcohol; sol-
4
uble in 4 vol. of 60% alcohol ,
Enanthaldehyde has a penetrating, characteristic fatty odor. Oxidation

with potassium permanganate yields n-heptanoic acid.
Use. Enanthaldehyde is used mainly in imitation cognac oils.^ Because
of its powerful odor, enanthaldehyde is also used in deodorants designed for
overcoming undesirable notes in technical preparations.

1
J. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 599.
2
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 349.
3
Analyst 61 (1936), 392.
4
6
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 49 (1927), 2520.
6
314 ALDEHYDES
n-Caprylaldehyde
Caprylic aldehyde. n-Octylaldehyde. Octanal
H
CH 3 -(CH 2 .O=0 ) fl
Occurrence. This aldehyde occurs in oil of lemongrass, probably also in

oil of lemon.
Isolation. Through the sodium bilsulfite compound.

p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 80, according to Stephen.
1
(1)

Allen. 2

3
(3)

Properties. Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 6 Semmler, 6 Harries and Oppen-

heim,
7
and Schimmel & Co. 8 reported these properties:
7 8
b. 171-173 nf? 1.41667
6 7
b9 60-61 nf? 1.42167
6
d 20 0.8211
5
d}i 0.827
n-Caprylaldehyde has an odor similar to that of enanthaldehyde. Vola-

tile with steam. Oxidation with potassium permanganate yields n-caprylic
acid.
Use. n-Caprylaldehyde is used very sparingly in imitation citrus oils,
especially lemon and orange.
1
J. Chem. Soc. 127 (1925), 1875.
2
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 2957.
3
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 349.
iJ.Org.Chem. 6(1941), 599.
6
*Ber. 42 (1909), 1161.
7
Chem. Zentr. II (1916), 993.
a. 11(1901), 1375.
Pelargonaldehyde
n-Nonylaldehyde. Nonanal
II
C=0
Pelargonaldehyde occurs in oil of orris root, cinnamon, lemon-
Occurrence.
grass, mandarin, in certain types of rose oil, and probably also in oil of lemon.
Isolation. Through the bisulfite compound which pelargonaldehyde forms with

sodium bisulfite in saturated aqueous solution.
2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 96, according to Allen.
1
(1)
(2) 7>-Iodobenzoylhydrazonc m. 135- 136 (corr.), according to Sah and Hsii.
2
(3) Hydrazone from l-inethyl-3-carbohydrazidopyridinium p-toluene sulfonate m.

152 (corr.) by Allen and Gates. 3
Properties. Walbaum and Stephan 4

reported for pelargonaldehyde as iso-
lated from German rose oil:
bi 3 80-82
d ls 0.8277
n{? 1.42452
Sabaticr and Mailhe, 5 and Holde and Zadek 6

reported the following
properties:
6 6
b. 185 di 7 .5 0.839
7 5
bi 2 80-83 6
n}>
-
1.4276 6
Pelargonaldehyde has a powerful odor somewhat reminiscent of rose, but

with a fatty by-note. Oxidation of pelargonaldehyde yields pelargonic acid.
Use. Pelargonaldehyde is used widely but most sparingly as an adjunct
in all kinds of perfume compositions, especially the floral types, such as rose.
It also serves to great advantage in the compounding of certain artificial es-
sential oils.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 2957.
2
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 352.
3
J. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 599.
4
Ber. 33 (1900), 2302.
6
Cornpt. rend. 158 (1914), 987.
6
Ber. 66 (1923), 2056.
316 ALDEHYDES
n-Decylaldehyde
Ci H20 O Mol. Weight 156.26
Capric aldehyde. Decanal
H
CH3 (CH^s *
C=O
Occurrence. n-Decylaldehyde has been observed in oil of orris root, Abies
alba, savin, lemongrass, sweet orange, neroli bigarade, mandarin, coriander,
acacia flower oil, and in a few other oils.
Isolation. Through the sodium bisulfite compound which n-decylaldehyde forms

with sodium bisulfite in saturated aqueous solution, and which can be decomposed by
treatment with aqueous sodium carbonate. According to Dodge, 1 this method may
be used to separate n-decylaldehyde from citronellal or from citral.
(1) Thiosemicarbazone m. 99- 100, according to Uhl.

2

3
(2)
p-Iodobenzoylhydrazone m. 151-152 (corr.), by Sah and Hsli.
4
(3)
Properties. Stephan,
5
whoisolated n-decylaldehyde from sweet orange oil,
Schimmel &
Co., who
6
isolated this aldehyde from lemongrass oil, and Uhl 7
5
b 755 207-209 (with slight d 20 0.8502 7
7
decomposition) nf? 1.4287
5 5
bia 93-94 nj> 1.42977 6
b6 . 5 80-81 6
n-Decylaldehyde prepared synthetically usually has a lower specific gravity

than that noted above (about 0.830 at 15).
n-Decylaldehyde possesses a strong odor somewhat reminiscent of sweet
orange oil. On oxidation with air or with potassium permanganate, n-decyl-
aldehyde yields n-capric acid.
Use.n-Decylaldehyde is used extensively but most sparingly as an ad-
junct in all kinds of perfume compositions. It is indispensable in imitation
citrus oils, particularly orange.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 37 (1915), 2760.
*J. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 24 (1935), 381.
3
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 2958.
4
Rec. trav. chim. 59 (1940), 349.
6
J. prakt. Chem. II, 62 (1900), 525.
8
Ber. Schimmel &
Co. Oct. (1905), 43.
7
J. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 24 (1935), 381.
Lauraldehyde
n-Dodecylaldehyde. Dodecanal
H
C=O
Occurrence. Lauraldehyde has been observed in the oils of Abies alba,
sweet orange, rue, and Okinawa pine.
Isolation. Through the sodium bisulfite compound.

Identification. By
(1) Semicarbazone m. 105-105.5, according to Naves.
1
(2) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 90, according to Mannich and Nadelmann.

2
(3) 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 106, according to Allen.

3
(4) Hydrazone from l-methyl-3-carbohydrazidopyridinium p-toluene sulfonate in.

Properties.Lauraldehyde, a solid at room temperature, possesses a very

strong odor slightly reminiscent of pine needle and orange oils. The following
5 6
properties have been reported by Zaar, Siegmund, Mannich and Nadel-
7 8
mann, and Naves:
B 8 8
m. 44.5 -
df 0.831 9
b. 227-235 6
nb 1.43704 8
bu 124-126 7
b2 . 4 9G-97 8
According to the last-named author, the aldehyde regenerated from the

semicarbazone by oxalic hydrolysis melts at 11, but gradually deposits
Krafft's aldehyde m. 44.5 (see above).
On exposure to air, and more readily in the presence of traces of mineral
acids, lauraldehyde polymerizes to a dimer. Mannich and Nadelmann 9 re-
ported that this dimcr crystallizes from 50 parts of alcohol or 10 parts of ether,
melting then at 57. The dimer or polymer is very stable and docs not
depolymerize on heating, steam distilling, or by treatment with warm sulfuric
acid. On oxidation lauraldehyde most readily yields lauric acid.
Use. Lauraldehyde is used extensively but most sparingly as an adjunct
in all kinds of perfume compositions of fancy and oriental character.
1
2
Ber. 63 (1930), 798.
3
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 2958.
4
.7. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 599.
6
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 132 (1931), 169. Cf. Krafft, Ber. 13 (1880), 1414.
6
Monatsh. 62 (1929), 190.
7
Ber. 63 (1930), 798.
8
Ber. 63 (1930), 798.
318 ALDEHYDES
Stearaldehyde
Stearic aldehyde. n-Octadecyl aldehyde. Octadecanal
H
CH3 -(CH2 ) 16 .C=0
Stearaldehyde was found by Ikeda in the volatile oil of pha-

l
Occurrence.
chium or Cinnamomum micranthum Hayata, a tree resembling camphor and
growing in Formosa.
Isolation. Through the sodium bisulfite compound m. 143 (with decomposition)

which an ethereal solution of this aldehyde yields on shaking for a long time with a
saturated aqueous solution of sodium bisulfite.
Identification. Stearaldehyde can be identified by the preparation of several
derivatives:
(1) Semicarbazone m. 108-109, according to Stephen. 2
(2) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 101 (from methyl alcohol), according to the same
author.
Properties. Stearaldehyde melts at 38 and readily polymerizes to a white

solid m. 80.
Oxidation with potassium permanganate in glacial acetic acid at 100
yields stcaric acid.
Use. Stearaldehyde is not used in our industries.
1
/. Chem. Soc. Japan 61 (1930), 335.
2
J. Chem. Soc. 127 (1925), 1876.
(b) UNSATURATED ALIPHATIC ALDEHYDES.
Artemisal
= Methacrolein
CH3 H
CH2 =CH C=O
I /
Adams and Oakberg 1
from the volatile oil of Artemisia tridentata
isolated
typica (black sage), fam. Compositae, a highly volatile aldehyde which was
strongly lachrymatory and possessed the characteristic odor of sagebrush.
They named this new aldehyde artemisal.
A few 2
years later Kinney, Jackson, DeMytt and Harris showed that the
artemisal of Adams and Oakberg was in reality methacrolein. On fairly
rapid heating, the 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone melted at 2p6*~207 (with de-

composition), on slow heating at 200-201 (With decomjtagiiion) .
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1934), 457.
2
/. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 612.
2-Hexen-l-al
a, 0-IIexylenaldehyde. /3-Propylacrolein. "Leaf aldehyde"
H
CH 3 CII 2 -
CH 2 CH=CH C=0
-
Occurrence, This aldehyde was first identified by Curtius and Franzen 1 in

the oil distilled from the leaves of Carpinus bctalus L. but was later detected
by these same workers in the oils derived from green leaves of numerous
plant species. Takei, Sakato and Ono likewise isolated a "leaf aldehyde"
2
reported as 2-hexen-l-al from tea leaf, mulberry, acacia, and radish leaf oil;
while Janistyn 3 somewhat later reported that the "leaf aldehyde" obtained
by oxidation of /rans-3-hexen-l-ol with chromic acid has been recognized in
tea, ivy "Fallnetz," clover, oak, beech, wheat, robinia, mulberry, black radish,
violet leaves, and cucumber. Recent work of Bohnsack 4 indicates the pres-
ence of 2-hexen-l-al in Java citronella oil. However, either the properties
reported for the aldehyde or the operations described in its isolation raise
some question as to whether or not all these authorities are dealing with the
same isomer of hexenal.
Isolation.In the case of isolation too, confusion exists, as Nye and Spoehr 6 maintain
that the separation of "hexenal" from fresh leaves requires a pro-exposure to air for a
period of time, while Takei, Sakato and Ono favor the view that both the hexenols
6
from which the aldehyde may arise, as well as the 2-hexenal per se, are present chiefly
in fresh leaves, and require neither fermentation nor enzyme action for their isolation.
These latter authors, however, obtained only 0.0007% yield, whereas Nye and Spoehr 7
report 0.04%. Here again it is quite possible that the workers dealt with isomeric
aldehydes.
Acetone extraction 8 has been employed to obtain the a,/3-hexylenaldehyde, but
steam distillation seems to be the most convenient method for isolating the crude
compound.
On treatment of the distillate with an alcoholic solution of m-nitro-benzoylhydrazine,
this aldehyde forms a hydrazone m. 167, from which the hexenal can be regenerated,
according to Curtius and Franzen.
9
Identification. Theoretically, this unsaturated aldehyde may exist as cis- and trans-
isomers, therefore different preparative methods could yield different forms of the
same aldehyde, the derivatives of which possess variant properties. However, no
proof has as yet been offered to show the identity of any of the following compounds
and the divergence between properties of certain of these derivatives may be due to
the existence of different geometric forms rather than formation from meta-isomers.
320 ALDEHYDES
2-Hexen-l-al can characterized by the preparation of several derivatives:
tpe
(1) Semicarbazone; m. 172-173, according to Schimmel & Co., von Braun and
10
Rudolph, and Tabfei et al.;

11 12
175-176 by Delaby and Guillot-Allegre. 13 " '
(2) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 137 by Tsujimura,

15
Takei et al., 18 Curtius and
Franzen, and tfon Braun and Rudolph; 18 139 according to Delaby and Guillot-
17
19
Allegre. ,
(3) 2,4-Dinitr -ophenylhydrazone

t m. 196 from oil of green tea, according to Tsuji-
mura. 20
However, Takei and collaborators 21 prepared a leaf aldehyde by the oxidation of
the natural 3-hexen-l-ol as isolated from fresh tea leaves. This aldehyde which boiled
at 138- -140 yielded a 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 144, a semicarbazone m. 173,
^Kjft a p-nitrophenylhydrazone m. 137. Moreover, Takei et al.
22
had previously
isolated this same "leaf aldehyde" which he described as 2-hexenal, from green leaves
of several plants and identified it by the same derivatives as mentioned above, with
like properties.
Two
possibilities present themselves either these hexenals, the 2,4-dinitrophenyl-
hydrazones of which melt at 196 and 144, are geometric forms; or a structural
isomer may have been isolated, i.e., a /3-hexenal, instead of thea-hexenal as assumed.
However, there is not at hand sufficient evidence to demonstrate the full truth of either
postulate.
Properties. 2-Hexen-l-al possesses a strong and pungent odor of green

leaves. Curtius and Franzen 23 reported these properties for the natural
isolates:
bi7 47-48
7 '9
dl 0.8470
d 0.8684
79
'
n{> 1.44602
2-Hexenal has been prepared synthetically by von Braun and Rudolph, 24

and Delaby and Guillot-Allegre 25>26 who found these characteristics:
b d nD M.R.
26 24 1 26
b. 150-152 df 0.8491 nf) 1.4390" Obs. 30.40
26 26 8 24 26
bis.5 49.5 df 0.8610 nj> 1.4462 Calc. 29.50
24
bi 2 43
Takei et al. 27 reported a leaf aldehyde isolated from green tea oil as b. 138-
140. The divergence of this boiling range from that of the synthetics cited
above adds another point in favor of regarding this hexenal as isomeric with
the products of von Braun, 28 Curtius and Franzen, 29 and Delaby and Guillot-
30
Allegre, etc.
81
/3-Propylacrolein has been observed by Delaby and Guillot-Allegre to
possess a certain degree of lachrymatory action. It does not polymerize
readily but is slowly oxidized by air. With alkaline silver oxide, 2-hexenal
is oxidized to 2-hexenoic acid m. 33. In the preparation of this type of de-
rivative, however, the worker should consider the lability of the ethylenic
32
linkage, as well as the fact that its presence here may result in geometric
38
isomers.
Leaf aldehyde is used for imparting to perfume and flavor composi-
Use.
tions a characteristic odor of green leaves where such a note is desired.
Liebigs Ann. 390 (1912), 89; 404 (1914), 101. Cf. Ckem. Zentr. I (1911), 1142; II (1912),
1
39, 523, 722. Meyer, Chem. Zentr. I (1918), 637.

*Sci. Papers Inst. Phys. Chem. Research (Tokyo} 23, Nos. 482-7 (1934). Chem. Abstracts
28 (1934), 3178.
3
Seifensieder-Ztg. 67 (1940), 1625.
*
Ber. 76B(1943), 564.
6
Arch. Biochem. 2 (1943), 23.
6
Sci. Papers Inst. Phys. Chem. Research (Tokyo) 23, Nos. 482-7 (1934). Chem. Abstracts
28 (1934), 3178.
7
Arch. Biochem. 2 (1943), 23.
8
Tsujimura, Sci. Papers Inst. Phys. Chem. Research (Tokyo} 34 (1938), 400. Chem. Ab-
stracts 32 (1928), 8029.
Liebigs Ann. 390 (1912), 89; 404 (1914), 101. Cf. Chem. Zentr. I (1911), 1142; II (1912),
39, 523, 722. Meyer, Chem. Zentr. I (1918), 637.
10
Ber. 67B (1934), 269.
12
Sci. Papers Inst. Phys. Chem. Research (Tokyo} 23, Nos. 482-7 (1934). Chem. Abstracts
28 (1934), 3178.
Compt. rend. 192 (1931), 1467.
13
14
Bull. soc. chirn. 63 (1933), 310.
[4],
16
Sci. Papers Inst. Phys. Chem. Research (Tokyo) 34 (1938), 406. Chem. Abstracts 32
(1938), 8029.
Phys. Chem. Research (Tokyo) 23, Nos. 482-7 (1934).
16
Sci. Papers Inst. Chem. Abstracts
28 (1934), 3178.
Liebigs Ann. 390 (1912), 98.
17
18
Ber. 67B(1934), 269.
19
Compt. rend. 192 (1931), 1467. Bull. soc. chim. [4], 63 (1933), 301.
20
Sci. Papers Inst. Phys. Chem. Research (Tokyo) 34 (1938), 406. Chem. Abstracts 32
(1938), 8029.
21
J. Agr. Chem. Soc. Japan 14 (1938), 709. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 2557.
22 Sci. Papers Inst. Phys. Chem. Research (Tokyo) 23, Nos. 482-8 (1934). Chem. Abstracts
28 (1934), 3178.
23
Liebigs Ann. 390 (1912), 98.
24
Ber. 67B (1934), 269.
25
Compt. rend. 192 (1931), 1467.
26
Bull. soc. chim. [4], 63 (1933), 310.
27
Sci.Papers Inst. Phys. Chem. Research (Tokyo) 23, Nos. 482-7 (1934). Chem. Abstracts
28 (1934), 3178.
28
Ber. 67B (1934), 269.
29
Liebigs Ann. 390 (1912), 89.
30
Ibid.
32
Linstead et al., J. Chem. Soc. (1930), 1603; (1934), 614.
33
Delaby and Guillot-Allegre, Bull. soc. chim. [4], 63 (1933), 314.
322 ALDEHYDES
2,6-Nonadien-l-al
"Violet Leaf Aldehyde"

<*,-Nonadien aldehyde
H
CH 3 CH 2 CH=CH -
CII 2 CH2 CH=CH C=0 -
Occurrence. The derived from violet leaves by extraction with volatile

oil
solvents and by steam distillation of the concentrated extract was first in-
vestigated by von Soden, and by
1
Treff et al.
2
Walbaum and
Somewhat later
Rosenthal 3
isolated from it an aldehyde CgHÔ which they named violet
leaf aldehyde because of its characteristic odor of violet leaves. The work
4 5
of Spath and Kesztler, and of Ruzicka and Schinz established violet leaf
aldehyde as 2,6-nonadienal and showed that about one-third of the ethereal
violet leaf oil consists of this aldehyde. The latter authors succeeded in
6
preparing a 2,6-nonadienal from synthetic 3-hexen-l-ol. Ruzicka also
found that the ethereal oil derived from violet leaves contains about ten
times more of this aldehyde than the corresponding oil derived from violet
flowers.
Later Ruzicka, Schinz and Susz 7 suggested that the 2,6-nonadienal occur-
ring naturally in violet leaves has probably the 2(trans)-, 6(aV)- form, whereas
the synthetic 2,6-nonadienal as obtained from synthetic 3-hexen-l-ol has
possibly the trans, transform of the corresponding alcohol.
Takei and Ono, 8 and Janistyn 9 recognized the existence of a 2,6-nonadie-
nal in the ethereal oil of cucumber, but the identity of this isomer with that
identified in violet leaf oil has not been confirmed, according to Schimmel
& Co. 10
Isolation. Ruzicka and Schinz u isolated the natural 2,6-nonadienal from the frac-
tion of the ethereal violet leaf oil, bi2 below 105, by hydrolyzing the semicarbazone
m. 157-158 with a 15% sulfuric acid solution and by steam distillation, the yield
of pure aldehyde from the semicarbazone being 18%.
Ruzicka, Schinz and Susz
l2
Identification. identified natural 2,6-nonadienal from
by the preparation of these derivatives:
violet leaves
(a) Semicarbazone m. 156- 158.
(b) Phenylsemicarbazone m. 99-100.
(c) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 95-97.
(d) Aminoguanidine picrate m. 189-190.
The natural isolate from cucumbers of Takei and Ono 13 yielded a semicarbazone m.
157.5 and a 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 113.
Synthetic 2,6-nonadienals prepared by Ruzicka and co-workers were reported at
one time not to yield solid derivatives 14
with p-nitrophenylhydrazine, aminoguanidine
or phenylsemicarbazide. However, in a later publication 15 these authors reported the
aminoguanidinc picrate of the synthetic as m. 190-192. The semicarbazones of the

synthetic and natural aldehydes melt at the same temperature.
Purifying natural 2,6-nonadienal through its semicarbazone,

Properties.
Ruzicka and collaborators I6 found the following properties:
4
bi 2 89-90 df 0.8058
4
df 0.8632 nf 1.4700
EMD +1.06
The same authors reported for synthetic pure 2,6-nonadienal:
bn 85-87 nf? 1.4000
df 0.8678 EMD +1.20

Semicarbazone m. 155-157
2,0-Nonadienal possesses the penetrating characteristic odor of violet

leaves to a high degree.
Use. Synthetic 2,6-nonadienal is used to great advantage in high-grade
perfume compositions where the odor of violet leaves is desired.
1
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 110 (1925), 273.
2
Ibid. 113 (1920), 357.
3
Ber. Schimmel & Co., Jubildums Ausyabe (1929), 211.
4
Rcr. 67B (1934), 1496.
5
Ada
Ilelv. Chitn. 17 (1934), 1592; 18 (1935), 381.
6
Perfumery Essential Oil Record 29 (1938), 174. Ruzicka and Schinz, Hclv. Chim. Ada 25
(1942), 760.
7
Helv. Chim. Ada 27 (1944), 1561. Chem. Abstrads 39 (1945), 3117.
8
J. Agr. Chem. Soc. Japan 16 (1939), 193. Chem. Abstrads 33 (1939), 6524.
Scifcnsiede r-Ztg. 67 (1940), 16.
9
10
11
Helv. Chim. Ada 17 (1934), 1592.
12 Ibid. 27 (1944), 1561. Chem. Abstrads 39 (1945), 3117.
13
/. Agr. Chem. Soc. Japan 16 (1939), 193. Chem. Abstrads 33 (1939), 6524.
14
Hdv. Chim. Ada 17 (1934), 1602.
15
Ibid. 27 (1944), 1561. Chem. Abstrads 39 (1945), 3117.
Ibid. 17 (1934), 1598; 27 (1944), 1561. Chem. Abstrads 39 (1945), 3117.

Sebastien Sabctay, "Progress in the Field of the Chemistry of the Aroma tics for
1934," Riechstoff Ind. Kosmetik 11 (1936), 94.
324 ALDEHYDES
n-2-Decen-l-al
n-1-Decenaldehyde. n-1-Decylenic aldehyde.

H
CH3 -(CH 2 )6-CH = CH-C=0
Occurrence. n-2-Decen-l-al was observed by van Romburgh 1 in the
first
essential oil derived from the leaves, petioles and rhizomes of Achasma Walang
Val. (which occurs in Java) Later Carlblom 2 found it in the volatile oil dis-
.
tilled from Coriandrum sativum during the flowering state. More recently
3
Naves has observed it in sweet orange oil from French Guinea. Investigating
4
the aldehydic components of this oil, Naves arrived at the conclusion that
they consist of:
31% n-octanal
27% n-decanal
7.5% citral
6% n-dodecanal
4% 2-decen-l-al
3% 2-dodecen-l-al
Isolation. The various workers mentioned above observed that n-2-decen-l-al can-
not be isolated by means of its bisulfite or sulfite addition compound, as only a small
percentage of the aldehyde can be regenerated by treatment with sodium carbonate or
acids. As a matter of fact, the presence of n-2-decen-l-al in sweet orange oil, accord-
6
ing to Naves, explains, at least partly, the loss in aldehydes experienced during
treatment of the oil with sulfite reagents, the aldehydes of that type (cf "n-2-Dodecen- .
1-al") being almost entirely lost under these circumstances.

Neither can these particular aldehydes be regenerated from their semicarbazones by
means of oxalic, phthalic or mineral acids, because resinification will take place.
The most effective method of isolating these aldehydes from an essential oil, there-
fore, is distillation in vacuo. Naves 6 used the fraction 1)2.5 80~102 of sweet orange
oil, while van Romburgh
7
found that n-2-decen-l-al occurs in the fraction bis 104 of
oil of Achasma Walang Val.
Identification. By preparation of the semicarbazone m. 162, and by oxidative
means (see below).
Properties. Van Romburgh 8

reported these properties for n-2-decen-l-al:
b. 229-231 d\l 0.846

b 13 104 ni? 1.4538
Oxidation with a 4 per cent alkaline (potassium carbonate) solution of potas-

sium permanganate yielded caprylic acid (n-octoic acid) m. 13.5, b. 234;
amide m. 50 (van Romburgh).
Oxidation in a steady current of oxygen gave decenoic acid m. 12, bi 5 165;
amide m. 121 (van Romburgh).
Catalytic hydrogenation of n-2-decen-l-al with platinum black in neutral

ethyl acetate yielded decanol b. 228-231 which was identified by prepara-
tion of its a-naphthylurethane m. 70 (van Romburgh).
Use. The synthetic product probably could be used for compounding
imitation orange oils, but nothing has been published in the literature to this
effect.
1
Proc. Acad. Sri. Amsterdam 32, II (1929), 1352; Rec. trav. chim. 67 (1938), 494.
2
J. prakt. Chem. 144 (1936), 225.
3
4
Ibid.
6
Ibid.
8
Ibid.
7
Proc. Acad. Sci. Amsterdam 32, II (1929), 1352. Rec. trav. chim. 67 (1938), 494.
8
Ibid.
n-2-Dodecen- 1-al
n-1-Dodecenaldehyde. n-1-Dodecylenic aldehyde.
H
CH 3 -(CH 2 8 -CH = CH-C=0
)
Occurrence. Observed by Koolhaas l as main constituent of the volatile

oil derived from the leaves of Eryngium foetidum L. (which in Java constitutes
an edible vegetable).
Isolation. By fractional distillation in vacuo, the fractions bs 83-150 containing

the aldehyde. n-2-Dodecen-l-al cannot be regenerated from its bisulfite or sulfite
addition compound, nor from its semicarbazone (cf. "n-2-Deeen-l-al").
Identification. By preparation of the semicarbazone m. 158.
2
Properties. Koolhaas reported the following properties for certain frac-
tions of oil of Eryngium foetidum which consisted chiefly of n-2-dodecen-l-al:
b8 120M25 b8 125-130
df 0.8497 df 0.8465
6
n?? 1.4567 nib 1.4550
b9 149-156
d 24 0.8749
Oxidation of w-2-dodecen-l-al with a 4 per cent potassium permanganate

(alkaline) solution yielded capric acid which was identified by preparation of
its anilide m. 63 (Koolhaas).
Oxidation with silver oxide in alkaline solution or with air oxygen gave
1-undecene-l-carboxylic acid m. 15.8-16.8; amide m. 114 (Koolhaas).
326 ALDEHYDES
On exposure to air, n-2-dodecen-l-al readily oxidizes to the above-men-
tioned 1-undecene-l-carboxylic acid.
Use. This aldehyde is not used in our industries.
1
Rec. trav. chim. 51 (1932), 460.
2
Ibid.
(c) ALIPHATIC TERPENE ALDEHYDES.
Citral
CioHieO Mol. Weight 152.23
In this treatise no purpose would be served by a review of the prolonged

controversy between Barbier and collaborators, and Tiemarm, Semmler and
their school on the otherregarding the structure of this important open-
side,
chained, unsaturatcd terpene aldehyde. For details the reader is referred to
Simonsen's "The Terpenes," Vol. I. Citral, as it occurs in nature, is today
regarded as a mixture of at least two, and probably four, isomcrs. His-
torically these two components were known as citral a and citral 6 or gcra-
nial and neral, terms that still commonly apply to them. Physicochemical
evidence has been gathered to show that these components are related as
geometric isomers of a diolcfinic aldehyde. At the same time studies sup-
ported the view that these geometric isomers, geranial and neral or citral a
and citral 6, were not homogeneous but are themselves each composed of
two structural isomers differing from one another only by relative position of
the double bond on the terminal carbon atoms.
Citral a (Geranial). Cis- Isomer
3,7-Dimethyl-2,7-octadien-l-al
H2 C
\C
CH2 CH2 CH2 C
H3 C H
H-C-C=O
and
H3 C
C=CH-CH2 -CH2 -C-CH3
H3 C I /
H
H.C-C=O
Citral b (Neral). Trans- Isomer
H2 C
\C-CH -CH 2 -CH2-C-CH 3
2
HaC \
C-C-H
/
and
HC 3
C=CH-CH 2 .CH 2 'C.CH3

Ha/ ^C-C-H
^
In the following, the general term citral, unless specified otherwise, will
always refer to the natural aldehyde, a mixture of citral a and b in which the
"a" form largely predominates.
Occurrence. Citral occurs in numerous essential oils, in some as the prin-
cipal constituent. Thus, citral is present in oil of
lemongrass (70-80 per
cent), Backhousia citriodora, Ocimum pilosum (about 35 per cent), Monarda
citriodora,verbena, Eucalyptus staigeriana, Leptospcrmum citratum, citron-
ella Java type, lemon, lime, ginger root, in the leaf oils of several citrus spe-
cies, etc.
According to Tiemann and Semmler, and Tiemann, 2 thecitral-containing

1
Isolation.
oil lemongrass oil, for example is shaken with sodium bisulfite solution. The result-
ing crystalline reaction product may be purified by washing with alcohol and ether.
The citral can be regenerated in pure form by decomposing the sodium bisulfite com-
pound with soda and by distilling the citral in vacuo. Tiemann found that citral a
can be obtained free from citral 6, during the regeneration from the bisulfite compound,
by taking advantage of the fact that the crystalline sodium bisulfite compound of
citral a is sparingly soluble, the corresponding compound of citral b readily soluble.
Thus citral a may be isolated from regular citral by converting the latter into the nor-
mal sodium bisulfite compound CgHi5CH(OH)S03Na, by suspending this compound
in water, by covering the mixture with ether, and by partially decomposing the com-
pound with soda in the cold. Hibbert and Cannon 3 indicated optimum conditions
for the separation of citral a and b by Tiemann 's method. Citral b, according to Tie-
mann, 4 can be isolated from regular citral by shaking it for a short time with alkaline
cyanacetic acid solution; citral a reacts with this acid much more readily than citral b.
328 ALDEHYDES
Due two ethylenic linkages and an aldehydic group, the reaction
to the presence of
between citral and sodium bisulfite is even more complex than that between citronellal
and sodium bisulfite. The reaction was studied in detail by Tiemann and collaborators.
The normal bisulfite compound
HC
3 OH
\ C=CII CH CH C=CH
I
C H
(I) 2 2
HC
/ I
CH S0 3 Na
3 3
is formed quantitatively when citral is shaken with a sodium bisulfite solution contain-
ing some free acetic acid and not too much free sulfurous acid. The bisulfite solution
is prepared by adding a solution of crystalline sodium sulfite to a little more than one
molecular proportion of acetic acid. After shaking, the normal crystalline double
compound C 9 Hi6 CH(OH) S0 3 Na (I) separates. It is almost insoluble at low tem-
perature and can be recrystallized from a solution of sodium bisulfite or from methyl
alcohol containing some free acetic acid. This normal bisulfite compound is quite
easily decomposed but citral cannot be regenerated quantitatively with sodium car-
bonate or sodium hydroxide, the decomposition always being connected with a loss
of 10-15% citral which may be due to the formation of cyclic bisulfite compounds.
If the normal bisulfite compound (I) is slightly warmed for several hours with an
excess of sodium bisulfite and the solution kept acidic, a labile compound (II) contain-
ing 2 mols of sodium bisulfite will be formed in quantitative yield. The crystalline
sodium salt of the dihydrodisulfonic compound (II) is very hygroscopic; it reacts with
phenylhydrazine and, therefore, contains a free aldehydic group.
Citral can be regenerated from this labile dihydrodisulfonic derivative
H
/
CflH 17 -(S0 3 Na) 2 .C=0
(probably)
HC
3 S0 3 Na H
\C CH I
CH CH C CH C=0
/ forms and
(in two
-
(II) 2 2 2 2 : labile stable.)
/
H C S0 Na
I
CH
3 3 3
with alkali hydroxide, but no longer with alkali carbonate. If, during the dissolving
of the normal bisulfite compound (I), the temperature rises too high, the labile dihydro-
disulfonic compound (II) is converted into a stable dihydrodisulfonic compound (also
II), from which citral, even with alkali hydroxide, can no longer be regenerated. The
same stable dihydrodisulfonic compound (II) will be obtained also if the normal bi-
sulfite compound (I) is dispersed in water and steam distilled for some time, or digested
with chloroform.
If a solution of the labile citraldihydrodisulfonate (II) is shaken with citral, the
aldehyde is taken up under formation of citralhydromonosodium sulfonate

H
/
C9Hie(S0 3 Na)C=0 (III or IV) which can easily be decomposed with alkaline media.
Having discussed so far the reactions between citral and sodium bisulfite, we shall
now review the action of neutral sodium sulfite upon this aldehyde.
The dihydrodisulfonic sodium salt of citral (II) will be obtained also

labile if citral
is shaken with a solution of neutral sodium sulfite.
H H
/ = CH
/
C 9 H 16 -C=0 + 2Na S0 + 2 3 2H 2 9 17 (S0 Na) 3 2 -C=0 -f 2NaOH
The hydroxide being liberated in this reaction would decompose the dihydro-
alkali
disulfonic compound while being formed; therefore, the solution must be kept only
slightly alkaline by the continuous addition of dilute acetic acid, sulfuric acid, or an
acid salt such as sodium bisulfite, sodium bicarbonate, etc. Neither must the solution
be permitted to turn acid, as this would result in the formation of a stable dihydro-
disulfonic compound (II) from which citral can no longer be regenerated. For this
purpose, Tiemann 6
suggested the following method :
Shake a solution of 350 g. of sodium sulfite, Na2S0 3 -f- 7II 2 0, in 1 liter of water
(colored red with a little phenolphthalein solution) with 100 g. of pure citral. Reduce
the strongly alkaline reaction to be produced, from time to time, by gradually adding
standardized sulfuric acid of about 20% strength. Keep the solution always slightly
alkaline as revealed by the red color of the indicator.
The labile dihydrodisulfonic compound (II) obtained by the action of neutral sodium
sulfite upon citral can be purified by crystallization from methyl alcohol. It yields a
semicarbazone as it contains a free aldehydic group. By the action of acids the labile
form (II), as said, can be converted into a stable form. When shaken with dilute
alkali, the latter compound yields a monoderivative (III or IV) containing a free
aldehydic group:
HC 3 H
\C
CH CH CH C=CH - -
/
C=0
(III) 2 2 2
/I I
H 3 C S0 3 Na CH 3
HC 3 S0 3 Na H
\
C=CH CH CH C CH
/
C=0
(IV) 2 2 2
H C
/ CH
3 3
For further details regarding the bisulfite compounds of citral, see the paper by
Dodge 6
"Citral and Its Sulfonates."
Quantitative Determination. See Vol. I, Chapter 4, 'The Examination and Analysis
of Essential Oils, Synthetics, and
Isolates," p. 279.
Identification. Citral can quite readily be identified by the preparation of several
derivatives. Since natural citral consists predominantly of citral a, the derivatives of
this modification are usually obtained easier and in purer form.
(1) By the semicarbazones m. 164 and 171. Gildemeister and Hoffmann

7
suggest
adding a solution of four parts of semicarbazide hydrochloride in a little water to a
solution of 5 parts citral (or of the fraction to be examined) in 30 parts glacial acetic
acid. After a short time, substantial quantities of semicarbazone will separate in
needle form. Repeated recrystallization of these needles from methyl alcohol will
give a sharp melting point of 164 (semicarbazone of citral a). The mother liquor
separated from these needles by filtration contains the semicarbazone of citrai 6
which can be obtained in leaflets m. 171. Mixtures of the two semicarbazones show
330 ALDEHYDES
melting points ranging from 130 to 171. The two semicarbazones, according to
Barbier, are derived from two isomeric aldehydes (citral a and citral 6), and do not
8
represent syn- anti-isomers.

(2) By the condensation products formed between citral and cyanacetic acid,
o-citrylidenecyanacetic acid m. 122.
6-citrylidenecyanacetic acid m. 94-95.
H CN
/ /COOH.
C 9 Hi 5 C=C
In order to prepare these compounds, Tiemann 9 suggested adding 2 mols of sodium
hydroxide (30% sodium hydroxide solution) and 1 mol of citral to a solution of 1 mol
cyanacetic acid in about 3 times its weight of water. If pure, the citral will dissolve
completely on shaking. The citrylidenecyanacetic acid can be precipitated with acids
from the clear solution or from the solution purified by shaking with ether, in the form
of crystals or as oil which will soon congeal. After dissolving in benzene and precipi-
tating with petroleum ether, the citrylidenecyanacetic acid can be obtained in the
form of coarse yellow crystals.
Since citral b combines with cyanacetic acid more slowly than citral a, this method
may serve for the separation of citral a and citral b.
(3) By the preparation of a- or 6-citryl-/3-naphthocinchoninic acid m. 200-201 as
obtained by the condensation of citral with /3-naphthylamine in the presence of
pyruvic acid. Both citral a and citral b yield the same compound.
C CH==C.CH .CH,.CH== C;
2
CH8
COOH
For this purpose, Doebner 10 recommended dissolving 12 g. of pyruvic acid and 20 g.

of citral (or the corresponding oil) in absolute alcohol. Twenty g. of 0-naphthylamine,
also dissolved in absolute alcohol, are added to this solution. The mixture is then re-
fluxed for 3 hr. on a steam bath. On cooling, the citrylnaphthocinchoninic acid will
separate in crystalline form; it is filtered off and purified by washing with ether. In
case the acid should not be sufficiently pure, it is dissolved in ammonia and precipi-
tated from the filtered solution by neutralizing with acetic acid. The substance thus
purified crystallizes from alcohol in the form of yellow leaflets. Doebner reported a
melting point of 197. However, it is usually higher, sometimes even slightly above
200.
When examining an oil for the presence of citral by Doebner's method, it should
be kept in mind that other aldehydes too citronellal, for example yield derivatives
of naphthocinchoninic acid. Furthermore, if the content of citral, or aldehydes in
general, is low, a part of the employed pyruvic acid may be decomposed to acetaldehyde
which will form a-methyl-/3-naphthocinchoninic acid m. 310. This is more sparingly
soluble in alcohol than the corresponding citral compound and remains in the residue
when the crude naphthocinchoninic acid is boiled with alcohol.
(4) By the preparation of the thiosemicarbazone m. 107-108, and the semiox-

amazone m. 190M91 .
" may be made by the 3-nitrobenzohydrazone

(5) According to Strain identification
m. 100-101; according to Whitmore, Revukas and Smith 12
by the nitroguanyl-
hydrazone of citral m. 135-136.5.
(6) The 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone has been variously reported by several investi-
gators. As citral a as well as citral 6 may yield both a- and )8- forms of this derivative,
it isnot surprising that several compounds should be obtained, but their correspondence
to a particular formula still remains in question. Allen 13 reported two dinitrophenyl-
hydrazones from citral, I m. 108-110, II m. 96, whereas Takei, Sakato and Ono 14
obtained a product from the citral derived from green tea oil m. 119-120, and Roduta
and Quibilan 16 reported still another m. 103.
Citral can thus be identified quite easily by various methods; care, however, must be
exercised in case citronellal is also present. Repeated recrystallization of the deriva-
tives may be required.
Properties. a slightly yellowish, optically inactive, liquid pos-

Citral is
sessing a characteristic and powerful lemon-like odor and flavor. When boil-
ing under atmospheric pressure, citral decomposes to a certain degree.
Tiemann and Semmler 16 reported the following properties:
b. 228-229 d 22 0.8844
b 23 120-122 d 15 0.8972
b 20 117-119 nD 1.48611 and 1.4931
When by the bisulfite compound,

purified citral, according to Gildemeister
and Hoffmann, 17 had these properties:
Citral from Lcmongrass Oil

bi2 llOMll
dJI 0.893
n{J 1.49015
Citral from Lemon Oil

b5 92-93
d}i 0.8920
nf? 1.48853
18
Gildemeister and Hoffmann recorded for commercial citral:
d}i 0.892-0.895
nf? 1.482-1.489
Sol. Soluble in 5 to 7 vol.
of 60% alcohol
332 ALDEHYDES
On a technical scale, citral is isolated from lemongrass oil by preparing the
bisulfite compound and by decomposing it with soda.
Regarding citral a and citral b, the former is obtained free from citral b
by
regeneration from its sparingly soluble crystalline sodium bisulfite compound,
the corresponding citral b compound being more readily soluble. Citral fr,
on the other hand, can be freed of citral a through the greater reactivity of
citral a with cyanacetic acid.
19 20
Tiemann, and von Auwers and Eisenlohr reported the following prop-
erties for the two forms:
Citral a
b 20 118-119 019 ' 20

d 20 0.8898 19 20
-
bi 2 110-112 019 n 1.4891 19 ' 20
Citral b
b 20 117-118 019 '

20
nD 1.49001 19
19 l9 20
b 12 102-104 (uncorr.) nf? 1.4891 -
19 20
d 20 0.8888 -
Due to the conjugation of the ethylenic linkages, both aldehydes show a

marked exaltation in their molecular refraction.
Owing and two ethylenic linkages, citral

to the presence of one aldehydic
is very readily attacked by oxidizing agents. Even on exposure to air, citral
oxidizes quite easily, whereby its yellow color is intensified. Under the in-
fluence of weak oxidizing agents for example, ammoniacal silver oxide
geranic acid Ci IIi 6 2 is formed. This liquid acid possesses an odor reminis-
cent of higher fatty acids. The action of stronger oxidizing agents such as
chromic acid yields geranic acid, methyl heptenone and methyl heptcnone
carboxylic acid. Further treatment with potassium permanganate chromic
acid mixture oxidizes methyl heptenone to acetone and laevulinic acid.
Hydrogenation, according to conditions, yields geraniol, or citronellal and

citronellol, etc. Under the influence of acids or acid media, citral readily
undergoes cyclization. For the same reason, hydrohalides of citral have not
been observed. When treated with dilute sulfuric acid, or potassium bisul-
fate, citral is converted into p-cymene, with loss of water. Alkalies, too,
attack citral; for example, when boiled with potassium carbonate solution,
decomposed into acetaldehyde and methyl heptenone.

citral is
When digesting citral with acetic anhydride and sodium acetate, Semmler
and Schlossberger 21 obtained the acetate of the enolic form of the aldehyde.
CH3 CH 2
C C
\ CH HC
/ \ CH
HC 2
I II
or | ||
H2 C CHOAc H2 C CHOAc
\ CH \CH
C C
H3 C
/ \CH ,
3 H3 C / VCH 3
This acetate is a mobile oil bio 118-126, dis 0.943, and saponification
number 291, with an odor resembling geranyl acetate. 22 The enolic acetate
cannot be hydrolyzed to regenerate the same aldehyde but yields isocitral.
I I
CH CH
C C
HC
\
HC H
/ \
HC HC H
2 2 2
I |/ or | |/
H2 C C=0 II 2 C C=0
\ CH \ CH
C C
/ \ HC
/ \
H3 C CHa 3 CH 3
i ii
Isocitral
I is the more probable structural formula of isocitral because, analogous to

citral a and citral b, it can occur in two diastereoisomeric forms (isomers of
the ethylenic linkage).
Studying this reaction more thoroughly and starting from common citral,
Schmidt 23 obtained a citral-enol acetate (yield 70 per cent, d}s 0.943, saponi-
fication number 291 = 101 per cent ester) which on gentle boiling with ab-
solute methyl alcohol and aluminum isopropylate for 14 hr. yielded isocitral
(yield 30 per cent, calculated upon the enol acetate used).
Isocitral is a mobile, slightly yellow, optically inactive oil, with a very fine,
mild and fresh lemon odor, quite different from that of common citral(from
lemongrass oil). The physical properties of isocitral differ little from those
of regular citral, but the chemical behavior of isocitral and citral shows
marked differences. Isocitral does not react with sodium sulfite bicarbonate;
itforms a semicarbazone m. 140 from which the isocitral cannot be regen-
erated completely, even by treatment with oxalic or phthalic acid. Con-
334 ALDEHYDES
trary to citral a and citral 5, isocitraldoes not form a crystalline condensation
product with cyanacetic acid. When treated with pyruvic acid and 0-naph-
thylamine, isocitral yields a naphthocinchoninic acid compound m. 195-
196. Isocitral is much more sensitive than citral; it polymerizes under the
prolonged influence of aluminum isopropylate; it tends toward cyclization,
resinification, and conversion into p-cymene, even without treatment with
24
sulfuric acid or condensing agents. According to Strausz, cyclization and
conversion into p-cymene may be caused even by the presence of about 1
per cent of fatty acids (acetic acid, n-acid Cg, C9 , CIQ, Ci 2 ) and proceeds via
l-methyl-4-isopropylidene-cyclohexen-3-ol. Such acids are formed on air oxi-
dation in poorly stored lemon oils from the corresponding aldehydes, while
free acetic acid may originate by hydrolysis of linalyl acetate and geranyl
acetate which occur in lemon Poorly stored, spoiled, and oxidized lemon
oil.
oils display the characteristic odor of p-cymene, while the odor of aged and
air oxidized lemongrass oil does not reveal the presence of p-cymene, but only
the sharp and acid odor of other cyclization and resinification products.
These observations, in connection with the fine lemon-like odor of cyclo-
25
citral, led Strausz to express the tentative opinion that the citral occurring
inlemon oil and the isocitral of Schmidt may be identical substances. As far
back as 1926 Verley 26 had already ventured the opinion that the citral pres-
ent in lemon oil is a special isomcr of citral which he named 7-citral and to
which he ascribed the formula
II 2 C CH 2 H
\C II /
CH2 CH2 CH2 C CH2
* *
C===O
H3 C
without, however, giving any experimental proof.
27 28
Schmidt, and Strausz tabulated the physicochemical properties of cit-
ral a (geranial), citral b (neral), and isocitral as follows:
*
The naphtbocinchoninic acid compounds of citral a and 6 show no melting point depres-
sion when mixed, but that of isocitral (196) displays a depression of 6 when mixed with
the others.
In the opinion of the authors, the contention that the citral occurring in
lemon oil is identical with the isocitral of Schmidt cannot be accepted with-
out more definite proof. It should be remembered that Poore 29 prepared
from natural citral (isolated from California lemon oil) a naphthocinchoninic
acid compound m. 199-200 (corr.), a semicarbazone of the a and b forms
m. 134-135, and a semicarbazone of the a form m. 1G3-164, which data
point toward the occurrence of citral a and b in California lemon oil.
Natural citral isolated from lemon

probably owes its fine and mild odor
oil
to the absence of contaminating substances, such as methyl heptenone, which

often accompany commercial citral derived from lemongrass oil.
Amongthe most interesting properties of citral are the condensations with
substances containing a reactive methylene group. These condensations
have become of great technical importance in the synthesis of the so-called
ionones.
Use. Citral is widely used in our industries, but usually only in small
quantities for the compounding of synthetic lemon, lime and orange flavors.
Citral, furthermore, serves for the scenting of soaps, cosmetics and as an ad-
junct in numerous perfume compositions.
1
Ber. 26 (1893), 2708.
2
Ber. 31 (1898), 3310, 3317.
*J. Am. Chem. Soc. 46 (1924), 119.
*Ber. 32 (1899), 117.
5
Ber. 31 (1898), 3317.
6
Am. Perfumer 32 (1936), No. 3, 67. Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 3403.
7
"Die Xthcrischen Ole," 3d Kcl., Vol. I, 515.
*Compt. rend. 121 (1895), 1159.
9
Ber. 31 (1898), 3329.
10
Ber. 27 (1894), 354, 2026; 31 (1898), 1891, 3197.
11
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 57 (1935), 758.
12
Ibid. 67 (1935), 706.
u lbid. 62 (1930), 2955.
14
Butt. Inst. Phys. Chem. Research Tokyo 16 (1937), 7. Pub. with Sd. Papers Inst. Phys.
Chem. Research (Tokyo} 13 (1937), 671. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 6815.
16
Rev. fiUpina med. farm. 27 (1936), 123. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 98.
Ber. 26 (1893), 2709.
17
"Die Xtherischcn Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 510.
"/&*., 511.
19
Ber. 32 (1899), 117, 120; 33 (1900), 880.
20
J. prakt. Chem. 82 (1910), 116.
21
Ber. 44 (1911), 992.
22
See also H. Schmidt, Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1938), 131; (1939), 114. Chem. Zentr. I
(1940), 196.
23
Ber. Schimmel &Co. (1938), 131; (1939), 114.
24
Perfumery Essential Oil Record 38 (1947), 262. Cf. Verley, Bull. soc. chim. [3], 21 (1899),
408. Zeitschel and Schmidt, J. prakt. Chem. [2], 133 (1932), 370.
25
26
Am. Perfumer 21 (1926), 480.
27
28
29
U. S. Dept. Agr., Tech. Bull. No. 241, March (1932).
336 ALDEHYDES
J. Bougault and E. Cattelain, "A Highly Sensitive Reaction for the Characteri-
zation and Determination of Citral," J. pharm. chim. 21 (1935), 437. Chem. Abstracts
29 (1935), 7578.
2016. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 8270.
M. F. Carroll, "Structure of Certain Acyclic Isolates," Perfumery Essential Oil
Record 38, No. 7 (1947), 226.
Y. R. Naves, A.V. Grampoloff and P. Bachmann/'fitudcs dans les Series des Me*thyl-
'3-linalols, des M^thyl-3-citrals et des Me*thyl-6-ionones," Helv. Chim. ActaZO (1947),
1599.
Citronellal
(Rhodinal)
As in the case of citronellol and rhodinol, the constitution of citronellal

and rhodinal, the corresponding aldehydes, has been the subject of much
controversy. For details the reader is referred to Simonsen's "The Ter-
penes," Vol. I. Naturally occurring citronellal is not homogeneous and is
regarded by some as being an inseparable mixture of the following two alde-
hydes in which either the one or the other form may predominate:
3,7-Dimethyl-7-octen-l-al
H2 C H
\C -
CII 2 -
CH 2 CH 2 CH CH2 C=O
- - -
/
H3 C CH3
Limonene form
(Isopropenyl form)
3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-l-al
H3 C H
\
O=CH CH CH CH CH - - - -
/
C==O
2 2 2
H3 C CH 3
Terpinolene form
(Isopropylidene form)
Some authors declared citronellal and rhodinal different compounds, assign-

ing the name rhodinal to the terpinolene form and the name true citronellal
to the limonene form. However, this contention is generally not accepted.
The aliphatic terpene aldehyde citronellal is not widely distributed in na-
ture. Occasionally it accompanies citral; in fact citronellal represents a di-
hydrocitral. Because an asymmetric carbon atom, cit-

of the presence of
ronellal can exist in d-, I- and dl- form but only the d- form occurs in some oils
in large quantities. A citronellal of low optical rotation is probably in most
cases a mixture of both optically active forms.
Occurrence. d-Citronellal occurs as the main constituent in oil of citronella,
Eucalyptus citriodora, and a few other eucalyptus species. It has also been
observed in oil of lemon and rose.
l-Citronellal occurs in "Java lemon olie" (a type of rare citronella oilno
longer being produced), in oil of Leptospermum flavescens var. citratum, and
a few other oils.
Isolation. Citronellal may be isolated from essential oils and purified most con-
veniently through its crystalline bisulfite compound but, due to the instability of the
aldehyde, great care must be exercised in decomposing the bisulfite compound. Cit-
ronellal contains an ethylenic linkage and an aldehydic group; therefore, three different
bisulfite compounds are theoretically possible and actually have been prepared:
HC2 OH
\ -CH 2 -CIT-CH 2 'CH
C-CHrOH 2
/ CH
\
HC3 3 SOjNa
(I) or
H,C OH
C=CH CH CH CH CH CH
2
-
2
-
2
-
HC
I \
3 CH, S(),Na
Normal bisulfite compound
HC H
(ID C-CH 2 'CH2-CH 2 -CH-CHi-O=O
HC3 SOiNa CH 3
Hydrosulfoiiic derivative
HC 3 OH
(HI) C-CHj-CHj-CHj-CH-CHj-CH
HC
/I
CH 3
I \S0 Na
3 SOiNa 3
Dihydrodisulfonic derivative
Tiemann developed methods for the separation of citronellal, citral, and methyl
l
heptenone. He showed that the normal bisulfite compound (I) is formed when citron-
ellal is shaken with an ice-cold, aqueous solution (35%) of sodium bisulfite from which
the excess of sulfur dioxide has been eliminated by a current of air. This crystalline
bisulfite compound is soluble in warm water but partially decomposes in boiling
water, with part regeneration of citronellal. Complete decomposition and regeneration

338 ALDEHYDES
aldehyde can be effected quite easily by treatment of the normal bisulfite com-
of the
pound with dilute acids or alkalies, best with alkali carbonate, as alkali might easily
affect this aldehyde.
The sulfonate derivative (III) is formed by treatment of citronellal with an excess
of sodium bisulfite solution which contains some sodium sulfite. This crystalline com-
pound may be isolated but it is very hygroscopic. Treatment of the compound with
dilute alkali results in decomposition and conversion into the monoderivative (II)
from which the cannot be regenerated either with soda or alkali solutions.
citronellal
Thus, citronellal can be isolated, for example, from oil of citronella or Eucalyptus
citriodora, according to Tiemann's
2
procedure:
A 35% aqueous solution of sodium bisulfite is first freed from excess sulfurous acid
by a current of air. The citronellal or the citroncllal-containing fraction is then added
together with pieces of ice and the mixture shaken. The separated normal sodium
bisulfite compound (I) of citronellal is freed from adhering organic impurities by
suction filtration, kneading with some alcohol and much ether and repeated suction
filtration. The normal bisulfite compound can be decomposed quantitatively, at room
temperature, by the action of soda or alkali solutions.
Zimmermann 3 suggested the following improvement of Tiemann's procedure:
Neutralize a 35% solution of anhydrous sodium sulfite, in the presence of phenol-
phthalein, with dilute sulfuric acid and add about 2% of sodium sulfate. After cooling,
and while stirring, slowly add the volatile oil, and the sodium bisulfite compound of
the citronellal will separate. The temperature should always be kept below 20 to
21. Neutralize the alkaline liquid with acetic acid (10% aqueous solution) but only
to such a degree that the mass remains slightly alkaline. After the rest of the oil has
been added stir the mixture for another half hour, remove the precipitate, press and
free from adhering essential oil by kneading the precipitate with ether in a mortar.
Dissolve the dry precipitate in a very small volume of boiling water, cool the solution,
place it in a separatory funnel, and shake with ether and concentrated soda solution
until everything is dissolved. Separate the ether, wash with water, distill the ether,
and purify the residual citronellal by rectification with steam.
With neutral sodium sulfite, too, citronellal forms hydrosulfonic derivatives (II and
III) from which citronellal cannot be recovered. However, the reaction will start
only if from the beginning a strong current of carbon dioxide is conducted through the
mixture or another acid is slowly added in sufficient quantities. This reaction of
if
citronellal with neutral sulfite may serve for its separation from citral which also
reacts readily with neutral sodium sulfite (see "Citral"). It is only necessary, in this
case, to neutralize the nascent sodium hydroxide in the same measure as it is liberated
in the course of the reaction (Gildemeister and Hoffmann 4 ).
Another procedure of separating citronellal and citral, according to Tiemann, 6 is
based upon the fact that citronellal reacts only with a concentrated solution of sodium
sulfiteand sodium bicarbonate, whereas citral reacts even with a dilute solution.
Tiemann 6 also showed that his method can be applied to the separation of citronellal
from small quantities of methyl heptenone, this ketone not reacting with concentrated
solutions of neutral sodium sulfite and sodium bicarbonate.
An interesting fact in connection with the isolation of this compound has been
observed by Waterman 7
who points out that citronellal can be obtained pure in a
cathode light vacuum.
Quantitative Determination. Regarding the quantitative determination of citron-
ellal, see Vol. I, Chapter 4, "The Examination and Analysis of Essential Oils, Synthetics,
and Isolates," p. 280.
For the determination of citronellal, Prins 8 suggested its reaction with formic acid
(85-90% may be used) citronellal forms thereby isopulegyl formate.
;
Identification. (1) readily yields a semicarbazone which separates

Citronellal
quantitatively on shaking an alcoholic solution of citronellal with a solution of semi-
carbazide hydrochloride and sodium acetate. The crude semicarbazone, on recrystal-
lization successively from chloroform and ligroine, is obtained in the form of white
laminae.
Best information on the m. 96, while that for the /- form is
dl- derivative records
given by Schorger, who reports the isolation of ^-citronellal from Pinus jeffreyi which
9
yielded a semicarbazone m. 91-92. In the case of the d- compound, however, two

forms have been recognized by Doeuvre, 10 and by Prins u which may well correspond
to the derivatives of the a- and (3- forms of this aldehyde. The optima reported by
these authors possibly representative of these forms are m. 77.5 and 86, although
the average figure usually given for the d- derivative is 83.5.
(2) Rupe and Schlochoff
12
showed that citronellal condenses with acetone to citron-
ellylidenacetone which yields a semicarbazide-semicarbazone m. 107.
13
(3) According to Doebner, citronellal may also be identified by the preparation
of citronellyl-/3-naphthocinchoninic acid m. 225
CH 3
CHa CH CHa CH CH= CC" 2 -
COOH
which isobtained by condensing (boiling) the aldehyde with /3-naphthylamine and

pyruvic acid. (For details see "Citral.") The crude product of condensation is
recrystallized from alcohol containing hydrochloric acid, the hydrochloride thus ob-
tained is dissolved in ammonia, the ammonium salt decomposed with acetic acid,
and the compound recrystallized from dilute alcohol. The colorless needles melt at
225. When heated above its melting point, the compound is converted into citron-
eUyl-jS-naphthoquinoline with cleavage of carbon dioxide. This base crystallizes from
dilute alcohol or ligroine in silky needles m. 53.
1 *
(4) Another characteristic derivative of citronellal, according to Tiemann, is
citronellylidenecyanacetic acid m. 137-138. (Regarding its preparation, see

"Citral.") This acid forms a characteristic, sparingly soluble sodium salt which may
be used to separate citronellal from citral.
(5) The 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone of the active form has also been reported as
m. 76.5-78 by Allen 1B and by Grundmann et al. 16 as m. 76.5.
(6) Henze and Speer prepared a hydantoin in. 172- 172.5.
17
Properties. Citronellal is a colorless liquid with a refreshing, melissa-like

odor. The following properties have been reported:
18
d-Citronellal, purified through its bisulfite compounds (Tiemann, Tiemann
20
and Schmidt, 19 and Doeuvre ):
18 18
b. 203-2(H di7. 6 0.8554
20 5 20
b 24 102-103 df- 0.8533
bi 4 89-91 18
D +!0 18' 20 .
+ 1230' 19
340 ALDEHYDES
properties of technical preparations vary between these limits (Gilde-
The
meister and Hoffmann 21 ) :
b. 205-208 a + 10 0' to +11 0'
b4 . 6 72-73 nL 1.444-1.452
d\l 0.855-0.8GO Sol. Soluble in 5-6 vol. of
70% alcohol
22
Prins reported the isolation of two fractions of the d- isomer with the
following characteristics:
b. 203-204 198-200
d 14 0.8880 0.8745
1.46141 1.45482
These products were probably contaminated with isopulegol, or partly re-

sinified (Gildemeister and Hoffmann), whereas Docuvre 23 isolated and char-
acterized a citronellal from citronella oil (via bisulfite purification) which he
reported as the /?- form and which had the following properties:
bi4 92 H 2
5 ?8 +13 27'
df 0.851 []J 6 +15 52'
[]6 +34 56' n 2D 1.4467
24
l-Citronellal (from Java lemon olie)
b. 205-208 D -30'
d!| 0.8567 nb 1.44791
Similar properties were reported for the laevo-isomer isolated from ethereal
25
oil of Pinus jeffrcyi by Schorger.
The racemic mixture has not been as thoroughly studied as the active iso-
lates. For a racemic mixture of citronellal, prepared by catalytic reduction
26
of citral, Skita and Paal 27 reported these data:
26
b 15 106-108
bio 79-81 27
7 27
dj 0.8535
Containing both an aldehydic group and an ethylenic linkage, citronellal

is a highly reactive substance.
Oxidation under the influence of sunlight leads to a complex mixture, con-
taining among others acetone, /3-methyladipic acid, isopulegol, and mcn-
thone. When stored under improper conditions, citronellal may undergo far-
reaching decomposition, resinification, and polymerization. Waterman and
28
Elsbach reported that citronellal is oxidized by air partly to citronellic acid,
partly to peroxides.
shows a strong tendency toward cyclization, especially under
Citronellal
the influence of acid media, whereby isopulegol is formed. Indeed, this form
of cyclization takes place so easily that commercial citronellal purified through
its bisulfite compound often contains some isopulegol. Cyclization also oc-
curs when with 5 per cent sulfuric acid, with 85-90 per
citronellal is treated
cent formic acid, or with 80 per cent phosphoric acid. By the action of acetic
anhydride, isopulegol acetate is formed, the first product of the reaction being
the acetate of the enolic form of citronellol and a small quantity of the di-
acetate.
Under the influence of alkalies, citronellal resinifies rapidly. For this rea-
son, citronellal should be regenerated from its bisulfite compound with alkali
carbonate and not with alkali hydroxides. Energetic oxidation with potas-
sium permanganate solution yields the same products as citronellol, further-
more acetone and /3-methyladipic acid. Gentle oxidation with silver oxide
gives citronellic acid Ci Hi 8 O 2 .
By reduction of citronellal with sodium
amalgam, citronellol is obtained, which reaction finds wide application for
the manufacturing of this important alcohol. Neuberg 29 succeeded in re-
ducing citronellal to citronellol enzymatically by means of yeast.

Use. Citronellal is used in perfumes and for the scenting of soaps and all
kinds of technical preparations. To a small extent it also serves in artificial

citrus flavors.
1
Ber. 31 (1898), 3306; 32 (1899), 812.
2
Ibid.
3
Pharm. Tijdschrift voor Nederlandsch-Indie 5 (1928), 293.
4
"Die Atherischon Olc," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 520.
*Ber. 32 (1899), 815.
6
Ibid. 834.
7
s 14 (1917), 627.
Ibid.
9
/. Ind. Eng. Chem. 6 (1913), 972.
10
Bull. soc. chirn. [4] 46 (1929), 1098.
11
Chem. Weekblad 14 (1917), 692. Chem. Zentr. II (1917), 678. (Lab. N. V. Polak &
Schwarz's Riechstoffabriken.)
12
Ber. 36 (1903), 4377. Rupe and Lotz, Ber. 36 (1903), 2796.
13
Ber. 27 (1894), 2025.
" Ber. 32 (1899), 824.
15
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 52 (1930), 2955.
Liebigs Ann. 624 (1936), 42.
1(5
17
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 522.
18
Ber. 32 (1899), 818.
19
Ber. 29 (1896), 905.
20
Butt. soc. chim. [4] 45 (1929), 1098.
21
"Die Atherischen Olc," 3d Ed., Vol. 518.
I,
22
Chem. Weekblad 14 (1917), 692. Chem. Zentr. II (1917), 678. (Lab. N. V. Polak &
Schwarz's Riechstoffabriken).
2
Bull soc. chim. 63 (1933), 589.
24
342 ALDEHYDES
26
J. hid. Eng. Chem. 5 (1913), 972.
26
Ber. 42 (1909), 1634.
27
German Patent 298,193. Chem. Zentr. II (1917), 145.
28
Rec. trav. chim. 63 (1934), 730.
"Biochem. Z. 92 (1918), 111.
Marston Taylor Bogert and Torsten Hasselstrom, "Action of Ultra- Violet Light on
Terpenes. Action on Citronellal," J. Am. Chem. Soc. 52 (1930), 4093. Chem. Abstracts
24 (1930), 5743.
Etablissements Roure-Bertrand Fils and Justin Dupont, "Determination of Cit-
ronellal," Recherches 1 (1937), 132. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 6398.
2016. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 8270.
Harry Schmidt, "Enol Acylates." Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1938), 140.
Charles C. Price and S. L. Meisel, "An Isomcr of Citronellal," /. Am. Chem. Soc. 69,
No. 6 (1947), 1497.
M.
F. Carroll, "Structure of Certain Acyclic Isolates," Perfumery Essential Oil
Record 38, No. 7 (1947), 226.
B. CYCLIC TERPENE ALDEHYDES
Perillaldehyde
(Dihydrocuminaldehyde)
Ci Hi 4 O Mol. Weight 150.21
4-Isopropenyl-l-cyclohexenaldehyde. l,8(9)-p-Menthadien-7-al
H
C=0
C
HC
/ \
CH
2
H2 C CH 2
\ /
CH
C
HC
/ \
2 CH 3
Occurrence. Z-Perillaldehyde occurs as main constituent (about 50 per

cent) in perilla oil (Perilla nankinensis Decne).
d-Perillaldehyde in oil of Hemandia peltata (' 'false camphor wood"); in
CYCLIC TERPENE ALDEHYDES 343
Perillaodmoides (Shiso oil) according to Hoshino, 1 and in sulpicia oil to the

extent of 65 per cent (Huzita 2 ).
Isolation. Perillaldehyde can be isolated with neutral sodium sulfite or isolated

and purified, according to Semmler and Zaar, through its crystalline compound with
3
sodium bisulfite.
Identification. Perillaldehyde may be characterized by the preparation of several

derivatives:
Semicarbazone m. 199-200.
(1)
(2) Phenylhydrazone m. 107.5.
(3) Furukawa and Tomizawa found that the oxime is obtained in two forms, viz.,
4
the a-anti-oxime m. 102 (I- rotatory), and the /3-syn-oxime m. 129. The a-anti-oxime
possesses an extremely sweet taste, the /?-syn-oxime is tasteless.
Properties. Perillaldehyde is an possessing a cumin-like odor. Schim-

oil
mel & Co.,

5
and Furukawa and Tomizawa 6 reported the following properties:
b 75 o 235-237 5' 6
D -1460' 5
5
b9 104 [a]n -150 42' 5
b4 . 5 91 5
[aft -145 48' 6
5 5
d 20 0.9645 ng> 1.50693
6
dig 0.9675 MX9685
7
Semmler and Zaar recorded these properties for /-perillaldehyde:
bio 104-105 WD -1460'

di 8 0.9617 nD 1.50746
The same authors found for the dextrorotatory form from "false camphor
8
wood":
b 74 3 234-236 d 15 0.973
b7 98-100 [a] D +137 40'
nf> 1.50802
A still more impure sample has been isolated from Shiso oil by Hoshino.
9
When exposed to air, perillaldehyde is easily oxidized to perillic acid

CioH 14 2, m. 132-133.
Use.Perillaldehyde, as such, has not found any noteworthy application
in the perfume and flavor industries.
1
Chem. Ind. Tokyo 22 (1919), 969.
J.
*Ber. 44(1911), 52, 815.
4
J. Chem. Ind. Tokyo 23 (1920), 342.
6
*J. Chem. Ind. Tokyo 23 (1920), 342.
7
Ber. 44 (1911), 53.
8
Ber. 44 (1911), 815.
9
/. Chem. Ind. Tokyo 22 (1919), 969.
344 ALDEHYDES
Shigehiro Abe, "The Chemical Constitution of Perillaldehyde, the Component of the

Oil of Perilla nankinensis," J. Chem. Soc. Japan 64 (1943), 845. Chem. Abstracts 41
(1947), 3767.
Kiku Murata, "A Derivative of Perillaldehyde a-anti-oxime and its anti-fungous
Power and Toxicity," Rept. Osaka Municipal Research Inst. Domestic Sci. 17, No. 1
(1940), 191. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 4785.
Phellandral
Mol. Weight 152.23
4-Isopropyl-l-cyclohcxenaldehyde. l-p-Menthen-7-al
H
C=O
C
HC
\CH
2
CH S
CH
cir
HaC
The above structural formula of phellandral has been confirmed by Cooke,
Macbeth and Swanson. 1
Occurrence. First found in water fennel oil (Phettandrium aquaticum L.)
by Schimmel & Co. 2 (D 30 30'), this aldehyde occurs also in several euca-
lyptus species ("Box and Mallee" group) for example, in the oils of Eucalyp-
tus hemiphloia, polybractea, bakeri Maiden, and cneorifolia, in which it has
been reported in all cases as J-phellandrene. However, Berry, Macbeth and
3
Swanson, reinvestigating the isolate from water fennel oil, reported their al-
dehyde, contrary to Schimmel & Co., as d-phellandral (D +116 13').
Isolation. Z-Phellandral is and purified by means of its sparingly soluble

isolated
crystalline sodium bisulfite compound from which phellandral can be regenerated with
alkali. Penfold 4 recommended fractionating oil of Eucalyptus hemiphloia, and treating
the fraction boiling above 185 at atmospheric pressure with pure 35% sodium bi-
sulfite solution. The mixture of phellandral and cuminaldehyde thereby obtained
may be separated by heating to boiling with the sodium bisulfite solution. Phellandral
thereby dissolves as sulfonic acid salt, while the bisulfite compound of cuminaldehyde
separates in the form of crystals. The phellandral is regenerated on treatment with
sodium hydroxide.
Identification. The active phellandrals may be characterized, according to Penfold,

8
Schimmel &
Co. 6 and Iskenderov, 7 by the preparation of their oxime m. 87-88,
semicarbazone m. 204-205, and phenylhydrazone m. 122-123.
The p-nitrophenylhydrazone melts at 169-170 and the 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone
at 202-203, according to Macbeth and Price. 8
Properties. Phellandral is an oil possessing an odor reminiscent of cumin-

aldehyde.
9
/-Phellandral isolated from oil of Eucalyptus hemiphloia by Penfold had
the following properties:
b5 90 <*D -130 51'
d 20 0.9412 nf? 1.4912
Cooke and Macbeth 10 later prepared a sample isolated from E. cneorifolia

and purified by means of the semicarbazone, with these properties:
bi.5 75
<$ -151 18'
[ag? -160 12'
nf? 1.4897
which represents an isolate with the maximum rotation thus far obtained.
d-a-Phellandral has been isolated from water fennel (Phellandriumoil of
u with an
aquaticum L.) by Berry, Macbeth and Swanson optical rotation of
<* D +116 13' (2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 204).
Schimmel & Co. had earlier described phellandral from this oil with a laevo-
rotation and these properties:
b5 89 oxime m. 87-88
d}i 0.9445 semicarbazone m. 202-204
aD -36 30' phenylhydrazone m. 122-123
nf? 1.4911
12 1 2
Iskenderov, by catalytic hydrogenation of perillyl alcohol, obtained A
-
dihydroperillyl alcohol; oxidation of this compound gave this phellandral:
bu 99-102 nf? 1.4910
dgo 0.9435 oxime m. 87.8

df <
0.9409 semicarbazone m. 204
+36 36'
On exposure to and more readily with silver oxide, phellandral readily

air,
oxidizes to phellandric acid Ci Hi 6 2 dr, I- m. 144-145, []f? 112 36' to
,
112 48', dl- m. 143-144, according to Cooke, Macbeth and Swanson. 18

346 ALDEHYDES
Use. Phellandral has not attained much importance in the perfume or
flavor industries.
1
J. Chem. Soc. (1940), 808.
*Ber. Schimmel & Co., Oct. (1904), 91; Oct. (1905), 71.
*J. Chem.Soc. (1937), 1448.
*
Ibid. 121 (1922), 266.
6
Ibid.
6
Ber. Schimmel & Co., Oct. (1904), 91; Oct. (1905), 71.
7
8
J. Chem. Soc. (1935), 152. See also Berry, Macbeth and Swanson, J. Chem. Soc. (1937),
986, 1448, and Cooke and Macbeth, /. Chem. Soc. (1938), 1412.
9
Ibid. 121 (1922), 266.
10
Ibid. (1938), 1412.
11
Ibid. (1937), 1448.
12
13
J. Chem. Soc. (1940), 808.
G. Burger arid A. Killen Macbeth (Univ. of Adelaide), "Carbonyl Constituents of

Eucalyptus Oil. Constitution of Phellandral. d-, 1-, and d/-/3-Isopropyladipic Acids,"
J. Chem. Soc. (1946), 145. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 4368.
Myrtenal
HsC C
HC2
CH 2
H
Occurrence. Semmler and Zaar l
discovered the dextrorotatory form of
this unsaturated bicyclic aldehyde in the oil distilled from the wood of the
so-called false camphor tree Hcrnandia peltata Meissn. Myrtenal occurs in
this wood oil associated with perillaldehyde, a monocyclic compound. Myr-
2
tenal has recently been reported by Schmidt in Spanish eucalyptus oil
(Eucalyptus globulus).
Isolation. By fractional distillation of the "false camphor wood" oiland by treating

the fraction b. 215-225 with neutral sodium sulfite solution. Both d-myrtenal and
perillaldehyde combine with neutral sodium sulfite, but only d-myrtenal can be
regenerated from this compound by the action of alkali.
Schmidt,
Identification.
3 4
Semmler and Bartelt, 8 Dupont, Zacharewicz and Dulou, 6
-
Dupont and Zacharewicz, 7 and Penfold, Ramage and Simonsen 8 characterized the
isomeric forms of myrtenal by their semicarbazones and oximes, the melting points of
which are noted :
Derivative d I dl
"215
220-221 (dec.)
8
Semicarbazone
230 *
218 3
200.5
225 206 6
8
Phenylsemicarbazone {
180 (dec.)
69-70 *
Oxime 71~72 5
69-70 101
6 7
70.5-71.5 '
9
Properties. d-Myrtenal was isolated by Semmler and Zaar from the oil
10
camphor tree," and by Schmidt
of the "false from Spanish eucalyptus oil.
When purified it had these properties:

Semmler and Zaar Schmidt
bn 89-92 b. 220-221
d 20 0.9859 dljj 0.991
MD + 13 36' an + 13 13'
nD 1.50G18 nD 1.50302
For d-Myrtenal prepared by the oxidation of (/-myrtenol with chromic acid

and purified through the semicarbazone, Rupe and Heretier n indicated the
following properties:
bi2. 5 91.8-92
df 0.9898
+15 41'
12
Dupont, Zacharewicz and Dulou prepared both the inactive and the
dextroisomer of this aldehyde by the oxidation of pinene with selenium di-
oxide and characterized both stereoisomers. The properties reported for the
dextroisomers confirm those noted above; for the inactive form these authors
reported:
d 0.9969
1.5036
13
Schmidt obtained l-myrtenal by the oxidation of /-/3-pinene in the pres-
ence of cobalt siccative and reported the following properties:
b. 220-221 D -15 20'
d 0.992 nD 1.50275
Because of the conjugation of the ethylenic linkage with the aldehyde

group, myrtenal shows a very marked molecular exaltation (1.19).
Use. Myrtenal, as such, is not used in our industries.
348 ALDEHYDES
i Ber. 44 (1911), 815.
8
4
6
Ber. 40 (1907), 1370.
Compt. rend. 198 (1934), 1699.
7
Bull. soc. chim.2 (1935), 533.
[5],
Ber. 44 (1911), 817.
10
Ber. Schimmel &
11
Liebigs Ann. 459 (1927), 178, 189.
12
Compt. rend. 198 (1934), 1699.
13
H. Rupe and Alwin Hdritier, "Influence of the Constitution upon the Optical Activity
of Optically Active Substances. Optically Active Myrtenyl Derivatives," Liebigs
Ann. 459 (1927), 171. Chem. Abstracts 22 (1928), 1575.
Safranal
Mol. Weight 150.21
2,6,6-Trimethyl-l,3-cyclohexadien-l-al
\C/ H
HC
/ \C /
C=O
2
HC C CH 3
\CH/
Aside from organoleptic properties, safranal is of interest from
its specific
the theoretical viewpoint inasmuch as it represents not only a natural prod-

uct containing the important ionone ring, but is also a potential degradation
product of carotene pigments; furthermore it is related to the termones.
Occurrence. Years ago Kayser l showed that the bitter substance con-
tained in safran (saffron) is a glucoside, viz., picrocrocin which, on treatment
with acids or alkalies, can be split into glucose and a volatile compound
CioHi 4 O now recognized as safranal. More recently, Kuhn and collabora-
tors 2 3 demonstrated this active organic to be closely related with the andro-
-
termone present in a green alga (Chlamydomonas eugametos f. Synoica).

Through enzymatic cleavage of picrocrocin they isolated by vacuum distilla-
tion 4-hydroxy-2,6,6-trimethyl-l-tetrahydrobenzaldehyde, which on dehydra-
tion readily yielded safranal.
Isolation. Kuhn and A. Winterstein, 4 following the scheme of E. Winterstein and

5
Teleczky, extracted very fresh safran with ether (after the drug had first been ex-
tracted with petroleum ether) and obtained about 4% of picrocrocin CieHêO?, m.
156, tctra-acetate m. 143. Decomposition of this glucoside gave the volatile aglucone
CioHnO to which Kuhn and A. Winterstein gave the name safranal:
Ba(OH)2 with steam
CielêOy
--- > CioHnO + CellÔe
Picrocrocin Safranal d-Glucoso
Further purification may be effected through the semicarbazone.

According to Kuhn et al. 0> safranal yields these characteristic
7
Identification.
derivatives:
m. C.
Oxime 65 7
Thiosemicarbazone 199-200 7
2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone 186 7
Semicarbazone 175 (corr.) 6
6
Berizaldehyde compound 135 136 (corr.)
Properties. The following properties have been reported by E. Winterstein

and Teleczky, 8 and Kuhn and A. Winterstein: 9
8 9
b 93 n 1.5281
9
bi ~70 9
fCalc. 45.25
9
Mol.retr.
d} 0.9734* | Qbs47499
EMD 2.24 9
Safranal possesses the characteristic odor of safran. The great sensitivity

of the glucosides of terpene aldehydes explains the fact that on storing of the
drug the content of the glucoside decreases considerably. Thus, aged safran
no longer yields crystalline picrocrocin.
Kuhn and Wendt 10 succeeded in synthesizing safranal by treating /3-cyclo-
citral with selenious acid.
Use. Safranal, as such, is not offered on the market but it may be a con-
stituent of certain flavor specialties.
1
Ber. 17 (1884), 2228.
*Bcr. 72B (1939), 1702.
*Ber. 74B (1941), 219.
4
Ber. 67 (1934), 352. Cf. Naturwissensrhafteii 21 (1933), 527.
<>Hdv. Chim. Ada 5 (1922), 376.
6
Ber. 67 (1934), 354.
7
Ber. 69 (1936), 1552.
8
Z. physiol. Chcm. 120 (1922), 153.
9
Ber. 67 (1934), 354.
10
Ber. 69 (1936), 1549. Cf. Gorman Patent No. 638,940, Nov. 25, 1936,
350 ALDEHYDES
Nortricycloekasantalal
Mol. Weight 164.24
H 3
HC (C) U)
(5) (3),
CH
'H
CH 3
This aldehyde is most probably identical with the nortricycloeka-

tricyclic
santalal obtained by Semmler and Zaar l through oxidation of nortricyclo-
ekasantalol with chromic acid.
Isolation. Schimmel & Co. 2 isolated and purified this aldehyde through its bisulfite
compound.
Identification. the preparation of the semicarbazone m. 223-224. The oxime
By
is an oil by 135-137. The derived nortricycloekasantalic acid melts at 93.
According to Schimmel & Co., the purified aldehyde

3
Properties. is an
oil of somewhat spicy odor and has these properties:
b 76 i 222-224 -38 48'

20
b6 86-87 nD 1.48393
d 20 0.9938
Use. Nortricycloekasantalal has not found any use in our industries.
Ber. 43 (1910), 1891.

*Ber. Schimmel & Co., Oct. (1910), 103.
3
Ibid.
C. AROMATIC ALDEHYDES
Introduction. Relative to the aliphatic aldehydes, the aromatic aldehydes
play a much more important role in essential oils. In fact, some volatile
oils for example, bitter almond and cassia consist almost entirely of alde-
hydes belonging to the aromatic series.

AROMATIC ALDEHYDES 351
Benzaldehyde
C7 H6O Mol. Weight 106.12
Occurrence. This aromatic aldehyde probably does not occur as such in

plants but in the form of glucosides for instance, amygdalin. Under the
influence of enzymes this glucoside is split into benzaldehyde, glucose, and
hydrocyanic acid. In volatile oils benzaldehyde is, therefore, often accom-
panied by small quantities of hydrocyanic acid (see ''Hydrocyanic Acid").
Benzaldehyde has been found in quite a number of essential oils for ex-
ample, cinnamon bark and leaf oil, cassia, neroli, patchouly, cajuput, niaouli
oil, acacia flower Volatile bitter almond, peach,
oil, etc. and apricot kernel
oils consist almost entirely of benzaldehyde.
Isolation. With sodium concentrated aqueous solution, benzaldehyde

bisulfite in
readily forms a bisulfite addition compound from which the original aldehyde can be
regenerated.
Identification. Benzaldehyde may be characterized by the preparation of several
crystalline derivatives:
(1)Hydrazone from N-methyl-/3-carbohydrazidopyridinium p- toluene sulfonate m.
(2) p-Iodobenzoylhydrazone m. 230-231 (237-238 corr.), by Sah and Hsu.

2
(3) 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 237 (orange crystals from glacial acetic acid),

3
according to Campbell.
Properties. Benzaldehyde is a colorless liquid possessing a powerful odor

characteristic of crushed and moistened bitter almonds. Gildemeister and
Hoffmann, and Pound
4 5
recorded these properties:
4 4
b. 179 ng> 1.544-1.546
4 5
b 733 177.3 1.5460
4
b5 45 Sol. Soluble in 8 vol. of 50% alco-
df 1 .0365
5
hoi, in 2.5-3 vol. of 60% al-
d
15
1 049-1.055 4 cohol, in 1-1.5 vol. of 70%
alcohol. Soluble in 200 vol.
4
of water
Benzaldehyde is volatile with steam. On exposure to air, benzaldehyde

readily oxidizes to benzoic acid m. 121.4 which often separates in crystalline
form from old and improperly stored lots of benzaldehyde. According to
Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 6 an addition of 10 per cent of alcohol prevents oxi-
352 ALDEHYDES
dation by air, whereas an addition of less alcohol might accelerate the oxi-
dation.
Owingto the danger of spontaneous ignition, bottles of benzaldehyde, when
shipped, should be packed in diatomaceous earth (kieselguhr) or in kaolin,
but not in wood shavings, sawdust, or cellulose.
When examining commercial (synthetic) benzaldehyde, it is advisable to
test it for the presence (absence) of chlorine.
Use. Benzaldehyde is widely used in flavors, also in perfumes, lotions,
cosmetics, and soaps for creating or imparting bitter almond effects. It
blends with heliotropin, vanillin, and coumarin.
*J. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 599.

8
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 352.
8
Analyst 61 (1936), 392.
4
"Die Athcrischon Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 525.
6
J. Phys. Chem. 36 (1931), 1496.
6
Cumaldehyde
CioHi 2 Mol. Weight 148.20
Cuminic aldehyde. p-Isopropylbenzaldehyde. Cuminal

II
Occurrence. Cumaldehyde is the main constituent of cumin seed oil. It

has been observed also in several other volatile oils for example, in oil of
myrrh, Ceylon cinnamon, various eucalyptus oils, acacia flower oil, etc.
With sodium bisulfite in saturated aqueous solution, cumaldehyde yields

Isolation.
an addition compound from which the original aldehyde can be regenerated by
treatment with alkali.
Identification. Cumaldehyde can be characterized by the preparation of several

derivatives:
(1) Semicarbazone m. 210-211 according to Giidemeister and Hoffmann. 1
(2) Hydrazone from N-methyl-/3-carbohydrazidopyridmium p- toluene sulfonate m.
by Allen and Gates.
2
259 (corr.),
(3) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 190 (crystals from alcohol), according to Baker,
Nathan, and Shoppee.
3
(4) 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 243 (red crystals from glacial acetic acid),

4
according to Campbell.
Properties. Cumaldehyde is an oil possessing a disagreeable odor charac-

teristic of cumin seed. Volatile with steam. Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 6
6
and Gladstone reported these properties:
8 6
b. 235.5 (corr.) d 20 0.9775
5 5
bia.5 109.5 djf 0.9818
6
nf? 1.5301
Onoxidation with alkaline potassium permanganate, cumaldehyde yields

cumic acid m. 117 (from alcohol).
Use. Cumaldehyde used for the compounding of synthetic cumin oil
is
which serves for the flavoring of curry sauces and of exotic dishes in general.
Because of its powerful odor, this aldehyde must be used sparingly.
1
"Die Xtherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 527. Cf. Warunia and Lekos, Ber. 43 (1910), 660.
2
J. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 599.
3
/. Chem.Soc. (1935), 1848.
4
Analyst 61 (1936), 392.
5
"Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 527. Cf. Perkin, /. Chem. Soc. 69 (1896), 1199.
J. Chem. Soc. 46 (1884), 246.
Phenylacetaldehyde
a-Tolualdehde
CH -C=0
2
This aromatic aldehyde has not yet been found in nature but
Occurrence.
should be described in these pages because of its importance in the com-
pounding of perfumes.
Isolation. On
treatment with sodium bisulfite in saturated aqueous solution,
phenylacetaldehyde forms a bisulfite addition compound from which the original
aldehyde can be regenerated by steam distillation after addition of dilute sulfuric acid,
alkali causing polymerization.
A patented process by Frisch claims decomposition of the bisulfite complex at a
l
specific temperature by means of formaldehyde, acetic acid, or acetone to separate

the tolualdehyde from other contaminants.
Identification. Phenylacetaldehyde may be characterized by the preparation of
several derivatives:
(1) Oxime m. (from ether or ligroine), according to Wood and Comley.*
98.5
(2) Semicarbazone m. 156 (from dilute alcohol), according to Henle. 3
Hydrazone from N-methyl-/3-carbohydrazidopyridimum p-toluene sulfonate m.
(3)
354 ALDEHYDES
2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 121 (from alcohol), according to Campbell.
8
(4)
(Observed m. 110 by Brady; reported m. 240 by Kharasch, Sternfeld and Mayo. )
6 7
Properties. The synthetic product is a colorless somewhat viscid oil of
very powerful odor, characteristic of hyacinth. Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 8

9 10
Etard, and Shumeiko reported these properties:
9 10
b. 193-194 d 15 1.0423-1.0512
8 8
b 18 88 nf? 1.52536-1.53370
8 10
bn 80 1.5335-1.5337
8
dJi 1.0315-1.0521 Sol. Soluble in 3 vol. of
8
70% alcohol
Phenylacetaldehyde is volatile with steam. The aldehyde has a strong

tendency toward polymerization, even on standing at room temperature, and
is, therefore, difficult to preserve without undergoing changes. On treatment
with nitric acid, phenylacetaldehyde is oxidized to benzoic acid.
Use. Phenylacetaldehyde is used quite widely in perfumes and in cos-
metics. It serves in the compounding of hyacinth, narcissus, jonquil, jas-
mine, lilac, lily, certain rose types, and of general floral scents to which it im-
parts a refreshing top note, characteristic of hyacinth.
1
British Patent No. 472,545, Sept. 23, 1937. Sec also Shumeiko, J. App. Chem. U.S.S.R.
14 (1941), 93; and Shorygin, Skoblinskaya and Frantsuz, Sintezy Dushistykh Veshchesiv,
Sbornik, Stalel (1939), 58. Khim. Referat. Zhur. No. 4 (1940), 112. Chem. Abstracts 36
(1942), 3794.
'/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 42 (1923), 432 T.
*Ber. 38 (1905), 1366.
/. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 599.
6
Analyst 61 (1936), 392.
*J. Chem. Soc. (1931), 756.
7
/. Org. Chem. 6 (1940), 376.
8
9
Ann. chim. phys. [5], 22 (1881), 248.
10
J. App. Chem. U.S.S.R. 14 (1941), 93.
Cinnamaldehyde
C9 H8O Mol. Weight 132.15
Cinnamic aldehyde. /?-Phenylacrolein
H
/
CH=CH*C=O
Occurrence. This aromatic aldehyde is the main constituent of cassia leaf

and bark oil, and of cinnamon bark oil. It has been found also in several
other volatile oils for example, in oil of myrrh and patchouly.
1
According to Tiemann, through the sparingly soluble, normal addition
Isolation.
compounds which cinnamaldehyde forms with sodium sulfite or sodium bisulfite in
cold concentrated solution, and from which the original aldehyde can be regenerated
with sodium carbonate. When separating cinnamaldehyde through the bisulfite
compounds, an excess of hot sodium bisulfite solution should be avoided, as in this
case a second molecule of sodium bisulfite would react with the cinnamaldehyde
molecule, forming thereby the water soluble hydrosulfonic acid salt Cells -C^Ha
(SOsNa) -CH(OH)S0 3 Na from which aqueous sodium hydroxide at ordinary tempera-
ture would regenerate only a part of the original cinnamaldehyde. The same is true
if cinnamaldehyde is treated with a mixture of excess sodium sulfite and sodium
bicarbonate.
Identification. Cinnamaldehyde can be characterized by the preparation of several
derivatives :
Hydrazone from N-methyl-/3-carbohydrazidopyridinium p- toluene sulfonate m.

(1)
(2) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 195 (from alcohol), according to Hyde.
3
(3) 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 255 with decomposition (from glacial acetic

4
acid), according to Campbell.
Properties. Cinnamaldehyde is a yellow liquid possessing a powerful odor

and flavor characteristic of cinnamon. Volatile with steam. Sparingly solu-
ble in water, soluble in alcohol or ether. Insoluble in petroleum ether.
Gildemeister and Hoffmann, Altschul and von Schneider, 6 and von Auwers
5
and Eisenlohr 7 recorded these properties:

6 5
m. -7.5 aD
5 B
b. 252 (partial de- nf? 1.61949
7 *
composition) n{?' 1.6235
5
b 20 128-130 Sol. Soluble in 25 vol. of 50% al-
67
d}
'
1.0520 7
cohol, in 7 vol. of al- 60%
5 cohol in 2~3 voL of 70 %
d}i 1.054-1.058 >
6
alcohol
On exposure to air cinnamaldehyde readily oxidizes to cinnamic acid, finally

to benzaldehyde and benzoic acid.
When examining commercial (synthetic) cinnamaldehyde, it is advisable
to test also for the presence (absence) of chlorine.
it
Use. Because of its powerful odor, typical of cassia and cinnamon, cin-
namaldehyde serves as a valuable ingredient in flavors and in perfumes for
the imparting of spicy notes. It is also used widely for the scenting of soaps.
Cinnamaldehyde is indispensable in the compounding of artificial cassia and
cinnamon oils. (N.B. In white soap stock it causes discoloration.)
1
Ber. 31 (1898), 3302.
2
J. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 599.
3
Ber. 32 (1899), 1814.
4
Analyst 61 (1936), 392.
8
6
Z. physik. Chem. 16 (1895), 24.
7
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 84 (1911), 65.
356 ALDEHYDES
SUGGESTED ADDITIONAL LITERATTJBE
B. Stempel, "Volumetric Analysis of Cinnamaldehyde in Cortex cinnamomi" Fette

u. Seifen 49 (1942), 42. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 5196.
Marcel Mouton, "The Determination of Benzaldehyde and Cinnamaldehyde as
2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazones and Its Possible Application to an Assay of Galenic
Preparations of Cherry Laurel and Cinnamon," Bull. sci. pharmacol. 46 (1939), 148.
H. Wachsmuth and R. Lenaers, "Cinnamic Aldehyde Determination of, and Other
Essential Principles," J. pharm. Belg. 1, No. 4, Jan. (1946), 65. J. Am. Pharm.
Assocn. 36, No. 11 (1947), 334.
Hydrocinnamaldehyde
C 9 Hi O Mol. Weight 134.17
)8-Phenylpropionaldehyde. Benzylacetaldehyde
H
" ^ CH 2 *CH 2 -C=0
Occurrence. Hydrocinnamaldehyde has been observed in Ceylon cinnamon

oil.
Isolation. Through the sodium bisulfite compound.

(1) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 122-123 (needles from benzene and ligroine),
1
according to Rtfna.
(2) 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 149 (corr.) (crystallized from alcohol), according
to Allenand Richmond. 2
4
Properties. Gildemeister and Hoffmann recorded these properties:
b 744 221-224 d}f 1.03
b 13 104-105 Sol. Soluble in about 2 vol. of

70% alcohol
Hydrocinnamaldehyde is an oil possessing a strong odor reminiscent of

jasmine, hyacinth, and lilac. On exposure to air, hydrocinnamaldehyde oxi-
dizes to hydrocinnamic acid m. 48.7.
Use. Hydrocinnamaldehyde is used widely but sparingly in all kinds of
floral perfume compositions, especially lilac, jasmine, rose, and sweet pea.
^Biochem. Z. 67 (1914), 141.
/. Org. Chem. 2 (1937), 224.
Ibid. 6 (1941), 599.
4
Salicylaldehyde
C7H 2 Mol. Weight 122.12
o-Hydroxybenzaldehyde.
Occurrence. Small quantities of this aromatic aldehyde occur in the oils
of various Spiraea species, in cassia oil, and in a few other volatile oils.
Isolation. Salicylaldehyde reacts as a phenol and as an aldehyde; thus it is soluble

in alkali solutions from which the aldehyde can be precipitated with carbon dioxide.
It also forms an addition compound with sodium bisulfite in saturated aqueous solu-
tion, which crystallizes from 10% alcohol and from which the original aldehyde can
be regenerated by treatment with dilute acids.
Identification. Salicylaldehyde can be characterized by the preparation of several
derivatives :
p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 227 (from alcohol), according to Biltz and Sieden.

1
(1)
(2) 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 252 (with decomposition) (from glacial acetic
acid), according to Campbell;
2
m. 248 (from absolute alcohol), according to Curtius
and Dedichen. 3
(3) p-Bromophenylhydrazone m. 171-172, according to Gildemeister and Hoff-

mann; 4 m. 175.5 by Biltz and Sieden. 6
(4) p-Iodobenzoylhydrazone m. 214-215 (corr.) by Sah and Hsii.
6
Properties. Salicylaldehyde is an oil of characteristic aromatic odor.

Volatile with steam. Sparingly soluble in water, miscible with alcohol and
ether.
The following properties have been reported by Carswell and Pfeifer,
7
von
8 9 10
Auwers, Perkin, and Walden:
7 10
f.p. 1.6 pure d 25 1.1539
9 7
b. 197 (corr.) dg 1.1690
7 5 10
b 75 i 196.4-196.5 nf> 1.57017
7 10 7 8
b 25 93 -
nj?- 1.574
With an aqueous solution of ferric chloride the aldehyde gives an intense

violet color. Oxidation of Salicylaldehyde yields salicylic acid m. 158.
Use. Small quantities of Salicylaldehyde are used in flavor work, also in
the compounding of synthetic flower oils. The principal use, however, is a
starting material for the synthesis of coumarin.
358 ALDEHYDES
1
Liebigs Ann. 324(1902), 322.
2
Analyst 61 (1936), 392.
a/, prakt. Chem. [2], 50 (1894), 265.
*
Liebigs Ann. 324 (1902), 315.
6
6
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 349.
7
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 60 (1928), 1765.
8
LiebigsAnn. 408 (1915), 238.
*J. Chem. Soc. 69 (1896), 1200.
10
Z. physik. Chem. 69 (1907), 395.
B. G. Feinberg, "Quantitative Study of Some Aldehyde Reactions," Am. Chem. J. 49

(1913), 87.
^-Anisaldehyde
Mol. Weight 136.14
' ' '
p-Methoxybenzaldehy de. Aube'pine'
OCH 3
Occurrence. Since this aromatic aldehyde is formed by oxidation of ane-
thole, it usually occurs in old essential oils which contain anethole oil of
anise, star anise, and fennel, for example. Anisic aldehyde has been found
also in acacia flower oil, and in a few other oils. Interesting is the occurrence
of anisaldehyde in the extract of Tahiti vanilla beans.
Isolation. Through the bisulfite compound.

Identification. Anisaldehyde may be characterized by the preparation of several
derivatives:
Semicarbazone m. 210, according to Wilson and Keenan; l 2-benzylthiosemi-
(1)
carbazone m. 175, by Cattelain. 2
(2) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 160-161, according to Hebert.
3
(3)2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 253-254 with decomposition (from glacial

acetic acid), according to Campbell. 4 (Cf. Brady, 6 and Nauta and Mulder 6 who report
m. 250.)
Oxidation of p-anisaldehyde with dilute potassium permanganate leads to p-anisic
acid m. 184.2.
Properties.Anisaldehyde is a colorless to yellowish oil, possessing a strong

odor characteristic of blooming hawthorn. Miscible with alcohol or ether.
Volatile with steam. Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 7 Jaeger, 8 and von Auwers 9
8 9
m. 2.5 df 1.123
9 7
b. 247 d}i 1.127-1. 130
8 7
b 75 i 246 nb 1.571-1.575
7
b5 10G-107 1.5731 9
Sol. Soluble in 7-8 vol. of 50% alcohol; soluble

7
in 300 vol. of water with slight opalescence
On exposure to air, anisaldehyde is oxidized to p-anisic acid m. 184.2

(corr.).
Use. Very useful in general perfume work and for the scenting of soaps,
particularly in lilac, heliotrope, hawthorn, acacia, mimosa, new mown hay,
and sweet pea compositions.
1
J. Assocn. Official Agr. Chem. 13 (1930), 390, 393.
2
3
Bull. soc. chim. [4], 27 (1920), 52. Also cf. Feinbcrg, Ant. Chem. J. 49 (1913), 87; Iddles
and Jackson, I ml. Eng. Chem., Anal. Ed., 6 (1934), 454; Harvill and Herbst, J. Org.
Chem. 9 (1944), 21.
4
Analyst 61 (1936), 392.
5
/. Chem. Soc. (1931), 756.
6
Rec. trav. chim,. 68 (1939), 1062.
7
"Die Atherischen Olc," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 532.
6
Z. anorg. allgern. Chem. 101 (1917), 142.
Licbigs Ann. 408 (1915), 240.
9
^-Methoxycinnamaldehyde
Ci H 10 O 2 Mol. Weight 162.18
OCHj
Occurrence. This aromatic aldehyde occurs in estragon oil.
Isolation. The aldehyde readily forms a bisulfite addition compound which is
sparingly soluble in water and from which it is not readily regenerated.

According to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, p-methoxycinnamalde-
1
Identification.
hyde can be characterized by the preparation of its semicarbazone m. 222 (Scholtz
and Wiedemann 2
reported 199), and cf its oxime in. 154.
360 ALDEHYDES
Oxidation with potassium permanganate in acid solution yields p-anisic acid (p-
methoxybenzoic acid) in. 184.2 (corr.), while oxidation with silver oxide leads to
p-methoxycinnamic acid m. 170.
Properties. Daufrcsne,
3
who isolated this aldehyde from estragon oil, re-

bi 5 171
d 1.137
4
Scholtz and Wiedemann found the synthetic aldehyde to melt at 58.
Use. Small quantities of the synthetic product are used for the compound-
ing of imitation estragon oil.
1
"Die Xthcrischcn Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 533.
*Ber. 36 (1903), 853.
3
Compt. rend. 146 (1907), 875.
4
Ber. 36 (1903), 853.
o-Methoxycinnamaldehyde
C 10 H 10 2 Mol. Weight 162.18
CH=CH'C=0
-OCH 3
Occurrence.This aldehyde occasionally occurs in cassia oil and separates

from the high boiling fractions in the form of a crystalline deposit.
Isolation. Forms a water soluble complex with sodium bisulfite which is readily
decomposed by acids to regenerate the aldehyde.
According to ( Jilderacister and Hoffmann, the aldehyde can be
1
Identification.
characterized by the preparation of its phenylhydrazorie m. 116-117, and of its
oximc m. 125M2G .
Oxidation with potassium permanganate yields o-methoxybenzoic acid m. 99;

treatment with silver oxide leads to /3-methylcumaric acid m. 182-183.
2
Properties. Bertram and Kiirsten reported these properties:
m. -15-46
b. 295 (with part decomposition)
b 12
The aldehyde very unstable and readily decomposes even without ex-
is
posure to air and light. It imparts an intensely yellow color to the skin.
Use. 0-Methoxycinnamaldehydo is not used in our industries.
1
"Die Xthorischen Ole," 3d Ed, Vol. I, 533.
2
J. prakt. Chern. II, 61 (1895), 31G.
Vanillin
C 8H 8 3 Mol. Weight 152.14
4-Hydroxy-3-methoxybenzaldehydc. Protocatcchualdehydc-3-methyl ether
CH 3
Occurrence. This important aromatic aldehyde is widely distributed in

nature, although it occurs in essential oils, gums, and balsams only in small
quantities. Most likely plants do not contain vanillin as such but in the
form of glucosidcs which by enzyme action release vanillin. The most im-
portant source of natural vanillin the vanilla bean (fruit).
is Vanillin occurs
also in gum benzoin, Peru balsam, clove oil, etc.
Isolation. Through the compound. From ether solutions vanillin can be

bisulfite
extracted completely with saturated aqueous sodium bisulfite solutions, but the sodium
bisulfite compound is quite soluble. Specialized technics must be employed to insure
pure isolates in the event closely related isomcrs and tautomers arc to be expected.
Identification. Vanillin can be characterized by the preparation of numerous
derivatives, among them:
(1) Semicarbazonc m. 230, according to Wilson and Keenan;
l
4-(p-nitrophenyl)-
semicarbazone m. 261, by Barre" and Piche. 2
(2) Hydantoin m. 276, by Henze and Speer.

3
(3) p-Nitrophenylhydrazorie m. 227 (leaflets from glacial acetic acid), according

to Biltz and Sieden. 4
(4) 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 271 (with decomposition), (reel crystals from

glacial acetic acid), according to Campbell;
5
Brickman et al. observed 261-262.
Gildemeister and Hoffmann 7 recommended several additional derivatives as useful
for the identification of vanillin, among them:
(5) Acetyl compound m. 77.
(6) Benzoate m. 75.
(7) p-Bromophenylhydrazone m. 148.
8
Properties. According to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, vanillin crystallizes
from hot water in the form of colorless needles m. 81-82. (Of. also Arana, 9
and Freudenberg et al. 10 ) It possesses a strong and intensely sweet odor
characteristic of vanilla. On careful heating, vanillin can be sublimated
without decomposition; by prolonged heating at 105 vanillin decomposes
362 ALDEHYDES
with formation of nonvolatile products. The same authors reported these
boiling points of vanillin:
b. 285 (in a current of CO2 )
bi5 170
b 10 162
b4 146
Vanillin readily soluble in alcohol, ether, chloroform, and hot ligroine;

is
insoluble in cold ligroine; soluble in hot water, relatively insoluble in cold

water, for which reason vanillin can be recrystallized from water. At 75-
80, 1 part of vanillin dissolves in 20 parts of water, at 14 in 90-100 parts of
water. At 7-8 the greater part of vanillin will gradually crystallize from
the water. Vanillin is soluble in sodium carbonate solution, but not in so-
dium bicarbonate solution.
Use. the main ingredient in artificial vanilla flavors. Used
Vanillin is
most extensively for the flavoring of confectionery, baked goods, candies,

chocolates, etc. Vanillin serves widely also in perfumes and cosmetics for
imparting sweet and lasting notes. It blends well with heliotropin and cou-
marin. Used in floral and fancy scents alike.
1
J. Assocn. Official Agr. Chem. 13 (1930), 390, 396. Cf. Knopfor, Monateh. 31 (1910),
103; and Brickman, Hawkins and Hibbcrt, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1940), 2149.
2
Can. J. Res. 20B (1942), 19.
3
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 522.
*Liebigs Ann. 324 (1902), 323.
6
Analyst Gl (1936), 392.
6
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1940), 2153.
7
"Die Athcrischcn t)le," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 536.
9
Puerto Rico Agr. Expt. Sta., Ann. Rept. of 1989 (1940), 2. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 5319.
10
Ber. 73B (1940), 169.

Irwin A. Pearl (Inst. Paper Chemistry, Appleton, Wis.), "Reactions of Vanillin,"
J. Am. Chem.
Soc. 67 (1945), 1628. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 70.
Juan de D. Guevara R., "The Assay of Preparations Containing Vanillin/' Farmacia
y quim. (Lima, Peru) 1 (1945), 240. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 2932.
Irwin A. Pearl (Inst. Paper Chemistry, Appleton, Wis.), "Reactions of Vanillin and
Its Derived Compounds. The Reaction of Vanillin with Silver Oxide," J. Am. Chem.
Soc. 68 (1946), 429. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 2813.
Irwin A. Pearl, "Reactions of Vanillin and Its Derived Compounds. The Cannizzaro
Reaction of Vanillin," /. Org. Chem. 12, No. 1 (1947), 79.
R. Fischer and G. Kocher, "Determination of Vanillin and Ethyl Ether Vanillin
(Bourbonal)," Mikrochemie ver. mikrochim. Acta 33 (1947), 131. Chem. Abstracts 42
(1948), 2058.
4-Methoxysalicylaldehyde
C8 H8 3 Mol. Weight 152.14
2-Hydroxy-4-methoxybenzaldehyde. 2-Hydroxyanisaldehyde.
Occurrence. This aromatic aldehyde has been found in the oil distilled
from the roots of Dccalepis hamiltonii.
Isolation. Extracted with alkali as a yellow colored solution. Readily volatile

with steam. Crystallizes from water in which the ethereal aldehyde is only moderately
soluble.
Identification. Through the oxime m. 137-138. Alkaline solutions of the com-

pound are colored intensely violet with iron chloride.
Conversion to the dimethyl ether in. 71 (Gattermann *) which in turn yields an
oxime m. 106.
2
Properties. According to Friedlaender and Schuloff m. 41. Character-
istic aromatic odor, suggestive of vanillin.
Use. 4-Methoxysalicylaldehyde is not used in our industries.
1
Ber. 31 (1898), 1152. Liebigs Ann. 357 (1907), 369.
2
Monatsh. 29 (1908), 390.
*
'Methylvanillin"
C9 H 10 3 Mol. Weight 166.17
Veratraldehyde. 3,4-Dimethoxybenzaldehyde. Protocatechualdehyde di-
methyl ether. Vanillin methyl ether
OCH3
)CH 3
Occurrence. Methylvanillin occurs in oil of Cymbopogon javanensis.

364 ALDEHYDES
Isolation. Through the crystalline sodium bisulfite compound.
Hydantoin m. 182.5M83 by Henze and
1
(1) , Speer.
(2) Phenylhydrazone m. 121 (crystallized from alcohol), according to Juliusberg.
2
(3) 2,4-T)iriitrophenylhydrazone m. 261-263 (from nitrobenzene), according to

3
Strain.
4 6
Properties. Puxeddu, Tiemann,
8
and Gildemeister and Hoffmann re-
corded these properties:
4 6
m. 42 d 1.151
5
b. 285 nD 1.551 6
Almost insoluble in cold water, more soluble

hot water. Readily solu-in
ble in alcohol or ether. Only very slowly volatile with steam.
Use. Methylvanillin is not used in our industries. However, "ethyl-
vanillin" or "bourbonal" (protocatechualdehyde-3-ethyl ether) m. 77.5
OC 2 H 5
serves widely in the flavor industry as an adjunct to, or substitute for vanillin,
7 8
being intensely sweet and reported by Defren and Boyles to possess to 3%
4 times the flavoring value of vanillin. "Ethyl vanillin" has not been identi-
fied in nature.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 522.
2 Ber. 40 (1907), 119.
3
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1935), 760.
*Atti accad. Lincei (Ilcndiconti) [5], 20, II (1911), 721.
6
Ber. 8 (1875), 1135.
6
"Die Xthcrischcn Olc," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 538.
7
Foodlnd. 1 (1929), 661.
8
Am. Perfumer 25 (1930), 243.
Piperonal
3,4-Methylenedioxybenzaldchyde. Heliotropin
CH*
Occurrence. It remains doubtful whether this aromatic aldehyde occurs in

the beans (fruit) of various vanilla species, also whether the odor of heliotrope
flowers is due to piperonal. Traces of piperonal have, however, been found
in a few flower oils such as Spiraea ulmaria and Robinia pseudacacia. Re-
by Ikeda
1
cently reported in pha-chium oil et al.
Isolation. Through the crystalline bisulfite compound which is sparingly soluble

in water or alcohol.
Identification. Piperonal can be characterized by the preparation of several deriva-
tives:
Semicarbazone m. 234, according to Wilson and Keenan. 2
(1)
(2) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 201, recorded by Quilico and Freri.
3
(3) 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 266 with decomposition (red crystals from

4
glacial acetic acid), according to Campbell.
(4) Hydantoin m. 207, by Henze and Speer.
5
Gildemeister and Hoffmann 6 recorded some additional derivatives and reactions

useful for the identification of piperonal :
(5) Monobromo compound m. 129.

(6) Mononitro compound m. 94.5.
(7) Thiosemicarbazone m. 185.
p-Bromophenylhydrazone m. 155.
(8)
(9) Oxidation with aqueous potassium permanganate at 70-80 yields piperonylic
acid m. 227.5-228.
(10) On addition of 40 per cent sodium hydroxide solution to an emulsion of piper-
onal, acetone and water, piperonalacetone m. 1()7-108 is formed.
Piperonal consists of colorless, shiny crystals m. 35-36 ac-

Properties.
7 8
cording to Gildemeister and Hoffmann; 37 according to Othmer, and Fittig
and Mielck. 9 It possesses a sweet, flower-like odor, characteristic of helio-
trope. Readily volatile with steam. The boiling point at 760 mm. is 263.
Gildemeister and Hoffmann 10 also reported that piperonal is soluble in the
usual organic solvents, sparingly soluble in cold water, more readily in hot
water from which it can be recrystallized in the form of large crystals. Solu-
366 ALDEHYDES
bility in water 2 : 1000 at 12. Five parts of piperonal are soluble in 100
parts of 70 per cent alcohol at 10.
When testing piperonal for the presence of impurities, it is advisable to de-
termine its melting point and its behavior toward sodium bisulfite with which
piperonal reacts readily.
On exposure to light and piperonal turns yellow and finally decomposes,
air,
being very slowly oxidized to piperonylic acid. It should, therefore, be stored

in a dark place and in airtight containers.
cool,
Use. Piperonal is used widely in perfumery and for the scenting of cos-
metics and soaps. Due to its distinct heliotrope odor it serves in lilac, car-
nation, sweet pea, and in fancy bouquets of all types. Piperonal blends well
with coumarin and vanillin and imparts a lasting sweetness wherever used.
1
/.
*J. Assocn. Official Agr. Chem. 13 (1930), 390, 395.
3
Gazz. chim. ital 68 (1928), 389.
4
Analyst 61 (1936), 392.
6
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 522.
6
''Ibid.
*Z. anorg. allgem. Chem. 91 (1915), 212, 226, 242.
9
Liebigs Ann. 162 (1869), 38.
10
"Specifications and Standards" of the Essential Oil Association of the United States,
January 10, 1947.
Asaronaldehyde
2,4,5-Trimethoxybenzaldehyde. Asarylaldehyde
OCHa
I I
HsCO-
^V
CH3
Occurrence. Gero *
found from the roots of wild
in the volatile oil derived
Hungarian hazelnut, Asarum europaeum L. (fam. Aristolochiaceae) an alde- ,
hyde, viz., asaronaldehyde, which, according to mixed melting point deter-

mination with an authentic sample, proved to be 2,4,5-trimethoxybenzalde-
hyde.
HETEROCYCLIC ALDEHYDES 367
Van Alphen 2
was able to show that freshly distilled calamus oil (Acorns
calamus L.) does not contain asaronaldehyde but old oils of the same type
may yield this aldehyde, as originally reported by Thorns and Beckstroem. 3
According to the same authors, asaronaldehyde

4
Isolation. is easily isolated by
means of its bisulfite addition product.
Identification. By the preparation of derivatives, according to van Alphen: 5
(1) Semioxamazone (CisHisOsNs), m. 249-250.

(2) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 234. This derivative has been found useful to
detect the aldehyde in very small quantities.
(3) Careful treatment with nitric acid and acetic anhydride yields 2,4,5-methoxy-
nitrobenzene m. 130.
Properties.m. 114, according to Gero. 8

The aldehyde is sparingly soluble in cold water but easily soluble in ether,
benzene, or ligroine.
Use. Asaronaldehyde, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Riechstoff Ind. 3 (1928), 176. Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1929), 49. Chem. Abstracts 24 (1930),
2235.
2
Rec. trav. chim. 46 (1927), 195.
3
Ber. 34 (1901), 1021.
4
Ibid.
6
Rec. trav. chim. 46 (1927), 195; 47 (1928), 174.
6
Riechstoff Ind. 3 (1928), 176. Ber. Schimmel &
Co. (1929), 49. Chem. Abstracts 24 (1930),
2235.
D. HETEROCYCLIC ALDEHYDES
Furfural
C 5 H4 2 Mol. Weight 96.08
a-Furfuraldehyde. 2-Furaldehyde. Furfurylaldehyde
HC CH H
HC
II
C
II /
C=O
\o /
Occurrence. Furfural occurs in the first fraction of many volatile oils be-
longing to the Pinaceae family for example, in oil of Pinus palustris, in oil
of cade, etc. It is present also in oil of orris root, lavender, Ceylon cinnamon,
petitgrain, bay, clove, etc. Because of its solubility in water, furfural has
been found in the distillation waters of oil of copal, cypress, savin, vetiver,
orris root, Cayenne linaloe wood, West Indian sandalwood, ambrette seed,
clove, clove stem, caraway, angelica, etc.
368 ALDEHYDES
Isolation. By washing the first fraction of the oil with water, extracting the water
layer with ether, and evaporating the ether.
With sodium bisulfite in saturated aqueous solution, furfural forms an addition
compound.
Identification. Furfural can be characterized by the following methods:
(1) With aniline acetate, furfural gives an intense red color, while tetrahydrofurfural,
methylfurfural, and hydroxymethyifurfural do not produce this color reaction.
(a) With hydroxylamine hydrochloride in alkaline solution, furfural yields a-
furfuraloxime m. 75-76 (from benzene and petroleum ether), according to Brady and
Goldstein. 1 With hydroxylamine hydrochloride and sodium acetate in dilute alcohol,
furfural yields /3-furfuraloxime m. 91-92 (from alcohol).
(b) Phenylhydrazone m. 97 (uncorr.), prepared according to the following pro-
cedure of Huntress and Mulliken. 2
In a dry test tube mix 1 drop of the oil to be tested with 2 drops of phenylhydrazine.
Dissolve the pasty reaction product in 3 cc. of boiling 50% alcohol. Cool in running
water, and shake until the precipitate separates. Collect on a small filter and wash
with 5 cc. of cold 33% alcohol. Transfer to a test tube and redissolve in 5 cc. of boiling
33% alcohol. If dark droplets separate allow to settle and decant the clear hot solu-
tion. Cool, and shake until pearly crystals again precipitate. Filter and wash with
cold 33% alcohol.
3
(c)
(d) Hydrazone from l-methyl-3-carbohydrazidopyridinium p-toluene sulfonate m.
Properties. Furfural is a colorless liquid which darkens rapidly on stand-

ing in light or air. Traces of pyrogallol retard this effect. The odor of fur-
furalsomewhat resembles that of benzaldehyde. The following properties
have been reported by Evans and Aylesworth, 6 Trimble, 6 Mains, 7 and Bruhl: 8
5 7
b. 161.7 -
ng> 1.5255
6 5- 8
b 25 64-C5 1. 52608
6
dl 1.1584
8
df 1.1594
Furfural readily soluble in water (1 part furfural in 11 parts of water at

is
13, 8.3 parts of furfural are soluble in 100 parts of water at 20); soluble in
alcohol or ether.
Furfural dissolves aromatic hydrocarbons in all proportions, while saturated
aliphatic hydrocarbons exhibit only a limited solubility in furfural. Trim-
9
ble studied the solubility of furfural and suggested the possibility of using
it as an analytical
reagent.
Easily volatile with steam. Furfural reduces Tollen's reagent and Feh-
ling's solution and adds bromine.
Use. Furfural and furfural derivatives are used for the compounding of a
few types of synthetic essential oils.
HETEROCYCLIC ALDEHYDES 369
1
J. Chem. Soc. (1927), 1960.
2
"Identification of Pure Organic Compounds," Order I (1941), 57. Cf. Mulliken, Vol. I
(1904), 24.
3
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 349.
*/. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 599.
*Ind. Eng. Chem. 18 (1926), 24.
*Ibid. 33 (1941), 661.
7
Chem. Met. Eng. 26 (1922), 779.
*Liebigs Ann. 236 (1886), 7.
9
2nd. Eng. Chem. 33 (1941), 660.
A. P. Dunlop, Paul R. Stout, and Samuel Swadesh, "Autoxidation of Furfural,"

Ind. Eng. Chem. 38, No. 7, (194(5), 705.
IV. KETONES
A. ALIPHATIC KETONES
Introduction. Not many aliphatic ketones occur in volatile oils. The low-
est members of this group originate most likely from decomposition of more
complex compounds during steam distillation. Because of their solubility in
water these ketones, particularly acetone and diacetyl, are found mainly in
the distillation waters, or in the oils of cohobation obtained by redistillation
(cohobation) of the distillation waters. Occasionally they also occur in the
lowest fractions (foreruns) of the direct oils. Acetone and diacetyl are fre-
quently accompanied by methyl alcohol and furfural.
(a) SATURATED ALIPHATIC KETONES.
Acetone
Dimethyl ketone
CH 3 CO CH 3
-
Occurrence. Acetone has been observed in many essential oils, especially

in those derived from leaf materials. Because of its solubility in water, this
ketone can frequently be found in the distillation waters; occasionally it is
accompanied by hydrocyanic acid. Quite possibly acetone originates during
the distillation process through decomposition of more complex substances.
Acetone thus occurs in oil of turpentine from Abies excelsa, in Russian tur-
pentine oil, in Atlas cedar oil, in oil of clove, etc., in the distillation waters of
American peppermint, of patchouly and numerous other plants.
Isolation. By washing fraction of the distillate with water, separating the

the first
water-acetone mixture by fractionation, and purification with sodium iodide. Three
rnols of acetone and 1 mol of sodium iodide form an addition compound, which has
been described by Shipsey and Werner, Wadsworth and Dawson, 2 Macy and Thomas, 3
1
and Weissberger and Proskauer. 4 This ketone may likewise be isolated by means of
its addition compound formed on treatment with a saturated aqueous solution of
sodium bisulfite.
Identification. (1) By color reaction:
Sodium nitroprusside according to Mulliken:
test,
8
To 2 cc. of cold water add 5 drops of the oil to be tested, then 2 drops of a 1%
aqueous solution of sodium nitroprusside, and finally 2 drops of 10% sodium hydroxide
solution. Divide the solution in two parts, a- and b-, adding to the latter 3 drops of
glacial acetic acid. Part a- is orange but changes to clear yellow in 20 min. Part 6- on
373
374 KETONES
acidification with a slight tendency toward purple.
is red, This color does not change
after 20 min. although the intensity slightly diminishes.
6
(a)
(b) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 148-149 (crystallized from alcohol), according to

Dakin 7 and Dehio. 8
p-Iodobenzoylhydrazone m. 214-215 (corr.), by Sah and Hsii.
9
(c)
(d) Hydrazone from A^methyl-/3-carbohydrazidopyridinium p-toluene sulfonate m.
V Allen and Gates.
10
166 (corr.),
> / / by
Properties. Acetone a water-clear liquid possessing a characteristic, pe-

is
culiar, sweet odor. The following properties have been reported by Gilde-
meister and Hoffmann, 11 Parks and Kelley, 12 Eisenlohr, 13 and Bramley: 14
12 05 14
m. -95.6 df 0.7912
b. 56.5 n di4 0.79945

9 4 -
13
n{> 1.3588G
Miscible in proportions with water; soluble in alcohol, ether, etc.

all
When treated with iodine and potassium iodide solution and alkali, acetone
yields iodoform.
Aside from other derivatives acetone forms an oxime and a phenylhydra-
zone, hydrazone, and methylphenylhydrazone that are not recommended for
identification purposes because of their low melting points.
Use. Acetone is widely used in the chemical industry as a solvent, as a
reagent, and for organic synthesis.
'/. Chem. Soc. 103 (1913), 1255.

*Ibid. (1926), 2784.
3
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 48 (1926), 1547.
4
"Organic Solvents" (1925), Oxford University Press.
6
"Identification of Pure Organic Compounds," I (1904), 146.
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 2957. Cf. Campbell, Analyst 61 (1936), 392.
V. Biol. Chem. 4 (1908), 238.
8
Z. anal. Chem. 104 (1936), 417.
9
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 352.
J. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 599.
11
"Die Atherischen (Me," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 546.
12
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 47 (1925), 2092.
13
Z. Physik. Chem. 76 (1911), 588.
J. Chem. Soc. 109(1916), 41.
G. J. W.
Ferrey, "Tests for Acetone and Ethyl Alcohol, with Special Reference to
Methyl Alcohol," Qwrt. J. Pharm. Pharmacol. 18 (1945), 193. Chem. Abstracts 40
(1946), 1279.
ALIPHATIC KETONES 375
n-Amyl Methyl Ketone

Methyl n-amyl ketone
CH3 -(CH 2 )4-CO-CH3

This ketone occurs in the low boiling fractions of clove oil
Occurrence.
and of Ceylon cinnamon oil. It contributes considerably to the odor of clove
oil.
Isolation. By fractional distillation and further

purification through the sodium
bisulfite addition compound, which this ketone forms with sodium bisulfite in saturated
aqueous solution.
Identification. Methyl n-amyl ketone can be characterized by the preparation of
1
Allen.
(2) Semicarbazone m. 123 (crystallized from alcohol), according to Sherrill. 2
Properties. The following properties have been reported by Ginnings,

Plonk and Carter, 3 Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 4 and Ceuterick: 6
3 5
b. 151.2 n?? 1.40439
4
151 -152 Sol. Slightly soluble in water,
0.8115 3 Soluble in
df alcohol,
4
6 ether etc '
df 0.81966 >
6
Behal found that on oxidation with chromium trioxide and sulfuric acid,
methyl n-amyl ketone yields n-valeric acid and acetic acid.

On reduction with sodium ethylate, methyl n-amyl ketone forms
7
2-heptanol, according to Whitmore and Otterbacher.
Methyl n-amyl ketoxime is a liquid and, therefore, cannot be recommended
as a derivative for identification purposes.
Use. Methyl n-amyl ketone is used for the compounding of certain syn-
thetic essential oils.
1
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 2957. [Cf. Campbell, Analyst 61 (1936), 394.]
2
Ibid. 1990.
3
Ibid. 62 (1940), 1923.
4
6
Bull. soc. chim. Belg. 46 (1936), 555, 558.
Ann. chim. [6], 16 (1888), 271.
7
"Organic Syntheses," Coll. Vol. II (1943), 317.
376 KETONES
Ethyl n-Amyl Ketone

C8 H 16 Mol. Weight 128.21
Amyl ethyl ketone. 3-Octanone
CH 3 CH2 CO (CH2 -
)4
-
CH 3
Occurrence.Ethyl n-amyl ketone has been observed in the low boiling
fractions of French lavender oil.
Isolation. fractional distillation; for purification the crude ketone is converted

By
into the semicarbazone which, on decomposition with 10% sulfuric acid and steam
distillation, yields the pure ketone.
Identification. Through the semicarbazone m. 117-117.5, according to Schimmel
& Co.; m. 112
*
(slow heating), according to Pickard and Kenyon.
2
On oxidation with chromic acid, ethyl w-amyl ketone yields caproic acid b. 203-
206, according to Schimmel & Co. 3
Ethyl n-amyl ketone is a mobile liquid with a characteristic, strong and somewhat
fruity odor.
Properties. The following properties have been reported by Schimmel &

4
Co.:
b 754 1C9.5-170
d\l 0.8251
nf? 1.41536
Ethyl n-amyl ketone is volatile with steam. It does not react with sodium
bisulfite.
On
treatment with hydroxylamine, othyl H-amyl ketone forms an oxime
b5 91, according to Schimmel & Co.
6
Use. Ethyl n-amyl ketone is occasionally used for the compounding of

certain synthetic essential oils.
1
Ber. Schimmel &
Co. April (1903), 42; Oct. (1903), 43.
*J. Chem. Soc. 103 (1913), 1936.
3
Ber. Schimmel &
Co. April (1903), 42; Oct. (1903), 43.
6
Ibid.
Methyl n-Heptyl Ketone

CgHigO Mol. Weight 142.23
n-Heptyl methyl ketone. 2-Nonanone
CH3 -CO.(CH 2 6 .CH 3

)
Occurrence. Methyl n-heptyl ketone forms the principal constituent of

rue oils distilled mainly from Ruta bracteosa ("winter rue"), and R. angusti-
folia Pers.; in smaller amounts it occurs in rue oils derived from R. montana L.
("summer rue"), and R. graveolens ("garden rue")- This ketone has been
identified also in the volatile coconut oil, in oil of clove, and in a few other
essential oils.
Isolation. By fractional distillation and purification through the sodium bisulfite

addition compound.
Identification.Methyl n-heptyl ketone can be characterized by the preparation of
its semicarbazone m. 118-119 (crystallized from alcohol), according to Dakin; or l
in. 119-120 according to Stiirkle, 2 and Ruzicka and Brugger. 3

,
4
Properties. The following properties have been reported by Ceuterick,
8
Deffet,
5
Ruzicka and Brugger, 6 Power and Lees, 7 and Houben:
5 6
m. -8.2 df 0.8188
5 4
b. 195.3 df 0.82537
bi5 80-82 8
dJJ 0.8296 7
8
bia 75-77 6
ng 1.4175
Methyl n-heptyl ketone is insoluble in water, soluble in alcohol, etc.

Reducing methyl n-heptyl ketone with metallic sodium and alcohol, Thorns
and Mannich 9 obtained n-mcthylheptylcarbinol b. 193-194, which, ac-
10
cording to Adamson and Kenner, can be characterized by the preparation
of its a-naphthylurethane m. 55.5 (crystallized from petroleum ether).
u
Oxidizing methyl n-heptyl ketone with chromium trioxide, van Gysegem
obtained acetic acid and n-heptylic acid.
Use. Methyl n-heptyl ketone is used for the compounding of certain syn-
thetic (artificial) essential oils.
1
Am. Chem. J. 44 (1910), 46. See also Gildcmcistcr and Hoffmann, "Die Atherischcn
Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 547.
*Biochem. Z. 161 (1924), 384.
z
Helv. Chim. Ada 9 (1926), 353.
4
5
Ibid. 40 (1931), 391.
6
Helv. Chim. Ada 9 (1926), 353.
7
J. Chem. Soc. 81 (1902), 1588.
8
Ber. 36 (1902), 3588.
Ber. 36 (1903), 2548.
10
/. Chem. Soc. (1934), 842.
11
Chem. Zentr. I (1907), 530.
Methyl n-Nonyl Ketone

C U H 22 Mol. Weight 170.29
2-Undecanone
CO CH *
CH
Methyl n-nonyl ketone is the main constituent of rue oils dis-
Occurrence.
tilled mainly from Ruta montana L. ("summer rue") and R. graveolens ("gar-
den rue"), whereas in the rue oils derived from R. bracteosa ("winter rue")
this ketone plays only a subordinate role, methyl heptyl ketone predominating.
378 KETONES
Isolation. By fractional distillation purification through the sodium bisulfite
and
addition compound which this ketone forms with sodium bisulfite in saturated aqueous
solution.
Identification. Methyl n-nonyl ketone can be characterized by the preparation of
1
2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 63 (from alcohol), according to Allen.
(1)
(2) Hydrazone from W-methyl-j3-carbohydrazidopyridinium p-toluene sulfonate m.
110, by Allen and Gates.
2
Properties. Methyl nonyl ketone is liquid at room temperature; its odor

resembles that of methyl heptyl ketone. The following properties have been
4 5 6 7
reported by Timmermans,
3
Ceuterick, Thorns, Houben, Carette, and
8
Power and Lees:
6 5 6
cong.pt. 12 df 0.8260-0.8263 -
3 6
m. 12.1 d 15 0.8295
4 4
12.7 nf? 1.42527
7
b 76 6 230.65 (corr.)
b 76 i 231.5-232.5 8 (after regenera-

tion from semicarbazone)
7
b 24 122-123 (corr.)
6
b 20 120
6
big 118
6
b7 99
On oxidation with chromium trioxide, methyl n-nonyl ketone yields pelar-

gonic acid and acetic acid.
Use. Methyl n-nonyl ketone is used in the compounding of certain syn-
thetic (artificial) essential oils.
1
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 2957. Cf. Campbell, Analyst 61 (1936), 394.
*J. Org. Chem. 6 (1936), 599.
8 6
Bull. soc. chim. Belg. 31 (1922), 391. Ber. 36 (1902), 3590.
4 7
Ibid. 46 (1936), 558. J. pharm. chim. II, 10 (1899), 256.
6 8
Ber. deut. pharm. Ges. 11 (1906), 8. J. Chem. Soc. 81 (1902), 1588.
Methyl n-Undecyl Ketone

Undecyl methyl ketone. 2-Tridecanone
CO.(CH2 ) 10
This ketone has been found in the fraction b. 260-265 of
Occurrence.
ethereal coconut oil by Haller and Lassieur, 1 likewise in the essential oil of
2
"Matsubasa" (Schizandra nigra, maxim.) by Sengoku.
Isolation. By fractional distillation or through the bisulfite addition compound

which forms but slowly from sodium bisulfite and is decomposed by sodium carbonate.
Subsequent recrystallization is recommended in either case.
Identification. Methyl n-undecyl ketone can be characterized by the preparation
of several derivatives, but the following are recommended:
(1) 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 69 (Allen ).
3
(2) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 101-102, according to Sengoku.

4
(3) Oxime m. 56-57 (crystallized from alcohol and petroleum ether), by Gue*rin
6
and Sengoku. 6
Methyl n-undecyl ketone is a crystalline mass. The follow-

Properties.
7
ing properties have been reported by Ceuterick, Haller and Lassieur, 8
9 10 11 12
Krafft, Gue"rm, Pickard and Kenyon, and Dreger et al.:
m. 29 08 - 11
df 0.82168 7
12 7
30.5 n?? 1.43175
9
b. 263
10
bu-i5 140-142
12
b 6 .5 127.7
On
oxidation with potassium dichromate and dilute sulfuric acid, methyl
13
n-undecyl ketone gives, according to Krafft, a quantitative yield of acetic
acid and undecylic acid.
Use. Natural methyl n-undecyl ketone is not used in our industries.
1
Compt. rend. 161 (1910), 699.
2
J. Pharrn. Soc. Japan 63 (1933), 947.
3
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 52 (1930), 2957.
4
Chem. Zentr. I (1934), 235.
6
Bull, soc. chirn. [3], 29 (1903), 1130.
6
Chem. Zentr. I (1934), 235.
7
Butt. soc. chim. Belg. 46 (1936), 558.
8
Compt. rend. 161 (1910), 699.
9
Ber. 12 (1879), 1667; 16 (1882), 1724.
10
Bull. soc. chim. [3], 29 (1903), 1130.
11
/. Chem. Soc. 99 (1911), 57.
12
Ind. Eng. Chem. 36 (1944), 612.
13
Ber. 12 (1879), 1667.
Diacetyl
C 4 H 6 O2 Mol. Weight 86.09
Biacetyl. Dimethylglyoxal
CH3 -CO-CO-CH3
Occurrence. Like methyl alcohol and furfural, this aliphatic diketone oc-
curs in the foreruns of numerous due to its
volatile oils and, solubility in
water, also in the distillation waters. Thus, diacetyl has been identified in
oil of cypress, savin, vetiver root, orris root, West Indian sandal wood, bay,
caraway, angelica root, etc.
380 KETONES
Isolation. By For purification purposes Olivier 1 suggested
treatment with 2 mols of phosphoric acid whereby a crystalline addition product
(C4H 6 O 2 2H 3 P0 4 ) is formed from which diacetyl can be regenerated by the addition
of water. Treatment with excess phosphoric acid results in the formation of a liquid
product.
Identification. Much
work has been done on the qualitative detection of diacetyl,
if present in small quantities, and on the quantitative assaying of this diketone.
Diacetyl can be characterized by several methods:
(1) By the preparation of diacetyldioxime (dimethylglyoxime) 1 mol of diacetyl on
:
treatment with 2 mols of hydroxylamine hydrochloride and 1 mol of sodium carbonate

in aqueous solution yields, according to Fittig, Daimler and Keller, 2 a dioxime which
(crystallized from dilute alcohol) melts at 234.5 (with sublimation). Biltz reported
'
the sublimed product to melt at 245-246 (corr.).

The diacetyldioxime (dimethylglyoxime) yields colored complex salts with metals,
which reactions have been suggested by various investigators for the quantitative
determination of diacetyl. Prill and Hammer 4 developed a colorimetric method for
the micro determination of diacetyl as diamino-ferrous dimethylglyoximate. Van
Niel 6 suggested a quantitative method for the determination of diacetyl and acetyl-
methylcarbinol. Schmalfuss and co-workers made extensive studies on the detection
6
of diacetyl in food products. For example, they described a method for the assaying
of diacetyl as nickel salt of dimethylglyoxime with an average error of 0.2%. These
procedures permit the exact quantitative determination of diacetyl even in presence
of other volatile a-dicarbonyl compounds.
Diacetyl fo's-semicarbazone m. 278-279 (crystallized from glacial acetic acid),
(2)
Diacetyl mono-semi carbazone m. 235 (corr.) (crystallized from
7
according to Posner.
water or glacial acetic acid), according to Biltz 8 and Diels. 9
(3) #is-2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 314-315 (crystallized from nitrobenzene),
10
according to Strain.
Diacetyl is a yellowish liquid with a diffusive odor, in dilution

Properties.
somewhat reminiscent of butter. Because of its high vapor pressure, di-
acetyl rapidly vaporizes at room temperature; a drop of diacetyl when put
on testing paper disappears within a few minutes.
The following properties have been reported (cf. Olivier,
11
von Auwers, 12
13
and Gildemeister and Hoffmann ):
m. -2.4
b 750 88-89
12
df 0.975
13
d 22 0.9734
3 45
'
12
d} 0.9809
d{f 0.9904 "

3 ' 45
nj) 1.39525"
Diacetyl is soluble in 4 parts of water at room temperature, miscible with

alcohol, or ether, etc. Diacetyl readily adds sodium bisulfite. When al-
lowed to stand for several days at with concentrated hydrochloric acid,
diacetyl, according to Diels and Jost, 14 yields a precipitate which is a trimer

of diacetyl, white crystals m. 105.
Use. Diacetyl used for the compounding of artificial butter flavors; it
is
serves also in all kinds of synthetic fruit flavors to which it imparts, if care-
fully dosed, a smooth butter-like note modifying thereby the harsh odor of
synthetic aromatics.
1
Bull soc. chim. [4], 61 (1932), 100, 105.
2
Liebigs Ann. 249 (1888), 204.
3
Ber. 41 (1908), 1881.
4
Iowa State Coll. J. Sci. 12 (1938), 377.
6
Biochem. Z. 187 (1927), 472.
Z. Untersuch. Lebensm. 63 (1932), 283; 70 (1935), 233; 76 (1938), 113. Fette u. Seifen 44
(1937), 509. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 4677.
7
Ber. 34(1901), 3977.
8
Ber. 41 (1908), 1881.
9
Ber. 36 (1902), 348.
10
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1935), 760.
11
Bull. soc. chim. [4], 51 (1932), 100, 105.
"Ber. 61 (1918), 1119.
14
Ber. 36 (1902), 3294.
(b) UNSATURATED ALIPHATIC KETONES.
'Methyl Heptenone
2-Methyl-l-hepten-G-one 2-,Methyl-2-heptcn-G-one
H^C H^C
\C CH2 CH2 CH2 CO CH3
\C=CH CII 2 CH2 CO CH3
a-Methyl heptenone 0-Methyl heptenone
Occurrence. This aliphatic ketone, containing one ethylcnic linkage, oc-

curs in several volatile oils for example, in oil of lemon, lemongrass, citron-
palmarosa, Mexican linaloe, and is often accompanied by related com-

ella,
pounds such as linalool, geraniol and citral.

1
According to Wallach, the naturally occurring methyl heptenone consists
of several isomers which he designated a-, /?-, 7- and 5-methyl heptenone.
Later workers suggested the terms a- and /3-methyl heptenone which forms
2
correspond to citral a and citral b. Grignard, Doeuvre and Escourrou came
to the conclusion that the natural methyl heptenone occurring in lemongrass
oil consists of a mixture of a- and /3-methyl heptenone, containing at the most
25 per cent of the a- form, but these data must await quantitative chemical
determinations on samples of known purity.
382 KETONES
Isolation. From the fractions b. 160-180 of an essential oil by the preparation
of the bisulfite compound and by regeneration of the parent ketone.
Identification. Methyl heptenone is readily recognized by its characteristic fruity
odor, reminiscent of amyl acetate. The ketone can be identified through several
derivatives:
According to Tiemann and Kriiger, methyl heptenone forms a semicarbazone
3
(1)
which, although probably a mixture of isomers, melts uniformly provided the semi-
carbazone is prepared as follows:
Add a solution of 12 g. of semicarbazide hydrochloride and 15 g. of sodium acetate
in 20 cc. of water to a mixture of 12 g. of methyl heptenone and 20 cc. of glacial acetic
acid. Set aside the mixed solutions for about one-half hour. On addition of water,
the semicarbazone will separate as an oil which soon congeals to crystals. Recrystal-
lized from dilute alcohol, the semicarbazone melts at 136-13S.
(2) According to Neuberg and Lewite, methyl heptenone can also be characterized
4
by the preparation of the p-nitrophenylhydrazone which crystallizes in the form of

light yellow needles m. 103.5-104.
prepared the 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 81, and Strain
6 6
Allen the m-nitro-
benzohydrazone m. 99~100.
(3) In order to identify methyl heptenone in the presence of citronellal and citral,
Tiemann 7 suggested taking advantage of the fact that methyl heptenone does not
react with either a dilute or a concentrated solution of sodium sulfite and sodium
bicarbonate, and that the two aldehydes can be removed successively by shaking the
oily mixture with the respective solutions of these salts.
Properties. Methyl heptenone is a colorless, mobile oil, optically inactive

and possessing a peculiar characteristic fruit-like odor. The physicochemical
properties vary according to the origin of the ketone.
The natural isolates seem to yield slightly lower characteristics than the
synthetic product, Timmermans, von Rechenberg, Schimmel & Co., and
8 9 10
ll
Escourrou found these properties typical of a stable methyl heptenone:
8 10
m. -67.1 d}f 0.8650
b. 173-174 09 '
10 11
-
dio 0.8691
9 4
108.3 nj> 1.44345"
ll
1.4455
a-M ethyl heptenone (5-methyl heptenone of Wallach) boils at 168 (Ver-

12 13
ley Escourrou
). found that, on heating with alkali, a-methyl heptenone
is transformed into the /3- form. When oxidized, the a- form yields only
traces of acetone.
fi-M ethyl heptenone (7-methyl heptenone of Wallach) boils at 173-174.
On oxidation it yields the theoretical quantity of acetone.
Use. Methyl heptenone is used as an adjunct in the scenting of soaps and
all kinds of technical preparations.
1
Liebigs Ann. 408
(1915), 183.
8
Compt. rend. 177 See also Escourrou, Bull. soc. chim. [4], 43 (1928), 1088;
(1923), 669.
and Dupont, Desreux and Dulou, Butt. soc. chim. [5], 4 (1937), 2023.
8
Ber. 28 (1895), 2124.
*
Biochem. Z. 91 (1918), 266.
6
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 2955.
6
Ibid. 67 (1935), 758.
7
Ber. 32 (1899), 823.
8
9
Z. physik. Chem. 96 (1920), 168.
10
Ber. Schimmel &Co., April (1912), 173.
11
Bull. soc. chim. [4], 39 (1926), 1125.
12
Rev. prod. chim. 21 (1918), 352. Chem. Zentr. I (1919), 922.
13
Butt. soc. chim. [4], 39 (1926), 1125.
2,6-Dimethyl-7-octen-4-one
H3 C
CH CH2 CO CH2 CH CH=CH2
- - - -
HC 3 CII3
Occurrence.Jones and Smith l found this unsaturated ketone in the oil
distilled from the flowers of Tagetes glandulifera.
Identification. The ketone can be characterized by the preparation of its crystalline

semicarbazone m. 92.5 (from alcohol).
The oxime is an oil:
b. 222
dw . 0.8778
[a] D +2 24'
Properties. When purified through its crystalline semicarbazone, the ke-

tone has these properties:
b. 185-18G [a] D + 130'

d 15 . 5 0.8354 nf> 1.4295
This ketone shows no tendency toward cyclization, does not react with sul-
furic acid (20 per cent), and does not combine with sodium sulfite or sodium
bisulfite.
Use. 2,6-Dimethyl-7-octen-4-one is not used in our industries.
1
J. Chem. Soc. 127 (1925), 2530.
384 KETONES
Tagetone
2-Methyl-6-methylene-7-octen-4-one
H3 C
CH CH 2 CO CH 2 C CH=CH2
-
HC
/ II
CH2
3
Occurrence. Jones and Smith l

found tagetone in the highest boiling frac-
2
tions of tagetes oil (Tagetes glandulifcra) .
Jones, however, besides demon-
strating the presence of a second ketone (Me) 2 : CH CH 2 CO CH 2 CH(Me)
CH=CH 2 along with tagetone in this essential modified the original for-
oil,
mula so as to regard tagetone as represented by this tautomeric system:
CO-CH2 -C(:CH 2 )-CH:CH2 ? C(OH):CII-C(:CH 2 )-CH:CH 2 <
CO CH C (Me) CH CH2
-
:
-
:
Isolation. Byfractional distillation of tagetes oil in vacuo. Tagetone shows a

distinct tendency toward resinification, probably due to the fact that the ketone may
exist also in enolic form. Because of this tendency, tagetone is difficult to obtain in a
pure state.
Identification. No crystalline derivatives of tagetone have been described. The
semicarbazone is resinous, the oxime an oil b25 126, dis.s 0.9207, nf? 1.4820.
However, Jones and Smith have demonstrated that catalytic reduction yields a
3
saturated ketone 3,7-dimethyl-octan-5-one which forms a semicarbazone m. 91.5-

92.5.
Tagetone is a yellowish oil which, on standing, resinifies and

Properties.
becomes viscid. According to Jones and Smith, 4 tagetone has these prop-
erties:
b. ~205-210 d 16 . 5 0.8803
b 3 -4 62 nf? 1.4895
Onoxidation with potassium permanganate in alkaline solution, tagetone

yields iso valeric and oxalic acids; when treated with potassium hydroxide in
alcoholic solution, tagetone forms methyl isobutyl ketone. Tagetone does
not show any tendency toward cyclization.
Use. Tagetone, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
J. Chem. Soc. 127 (1925), 2530, 2538.
2
Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland 45 (1934), 45.
8
J. Chem. Soc. 127 (1925), 2532.
*
Ibid. 2538.
The Tagetenones
According to Naves, the tagetenones consist of a mixture

1
of
Myrcenone
H3 C
C=CH CO CH 2 C CH=CH
- -
2
H3 C
/
(2-Methyl-6-methenyl-2,7-octadien-4-one)
and
Ocimenone
H3 C
C=CH CO CH=C CH=CH 2
- -
H3 C
/ I
CII 3
(2,6-Dimethyl-2,5,7-octatrien-4-one)
and
perhaps isopropylidenic (a) isomers
2
Occurrence. Naves identified the tagetenones in the volatile oil of
Lippia
asperifolia Rich. (syn. Lantana lavandulacea Willd.) which contains 80 per
cent of this ketone mixture.

Identification. hydrogenation to the saturated ketone 2,6-climethyl-4-octanone
By
b. 187-188, dl 0.8155, n| 1.41952, which can be characterized by the preparation
of its semicarbazone m. 92-92.5 (crystallized from pentane), and of its phenyl-4-
semicarbazone m. 95.5-96 (crystallized from methanol).
3
Properties. Naves reported these properties :
b 2 .i 63-64
df 0.9033
nf? 1.5003
The tagetenones are volatile with steam, and soluble in alcohol and ether.
To be quantitative, the oximation must be effected in a neutral medium
(CaCO 3 ), and by refluxing with alcohol for 1 hr.
When boiled with 70 per cent sulfuric acid for 2 hrs., the mixture of ketones
yields an abundance of acetone.
Use. The tagetenones, as such, are not used in our industries.
1
Private communication of Dr. Y. R. Naves, Geneva, during publication of this book.
Cf. Helv. Chim. Acta 31 (1948), 29.
3
Ibid. Ibid.
386 KETONES
Artemisia Ketone
and
Isoartemisia Ketone
2,5,5-Trimethyl-l,6-heptadien-4-one
H3 C CH 3
C-CH 2 -CO-C-CH==CH2
H2 C CH 3
and
2,5,5-Trimethyl-2,6-heptadien-4-one
H3 C CH 3
\C=CH - -
I
CO C CH=CH2.
HC
/ I
CH 3
3
This ketone is of interest as it represents one of the few exceptions to the

"isoprene rule" being built up from irregularly assembled isoprene units.
Occurrence. These acyclic ketones containing two ethylenic linkages were
observed by Imada, 1 by Asahina and Yoshitomi, 2 and by Asahina and Ta-
3
kagi in oil of Artemisia annua L.
Isolation. By preparation of the semicarbazones,

fractional distillation of the oil,
and regeneration of the ketones through hydrolysis of the semicarbazones.
Identification. The ketones each yield a semi car bazone, which can be separated
by fractional crystallization.
Artemisia ketone forms the more sparingly soluble semicarbazone m. 95-96,
whereas the semicarbazone of isoartemisia ketone m. 70-72 is more soluble. The
latter contains water of crystallization; in anhydrous form the semicarbazone of iso-
artemisia ketone melts at 103-104. Upon heating artemisia ketone semicarbazone
with 20% sulfuric acid, the azide (m. 156) is formed.
Properties. Regenerated from their semicarbazones, the two ketones,

which are optically inactive, possess these properties:
Artemisia ketone Isoartemisia ketone
b. 182 b. 182-183
4 7
dj 0.8906 d} 0.8711
5
nff' 1.4695 nD 1.4188
4
Asahina and Takagi found that both ketones, when hydrogenated cata-
lytically, yield the same tetrahydro ketone, viz., 2,5,5-trimethylheptan-4-one.
CH-CH2 .CO-C-CH2 -CH3

H3 C
/ I
CH 3
5
Ruzicka, Reichstein and Pulver synthesized a tetrahydro artemisia ke-
tone and demonstrated its identity with the tetrahydro derivative derived
from the natural isolate to confirm the structure originally proposed by Asa-
hina and Takagi.
Use. These ketones are not used in our industries.
1
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan No. 420 (1917), 119.
2
Ibid. No. 424 (1917), 1.
3
Ibid. No. 464 (1920), 837. Helv. Chim. Ada 20 (1937), 220.
4
5
Helv. Chim. Ada 19 (1936), 646.
Jean Colonge and Pierre Dumont, "Synthesis and Cyclization of Artemisia Ketone,"
Compt. rend. 220 (1945), 500. Chem. Abstracts 40 (194(5), 4684.
Doremone
C 15 H 26 Mol. Weight 222.36
The constitution of this acyclic sesquiterpene ketone found in nature

first
has not been definitely established. Doremone contains two ethylenic link-
ages.
Semmler, Jonas and Roenisch doremone from am-
l
Occurrence. isolated
moniacum oil (Dorema ammoniacwn Don.).
Isolation. Byrepeated fractionation.

Identification. Doremone can be characterized:
(1) by the preparation of the semicarbazone m. 124.
(2) by the preparation of the oxime m. 88.
Properties. Doremone is an oil possessing these properties:
bw 145-155 <$ +3 30'
d 20 0.8765 n^ 1.47160
Onreduction with sodium and alcohol, doremone yields doremol, an ali

H
phatic alcohol Ci 5 28 0, b 12 145-150, d 20 0.8702, f? +3 0', nf? 1.47130.
388 KETONES
The acetate of doremol, b 12 155-165, d 20 0.8896, a?? -f 4 48', nf? 1.46596
also seems to occur in ammoniacum oil.
Use. Doremone is not used in our industries.

l
Ber. 60(1917), 1829.
Henri Leclerc, "The Pharmacology of Gum Ammoniac (Diserneston gummiferum

Jaub. and Spach.)," Bull sci. pharmacol 48 (1941), 81. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942),
1140.
B. CYCLIC TERPENE KETONES
(a) MONOCYCLIC TERPENE KETONES.
Cryptone
4-Isopropy 1-2-cy clohexen-1 -one
O
II
C
II2 C CH
H2 C CH
\CH/
CH
/ \
According to Berry, Macbeth and Swanson, the aldehyde /-cryptal de-
1
scribed earlier by Penfold, 2 and Penfold and Simonsen, 3 as a constituent of

various eucalyptus oils is actually J-cryptone. Cryptal, in the opinion of
Berry et al., does not occur in nature.
Occurrence. Cryptone, in laevorotatory form, was observed by Cahn,
first
4
Penfold and Simonsen in the oils of Eucalyptus polybractea, E. hemiphloia,
5
and E. cneorifolia. Shortly thereafter, Berry, Macbeth and Swanson and,
6
working independently, Wienhaus and Striegler, found the dextrorotatory
form of 4-isopropyl-2-cyclohexen-l-one in water fennel oil (Phellandrium
aquaticum L.).
Z-Cryptone has been isolated:

Isolation.
(1) Through the hydrosulfide m. 206-207, by Hooper, Macbeth and Price.
7
From this hydrogen sulfide compound the ketone can be regenerated by the action of
mercuric chloride in ether.
CYCLIC TERPENE KETONES 389
(2) Through the semicarbazone m. 185 (with decomposition) by Cahn, Penfold

and Simonsen. 8
Identification. Z-Cryptone may be characterized by the preparation of several

derivatives:
(1) Hydrosulfide compound (see above).
(2) Semicarbazone (see above).
(3) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 168-169, according to Cahn, Penfold and Simon-
9
sen.
Galloway, Dewar and Read
10
(4) reported that the 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone of
n found m.
optically pure J-cryptone melts at 132, while Hooper, Macbeth and Price
137.5-138.
12
Cahn, Penfold and Simonsen
Properties. reported these properties of
Z-cryptone from the eucalyptus oils:
bio 98-100 D -59 18' to -66 24'
d}jj 0.9472 to 0.9483 nf? 1.4820 to 1.4848
13
The optically pure kctone prepared by Galloway, Dewar and Read had
these properties:
b9 90
[a] D -11 9 18' (c = 2 in ale.)
nj? 1.4810
Isolating cryptonc from the oil of Eucalyptus cneorifolia by means of the

neutral sulfite method continuous shaking from 2 to 3 hr. with a 35 per
cent Na2S0 3 -7H 2 O solution, and liberation of the cryptone by treatment
14
with caustic soda solution in the presence of ether Berry obtained a
cryptone:
dlii 0.927 to 0.966
[] D 55 36' to 68 48'
On oxidation with potassium permanganate, cryptone yields a-isopropyl-

glutaric acid.
Use. Cryptone is not used in our industries.
1
/. Chem. Soc. (1937), 986, 1443.
2
Ibid. 121 (1922), 266. /. Proc. Roy. Soc. New South Wales 61 (1927), 185.
3
/. Chem. Soc. (1930), 403.
/&*. (1931), 1366.
5
Ibid. (1937), 1448.
8
Ber. Schimmel &
Co. (1937), 91.
7
J. Chem. Soc. (1934), 1149.
9
Ibid. (1931), 1366.
9
Ibid.
u lbid. (1936), 1595.
u lbid. (1934), 1147.
u lbid. (1931), 1366.
18
Ibid. (1936), 1595.
14
390 KETONES
%
Menthone
p-Menthan-3-one. l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexan-3-one
CH 3
CH
H2C
/ \CH
2
H2 C C=O
\Oil/
Oil
H3 C
/ \CII
3
Because of two asymmetric carbon atoms, menthone can exist in two

its
racemic and four optically active modifications that have come to be recog-
nized as
d-menthone d-isomenthone
/-menthone /-isomenthone
dZ-menthone dZ-isomenthone
This molecule, by virtue of its configuration, also allows geometrical isomerism

that has been the subject of comparatively recent study by Sugden and Whit-
taker,
1
Zeitschel and Schmidt, 2 Read, Robertson and Cook, 3 Read, 4 Hiraid-
6
zumi, Oillespie, Macbeth and Mills, 6 Weissberger 7 and others, and readily
accounts for the existence of certain characteristics of the menthone-isomen-
thone series.
Menthone occurs frequently as a mixture of several modifications which

are difficult to separate and which are easily inverted by the action of acids
or bases, causing a change in the rotatory power of the substance.
Occurrence. d-Menthone has been found in oil of Nepeta japonica and
Barosma pulchella.
l-Menthone occurs in oil of pennyroyal, peppermint (up to 30 per cent),
buchu Calamintha nepcta, etc. According to Schimmel & Co., 8 Reunion
leaf,
geranium oil does not contain /-menthone, as formerly assumed, but Z-iso-
menthone. Schimmel & Co. developed a method of identifying these two
ketones in mixtures.
d-Isomenthone has been identified in Portuguese and Moroccan pennyroyal
9
oil by Naves.
10
l-Isomcnthone has been isolated from Algerian oil of geranium.
by Angla
n
Goethals reported this isomer in geranium oil from the Belgian Congo, even
as much as 75 per cent in an oil from Katanga.
CYCLIC TERPENE KE TONES 391
Isolation. Menthone cannot be and freed from accompanying substances

isolated
by mere fractional distillation; neither does menthone react easily with bisulfites.
suggested isolating menthone most conveniently from
12
Therefore, Schindelmeiser
mixtures through its oxime or semicarbazone. For example, oil of peppermint is frac-
tionated and from the fraction b. 204-212 the oxime or semicarbazone prepared.
Menthones may be regenerated therefrom by decomposing the oxime or semicarbazone
with dilute sulfuric acid. Read and Cook 13 have found these derivatives most suitable
for readily distinguishing c^-menthone and rf^-isomenthone by preparation in weakly
acid solutions. The rotatory power of the regenerated ketone may be changed,
depending on the procedure used (in this connection, see Weissberger et al. 14 ). How-
ever, Kon in 1930 cited a method which prevents this isomerization of sensitive
15
ketones during regeneration in this procedure hydrolysis is carried out in a petroleum

;
ether (b. 40-GO) suspension, with N/2 sulfuric acid. As marked solvent effects
have been noted in connection with the determination of optical properties of this
compound (see Volkmann, 16 and Naves and Angla 17 ), particular care should be given
to this determination. Moreover, Petit and Tallard 18 found the reagents of Girard
and Sandulesco suitable for extracting the isomcnthone as they form water soluble
complexes which are insoluble in nonhydroxylic organic solvents.
Identification. The isomeric menthones can be characterized by the preparation of
several derivatives, according to Kishner, 19 Pickard and Littlebury, 20 Neuberg and
Neimann, 21 Beckmann, 22 Read, Cook and Shannon, 23 Read and Cook, 24 Rupe and
Gassmann, 26 Strain, 26 Zeitschel and Schmidt,
27
Guha and Nath, 28 Earl, Johnson
and McKean, 29 Read, 30 Penfold, Ramage and Simonscn, 31 and Allen. 32 These deriva-
tives are presented in tabular summary, indicating melting points:
Menthone
Isomer
Derivative d I dl
Oxime 59 25
59 25
81-82 24
iso-114-115 24
Semicarbazone 187-189 20 189 20
a- 185-186 24
24
13- 161
2,4-Dibromo- 78-79 28
19 19
Azine 51 51
* *
Thiosemi carbazone 155-157 2l
155-157 21
HCOONH 4 der. (neo form)

23
117-118 23
86 23
(formylamine)
Oxime -HC1 95-100 22
118-119 22
3-Nitrobenzohydrazone 105--107
Nitroso oxime 124-125 3
124-125 29
2,4-Dinitrophenyl-
32
hydrazone 145
Benzoyl oxime 72-73 24
Isomenthone
27 24
Semicarbazone 164 27
164 a- 225
0-177-178
Oxime Liquid
27 30
-
Liquid
27,30 99-100 24
iso- 94- 95 24
HCOONH 4 der. (formylamine) 45-46 23 45-46 450,470 23
Oxime -HCl 132 132 30 127M28 "

24
Benzoyl oxime 55.5
*
Optical rotation of menthone not indicated.
392 KETONES
Regarding the quantitative determination of menthone, see Vol. I, Chapter 4
Properties. /-Menthone is a colorless mobile liquid with an odor reminis-

cent of peppermint, but harsher. The taste is bitter and less cooling than
that of /-menthol. Soluble in 3 volumes of 70 per cent alcohol.
33
The following properties have been reported by Pickard and Littlebury,
34
Wallach, Kondakov and Bachtschiev, 35Read and Robertson, 38 Hiraidzumi, 37
38
Dulou, Rupe and Gassmann, 39 von Rechenberg, 40 Henderson, Henderson
and Heilbron, 41 Goethals, 42 and Huggett: 43
Under the influence of acids or alkalies, /-menthone is readily inverted to

rf-isomenthone. Oxidation of menthone with chromic acid in acetic acid
solution yields /3-methyl-6-isobutyryl-n- valeric acid. With potassium per-
manganate as oxidizing agent, rf-/9-methyl-adipic acid formed together with
is
smaller quantities of a ketonic acid, methylsuccinic, and other acids. Dil-

44
they, Inckel and Stephan found that I- and d-isomenthones do not yield
peroxides when subjected to oxidative action of perhydrol.
Use. Menthone, as such, serves in the compounding of imitation (artifi-
cial) essential oils.
1
J. Chem. Soc. 127 (1925), 1868.
*Ber. 59 (1926), 2301.
/. Chem. Soc. (1927), 1278.

4
Chem. Rev. 1 (1930), 1.
Anniversary Volume dedicated to Masumi Chikashige on his 60th birthday (1930), 86.
6

6
J. Chem. Soc. (1940), 280.
7
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1943), 102, 246, 402.
8
9
Helv. Chim. Ada 26 (1943), 162.
10
Chimie & Industrie 41 (1939), 234.
u Natuurw. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943),
Tijdschr. Belg. 23 (1941), 81, 121; 24 (1942), 16.
6410.
"Apoth. Ztg. 21 (1906), 927.
13
J. Chem. Soc. 127 (1925), 2782.
14
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1943), 102, 246, 402.
15
J. Chem. Soc. (1930), 1616.
16
Zeit. physik. Chem. Abt. BIO (1930), 161.
17
Compt. rend. 213 (1941), 570.
18
Rev. chim. ind. 48 (1939), 226.
19
J. Ruas. Phys. Chem. Soc. 39 (1907), 1246.
20
/. Chem. Soc. 101 (1912), 124.
21
Ber. 36 (1902), 2053.
"Liebigs Ann. 250 (1889), 333, 340.
23
J. Chem. Soc. (1926), 2225. See Wallach, Liebigs Ann. 276 (1893), 314; 300 (1898), 278.
24
/. Chem. Soc. 127 (1925), 2782. Cf. ibid. (1927), 1283.
25
Ilelv. Chim. Acta 17 (1934), 283; 12 (1929), 193, 200. Cf. Simonsen, "The Tcrpenes,"
Vol. I (1947), 315.
26
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1935), 758.
27
Ber. 69 (1926), 2307.
28
Ber. 70 (1937), 931.
29
30
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 46 (1927), 873.
31
Chem. Soc. (1939), 1496.
J.
32
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 52 (1930), 2955.
33
/. Chem. Soc. 101 (1912), 124.
"Licbigs Ann. 397 (1913), 217.
36
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 63 (1901), 54.
36
J. Chem. Soc. (1926), 2216.
Anniversary Volume dedicated to Masumi Chikashige on
37
his 60th birthday (1930), 85.
38
Bull. inst. pin (1934), 177.
39
Helv. Chim. Acta 12 (1929), 196.
40
"Einfache und fraktionierte Destination in Theorie und Praxis," Miltitz, 2d Ed. (1923),
294.
"Ber. 47 (1914), 887.
42
Natuurw. Tijdschr. Belg. 24 (1942), 15. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 6410.
43
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 60 (1941), 68T.
44
/. prakt. Chem. 154 (1940), 219.
John Read, "Biogenetic Relationships in the Menthone Series," J. Soc. Chem. Ind.
48 (1929), 786.
Lawrence H. Baldinger, "Assay for Menthone in Oil of Peppermint," Proc. Indiana
Acad. Sci. 52 (1942), 111 (Pub. 1943). Chem. Abstracts 38 (1944), 1075.
Y. R. Naves, "Sur Thuile essentielle de Micromeria abyssinica (Hochst.) Benth.,
Source de d-Isomenthone," Helv. Chim. Acta 31 (1948), 932.
394 KETONES
Carvomenthone
(Tetrahydrocarvone)
p-Menthan-2-one. l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexan-2-one
CH 3
CH
H2 C
/ \C=O
H2 C CH2
\ /
CH
CH
HC
/ \ CH
3 3
Occurrence. Simonscn and Rau

found that oil of Blumea malcolmii con-
1
tains about 16 per cent /-Carvomenthone. This ketone occurs also in oil of
Blumea eriantha fam. Compositae. 2
Isolation. By fractional distillation of the oil, preparation and decomposition of

the semicarbazone.
Identification. Carvomenthone may be characterized by its semicarbazone (d- and
/- form m. 194-195, dl- form m. 174); also by its oxime (d- and /- form m. 97-99,
dl- form m. 105).
Properties. This ketone is a colorless oil with a menthone-carvone-like

odor.
In view of the number of possible stereoisomers of this ketone, particular
attention should be given to source, processing, and method of isolation when
defining the properties of this product.
Simonsen and Rau 3 found the following properties for natural /-carvo-
menthone. It will be observed that these authors reported a rotation of
about -9.
b 705 218.5-219 [] -9 20'
dig 0.9001 nff 1.4531
Onthe other hand, Hiickcl and Wilip, 4 Vavon, 6 and Wallach 6 preparing
this I- isomer synthetically from dextrorotatory carvone by catalytic hydro-
genation apparently obtained two forms. That of Huckel, which he describes

as trans- Carvomenthone, possessed a rotation of 7 30'; whereas those of
Vavon and Wallach, in spite of correspondence in other characteristics, gave
MD figures of -24 53' to -27 57'. Huckel and Doll 7 had earlier reported
characteristicson certain indirect derivatives of these forms, while Bradfield,

Jones and Simonsen 8 observed an /-2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone melting at
133.
A similar series of results were obtained by Read and Johnston, 9 but these
authors observed optical rotations higher than any thus far reported :
l-Carvomenthone obtained from l-Carvomenthone obtained from

d-Carvone with Catalytic 2 H d-Carvomenthol with Cr0 3
bi 6 98-99 b 16 9G-96.5
WD -30 37' WD -C0'
nj? 1.4552 nJJ 1.4548
10
Nagasawa catalytically hydrogenated /-carvone derived from Japanese
mint oil (Mentha viridis L. var. crispa Benth.) and obtained d-carvomenthone.
This compound b 5 83-84, WD +17 9', yielded two semicarbazones and

an oxime possessing the following properties:
Semicarbazones
I II
(Yield 84.2%) (Yield 11 .6%)
m. 192-193 m. 160-164
WD 4-9 51' (in chloroform) WD +43 35' (in chloroform)
Oxime
m. 98-99
WD +36 35' (in alcohol)
Decomposition of these two semicarbazones, I and II, yielded respectively

d-/3-carvomenthone and d-a-carvomenthone with the following properties:
d-(3-Carvomenthone d-a-Carvomenthone
be 87-88 b6 88-89
WD +11 48' WD +42 3'
Wallach n reported for e?/-carvomenthone prepared from c?/-carvomenthol:
b. 220-221
d 20 0.90
nf? 1.4554
Use. Carvomenthone has not found any noteworthy use in the perfume
or flavor industries.
1
J. Chem. Soc. 121 (1922), 881.
2
Ber. Schimmel &
Co. (1937), 7.
396 KETONES
Chem. Soc. 121 (1922), 881.
/.
</. prakt. Chem. 168 (1941), 21.
5
Compt. rend. 163 (1911), 70.
Liebigs Ann. 381 (1911), 64.
7
7&M*. 626 (1936), 103.
8
/. Cfeem. Soc. (1935), 315.
9
Ibid. (1934), 226.
10
Repls. Osaka Imp. Ind. Res. Inst. 19, No. 4 (1938). Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 219.
Liebigs Ann. 277 (1893), 135. Ber. 28 (1895), 1962.
Piperitone
l-p-Menthen-3-one. l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-l-cycIohexen-3-one
CH 3
C
HC
/ \CH
2
HC2 C=0
\CH/
CH
HC
/ \ CH
3 3
Occurrence. The raeemic form of piperitone can be prepared synthetically

while both the d- and I- forms occur in several essential oils.
d-Pipcritone has been found in Japanese mint oil (Mentha arvensis var.
piperascens) It forms the main constituent of oil of Andropogon iwarancusa
.
Jones (about 80 per cent), and oil of Cymbopogon sennaarensis Chiov. (about
45 per cent), the so-called Sudan "Mahareb" grass.
l-Piperitone occurs in several eucalyptus species e.g., in certain types of
Eucalyptus dives (about 40 per cent) and E. radiata. Oil of E. dives forms the
principal source of /-piperitone. Usually this ketone is associated with I-
piperitol and Z-a-phellandrene.
Isolation. By fractional distillation e.g., oil of Eucalyptus dives type a ketone.of

93% purity can be isolated. A high degree of purity may be attained by the prepa-
ration of the crystalline derivative which piperitone forms with sodium bisulfite or
sodium sulfite, and by the regeneration of the parent ketone from this compound.
For the isolation of piperitone, Read and Smith l recommended the following
method:
Mix 700 g. of sodium bisulfite, 1,000 cc. of water and 1,750 cc. of Eucalyptus dives oil
in a vessel provided with a steam jacket and attached to a shaking machine. Shake
the mixture for 10 hr. while heating with steam. Pour the product of reaction into a
large vessel and let it cool overnight. Remove the oil which has not reacted, collect
the crystalline mass on a suction filter, filter, wash once with methyl alcohol and twice
with ether. Dissolve the mass in hot water, filter and regenerate the ketone from the
bisulfite compound by adding to the hot filtrate a concentrated solution of sodium
hydroxide. Separate the ketone from the aqueous layer, wash with warm water, and
dry over sodium sulfate and filter.
Identification. (I) The most modern technique for the preparation of /-piperitone
reported by Blagden and Huggett;
2
is these authors offered a patented process em-
ploying low temperature and recrystallization for the isolation of this terpenic deriva-
tive.
(2) According to Smith and Penfold,

3
can be detected most conveniently
pi peri tone
by the reduction of the ketone, in alcoholic-ethereal solution, with sodium amalgam
which reaction produces a pinacone (l,l'-bismenthone) C2oH 34 02, m. 148-149. The
melting point of this ketone is somewhat indefinite, but by fractional crystallization
the compound may be resolved into isomers melting respectively at 135-136 and at
166M67 .
For the preparation of the pinacone, 1 cc. of oil, which must contain at least 10%
piperitone, is mixed with 1 cc. of alcohol, 4 cc. of ether, and 1.3 g. of sodium amalgam.
The mixture immediately assumes a brown color, and after 10 min. an amber-white
precipitate of the pinacone m. 142-149 will be observed. Upon recrystallization of
the substance from chloroform, the two isomers melt at 135-136, and at 166-167.
(3) On treatment with semicarbazide, dJ-pi peri tone yields a mixture of two semi-
carbazones. According to Read and Smith, 4 the very sparingly soluble a-semicarba-
zone melts at 226-227, the /3- form at 174-17G.
From d-piperitone, Simonsen 6 prepared the optically active a-semicarbazone m.
193-194. The optically active form of /-piperitone semicarbazone does not appear
to have been described. It should be kept in mind that the optically active forms of
piperitone are apt to be racemized during the conversion into the semicarbazones.
(4) Read, Smith, and Bentivoglio prepared from d/-piperitone two oximes, the
6
a-oxime m. 118-119, and the /?-oxime m. 88-89, both of which yield the same
hydrochloride m. 157 (decomposition). An excess of hydroxylamine during the reac-
tion with dZ-piperitone causes the formation of a- and /3-hydroxylamino-oxime (see
below).
Thus, the action of hydroxylamine on d/-piperitone results in the formation of a
mixture of two isomeric oximes and two isomeric hydroxylamino-oximes. The oxime
mixture is obtained with the calculated quantity of hydroxylamine. But even under
these conditions, hydroxylamino-oxime is partly formed. Therefore, the oxime
mixture must be freed from adhering hydroxylamino-oxime by steam distillation.
The oxime mixture melts at 107-109 which, by recrystallization from methyl or
ethyl alcohol, is separated into the a-oxime m. 118-119, and the /3-oxime m. 88-89
(see above). As mentioned, an excess of hydroxylamine causes the formation of
hydroxylamino-oxime m. 164-165. Due to their low volatility, these compounds
can easily be separated from the oximes and from the piperitone. 7
Read and Smith 8 showed that the hydroxylamino-oxime mixture consists of dl-
piperitone-a-hydroxylamino-oxime m. 176, and <#-piperitone-/3-hydroxylamino-oxime
m. 185-186.
The oximes of d- and /-piperitone are liquids; in the presence of an excess of alkali
only the racemic oximes are formed.

Regarding the quantitative determination of piperitone, see Vol. I, Chapter 4,
398 KETONES
Properties. Piperitone possessing a mint- and camphor-like odor.
is an oil
Colorless, when freshly distilled, piperitone turns yellow on aging, but this
tendency is less pronounced in products purified through their semicarbazones.
The products formed by autoxidation of piperitone were described by Treibs. 9
The properties of piperitone have been variously reported. The informa-
10
tion gathered by Read and Smith was derived from a very carefully puri-
fied sample. The constants studied and confirmed by Wallach and Meister, 11
Roberts,
12
Schimmel & Co. 13 and Huggett 14
are tabulated:
d-Piperitone
b 20 116-118.5 010 [afe -H98' 10
10 10
df 0.9344 (vac.) nf? 1.4848
l-Piperitone
m. -29 14
WD -5132' 10
14
b. 232.5-234.7 14
[a]?? -67 48' (homogeneous)
10 10
bis 109.5-110.5 nf? 1.4848
10
df 0.9324 (vac.) 1.4845"
14
d20 0.9330
dl-Piperitone
b. 235-237 011 ' 12

nf? 1.4845 10
bi 8 H3 10
1.4844"
10
df 0.9331 (vac.) nj? 1.4875
dw 0.9375 u
12
dis 0.9387
According to early workers, the optically active forms of piperitone easily

racemize, part racemization taking place when distilled at atmospheric pres-
sure. Complete racemization occurs when piperitone is purified through its
bisulfite compound, especially during the regeneration of the ketone from its
bisulfite compound by the action of alkali. This seems to be caused by enoli-
zation of the ketone which involves loss of the original molecular asymmetry.
Acids are causing racemization. This, however, is disputed
less effective in
14
in the recent investigations of Huggett, and to some extent by Nerdel and
Doll. 15 These authors found the optical rotation of pure ^-piperitone prepared
by recrystallization as [a]f? 67 48'. Their work indicated that the com-
mercial processes for the isolation of this ketone, contrary to the findings of
originalworkers, cause little racemization. Furthermore, the rotation
which was discovered in the natural isolates indicated that this terpenic de-
rivative occurs in nature in a partially racemized state. However, more re-
cent findings of Huggett and co-workers 16 indicate that the specific rotation
varies considerably with the solvent selected, these investigators reporting
values [a]!? from 16 in acetic acid to 77 30' in benzene.
In the opinion of Nerdel and Doll (see above), the hitherto known piperi-
tone a mixture of optically active and racemic piperitone. The fully active
is
piperitone should have a rotation of 67.

Reduction of d-, or 1-, or dZ-piperitone with sodium in alcoholic solution
yields d-isomenthols and d-menthols, with the simultaneous formation of
some dZ-a-phellandrene. Regarding other methods of hydrogenation, the
reader is referred to Simonsen, 17 and to a paper by Nerdel and Doll. 18
Oxidation with ferric chloride gives thymol with a yield of about 25 per
cent.
the oxidation with potassium permanganate in neutral solution, dios-
By
19
phenol is formed, according to Roberts.
Use. Piperitone used for the scenting of many technical preparations,
is
but its main employment is as a starting material for the preparation of syn-
thetic menthol and thymol.
1
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 42 (1923), 339T.
2
U. S. Patent No. 2,264,928, Dec. 2, 1941.
3
J. Proc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales 64 (1920), 40. Tech. J. Australia 1 (1922), 11. Tech-
nological Museum, Sydney, Bulletin No. 1. Cf. Baker and Smith, "The Eucalypts"
(1923), 393. Carter and Read, /. Soc. Chem. Ind. 45 (1926), 45T.
4
/. Chem. Soc. 121 (1922), 1866.
6
/. Chem. Soc. 121 (1922), 587.
7
See also Ber. Schimmel &
Co., Oct. (1910), 80; (1923), 195.
8
J. Chem. Soc. 123 (1923), 2272.
9
Ber. 63 (1930), 2423; 64 (1931), 2178; 66 (1933), 610.
10
/. Chem. Soc. 123 (1923), 2268.
Liebigs Ann. 362 (1908), 271.
11
J. Chem. Soc. 107 (1915), 1466.

13
14
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 60 (1941), 67T.
15
16
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 60 (1941), 67T.
17
18
/. Chem. Soc. 107 (1915), 1466.
400 KETONES
y
Pulegone
4 (8) -p-Menthen-3-one. 1
-Methy 1-4-isopropy lidenecy clohexan-3-one
CH3
CH
/ \
H2C CH2
H2 C C=O
\c /
c
/ \
HsC
Occurrence. d-Pulegone occurs as a main constituent (80-90 per cent) in
pennyroyal oil (Mentha pulegium and Hedeoma pulcgioides); it has also been
observed in Japanese mint (Mentha arvensis var. piperascens)
oil ,
in oil of
Pycnanthemum lanceolatum, Calamintha nepeta, etc.

Isolation. Pulegone can be isolated from essential oils, and purified by conversion
into the addition compound with sodium bisulfite or, preferably, sodium sulfite from
which the ketone can be regenerated by the action of alkali. For this purpose, Baeyer
and Henrich l suggested diluting oil of pennyroyal with 0.25 volumes of alcohol,
and shaking the mixture for a prolonged time with sodium bisulfite solution. The
crystalline complex is then decomposed with soda. Although the original directions
as published by Baeyer and Henrich 2 for the preparation of this crystalline complex
are still operative, nevertheless improvements have been recommended by several
authors that lead not only to a speedier determination but also to the separation of this
ketone from contaminants sometimes found associated with it in essential oils as,
for instance, the isomeric menthones and piperitenones in oil of pennyroyal. Where
these factors are likely to be of importance the worker should be guided by the research
of Burgess, 3 Bennett, 4 Penfold, 5 Dulou, 8 Foote and Matthews, 7 and Naves 8 wherein
the influences of time, temperature and pH are studied with respect to derivative
formation by this rather inactive carbonyl compound.
For the isolation as well as for the quantitative determination of pulegone, the
sodium sulfite method is generally preferred to the sodium bisulfite method. Since
pulegone does not react readily with sodium sulfite the process should be carried out
with a hot neutral sodium sulfite solution and with shaking for 4 hr. on a boiling
water bath. However, the values thus obtained will not only represent pulegone but
will include other carbonyl compounds present in the oil.
Pure d-pulegone may also be obtained by preparing the semicarbazone and by
regenerating the parent ketone through the action of acids.
The regenerative procedure of Kon 9 is also to be recommended, wherein the semi-
carbazone suspended in light petroleum (b. 40-60) is mechanically agitated with the
calculated amount of N/2 sulfuric acid until hydrolysis is complete and no more
solid remains.
Where certain ketones, as those observed in oil of pennyroyal, are present, Naves lo
has found the fractionation of the phenyl semicarbazones a useful method of purifica-
tion.
Identification. Several derivatives may serve for the characterization of pulegone:
u the most
(1) According to Baeyer et al., satisfactory compound is fo's-nitroso-
pulegone m. 81.5, which may be prepared by the action of hydrochloric acid on a
mixture of pulegone and amyl nitrite. For this purpose a solution of 2 cc. of pulegone
or pulegone-containing oil in 2 cc. of petroleum ether and 1 cc. of amyl nitrite is well
cooled in a freezing mixture and treated with a very small quantity of hydrochloric
acid. The 6ts-nitrosopulegone will separate after a short time in the form of fine needles
which can be obtained in pure form by spreading them on porous clay plates and by
washing with petroleum ether. These crystals decompose on recrystallization. Iso-
pulegone does not form a fris-nitroso compound.
On treatment with alkali, ta's-nitrosopulegone is converted into isonitrosopulegone
m. 122-127.
A new series of nitroso compounds have been prepared from the nitrite-treated reac-
pulegone and amines, by Adamson and Kenner.
12
tion product of These derivatives
are of the general formula
.2\
CO-CH /
<2 >CH-CH 3
R-N-NO
and may well serve for purposes of identification. R
in the formula corresponds to
the alkyl groups indicated in the following table of these nitroso derivatives:
R = Alkyl Group m. C,
CH 3- 116.5
C H 5-
2 108.5
n-C 3 Hr 125.5
n-C H r
4 89
n-C 5 Hn- 88.5
tt-C 7 H 16
- 70
Allyl- 108
According to Doeuvre and Ferret, d-pulegone gives a semicarbazone m. 174,

13
(2)
and Naves M reports the 4-phenyl semicarbazone as m. 142-143.
An unusual derivative from pulegone and semicarbazide has been reported by
Busse and Gurevich; l6 it is obtained under the same conditions as used by Beckmann
and Pleissner for oximation. This carbaminyl pyrazoline melts at 156-157.
(3) With hydroxylamine, pulegone gives several derivatives :
Hydroxylamine hydrochloride in the presence of sodium bicarbonate yields pulegone

16
hydroxylamine CioHieO-NHÔH, m. 157, according to Beckmann and Pleissner.
In this case, hydroxylamine is added to the ethylenic linkage. When treating pulegone
with hydroxylamine in the presence of alkali, Wallach 17 obtained a normal oxime
CioHi 6 :NOH, m. 120-121, which however is not d-pulegoneoxime, but d-isopulegone-
oxime. At the same time hydrolysis occurs by the action of alkali and the yield of
oxime will be poor. By the action of excess hydroxylamine on pulegone, Semmler 18
obtained pulegone hydroxylamino-oxime, CioHie-NOH-NHÔH, m. 118, while
Cusmano 19 reported the existence of a second hydroxylamino-oxime m. 143.
M
Sabetay suggested a simplified oximation method for pulegone in which the reac-
tion mixture is heated in the presence of CaCOs.
402 KETONES
Baeyer and Henrich
21
(4) prepared pulegone hydrochloride (8-chloro-p-menthan-3-
one), by the action of hydrogen chloride on pulegone in acetic acid solution. This
hydrochloride crystallizes in rhombic crystals m. 24-25 and can easily be reconverted
into pulegone with alkali.
(5) The inactivity of the carbonyl group in this compound again made evident in
is
difficulties attendant upon the formation of the 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone derivative

m. 142, according to Brady 22 (also consult in this connection the work of Allen, 23 and
Fernandez, Socias and Torres ).
24
For the quantitative determination of pulegone, see Vol. I, Chapter 4, "The Exami-
nation and Analysis of Essential Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates," p. 283.
Properties. d-Pulegone is with an odor reminiscent of menthone and

an oil
menthol. Colorless, when freshly prepared, pulegone assumes a yellowish

tinton aging.
Natural pulegone usually accompanied by other ketones; in order to ob-
is
tain pulegone in pure form it must be freed from these impurities by conver-
sion to a suitable derivative from which pulegone is regenerated. The fol-
25
lowing characteristic properties, reported by Beckmann and Pleissner, Bar-
26 27 28 29
bier, Baeyer and Henrich, Wallach, Grignard and Savard, Gildemeister
and Hoffmann, 30 Kon, 31 Dulou, 32 Doeuvre and Ferret, 33 Naves et al., 34 35 -
and Manzoni-Ansidci, 36 have all been observed in samples obtained by

treatment of pulegone with sulfites or semicarbazide:
PROPERTIES
Extensive studies of the optical properties (n and D over a wide range of

wave lengths) of this ketone have been made by Lowry, Simpson and All-
sopp,
37
and again by Simpson 38 wherein the latter author concludes, in con-
nection with the enhanced molecular refractivity of this compound, that
such an from the invalidity of the additive relationship in the

effect "results
presence of strongly chromophoric radicals."

This optical exaltation is observed to be even more pronounced in samples
39
purified by chemical treatments (cf. Naves and Papazian, and Doeuvre and
40
Ferret ).
Pulegone is fairly stable in most of its reactions and can be distilled with-
out harm, but it shows some tendency to decompose, yielding thereby ace-
tone and l-methyl-cyclohexan-3-one.
On oxidation with potassium permanganate, pulegone gives acetone and
/3-methyladipic acid.
Less vigorous action of oxygen, as autoxidation or photodecomposition in
41
air, evidently develops lactones. Serniagiotto offers such evidence in pho-
42
tolyzed pulegone and Naves found similar products in commercial oil of
pennyroyal.
The reduction of pulegone has become a reaction of commercial importance
inasmuch as menthol may be derived, cither by chemical or catalytic hydro-
genation.
Reducing pulegone with sodium and alcohol, Beckmann and Pleissner 43
early obtained ^-menthol CioH 2 oO, rn. 38 and []D 80 25', together with
some menthone. This technique is suitable for the laboratory; however,
catalytic hydrogenation has replaced this procedure commercially and Ru-
44
tovskii, Kolobelotzkaya and Yaroslavtzeva have so far improved this re-
duction recently as to report near theoretical yields by use of a nickel cata-
lyst. An intermediary product of reduction, in the above reaction, is pulegol
CioHi 8 O. This reaction likewise is accompanied by many difficulties and
has been studied from many angles by Doeuvre and Ferret. 45
Use. used for the scenting of soaps, but principally
Pulegone is it serves
as starting material for the making of synthetic menthol.
1
Ber. 28 (1895), 652.
2
Ibid.
3
Analyst 29 (1904), 78.
4
6
Ibid. 13 (1922), 21.
6
Bull pin (1934), 173.
inst.
7
/. Am. Pharm.Assocn. 31 (1942), 65.
8
Helv. Chim. Acta 26 (1943), 162. Perfumery Essential Oil Record 35 (1944), 221.
J. Chem. Soc. (1930), 1616.
10
Helv. Chim. Acta 26 (1943), 162.
11
Ber. 29 (1896), 1078.
12
J. Chem. Soc. (1937), 1551.
13
Bull. soc. chim.[51, 2 (1935), 301.
u Helv. Chim. Acta 26 (1943), 172.
16
Ber. 63B (1930), 2209.
"Liebigs Ann. 262 (1891), 6.
17
Ibid. 277 (1893), 160; 289 (1896), 347; 366 (1909), 241.
18
Ber. 38 (1905), 146.
19
Gazz. chim. ilal. 39, II (1909), 462.
404 KETONES
*>
Bull. soc. chim.[5], 6 (1938), 1419.
Ber. 28 (1895), 653.
22
/. Chem. Soc. (1931), 758.
23
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 2955. [Cf. Allen and Richmond, /. Org. Chem. 2 (1937), 222.]
24
Anales soc. espan. fts. qulm. 30 (1932), 37. Chem. Abstracts 26 (1932), 2395.
25
Liebigs Ann. 262 (1891), 3, 4, 20.
26
CompL rend. 114 (1892), 126.
27
Ber. 28 (1895), 653.
28
Ber. 28 (1895), 1965.
29
BwW. soc. chim. Belg. 36 (1927), 101. CompL rend. 181 (1925), 589; 182 (1926), 422.
30
31
J. Chem. Soc. (1930), 1616.
32
Bull. inst. pin (1934), 173.
33
Bull. soc. chim. 2 (1935), 298.
[5],
84
Helv. Chim. Ada 25 (1942), 1046.
36
36
Giorn. biol. ind. agrar. aliment. 7 (1937), 234, Bologna, Univ. Inst. f. allg. Chem. Chem.
Zentr. I (1938), 3188.
37
Proc. Roy. Soc. London A163 (1937), 483.
38
/. Chem. Soc. (1939), 886.
39
#e/y. CTum. Acto 26 (1942), 1046.
40
Buft. soc. chim. [5], 2 (1935), 298.
41
flend. accod. /.mm 24, [I] (1915), 1065. Gazz. chim. Hal. 47, I (1917), 150.
42
43
Liebigs Ann. 262 (1891), 30.
44
/. App. Chem. U.S.S.R. 9 (1936), 684. Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 7561.
46
Bw#. soc. chim. [5], 2 (1935), 298.
W.
Treibs, "Sulfonic Acids of Terpenes and Sesquiterpenes arid Cyclopulegenol
Sulfonic Ester and Its Conversion into Menthofurane," Ber. 1GB (1937), 85.
Isopulegone
C 10 H 16 () Mol. Weight 152.23
8(9)-p-Menthen-3-one. l-Methyl-4-isopropenylcyclohexan-3-one
CH3
CH
H2C
/ \
CH 2
H2 C C=O
\ /
CH
C
l
Griguard and Savard reported that the "pulegone" fraction
Occurrence.
of pennyroyal oil contains about 15 per cent isopulegone. However, Hugh,
Kon and 2
questioned these findings. In view of the marked in-
Linstead
stability of isopulegone, the latter authors hold it doubtful whether this ke-
tone actually accompanies pulegone in normal oil of pennyroyal.
According to Grignard and Savard, isopulegone can be separated from

3
Isolation.
the mixture of isomers occurring in pennyroyal oil by treatment with sodium hydrogen
sulfite solution. Pulegone forms thereby a crystalline compound, whereas isopulegone
does not react with sodium hydrogen sulfite.
According to Kon, isopuiegone may be purified by the preparation of the crystalline
4
semicarbazone (see below) from which the ketone is regenerated by hydrolysis with
oxalic acid or with very dilute sulfuric acid.
(1) According to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, the optically active
6
Identification.
isopulegone can be characterized by the semicarbazone which crystallizes in needles
m. 172-174, easily soluble in ether. The d/-semicarbazone is much more sparingly
soluble in ether and melts, according to Wallach, 6 at 182-183. These data have been
confirmed in the work of Harries and Roeder. 7 Doeuvre 8 reported that isopulegone
yields two semicarbazones with m. 172-173 and m. 156, corresponding to the cis- and
trans- isomers.
(2) Wallach 9 found that the optically active isopulegone yields an oxime m. 120-
121. This isopulegoneoxime can be prepared either from isopulegone or from pule-
gone. The d/-isopulegonc forms a dl-oxime which has been variously reported as
regards its melting point. Wallach
10
found 138-139, Tiemann and Schmidt u 134,
Harries and Roeder 12 143.
(3) According to Harries and Roeder,
13
the presence of even 1% pulegone can be
established in a mixture of pulegone and isopulegone, if 2 cc. of the sample are mixed
with 2 cc. of petroleum ether and 1 cc. of isoamyl nitrite, and 1 drop of fuming hydro-
chloric acid is added under strong cooling. The nitrosopulegone will separate as a
white deposit while the color of the solution turns blue.
Properties. Isopulegone is a colorless oil possessing an odor very similar

to that of pulegone. Pure isopulegone is strongly dextrorotatory. Neither
the form, nor the dl- form has been prepared, although derivatives of the
/-
latter are known (see above).

The properties of this terpenic ketone have been reported by Grignard and
Savard, Hugh, Kon and Linstead, and by Harries and Roeder, and are
14 16 16
summarized in the following table:
bn 101 -102 015 WD +34 2' 14
bia 98-100 16
MD +24 42' 15
(c
= 5.55 in
14
b5 78 methyl alcohol)
4 15 ' 4 16
df' 0.92177 no 1.46787
15 15
df 0.92085 nf? 1.4667
16 4 14
di9. 5 0.9192 nf 1.46332
4 14
dj 0.9097
The properties observed by Grignard and Savard were determined on

pure natural d-isopulegone. This applies also to the figures given by Hugh,
Kon and Linstead, except those for density and refractive index taken at
406 KETONES
20.4 which were obtained on a sample of very pure ketone derived from iso-
pulegol.
Use. Isopulegone, as such, is used in our industry only to a small extent
for example, in the compounding of imitation essential oils such as geranium,
etc.
Compt. rend. 181 (1925), 589; 182 (1926), 422.

1
2
J. Chem. Soc. (1927), 2585. Kon, ibid. (1930), 1617.
Compt. rend. 181 (1925), 589; 182 (1926), 422.
8
*J. Chem. Soc. (1930), 1616.

6
Liebigs Ann. 366 (1909), 253. See also Harries and Rocder, Ber. 32 (1899), 3362.
6
7
Ber. 32 (1899), 3371.
8
Butt. soc. chim. ]4], 63 (1933), 589.
Liebigs Ann. 366 (1909), 253. See also Harries and Roeder, Ber. 32 (1899), 3362.
9
Liebigs Ann. 366 (1909), 252.

10
Ber. 29 (1896), 915; 30 (1897), 26.

12
Ber. 32 (1899), 3371.
13
Ibid. 3369.
Compt. rend. 181 (1925), 589; 182 (1926), 422.
14
15
/. Chem. Soc. (1927), 2585. Kon, ibid. (1930), 1617.
" Ber. 32 (1899), 3371.
Carvotanacetone
6-p-Menthen-2-one. l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-6-cyc!ohexen-2-one
CH 3
C
\
HO C=O
H2 C CH 2
\CII/
OH
H3 C
/ \CIT
3
Occurrence.Simonsen and Rau l found c/-carvotanacetone as a main con-

stituent (about 82 per cent) in oil of Blumea malcolmii, fam. Compositae.
More recently Schimmel & Co. 2 examined a sample of oil distilled in East
India from Blumea eriantha D.C. fam. Compositae and found that it contained
95 per cent ketones, mainly d-carvotanacetone.
Wallach 3 isolated a small percentage of d/-carvotanacetone from the high
boiling fraction of thuja oil (Thuja occidentalis) but pointed out that it re-
,
mains doubtful whether carvotanacetone exists in this oil as such or whether

it is formed from thujone during the process of purification.
Isolation. After washing with both sodium carbonate and sodium hydroxide
initial
to remove acids and phenols, the essential oil is treated with neutral sodium sulfite.
Contrary to carvomenthone (tetrahydrocarvone), with which it is sometimes asso-
ciated in nature, carvotanacetone dissolves readily in a neutral solution of sodium
sulfite and can be recovered from this solution by treatment with alkali. This reaction
offers a method of isolating carvotanacetone and separating it from carvomenthone.
After regeneration of the ketone from the sulfite complex with alkali, complete purifica-
tion is carried out by distillation.
According to Baeyer, carvotanacetone may be characterized by

4
Identification. (1)
its semicarbazone, the dl- form melting at 177-179, the active forms at 173-174
(cf. also Simonsen and Rau, Read and Swann, and Nagasawa ).
5 6 7
(2) With hydroxylamine, carvotanacetone forms a highly crystalline oxime, the

dl- form melting at 94-95
6
the d- and I- forms at 7G-77. 6 When treated with an
,
excess of hydroxylamine, the ketone forms a hydroxylamino-oxime which crystallizes

with half a molecule of crystallization water. The active hydroxylamino-oxime melts
at 95-96, the dl- form at 162.
(3) The phenylhydrazone of the active isomers of carvotanacetone m. 92-93 was
described by Simonsen and Ran, 8 and the hydrogen sulfide derivative m. 225-226.
(4) Read and Swann found that the 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone melts at 191-
9
192.
Properties. Carvotanacetone is an oil possessing an odor very similar to

that of carvone. The following properties have been reported:
10
dl-Carvotanacetone (Briihl )
764 228.0-228.5
8.0-228.5 aD
df 0.9351 n> 1.48056
12
d-Carvotanacetone (Simonsen and Ran, 11 and Read and Swann )
b 707 227.5 u +58 12

[a] D 18'
b 2 i. 5 105-106 12
[a]?? +5933 /n
d^ 0.9305 " n?? 1.4767"
12
nf? 1.4796
13 14
l-Carvotanacetone (Wallach and Nagasawa )
b. 227-229 13
[a]fj -60 34' 14
14 9 13
b5 88-88.5 nj> 1.4822
13
dis 0.9345
When oxidizing d-carvotanacetone with potassium permanganate in alka-

line solution, Simonsen and Rau 15 obtained as sole products of oxidation
acetic acid and 0-isopropylglutaric acid m. 103-104.
Use. Carvotanacetone has not found any noteworthy use in the perfume
or flavor industries.
1
J. Chem. Soc. 121 (1922), 876.
2 Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1937), 7.
408 KETONES
*Liebigs Ann. 276 (1893), 182.
4
Ber. 27 (1894), 1923.
*
/. Chem. Soc. 121 (1922), 876.
6
Ibid. (1937), 239.
7
8
,7. Chem. Soc. 121 (1922), 876.
Ibid. (1937), 239.

10
Ber. 32 (1899), 1225.
11
/. Chem. Soc. 121 (1922), 876.
M 76*d. (1937), 239.
w Z*e&i08 Ann. 336 (1904), 37.
14
16
J. Chem. Soc. 121 (1922), 876.
Dihydrocarvone
8 (9)-p-Menthen-2-one. l-Methyl-4-isopropenylcyclohexan-2-one
CH3
CH
H2 C C=O
Hr^ OTJ
2^ v^JLl2
CH
C
Occurrence. Schimmel & Co. 1 found small quantities of dihydrocarvone in

caraway seed oil.
Isolation.This menthcnone can be isolated from the fraction b. 218-224 of

caraway seed oil; the ketone may be purified through the crystalline compound which
it readily forms with sodium bisulfite.
Identification. Dihydrocarvone is characterized by the preparation of several

derivatives:
(1) The and /-oximes melt at 88-89, the <#-oxime at 115-116.
d-
According to Baeyer, the d- and /-semicarbazones melt at 189-191, the
2
(2) dl-
semicarbazone at 187-188.
According to Wallach, a crystalline dibromide is obtained on addition of
3
(3)
bromine, drop by drop, to a solution of dihydrocarvone in glacial acetic acid containing
hydrogen bromide. The d- and Z-dibromides melt at 69-70, the cW-dibromide at
96-97.
Dihydrocarvone is a
Properties. colorless oil possessing an odor which re-
sembles carvone and menthone.
Schimmel & Co. 4 reported the following properties for the natural ketone:
b 7 35.5 221 aD -16 18'
djf 0.9297 nf? 1.47107
5
Wallach et al. found for /-dihydrocarvone as prepared from d-carvone:
b. 221-222 <* D -17 45'
diQ 0.928 nj? 1.47174
The only significant difference revealed in the recent literature between

properties as earlier reported by Wallach and those of
6
other workers is the
fact that slightly higher rotatory powers have been observed. (Compare
7 8 9
Kondakov and Lutschinin, Kishner,and Nagasawa who report rotations
between -18 11' and -19.) Kondakov and Lutschinin, 10 and Wallach n
also studied the d- isomer but found a complete correspondence in properties
with those of the I- form as recorded by Wallach.
On
oxidation with potassium permanganate, dihydrocarvone yields p-men-
than-2-one-8,9-diol, m. 115-120, which forms a semicarbazone m. 187,
and an oxime m. 202.
Use. Dihydrocarvone has not found any noteworthy employment in the
flavor or perfume industries.
1
2
Ber. 27 (1894), 1923.
3
Liebigs Ann. 279 (1894), 389; 286 (1895), 127.
4
6
Liebigs Ann. 275 (1893), 116; 279 (1894), 381. Cf. Simonsen, "The Terpenes," Vol. I
(1947), 352.
6
Ibid.
7
/. prakt. Chem. II, 60 (1899), 261.
9
Repts. Osaka Imp. Ind. Res. Inst. 19, No. 4 (1938).
10
/. prakL Chem. II, 60 (1899), 261.
11
Ber. 28 (1895), 2705.
The Santolinenones
Francesconi and collaborators observed in oil of Santolina chaemaecypa-

rissus L. the occurrence of three ketones which they named a-, 0-, and 7-
santolinenone. None of these ketones have been obtained in pure form and
the suggested structural formulas remain quite doubtful. The 7- isomeride
is probably bicyclic.
410 KETONES
a-Santolinenone
CioHi 6 O Mol. Weight 152.23
1 (7)-p-Menthen-2-one. l-Methylene-4-isopropylcyclohexan-2-one
CHo
C
H2 C C=O
I (?)
^
H2C CH2
\CH/
CH
HC
/ \ CH
3 3
This ketone was described by Francesconi and Scarafia. 1 It forms a hy-

2
droxylamino-oxime m. 190, according to Francesconi and Granata.
1
Atti accad. Lincei 20, II (1911), 318.
[5], Chem. Abstracts 6 (1912), 230.
2
Gazz. chim. ital 45, I (1915), 170.
ft-Santolinenone
Mol. Weight 152.23
3(8)-w-Menthen-4-one. l-Methyl-3-isopropylidenecyclohexan-4-one.
3(8)-w-Menthen-2-one. l-Methyl-3-isopropylidenecyclohexan-2-one.
CH 3 CH 3
CH CH
Il2C CIl2 Cri3 H.2C C==0 CIl3
'
H2 c c=c H2 c c=c
/
\C=O \ CH /
\CH \CH
3 2 3
This ketone was described by Francesconi and Granata. 1 forms a hy- It
droxylamine m. 63-64 which, like the liquid oxime, is volatile with steam.
On oxidation with mercuric oxide, the hydroxylamine yields a nitroso-com-
pound m. 60-G2. The hydroxylamine cannot be hydrolyzed to the parent
ketone.
>
Gazz. chim. ital. 46, II (1916), 251.
Carvenone
O Mol. Weight 152.23
3-p-Menthen-2-one. l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-3-cyclohexen-2-one
CH3
CH
H2 C
/ \C=0
H2 C CH
\C /
CH
H3C
/ \CH
3
This ketone has not yet been found in essential oils. It is obtained by the
action of concentrated sulfuric acid on camphor at 200.
Identification. The raccmic oxime m. 91-92 can be prepared quite easily but its
melting point lies too close to that of carvone oxime or dihydrocarvone oxime.
The most suitable derivative for the characterization of carvcnone is its hydroxyl-
amino-oxime m. 167-1G8.
The semi car bazone exists in two modifications, the a- form melting at 202-203, the
more soluble 0- form at 153-154.
Properties.Carvenone is a colorless oil possessing an odor similar to that

of carvone. Auwcrs and Eisenlohr reported these properties which are ap-
*
2
parently typical as they confirm results of Wallach, Bredt, Rochussen and
3 4
Monheim, Brtihl, and Crymble, Stewart, Wright and Rea: 5
dl-Carvenone
b. 232-233 df 0.9266
5
b 758 235.5-236 nf? 1.48245
Onreduction with sodium and alcohol, carvenone yields carvomenthol, ac-

cording to Wallach.
6
Treibs 7 found that the autoxidation of carvenone pro-
ceeds analogously to that of piperitone.
Use. Carvenone has not found any noteworthy use in the perfume or
flavor industries.
1
/. prakt.Chem. [2], 82 (1910), 130; [21,84 (1911), 19.
2
Liebigs Ann. 286 (1895), 130.
3
Ibid. 314 (1901), 379.
4
Ber. 32 (1899), 1225.
*J. Chem. Soc. 99 (1911), 1265.
6
Liebigs Ann. 277 (1893), 130.
7
Ber. 65 (1932), 163.
412 KETONES
Carvone
(Carvol)
CioHnO Mol. Weight 150.21
6,8(9)-p-Menthadien-2-one. l-Methyl-4-isopropenyl-6-cyclohexen-2-one
CH 3
C
HC
\C=O
}
CH2
CH
C
Occurrence. This important ketone occurs in several essential oils, in both

the racemic and the optically active forms.
d-Carvone is the main constituent (50-00 per cent) of caraway seed and dill
seed oil (Anethum graveolens L.). Dill herb oil contains a lesser percentage.
l-Carvone the principal constituent of spearmint
is oil (up to 70 per cent),
and also occurs in kuromoji oil.
dl-Carvone occurs in gingergrass oil.
Isolation. (1) Carvone can be isolated from essential oils by taking advantage of
the fact that this ketone, when shaken with a neutral solution of sodium sulfite, forms
the water soluble sodium salt of a disulfonic acid CioHi607S2Na2, whereby the addition
takes place at both of the ethylenic linkages. For this purpose the fraction b. 220-
235 for instance, of caraway seed oil is shaken with the corresponding quantity of
a concentrated aqueous solution of sodium sulfite, and the sodium hydroxide liberated
during the reaction is neutralized from time to time with dilute acid. After completion
of the process, the portions which have not entered the reaction are removed by ex-
tracting the solution repeatedly with ether. Finally the carvone is regenerated by
the action of sodium hydroxide, and distilled off with steam.
(2) Carvone may be separated from essential oils, and identified, through the com-
pound which it forms readily with hydrogen sulfide, (CioHuO^-H^S. This can be
1
achieved, according to Wallach, by passing a current of hydrogen sulfide into an al-
coholic solution of the ketone containing ammonia. The pure ketone may be regen-
erated from the hydrogen sulfide compound by digestion with alkali. Gildemeister
and Hoffmann 2 recommended saturating a mixture of 20 parts carvone fraction, 5
parts alcohol, and 1 part ammonia (dis 0.96) with hydrogen sulfide. The separated
hydrogen sulfide compound is filtered off under suction, recrystallized from methyl
alcohol, the carvone regenerated by boiling with alcoholic potassium, and purified by
steam distillation. Harries 3 reported for the d- and I- forms of the hydrogen sulfide
compound a melting point of 224-225, whereas Deussen 4 claimed a melting point
of 210-211 (M{? +48 [a]g-4827', in 0.6% chloroform solution). The

43',
dl- form melts at 189-190. The compound, according to Challenger, 6 has been
widely studied. A wide variation of properties has been reported.
Identification. Carvone may be characterized by the preparation of several com-
pounds:
Through the hydrogen
(1) sulfide compound (see above, and also consult work of
8
Taboury ).
d-Carvone yields two semicarbazones m. 162, [a]f? +115 6' (in methyl alcohol)
(2)
and m. 14l-142, [ajf? 4-113 18' (in pyridine). The lower melting semicarbazone,
according to Rupe and Dorschky, is unstable and passes into the higher melting form
7
either on keeping or on heating to 170-175. l-Carvone yields only the higher melting,
stable semicarbazone. semicarbazone melts at 154-156.
The dl-
According to Baeyer, carvone may be characterized by its phenylhydrazone m.

8
(3)
(4) The oximes of carvone have been thoroughly studied, d- or -Carvoxime m.

72, [<*]#43' (in alcohol), [a]{J -39 21' (in alcohol), according to Wallach, 8 is
+39
easily prepared by treating d- or Z-carvone with hydroxylamine hydrochloride in
methyl alcoholic solution. cM-Carvoxime melts at 92-93. It can be obtained either
from dJ-carvone, or by the digestion of the active oximes with alcohol or ligroine,
whereby racemization occurs.
For the preparation of carvoxime, Wallach 10 recommended dissolving 50 g. of
carvone in 250 cc. of alcohol, and adding to this solution, with shaking, a hot solution
of 50 hydroxylamine hydrochloride in 50 cc. of water. Into the clear liquid a
g. of
warm solution of 50 g. of potassium hydroxide in 400 cc. of water is poured at once.
The liquid becomes yellow and potassium chloride precipitates. Immediately after
cooling, and without any further warming, the liquid is poured into cold water. The
main portion of the carvoxime will precipitate in the form of solid flakes which should
be collected on a filtering cloth and expressed. One hundred g. of dry carvoxime are
recrystallized from 200 g. of hot alcohol, but before filtering some ether is added to
the solution.
Whenpreparing the carvoxime, care should be taken not to use too large an excess
of hydroxylamine, as thereby also an addition compound of carvoxime with hydroxyl-
amine, viz., CioHuNOH-NIÔH, m. 174-175, would be formed. In case the

freshly prepared carvoxime does not congeal soon, it may be brought to crystallization
by steam distillation.
(5) Henze and Speer, study of methods of identification of carbonyl com-
11
in their
pounds, characterized carvone by its conversion into a hydantoin m. 193.5-194.

(6) Bowden and Watkins
l2
discovered that the ether magnesium iodide complex
with carvone 2CioHi40 Mgl2 EtrÔ yields two characteristic melting points: 1st 85,
2nd 125.
(7) A number hydrazones of the d- isomer have been prepared:
of characteristic
2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone, m. 189 (Allen ); 3-nitrobenzohydrazone m. 162-163

13
u
(Strain ); /3-naphthylhydrazone m. 147 (Rothenfusser ) p-nitrophenylhydrazone m.
16
;
174-175 (Borsche, Witte and Bothe 16 ).

Regarding the quantitative determination of carvone, consult Vol. I, Chapter 4,
"The Examination and Analysis of Essential Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates," p. 283;
see also p. 287 for the method of Stillman and Read. 17
Properties. Carvone is a colorless oil possessing a marked odor typical of

caraway seed. Carvone congeals at very low temperature. Gildemeister
414 KETONES
18
and Hoffmann reported the following properties for d- and /-carvone purified
through their sulfite compounds:
d-Carvone (from caraway seed oil)
b 755 230 D +59 57'
b 5 _6 91 nf? 1.49952
dlS 0.9645
l-Carvone (from spearmint oil)
b 763 230-231 D -59 40'

1 15
45
d}f 0.9652 nf? 1.4988
Apparently the more recent literature recognizes a slightly higher rotation

for these optical isomers, viz., near 62 (cf. Naves and Bachmann, 19 also
Doeuvre 20 ). Otherwise, numerous investigations of this ketone only seem to
confirm the other properties.
Both forms are soluble in 17 volumes of 50 per cent alcohol, and in 4 vol-
umes of 60 per cent alcohol.
dl-Carvone, according to Walbaum and Hiithig, has these properties:
21
b. 230-231
dis 0.9645
nb 1.5003
In connection with the properties of this ketone mention should be made

of very accurate measurements of the boiling point as carried out by Kobe,
22
Okabe, Ramstad and Huemmer.
Reduction of carvone to any one of several hydrogenated products may be
used as an indirect method of identification inasmuch as carvone yields to
hydrogenation by platinum, sodium and alcohol, alkaline zinc, or isopropyl
aluminum. However, particular attention should be given, whenever a re-
ductive technique employed, to the fact that several methods often cause
is
complete inversion in the nature of the optical sign. Sodium and alcohol
produce /-dihydrocarveol from /-carvone, whereas catalytic hydrogenation
always causes inversion in the optical activity, /-carvone yielding finally d-
carvomenthol. A guide in connection with these operations may be had in
the studies by Wallach, 23 and Wallach and Schrader, 24 and the more recent
25
findings of Nagasawa on Japanese mint oils.
Carvone is quite readily attacked by oxidizing agents. When shaken with
air or oxygen in the presence of baryta water, carvone yields a yellow dike-
26
tone, according to Harries. With potassium permanganate the degrada-
tion is profound, the main product being hydroxyterpenylic acid CsHtaOs,
m. 190-192, as shown by Tiemann and Semmler. 27 See also the later in-
vestigations by Treibs. 28
The bromination carvone has been investigated by Wallach. 29 Bromina-
of
tion leads to a mixture of crystalline (d- and I- forms m. 120-122; dl- form
m. 112-114), and liquid tetrabromides which are probably stereoisomers.
On further bromination, the crystalline tetrabromide yields a pentabromide
(d- and /- form m. 86-87; dl- form m. 96-98), while the liquid tetrabro-
mide yields an isomeric pentabromide (d- and I- form m. 142-143; dl- form
m. 124~126).
All halogen derivatives of carvone can be reconverted into carvone by re-
duction with zinc in acetic acid solution.
With hydrogen
chloride in acetic acid solution, carvone gives a monohydro-
chloride; with hydrogen bromide, carvone yields a (/-carvone hydrobromide
m. 32. On warming, especially in the presence of a catalyst, these hydro-
halides pass into carvacrol. Isomerization of carvone to carvacrol also takes
place with nearly all dehydrating agents for example, sulfuric acid, phos-
phoric acid, zinc chloride, alkalies, etc.

Abe 30 has found that a combination of hydrogen cyanide, hydrogen sulfide,
and ammonia acting upon carvone yields certain crystalline thioamidc de-
rivatives. These compounds form very slowly but may be of use in the study
of carvone where time is not a factor.
When exposed to light for several months, carvone is converted to an iso-
meric crystalline ketone, the so-called camphor-carvone.
Use. Carvone is widely used for the flavoring of many kinds of food prod-
ucts and beverages, especially infkummel liqueurs. It also serves in mouth
preparations, gargles, toothpastes, and pharmaceuticals.
1
Ann. 305 (1899), 224.
Liebigs
2
3
Ber. 34 (1901), 1928.
4
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 90 (1914), 318.
5
Ind. Chemist 4 (1928), 315.
6
Compt. rend. 214 (1942), 764.
7
Ber. 39 (1906), 2113, 2372.
8
Ber. 27 (1894), 810.
9
Liebigs Ann. 246 (1888), 226.
10
Ibid. 276 (1893), 118.
11
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 522.
12
/. Chem. Soc. (1939), 1961.
13
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 2955.
" Ibid. 67 (1935), 758.
15
Arch. Pharm. 246 (1907), 375.
Liebigs Ann. 359 (1908), 70.
16
17
18
"Die Athcrischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 555.
19
Helv. chim. acta 29 (1946), 61.
20
Bull soc. chim. [5], 1 (1934), 198.
21
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 71 (1905), 463.
22
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 3251.
416 KETONES
Ann. 275 (1893), 114.
Ibid. 279 (1894), 377.
86
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. Japan 41 (Suppl. Binding) (1938), 252. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 811.
88
Ber. 34 (1901), 2105.
Ber. 28 (1895), 2148.
w Ber. 64 (1931), 2178; 66 (1932), 1314.
Lte%s 4rm. 286 (1895), 120.
*>Sci. Repts. Tokyo Bunrika Daigaku A3 (1939), 217. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 3360.
John Read and Robert G. Johnston, "Researches in the Carvone Series." Part I.
"Some Ketones and Amines," J. Chem. Soc. (1934), 226.
Piperitenone
1 ,4 (8)-p-Menthadien-3-one. l-Methyl-4-isopropylidene-l-cyclohexen-3-one
CH3
C
H2 C
/ \CH
H2 C C=O
\C
C
Occurrence. Found by Naves x

in Moroccan oil of pennyroyal (Mentha
pulegium L. var. eriantha).
2
According to the same author, piperitenone exists in the majority of oils
from young pennyroyal plants harvested in damp places.
Isolation. Compared with pulegone, piperitenone reacts more slowly with neutral
sodium sulfite solution; the reaction should, therefore, be carried out on a boiling water
bath for 3 hr. with continual shaking, preferably mechanical. The hydrogen sulfite
compound is soluble in excess of sodium sulfite solution and can be regenerated by the
action of alkalies. Piperitenone combines slowly with hydroxylamine.
Identification. Piperitenone can be hydrogenated to menthone and menthol. By
the action of catalysts such as nickel, palladium, or charcoal carrying palladium
and in the absence of hydrogen by mere heating, piperitenone is isomerized to thymol
with good yield.
Moreover, Naves and Papazian report that this unsaturated ketone is readily
8
converted by formic acid to l-methyl-l-cyclohexen-3-one.

5
Properties. Naves and co-workers 4>
describe the properties of this ter-
penic derivative as follows:
4 4 5
bio 106-107 df 0.9774 -
5 4' 5
bi.8 92 aD
4' 5
nf? 1.5294
Use. Piperitenone, as such, has not found any use in the perfume or flavor
industries.
1
Helv. Chim. Acta 26 (1942), 732; 26 (1943), 162.
2
Perfumery Essential Oil Record 36 (1944), 221, 224.
3
Helv. Chim. Acta 25 (1942), 1023.
4
Perfumery Essential Oil Record 35 (1944), 221, 224.
6
Helv. Chim. Acta 26 (1942), 1023.
Isopiperitenone
Ci Hi 4 Mol. Weight 150.21
1,8 (9)-p-Menthadien-3-one. l-Methyl-4-isopropenyl- l-cylcohexen-3-one
CHs
H2 C
/ \CH
H2 C C=0
\CH/
C
\
Occurrence. Naves * found from Mentha pulegium
in the volatile oil derived
var. Villona Benth., growing in North Africa, a mixture of two isomeric ke-
tones CioHnO, viz., piperitenone and isopiperitenone, the former comprising
about 85 per cent of this mixture. The only direct proof of the presence of
isopiperitenone in the ketone mixture was the formation of formaldehyde on
ozonolysis.
This ketone may be catalytically isomerized to thymol and hydro-

Identification.
genated to isomenthol which is readily identified (see "Isomenthol")'
Use. Isopiperitenone is not used in our industries.

1
Helv. Chim. Acta 26 (1942), 732.
418 KETONES
(b) BICYCLIC TEKPENE KETONES.

i
Fenchone
CH 3
HC
2
}H2
.CH 3
Occurrence. (Foeniculum vulgare) and

c?-Fenchone occurs in fennel seed oil
in oil of Lavandula stoechas, whereas its optical cnantiomorph /-fenchone is a

constituent of thuja oil (Thuja occidentalis L.). The ketone has also been
reported in oils from a number of species of Artemisia.
1' 12
Isolation. Fenchone can be freed quite readily from impurities by taking advantage
of its great stability toward oxidizing agents. For example, when gently warmed with
nitric acid,fenchone is only slowly attacked. The fenchone thus obtained will be
almost pure. Further purification may be achieved by crystallizing the ketone at low
temperature.
d-Fenchone can easily be isolated from the fenchone-containing fractions of fennel
oil. The fraction b. 190 -195 is gently heated with three times its weight of concen-
trated nitric acid until the color of the escaping, originally reddish-brown vapors fades.
After cooling, the mixture is poured into water, the oil separated, washed with water,
and steam distilled. However, this method does not eliminate small quantities of
camphor which might be present, or that may be formed during the process of oxida-
tion from esters of borneol.
According to Wallach, a complete separation of fenchone from camphor and other
3
ketones can be effected by treatment with semicarbazide. The formation of the

ferichonesemicarbazone requires several days, while the semicarbazonc of camphor is
formed more rapidly. For the preparation of the semicarbazone, Wallach recom-
mended treating the fenchone in alcoholic solution at room temperature for two days
with semicarbazide hydrochloride and sodium acetate. The alcohol and the fenchone
which has not reacted are distilled off with steam. A single treatment will usually be
sufficient to obtain a reasonably pure fenchone but, to prepare it in absolutely pure
form, it is advisable to prepare and recrystallize the fenchoncsemicarbazone and to
decompose it with acids. This method has been confirmed by Dulou who finds that
4
a week is sufficient to insure formation and separation.

Semmler 6 suggested that fenchone and camphor be separated by boiling; then by
distilling the two ketones over metallic sodium. Camphor forms sodium camphor,
whereas fenchone, according to Wallach, 6 is attacked much more slowly.
l-Fenchone may be isolated from thuja oil, according to Wallach, 7 by shaking 130 g.
of the oil fraction b. 190-200 with a solution of 390 g. of potassium permanganate
in 5 liters of water, and by steam distilling the mixture. Each 20 cc. of the oil layer
distilled over is then boiled for 1 hr. with 80 g. of concentrated nitric acid and steam
distilled. The l-fenchone thus obtained still contains small quantities of camphor but
may be freed from it by the preparation of the semicarbazone, as described above.

Identification. Fenchone can now be characterized by several derivatives. How-

ever, considerable attention should be paid in these directions to the element of time
and to the technique of preparation.
(1) By the preparation of its semicarbazone which, however, is formed only very
slowly. Wallach 8 suggested the following method :
Dissolve 10 g. of semicarbazide hydrochloride and 10 g. of sodium acetate in 20 cc.

of water and add a solution of 10 g. of fenchone in 50 cc. of alcohol. Keep the clear
solution at room temperature for at least two weeks, then steam distill the product.
The alcohol and
free fenchone will distill over, while the semicarbazone in the residue
will partly congeal to a compact mass, and partly crystallize from the hot water in
which it is slightly soluble. From dilute alcoholic solutions the semicarbazone crystal-
lizes in well formed, large, shiny rhombic prisms m. 182-183[(184) 9 ] for the d-
and I- form. The dl- form melts at 172-173 and docs not possess the same capacity
of crystallization.
(2) the preparation of the oxime compound. These derivatives have been
By
studied particularly by Dele*pirie, 10 Wallach, 11 and Iliickel and Sachs 12 who are pri-
marily responsible for these findings, also by Rabak, Ruzicka, and Komppa and
13 14
Klami. 16 The following table lists melting points arid rotation:
d I dl
Oxime a 167 []?? +46 30' (in 96% ale.) 12

165 u -
158-160 "..","
7 7 '
12 10 10
ft 123 [a]}) +148 0' (in 96% ale.) 123 129
Bcnzoyloxime a. 81 [a]j? +49 0' (in 96% ale.)

^ 79 10
77 10
12 10 10
ft 125 [aj|? 4- 128 30' (in 96% ale.) 123 111.5
Wallach 16 originally gave the following directions for the a-oxime preparation:
Add to a solution of 5 g. of fenchone in 80 cc. of absolute alcohol a solution of 11 g.
of hydroxylamine hydrochloride and 6 g. of powdered potash in 1J g. of hot water.
The oxime will crystallize after standing for one to two days, and when some of the
alcohol has evaporated. The oxime may be purified by recrystallization from alcohol,
acetic ether, or ether.
Although this procedure yields a satisfactory a- product, Vavon and Anziani
17
later studied the optimum conditions for oximation of this ketone; they recommended
different proix)rtions with critical attention to pH where yield and speed of reaction
are important. These workers obtained high yields for their procedure only after 180
hr. of refluxing.
Fenchoneoxime insoluble in alkalies; under the influence of acidic reagents the
is
course of the reaction has been shown by Cockburn 18 and Gandini 19 to be one of
dehydration and ring fission instead of hydrolysis with a resulting mixture of complex
nitrogenous products.
Subsequent to Wallach's isolation of the active a-i enchoneoximes, Deldpine modified
the technique to obtain a /3-oxime that could readily be thermally rearranged to the
stable a- form. Huckei's work demonstrated the stability of both a- and /3-benzoyl-
oximes.
Dele" pine made these properties of the oximes the basis of a method of identification
of fenchone in mixtures withcamphor. To accomplish this, he suggested:
Prepare the oximes by heating an alcoholic solution of fenchone and hydroxylamine
hydrochloride for 4-6 hr. in presence of excess sodium hydroxide. Isolate the 0-
fenchoneoxime m. 123 by diluting the alkaline solution; the camphoroxime will remain
in solution. The enchoneoxime, according to Dcldpine,
rotatory power of the crude j8-f
is always higher than 115. The /3-f enchoneoxime can be isomerized to the a-oxime
which has an optical rotation of about 45.
420 KETONES
Useful hydrazone derivatives have been prepared from the active forms although
(3)
both Wallach 20 at an early date and more recently Allen " reported fenchone indiffer-
ent to phenylhydrazines, which again serves to emphasize the nonreactivity of the
carbonyl grouping in this compound:
2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 140 22 (sinters at 125)

p-Iodobenzoylhydrazone m. 168- 169 23
Properties. Fenchone is an oilwith a camphoraceous odor and somewhat

bitter flavor. The ketone is distinguished by its relatively low melting point;
it crystallizes at low temperature. The following properties have been re-
24 25 26 27
ported by Fischer, Hiickel et al., Wallach, Bouchardat and Lafont, 28
'
von Rechenberg, 29 Zaitzev, 30 Nametkin, 31 Schimmel & Co., 32 Ruzicka, 33 and

Kondakov and Lutschinin: 34
The chemical properties of fenchone indicate that this ketone is relatively

stable and inert, being indifferent to halogen acids, bisulfite, cold permanga-
nate; even prolonged treatment with nitric acid degrades the ketone only
36
partially, according to Gardner and Cockburn, whereas the action of halo-
36
gens, recently studied in detail by Briusova, is best promoted by
catalysts
and often does not lead to uniform products. The sluggishness of the car-
bonyl grouping toward the formation of many derivatives has already been
treated in detail.
Use. Fenchone serves mainly as an odor adjunct in room sprays and bath
preparations of pine character. Small quantities are used also in certain arti-
ficial essential oils.
iCovello, Bull. orto. botan. Univ. Napoli 15, II (1941), 61. Chem. Zentr. I (1942), 2072.
2
Rabak, Ber. Schimmel &
Co., April (1912), 24. Chem. Zentr. I (1912), 1715.
3
Liebigs Ann. 363 (1907), 215; 369 (1909), 65.
4
Bull. inst. pin [2], No. 58 (1934), 173.
6
Ber. 40 (1907), 4591.
6
Liebigs Ann. 369 (1909), 65.
7
Ibid. 272 (1893), 102.
9
Ibid. 353 (1907), 211.
9
Henderson, Henderson and Heilbron, Ber. 47 (1914), 887.
10
Compt. rend. 178 (1924), 1721. Bull. soc. chirn. [4], 36 (1924), 1330.
Liebigs Ann. 259 (1890), 327; 263 (1891), 136; 272 (1893), 104; 276 (1893), 317; 316
11
(1901), 278; 362 (1908), 199.

12
Ibid. 498 (1932), 166.
13
14
Ber. 50 (1917), 1374.
16
Ber. 68B (1935), 2001.
Liebigs Ann. 272 (1893),
16
104; 316 (1901), 278.
17
Bull. soc. chim. [5], 4 (1937), 2026, 2035.
18
/. Chem. Soc. 76 (1899), 501.
19
Oazz. chim. ital 72 (1942), 232. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 4381.
20
Liebigs Ann. 263 (1891), 135.
21
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 2955.
22
Brady, /. Chem. Soc. (1931), 756.
23
Sah and Hsu, Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 355.
24
26
20
Ibid. 263 (1891), 131.
37
Ibid. 272 (1893), 103.
28
Compt. rend. 126 (1898), 756.
29
"Kinfache und Fraktionierte Destination," 2d Kd., Miltitz (1923), 251, 291.
30
31
Ibid. 47 (1915), 1596. Chem. Zentr. IT (1916), 253.
32
33
Ber. 60 (1917), 1374.
34
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 62 (1900), 2.
35
/. Chem. Soc. 73 (1898), 708.
*J. Gen. Chem. U.S.S.R. 10 (1940), 1462. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1941), 2878.
Isofenchone
CII 3
O=C C CH 2
CII 2 CH 3
H2 C C C
H CH 3
Occurrence. Isofenchone has not been found in nature.
d-Isofenchone was prepared by Wallach through oxidation of d-iso-

Isolation. l
fenchyl alcohol, while -isofenchone was obtained by Bertram and Helle through
2
oxidation of /-isofenchyl alcohol with chromic acid mixture.

420 KETONES
Useful hydrazone derivatives have been prepared from the active forms although
(3)
both Wallach 80 at an early date and more recently Allen 2l reported f enchone indiffer-
ent to phenylhydrazines, which again serves to emphasize the nonreactivity of the
carbonyi grouping in this compound:
2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 140 22 (sinters at 125)

p-Iodobenzoylhydrazone m. 168- 169 2S
Properties. Fenchone is an oilwith a camphoraceous odor and somewhat

bitter flavor. The ketone is distinguished by its relatively low melting point;
it low temperature. The following properties have been re-
crystallizes at
ported by Fischer,
24
Huckel et al., 25 Wallach, 26>27 Bouchardat and Lafont, 28
von Rechenberg, 29 Zaitzev, 30 Nametkin, 31 Schimmel & Co., 32 Ruzicka, 33 and
34
Kondakov and Lutschinin:
The chemical properties of fenchone indicate that this ketone is relatively

stable and inert, being indifferent to halogen acids, bisulfite, cold permanga-
nate; even prolonged treatment with nitric acid degrades the ketone only
36
partially, according to Gardner and Cockburn, whereas the action of halo-
36
gens, recently studied in detail by Briusova, is best promoted by
catalysts
and often does not lead to uniform products. The sluggishness of the car-
bonyi grouping toward the formation of many derivatives has already been
treated in detail.
Use. Fenchone serves mainly as an odor adjunct in room sprays and bath
preparations of pine character. Small quantities are used also in certain arti-
ficial essential oils.
ôvello, Bull orto. botan. Univ. Napoli 15, II (1941), 61. Chem. Zentr. I (1942), 2072.
Rabak, Ber. Schimmel & Co., April (1912), 24. Chem. Zentr. I (1912), 1715.
2
Liebigs Ann. 353 (1907), 215; 369 (1909), 05.

3
4
Bull. imt. pin [2], No. 58 (1934), 173.
5
Ber. 40 (1907), 4591.
9
Liebigs Ann. 369 (1909), 65.
7
Ibid. 272 (1893), 102.
*
Ibid. 353 (1907), 211.
9
Henderson, Henderson and Heilbron, Ber. 47 (1914), 887.
10
Liebigs Arm. 259 (1890), 327; 263 (1891), 136; 272 (1893), 104; 276 (1893), 317; 315
11
(1901), 278; 362 (1908), 199.

12
Ibid. 498 (1932), 166.
13
14
Ber. 50 (1917), 1374.
15
Ber. 68B (1935), 2001.
Liebigs Ann. 272 (1893),
16
104; 315 (1901), 278.
17
Bull. soc. chim. [5], 4 (1937), 2026, 2035.
18
J. Chem. Soc. 75 (1899), 501.
19
Cazz. chim. ital. 72 (1942), 232. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 4381.
20
Liebigs Ann. 263 (1891), 135.
21
7. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 2955.
22
Brady, /. Chem. Soc. (1931), 756.
23
Sah and Hsu, Rec. trav. chim. 59 (1940), 355.
24
26
*lbid. 263 (1891), 131.
*Ibid. 272 (1893), 103.
28
Compt. rend. 126 (1898), 756.
29
"Einfachc und Fraktionierte Destination," 2d Ed., Miltitz (1923), 251, 291.
30
J. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc, 45 (1913), 1578.
31
Ibid. 47 (1915), 1596. Chem. Zentr. II (1916), 253.
32
33
Ber. 50 (1917), 1374.
34
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 62 (1900), 2.
35
J. Chem. Soc. 73 (1898), 708.
*J. Gen. Chem. U.S.S.R. 10 (1940), 1462. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1941), 2878.
Isofenchone
Mol. Weight 152.23
o=c-
HoC-
H
\CH
3
Occurrence. Isofenchone has not been found in nature.
d-Isofenchone was prepared by Wallach through oxidation of d-iso-

Isolation. l
fenchyl alcohol, while J-isofenchone was obtained by Bertram and Helle through
2
oxidation of /-isofenchyl alcohol with chromic acid mixture.

422 KETONES
Identification. Isofenchone can be characterized directly or reduced to isofenchyl
alcohol to form a number of derivatives as reported by Alder, Stein and Rickert, 3
Komppa and Hasselstrom,
4
Schmidt and Todenhofer, 8 Ruzhentseva and Delek-
torskaya,
6
and Bertram and Helle: 7
Derivative I dl
Semicarbazone m. 221-222 221-222 223-224 *
Oxime m. 82 6 7 -
82 6
133 3
Monobromo m. 56-57 6 56-57 6

4G-47 3
Hydrazone m. 111-112 4
Acetyl Hydrazone m. 193-194

Isofenchyl Alcohol bi 6 89 3
Isofenchyl Phthalate (|3) m. 104-105 3
Isofenchyl Phenylurethane m. 101 3
Quinone m. 49-50 3
m. 69-70 6
Properties.Isofenchone is an oil possessing an odor which resembles that

of camphor. At low temperature isoferichone forms an amorphous solid mass.
Oxidizing a-isofenchol m. 01-62 with bichromate-sulfuric acid mixture and
purifying the optically active isofenchone thus obtained through its semicar-
8
bazone, Schmidt and Todenhofer obtained pure isofenchone which had
these properties:
b. 193-194 o: D -8 20'
d}J 0.949 nj? 1.46191
With the exception of the boiling point which was observed as 200-201
and rotations ranging from absolute values 6 41' to 9 35', the properties
cited above conform to those reported earlier by Nametkin, 9 Wallach and
10 n for the
Vivck, and Bertram and Helle optically active forms.
Use. Isofenchone, as such, is not used in our industries.
Liebigs Ann. 367 (1907), 56.

*
2 J. prakt. Chem. II, 61 (1900), 303.

Liebigs Ann. 625 (1936), 221, 242.
^
Liebigs Ann. 496 (1932), 164.

4
6
Ber. Schimmel &
Co. (1937), 111. Cf. Wallach, Liebigs Ann. 362 (1908), 194, 200.
7
J. prakt. Chem. II, 61 (1900), 303.
*Ber. Schimmel ACo. (1937), 111.
9
J. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 47 (1915), 1598, 1601.
Liebigs Ann. 362 (1908), 195.
10
11
J. prakt. Chem. II, 61 (1900), 303.
Thujone
3-Keto-sabinane
CH 3
Thujone occurs in nature in the form of two diastereoisomers, viz., as laevo-

rotatory "a-thujone" and as dextrorotatory "/8-thujone," the hitter being the
"tanacetone" of Semmler. The behavior of the two isomers indicates that
a- and /3-thujone are not optical enantiomorphs, but stereoisomers of the
same type as menthone and isomenthone. However, due to the pronounced
tendency of a- and /3-thujone to undergo inversion, especially under the in-
fluence of alkalies, it has only been through the comparatively recent work of
Short and Read that stereochemically homogeneous thu Jones have been pre-
l
pared for the first time. These pure isomers were then properly named as
l-thujone and d-isothujonc,* and the natural products a- and 0-thujone were
shown to be mixtures of these above-mentioned diastereoisomers in dynamic
equilibrium.
Occurrence. Thujone occurs in nature quite widely distributed. It forms
the main constituent of several important volatile oils for example, a-thu-
jone in oil of thuja (Thuja occidentalis) and sage (Salvia 0-thu-
ojjlcinalis L.),
jonc in oil of tansy (Tanacetum vulgar e L.), and wormwood (Artemisia absin-
thium L.). Thujone has been identified also in a number of less important
oils.
Isolation. Werner and Bogert 2

reported the ready isolation of the natural a-
thujone from thuja leaf oil of Thuja occidentalis by a single fractionation, whereas
Rose and Livingston 3 succeeded in fractionating this ketone from the leaf oil of the
Washington cedar (Thuja plicata).
Most workers, however, employed chemical methods for this step. Thus, Wallach
and Bocker 4 isolated the a- isomer from a thuja oil fraction b. 200-204 by prepara-
tion of the semicarbazone and decomposition of this derivative with phthalic anhydride.
The j8- isomer of the ketone can be isolated from oils containing a high percentage
of thujone by taking advantage of the fact that it forms with sodium bisulfite a char-
acteristic, sparingly soluble, compound Ci Hi 6 O, NaHSO 3 from which the thujone
can be regenerated by treatment with alkali.
* Not
to be confused with the so-called "isothujone" of Wallach, Liebigs Ann. 286
(1895), 102.
424 KETONES
For the separation of /3-thujone from oil of tansy, Semmler 6 suggested shaking 200
cc. of tansy oil, 200 cc. of saturated sodium bisulfite solution, 75 cc. of water and
300 cc. of alcohol for two weeks. A part of the bisulfite compound will remain liquid
for a long time but may be brought to crystallization when placed in a freezing mixture.
The crystalline mass is then filtered under suction, pressed, washed first with alcohol-
ether, then witli ether and decomposed by the addition of sodium carbonate. Steam
distillation will yield about 47% of the crude oil as /3-thujone. Traces of aldehydes,
where they exist, may be removed by treatment with ammoniacal silver nitrate and
redistillation in steam.
Another similar type of compound is recommended by Giidemeister and Hoffmann
These authors suggested the ammonium bisulfite derivative.
A procedure to prepare this compound is the following:
Mix 200 g. of oil and 300 cc. of alcohol with 200 cc. of concentrated ammonium
bisulfite solution and 75 cc. of water, set aside for two weeks, and shake frequently.
Decompose the precipitated crystalline mass with soda solution and remove the
regenerated thujone by steam distillation.
In cases where the amount of thujone may be small, even as little as 5 mg., recourse
should be had to the method generally in use for absinthe- type liqueurs, viz., the semi-
carbazide reaction which has been critically assayed by Wilson. 7
Identification. Since it has been only recently shown that a- and jS-thujone, as
prepared by the methods used in the past, are, in truth, mixtures of l-thujone and
d-isothujone the purity of the derivatives prepared at that time may also be question-
able. In case of any doubt, the following compounds should be considered:
(1) Both a- and /3-thujone can be characterized by the preparation of their tri-
bromide CioHi 3 OBr 3 .
As Wallach 8 suggested: Dissolve in a large beaker 5 g. of thujone in 30 cc. of petro-

leum ether and add at once 5 cc. of bromine. After a few seconds a quite violent
reaction will take place, accompanied by the development of much hydrogen bromide.
After completion of the reaction, and as the solvent vaporizes, the tri bromide will
gradually precipitate in the form of a crystalline mass. Free the crystals from adhering
oil by washing with cold alcohol, and recrystallize from hot acetic ether. The pure
tribromide crystals melt at 12l-122 (cf. Werner and Bogert 9).
On treatment with sodium ethylate or sodium methylate, this tribromide yields an
ethyl ether CioHnBr(OH)(OC 2 H5), m. 144-145, and a methyl ether Ci n Br(OH) H
(OCRs), m. 156-157.
(2) Both a- and /3-thujone may also be characterized and distinguished by the
10
preparation of their semicarbazones, according to Wallach.
a-Thujone (J-thujone) yields both a crystalline semicarbazone m. 18G-188 (usually
m. 184.5-186, if not absolutely pure), []D 4-59 30', and an amorphous semi-
carbazone m. 100-110, the amorphous product also being dextrorotatory.
jS-Thujone (d-isothujone) yields a dimorphic semicarbazone crystallizing in hexagons
m. 174-175, and rhombohedras m. 170-172, the latter being the more stable form
of the two modifications. [a]g +215 46' to [a]g +221 28'.
The method for the preparation of this derivative from mixtures and the optical
properties of the derived semicarbazone of /3- thujone by petrographic methods have
been studied by Wilson and Keenan u who found these constants useful for character-
ization of the ketone.
The variations in properties noted above suggest mixtures, but they have been
included to show that derivatives of reliable melting point may nevertheless be iso-
lated from a mixture of the natural products, viz., the a- and /3-thujones, with patience
in recrystallization. Moreover, the melting point and specific rotation of the semi-
carbazones of the optically pure l-thujone and d-isothujone are described by Short and
Read 12 who found them to be quite similar, as regards melting point, to those ob-
tained by Wallach. 13
Pure l-Thujone Pure d-Isothujone

m. 186M88 m. 172
[a]}? +42 0' (c = 1 in methyl alcohol)

5
[a]J> +222 0' (c = 1 in methyl alcohol)
(3) By oxidation (see below).

(4) Macbeth and Price, 14
Several hydrazones have been prepared, according to
Strain, Werner and Bogert, Short and Read, and Ruzicka and Koolhaas, although
16 16 17 18
the form of the parent substances is not always disclosed :
16
Derived from in. Mi?
2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone
2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone 106M07.5 015
Distilled a-thujone 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone 106-107 16
Optically pure J-thujone 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone H70 17
-f-44 0' (c = 1
17
in chloroform)
Optically pure 2,4-diiiitrophenylhydrazone 110 17

+ 1610'(c = 1
17
d-isothujorie in chloroform)
Syn. thujone
/3- 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone
Natural 0-thujonc 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone
Syn. /3-thujone p-nitrophenylhydrazone 148M50 "
Natural /3-thujone p-nitrophenylhydrazone 148-150 18
3-nitrobenzohydrazonc 156 -l 56.3"
compounds may be regenerated from the

19
Strain reports that the original carbonyl
hydrazones by treatment with dicarbonyls, such as methyl glyoxal and diacetyl in
water, or with aqueous acids or glacial acetic acid.
Properties. Thujone is a colorless, mobile oil possessing a characteristic

odor.
The following properties have been reported for the thujones:
20
a-Thujone from Thuja oil, regenerated by Wallach and Bocker from the
semicarbazone with phthalic anhydride:
b. 200-201 WD - 10 14'
d 0.912 nf? 1.4503
An optical rotation ao 10 23' was observed by Paolini 21

who decomposed
the semicarbazone of a-thujone with phthalic anhydride and isolated the re-
generated thujone by steam distillation. When heating the mixture of semi-
426 KETONES
carbazone and phthalic anhydride on a steam bath for a half hour, Paolini
obtained d-a-thujone D +10 23', inversion having taken place.
Werner and Bogert, 22 Rose and Livingston, 23 Godchot, 24 and Short and
Read 25 report constants slightly different from the above. However, these
workers relied upon fractionation in the preparation of their distillates, the
properties of which follow:

5
b. 198-203 22
aj> -133' 25
199-201 24
[]f? -1135' 23
23 22
b 40 103-104 ng 1.4521
25 23
b8 72-74 nL 1.4530
23 24
d 20 0.9152 n{J 1.4546
24 26
dis 0.9190 1.4590
produced on a large scale by Schimmel & Co.,

26
ft-Thujone, and boiling
in the same range as the a- isomer had these properties:
d!I 0.9209-0.9217
aD +08 16' to +70 58'
ng> 1.44962-1.45422
Sol. Soluble in about 10 vol. of 60%

alcohol, and 2.5 to 3 vol. of
70% alcohol
For /3-thujone regenerated from the semicarbazone, a rotation of []D

+76 10' was found.
The work of Short and Read, 27 however, has shown that both the a- and
/?-thujones, whether natural isolates or chemically derived as in the past, are
but mixtures of two stereoisomers in dynamic equilibrium:
Z-thujone ( D -19 54') => d-isothujone (a D +72 30')
35% <- Dynamic Equilibrium ->

65%
OD +40 0'
These workers have prepared optically homogeneous thu Jones for the first
time by the chromic acid oxidation of thujyl alcohols. For these pure prod-
ucts, /-thu j one and d-isothujone, they reported:
l-Thujone d-Isothujone
b, 74.5 bio 76
df 0.9109 df 0.9135
-19 56' +72 28'
44.77 Obs. 44.72

[RLlD jObs. , ..
t1
ICalc. 44.11 Calc. 44.11
rig 1.4490 1.4500
2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone :
2,4-Dinitrophcnylhydrazone :
m. 117 in. 116
[a]}? +44 0' (c = 1 in chloroform) [a] J? + 161 0' (c =1 in chloroform)
Semicarbazone: Semicarbazone:
m. 18G-188 m. 172
+42 0' (c = 1 in methyl +222 0' (c - 1 in methyl

alcohol) alcohol)
Thujone shows a somewhat high molecular exaltation (+0.66). Chugaev

and Chesno, 28 studying the rotatory characteristics of essential oils and their
constituents, observed a very high dispersion coefficient for /3-thujone (2.05)
and suggested the use of this constant in characterizing the ketone.
Although a saturated ketone, thujone is easily oxidized with potassium
permanganate to a- and /3-thujaketonic acids.
The prefixes a- and (3- in connection with the acids, however, do not neces-
sarily refer to products derivable only from a- and 0-thujones; in fact, both
acids may be derived from either ketone. Tiemann and Semmler 29 showed
CH3 CH 3
C=0
COOH COOH
Heating
a- or /3- a-Thujaketonic acid /8-Thu jake tonic acid

Thujone (saturated) (unsaturated)
Optically active Optically inactive
that at low temperature and with dilute potassium permanganate solution,

only a-thujaketonic acid m. 75-76 is formed and almost quantitatively.
(In this connection, consult the work of Thomson,
30
Werner and Bogert, 31
428 KETONES
Ruzicka and Koolhaas. 32 ) This saturated a-thujaketonic acid CioHieOa
forms a semicarbazone m. 183-184 (m. 198.5 according to Seyler 33 ), and
an oxime m. 174-175 according to Thomson. 34 On heating or on distilling
in vacuo, the a-thujaketonic acid is isomerized to the unsaturated /3-thujake-
tonic acid m. 78-79.
Oxidation with sodium hypobromite yields a stable dicarboxylic acid (viz.,
a-thujadicarboxylic acid m. 141-142 which forms an anhydride m. 55-56),
and 0-thujadicarboxylic acid m. 116-117.
Aside from oxidation, other reactions, too, prove the instability of the cy-
35
clopropane ring in thujone. Thus, Semmler showed that when heated to
200 under pressure, thujone is isomerized to carvotanacetone Ci Hi 6 0.
This reaction takes place even on prolonged boiling, as may be concluded
from the lowering of the rotatory power. This property of cyclopropane
36
ring stability is useful according to Wallach and Thomson 37 in differential
analysis of terpenes similarly constituted.
To halogen acids, thujone is stable, at least in the cold and in ethereal
solution. Aqueous hydrochloric acid and other mineral acids isomerize thu-
38
jone to the so-called "isothujone," of Wallach (b. 230-231, d 0.9285,
n?" 1.48227) with formation of some p-cymene.

Use. Thujone isused primarily in the compounding of synthetic (artifi-
cial) essential oils, such as sage, wormwood, etc.

1
J. Chem. Soc. (1938), 2016.
2
/. Org. Chem. 3 (1939), 578.
3
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 34 (1912), 201.
*
Liebigs Ann. 336 (1904), 203.
6
Ber. 26 (1892), 3343. See also Schimmel Report, April (1898). Deusson and Ziem, J.
prakt. Chem. 90 (1914), 318.
6
7
,7. Assocn. Off. Agr. Chem. 19 (1936), 120; 20 (1937), 151.
*
Liebigs Ann. 276 (1893), 179; 286 (1895), 109.
9
J. Org. Chem. 3 (1939), 578.
"Liebigs Ann. 336 (1904), 254, 270.
11
J. Assocn. Off. Agr. Chem. 13 (1930), 396.
12
/. Chem. Soc. (1938), 2016.
13
Liebigs Ann. 336 (1904), 261.
14
J. Chem. Soc. (1935), 151.
16
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1935), 758.
18
J. Org. Chem. 3 (1939), 578.
17
J. Chem. Soc. (1938), 2016.
18
Helv. Chim. Ada 16 (1932), 948.
19
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1935), 758.
20
Liebigs Ann. 336 (1904), 258, 264.
21
22
J. Org. Chem. 3 (1939), 582.
23
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 34 (1912), 201.
24
Compt. rend. 168 (1914), 1807.
25
/. Chem. Soc. (1938), 2016.
26
Gildeme ster and Hoffmann, "Die Xtherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 578.
:
27
/. Chem. Soc. (1938), 2016.
28
Trans. Sci. Chem. Pharm. Inst. (Moscow), No. 19 (1928), 181. Chem. Abstracts 24 (1930),
5933.
29
Ber. 30 (1897), 431. See also Semmler, Ber. 25 (1892), 3347. Wallach, Liebigs Ann.
272 (1893), 111.
30
/. Chem. Soc. 97 (1910), 1502.
31
J. Org. Chem. 3 (1939), 578.
38
Helv. Chim. Ada 15 (1932), 944.
33
Ber. 36 (1902), 552. See also Simonsen, Indian Forest Records 9 (1922), 293.
84
/. Chem. Soc. 97 (1910), 1511.
36
Ber. 27 (1894), 895.
36
Liebigs Ann. 360 (1908), 86.
37
J. Chem. Soc. 97 (1910), 1502.
**
Liebigs Ann. 286 (1895), 102.
Yasuji Fujita, "Dehydrogenation of Thujone with Chloranil," J. Chem. Soc. Japan

63 (1942), 1441. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 3175.
M. S. Muthanna and P. C. (Dept. of Pure & Applied Chemistry, Indian Inst.
Guha
of Sci., Bangalore), "Total Synthesis of Thujone," Science and Culture 11 (1945), 103.
Camphor
Mol. Weight 152.23
HaC C
H
True camphor, also called Japan or China camphor, is a bicyclic ketone
and must not be confused with the so-called "Borneo camphor," the latter
being borneol; nor with "artificial camphor," which is an old term for ter-
pene hydrochloride. For many years Formosa, Japan, and the adjacent
coast of China held a world monopoly in the production of natural camphor
but, due to a successful commercial synthesis and important technical de-
mands, this ketone is today manufactured on a large scale. Space does not
permit reviewing the many patents covering this field. Suffice it to mention
only that most technical processes presently employed start from pinene (tur-
pentine oil).
The
principal reactions followed in this synthesis involve rearrangements
under acidic influence as illustrated in the diagram on p. 430. Reviews of
these processes have been given by Pond, 1 and more recently by Mayor. 2
Occurrence. Natural camphor, although produced in very large quantities
from camphor oil (camphor tree), is not widely distributed in other volatile
oils.
a
CO
8
Offi
w
U
a
o
a a
a
a , i
a
o
w
Wr-> r S
vî
O
^
a a
o-
o fication
o
\/ a a Sa
a
d-Camphor, by far the most important modification, occurs in the wood

and leaves of the camphor tree, Cinnamomum camphora (Linne") Nees et
Ebermaier (fam. Lauraccae), which grows wild and profusely in the moist,
subtropical and tropical parts of Formosa, Japan, and southeastern China.
The tree has been cultivated, but on an insignificant scale, also in other parts
of the world, where suitable conditions of climate, soil, and altitude prevail.
d-Camphor occurs also, but in much smaller proportions, in oils of sassafras,
rosemary, spike lavender, Reunion basil, Ocimum canum, Dalmatian sage, etc.
l-Camphor has been found in oils of Salvia triloba, Blwnca balsamifcra, tansy,
3
by Sokolova to the extent of 60-70 per cent in Artemisia Austrachanica, in
amounts of nearly 50 per cent in Lippa adoensis from French West Africa by
4
Laffitte and Rabate*, appreciable percentages in Lavandula pcdunculata by
5
Gattefosse* and Igolen, and in a few other oils.
dl-Camphor occurs in oil of Chrysanthemum sincnse var. japonicum. It has

6
also been identified by Morani in oil of sage.
Camphor has furthermore been observed in a number of other volatile

oils in calamus oil and Seychelles cinnamon oil for example and recently
according to an anonymous authority in an African Ocimum kilimandschari-
7
cum oil of 77 per cent camphor content, but the literature docs not specify
which optical modification this camphor represents.
Isolation. If an oilcontains a large percentage of camphor, the latter may be sepa-

rated quite easily by mere cooling or freezing. Otherwise, the oil must be fractionated
and the camphor-containing fraction cooled. However, this technique should not be
recommended, as shown some time ago by Simonsen and Ghose, in cases where the
8
determination of yield is important as too much camphor remains dissolved in the

rejected oily distillates. The raw camphor can readily be purified by sublimation.
This is also done technically on a large scale.
Extraction or precipitation by means of acidic solvents has been successful in a
qualitative way as this ketone apparently forms complexes that facilitate this reaction,
even in essential oils. As a typical instance, Konovalov 9 successfully isolated the
camphor from oil of basil by fractional distillation and extraction by 80% sulfuric
acid, whereas "Montecatini" patents 10 register the use of the acetic acid complex
which, upon dilution, precipitates camphor.
Identification. Camphor may be characterized by a number of functional deriva-
tives. Although many have been prepared for the dextrorotatory isomer and are
useful for its identification they are not of particular value for the purpose of discrimina-
tion between the stereo forms. The active and racemic isomers too often possess
very similar characteristics; hence only a few derivatives are important in the case of
camphor. However, in recent years a restricted number of derived chemicals have
been obtained, with distinctly different melting points among the stereo forms, that
are of value for purposes of identification. Derivatives studied by Wheeler and
Patterson, Blackwood and Stewart,
12 13 14
Park,
11
Borsche and Merkwitz, Morani,
Brady,
15 16
Taipale and Gutner, Little, M'Lean and Wilson,
17
Woodward, Kolman and
Harris, Sah and Hsu, 19 Nametkin, 20 Kishner, 21 Bredt and Perkin, 22 Langlois, 23 Beck-
18
27
mann, Tiemann, Wheeler and Walker, and Janot and Mouton, are tabulated in
24 26 28
the following table of melting points and specific rotation, emphasis being placed upon
the complex semicarbazones:
432 KETONES
An important derivative is the 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone which has come to be

recognized as a means of identification and as a quantitative determinative agent.
The pure ketone cannot be reconverted from the oxime.
For the identification of camphor in the presence of borneol, Haller 28 suggested
that the mixture be heated with succinic or phthalic anhydride and alkalized, whereby
the acid ester of borneol goes into solution. The camphor can then be extracted with
ether from the alkaline solution. It is also possible to convert the borneol into high
boiling esters, such as the succinate or the stearate, and to remove the camphor by
steam distillation. As a third alternative, the camphor may be converted into its
oxime and the latter dissolved in dilute sulfuric acid. The borneol may be removed
by extraction with ether. In this case, however, the ethereal solution should in turn
be shaken rapidly with dilute sulfuric acid as the ether dissolves also some of the oxime.
In order to distinguish natural camphor from synthetic camphor, Bohrisch 29
recommended the following reaction:
On careful heating to 30, with a freshly prepared vanillin-hydrochloric acid solution
(1 to 100), natural camphor develops a yellow, at 60 a blue-green, and at 75 to 80
an indigo-blue, color. The
latter persists for several hours, even after cooling. By
the same treatment, synthetic camphor gives a yellow color. After repeated recrystal-
lization, the natural camphor no longer shows this reaction which permits the con-
clusion that the color reaction is caused by slight contamination of the camphor with
constituents of camphor oil.
Properties. Camphor is a granular-crystalline, colorless, transparent mass.

It crystallizes in thin plates and easily sublimes, even at room temperature.
30
Bridgman's researches show camphor as one of the most complex poly-
morphic systems among all organic compounds, at least three of its forms
existing at atmospheric pressures.
The continuous use of this ketone in the research laboratory as well as its
industrial importance no doubt account for the fact that its physical con-
stants have been redetermined many times. Certain points should be noted
in connection with the physical properties. First, great similarity exists be-
tween certain of the characteristics for the active and racemic camphors per se
and for their solutions, as melting point, boiling point, density, retroactive
index and viscosity (Singh et al. 31 and Plein and Poe 32 ). On the other hand
the optical properties depend upon media, concentration, and temperature.
Particular attention should be given to uniform conditions in determining
the rotation. Alcohol is the solvent most frequently employed and its use
has lead to the development of empirical equations allowing of correction
factors in terms of the variables of temperature, camphor concentration, and
33
alcohol proof; the formulas of Schoorl are typical of those used in such
cases:
7Q%
90%
alcoh()1
alcohol
^
[] D
=
=
33 8Q
37.05
+
+
Q 2c
0.145c
+ Q 09f
+ 0.09t
Moreover the research worker will discover a helpful tabular summary of the
many on camphors in several media in

figures obtained for optical rotation
Beilstein's "Handbuch der Organischen Chemie," Vol. VII E I, 78. In ad-
dition there are certain relevant contributions in the literature that should
not be overlooked (Owen, 34 Plein and Poe, 35 and Beckmann and Cohen 36 ).
The following properties have been reported by Duncan, 37 Klemm, Tilk,
38
and v. Mullenheim, David and Novak, 39 Lenz, 40 Foerster,
41
Landolt,
42
Muncke, 48 Beckmann, Haller, Chautard,

44 45 46
Faucon,
47
Crane and Joyce, 48
LeFevre and Tideman, 49 and de Wilde: 50
d I dl
48 50
m. 179.4-i79.5 -
(coir.)
40 41 47 49 45 45
178.7-178.8 ' ' '
178.6 (corr.) 178.8 (corr.)
(corr.)
50 46
b. 207 204
38
d? 0.9920
39
d 20 0.9940-0.99GO
37 46
difi.6 0.9960 dig 0.9853
43
dj 0.9998
43
dg 1.0000
[a]|? (Ale.) -1-43 40' 42
(p
= 15.09) -44 13' 44
(P
= 20)
+44 13' 44
(p
= 20)
434 KETONES
Camphor readily soluble in organic solvents, in water at room tempera-
is
ture 1:598, and more sparingly soluble in warm water than in cold water,
according to Leo and Rimbach.
51
Camphor does not combine with bisulfite.

With potassium hydroxide in alcoholic solution, or more readily with metal-
lic sodium in a neutral solvent, camphor is reduced to the stereoisomeric
52
secondary alcohols, viz., borneol and isoborneol, according to Berthelot,
and Baubigny. 53
Vavon and Peignier 54 found that, in the presence of platinum black, cam-
phor can be hydrogenated at room temperature, the main product being iso-
borneol together with very little borneol. Prolonged hydrogenation yields
camphane.
As a saturated camphor is quite resistant to the action of
bicyclic ketone,
oxidizing agents. Chromic acid attacks camphor only very slowly but, on
56
prolonged heating, Kachler obtained a mixture of mainly camphoronic acid
and isocamphoronic acid.
Potassium permanganate in neutral solution does not attack camphor but,
56
according to Grosser, in alkaline solution yields camphoric acid.
57
Vene recently prepared the quinone in 95 per cent yields by the action
of selenium oxide in acetic anhydride on camphor.
Use. used very widely in countless medicinal preparations as
Camphor is
a local anesthetic and remedy for rheumatic conditions, muscular strains,

and similar inflammation. Internally it serves as a circulatory stimulant
and as a calmative.
1
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 26 (1907), 383.
2
3
Plasticheskie Massui No. 5 (1934), 26. Chem. Abstracts 29 (1935), 3112.
*
Compt. rend. 214 (1942), 885. Chem. Abstracts 38 (1944), 3777.
5
6
Gazz. chim. 68 (1928), 404.
ital.
7
Bull. Imp. Inst. 39 (1941), 217. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 615.
8
/. Soc. Chem. hid. 39 (1920), 296T.
Farmatsiya Farmakol. No. 6 (1938), 8. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 6764.
9
10
Soc. gen. per I' Industrie mineraria ed agricola. French Patent No. 808,057, Jan. 28;
British Patent No. 474,097, Oct. 26; U. S. Patent No. 2,093,100, Sept. 14, 1937.
11
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1929), 3079.
Ber. 37 (1904), 3182.
" Gazz. chim. ital. 68 (1928), 404.
14
J. Chem. Soc. (1933), 93.
Ibid. (1931), 756.
w Ber. 63B (1930), 243.
/. Chem. Soc. (1940), 336.
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 120.
w Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 349.
20
a Ibid. 43 (1911), 588.
22
J. Chem. Soc. 103 (1913), 2189.
23
Ann. chim. [9], 12 (1919), 335.
"Liebiga Ann. 250 (1889), 355.

25
Ber. 28 (1895), 2191.
26
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 47 (1925), 2792.
27
J. pharm. chirn. 23 (1936), 547.
28
CompL rend. 108 (1889), 1308.
29
P/tarrn. Zentralhalle 48 (1907), 527, 777; 66 (1914), 1003.
30
Proc. Am. Acad. Arts Sci. 72 (1938), 227.
31
Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 6A (1937), 484.
32
hid. Eng. Chem. Anal. Ed. 16 (1944), 168.
33
Pharm. Weekblad 64 (1927), 338.
34
Trans. Faraday Soc. 26 (1930), 423.
35
J. Phys. Chem. 38 (1934), 883. J. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 32 (1943), 89.
36
J. Chem. Phys. 4 (1936), 784.
37
Pharm. J. 119 (1927), 694.
38
Z. anorg. allgem. Chem. 176 (1928), 10.
39
Magyar Gyogyszeresztud Tdrsasdg Ertesitoje 15 (1939), 344. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939),
7485.
"Arch. Pharm. 249 (1911), 289.
Ber. 23 (1890), 2982.
Ltefoflrs 4nn. 189 (1877), 333.
Berzelius Jahresber. 27 (1828), 453. Cf. Bcilstein, VII (1925), 103.
"Liebigs Ann. 250 (1889), 352.
Co/npl. rend. 103 (1886), 66; 105 (1887), 68.
46
Jahresber. Fortschritte Chem. (1863), 555.
Compt. rend. 164 (1912), 652.
*7
*8
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 26 (1907), 386.
/. C/iem. Sor. (1931), 1730.
50
51
Biochcm. Z. 95 (1919), 306. See also J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 38 (1919), 738A.
M Liebigs Ann. 110 (1859), 368.
" CompL mid. 63 (1866), 221.
"Ibid. 181 (1925), 184.
13 (1880), 487.
.
14 (1881), 2507.
.
67
CompL rend. 216 (1943), 772. Chem. Abstracts 38 (1944), 4576.
Tlouben and E. Pfankuch, "Camphor and Terpenes. Conversion of ^-Camphor

J.
into /-Camphor (Preliminary Communication)/' Ber. 64B (1931), 2719. Chem. Ab-
stracts 26 (1932), 1272.
Karl Meyer, "Der Kampfer," Pharm. Ztg. 81 (1936), 1180; 82 (1937), 73, 191.
(Reviews.)
Seiichi Yamada, "Camphor, Borneol, and Allied Substances," Bull. Chem. Soc.
Japan 16 Chem.
(1941), 336. Abstracts 41 (1947), 4474.
Ken Wakatsuki, "The Estimation of Camphor. The Oxime Method," /. Chem. Soc.
Japan 63 (1942), 559. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 3257.
Eric D. Robinson and S. C. Werch, "The Determination of Camphor in Solution
with Phenol in a High Percentage of Light Mineral Oil," /. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 36,
No. 9 (1947), 264.
436 KETONES
Camphenilone
Mol. Weight 138.20
H
H C- 2 C=0
CH*
xCHa
H
Occurrence. Camphenilone does not occur in nature. However, it has been

2
identified by several authors (Henderson and Sutherland,
1
Konovalov,
Aschan, Kumagae, and Cosciug ) among the oxidation products of cam-
3 4 6
6
phene; and synthesis has been reported by Komppa and Komppa.
Identification. This terpenic ketone be characterized by several well-defined

may
derivatives of its stereoisomeric forms. These data by Snitter, 7 Hiickel et al., 8
Lipp,
9 10
-
Nametkin and Chuchrikova, 11 Nametkin, Grekova and Chuchrikova, 12
Wagner, Harries and Palmen, Komppa and Hintikka, Henderson and Suther-
13 14 15
" are summarized in the following tables:

land, and Nametkin and Alexandroff
16
Derivatives d dl
Semi- 222-224< m. 223-225 12

223-224
9 7 ' 10 ' 14 - 15 ' 17
carbazone (corr.) (corr.)
10
m. 223 224-225
8
[alU +263 0' (in chloroform)
2 compounds
Oxime m. 115-118 8
m. 123 8
m. 105-107 13 16 -
WD + 1730' 8
Mfj + 1600' 8
bM 128-12y 13
(in ben- (in ben-

zene) z(me)
Hydrazone m. 27-28 8 m. 29-3l 011

bs 103-103.5 8 b 753 236-238
[]?? +223 24' 8
(in alcohol) bn 119-120 011
Azine m. 142-143 8
in. 148.5 u
8
[]i? +304 0' (in benzene)
Properties. Camphenilone possesses a typical camphoraceous odor. It

has been prepared in the dextro, laevo, and racemic form and no doubt the
variations noted in the physicochemical properties recorded by a number of
authors (Nametkin, Grekova and Chuchrikova, 18 Langlois, 19 Aschan, 20
Lipp,
21 - 22
Snitter,
23
Hiickel et al., 24 Nametkin and Chuchrikova, 25 Komppa
and Hintikka, 26 Henderson and Sutherland, 27 Bredt and Pinten, 28 and Heil-
bron and Bunbury 29 ) may be accounted for by the purity of the starting
materials.
PROPERTIES
Isomeric Forms
d dl
24
193
b. 190 19
192 "
20
b. 191-192 192-194
b?GO
76-77 2l
o 28
bis
75-76 20
24
78
bio 7502,
m. 36 19
37-38.5 21 23
37
39-40 18
35-36 26
20 26
41-41.25 36
38-39 24
38-39 (corr.)
22
27
40
29
0.9705
23
0.980
WD +70 24' (in alcohol) 24
WD +49 10' (c = 6.6 in al-
cohol)
n
MS- 5 +66 42' (in benzene) 24
MS -6113'(c = 10 in ben-
21
zene)
Mg -58 39' 28
23
nf? 1.469
Camphenilone is most resistant to oxidizing agents but, on digestion with

dilute nitric acid, it yields isocamphoronic acid.
With sodium and camphenilone can be reduced to its correspond-
alcohol,
ing secondary alcohol, viz., camphenilol m. 91.5-92, b 7 4 192, bn 88.5-
89. This alcohol may be characterized by its phenylurethane m. 100-102
30
according to Jagelki, and 99.5 (Komppa ).
81
Use. Camphenilone is not used in our industries.

i/. Chem. Soc. 99 (1911), 1547.
2
/. Rwss. Phys. Chem. Soc. II, 34 (1902), 43. See Chem. Zentr. I (1902), 1271, 1296.
3
Liebigs Ann. 376 (1910), 352; 383 (1911), 49. Chem. Zentr. I (1912), 415.
4
5
Ann. sci. univ. Jassy, Sect. I, 27 (1941), 303. Chem. Zentr. I (1943), 150.
Ber. 69B (1936), 2606.
438 KETONES
1
Butt. inst. pin 46 (1933), 205.
[2],
8
9
Ibid. 399 (1913), 250.
10
Ibid. 402 (1914), 360.
11
/. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 47 (1915), 427. Liebigs Ann. 438 (1924), 193.
12
18
Ibid. 28 (1896), 64, 76; 29 (1897), 124. Cf. Simonsen, "The Terpenes," Vol. II (1932)
301, 304.
14
Ber. 43 (1910), 1434.
16
Ber. 47 (1914), 1551.
16
J. Chem. Soc. 99 (1911), 1547.
LieUg* Ann. 467 (1928), 198.
17
18
19
Ann. chim. phys. [9], 12 (1919), 271, 337.
20
Liebigs Ann. 410 (1915), 233.
81
Ibid. 399 (1913), 250.
Liebigs Ann. 382 (1911), 290, 294, 297.
22
25
Bull. inst. pin 46 (1933), 205.
[2],

24
26
J. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 47 (1915), 427. Liebigs Ann. 438 (1924), 193.
26
Ber. 47 (1914), 1551.
27
/. Chem. Soc. 99 (1911), 1547.
28
/. prakt. Chem. 119 (1928), 81.
29
"Dictionary of Organic Compounds," Vol. I (1943), 381.
30
Ber. 32 (1899), 1503.
Liebigs Ann. 366 (1909), 74.
81
Santenone
(TT-Norcamphor)
C9H HO Mol. Weight 138.20
CHj
C C=O
I^C-C-H
HC 2 C CH 2
H
Semmler and Bartelt *
prepared this bicyclic ketone synthetically and
named it
ir-norcamphor. The structural formula suggested by these authors
was later confirmed by Enkvist. 2
Occurrence. Schimmel & Co. 3 identified Z-santenone in East Indian san-
dalwood oil.
Isolation. The fraction b 6 . & 65-80 (b. 180-200) of East Indian sandalwood oil
istreated with semicarbazide and the santenone regenerated through boiling of the
semi car bazone with dilute sulfuric acid.
taking advantage of the difference in solubility of the semicarbazones in alcohol
By
and water, Aschan 4 was able to separate certain stereoisomers of this ketone which
he characterized as "a" and "/9" * santenones.
*
Authors are not always consistent in describing the same santenone and its derivatives
as "a" and "0." The nomenclature of Aschan has been maintained in this monograph.
m. C. Set. in Ak. Sol in Water

a-Santenone semicarbazone 235-236 0.6 2.5
/3-Santenone semicarbazone 221-222 7.1 1.5
This author likewise recommended decomposition of the semicarbazones with oxalic

9
acid as a means of obtaining pure "a' and "0" santenones.
Identification. The isomeric "a" and "|8" santenones designated according to the
nomenclature of Aschan have been found by several workers to yield semicarbazones
melting at 235-236 and 222-224, respectively (cf. Schimmel & Co.,* Rimini,'
Komppa and Nyman, and Ishidate and Sano 8).
7
These stereoisomers yielding semicarbazones m. 235-23G and 222-224, upon

alkaline oxidation with potassium permanganate, form santenic acids melting respec-
tively at 150-1 51 and 170-171 (cf. Ishidate and Sano, Komppa and Nyman,
9 10
12
Aschan, and Enkvist ). Both these cis- acids have been found to isomerize to the
11
trans- forms m. 166-167 and 129-130. Anhydrides derived from these cis- trans-
forms melted at 93-94 and 113-1H.
Properties. Schimmel & Co. 13 reported for the /-santenone isolated from
East Indian sandal wood oil:
m. 58-61 HD -4 24' (in alcohol)
b. 193-195 Semicarbazone m. 222-224

14
Ishidate and Sanorecently prepared a relatively pure product which
they have described as having the "d-tis-a configuration"; it had these
properties:
m. 56-59
Hi? +11 24'
Semicarbazone m. 235-236
15
The purified "a" and "0" stereoisomers isolated by Aschan from crude
santenone were characterized as follows:
a-Santenone 0-Santenone
m. 55-56 m. 46
b 767 191 b. 189.5-190.5
Semicarbazone m. 236 Semicarbazone m. 221-222
Oxime m. 74 Oxime m. 50-51
Use. Santenone has not found any practical use in our industries.
i
Ber. 40 (1907), 4467.
J. prakt. Chem. N.F. 137 (1933), 261.
3
Ber. Schimmel &Co., Oct. (1910), 98.
*Svensk Kern. Tid. 46 (1933), 216.
6
6
Gazz. chim. ital. 43, II (1913), 525.
7
Ann. Acad. Sci. Fennicae A46, No. 1 (1935). Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 6644.
Ber. 74B (1941). 1189.
Ibid.
440 KETONES
Ann. Acad. Sci. Fennicae A46, No. 1 (1935). Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 6644.
11
Svensk Kern. Tid. 45 (1933), 209.
12
Finska Kemistsamfundets Medd. 41 (1932), 74. Chem. Abstracts 27 (1933), 715.
13
"Ber. 74B (1941), 1189.
/Cem. Tid. 45 (1933), 209.
Umbellulone
CH 3
Occurrence. The oil distilledfrom the leaves of the California laurel tree
Umbellularia californica Nuttall contains from 30-40 per cent of this unsatu-
rated bicyclic ketone.
Isolation. Umbellulone can be isolated by preparing the compound which it

(1)
forms with sodium sulfite in neutral solution, and by regenerating the ketone through
the action of alkali, according to Wienhaus and Todenhofer. 1
(2) By fractional distillation of California laurel oil, separating the fraction b.
215-216 or bio 92-94. contends that this procedure yields an impure
Tutin 2
product which requires further treatment.

The ketone may be purified by the preparation of the semicarbazido-semicarbazone
(see below) from which the carbonyl compound can be regenerated by hydrolysis with
mineral acids.
Identification. (1) With semicarbazide acetate, Umbellulone yields a semicarbazido-
semicarbazone m. 217 (with decomposition). For its preparation, Power and Lees 3
suggested removing first the eugenol, by shaking the fraction b. 217-222 of California
laurel oil with potassium hydroxide solution. The fraction will then consist mainly of
umbellulone. Mix a concentrated aqueous solution of 40 g. of semicarbazide hydro-
chloride and 50 g. of sodium acetate with 20 g. of the above-mentioned fraction and
add methyl alcohol until the solution becomes clear. After standing for three days and
after the addition of water, the semicarbazido-semicarbazone of the umbellulone will
precipitate in the form of a white crystalline mass. Recrystallization from alcohol
yields a semicarbazido-semicarbazone in. 216-217. Regenerate the umbellulone by
the addition of a sufficient quantity of dilute sulfuric acid and distill with steam.
Extract the umbellulone from the distillate by shaking with ether.
(2) The normal monosemicarbazone m. 240-243 was prepared by Semmler. 4
Umbellulone can also be characterized by oxidation to umbellularic acid (1-iso-
(3)
propyl-l,2-cyclopropanedicarboxylic acid). When oxidized with potassium perman-
ganate, umbellulone yields, according to Lees and Tutin, mainly a ketonic acid, viz.,
6
umbellulonic acid (2-acetyl-l-isopropylcyclopropanecarboxylic acid) C 9 Hi 4 03, m. 102,

b 60 193-195, which can be identified by its oxime m. 169-170. On distillation at
atmospheric pressure, umbellulonic acid readily loses water and yields an unsaturated
H
lactone C 9 12 O 2 bi 6 99-100, dig 1.0197, [a] D -210 35'. Oxidation of this lactone
,
with potassium permanganate gives a saturated dibasic acid, viz., umbellularic acid
C 8 Hi 2 4 m. 120-121, [a] D -89 42' (in chloroform). This active acid has been
,
shown by Rydon 7 to be identical with a synthetic J-a's-l-isopropylcyclopropane-l,2-

dicarboxylic acid.
Properties. Umbellulone is a colorless

possessing a peculiar mint-like
oil
and extremely pungent odor, irritating to the mucous membranes. This ke-
tone also has decided pharmacological action, according to Drake and Stuhr. 8
Wienhaus and Todenhofer 9 found the following properties for umbellulone
purified through its sodium sulfite compound:
b5 85 aD -38
d 20 0.949 nL 1.48315
di5 0.953
10
Gillam and West reported for umbellulone regenerated from its mono-
scmicarbazone with steam and phthalic anhydride:
1) 3 69 [a]i> -36 0' (c = 1 in ale.)
d 0.950 ii? 1.4846
while umbellulone regenerated from its semicarbazido-semicarbazone had

these properties:
b3 72 u -37 0'
dJt 0.9518 nf? 1.4847
Umbellulone shows a very pronounced molecular exaltation (+1.4), due

to the conjugation of the ethenoid linkage and the cyclopropane ring.
Use. Umbellulone, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Ber. Schimmel & Co. Jubildums Ausgabe (1929), 286.
2
/. Chem. Soc. 93 (1908), 256.
3
Ibid. 85 (1904), 635. Sec also Gillam and West, ibul. (1945), 95.
4
Ber. 40 (1907), 5017; 41 (1908), 3988. See also Gillam and West, /. Chem. Soc. (1945), 95.
5
/. Chem. Soc. 86 (1904), 645.
6
Ibid. 89 (1906), 1104.
7
Ibid. (1936), 830.
8
/. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 24 (1935), 196.
9
Ber. Schimmel & Co. Jubildums Ausgabe (1929), 288.
10
J. Chem. Soc. (1945), 98.
Y. R. Naves, "Sur la Structure de I'Umbellulone," Helv. Chim. Acta 28 (1945), 701.

442 KETONES
Pinocamphone
Mol. Weight 152.23
CH 3
CH
H
HaCFC-CH
According to Schimmcl & Co., and Gildemeister and Kohlcr,

1 2
Occurrence.
Z-pinocamphone occurs in oil of hyssop (Hyssopus officinalis), of which it
forms the main constituent (about 45 per cent). The dextrorotatory modifi-
cation does not seem to occur in nature.
Isolation. By fractional distillation of hyssop oil.

Recent investigations by Schmidt pinocam phones and the
3
indicate that the
stereoisomeric isopinocam phones are comparable to the menthol => isomenthol and
thujone <=^ isothujone series. They appear to exist together in dynamic equilibrium
which is influenced by acids, alkalies, or catalysts. However, there are certain differ-
ences in the case of the pinocam phones. The direction of rotation is the same, but the
rate of reaction with bromine differs, and similarly the rate of formation of the oximes
is of different order. The pinocam phone oxime forms at the rate of 60% in 10 hr.,
while the isopinocamphone yields only 30%. This latter fact is of substantial assist-
ance in the isolation of pure stereo forms.
</-Pinocamphool Hsopinocainpheol
I (O) I (O)
Pinocamphone Isopinocamphone
H Me Me H
Iia
V Me X;=O MeC0
tJMe
HaC .CH,. HC2
C "C'
H H
+ 11 0'
Identification. ^Pinocamphone may be characterized by several methods:

(1) Treatment with bromine in glacial acetic acid at yields first a crystalline
dibromide CioHuOB^, the active forms, m. 95-96, according to Schmidt.
4
The oily
liquors therefrom, on steam distillation,gave the isomeric isopinocamphone dibromide,
m. 113-114. The ketone may be readily regenerated from the dibromide by reduc-
tion with zinc dust in acetic acid solution.
(2) Z-Pinocam phone, according to Gildemeister and Kohler, 6 yields two semicar-
bazones, the a- form melting at 228-229, and the 0- form melting at 182-183.
(3) Other derivatives of the pinocamphones are listed in connection with properties
Properties. Pinocamphone is an oil with an odor reminiscent of camphor

and thujone.
7
Gildemeister and Kohler, 6 and Dulou reported these properties for natu-
ral /-pinocamphone from oil of hyssop:
212-213 6
-1342 /6
09
7 7
22 95 1.4740
0.960 7
n 20
n D 1.47421 6
i!5 6
15 0.9662
Studying the stereoisomerism of pinocamphone, Schmidt and Schulz

8
re-
corded the following properties:
* The melting point was not determined. t "Terpene und Campher," 2d Ed., 2-14.
These values were obtained by Schmidt before his investigation of the pino-
camphone ^
isopiriocamphone equilibria studies had been completed, and
may be expected to change to a certain degree when more fully examined in
9
the light of this work. Pinocamphones obtained by the same author after
studying the effect of alkali, acids, and catalysts upon the stereoisomers of
these ketones, had these properties:
Pinocamphone Isopinocamphone
b. b. 213.5-214
70-72 70
0.9643 0.9G88
+23 57' + 11 0'
nD 1.47279 1.47495
fObs. 44.21 44.17

Mol. refr. Mol. refr. |Obs.
ICalc. 44.27 [Calc. 44.27
Semicarbazone 227-228 Semicarbazone 219-220
n il
444 KETONES
Use. Pinocamphone is not used in our industries.
1
2
Wallach Festschrift (1909), 421.
3
6
Wallach Festschrift (1909), 421.
Ibid.
7
Bull. inst. pin (1934), 173.
8
Ber. Schimmel &
Co. (1934), 99.
Ber. Schimmel &
Verbenone
CH 3
HC:
On autoxidation, a-pinene yields verbenone, verbenol being an intermedi-

ate product.
Occurrence. For this reason, d- and /-verbenone frequently occur in old,
oxidized dextro- and laevorotatory turpentine oils or in other oils containing
a substantial quantity of pinene.
d- Verbenone present to the extent of about 1 per cent in Spanish ver-
is
bena oil (Verbena triphylla L.). It also occurs in Spanish Eucalyptus globulus
oil.
Isolation. (I) From

autoxidized turpentine oils, verbenone is best isolated by
fractional distillation and by treatment of the fraction bs 105-107, with semicarba-
zide-sodium acetate solution. The readily formed verbenone semicarbazone crystals
are hydrolyzcd with phthalic acid. The regenerated verbenone is steam distilled
and thus obtained in pure form.
(2) A somewhat the preparation of the sodium
less satisfactory process consists in
sulfite derivative of verbenone in neutral solution, some loss occurring due to the for-
mation of stable sulfonates. From the sodium sulfite compound, the ketone can be
regenerated by the action of sodium carbonate. In Spanish verbena oil, verbenone
occurs associated with citral a and citral b. These aldehydes should first be removed
by condensation with cyanacetic acid.
For the isolation of verbenone from Spanish verbena oil, Kerschbaum l
suggested
the following method :
Shake 500 g. of Spanish verbena oil for two days with a solution of 900 g. of sodium
suifite and 350 g. of sodium bicarbonate in 2,500 g. of water, and extract repeatedly
with ether. Decompose the with aqueous sodium hydroxide. A mix-
suifite solution
ture of mainly citral and verbenone will be obtained. Shake this mixture with a solu-
tion of 5.5 g. of cyanacetic acid and 4 g. of sodium hydroxide in 30 g. of water, and
isolate the verbenone by extracting the mixture with ether. Acidify the residual
alkaline solution and separate the citrylidenecyanacetic acid-o and -6.
The verbenone may finally be purified through the semicarbazone as described above.
Identification. Verbenone can be identified:
(1) By the semicarbazone, the d- form melting at 208-209 (from
preparation of its
alcohol) according to Kerschbaum, the dl- form at 180-lc81 according to Blumann

2
and Zeitschel. 3
(2) the preparation of the oxime of d- verbenone in. 119-120, according to
By
Wienhaus and Schumm. 4 The formation of the oxaminc-oxime in. 1(>5 results
from a slight excess of hydroxylamine according to these same authors; m. 103 ac-
cording to Dupont and Zacharewicz.
6
According to Wienhaus and Schumm, the catalytic hydrogenation of d-verbe-

6
(3)
none with palladium-animal charcoal yields a saturated ketone, viz., rf-vcrbanonc
CioHi0 which can be characterized by the preparation of its oxime m. 88.
Properties. Verbenone is a viscid oil possessing an odor reminiscent of

camphor, menthol, and celery. It crystallizes in the cold. On exposure to
the air, the oil rapidly becomes yellow.
The following properties have been reported for verbenone:
7
d-Verbenone, obtained by Kerschbaum from Spanish verbena oil and puri-
fied through the semicarbazone:
8
bi a 103-104 (uncorr.) [a]}? +246 0'
d 17 0.974 ii{J 1.49951
by Blumann and
9
d-Verbenone, obtained Zeitschel through oxidation of
d-a-pinene:
m. +6.5 d 20 0.9780
b. 227-228 WD -f 249 37'
b 16 100 ng 1.49928
by Wienhaus and Schumm

10
d-Verbenone, obtained from d-a-pinene from
Greek turpentine oil:
b 74 o 233-234 [] D +217 24'
b 37 125 nf? 1.49557

d 20 0.976
d 15 0.9795
A n on a
high rotation has been reported by Schmidt, Schulz and Doll
product obtained by the oxidation of verbenol: D +250 45'.
In a later investigation, Schulz and Doll 12 succeeded, by repeated recrys-
tallization, in obtaining a d-verbenone of higher purity, possessing these
properties:
cong. pt. +9.8 aD 4-273 25'
df 0.9754 nf? 1.49649
d}f 0.9801
446 KETONES
This product yielded an oxime m. 120-121, [] D +91 0' (in ether), and
a semicarbazone m. 198-199 (see "Identification").
l-Verbenone does not seem to have been obtained in pure form.
Oxidation of d- and /-verbenone yields d- and Z-pinononic acid which can
be characterized by its semicarbazone m. 204.
Use. Verbenone is not used in our industries.
1
Ber. 33 (1900), 886.
2
Ber. 33 (1900), 889.
3
Ber. 46 (1913), 1194.
4
Liebigs Ann. 439 (1924), 32. See also Schmidt, Schulz and Doll, Ber. Schimmel Co. &
(1940), 38. Chern. Zentr. II (1940), 3037.
6
Bull. soc. chim. [5], 2 (1935), 538.
Liebigs Ann. 439 (1924), 35, 37. See also Schmidt, Schulz and Doll, Ber. Schimmel <t Co.
6
(1940), 38. Chern. Zenlr. II (1940), 3037.

7
Ber. 33 (1900), 889.
8
Original value given as -j-66. Observed and corrected, cf. Blumann and Zeitschel, Ber.
46 (1913), 1183.
9
Ber. 46 (1913), 1178.
10
Liebigs Ann. 439 (1924), 32. See also Schmidt, Schulz and Doll, Ber. Schimmel & Co.
(1940), 38. Chem. Zentr. II (1940), 3037.
11
Ber. Schimmel &Co. (1940), 38. Chem. Zentr. II (1940), 3037.
Ber. Schimmel &Co. (1942/43), 50.
Pinocarvone
HaC
1
Occurrence. According to Schmidt, pinocarvone occurs in Spanish oil of
Eucalyptus globulus.
Isolation.Being un a,j8- unsaturated ketone, pinocarvone reacts with neutral

sulfite, but complete regeneration of the parent ketone from its sulfite addition com-
pound can be achieved only with strong alkalies. Thus pinocarvone can be separated
from accompanying myrtenal, the sulfite of which is decomposed, even by the addition
of weak alkalies such as sodium carbonate. Schmidt 2 recommended the following
procedure:
Shake, in the usual way, one 1 kg. of last runs of eucalyptus oils containing 10-
15% ketones (hydroxylamine determination) with neutral sodium sulfite solution
and bicarbonate. After separation of the neutral oil, steam distill the sulfite solu-
tion (soda alkaline!) until no more oil distills over. Add strong alkali to the sulfite
solution and continue distilling. Extract the distillation waters with ether and
purify the crude pinocarvone by freezing, centrifuging, and distillation in vacuo.
3
Identification. According to Schmidt, by the preparation of derivatives:
(1) The dibromide of /-pinocarvone melts at 73.5-74. It is obtained by adding
16 g. of bromine to a well-cooled solution of 15 g. of J-pinocarvone in chloroform and
by removing the solvent through distillation.
(2) The semicarbazone of /-pinocarvone melts at 350.

4
Properties. reported for a highly purified /-pinocarvone isolated
Schmidt
from the last runs of Spanish eucalyptus oil, as described above:
f.p. -1.8 D -68 30'
dli 0.9875 nf? 1.49498
Pinocarvone is very sensitive toward acids and is readily converted into

carvone with accompanying ring opening. Pinocarvone possesses a peculiar
odor. On exposure to air, this ketonc rcsinifics easily.
In the light of Schmidt's recent discoveries, the earlier findings of the same
7 8
author, of Wallach, Stallcup and Hawkins, and Joshel and Palkin, on
5 6
"carvopinone" need to be modified, as Wallach's "carvopinone" is identical

with pinocarvone.
Use. Pinocarvone is not used in our industries.
1
Ber. ScHmmel A Co. (1941), 5(5. Chcm. Abstracts 37 (1943), 4714.
2
Ber. 77B (1944), 167.
3
Ibid.
4
Ibid.
6
Ber. 63 (1930), 1131.
Licbigs Arm. 346 (1906), 231.
7
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 3341.
8
Ibid. 64 (1942), 1008.
Carone
doIIieO Mol. Weight 152.23
5-Ketocarane
CH 3
(2)
H.,
Although this saturated bicyclic ketone has not yet been

Occurrence.
found in nature, its development in the course of several diagnostic reactions
on terpenes from essential oils has been noted.
Identification. Carone can be characterized :
(1) the preparation of its semicarbazone, d- and

By /- form m. 167-169, dl- form
m. 178, according to Baeyer. 1
448 KETONES
(2) oxidation with a hot solution of potassium permanganate to caronic acid
By
C?Hio04, a saturated dibasic acid, the cis- modification melting at 175, and the d-,
1-, or dl- trans- modifications melting at
212-213. 2 This latter form is converted to
the cis- isomer by acetic anhydride. The anhydride of the cis- form melts at 54-56.
Properties. Carone is a colorless, mobile oil possessing a somewhat cam-

3
phoraceous odor. The following properties have been reported by Baeyer,
4
and Richter, Wolff and Presting:
b. 210 3
(with partial decom- [a] D +173 48' and -169 30' 3
position and isomeriza- (from caraway and spear-

tion to carvenone) mint oils, resp.)
b 13 98 4
[a] D + 1340' 4
(from Z-dihydro-
7 4
di 0.955 carvone)
4
nj? 1.478
5
Baeyer found that carone reacts with bromine very slowly, not yielding
any crystalline derivative. With hydrogen bromide, carone gives dihydro-
carvone hydrobromide which can be characterized by the preparation of its
oxime m. 118-120.
Use. Carone is not used in our industries.
1
Ber. 28 (1895), 639.
2
(a) Naves and Papazian, Helv. Chim. Ada 25 (1942), 984.
(b) Guha and Sankaran, Current Science 6 (1937), 388.
(c) Owen and Simonsen, J. Chem. *Soc. (1933), 1223.
Locquin, Bull. soc. chim. 16 (1914), 747.
(d)
3
Ber. 27 (1894), 1920; 28 (1895), 639.
4
Ber. 64 (1931), 877.
*Ber. 27 (1894), 1920.
C. SESQUITERPENE KETONES
Atlantone
CH 3 CH 3
C CHo C CH 2
HC
-/ \ CH/ \CH HC
/ \ C
/ \ CH
2 2 2
O=C TI 2 C C CH 3 O=C H2 C C CH3

\CH \HC / \CH \HC
C C
H3C
/ \CH H3C
/ \CH
3 3
a-At Ian tone -y-Atlantone
2
According to Pfau, and Pfau and Plattner, the main con-
1
Occurrence.
stituent of Atlas cedarwood oil (Cedrus atlantica Manet.) and Himalaya cedar-
SESQUITERPENE KETONES 449
wood (Cedrus deodora Loud.) consists of a mixture of two monocyclic ses-

oil
quiterpene ketones CisH 22 O which, because of their analogy with a- and 7-

bisabolene, were classified as a- and 7-atlantone (cf. Ruzicka and Capato ).
3
The two ketones are very sensitive and could not be separated from each
other. Pfau and Plattner, 4 after investigation, suggested the structural for-
mulas pictured above.
Isolation. Through the semicarbazones from the fraction bi 120- 121 of Atlas
or Himalaya cedar wood oil.
Identification. Both the a- and 7- isomers yield a semicarbazone without definitive
characters. Upon decomposition of this derivative with
potassium hydroxide at
elevated temperature (~200), according to Pfau and Plattner, 6 a fraction bio 137-
140 is obtained which upon treatment with HCl gas in ether forms a trihydrochloride
and has been identified as bisabolene-trihydrochloride m. 78.5-79. Should it be
necessary to identify specifically a- or 7-atiantone, this is best accomplished by the
following scheme:
Na
(1) a-Atlantone -f- Alcohol Tetrahydro-a-atlantol + KMnO 4 *
Ci 6 H 22 O Ci 6 H 28 O
CH 3
CH CH2 COOH
/ \CH/ \CH I
âs
H2 C 2 CH 2
| | |
-f- excess KMnO4 >
|
O=C H2 C C=O CH
\CH \COOH\CH H3 C
/ \
2 3 CII 3
Isovaleric acid, identified
p-phenylphenacyl
ester m. 75.5
HC
/ \CH
Diketomonocarboxylic acid
Semicarbuzone m. 208-209
Na COOH
(2) 7-Atlantone + Alcohol |
Ci 6H 22o CH 2
Dihydro-7-atlantol -f KMnO 4 >
|
C 16 H 26 CH
HC
/
3
VCH
Isovaleric acid only
3
Properties. The fraction rich in the atlantones had these properties:
bi 121-123 C*D +2 48'
d 20 0.9562 ng* 1.5181
Use. Atlantone, as such, is not used in our industries.

1
Helv. Chim. Ada 16 (1932), 1481.
4
2
Ibid. 17 (1934), 129. Ibid. 17 (1934), 129.
6
*
Ibid. 8 (1925), 262. Ibid. 17 (1934), 154.
450 KETONES
Turmerone
Mol. Weight 218.33
and
ar-Turmerone
Mol. Weight 216.31
"Tumerone"
CH3 CHs
I
CH CH CH
HC2 H.C C CH
-CHs
0=C 0= C. HC C CHs
'CH CH
\CHS
II
c Q
/ \
HsC CH3 CH3
Turmerone Dehydro-turmerone or ar-turmerone
CHa
+ H2
*
0= C
VV
HC
CH
C
+ CHs -CO- CHs
CHs CH
Curcumone
According to Pfau, and Rupe, Clar, Pfau and Plattner, the

1 2
Occurrence.
main fraction of the volatile oil derived from the rhizome of curcuma (Cur-
cuma longa L.) consists of a monocyclic hydroaromatic ketone CisH^jO, viz.,
turmerone, and an aromatic ketone CisH 2 oO, viz., ar-turmerone or dehydro-
turmerone. Hydrogenation and degradation products of these ketones along
with a synthesis of ar-turmerone by Rupe and Gassmann 3 have proved the
validity of the structural formula suggested for ar-turmerone by Pfau and
collaborators. These reactions also lend weight to the structure postulated
for turmerone.
Isolation. Turmerone has not been isolated in pure form. However, it appears to
be present in the neutral fraction of curcuma oil bio 155-156, and to be accompanied
by ar-turmerone. Controlled dehydrogenation or oxidation of the fraction bio 145-
165 with CrOa, separation of the cut bio 160-165, subsequent treatment of this
fraction with dinitrophenylhydrazone, and regeneration of the ketone with hot alco-
holic hydrochloric acid yield pure d-ar-turmerone, according to Rupe and Gassmann. 4
Cleaving this ar-turmerone with sodium ethoxide arid ozone, Rupe et al. 6 obtained,
respectively, d-curcumone and d-curcumic acid m. 42-43 C.
Identification. As turmerone has not been obtained pure, identification is best
carried on through the derived d-ar-turmerone. This latter product yields a dinitro-
phenylhydrazone m. 133-134 and its dihydro ar-turmerone dinitrophenylhydrazone
m. 121-122 (Rupe and Gassmann 6). Cleavage of the active ar-turmerone dinitro-
phenylhydrazone with concentrated hydrochloric acid gives d-curcumone, the di-
nitrophenylhydrazone of which melts at 89.5.
Properties. The following properties have been reported by Rupe and

7 8
Gassmann and Rupe and others:
ar-Turmerone d-Curcumone
7
bio 159-160 bio 115-117 8
7 8
df 0.9634 d 20 0.9620
8
[a]!? +8213' 7
aD +-4632'
8
II?? 1.5046
Use. The turmerones, as such, are not used in our industries.
*
Helv. Chirn. Ada 16 (1932), 1482.
2
Ibid. 17 (1934), 380.
*Ibid. 19 (1936), 573.
*
Ibid.
5
Ibid. 7 (1924), 654; 17 (1934), 384.
'Ibid. 19 (1936), 573, 581.
7
Ibid. Cf. Mukerji, Science and Culture 8 (1942), 40.
s
Ibid. 17 (1934), 385.
Eremophilone
CH 3
CH 8
I
CH CH 2 CH,
^ > ^ > /^ ,
H2 C C C C
H^C C CII2 CHs

\CH/ \C/
(According to Robinson)
Bradfield, Penfold and Simonsen l

described three closely related ketones,
viz., eremophilone Ci 5 H 22 0, hydroxyeremophilone Ci 5 H 22 2, and hydroxydi-
hydroeremophilone Ci5H 24 2 The structural formula first suggested by
.
these workers for eremophilone has subsequently been modified in the course
452 KETONES
2
of investigations by Bradfield et al., and confirmatory evidence has been
rendered for the suggestion by Robinson 3 regarding the formula of this ke-
tone. However, studies continue relative to the related hydroxyeremophilone
4
(I)and hydroxydihydroeremophilone (II) for which Gillam and collaborators
recently advanced the following formulas:
CH 3 CH 3
CH 3
CH CII2 CHs CH CH CH
Hpi
ovv
\ r^
v^
f^
vy
p<
vy
TT T 1
JTlovy
\ C*
v_>>
\ C<
Vy
C*
Vy
H2 C C C=0 CH 3 H2 C C C CH 3
\CH/ \C/ \ /|\ / \OH
H2 C H C
2
AH O
i ii
Occurrence. The three above-named ketones occur in oil of Eremophila

mitchelli Benth.
Isolation. For details of best procedure in use at this writing see the papers by
Bradfield, Hellstrom, Penfold and Simonsen, and Bradfield, Penfold and Simonsen.
5 6
Identification. Eremophilone forms a semicarbazone m. 202-203 (with decom-

position), and a tetrabromo derivative m. 116.
Hydroxyeremophilone forms a benzoyl derivative m. 119-120.
Hydroxydihydroeremophilone yields a 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 239~241
(with decomposition), a dinitrobenzoate m. 145-146, and a diacetate m. 69-70.
7
Properties. Bradfield, Penfold and Simonsen reported for these three
sesquiterpene ketones the following properties:
Eremophilone
m. 41-42 [a] 54 6i -207 (MeOH, c = 2.46)
b 15 171 ng 1.5182
dg 0.9994
Onreduction \Vith sodium and alcohol, eremophilone yields dihydroeremo-

H
philol Ci 5 26 0, bi4 16S-170, which can be characterized by the preparation
of a 3,5-dinitrobenzoate m. 119-121.
Hydroxyeremophilone
m. 66-67 W 546 i +153 (MeOH, c = 2.51)
b 22 189-190 ng 1.5564
d|l 1.0620
On exposure to air, hydroxyeremophilone oxidizes with extreme rapidity.

Oxidation of hydroxyeremophilone with chromium dioxide in dilute acetic

acid yields a phenol Ci 2 Hi 8 O 3 m. 193-194.5, and a keto acid CioHiaOa,
,
m. 105-107.
Hydroxydihydroeremophilone
m. 102M03
M 546 i +94 (MeOH, c = 2.02)
Use. These three sesquiterpene ketones are not used in our industry.
1
J. Chem.Soc. (1932), 2744.
2
Ibid. (1938), 767; (1939), 87; (1941), 60.
3
See Penfold and Simonsen, /. Chem. Soc. (1939), 87.
4
J. Chem. Soc. (1941), 60.
6
Ibid. (1938), 767.
6
Ibid. (1932), 2744.
7
Ibid.
Cyperone
CH 3
HC
\ \
a ^ CH2
c c c c=o
/ H\ / \ /
HoC CHo C
CH 3
a-Cyperone
This structural formula of cyperone, a sesquiterpene ketone, was suggested

1
by Bradfield, Pritchard and Simonsen. Since the semicarbazones of a- and
/3-cyperone give the same product of degradation, a- and /3-cyperone are ap-
parently stereoisomers, differing in the spatial placement of the methyl and
the isopropenyl groups.
2
Occurrence.According to Hegde and Rao, and Bradfield, Hegde, Rao,
Simonsen and Gillam, 3 a-cyperone is the main constituent of oil of Cyperus
rotundus Linn, which contains 33-54 per cent of ketones.
Isolation. a-Cyperone can be isolated from volatile oils through its semicarbazone.
Identification. The cyperones may be characterized by the preparation of several
derivatives:
Isomers, m.
Derivative a- 0-
Semicarbazone 216 207
Oxime 150.5 138
2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone 209-210 218-219 (decomp.)
(Red crystals show
a bronze reflex)
Nitroguanylhydrazone 203-204 197
454 KETONES
Properties. The above-named authors reported the following properties
for a-cyperone:
b 20 177 [a] 54 6i +138

dg 0.9946 [a] 5 78o +118 36'
1.5283
Ontreatment with aqueous oxalic acid or methyl alcoholic potassium hy-

droxide, a-cyperone is isomerized to /9-cyperone for which these properties
have been reported:
>
16 175-176 W5461 +239
25
125
1
*25 0.9945 nf? 1.5414
a-Cyperone and the stereoisomeric /3-cyperonc have been prepared syn-

4
thetically by Adamson, McQuillin, Robinson and Simonsen from dihydro-
carvone. The principal physicochemical properties of the natural and the
synthetic a- and 0-cyperone are very similar, but certain differences in the
optical and crystallographic data of the respective oximes and semicarbazones
shed some doubt regarding the absolute identity of the synthetic and the
natural cyperones.
Use.Cyperone, as such, is not used in our industry, although the tubers
of Cyperus rotundus Linn, from which it is derived have found favor in oriental
medicine and perfumery.
3 Chem. Soc. (1936), 667.
1
J. Chem. Soc. (1937), 760. /.
4
2
/. Soc. Chem. hid. 54 (1935), 388 T. Ibid. (1937), 1576.
Conrado F. Asenjo, "Some of the Constituents of the Tuber 'Coqui' (Cyperus

rotundus L.). The Volatile Oil," /. Am. Pharm. Assoc. 30 (1941), 628. Chem. Ab-
stracts 36 (1942), 2172.
Vetivone
(Vetiverone)
Ci 5 H 22 O Mol. Weight 218.3*3
HaC
structural formula of /3-vetivone as pictured above was established by

The
Pfau and Plattner. 1 Naves and Perrottet 2 expressed the opinion that a-
and jft-vetLvones are stereoisomers, both modifications possessing the same

plane projection formula. The odor of vetiver oil is due primarily to the
ketonic sesquiterpenes CisHÔ (bicyclic and a-ethylenic), of which only a-
vetivone and /3-vetivone have been isolated so far.
According to an old German Patent, oil of vetiver contains a
3
Occurrence.
mixture of isomeric ketones Ci 3 H 2 20 called "vetiverone" which can be iso-
lated through their semicarbazones. More recently Pfau and Plattner, 4 and
6
Sabetay and Trabaud almost simultaneously but independently found that
the ketones occurring in Java and Reunion vetiver oil possess the empirical
H H
molecular formula Ci 5 2 20 and not Ci 3 2 20, as claimed in the above-men-
tioned German patent. Sabetay and Trabaud retained the designation veti-
verone, while Pfau and Plattner, and Naves and Perrottet gave preference to
the term "vetivone." By all evidence, vetivone and vetiverone, as considered
in recent work, are identical. Isolating the ketones by a modified hydroxyla-
mine method, Pfau and Plattner examined eighty-nine Java and Reunion
vetiver oils and came to the conclusion that these oils contained from 7.8 to
35.1 per cent, in most cases from 15 to 27 per cent, of ketones. These ana-
lytical figures are considerably higher than the actual yield obtained when
from vetiver oil
isolating the ketones by various methods. By oximation,
6
Sabetay and Trabaud arrived at a ketone content ranging from 12 to 13
per cent.
Isolation. Sabetay and Trabaud isolated the ketones from vetiver oil with the
"P" reagent (acetyl hydrazine pyridinium chloride) of Girard and Sanduiesco. 7
Treating 500 g. of genuine Reunion vetiver oil in 1.5 liters of alcohol and 75 g. of acetic
acid with 75 g. of the Girard and Sanduiesco reagent "P," Sabetay and Trabaud 8 thus
obtained 11.6% of crude ketones containing 84.8% of vetiverone as determined by
oximation in the cold and in the presence of calcium carbonate. Distillation of this
ketone fraction in vacuo yielded a main fraction bu 138-14S which gave a scmicarba-
zone m. 210. On decomposition of the semicarbazonc with dilute sulfuric acid at
elevated temperature, a main fraction bi2 142-150, containing 89.5% vetiverone,
was obtained. Correspondingly, Java vetiver oil on treatment with the reagent of
Girard and Sanduiesco, yielded about 13% of a ketone fraction which gave a main
fraction b 20 150-155 possessing these properties: d iB 1.001, a +80 40', nf? 1.5355.
Pfau and Plattner 9 found this reagent of Girard and Sanduiesco unsatisfactory
because of difficulty in regeneration and resorted to the semicarbazone for separation
of this ketone from an enriched fraction of vetiver oil. A ketone fraction 1)4 152-160
containing 81.5% vetivone gave a crude semicarbazone mixture which on fractional
crystallization by use of a variety of solvents yielded the semicarbazone of /3-vetivone
m. 228-229, arid of a-vetivone m. 210-212 (with decomposition). According to
Pfau and Plattner, 10 the ketone fraction of vetiver oil varies according to the origin
of the oil from about 20 to about 90%, and the yield of /3-vetivonc from 2% to 49%.
Treatment of the semicarbazone of /3- vetivone with phthalic anhydride gave 0-vetivone,
while the corresponding treatment of the semicarbazone of a-vetivone yielded a-
vetivone. Crystallization of /3-vetivone oil from petroleum ether gave pure /3-vetivone
m. 44-44.5.
456 KETONES
Identification. The vetivones can be characterized by the preparation of several
derivatives:
(1) The semicarbazones:
According to Naves and Perrottet, the semicarbazone of a-vetivone, on recrystal-
11
lization from acetic acid, deposits first, and on recrystallization from absolute alcohol
gives a pale yellow crystalline powder m. 222~223, []D +334 12' (c

= 4% in acetic
acid).
Recrystallization of the semicarbazone of /3-vetivone from dry pyridine yields
nacreous leaflets m. 228-229, [a] D -71 6' (c = 4% in acetic acid).
According to Pfau and Plattner, 12 the semicarbazone of /3-vetivone melts at 228-
229, [a]?? 71 0' in glacial acetic acid, whereas that of a-vetivone melts at 210-
212 (with decomposition), [a]i? -f 316 0' in glacial acetic acid.
The dinitrophenylhydrazones:
(2)
Naves and Perrottet u prepared the 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone of a-vetivone m.
149, and that of 0-vetivone m. 190.5M91 .
The mixture of vetiver ketones, isolated by Sabetay and Tra-

Properties.
baud 14 from Bourbon (Reunion) vetiver oil and purified through the semi-
carbazone m. 210, had these properties:
bw 142-150 D +74 0'
dis 1.002 nf? 1-5252
Similarly, Java vetiver oil gave a vetiverone (semicarbazone m. 210) of

these properties:
b 20 150-155 aD +80 40'

d 15 1.001 1$ 1.5355
15
Naves and Perrottet reported the following properties for a- and /3-veti-
vone, after reconversion from the semicarbazone, distillation in an atmosphere
of carbon dioxide, washing, rectification, and recrystallization from pentane:
a-Vetivone
m. 51-51.5 df 1.0035 (superfusion)

b2 144-144.5 [a] D +238 15' (c = 6.934 in ale.)
bo.85 126-127 ng
1
1.5370 (superfusion)
a-Vetivone has a sweet, agreeable, powerful odor, characteristic of vetiver

oil.
fi-Vetivone
m. 44-44.5 [a] D -38 55' (c = 10.62 in ale.)

5
b2 141M42 nj) 1.5216
bi.w 130-132 ni? 1.5309
df 0.9804 (superfusion)
df 1.0001 (superfusion)
Certain of these data are comparable to those obtained earlier by Pfau and
Plattner. 16
The odor of /3-vetivone is relatively faint, reminiscent of styrax.
When Naves and Perrottet 17 obtained
treating a-vetivone with selenium,
eudalinol m. 85-85.5, phenylurethane m. 135. Treatment of the neutral
fraction of the distillate (reaction product with selenium) with phosphoric
acid produced 2.3 per cent of vetivazulene, picrate m. 122-122.5.
/3-Vetivone does not form a bisulfite
compound. Dehydrogenating 0-veti-
vone with palladium, sulfur and selenium, Pfau and Plattner l8 obtained
mainly vetivazulene, furthermore, vetivalene (l,5-dimethyl-3-isopropylnaph-
thalene), eudalene, a CH naphthol and azulene.
Vetivazulene
Use.Nothing is known in literature about the use of the vetivones, as

such, in perfumes and cosmetics, but it seems quite possible that some of the
specialties offered by certain essential oil houses are based upon vetivones or
ketone fractions of vctivcr Since they possess the typical odor of veti-
oil.
ver oil in more concentrated and lasting form, these ketones may form valu-
able adjuncts in the compounding of fine and modern perfumes, especially
those of oriental character.
1
Helv. Chim. Ada 23 (1940), 768.
2
Ibid. 24 (1941), 3.
3
German Patent 142,415, Feb. 2, 1902.
4
Helv. Chim. Acta 22 (1939), 640.
6
Bull. soc. chim. [5], 6 (1939), 740.
6
Ibid.
7
Helv. Chim. Acta 19 (1936), 1095.
8
Butt. soc. chim. [5], 6 (1939), 740.
9
Helv. Chim. Acta 22 (1939), 648.
10
Ibid.
11
Helv. Chim. Acta 24 (1941), 19.
12
Ibid. 22 (1939), 640.
13
Ibid. 24 (1941), 19.
14
Bull. soc. chim. [5], 6 (1939), 740.
15
Helv. Chim. Acta 24 (1941), 20.
u lbid. 22 (1939), 640.
* Ibid. 24 (1941), 21.
18
Ibid. 23 (1940), 768.
458 KETONES
D. THE IONONES
a-Ionone
Mol. Weight 192.29
a-Cydocitrylideneacetone. 4-[2,6,6-Trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-l-yl]-
3-butcn-2-one
HC CH
\
C
II 2 C CH-CH=CH.CO-CH3
H2 C C CH 3
\CII
p-Ionone
jS-Cyclocitrylideneacotone. 4-[2,6,6-Trimethyl-i-cyclohexen-l-yl]-
3-buten-2-one
OH,
C
O.CH=CII-CO-CH 3
IIoC C-CH 3
CH S
l
Occurrence. Penfold first observed 0-ionone in the flower oil of Boronia
mcgasligma Nees. When other workers expressed doubts about the purity
by Penfold, Naves and Parry prepared an
2
of the flower oil investigated
authentic product and identified in it /2-ionone, d-a-ionone, and (//-a-ionone.
Tischer 3 reported the identification of ionone in violet moss (Trcntepolia joli-
thus [L.] Wallr.) whose gold-yellow color is due to carotene. Tischer concluded
that the typical violet odor (ionone) of this moss originates in the living plant
by the decomposition probably under the influence of enzymes.
of carotene,
In view of their great commercial importance, a short discussion of the
ionones and their synthesis is advisable; for details the reader is referred to
the ample patent literature and to books on synthetic aroma tics.
The ionones are prepared through condensation of the olefinic terpene al-
dehyde citral with acetone, by the action of alkaline reagents, whereby \f/-
THE IONONES 459
ionone, an olefinic ketone CiaHôO, is obtained as intermediate product of

the reaction
H.C H
C=CH CH2 CH2 C=CH C=0 + CH 3 CO CH3
I
Citral Acetone
H3 C H2
C=CII CH 2 CH 2
-
C=CH CH=CH CO CH3 -
/ I
H3 C CII 3
The aliphatic ketone ^-ionone subsequently cyclicized by a variety of

is
methods 4 (with reagents such as sodium bisulfate, concentrated sulfuric or

phosphoric acid, dilute nitric or formic acid, dilute mineral acids, sodium ace-
tate, etc.) to ionone. In all cases a mixture of isomeric a- and /3-ionones will
result from the depending upon the process employed.
cyclization, their ratio
The action of sulfuric acid, for example, yields mainly 0-ionone, while with
phosphoric or formic acid chiefly a-iononc is obtained.
v|/-Ionone
(pseudo-Ionone)
Tiemann 5 found that this olefinic ketone does not react with sodium bi-
sulfite at room temperature but on prolonged boiling with bisulfite solution
^-ionone forms a water soluble hydrosulfonic acid compound. By extracting

the hydrosulfonic acid compound repeatedly with ether, products of resinifi-
cation and other impurities can be removed. The parent ketone is regener-
ated by decomposition of the hydrosulfonic acid compound with alkali.
Steam distillation yields ^-ionone in pure form.

^-Ionone can be identified by the preparation of its jo-bromophcnylhydra-
zone m. 102-104, and 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 143. Pure ^-ionone
is a yellowish, somewhat viscid oil with a peculiar odor. It has these prop-
erties:
b 12 143-145
d 20 0.8984
nD 1.53346
460 KETONES
a-Ionone
Identification. a-Iononebe identified:

may
(1) By the preparation of its oxime m. 89-90, which crystallizes from a petroleum
ether solution at low temperature.
(2) By its semicarbazone I m. 107-108, II 137-138; 142-143 corr. (Naves and
Bachmann 8
).
(3) By its thiosemicarbazone m. 121.

(4) By p-bromophenylhydrazone m. 142-143, prepared in glacial acetic acid
its
solution and recrystallized from dilute methyl alcohol or ligroine. It is the compound
best suited for the identification of a-ionone.
The p-nitrophenylhydrazone m. 113, 4-phenylsemicarbazonc m. 186.5-187 corr.
(see Naves and Bachmann), 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone (see Brady, also section on
7
"Properties"), arid 3-benzohydrazone m. 149.5-150.5 (Naves and Bachmann) have

all been found suitable as derivatives for this ketone.
a-Ionone, especially in dilution, possesses a typical violet-like

Properties.
odor reminiscent also of orris root. According to Auwers and Eisenlohr, 8
pure a-ionone has these properties:
Regenerated from its oxime:
bn 123M24
d 20 0.932
nf? 1-4980
Regenerated from its bisulfite compound:

b 12 127.6
d? 0.9287
7
nj> 1.5002
Using a similar method of recovery Naves and Bachmann recently pre-

9
pared a highly purified sample whose properties correspond very closely to

those described by the earlier workers.
Tiemann 10 reported for a-ionone:
bn 123-124
d 20 0.932
nD 1 .4980
Chuit n recorded:
bi2 127.6
di5 0.9338
2
n{J' 1.50001
12
Recently Sobotka et al. specifically resolved a dl- isomer (nf 1.4995) by
means of J-menthydrazide: /-a-ionone Z-menthydrazide [a]?? 320 0' in ethyl
THE IONONES 461
alcohol,m. 185; c?-a-ionone /-menthydrazide []? 4-230 0' in ethyl alcohol,

m. 176. By decomposition of these /- and d-menthydrazides of a-ionone,
they obtained the optically active a-ionones and the corresponding derived
phenyl hydrazones with these properties:
l-a-Ionone d-a-Ionone
[a]g -400 0' [a]g +347 0'

5 5
ng 1.500 ng 1.5021
2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone
m. 133 m. 129
p-chlorobenzoylhydrazone p-chlorobenzoylhydrazone
m. 200-201 m. 19G-198
The 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone obtained from the d/-o:-ionone melted at 143,

and the p-chlorobenzoylhydrazone at 214.
p-Ionone
Identification. /3-Ionone may be identified, according to Tiemann: u

(1) By the preparation of its semicarbazone m. 148-149.
(2) By its thiosemicarbazone m. 158.
(3) By hydrazone m. 104-105.

its
(4) Byits p-bromophenylhydrazone m. 115-116.
(5) Byits p-nitrophenylhydrazone m. 173.

Allen and Gates u reacted /3-ionone with l-methyl-3-carbohydrazicopyridinium
p-toluene sulfonate, obtaining a derivative melting at 147. Since this reagent does
not react with a-ionone, it offers itself as a possible compound to differentiate and to
separate these isomers in a commercial product.
15
Wilson, as a result of a collaborative study, selected the optical crystallographic
properties of m-nitrobenzhydrazone as a most satisfactory method of identifying @-
ionone in quantities as small as 10 mg.
Miiller employed the new "EM" reagent to identify colorimetrically and dis-
16
tinguish between the a- and /3- isomers.

The 4-phenylsemicarbazone is reported as m. 157.5-158, the dinitro-2,4-phenyl-
hydrazone m. 128.5-129, the Z-menthylhydrazide m. 178, [] D -35 0'.
The oxime of /3-ionone is liquid.
Properties. /3-Ionone possesses an odor somewhat stronger than a-ionone

with a faint leather-like "by-note." According to Auwers and Eisenlohr, 17
pure /3-ionone has these properties:
Regenerated from its semicarbazone:
big 140
dn 0.946
nfj 1.521
462 KETONES
Regenerated from its sodium bisulfite compound:
bio 140.4
d 15 0.9488
1.52072
18
Tiemann reported for pure /3-ionone:
b 10 127-128.5
di7 0.946
n> 1.521
19
Chuit recorded:
bi 2 134.6
d^ 0.9488
5
nU' 1.52008
The Separation of the Ionones
As
stated, the preparation of ionones from citral via ^-ionone always re-
sults in a mixture of a- and /3-ionone, their ratio depending upon the process
20
employed. Gildemeister and Hoffmann suggested these average properties
of a- and /3-ionone mixtures:
bio 126-128 d}? 0.9350-0.9403

b 4 -5 104-109 no 1.50335-1.50510
The crude ionones can be purified by preparing the water soluble bisulfite
compound with a boiling solution of sodium bisulfite (see "^-Icmone")- Ex-
traction with ether eliminates the neutral products. The bisulfite compound
is decomposed with alkali and steam distilled. Treatment of the
finally
ionones with an alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide removes unchanged
^-ionone.
a- and /3-Ionone can be separated by several methods:
(1) Through the difference in the properties of their bisulfite derivatives,
according to German Patent No. 106,512 (Haarmann and Reimer). /3-

lonone is regenerated from the bisulfite compound, and separated by mere
steam distillation, whereas a-ionone can be regenerated from the residue
only after treatment with alkali.
(2) According to British Patent No. 18,333 (Chuit and Naef), the sodium
bisulfite compound of a-ionone Ci3H 2 iOSO3Na-3H 2 O,
by satis precipitated
uration of the solution with sodium chloride whereby the /3-ionone compound
Ci3H 2 iOSO3Na-2H 2 O, remains in solution. The two bisulfite compounds
are then separated, each is decomposed with alkali, and a- and /3-ionone iso-
lated by steam distillation.
THE IONONES 463
(3) By
the use of formaldehyde, acetaldehyde, or acetone as agents for
decomposition of the bisulfite compound, according to British Patent No.
472,545, September 23, 1937. Temperature is the critical factor.
21
(4) According to Tiemann, through the different solubilities of their semi-
carbazones. The very sparingly soluble and thereby
jS-ionone derivative is
can be separated in pure form while the crude a-ionone semicarbazone re-
mains in the mother liquor. By hydrolysis of the a-ionone compound, the
parent ketone is regenerated and converted into a-ionone oxime which crys-
tallizes at a low temperature. The /3-ionone oxime is an oil.
A similar procedure has recently been outlined by Young, Cristol, An-
drews and Lindenbaum. 22 These authors recommend decomposition of the
highly purified semicarbazone with cold sulfuric acid, to obtain a very pure
0-isomer.
the action of concentrated sulfuric acid, a-ionone is inverted to /3-
By
ionone; vice versa, by the action of alkali in alcoholic solution, /3-ionone may
be inverted to a-ionone, but not as readily.
In order to test a commercial ionone preparation for its actual content of
ionone, it is necessary to remove first any by-products which may have origi-
nated during the manufacturing process. For this purpose, Gildemeister and
23
Hoffmann suggested boiling (reflux condenser) the oil in question for ten to
fifteen hours with three times its weight of sodium bisulfite solution in which
the free sulfurous acid has been neutralized with dilute soda solution. The
duration of the refluxing depends on the reaction of the ionone with the bi-
sulfite. In order to remove the neutral substances which do not react with
bisulfite, the solution is first diluted with water and four times extracted with
ether. If the ionone
comparatively pure, the addition of water will cause
is
but a slight turbidity; if impure, separation of oil will take place. In case
the odor of the separated oil indicates the presence of ionone, repeated treat-
ment with bisulfite is necessary. The difference between the amount of oil
originally used and the amount extracted is computed as ionone. Some idea
as to the relative proportions of a- and /3-ionone in a mixture of ionones can
be obtained from the physical properties of the ionone mixture, after regener-
ation from the bisulfite compound, and steam distillation. Naves and Bach-
mann 24
have found data on the dispersion of optical refractivity particularly
useful in this connection.
Use. The ionones
(but not ^-ionone) belong to some of the most important
synthetic aromatics used most widely in perfumes, cosmetics, and the scent-
ing of soaps. They serve in floral odors as well as in compositions of fancy
character.
1
/. Roy. Soc. W. Australia 14 (1927-28), 1.
2
Helv. Chim. Acta 30, 1 (1947), 419. According to a recent publication of Naves (find., 956),
small quantities of /3-ionone occur in the press residue of raspberry. Naves attributes
this to degradation of carotene or a similar compound.
464 KETONES
8
Z. physiol. Chem. 243 (1936), 103. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 130.
4
For laboratory methods, sec Hibbert and Cannon, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 46 (1924), 127.
6
Ber. 31 (1898), 842, 846.
Helv. Chim. Acta 26 (1943), 2151; 27 (1944), 645.
V. Chem. Soc. (1931), 756.
*J. prakt. Chem. II, 82 (1910), 126.
9
Helv. Chim. Acta 26 (1943), 2151.
M Ber. 31 (1898), 876.
11
to. gen. chim. 6 (1903), 432.
12
/. 4m. CTiem. Soc. 66 (1943), 2061.
i
Ber. 31 (1898), 871, 879, 1736. Cf. Chuit, Chem. Zentr. I (1904), 281.
14
/. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 596.
i6
/. 4ssocn. Of. Agr. Chem. 22 (1939), 378.
16
Deut. Parfiimerieztg. 26 (1940), 239; 27 (1941), 190. Chem. Zentr. I (1941), 1892; I (1942),
1442. Cf. Naves, Helv. Chim. Acta 30, I (1947), 420.
17
J. prakt. Chem. II, 84 (1911), 68.
18
Ber. 31 (1898), 871, 879.
19
Rev. gen. chim. 6 (1903), 432.
20
"Die Xthcrischen Die," 3d Kd., Vol. I, 589.
81
Ber. 31 (1898), 874, 1737.
22
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1944), 855.
23
24
Helv. Chim. Acta 26 (1943), 2151.
Hans
Roster, "Constitution of Methyl lonones," J. prakt. Chem. 143 (1935), 249.
Dissertation by Domenick Papa, "The Methyl lonones: A Proof of Structure,"
Columbia University (1937).
Hans Koster (Haarmann & Reimer, Holzminden), "The Double Bond of the lonone
Ring. Perfumes of the lonone Group," Ber. 77B (1944), 553. Chtm. Abstracts 40
(1946), 5401.
Y. R. Naves, "Sur de Soi-disant Formylations d'lonones," Helv. Chim. Acta 29, I
(1946), 12.
E. Earl Royals (Georgia School of Technol., Atlanta), "Cyclization of Pseudo
lonone by Acidic Reagents," Ind. Eng. Chem. 38 (1946), 546. Chem. Abstracts 40
(1946), 4023.
Y. R. Naves, "Sur le D&Ioublement de la d,tax-Ionone," Helv. Chim. Acta 30 (1947),
769.
Y. R. Naves, 0. Schwarzkopf and A. D. Lewis, "Sur les fipoxydes des lonones,"
Helv. Chim. Acta 30 (1947), 880.
Y. R. Naves, A. V. Grampoloff and P. Bachmann, "Etudes dans les Series des
Me*thyl-3-linalols, des Me*thyl-3-citrals et des Me*thyl-6-ionones," Helv. Chim. Acta
30 (1947), 1599.
M. Winter, H. Schinz and M. Stoll, "Synth&se de la 4-Me*thyl-ionone," Helv. Chim.
Acta 30 (1947), 2213.
A. Rouve* and M. Stoll, "Synthdse de la 5-Me*thyl-ionone," Helv. Chim. Acta 30
(1947), 2216.
Hans
Koster, "Perfumes of the lonone Group. Condensation of Citral with Ke-
tones," Chem. Ber. 80 (1947), 248. Chem. Abstracts 42 (1948), 4956.
THE IONONES 465
Dihydro-7-Ionone
Ci 3 H 22 O Mol. Weight 194.31 .
R.C CHa
C
HC2 CH-CHa-CHa-CO-CHs
CH 2
Occurrence. According to Ruzicka, Seidel and Pfeiffer l

d-dihydro-7-
ionone one of the volatile constituents of ambergris.
is (The chief constituent
of ambergris is ambreine, a solid nonvolatile triterpene alcohol. 2 )
Isolation. The
volatile constituents of the ambergris are isolated by steam distil-
lation of the mother liquor of the ambreine. The neutral portions of the steam dis-
are then distilled in vacua, separating the middle fractions bio 60 to bo.i 130
tillate
which contain the oxygenated constituents. Depending upon the quality of the
ambergris, these middle fractions amount to 1 .5-3% of the raw material used. Treat-
ment of the middle fractions with Girard's reagent Tand regeneration yield a mixture
of ketones, amounting to one-fifth of the above mentioned middle fractions. The
regenerated ketones are finally submitted to fractional distillation; bio 114-116.
Identification. By preparation of the semicarbazone m. 189-190.
Properties. Regenerating the ketone from its semicarbazone, Ruzicka

3
et al. found these properties for e/-dihydro-7-ionone:
bio 116M18 D -r-l30'

df 0.9347 ng 1.4789
Dihydro-7-ionone possesses the typical odor of ambergris, whereas the odor

of dihydro-a-ionone and dihydro-/8-ionone resembles that of eedarwood.
4
Dihydro-7-ionone has been synthesized by Ruzicka, Blichi and Jeger.
Use. Nothing is noted as yet in literature regarding the availability of
synthetic dihydro-7-ionone.
1
Helv. Chim. Acta 31 (1948), 827.
2
Cf. Ruzicka and Lardon, ibid. 29 (1946), 912. Ruzicka, Durst and Jeger, ibid. 30 (1947),
353. Jeger, Durst and Ruzicka, ibid. 30 (1947), 1859.
3
Ibid. 31 (1948), 827.
4
Ibid., 293.
466 KETONES
E. THE IRONES
Mol. Weight 206.32
x r
C
H/
"' \
'CH-CH = CH-CO CH,
C
C
H 2
7-Irone
(6-Methyl-7 -lonone)
/\
H H /C \
H C-C' 'CH-CH=CH-CO-CH,
a H 3 C C* C-CH=CH-CO-CH ;
JLjLnV^/K
y^~r
C
TT
2
alkalies n T
-Irone
<
or strong acids
(6-Methyl- a-Ionone) (8-Methyl- ft -lonone)
Irone, a hydroaromatic, unsaturated ketone was first described by Tiemann

and Kriigcr. 1 The extremely small yield of irone from oil of orris root,
and the presence have contributed to the considerable difficulties
of isomers,
connected with the elucidation of its structure. For a long time the formula
suggested by Tiemann and Kruger was accepted as correct, especially since
2
Merling appeared, at one time, to have succeeded in synthesizing an irone
of the same structure. More than twenty years later, however, Ruzicka,
3
Seidel and Schinz proved that the empirical molecular formula of natural
irone is CuHÔ, and not CiaTIôO as originally reported by Tiemann and
Kruger. Ruzicka and Bruggcr 4 also showed that the synthesis achieved
by Merling and Welde does not yield irone, but a-ionone. Gillam and West, 5
Evans and Gillam, 6 and Koster 7 noted that on treatment with acids and
alkali, irone seems to incur a shift in the position of the double bond. Such
isomerization resembles that found in the formation of a- and /3-ionones, and
is partly responsible for the variant physical properties noted for irones of
different origin, or isolated by varying methods.
In the course of their investigations, the above-named workers observed
that irone could be purified in part by the preparation of derivatives (for
example, the oxime or the phenylhydrazone) from which the parent ketone
could be regenerated. However, the properties of the ketones regenerated
from these derivatives (particularly from the thiosemicarbazone) differed from
those of the first isolates and suggested that irone exists in the form of several
THE IRONES 467
isomers. Experiments with oxidative degradation of irone led Ruzicka and

collaborators 8 to the erroneous conclusion that a major component of this
mixture of isomers is a ketone with a seven-membered ring. 9
It is only recently that the six-membered ring formula of irone has been es-
tablished by Ruzicka and his collaborators, and by Naves and his co-workers
two groups of prominent researchers who independently arrived at similar
conclusions.
Ruzicka et proved the structure of irone by means of a series of degra-
al.
dation products, which they obtained from tetrahydroirone, 10 from dihydro-

'
irone and dihydro-irane, 11 and also from irone itself. 2 Naves and Bach-
1
13
mann, on the other hand, arrived at their conclusion that irone possesses
a hexacyclic structure, by a comparison of the Raman spectra of dihydro-
irol with those of model substances containing six- and seven-membered ring
systems.
The two research groups, however, do not quite agree in respect to the uni-
formity of irone and to the position of one of the double bonds. According
to Naves and Bachmann, 14 irone is a chemically well-defined ketone which
gives a phenylscmicarbazone in. 162.5-163. The natural ketone consists
chiefly of 6-methyl-a-ionone, as deduced from the Raman spectra and its
similarity to that of a-ionone.
15
According to Ruzicka, Seidel, Schinz and Pfeiffer, natural irone extracted
from orris root contains about 75 per cent of 7-irone (an isomer with a semi-
cyclic double bond) and 25 per cent of a-irone. Carefully prepared irone
contains only traces of /3-ironc. These authors found that the phenylsemi-
carbazone derived from natural irone is a mixture which by fractional crystal-
lization can be divided into many fractions containing different proportions
of the derivatives of 7- and a-irone. 16 The highest melting point observed
(on the semicarbazone of 7-irone) was 178-179.
The presence of 7-irone, the principal constituent of the natural orris ke-
tone, can be inferred from the formation of formaldehyde when irone is

treated with ozone. 17 The /3,/3,7-trimethyl-pimelic acid, also obtained on
treatment of irone with ozone, is not due to the presence of a heptacyclic
compound as used to be thought, but to acid splitting from 1,1,2-trimethyl-
5-cyclohexanone-6-carboxylic acid, the primary unstable degradation prod-
uct of 7-irone. 18 On the other hand, the /3-keto acid, on ketonic splitting,
produces l,l,2-trimethyl-5-cyclohexanone, a compound isolated from the
neutral products of oxidation. The presence of the semicyclic methylene
19
group has been confirmed by a study of the infrared spectra.
The a-form, of which the original orris ketone contains about 25 per cent,
can be obtained from the 7-form by isomerization under the in-
artificially
fluence of weak acids (oxalic acid, for example). The mixture of 7- and a-
irone, in addition, contains a third isomer, viz., /3-irone, the quantity of which
seems to vary with the method of preparation. In a mixture of two or all
468 KETONES
three isomers, the percentage of each one can be determined by the following
rule 20 The amount of 7-irone is proportional to the quantity of formalde-
:
hyde formed on ozonization and determined as condensation product with

dimedone. The ratio of 0-irone can be established by a study of the ultra-
violet spectra, pure /3-irone showing a maximum at 295 imz, log e 4.05.
These two values make it possible to calculate the proportion of a-irone pres-
ent in the mixture.
21
Formic acid one of the most convenient agents for the quantitative
is
isomerization of 7-irone into a mixture of a- and /3-irone. Treatment with

22
strong acids (sulfuric acid) produces mixtures rich in /3-irone. Alkali, also,
is very effective and a great amount of /3-irone will be formed. The latter
isomer can be obtained in pure state through its crystalline semicarbazone. 23
Syntheses. Ruzicka et al. 24 synthesized dl-a- and t?/-/3-irone in the follow-
ing steps: 2,3-dimethyl-2-hcpten-6-one ->
5-methyl-geraniol pseudo-irone.
The a-form was obtained by cyclization under the influence of phosphoric
acid, whereas concentrated sulfuric acid gave /3-irone.
25
Naves, Grampoloff and Bachmann, working along similar lines and using
sulfuric acid for ring closure, obtained an a-irone which, however, seems to
consist of another stereoisomeric form different from that prepared by Ruzicka
and Naves expressed the opinion that synthetic
his co-workers. dl-a-ironc
(phenylsemicarbazone m. 174.5-175.5) possesses the trans-(2,&) structure,
whereas the a-irone isolated from orris root has chiefly the ctV(2,6) configu-
ration. (See page 473 for additional work of Naves.)
Possibilities of isonierism. For a- and 7-irone there exist two possibilities
of stereoisomerism (1) the one between the side chain and methyl group
:
(the isolated one) in respect to the ring. (2) cis-trans isomerism in regard to
the double bond of the chain. Thus for a synthetic and consequently op-
tically inactive a- and 7-irone four different forms may be postulated,
whereas for /3-irone the number
of possible isomers is reduced to two. Tn
the case of natural optically active irone, the number of possible forms is
doubled. Theoretically then eight different forms of each a- and 7-irone
and four of /3-irone can exist.
Occurrence. rf-lrone is present in the fraction b4 105-120 of orris root
oil the latter obtained by steam distillation of the dried rhizomes of Iris
florentina, I. germanica, and /. pallida. Ten kilograms of orris root yield
about 2 g. of irone. The same yield is obtained by extraction of the roots
with light petroleum ether. 26
Isolation. The irone can be isolated from oil of orris root in fairly pure state by
fractional distillation of the nonacidic portion, using the fraction b4 105-120. For
further purification Girard's reagents P and T are very convenient. Irone can also
be regenerated from the crystalline phenylsemicarbazone or from the amorphous
semicarbazone by steam distillation in the presence of an aqueous solution of phthalic
acid. Hydrolysis of the thiosernicarbazones seems to yield products of lesser purity.
The p-bromophenylhydrazones resist hydrolysis.
THE IRONES 469
Identification. A
citation of all the different melting points observed in earlier
investigations of various derivatives of irone would serve no practical purpose and
only add to the confusion, for the simple reason that the earlier workers dealt with
mixtures of isomers, the true composition and configuration of which they did not
know. (Cf. Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 27 Ruzicka et ai. 28 ) Gillam and West, 29 for
instance, prepared derivatives of irones from English, French and German products,
and obtained a divergence of melting points indicating the existence of several iso-
meric irones. French and English irones yielded bromophenylhydrazones melting at
174-175, and two thiosemicarbazones, (I) m. 184-185, (II) m. 112 (turbid), 131
(clear). On
treatment with sulfuric acid, the thiosemicarbazone of a German irone
originally melting at 120 was isomerized to a product m. 180, while the correspond-
ing derivative from an English irone melted at 156.
The latest investigations of Ruzicka et al., and Naves et al. have helped to clarify
the formerly so confused picture:
y-Irone (isolated from natural irone)
Phenylsemicarbazone m. 178-179
30
(1)
(2) Thiosemicarbazone m. 125-127 31
a-Irone (natural irone isomerized)
Phenylsemicarbazone m. 155; 32 160-161;

33 34
(1) 162.5-163
(2) Thiosemicarbazone m. 180 82
p-Bromophenylhydrazone m. 181.5-182
34
(3)
(4) Dinitro-2,4-phenylhydrazone m. 125.5M26 34
a-lrone (synthetic ketone}
Phenylsemicarbazone m. 166-167 m. 174.5-

36
(1) (besides amorphous portions);
36
175.5
Dinitro-2,4-phenylhydrazone m. 102.5-103
3<J
(2)
(3-Irone (natural irone isomerized)
(1) Semicarbazone m. 1G6-167; 37 167-1G8 3

(2) Phenylsemicarbazone m. 160-161 38
38
(3) Thiosemicarbazone m. 1G6-1G7; 37 165-1G6
p-Irone (synthetic ketone)
Phenylsemicarbazone 164-166
39
(1) (besides amorphous portions).
Natural irone is a slightly viscous oil which (especially in di-

Properties.
lution) possesses a strong odor characteristic of violet and dried orris root.
In the opinion of Ruzicka and collaborators, the odor of the a-isomer is su-
perior to that of the 7-isomer, while /3-irone, on the contrary, has an odor
approaching that of the ionones.
Natural Irone
Among earlier investigators, Tiemann and Kriiger 40

first reported for a
carefully purified irone:
b 16 144 D about +40 0'
d 20 0.939 nf? 1.5011

470 KETONES
For an irone purified by repeated fractionation and by treatment with
41
p-phenylhydrazine sulfonic acid Ruzicka et al. recorded :
20 146-152 <* D +46 V

7
dl 0.9395 nJJ 1.502
42
and later, for a genuine irone extracted from orris root by light petroleum
ether:
bo.02 72-74 D +42 0'
5 5
dl 0.9387 n{) 1.5007
On another specimen prepared by steam distillation:
bo.02 72-75 oi> +43 0'

5
dl 0.9410 n{f 1.5028
For a commercial product of Roure-Bertrand Fils, Grasse, similarly pre-

pared by steam distillation :
bo.02 72-75 OD +46 0'

6 5
dl 0.9378 nfe 1.5007
43
Naves and Bachmann observed these properties :
bio 133-134 df 0.9401
bi 96-97 D 4- 32 20'
n?? 1.5016
7-Irone (from natural irone)

**
Ruzicka, Schinz, and Seidel observed on pure 7-irone regenerated from
its phenylsemicarbazone (m. 177-179) by phthalic acid:
df 0.939
D +22 0'
5
n{> 1.505
a-Irone
Pure a-irone has not yet been isolated either from the naturally occurring
mixture of the 7- and a- forms, or from isomerization products, which always
.contain a certain amount of /3-irone.
Naves, Grampoloff, and Bachmann

45
report for their synthetic dZ-<*-irone
b3 . 2
df 0.9355
1.4970
THE IRONES 471
46
Schinz, Ruzicka, Seidel, and Tavel for their synthetic preparation :
bo.oi 68-73
9
dj 0.9345
1.5001
and a little later

47
for a somewhat purer product:
9
dl 0.9344
1.4971
/8-Irone
For a prepared by isomerization of natural irone with concentrated

/3-irone
sulfuric acid and by purification through its semicarbazone, Koster 48 recorded :
b2 97-98 aD +48 42'

8 5
dl 0.9472 no 1.5160
49
Ruzicka, Seidel, Schinz, and Tavel, for an analogous preparation, isomer-
ized with alkali :
b .i 85-90 D +41 36'

5 5
dl 0.9485 nj) 1.5205
and for synthetic c^-/3-irone:
bo.i 93
5
dl 0.9508
1.5198
Hydrogenating natural irone over Raney nickel, Naves and Bachmann

60
obtained a dihydro product, the semicarbazone of which melted at 203-

203.5, the dinitro-2,4-phenylhydrazone at 106-106.5. Using another
nickel catalyst Ruzicka and Seidel 61 obtained a mixture of dihydro-a- and
dihydro-7-irone. They isolated a semicarbazone m. 180-181, and a small
quantity of another semicarbazone m. 170-172.
62
Tetrahydro-irone yields a semicarbazone m. 203-204 and some lower
melting isomers (Ruzicka et al.). The ketone regenerated from this deriva-
tive has these properties:
b 10 135-136
5
dl 0.925
+35 0'
472 KETONES
63
By means of the Meerwein reaction irone is reduced to irol. This very
viscous alcohol shows:
bi 3 136-140
9
d} 0.9301
1.4941
The highest melting point of the allophanate so far observed is 197.

On treatment with hydroiodic acid in the presence of red phosphorus, irone
loseswater and yields a bicyclic hydrocarbon Ci 4 II 2 o, viz., irone b 9 113-115,
d2o 0.9402, no 1.5274, which on dehydrogenation with selenium is converted
64
to 1,2,6-trimethylnaphthalene. Ruzicka, Seidel and Schinz suggested the
following structural formula for irene :
HC
8
CH 3
C CH
H 3 C C C CH
56
Synthesizing irene from w-bromotoluol, Bogert and Apfelbaum confirmed
the correctness of the structural formula pictured above.
56
experimented with the synthesis of irone from rhodinal, but accord-
Verley
57
ing to Ruzicka and Brugger, the identity of the product thus obtained is
questionable.
Use. Irone one of the most valuable ingredients in the compounding
is
of fine violet scents used in perfumes and cosmetics. It is usually employed

in the form of oil of orris root concrete, or in more concentrated form as oil
of orris root tenfold.
l
Ber. 26 (1893), 2075; 28 (1895), 1757; 31 (1898), 808.
Merling and Welde, Liebigs Ann. 366 (1909), 129.
2
Ber. 41 (1908), 2066.
3
Helv. Chim. Ada 16 (1933), 1143.
4
J. prakt. Chem. 168 (1941), 125.
6
Nature 148 (1941), 114. /. Chem. Soc. (1942), 95, 484.
6
J. Chem. Soc. (1943), 565.
7
Ber. 77, No. 8 (1944), 559.
8
Helv. Chim. Ada 16 (1933), 1143, 1150; 23 (1940), 935, 959; 24 (1941), 1434; 26 (1942),
188, 199.
9
Cf. Simonsen, "The Terpenes," 2d Ed., Vol. I, 130. Cambridge Univ. Press, 1947.
10
Ruzicka, Seidel and Brugger, Helv. Chim. Ada 30 (1947), 2168.
11
Ruzicka and Seidel, ibid. 31 (1948), 160.
Ruzicka, Seidel, Schinz, and Tavel,
12
ibid., 257.
13
Ibid. 30 (1947), 2222 (sealed paper of June 10, 1943), 2233, 2241.
14
Ibid., 2230.
18
Ibid., 1807 (sealed paper of June 28, 1946). See also Ruzicka, Seidel, and Schinz, ibid.
31 (1948), 257.
THE IRONES 473
16
Ruzicka, Seidel, and Schinz, ibid. 16 (1933), 1143.
17
Ruzicka, Seidel, Schinz, and Pfeiffer, ibid. 30 (1947), 1807. Ruzicka et al., ibid. 31 (1948),
257.
18
Ruzicka, Seidel, Schinz, and Tavel, ibid. 31 (1948), 257.
19
Giinthard and Ruzicka, ibid., 642.
20
21
Ibid.
22
Ruzicka, Seidel, and Firmenich, ibid. 24 (1941), 1434. Cf. Roster, Ber. 77 (1944), 559.
Roster, Ber. 77 (1944), 559. Ruzicka, Seidel, Schinz, and Tavel, Helv. Chim. Ada 31
23
(1948), 257.
24
Helv. Chim. Ada 30 (1947), 1810 (sealed paper of June 28, 1946). See also ibid. 31 (1948),
422.
26
Ibid. 30 (1947), 1599. Naves, ibid. 31 (1948), 893.*
20
Ruzicka, Seidel, Schinz, and Tavel, ibid. 31
(1948), 257.
27
"Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 592. Chuit, Rev. gen. chim. 6 (1903), 433.
Helv. Chim. Ada 16 (1933), 1143, 1150; 23 (1940), 935, 959; 24 (1941), 1434.
29
/. Chem. Soc. (1942), 95, 484.
Ruzicka, Seidel, and Schinz, Helv. Chim. Ada 16 (1933), 1143.
30

31
Ruzicka, Seidel, and Firmenich, ibid. 24 (1941), 1434. Isomerization effected by dilute
32
sulfuric acid in the heat.

33
Ruzicka, Seidel, Schinz, and Tavel, ibid. 31 (1948), 257. Isomerization effected by for-
mic acid.
(Note to 32 and 33: Inasmuch as pure a-irone has not yet been isolated from the mixture
of a- and /3-ketones, the authors give these melting points with u certain reserve.)
34
Naves and Bachmann, Helv. Chim. Ada 30 (1947), 2222. The
indicated derivatives are
those obtained from natural irone, which these authors consider to be a-irone.
36
Schinz, Ruzicka, Seidel, and Tavel, ibid., 1814.
Naves, Grampoloff, and Bachmann, ibid., 1608. Naves, ibid., 31 (1948), 893.
36
37
Roster, Ber. 77 (1944), 559. Isomerization effected by concentrated sulfuric acid.
38
Ruzicka, Seidel, Schinz, and Tavel, Helv. Chim. Ada 31 (1948), 257. Isomerization
effected with alkali.
39
Ibid.
40
Ber. 26 (1893), 2675. Cf. Gildemeister arid Hoffman, "Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed.,
Vol. I, 592.
41
Helv. Chim. Ada 16 (1933), 1143.
42
Ibid. 31 (1948), 271.
43
Ibid. 30 (1947), 2226.
"Ibid. 16 (1933), 1143.
46
Ibid. 30 (1947), 1608.
46
Ibid., 1810.
47
Ibid. 31 (1948), 279.
48
Ber. 77 (1944), 559.
49
Helv. Chim. Ada 31 (1948), 257.
60
Ibid. 30 (1947), 2231.
51
31 (1948), 160.
Ibid.
62
Ibid. 24 (1941), 1437; 30 (1947), 2168; see also ibid. 2 (1919), 352.
63
64
Ibid. 16 (1933), 1143. Butt. soc. chim. [5], 2 (1935), 1205.
66
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 60 (1938), 930. 67
J. prakt. Chem. 168 (1941), 125.
*
In his latest publication, Naves [Helv. Chim. Ada 31 (1948), 1876] reports that in oil
of orris root he identified czs-(2,6) a-irone, and trans-(2,6) ot-irone, the phenyl-4-semicarba-
zones of which melt at 162M63 (dl: 164.5-165), and at 174.5-175.5, respectively.
Naves also identified neo-a-irone (b 2 .s di 0.9347, ao -8 15'; phenyl-4-semi-
107-108,
carbazone 181-182) among the natural constituents of orris root oil.
474 KETONES
F. AROMATIC KETONES
Introduction. Aromatic ketones are even more rare in essential oils than
are the aliphatic ketones. Some of the synthetic compounds, however, have
attained considerable importance in the perfume and especially in the soap
industry as they possess a powerful aromatic odor.
Acetophenone
Methyl phenyl ketone. Acetylbenzene. Hypnone
Occurrence. Acetophenone is the main constituent of oil of Stirlingia
latifolia.
Isolation. By fractional distillation, cooling of the corresponding fraction, and

recrystallization.
Acetophenone can be characterized by several methods:
Identification.
(1) Through the sodium nitroprusside color test, according to Mulliken:
l
To 2 cc. of a cold saturated aqueous solution of acetophenone add 2 drops of a 1%

aqueous sodium nitroprusside solution and then 2 drops of 10% sodium hydroxide
solution. Divide into two equal parts, viz., a and 6, adding to 6 3 drops of glacial
acetic acid. Part 6 on acidification turns blue, while part a is red changing to yellow
in 20 min.
Semicarbazone m. 198-199 corr. (from 50% alcohol), according to Shriner
(a)
and Turner; 2 m. 197, according to Wilson and Keenan; 3 m. 201-203, according
to Gilman and Nelson. 4
(b) Phenylhydrazone m. 105 (from alcohol), according to Fischer, and Ardagh
6
and collaborators 6 who point out that the white crystals rapidly darken on exposure
to air. The phenylhydrazone is prepared by shaking an aqueous solution of aceto-
phenone with an aqueous solution of phenylhydrazine hydrochloride and sodium
acetate.
2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 249-250 (from glacial acetic acid), according
(c)
to Campbell; 7 m. 238-240, according to Discherl and Nahm. 8 (Cf. also Allen. 9 )
(d) Hydrazone from N-methyl-/3-carbohydrazidopyridinium p- toluene sulfonate m.
10
191, by Allen and Gates.
(e) p-Iodobenzohydrazone m. 212 (corr.), by Sah and Hsu.
11
Properties. Acetophenone has a powerful, peculiar, sweet, and aromatic

odor.
AROMATIC KETONES 475
The
following properties have been reported by Timmermans and Hen-
12 13 14 15
naut-Roland, Briihl, Perkin, Noller and Adams, Senderens, 16 Norris and
17 18
Sturgis, and Oilman and Nelson:
12 - 16 ' 16 - 17
m. range 19.5-20.5 df 1.02810 12
12 14
b. 202 d}f 1.0329
16 6
b 746 201.5 (corr.) n{?' 1.53418 13
13 5
b 20 94.5 n{> 1.53031 12
18
b 13 87
Acetophenone almost insoluble in water, soluble in organic solvents, and

is
in concentrated sulfuric acid with orange-yellow color. It is volatile with

steam. This ketone does not form an addition compound with sodium bi-
sulfite.
On oxidation with potassium bichromate and sulfuric acid or with so-
dium hypochlorite solution, acetophenone, according to van Arendonk and
19
Cupery, yields benzoic acid.
Use. Acetophenone is used in perfumes of the floral type, especially haw-
thorn, wistaria, lilac, mimosa and foin-coupe*. Because of its powerful odor
and low price, acetophenone is a valuable adjunct in the scenting of soaps.
It, furthermore, serves in all kinds of technical preparations where efficient
odor coverage is required.
1
"Identification of Pure Organic Compounds," Vol. I, New York, Wiley (1904), 149.
2
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 52 (1930), 1269.
3
J. Assocn. Official Agr. Chem. 13 (1930), 390.
4
Rec. trav. chim. 65 (1936), 529.
B
Ber. 17 (1884), 576.
6
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 54 (1932), 721.
7
Analyst 61 (1936), 393.
8
Ber. 73 (1940), 450.
9
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 52 (1930), 2955.
10
J. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 600.
11
Rec. trav. chim. 59 (1940), 352.
12
/. chim. phys. 32 (1935), 524.
13
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 50 (1894), 131.
14
J. Chem,. Soc. 69 (1896), 1200.
16
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 46 (1924), 1893.
16
Ann. chim. phys. [8], 28 (1913), 312.
17
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 1417.
18
Rec. trav. chim. 66 (1936), 528.
19
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1931), 3184.
476 KETONES
>-Methylacetophenone
C9 H 10O Mol. Weight 134.17
Methyl-p-tolyl ketone. p-Acetyltoluene
CHrCO -<f \-CHa
Naves identified this aromatic ketone in the volatile oils

Occurrence. l
derived from the wood of the Brazilian Cabreuva tree (Myrocarpus fastigiatus
and M
frondosus Allem.) and of the rosewood tree (bois de rose)
.
,
Cerbelaud 2 .
has suggested that the ketone is a possible constituent of mimosa flower oil.
According to Naves, by fractional distillation in vacuo, and by conversion

3
Isolation.
of the ketone into its semicarbazone, which is very sparingly soluble in cold methyl
alcohol. The semicarbazone can be decomposed by treatment with a 10% aqueous
solution of oxalic acid; the regenerated ketone is removed by steam distillation.
Identification. p-Methylacetophenone may be characterized by the preparation of
Semicarbazone m. 209-210 (crystallized from alcohol), according to Naves; *
(1)
m. 210, according to Wilson and Keenan. 6 Sorge, 6 and Rupe and Steinbach 7 reported
a melting point of 204-205 (needles or plates from alcohol).
(2) 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 259-260 (crystallized from ethyl acetate),
according to Naves; m. 260.4 (from toluene), according to Ferrante and Bloom.
8 9
(3) p-Iodo-benzohydrazone m. 214, according to Sah and Hsii.

10
(4) Oxime m. 88 (crystallized from petroleum ether), by Naves.

11
p-Methylacetophenone is an oil (at room temperature) of

Properties.
powerful odor, reminiscent of blooming hawthorn. The following properties
have been reported by Naves, 12 Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 13 Groggins and
Nagel,
14
and Noller and Adams. 15
15
m. -23 14
(reported incorrectly d 20 1.0051
as -28 in Beilstein and df 1.0016 12
13
elsewhere) d\l 1.007-1.014
b 76 4 226.7 0.2 14
nf? 1.5335 *"
13 14
b 756 222-220 1.5331
1B
b 736 225 (corr.) Sol. Soluble in about 3 vol. of
b7 93.5 16
(vac. corr.) 60% alcohol. 13
12
bi.s 68
Whenoxidized with excess alkaline sodium hypochlorite, p-methylaceto-

16
phenone yields p-toluic acid m. 178, according to van Arendonk and Cupery ;
m. 180-180.5 (crystallized from acetic acid 50 per cent), according to Naves. 17

18
Oxidizing the ketone with potassium permanganate, Glaus obtained almost
quantitatively terephthalic acid which sublimes without melting at about 300.
Reduction of p-methylacetophenone with sodium and alcohol yields, according

to Klages and Keil, 19 methyl-p-tolyl carbinol b. 219; reduction with 5 per cent
sodium amalgam in 70 per cent alcohol gives, according to Glaus, 20 methyl-p-
tolyl pinacone m. 90 (uncorr.) (crystallized from alcohol).
Use. p-Methylacetophenone is used widely in perfumes of the floral type,
especially hawthorn, lilac, mimosa and cassie. Because of its powerful odor
and low price, it serves as a valuable adjunct in the scenting of soaps.
1
Cf. Helv. Chim. Acta 31 (1948), 44.
Parfumerie moderne May (1926), 99. Chemist & Druggist 105 (1926), 201.
2
3
Private communication. Cf. Helv. Chim. Acta 31 (1948), 44.
4
Ibid.
6
J. Assocn. Official Agr. Chem. 13 (1930), 390, 395.
Ber. 35 (1902), 1070.
7
Ber. 43 (1910), 3465.
8
9
Am. J. Pharm. 105 (1933), 383.
10
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 352.
11
12
Ibid.
13
"Die Atheriachen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 554.
14
Ind. Eng. Chem. 26 (1934), 1315.
16
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 46 (1924), 1893.
16
Ibid. 53 (1931), 3184.
17
18
Ber. 19 (1886), 234.
19
Ber. 36 (1903), 1635.
20
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 41 (1890), 403.
o-Hydroxyacetophenone
o-Acetylphenol
Occurrence. o-Acetylphenol occurs as such and possibly as methyl ether

in oil of Chione glabra.
Isolation. By fractional distillation, cooling of the fraction,and recrystallization.

Identification. o-Hydroxyacetophenone can be characterized by several methods:
(1) With ferric chloride it gives an intense reddish-violet color.
(2) By the preparation of several derivatives:
Semicarbazone m. 209-210, according to Cope, 1 and Pauly and Lockemann. 2
(a)
(b) Phenylhydrazone m. 109-110, according to Torrey and Brewster;
8
m. 108-
108.5 (corr.), according to Bogert and Marcus. 4
(c) a-Naphthoate m. 108 and /3-naphthoate 119, according to Virkar and Shah.
6
478 KETONES
6
Properties. The following properties have been reported by von Auwers,
7
and Shriner and Sharp:
6
b. 215-220 7
df 1.131
6 6
bi4 100 nf? 1.5593
Sol. Sparingly soluble in water, soluble in al-
cohol, ether, etc.
o-Hydroxyacetophenone is volatile with steam, while its p-isomer is not

volatile with steam.
8
Pauly and Lockemann suggested separating o-hydroxyacetophenone from
phenol through its copper derivative.
Use. o-Hydroxyacetophenone is used very little, if at all, in perfumes or
flavors.
1
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 57 (1935), 574. 6
./. Univ. Bombay 11, Pt. 3 (1942), 140.
6
Ber. 48 (1915), 30. Liebigs Ann. 408 (1915), 245.
2
3
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 36 (1913), 441. 7
J. Org. Chem. 4 (1939), 575.
4 8
Ibid. 41 (1919), 97. Ber. 48 (1915), 30.
jfr-Methoxyacetophenone
C 9 Hio0 2 Mol. Weight 150.17
p-Anisyl methyl ketone. p-Acetylanisole. "Crataegon"
OCH 3
Occurrence. This ketone has not been reported as a natural constituent of

essential oils.
p-Methoxyacetophenone could be isolated from volatile oils by cooling

Isolation.
the corresponding fraction to a low temperature, and by recrystallizatiori.
Identification. By the preparation of several derivatives:
(1) p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 195-195.5 (orange leaflets from alcohol), according
1
to linger.
2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 220 (corr.), according to Allen and Richmond;
2
(2)
m. 231.8 (corr.), according to Ferrante and Bloom; 3 m. 233-234 by Borsche and
Barthenheier. 4
o-Chlorbenzohydrazone m. 125-126 by Sun and Sah;
(3)
6
p-nitrobenzohydrazone
m. 199-200 by Chen. 8
Anisal-6is-(p-methoxyacetophenone) from anisaldehyde and p-methoxyaceto-
(4)
phenone, m. 104-105; disemicarbazone m. 235-237 (1 per second heating),
according to Schneider and Gramms.
7
Properties. p-Methoxyacetophenone is a crystalline mass possessing a

powerful, lasting odor reminiscent of p-methylacetophenone, heliotrope, and
syringa.
The following properties have been reported

by Gildemeister and Hoff-
8 9
mann, Gattermann, Ehrhardt and Maisch, von Auwers, 10 and Oilman and
Nelson: n
8 1'1
10
cong. pt. 34.7 dj 1.0818
9 8
b. 258 d 25 1.0959
8 8
b 36 158 d 20 1.0997
8
b 13 138 T$ 1.55489
8
b 10 136
Sol. at 20 Soluble in 4-5 vol. and more of 50%
8
alcohol; slightly soluble in water
Whentreated with excess alkaline sodium hypochlorite in cold methanol

solution, p-methoxyacetophenone yields p-methoxybenzoic acid m. 184, ac-
cording to van Arendonk and Cupery.
12
On oxidation with potassium per-
manganate in alkaline solution, the ketone gives p-methoxyphenylglyoxylic
acid m. 90 (anhydrous needles from benzene), according to Kogl and Becker. 13
Von Wacek and B6zard 14 found that degradation with pcracetic acid yielded
p-hydroxyanisole.
Use. p-Methoxyacetophenone is used like p-methylacetophenone but in
products of higher grade.
1
Liebigs Ann. 604 (1933), 279.
2
/. Org. Chem. 2 (1937), 224.
3
Am. J. Pharm. 106 (1933), 383.
4
Liebigs Ann. 653 (1942), 254.
6
Sci. Repts. Nail. Tsinghua Univ. [A], 2 (1934), 359. Chem. Abstracts 29 (1935), 466.
/. Chinese Chem. Soc. 3 (1935), 251. Chem. Abstracts 29 (1935), 7229.
7
Ber. 69 (1936), 2543.
8
"Die Xthcrischcn Olc," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 554.
9
Ber. 23 (1890), 1201. l
*J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1931), 3184.
13
Ann. 408 Liebigs Ann. 466 (1928), 236.
10
Liebigs (1915), 247.
11
Rec. trav. chim. 66 (1936), 529. 14
Ber. 74B (1941), 845.
jfr-Methoxyphenylacetone
Ci Hi 2 O 2 Mol. Weight 164.20
Anisketone
CH,0-<f V-CH.-CO-CH3
Occurrence. p-Methoxyphenylacetone possibly occurs in Russian oil of
anise, in oil of fennel, sweet and bitter. Tardy

l
reported its occurrence in
Chinese star anise oil.
Isolation. fractional distillation, after separation of the product

By by means of
the bisulfite complex, according to Tardy. 2
480 KETONES
Identification. Anisketone can be characterized by the preparation of several
derivatives:
(1)forms two oximes, according to Hoering; 3 1 m. 78-79, II m. 61-62.
It
(2) Semicarbazone m. 182, according to Behal and Tiffeneau.

4
On oxidation with moist silver oxide, anisketone gives, according to Tardy, 6 anisic
acid m. 183.
When treated with iodine and potassium hydroxide, anisketone yields iodoform and
4-methoxyphenylacetic acid, according to Tiffeneau and Daufresne.
8
Properties. an oil with an odor reminiscent of anise.

Anisketone is
The following properties have been reported by Gildemeister and Hoff-

7 8 9 10
mann, Balbiano, Hoering, and Wallach and Muller:
f.p. -15 08 dg 1.0707 9
b. 2G7-209 (corr.)
9
d 1.095 7
3 10
b 10 136-137 nf? 1.5253
Anisketone is not easily volatile with steam; it is somewhat soluble in water,

readily soluble in alcohol, ether, etc.
Use. Anisketone is used very little in the perfume and flavor industries.
1
Bull soc. chim. [3], 27 (1902), 990.
8
Ber. 38 (1905), 3480.
4
Compt. rend. 141 (1905), 597.
6
Bull. soc. chim. [3], 27 (1902), 990.
8
Compt. rend. 144 (1907), 1356.
7
"Die Atherischen ttle," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 555.
8
Atti accad. Lined [5], 17, II (1908), 262.
Ber. 38 (1905), 3480.
10
Liebigs Ann. 332 (1904), 324.
G. MISCELLANEOUS KETONES
d-l-Methyl-3-cyclohexanone
Pulegone, on boiling with anhydrous formic acid, or with alkali, or on heat-

ing with water at 250 in an autoclave, takes up water and is split into acetone
and d-l-methyl-3-cyclohexanone (Wallach). 1
MISCELLANEOUS KETONES 481
Occurrence. d-l-Methyl-3-cyclohexanone was first observed by Barrow-

2
cliff in the fraction b. 165-170 American oil of pennyroyal (Hedeoma
of
pulegioides [L.] Pers.), after the oil had been freed from pulegone by treatment
with bisulfite solution.
8
According to Naves, small quantities of c?-l-methyl-3-cyclohexanone occur
in the European type of oil of pennyroyal (Mentha pulegium L.). Bohnsack 4
isolated this ketone from the foreruns of Java citronella oil.
d-l-methyl-3-cyclohexanone from the fraction

6
Isolation. Barrowcliff isolated
165- 170 of American oil of pennyroyal by preparing the semicarbazone and regenerat-
ing the parent ketone from its semicarbazone.
(1) By preparation of the oxime m. 41-43
8
Identification. (Barrowcliff ).
(2) By preparation of the semicarbazone m. 182-183 (Barrowcliff ), m. 178-
7
178.5 (Naves
8
), m. 181-182
(Bohnsack ).
9
(3) On oxidation with potassium permanganate in alkaline solution, d-l-methyl-3-

cyelohexanone yields /3-methyl adipic acid m. 85-86 (Bohnsack ).
10
Properties. The following properties have been reported by Wallach,

11
14 16 16
Tiemann and Schmidt, 12 Tschugaev, 13 Barrowcliff, Bohnsack, and Naves:
b. 169 []f? +1 12' (2 g. oil + 3 g. ether

16
b. 167-168 14 in a 5 cm. tube)
bio 58 15
[a]f? + 12 42' (undiluted) 13
b2 52.0-52.5 16
+11 58' (c = 11.4 in
0.915 n
13
d2 i benzene)
df 0.9155 16
+8 9' (c = 11.5 in
12 13
d 20 0.9071 (from pulegone) methanol)
0.9115 (from isopulegone) 12
+10 35' (c = 11 in
16 13
dli 0.9176 ether)
ML 5
+ 1323' n
16
[] D 4- 12 55'
1.4456 n
1
nf,
16
n|? 1.4439
Use. d-l-methyl-3-cyclohexanone, as such, is not used in our industries.

1
Liebigs Ann. 289 (1896), 338, 340; 365 (1909), 243. Cf. Tiemann and Schmidt, Ber. 30
(1897), 23.
2
/. Chem. Soc. 91 (1907), 879.
3
Helv. Chim. Ada 26 (1943), 162.
4
Ber. 76 (1943), 564.
6
/. Chem. Soc. 91 (1907), 879.
Ibid.
7
Ibid.
8
Helv. Chim. Ada 26 (1943), 169.
9
Ber. 76 (1943), 567.
482 KETONES
10
Ibid. Cf. Wallach, Liebigs Ann. 289
(1896), 344, 345. Ber. 32 (1899), 3339.
Liebigs Ann. 289 (1896), 338, 339; 332 (1904), 337.
11
12
Ber. 30 (1897), 23.
13
Z. physik. Chem. 76 (1911), 472.
u J. Chem. Soc. 91 (1907), 875.
"Ber. 76 (1943), 571.
16
Helv. Chim. Ada 26 (1943), 162.
/-l-Methyl-4-acetyl-l-cyclohexene
p-Methyl-3-tetrahydroacetophenone
CH,
KLC
L
2
CH
H 2 C Ctt 2
CO
CH,
1
Occurrence. Roberts isolated from Himalaya cedar oil (deodar tree)
through the semicarbazone m. 103-1G4, 2% of a ketone, very probably
p-methyl-3-tetrahydroacetophenone which possessed the characteristic odor
of this oil.
2
More recently, Naves identified this cyclic ketone in the volatile oil
derived from the wood of the Brazilian Cabreuva tree (Myrocarpus fastigiatus
and M. frondosus Allem.).
Isolation. By in vacuo, elimination of the aldehydes and
fractionation of the oil
ketones which react with sodium sulfite solution, and by conversion into the semi-
carbazone. The can be decomposed by treatment with a 10% aqueous solution
latter
of oxalic acid; the free ketone is then removed by steam distillation.
3
Identification. (1) According to Naves, by preparation of the semicarbazone
m. 156-156.5 (crystallized from methanol) Roberts 4 reported for the semicarbazone
.
a melting point of 163M64 .
6
According to Naves, by catalytic hydrogenation into saturated ketone, viz.,
(2)
hexahydro-p-methyl acetophenone, and by preparation of the semicarbazones of the
two stereoisomeric forms, m. 158-161 and 182-183, respectively (crystallized from
methanol).
8
(3) According to Naves, by oxidation with concentrated sulfuric acid at 100 into
p-methyl acetophenone, which can be identified by the preparation of its semicarba-
zone m. 209-210 (crystallized from alcohol), and of its dinitro-2,4-phenylhydrazone
m. 257-259 (crystallized from ethyl acetate).
7
(4) Roberts prepared the dibromo-oxime m. 130.
8
Stephan and Helle
Properties. reported these properties of p-methyl-3-
tetrahydroacetophenone :
b4 68.5-70
d!S 0.9435
5
n}> 1.47421
9
For the natural product, Naves recorded
b3 . 3 01 [afe -35 6'
df 0.9371 ng> 1.4711
Oxidation with a solution of hypobromite (without cooling) yields p-toluic

acid m. 179-180.
The ketone is volatile with steam.
Use. M-Methyl-4-acetyl-l-cyclohexene, as such, is not used in our
industries.
1
J. Chem. Soc. 109 (1916), 791.
2
Cf. Helv. Chirn. Acta 31 (1948), 29, 44.
3
Ibid.
4
J. Chem. Soc. 109 (1916), 791.
6
Private communication. Cf. Helv. Chim. Acta 31 (1948), 29, 44.
e
ibid.
7
J. Chem. Soc. 109 (1916), 791.
*Ber. 36 (1902), 2151.
9
Private communication. Cf. Helv. Chim. Acta 31 (1948), 29, 44.
Perilla Ketone
C 10 II 14 02 Mol. Weight 166.21
/3-Furyl-isopentyl-ketone
HC
II
- C
II
CO CH2 CH2 CH
-
\CH
CH3
HC CH 3
\O /
Occurrence. Perilla ketone is the main constituent in the essential oil ob-
tained on steam distillation of the fresh herb Perilla frutescens Brit. fam.
Labiatae. More than 90 per cent of the oil distills at b 2 o 118-119.
Isolation. ketone forms an oxime CioHisC^N, m. 67 (from alcohol), from

Perilla
which the parent ketone can be regenerated by cleavage with dilute sulfuric acid.
The structural formula of perilla ketone was established by Goto. 1
484 KETONES
Identification. Perilla ketone can be characterized by the preparation of its
oxime m. 67 (Goto ), m. 66-67 (Sebe ).
(1)
2 3
(2) semicarbazone which crystallizes in the form of colorless needles m. 98-99

(Goto), m. 93-94 (Sebe).
4
Properties. Goto, and Sebe 5
reported these properties for perilla ketone:
4
b7 90-100 5
ng 1.4781
4 4 6
d|J 0.99002 nf 1.4764
5 4
df 0.9842 Mol. refr. 47.18
4
-136' 5
On oxidation with potassium permanganate perilla ketone yields isocaproic

acid b. 203-204, anilide m. 112.
Use. Perilla ketone, as such, is used very little in our industries.
1
/. Pharm. Soc. Japan 67 (1937), 17. Chem. Zentr. II (1937), 2082.
*Ibid.
4
6
Angustione
and
Dehydroangustione
Years ago Penfold, 1 when treating oil of Backhousia angustifolia F. Mull.

with sodium hydroxide solution, isolated a substance CioHÔa which could
be purified by the compounds formed with ammonia and with copper. A
later investigation by Gibson, Penfold and Simonsen, 2 and by the same au-
thors in collaboration with Cahn 3 proved that the new substance consisted
of two new /8-diketones, viz., angustione CiiHi 6 O 3 and dehydroangustione
,
CnHi 4 O3 . Both substances are the /3-diketones identified in nature;

first
they contain the ionone ring. Since their first isolation they have been re-
4
ported by Penfold to occur in many Australian essential oils.
MISCELLANEOUS KETQNES 486
Angustione
CnHi 6 O3 Mol. Weight 196.24

O
C
HC
/ \ /CO-CH3
2 C<X
I I
CH 3
O=C CH2
\C /
HC
/ \CH
3 3
Occurrence and Isolation. See above.

Identification. Angustione can be characterized by the preparation of the following
derivatives:
(1) Anhydroangustione-4- m. 145.
or -co-semicarbazone
(2) Anhydroangustione-4- or -6- phenylhydrazone m. 119-120.
(3) Anhydroangustione-4- or -6-p-bromophenylhydrazone m. 191.
(4) Anhydroangustione-4- or -6-oxime m. 41-43.
(5) Piperonylidene-angustione m. 166-167.
(6) On treatment with ferric chloride in dilute acetic acid, angustione yields 1,1,3-
trimethylcyclo-hexene-2-dione-(4,6), C 9H 12 2, m. 159-160.
Properties. When purified through the amino compound CiiH 17 () 2 N, m.

130-131, or through the copper compound C22H 3 oO 6 Cu, m. 192-193,
angustione had these properties:
bis 129 [a]546i -5 34'
diS 1.089 nl? 1.5092
On treatment with ferric chloride, the alcoholic solution of angustione de-

velops an intense orange-red color.
The synthetic d/-angustione has been prepared by hydrogenating dehydro-
5
angustione and likewise characterized by Simonsen and co-workers.
The properties of the racemic form were quite similar to the natural isolate.
1
Z
J. Chem. Soc. (1930), 1184.
3
Ibid. (1931), 286.
4
J. Chem. Education 9 (1932), 429.
6
/. Chem. Soc. (1931), 286.
486 KETONES
Dehydroangustione
Mol. Weight 194.22
O
C CH
/ \c-/
O=C C
\C/IH
H3 C CH 3
Occurrence and Isolation. See above.
Identification. Dehydroangustione can be characterized by the preparation of the
following derivatives:
(1) Aminodehydroangustione m. 151.
(2) a- and jS-Anhydrodehydroangustione-4- or -6-semicarbazone m. 138-139, and
173-175.
(3) Anhydrodehydroangustione-4- or -6-bromophenylhydrazone m. 247-248.
(4) Anhydrodehydroangustione-4- or -6-oxime m. 79-80.
(5) Piperonylidene-dehydroangustione m. 169- 170.
Properties. -When purified through its copper salt C 22 H 2 6O6Cu, m. 188-

190, dehydroangustione had these properties:
ha 126-127 [a] 54 6i -2 2'
5 " 5
dig' 1.103 nb 1.5313
On treatment with ferric chloride, an alcoholic solution of dehydroangus-

tione gives the same orange-red color as angustione.
Use. Angustione and dehydroangustione are not used in our industries.
Jasmone
CnHi 6 O Mol. Weight 164.24
3-Methyl-2-[2'-penten-yl]-2-cyclopenten-l-one
CH3
C
HC
/ C CH 2
- -
CH=CH CH CH3
- -
2 2
H2 C C=O
*
by Hesse, the constitution of this ketone was later eluci-
1
First described
dated by Huzicka and Pfeiffer 2 and by TrefY and Werner 3 who also suc-
*
In this connection, see Parfumerie moderne 28 (1934), 95 re: Sealed note of Mav 12,
1927, at Soc. Suisse de Cliimic, Basel, by Soc. anon. M. Naef & Cie.
ceeded in synthesizing jasmone. It is the first monocyclic five-membered

ring found in essential oils.
Occurrence. The volatile oil of Jasminum grandiflorum contains about 3
per cent jasmone.
Isolation. fractional distillation in vacuo of ethereal jasmine oil, be-? 70- 120,
By
and by the preparation of the oxime or semicarbazone from the fraction bs-e 108-
110 and regeneration of the parent ketone, by phthalic anhydride.
Identification. Jasmone can be characterized by the preparation of:
(1) The oxime m. 45.
(2) The semicarbazone m. 204-206, according to Treff and Werner/ and 209.5-
210 according to Ruzicka and Pfeiffer. 6
(3) Catalytic reduction gives dihydrojasmone bi2 120, semicarbazone m. 175-
176, and p-nitrophenylhydrazone m. 111, according to Ruzicka and Pfeiffer, 106-
6
107 (LaForge and Haller 7 ).
Properties. Jasmone is a light-colored oilwhich darkens on standing. It

has a characteristic jasmine-like odor. Ruzicka and Pfeiffer reported these
properties for pure jasmone:
b 775 257-258 (Hesse 8

) <* D
b 12 134-135 ng 1.4979
df 0.9437
Use. Jasmone almost indispensable for the compounding of jasmine

is
scents but, since jasmone is hard to synthesize, more easily obtainable ketones
of similar odor have lately been developed. Details will be found in the patent
9
literature.
1
Ber. 32 (1899), 2617.
*Helv. Chim. Ada 16 (1933), 1208.
3
Ber. 66 (1933), 1521; 68B (1935), 640.
*Ber. 66 (1933), 1521.
5
Helv. Chim. Ada 16 (1933), 1210.
6
Ibid.
7
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 68 (1936), 1777.
8
Ber. 32 (1899), 2617.
9
Hdne & French Patent No. 767,725, July 24, 1934. Givaudan & Cie., Soc. anon.
Co.,
German Patent No. 639,455, Dec. 5, 1936. Haller & LaForge, U. S. Patent No. 2,096,715,
Oct. 26, 1938.
H. Werner, "Constitution and Synthesis of Jasmone and Perfume Materials Re-

sembling Jasmone and Their Use," Fette u. Seifen 45 (1938), 623. Chem. Abstracts 33
(1939), 1880.
Heinz Hunsdiecker and E. Wirth, "Synthesis of Jasmone," Ber. 75B (1942), 460.
Everett L. Saul, "Jasmone Constitution and History of Its Synthesis," Am.
Perfumer 45, No. 5 (1943), 27. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 3881.
488 KETONES
Leptospermone
(Formerly Leptospermol)
C CH3
H 3 (\ / \ /
>C CH-COCHjrCH
H3 C/ 1 | \
0=C
H3 C
v C=O
CH3
CH
,
3
The compound Ci4H 20 04, formerly considered a phenol and called lepto-
spermol, has been shown more recently, however, by Briggs, Penfold and
Short 1 to be Ci5H 22 O4 and actually a tetraketone possessing probably the
structural formula pictured above. Briggs and collaborators, therefore, sug-
gested changing the old designation leptospermol to leptospermone.
Occurrence. In the oils distilled from various species of the genus lepto-
spermum.
Isolation. Leptospermone was isolated from these oils by extraction with a 4%

aqueous sodium hydroxide solution and purified by washing with a saturated aqueous
sodium bicarbonate solution, followed by distillation.
Identification. (1) On boiling with aniline and zinc chloride, leptospermone gives
anilinoleptospermone C2iH270aN, m. 91.
(2) On
heating with phenylhydrazine for a half hour, leptospermone yields the
anhydrophenylhydrazone C 2 iH 2 60 2 N2, m. 118.
(3) p-Toluidine and leptospermone yield the p-toluino derivative m. 101, according
to Briggs et al. 2
3
Properties. Briggs and collaborators reported the following properties of
leptospermone:
b 10 146 aD
95
' 9 5 '
d] 1.0688 nj) 1.5000
The ketone isa thick yellow liquid with a somewhat unpleasant odor.
Use. Leptospermone, as such, is not used in our industries; it is, however,
reported to possess anthelmintic activity.
1
J. Chem. Soc. (1938), 1193.
>
Ibid. (1945), 706.
Ibid. (1938), 1193.
LARGE RING KETONES 489
H. LARGE RING KETONES

Muscone
3-Methyl-l-cyclopentadecanone
H
C CH 3
(CH 2 )i2 CH 2
C=0
Occurrence. Years ago Walbaum l
recognized a ketone CioH 30 as the
principal odoriferous component of the Chinese or tonquin musk. This musk
is obtained from the dried secretion present in the musk sac located between
the umbilicus and the preputial follicles of the male musk deer (Moschus
moschiferus L.), a shy animal living in forests of the Himalaya Mountains
from India to Siberia. The crude brown secretion occurs in quantities up to
one ounce in the sac of the adult animal.
Zieglerand Weber, 2 Ruzicka and Stoll, 3 Naef & Cie., 4 and Hunsdiecker 6
succeeded in synthesizing racemic muscones while the natural /-rotatory mus-
cone was described by Ruzicka, 6 and by Ruzicka, Stoll, Huyser and Boeke-
7
noogen.
Isolation. The ether extract from the musk
glands is saponified with 10% alcoholic
potassium hydroxide and the neutral substances are fractionated by distillation.
Crystallization of the semicarbazones and hydrolysis with aqueous oxalic acid solution
concludes the isolation.
Identification. The semicarbazone of the naturally occurring /-rotatory muscone
8
melts at 134, according to Ruzicka; after repeated recrystallization, at 140-141,
according to Ruzicka and Stoll.
9
Ziegler and Weber

10
reported for the semicarbazone of the racemic synthetic
muscone a melting point of 133.5-134.5, while Ruzicka and Stoll u found m. 136-
137, and 143-144.
The phcnylsemicarbazone of the natural /-rotatory muscone melts at 158-160; the
same derivative of the synthetic racemic muscone melts at 170-171, according to
the last named authors. 12
Ruzicka and co-workers 13> u

Properties. reported the following properties
for the natural /-rotatory muscone:
13 13
b.5 130 nJJ 1.4802
14 4 14
0.8647 nj?e f 1.4496
14 2 14
0.9212 nja 6f 1.4006
18 14
0.9221 n}fe| 1.4797
13
[a] D ~13 I'
490 KETONES
The following properties have been reported by Ziegler and Weber, 15 Huns-
diecker,
16
and M. Naef & Cie. 17 for synthetic racemic muscone:
15 17
bi.2 128 df 0.9193
16 17
b .8 132-134 ng> 1.4798
Use. Muscone is used as an odor modifier and fixative in high-grade per-

fumes.
1
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 73 (1906), 480. Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1906), 98. German Patent No.
198,660.
2
Liebigs Ann. 612 (1934), 164.
9
Helv. Chim. Acta 17 (1934), 1308.
4
French Patent No. 776,064, Jan. 16, 1935.
5
Ber. 75B (1942), 1197.
6
Helv. Chim. Acta 9 (1925), 715.
7
Ibid. 13 (1930), 1152.
9
Ibid. 9 (1926), 715.
9
Ibid. 17 (1934), 1310.
10
Liebigs Ann. 612 (1934), 171.
11
Helv.' Chim. Acta 17 (1934), 1310, 1317.
12
Ibid.
13
Ibid. 9 (1925), 715.
"Ibid. 13 (1930), 1173.
Liebigs Ann. 612 (1934), 171.
15
16
Ber. 76B (1942), 1201.
17
French Patent No. 776,064, Jan. 16, 1935.
L. Ruzicka, H. Schinz und M. Pfeiffer, "Zur Kenntnis des Kohlenstoffringes

tlber die Herstellung methylierter 14-, 15- and 17-gliedriger cyclischer Ketone,"
Helv. Chim. Acta 11 (1928), 686.
R. W.
Moncrieff, "The Biological Derivation of Civetone and Muscone/' Soap, Per-
fumery & Cosmetics 20, No. 3 (1947), 261.
M. Stoll and A. Rouv6, "Nouvelle Synthese de la Muscone," Helv. Chim. Ada 30
(1947), 2019.
M. and A. Commarmont, "Transformation de
Stoll la Cyclo-pentade"cene-2-onc-l
en Muscone," Helv. Chim. Acta 31 (1948), 554.
Civetone
C 17 H30O Mol. Weight 250.41
9-Cycloheptadecenone
HC (CH2 )r-i
C=O
HC (CH 2 )7
Occurrence.Civetone is a very important constituent of civet, a glandular

secretion obtained from a pouch located near the genitalia of both male and
female civet cats. These animals, Vivirra civetta and Vivirra zibetha, occur
respectively in Africa and southern Asia. Most of the commercial product
is gathered in Abyssinia. Sack L isolated from civet the odoriferous constitu-
ent, a ketone which is present in quantities of 2.5-3.5 per cent. Civetol and
skatol, too, occur in civet.
2
Isolation. According to Ruzicka, the lipoids of the civet gland contents are hy-
drolyzcd with 10% alcoholic potassium hydroxide. After fractionation, the small
amount of semicarbazones of fraction bi.s 130-170 are recrystallized and decomposed
with concentrated oxalic acid solution, yielding thereby civetone.
Identification. Civetone can be identified by the preparation of derivatives:
(1) Semicarbazone m. 190-191 (Hunsdiecker ), m. 185-186 (Ruzicka ).
3 4
p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 125, decomposes

4
(2) in light (Ruzicka ).
Properties. The
following properties have been reported by Ruzicka
4
for
the natural civetone, and by Hunsdiecker 6 for the synthetic product:
5 4
m. 37.5-38.5 df 0.9135
4 4
m. 31 D
4 4
b .5 145 n?J 1.4820
Reduction with platinum in alcohol yields cycloheptadecanone m. 64-

64.5.
More recently Stoll, Hulstkamp and Rouve*
6
succeeded in synthesizing
natural civetone (isomer a) to which they ascribe the cis configuration, where-
as the isomer /3 possesses the trans configuration. The latter can be con-
verted into the cis form (natural civetone or civetone isomer a).
These authors reported the following properties:
Isomers
Civetone Natural (cis) a (cis) (trans)
m. 31-32 31-32 29-30
df 0.917 0.915 0.913
ng 1.4830 1.4827 1.4812
Semicarbazone
m. 186-187 186-187 195-196
Use. Civetone is used in high-grade perfumes, to which it imparts a charac-

teristic and lasting note.
1
Chem. Ztg. 39 (1915), 538. German Patent No. 279,313 (1912).
2
Helv. Chim. Ada 9 (1926), 230.
3
Ber. 76B (1943), 142.
4
Helv. Chim. Acta 9 (1926), 239, 240.
6
Ber. 76B (1943), 142.
*Helv. Chim. Acta. 31 (1948), 543.
492 KETONES
R. W.
Moncrieff "The Biological Derivation of Civetone and Muscone," Soap, Per-
,
fumery & Cosmetics 20, No. 3 (1947), 261.

Eric Hardy, "Animals in Perfumery. I. The Civet," Perfumery Essential Oil Record
38, No. 8 (1947), 276.
Dihydrocivetone
Cycloheptadecanone
(CH 2 ) lfl C=0
2
According to Stevens and Erickson, and Stevens, dihydro-
1
Occurrence.
civetone occurs in the scent glands of the male and female Louisiana muskrat
(Ondatra zibcthicus rivalicius) and is accompanied by exaltone, cyclotrideca-
none and cyclononadecanone, these ketones amounting to about 2 per cent.
The major part of the lipoids present in these glands,
however, consists of di-
hydrocivetol (58 per cent) and normuscol (40 per cent). On oxidation with
chromic acid these two alcohols form additional quantities of dihydrocive-
tone and exaltone.
Isolation. Stevens and Erickson 3

isolated dihydrocivetone by hydrolyzing the ether
extract of the scent glands and by preparing the semicarbazone from the fraction bi
152-155.
Ruzicka, Stoll and Schinz synthesized dihydrocivetone by distilling the thorium
4
salts of dicarboxylic acid, while Ziegier et al. 6 obtained the synthetic product through
the dinitriles under the influence of alkali metals.
Identification. Stevens and Erickson 6 prepared the following derivatives of natu-
rally occurring dihydrocivetone:
(1) Semicarbazone in. 190-190.5.
(2) Oxime 63-64.
(3) Iso-oxime 121.5-123.
Ruzicka et al. 7 reported these derivatives of synthetic dihydrocivetone:
(1) Semicarbazone m. 187, m. 191.
(2) Oxime m. 63.
(3) Iso-oxime m. 123-124.
(4) Benzaldehyde addition compound 113-114.
8
Properties. According to Stevens and Erickson, naturally occurring di-
hydrocivetone has these properties:

O O
1
m. 59-61
bn 189
nf? 1.4622
9 10
Ruzicka et al., and Ziegler, Eberle and Ohlinger recorded the following
properties for synthetic dihydrocivetone:
9 9
m. 63-64 nj> 1.4602
9 9
bo.s 145 nK* 1.4492
10 2 9
bo.i 145 n^ e r 1.4596
9 9
dj 0.8830 ng 1.4688
Because of its musk-like odor, dihydrocivetone

Use. is used as an odor
modifier and as a fixative in high-grade perfumes.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 144.
2
Ibid. 67 (1945), 907.
3
Ibid. 64 (1942), 144.
4
Helv. Chim. Acta 9 (1926), 249.
6
Liebigs Ann. 604 (1933), 94; 613 (1934), 43.
6
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 144.
7
Helv. Chim. Acta 9 (1926), 230, 249.
8
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 144.
9
Helv. Chim. Acta 9 (1926), 230, 249, 499; 13 (1930), 1152.
Liebigs Ann. 604 (1933), 94.
10
Exaltone
Normuscone. Cyclopentadecanone
(CH 2 ) 14 C=0
Occurrence. Stevens and Erickson l

identified exaltone in the scent glands
of the Louisiana muskrat (Ondatra zibethicus rivalicius), where it occurs, to-
gether with dihydrocivetone, in the amount about 2 per cent. The major
of
part of this musk consists of dihydrocivetol (58 per cent) and normuscol (40
per cent).
Isolation. hydrolysis of the ether extract of the scent glands and preparation
By
of the semicarbazone from the neutral fraction bi 125.
Identification. Exaltone can be characterized by the preparation of derivatives:
(1) Semicarbazone m. 186-187, according to Stevens and Erickson; 2 187-188,
according to Ruzicka, Stoll and Schinz.
3
(2) 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 108-109, according to Stevens and Erickson.

4
(3) J-Menthydrazone m. 138.5-139.5, by the same authors.

5
Properties. following properties have been reported by Stevens and

The
6 7
Erickson, for natural exaltone; and by Ruzicka, Stoll and Schinz, by Ziegler,
494 KETONES
Eberle and Ohlinger, 8 by Ruzicka, Stoll, Huyser and Boekenoogen, 9 and by
10
Ruzicka, Brugger, Pfeiffer, Schinz and Stoll for the synthetic exaltone:
6 10
m. 63-65.5 ng 1.4637
7 2 9
63 nj?e f 1.4510
8 9
bo.i 120 nj 1.4616
f
11 9 9
dj 0.8683 1.4601
ng|
6 5
'
9
dl 0.8895
10
df 0.8973
n
Ruzicka, Stoll and Schinz succeeded in synthesizing exaltone through dis-
tillation of the thorium salts of dicarboxylic acid, while Ziegler, Eberle and
12
Ohlinger achieved the same result by cyclization of dinitriles under the
influence of alkali metal.
Oxidation of exaltone with persulfuric acid (Carols acid) yields the corre-
sponding musk lactone, viz., exaltolide.
Use. Exaltone is used in high-grade perfumes. Because of its high cryo-
scopic constant, exaltone serves in analytical chemistry as a solvent for the

determination of molecular weights.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 144.
*
Ibid.
3
Helv. Chim. Ada 9 (1926), 249.
*/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 144.
6
Ibid.
*Ibid.
7
Helv. Chim. Acta 9 (1926), 249.
Liebigs Ann. 504 (1933), 126.
8
9
Helv. Chim. Acta 13 (1930), 1172.
10
Ibid. 9 (1926), 499.
" Ibid. 249.
12
Liebigs Ann. 604 (1933), 126.
I. KETONES OF DOUBTFUL CONSTITUTION
Santalone
CiiHioO Mol. Weight 164.24
The constitution of this ketone has not been established.

1
Occurrence. In East Indian sandalwood oil, according to Muller, and
Schimmel & Co. 2
Isolation. By fractional distillation, preparation of the semicarbazone, and regen-

eration of the ketone.
KETONES OF DOUBTFUL CONSTITUTION 495
Identification. Santalone can be characterized by the preparation:

(1) Of a semicarbazone m. 174-176.
(2) Of an oxime m. 74.5-75.5.
Properties. The following properties have been reported by the afore-

named authors:
b. 214-215 01 <XD -62 0' l
b. 213-216 2 <* D -4132 /2

b^ 88-89 1
n|? 1.50021 2
2
d}i 0.9909
d^ 0.9906 *
Use. Santalone as such is not used in our industry.

1
Arch. Pharm. 238 (1900), 366, 373.
2
Ber. Schimmel &
Co., Oct. (1910), 105.
Parmone
Parmone is isomeric with the ionones. Its structural formula has not yet
been definitely established.
1
Occurrence. According to Ruzicka, parmone occurs in the absolute oil of
violet flowers, but not in the oil derived from violet leaves.
Isolation. Ruzicka and Schinz 2 treated the fraction bi2 80-100 (D +5 54',
d 2 o 0.924), of an oil derived by double steam distillation of a Victoria violet flower ex-
tract, with semicarbazide, decomposed the semicarbazone with aqueous oxalic acid,
and steam distilled the ketones. On treating the distillate with Girard reagent T, a
fraction rich in parmone was obtained: bi2 110-120.
Identification. Parmone can be identified through the preparation of its phenyl-
semicarbazone m. 166-168, and of the p-bromophenylhydrazone m. 132-133.
Properties. The odor of parmone in dilution is more nearly like that of

violet flowers than is the odor of the ionones, methyl ionones, or irone.
b 12 110-120
Use. Natural parmone as isolated from violet flowers is not used in our
industries, nor have any reports on its synthesis yet reached the literature.
1
Compt. rend. 17th Congr. chim. ind. t Paris, Sept.-Oct. (1937), 915. Chem. Abstracts 32
(1938), 6805.
2
Helv. Chim. Acta 25 (1942), 765, 773.
V. PHENOLS AND PHENOL ETHERS
Introduction. Phenols and phenol ethers belong among the most impor-
tant constituents of volatile oils. Some oils for example, thyme and origa-
num owe their value in the pharmaceutical field almost entirely to the anti-
septic and germicidal properties of their phenolic content. Others are most
popular flavoring ingredients for instance, oil of clove, anise, estragon, sas-
safras, etc. Most phenols and phenol ethers possess a powerful aromatic
odor and flavor.
The phenols form water soluble salts in dilute (3 to 5 per cent) alkali solu-
tion, which property offers a convenient method for the separation of phenols
from nonphenolic constituents. For this purpose the volatile oils, or frac-
tions, are shaken with dilute aqueous alkaline solutions, the two layers sepa-
rated, the water soluble salts decomposed by acidification, and the regenerated
phenols isolated by steam distillation or ether extraction. Thymol and car-
vacrol can be steam distilled from the alkaline solution without previous
acidification. Details will be found in the special part. Several phenols and
phenol ethers can be isolated by cooling the oil, or the proper fraction, to a
low temperature whereby these compounds separate in crystalline form.
p-Isopropylphenol
C H 12 O (Australol) Mol. Weight 136.19
l-Hydroxy-4-isopropylbenzene. p-Hydroxycumene. p-Cumenol

OH
CH
H C
X CH
3 3
Occurrence. Investigating the composition of oil of Eucalyptus polybractea

R. T. Baker, which formerly was believed to contain a new phenol called
australol, Earl and Trikojus found that in reality australol is identical with
:
compound from
2
p-isopropylphenol. Penfold isolated this oil of Eucalyptus
Bakeri Maiden.
Isolation. By the formation of a water-soluble salt in an aqueous alkali solution and

regeneration by acidification, etc.
499
500 PHENOLS AND PHENOL ETHERS
According to Vavon and Zaharia, p-isopropylphenol can be isolated from an alkaline
3
solution by extracting the latter with ether.

Identification. By preparation of its benzoate m. 71 (Huston et al. 4 ), ra. 71.5
(Earl and Trikojus ), and m. 73-74 (Penfold ).
6 6
Properties. Penfold,
7
Earl and Trikojus, 8 Bert, 9 von Braun, 10 Vavon and
11
Callier, and Huston et al.
12
reported these properties of p-isopropylphenol :
m. 62-63 (leaflets from petroleum ether) 7
8
m. 00
9
b. 228
b 74 5 228-229 12
9
b 19 119
bi2 112 -115 010
b 10 109-111 011
Use. p-Isopropylphenol, as such, is used very little in the perfume and

flavor industries.
1
J. Proc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales 69 (1925), 301. Cf. Robinson and Smith, ibid. 48 (1914),
518.
2
Ibid. 61 (1927), 180.
3
Compt. rend. 187 (1928), 347.
4
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1945), 899.
6
6
Ibid. 61 (1927), 180.
7
Ibid.
*Ibid. 59 (1926), 301.
9
Compt. rend. 177 (1923), 453. Bull. soc. chim. [4], 37 (1925), 1252, 1398.
Liebigs Ann. 472 (1929), 65.
l(t
11
Bull. soc. chim. [4], 41 (1927), 678.
* J. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1945), 899.
Thymol
3-Hydroxy-p-cymene. 3-Methyl-6-isopropylphenol. "Thyme Camphor"

CH 3
Occurrence. Thymol is the main constituent of several important oils be-

longing to the Labiatae family, for example, oil of thyme (Thymus vulgaris)
and ajowan; it also occurs in oils derived from several species of Ocimum,
PHENOLS AND PHENOL ETHERS 501
such as 0. gratissimum and 0. viride; furthermore in Monarda punctata,

oil of
etc. For details see Albers, 1 "The Occurrence of Thymol and Carvacrol in
the Plant Kingdom and Their Significance in Botanical Systematics." Occa-
sionallythymol crystallizes from these oils at ordinary temperature. Fre-
quently thymol in essential oils is accompanied by carvacrol.
Isolation. Thymol can be isolated from volatile oils:

(1) By crystallization at low temperature.
(2) By fractional distillation.
(3) the preparation of water soluble salt in dilute aqueous alkali solution from
By
which the thymol can be regenerated by extraction with ether or by steam distillation.
(Compare with "Carvacrol.")
Identification. Thymol can be characterized by several methods:
Phenylurethane m. 106-107, according to Weehuizen.
2
(a)
(b) a-Naphthylurethane m. 160, according to French and Wirtel.
3
(c) p-Bromobenzene sulfonate m. 103.5, by Sekera.

4
(d) 3,5-Dinitrobenzoate m. 103.2, by Phillips and Keenan.

5
(e) p-Iodophenylurethane m. 175-176, by Sah and Young.

6
(f) By coupling with diazotized p-nitroaniline and subsequent chroma tographic
separation of the derived dyes it is possible to identify thymol in a mixture of several

hydroxy benzenes, according to Bieienberg and Fischer.
7
(2) By oxidation:
Using potassium bichromate and sulfuric acid, Bargellini oxidized thymol, or its
8
nitroso and amino compounds, to thymoquinone m. 44-4(>. Colin and Richter 9

mentioned also the use of magnesium dioxide for the preparation of thymoquinone
from thymol.
(3)By color reactions:
When fused with phthalic anhydride, thymol develops a strongly violet-red to red
color, and in dilute alkaline solution an intense blue color (thymol phthalein).
When treated with ferric chloride, an alcoholic solution of thymol, contrary to
carvacrol, does not show any color reaction, but when dissolved in concentrated sul-
furic acid, thymol forms thymol sulfonic acid Cel^SOsHHCHsHCaHhHOH), the
10
latter, according to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, producing a violet color with ferric
chloride.
The U.S.P. XIII 574) suggests the two following color reactions:
(p.
Dissolve a very small crystal of thymol in 1 cc. of glacial acetic acid, add G drops of
sulfuric acid and 1 drop of nitric acid the liquid shows a deep bluish-green color when
:
viewed by reflected light.

Heat about 1 g. of thymol in a test tube in a water bath with 5 cc. of a 10 per cent
solution of sodium hydroxide: a clear, colorless, or pale red solution is formed, which
becomes darker on standing, without the separation of oily drops. Upon the addition
of a few drops of chloroform to this solution and agitating the mixture, a violet color
is produced.
Quantitative Determination. phenols, thymol forms water soluble

Like all
salts in dilute (5-10 per cent) aqueous solutions of alkalies, which property is
used for the quantitative determination of thymol. See Vol. I, Chapter 4,
"Examination and Analysis of Essential Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates/' p. 291.
Properties. Thymol forms transparent hexagonal colorless monoclinic or
crystals. Its odor is reminiscent of thyme. Thymol crystals sink in water

and therefore have a specific gravity above 1.0. In liquid phase, however,
this phenol floats on the surface of water. Thymol can be undercooled con-
ll
siderably below its melting point without solidifying (cf. Meyer and Pfaff ).
The following properties have been reported by Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 12
13 14 15
Meyer and Pfaff, Perkin, and Nasini and Bernheimer:
i24.4 15
cong. pt. 49-50 12
Q4 0.9689
m. 50-51.5 12
aj20
20 0.9757 14
(undercooled)
13 14 16
dg 0.9790 (undercooled)
14 24 - 4 15
b. 233.5 (corr.) nD 1.51893
12 12
233-234 1.52269 (undercooled)
Thymol is 1200) and in glycerol (1 1000),

only sparingly soluble in water (1 : :
better in paraffin oil (1:20), and readily soluble in alcohol, ether, chloroform,
benzene, or glacial acetic acid. It is soluble in volatile and fatty oils, and
volatile with steam.
Active carbon has been observed to exert a catalytic effect upon thymol
and should be used cautiously in connection with decolorization procedures
(cf. Kimura 17
)
Use. Thymol was originally introduced as a disinfectant in lieu of carbolic

acid,having the advantage of a more pleasant odor. Thymol, however, has
the drawbacks of producing a strong local irritant effect and of being only
sparingly soluble in water. In the absence of large amounts of organic mat-
ter, thymol seems to possess considerably more powerful antibacterial prop-
erties than carbolic acid. Thymol is employed in many of the antiseptic
mixtures intended for use upon mucous cavities, especially in gargles, mouth
washes, other oral preparations, and as a local anesthetic in toothache. Be-
cause of its strong local irritant action, thymol cannot be applied, without
some discomfort, than
part in 1,000. Thymol is also
in stronger solutions 1
used as a gastro-intestinal disinfectant in fermentative gastritis, enteritis, and

similar cases.
Another important use of thymol is as a vermifuge against tapeworm and
probably forms of intestinal parasites, especially
all the hookworm. For this
purpose thymol must be applied in such large doses that there exists danger
of poisoning unless absorption is guarded against.
Thymol isfurthermore used for the compounding of synthetic essential
oils; it also serves as a starting material for the making of synthetic menthol.
1
Pharm. Arch. 13, May
(1942).
2
flee. trav. chim. 37 (1918), 268.
8
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 48 (1926), 1738.
. 65 (1933), 421.
6
Ibid. 63 (1931), 1926.
6
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 357.
Brennstoff-Chem. 22 (1941), 278.
7
8
Gazz. chim. ital. 63 (1923), 238.
"Die Riechstoffc," 2d Ed., 116.
9
1
11
Z. anorg. Chem. 217 (1934), 257.
13
Z. anorg. Chem. 217 (1934), 257.
"/. Chem. Soc. 69 (1896), 1183.
16
Gazz. chim. 16 (1885), 84. Jahresber. Chem. (1885), 314.
ital.
18
Cf. Pardee and Weinrich, re: calculated value of d for liquid at 60F/4C., Ind. Eng.
Chem. 36 (1944), 603.
Carvacrol
2-Hydroxy-p-cymcne. 2-Methyl-5-isopropyl phenol
CHa
Occurrence. Carvacrol forms the main constituent of several important

volatile oils derived from various species of the Labiatae family, particularly
Spanish, Moroccan and Syrian oil of
origanum (Coridothymus capitatas syn.
Thymus capitatus), also oil of savory, marjoram, Monarda punctata, Pycnan-
themum lanccolatum, etc. In many other oils carvacrol occurs as a minor
constituent. For details, see Albers, 1 "The Occurrence of Thymol and Car-
vacrol in the Plant Kingdom and Their Significance in Botanical System-
atics."
In aqueous alkali solutions, carvacrol forms a water soluble salt from

Isolation.
which this phenol can be regenerated by extraction with ether or by steam distillation.
Identification. Carvacrol may be characterized by several methods:
(a) Phenylurethane m. 134-135, according to Weehuizen, and Goldschmidt.
2 3
(b) a-Naphthymrethane m. 116, according to French and Wirtel.

4
(c) Substituted phenylurethanes, by Sah and Young:

6
p-iodo m. 135-136 o
p-bromo m. 136-137
-io<
o
p-nitro m. 143
With but in a very concentrated alcoholic solution, carvacrol develops
ferric chloride
a fugitive green color, a means of distinguishing carvacrol from thymol.
Bielenberg and Fischer recommended the coupling of p-nitroaniline with the sodium
6
salt and chromatographic separation of the dye from other hydroxy benzenes as a
means of identifying carvacrol in the presence of several phenols.
Puxeddu 7 had earlier used a modification of this technique for the same purpose.
This author suggested that the sodium hydroxide extract be coupled with diazonium
chloride and the colored hydroxy azo derivative purified by crystallization. The
hydroxy azo compound is decomposed with phenylhydrazine and the amino phenol
purified.
(3) By oxidation:
Dissolving carvacrol in concentrated sulfuric acid, and diluting and oxidizing the
8
phenol with manganese dioxide, Carstarijen obtained yellow plates of thymoquinone
m. 45.5. Glaus and Fahrion 9 used potassium permanganate for the oxidation,
whereas Reychlcr 10 applied potassium chromate for the preparation of the same
product. Thymoquinone is volatile with steam.
11
According to Jacobsen, carvacrol on prolonged gentle warming with potassium
(4)
hydroxide is converted into isohydroxycuminic acid (CHa^CH-CelÔH^COOH,
which volatilizes with steam and melts at 93.
Properties. When
freshly distilled, carvacrol is a colorless, somewhat vis-
cid liquid which darkens on exposure to air and light. Carvacrol can be
cooled considerably below its melting point before it solidifies.
12
Thefollowing properties have been reported by Gildemeister, John and
13 14 15 16
Beetz, Dzirkal, Semmler, and Gildemeister and Hoffmann:
m. 1
13
Qj20
4 0.9772 l4
13 12
b. 237.5 df 0.976 (from origanum oil)
14 12
236.8-237.4 0.980 (from origanum oil)
12 12
7 42 235.5-23(>.2 (from 1.52338 (from origanum oil)
origanum oil) Sol. Soluble in 2-3 vol. of 70% al-

15 16
119 cohol
Carvacrol, like thymol, is volatile with steam, even from strongly alkaline
solutions, a property not shared by other phenols, except thymol. It is solu-
ble in concentrated sulfuric acid with sulfonation, sparingly soluble in water,
and readily soluble in alcohol or ether. Soluble in alkalies with formation of
a water soluble from which carvacrol, like thymol, can be extracted with
salt
ether. Stoermer and Kippe 17 reported that in strong alkali for example,
in a 30-40 per cent aqueous sodium hydroxide solution the sodium com-
pound of carvacrol goes into the ether layer, while thymol under the same
condition dissolves as pure phenol in the ether layer. Sherk 18 found that,
from a dilute (5 per cent) aqueous sodium hydroxide solution, either carva-
crol or thymol can be regenerated as pure phenols by ether extraction of the
alkaline solution.
19
According to Hubacher, carvacrol phthalein m. 293.5-294.7 (corr.)
turns from colorless to blue at a pH 9.5 to 10.5, and in concentrated sulfuric
acid purple red.
20 21
Brunei, and Paolini
found that, on hydrogenation with a nickel cata-
lyst, according to Sabatier and Senderens, carvacrol yields a mixture of two
isomeric alcohols, viz., a- and /3-carvacromenthol, the latter on oxidation with
chromic acid forming i-tetrahydrocarvone.
Use. Like thymol, carvacrol is used widely as a powerful antiseptic and
germicide in all kinds of medicinal and oral preparations, disinfectants, room
sprays, etc. It has been suggested as a local anesthetic in toothache and as
an anthelmintic.
Carvacrol furthermore finds application in the scenting of soaps and in the
compounding of imitation or artificial essential oils.
5
1
Pharm. Arch. 13, May
(1942). Rec. trav chim. 69 (1940), 357.
2 6
Rec. trav. chim. 37 (1918), 356. Brenstoff-Chem. 22 (1941), 278.
3
Ber. 26 (1893), 2086. 7
4
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 48 (1926), 1738. /. prakt. Chem. II, 15 (1877), 410.
9
Ibid. II, 39 (1889), 360.
10
Bull. soc. chim. Ill, 7 (1892), 34. Chem. Zetitr. I (
1892), 380.
" Ber. 11 (1878), 573, 1061.
"Arch. Pharm. 233 (1895), 188.
13
/. prakt. Chem. II, 143 (1935), 256.
14
Trans. Inst. Pure Chem. Reagents V.S.S.R., No. 17 (1939), 40. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942),
2257.
16
Ber. 25 (1892), 3353.
16
"Die Atherischen Clc," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 600.
17
Ber. 36 (1903), 3992.
18
Am. /. Pharm. 93 (1921), 8.
19
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 2538. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 629.
*>Compt. rend. 146 (1907), 1427.
21
Gazz. chim. ital. 55 (1925), 812. Chem. Zentr. I (1926), 3599.
Chavicol
C fl
II 10 Mol. Weight 134.17
p-Allylphenol. 1 -Hydroxy-4-allylbcnzene. p-Hydroxyallylbenzene
OH
CH2 CH= CH 2
Occurrence. Chavicol occurs in oil of bay, in some oils of betel leaf, and
1
in a few other volatile oils. Zempl&i identified natural lusitanicoside as
chavicol-jS-rutinoside.
Isolation. (1) the preparation of water soluble salts in alkali solution and
By
regeneration through acidification, etc. In order to isolate chavicol from volatile
oils betel leaf oil, for example the phenols are first extracted with dilute aqueous
alkali, and the freed crude phenols fractionated, the fraction b. 235-240 containing
the chavicol.
(2) Palkin and Wells found the most satisfactory procedure for the preparation
2
of a pure grade of chavicol from oil of bay to be the separation of the sodium phenolate
with 5% aqueous sodium hydroxide. This solution and the phenol freed
is well cooled
by 10% sulfuric acid. The phenol is separated by centrifuging and fractionated in a
32 plate column at 7 mm. to remove the eugenol. The fraction br 103.2-103.6
contains most of the chavicol. Finally crystallize the chavicol by cooling.
Identification. Chavicol can be characterized as follows:

Chavicol 3,5-dinitrobenzoyl ester was prepared by the action of 3,5-dinitro-
(1)
benzoyl chloride upon the phenol in pyridine. According to Palkin and Wells it
3
melts at 103.5-104.5.
(2) On treatment with ferric chloride, an aqueous solution of chavicol gives a pro-
nounced blue color, whereas an alcoholic solution develops only a faint blue shade.
Properties. The following properties have been reported by Palkin and

Wells: 4
5 5
'
m. 16 dl 1.0203
b. 235-23f) nj? 1.5448
Chavicol issparingly soluble in water and soluble in organic solvents.

Use. Because of its strongly antiseptic properties, chavicol is useful medici-
nally.
1
Math, naturw. Am. ungar. Akad. Wiss. 66 (1937), 560. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 2136.
*J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1933), 1557.
3
Ibid.
4
Ibid.
Methyl Chavicol
Ci Hi 2 O Mol. Weight 148.20
Chavicol methyl ether. *

p-Allylanisole. p-Methoxyallylbenzene. Estragolc
OCH,
CH 2 . CH=CH 2
Occurrence. Methyl chavicol occursAmerican wood turpentine oil, in

in
oil of estragon, star anise, anise, fennel, bay, in German, French and
Japanese
l 2
oils of basil. Herissey reported it in the glucoside, lusitanicoside. Goto
*
Synonymous with "Esdragol."
identified it steam distilled

in the oil of the fruit and leaves of Manchurian
Fagara mantshurica Honda.
Hasselstrom and Hampton found3
that thiscompound could be isolated successfully
from turpentine by shaking an ether solution of bio 88-95 with aqueous mercuric
acetate and heating the aqueous solution with sodium hydroxide and zinc.
This technique is also useful, according to Balbiano, 4 to separate methyl chavicol
from anethole.
Identification. Methyl chavicol can be characterized by several methods:
(1) On boiling with alcoholic potassium hydroxide or on heating with sodium
ethylate under pressure, methyl chavicol, according to Gildemeister and Hoffmann,
6
is converted into anethole m. 21. Vinogradova and Novotel'nova obtained anethole

6
by heating 2 parts of solid potassium hydroxide with 1 part of methyl chavicol for 2
hr. at 130.
(2) Oxidizing methyl chavicol with dilute potassium permanganate, Bertram and
Walbaum 7 obtained homoanisic acid (p-methoxyphenylacetic acid) m. 84-85 and,
in addition, a little p-ariisic acid m. 184. The latter acid, however, may also have
been formed by oxidation of anethole.
(3) By the preparation of monobromomethylchavicol dibromide m. 62.4, according
to Hell and Gaab, 8 and Goto. 9
Properties. Methyl chavicol is a colorless liquid possessing an odor slightly

reminiscent of anise; its flavor is not as intensely sweet as that of anethole.
The following properties have been reported by Hasselstrom and Hampton,
10
12
Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 11 Kykman, and Lobo: 13
2
b. 213-215 010 - 13
no 1.51372 10
bw 97-97.5 011 n}? 1.52355-1.52380"

86 n
1 -5 12
b7 n}> 1.5244
10
dig 0.9600
d }i 0.9714-0.972 n
Use. Methyl chavicol is used for the compounding of certain synthetic

essential oils, estragon, for instance.
1
Compt. rend. 198 (1934), 265.
*J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 61 (1941), 91. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1941), 7971.
3
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 60 (1938), 3086.
4
Ber. 42 (1909), 1504.
6
6
Trudy Vsesoyuz. Inst. Efirno-Maslichnol Prom. 8 (1940), 141. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943),
3558.
7
Arch. Pharm. 235 (1897), 179, 182. Cf. Goto, J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 61 (1941), 91. Chem.
Abstracts 35 (1941), 7971.
8
Ber. 29 (1896), 344.
9
10
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 60 (1938), 3086.
11
12
Ber. 23 (1890), 862.
13
Ion 3 (1943), 410. Chem. Abstracts 38 (1944), 1319.
J. M. Zanden, "Polymers of Methyl Chavicol," Proc. Acad. Sci. Amsterdam 40

v. d.
(1937), 706. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 1676. Also Rec. trav. chim. 67 (1938), 233.
T. I. Knishevetskaya, "The Composition of the Essential Oils of Hybrids of Basil,"
Trudy Gosudarst. Nikitskogo Botan. Soda 21, No. 2 (1939), 29. Khim. Referat. Zhur.
No. 6 (1940), 128. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 5207.
L. Bert, "Synthesis of Allyl and Propenyl Essential Oils. General Method," Compt.
rend. 213 (1941), 873. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 4060.
J. M. v. d. Zanden, M. G. de Vries and P. Westerhof, "Polymerization of Methyl
Chavicol and Ethyl Chavicol. l,6-Dianisyl-l,5-Hexadiene and l,6-Diphenylethyl-l,5-
Hexadiene," Rec. trav. chim. 62 (1943), 283. Chem. Abstracts 38 (1944), 2329.
Ollivier Gaudin and Noel Lazac'h, "Sulfurized Derivatives of Anethole and Es-
tragole," Compt. rend. 224 (1947), 577. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 3441.
Anethole
C 10 H 12 Mol. Weight 148.20
"
p-Propenylanisole. p-Methoxypropenylbenzene. Anise camphor"
OCH 3
H CH 3
Occurrence. Anethole is the main constituent of several volatile oils de-

rived from the seed of plant species belonging to the family Umbellifcrac,
viz., anise and fennel. It also forms the principal constituent of star anise
oil (Illicium verum) and occurs in several other essential oils.
Isolation. Anethole is most conveniently isolated from volatile oils by first frac-
tionating the oil, by cooling the corresponding fraction to a low temperature, and by
recrystallization. From some oils which contain a high percentage of anethole, this
phenol ether can be isolated directly by cooling.
Identification. Anethole may be characterized by several methods:
( 1) By the preparation of 2-monobromoanethole dibromide CHaO CeHsBr CsHsB^.
Underwood, Baril and Toone

l
developed the following procedure:
Dissolve 0.37 g. of anethole in 4 cc. of absolute ether cooled in ice. In the course of
8 min. add drop by drop 0.84 g. of bromine (2 mols) dissolved in 3 cc. of absolute ether.
Evaporate the ether. Grind the solid residue in a mortar with 1 cc. of alcohol and
recrystaliize from 18 cc. of petroleum ether. Yield 0.68 g. of needles m. 107.6-108,
which melting point has been determined as 102 by Orndorff and Morton, 2 and as
107M08 by Hell et al. 3
Oxidizing anethole with potassium permanganate, King and Murch 4 obtained

(2)
(92% yield) p-methoxybenzoic acid (p-anisic acid) m. 184, but with alkaline potassium
permanganate both anisic acid and anisaldehyde were formed. Gildemeister and
Hoffmann 6 reported that oxidation of anethole with chromic acid yields anisaldehyde
and anisic acid, while oxidation with potassium permanganate gives 4-"methoxyphenyl-
glyoxylic acid CH 3 C 6 H 4 CO COOH, m. 89,
the oxime of which melts at 145- 146.
Oxidizing anethole with 3.5 parts of dilute nitric acid and 2 parts of glacial acetic acid
for one half hour, Labbe* 6 obtained anisaldehyde, a fact confirmed by Shoesmith. 7
Oxidizing anethole with ozone, Briner and Nemitz also obtained anisic aldehyde.
8
(3) By the preparation of nitroso derivatives.

Kramli and Bruckner 9 treated a solution of anethole in ether with aqueous sodium
nitrite acidified with sulfuric acid and obtained anethole-i/'-nitrosite m. 126 (decom-
position). seems obvious that a lower melting unstable form for this molecule
It
exists; its presence may be anticipated and care maintained in purification so as to

obtain a maximum melting point. Wallach and Miiller 10 prepared the nitroso-
chloride m. 127-128; Perrot ll reported the nitrolpiperidine m. 90.
(4) Condensation product of anethole and maleic anhydride, m. 310; l,2,3,8a-
tetrahydro-7-methoxy-3-methyl-l,2-naphthlenedicarboxylic acid as derived therefrom,
m. 292. Oxidation of the condensation product yields anisic acid (Tamayo and
12
Ayestaran ). Conditions influence the direction of condensation of this molecule
(cf. Hudson and Robinson
13
). To obtain the naphthalenedicarboxylic acid mentioned
above, therefore, it is recommended that 14.8 g. of anethole and 19.6 g. of maleic
anhydride be heated under reflux for 12 hr. in 200 cc. of toluene. Wash thoroughly
with alcohol, hydrolyze by solution in hot 2 N
sodium hydroxide, arid precipitate
with hydrochloric acid.
Properties. Anetholea white crystalline mass of intensely sweet odor

is
and taste, characteristic of anise seed. It melts to a colorless, highly refrac-

tive liquid. The following properties have been reported by Gildemeister
and Hoffmann, 14 Stohmann, 15 Sanderson and Jones, 16 Block, 17 Jourdan, 18
19 20
Eykman, and Lobo:
cong.pt. 21-22 14
d 25 0.986 15
21-22 18
(from oil of 0.984-0.986 14
19
star anise) dn . 5 0.999
16 20 5 14
21.3 -
nf> 1.559-1.561
14 8 15
m. 22.5-23 nj> 1.56149
17 1 '5 19
22.32 nk 1.5624
2 <>
b. 232-234 Sol. Soluble in 2-3 vol. of
14 14
b 75 i 233-234 90% alcohol
Anethole is almost insoluble in water, but miscible in all proportions with

organic solvents.
Under the influence of light and air, or heat, anethole loses its ability to
crystallize,assuming simultaneously a viscid consistency, a yellow color, and
a somewhat bitter, disagreeable taste. This is accompanied by an increase
in the specific gravity above 1 and a better solubility in alcohol. It remains
doubtful whether this change is caused, according to de Varda, 21 by polymeri-
zation of anethole or, according to Hoering and Gralert, 22 by oxidation to
anisaldehyde, anisic acid, and other products of oxidation, among them
23
4,4'-dimethoxystilbene, the so-called "photoanethole" (see Beilstein ). The
last-named compound is quite insoluble and, therefore, freshly prepared ane-
thole upon standing sometimes becomes turbid. When recrystallized from
glacial acetic acid or benzene, efo'-p-methoxystilbene melts at 214-215.
These crystals show a fluorescence in solid form as well as in solution. It is
possible that di-p-methoxystilbene does not form directly from anethole but
from anisaldehyde as an intermediary product of the reaction.
24
Campbell found that, on heating in the absence of air, anethole under-
goes fission and dimerization resulting in the formation of 1,3-c/z-p-methoxy-

phenyl-2-methylpropane.
The following data are selected from the files of the New York laboratories
of Fritzsche Brothers, Inc., and serve to illustrate the effect of light and air
upon the physical properties of anethole.
Original Exposed to Light Exposed to Air

Anethole and Air in the Dark
Specific Gravity 0.986 1.114 1.080
at 25
Solubility 1.5 to 2 vol. and Miscible with 80% al- 0.5 vol. 80% alcohol
*
more of 90% alcohol. The solution and more. The solu-
cohol. has a decided blue tion has a blue fluo-
fluorescence rescence
Acid Number 1.4 1.4
Aldehyde Con- 0.7% 25.0% 17.6%

tent as Anis-
aldehyde
Flavor Sweet, anethole- Very harsh and bitter Harsh and bitter
likc
Note: The experiments and the control were permitted to stand undisturbed for a period
of eighteen months.
Under the influence of acid reagents anethole forms various polymers.

26
Orndorff, Terrasse and Morton treated anethole with zinc chloride, while
Puxeddu 26 used ferric chloride in ether and obtained a dimeric "metanethole"
or dianethole m. 132-133, the structure of which was studied by Baker and
28
Enderby.
27
Staudinger and Brunner, and Staudinger and Dreher 29 pre-
pared a hemicolloid polyanethole "anisoin" by shaking anethole with small
amounts of concentrated sulfuric acid or phosphoric acid, or with tin tetra-
chloride in benzene solution.
Goodall and Haworth 80 obtained a liquid dimer "isoanethole" on boiling
anethole with methanol and hydrochloric acid. Balbiano and Paolini 31
found that, on treatment with mercuric acetate, anethole yields a glycol
32
According to Varenne and Godefroy, the same
.
product formed on treating anethole dibromides with alcoholic potassium

is
in the cold. By the action of 20 per cent sulfuric acid this anethole glycol
can be converted into anisketone.
33
According to Orndorff and Morton, and Baril and Megrdichian, 34 ane-
thole, when treated with picric acid in chloroform, yields a picrate consisting
of orango-red needles m. 69-70 which lose anethole on exposure to the air.
Studying the oxidation of anethole with molecular oxygen at 150, Schulz

and Trcibs 35 obtained acetaldehyde, carbon dioxide, anisic acid and acetic
acid, free and esterified. The amount of aldehydes, ketones and phenols
present were quantitatively determined. When the oxidation was carried
out at 20 in the presence of benzaldehyde, the following compounds were
identified in addition to those mentioned above:
anisaldehyde
p-methoxyphenylacetone
p-methoxyphenylacetoin
anethole glycol
dimolecular anethole glycol ethers
Use. used most widely for the flavoring of all kinds of food
Anethole is
products, especially confectionery. It forms an important constituent of
beverages, alcoholic and nonalcoholic, particularly of the absinthe type so

popular in France. Anethole also finds wide application for the flavoring of
pharmaceutical preparations, especially dentrifices, mouth washes, gargles,
etc.
It is used in some perfume compositions in order to impart a sweet note.
1
J.Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 4090.
2
Am. Chem. J. 23 (1900), 185.
3
J. prakt. Chem. II, 61 (1895), 424; II, 62 (1895), 194.
4
/. Chem. Sac. 127 (1925), 2640.
6
"Die AthcrLschen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 605.
6
Bull. soc. chirn. Ill, 21 (1889), 1076.
7
J. Chem. Soc. 123 (1923), 2702.
8
Helv. Chim. Ada 21 (1938), 748.
9
J. prakt. Chem. 148 (1937), 121. See also Kramli, Magyar Biol. Kutatdintezet Munkdi 10
(1938), 452. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939) 4971. Cf. Savitskil and Makhnenko, J. Gen.
Chem. U.S.S.R. 10 (1940), 1819. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1941), 4356. Monti and Dinelli,
Gazz. chim. Hal. 62 (1932), 368. Wallach and Mtiller, Liebigs Ann. 332 (1904); 318.
Liebigs Ann. 332 (1904), 326. Cf. Neber and Rauscher, ibid. 660 (1942), 182. Chem.
10
Abstracts 37 (1943), 3411.

11
Compt. rend. 203 (1936), 329.
12
Anales soc. espan. fis. quim. 36 (1940), 44. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 7288. Anales fis.
quim. 37 (1941), 392. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 1707.
13
/. Chem. Soc. (1941), 715.
14
15
Sitz. Akad. Wiss. Leipzig (1892), 318.
16
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 42 (1923), IT.
17
Z. physik. Chem. 78 (1911), 397.
18
Parfums France, April (1933), 88.
Ber. 23 (1890), 862.
20
Ion 3 (1943), 410.
(to. c/wm. itaZ. I, 21 (1891), 183. Chem. Zentr. I (1891), 788.
22
Ber. 42 (1909), 1204. Cf. Milas, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 52 (1930), 739.
23
"Handbuch der Organischen Chemic," Vol. VI, 1023.
24
J. Chem. Soc. (1941), 672.
26
Am. Chem. J. 19 (1897), 858.
26
Gazz. chim. ital. I, 60 (1920), 149.
27
/. Chem. Soc. (1940), 1094.
28
//efo. CTum. 4cta 12 (1929), 972.
Li'e&igs Ann. 517 (1935), 99.

29
80
/. Cfcem. Soc. (1930), 2482.
31
Ber. 35 (1902), 2997.
32
Compt. rend. 140 (1905), 591.
33
Am. Chem. J. 23 (1900), 184.
34
/. Aw. CTiem. Soc. 58 (1936), 1415.
35
Ber. 77B (1944), 377.
Ollivier Gaudin and Noel Lazac'h, "Sulfurized Derivatives of Anethole and Es-
tragole," Compt. rend. 224 (1947), 577. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 3441.
Feniculin
p-Anol prenyl ether

Mol. Weight 202.28
CH=CH CH 3 CH=CH-CH 3
CH 3
CH 2 CH=C H
X!H 3
Feniculin p-Anol
Occurrence. Years ago Takens J isolated from the last runs of fennel oil
and star anise oil a substance CnHisO which, on heating to 260, decomposed
with effervescence yielding p-propenylphenol (= p-anol) CgHi O (crystals
from benzene), m. 93-94. p-Anol possesses an odor of withering foliage.
2
Morerecently Spath and Bruck submitted the substance CuHigO iso-
lated from fennel oil to a closer investigation and named it feniculin. Spath
and Bruck found that feniculin is p-anol prenyl ether, suggesting the term
H3 C
\
"prenol," for the primary 7,7-dimethyl-allyl alcohol C=CH CH 2 OH.
H3C
3
Spath and Bruck proved the validity of the structural formula which they
had suggested for feniculin by synthesizing p-anol prenyl ether from p-anol
and prenyl bromide.
Isolation. By crystallization from 90% methyl alcohol at 80 and fractional
distillation, separating the cut bo.o4 130-135.
Identification.Hydrogenation to tetrahydrofeniculin bo.oa 100-110, and cleavage
of the isoamyl group by hydriodic acid.
The resulting p-n-propylphenol yields a phenylurethane m. 128.5-129.
Conversion to p-anol by heating to 260, methylation and oxidation to anisaldehyde
which yields several derivatives. (p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 161.)
4
Properties. According to Spath and Bruck, feniculin melts at 23.5 to
24.5 (in an evacuated tube). These authors and Takens 6 reported:
b5 147
b .04 130-135
d 15 0.967
Use. Feniculin, as such, is not used in our industries.

1 4
Riechstoff Ind. 4 (1929), 8. Ibid.
2 5
Ber. 71 (1938), 2708. Riechstoff Ind. 4 (1929), 8.
3
Ibid.
Allylpyrocatechol
C 9 HioO 2 Mol. Weight 150.17
l,2-Dihydroxy-4-allylbenzene. Hydroxychavicol
OH
Occurrence. Allylpyrocatechol has been identified in Java betel leaf oil.
Isolation. the formation of a water-soluble salt in an aqueous alkali solution

By
and regeneration by acidification, etc. Thus, Java betel leaf oil is treated with dilute
aqueous alkali, and the phenolate separated. The crude phenols are freed and frac-
tionated, the allylpyrocatechol occurring in the fraction b 4 137-139.
Identification. Allylpyrocatechol can be characterized by the preparation of several
derivatives:
Dibenzoyl compound m. 71-72, according to Gildemeister and Hoffmann.
1
(1)
(2) Schopf and co-workers
2
converted the 4-allylcatechol to the dibenzyl ether m.
37-38 by the action of benzyl chloride and potassium carbonate in acetone. Further
action of silver benzoate, iodine and benzene on the derived dibenzyl ether gave the
glycol [l,2-dihydroxy-3-(3',4'-dibenzyloxyphenyl)-propane], m. 82-83.
Properties. Allylpyrocatechol is a crystalline mass possessing a faint odor
slightly reminiscent of creosote. From petrol ether or benzene, allylpyro-
catechol crystallizes in the form of long, colorless needles m. 48.
Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 3 Perkin and Trikojus, 4 Kurd and Puterbaugh,
6
and Schopf and co-workers 6 reported the following properties:
3- 4 6 6
m. 48 -
nj? 1.5(500
4 5 5
bi 6 156-158 n 1.5G89
4
bio 147-149
5
b7 141-144
3
b4 139
Allylpyrocatechol readily soluble in water and alcohol, the alcoholic

is
solution developing a deep green color on treatment with ferric chloride.

Use. Allylpyrocatechol is not used in our industries.
1
*Liebigs Ann. 644 (1940), 51.
3
*J. Chem.Soc. (1927), 1663.
6
J. Org. Chem. 2 (1937), 383.
6
Liebigs Ann. 644 (1940), 50.
Chavibetol
C 10 H 12 2 Mol. Weight 164.20
l-Methoxy-2-hydroxy-4-allylbenzene. "Betel phenol"
)CH 3
CH -CH=CH2 2
Where interest centers in products of synthetic nature, the work of Hirao 1
and of Schopf et al. 2 should be consulted.

Occurrence. Chavibetol occurs in betel oil from which the old name betel
phenol is derived. Small quantities of chavibetol probably occur also in
other essential oils camphor oil, for instance.
Isolation. In general, chavibetol is isolated by shaking the oil containing chavibetol

with a dilute aqueous alkali solution, regeneration of the phenols by acidification, and
fractional distillation of the phenols. Where the system is complicated by the presence
of eugenol, purification may be effected by the following procedure as recommended
by Schopf and collaborators: 3
Cool 42 the phenolic mixture in 120 cc. of absolute ethyl alcohol containing
g. of
19 g. of potassium hydroxide, whereby the potassium eugenolate separates. The
chavibetol may be recovered from the alcoholic filtrate. Further purification, where
necessary, may be effected by preparation of the benzoate and fractional crystallization
of the benzoates, according to Hirao. 4
Identification. According to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 6 chavibetol can be char-
acterized by several methods:
(1) By the preparation of the benzoyl derivative m. 49-50 (cf. also Hirao, and
6
Schopf and collaborators ).

7
(2) When treated with ferric chloride, an alcoholic solution of chavibetol gives a
strong bluish-green color.
(3) On treatment with potassium hydroxide, chavibetol is converted into isobetel
phenol (isochavibetol) m. 96, big 147 (cf. also Hirao ).
8
(4) According to Schopf and co-workers, preparation of the benzyl ether in. 48 by
9
treatment of the phenol with benzyl chloride and potassium carbonate, and crystalliza-
tion from methyl alcohol.
Properties. a highly refractive liquid which, on cooling in a

Chavibetol is
freezing mixture, congeals to a crystalline mass m. 8.5. The following prop-

erties have been reported by Bertram and Gildemeister, 10 Schimmel & Co., 11
12 13
Ilirao, and Schopf and co-workers:
12
m. 8.5 d|f 1.0646
12
b. 254-255 10
df 1.0013
13 12
bi 2 121 nf? 1.5379
12
b8 113 nf? 1.54134 ll
b4 107-109 ll
Use. Chavibetol is not used in our industries.

1
Liebigs Ann. 644 (1940), 30.
2
8
Ibid.
4
6
"Die Atherischen Olo," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 608.
6
7
Liebigs Ann. 644 (1940), 30.
8
Liebigs Ann. 544 (1940), 30.
9
10
/. prakt. Chem. II, 39 (1889), 350.
11
Ber. Schimmel & Co., Oct. (1907), 13. Chem. Zentr. II (1907), 1741.
12
Liebigs Ann. 644 (1940), 40.
18
Eugenol
CioHi 2 O 2 Mol. Weight 164.20
l-Hydroxy-2-methoxy-4-allylbenzene. 4-Allylguaiacol. "Eugenic acid"

on
CH=CH 2
Occurrence. Eugenolthe main constituent of several important volatile

is
oils belonging to the family Myrtaceae and Lauraceae for example, oil of
clove, clove stem and leaf, pimenta berry and leaf, bay, and cinnamon leaf.
In smaller quantities eugenol occurs in numerous volatile oils for instance,
cinnamon bark, camphor, calamus, Java citronella, ylang ylang, cananga,
nutmeg, sassafras, myrrh, laurel, California laurel, galangal, in the oil ex-
tracted from acacia flowers, etc. Certain Ocimum species, such as 0. gratis-
Sabetay and Trabaud
1
simum, contain considerable quantities of eugenol.
reported 21 per cent of eugenol in the oil from the flowers of the Parma violet.
In some plants eugenol seems to occur as glucoside which, according to
Bourquelot and Herissey, is split by the ferment gease (from Geum urbanum).
2
Isolation. By treatment of the oil with a 3% aqueous sodium hydroxide solution,

extraction of the nonphcnolic constituents with ether, acidification of the alkaline
solution, and separation of the regenerated phenols which are subsequently fraction-
ated. Eugenol distills without decomposition even at atmospheric pressure.
Hunger 3 suggested isolating eugenol from oil of clove, cinnamon leaf or pimenta
by first preparing a concentrated alkaline solution of eugenol, by removing the non-
eugenolic constituents through steam distillation, by neutralization (acidification) at
low temperature, and by steam distillation of the freed eugenol.
Rowaan and Insinger 4 recommend pretreatment with tartaric acid paste and the
use of potassium hydroxide to reduce the difficulties of emulsion formation.
Identification. (1) Eugenol can be characterized by the preparation of several
derivatives:
(a) Ontreatment with benzoyl chloride, eugenol forms a benzoate m. 69.5, accord-
ing to Ikeda et al.
6
McKie 6 suggested a method of estimating the composition of
mixtures of eugenol and isoeugenol through the melting point curves of their ben-
zoates, eutectic 25.5% isoeugenol benzoate m. 56.5.
(b) Phenylurethane m. 97, according to Junge. 7
(c) Mercury derivative from mercuric acetate m. 95-96, hydrate m. 120.5-121.5.
By shaking with dilute hydrochloric acid, eugenol is regenerated readily (cf. Priester 8).
(d) Eugenol piperazine m. 99; this compound gives characteristic precipitates with
alkaloids, thus it is useful in micro work (Sanna and Soraru ).
9
(e) 2,4-Dinitrophenyl ether m. 114-115, according to Bost and Nicholson.

10
This compound is prepared by treating eugenol in alkaline solution with 2,4-dinitro-

chlorobenzene.
Dibromide m. 80, tetrabromide m. 118-119, as recorded by Gildemeister and

(f)
Hoffmann. 11
Color reactions:
(2)
In a cold saturated aqueous solution of ferric chloride, eugenol gives a turbid, grayish-
yellow; in 2% alcoholic solution a blue color, which fades to gray-yellow in 15 min.
Bezssonoff s reagent gives a positive reaction (blue color) in very small concentra-
12
tion, according to Sabetay.
Quantitative Determination. For the quantitative determination of euge-

'
nol, see Vol. I, Chapter 4, 'Examination and Analysis of Essential Oils, Syn-
thetics, and Isolates," p. 291.
Properties.Eugenol is a faintly yellow liquid possessing a strong odor of
cloves and a burning taste. The following properties have been reported by
Waterman and Priester, Erdmann, 14 Junge, 15 Eykman, 16 Gildemeister and
13
17 18
Hoffmann, and (Lauffer and Ingalls) Odorgraphia Committee:
18 18
f.p. 10.3 df 1.0651
18 13
b. 253.1-253.4 df 1.0604
14 16
b 749 .5 252 du. 5 1.072
14 13 15
bi 2 -i3 123 nf? 1.5410 -
18 4 5'
bio 121.3 no 1.5439"

18
b5 110.3
111 015
18
b4 106.4
Sol. Soluble in 5-6 vol. of 50% alcohol, in 2-3 vol.
of 60% alcohol, or in 1-2 vol. of 70% alco-
17
hol. One cc. of eugenol dissolves in 4.27
cc. of 50% alcohol at 25; in 5.22 cc. of 50%
alcohol at15; in 12.70 cc. of 2% sodium
18
hydroxide at 25.
On heating with potassium hydroxide, eugenol is converted to isoeugenol.

Use. Eugenol is widely used in pharmaceutical preparations, in perfumes,
cosmetics, and for the scenting of soaps. It serves for the flavoring of all
kinds of food products, especially meats, sausages, table sauces, etc. The
main use of eugenol, however, is as a starting material for the making of
high quality vanillin.
Compt. rend. 209 (1939), 843.
1
*Ibid. 140 (1905), 870.

Seifensieder-Ztg. 68 (1941), 95. Chem. Abstracts 35 (1941), 3765.
8
4
6
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 61 (1940), 583. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 6754. Cf. Jungc, Riech-
stoff Ind. 7 (1932), 112; and Tiemann and Kraaz, Ber. 15 (1882), 2067.
*J. Chem. Soc. 119 (1921), 777.
Riechstoff Ind. 7 (1932), 112. Cf. Weehuizen, Rec. trav. chim. 37 (1917), 268; and Claisen,
7
Liebigs Ann. 418 (1919), 120.

8
Rec. trav. chim. 67 (1938), 811.
9
Rend, seminar. facoltd Univ. Cagliari 12 (1942), 34.
sci. Chem. Zentr. II (1943), 1278.
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1935), 2369.
" "Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 610.
12
Riechstoff Ind. Kosmetik 13 (1938), 84.
3
Rec. Irav. chim. 48 (1929), 1272.
" /. prakt. Chem. II, 66 (1897), 147.
B
* Ber. 23 (1890), 862.
17
Ind. Eng. Chem., News Ed. 11 (1933), 114.
Eugenol Acetate
Ci 2 H 14 3 Mol. Weight 206.23
Acetcugenol. Acetyl eugenol.
Q OC CH 3
OCH 3
Occurrence. Eugenol acetate occurs in the oil derived from dried clove
buds but not in oil of clove stems.
Isolation. Eugenol acetate can be isolated from a mixture with eugenol by treat-
ment with dilute aqueous alkali in the cold whereby the eugenol is removed, and the
ester is then fractionated. This removal of the free phenol, according to Rowaan and
Insinger, is best effected by the use of potassium hydroxide and a pretreatment with a
1
small amount of tartaric acid paste to reduce emulsion formation.

Identification. By saponification :
When boiled with a concentrated solution of sodium hydroxide, eugenol acetate

forms sodium acetate and sodium eugenolate which, according to Erdmann, 2 separates
as a white crystalline mass. The eugenol is readily recovered by acidification and
identified as such.
Properties. Thefollowing properties have been reported by Erdmann, 8

Thorns,
4
and Schimmel & Co.: 5
4
m. 30 dlS 1.087 5
3 5
29 -
d 15 1.0842 3
(undercooled)
3
b 752 281-282 n^ 1.52069 5
4
bw 163-164
3
b 8 .5 145-146
b6 142-143
Use.Eugenol acetate is used in imitation spice oils. Since eugenol ace-

tate has less of a tendency to discolor than eugenol, it often serves in per-
fumes as a substitute for eugenol. This holds true particularly of composi-
tions for the scenting of soaps.
1
*J. prakt. Chem. [2], 56 (1897), 147.
3
Ibid.
4
Arch. Pharm. 241 (1903), 600.
5
Ber. Schimmel &
Co., Oct. (1903), 51.
Methyleugenol
CnH 14 O 2 Mol. Weight 178.22
Eugenol methyl ether. 1,2-Dimethoxy-l-allylbenzene. 4-Allylvcratrole
Occurrence. Methyleugenol frequently accompanies eugenol in volatile

oils; it has been found in oil of citronella, Canada sriakeroot, California laurel,
'
bay, pimenta, in the oil extracted from acacia flowers, in tea-tree oil," and
several others.

Identification.Methyleugenol can be characterized by several methods:
(1) By the preparation of bromoeugenol methyl ether dibromide (CHsO^-Cel^Biv
CaHsB^. Underwood, Baril arid Toone * developed this method:
Dissolve 0.45 g. of methyleugcnol in 5 cc. of dry ether and in the course of 10 min.
add 0.8 g. of bromine; during the bromination cool the mixture in ice and subsequently
allow to stand at room temperature for one-half hour. Cool in an ice-hydrochloric
acid bath. Induce crystallization by scratching the wall of the container with a glass
rod. Filter the solid, wash with 3 cc. of cold alcohol. Recrystallize from 8 cc. of
absolute alcohol at 60. The yield is 0.88 g. of needles m. 77.5-78, in agreement with
the findings of Wassermann, 2 and Bertram and Gildemeister. 3
(2) By the preparation of eugenol methyl ether picrate. According to Baril and
Megrdichian, this compound crystallizes from chloroform in the form of red-brown
4
rhombic crystals m. 114-115.

(3) On oxidation, methyleugenol yields principally veratric acid (3,4-dimethoxy-
benzoic acid) Graebe and Borgmann 6 used for this purpose potassium dichromate
.
in glacial acetic acid, whereas Luff, Perkin and Robinson 6 oxidized methyleugenol in
acetone with a saturated aqueous solution of potassium permanganate and obtained
the same product. (Aside from veratric acid, a little homoveratric acid [3,4-dimethoxy-
phenyl acetic acid] is also formed but can readily be separated. Recrystallized from
water, the monohydrate of homoveratric acid melts at 82, while the anhydrous form
melts at 98.) When recrystallized from water, veratric acid melts at 179. Oxidizing
methyleugenol with potassium permanganate, Wallach and Rheindorff found that
7
veratric acid melts at 179-180.

(4) By the preparation of methyleugenol nitrite m. 125, according to Wallach. 8
(5) An addition product can be prepared by shaking the ether and mercuric acetate
in water. It is soluble in water but, on evaporation and "seeding," a compound m.
69-70 will be obtained, according to Priester. 9 The ether is readily regenerated
therefrom by cold hydrochloric acid.
Properties. Methyleugenol is a somewhat viscid liquid with an odor simi-

lar to that of eugenol but fainter. The following properties have been re-
10 12
ported by Gildemeister and Hoffmann, Abati, Bertram and Gildcmeister
11
14
and Eykman. 13 -
b. 248-249 10
1.5383 n
12
bn 128-129 Sol. Soluble in 4-5 vol. of 60% alco-
5 3 1-2 vol. of
dl
'
(vac.) 1.038G 14
hol, in 70% alco-
10
13 hol
dn 1.041
Use.Methyleugenol is used quite widely in perfume compositions of the

carnation type and in bouquets of oriental character. Its odor is softer than
that of eugenol and, therefore, methyleugenol serves as a modifier of eugenol.
1
/. Am. Chem.
Soc. 62 (1930), 4090.
*Jahresber. Chem. (1879), 520.
J. prakt. Chem. II, 39 (1889), 354.
*
J. Am. Chem. Soc 58 (1936), 1415.
Liebigs Ann. 158 (1871), 282.
6
6
J. Chem. Soc. 97 (1910), 1138.
Liebigs Ann. 271 (1892), 306.
7
Ibid., 307.
9
Rec. trav. chim. 57 (1938), 816.
"Die Atherischen Olo," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 611.
11
Gazz. chim. ital. 40, pt. 2 (1910), 91.
" /. prakt. Chem. II, 39 (1889), 354.
Ber. 23 (1890), 862.
14 Rec. trav. chim. 14
(1895), 189.
Isoeugenol
CioHi 2 2 Mol. Weight 104.20
2-Methoxy-4-propenylphenol. l-Hydroxy-2-methoxy-4-propenylbenzene.
4-Propenylguaiacol
CH 3
prepared by various methods of treating eugenol with potas-

Isoeugenol is
sium hydroxide for example, in amylalcoholic solution. (For details, see

patent literature.)
According to Boedecker and Volk, and von An were, commercial isoeuge-
1 2
nol is a mixture of cis- and trans- isomers; it freezes at to 5. The two

first-named authors found that the commercial product, when dissolved in
1 .7
parts of warm 15 per cent sodium hydroxide solution, yields on cooling a
sodium salt which can be recrystallized from 2 parts of water, and on acidifi-
cation with dilute acetic acid forms Irans-isocugenol m. 30-33. An iso-
eugcnol possessing a melting point of 33 could be regarded as the result of

complete transformation of the cis- form into the alkali resistant transform.
Isoeugenol occurs in
Occurrence. oil of ylang ylang, champaca, nutmeg,
and in a few other volatile oils.
Isolation. By the usual method of separating phenols from volatile oils, followed
by distillation (see "Eugenol").
Identification. Isoeugenol can be characterized by the preparation of several
derivatives:
3,5-Dinitrobenzoate m. 158.4 (corr.), according to Phillips and Keenan. Ob-
3
(1)
tained by treating isoeugenol with 3,5-dinitrobenzoyl chloride in pyridine and crystal-
lization from n-butyl alcohol.
a-Naphthylurethane m. 149-150, according to French and Wirtel. Obtained
4
(2)
by treating isoeugenol with a-naphthylisocyanate in the presence of traces of anhy-
drous trimethylamine, and crystallized from ligroine.
(3) Monobromoisocugenol dibromidc m. 138-139, according to Gildemeister and
Hoffmann. 5
(4) Piperazine derivative prepared by evaporating an alcohol solution of piperazine
and isoeugenol (molecular ratios of 1:2). The derivative is rose colored and melts at
79. It forms characteristic complexes with alkaloids, useful in micro work (Sanna
and Soraru). 8
Pôr further derivatives see "Properties."
Quantitative Determination. For the quantitative determination, see Vol. I,
Chapter 4, "Examination and Analysis of Essential Oils, Synthetics, and
Isolates," p. 291.
Properties. As pointed out, commercial isoeugenol is usually a mixture of
cis- and trans- isomers which freezes at low temperature. The transform has
been prepared in the form of large, water clear plates m. 32. The cis- form
is liquid.
The two isomers have been reported by Boe-
following properties of the
decker and Volk, 7 by von Auwers, 8 and by Junge: 9
Trans-isoc ugenol Cis-isoeugcnol

m. 30-33 7
8- 9
33-34
7
bis 134-135 7
8
bi2 140
8
bn 133
9 9
b5 118 115
7
bi-2 98
7 7
1.0852 1.0851
8 8
1.087 1.088
20
n
nD 1.5782 7
1.5726 7
9 9
1.57862 1.57002
8 8
1.5778 1.5724
8 9 9
Acetate m. 79 -
Liquid
8>
9
Benzoate m. 104 08 9
9 9
Phenylurethane m. 152 118
9
FeCl 3 reaction Yellowish-green Olive green
Technical isoeugenol is a somewhat viscid, clear liquid with an odor char-

acteristic of carnation and reminiscent of eugenol, but finer, more suave, and
much more lasting. Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 10 Perkin, 11 and Eykman 12
recorded these properties for technical isoeugenol:
10
cong. pt. 17.3 1
25 1.0839
15
m. 18-20 10 1
1
15 1.087-1.091 10
10
b. 267.5 (corr.) 1.0904
10 2 10
1*750 270 nD 1.570-1.576
12
bs.5 nD 1.5680
10
Sol. Soluble in 5-6 vol. of 50% alcohol
Isoeugenol, when treated with acids or acid reagents, yields di-isoeugenol,

the structure of which has been studied by Haworth and Mavin, 13 by Pux-
14
eddu, and by Puxeddu and Rattu. 15
Ontreatment with picric acid in chloroform solution, isoeugenol forms a

picrate, crystallizing in dark red silky needles m. 46-47.5, unstable in air,
16
according to Baril and Megrdichian.
On oxidation, isoeugenol yields vanillin.
Use. Isoeugenol is an important aromatic used in the
compounding of all
kinds of floral and fancy bouquets. It forms the base of most carnation
scents. Because of its pleasant, persistent and strong odor, isoeugenol has
become one of the most useful ingredients in perfume work. It serves equally
well for the scenting of cosmetics and soaps.
iBer. 64 (1931), 62.

'? Ber. 68 (1935), 1346.
8
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1931), 1926
4
Ibid. 48 (1926), 1738.
6
6
Rend, seminar, facoltd sci. Univ. Cagliari 12 (1942), 34. Chem. Abstracts 38 (1944), 5504.
7
Ber. 64 (1931), 62.
8
Ber. 68B (1935), 1346.
9
Riechstoff Ind. 7 (1932), 112. Chem. Abstracts 27 (1933), 4530.
10
11
/. Chem. Soc. 69 (1896), 1227.
12
Ber. 23 (1890), 862.
13
/. Chem. Soc. (1931), 1363.
14
Gazz. chim. ital. 66 (1936), 710.
15
Ibid.67 (1937), 654.
16
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 68 (1936), 1415.

Aleardo Oliverio, "The So-called di-Isoeugenol," Gazz. chim. ital. 73 (1943), 270.
Methylisoeugenol
Isoeugenol methyl ether. l,2-Dimethoxy-4-propenylbenzene. 4-Propenyl-

veratrole
OCHa
OCH3
H
Methylisoeugenol occurs in oil of Cymbopogon javanensis, Asa-
Occurrence.
rum arifolium, and in a few other volatile oils.
Identification.^!) Methylisoeugenol can be readily characterized by the prepara-
tion of its dibromide m. 101-101.5. Underwood, Baril and Toone l developed the
following procedure:
In the course of 8 min. add 0.4 bromine to 0.45 g. of methylisoeugenoi dissolved
g. of
in 5 cc. of dry ether. During the treatment cool the mixture in ice; subsequently allow
to stand for half an hour at room temperature, then cool in an ice-hydrochloric acid
mixture. Induce crystallization by scratching and recrystallize the solid from 8 cc.
of dry ether. The yield of dibromide observed was 0.61 g. of plates m. 101-101.5.
(2) Bruckner prepared a series of derivatives from the reaction of methylisoeugenoi
2
and maleic anhydride in the ratio of 6.0 g. 2.94 g. After washing the residue with ether
:
and benzene a 7.2 g. condensate ^gHsoOis), m. 300-305', is obtained. The ben-

zene solution yields 3.3 g. of a characteristic dicarboxylic anhydride m. 139, the free
acid derived therefrom melting at 116-118 .
Properties. Methylisoeugenoi is a colorless, slightly viscid liquid; its odor

resembles that of isoeugenol. Methylisoeugenoi exists as cis- and as trans-
isomer. The commercially available product is most probably a mixture of
both forms.
Boedecker and Volk 3 reported the following properties for the cis- form
which is prepared from the liquid stereoisomer of isoeugenol:
df 1.0521
1.6016
Boedecker and Volk, 4 and von Auwers 5 reported these properties for the
transform derived from the crystalline stereoisomer of isoeugenol:
m. 16-17
df 1.0528
nf? 1.5692
The following properties of methylisoeugenoi have been reported by Gilde-

meister and Hoffmann, 6 and by Eykman: 7
6 6
cong. pt. 4.5 d{s 1.0568
6 7
m. 5.5-6.5 dn.5 1.064
6 5
b. 270 nk 1.56732
b8 136M37 06 n})
1 '6
1.5720 7
Sol. Soluble in 6.5 to 7.5 vol. of 60% alcohol,

6
soluble in 1.5 to 2 vol. of 70% alcohol
On treatment with dry hydrochloric acid, isoeugenol methyl ether, accord-

8
ing to Szeki, yields a dimer (fo's-isoeugenol methyl ether of Beilstein) which
from dilute alcohol or dilute acetic acid in the form of colorless
crystallizes
needles m. 106. Haworth and Mavin 9 obtained this dimer by refluxing
isoeugenol methyl ether with 20 parts of 5 normal methyl alcoholic hydro-

chloric acid.
When
treated with 1,3,5-trinitrobenzene, isoeugenol methyl ether yields a
10
compound m. 69-70, according to Sudborough and Beard.
Methylisoeugenol is used, like isoeugenol, in perfumes and for the
Use.
scenting of cosmetics and soaps.
1
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 52 (1930), 4090.
*Ber. 75B (1942), 2041.
3
Ber. 64 (1931), 64.
4
Ibid.
6
Ber. 68 (1935), 1347.
6
7
Ber. 23 (1890), 862.
8
Ber. 39 (1906), 2422.
J. Chem. Soc. (1931), 1365.
w lbid. 99 (1911), 214.
Peonol
C 9 H 10 3 Mol. Weight 166.17
2-Hydroxy-4-methoxyacetophenone
CO CH a
CH 3
Occurrence. Goris and Canal 1
isolated from the roots of Primula auricula
L., by steam distillation, an essential oil which for the greater part consisted
of an aromatic ketone, viz., peonol.
It had previously been identified in the root stock of Pconia arborca as a
glucoside and likewise in Peonia moutan (China and Japan).
Identification. Peonol forms a number of derivatives which are suitable for defining
this ketone:
Phenyl hydrazone m. 108 (soluble in hot 10% NaOH); 2,4,6-tribromophenyl
(1)
hydrazone m. 162 (soluble in boiling 10% NaOH) hydrazone m. 73-75 from alcohol
;
according to Adams.
2
(soluble in cold 10% NaOH), all
(2) p-Thiocyanophenyl hydrazone m. 157-158.5, according to Horiuchi and

3
Kiuchi.
Bromopeonol m. 169, and tribromobromopeonol m. 123-124, by Adams.
4
(3)
(4) Azine m. 226-227 from acetic acid (insoluble in boiling 10% NaOH), by
Adams. 6
(5) p-Nitrophenyl hydrazone (red) m. 238-239, by Mauthner.
9
(6) Semicarbazone m. 250, by Goris and Canal.

7
(7) Oxime m. 130-131, by Goris and Canal;

8
and acetyl derivative m. 123,
according to Lindemann, Konitzer and Romanoff.
9
The melting point of 50 has been confirmed by several
Properties. in-
10 12
vestigators, among them Adams, Mauthner, and Goris and Canal.
11
Eijkman, Bergema and Henrard

13
reported:
2
d81 -
1.1310
1 ' 2
ul 1.54322
Peonol is easily soluble in alcohol, ether, chloroform, carbon disulfide or

benzol.
This phenolic ketone forms metallic complexes with a number of the heavy
metals, viz., (CgHgOa^Ni from nickel salts; (CgHgOs^Cu from those of cop-
15
per, according to Pfeiffer, Buchholz and Bauer. 14 Hein reports the chro-
mium salt(C 27 H 27 O 9 Cr-O-25 CHC1 3 ) as melting at 270-271 (uncorr.).
Use. Peonol is used very little, if at all, in the perfume, soap, or flavor
industries.
Compt. rend. 202 (1936), 1351.

1
2
/. Am. Chern. Soc. 41 (1919), 260.
4
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 41 (1919), 261, 262.
5
Ibid., 260.
6
J. prakt. Chem. 136 (1933), 208. See also Math, naturw. Anz. ungar. Akad. Wiss. 60
(1933), 468.
Compt. rend. 202 (1936), 1351.
7
*Ibid.
9
Liebigs Ann. 456 (1927), 304.
10
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 41 (1919), 247.
11
/. prakt. Chem. 136 (1933), 205. Math, naturw. Anz. ungar. Akad. Wiss. 60 (1933), 468.
12
Compt. rend. 202 (1936), 1351.
Chem. Zentr. I (1905), 815. Chem. Weekblad 2 (1905), 59, 79.
13
UJ. prakt. Chem. 129 (1931), 163. See also Ephrairn, Ber. 64B (1931), 1210.
"/. prakt. Chem. 153 (1939), 172.
Safrole
CioHi O2 Mol. Weight 162.18
1 ,2-Methylenedioxy-4-allylbenzene. Allylpyrocatecholmethylene ether
CH 2
H CH=CH
2 2
Occurrence. the main constituent of several important volatile

Safrole is
oils for example, American sassafras oil, Brazilian sassafras oil (Ocotea pre-
tiosat) and star anise oil (Illicium verum). Camphor oil contains considerable
quantities of safrole. This phenol ether also occurs as a minor constituent in

numerous other volatile oils for instance, in oil of nutmeg, American worm-
seed, cinnamon leaf, California laurel, probably ylang ylang, etc. Accord-
ing to Foote, oil of Illicium parviflorum Michx. contains 90 per cent safrole,
1
the highest safrole content of any volatile oil yet reported.

Isolation. (1) By cooling the oil, or the safrole containing fraction of the oil, to
at least - 12 C (cf . Foote ).
(2) By fractional distillation, followed by cooling and crystallization. (Regarding

distillation of safrole in mixtures consult Brauer. 3 )
(3) Where safrole may be contaminated by oily constituents in an essential oil as
in red camphor oil, the method of Ikeda and Takeda 4 may be employed advanta-
geously to determine the safrole by preparation of the addition product with mercuric
acetate and sodium chloride in dilute acetone. The precipitate so formed should be
filtered in a gooch and weighed, and with a correction factor used to define the per-
centage of safrole in the sample.
This complex hydroxy chloride of safrole [CioHio02(OH)HgCl], according to
6
Tsukamoto, is readily decomposed to regenerate safrole either by hydrochloric acid,
or sodium sulfide and zinc in potassium hydroxide. The oxychloride melts at 141-
6
142, according to Fujita.
Identification. Safrole can be identified by several methods:
(1) Bythe preparation of derivatives:
(a) Tribromosafrolc dibromide or "pentabromosafrole." Underwood, Barii and
Toone developed the following method
7
:
Dissolve 0.41 g. of safrole in 3 cc. of alcohol and treat with 2 g. of bromine in the
course of 8 min.; heat for 15 min. on a water bath, then cool. Recrystallize the solid
from 7 cc. of benzene. Needles m. 169-170.
(b) Safrole picrate crystallizes from chloroform in the form of long orange-red
blades m. 104-105.5, according to Baril and Megrdichian. 8
(2) By oxidation:
Oxidizing safrole in acetone with aqueous potassium permanganate, Luff, Perkin
and Robinson 9 obtained piperonylic acid m. 228. Decker lo found that a small
quantity of piperonylacetic acid, m. 87-88, is formed as side reaction.
Foote " reported on the oxidation of safrole by the method of Fittig and Mielch 12
with alkaline potassium permanganate. The oxidation should be carefully controlled
because of the variety of products obtainable. Foote suggested the following pro-
cedure:
Disperse 4 the sample in 240 cc. of a 1% sodium hydroxide solution contained
cc. of
in an 800-cc. flask. To this slowly add with agitation 200 cc. of a 5% potassium per-
manganate solution. Heat on a water bath for 1 hr. Filter hot and cool. Acidify
the filtrate with sulfuric acid. The precipitated piperonylic acid is filtered off, washed
with water, and recrystallized from hot alcohol. It melts at 228.
On oxidation with potassium dichromate and dilute sulfuric acid, safrole yields
piperonal (heliotropin) m. 35, according to Power and Lees.
13
Gildemeister and Hoffmann 14 reported that, on careful oxidation with permanganate,

a glycol m. 82-83 is formed first, and with further oxidation a-homopiperonylic
acid m. 127-128.
(3) Note section on "Isolation" regarding mercury derivatives.
Quantitative Determination. See Vol. I, Chapter 4, "Examination and Anal-

ysis of Essential Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates," p. 239.
Properties. a colorless liquid, which becomes yellow on standing.
Safrole is
Its odor and flavor resemble sassafras. On cooling, safrole forms a crystal-
line mass.
The following properties have been reported by Gildemeister and Hoff-
15 16
mann, Eijkman, Waterman and
17
Priester, Perkin and Trikojus, 18 Priester, 19
and von Rechenberg: 20
11 15,17,19 d
2o
1.100 n
cong.pt.
19 16
m. 11 d 12 1.110
20 16
b. 234.5 (corr.) n|? 1.536-1.540
15 17
b 759 233 1.5383
18 18
bio-n 100-101.5 1.5381
15 16
b4 91 nj? 1.5420
Crude isolates from natural sources are reported to melt at 7-8, according
to Eijkman
21
and Foote. 22
Safrole is insoluble in water, soluble in alcohol or ether. Volatile with
steam.
Ciamician and Silber 23 found that safrole and isosafrole, when dissolved in
concentrated sulfuric acid, develop an intense red color, while heating with
phosphoric acid, according to Ono and Hirayama, yields allylpyrocatechol.
24
On treatment with 1,3,5-trinitrobenzene, safrole yields a crystalline com-

25
pound m. 51, according to Sudborough and Beard.
When heated with alkalies, safrole is converted to isosafrole. Sodium alco-
holate decomposes the methylenedioxy group after rearrangement to iso-
26
safrole (cf. Ono and Imoto ).
Use. used widely for the flavoring of certain beverages, chewing

Safrole is
gums, pharmaceuticals, oral preparations, tooth pastes, etc., and for the
scenting of soaps. The principal use, however, is for the conversion to iso-
safrole and the manufacture of heliotropin.
1
J. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 27 (1938), 574.
3
Ber. Schimmel & Co., Jubilaums-Ausgabe (1929), 153.
4
/. Chem. Soc. Japan 67 (1936), 565. Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 7497. Cf. Matcjika,
Ber. 69B (1936), 274; Huzita and Nakahara, J. Chem. Soc. Japan 62 (1941), 5. Chem.
Abstracts 37 (1943), 3882.
6
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 60 (1930), 7. Chem.. Abstracts 24 (1930), 1853.
6
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 68 (1937), 1185. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 3904. Cf. also Priester,
Rec. trav. chim. 67 (1938), 811.
7
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 4090.
8
Ibid. 68 (1936), 1415.
9
J. Chem. Soc. 97 (1910), 1139.
Liebigs Ann. 396 (1913), 295.
11
/. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 27 (1938), 574.
12
Liebigs Ann. 162 (1869), 40.
13
/. Chem. Soc. 86 (1904), 638.
14
"Die Atherischen Ole," 3d. Ed., Vol. I, 614.
15
Ibid.
16
Rec. trav. chim. 4 (1885), 32. Ber. 23 (1890), 862.
17
Rec. trav. chim. 47 (1928), 849.
18
J. Chem. Soc. (1927), 1663.
19
Rec. trav. chim. 67 (1938), 811.
20
"Einfache und fraktionierte Destination," 2 Aufl. (Miltitz 1923), 218.
21
See Gildemeister and Hoffmann, "Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 614.
22
/. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 27 (1938), 574.
23
Ber. 23 (1890), 1160.
24
25
/. Chem. Soc. 99 (1911), 214.
26

L. Bert, "Synthesis of Allyl and Propenyl Essential Oils. General Method," Compt.
Yasuji Fujita and Takeo Yamashita, "Determination of Safrole in Essential Oils,"
Isosafrole
CioHi O2 Mol. Weight 162.18
l,2-Methylenedioxy-4-propenylbenzene. Propenylpyrocatecholmethylene
ether
H
Theoretically, isosafrole can exist in the form of two geometrical isomers.
In fact, years ago Hoering and Baum 1
identified in technical isosafrole two
isomeric forms which they named a- and /3-isosafrole. The latter largely pre-
dominates in the commercial product. According to Nagai, 2 the relation-
ship of the isosafroles a case of cis-trans- isomerism, the labile cis- form on
is
warming being converted into the stable transform. Waterman and
Priester 3 came to the conclusion that the cis- or a-isosafrole reported in
earlier literature is a mixture of safrole and tfrans-isosafrole, and that only the
trans- or /5-isosafrole isolate ishomogeneous.
Occurrence. Isosafrole is not as widely distributed in nature as safrole.
It occurs probably in oil of ylang ylang.
Isolation. By fractional distillation, and purification through the picrate.
Identification. Isosafrole can be characterized by several methods. The variant
melting points reported for several of these compounds may be due in part to the fact
that the products retained a small percentage of unstable geometric isomers.
(a) Bromoisosaf role dibromide. Underwood, Baril and Toone 4
suggested the follow-
ing method:
Add 2.03 g. of bromine drop wise in the course of 15 min. to 0.41 g. of isosafrole dis-
solved in 2 cc. of carbon disulfide, and allow to stand for 24 hr. Grind the solid mass
in a mortar with 3 cc. of cold alcohol and recrystallize from 5 cc. of petroleum ether.
Needles m. 109. Ciamician and Silber 6
reported m. 109-110, Pond, Erb and Ford 6
m. 110-111 .
(b) Isosafrole picrate dark, red thick needles when crystallized from
m. 74-75
chloroform or alcohol, according to Baril and Megrdichian. 7 Nagai 8 recorded 73.5-
74 for the trans- isomer and 68.5 for the cis- isomer.
(2) By oxidation:
Oxidizing 5 g. of isosafrole with 25 g. of potassium bichromate and 8 g. of sulfuric
acid in 80 cc. of water, Ciamician and Silber 9 obtained about 4 g. of heliotropin
(piperonal), as isolated through its sodium bisulfite addition compound.
Oxidation of isosafrole with potassium permanganate yields piperonylic acid,
linoto lo described the following method:
Add 15 of isosafrole to 135 cc. of water, stir vigorously, and treat at 80-90 with
g.
a 4% aqueous solution of potassium permanganate (69 g.) added dropwise during an
hour. After the passage of another 30 min., filter and steam distill the unreacted
products, and precipitate the organic acid with hydrochloric acid. The yield will be
11.9 g., or 79.5%, of piperonylic acid m. 226-227.5.
(3) The pseudonitrosite m. 133, according to Monti and Dinelli,
11
prepared by the
method of Angeli. 12
Hudson and Robinson 13 reported that the reaction of 13 g. of isosafrole, 10 g. of
maleic anhydride and 40 cc. of xylene refluxed 3 hr. gives 10 g. of adduct. Extract this
derivative with chloroform, discarding the insoluble portion. The chloroform extract,
as well as the xylene mother liquors, yields a naphthalenedicarboxylic acid anhydride
m. 142-143; the phenylimide derived from the anhydride by heating with aniline
melts at 243.
Properties. a liquid with an anise-like odor.

Isosafrole is
As mentioned, Waterman and Priester 14 found that the cis- (or a-) iso-
safrole reported in the literature is a mixture of safrole and /rans-isosafrole
and that only the trans- (or @-) isosafrole is known with certainty.
Thefollowing properties have been reported by Waterman and Priester,
15
16 17
Nagai, Eijkman, and Gildemeister and Hoffmann 18 for the stable trans-
and the labile cu -isosafrole:
v
Trans- da-
16
rn. 6.7-6.8
16
b. 247-248 242-243 16
18
b4 105-106
15
df 1.122
5 16
di 1.1230-1.1235
17
dii.s 1.126
15
ng> 1.5782
16
1.5630-1. 5632
Conclusions relative to the configuration should not be drawn in terms of

the von Auwers-Skita 19 rule, which ordinarily requires the cis- compounds to
be of higher and refractive index, but of smaller molecular
specific gravity
refractions. It has been shown that this rule cannot be applied to members
of the styrene series. As regards isosafrole, the data on the cis- form are
still too meager for conclusions to be drawn.
Isosafrolesoluble in organic solvents, alcohol, ether, benzene, etc.

is It is
volatile with steam, and polymerizes under the influence of acids.
Use. Isosafrole is used mainly for the manufacture of heliotropin.
1
Ber. 42 (1909), 3076.
2
Eng. Tokyo Imp. Univ. 11 (1921), 83.
/. Coll.
8
Rec. trav. chim. 47 (1928), 851.
*J. Am. Chem. Soc. 52 (1930), 4090.
5
Ber. 23 (1890), 1164.
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 24 (1902), 341.
7
Ibid. 58 (1936), 1415.
8
/. Coll. Eng. Tokyo Imp. Univ. 11 (1921), 108. Chem. Abstracts 16 (1922), 418.
9
Ber. 23 (1890), 1160.
10
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. Japan 37, Suppl. (1934), 26.
11
Gazz. chim. ital. 62 (1932), 370. Cf. Wallach ami Mueller, Liebigs Ann. 332 (1904), 331.
Gazz. chim. ital. 22, II (1892), 335.
13
J. Chem. Soc. (1941), 715.
14
Rec. trav. chim. 47 (1928), 851, 1036; 48 (1929), 1272.
15
Ibid. 47 (1928), 851, 1033; 48 (1929), 1272.
16
/. Coll. Eng. Tokyo Imp. Univ. 11 (1921), 108. Chem. Abstracts 16 (1922), 418.
17
Ber. 23 (1890), 859.
18
Liebigs Ann. 420 (1920), 91. Ber. 53 (1920), 1792; 68 (1935), 1346.
19

Matsuji Takebayashi, "Reaction of Isosafrole with Hydrogen Halides. Considera-
tion of the Dimerization of Isosafrole," J. Chem. Soc. Japan 64 (1943), 1363. Chem.
Abstracts 41 (1947), 3774.
Matsuji Takebayashi, "Polymerization of Isosafrole. Synthesis of Diisosafrole
with Metallic Salts," J. Chem. Soc. Japan 65 (1944), 582. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947),
3774.
Myristicin
l,2-Methylenedioxy-6-methoxy-4-allylbenzene.
CH 2
1
HaCO
-CH=CH 2
Occurrence.Myristicin occurs in oils of nutmeg and mace, also in French

parsley and dill oil. This phenol ether must not be confused with the deposit
occasionally crystallizing from old nutmeg oils on standing. In the old litera-
ture this deposit was called "myristicin," but Fliickiger 1 showed it to consist
of myristic acid m. 54.
2
Huzita has recently detected myristicin in orthodon oils.

Myristicin can be characterized by the following methods:
Identification.
(1) On treatment with bromine, myristicin, according to Gildemeister and Hoff-
mann, yields dibromomyristicin dibromide (CaHsB^-CeB^CC^CH^-COCHa), m.
3
130 (cf. also Windisch, 4 and Trikojus and White 5 ).

According to Thorns, myristicin, on oxidation with permanganate, yields
6
(2)
myristicinaldehyde m. 130, and myristicinic acid m. 208-210. The same products
are obtained by oxidation of isomyristicin (see below). (Cf. Baker, Montgomery and
Smith, and Baker, Penfold and Simonsen.
7 8
)
Properties. Myristicin is an oil of slightly aromatic odor. Tt does not
congeal at low temperature. The following properties have been reported

9
by Power and Salway, Thorns,
10
and and White: n
Trikojus
b 40 17l-173 09 dig 1.1437 9
10 10
bis 149.5 dw 1.1425
95-97 n
5 5 -
9
b . 2 n) 1.52927
9
1. 54032
Onboiling with alcoholic potassium hydroxide or on treatment with metal-

lic sodium, the liquid myristicin is converted into solid isomyristicin, the allyl
group being rearranged into the propenyl group. Isomyristicin occurs in oil
of mace and dill herb.
CH 2
CH=CH-CH 3
Isomyristicin
l,2-Methylcnedioxy-6-methoxy-4-propenylbenzene
12
Power and Salway reported the following properties for isomyristicin:
m. 44
big 166
5 5 -
n|> 1.56551
Isomyristicin can be characterized by the preparation of a dibromide m.

109, and of dibromoisomyristicin dibromide m. 156 (cf. also Trikojus and
White 13 ).
Use. Myristicin is not used in our industries.

*
Pharm. J. Ill, 5 (1874), 136.
2
/. Chem. SGC, Japan 61 (1940), 729. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 6753.
3
4
Merck's Jahresber. 47 (1933), 56.
6
Nature 144 (1939), 1016.
Ber. 36 (1903), 3446.
7
/. Chem. Soc. (1932), 1283.
8
Ibid. (1939), 439.
9
Ibid. 91 (1907), 2054.
10
Ber. 36 (1903), 3447.
" Nature 144 (1939), 1016.
12
/. Chem. Soc. 91 (1907), 2054.
13
Nature 144 (1939), 1016.
Croweacin
O -CH 2
Mol. Weight 192.21
VÔCH 1
CH 2 CH=CH 2
.
This phenol ether was first described by Penfold and Morrison. 1 Some
2
years later, Penfold and collaborators established for croweacin the struc-
tural formula picturedabove (l,2-rnethylenedioxy-3-methoxy-4-allylbenzcne).
3
Occurrence. According to Penfold and Morrison, croweacin forms the
main constituent (about 90 per cent) of the oil distilled from the leaves and
terminal branchlets of Eriostemon crowd F. Mull. (fam. Rutaceac), (Crowd
saligna).
Isolation. fractional distillation, which must be repeatedly carried out as the

By
phenol ether, according to Penfold and Morrison, is not easily freed from accompany-
4
ing laevo- and dextrorotatory substances possessing closely related boiling points.
Identification. On treatment with bromine, croweacin yields dibromocroweacin
dibromide m. 108.
Oxidation of croweacin by potassium permanganate, according to Baker, Penfold
and Simonsen, 6 yields a glycol m. 90-91 (recrystallization first from ligroine and then
from ether).
6
Properties. For natural croweacin Baker, Penfold and Simonsen re-
ported:
b io 129-131
djf 1.1346
5
nj?' 1.5346
7
Penfold and Morrison had earlier observed constants of the same order
and reported b 76 6 256-258.
Refluxed for 68 hr. with 16 potassium hydroxide in 60 cc. of ethyl
g. of
alcohol, the natural croweacin is converted to isocroweacin (2-methoxy-3,4-

methylenedioxypropenylbenzene), which after purification by the picrate had
these properties: bi 2 145-147, nf? 1.5675, picrate m. 75-76 (garnet red
crystals). The natural croweacin does not form a picrate. 6 The isocrowea-
cin behaves in an unexpected manner toward bromine in acetic acid at room
temperature, and yields l,2,3-tribromo-4-methoxy-5,6-methylenedioxyben-
zene with complete loss of the propenyl side chain.
Use. Croweacin is not used in our industries.
1
/. Proc. Roy. Soc. N. 8. Wales 66 (1922), 227.
*J. Chem. Soc. (1938), 756; (1939), 439.
3
4
Ibid.
6
,7. Chem. Soc. (1939), 441.
6
Ibid.
7
Elemicin
Ci 2 Hi 6 O 3 Mol. Weight 208.25
1 ,2,6-Trimethoxy-4-ally Ibenzene
)CH 3
H CO
3 // V-OCHa
CH 2 -CH=CH 2
Occurrence. Elemicin is the main constituent of Manila elemi oil after
which it has been named by Semmler. 1
Elemicin occurs also in a few other
volatile oils.
Isolation. By fractional distillation. Semmler 2 purified the fraction b. 277-280

of elerni oil byboiling with formic acid whereby the allyl compound remains unchanged
and the propenyl compounds are destroyed.
Identification.Elemicin can be characterized by the following methods :
(1) On oxidation with potassium permanganate in acetone solution, elemicin yields

trimethylgallic acid m. 169, bio 225-227. The same end product is formed on
oxidation of isoelemicin with permanganate.
(2) By rearrangement and preparation of isoelemicin dibromide m. 88-89, accord-
ing to Gildemeister and Hoffmann.
3
(3) Ozonization with 1% ozone in ethyl acetate and decomposition of the ozonide
in a reducing atmosphere gave 75% of 3,4,5-(CH 30)3C6H 2 CH CHO, which was isolated
by means of its bisulfite compound. The aldehyde regenerated from this addition
compound yields an oxime m. 67, and a semicarbazone m. 191, according to Hahn
and Wassmuth. 4
Properties. The following properties of elemicin have been reported by

Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 5
and Habn and Wassmuth: 6
6 5
152-156 d 20 1.063
5 5
io 144-147 nD 1.52848
On boiling with alcoholic potassium hydroxide or on treatment with metal-

lic sodium, elemicin is converted to isoelemicin (l,2,6-trimethoxy-4-propenyl-
benzene), an isomer of asarone.
Gildemeister and Hoffmann 7 reported these properties of isoelemicin:
b 10 153-15G
d 20 1.073
nD 1.54679
Use. Elemicin, as such, is not used in our industries.

i Ber. 41 (1908), 1768, 1918, 2183, 2556.
*Ibid. 41 (1908), 1918, 2185.
3
4
Ber. 67B (1934), 696.
6
6
Ber. 67B (1934), 704.
7
L. Bert, "Synthesis of Allyl arid Propenyl Essential Oils. General Method," Compt.
Asarone
C 12 H 16 O 3 Mol. Weight 208.25
l,2,5-Trimethoxy-4-propenylbenzene
OCH 3
-OCH 3
I I
H CO-3
Asarone occurs in oil of Asarum arifoliwn, A. europaeum,

Occurrence.
calamus, matico, and a few other volatile oils.
The isolate from the oil in roots of Acorus calamus Linn, was shown by
Rao and Subramaniam, 1 however, to be /3-asarone and differs from the ordi-
nary asarone as do cis-trans- isomers.
Oils containing a high percentage of asarone separate this phenol ether on
prolonged standing.
Isolation. By fractional distillation and cooling of the asarone fraction to a low
temperature, followed by recrystallization.
Identification. Ordinary asarone can be characterized by the following methods
(where the properties of the isomeric 0-asarone are known they are described) :
(1) According to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, by the preparation of the dibromide

2
m. 86. On treatment with sodium methylate in the cold, this dibromide yields a
compound (CH 3 0) 3 CeH 2 CH(OCH 3 ) CHBr 3 m. 77.5. CH ,
Rao and Subramaniam reported the dibromide of /3-asarone as a liquid and the
3
melting point of that of asarone as 82-83.

(2) By the action of chromic acid, asarone is oxidized to asaryl aldehyde m. 114,
while on oxidation with potassium permanganate, asarone forms asaryl aldehyde and
asaronic acid m. 144 (trimethoxybenzoic acid) (Gildemeister and Hoffmann).
(3) Picrate m. 81-82, by Bruni and Tornani.
4
(4) Compound with trinitrobenzene C^HieOs +

CeHaOeNa, m. 77-78, according
to Sudborough and Beard. 6
6
(5) According to Bruckner, asarone in ether reacts with aqueous sodium nitrite
previously acidified with 20% sulfuric acid to give an 80% yield of asarone pseudo-
nitrosite (C^HieOeNa^, yellow, m. 130 (dec.). This compound reacts further with
8% alcoholic potassium hydroxide to yield /3-nitroasarone m. 101 which exists as
both a red and yellow form.
Rao and Subramaniam 7 reported that asarone and /3-asarone both yield the same
^-nitrosite.
Properties.In pure form asarone is odorless and tasteless. The follow-

ing properties of the trans- and cis- isomers, asarone and /3-asarone, have been
reported by Rao and Subramaniam: 8
2
m. b l2 diS nD [R L ] D
Asarone 62-63 167-1G8 1.112 1.5(383 62.7
0-Asarone . . . 162-163 1 . 082 1 . 5552 02 2.
No
deduction as to configuration can safely be drawn, however, from these
9
figures as the rule of von Auwers-Skita is not strictly applicable in the sty-
rene series.
These isomers are interconvertible by the action of alkali, according to the
above authors.
Asarone is slightly soluble in hot water, readily soluble in alcohol, ether
and chloroform.
Asarone, as such, is not used in our industries, although "asarone
Use.
oil" in which it is contained has, according to Orient, 10 found some use as
an abortifacient.
1
Ckem. Soc. (1937), 1338.
/.
2
"Die Xtherischen Die," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 618.
8
J. Chem. Soc. (1937), 1338.
*
Atli accad. Lincei [51, 13, II (1904), 186.
*J. Chem. Soc. 99 (1911), 214.
6
/. prakt. Chem. 138 (1933), 271; 148 (1937), 5.
7
/. Chem. Soc. (1937), 1338.
8
Ibid., 1339.
Liebigs Ann. 420(1920), 91. Ber. 53 (1920), 1792; 68 (1935), 1346.
10
Pharm. Monatsh. 11 (1930), 174. Chem. Abstracts 25 (1931), 169.
Diasarone
Mol. Weight 416.5
OCHa
H H
HaC c- -C- -CH 3
OCHu
OCH.j
HaCO C- -C-
H H
OCH 3
Gero l
found in the volatile oil derived from the roots of Hungarian wild
hazelnut, Asarum europaeum L. (fam. Aristolochiaceae) a phenol ether, viz., ,
(C^HieOa^, m. 99. Haraszti and Sze"ki reported for synthetic

2
diasarone
diasarone a melting point of 101.5. The work of these investigators sug-
gests the above-pictured formula as a symmetrical dimeride of asarone.
Diasarone was identified by oxidation to asaronic acid m. 144.
1
Riechstoff Ind. 3 (1928), 176. Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1929), 49. Chem. Abstracts 24 (1930),
0035
2
Liebigs Ann. 507 (1933), 201. Cf. Ber. 39 (1906), 2422.
Apiole
Mol. Weight 222.23
l,2-Methylenedioxy-3,6-dimethoxy-4-allylbenzcne.
"Parsley camphor"
HCa
The was established through the investigations of

constitution of apiole
Ciamician and Silber, and Thorns, 2 and confirmed in recent work of Baker
1
and Savage 3 who completed a synthesis of this product and identified it with
the natural isolate.
*
The pure chemicalnot to be confused with the commercial "green oily liquid" some-
is
times described as apiole. For a discussion of this compound, see Walmsley, Pharm. J.
121 (1928), 89. Chemist Druggist 109 (1928), 127. Quart. J. Pharm. 1 (1928), 388.
Occurrence. Apiole occurs in parsley seed oil and in a few other volatile
oils.
Isolation. By cooling of the oil to a low temperature, and

recrystallization from
alcoholand petroleum ether. Separable from the isomeric isoapiole by means of their
mercury salts (cf. Balbiano ).
4
Apiole can be characterized by several methods:

Identification.
(1) By the preparation of apiole tribromide (bromoapiolc dibromide) (CHsO^CeBr-
(02CH 2 ) CsHsB^, m. 80-80.5, as recorded by Baker and Savage, from the reaction
6
of excess bromine in carbon disulfide on natural apiole.

(2) By oxidation:
Onoxidation with potassium permanganate, apiole as well as isoapiole yields
apiolaldehyde m. 102 and apiolic acid m. 173. Fabinyi and Sz6ki found that
6
apiolaldehyde is obtained most conveniently by oxidation of isoapiole with ethyl

nitrite. Apiolaldehyde forms a characteristic p-nitrophenylhydrazone m. 228-229,
according to Quilico and Freri.
7
suggested a suitable method for the quantitative determination of

8
(3) Vignoli
apiole, by means of bromination and titration of excess halogen by means of bisulfite.
(4) The following qualitative colori metric test is recommended by lonesco-Matiu
and Popesco: 9
To 1 cc. of the alcoholic solution add 5 drops of a

solution of phosphomolybdic
2.5%
acid in dilute alcohol. Then add 0.5 cc. of concentrated sulfuric acid and shake. A
deep blue-green color changing to orange-red on heating indicates apiole.
Properties. Apiole crystallizes in the form of long colorless needles. The

odor is faint, reminiscent of parsley.
10
The following properties have been reported by Ciamician and Silber,
Vignoli,
11
Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 12 Eykman,
13
and Baker and Savage: 14
14 12
m. 28.5-29 (synthetic) dJs 1.1788 (superfused)
13
28 ll
(natural) du 1.176
b. 292 " nJJ 1.5380 13

(liquid)
b 34 179 l
1B
Apiole has been reported by Volochneva as polymorphic with an unstable
form m. 18-19.
Apiole almost insoluble in water, soluble in alcohol, ether or in fatty oils.
is
On boiling with alcoholic potassium hydroxide, apiole is converted into

m. 55-56, which yields a monobromide m. 51, a dibromide m.
isoapiole
75, and a tribromide m. 120.
Apiole as well as isoapiole reacts with nitrous acid.
Use. Apiole, as such, is not used in our industries, although it is reported
as a substance of considerable physiological power but of questionable thera-
16
peutic value (cf. U. S. Dispensatory ).
1
Ber. 21 (1888), 913, 1621; 22 (1889), 2481; 23 (1890), 2283.
*Ber. 36 (1903), 1714.
*J. Chem. Soc. (1938), 1602.
4
Ber. 42 (1909), 1506. Atti accad. Lined [5], 18, I (1909), 375.
6
J. Chem. Soc. (1938), 1607. Cf. Ginsberg, Ber. 21 (1888), 2514.
6
Ber. 60 (1917), 1335. Cf. Baker and Savage, J. Chem. Soc. (1938), 1606.
7
Gazz. chim. ital. 68 (1928), 380.
8
Bull. sci. pharmacol. 40 (1933), 344. Chem. Abstracts 27 (1933), 4628.
9
Bull. soc. chim. biol. 17 (1935), 671. Chem. Abstracts 29 (1935), 5222.
10
Ber. 21 (1888), 1622.
11
Bull. sci. pharmacol.40 (1933), 344. Chem. Abstracts 27 (1933), 4628.
12
13
Ber. 23 (1890), 862.
14
J. Chem. Soc. (1938), 1607.
16
J. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 77. Chem. Abstracts 24 (1930), 4679.
16
24th Ed., Lippincott (1947), 1543.
Payen, "Detection and Determination of Apiole in Viscera," Ann. m6d.

I. legale
criminol. police sci. 15 (1935), 59. Chem. Abstracts 29 (1935), 4694.
Dillapiole
C 12 Hi 4 O 4 Mol. Weight 222.23
l,2-Methylenedioxy-5,6-dimethoxy-4-allylbenzene
CH*
H -CH=CH
2 2
constitution of dillapiole was established by Thorns, 1

The and the complete
2
synthesis effected by Baker, Jukes and Subrahmanyam.
Occurrence. Dillapiole occurs in East Indian, Japanese, and Spanish dill
oils and Crithmum maritimum. Spoelstra 3
in oil of reported the compound
in Bamba oil ("laurel oil"); Kariyone and Teramoto 4 identified it in Ligusti-
cum scoticum and Huzita 5 detected 65 per cent in Orthodon formosanum
Kudo; it also occurs in a few other volatile oils.

Identification. Dillapiole can be characterized by several methods:
(1) On treatment with excess bromine, dillapiole forms a monobromoapiole di-
bromide C^HiaBraO^ colorless prisms which melt at 107, according to Baker, Jukes
and Subrahmanyam. 6
(2) On
treatment with alcoholic potassium hydroxide, dillapiole is converted into
dillisoapiole m. 44, b. 296 (dec.). Del6pine and Longuet
7
prepared the tribromide
of dillisoapiole m. 115. Spoelstra 8 reported the picrate as m. 81.5.
(3) On oxidation with alkaline potassium permanganate solution, dillapiole, accord-
ing to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, yields dillapiolaldehyde CioHioOs, m. 75, and
9
10
dillapiolic acid CioHioOe, m. 151-152 (144 according to Kariyone and Teramoto ).
Properties. a viscid, almost odorless oil. The following prop-
Dillapiole is
erties have been reported by Ciamician and Silber, 11 Spoelstra, 12 Baker, Jukes
14
and Subrahmanyam, 13 and Del6pine:
b. 285 u dlf 1.1598 12
172-173 13 3
1.1644 "
bi 6 dj
162" 5 u
bn nf> 1.52778
12
1.5305
Use. Dillapiole, as such, is not used in our industries.

i
Arch. Pharrn. 242 (1904), 344.
2
J. Chem. Soc. (1934), 1681.
8
Rec. trav. chim. 48 (1929), 372.
4
5
6
/. Chem. Soc. (1934), 1683. Cf. Kariyonc and Teramoto, J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 69 (1939),
313; Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 7959. Spoelstra, Rec. trav. chim. 48 (1929), 372. Ciamician
and Silber, Ber. 29 (1896), 1800.
7
Bull. soc. chim. IV, 39 (1926), 1022.
8
Rec. trav. chim. 48 (1929), 373.
9
10
Pharm. Soc. Japan 69 (1939), 313. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 7959.
/.
" Gazz. chim. ital. II, 26 (1896), 293. Ber. 29 (1896), 1799.
12
Rec. trav. chim. 48 (1929), 373.
13
J. Chem. Soc. (1934), 1682. Cf. Kariyonc and Teramoto, J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 69 (1939),
313; Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 7959. Spoelstra, Rec. trav. chim. 48 (1929), 372. Ciami-
cian and Silber, Ber. 29 (1896), 1800.
14
Compt. rend. 149 (1909), 216.
Calamol
Ci 2 Hi 6 3 Mol. Weight 208.25
(CH3 0) 3 C 6 H 2 (CH 2 CH==CH 2 )
-
Qudrat-i-Khuda, Mukherjee and Ghosh

*
Occurrence. isolated from
the rhizomes of Acorus calamus an oily substance of the empirical formula
C^HieOs which they demonstrated to be an allyltrimethoxybenzene.
Isolation. The from the Indian variety "ghorebaeha" is fractionally
essential oil
distilled several times, saving the cut bs 153-154 which amounts to 7-8% of the total
steam distilled oil.
Identification. Oxidation with alkaline permanganate yields calamonic acid m.

143.
Properties. The isolate from Indian calamus oil possesses these properties:
b5 153-154 [R L ] D Found 61.9

1
df 1.07021 Calc. 58.5
1.55012
Calamol a colorless mobile liquid with a strong characteristic and rather

is
pleasant aromatic odor.

When refluxed with alcoholic potassium hydroxide, calamol is isomerized
H
to an isocalamol (C 9 11 O 3 -CH=CH-CH3, b 2 133, df
5
1.07261, n^
1 6 '
1.55229), which yields a trimethoxybenzoic acid identical with that obtained

from calamol upon oxidation with alkaline permanganate.
Calamol forms a dihydroderivative when catalytically reduced: C^HigOa,
1 * L2
b 2 124, dj 1.03109, nf) 1.51219.
Demethylation shows the existence of three methoxy groups.
Use. Calamol, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
J. Indian Chem. Soc. 16 (1939), 583. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 2531.
Allyltetramethoxybenzene
l-2,3,6-Tetramethoxy-4-allylbenzene
OCH 3
OCH 3
!I,-CH=CH 2
Occurrence. Thorns l
isolated this phenol ether from French parsley seed
oil.
Isolation. By fractional distillation, cooling of the corresponding fraction to a

low temperature, and recrystallization.
Identification. Allyltetramethoxybenzene can be characterized by its oxidation
product. For this purpose Bignami and Testoni used potassium permanganate and
2
obtained tetramethoxybenzoic acid which crystallizes in the form of long needles m.

87.
3
Properties. Thorns reported these properties:
m. 25
d 26 1.087
nf? 1.51462
Use. Allyltetramethoxybenzene is not used in our industries.
iBer. 41 (1908), 2761.

2Gazz. chim. ital. 30, I (1900), 246.
*Ber. 41 (1908), 2761.
Diosphenol
(Buchucamphor)
Mol. Weight 168.23
CH 3 CH Oil,
C C CH
H2C c on H2 C
\C OH HoC
H2C c=o HoC G OH HoC C=O
\OH
C CH
CH CH CIl
cn 3 H3 C CH- H,C CII;
Occurrence. Diosphenol the main constituent (17-30 per cent) of the

is
)ils distilled from the leaves (buchu leaves) of various Barosma species, es-
pecially Barosma betulina Bartl. Some of these oils partly crystallize at

'oom temperature, the (Crystals being diosphenol.
Isolation. Diosphenol may he separated from Barosma betulina oil by cooling the
)il repeatedly to 20 and by fractionating. Or diosphenol can be isolated from
Barosma oils by shaking with dilute alkali solutions and by acidifying the solution,
lowever, in this case care has to be exercised because part of the diosphenol will
lissolve in the ether if, previous to acidification, the alkali solution is extracted with
ether.
Identification. Diosphenol can be characterized by itsm. 83, by the fact that it

educes both Fehling's and ammoniacal silver solutions, that it gives an intense green
coloration with ferric chloride, and by the preparation of several derivatives as indi-
cated below. Its reaction and derivatives would seem to confirm the formula of a
cyclic hydrogcnated keto-phenol originally assigned to this terpenic derivative,
lowever, recent physicochemical studies have led a number of investigators (Straneo, 1
ind Gillam, Lynas-Gray, Tenfold and Simonscn 2 ) to attribute a diphenolic structure
,o buchucamphor. Such a structure (conforms to the reactions discussed above.
(1) Phcnylurethanc m. 113 (Asahina and Mituhori ).
3
(2) Monoxime m. 125 which forms very slowly (Scmmler and McKenzie 4 )-
(3) When heated with alcoholic alkali in a sealed tube to 150- 100, diosphenol
orms a hydroxy acid which crystallizes from water in needles m. 94 (Semmler and
VtcKenzie).
Properties. Diosphenol possesses a peculiar mint-like odor. It forms op-

,ieally inactive, monoclinic crystals m. 83, bio 109-110. Von Auwers 5
eported these properties for the fused ketone:
m. 83
U]99.2
4 0.9524
-.99.8 1 \C*C\*7C\
AND riltiNUL KTUKKS 543
Diosphenol is very readily attacked by oxidizing agents.

Use. Because it is not readily available, diosphenol has not found any
noteworthy use in our industries.
1
ital. 70 (1940), 27; 71 (1941), 646.
Gazz. chim.
2
Chem. 8oc. (1941), 60.
J.
3
J. Pharm. Roc. Japan 482 (1922), 255. Chem. Abstrac.ts 16 (1922), 2502.
*Rer. 39 (1906), 1158.
6
Bcr. 67 (1924), 1106.
Phloracetophenone Dimethyl Ether
(Xanthoxylin)
CiolIi 2 O 4 Mol. Weight 190.20
2-TIydroxy-4,(5-dimethoxyacetophenone
CO-CHa
-OII
Occurrence.This compound occurs in the oil of Blumca balsamifera and in

a few other volatile oils. Penfold found it in the oil derived from the leaves
l
and twigs of Gcijcra parviflora Lindley var. A (fam. Itutaceae), and in the oil
derived from Gcijcra salicifolia Schott. Sonn 2 reported the presence of
phloracetophenone dimethyl ether in the volatile oils of Xanthorrhea. Fin-

3
layson in the past had described this compound as "hydroxypeonol." This
ether is likewise found in literature under the name of "brevifolin," having
been isolated from Artemisia brcvifolia (cf. Communication from Laboratories
T. & II. Smith Ltd. 4).
Isolation. (1) By cooling of the oil, and crystallization.

(2) By fractional distillation.
(3) Due
to its phenolic nature, this compound can be extracted from volatile oils
by treatment with a dilute aqueous sodium hydroxide solution, and by acidification
of the separated aqueous layer whereby phloracetophenone dimethyl ether precipitates
as a solid, yellowish substance.
Identification. Phloracetophenone dimethyl ether may be characterized by several
methods:
by Gildemeister and Hoffmann:
6
By the preparation of derivatives, as recorded
(1) Oximcm. 108-110.
(2) Monobromide m. 187.
(3) Acetyl compound m. 106-107.
(4) Methyl ether m. 103.
(5) Condensation with benzaldehyde yields 2-hydroxy-4,6-dimethoxychalcone m.
91_92 (cf. also Kimura 6
).
Shinoda and Sato obtained a meconinic acid derivative m. 175 by alkaline con-
7
densation with opianic acid; the derived monomethyl ether melted at 144-145, and
the dimethyl ether at 155-156.
Gulati and Venkataraman 8 prepared the benzoyl derivative m. 91 by the action
of benzoyi chloride in pyridine upon 2-hydroxy-4,6-dimethoxyacetophenone.
Properties. On from benzene or petroleum ether phlor-

recrystallization
acetophenone dimethyl ether forms colorless crystals m. 82-83; b. 307
9 10
(Barger and Easton ), b 20 185 (Sonn ).
Because of the phenolic and ketonic groups contained in its molecule, this
phenol ether reacts as a phenol as well as a ketone. However, according to
Sonn and Winzer, 11 these functional groups may not always react smoothly
as this compound may display a tautomeric structure under certain conditions.
Use. Phloracetophenone dimethyl ether is not used in our industries.
1
2
Ber. 61A (1928), 2300.
/. Chem. Soc. (1926), 2763.
4
Chemist Druggist 112 (1930), 7. Pharm. J. 123 (1929), 604, 611.
6
6
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 60, 145, Abstracts (in German) 51 (1940). Chem. Abstracts 34
(1940), 4063.
7
8
.7.Chem. Soc. (1936), 268.
9
See Communication from Laboratories, T. & H. Smith Ltd., Chemist Druggist 112 (1930), 7.
10
Ber. 61A (1928), 2301.
Ibid., 2303.
Eugenone
2,4,6-Trimethoxybenzoylacetone
CO-CH 2 -CO.CH3
HaCO
OCH.
1
, Occurrence. Meijer first observed this compound in the oil extracted
with petroleum ether from the dried buds (cloves) of the variety of tree Eu-
genia caryophyllata Thunb. which grows wild in the Moluccas. Curiously
enough, the oil from the cloves of this wild growing tree contains no eugenol.
2
Meijer expressed the opinion that eugenone is 2,6-dimethoxy-4-hydroxy-
3
acetophenone. Schmid, however, demonstrated that this could not be the
case, since the melting point of the last-named compound, synthesized years
4
ago by Canter, Curd and Robertson, differed considerably from that of
eugenone.
More recently, Meijer and Schmid, 5 working in collaboration, found that
eugenone actually 2,4,6-trimethoxybenzoylacetone, the
is first member of the
benzoylacetone series observed in nature.
Isolation. By recrystallization of the extract of the cloves (see above), and by

sublimation of the crude eugenone m. 93-96 in (high) vacuo bo.oos 100-105.
Identification. By the preparation of the p-nitrophenylhydrazone m. 221-222.
Properties. Odorless and colorless needles m. 97-98.

On treatment with alcoholic ferric chloride, eugenone develops a dark red
color.
Use. Eugenone, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Rec. trav. chim. 66 (1946), 843.
2
Ibid.
3
Helv. Chim. Ada 30 (1947), 1663.
4
/. Ckem. Soc. (1931), 1245.
6
Helv. Chim. Ada 31 (1948), 748.
Baeckeol
C 13 H 18 O 4 Mol. Weight 238.27
2-Hydroxy-4,6-dimcthoxy-3-methyl-isobutyrophenone
CH 3
C
H 3 CO C
\C Oil CH 3
HC C CO CH .
\C / \CH
3
OCH 3
The phenol Ci 3 IIi8O 4 first described by Penfold and Morrison, was later
,
1
examined by Penfold and Simonsen 2 who suggested a tentative structural

formula and the name baeckeol. Ramage and Stowe 3 synthesized methyl
phloroisobutyrophenone dimethyl ether and found it to be identical with
baeckeol. A second synthesis was offered by Hems and Todd. 4
Occurrence. Baeckeol occurs in the oils of Baeckea crenulata and Darwinia
grandiflora.
Isolation. Soluble in dilute alkali; separated in the phenolic fraction of the essential
oil.
Baeckeol yields a colorless monoacetyl derivative (crystallized from
Identification.
methyl alcohol) found by Hems and Todd to be dimorphic: (I) (prisms) m. 73 which,
6
if maintained at 75 for a short time, resolidifies and then melts as II (needles) m.

79-80.
Nitration with nitric acid-sulfuric acid gives a nitro derivative m. 106 (Ci 2 Hi5N0 5 ).
Blue color with 2,6-dichloroquinonechloroimide.
Fusion with sodium ethylate at 200-220 in an atmosphere of nitrogen for 4 hr.
yields methyl phloroglucinol dimethyl ether m. 67-68.
Properties. Baeckeol forms yellow crystals m. 103-104. This phenol is

soluble in hot alcohol, moderately soluble in ethyl acetate, and sparingly so
in petroleum ether.
Use. Baeckeol is not used in our industries.
1
*Ibid. 71 (1936), 291.
*J. Chem.Soc. (1940), 425.
4
Ibid. (1940), 1208.
6
Ibid.
VI. QUINONES
Hydroquinone
C 6 H6 O 2 Mol. Weight 1 10. 1 1
p-Dihydroxybenzene. Hydroquinol
H
According to Benezet and Brun, small quantities of this
1
Occurrence.
phenol occur, probably as glucosides, in oil of star anise (Illicium verum
Hooker f.).
The work of Danner 2
indicates that hydroquinone occurs bound in the
leaves of Saxifraga crassifolia, and Sviridova 3 likewise detected the com-
pound in products extracted from ensilaged star anise leaves. Thus, hydro-
quinone may heretofore not have been found in many oils because no previous
treatment had served to free this phenol from its glucoside in the plant.
Isolation. By the preparation of water soluble salts in dilute aqueous alkali solution
and regeneration through acidification.
(1) Ry
(a) Diacetate m. 123-124 (from water or alcohol), according to Chattaway.
4
(b) Dibenzoate m. 204 (corr.) (from toluene), according to Bogert and Ho wells;
6
monobenzoate m. 161-162, by Varvoglis.

(c) Hydroquinone 6is-phenylurethane m. 224, according to Morgan and Pettet.
7
(d) Hydroquinone methane sulfonate m. 167 (Helferich and Papalambrou ), by

8
the action of methane sulfonyl chloride in pyridine on hydroquinone.

(2) By means of color reactions:
(a) 7 7 of hydroquinol gives a blue color with o-phthalic aldehyde and sulfuric acid,
9
according to Eegriwe, while 1 7 of hydroquinone produces an orange color with
phloroglucinol in alkaline solution.
10
Properties. Hydroquinone is reported by Lindpaintner as dimorphous
but the two forms have identical melting points (172.5).
b. 286 (Huntress and Mulliken n ).
Pardee and Weinrich 12 report the calculated value for dJSc?' as 1.315.
Hydroquinone sublimes without decomposition 10 below its melting point,
13
according to Hesse.
It is readily soluble in alcohol or ether. Kempf 14 reported that this phenol
is very sparingly soluble in benzene (0.2 g. per liter). A
saturated aqueous
549
550 QU 1 NONES
solution contains 5.8 per cent of hydroquinone at 15, and 9.4 parts at 28.5,
15
according to Hlasiwetz and Habermann.
Onshaking with excess dimethyl sulfate and 5 N
aqueous sodium hydrox-
ide, hydroquinone yields the dimethyl ether, white flakes m. 53-55, b. 210-
212. The diethyl ether melts at 70-71, b. 234-235.
Hydroquinone reduces Fehling's solution in the cold, ammoniacal silver
nitrate on warming.
Use. Hydroquinone has been extensively investigated as an antioxidant
for oils and flavors. For this purpose it seems to have considerable merit
16
(cf. Hollander and Tracy; Sumerford, Huff and Coleman;
17
Bose 18).
1
Ann. chirn. anal. chim. appl. 23 (1941), 263. Chem. Abstracts 38 (1944), 2164.
z
Botan. Arch. 41 (1940), 168.
3
Lesokhim. Prom., No. 11 (1939), 45. Khim. Referat. Zhur., No. 5 (1940), 114. Chem. Ab-
stracts 36 (1942), 3973.
4
J. Chem. Soc. (1931), 2496. Cf. Spasov, Ann. Univ. Sofia II Faculte phys. -math. Livre 2,
36 (1938), 289. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 2343. See also Ciusa and Sollazzo, Ann. chim.
applicata 33 (1943), 72. Chem. Abstracts 38 (1944), 5794.
6
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 52 (1930), 846.
6
Ber 71 (1938), 2490.
7
J. Chem. Soc. (1931), 1125.
Liebigs Ann. 661 (1942), 238.
8
Z. anal. Chem. 126 (1943), 241.

10 Mikrochemie 27 (1939), 31. Cf. Lehmann, Jahresber. (1877), 566. Also Garelli, Gazz.
chim. ital. 26, I (1896), 76.
11
12
Ind. Eng. Chem. 36 (1944), 603.
Liebigs Ann. 200 (1880), 242.
13
"Ber. 39 (1906), 3721.

Liebigs Ann. 180 (1876), 345.
16
J. Dairy Sci. Research 12 (1941), 131.
17
/. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 33 (1944),. 150.
18 Trans. Bose Research hist. Calcutta 13 (1937), 71. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 8302.
Ldszl6 Ekkcrt, "Color Reactions of Phenols," Ber. ungar. pharm. Ges. 15 (1939), 29.
B. N. Afana'sev, "Colorimetric Determination of Some Phenols and Naphthols,"
Khim. Prom., No. 7 (1944), 18. Chem. Abstracts 39 (1945), 677. J. Applied Chem.
U.S.S.R. 17 (1944), 335.
QUINONES 551
Hydroquinone Monomethyl Ether

C 7 H8O2 Mol. Weight 124.13
p-Methoxy phenol .
p-Hydroxy anisole
OH
CH3
According to Benezet and Brim, small quantities of this phe-

1
Occurrence.
nol ether occur, probably as glucosides, in oil of star anise (Illiciam vcrum
Hooker f.).
Goris and Canal 2 observed the corresponding methyl carbonate in the es-
sential oil derived from the roots of Primula auricula L.
Isolation. By
the preparation of water-soluble salts in dilute aqueous alkali solu-
tion and regeneration through acidification.
Identification. By the preparation of the p-methoxyphenyl benzoate rn. 87,
according to Irvine and Smith.
3
4
According to Benezet and Brun, and Robinson and Smith,
5
Properties.
hydroquirione monomethyl ether has these properties:
4 4
m. 53 b. 245
56 5
243-244 5
It reduces Tollen's reagent.

On
methylatiori, hydroquinone monomethyl ether forms hydroquinone di-
methyl ether (1,4-dimethoxybenzene), white flakes m. 53-55, b. 210-212.
Use. The mono- and
especially the dimethyl ether are used in the per-
fume, cosmetic, flavor, and pharmaceutical industries.
1
Ann. chim. anal. chim. appl. 23 (1941), 263. Chem. Zentr. II (1942), 2094. Chem. Ab-
stracts 38 (1944), 2164.
Compt. rend. 202 (1936), 1351.
2
3
J. Chem. Soc. (1927), 75.
4
Ann. chim. anal. chim. appl. 23 (1941), 263. Chem. Zentr. II (1942), 2094. Chem. Ab-
stracts 38 (1944), 2164.
6
/. Chem. Soc. 129 (1926), 394.
552 QUINONES
Hydroquinone Monoethyl Ether

C 8 H 10 O 2 Mol. Weight 138.16
p-Ethoxyphenol. p-Hydroxyphenetole
OC H 5
2
Occurrence. Small quantities of this ether occur in oil of star anise (Illicium
verum Hooker f.) (cf. "Hydroquinone Monomethyl Ether").
Isolation. By
the preparation of water-soluble salts in dilute aqueous alkali solu-
tion and regeneration through acidification.
Identification. Hydroquinone monoethyl ether can be characterized through its
properties.
Properties. The following properties have been reported by Gildemeister

and Hoffmann: l
m. 66
b. 246-247
Hydroquinone monoethyl ether crystallizes from water in the form of lus-

trous thin leaflets.
This ether is fairly easily soluble in cold water, readily soluble in hot water,
very soluble in alcohol or ether.
Use. Hydroquinone monoethyl ether has been suggested as an antioxi-
dant of essential oils. The diethyl ether, white flakes m. 70-71, b. 234-
235, is used in the perfume, cosmetic, flavor and pharmaceutical industries.
1
QUINONES 553
Thymohydroquinone
Mol. Weight 166.21
2-Methyl-5-isopropyl-l ,4-hydroquinone. Thymoquinol
CH 3
Occurrence. Thymohydroquinone occurs in oil of Monarda fistulosa, M.

punctata, and in a few other volatile oils. Recently observed by Malavya
and Dutt 1
in the oil steam distilled from the seeds of Carum roxburghianum
Benth.
Isolation.Fractionation of the essential oil, with separation conducted on frac-

tions boiling above 230. Extraction with aqueous 5% sodium hydroxide solution
and precipitation with carbon dioxide. Ether extraction of the residue (cf. Malavya
and Dutt).
Identification. Thymohydroquinone can be characterized by oxidation to
(1)
thymoquinone m. 45.5 (see "Thymoquinone").
(2) Preparation of the a-naphthylurethane m. 147-148, the dibenzoyl derivatives
m. 141-142, and the phenylurethane m. 232-233, according to Sherk. 3
Thymohydroquinone crystallizes in the form

Properties. of long white
needles m. 141.5, according to Conant and Fieser. 3
The boiling point of 290 has been confirmed by several investigators.
Thymohydroquinone is sparingly soluble in cold water, soluble in hot water;
soluble in alcohol or ether.
The dimethyl ether of thymohydroquinone b. 248-250, d 22 0.998, has
been investigated by Reychler; 4 it forms the main constituent of oil of arnica
root and Eupatorium capillifolium.
Care should be exercised in the isolation and
purification of this sensitive
phenol not to treat its solutions with norite for the removal of colored tars
since this procedure may produce quantities of thymoquinhydrone (cf.
5
Gandini ).
Use. Thymohydroquinone has been suggested as an antioxidant of es-

sential oils.
1
Proc. Indian Acad. Sci. 16A (1942), 157. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 1010.
2
Am. J. Pharm. 93 (1921), 115.
554 QUINONES
*J. Am. Chem. 8oc. 46 (1923), 2201. Cf. Carstanjen, /. prakt. Chem. II, 3 (1871), 54.
Ciamician and Silber, Alii accad. Lincei 15], 10, I (1901), 96. Sumerford and Hartung,
J. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 29 (1940), 65.
4
Bull. soc. chim. Ill, 7 (1892), 35.
6
Gazz. chim. ilal. 63 (1933), 9.
Tito Pavolirii, "Thymohydroquinone and 6-Aminothymol as Photographic De-

velopers," Chim. ind. agr. biol. 12 (1936), 132. Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 6662.
L. M. Movilia, "Derivatives of Hydroquinone and p-Aminophenol," II progresso
folo. 44 (1939). 276, 279, 288. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 8588.
Thymoquinone
Ci Hi 2 2 Mol. Weight 164.20
2-Methyl-5-isopropyl- 1 ,4-benzoquinonc
CHs
Occurrence. Thymoquinone seems to be the only true quinone found in

essential oils. It Monarda fistulosa and Mosla grosser-
has been found in oil of
rata, accompanied by thymohydroquinone CioHi 4 O 2 The addition product .
of these compounds, viz., thymoquinhydrone CioH^C^ + CioH 14 2 is ,
probably also present in these oils.
Isolation. By and by crystallization.

fractional distillation in vacuo,
Identification. Thymoquinone can be characterized by the preparation of various
derivatives:
3,6-Dibromo compound m. 73 (from alcohol), according to Chechik. 1
(1)
(2) The monoxime is formed by wanning the thy inoqui none with hydroxylamine
hydroohloride and a little hydrochloric acid, in alcohol. According to Goidschmidt
and Schmid, 2 the oxime melts at 160. The dioxime melts at 235 and results from
excess of the reagent on the monoxime. Using the improved technique of Sumerford
and Dalton, 3 the quinone may be regenerated in a state of high purity.
(3) Mono-2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 179- 180, according to Borsche.
4
(4) A color test sensitive to 0.01 mg. per cc. has been developed by Craven
using
6
a 1:1 solution of alcohol and ammonia (d = 0.88). A bluish-violet color develops,

changing finally to reddish-brown. Another colorimetric test of the same order of
sensitivity recommended by Schonberg and Ismail 6 who found characteristic
is
orange-red tints developing with thymoquinone and triphenylphosphine.
8
Properties. Thymoquinone crystallizes in yellow triclinic plates m. 45.5, 7 '
9
b. 232, and possesses an odor reminiscent of thymol and quinone. The
QUINONES 555
compound is volatile with steam. On

exposure to light for five days, thymo-
quinone is gradually converted to dithymoquinone, which crystallizes from
alcohol in yellow needles m. 199.5-200, according to Smith and Tess. 10
Use. Thymoquinone has found use as an antioxidant for certain organic
substances.
1
J. Am. Pharm.
Assocn. 22 (1933), 506.
*Ber. 17 (1884), 2061.
8
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1944), 1331.
*Liebigs Ann. 367 (1907), 181.
*/. Chem. Soc. (1931), 1605.
6
Ibid. (1940), 1374.
7
Carstanjen, /. prakt. Chem. [2], 3 (1871), 53.
8
Henderson and Boyd, /. Chem. Soc. 97 (1910), 1662.
9
Liebermann and Ilinski, Ber. 18 (1885), 3196.
10
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1944), 1323. Cf. Liebermann et al, Ber. 10 (1877), 2177; 18 (1885)
3193.
VII. ACIDS
Introduction. The waters of many essential oils contain small
distillation
quantities of fatty acids, especially lower fatty acids such as formic, acetic,
propionic, butyric, and valeric acid. Most probably they do not occur as
such in the oils but are formed by hydrolysis of esters in the course of dis-
tillation. Often the free acids are accompanied by methyl and ethyl alcohol.
Because of their solubility in water, these substances dissolve in the distilla-
tion water and accumulate in the cohobation oils which are obtained by re-
distilling (cohobating) the distillation waters.
Some essential oils, however, contain large quantities of fatty acids. Thus,
oil of orris root contains about 85 per cent myristic acid oil of ambrette seed
;
consists principally of palmitic acid.

Many fatty acids can be isolated and identified by adding silver nitrate to
their neutralized aqueous solution, and by analyzing the silver salt after re-
crystallization from water. It is not the purpose of this work to enumerate
the many reactions and derivatives by which the organic acids occurring in
volatile oils can be identified as these are readily found in standard books
on organic-analytic chemistry, especially in the excellent work by Huntress
and Mulliken, "Identification of Pure Organic Compounds/' John Wiley and
Sons, Inc., New York, 1941, Order I, and in Heilbron's "Dictionary of Or-
ganic Compounds," Revised, Eyre & Spottiswoodo, London, 1943.
Only a minimum of data will be presented in these pages to facilitate diag-
nostic operations with more emphasis on the less readily identifiable products.
Since isolation is readily effected in most cases by alkaline extraction with
subsequent acid treatment of the isolate, no remarks are inserted in this sec-
tion unless unusual difficulties may be expected in this step. Low melting
derivatives have in the main been avoided so as to eliminate purification
troubles from oily impurities.

J.G. Kirchner, Arthur N. Prater, and A. J. Haagen-Smit, "Separation of Acids by
Chromatographic Adsorption of Their p-Phenylphenacyl Esters," Ind. Eng. Chem.,
Anal Ed., 18 (1946), 31.
559
560 ACIDS
A. ALIPHATIC ACIDS
(a) SATURATED ALIPHATIC ACIDS.
Formic Acid
CH2 O2 Mol. Weight 46.03
H COOH
Occurrence. Formic acid has been identified in many volatile oils and their
distillation waters. A few oils geranium, for instance contain formic acid
in ester form (formates).
Identification. (1) By reduction: Warm a few

the dilute (1-3%) aqueous
cc. of
solution with excess powdered mercuric oxide and shake. Remove the undissolved
oxide by filtration and boil the clear nitrate for 30 sec. Dark grey, finely divided
mercury will suddenly precipitate.
(2) The silver salt decomposes on boiling with water (difference from acetic acid).
p-Chlorophenacyl formate m. 128, according to Moses and Reid.
1
(a)
(b) p-Phenylphenacyl formate m. 74, according to Drake and Bronitsky.
2
(c) Phenylmercuric formate HCOOHgPh, prepared from diphenyl mercury and

formic acid, m. 135-138 (decomp.), according to Koton. 3
(d) When formic acid is admixed with several of the lower fatty acids, the azeotropic
distillation technique of Schicktanz, Steele arid Blaisdell 4 may be advantageous as a
means of analyzing and identifying the mixture. This will reduce the necessity of
numerous fractional crystallizations of derivatives. These workers use benzene and
toluene in their azeotropes.
(e) p-Bromobenzylpseudothiuronium bromide (prepared from p-bromobenzyl bro-
mide and thiourea) yields a characteristic formate m. 148, when permitted to react
with sodium formate in alcohol, according to Dewey and Shasky. 6
Properties. A mobile colorless liquid of stinging, irritating and penetrating

odor. Timmermans and Hennaut-Roland, 6 Schoorl,
7
and Grunfeld 8
re-
corded these figures:
6 6
m. 8.4 df 1.22026
8
b. 101 d 15 1.22647 6
7
nf? 1.3719
Volatile with steam. Miscible with water and forming a mixture of con-
stant boiling point 108.1 at 774 mm.; this mixture contains 76.8 per cent
formic acid and 23.2 per cent water, according to Takagi. 9
All neutral salts of formic acid are soluble in water.
When heated with concentrated sulfuric acid, formic acid or its salts yield
carbon monoxide which burns with a blue flame (difference from acetic acid).
Formic acid reduces cold potassium permanganate solutions.
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 561
Use. Except for chemical reactions and the preparation of esters, formic
acid is seldom used in the perfume and flavor industries.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1932), 2101.
2
Ibid. 52 (1930), 3719.
3
4
*/. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 3526.
6
/. chim. phys. 27 (1930), 420.
7
Rec. trav. chim. 41 (1922), 296.
8
Ann. chim. phys. [10], 20 (1933), 326.
9
Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan 14, No. 11 (1939), 508. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 1892.
Acetic Acid
C 2 H4 O 2 Mol. Weight 60.05
CII 3 COOH
Occurrence. Acetic acid occurs in a great many volatile oils, usually in
ester form, them being distinguished by a pleasant, fruity odor.
most of
Linalyl, geranyl, and bornyl acetate are the main constituents of several es-
sential oils for example, bergamot, lavender, Siberian pine needle, etc. Nu-
merous oils contain traces of free acetic acid.
Identification. (1) Analysis of silver salt: Ag = 04.67%.

(2) the preparation of derivatives:
By
(a) p-Nitrobenzyl acetate m. 78, according to Reid.
1
(b) p-Iodophenyl urea, from p-iodobenzazide and acetamide, m. 238-239 (corr.),

according to Sah and Wang.
2
(c) p-Bromophenacyl acetate m. 86, according to Moses and Reid.

3
(d) Dewey and Shasky

4
prepared the p-bromobenzylpseuclothiuronium acetate m.
149.
(e) Mercury phenyl acetate m. 147 from diphenyl mercury and acetic acid, accord-
ing to Koton.
6
p-Toluidide m. 153, according to Robertson.

6
(f)
Properties. Acetic acid possesses a sharp and penetrating odor. Timmer-

mans and Hennaut-Roland, 7 Tromp, 8 and Grunfeld 9 reported these proper-
ties:
9 7
m. 16.7 df 1.04351
9 7
b. 117-118 df 1.04926
8
1.3721
Acetic acid miscible in water; volatile with steam.

is The neutral salts are
soluble in water.
Regarding the detection of acetic acid in presence of propionic acid or n-
Osburn, Wood and Werkman,
10
butyric acid, see Osburn and Werkman,
11
12
Eijssen et al., and Schicktanz, Steele and Blaisdell. 13
562 ACIDS
Use. Acetic acid is used widely, especially for the preparation of many
esters which have attained great importance in the flavor, perfume, cosmetic,
and soap industries.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 39 (1917), 136.
2
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 364.
8
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1932), 2101.
*Ibid. 63 (1941), 3526.
6
6
/. Chem. Soc. 93 (1908), 1033.
7
/. chim. phys. 27 (1930), 422.
*Rec. trav. chim. 41 (1922), 296.
9
Ann. chim. phys. [10], 20 (1933), 327.
nind. Eng. Chem., Anal Ed. 3 (1931), 264.
11
Ibid.8 (1936), 270.
13
Marinette Gerbault, "Calcium Salts of Acetic Acid," Compt. rend. 223 (1946), 674.
Propionic Acid
CH3 CH 2 COOH -
Occurrence. Propionic acid occurs in oil of lavender, cajuput, and a few

other volatile oils.
Identification,. (1) Analysis of silver salt: Ag = 59.67%.

(a) Mercury phenyl propionate m. 80-81 from diphenyl mercury and propionic
acid, according to Koton. 1
p-Chlorophenacyl propionate in. 98.2, according to Moses and Reid. 2

(b)
(c) p-Bromobenzylpseudothiuronium propionate m. 146, according to Dewcy and
3
Shasky.
(d) p-Phenylphenacyl propionate m. 103, according to Hancock and Lochte.
4
(e) p-Toluidide m. 126, according to Bischoff.

6
Properties. Propionic acid possesses an odor similar to that of acetic acid.

The following properties have been reported by Hunten and Maass, 6 Tim-
mermans and Hennaut-Roland, 7 and Tromp: 8
6 6
m. -22.4 dX2 0.99211
7 5 7
b. 141.35 dj 0.99874
8
1.3862
Propionic acid is volatile with steam. The salts are soluble in water. The
acid is likewise miscible with water but can be salted out with calcium chlo-
ride and thereby differs from acetic acid.
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 563
Regarding the detection and determination of propionic acid in the presence

of other fatty acids (formic to butyric), see McNair, 9 and Schicktanz, Steele
and Blaisdell. 10
Use. Propionic acid is used especially for the preparation of esters of
flavor and perfume value.
1
/. Gen. Chern. U.S.S.R. 9 (1939), 912. Chern. Abstracts 34 (1940), 392.
2
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1932), 2101.
*Ibid. 63 (1941), 3526.
*
Ibid. 61 (1939), 2450. Cf. Drake and Bronitsky, ibid. 52 (1930), 3719.
5
Liebigs Ann. 279 (1894), 172.
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1929), 154.
7
/. chim. phys. 27 (1930), 425.
8
Kec. trav. chim. 41 (1922), 297.
9
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1932), 3249.
10
hui. Eng. Chem., Anal. Ed. 12 (1940), 320.
n-Butyric Acid
C4 H8O2 Mol. Weight 88.10
Butanoic acid
CH 3 CH 2 C1I 2 COOH
Occurrence. n-Butyric acid has been observed in numerous volatile oils
for example, in oil American pennyroyal (Hedeoma pulegioides)
of lavender, ,
valerian, nutmeg, hops, Ceylon citronella, Eucalyptus globulus, cajuput,

niaouli, etc.
Identification. (1) Analysis of silver salt: Ag = 55.38%.

Phenylmercury butyrate in. 91, according to Koton.
1
(a)
(b) p-Bromobenzylpseudothiuronium butyrate in. 142, according to Devvey and
2
Shasky.
p-Bromophenacyl n-butyrate m. 63, according to Moses and Reid. 3
(c)
(d) p-Phenylphenacyl n-butyrate m. 97, according to Drake and Bronitsky, and

4
Kogl and Sparenburg.

6
(e) p-Toluidide m. 75, according to Robertson.

8
(f) 4-Diphenyl butyrate m. 59-60.3, according to Hazlet and Hensley,

7
from the
butyryl chloride and 4-phenyl phenol in pyridine solution.
Properties. n-Butyric acid possesses an unpleasant odor reminiscent of

rancid butter. The following properties have been reported by Timmermans, 8
and Hun ten and Maass: 9
8 5 9
m. -5.55 d^ c 0.9527
8 4 9
b. 163.55 d 0.9615
8
1.3983
n-Butyric acid is volatile with steam. It is miscible with water and thereby
differs from isobutyric acid. It is soluble in alcohol or ether.
564 ACIDS
Regarding azeotropic techniques for analysis of mixtures with other low
molecular weight fatty acids (formic to valeric), see articles by Schicktanz,
Steele and Blaisdell, 10 and by Axe and Bratton. 11 The combined distillation
and crystallization methods of Schutze et al., 12 on such mixtures from pe-
troleum acids is also applicable to other natural isolates.
"Partition chromatography" using silica gel for purposes of differential
13
adsorption has been employed by Ramsey and Patterson to separate
Ci > 04
fatty acids in mixtures wherein only small amounts of these prod-
ucts occur.
n-Butyric acid serves mainly for the preparation of esters which
Use.
have attained considerable importance in the flavor industry.
1
Gen. Chem. U.S.S.R. 9 (1939), 912. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 392.
.7.
2
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 3526.
9
Ibid. 54 (1932), 2101.
*Ibid. 52 (1930), 3719.
6
Rec. trav. chim. 59 (1940), 1196.
6
/. Chem,. Soc. 115 (1919), 1220.
7
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1943), 2041.
8
9
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1929), 159.
10
11
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 69 (1937), 1424.
12
13
/. Official Agr. Chem. 28 (1945), 644.
Isobutyric Acid
<*-Methylpropanoic acid
H3C
CH-COOH
H3 C
Occurrence. Isobutyric acid has been observed in oil of laurel leaves, Ro-
man chamomile, arnica root, masterwort; probably it occurs also in a few
Identification. Analysis of silver salt: Ag = 55.38%.

(1)
(a) Isopropylbenzimidazole m. 234, according to Hancock and Lochte, prepared
1
by heating a mixture of the acid and o-phenylene diamine.

(b) p-Iodophenacyl isobutyrate m. 109.2, according to Judefind and Reid.
2
(c) p-Phenylphenaeyl isobutyrate m. 89, according to Clutterbuck et al.

3
(d) p-Toluidide m. 108-109.5, according to von Auwers and Ungemach; 4 m.

106-106.5, according to Fieser, Hartwell and Seligman. 5
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 565
Properties. Isobutyric acid possesses a disagreeable odor reminiscent of

rancid butter. The following properties have been reported by Timmermans
7
and Delcourt, 6 and by Friedlander:
m. -46.1 6
n' 1.39187 7
6 46 7
b. 154.70 nf?' 1.39343
6 5 6
df 0.93782 n{) 1.39525
6
df 0.95296
Isobutyric acid is volatile with steam. Soluble in 5 parts of water (differ-

ence from n-butyric acid!) and soluble in alcohol or ether.
Anaqueous solution of calcium isobutyrate does not become turbid on
boiling and thereby differs from n-butyric acid. Hutzler and Meyer 8 found
that, on oxidation with alkaline potassium permanganate, isobutyric acid
yields a-hydroxy-isobutyric acid, whereas n-butyric acid is destroyed by the
same treatment.
More 9
recently Kline modified this procedure by oxidizing isobutyric acid
in an acetone solution with potassium permanganate. The oxidized product
is precipitated with an alkaline solution of mercuric cyanide and silver ni-
trate. Acetic, propionic, and lactic acids fail to interfere. If the perman-
ganate solution opalescent, n-butyric acid is present; otherwise, the pre-

is
cipitated liquid acid may be distilled from potassium permanganate and the
acetone titrated iodometrically. When the normal acid is present in an ap-
preciable percentage with other acids, the total can be determined iodometri-
cally after oxidation with hydrogen peroxide, and the isobutyric acid after
oxidation with potassium permanganate. The normal acid may be calcu-
lated by difference.
An azeotropic method has been offered by Schicktanz, Steeleand Blaisdell 10
wherein both benzene and toluene act as modifiers. This method permits
the analysis of mixtures containing formic, acetic, propionic, n-butyric acids,
and isobutyric acid.
A study of the Dyer distillation method of evaluating fatty acids
critical
has been conducted by Clark and Hillig. 11 Their data indicate that this
procedure is useful as a means of identifying the fatty acids (formic to valeric)
but careful account must be taken of the kind and type of apparatus used
which may well influence the distillation constants thereby obtained.
Hancock and Lochte 12 applied the methods of fractional alkaline extrac-
tion, esterification and distillation to complex mixtures of acids from petro-
leums. Where sufficiently large quantities of acidic mixtures are available
for study, this technique will
prove useful.
Use. Isobutyric acid is used mainly for the preparation of esters which
*
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 2450. Biochem. J. 29 (1935), 880.
2 *
Ibid. 42 (1920), 1055. Ber. 67 (1934), 252.
566 ACIDS
6
J. Am. Chem.Soc. 68 (1936), 1226.
/. chim. phys. 31 (1934), 109.
7
Z. physik. Chem. 38 (1901), 424.
8
Ber. 30 (1897), 2525.
9
Biochem. Z. 296 (1938), 202.
10
Ind. Eng. Chem., Anal Ed. 12 (1940), 320.
11
/. Official Agr. Chem. 21 (1938), 684.
12
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 2448.
Isovaleric Acid
C 5 Hi O 2 Mol. Weight 102.13
/3-Methyl-n-butyric acid. /3-Methylbutanoic acid. Isopropyl acetic acid
H3 C
CH.CH 2 -COOH
HC 3
Occurrence. Isovaleric acid occurs in numerous volatile oils for instance,

in oil of valerian, citronella, cypress, laurel leaves, American peppermint,
hop, etc. Tsujimoto and Koyanagi reported the cetyl
1
spearmint, niaouli,
ester in the volatile portions of pilot- whale head oil.
Identification. Analysis of silver salt: Ag = 51.67%.

(1)
(a) 2-Isobutyl benzimidazole m. 190.5, according to Hancock and Lochte.
2
(b) p-Iodophenacyl isovalerate m. 78.8, according to Judefind and Reid.

3
(c) Anhydrous ammonium salt m. 91, according to Raiziss and Clemcnce. 4

p-Toluidide m. 10G-107, according to Underwood and Gale.
6
(d)
(e) p-Bromobenzylpseudothiuronium isovalerate m. 148, according to Dewey and
6
Shasky.
Properties. most offensive odor, reminiscent of per-

Isovaleric acid has a
spiration. The following properties have been reported by Timmermans and

7 8 9
Hennaut-Roland, Lecat, and Tromp:
m. -30 7 5
nj ? 1.4043 9
7- 8 5 9
b. 176.5 n{> 1.4064
7
df 0.91708
7
dj* 0.93080
soluble in 23.6 parts of water at 20 and can be salted out

Isovaleric acid is
with calcium chloride. The acid is soluble in alcohol or ether. The silver
very sparingly soluble in water, and particularly sensitive to light, ac-
salt is
10
cording to Schaum and Scheid. Regarding the separation of isovaleric acid
from other lower fatty acids by azeo tropic means, see Axe and Bratton, 11
and Jaulmes and Mazars. 12 The fractional extraction, esterification, and dis-
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 567
13
tillation techniques of Hancock and Lochte are useful where sufficiently
large quantities are available.
Use. Isovaleric acid is used mainly for the preparation of esters which
1
Chem. Ind. Japan 40, Suppl. bind. (1937), 272.
/. Soc. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 7685.
2
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 2450.
3
Ibid. 42 (1920), 1055.
*Ibid. 63 (1941), 3124.
6
Ibid. 66 (1934), 2119.
6
Ibid. 63 (1941),3526.
7
J. chim. phijs. 29 (1932), 554.
8
Ann. Soc. Sci. Bruxelles Ser. B 48, I (1928), 54, 116, 118.
9
Rec. trav. chim. 41 (1922), 282, 297.
10
Z. Wiss. Phot. 36 (1937), 121. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 2801.
11
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 69 (1937), 1424.
/. chim. phys. 34 (1937), 37.
13
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 2448.
a-Methyl-n-Butyric Acid
C 5 H 10 2 Mol. Weight 102.13
a-Methylbutanoic acid. Methyl ethyl acetic acid
CH3
CH 3 -CII 2 C COOH
H
Occurrence. This racemic acid has been found in the volatile coffee oil, in
angelica root oil, and in a few other essential oils. The active forms have been
reported free and as methyl and ethyl esters in champaca flower oil.
Identification. By the preparation of derivatives, according to Taverne, 1 Scheuble

and Loebl, 2 Schiitz and Marckwald, 3 Kenyon, Phillips and Pittman, 4 Kogl and
Erxleben, Drake and Veitch, Murahashi, and Hopff and collaborators:
6 7 8
Isomer
Derivative d I dl
Amide m. Ill 01 []}J + 18 19' ... m. 121 8
2
(112)
Brucine salt-H 2 O m. 95 3
m. 100 3
Aceto amide m. 156 4

[a]J| 93 +3 23' 4
*
p-Phenylphenacyl m. 71 6
[a]?? +9 54' 6
... m. 70 6
B 5 6
m. 70 [a] D +10 12' in. 70 in. 70.6
(in 80%
5
alcohol)
syn.
* 7
m. 7 7
p-Bromophenacyl m. 55 55 m. 55
*
Authors reported that the active form and the racemic form not only melt at the same
temperature but give no melting point depression on mixing.
568 ACIDS
Properties. Schimmel &
Schutz and Marckwald, 10 Taverne, 11 Hopff
Co.,
9
and collaborators, 12 Eisenlohr and Meier, 13 Neuberg, 14 Kenyon, Phillips and

16 16 17 18
Pittman, Levene and Meyer, Kogl and Erxleben, Oilman and Kirby,
19
and Murahashi recorded the following properties:
Properties
d I dl
b. 176 176-177 173-174 18
(177) ... 174 "

16 10
d df 0.934 df 0.934 d20 0.9332"
[] D +17 18' u 14 - - 17 51' 10
Wwei +21 34' (c = 2.503 [a]|| 61 -6 O'(c - 2.002

in H 2 O) " in II 2 O) 16
[] D + 1636' 17 4
[a]j> -10 6' (c = 4.25,
19
abs. ale.)
[M]f>
5
-18"
12
n nf> 1.4044"
20
Marckwald reported that the solubility of the silver salt for the various
forms ranges from 0.73 g. in 100 cc. of water to 0.94 g. in 100 cc. Houston 2l
found that the calcium salt changed from penta to /te/ra'hydrate at 36.5
where solubility is at a maximum of 29.9 g. in 100 g. of water. At the
solubility is 23.05 g. and at 100, 19.8 g. per 100 g. water.
22
Kenyon and Young noted the ready racemization of the esters of this
acid with alcoholic alkali.
Use. a-Methyl-n-butyric acid is used very little in our industries.
1
Rec. trav. chim. 19 (1900), 108.
2
Monatsh. 26 (1904), 1097.
3
Ber. 29 (1896), 57.
*J. Chem. Soc. (1935), 1080.
6
Z. physiol. Chem. 227 (1934), 70.
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1935), 2623.
Phys. Chem. Research (Tokyo) 34 (1938), 169.
7
Scl. Papers Inst.
6
Ber. 69B(1936), 2244.
9
Ber.Schimmel & Co., Oct. (1907), 19.
"Ber. 29 (1896), 56.
11
Rec. trav. chim. 13 (1894), 198, 201.
12
Ber. 69B (1936), 2244.
Ber. 71B (1938), 997.
"Bio. Z. 37 (1911), 504.
16
J. Chem. Soc. (1935), 1080.
16
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1934), 244.
17
Z. physiol. Chem. 227 (1934), 71.
"Organic Syntheses," Coll. Vol. I, 2d Ed., New York, John Wiley, p. 361.
18
19
Sci. Papers Inst. Phys. Chem. Research (Tokyo) 34 (1938), 169.
20
Ber. 32 (1899), 1091.
21
J. Research Natl. Bur. Stds. 17 (1936), 55.
22
/. Chem. Soc. (1940), 216.
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 569
n-Caproic acid
C 6 H 12 O 2 Mol. Weight 116.16
Hexanoic acid. n-Hexylic acid
CH3 -(CH2 4 'COOH )
Occurrence.n-Caproic acid has been observed in oil of lemongrass, palma-

rosa, camphor, lavender, and in several other volatile oils.

By
(1) p-Bromophenacyl n-caproate m. 72, according to Moses and Reid, 1
70.5 by
Karrer and Geiger. 2
(2) Anilide m. 94-95, according to Underwood and Gale.

3
p-Toluidide m. according to the same authors, and Quebedeaux et al.

4
(3) 74-75, 6
(4) p-Bromobenzylpseudothiuronium caproate m. 146, according to Dewey and

6
Shasky.
(5) p-Phenylphenacyl caproate m. 69-70, by Kogl and others. 7
Properties. Hexanoic acid is an

possessing a fetid odor.
oil Volatile with
steam. Very sparingly soluble in water. The following properties have been
8 9 10
reported by Pool and Ralston, Simon, and Quebedeaux et al.:
8
f.p. -3.24 df 0.91832 9
8 9
b. 205.8 df 0.93136
8 9
b 64 136 dj 0.94423
8 9
b8 94.6 nf? 1.41489
10
nf> 1.4152
9
1.41877
For the effective separation of n-heptylic acid from caproic acid, Schutze
and Quebedeaux and Lochte n used a liquid-liquid extraction technique with a
rotatory column and petroleum ether-sodium hydroxide adjuncts.
12
Quebedeaux and co-workers also employed fractional esterification and
distillation successfully to separate n-caproic acid from complex mixtures of
petroleum acids, including several of the methyl pentanoic and hexanoic

acids.
The properties of certain metallic saltsbe useful in connection with
may
13
identification; for example, Kenner and Morton found that the lead salt
m. 95 decomposed at 280 and yielded 54.1 per cent of diamyl ketone.
14
Chang observed that the zinc salt from a complex with quinoline melted
at 145, whereas Koton 15 prepared phenyl mercury caproate m. 82-83 by
the action of diphenyl mercury on the free acid. Zuffanti 16 prepared the
anhydrous ammonium salt m. 108.
Comprehensive solubility tables of the acid in water, ethyl alcohol, acetone,
n
ethyl acetate and benzene have recently been reported by Ralston and Hoerr
who noted a eutectic with benzene at 97.7 per cent and m. 5.4.
570 ACIDS
Use. Hexanoic acid is used mainly for the preparation of esters that serve
as adjuncts in all kinds of flavor compositions.
1
J. Am. Chem.
Soc. 64 (1932), 2101.
2
Helv. Chim. Acta 24 (1941), 296.
3
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1934), 2119. See also Schwartz and Johnson, ibid. 63 (1931), 1065.
4
Ibid.
66 (1943), 769.
Ibid.
9
63 (1941), 3526.
Ibid.
7
Z. physiol. Chem. 279 (1943), 131. Sec Wrede and Rothhaas, Ber. 67 (1934), 740.
*Ind. Eng. Chem. 34 (1942), 1104. See Ralston and Hoerr, J. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 547.
9
10
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1943), 767.
u lnd. Eng. Chem., Anal. Ed. 10 (1938), 675.
12
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1943), 769.
13
Ber. 72B (1939), 452.
14
15
10
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 3123.
17
J. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 554.
Enanthic Acid
C 7 H 14 O 2 Mol. Weight 130.18
Oenanthic acid. Heptanoic acid. n-Heptylic acid. n-Heptoic acid
CH 3 -(CH 2 5 -COOH )
Occurrence. Enanthic acid has been identified in oil of hop, in the oil dis-
tilled from calamus herb, in Himalaya cedarwood oil, and in a few other
volatile oils.

p-Bromopseudothiuronium enanthate m. 147, according to Dewey and Shasky.
1
(1)
2-n-Hexylbenzimidazole m. 136-138, according to Quebedeaux et al., and
2
(2)
3
Weidenhagen.
(3) p-Brornophenacyl enanthate m. 72, according to Moses and Reid.
4
(4) Toluidide m. 81, according to Robertson.

6
(5) Amide in. 96, by the same author; 6

94.5-95, according to Quebedeaux et al. 7
Properties. The following properties have been reported by Pool and Ral-
8
ston, and Bryusova and Ogorodnikova: 9
8 9
f.p. -6.26 di 6 0.9214
8
b. 223.0 n 15 1.4289 9
8
b 64 150.8
bio H9 9
10
According to Franchimont, the barium salt of enanthic acid crystallizes
from water in the form of anhydrous leaflets m. 240. The dried zinc salt
melts at 131M32 .
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 571
The lead salt is reported by Kenner and Morton n to melt at 85 and to

decompose at 285, yielding 91.89 per cent of dihexyl ketone.
The
acid yields a characteristic salt with the microchemical Cu-pyridine
12
reagent; the salt is described by Huijsse as "bluish-green plates."
13
Carrick, Dahl, Farstad and Glendening employed the distillation method
of Dyer to analyze mixtures consisting of small amounts of heptylic, caprylic,
capric, and pelargonic acids.

14
Quebedeaux et al. likewise employing fractional distillation methods, but
on large stocks of the esters, separated complex mixtures of petroleum ali-
phatic acids including enanthic acid.

15
Extensive solubility tables are reported by Ralston and Hoerr for the
acid in water, acetone, ethyl alcohol, ethyl acetate, and benzene. With ben-
zene a eutectic mixture at 98.8 per cent and m. 6.5 was observed.
Use. Knanthic acid is used mainly for the preparation of esters which
serve as adjuncts in various types of flavor compositions.
However, in another direction of potential use, the acid is reported by
16
Hoffman, Schweitzer and Dalby to possess marked fungistatic action.
1
Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 3526.
J. Am,.
2
65 (1943), 767.
Ibid.
*Ber. 69 (1936), 2268.
.7. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1932), 2101.
4
5
J. Chem. Soc. 115 (1919), 1220.
6
Ibid.
7
J. Am. Chem.
Soc. 65 (1943), 767.
*Ind. Eng. Chem. 34 (1942), 1104. See Ralston and Hoerr. J. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 547.
9
J. Applied Chem. (U.S.S.R.) 14 (1941), 636. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 3486.
Liebigs Ann. 165 (1873), 244.
10
11
Ber. 72B (1939), 455.
12
Tijdschr. Artsenijkunde 1 (1943), 218. Chem. Zentr. II (1943), 548.
19
Am. Paint J. 25 (Oct. 21, 1940), 58.
14
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 65 (1943), 767.
vj.Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 554.
16
Am. J. Cancer 38 (1940), 569.
n-Caprylic Acid
C 8 H 16 O 2 Mol. Weight 144.21
Octanoic acid
CH3 -(CH 2 6 -COOH

)
Occurrence. n-Caprylic acid occurs in oil of hop, nutmeg, camphor, sweet

orange, American pennyroyal (lledeoma pulcgioides) ,
oil of lime, tobacco
flowers, and in a few other volatile oils.

By
p-Bromophenacyl n-caprylate m. 67.4, according to Moses and Reid.
1
(1)
(2) Amide m. 105-106, according to Deffet, 2 Igolen and Palfray,
3
and Quebedeaux
et al. 4
572 ACIDS
5
(3)
6
(4) p-Phenylphenacyl ester m. 66.6-67.3, according to Lochte et al.
(5) p-Bromobenzylpseudothiuronium caprylate m. 147, according to Dewey and
7
Shasky.
Properties. The following properties have been reported by Pool and

8 9 10 11
Ralston, Eisenlohr, Deffet, Quebedeaux and others, and Sabetay, Igolen
12
and Palfray:
8 10 10
m. 1().3 '
df 0.90087
8 9
b. 239.7 df 0.90866
8 10
bias 183.3 df 0.90884
8 12
bi 6 134.0 nl? 1.4335
b4 109.1 8
1.4327 n
Comprehensive solubility studies with this acid have been conducted by

Ralston and Ploerr, 13 employing a variety of solvents including water, alcohol,
acetone, 2-butanone, benzene, acetic acid, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform,

and many others. At 20, 0.068 g. of acid dissolves in 100 g. of water; at 100
the solubility is 0.25 g. The acid is soluble in alcohol, acetone, benzene, and
several other organic solvents.
The calcium salt of n-caprylic acid is most sparingly soluble in cold water;
the zinc salt melts at 135; the silver salt is a curdy precipitate; ammonium
14
salt from alcohol m. 54 (cf. Kench and Malkin ), the anhydrous salt melt-
ing at 114, according to Zuffanti.

15
The octadecyl ammonium salt and
amide melt at 57.5 and 79.0-79.5, respectively (Hunter 16 ), the copper
salt at 264-2G6; the lead salt at 82.0-82.8 (cf. Piper, Fleiger, Smith and
n 18
Kerstein According to Kenner and Morton, lead caprylate melts at
).
100 and decomposes at 280, forming 71.59 per cent of diheptyl ketone.
Schutze et al. 19 successfully employed fractional precipitation of salts, frac-
tional alkaline extraction and distillation of a complex mixture of petroleum
acids in the separation of valeric, butyric, and caprylic acids in petroleum
acid mixtures where an appreciable amount of stock was available. Later
20
Quebedeaux and co-workers used similar methods with highly effective
fractionating columns to separate caprylic from a mixture of several isomeric
hexanoic and heptanoic acids.
Use. n-Caprylic acid is used mainly for the preparation of esters which
serve as adjuncts in various flavor compositions.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1932), 2101.
2
3
Compt. rend. 213 (1941), 805. Cf. Robertson, /. Chem. Soc. 116 (1919), 1220.
4
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1943), 770.
5
/. Chem. Soc. 116 (1919), 1220.
8
Ind. Eng. Chem., Anal. Ed. 12 (1940), 262. Cf. Drake & Bronitsky, /. Am. Chem. Soc.
62 (1930), 3715.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 3526.
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 573
Eng. Chem. 34 (1942), 1105. Cf. Ralston and Hoerr, J. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 546.
.
9
Z. physik. Chem. 75 (1911), 590.
"Bull. soc. chim. Belg. 40 (1931), 390.
11
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1943), 770.
12
Compt. rend. 213 (1941), 805. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 4856. Cf. Robertson, J. Chem.
Soc. 115 (1919), 1220.
13
J. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 546; 9 (1944), 329.
14
J. Chem. Soc. (1939), 230.
18
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 3123.
16
Iowa State College J. Sci. 15 (1941), 226.
17
Ind. Eng. Chem. 31 (1939), 309.
18
Ber. 72B (1939), 452.
19
20
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 65 (1943), 767.
Aage Lund and Olav Arstad, "Determination of the Fat Acid Content of Soaps Con-
taining Coconut Oil," Tids. Kjemi Bergvesen Met. 1 (1941), 32-3, 83-6. Chem. Ab-
stracts 36 (1942), 1796.
Pelargonic Acid
C 9 H 18 O 2 Mol. Weight 158.23
Nonanoic acid. n-Nonylic acid
eiI 3 -(OH 2 ) 7 -COOH

Occurrence. This acid has been identified in oil of hop and in a few other
essential oils.
Identification. By
(1) p-Bromophenacyl pelargonate m. 68.5, according to Moses and Reid. 1
(2) Amide m. 98.9-99.0, according to DefTet, 2 and Quebedeaux et al. 3
4
(3)
Properties. Pelargonic acid is an oil, but at low temperature it crystallizes

in the form of leaflets. It is slowly volatile with steam, and sparingly soluble
in water. The following properties have been reported by Pool and Ralston,
5
6
Quebedeaux et al., and Deffet: 7
5 7
f.p. 12.24 df 0.90552
5 7
b. 255.6 df 0.90932
5 6
bi28 196.9 nf? 1.4379
5
bio 147.5
5
b4 121.2
Extensive data on the solubilities of pelargonic acid in selected useful sol-

vents have been reported by Hoerr and Ralston. 8 It has been found that
0.026 g. of the acid dissolves in 100 g. of water at 20, and 0.051 g. at 60.
574 ACIDS
Appreciable quantities are soluble in alcohol, acetone, benzene, and acetic
acid with eutectics existing for the two latter solvents.
The calcium salt of pelargonic acid melts at 216 (crystallized from dilute
9
methyl alcohol), according to Harries. The zinc salt melts at 131-132.
The ammonium salt has been found by Zuffanti 10 to melt at 115 (from
alcohol).
Smith and Kerstein u reported the lead salt to melt at 98-
Piper, Fleiger,
12
98.5, whereas Kenner and Morton observed this compound to melt at
95-100, decomposing at 299 to form 82.1 per cent of dioctyl ketone.
Use. Pelargonic acid is used for the preparation of a few esters which
serve as adjuncts in certain flavor compounds.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1932), 2101.
2
3
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1943), 770.
*J. Chem. Soc. 116 (1919), 1220.
6
Ind. Eng. Chem. 34 (1942), 1105. Cf. Ralston and Hoerr, /. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 546.
6
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1943), 770.
7
8
/. Org. Chem. 9 (1944), 329; 7 (1942), 546.
9
Liebigs Ann. 343 (1905), 358. Cf. Zincke and Franchimont, ibid. 164 (1872), 337.
10
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 3123.
Ind. Eng. Chem. 31 (1939), 307.
12
Ber. 72B (1939), 452.
n-Capric Acid
Decanoic acid n-Decylic acid.
CH3 -(CH 2 8 -COOH

)
Occurrence. n-Capric acid occurs in oil of

chamomile, lemongrass, hop,
American pennyroyal (Hedeoma pulegioides) lime, pha-chium, aniseed, fusel
,
oil from grape bagasse, and a few other volatile oils.
(1) p-Bromobenzylthiuronium caprate m. 145, according to Dewey and Shasky. 1

(2) Phenyl hydrazide m. 105, by Stempel, Jr., and Schaft'el. 2
(3) p-Bromophenacyl n-caprate m. 67, according to Moses and Reid. 3
(4) n-Capramide m. 100.1, according to Deffet. 4
6
(5)
Properties. The following properties have been reported by Pool and Ral-
6 7
ston, and Schuette and Vogel:
7 6
solid, pt. 31.60 b. 270
7 6
m. 31.60 b 128 209.8
6
b 16 159.4
6
b4 132.7
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 575
8
Lepkovsky, Feskov and Evans recommended separating n-capric acid
from its near homologues by fractional distillation of the methyl esters.
9
Carrick, Dahl, Farstad and Glendening employed the Dyer fractional
distillation method to separate mixtures of heptylic, caprylic, pelargonic, and
capric acids.
Schuette and Vogel 10 reported the solidification-point curves of capric-
lauric mixtures as a means of analyzing these acids, also those of capric-
caprylic acids.
Considerable data on the solubilities of capric acid in organic solvents
have been supplied by Hoerr and Ralston. 11
These authors also determined the solubility of this acid in water as:
0.015 g. per 100 g. of H O at 20

2
0.100 g. per 100 g. of H 2 O at 100
Smith and Kerstein 12 noted the lead salt as m. 96.5-97.0;

Piper, Fleiger,
Kench and Malkin 13 found that the ammonium salt melted at 08; Hunter 14
reported that the octadecylamine salt and amide melted at G2-G2.5 and
83-83.5, respectively.
Use. n-Capric acid is used for the preparation of a few esters which serve
as adjuncts in certain flavor compositions.
i
J. Am. Chem.
Soc. 63 (1941), 3526.
*Ibid. 64 (1942), 470.
3
Ibid. 54 (1932), 2101.
4
Bull. soc. chirn. Belg. 40 (1931), 391.
B
J. Chem. Soc. 115 (1919), 1221.
*Ind. Eng. Chem. 34 (1942), 1104.
7
Oil and Soap 22 (1945), 239; 16 (1939), 209.
8
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 58 (1936), 978.
9
Am. Paint J. 25 (1940), 58.
10
Oil and Soap 16 (1939), 209; 22 (1945), 239.
11
J. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 546; 9 (1944), 329.
12
Ind. Eng. Chem. 31 (1939), 307.
13
/.Chem. Soc. (1939), 232.
14
Iowa State College J. Sci. 15 (1941), 226.
n-Undecylic Acid
CiiH 22 O2 Mol. Weight 186.29
Undecanoic acid. Hendecanoic acid
CH 3 -(CH 2 9 -COOH
)
Occurrence. This acid occurs in oil of Artemisia frigida, in the leaf oil of
Chamaecyparis pisifera Engl., and in the (concrete) oil of orris root.

tt-Undecylanilide m. 71, according to Robertson.
1
(1)
n-Undecyl-p-toluidide m. 80, according to the same author.
2
(2)
576 ACIDS
Properties. The following properties have been reported by Ralston and
Hoerr, Pool and Ralston, 4 Garner and Ryder, 5
3
Waterman and Bertram, 6
and Levene and West: 7
f.p. 28.13 03 ' 4

0.9948 5
m. 28-29 7 n 70
n D 1.4203 6
4
b. 284
4
222.2
4
170.8
4
b4 143.3
Ralston and Hoerr 8 found the solubility of this acid in water at 20 to be

0.0093 g. per 100 g. of solvent and 0.015 g. per 100 g. of solvent at 60. These
authors also determined the solubilities of the acid in numerous organic sol-
vents, observing a good solubility in alcohol, acetone, benzene and acetic
acid at ordinary temperatures. The acid crystallizes from acetone at 10.
The ammonium salt melts at 72, according to Kench and Malkin; the
9
lead salt at 90-92, decomposing at 298 to yield 78.2 per cent ketone, ac-
10
cording to Kenner and Morton. The barium and silver salts are only
slightly soluble in water.
Use. Hendecanoic acid is used for the preparation of a few esters which
are employed in the perfume and flavor industries.
1
/. Chem. Soc. 116 (1919), 1220. fi
Rec. Irav. chim. 46 (1927), 701.
7
2
Ibid, /. Bid. Chem. 18 (1914), 464.
*J. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 546. *J. Org. Chem. 1 (1942), 546; 9 (1944), 329.
4 9
Ind. Eng. Chem. 34 (1942), 1104. /. Chem. Soc. (1939), 230.
6
J. Chem. Soc. 127 (1925), 728. 10
Ber. 72B (1939), 452.
Laurie Acid
Mol. Weight 200.31
n-Dodecanoic acid. t^Dodecylic acid
CH3 -(CH2 ) 10 -COOH

Occurrence. Laurie acid occurs in oil of camphor, laurel berry and Cupres-
1
sus torulosa. Moreover, Boekenoogen reports that this acid is present as
ester in 7 per cent of all the commercial fixed oils; thus hydrolytic cleavage
might be expected to give rise to lauric acid in a number of steam distilled

volatile oils.
Identification. By
(1) p-Chlorophenacyl laurate m. 70, according to Hann, Reid and Jamieson.
2
(2) Lauramide m. 100, according to Robertson.

3
(3) p-Toluidide m. 87, according to the same author.

4
(4) p-Bromobenzylpseudothiuronium laurate m. 142, by Dewey and Shasky.

6
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 577
Physical properties determined on carefully purified products

Properties.
have been reported recently by Schuette and Vogel, 6 Pool and Ralston, 7 and
Ralston and Hoerr. 8 Data from several of these authors are reported here:
7 8
f.p. 43.86 -
7
b. 298.9
7
bias 234.3
7
bw 181.8
7
b4 154.1
Laurie acid crystallizes from alcohol in the form of needles. Ralston and
Hoerr 9 determined the solubility in water as:
0.0055 g. per 1 00 g. of water at 20

0.0087 g. per 100 g. of water at 60
The same authors also carefully investigated the solubility of this acid in
a wide variety of organic solvents, whereas Foreman and Brown 10
deter-
mined the solubilities of lauric acid in Skelly solve B, acetone, and methyl
alcohol at low temperatures.
Lauric acid is volatile with superheated steam.
Schuette and Vogel ll determined the solidification-point curves in mixtures
with capric and also with myristic acids. These determinants are valuable
as a means of analysis.
12
Cassidy used activated charcoal as an adsorptive agent for separation
of lauric acid from stearic, palmitic and myristic acids.
Kench and Malkin 13
observed the ammonium salt as melting at 77, while
in a sealed tube the melting point is 130.
The heavy metal salts are most sparingly soluble in water. The silver
14
salt melts at 212-213. Piper et al. reported that the lead salt melts at
103.8-104.2. Kenner and Morton 15 found that this salt m. 98 decom-
poses at 302 to produce 80.1 per cent of ketone.
Use. used for the preparation of several esters which serve
Lauric acid is
as solvents, diluents, and occasionally are encountered as adulterants of es-

sential oils.
1
Olien, Vetten, Oliezaden 26 (1941), 143. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 2778.
2
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 819.
3
J". Chem. Soc. 116 (1919), 1220.
4
Ibid.
6
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 3526.
8 and Soap
Oil 16 (1939), 209. " Ibid.16 (1939), 209.
7
Ind. Eng. Chem. 34 (1942), 1104. 12
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 2735.
8 13
J. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 546. /. Chem. Soc. (1939), 230.
9 14
Ibid. 7 (1942), 546; 9 (1944), 329. Ind. Eng. Chem. 31 (1939), 307.
10
Oil and Soap 21 (1944), 183. K Ber. 72B (1939), 455.
578 ACIDS
Myristic Acid
Ci4H28 02 Mol. Weight 228.36
n-Tetradecanoic acid. n-Tetradecylic acid
CH3 -(CH 2 )i 2 -COOH

Occurrence. Myristic acid is the principal constituent of the oil distilled
from orris root; it occurs in nutmeg oil, pha-chium, and in a few other essen-
l
tial oils. Boekenoogen reports that this acid is present also in 3 per cent
of all the commercial fixed oils from the plant world.

By
(1) p-Chloropheriacyl myristate m. 76, according to Hann, Reid and Jamieson.
2
(2) n-Myristamide m. 103, according to Robertson.

3
(3) p-Toluidide m. 93, according to Robertson.

4
Properties. Myristic acid is an almost odorless, crystalline mass. Several

authors recently reported the results of careful studies on the physical prop-
5
erties of this acid: Francis and Piper, Schuette and Vogel, Foreman and
6
8
7
Brown, Ralston and Hoerr, and Pool and Ralston.
9
The data given here
are those of Pool and Ralston:
o
f.p. 54.0r
b. 320.2 (by extrapolation)
b 128 257.3
b ie 202.4
b4 173.9
10
According to Ralston and Hoerr, myristic acid is soluble in water to the
amount of 0.0020 g. per 100 g. of H 2 at 20 and 0.0034 g. at 60. These
same authors also investigated the solubilities of this acid in numerous or-
ganics. The acid dissolves readily in alcohol, ether, benzene, acetone, or
acetic acid.
Foreman and Brown n studied the solubilities in acetone, methyl alcohol
and Skelly solve B at low temperatures with the view of using such procedure
for purification of the acid.
Schuette and Vogel 12 prepared solidification-point curves of the pure acid
in mixture with lauric and palmitic acid and employed these as indexes of
purity and identity.

13
Cassidy described a procedure of adsorption analysis employing carbon
for the differential separation of mixtures of lauric, stearic, palmitic, and
myristic acid.
14
Lepkovsky, Feskov and Evans suggested a method of separating myris-
tic acid from other fatty acids by distillation.
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 579
15
According to Jacobson and Holmes, the silver salt of myristic acid melts
at 211, the magnesium salt at 131.6. The same authors 16 suggested using
this salt for the separation of myristic acid from palmitic and stearic acid.
The according to Piper, Fleiger, Smith and Kerstein, melts at
lead salt,
17
109. 6-l 10.2, whereas the ammonium salt is reported by Kench and Mai-
kin 18 as m. 84. The dodecylamine salt and amide, according to Hunter, 19
melt at 72.5-73 and 84-85, respectively.
Myristic acid is occasionally employed in the sophistication of con-
Use.
crete orris root oil in which it also occurs naturally. Myristic acid is used
for the preparation of esters methyl or ethyl myristate, for example
which serve as diluents of perfume compositions and as adulterants of es-
sential oils.
1
Olien, Vetten, Oliezaden 26 (1941), 143. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 2778.
2
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 52 (1930), 819.
3
J. Chem. Soc. 115 (1919), 1220.
4
Ibid.
6
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 577.
and Soap 16 (1939), 209.
Oil
11
Ibid. 21 (1944), 183.
/. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 546; 9 (1944), 329.
9
Ind. Eng. Chem. 34 (1942), 1104.
10
/. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 546; 9 (1944), 329.
" Oil and Soap 21 (1944), 183.
iz
lbid. 16 (1939), 211.
13
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 2735.
14
Ibid. 68 (1936), 978.
16
J. Biol. Chem. 25 (1916), 31.
16
Ibid., 55.
17
Ind. Eng. Chem. 31 (1939), 307.
18
J. Chem. Soc. (1939), 230.
19
Iowa State Coll. J. Sci. 15 (1941), 228.
Palmitic Acid
Ci6H 32 O2 Mol. Weight 256.42
n-Hexadecanoic acid. Hexadecylic acid
CH3 -(CH 2 U -COOH

)
Occurrence. Palmitic acid occurs in oil of vetiver, Canadian snakeroot,

pimenta, myrrh, cascarilla, in the seed oils of ambrette, celery, anise, parsley
and carrot, also in expressed almond oil; as ester in the volatile oil of Arte-
misia verlotorum, and in quite a few other essential oils. Moreover, Boeke-
noogen points out that palmitic acid is present in 11 per cent of all commer-
1
cial fixed oils, which fact may readily account for its occurrence in many
ethereal fractions therefrom.
580 ACIDS
By
(1) p-Chlorophenacyl palmitate m. 82, according to Hann, Reid, and Jamieson.
2
(2) Palmitamide m. 105.3, according to Guy and Smith.

3
(3) p-Bromoanilide m. 113.2, according to Houston.

4
(4) p-Chlorobenzylpseudothiuronium palmitate m. 146, by Dewey and Sperry;

6
the corresponding p-bromo compound, according to Dewey and Shasky, 6 melts at 135.
Properties. Reliable stocks of palmitic acid have been employed in the

reassaying of the physical properties of palmitic acid, as reported by Schuette
and Vogel, 7 Pool and Ralston, 8 Francis and Piper, 9 Guy and Smith, 10 Ralston
and Hoerr. 11 The findings of Ralston and co-workers u are given here: 8>
o
(
f.p. 62.82
b. 351.5 (obtained by extrapolation)
b 128 278.7
bie 221.5
b4 192.2
Palmitic acid forms needles or greasy scales, insoluble in water. Accord-

12
ing to Ralston and Hoerr, the solubility in water ranges from 0.00072 g.
per 100 g. of solvent at 20 to 0.0012 g. at 60.
The same authors studied the solubility of this acid in a variety of organic
compounds. Palmitic acid may be recrystallized from alcohol, benzene, or
acetone.
One hundred g. of absolute alcohol dissolve 7.21 g. of palmitic acid at 20.0
13
and 2600 g. at 60, according to Ralston and Hoerr.
The acid may be titrated in alcohol but not in water.
Solidification-point curves of palmitic-myristic and palmitic-stearic acid
mixtures have been prepared by Schuette and Vogel. 14
Manunta 15 used dry magnesium sulfate or franconite as an agent for chro-
matographic separation of palmitic, stearic, and oleic acid mixtures in pe-
troleum ether.
The ammonium salt melts at 89, according to Kench and Malkin, 16 and
the lead salt at 113.0-113.6, according to Piper, Fleiger, Smith, and Ker-
stein. 17
and amides derived from octadecylamine and dodecylamine are
Salts re-
18
ported by Hunter to melt as follows:
Octadecylamine Dodecylamine
Salt Amide Salt Amide
85-85.5 91.5-92 72-73 82.5-83
Use. Palmitic acid is used mainly as a base of soaps.

1
Often, Vetten, Oliezaden 26 (1941), 143. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 2778.
2
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 819.
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 581
8
J. Chem. Soc. (1939), 617. See Robertson, J. Chem. Soc. 116 (1919), 1220.
4
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1940), 1303.
*Ibid. 61 (1939), 3251.
6
63 (1941), 3526.
Ibid.
7
Oil and Soap 16 (1939), 209; 17 (1940), 155.
*Ind. Eng. Chem. 34 (1942), 1104.
9
J. Am. Chem, Soc. 61 (1939), 577.
10
/. Chem. Soc. (1939), 615.
11
J. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 546; 9 (1944), 329.
Ibid. 7 (1942), 546.
18
Ibid.
" Oil and Soap 16 (1939), 209; 17 (1940), 155.
16
Helv. Chim. Acta 22 (1939), 1156.
uj. Chem. Soc. (1939), 230.
17
Ind. Eng. Chem. 31 (1939), 307. Also see Whitmore and Lauro, ibid. 22 (1930), 646.
is
Iowa Slate Coll. J. Sci. 15 (1941), 226, 228.
Stearic Acid
Ci8H36 2 Mol. Weight 284.47
n-Octadecanoic acid. n-Octadecylic acid
CH 3 -(CIT 2 ) 16 -COOH
Occurrence. Stearic acid has been observed in Himalayan cedar oil, in oil
of cascarilla, and in a few other essential oils.
Identification. By
(1) p-Chlorophenacyl stearate m. 86, according to Hann, Reid and Jamieson.
1
(2) Stearanilide m. 95.05 (capillary tube 95.5), according to Guy and Smith,
2
obtained through the acid chloride and cold aniline, and crystallized from alcohol or
benzene.
p-Bromobenzylpseudothiuronium stearate m. 135, by Dewey and Shasky. 3
(3)
(4) p-Bromoanilide m. 115.2, by Houston.
4
(5) Phenylmercuric stearate m. 90-92, prepared from diphenyl mercury and the
free acid by Koton. 8
Recently, reliable studies on the physical properties of this

Properties.
7
acid have been reported by Francis and Piper, 6 Guy and Smith, Schuette and
Vogel, Pool and Ralston, 9 and Ralston and Hoerr. 10
8
The following data are selected from work by Guy and Smith, 7 and Pool
9
and Ralston:
7 9
f.p. 69.60 b 128 299.7
7 9
m. 69.62 bi 6 240.0
9 9
b. 376.1 (value obtained by b4 209.2
extrapolation)
Ordinary stearic acid consists of odorless leaflets and is polymorphic. It
is, for all practical purposes, considered insoluble in water which dissolves
582 ACIDS
only 0.00029 g. of acid per 100 g. of solvent at 20, according to Ralston and
Hoerr. 11 Absolute alcohol dissolves 2.25 g. per 100 g. of solvent. The same
authors also studied the quantitative solubilities of this acid in numerous
other organic solvents. Stearic acid does not dissolve in cold sodium car-
bonate solutions nor in 0.1 N aqueous potassium hydroxide solutions, but it
can be titrated in alcohol.
The ammonium salt of stearic acid melts at 93 (Kench and Malkin
12
),
13
the lead salt at 115-115.5 (Piper et al. (Jacobson
), the silver salt at 205
14
and Holmes ). The salts and amides of octadecylamine and dodecylamine
are reported by Hunter 15 to melt at:
Octadecylamine Dodecylamine
Salt Amide Salt Amide
89.5-90.5 95.5-96 69-70 85-85.5
Manunta 16
separated stearic, oleic, and palmitic acid mixtures by chro-
matographic adsorption on dry magnesium sulfate from a petroleum ether
solution.
Schuctte and Vogel 17 determined the solidification-point curves of stearic-
palmitic acid mixtures and recommended these determinants as a diagnostic
tool.
Use. used most widely in the preparation of all kinds of
Stearic acid is
creams, particularly vanishing creams, and in cosmetics in general.

1
J. Am. Chern. Soc. 62 (1930), 819.
2
J. Cfiem. Soc. (1939), 615.
*J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 3526.
4
Ibid. 62 (1940), 1303.
5
J. Gen. Chern. U.S.S.R. 9 (1939), 912. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 392.
.7". Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 577.
6
7
J. Chem. Soc. (1939), 615.
8 Oil
and Soap 17 (1940), 155.
9
Ind. Eng. Chem. 34 (1942), 1104.
"J. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 546; 9 (1944), 329.
Ibid. 7 (1942), 546.
/. Chem. Soc. (1939), 230.
Ind. Eng. Chem. 31 (1939), 309.
i*
J. Biol. Chem. 25 (1916), 29.
15
Iowa State Coll. J. Sci. 15 (1941), 226, 228.
Helv. Chim. Ada 22 (1939), 1156.
7
Oil and Soap 17 (1940), 155.
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 583
(b) UNSATURATED ALIPHATIC ACIDS.
Methacrylic Acid
C4 H 6 O2 Mol. Weight 86.09
CH 2
C COOH
CH 3
Occurrence. Studies indicate that this unsaturated acid occurs both free
and as ester in Roman chamomile oil.
Isolation and Identification. For purposes

of isolation, the calcium salt is prepared
from the hot aqueous solution, the acid set free by hydrochloric acid, extracted with
ether, and distilled. Polymerization in the course of distillation should be prevented
by the addition of sulfur or diphenylamine, certain metal halides, or hydroquinone.*
1
Properties. Fittig and Prehn, 3 and Briihl 4

3 4
m. 16 df 1.0153
3 4
b. 160.5 (corr.) nf? 1.43143
This acid very susceptible to polymerization. It undergoes polymeriza-

is
tion on distillation, even on long standing, and readily upon addition of a few
drops of acid.
Use. Methacrylic acid, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
See British Patent No. 456,147, Nov. 3, 1936.
2
See French Patent No. 807,222, Jan. 7, 1937.
Liebigs Ann. 188 (1877), 47.
3
4
Ibid. 200 (1880), 181.
Isopropylidenacetic Acid
C5H8 2 Mol. Weight 100.11
Senecioic acid. /3,/3-Dimethylacrylic acid. /3-Methylcrotonic acid
H3 C
C=CH-COOH
H3 C
Occurrence. This unsaturated acid has been observed in oil of masterwort.
Identification. (1) By preparation of the amide m. 107-108, according to de Laet. 1
(2) Condensation with m-xylene using aluminum chloride yields 97% of /3-(3,5-
dimethyiphenyl)-isovaleric acid m. 111-112, according to Smith and Spillane.
2
584 ACIDS
Properties. The following properties are reported by Pressman and Lu-
cas,
8
Harries and Tiirk, 4 Getman, 5 Crossley and LeSueur, 6 and Smith, Prich-
7
ard and Spillane:
8' 7
m. 66-67.5
4
b. 199
6
b 40 114
" 4 6
df 1 .0062
Use. Isopropylidenacetic acid is not used in our industries.

1
2
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1943), 202.
Ibid. 62 (1940), 2078.
4
Liebigs Ann. 374 (1910), 348.
6
Am. Chem. J. 44 (1910), 154.
/. Chem. Soc. 76
(1899), 164.
7
"Organic Syntheses," Vol. 23 (1943), 28.
Angelic Acid
C5 H 8 2 Mol. Weight 100.11
Angelica acid. rans-a-Methylcrotonic acid. rans-a,/3-Dimethylacrylic acid
H3 C C H
II
HOOC C CH 3
Occurrence. Angelic acid occurs in Roman chamomile oil and in the dis-
tillation waters of angelica root oil.

Arigelamide m. 127-128, according to Naster and GavrilofT.
1
(1)
(2) Angelanilide m. 126-127 (crystallized from benzene), according to Blaise and
2
Bagard.
Properties. Angelic acid possesses a somewhat spicy odor. Young, Dil-

3 4
lon and Lucas, and von Auwers reported these properties:
3 6
m. 45.0-45.5 df' 0.9298 4
3
bi2-i3 85.5-87.5 .
ng? 1.4200 4
The sparingly soluble in cold water, readily soluble in hot water,

acid is
and volatile with steam.

5
According to the findings of Fittig and co-workers, angelic acid can be
separated from tiglic acid through the difference in the solubility of their
calcium salts, that of angelic acid being insoluble in alcohol. Also, this salt
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 585
it 60-70 is much less soluble in water than at room temperature. There-

ore, on heating a cold aqueous solution saturated at room temperature, a
precipitate will form that will redissolve on cooling another means of dis-
inguishing angelic acid from tiglic acid.
Use. Angelic acid is not used in the perfume and flavor industries.
1
Bull chim. Belg. 42 (1933), 528.
soc.
Mnn. chim. phys. [81, 11 (1907), 119.
8
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1929), 2531.
*Liebigs Ann. 432 (1923), 71.
*Liebigs Ann. 283 (1894), 105; 196 (1879), 87.
Tiglic Acid
^5 H8 2 Mol. Weight 100.11
czs-a-Methylcrotonic acid. a's-a,/?-Dimethylacrylic acid
H3C C H
\\
H 3 C C COOH
Occurrence. Tiglic acid occurs in oil of geranium and in oil of anise seed.

By
(1) p-Bromophenacyl tiglate m. 67.9 (corr.), according to Lund and Langvad. 1
Tiglamide m. 76.5-77, according to Seib.

2
(2)
(3) Tiglanilide m. 77 (crystallized from petroleum ether), according to the same
luthor. 8
Properties. pungent and somewhat spicy odor.

Tiglic acid possesses a
The following properties have been recorded by Young, Dillon and Lucas, 4
ind von Auwers: 5
5 5 6
m. 64 df' 0.9427
7
bw 94-9G 4
n 1.4275 5
The calcium salt of tiglic acid is much more soluble in hot than in cold
âter and thereby differs from the calcium salt of angelic acid.
Use. Tiglic acid is used very little in the perfume, soap, and flavor in-
iustries.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1932), 4107.
2
Ber. 60 (1927), 1396.
3
Ibid.
*J. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1929), 2532.
6
Liebigs Ann. 432 (1923), 70.
586 ACIDS
a,p-Hexenic Acid
C 6 H 10 2 Mol. Weight 114.14
/3-Propylacrylic acid
CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 CH=CH COOH
- - -
According to Walbaum and Rosen thai, the highest boiling

1
Occurrence.
fractions of Japanese mint oil (Mentha arvensis) contain a,/3-hexenic acid es-
terified partly with menthol and partly with n-hexenyl alcohol (/3,7-hexenol).
Isolation. By fractionatiori of Japanese mint and hydrolysis of the esters.

oil
Identification. Bromination yields a,/3-dibromocaproic acid m. 70, according to

Goldberg and Linstead.
2
These same authors report the anilide as in. 109-110.
Properties. a,/3-Hexenic acid has a somewhat musty, animal-like odor.

3- 4 5
Delaby and Guillot-Allegre, Linstead, and Nenitzescu, Gavat and Ca-
6
cora reported these properties:
3' 4 - 6
m. 33
b. 210-217 6
(corr.)
6
7
According to Goldberg and Linstead, the a,/3 acid reaches an equilibrium
with the (3,y isomer at 77 per cent of the a,/3 form. This transformation
takes place to some extent near the boiling point of the acid.
Use. This acid, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Ber. Schirnmel <fr Co., JubiUlums Ausgabe (1929), 205.
2 6
J. Chem. Soc. (1928), 2351. J. Chem. Soc. (1930), 1609.
3
Compt. rend. 192 (1931), 1467.
6
Ber. 73B (1940), 233.
4 7
Bull. soc. chirn. 14], 63 (1933), 301. /. Chem. Soc. (1928), 2343.
Citronellic Acid

Rhodinic acid. Rhodinolic acid
H 3 C
C=CH CH 2 CH 2 CH CH2 COOH . -
H3 C (iS-form) CH 3
or
H2 C
\
C CH2 CH2 CH2 CH CH 2 COOH
- - - -
H3 C (a-form) CH 3
Occurrence. The d- modification of this acid occurs in Java citronella oil
and in geranium oil (Pelargonium graveolens). The I- modification, originally
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 587
isolated from "callitris" pine oil by Smith 1 and described as a phenol ("calli-
trol"), was later identified in the steam distilled oil from the wood of Callitris
2
glauca by Trikojus and White and shown to be /-citronellic acid. The d,l-
modification has been reported by Rochussen 3 in camphor oil; however, later
4
findings by Trikojus and White indicate that no true racemate of this acid
is formed. Gentle oxidation of citronellal yields citronellic acid.
According to Trikojus and White, the ethereal solution of the steam

6
Isolation.
distilled oil is extracted with 5% sodium hydroxide, the acid precipitated and frac-
tionated several times retaining the fraction bo.s-o.e 116.5-119 .
Identification. (1) By the analysis of the silver salt (Ag

= 38.99%).
Sabetay prepared d-citronelloylhydrazides by the action of hydrazine on the
6
(2)
free acid. Equal molar quantities of each yield the symmetrical d-citronelloylhydrazide
m. 139-140; while 2 mols of hydrazine and 1 moi of the d- acid yield the mono-
citronelloylhydrazide m. 83.
According to Trikojus and White,
7
(3) citroneliic acid gives these color re-
actions :
With bromine in alcohol purple on evaporation.

With bromine in acetic acid red changing to indigo.
With sulfuric acid in acetic acid red changing to purple.
(4) For further data see section on "Properties."
8
Properties.Trikojus and White reported these characteristics for a syn-
thetic d-citronellic acid and for the natural isolate of the /- modification from
"callitris" pine oil:
*[]D = -6 36'.
f Heilbron, "Dictionary of Organic Compounds," Vol. I (1943), 558.

588 ACIDS
In a more recent publication, Okazawa 9 reported these melting points of
several derivatives of citronellic acid obtained from citronella oil:
Anilide m. 56-57
Nitrosochloride m. 118-119
Nitrosate m. 120.5
Okazawa considered his citronellic acid as a mixture of isomers of the limo-

nene and terpinolene type and attempted to separate these isomers by re-
peated fractional distillation.
10
Naves, Brus and Allard described the d-citronellic acid from Java citron-'
ella oil as follows:
bio 139-140 Hi +7 20'
df 0.9280 nf> 1.4537
These authors pointed out the fact that the acid, as it occurs in this oil, is
a mixture of the a- and ft- forms with the ft- form predominating.
The d,l- acid from camphor oil was found by Rochussen " to possess these
properties:
b4 126 ng> 1.46062
5
d 15 0.9557 nj> 1.46231
The reported to be nearly odorless when pure and to be completely

acid is
soluble in sodium carbonate and sodium bicarbonate.

Use.Citronellic acid, as such, is not used in the perfume or flavor indus-
tries; however, in the pharmaceutical trade it has a potential use as it is re-
ported to be toxic to the wood fungus Fones annosus.
1
J. Soc. Ghent. Ind. 30 (1911), 1358.
2
3
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 106 (1922), 124.
4
6
Ibid.
6
Compt. rend. 190 (1930), 1016.
7
8
Ibid. See also Semmler, Ber. 24 (1891), 208; 26 (1893), 2255. Glichitch and Mxiller,
Chim. et ind., April, Special Number (1928), 479. Ber. Schimmel & Co., April (1910), 17.
9
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 64 (1943), 501, 1360; 66 (1944), 448. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 3777.
10
Compt. rend. 200 (1935), 1112.
11
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 106 (1922), 124.
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 589
The Geranic Acids

Geranic Acid
Ci H 16 O2 Mol. Weight 168.23
2,6-Dimethyl-l ,5-heptadiene-l-carboxylic acid

(/3- form)
H3 C CH3
C=CH CH2 CH 2 C=CH COOH
- -
H3 C
and
2,6-Dimethyl-l,6-heptadiene-l-carboxylic acid
(a-form)
H3 C CH 3
C CH 2 CH 2 CH 2
. -
C=CH COOH-
H2 C
/
Dehydrogeranic Acid
a7e
2,6-Dimethyl-l,3,5-heptatriene-l-carboxylic acid. /3,f-Dimethyl-A -octa-
trienoic acid
H3 C CH 3
O=CH CH=CH C=CH COOH
- - -
H3 C
The naturally occurring geranic acid is composed of the metamers repre-
sented above, the /3- form predominating.
Cahn, Penfold and Simonsen suggested this structure of dehydrogeranic
1
acid from among the seven theoretically possible formulas, primarily on the
basis of the absorption spectra of the compound in ethyl alcohol.
Kuhn and Hoffer,
2
studying the synthetic preparation of dehydrogeranic
acids, came to the conclusion that the natural dehydrogeranic acid is related
structurally to geraniol and citral a, whereas their synthetic dehydrogeranic
acid m. 137 on the other hand, related structurally to nerol and citral b.
is,
Isopropenyl-isopropylidene isomerism may also occur in this molecule, but

the data suggest the 0- form as most likely.
3
Occurrence. Glichitch and Naves identified geranic acid in the saponifi-
cation products of lemon petitgrain oil. Gentle oxidation of geraniol yields
geranic acid.
590 ACIDS
Cahn, Penf old and Simonsen isolated dehydrogeranic acid from the wood
4
oil of Callitropsis araucarioides where it occurs as geranyl dehydrogeranate,
primarily in the fraction b 3 115-125.

Penf old, Ramage and Simonsen 6 detected methyl geranate in the volatile
oil derived from the "leafy tops" of the Australian shrub Calythrix tetragona
(Labillardiere) variety "A."
Isolation. The salt ofdehydrogeranic acid is obtained from the geranyl ester by
reflux hydrolysis, for 24 hr., with 0.5 N aqueous potassium hydroxide. The free acid
can be purified by successive recrystallization from methyl alcohol and ethyl acetate.
According to Cahn, Tenfold and Simonsen, it is a colorless solid.
6
Identification.
(a) Geranic acid. Penf old, Ramage and Simonsen 7 identified the natural geranic
acid by means of the p-phenylphenacyl geranate, m. 79-80, and the p-bromophenacyl
geranate m. 67.
(b) Dehydrogeranic acid. Reduction with palladized charcoal gives d/-tetrahydro
geranic acid which yields a p-toluidide m. 81-82, according to Cahn, Penf old and
Simonsen, and an amide m. 101-102.
8
Properties.
9
(a) Geranic acid. Von Auwers and Eisenlohr described synthetic geranic
4 2
acid as follows: b 14 158; df' 0.9518; ng*' 1.48695.
Glichitch and Naves 10 characterized the geranic acid isolated from lemon
petitgrain oil as: b 3 135-140; d 15 0.8694; n i5 1.4804.
11
According to Tiemann, this unsaturated acid decomposes on distillation
at ordinary pressures to 2,6-dimethyl-l,5-heptadiene; whereas, on treatment
with warm sulfuric and glacial acetic acid, isomerization occurs, to a com-
12
pound which Bernhauer and Forster reported as 82 per cent of a-cyclo-
geranic acid m. 106.
13
(b)Dehydrogeranic acid. Cahn, Penfold and Simonsen noted that the
natural isolate decomposes at 185-186, and that it is optically inactive in
0.03 per cent sodium hydroxide solutions. It decolorizes potassium perman-
ganate immediately and forms an unstable monobromo-acid. The acid is

readily soluble in hot benzene, acetic acid, and methyl alcohol but only spar-
ingly so in these solvents when cold.
Fischer and Lowenburg 14 reported the dl- synthetic /S^-dimethyl-A^-octa-
trienoic acid as melting at 187-188.
These authors further observed that dehydrogeranic acid, when heated to
50-95, loses carbon dioxide and forms the easily polymerized /3,f-dimethyl-
Aa7 '-heptatriene bio 53-54, m. -23 to -22.
A density determination was conducted by Owen and Pickup 15 who ob-
served 1.10 for the crystal.
Use. Geranic and dehydrogeranic acids, as such, are not used in our in-
dustries.
16
Roger and Dvolaitskaya explored the use of heptyl geranate in perfumes.
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 591
ij. Chem. Soc. (1931), 3134.

*
Ber. 66 (1932), 655, 658; 63 (1930), 2170.
3
4
J. Chem. Soc. (1931), 3134.
6
J. Chem. Soc. (1931), 3139.
7
/. Chem. Soc. (1931), 3140.
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 84 (1911), 22.
10
11
Ber. 31 (1898), 827. Cf. also Henne and Chanan, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1944), 394.
12
/. prakt. Chem. 147 (1937), 199. Cf. Glichitch and Naves, Parfums France 7 (1929), 60.
13
/. Chem. Soc. (1931), 3139.
14
Liebigs Ann. 494 (1932), 282. Cf. Fischer and Hultzsch, Ber. 68 (1935), 1726.
16
Reported in paper by Cahri, Penfold and Simonsen, J. Chem. Soc. (1931), 3137.
16
Recherches 1 (1937), 79. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 1241.
Oleic Acid
Mol. Weight 282.45
(CH^jyy C H
HOOC (CH2 -
)7 C H
Occurrence. Oleic acid occurs in oil of orris root and in a few other essen-
tial oils.

p-Bromophenacyl oleate m. 46 and p-phenylphenacyl ester m. 61, according
(1)
to Kimura. 1
(2) p-Chloropseudothiuronium oleate m. 131, by Dewey and Sperry.
2
(3) p-Bromobenzylpseudothiuronium oleate m. 133, by Dewey and Shasky.

8
Properties. Physical properties for highly purified oleic acid have been
4 5
reported by Smith, and by Wheeler and Riemenschneider:
4 5
f.p. 13.34 (a- form) nf? 1.4581
4 4
m. 13.36 (a- form) nf? 1.4597
4 5 4
16.25 OS- form) n{> 1.4616
Iodine No. (Wijs, % hr.) 90.0 5
5
Thiocyanogen No. (3 hr.) 89.6
Oleic acid is insoluble in water, and miscible with alcohol or ether. On

distillation at atmospheric pressure, oleic acid decomposes but it can be dis-
tilled with superheated steam at 250.
Oleic acid crystallizes first as a- form,
but on standing this form changes gradually inô the stable j8- form which,
6
according to Smith, crystallizes only slowly.
7
Ravich, Volkova and Kuz'mina investigated the polymorphic properties
of this acid and reported the melting points of unstable varieties at 8.5 and
11.0.
592 ACIDS
8 9
Smith, Wheeler and Riemenschneider, and Brown 10
all contributed to the
method and knowledge of low temperature crystallization as a special means
of purification of oleic acid.
Stewart and Wheeler n prepared binary mixtures of oleic with linoleic and
linolenic acid and studied their properties as a means of analyzing mixtures
of these acids.
Use. Oleic acid is used mainly as an ingredient in cosmetics, especially
facial creams. It also serves as an emulsifying agent. Oleic acid further-
more forms the base of many types of soaps.
1
/. Soc.Chem. Ind. Japan 36, Suppl. binding (1932), 221.
*/. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 3251.
3
Ibid. 63 (1941), 3526.
4
/. Chem. Soc. (1939), 978.
6
Oil and Soap 16 (1939), 209.
6
/. Chem. Soc. (1939), 978.
7
Corn-pi, rend. acad. sci. U.S.S.R. 29 (1940), 88. Ada physicochim. U.S.S.R. 14 (1941),
403. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1941), 2782, 5369.
8
/. Chem. Soc. (1939), 974.
9
Oil and Soap 16 (1939), 209.
10
Chemical Reviews 29 (1941), 333.
Oil and Soap 18 (1941), 69.

H.
Fiedler, "Zur stereochemischen Konfiguration der Olsaure," Fette und Seifen 47
(1940), 219.
(c) DIBASIC ALIPHATIC ACIDS.
Succinic Acid
Ethane-l,2-dicarboxylic acid
CH 2 COOH
CH2 COOH
Occurrence. This dibasic acid has been observed as a natural constituent
in the wood of Goupia tomentosa.
Identification. By
(1) p-Chlorobenzylpseudothiuronium succinate m. 167, by Dewey and Sperry;
*
and the corresponding bromo derivative m. 167, according to Dewey and Shasky. 2
Mono-p-toluidide, m. 177-178, according to Pucher and Vichery.
3
(2)
(3) Di-phenacyl succinate m. 148, according to Rather and Reid.
4
This compound
is useful for the identification of succinic acid in the presence of acetic acid, citric acid,
/-malic acid, oxalic acid, or d-tartaric acid.
Di-p-bromophenacyl succinate m. 211, according to Judefind and Reid;

(4)
6
and
methyl-p-bromophenacyl succinate m. 104.6-104.8, by Mowry and Brode.
6
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 593
7 8
Properties. Viseur and Biltz recorded these properties:
7
m. 182.7
8
df 1.572
9
Wright reported the solubilities (g. per 100 g. of solvent) of succinic acid
in water and absolute alcohol:
20 30
Water 6.8 g. 10.5 g.
Absolute Alcohol 10.0 g. 12.0 g.
The silver salt of succinic acid is insoluble in cold water. The calcium salt
containing 3 mols of water precipitates at room temperature; the calcium salt
containing mol of water precipitates at the boiling point, but with calcium
1
chloride only from concentrated solutions of alkali succinates.

Use. used mainly for the preparation of esters which serve
Succinic acid is
as diluents of perfume compositions and occasionally as adulterants of essen-

tial oils.
!/. Am. Chem. Sac. 61 (1939), 3251.

*Ibid. 63 (1941), 3526.
a/nd. Eng. Chem., Anal. Ed. 13 (1941), 414.
4
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 41 (1919), 83.
6
Ibid. 42 (1920), 1055.
6
Ibid. 63 (1941), 2281.
7
8
Liebigs Ann. 453 (1927), 278.
9
J. Chem. Soc. (1927), 1336.
L. M.
Kulberg, "Micro-determination of Acids by Titration with Sodium Phenol-
phthaleinate," Zavodskaya Lab. 7 (1938), 417.
George J. Goepfert, "A Micro-determination of Succinic Acid," Biochem. J. 34
(1940), 1012.
(d) ALIPHATIC HYDROXY ACIDS.
Hydroxymyristic Acid
Ci 4 H 28 O3 Mol. Weight 244.36
OH
CH3 (CH2 )2 CH -
(CH 2 ) 9 COOH
Occurrence. This acid has been observed in the high boiling fractions of
the derived from angelica seed, and from sabadill. Although its constitu-
oils
tion has not been firmly established, a hydroxymyristic acid of similar prop-
594 ACIDS
erties was prepared by Asahina and co-workers l and identified as 10-hydroxy-
tridecan-carboxylic acid.
Identification. By the preparation of benzoylhydroxymyristic acid m. 68, according

to Miiller. 2
Properties. M. 51 (Miiller). Asahina et al.

3
obtained sebacic and bu-
tyric acids by oxidation of their hydroxymyristic acid. The acid is not easily
soluble in hot water. The derived keto acid from 10-hydroxymyristic acid
melts at 66-67, and yields a semicarbazone m. 100.
Use. Hydroxymyristic acid is not used in the perfume and flavor industries.
1
/. Pharm. Soc. Japan 620 (1925), 2; 479 (1922), 1. Chem. Zentr. I (1926), 135; I (1922),
976.
2
er. 14 (1881), 2483.
/. Pharm. Soc. Japan 620 (1925), 2; 479 (1922), 1. Chem. Zentr. I (1926), 135; I (1922),
976.
16-Hydroxypentadecylic Acid
Ci5H 3 o0 3 Mol. Weight 258.39
15-Hydroxypentadecanoic acid
HO (CH2 ) 14 COOII
Occurrence. The
constitution of this acid, which occurs, according to Cia-
mician and Silber, 1 as lactonc in the high boiling fractions of angelica root oil,
was established by Kerschbaum. 2 Casparis and Freund 3 identified this acid
in the fixed oil of juniper berries.
Identification. By preparation of these derivatives:

Acethydroxypentadecylic acid m. 59.4-59.6, by Chuit and Hausser.
4
(1)
(2) 15-Bromopentadecylic acid m. 66, according to Hunsdiecker and Hunsdiecker.
6
15-Iodopentadecylic acid m. 77, by the same authors.

(3) The methyl ester was observed by Chuit and Hausser as m. 52-52.5. b 2 180-
6
182.
Properties. When from ether, this acid forms

crystallized star-like needles
m. 84.8-85.2, according to Chuit and Hausser. 7
Insoluble in water, slightly soluble in ligroine, easily soluble in alcohol,
ethyl acetate, acetone, and benzene.
8
According to Ruzicka and Stoll, oxidation with chromic acid in acetic acid
yields tridecan-dicarboxylic acid, m. 112-113.
1
Ring closure leads to the musk lactone exaltolide m. 31-32, d^ 0.9383,
9
nj) 1.4633, according to Ruzicka and Stoll; while Stoll and Rouve* l re-
ported m. 30-31, bo.06 111-112 , df 0.9462, nfj 1.4670, saponification
number 233.4.
Use.Hydroxypentadecylic acid, as such, is not used in the perfume or
flavor industries. However, the lactone of this acid has attained considerable
importance (see "Exaltolide")-
ALIPHATIC ACIDS 595
l
Ber. 29 (1896), 1811.
2
Ber. 60 (1927), 903.
3
Pharm. Ada Helv. 13 (1938), 307. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 849.
4
Helv. Chim. Acta 12 (1929), 484. Cf. Ciamician and Silber, Ber. 29 (1896), 1811.
6
Ber. 76B (1942), 294. Cf. Chuit and Hausser, Helv. Chim. Acta 12 (1929), 484; and
Ciamician and Silber, Ber. 29 (1896), 1811.
6
Helv. Chim. Acta 12 (1929), 484.
7
Ibid., 483.
*Ibid. 11 (1928), 1167.
9
Ibid.
w Ibid. 17 (1934), 1288.
Otto Gerhardt, "Higher-ring Ketoncs and Lactoncs. (Exaltone and Exaltolide),"

Seifensieder-Ztg. 62 (1935), 169.
Ambrettolic Acid
Ci 6 H 3 o0 3 Mol. Weight 270.*
lG-Hydroxy-7-hexadccenoic acid
CH 2 (CH 2 ) 7 CH=CH (01I 2 ) 6 COOII
OH
Occurrence. Ambrettolic acid occurs mainly as ester in oil of ambrette seed.
Isolation. Stoll and Gardner l

isolated the acid from the neutral fraction bo.a 90-
137. After saponification of this fraction, the aqueous solution was extracted re-
peatedly with ether and acidified with hydrochloric acid. The resulting acid, nearly
insoluble in petroleum ether, is further purified through its barium salt, a method
by Kerschbaum.
2
developed earlier
Properties. M. 25, 3
according to Kerschbaum, m. 20-22 by Stoll and
Gardner. 4
On
treatment with acids or on warming, even in a vacuum desiccator at
room temperature, ambrettolic acid is converted into a lactone, viz., ambret-
tolide,which can be distinguished by its typical musk odor. Lactonization
6
by the method of Stoll and Rouve yields pure ambrettolide, according to
6
Stoll and Gardner. Reduction forms a dihydroambrettolic acid identical
with Bougault and Bourdier's 7 juniperic acid, m. 95.
Use. Ambrettolic acid, as such, is not used in our industries.
l
Helv. Chim. Acta 17 (1934), 1611.
2
Ber. 60 (1927), 902.
3
Ibid. t 904.
*Helv. Chim. Acta 17 (1934), 1611.
6
Ibid., 1283.
6
Ibid., 1611.
7
J. pharm. chim. [6], 29 (1909), 561.
596 ACIDS
B. AROMATIC ACIDS
Benzole Acid
:OOH
Occurrence. Benzoic acid has been found in quite a number of essential

oils for example, in oil of cinnamon leaves, anise seed, clove, cassia, neroli
bigarade, tolu balsam, vetiver, ylang ylang, and in a few flower oils, such as
tuberose, hyacinth and champaca.
Identification. (1) Byuse of the microchemical test of Shupe l wherein the acid is
treated with a 5% silver nitrate solution in 2%
triethanolamine. The zinc-pyricline
reagent or a lead-triethanolamine solution yields crystalline precipitates character-
2
istic for benzoic acid; Huijssc employs the copper-pyridine reagent for this acid.
/
(2) 4-(4 -Bromophenyl)-phenyl benzoate m. 192-193, by Hazlet, Alliger and
Tiede. 3
Phenyl mercury salt (Bz-0-Hg-Ph) m. 97-98, according to Koton; it is
4
(3)
prepared directly by the action of diphenyl mercury on the acid.
(4) p-Iodophenylurea m. 247-248 (corr.) derived from the reaction of p-iodo-
benzazide and ben/amide in boiling toluene, according to Sah and Wang. 5 Although
an indirect derivative of the acid, it is nevertheless to be recommended because of the
high yield and low solubility of the urea. Benzamide m. 130, according to Huntress
and Mulliken. 6
(5) Another indirect but equally useful derivative is the benzylamide m. 105-105.5
from the interaction of the esters of benzoic acid and benzylamine, according to Dermer
and King. 7
(6) p-Bromobenzylpseudothiuronium benzoate m. 154, by Dewey and Shasky.
8
(7) p-Chlorophenacyl benzoate m. 11,8.6, according to Judefind and Reid.

9
(8) p-Phenylphenacyl benzoate m. 167, according to Drake and Bronitsky.

10
Properties. The following properties are reported by Schwab and Wichers, 11

12
and Landee and Johns:
f.p. 122.36 .Ol 011
12
b. 249
Benzoic acid sublimes even at 100; it is readily volatile with steam; 0.27 g.
are soluble in 100 g. of water at 18. Soluble in 2.14 parts of absolute alcohol
at 15.
Extensive careful studies have been carried out by Nicolescu and Klang l3
also on the solubilities of benzoic acid in numerous other solvents.

Use. Benzoic acidused mainly for the preparation of esters and for
is
chemical synthesis in general. It has also attained some importance as a

AROMATIC ACIDS 597
preservative of fruit juices and pharmaceutical preparations which readily

spoil by bacterial action.
1
2
Tijdschr. Artenijkunde I (1943), 218. Chem. Zentr. II (1943), 548.
3
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 1447.
6
Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 364.
6
"Identification of Pure Organic Compounds," Order I, New York, Wiley (1941), 146.
7
/. Org. Chem. 8 (1943), 168.
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 3526.
9
Ibid. 42 (1920), 1054.
10
Ibid. 52 (1930), 3719.
11
/. Research NaVl Bureau Standards 25 (1940), 757.
12
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 2891.
13
Bui. chim. soc. chim. Romdnia [2], 1 (1939), 146. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 3320.
Phenylacetic Acid
C 8 H8 O 2 Mol. Weight 136.14
CH 2 COOH
Occurrence. Phenylacetic acid occurs free and as ester in Japanese mint

oil (Mentha arvensis), and in oil of neroli bigarade. It is present probably
also in other volatile oils.
Identification. (1) On warming

with dilute sulfuric acid and manganese dioxide,
phenylacetic acid develops an odor of benzaldehyde.
(a) p-Nitrobenzyi phenyl acetate m. 65, according to Lyman and Reid.
1
(b) Phenylacetanilide m. 117-118, according to Reissert and More.

2
(c) Phenylaceto-p-toluidide m. 135-136, according to Purgotti.

3
(d) Salt and amide from dodecylamine: respectively, m. 68.5-69.5 and m. 79-
79.5 (Hunter ).
(e) The benzylamide m. 121-122 is prepared directly from the ester by the action
of benzylamine, according to Dermer and King. 6
Properties. Phenylacetic acid possesses a peculiar, lasting odor. Moller

and Strecker, 6 and Adams and Thai 7 recorded these properties:
6 7
m. 76-76.5 '
6
b. 265.5
Phenylacetic acid easily soluble in hot water, sparingly soluble in cold

is
water; very soluble in alcohol or ether. It sublimes readily.

Use. used mainly for the preparation of esters, es-
Phenylacetic acid is
pecially methyl and ethyl esters, which are characterized by their strong odor
reminiscent of honey, and which serve in numerous perfume and flavor com-
positions. Because of their odor strength and low price, these esters are also
used as adjuncts in the scenting of soaps.
598 ACIDS
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 39 (1917), 710.
2
Ber. 39 (1906), 3307.
3
Gazz. chim. iial 20 (1890), 178.
4
Iowa Stale College J. Sci. 16 (1941), 228.
5
J. Org. Chem. 8 (1943), 168.
6
Liebigs Ann. 113
(1860), 65.
7
"Organic Syntheses," Coll. Vol. I, New York, John Wiley (1941), 436.
Cinnamic Acid
H-C-COOH
Occurrence. Cinnamic acid occurs in nature predominately as the trans-
isomer.
Cinnamic acid has been observed in Asiatic and American styrax oil, in oil
of cassia, balsam of Peru, basil, and in a few other essential oils.
Identification. By
(1) p-Nitrobenzyl cinnamate m. 116.8, according to Lyman and
Reid. 1
(2) Phenacyl cinnamate m. 140.5, according to Rather and Reid.
2
p-Bromobenzylpseudothiuronium cinnamate m. 170, by Dewey and Shasky;

3
(3)
the corresponding chloro compound m. 167, by Dewey and Sperry. 4
5
Properties. Dippy and Lewis reported the melting point of a highly puri-
product as 130.5, the cis- or olio- form melting at 08.
fied trans-
Gross, Saylor and Gorman determined the solubility of cinnamic acid in

6
water as 0.004 g. per 1000 g. of solvent, while Desai and Patel 7 investigated
the solubility of this acid in numerous organic solvents. These authors
found ~ 0.08 mol of acid to be soluble per mol of alcohol. The acid is some-
what soluble in hot water, readily soluble in ether, insoluble in petroleum
ether.
Use. Cinnamic acid serves mainly for the preparation of esters which are
used in perfumes, cosmetics, and for the scenting of soaps.
1
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 39 (1917), 703.
*Ibid. 41 (1919), 81.
3
63 (1941), 3526.
Ibid.
*Ibid. 61 (1939), 3251.
8
/. Chem. Soc. (1937), 1010.
6
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1933), 650.
7
J. Indian Chem. Soc. 12 (1935), 131.
P. Mastagli and M. Metayer, "Hydrogenation

Cinnamic Acid and p-Hydroxy-
of
cinnamic Acid with Raney Nickel," Compt. rend. 224 (1947), 1779. Chem. Abstracts
42 (1948), 1243.
AROMATIC ACIDS 599
Salicylic Acid
o-Hydroxybenzoic acid
COOH
-OH
Occurrence. Salicylic acid has been identified in oil of ylang ylang, cassia,
American pennyroyal, anise seed, and several other essential oils. As methyl
ester it is widely distributed in nature.
Identification. (1) On warming with concentrated sulfuric acid and methyl alcohol,
salicylic acid or its salts develop the characteristic odor of wintergreen oil (methyl
salicylate).
Kul'berg and Presman found that
l
(2) salicylic acid develops a yellow color in
concentrations of 1 part per million, with ammoniumpcrsulfate.
(a) p-Bromophenacyl salicylate m. 140, according to Judefind and Reid.
2
(b) Salicylanilide m. 134-i35 (prepared by heating salicylic acid with aniline in

the presence of phosphorus trichloride PCls), according to Iliibner. 3
(c) S-benzyl thiuronium salicylate m. 146 (Donleavy ).
4
(d) 3,5-Dinitrobenzoyl methyl salicylate m. 107.5 from sodium methyl salicylate

and 3,5-dinitrobenzoyl chloride (Saunders, Stacey and Wilding 5 ).
(e) p-Chlorobenzylpseudo thiuronium salicylate m. 162 (Dewey and Sperry ). The
6
corresponding bromo compound melts at 168 (Dewey and Shasky ).

7
Properties. The United States Pharmacopoeia, Twelfth Revision, and

8
Cohen and Blekkingh, Jr. recorded these properties:
m. 158-1GO
d 25 1.4340
Salicylic acid is slightly soluble in water (0.124 g. in 100 g. of water at

and 7.5 g. at 100, according to Savarro 9 ); it is readily soluble in alcohol or
ether. However, figures as to solubility should be accepted with caution,
since Thiessen and Koerner, 10 reported their observations on the relation of
solubility to polymorphism in this acid. The acid is volatile with steam.
Moreover, it sublimes at 70-85 without decomposition, according to Binova
and Ralgorodska, 11 but decomposition takes place with sublimation in the
12
range 100-150 as observed by Hirsbrunner.
Use. Salicylic acid is used for the synthesis of many important compounds
aspirin, for example. In our industry it serves mainly for the preparation
of esters, methyl salicylate in particular. Because of its antiseptic properties,
600 ACIDS
salicylic acid is also used for the preservation of fruit juices and generally in
pharmaceutical preparations.
1
Farm. Zhur. 13, No. 1 (1940), 17. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 7234.
a
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 42 (1920), 1049.
Liebigs Ann. 210 (1881), 342.
3
4
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 58 (1936), 1004.
6
Biochem. J. 36 (1942), 373.
6
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 3251.
7
Ibid. 63 (1941), 3526.
8
Proc. Acad. Sri. Amsterdam 38 (1935), 842, 978. Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 2069.
9
AUi. Accad. Torino 48 (1913), 955.
10
11
Farm. Zhur. (1934), 30. Chem. Abstracts 28 (1934), 3691.
12
Helv. Chim. Acta 17 (1934), 477.
Ânisic Acid
p-Methoxybenzoic acid
Occurrence. found in most essential oils containing a high

Anisic acid is
percentage of anethole, from which it may originate by gradual oxidation on

aging. Anisic acid has also been identified in Tahiti vanilla beans. Re-
1
cently Lederer observed it in castoreum.
Identification. By
(1) />Nitrobenzyl anisate m. 132, according to Lyons and Reid.
2
(2) Anisanilide m. 168-169, according to Haller, and Lessen.

8 4
(3) Benzylamide of the acid, m. 131-132.5, by Dermer and King,

6
prepared
from the methyl ester of anisic acid and benzylamine.
6 7
Oilman, Langham and Willis, Persoz,
Properties. and Nozu, Hamada,
Hosino and Kinosita 8 recorded these properties:
6 8
m. 183-184 '
7
b. 275-280
p-Anisic acid is sparingly soluble in cold water. (1 liter water dissolves

0.27 g. of the acid at 18, according to Berthelot. 9) Cahours 10 reports the
acid as easily soluble in alcohol or ether, and fairly so in hot water.
The acid gives a characteristic micro crystalline salt with the copper-
11
pyridine reagent, according to Huijsse.
Use. p-Anisic acid as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Trav. membres soc. chim. biol. 23 (1941), 1457. Chem. Abstracts 39 (1945), 1448.
2
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 39 (1917), 1738.
3
Compt. rend. 121 (1895), 190.
AROMATIC ACIDS 601
Liebigs Ann. 176 (1875), 292.

4
8
J. Org. Ghent. 8 (1943), 168.
6
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1940), 347.
Liebigs Ann. 44 (1842), 311.
7
8
9
Ann. chim. phys. [6] 7 (1886), 180.
Liebigs Ann. 41 (1842), 66.
10
11
Tijdschr. Artsenijkunde 1 (1943), 218. Chem. Zentr. II (1943), 548.
Piperonylic Acid
C 8 H6 O4 Mol. Weight 166.13
3,4-Methylenedioxybenzoic acid
COOH
-CH 2
Occurrence. In oil of camphor, and pha-chium.
Identification. (1) preparation of piperonylamide m. 169

By the (anhydrous
tablets from alcohol), according to Rupe and v. Majewski. 1
(2) By means of the benzylamide of piperonylic acid, m. 126.5-127.5. Prepared
by the action of benzylamine on the methyl ester of piperonylic acid, according to
Dernier and King. 2
This same derivative and several other N-substituted piperonyl-
amides are reported by Gertler arid Haller; 3 they include the o-tolyl piperonylamide
m. 137.5-138.5, the m-isomer m. 12l-122, and the p- isomer m. 149-149.5.
These authors prepared this series of compounds from piperonoyl chloride and the
appropriate amine.
Properties. Shriner and Kleiderer 4

reported the melting point as 227-
228.
5
According to Fittig and Mielch, piperonylic acid is insoluble in cold water
or chloroform, and sparingly soluble in cold alcohol or ether. Jobst and
6
Hesse observed that piperonylic acid sublimes on slow heating at 210.
Use. Piperonylic acid, as such, is not used in our industries but certain of
its nitrogen derivatives have been explored as pyrethrum synergists.
1
Ber. 33 (1900), 3403.
2
J. Org. Chem. 8 (1943), 168.
3
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 1741.
"Organic; Syntheses," Col. Vol. II, New York,
4
John Wiley, 538.
Liebigs Ann. 162 (1869), 40.
6
6
Ibid. 199 (1879), 63.
602 ACIDS
Veratric Acid
C Hi O 4
fl
Mol. Weight 182.17
3,4-Dimethoxybenzoie acid
COOH
OCIIa
Occurrence. Vcratric acid has boon observed in oil of sabadill where it
occurs probably as methyl and ethyl ester.
Identification-. Vcratric acid may be identified by the preparation of these deriva-

tives:
(1) Amide m. 164, from the action of ammonia on vcratroyl chloride, according to
1
Meyer.
(2) 6-Bromoveratric acid m. 183- 181, according to Matsmoto.
2
(3) Freudenburg and Jakob prepared the methyl ester m. (>2 by the reaction of
3
2 g. of veratric acid, 40 cc. of methyl alcohol, and 0.3 g. of acetyl chloride for 24 hr.
at 20. The resulting ester is vacuum dried and recrystallized from methanol. Methyl
veratrate bi& 105, according to Arnold and Bordwell. 4
Properties. Matsmoto
observed that this acid crystallizes as a mono-
r>
hydrate from its aqueous solutions at temperatures below 50, whereas the
anhydrous veratric acid is obtained when crystallization results above 50 C.
Goldschmiedt 6 reported the anhydrous acid as melting at 18J. These
melting points have been subsequently confirmed by Freudenburg, Meister
and Flickinger, 7 (Jrignard, 8 Nicrenstein, 9 and Oliverio. 10
Rodionov and Fedorova n observed rhombic crystals of the sublimed acid
as melting at 178-179.
Onepart of veratric acid is soluble in 2100-2150 parts of water at 14 and
in 160-1 (it ) parts at 100, according to Matsmoto. 12
1
Graebe and Jiorgmann l:{

noted that the acid is easily soluble in alcohol and
ether.
l?se.- -Veratric acid, as such, is not used in the perfume or flavor industries.
1
Monatsh. 22 (1901), 429.
2
Her. 11 (1878), 126. Cf. Kuiford and Perry, J. On/. Chcm. 7 (1942), 354.
*Ber. 74 (1941), 1001.
.7. Am. Chcm. 8oc. 64 (1942), 2983.
4
6
tier. 11 (1878), 124.
6
Monatsh. 6 (1885), 379.
7
tier. 70 (1937), 512.
8
Compt. rend. 198 (1934), 625.
8
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 4012.
10
Koll. sedute accad. yioenia sci. nat. Catania 3, No. 5 (1937). Chem. Zentr. I (1939), 2594.
"Arch. Pharrn. 271 (1933), 287.
12
Ber. 11 (1878), 124. Liebiys Ann. 158 (1871), 282.
AROMATIC ACIDS 603
Trimethylgallic Acid
Ci H 12 O 6 Mol. Weight 212.20
3,4,5-Trimethoxybenzoic acid
COOH
HaCO V > OCHa
Occurrence. Trimethylgallic acid has been observed in oil of Boronia pin-

nata Smith.
Isolation. The acid is readily isolated as sodium saltand freed by precipitation with
hydrochloric acid. Trimethylgallic acid is further purified by recrystallizatiori from
boiling water and treatment of the solution with decolorizing carbon.
(I) As methyl ester m. 81, b. 274-275, according to Will.
1
Identification.
(2) As phenyi ester m. 103 (Pepe).
2
(3) Trimethylgallic hydrazide, prepared from the methyl ester and hydrazine
hydrate in rnethanol, crystallizes with 1 mol of solvent. It melts at 128- 129 and
after vacuum drying at 100, m. 168, according to Buchanan, Cook and London. 3
This hydrazide is converted to the azide by the action of nitric acid (Pepe). 4
(4) With a- and /3-naphthols the azide yields the corresponding trimethylgallates
m. 155 and 127, respectively (Pepe). 5
With o-, m-, and />-cresois the azide of trimethylgallic acid yields the o-, m-, and
p-cresyl esters: o-tolyl trimethylgallate m. 102; m- isomcr in. 124; ;;- isomer m. 89,
6
according to Pepe.
Properties. Nierenstein 7 reported the pure acid as melting at 169 with

evolution of carbon dioxide.
3,4,5-Trimethoxybenzoic acid is not so sensitive to oxidation as gallic acid.
Use. Trimethylgallic acid is not used in the perfume or flavor industries.
1
Ber. 21 (1888), 2022.
2
J. prakt. Chem. 126 (1930), 243.
3
J. Chem. Soc. (1944), 327.
4
/. prakt. Chem. 126 (1930), 241. Cf. Anales asoc. quim. Argentina 26 (1938), 51. Chem.
Abstracts 33 (1939), 171.
5
Anales asoc. quim. Argentina 28 (1940), 143. Chem. Abstracts 35 (1941), 2882.
6
Anales asoc. quim. Argentina 29 (1941), 124. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 440.
7
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 4012.
F. Mauthner, 'Trimethylgallic Acid," "Organic Syntheses," Coll. Vol. I, Wiley

(1941), p. 537.
Morris and Riemenschneider, "Higher Fatty Alcohol Esters of Gallic Acid," J. Am.
Chem. Soc. 68 (1946), 500.
604 ACIDS
^-Methoxycinnamic Acid
p-Coumaric acid methyl ether
CH= CH COOH
OCH 3
ethyl ester of this acid was first reported by Thresh in

1
Occurrence. The
the oil derived from the rhizome of Hedychium spicatum I lam. (fain. Zingi-
According to van Romburgh, and Panicker, Rao and Simonsen,
2 3
beraceac).
the ethyl ester also occurs in oil of Kaempferia galanga L.
Power and Rogerson 4 identified the acid in the hydrolyzed alcoholic ex-
tract from the roots of Veronica virginica L. (Leptandra virginica, Nuttall)
but did not identify the type of linkage.
This acid, furthermore, has been noted as a complex in larger molecules,
none of which are likely to arise in steam distilled oils but may be present in
5
extracts from safflower (see Kametaka and Perkin ), and kava root (see
Borsche and Gerhardt 6 ).
The acid may also be observed in old or oxidized oils of estragon as Dau-
fresne 7 has found that the aldehyde occurs in this ethereal oil.
Isolation. Hariharan and Sudborough 8 reported that the ethyl ester m. 49-50,
bi2o 245-255, sediments directly after long standing from ethereal oil of Kaempferia
galanga L. in 30% yield. These authors obtained 2.4 to 3.2% of volatile oil from the
botanical.
De Kock 9
readily isolated the pure free acid by saponifying the ester with alcoholic
potassium hydroxide, crystallizing the potassium salt, freeing the acid with sulfuric
acid, and
recrystallizing it from methyl alcohol.
10
According to Foote, the acid may also be isolated as ammonium salt, by passing
anhydrous ammonia into its solution in toluene.
Identification. (1) The methyl ester m. 88-90
readily prepared from p-coumaric
is
acid methyl ether and methyl alcohol in presence of a small amount of sulfuric acid
(Power and Rogerson "); or through the acid chloride, according to Perkin.
12
(2) The dibromide of the free acid melts at 149, and that of the ethyl ester at
111-112 according to Hariharan and Sudborough. 13
,
(3) Sondern
u readily prepared the guaiacol ester m. 102-103, and the a-naphthol
ester m. 102.
(4) The phenyl ester melts at 76-77, the 0-naphthyl ester at 130- 131, the
16
phenacyl ester at 136, according to Foote.
Properties. Several authors reported the fact that this acid displays liquid-
crystalline properties, melting first to an opalescent fluid near 170, finally to
AROMATIC ACIDS 605
a translucent liquid at about 185 (cf. de Kock, 16 Vorlander, 17 Power and

18 19
Rogerson, and Hariharan and Sudborough ).
However, a careful study of the heating curve of the two transformations
of this acid led Skau and Meier 20 to report the temperatures corresponding
to the passage from solid to liquid crystals and from liquid crystals to liquid
as 172.1 and 187.3, respectively.
The acid moreover allows of cis-trans- forms. Evidently the transform
21
is that ordinarily isolated, as de Costa has reported the lower melting cis-
form as m. 65.
The acid is moderately soluble in hot water and alcohol, soluble in hot
acetic acid (Perkin 22 ).
Use. p-Methoxycinnamic acid is not used iii the perfume or flavor in-
dustries.
1
Pharm. J. 15 (1884), 362.
[3],
Koninklijke Akademie van Wetenschappen

2 te Amsterdam 3 (1901), 38. Cf. ibid. 4 (1902),
618. Ber. Schimmel &
Co., Oct. (1900), 37; April (1903), 38.
3
J. Indian Inst. Sci. 9A (1926), 133.
4
/. Chem. Soc. 97 (1910), 1954.
6
Ibid., 1415.
6
Ber. 47 (1914), 2902.
7
Compt. rend. 146 (1907), 876. Bull. soc. chim. [4], 3 (1908), 330, 656.
8
9
Z. physik. Chem. 48 (1904), 132.
10
/. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 17 (1928), 958.
11
J. Chem. Soc. 97 (1910), 1954. See also Ramage and Robinson, J. Chem. Soc. (1933), 609.
"Ibid. 39 (1881), 439.
13
J. Indian Inst. Set. 8A (1925), 189.
14
J. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 25 (1936), 418.
15
Ibid. 17 (1928), 958.
16
Z. physik. Chem. 48 (1904), 132, 165.
^ Ibid. 57 (1907), 359.
i
J. Chem. Soc. 97 (1910), 1954.
19
2
Trans. Far. Soc. 31 (1935), 478.
21
Compt. rend. 198 (1934), 1996.
22
J. Chem. Soc. 31 (1877), 409. Jahresber. Forlschritte Chem. (1877), 792.

P. A. Foote, "Para-Methoxy Cinnamic Acid. A Revision," J. Am. Pharm. Assocn.
18 (1929), 880.
606 ACIDS
C. MISCELLANEOUS ACIDS
Camphoric Acid
Mol. Weight 200.23
CH a
H C-
2
-COOH(/3) (allo)
HC
3 C CH 3 (TT)
-C- COOH (a) (ortho)
H
This acid has attained considerable importance in the characterization of
camphor derivatives, as a product of their oxidation. Aschan showed that
1
actually there exist only six isomeric camphoric acids whose listing, configu-
ration, and properties follow.
Careful measurements have been made by Campbell, 2 and later by
3
Singh in connection with the determination of the specific rotation of the
d- and /-camphoric acids. The findings of the latter authors are given for
these isomers. The remainder of the data are quoted from Aschan.
Specific Rotation in Ethyl Alcohol at 35 C. for

Na 5892, c = g/100 cc.
Isorner m.
c = 1.2533 3.2467 5.253 7.2500 9.2500
d-Camphoric acid 187 +49 52' +48 4' +47 47' +47 26' +46 57'
c = 1.2526 3.2473 5.250 7.2507 9.2480
^Camphoric acid 187 -50 18' -48 12' -47 48' -47 23' -47 1'
m. WD
dZ-Camphoric acid 202-203
d-isoCamphoric acid H 20
+48
(absolute
36' (c = 9.88)
ale.)
Z-isoCamphoric acid -48 54' (c = 10.00)
cK-isoCamphoric acid 191'
These camphoric and isocamphoric acids are related as geometric isomers,

their relative configurations being illustrated in the following formulas:
MISCELLANEOUS ACIDS 607
,-COOH
HC2
COOH H
HaC c CH
c: 3 HC C
3 CH 3
I
.-COOH
H2C- H.C C^
COOH ^CH 3
acids
. H Camphoric ,-COOH
c: -c;
'COOH H
HaC C CHa HsC C~CH 3
x
,-COOH
-CC' H.C C'''
*CH 3 COOH
Isocamphoric acids
All other camphoric acids described in literature, according to Aschan, are

merely mixtures. As these acids are themselves "derived" from camphors
no further derivatives of the same are included at this point, although a num-
ber can be found in the literature.
1
Bcr. 27 (1894), 2001. Ada Soc. Sci. Fennicae V, 21 (1895), 47. Liebigs Ann. 316 (1901),
209.
2
,7.Am. Chem. Soc. 53 (1931), 1665.
3
Current Sci. Ill (1935), 420. Proc. hid. Acad. Sci. 2A (1935), 381.
Bredt, "History of the Constitution of Camphoric Acid and Its Esters," J. prakt.
J.
Chem. 133 (1932), 92. Chem. Abstracts 26 (1932), 2446.
Bawa K.
Singh, Kailoshpati Narayan, Parameshwar Sinha, Sheonath Prasad and
Nutbehari Chatterji, "The Physical Identity of Enantiomers." Pt. III. "Viscosities,
densities and and dl- forms of isonitrosocamphor (stable and
refractivities of d- and I-
unstable), camphor, camphoric acid, camphoric anhydride, camphorquinone and

sodium camphorate", Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 5A (1937), 484.
Nepetalic Acid
Mol. Weight 184.23
COOH COOH
HaC CsHr HC a HC 3 C5
C-(CH a )-CHOH
\
CH(CH 3)-C=0
.H \
Enolizcd Structure Solid Nepetalic Hydroxy Lactone
Acid Structure
(a) (b)
According to McElvain, Bright and Johnson, nepetalic acid

1
is a tri-sub-
r -i^
TT
stituted cyclopentane with CH3 , COOH, and CH(CH 3 )C=O as the
608 ACIDS
substituent groups. In solution this aldehydo-acid appears to exist in two
tautomeric forms: (a) as enolized structure and (b) ashydroxy lactone structure.
2
Occurrence. found that nepetalic acid is one of the main constitu-
Meyer
ents of catnip oil (Nepeta cataria). Together with nepetalactone, this acid
comprises the 85 per cent of catnip oil that dissolves in aqueous sodium hy-
;
droxide.
According to McElvain, Bright and Johnson, the most satisfactory

3
Isolation. (1)
method of preparing the crystalline nepetalic acid starts with the extraction of catnip
oil with a saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution. About 30% of the oil goes
into the bicarbonate solution with a vigorous evolution of carbon dioxide. Acidifica-
tion of the resulting aqueous solution precipitates the nepetalic acid as a mixture of
oil and solid which crystallizes further on standing.
reported the preparation of a bisulfite addition compound of nepetalic

4
(2) Meyer
acid. Later, McElvain, Bright and Johnson 6 found that this compound m. 95-97
can be prepared in 65% yield from the acid by warming the latter on a steam bath
for 10 min. with a 30% solution of sodium bisulfite. The crystalline acid may be
regenerated from the bisulfite compound by treatment with 5% sulfuric acid. Since
the yield of recovered acid from this operation amounted to only 60% of the theoretical,
the bisulfite procedure does not offer a very satisfactory purification route.
Identification. Nepetalic acid can be characterized through its semicarbazone,
which is prepared by treating an aqueous-alcoholic solution of nepetalic acid with an
aqueous solution of semicarbazide-hydrochloric acid buffered with sodium acetate.
The semicarbazone melts at 160-161.
Nepetalic acid is odorless. When isolated from catnip oil with

Properties.
sodium bicarbonate solution, as described above, nepetalic acid melts at 74-
75, a|? +48 6'. This is a considerably higher rotation than that obtained
with nepetalic acid extracted from oil of catnip with aqueous sodium hydrox-
ide, and suggests that this latter reagent causes some racemization of the acid.
Acetic anhydride converts nepetalic acid (in hydroxy lactone form) quan-
titatively into the acetate.
6
According to McElvain, Walters and Bright, the anhydride of nepetalic
acid forms slowly at ordinary temperatures in noncrystalline samples of nepe-
talic acid on standing (see "Nepetalic 'Anhydride' ").
Distillation at atmospheric pressure converts nepetalic acid into an un-
saturated lactone, nepetalactone.
Nepetalic acid is oxidized by hydrogen peroxide in alkaline solution to
formic and nepetonic acids. The latter acid contains an acetyl group in the
place of the CH(CH 3 ) -CHO substituent of nepetalic acid. Sodium hypo-
iodite converts nepetonic acid into nepetic acid, a methyldicarboxycyclopen-
tane. Oxidation of nepetalic acid with chromic acid converts the aldehyde
group to a carboxyl and produces the dibasic nepetalinic acid.
Use. Nepetalic acid, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 1558! *
Pharm. Arch. 7 (1936), 17.
2
Pharm. Arch. 1 (1936), 17. *J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 1558.
.7. Am
3 6
Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 1558. Ibid. 64 (1942), 1828.
Sedanonic Acid
Ci 2 H 18 O 3 Mol. Weight 210.26
CH
H2 C
/ \
C COOH
H2 C CH C=0
\OT/~ltT
/ Url
I
/~"<TJ OTT
orl 2 /"^"LT
Uil 3
2 2 U-tl 2
and
Sedanonic Anhydride
A 2 -Tetrahydro-n-butylidene phthalide
O
CH C
IT 2 C
/ \C /
I
o
H2 C CH
\CH/ \ <
2
CH CH 2 CH 2 CH 3
Occurrence. Sedanonic acid and sedanonic anhydride were first isolated
from celery seed oil by Ciamician and Silber. Years later, Murayama, 2
1
Murayama and Itakagi, 3 Noguchi, 4 and Noguchi and Kawanami 5 observed

sedanonic acid in the essential oil of another umbelliferous plant, viz., Cnidium
Makino, a drug called in China Hsiung-Ch'uang. More recently
officinale
Naves 6 isolated sedanonic anhydride from oil of lovage root.
A relative of sedanonic acid is valerophenone-o-carboxylic acid Ci 2 IIi4O 3
COOH
C=0
which Kariyone and Kotani 7 showed to be identical with the "Ligusticumic

acid" Ci 2 Hi6O 3 previously isolated by Kariyone, Kanno and Sugino 8 from
,
the benzene extract of the fruit of Ligusticum acutilobum Sieb. and Zucc.
(family Umbelliferae). "Ligusticum lactone" C 12 Hi 4 O 2 obtained by the ac- ,
'
tion of formic acid on 'Ligusticumic acid," proved to be butylidene phthalide.
610 ACIDS
Isolation. As Naves pointed out, all methods aiming at the separation of these
9
acids are beset with one difficulty the yield of lactones. Nevertheless it is possible
to isolate sedanonic acid and even valerophenone-o-carboxylic acid if one conducts a
current of carbon dioxide through their salt solutions during these operations.
Identification. Naves 10 thus isolated and identified sedanonic anhydride from the
tail fractions (1.3 g.) of lovage root oil, after saponification with a 25% potassium
hydroxide solution, and by treatment of the acids with hydrazine hydrate (2 cc.) on a
water bath. When recrystallizing from alcohol, the crystals (0.27 g.) of tetrahydro-n-
butyl phthalazone melted at 136.
Heating sedanonic acid with paladium charcoal at 330 to 340 for 3 hr., Noguchi
and Kawanami u obtained butyl phthalide which, on nitration, yielded 6-nitrobutyl
phthalide m. 53-54.
Ciamician and Silber, 12 as well as Murayama and Itagaki, 13 prepared the oxime of
sedanonic acid, m. 128.
According to Noguchi and Kawanami, valerophenone-o-carboxylic acid forms an
14
amide m. 134, and a semicarbazone m. 180.
Properties. Murayama and Itagaki,

15
and Ciamician and Silber 16 re-
ported the melting point of sedanonic acid as 113.
According to Noguchi and Kawanami/ valerophenone-o-carboxylic acid
7
boils at b 2 168-175.
Use. Sedanonic acid, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Ber. 30 (1897;, 492, 501, 1419, 1424, 1427.
2
J. Pharm. Sac. Japan 477 (1921), 951. Chem. Zentr. I (1922), 416.
3
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 493 (1923), 15. Chem. Zentr. Ill (1923), 252.
4
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 64 (1934), 171. Chem. Zentr. T (1935), 1069.
6
6
Helv. Chim. Ada 26 (1943), 1281.
7
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 67 (1937), 183. Chem. Zentr. II (1937), 4051.
8
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 66 (1936), 113. Chem. Zentr. I (1937), 1456.
9
Helv. Chim. Ada 26 (1943), 1282.
10
Ibid., 1293.
11
12
Ber. 30 (1897), 501.
13
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 493 (1923), 143.
14
18
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 493 (1923), 143.
16
Ber. 30 (1897), 500.
17
The Santalic Acids

Mol. Weight 234.33
CH 2
HC 3 COOH
.CH
v/\ HC
2 CH 3
CH 2 CH 2-CH=
HC
2 COOH
CH 2
CH 3
Guerbet's Acid or 7-Santalic Acid /3-Santalic Acid
(According to Guha and lihatta- (According to Bhattacharyya)
charyya)
Occurrence. Guha and Bhattacharyya l

identified in East Indian sandal-
wood oil a new monobasic terpenic acid of bicyclic structure which they
named /3-santalic acid.
Guha and Bhattacharyya 2
isolated Guerbet/s 3
"santalic acid" from san-
dalwood However, these workers described their isolate as "7-santalic
oil.
acid" as they have shown that it bears no structural relationship to a-santalol,

nor is it identical with a-santalic acid.
7-Santalic acid is reported as a saturated tetracyclic sesquiterpenc deriva-
tive.
Isolation. Boil sandalwood oil for one-half hour with the required amount of 3%
alcoholic potash to saponify the esters. Distill off the excess of alcohol, pour the
residual oil into water and separate the oily layer. Extract the oil layer repeatedly
with water, evaporate the combined aqueous liquors to a smaller bulk, and extract
the residuum with ether. Acidify the alkaline aqueous liquor with cold dilute sulfuric
acid and take up the oily acid layer with ether. Dry the extract and fractionate. The
fraction bi 150-] 72 is mostly Guerbet's acid, whereas the fraction bi 172-188 is
primarily /3-santalic acid. Repeated fractionation of the fraction rich in 7-santalic
acid yields the nearly pure 7- product.
Identification and Properties. 7-Santalic acid or Guerbet's acid has been

characterized by Guha and Bhattacharyya as follows:
5
b9 189 ng*' 1.5021
bi 106 nf? 1.5055
7-Santalic acid is a syrupy liquid with a persistent odor, and is insoluble in

water. The silver salt is stable toward light. This acid cannot be titrated
with alkali.
The methyl ester has these properties:
5
b9 141 ng 1.4892
df 1.02483 n|> 1.4915
df 1.02858
612 ACIDS
This acid is shown by comparative evaluation with percamphoric acid and by
means of spectroscopic evidence to contain a small amount of /3-santalic acid.
/3-Santalic acid, according to
Bhattacharyya, in all probability is the corre-
sponding carboxylic acid of /3-santalol. This author describes the new /3-san-
talic acid as follows:
5
b9 202 n 1.5100
u
b! 181 nf) 1.5136
The methyl ester of /3-santalic acid has these properties:
b9 157
n> 1.4989
This weak acid is likewise of thick and syrupy consistency and water in-
soluble, with an odor like that of Guerbet's acid.

Use. Santalic acid is not used in our industries.
1
J. Indian Chem. Soc. 21 (1944), 333, 337.
2
Ibid., 336.
8
Compt. rend. 130 (1900), 417.
D. ACIDS OF DOUBTFUL CONSTITUTION
Costus Acid
(Costusic Acid)
This bicyclic acid containing two double bonds was found by Semmler
and Feldstein l in the fraction bn 190-200 (d 2i 1.0501, a D +44, n D 1.52703)
of costus root oil (Saussurea lappa Clarke).
When purified through its silver salt, costus acid had these properties:
bn 200-205 Mol. refr. Calc. 67.85
d 2t 1.0508 Found 67.73
OD +40 0' Methyl ester b lx 170-175

nD 1.51912
On reduction with sodium and alcohol, the methyl ester of costus acid
yields costol (see "Costol"), a bicyclic, primary sesquiterpene alcohol Ci 5 H 24 O
containing two double bonds.
When warmed with 33 per cent sulfuric acid, costus acid is transformed into
dihydrocostus lactone (see "Dihydrocostus Lactone").
1
Ber. 47 (1914), 2433, 2687.
ANHYDRIDES 613
E. ANHYDRIDES
Nepetalic "Anhydride"
C 2 oH3 oO5 Mol. Weight 350.44
CO CO
CH O CH
CH 3 CH CHa
According to McElvain, Walters and Bright, nepetalic "anhydride" is the
1
anhydride of the hydroxy lactone form of nepetalic acid (see "Nepetalic

Acid"). ^CsIIy CHa is a methylcyclopentane nucleus. Nepetalic "an-
hydride" slowly forms when noncrystalline nepetalic acid is kept standing
at ordinary temperatures.
2
Occurrence. McKlvain et al. found that nepetalic "anhydride" comprises
about 36 per cent of the alkali-insoluble portion (10 per cent) of the volatile
oil derived from catnip (Nepeta cataria).
Isolation. The
residue remaining from the initial crude fractionation of the neutral
portions of catnip oilis distilled and yields a yellow viscous oil b .i 200-210, from
which on standing nepetalic "anhydride" crystallizes.

Identification. Hydrolysis witli dilute hydrochloric acid converts nepetalic "an-
hydride" into nepetalic acid m. 74-75 which can be characterized by the preparation
of its semicarbazone m. 160-161 (see "Nepetalic Acid").
Properties. Nepetalic "anhydride" is an odorless crystalline mass. After

recrystallization from petroleum ether it melts at 139-140, [a& +136 (in
chloroform) .
Use. Nepetalic "anhydride," as such, is not used in our industries.

1
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 1828.
*Ibid.
VIII. ESTERS
Introduction. Esters are widely distributed in essential oils, being among
their most important constituents and contributing greatly to the character
of their odor and flavor. In fact, some essential oils consist almost entirely
of esters; oil of wintergreen and oil of sweet birch, for example, contain up to
99 per cent of methyl salicylate.
A few esters solidify at room temperature and can thus be readily separated
from an oil by cooling, but in most cases the isolation and identification of
esters are accompanied by some difficulty. First of all, direct crystalline
derivatives of esters, which would permit their characterization, are not nearly
so numerous as those of alcohols, aldehydes, ketones, most terpenes and ses-
quiterpenes. Therefore, one has to resort to fractional distillation and to
the preparation of crystalline derivatives of the saponification products.
Secondly, many decompose on distillation, especially at atmospheric
esters
pressure. The application of a good vacuum is, therefore, of paramount im-

portance. Moreover, prior to fractionation the oil must be freed from or-
ganic acids in order to prevent hydrolysis of the esters during distillation.
Thirdly, the boiling points of some esters are so close that such esters cannot
be completely separated by mere fractionation. For all these reasons the
isolation of esters from essential oils and their identification present a deli-
cate problem requiring great care.
In recent literature several techniques have been suggested, which permit
identification of fractional groups in esters without previous saponification.
These methods include ammonolysis as well as aminolysis of the esters. The
acid radical is thereby identified by means of the derived amide. (See p. 831.)

C. F. Koelsch and David Tenenbaum, "A Method for the Identification of the Acyl
Group in Certain Esters," J. Am. Chern. Soc. 55 (1933), 3049.
F. Feigl, V. Anger and O. Frehden, "Detection of Carboxylic Acids and Their De-
rivatives (Anhydrides, Esters and Halides)," Mikrochemie 15 (1934), 9.
Douglas V. N. Hardy, "Identification of Acids and Esters," J. Chem. Soc. (1936), 398.
C. A. Buehler and Charles A. Mackenzie, "The Action of Benzylamine on Aliphatic
Esters," /. Am. Chem. Soc. 59 (1937), 421.
O. C. Dermer and Jack King, "N-Benzyl amides as Derivatives for Identifying the
Acyl Groups in Esters," /. Org. Chem. 8 (1943), 168.
R. W. Moncrieff, "Esters in Perfumery," Soap, Perfumery and Cosmetics 20 (1947),
654.
Kurt Kulka, "Ester Preparation," Am. Perfumer 50 (1947), 545.
617
618 ESTERS
A. ALIPHATIC ESTERS
Ethyl Acetate
C4 H8 2 Mol. Weight 88. 10

"
Acetic ether"
CH3 -CO-0-C 2 H 5
Occurrence. The occurrence of ethyl acetate in essential oils is probable
but has not been definitely proved. However, ethyl acetate is a constituent
of natural fruit flavors for example, of the volatile esters derived from pine-
apple.
Isolation. By fractional distillation. When

desired to purify the ester from
it is
small amounts of impurities, such as water, ethyl alcohol, and acetic acid, the methods
recommended by Gillo l
be employed.
may
Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as ethyl alcohol and
acetic acid.
Properties. Ethyl acetate is an optically inactive, mobile, quite volatile

liquid, possessing a strong, refreshing, very fruity odor and flavor.
According to Timmermans and Hennaut-Roland, Wojciechowski and
2
4 5
Smith, von Rechenberg, Young, Rozhdestvenskii, Pukirev and Longinov,
3 6
Gillo,
7
Krchma and 8 9
Williams, Allsopp and Willis, and Gildemeister and
10
Hoffmann, ethyl acetate has properties as tabulated below.
Von Rechenberg published extensive boiling point data, while Young pre-
sented a considerable amount of material on specific gravity determinations.
Allsopp and Willis reported the results of their investigations for refractivity
of the ester over a wide range of wave lengths. However, only a limited
number of data from these authors are' included here:
2 4
m. -83.0 b 50 12.78
4 4
-83.4 b 20 -3.08
b 8 oo 78.60 4
bio
- 13.25 4
b. 77.15 02 -
4- 5 ' 6' 7
df 0.8245 5
3 5
77.11 dj 0.8376
b 600 70.18 04 dj 0.8508 6
b 40 o 58.71 4
df 0.8636 B
4 5
b 200 41.31 df 0.8762
26.13 04 df 0.8885 5
ALIPHATIC ESTERS 619
2 5 2
df 0.89453 d} 0.90657
3 5
0.8946 d} 0.9127
5 9 7
df 0.9005 '
dj 0.92451
8
1 .3695
9
nf? 1.37229
1 2
nj) 1.3732
Sol. Miscible with most organic solvents.

Ethyl acetate itself is a good solvent.
Soluble in 18 vol. of water; vice versa
28 vol. of ethyl acetate dissolve 1 vol.
lo
of water
Use. Ethyl acetate is used widely in all kinds of flavors for confectionery,
beverages, etc.
1
Bull. soc. chim. Belg. 48 (1939), 341 , 412.
2
J. chim. phys. 27 (1930), 429.
3
J. Res. Nail. Bur. Stand. 18 (1937), 503.
4
Schimmel & Co., "Einfache und fraktioniertc Destination in Theorie imd Praxis," Leipzig
(1923), 238, 335.
5
Proc. Sci. Roy.
^
Dublin Soc. 12 (1910), 387, 434.
6
Trans. lust. Pure Chem. Reagents U.S.S.R., Sci.-Tech. Dept. No. 300 (1929). Chem.
Abstracts 24 (1930), 3755.
7
8
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 49 (1927), 2411.
9
Proc. Roy. Soc. London A 163 (1936), 401, 402.
10
"Die Atiieriscken Ole," 3d I'M., Vol. I, 037.

H. Lowery, II. C. Poole and C. Isherwood, "Refraction of Gaseous Acetaldehyde and
Ethyl Acetate," Phil. Mag. [7] 14 (1932), 743. Chem. Abstracts 27 (1933), 3649.
F. Feigl, V. Anger and O. Frehdcn, "Detection of Carboxylic Acids and Their De-
G. S. Shaw, "Methods of Analysis for Acetylene, Acetic Acid Anhydride, Ethyl
Acetate and Mercury," Can. Chem. Proc. Ind. 26 (1941), 197.
G. V. L. N. Murty and T. R. Seshadri, "Raman Effect and Hydrogen Bonds. Mix-
tures of Esters and Acceptor Molecules," Proc. Indian Acad. Sci. 14A (1941), 593.
C. L. Lindeken, J. O. Clayton and D. A. Skoog, "Determination of Ethyl Acetate in
the Presence of Acetaldehyde," Ind. Eng. Chem., Anal. Ed. 16 (1944), 734.
620 ESTERS
B. TERPENE ESTERS
Linalyl Acetate
Ci 2 H 2 o0 2 Mol. Weight 190.28
CH 3 .aO-0-C 10 Hi7
(See "Linalool")
Occurrence. This important ester the principal constituent of lavender

is
and bergamot oil; in fact, these oils are evaluated mainly by their content of
linalyl acetate. The ester is present also in numerous other essential oils
for example, petitgrain, clary sage, neroli bigaradc, ylang ylang, jasmine
flower oil, etc.
Isolation. By fractional distillation in vacua.

Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as linalool and
acetic acid.
Linalyl acetate is a colorless oil, possessing a pleasant, fruity

Properties.
odor, reminiscent of bergamot oil. The optical rotation (d- or I- rotatory) of
the synthetic product depends upon the linalool used for the preparation of
the ester. Although both d- and acetate have also been reported as
/-linalyl
natural isolates, there evidently exists some question regarding the purity
of certain of these products.
2
Hesse and Zeitschel, 1 Barillet and Berthele", Penfold and Grant, 3 Kauf-
mann and Kjelsberg,
4
Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 5 and Likhtman 6
reported
these properties for linalyl acetate:
b 762 220 (decomposition) []?? -7 42' to -8 18' 4
b 25 115-11G 01 1
nf) 1.4544 2
2 4
bn 105-1()6 nf? 1.450
3
bio 98-100 Sol. Soluble in 3-5 vol. of
6 5
df 0.8998 70% alcohol
2 4
d 15 0.9060 -
On distillation with steam, or at atmospheric pressure, linalyl acetate is
readily hydrolyzed and decomposed, respectively.

Use. Linalyl acetate is widely used in the perfume, cosmetic, and soap
industries. Useful in Eau de Cologne and in lavender compositions, and for
the compounding of artificial essential oils. Linalyl acetate imparts a re-
freshing top note to floral and to oriental perfumes. It is valuable also in
artificial flavors.
3
1
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 64 (1901), 256. /. Proc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales 68 (1924), 120.
2
Bull. soc. chim. [4], 17 (1915), 21. 4
Am. Perfumer 22 (1927), 500.
5
6
Org. Chem. Ind. V.S.S.R. 4 (1937), 629. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 6227.
TERPENE ESTERS 621
Geranyl Formate
CnHi 8 2 Mol. Weight 182.25
H-CO-O-Ci H 17
(See "Geraniol")
Occurrence. Geranyl formate occurs very probably in geranium oil.
Isolation. By fractional distillation in racuo.

Saponify the ester and identify the components as formic acid and
Identification.
geraniol, whose characterization is described elsewhere in this work.
Geranyl formate is a colorless oil possessing a rose-like but

Properties.
somewhat "dry" odor. According to Tiemann and Schmidt, Bertram, 2 1
Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 3 Tromp, 4 and Lewinsohn, 5 geranyl formate has

these properties:
3
1.461-1.465
bio-n 104M05 02 n}?-
93
1.46592 4
5
l> 3 88 Sol. Soluble in 10 vol. of 70%
df 0.90859 4 alcohol and more 3
5 2
'
4
dj 0.91641
Like all formates, geranyl formate readily decomposes, especially on dis-

tillation at atmospheric pressure.
Use. Geranyl formate is used as an odor modifier in rose, geranium, and
neroli compositions.
l
Ber. 29 (1896), 907.
2
German Patent No. 80,711.
3
"Die Atherisehen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. 1, 641.
4
Rec. trav. chim. 41 (1922), 285, 297.
6
Geranyl Acetate
Ci 2 H 2 o0 2 Mol. Weight 196.28
CH 3 -CO-0-C 10 H 17
(See "Geraniol")
This important ester is widely distributed in essential oils,

Occurrence.
forming in some oils a principal constituent. It occurs, for example, in oil
of citronella, palmarosa, lemongrass, geranium, pctitgrain, neroli bigarade,
lavender, coriander, Eucalyptus macarthuri and E. staigeriana, etc.

Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as geraniol and
acetic acid. The identification of these products is described elsewhere in this work.
622 ESTERS
Properties. Geranyl acetate is a colorless liquid, possessing a pleasant
fruity odor reminiscent of rose.
Bertram and Gildemeister, 2 Jeancard and Satie, 8 Reychler, 4
Barbier,
1
Muller, Tromp, Gildemeister and Hoffmann, O'Donoghue, Drum and

6 6 7
8 9
Ryan, and Isagulyants and Serebrennikov reported the following properties
for geranyl acetate:
b 762 242-245 2
(decomposition) df 0.9080 6
4 6
b 22 130-132 df 0.9163
8
big 127-129 dn 0.9230 3
5
bi4 127.8 d 0.9388 l
9
1.4655
6
1.4624
2
1.4628
7
Sol. Soluble in 5-10 vol. of 70% alcohol
10
Isagulyants and Serebrennikov reported the isomerization of geranyl
acetate to cyclogeranyl acetate.
Geranyl acetate is very widely used in the perfume, cosmetic, and

Use.
soap industry. It forms a main ingredient in the compounding of rose
scents and has its place in almost any perfume composition. It is valuable
also in artificial flavors.
Compt. rend. U7 (1893), 122.

1
2
/. prakt. Chem. 49 (1894), 189.
*Bull. soc. chim. [3], 25 (1901), 521.
4
6
Ber. 64 (1921), 1471.
6
Rec. trav. chim. 41 (1922), 285, 297.
7
"Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. T, 642.
*Sci. Proc. Roy. Dublin Soc. INS] 19 (1928), 120.
9
10
Ibid.

V. N. Guha Roy and M. N. Goswami, "Gcraniol and Geraniol Esters," Indian Soap
J., April to June (1945).
Neryl Acetate
CH3 -CO-O-C 10 H 17
(See "Nerol")
Occurrence. Neryl acetate occurs in several essential oils for example, in

011 of Helichrysum angustifolium, neroli bigarade, petitgrain, and lemon.
TERPENE ESTERS 623
Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as nerol and acetic
acid. The identification of these products is described elsewhere in this work.
Properties. Neryl acetate is a colorless liquid with a pleasant odor reminis-

cent of rose.
2
Von Soden and Treff,
1
and Reclaire reported the following properties:
2
b 25 134 i
nf? 1.4510-1.4540
b3 93-94 !
Sol. Soluble in 5-6 vol. of
2
dll 0.903-0.906 2
70% alcohol
l
dis 0.916
Use. Neryl acetate (usually the synthetic product) is used as an adjunct

in the compounding of floral, particularly rose, bouquets, and in imitation
lemon oils.
2
1
Ber. 36 (1906), 910. Deal. Parfumerieztg. 16 (1929), 71.
Citronellyl Formate
CiiH 20 O 2 Mol. Weight 184.27
(See "Citroncllol")
Occurrence. This ester occurs, perhaps, in geranium oil.
Isolation. By fractional distillation in vaciw.

Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as formic acid and
as citronellol whose characterization is described elsewhere in this work.
Properties. Citronellyl formate is a colorless oil, possessing a strong fruity,

somewhat "dry" odor, reminiscent of roses.
2
Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 1 and Tromp (c?-citronellyl formate) reported
these properties for synthetic products:
bn 97-98 2
aD -l9 ri
2 l
df 0.88416 nf? 1.45111
1 98 2
d}S 0.9105 n{?' 1.45557
2
df 0.89184 Sol. Soluble in 12.5 vol. of 70%
alcohol; in 2.5 vol. of 80%
alcohol l
Citronellyl formate is not very stable; it decomposes readily on distilling

at atmospheric pressure.
Use. The ester finds only occasional use for example, as an odor modifier
in rose compositions.
1
"Die Atherisehen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 642.
2
Rec. trav. chim. 41 (1922), 285, 297.
624 ESTERS
Citronellyl Acetate
Ci2H 22 O2 Mol. Weight 198.30
CH.3 CO O CioHi9
Occurrence. This ester occurs in oils of citronella and geranium.

Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as citroriellol and
acetic acid.
Properties. Citronellyl acetate is a colorless liquid with a strong rose odor,

but fruity and dry.
The by Flatau and Labbe*, Tie-
following properties have been reported
1
mann and Schmidt, 2 O'Donaghue, Drum and Ryan, 3 Muller, 4 Tromp, 5 and
Gildemeister and Hoffmann: 6
b 34 172-173 '
aD -1 15' to +2 18'
7 5
bi 6 119-121 2' 3
[]{>
-
+2 22' 2
(from
4
bi4 1 17.3 (from d-citronellol)
6
(/-citronellol) nf? 1.44287-1.44891
5 5 3
bn 107-108 njf- 1.457
5 7 5 '
2
df 0.89492 nj> 1.4456 (from
3
d 19 . 5 0.9035 d-citronellol)
2
d 17 . 5 0.8928 (from Sol. Soluble in 6 vol. of
6
rf-citronellol) 70% alcohol
2 6
df' 0.90273
6
d\l 0.895-0.901
Muller 7 reported that citronellyl acetate, on treatment with phosphoric acid

in the cold, yields the acetate of l.l,3-trimethyl-2-hydroxymethylcyclohexane.
8
Caldwcll and Piontkowski investigated the iodine and thiocyanogen num-
bers of citronellyl acetate.
9
Sabetay observed a positive color reaction of citronellyl acetate with
Bezssonoff 's reagent [Mo() 3 WO 3 (P 2 5 )i 7 ] 24H 2 0.
Use. Citronellyl acetate is used widely, but sparingly, in all kinds of com-
positions, especially in rose scents, to which it imparts a pleasant, fruity note.
Compt. rend. 126 (1898), 1727.

1
2
Ber. 29 (1896), 907.
3
Sri. Proc. Roy. Dublin Soc. (N.S.) 19 (1928), 120. Bcilstein, 4th Kd., 2d Erganzungswerk,
Vol. 2 (1942), 152.
4
Ber. 64 (1921), 1471.
5
Rec. trav. chirn. 41 (1922), 285.
8
"Die XtluTischon Olo," 3d Kd., Vol. I (1928), 643.
''Ber. 54 (1921), 1471.
8
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1934), 2088.
9
TERPENE ESTERS 625
Citronellyl Butyrate
Ci 4 H 2 60 2 Mol. Weight 220.35

CH 2 CH 2 CO
*
CioHiQ
Occurrence. This ester occurs in oil of citronella.

Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as citronellol and
butyric acid.
Properties. Citronellyl butyrate possesses a strong rose odor, but very

fruity, slightly fatty, and, as such, not too pleasant.
Thefollowing properties have been reported
1
by Burger, Kjelsberg and
2 3
Miiller, and Reclaire:
bia 135-139 3
D +0 48' to -f 1 6'
3
3
b 12 134-135 l
no 1.4458-1.4-189
d 20 0.884 !
Sol. Soluble in to 9 vol. of
3
di 6 0.8874 2
80% alcohol
3
0.8898-0.8928
4
Kjelsberg and Miiller reported on the velocity of saponifi cation with half
normal potassium hydroxide.
I ',%-.
Citronellyl butyrate is used like citroncllyl acetate, but even more
sparingly because of its somewhat fatty note.
1
Ricchstoff hid. 3 (1928), 17. Bcilstein, 4th Ed., 2d KrgJinzungswerk, Vol. 2 (1942), 248.
*
Deut. Parfumerieztg. 14 (1928), 235. Beilstcin, 4th Ed., 2d Erganxungswcrk, Vol. 2
(1942), 248.
3
Ricchstoff hid. (1920), 229. Chimie & Industrie 19 (1928), 109. Chem. Abstracts 22
(1928), 1346.
*Deut. Parfumericztg. 14 (1928), 235. Bcilstein, 4th Ed., 2d Erganzungswerk, Vol. 2
(1942), 248.
Terpinyl Formate
CnHi8(>2 Mol. Weight 182.25
H-CO-0-C 10 H 17
(See "o-Terpineol")
Occurrence. The presence of this ester in volatile oils has not been defi-
nitely established. It possibly occurs in Ceylon cardamom oil.

Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components us tcrpineol and
formic acid.
626 ESTERS
Terpinyl formate is an oil of strong, pleasant odor. Gilde-
Properties.
meister and Hoffmann, 1 and Lafont 2 reported these properties for the syn-
thetic product:
b40 133-136 2
(from d-a- + 1633' 2
(fromd-a-
terpineol) terpineol)
135-138 2
(from l-a- -69 25' 2
(from I-CL-
terpineol) terpineol)
b7 95-99 1
(The optical rotation of
! the synthetic ester de-
d}f 0.9855
2
pends upon that of the
d 0.9989 (from d-a-
a-terpineol employed)
terpineol) Sol. Soluble in 6 vol. and
2
0.9986 (from /-<*- more of 70% alco-
'
terpineol) hol
Like most formates, terpinyl formate readily decomposes on distillation at

atmospheric pressure.
Use. Terpinyl formate is used on a very small scale as an odor modifier
in some perfume compositions.
1
8
Bull. soc. chim. [2], 49 (1888), 325. Ann. chim. phys. [6], 16 (1888), 185.
Terpinyl Acetate
Mol. Weight 196.28
CO O C
(See "a-Teipineol")
Occurrence. This ester occurs in cajuput, cypress, Malabar carda-

oil of
mom oil, possibly also in niaouli, Siberian pine needle and a few other oils.

Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as a-terpineol and
acetic acid.
a-Terpinyl acetate is a colorless oil possessing a strong odor

Properties.
which somewhat resembles bergamot and lavender oil. According to its origin,
a-terpinyl acetate is either dextro- or laevorotatory, or optically inactive.
The following properties have been reported by Bouchardat and Lafont,
1
2 3 4
Lafont, Barillet and Berthele", Gildemeister and Hoffmann, and Paillard
5
and Tempia:
TERPENE ESTERS 627
dl-a-Terpinyl Acetate d-a-Terpinyl Acetate

5 2
b. 220 b 40 140
3' 5 2
bi 6 102-103 [] D +5230'
b5 90-94 4
Sol. Soluble in 4-5 vol. of
4
dioo 0.8896 x
70% alcohol
1
di 8 0.957
3
di5 0.9704
2
d 0.9753
3
1.4689
Terpinyl acetate not as readily saponified as, for example, geranyl ace-
is
tate or linalyl acetate. (For quantitative determination see Vol. I, Chapter

4, pp. 267 and 336.)
Use. Terpinyl acetate is used as a general modifier in perfume compounds
of the lavender and Eau de Cologne type. Because of its strong odor and
low price terpinyl acetate serves widely also in the scenting of soaps and all
kinds of technical preparations.
1
Ann. chim. phys. [6], 9 (1886), 515.
*lbvl. [6], 16 (1888), 153, 211.
3
Bull soc. chim. [4], 17 (1915), 21.
4
"Die Athcrischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, G47.
5
Helv. Chim. Ada 14 (1931), 1314.
H. M. Perry and T. F. West, "Determination of Terpinyl Acetate and Other Esters,"

AnalystW (1942), 159.
"Specifications and Standards" of the Essential Oil Association of the United States,
January 10, 1947.
Bornyl Formate
H.CO-0-C 10 H 17
(See "Borneol")
Occurrence. Bornyl formate has been identified in valerian root oil.

Saponify the ester and identify the components as formic acid and
Identification.
as borneol whose characterization is described elsewhere in this work.
Bornyl formate is a colorless oil of strong and pleasant odor.

Properties.
According to the type of borneol used for its preparation, bornyl formate is
628 ESTERS
either dextro- or laevorotatory. Bertram and Walbaum, 2 3 B6-
Bruylants,
1 -
4 6 6
hal, Tschugaev, Minguin and de Bollemont, and Gildemeister and Hoff-
mann 7
reported the following properties:
225-230 /3
b. l
D +31
b2 i 10G-108 4
WD +4845' 4
b^ 98-99 2
-48 56' 4
bio-n 90 3- 7
-49 (X
6
(in alcoholic
b7 85-86 7 solution)
6 3
df 1.0058 ni? 1.47078
2
d 15 1.017
4
d 1.027
Use. Bornyl formate is used on a very small scale in pine compositions.
1
Bcr. 11 (1878), 455.
2
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 49 (1894), 7.
3
Arch. Pharm. 231 (1893), 305.
4
Ann. chim. phys. [71, 20 (1900), 421.
5
Her. 31 (1898), 1775.
6
CompL rend. 134 (1902), 609.
7
Th. Ruemele, "Action of Formic Esters in Perfumes," fteifensieder-Ztg. 67 (1940)

56, 65.
Bornyl Acetate
Ci2H 2 oO2 .
Mol. Weight 196.28
CHa CO CioHi7
(See "Borneol")
Occurrence. This important ester occurs in many oils distilled from leaves
of plants belonging to the family Pinaceae for example, in Siberian pine
needle oil, oil of Abies alba, Pinus pumilio, and P. picea. Bornyl acetate has
also been identified in several other volatile oils, such as coriander seed, and
valerian root oil.
Isolation In order to isolate bornyl acetate, the fraction b. 220-

and Identification.
230 is cooled to a low temperature and inoculated with a bornyl acetate crystal. If
the ester does not crystallize, the fraction should be saponified and the components
identified as borneol and acetic acid.
TERPENE ESTERS 629
Properties. Optically active bornyl acetate is a crystalline substance, the

1
inactive ester a liquid even at 17, according to Haller. In supercooled
condition the ester may remain liquid for a long time. Bornyl acetate pos-
sesses a strong, pleasant and refreshing odor, typical of pine needles. The
naturally occurring ester mostly laevorotatory, while the rotation of a syn-
is
thetic product depends upon that of the parent borneol (+ or ).

2
According to Lipp (nee Bredt-Savelsberg) and Bund, Moesveld, Takeuchi
3
and Sahashi, 4 and Haller, 5 Bertram and Walbaum, 6 7 Tschugaev, 8 Kenyon -
and Pickard, 9 Berner and Hjulstad, 10 and Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 11 the
optically active isomers of bornyl acetate have these properties:
d-Bornyl Acetate I- Bornyl Acetate

3 2
m. 27.7 m. 27.4
6 5
b. 225-226 b. 225-226
6 8
bis 106-107 bis 107
2
bg 93010 bis 105
80-81 4
0.97715 3
aJ36.4
4 0.9708 2
6 i20 9
dig 0.991 df 0.9868
WD +44 23' 6
(liquid) [al? -44 47' 2
(c
= 5.23 in ethyl
alcohol)
+44 T 10
10 n 36 ' 4 2
nf? 1.4639 nD 1.45689
15 7
nD 1.46635
11
Bornyl acetate is soluble in 3 volumes of 70 per cent alcohol.
Use. Because of its characteristic pine odor and low price, bornyl acetate
is used widely, serving as a valuable ingredient in pine oil compositions for
the scenting of bath preparations, inhalants, room sprays, and soaps. The
ester is employed also for the flavoring of medicinal preparations, cough drops,
etc.
1
Compt. rend. 109 (1889), 29.
2
Ber. 68 (1935), 249.
Koninklijke Akad. van Wetenschappen Te Amsterdam (Verslagen der Afdeeling Natuur-
3
kundige) 37 (1928), 823. Chcm. Abstracts 23 (1929), 1553.

*Sci. Papers Inst. Phys. Chem. Research Tokyo 22 (1933), 59. Chem. Abstracts 28 (1934),
1998.
5
Compt. rend. 109 (1889), 29.
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 49 (1894), 7, 12.
'
Arch. Pharm. 231 (1893), 304, 305.
Ber. 31 (1898), 1775.
*J. Chem. Soc. 107 (1915), 51, 62.
Ber. 71 (1938), 2053.
630 ESTERS
Georges Brus and J. Ye* bra, "Crystalline Complexes from Bornyl and Isobornyl
Acetate," Compt. rend. 191 (1930), 667.
Pierre Bonichon, "Spectrographic Study of Terpenic Alcohols and Esters," Bull,
inst. pin (1933), 249; (1934), 1, 32.
Haruo Tsuji, "The Effect of the Acetic Acid Ester and of Some Substituted Acetic
Acid Esters of Borneol," Tohoku J. Exptl. Med. 24 (1934), 374. Chem. Abstracts 29
(1935), 4828.
F. Feigl, V. Anger and 0. Frehden, "Detection of Carboxylic Acids and Their De-
Isobornyl Acetate
Ci 2 H 2 oO 2 Mol. Weight 196.28
CH 3 -CO.O-CioH 17
(See "Isoborneol")
Occurrence. So far this ester has not been found in nature, but should be
described here because of its commercial importance.
Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as isoborneol and
acetic acid.
Properties. Isobornyl acetate is liquid at room temperature. It possesses

a slightly more camphoraceous odor than bornyl acetate.
The following properties have been reported by Lipp (nee Bredt-Savels-
berg)and Bund, Kondakov, 2 Bertram and Walbaum, 3 Tschugaev, 4 Minguin
1
and de Bollemont, 6 Tsakalotos and Papaconstantinou, 6 Fujita, 7 and Lafont: 8
dl- Isobornyl Acetate
4 4
102-103 01 2 -
1
bi2-i3
'
n} 1.46589
2 2
dig 0.9858 nD 1.46494
2
df 0.9841
8
dis 0.9905
4 4
'
*
dl 0.98918
As far as the optically active forms are concerned, it should be noted that
the isobornyl acetate derived from d-camphene is slightly laevorotatory, and
the ester derived from J-camphene dextrorotatory.
TERPENE ESTERS 631
Optically Active Isobornyl Acetate

8
b. ca. 225 (from /-camphene)
8
b 35 123-127 (from /-camphene)
b 15 104-107 7
(from /-camphene)
5
bu 100 (from /-isoborneol)
6
bi2 97-105 (from d-camphene)
7
df 0.9739 (from /-camphene)
6
dis 0.991 (from d-camphene)
7
d4 0.9991 (from /-camphene)
8
dg 1.002 (from /-camphene)
5
D 2 7' (from /-isoborneol)
(
(1.225 g. in 25 g. alcohol)
6
[<X]D 3 5G' (from d-camphene)
+1 42' 7
(from /-camphene)
7
1.4538 (from /-camphene)
Use. Synthetic isobornyl acetate is widely used in pine needle scents (see
"Bornyl Acetate").
i
Ber. 68 (1935), 249.
'/. prakt. Chem. [2] 66 (1902), 225.
3
Ibid. [2], 49 (1894), 7, 12.
4
Ber. 31 (1898), 1775.
6
Compt. rend. 136 (1903), 239.
6
J. pharm. chim. [7], 7 (1916), 198. Chem. Zentr. II (1918), 24.
7
Ball. Inst. Phys. Chem. Research Tokyo 7 (1928), 1. Chem. Abstracts 22 (1928), 3406.
6
Ann. Chim. Phys. [6], 16 (1888), 149.
Georges Brus and J. Ye" bra, "Crystalline Complexes from Bornyl and Isobornyl
Acetate," Compt. rend. 191 (1930), 667.
Bornyl Isovalerate
(Bornyval)
Ci5H26O 2 Mol. Weight 238.36
H3 C
CH.CH 2 .CO.O'Ci H 17
HC3
(See "Borneol")
Occurrence. This ester occurs in valerian root oil and in a few other es-
sential oils.
632 ESTERS
Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as borneol and iso-
valeric acid.
Properties. d-Bornyl isovalerate is a colorless oil of aromatic odor, remi-

niscent of valerian root and borneol. Gildemeister and Hoffmann, Bruy- 1
lants,
2
Vavon and Peignier, 3 and Siedler 4 reported these properties for bornyl
isovalerate:
b. 255-260 2- 4
[a] 578 +36 42' 3
(c
= 0.05 in ale.)
3
b 26 151-152 nf? 1.4605
3
df 0.9486 Sol. Soluble in 4 vol. of 80%
i
alcohol
Bornyl isovalerate is not readily saponified.

assaying the ester When
quantitatively by saponification, it is, therefore, necessary to use a large ex-
cess of alkali and to heat the mixture for 6 hr. (See "Terpinyl Acetate/'
and Vol. Chapter 4, "The Examination and Analysis of Essential
I, Oils,
Synthetics, and Isolates," pp. 267 and 336.)

Use. Bornyl isovalerate is used very little in our industries.
1
"Die Xthcrischen Die," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 650.
2
Ber. 11 (1878), 456.
3
Bull. soc. chim. [41, 39 (1926), 936.
4
Pharm. Ztg. 48 (1903), 772. Chem. Zentr. II (1903), 899.
Menthyl Acetate
Mol. Weight 198.30
CO O *
CH
(See "Menthol")
Occurrence. This ester has so far been identified only in peppermint oil.

Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as menthol and
acetic acid. (Cf. Vol. I of this work, p. 267.)
Properties. Menthyl acetate is a colorless oil of pleasant fruity odor, remi-

1 2
niscent of peppermint.Kishner, Tschugaev, Patterson and Taylor, 3 Ken-
4 5
yon and Pickard, Gildemeister and Hoffmann, Stadnikov, van Pelt and
6
7 8
Wibaut, and Frank, Davis, Drake and McPherson reported these proper-
ties for -menthyl acetate, comparable to the natural occurring isomer:
TERPENE ESTERS 633
227-228 * 2
-72 *
b. D 47' to -73 18' 5
1
b 22 ]15-118 8
-7834' 4 *
W, ?
3 *
11() [a]?? -7853' 4
bi 9 113 06 [aff -7859' 4 *
b ls 110-111 7
-79M2' 4 *
[atfS
32 *
d] 0.8294 4
[a]^ -7925' 2 4 -
4 s 8
df 0.8()17 nf? 1. 4472 -
4
00
d' 08910
' '
4 alcohol; in 6 vol. of
6
4
70% alcohol
df 0.9090
4
df 0.926 1
3
di3 0.9307
*
roterminations made in homogeneous state.
According to Murayama and Tanaka, 9 oxidation of menthyl acetate with

chromium trioxide and acetic acid leads to an oil whose semicarbazone melts
at 189-190.
Use. Menthyl acetate is used in synthetic peppermint oils for the techni-
cal field. It also finds application, in very small percentages, to impart odor
strength and "lift" to certain perfume and flavor compositions.
1
J. Russ. Phys. Chem. Soc. 27 (1895), 480. See Gildemeister and Hoffmann, "Die Xther-
ischen Olo," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 651.
2
Bar. 31 (1898), 364; 36 (1902), 2475.
3
J. Chem. Soc. 87(1905), 37.
4
Ibid. 107 (1915), 46, 60.
6
6
/. RMS. Phys. Chem. Soc. 47 (1915), 1113.
7
Rec. trav. chim. 60 (1941), 55.
8
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1944), 1509.
9
/. Pkarm. Soc. Japan 48 (1928), 429.
Matsuno and Han, "Raman Effect of Organic Substances," Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan
11 (1936), 576. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 4207.
L.H. Baldingcr, "Hydrolysis of Menthyl Acetate and Acetylized Peppermint Oil,"
/. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 26 (1937), 208.
Henry C. Marks and Charles 0. Beckmann, "The Rotivity of Dipropionyl-diethyl-

d-tartrate and /-Menthyl Acetate in Aromatic and Aliphatic Solvents," J. Chem.
Physics 8 (1940), 831.
634 ESTERS
Menthyl Isovalerate
Ci 5 H 2 8O 2 Mol. Weight 240.37
H3 C
CH Cr2 CO O GioHiQ
H3 C
(See "Menthol")
This ester has been identified in American, French, English

Occurrence.
and Russian peppermint oil.

Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as menthol and
isovaleric acid. Like most isovaleratcs, this ester is difficult to saponify; saponifica-
tion of 1.5 g. of menthyl isovalerate requires boiling with 60 cc. of alcoholic 0.5 N
potassium hydroxide solution for 6 to 8 hours. (Cf. Vol. I of this work, p. 267.)
Properties. /-Menthyl isovalerate is a colorless oil with an odor reminis-

cent of both menthol and isovaleric acid.
Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 1 Rupe, 2 and Nekrasova 3 reported these prop-
erties for synthetic menthyl isovalerate (95-100 per cent ester content):
b 22 140-146 3
a -56 28' to -57 40' l
b9 129 2
[a& -64 12' 2
(homogeneous)
2
d 20 0.8797 nf? 1.4461-1.4500 1
3
d 15 0.907 Sol. Soluble in 5-9 vol. of 80%
alcohol l
Use.Menthyl isovalerate isused only to a small extent for example, in

the compounding of artificial peppermint oils serving for technical purposes.
1
"Die Athcrischen Die," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 651.
*Liebigs Ann. 369 (1909), 339.
3
Arch. Pharm. 266 (1928), 597.
AROMATIC ESTERS 635
C. AROMATIC ESTERS
Benzyl Acetate
C 9 Hio02 Mol. Weight 150.17
CHa-CO-O-CHa
Occurrence. This very important ester the main constituent of jasmine,

is
hyacinth and gardenia flower oil. It also occurs in oil of ylang ylang, and
several other essential oils.

Identification. On
saponification benzyl acetate yields benzyl alcohol and an ace-
tate. Identification of the component alcohol and acid is described elsewhere in this
work.
Properties. Benzyl acetate is a colorless, optically inactive oil. It pos-

sesses a powerful, fruity and flowery odor, reminiscent of jasmine.
Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 1 Hesse and Zeitschcl, 2 Debrosscrdov, 8 Thole, 4
5 6 7 8
Herold, Szamatolski and Austin, Shapiro, Sivkov and Matveeva, von
Rechenberg,
9
Zaganiaris and Varvoglis,
10
and Berncr and Hjulstad u re-
ported these properties for synthetic benzyl acetate:
9 4
b 80 o 217.4 d 45 1-033
r'- 10 8
b. 216 d 25 1.052
6 8
214-215 d 20 1.0502
9 5 3
b 60 o 206 d}f- 1.0587
9 6
b 400 190.5 dis LOGO
baoo 167.25 9
nf? 1.5029 u
9
bioo 140.7 Sol. Slightly soluble in water; soluble
br 128.75 9 ma ^ proportions in alcohol
h 110 111 2
and ether
D2 5 IIU -111 a i ui i
l
Soluble in:
9
b 20 107.5 200 vol. of 30% alcohol
bM 102 120 vol. of 35% alcohol
b i0 93-94 7 v l- f 40% alcohol
r Ô vol. of 50% alcohol
4
77 4 a
5-6 vol. of 60% alcohol

2 vol. of 70% alcohol
636 ESTERS
When
examining commercial benzyl acetate, it is advisable to test also for
the presence (absence!) of chlorine which contamination might be due to
improper purification after synthesis.
Use. Benzyl acetate is most widely used in practically all types of per-
fume compositions. This is equally true of cosmetics and the scenting of
soaps. High odor value combined with low cost make this ester one of the
most important aromatics. Tt has its place also in artificial fruit flavors.
1
"Die Xthcrischen Olo," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 644.
2
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 64 (1901), 250.
*Chem. Zentr. I (1911), 954.
4
J. Chem. Soc. 97 (1910), 2600.
5
Dent. Parfiimerieztg. 17 (1931), 362. Chem. Abstracts 26 (1932), 3072.
6
hid. Eng'. Chem., News Ed. 11 (1933), 114.
7
Maslobolno Zhirovoe Delo 11 (1935), 321. Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 723.
8
Sintezy Dushistykh Veshchestv, Sbornik Statel (1939), 154. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 3793.
9
Schimmel & Co., "Einfache und fraktionicrtc Distillation in Theorie und Praxis," Leipzig
(1923), 257.
10
Ber. 69 (1936), 2280.
11
Ber. 71 (1938), 2053.
Em Ire
Berner and Arnfinn Hjulstad, "Catalytic Action of Metal Surfaces in the
Interchange of Ester Radicals," Ber. 71B (1938), 2052. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 458.
H. S. Redgrove, 'Two Jasmine Constituents," Mfg. Perfumer 4 (1939), 59.
Dinakar Karve* and V. L. Mehendale, "Kinetics of Reactions of Heterogeneous
Systems. Hydrolysis of Benzyl Acetate, Butyl Acetate and Isoamyl Acetate by
Hydrochloric Acid," J. Univ. Bombay 8, Part 3 (1939), 160. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940),
3161.
O. V. L. N. Murty and T. R. Seshadri, "Raman Effect and Chemical Constitution.
Effect of Benzyl Group on C=0
Bond in Esters," Proc. Indian Acad. Sci. 11A (1940),
32. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 6881.
Methyl Benzoate
Benzoic acid methyl ester. "Oil of niobe"
CO -0 -
CH 3
Occurrence. Methyl benzoate occurs in oil of ylang ylang, probably also

in oil of clove and tuberose.

Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as benzoic acid and
methvl alcohol.
AROMATIC ESTERS 637
Direct aminolysis of the ester by means of benzyl amine, according to Dermer and
King, yields the benzylamide of benzoic acid, m. 105-105 r 5. This technique facil-
1
itates identification of methyl benzoate.
Properties. Methyl benzoate is an oil, optically inactive, of powerful,

rather harsh floral odor. The following properties have been reported by
Timmermans and Hennaut-Roland, 2 Timmermana, 8 Jaeger,
4
von Auwers and
Eisenlohr,
5
Perkin,
6
Kendall and Booge, 7 and (iildemeister and Hoffmann: 8
m. -12.5 to -12.3 02 - 3' 7

ni? 1.5181 5
-13.7 07 (metastable 1.51924 2
crystalline form) Sol. Soluble in 4 vol. of 60%

alcohol, soluble in 1.5
8
vol. of 70% alcohol
9
According to Raikow, methyl benzoate, unlike the esters of the homologous
alcohols, forms a crystalline compound with phosphoric acid.
Use. Because of its powerful odor and low price, methyl benzoate is used
primarily in perfume compositions serving for the scenting of soaps. It is
an important constituent in synthetic ylang ylang oils.

6
1
/. Org. Chem. 8 (1943), 168. /. Chem. Soc. 69 (1896), 1174.
2
/. chim. phys. 32 (1935), 589. 7
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 38 (1916), 1721.
8
3
Bull soc. chim. Belg. 27 (1913), 334. "Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 633.
4 9
Z. anorg. Chem. 101 (1917), 137. Chem. Ztg. 24 (1900), 368.
6
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 84 (1911), 24.
Ethyl Benzoate
Mol. Weight 150.17
Benzoic acid ethyl ester
X) O C 2H 5
Occurrence. Although not definitely proved, the occurrence of this ester

in volatile oils is probable.
638 ESTERS
Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as ethyl alcohol
and benzoic acid.
Anger and Frehden describe the micro detection
*
Feigl, of ethyl benzoate with
hydroxamic acid and ferric chloride; this metallic complex yields a violet color in
concentrations for as little as 5 7 of the ester.
A direct derivative may be obtained, according to Dernier and King, 2 by the reaction
of benzylamine and the ester to form the N-benzylamide of benzoic acid, m. 105-
105.5.
Properties. Ethyl benzoate possesses an odor similar to, but milder than
that of methyl benzoate. The following properties have been reported by
Timmermans and Hennaut-Roland, 3 Kremann, Meingast and Gugl, 4 Lums-
6 6 7 8
den, Timmermans, von Rechenberg, Matsuno and Han, Bhatkhande, Phal-
nikar and Bhide, 9 Petyunin, 10 Evans, Gordon and Watson, 11 de Benneville,
12 13
Clagett, and Connor, Perkin, von Auwers and Eisenlohr, 14 and Gilde-
16
meister and Hoffmann:
3 14
m. -34.7 n}> 1.5068
6 5
-34.2 n{? 1.50790
3 7 - 8- 9
b. 212-213 -
Sol. Soluble in 7.5 vol. of 60%
b 73 9.7 211 7
alcohol; in 2 vol. of 70%
15
7 alcohoi
b 100 142.2
b 20 103 011
12
b9 89-99
4
df 1.0016
5 "
4
df 1.0125
3
df 1.03718
3
df 1.04192
3
1.04652
3
df 1.05112
13
d}? 1.0562
3
1 .05578
3
dj 1.06498
16
Sen and Mukherji reported on the 1:1 condensation of ethyl benzoate
with resorcinol by zinc chloride to prepare 2,4-dihydroxy benzophenone, a
yellow powder melting at 144.
Use. Similar to that of methyl benzoate.
1
Mikrochemie 16 (1934), 9. *
Monatsh. 35 (1914), 1287.
2 6
J. Org. Chem. 8 (1943), 168. J. Chem. Soc. 87 (1905), 94.
8
J. chim. phys. 32 (1935), 591. Bull. soc. chim. Belg. 25 (1911), 313.
AROMATIC ESTERS 639
7
Schimmel & Co., "Einfache und fraktionierte Destination in Thcorie und Praxis,'* Leipzig
(1923).
8 Chem. Abstracts 28 (1934), 1927.
Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan 8
(1933), 338.
9
J. Univ. Bombay 10, Part 3 (1941), 53. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 5068.
w J. Gen. Chem. U.S.S.R. 10 (1940), 35. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 4726.
" /. Chem. Soc. (1937), 1432.
/. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 691.
/. Chem. Soc. 69 (1896), 1174.
14
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 82 (1910), 167.
B
16
J. Indian Chem, Soc. 6 (1929), 560.
R. A. Fairclough and C. N. Hinshelwood, "The Functional Relation between the

Constants of the Arrhenius Equation," J. Chem. Soc. (1937), 538.
Fellinger and Audrieth, "Arnnionolysis of Ethyl Benzoate," J. Am. Chem. Soc. 60
(1938), 579.
A. A. Shamshurin, "Action of Pyrocarbonates in Grignard Reagents," J. Gen. Chem.
U.S.S.R. 13 (1943), 569. Chem. Abstracts 39 (1945), 700.
Benzyl Benzoate
Ci 4 Hi 2 2 Mol. Weight 212.24
Bcnzoic acid benzyl ester
Occurrence. This important ester occurs in several essential oils for ex-
ample, in oil of ylang ylang, balsam tolu, in tuberose flower oil, etc. It forms
the main constituent of the oil derived from balsam Peru ("cinnamein").
Isolation. By cooling the corresponding fraction to a low temperature, and re-
crystallization.
Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as benzole acid
and benzyl alcohol.
Properties.Benzyl benzoate is an optically inactive, somewhat viscid oil

which congeals at low temperature to white crystals m. 20. It is sparingly
volatile with steam. The pure ester possesses only a faint odor.
The following properties have been reported by Reznek, 1 Gildemeister and
2 3 4 5
Hoffmann, Mascarelli, Zonev, and Cotton and Mouton:
m. 19-20 2 dig 1.120 1
b. 325-327 01 ng 1.5065 l
3 5 5
bi s 189-191 ng- 1.5685
4
bi 6 183-184 Sol. Soluble in 10-12 vol. of 80%
b4 5 156 2
alcohol, or in 1.5-2 vol. of
2
90% alcohol
640 ESTERS
Use. Benzyl benzoate used most widely as a diluent and solvent of
is
solid aromatics for example, of artificial musk. Because of its low volatility
this ester also serves as a fixative in perfume compositions.
1
Chem. 20 (1937), 560.
/. Assocn. Off. Agr.
2
3
Atti accad. Lincei [5], 19, Part I (1910), 385.
6
Ann. chim. phys. [8], 28 (1913), 218.

Eberhard "Benzyl Benzoate, a Constituent of Peru Balsam," Klin. Wochschr.
Postel,
22 (1943), 362. Chem. Abstracts 39 (1945), 4964.
R. M. Gordon and K. Unsworth, "The Lethal Action of Benzyl Benzoate, Di-
methylthianthrcne (Mitigal) and Tetraethylthiuram Monosulfidc (Tetmos) on the
Scabies-producing Mites, Notoedres Sp. and Sarcoptes scabiei var. hominis, when Tested
in Vitro," Ann. Trap. Med. 37 (1943), 195. Chetn. Abstracts 39 (1945), 365.
Methyl Salicylate
Mol. Weight 152.14
Salicylic acid methyl ester. Methyl o-hydroxy benzoate

CO O CH 3
Methyl salicylate occurs in many essential oils, and forms the

Occurrence.
main constituent of some oils. Oil of wintergreen (Gaultheria procumbens)
and sweet birch (Betula lenta), for example, contain up to 99 per cent methyl
salicylate. The ester has also been identified in oil of
ylang ylang, rue, clove,
American wormseed, in tuberose and cassia flower oil, green tea, and a num-
ber of others.
an interesting fact that in several aromatic plants wintergreen, for
It is
instance methyl salicylate docs not occur as such, but in the form of a
glucoside (gaultherin) which must first be split by enzyme action in order to
liberate the ester. Without previous digestion in lukewarm water for sev-
eral hours, the plant material on distillation would yield almost no oil.

Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as salicylic acid
m. 158 and methyl alcohol.
Otherwise methyl salicylate can be characterized by the preparation of several
derivatives:
(1) salicylate in an ice cold alkaline solution on shaking with acetic an-
Methyl
hydride yields, according to Chattaway, methyl o-acetoxybenzoate m. 52-52.5.
1
AROMATIC ESTERS 641
(2) Methylsalicylate in a cold dilute alkaline solution on shaking with benzoyl

chloride yields, according to Lassar-Cohn and Lowenstein, 2 methyl o-benzoxybenzoate
m. 92 (from alcohol or ether).
(3) On
treatment with an equal weight of phenylisocyanate and a trace of sodium
acetate for 5 hr. at 100, methyl salicylate yields o-carbomethoxyphenyl-N-phenyl-
urethane m. 117 (crystallized from benzene), according to Michael and Cobb. 3
(4) Capryl chloride and methyl salicylate yield methyl-2-(capryioxy)benzoate,
which with a Fries rearrangement gives methyl-4-capryl salicylate m. 66.5-67.5.
Hydrolysis of the ester forms 4-caprylsalicylic acid m. 120.5-121.5 (Price and May ).
4
(5) Antipyric acid chloride in pyridine on treatment with methyl salicylate yields
the 0-carbomethoxyphenyl ester m. 138 (Kaufmann et al. 6).
(6) For the preparation of methyl 3,5-dinitrobenzoyl salicylate, Saunders, Stacey
and Wilding 6 recommend the following procedure:
Triturate for 2 min. in a small mortar 2.31 g. of 3,5-dinitrobenzoyl chloride, 1.52 g.
of methyl salicylate, and 10 ml. of N sodium hydroxide. Treat the reaction mixture
with ether; recrystallize the methyl 3,5-dinitrobenzoyl salicylate from a mixture of
chloroform and petroleum ether: m. 107.5.
Properties. Methyl salicylate is a colorless oil, possessing a powerful odor

and flavor very characteristic of wintergreen.
The 7
following properties have been reported by von Schneider, Perkin,
8
10
Hoyer, Schreiner, Gildemeister and Hoffmann, and Nozu et al.:
9 11 I2
m. -8.3 7
(corr.) d} 1.188-1.191 u
12 8
b. 224 djf 1.1890
9 8
b 751 221.5-222 dj 1.1992
10
b 730 217 ni? 1.535-1.538"
Sol. Soluble in 6-8 vol. of 70% alcohol. Sparingly
soluble in water u
Onaddition of ferric chloride in cold saturated aqueous solution, methyl

salicylate develops a red-violet color which lasts for at least 15 min.
In a moderately concentrated aqueous solution of potassium hydroxide,
methyl salicylate dissolves with formation of a readily soluble ester salt (po-
tassium methyl salicylate). By the action of dilute acids, the methyl salicyl-
ate can be regenerated from the alkaline solution. Methyl salicylate is solu-
ble also in a very dilute aqueous sodium hydroxide solution, but in 3 per cent
or stronger sodium hydroxide solution the sparingly soluble sodium methyl
salicylate precipitates. When
heated with excess alkali both ester salts (Na
and K- salt) are saponified, and on acidification salicylic acid will be obtained.
Use. Methyl salicylate is used most widely in the flavoring of chewing
gums, candies, confectionery, and all kinds of food products and beverages.
As one of the most popular United States, it also serves in oral
flavors in the
preparations, tooth pastes, and pharmaceutical products. Another but more

limited use is in cosmetics and as an adjunct for the scenting of soaps.
2
1
J. Chem. Soc. (1931), 2495. Ber. 41 (1908), 3363.
642 ESTERS
8 Ann. 363 (1908), 86.
Liebigs
</. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1943), 297.
6
#er. 76 (1942), 1226.
6
Biochem. J. 36 (1942), 373. See also Sah and Ma, Science Repts. Nail. Tsing Hua Univ.
Ser. A-l (1932), 203.
7
Z. physik. Chem. 22 (1897), 233.
/. CAem. oe. 69 (1896), 1176.
9
Z. physik. Chem. Abt. B 46 (1940), 401.
Liebigs Ann. 197 (1879), 17.
1
" "Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 637.

"/. Chem. Soc. Japan 60 (1939), 1189. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 6513.
F. Feigl, V. Anger and 0. Frehden, "Detection of Carboxylic Acid and Its De-
Ethyl Salicylate
C 9 H 10 O 3 Mol. Weight 166.17
Salicylic acid ethyl ester
CO O C 2 H.i
Occurrence. The occurrence of this ester in essential oils is possible, but

has not been definitely proved.
Isolation. By fractional distillation in vacuo, or by cooling the fraction rich in

ethyl salicylate to a low temperature whereby the ester will separate in crystalline form.
Identification. (1) Saponify the ester and identify the components as ethyl alcohol
and salicylic acid.
(2) By
(a) Treatment of ethyl salicylate with p-nitrobenzoyl chloride in pyridine, and
standing overnight at ordinary temperature yields ethyl o-(p-nitrobcnzoxy) benzoate
m. 107-108 from benzene), according to Einhorn and von Bagh. 1
(crystallized
(b) Nitration at with 5 parts of a mixture of equal volumes of fuming nitric acid
and fuming sulfuric acid yields ethyl 3,5-dinitrosalicylate m. 92-93 (crystallized from
alcohol), according to Sah and Ma.
2
Ethyl salicylate is a colorless oil, possessing an odor similar to,

Properties.
but weaker than, methyl salicylate. Von Schneider, 3 Hoyer, 4 Gildemeister
and Hoffmann, 6 and Sah and Ma 6 reported these properties:
5
m. 1.3 b5 91
5 6
b 743 234-235 df 1.1396
4 6
233 nf? 1.52542
5
Sol. Soluble in 4 vol. of 80% alcohol
AROMATIC ESTERS 643
Ethyl salicylate sparingly soluble in water; soluble in dilute sodium hy-

is
droxide solution (6 per cent or less), but in more concentrated sodium hy-
droxide solutions the sodium salt of this phenolic ester will precipitate.
Withcold saturated aqueous ferric chloride solution ethyl salicylate im-
mediately gives a red-violet color.
Use. Ethyl salicylate is used like methyl salicylate, but only to a very
limited degree.
1
Ber. 43 (1910), 329.
2
Science Repts. Natl Tsing Hua Univ. Scr. A-l (1932), 203.
*Z. physik. Chem. 19 (1896), 158.
4
Ibid. Aht. B 45 (1940), 400.
5
8
Science Repts. Natl. Tsing Hua Univ. Ser. A-l (1932), 203.
Charles Valencian and Jean Deshusses, 'The Identification and the Bromometric
Determination of the Esters of Salicylic Acid," Mitt. Lebensm. Hyg. 30 (1939), 85.
Isoamyl Salicylate
Ci 2 Hi G 3 Mol. Weight 208.25
Salicylic acid Lsoamyl ester
CO - -
CiHn
Theoretically eight isomeric amyl salicylates may exist of which isoamyl

salicylate and n-amyl salicylate are most easily prepared and usually referred
to in the literature. The commercially available product consists mainly of
isoamyl salicylate. Freeman and Haller described the preparation and
L
properties of primary, secondary, and tertiary amyl salicylates.

Occurrence. Isoamyl salicylate has not yet been identified in nature.

Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as isoamyl
(1)
alcohol and salicylic acid. Isoamyl salicylate, like most salicylic esters, is not readily
saponified. For complete saponification a large excess of alkali should be used and
the mixture heated on the steam bath for at least 2 hr.
(2) When nitrated at with 5 parts of a mixture of equal volumes of fuming nitric
acid and fuming sulfuric acid, isoamyl salicylate, according to Sah and Ma, 2 yields
isoamyi 3,5-dinitrosalicylate m. 61-62 (crystallized from alcohol).
644 ESTERS
Properties. Isoamyl salicylate is a colorless oil, possessing a strong and
lasting odor, reminiscent of orchids and hay. Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 3
and Sah and Ma 4
reported these properties for the synthetic product:
b. 276-278 4
<* D Up to +2 50' 3
b 743 276-277 3
nf? 1.505-1.508 3
3 4
b 15 151-152 1.50799
4
3
1.049-1. 056 3 alcohol
d}
Isoamyl salicylate is soluble in dilute (1 per cent or less) sodium hydroxide

solution, but in more concentrated alkaline solutions the sodium salt of this
phenolic ester will precipitate.
Use. widely used by the perfume and cosmetic in-
Isoamyl salicylate is
dustry in compositions of the orchid, trefle, new mown hay, carnation and
chypre type. Because of its strong odor, stability and low price, this ester
serves very well for the scenting of soaps.
Scott and Milam 5
also reported isoamyl salicylate as an attractant for
hornworm moths.
1
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 60 (1938), 2274.
2
Science Repts. Nail Tsing Hua Univ. Scr. A-l (1932), 203.
3
"Die Atherisehen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 639.
4
Science Repts. Natl Tsing Hua
Univ. Ser. A-l (1932), 203.
6
J. Econ. Entomol. 36 (1943), 712. Chem. Abstracts 38 (1944), 1315.
Methyl Cinnamate
Cinnamic acid methyl ester
CH= CH -
CO O CH 3
Occurrence. Methyl cinnamate a main constituent of certain types of

is
Ocimum canum oil; it also occurs in the oil distilled from Alpinia galanga, and
in a few other oils. Rakshit l reported oil of Ocimum basilicum from North
India to contain 52 per cent of this ester.
Isolation. By cooling the corresponding fraction of the oil to a low temperature,

and recrystallization.
Rakshit 2 separated methyl cinnamate (transform) from Minalool by the formation
of a calcium chloride addition product. The formation of this addition compound does
not appear to have been observed previously. The dried oil (36 cc.), after washing
AROMATIC ESTERS 645
with sodium carbonate solution, was mixed with freshly fused and finely powdered
calcium chloride (40 g.) and kept in a desiccator for 48 hr. After removal of Minalool
by extraction with ether the calcium chloride compound was decomposed by water and
distilled.
Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as methanol and
cinnamic acid.
For further methods of identification, see section on properties relative to direct
haiogenation.
Identification of the isomers may be effected directly by employing the mercuration
3
technique of Wright:
Trans- form. To a solution of 3.18 g. (0.01 mol) of mercuric acetate in 25 cc.
methanol, add 0.05 g. of concentrated nitric acid followed by 1.94 g. (0.012 mol) of
methyl cinnamate. After standing 75 min. at 25, an acetoxymercuric compound will
crystallize in the reaction mixture, which should be immediately filtered off, m. 142.
Treat the filtrate with dilute sodium chloride solution to yield methyl-a-chloromercuri-
/3-methoxy-/3-phenylpropionate m. 134 (88% yield).
Cis- form. Filter a solution of 1.78 g. (0.011 mol) of cis-methyl cinnamate and 3.18
g. of mercuric acetate in 25 cc. of methanol after 9 hr. and treat the filtrate with 2%
sodium chloride solution. Crystallize the precipitated methyl-o:-chloromercuri-/3-
methoxy-/3-phenylpropionate from ethanol, m. 141 (50% yield).
A mixed melting point with the diastereomer obtained from (rows-methyl cinnamate
(134) was lowered 20.
Properties. Methyl cinnamate possesses a strong, lasting, rather peculiar

odor.
Two methyl cinnamate are possible, the trans- stereoisomer
isorners of
usually being called methyl cinnamate and the cis- form methyl aô-cinna-
mate.
The following properties have been reported by Jaeger,
4 6
Weger, Rakshit,
6
and Gildemeister and Hoffmann: 7
Trans-methyl Cinnamate
4 7
m. 36.5 nff 1.563-1.566
5- 6 6
30 nf? 1.5G704
6
b. 254-255 Sol. Soluble in 7 vol. of 70%
d 1 0340 4 alcohol at 20; in 2-4
4 voL at
df 1.0573
4
df 1.0700
6
di5 1.0672
8
Block measured the specific gravity of crystalline methyl cinnamate
also
over the range to 21, and liquid methyl cinnamate between 19 and 48.
On treating rans-methyl cinnamate with chlorine in carbontetrachloride in
the presence of sunlight Bruhl 9 observed an almost complete conversion into
10
methyl cinnamate dichloride (m. 101, according to Sudborough and James ).
In the presence of diffuse light a mixture of the trans- with the oily methyl
646 ESTERS
aWo-cinnamate dichloride formed, while in the dark, according to Michael
is
and Smith, 11 this reaction yields only the a//0-dichloride product. The same
authors also noted an analogous behavior in the formation of the methyl cin-
12
namate dibromides. Rakshit reports the bromine derivative to melt at
114.
Cis- or Methyl Allo-cinnamatc. Cis- or methyl a/to-cinnamate an is oil at
13 14 15
room temperature. Riiber, Wright, and Kistiakowsky and Smith re-
corded the following properties:
15 13
m. -3.5 b .i 49
-3 14
nf? 1.5528 15
16
Kistiakowsky and Smith also observed the characteristic freezing point
curve of the cis- and trans-methyl cinnamates. According to Riiber, 17
methyl a/fo-cinnamate forms /3-phenylglyceric acid m. 121 on oxidation with
potassium permanganate solution in presence of potassium carbonate at 15
to -17.
Use. Methyl cinnamate is used in oriental and in floralperfume composi-
tions, especially of the carnation type. It is an excellent fixative and blender
in soap perfumes.

1
2
Ibid.
i
3
/. Am.Chern. Soc. 67 (1935), 1993. Sec also Schrauth, Schocllcr and Strucnseo, Ber. 43
(1910), 695.
4
Z. anon/. Chem. 101 (1917), 140.
B
Liebigs Ann. 221
(1883), 74.
6
7
"Die Atherischcn Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, G33.
8
Z. physik. Chem. 78 (1912), 413.
9
Ber. 29 (1896), 2907.
10
/. Chem. Soc. 89 (1906), 106.
11
Am. Chem. J. 39 (1908), 25.
12
13
Ber. 41 (1908), 2415; 48 (1915), 828. Sec also Wcerman, Rec. trav. chim. 37 (1918), 43.
14
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1935), 1993.
16
Ibid., 269.
Ibid.
17
Ber. 41 (1908), 2415; 48 (1915), 828.
Ryoichi Kubo, "Catalytic Action Under High Pressure and High Temperature.
Catalytic Reduction of Cinnamic Acid Methyl Ester and Its Derivatives," J. Chem.
Soc. Japan 54 (1933), 509. Chem. Abstracts 27 (1933), 5732.
Seishi Takaki and Takeo Ueda, "Action of Ammonium Amalgam on a,/3-Unsaturated
Acid Esters," /. Pharm. Soc. Japan 68 (1938), 427. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 6636.
Osamu Simamura, "The Isomerization of Methyl Allo-cinnamate by Hydrogen
Bromide and the Influence of Oxygen," Bidl. Chem. Soc. Japan 14 (1939), 294. Chem.
Abstracts 33 (1939), 8592.
AROMATIC ESTERS 647
Ethyl Cinnamate
CnHi 2 O 2 Mol. Weight 176.21
Cinnamic acid ethyl ester
CH = CH- CO O-a-Hs
Occurrence. This ester occurs only in a few essential oils - for instance, in
oil of styrax and in oil of Campheria galanga.
Identification. Saponify the ester and identify the components as ethyl alcohol and
cinnamic acid. See section on "Properties" relative to halogen derivatives. Pfeiffer l
reports that stannic chloride and ethyl cinnamate form a double salt [2CnIIi 2 O 2 ] SnCl 4 ;
m. 134.
Diels and Heintzel 2 prepared the cinnamoyl urethane m. 110-111 directly from
the ester and sodium urethane.
Jerzinanowska-Sienkicwiczowa, obtained the ureide m. 2()7~209
3
from sodium
alcoholate, urea, and ethyl cinnamate in 24% yield only.
Properties. Ethyl cinnamate

a liquid, optically inactive, which congeals
is
at low temperature. It possesses a strong, lasting, pleasant, somewhat fruity

odor. The following properties for the geometric isomcrs have been reported
4 6 6 7
by Weger, Anschiitz and Kinnicutt, Bruhl, Perkin, Bergmann, 8 Marvel
and King, 9 Duquenois, 10 Manta, 11 Roth and von Auwers, 12 Jaeger, 13 and Wil-
liams and Sudborough: 14
Trans- Cis-
4 10
m. 12 -
14
b 767 . 5 272.6-272.8 b 17 131
4 5 10
b. 271 - -
133
b 74 i.i 267-268 6
7
b 25 o 226 (corr.)
9
b 46 168-173
b 22 149 ll
bi 5 144
5 13
dl 1.0018
13
df 1.0234
13
df 1.0457
6
df 1.0490
6 8 '
12
di 1.0519
648 ESTERS
Trans- Cis-
6 4 ll
nf? 1.55982 nj> 1.5450
12
1.5597
1.5603 u
4
nk
2 9 -
7
n{> 1.56351
Sol. Soluble in 4-7 vol. of 70% alcohol (Gilde-
meister and Hoffmann)
The trans- the one ordinarily encountered. The cis- isomer or

form is
ethyl aWo-cinnamate is a liquid.

15
According to Michael, on the addition of bromine in carbon tetrachloride
or carbondisulfide, dibromides of the two isomers of ethyl cinnamate are
formed, the quantities being a function of the conditions.
16
Duquenois reports the a,/?-dibromo derivative of ethyl frcws-cinnamate
as monoclinic crystals m. 74-75. The ethyl aô-cinnamate dibromide melts
at 28-30, according to Michael. 17
Use. Ethyl cinnamate is used in perfume compositions of floral and orien-
tal type. Occasionally it serves as a fixative for lotions, eaux de Cologne, and
lavender waters.
Liebigs Ann. 376 (1910), 305.

1
9
Ber. 38 (1905), 302.
8
Roczniki Chem. 16 (1935), 510. Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 2933.
4
Liebigs Ann. 221 (1883), 75.
6
Ber. 11 (1878), 1220.
6
Liebigs Ann. 236 (1886), 19.
7
,7. Chem. Soc. 69 (1896), 1228, 1247; 61 (1892), 308.
8
Ibid. (1936), 405.
9
"Organic Syntheses," Coll. Vol. I, 252, John Wiley & Sons, New York (1941).
10
Bull soc. chim. [5] 6 (1938), 1200.
11
Ibid. 63 (1933), 1277.
[4],
Liebigs Ann. 413 (1917), 264.

12
13
Z. anorg. Chem. 101 (1917), 141.
14
/. Chem. Soc. 101 (1912), 414.
16
Ber. 34 (1901), 3663. See also Sudborough and Thompson, /. Chem. Soc. 83 (1903), 671;
Michael and Smith, Am. Chem. J. 39 (1908), 27; James and Sudborough, /. Chem. Soc. 96
(1909), 1542; Sudborough and Thomas, Ibid. 97 (1910), 719; Bruner and Fischler, Z. Elek-
trochemie 20 (1914), 85; Lespagnol and Bruneel, J. pharm. chim. 26 (1937), 454. Chem.
Abstracts 31 (1937), 6820.
18
Bull. soc. chim. [5], 5 (1938), 1200.
17
Ber. 34 (1901), 3661.
Karl Morsch, "Action of Ammonia and Amines on Esters of Unsaturated Acids,"

II. "Action of Ammonia, Methylamine and Diethylamine upon Ethyl Cinnamate/'
Monatsh. 61 (1932), 299.
S. P. Lagerev, "Catalytic Hydrogenation of Ethyl Cinnamate under Pressure,"
AROMATIC ESTERS 649
Benzyl Cinnamate
Cinnamic acid benzyl ester
?H=CH- CO 0- CH 2
This ester
Occurrence. is an important constituent of oil of styrax, tolu
balsam, and Peru balsam. Machado found benzyl cinnamate to be a con-
l
stituent (54.3 per cent) of copaiba- jacare* balsam.
Isolation. By cooling the corresponding fraction to a low temperature, and recrys-

tallization. If no crystals separate on cooling, seeding is advisable.
Identification. Saponify and identify the constituents as benzyl alcohol and cin-
namic acid.
Duquenois
2
reported that benzyl dibromohydrocinnamatc melts at 95.
Properties.Benzyl cinnamate consists of white shiny crystals which de-

3
compose at about 350 (Grimaux ). Occasionally the ester remains liquid
for hours even at 0. The odor of benzyl cinnamate is aromatic, sweet and
persistent.
Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 4 Manta, 6 and Duquenois 6
reported these
properties for benzyl cinnamate:
4 5
cong. pt. 34.5 b 22 204-205 (allo-)
4
m. 35-36 B
(trans-) b5 195-196
6
34-35 (allo-) df5 1.1066 4
(superfused)
6
34.5 (allo-)
Sol. Soluble in 4-6.5 vol. of 90% alcohol at 30, soluble in

4
8-11 vol. of 90% alcohol at 20
To prevent decomposition, benzyl cinnamate must be distilled in vacuo.

7
According to Wallerant, benzyl cinnamate, after fusion, forms first un-
stable monoclinic crystals and then stable crystal sphaerolites, the double re-
fraction of which than that of the unstable crystals.
is larger
Use. Benzyl cinnamate is used in floral as well as oriental scents. It also
serves as a fixative in all kinds of perfume compounds.

1
Rev. quim. ind. Rio de Janeiro 10, No. 115 (1941), 15, 379. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 1735.
2
Bull. soc. chim. [5], 5 (1938), 1200.
*Compt. rend. 67 (1868), 1051.
4
"Die Athorischen Die," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 645.
6
Bull. soc. chim. 63 (1933), 1283, 1285.
[4],
Ibid. [5], 5 (1938), 1202.
7
Compt. rend. 168 (1914), 1474.
650 ESTERS
Jacobson, "The Disappearance of Keratitis Lesions and Experimental Opacities

J.
in the Cornea after Treatment with Benzyl Cinnamate," Bull. acad. med. 110 (1933),
104. Chem. Abstracts 28 (1934), 3133.
J. Jacobson, "Benzyl Cinnamate in Treatment of Lesions Caused by Mustard Gas,"
Bull. acad. med. 123 (1940), 289. Chem. Zentr. II (1941), 921. Chem. Abstracts 38
(1944), 2120.
Cinnamyl Cinnamate
Cinnamic acid cinnamyl ester. "Styracine"

CH=CH CO CH* CH=CH
Occurrence. This ester, commonly known an important

as "Styracine," is
constituent of sty rax; it occurs also in balsam Peru, Honduras balsam, and
possibly in a few essential oils.
Isolation. By cooling the fraction consisting mainly of cinnamyl cinnamate, sepa-

ration of the crystals and
recrystallization.
Identification. (1) Saponify the ester and identify the components as cinnamic
alcohol and cinnamic acid.
(2) On
adding bromine to an ethereal solution of cinnamyl cinnamate until the
solution is no longer decolorized, the ester, according to Miller, forms a dibrornide m. 1
151 [(/3,7-dibromo-7-phenylpropyl) cinnamate], which separates after 24 hr. as a

white powder. This powder is filtered off, washed with ether, and recrystallized from
hot alcohol.
Properties. Cinnamyl cinnamate is a white crystalline mass, sparingly

volatile with steam. It has a faint odor. The solubility in alcohol is low.
2
According to Simon the ester is soluble in 20 to 22 parts of cold alcohol.
8 4 5
Toel, Miller, and Schroder reported these properties:
3 4
m. 44 -
5
d4 1.1565 (solid)
Use. Because of its mild and lasting odor, cinnamyl cinnamate is used as
an odor fixative in perfumes and cosmetics. It blends particularly well with
floral scents such as gardenia.
1
Liebigs Ann. 189 (1877), 344; 188 (1877), 202. See also Lespagnol et al., /. pharm. chim.
29 (1939), 447; Duqucnois, Butt. soc. chim. [5], 6 (1938), 1200.
2
Liebigs Ann. 31 (1839), 273.
3
Ibid. 70 (1849), 2.
4
Ibid. 188 (1877), 200.
6
Ber. 13 (1880), 1072. Beilstcin, "Organische Chemie," Vol. 9 (1926), 585.
ESTERS CONTAINING NITROGEN 651
D. ESTERS CONTAINING NITROGEN
Methyl Anthranilate
C8 H9 O2 N Mol. Weight 151.16
Anthranilic acid methyl ester. o-Aminobenzoic acid methyl ester
CO O CH 3
NHa
by Walbaum
*
Occurrence. Identified first in oil of neroli bigarade, this
important basic ester occurs also in other natural flower oils and volatile oils
in general for example, in oil of jasmine, tuberose, jonquil, gardenia, ylang
ylang, champaca, Robinia pseudacacia, and in the oils distilled from the leaves
of the sweet orange, mandarin, bergamot, etc. Power and Chesnut 2
identi-
3
fiedmethyl anthranilate in grape juice (Vitis labrusca). Small recorded the
occurrence of traces of methyl anthranilate in oils of orange and lemon.
According to Walbaum, methyl anthranilate can be isolated from essen-

4
Isolation.
tial oils quite readily by shaking the oil with dilute sulfuric acid. The sulfate thereby
formed crystallizes in the cold and may be purified by recrystallization from alcohol.
From the sulfate the methyl anthranilate is regenerated by treatment with soda.
Hesse and Zeitschel 6 developed a method of isolating quantitatively methyl
anthranilate from essential oils, but by this procedure methyl anthranilic acid methyl
ester, too, is precipitated and determined. In order to differentiate the two esters,
Erdmann suggested another procedure which, like that of Hesse and Zeitschel, is
described in Vol. I, Chapter 4, "The Examination and Analysis of Essential Oils,
Synthetics, and Isolates," p. 302.
Identification. Methyl anthranilate can be characterized by the preparation of
The picrate in the form of yellow needles m. 103.5-104, according to Frcund-
(1)
ler, 105-106 reported by Gildemeister and Hoffmann.
7 8
(2) Benzoate m. 99-100, according to Erdmann and Erdmann,

9
100-102, by
Schimmel &
Co. 10
(3) When heated with phenyl mustard oil to 100-120, methyl anthranilate forms
quantitatively thiophenylketotetrahydroquinazoline. According to Gildemeister and
Hoffmann, this compound is readily soluble in sodium hydroxide solution, very spar-
11
ingly soluble in alcohol. It melts above 300 and sublimes at 160-170.

(4) For the rapid identification of methyl anthranilate in essential oils, 4 drops
of
the oil are warmed, as suggested by Sabetay, with 12 drops of a mixture from 1 part
12
of acetic anhydride and 2 parts of pyridine for 5 min. on a water bath. The mixture
is then diluted, warmed again, and The
cooled. residue formed, after crystallization
from shows a melting point
alcohol, 99-100.
(5) In order to identify methyl anthranilate in fruit juices, Power
13
suggested
coupling it with /3-naphthol. Danet
u recommended a similar rapid method for the
652 ESTERS
determination of methyl anthranilate in orange flower water. The method depends
on the colorimetric determination of methyl ester of anthranilic acid by diazotization
and coupling with /3-naphthol:
Treat 5 cc. of the water with 0.25 cc. of a 10% solution of sodium nitrite and 0.25
cc. of acetic acid, couple with 0.5 -cc. of a saturated solution of 0-naphthol in ammonia
and dissolve the precipitate in 4 cc. of acetone. A standard solution is prepared by
using the methyl ester.
Dernier and King IB reported the preparation of anthranilic acid N-benzylamide
(6)
in. 124 -125 from benzylamine and methyl anthranilate.
10
(7) According to Feigl et al., the identification of anthranilic acid with hydroxamic
acid and ferric chloride is possible with 12 7 quantities, giving a dark violet color.
Regarding the quantitative determination of

Quantitative Determination.
methyl anthranilate, see Vol. I, Chapter 4, "The Examination and Analysis
of Essential Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates/' p. 302.
Properties. At low temperature methyl anthranilate is a crystalline mass

of powerful, lasting and peculiar odor, which in strong dilution resembles
orange blossoms and the flavor of certain grape varieties.

Walbaum, who isolated methyl anthranilate from oil of neroli bigarade,
17
and Naves l8 who isolated it from the distillation water of bitter orange blos-
soms, reported these properties:
17 18
cong. pt. 24 1.1640
18 17
23.8 1.168 (undercooled)
m. 24-25 17
1.5802 18
17
132 Sol. Readily soluble in alcohol,
b is 129M31 l8 soluble in water
17
124-125 (vac.)
In concentrated form, especially in alcoholic solution, methyl anthranilate

shows a characteristic blue fluorescence. The ester is volatile with steam.
Use. used widely but most sparingly in floral com-
Methyl anthranilate is
positions, such as orange blossom, jasmine, tuberose, and gardenia. The

ester has a tendency to discolor. Methyl anthranilate finds use also in flavor
work, especially in synthetic grape.
1
J. prakt. Chern. [2], 59 (1899), 352.
2
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 43 (1921), 1741. /. Agr. Research 23 (1923), 47.
9
Food 12 (1943), 179, 210.
*J. prakt. Chem. [2], 59 (1899), 352.
6
Ber. 34 (1901), 296. J. prakt. Chem. [2], 64 (1901), 246.
6
Ber. 35 (1902), 24.
7
Bull. soc. chim. [3], 31 (1904), 882.
8
Ber. 32 (1899), 1216.
10
Ber. Schimmel &
Co., Oct. (1903), 81.
11
12
Ann. fals. 28 (1935), 478. Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 702.
13
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 43 (1921), 377.
/. pharm. chim. 1 (1941), 434. Chem. Abstracts 38 (1944), 2163.

16
J. Org. Chem. 8 (1943), 168.
16
Mikrochemie 16 (1934), 9.
17
J". prakt. Chem. [2], 69 (1899), 352.
18

"
R. H. Clark and E. C. Wagner, Reactions of Isatoic Anhydride with Primary and
Secondary Amines and with Some Amides," J. Org. Chem. 9 (1944), 55.
J. F. Meyer and E. C. Wagner, "The Niementowski Reaction; the Use of Methyl
Anthranilate or Isatoic Anhydride with Substituted Amides or Amidincs ," J. Org. . . .
Chem. 8 (1943), 239.

ArnoMiiller, "Terpene Chrornogenic or Terpenochromic Compounds. The Ap-
plication of the 'EM' Reaction," Seifensieder-Ztg. 68 (1941), 478, 491. Chem. Ab-
stracts 37 (1943), 6410.
Dimethyl Anthranilate
C 9 HnO 2 N Mol. Weight 165.19
N-Methylanthranilic acid methyl ester. o-Methylaminobenzoic acid methyl

ester
Occurrence. Dimethyl anthranilate is a most important constituent of

mandarin leaf oil; it occurs also in mandarin peel oil, and probably in a few
and Quantitative Determination. The ester can be isolated quantitatively

Isolation
from essential oils by the method of Hesse and Zeitschel, details of which will be found
1
in Vol. I, Chapter 4, "The Examination and Analysis of Essential Oils, Synthetics,

and Isolates." In order to determine methyl anthranilic acid methyl ester in the
presence of anthranilic acid methyl ester, the total ester content is first assayed by
the method of Hesse and Zeitschel, and in another test the content of anthranilic acid
methyl ester by the method of Erdmann. The difference then indicates the percentage
2
of methyl anthranilic acid methyl ester (cf Vol. I of this work, p. 303)
. .
Identification. (1) Dimethyl anthranilate is characterized by the determination of

its properties and by hydrolysis to methyl anthranilic acid which forms white prismatic
crystals m. 179. In dilution this acid shows blue fluorescence.

(2) Dermer and King suggested the direct preparation of anthranilic acid N-
3
benzylamide m. 124-125 by the action of benzylamine on the methyl ester.

(3) According to Feigl et al., the identification of anthranilic acid with hydroxamic
4
acid and ferric chloride is possible for as little as 12 7. This complex has a violet color.
Properties. The odor of dimethyl anthranilate is similar to, but somewhat

softer than that of methyl anthranilate.
654 ESTERS
5 6
Walbaum, and Schmidt reported these properties for dimethyl anthra-
nilate isolated from mandarin leaf oil:
5 6
m. 18.5-19.5 c* D
5 2 -3 6
bia 130-131 n{> 1.58395
5
d 15 1.120
5 6
d 1.1348
The ester is soluble in alcohol, ether or chloroform. Soluble in 10 volumes

of 70 per cent alcohol, in 3 volumes of 80 per cent alcohol. Dimethyl anthra-
nilate shows a strong blue fluorescence, also in dilution.
Use. Similar to that of methyl anthranilate.
*
Ber. 34 (1901), 290. /. prakt. Chem. [2], 64 (1901), 246.
*Ber. 35 (1902), 24.
3
J. Org. Chem. 8 (1943), 108.
4
6
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 62 (1900), 136.
8
Ber. 38 (1905), 203.
Damascenine
CioH 13 O 3 N Mol. Weight 195.21
3-Methoxy-N-methylanthranilic acid methyl ester. 3-Methoxy-2-methyl-

aminobenzoic acid methyl ester
CO CH 3
Damascenine, an alkaloid, was

1
Occurrence. first observed by Schneider
2
in the seeds of Nigella damascena. Pommerehne, and Keller
3
isolated dam-
ascenine also from the seeds of Nigella aristata. The chemical constitution
4
of damascenine was first elucidated by Ewins.
Isolation. Pommerehne
treated the whole seeds with diluted hydrochloric acid,
6
then saturated the solute with sodium carbonate and extracted the alkaloid with
petroleum ether.
Identification. (1) Ewins 6
prepared damascenine picrate by precipitating the
picrate from an aqueous solution of a salt of the base with a saturated solution of
picric acid in water. The picrate crystallizes in yellow rhombic plates m. 158-159
and, unlike damascenic acid picrate, melts without formation of a blue liquid.
(2) According to Schneider, damascenine, when treated with sulfuric acid, forms a
7
salt (CioHi 3 3 N).H 2 S04, needles m. 168-170.

Damascenine nitrate, recrystallized from water, melts at 98 and exhibits a
(3)
blue color at 180, according to Schneider; 8 m. 94-95, according to Ewins. 9
(4) The
hydroiodide, recrystallized from water, melts at 140; it is formed on boiling
damascenine with methyl iodide and methyl alcohol under reflux, according to Keller. 10
11
Properties. According to Ewins, and Kaufmann and Rothlin, 12 dam-
ascenine has these properties:
m. 24-2G (natural)
23-24 u (synthetic)
b 750 270 u
(natural)
b 17 156-157 (synthetic)
bis 154
12
bio 147-148
On boiling with hydrochloric acid, subsequent saponification in alcoholic

potassium hydroxide and recrystallization from water, damascenine forms
damascenic acid containing 3 mols of water of crystallization, m. 7G-77,
13
according to Pommerehne.
Damascenine hydrochloride (anhydrous) is prepared by precipitating it
from the dry ethereal solution of the base and by careful addition of an alco-
holic solution of hydrogen chloride; m. 156 slender prisms.
14
According to Ewins, the anhydrous hydrochloride is deliquescent and,
when crystallized from 80 per cent alcoholic solution, forms CioHÔsN
IIC1 H 2 O which separates with 1 mol of water of crystallization and
melts at 121-122. According to Keller, 15 this substance loses 1 mol of
water in vacuo. The same author found that damascenine, on treatment
with sodium nitrite in hydrochloric acid solution, yields a crystalline mass
which, recrystallized from dilute alcohol, melts at 72 but softens at 00.
Damascenine forms salts with the usual alkaloid reagents such as platinum,
gold, or mercuric chloride.
Use. The literature does not reveal whether actually used
this product is
in our industries. It may be part of some perfume specialties, but under the
name damascenine this compound is not found on the market.
1
Pharm. Zentr. 31 (1890), 173, 191. Ber. Schimmel & Co., April (1908), 75.
2
Arch. Pharm. 238 (1900), 546; Keller, ibid. 242 (1904), 295.
3
Ibid. 246 (1908), 1.
4
/. Chem. Soc. 101 (1912), 544.
6
Arch. Pharm. 238 (1900), 540; Keller, ibid. 242 (1904), 295.
/. Chem. Soc. 101 (1912), 551.
7
Pharm. Zentr. 31 (1890), 193.
9
Chem. Soc. 101 (1912),
J. 546.
10
Arch. Pharm. 246 (1908), 10.
11
/. Chem. Soc. 101 (1912), 546, 547.
12
Ber. 49 (1916), 583.
13
Arch. Pharm. 239 (1901), 35.
14
/. Chem. Soc. 101 (1912), 551.
18
Arch. Pharm. 246 (1908), 11; 263 (1925), 482.
656 ESTERS
V. M. Rodionov and A. M. Fedorova, "Homologs Damascenine Alkaloid/' Bull,

of
acad. U.8.S.R., Classe sci., math. not. S&r.
sci. chim. (1937), 501. Chem. Abstracts 31
(1937), 7864.
L6o Marion, "The Alkaloids of the Indole Series," Rev. trimestr. can. 27 (1941), 392.
IX. LACTONES, COUMARINS, AND COUMARONES
Introduction. Lactones are quite widely distributed in nature. The most
important members of this class occurring in essential oils are the coumarins
and coumarone derivatives, many of which have been isolated from aromatic
plants, identified, and synthesized. For our purpose we may subdivide these
compounds into three groups:
(1) The coumarins proper and their derivatives which may be said to be
derived from o-hydroxy cinnamic acid, or viewed theoretically, from the fu-
sion of one benzene nucleus with one 1,2-pyrone (also called 1,2-coumarin)
ring.
H
C. O
HC
Coumarin
Typical representatives of this benzo-l,2-pyrone group are coumarin, um-

belliferone, methyl umbellil'crorie, ostruthin, auraptene, osthol, limettin, etc.
(2) The coumarones which, viewed theoretically, originate by the fusion
of one benzene nucleus with one furan ring.
CH
L3J
CH
H
Coumarone
Coumarone does not occur in essential oils, but many derivatives of

itself
coumarone have been found in the plant kingdom.

(3) The compounds that may be viewed as a combination of one coumarin
ring with one furan ring therefore, the term furanocoumarins or furocouma-
rins. Two types of fusion between the furan ring and the coumarin ring are
possible, viz.:
659
660 LACTONES, COUMARINS, AND COUMARONES
(a) the linear type (fusion between the 6 and 7 position of the coumarin
molecule); and
ww v^ L
Psoralcne
(linear type)
Representatives of the linear type are psoralene, bcrgaptol, bergaptene,

xanthotoxin, imperatorin, isoimperatorin, and isopimpinellin.
(b) the angular type (fusion between the 7 and 8, or 5 and 6 position of the
coumarin molecule).
H H
Angelicin
(angular type)
Representatives of the angular type are angelicin and pimpinellin.

These coumarin and coumarone derivatives occur either in free or com-
bined state.
Coumarin widely distributed in nature; it has been found in more
itself is
than sixty plants belonging to about twenty-four natural orders. Coumarins

often occur in plants as glycosides. Melilotoside is a glycoside of hydro-
coumarinic acid. The presence of cournarin is indicated whenever o-coumaric
acid (trans-o-hydroxy cirmamic acid or trans-o-coumsunnic acid) can be iden-
tified in an essential oil or in a plant extract. By fission of the pyrone ring
in the coumarin molecule under the influence of alkalies, unstable o-couma-
rinic acid (cis-o-hydroxy cinnamic acid) is first formed but readily isomerizes
into the stable o-coumaric acid (frans-o-hydroxy cinnamic acid) . On the other
hand, the stable trans- isomer can be changed into the unstable cis- form by
LACTONES, COUMARINS, AND COUMARONES 661
the action of light or on treatment with acids. However, the experimental

realization of these isomeric changes is in many cases beset with difficulties.
The cis- form (coumarinic acid) exists in the form of salts.
H H
C C
/ \ / \
HC C C=0 HC C OH COOH
II
HC C CH HC C C=
\ \ / H H
C C C
H H H
Coumarin o-Coumarinic Acid (ns-o-hydroxy
cinnamic acid)
H
C
\
HC C OH o-Coumaric Acid
H (frews-couniarinic acid)
HC C C= =C (trans-o-hydi oxy cinnamic acid)
\C / H
COOH
H
H H
C C
\ OH
/ \ / \
HC C HC C C=0
HC C CH 2 CH 2 COOH HC C CH 2
\ / / \CH/
C C 2
H H
Melilotic Acid (hydrocoumarinic acid) Dihydrocoumarin
A large amount of work has been done on the reactivity of the double bonds
in coumarins. The double bond between carbon atoms 3 and 4 in the cou-
marin nucleus is highly reactive. It adds bromine, hydrogen cyanide, and
sodium bisulfite with great facility. Perkin 1 studied the addition of bromine,
and Dey and Row, 2 and Dodge 3 reported on the reaction of sodium bisulfite
with coumarins.
Most coumarone derivatives, and some lactones in gen-
of the coumarins,
eral have high boiling points and are only sparingly, if at all, volatile with
steam. They are, therefore, found mainly in extracted oils, especially in ex-
pressed citrus peel bergaptene in oil of bergamot, or
oils as, for instance,
limettin in oil of lemon and lime. Certain lactones occur in the high boiling
fractions of distilled oils for example, ambrettolide in oil of ambrette seed
and angelicin in oil of angelica root. These compounds contribute greatly
to the odor value of these oils and, therefore, it is necessary to distill the cor-
responding plant material carefully, that is, sufficiently long so that all the
high boiling constituents are carried over by the steam.
Of the numerous lactones occurring in nature, only those identified in es-
sential oils and only the more important ones will be mentioned in these pages.
Isolation. Sethna and Shah 4 suggested the following method for the isolation of
coumarins and coumarin derivatives from plant extracts:
The extract is treated with a dilute aqueous alkali solution (0.5%) to remove any
acids and phenolic substances that may be present. A simple coumarin having no
interfering group in the molecule and not in combination with glucose as giucoside
can then be isolated on treatment with a 5% aqueous-alcoholic solution of potassium
hydroxide. By this treatment the coumarins arc transformed into the potassium salts
of the corresponding coumarinic acids as the lactone ring opens (see "Introduction").
Other reactions, too, occur simultaneously for example, saponification of any fatty
acid esters present. The mixture is then diluted witli water and extracted with ether,
whereby other substances (if any) are removed. The alkaline layer is subsequently
acidified whereby the acidic substances (if any) and coumarins are liberated. This
mixture is taken up with an excess of ether and treated dropwise with dilute aqueous
alkali; the acids dissolve and the coumarins remain behind. By repeating this process
the acids along with a fraction of the coumarin are removed. Further separation can
be effected by vacuum distillation arid/or sublimation. The coumarin should finally
be purified by crystallization, chromatographic analysis, or other suitable methods.
If the original plant material contained any hydroxycoumarins, they are carried
down in the aqueous portion by initial treatment with aqueous alkali. That fraction
is worked up; i.e., acidified, extracted with ether, and separated from other fatty
substances by extraction with petroleum ether. The material is then distilled in a

high vacuum andfurther purified by crystallization. To ascertain the presence of
hydroxycoumarins, a portion of the liquid after acidifying should be treated with
diazomethane and then subjected to the treatment described above. If a methoxy-
coumarin is found to be present, a hydroxycoumarin was present in the original
material. It may be mentioned here that prolonged treatment with alkali should be
avoided, as it causes a change of hydroxycoumarin into coumaric acid to a small
extent.
Esters of hydroxycoumarins, if present, will be found together with nonhydroxylic
coumarins, but due to hydrolysis they may suffer in the course of separation. Hydroxy-
coumarins will be produced and separated along with them; they should be worked up
as described above.
Coumarin glucosides may be detected as follows: free the soluble fraction, after
the treatment with alcoholic alkali, from impurities by extraction with ether; then
decompose the glucosides by the action of dilute sulfuric acid, and test the resulting
aglucone for coumarin.
Detection. Regarding the detection of natural coumarins in drugs the

6
reader is referred to the paper by Casparis and Manella.
suggested a method for the quantitative de-

6
Kanevskaja and Fedorova
termination of simple coumarins, which is of possible interest in the separa-
tion of coumarins.
Physiological Effects. It might be of interest to add a few words concern-
ing the physiological effects of coumarins and coumarin derivatives on ani-

mals and on man. For details the reader is referred to von Werder's collec-
tive bibliography on the subject. 7 On human beings, coumarin has a slightly
toxic effect. The first dose to the extent of 4 g. produces the symptoms of
illnessand weakness. A dose of approximately 5 g. kills a sheep. The fatal
dose for horses and cattle is about 40 g. The hydroxycoumariris have been
found although toxicity increases considerably on methylation.
less effective,
Pimpinellin, peucedanin, and ostruthin possess only little toxicity on mice,

rats, and guinea pigs. Natural coumarins are highly effective substances on
fish in spite of the low concentration of solutions employed, due to the fact
that most of these substances are sparingly soluble in water. Coumarin was
lethal to fishes in as low a concentration as 1 g. in 0800 cc. of water. Some
furanocoumarins are highly toxic to fish.
1
J. Chem. Soc. 23 (1870), 368.
2
Jbid. 125 (1924), 554.
3
J. Am. Chem. Koc. 38 (1916), 446; 52 (1930), 1724.
*Chem. Rev. 36 (1945), 1.
pharm.) (1943), 347. Chem. Ab-
5
Hundert Jahre Schivciz. Apoth.-Ver. (Centenaire soc. suisse
stracts38 (1944), 1841.
Z. anal. Chem. 93 (1933), 176.
7
Merck's Jahresberichte 50 (1936), 88.
R. W. Moricrieff, "The Nature of Lactoncs," Am. Perfumer 48, No. 11 (1946), 47.
Rolf Brodersen and Anders Kjaer, "The Antibacterial Action and Toxicity of Some
Unsaturated Lactones," Ada Pharmacol. et Toxicol. 2 (1946), 109 (in English). Chem.
Abstracts 41 (1947), 2121.
G. A. Richardson, M. S. El-Rafey and M. L. Long (Univ. of California, Coll. of
Agr., Davis), "Flavones and Flavone Derivatives as Antioxidants," /. Dairy Sci. 30
(1947), 397. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 6637.
M. Stoll, "Formation of 15-Pentadecanolide from 15-Bromopentadecanoic Acid,"
Helv. Chim. Acta 30 (1947), 1393.
Coumarin
Lactone of o-hydroxycinnamic acid

H
H
Occurrence. Coumarin is widely distributed in plants. However, it seems
quite certain that in many cases, especially when the plants are odorless, this
compound occurs in the form of a complex from which the lactone is liberated
on withering of the plants by enzyme action, or by special treatment. This
would explain the typical coumarin odor which hay develops on drying foli-
age in the sun (action of ultraviolet light?).
Coumarin is the odoriferous principle of tonka beans, melilot and wood-
ruff (Asperula odorata). Coumarin has been identified in oil of lavender,
cassia, Peru balsam and in many other essential oils, and in extracts of numer-
ous aromatic plants.
Isolation. When
boiled for a short time with mild alkali solutions, coumarin yields
salts of coumarinic acid from which coumarin can readily be regenerated and pre-
cipitated on treatment with hydrochloric acid, even with carbon dioxide.

Shumeiko recommended the following method for the isolation and purification of
1
coumarin when strongly admixed with contaminating neutral organic substances:

Treat the crude product with an equal weight of 60-65% sulfuric acid, mix for 30
min., remove the lower layer and extract the upper layer with half its weight of the
same acid. Repeat three to four times. Heat the combined extract to 50-60, add
formalin until its odor does not disappear, filter, and dilute with hot water to 30%
sulfuric acid. Wash the upper layer with warm water (70-75) to neutral reaction
to Congo red. Dry in vacuo and distill at 3-5 mm. Recrystallize from alcohol. Cool
the lower layer and recrystallize from alcohol.
Identification. Coumarin sublimes unchanged and is easily identified by melting
point determination. The following reactions and derivatives have been suggested:
(1) On
addition of iodine test solution (yg iodine), a saturated aqueous solution of
coumarin forms a precipitate which at first is brown and flocculent, but on shaking
coalesces, forming thereby a dark green curdy mass and leaving a clear supernatant
liquid (distinction from vanillin).
2
(2) According to Dodge, and

3
Dey and Row, 4 coumarin is soluble in solutions of
sodium sulfite or sodium forming thereby sodium hydrocoumarin sulfonate
bisulfite,
CgHeO NaHSOa H20 which, on treatment with more than 2 mols of 50% alkali, is
converted to o-coumaric acid HO-CeH4-CH==CH-COOH, m. 208, as obtained by
acidification. Also, on heating with concentrated alkali or alcoholic potassium hy-
droxide, coumarin yields salts of coumaric acid. On the other hand, short boiling with
mild alkalies gives solutions of salts of the isomeric coumarinic acid from which cou-
marin can readily be regenerated even by treatment with carbon dioxide or hydro-
chloric acid.(See "Isolation.")
6
According to Smoryaninova, this procedure of forming bisulfite compounds offers
the only method of isolating and identifying coumarin in the presence of the 3-methyl
isomer.
(3) Although not a crystalline adduct m. 181-181.5 is obtainable by
of high yield,
autoclaving 2,3-dimethyl-l,3-butadiene and coumarin at 260 in xylene, according

to Adams et al. 6
Properties. Coumarin ordinarily crystallizes in the form of colorless, shiny

7
leaflets or of rhombic prisms. However, Lindpaintner has reported this sub-
stance as polymorphic existing in three forms. It sublimes without decom-
position and is readily volatile with steam. The odor is pleasant, pronounced
and characteristic of tonka beans, the taste bitter. The following properties
have been reported by von Rechenberg, 8 and the Odorgraphia Committee
9
(Lauffcr):
9
m. 08
9
b. 301 (total immersion)
301. 1
08
t>750.2
8
t>20 170.4
8
blO 153.9
8
138.5
One g. of soluble in 400 cc. of cold water, or in about 50 cc. of

coumarin is
hot water. It is freely soluble in ether, chloroform, in fixed or volatile oils.

The Odorgraphia Committee Report 10 lists these solubilities in alcohol:
16.6 cc. 50% alcohol at 25 C.
1 g. of coumarin dissolves in
1 12.0 cc. 70% alcohol at 15 C.
11
According to de Jong, coumarin as solid or in solution, on exposure to
sunlight, changes to a dimer m. 262.
Use. Coumarin is used widely in perfumes and cosmetics, and for the
scenting of soaps in new mown hay, lavender, fougere, and chypre blends.
Coumarin blends well with vanillin and heliotropin. Another wide use of
coumarin is in the flavoring of baked goods, all kinds of confectionery, can-
dies, and tobacco. Coumarin also serves as an important adjunct in syn-
thetic vanilla flavors.
1
Chem. U.S.S.R. 13 (1940), 1204. Chem. Abstracts 35 (1941), 2133.
/. Applied
2
"National Formulary," Eighth Ed. (1946), 175.
*J. Am. Chem. Soc. 38 (1916), 446; 52 (1930), 1724.
4
J. Chem. Soc. 126 (1924), 554.
6
Sintezy Dushistykh Veshcheslv, Sbornik Slatel (1939), 162. Khim. Referat. Zhur. No. 4
(1940), 115. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 3795.
/. Am. Chem.
Soc. 66 (1943), 356.
7
8
"Einfache und fraktionicrtc Destination," (1923), 304.
9
Ind. Eng. Chem., News Ed. 11 (1933), 114.
10
Ibid.
11
Rec. trav. cMm. 43 (1924), 320. See also von Wessely and Plaichinger, Ber. 76B (1942), 971.
John B. Wilson, "Determination of Coumarin," J. Assocn. Official Agr. Chem. 22

(1939), 378.
Ignaz Herold, "Coumarin," Seifeiiftieder-Ztg. 66 (1939), 162, 191. (A Review)
D. T. Englis and Donald J. Hanahan, "Determination of Vanillin and Coumarin in
Flavoring Extracts," hid. Eng. Chem., Anal. Ed. 16 (1944), 505.
Milo Oerny, "The Determination of Coumarin in Plant Substances," Chem. Obzor
18 (1943), 149. Chem. Zentr. I (1944), 40. Chem. Abstract* 39 (1945), 3328.
P. Casparis and E. Manella, "Coumarins in Drugs. The Detection of Natural
Coumarin," Pharm. Ada Helv. 18 (1943), 714. J. Am. Pharm. Assocn. (Abstracts) 35,
No. 6 (1946), 190.
Umbelliferone
C 9 H6 3 Mol. Weight 162.14
7-Hydroxycoumarin
H
HO c wo
c (31CH
H H
Occurrence. Umbelliferone occurs in the free state in the bark of the
spurge-laurel (Daphne mezerenm). It is also obtained by dry distillation of
the resins from several Umbcllifcrae species.

Markley, Nelson and Sherman identified Umbelliferone in the waxy dis-
*
tillation residue of Florida grapefruit oil.
Isolation. By the usual methods of isolating coumarin derivatives.

Identification. By melting point determination.
Meerwein, Buchner and van Emster reported on the reaction of Umbelliferone with
2
p-chlorobenzenediazonium chloride yielding the 3-p-chlorophenyl derivative m. 280-

282; if an excess of sodium carbonate is added to the sodium salt derivative of um-
belliferone, there results a chocolate azo-dye CisHwOs^Cl.
Casparis and Manella found that natural coumarins, including Umbelliferone,
3
ostruthin, bergaptene, imperatorin and others, can be detected in drugs by the flu-
orescence exhibited in diffused light and in ultraviolet light by various solutions of
these natural coumarins and coumarin derivatives.
Properties. Umbelliferonc melts at 224. In alkali solutions umbellifer-

ones (7-hydroxycoumarins) show fluorescence. Goto 4
found the fluorescence
indicator of umbelliferones to be effective at pH 4. According to Chakra-
varti and Mukerjee, 5 5-hydroxycoumarins show no fluorescence whatsoever
in alkali solutions. Volmar 6 reported on umbelliferone as a very sensitive
fluorescent indicator for fixed alkalies, useful for titrating the acidity of cer-
tain highly colored substances such as wines, etc.
When hydrolized at 70, umbelliferone, according to Limaye and Kul-
yields 2,4-dihydroxycinnamic acid m. 217.
7
karni,
On heating umbelliferone in methanol-potassium hydroxide solution with
methyl iodide, umbelliferone
methyl ether (herniarin) is obtained. Accord-
8
ing to Fischer, crystalline herniarin on exposure to light, especially ultra-
violet light, forms hydrodiherniarin m. 207-208 (stable form).
Use. Natural umbelliferone, as such, is not used in the perfume or flavor
industries.
!/. BioL Chcm. 118 (1937), 433.

2
J. prakt. Chcm. 12], 162 (1939), 250.
3
Hundert Jahrc Schweiz. Apoth.-Vcr. (Ccntcnaire soc. suisxc phann.) (1943), 347. Chem.
Abstracts 38 (1944), 1841.
4
J. Cham. Soc. Japan 69 (1938), 199. Chcm. Abstracts 32 (1938), 3721, 4458.
5
/. Indian Chem. Soc. 14 (1937), 725. Chem. Abstracts 32 (1938), 4150.
6
Documentation set. 6 (1930), 33; Chimie &
iiuluxtnc 37, 440. Chcm. Abstracts 31 (1937),
4919.
7
Kasaijanam 1 (1941), 208. Chetn. Abstracts 36 (1942), 1033.
8
Arch. Pharm. 279 (1941), 300. Chem. Zcntr. I (1942), 2541. Chcm. Abstracts 37 (1943),
3748.
Umbelliferone Methyl Ether

CioH 8 3 Mol. Weight 170.16
Methylumbclliferone. 7-Methoxycoumarin. Hermann. Ayapanin

H
HuCO-C7) V WO
II II
Occurrence.Umbelliferone methyl ether occurs in the oil of German

chamomile (Matricaria chamomilla L.). Kaufmarin and Kjelsberg, 1 and
Pfau 2 identified umbelliferone methyl ether in the oil extracted from French
lavender, the concrete oil containing 2.5 per cent and the absolute oil 4.5
per cent of umbelliferone methyl ether. On standing, the concretes and ab-
solutes of lavender frequently separate methyl umbelliferone as a crystalline
deposit. Ellmer 3
found that a concrete of lavender made by extracting lav-
ender with benzene contained about 5 per cent of methyl umbelliferone. Ac-
cording to the same author, 1000 kg. of lavender plants contain at least
60 g. of umbelliferone methyl ether.
Isolation. Ellmer 4
suggested the following method of isolating coumarin and um-
belliferone methyl ether from essential oils.
Dissolve the oil in the same quantity of methyl alcohol and titrate very quickly to
red with a normal alkali solution and phenol phthalein as indicator, in order to separate
the free acids. Shake the solution immediately with ether and ice water, separate the
ether layer, and extract it three times for 1 hr. with concentrated barium hydroxide
solution. Regenerate the lactones by treating the united barium hydroxide solutions
with dilute hydrochloric acid. Extract with ether and recover the lactones by remov-
ing the ether through distillation or evaporation.
Identification. By melting point determination. On heating, umbelliferone methyl
ether develops an odor of coumarin. In concentrated sulfuric acid it shows blue
fluorescence. On bromination umbelliferone methyl ether (hcrniarin) yields dibromo-
herniarin m. 157- 158 (from alcohol), according to Fischer. 5 The meto-stable form
melts at 146-147.
Properties. Pure umbelliferone methyl ether is odorless. It melts at 117-

6
117.5, according to Pfau.
Fischer 7 found that herniarin when microsublimed from Herba herniarae
melts at 117-118.
8
Dey, Rao and Seshadri reported on the fundamental difference between
the behavior of the trans- acids of the coumarinic acid series and their esters
under the action of heat. The acids decompose into the corresponding sty-
renes and carbon dioxide, whereas the esters eliminate alcohol to form the
original pyrones. The action of sunlight differs from that of heat; sunlight
converts both the esters and the acids into the corresponding coumarins, the
esters undergoing inversion more readily than the acids. The table of per-
centage conversion of the trans- esters into the coumarins when heated shows
that the effects of substituents are similar to those found in the photochemical
inversion.
9
According to Fischer, herniarin undergoes photodimerization, the mcta-
stable form melting at 181, the stable form at 207- 208.
Von Wessely and Plaichinger 10 reported on photodimers of coumarins and
furanocoumarins, including herniarin.
Bose and Sen n experimented with ayapanin from the aromatic herb Eupa-
torium ayapana as a new hemostatic agent.
Use. Umbelliferone methyl ether, as such, is not used in the perfume and
flavor industries.
Parfumerie Moderns 20 (1927), 198.

1

'"
3
Riechstoff Ind. (1927), 206.
6
Arch. Pharm. 279 (1941), 306. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 3748.
6
7
8
9
10
Ber. 76B (1942), 971.
" Ann. Biochem. Exptl. Med. 1, No. 4 (1941), 311. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 3835.
Eugenine
CiiHioO 4 Mol. Weight 206.19
*
Occurrence. reported this coumarin derivative in the oil extracted
Meijer
(with petroleum ether) from the dried buds (cloves) of the tree Eugenia
caryophyllata Thunb. growing wild in the Moluccas. Strangely, the oil
from cloves growing tree does not contain any eugenol.
of the wild
2
Meijer expressed the opinion that eugenine is 4-methyl-5-hydroxy-7-
methoxy coumarin. More recently, however, Schmid synthesized 4-methyl-
8
5-hydroxy-7-methoxycoumarin and 4-methy l-5-methoxy-7-hydroxycoumarin .
Studying the melting points of these two isomers and the melting points of
their acetates, Schmid arrived at the conclusion that neither isomer is identical
with the natural eugenine. It has remained for Meijer, 4 however, to show
definitely that eugenine is 2-methyl-5-hydroxy-7-methoxychromone.
Isolation. By distillation in (high) vacuo and recrystallization.
Properties. White crystals m. 119-120; odorless. The acetate melts at

150M51 .
Use. Kugenine, as such, is not used in our industries.

1
Rec. trav. chim. 65 (1046), 843.
2
Ibid.
3
Helv. Chim. Ada 30 (1947), 1661.
4 Ibid. 31 (1948), 1603.
Limettin
CnH 10 04 .
Mol. Weight 206.19
Citroptene. Citraptene. 5,7-Dimethoxycoumarin

H
HC< 6 >
OCHs
Occurrence. Tilden and Beck, 1 Tilden and Burrows, 2 Burgess, 3 Spath and
Kainrath,
4
and Caldwell and Jones 6 established the presence of this dimeth-
oxycoumarin in expressed oil of bergamot, lemon, and lime.
Isolation. By the usual coumarins and coumarin derivatives
method of isolating
from plant extracts or essential oils. According to Dodge, limettin may be purified
by conversion into sodium dihydrolimettin sulfonate, CnHnOÔsNa with 4H20,
which dissolves in 6 volumes of water and from which limettin is regenerated by treat-
ment with dilute alkali solutions.
Caldwell and Jones 7 separated pure limettin from the deposited material of expressed
lime oil by chromatographic analysis (see "7-Methoxy-5-Geranoxycoumarin").
Identification. By melting point determination. Refer to chemical properties as
described in the following section.
Properties. Repeatedly recrystallized from acetone or methyl alcohol or

dilute ethereal alcohol and treated with animal charcoal (chromatographic
separation), limettin forms shiny colorless needles m. 14G-147, according to

9 10
Spath and Kainrath, and Schmidt; m. 147.5 (Tilden, and Heyes and
8
Robertson n ). Limettin is sparingly soluble in water or petroleum ether but

readily soluble in hot alcohol, benzene, or glacial acetic acid. The diluted
solutions show a violet fluorescence. Schmidt 12 found that limettin is in-
soluble in cold dilute potassium hydroxide.
13
According to Tilden, limettin partly decomposes on dry distillation at
200.
14
Dodge observed that the limettin separated from expressed lime oil and
purified by re-crystallization from acetone is often accompanied by yellow
rosettes or nodules. These were shown to consist of isopimpiricllin CiallioOs,
m. 149.8 (corr.) which previously had been isolated by von Wessely and
15
Kallab from Pimpinclla saxifraga.
16 17
Tilden, and Tilden and Burrows investigated the mono-, di-, and tri-
chlorocitroptenes: (>- or 8-chlorocitroptcne is formed by passing chlorine

through a cold solution of citroptene in glacial acetic acid until the precipi-
tate is just dissolved; needles m. 242 (from glacial acetic acid).
3,0- or 3,8-Dichlorocitropteno is formed in thesame way but in the pres-
ence of a small amount of iodine. It melts at 275.
3,6,8-Trichlorocitroptene is formed on passing a current of chlorine into a
solution of citroptene in glacial acetic acid until completely saturated. Nee-
17
dles m. 188.5 (from methyl alcohol).
By introducing a solution of citroptene into a supersaturated solution of

bromine in benzene or toluene or glacial acetic acid, dibromocitroptene is
formed. According to Tilden, 18 arid Tilden and Beck, 19 the leaflets or prisms
(from chloroform) melt at 257 (with decomposition).
On boiling with dilute potassium hydroxide (Schmidt 20
), or with alcoholic
21
sodium ethylate (Tilden and Burrows ), citroptene yields the dimethoxy-
coumaric acid.
When treated with warm diluted nitric acid, citroptene yields nitrocitrop-
22
tene (Tilden ).
23
Schmidt succeeded in synthesizing limettin.
Use. Limettin, as such, is not used in the perfume or flavor industries.
J. Chem. Soc. 67 (1890), 323. Tilden, ibid. 61 (1892), 344.

2 13
Ibid. 81 (1902), 508. J. CTiew. Soc. 61 (1892), 344.
3
Chem. Ztg. 25 (1901), 602. 14
4m.Perfumer, 37, Dec. (1938), 34.
4
Ber. 70B (1937), 2272. "Monatefc. 59 (1932), 161.
5 16
/. Chem. Soc. (1945), 540. /. Chem. Soc. 61 (1892), 349.
6
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 38 (1916), 451. 17
Ibid. 81 (1902), 510.
7 18
/. C/iern. Soc. (1945), 540. Ibid. 61 (1892), 348.
8
#er. 70B (1937), 2272. *Ibid. 57 (1890), 324.
9 20
Arcfc. Pharm. 242 (1904), 288. CTiem. Zenfr. II (1901), 810.
10
/. Chem. Soc. 61 (1892), 344. 21
/. Chem. Soc. 81 (1902), 510.
11 22
Ibid. (1936), 1831. 7buJ. 61 (1892), 350.
12 23
Arch. Pharm. 242 (1904), 288. Arch. Pharm. 242 (1904), 288.
Osthole
Mol. Weight 244.28
Methyl ether of osthenole. 7-Methoxy-8-(7,7-dimethylallyl) coumarin.

7-Methoxy-8-(3'-methyl butenyl-2') coumarin
H
H CO C'w
;5 C (*>CO
HC< 6 > C
H II
Occurrence. A
7-lactone CigHieOa was first observed by Booker arid
Halm in angelica root oil. More recently Spath and Pesta 2 found that this
1
lactone was identical with osthole occurring in the root of masterwort (7m-
peratoria ostruthium).
Isolation. Osthole can be isolated from the high boiling fractions of angelica root
oil by suitable treatment with dilute alcoholic alkali solutions. (See "Introduction"
to the section on "Lac tones.")
(1) According to Bocker and Halm, osthole, on treatment with
3
Identificatio-n.
bromine in glacial acetic acid, yields a dibromide which, after recrystallization from
glacial acetic acid, melts at 143- 145.
(2) On treatment with hydrochloric acid, osthole yields a hydrochloride m. 101.
According to Spath and Holzen, osthole melts at 82-83

4
Properties.
(cryst. from petroleum ether or ether). When distilled in a high vacuum,
osthole solidifies and melts at 62-63, but on long standing, seeding or heat-
ing to osthole changes into the higher melting dimorphous form.
50-60,
Osthole does not dissolve in cold or hot aqueous potassium or sodium hy-
droxide solutions but it dissolves in hot alcoholic potassium hydroxide solu-
tions. After saponification, the lactone can readily be regenerated, which
proves that osthole is a 7-lactone.
5
Osthenole, the parent phenol of osthole, according to Spath and Bruck,
melts at 124-125. This phenol is also present in angelica root oil.
Bohme and Pietsch 6
showed that osthole, when oxidized with phthalic-
mono-peracid in ethereal solution, yields a compound which on heating with
20 per cent sulfuric acid gives isoauraptene m. 64-66. This ketone forms
an oxime m. 166-167.
H
H..C- C-CHa
CO
CH 2
4
N /u>\
C (2 )CO
H H
Isoauraptene
Use. Osthole, as such, is not used in our industries.

1
J. prakt. Chem. II, 83 (1911), 243.
a Ber. 67 (1934), 853. See also Spath and Vierhapper, Monatsh. 72 (1938), 179.
3
/. prakt. Chem. II, 83 (1911), 243.
4
Ber. 67B (1934), 264.
6
Ber. 70B (1937), 1023.
6
Ber. 72 (1939), 779.
Auraptene
Meranzin
HaC CHa
The constitution of this natural coumarin was elucidated by Bohme and

collaborators. 1 Auraptene is closely related to osthole.
According to Bohme and Pietsch, auraptene occurs in the

2
Occurrence.
oils expressed from the peels of both the sweet and the bitter (sour) orange.
The auraptene of Bohme and collaborators must not be confused with the
"auraptene" (umbelliferone-4-heptylether Ci6H 2 oO 3 m. 68) that Komatsu
,
and co-workers 3 had isolated from grapefruit oil. In order to avoid confu-
Dodge suggested retaining the name auraptene for the compound de-
4
sion,
scribed by Komatsu, and naming the coumarin derivative isolated by Bohme
from orange oils meranzin, rather than auraptene. However, it seems that,
due to the extensive work of Bohme, the designation auraptene will remain in
literature.
Isolation. Bohme and Pietsch 6

from orange oils by boiling and
isolated auraptene
extracting the brown crystalline sedimentary deposit with petroleum ether.
Identification. Bohme 6 found that auraptene shows a most characteristic absorption
spectrum in ultraviolet light. It was thus possible to identify auraptene in sweet as
well as in bitter (sour) orange oil. Indeed, according to Bohme, the measuring of the
absorption spectra permits definite conclusions as to the percentage of auraptene
present in an oil. Since distilled orange oils contain no auraptene, a subnormal content
of auraptene might indicate the addition of distilled orange oil to an expressed oil.
Bohme also ventured the opinion that his findings might also be applied to expressed
lemon, lime, and bergamot oils which contain the natural coumarin derivatives,
limettin and bergaptene. Bohme measured the absorption spectra with the apparatus
described by Eisenbrand. 7
According to Bohme and Pietsch, auraptene crystallizes in

8
Properties.
the form of colorless, tuft-like needles m. 91. The alcoholic solutions [a]
33 24' show blue fluorescence. readily soluble in benzene,
Auraptene is
chloroform, ether, ethyl acetate, or concentrated acetic acid; and sparingly

soluble in petroleum ether (ligroine). When treated with concentrated sul-
furic auraptene develops an orange-red color. With palladiumized
acid,
charcoal and in acetic acid solution, auraptene yields dihydroauraptcne m.
116.
Treating a methyl alcoholic solution of auraptene with the calculated
amount of sodium methylate, setting the mixture aside for several days at
room temperature, with water, and acidifying, Bohme and Pietsch 9
distilling
obtained cis-auraptenic acid. On the other hand, rans-auraptenic acid will
be formed if the solution of auraptene is treated for several hours on a hot
water bath. Cis- and frews-auraptenic acid bear to one another the same
relation as coumarinic and coumaric acid. However, czVauraptenic acid
shows no tendency toward reconversion to auraptene by ring closure. The
reactivity of the phenolic group is greatly diminished.
In excess of sodium methylate, czs-auraptenic acid m. 150, [a]o +2 (in
alcohol) is converted into frans-auraptenic acid m. 204, [a]|? +90 24' (in
alcohol). Both acids on catalytic hydrogenation yield dihydroauraptenic
acid m. 99-100. The same acid can also be obtained by hydrogenation of
auraptene in alkaline solution. When treated with acetic acid containing a
little sulfuric acid,auraptcnc yields isoauraptene m. 06 (see "Osthole") which
is a ketone forming an oxime m. 166-167.
On boiling with 1 per cent oxalic acid, auraptene yields an optically active
glycol,auraptene hydrate m. 128-129, []D -43 48' (in alcohol), which
on heating with sulfuric acid is converted to isoauraptene.
With dimethylaminc in benzene at 150, auraptene forms an amino alco-
5
hol m. 170, []}> +78 48' (in alcohol).
Use. Auraptcnc, as such, is not used in our industry.
1
Arch. Pharm. 276 (1938), 482; 279 (1941), 213. Bcr. 72B (1939), 773. Bohme and
Schneider, ibid., 780.
9
Arch. Pharm. 276 (1938), 482.
3
/. Ckem. Soc. Japan 61 (1930), 478.
4
Am. Perfumer 41, Nov. (1940), 31.
6
Arch. Pharm. 276 (1938), 482.
8
Ibid. 277 (1939), 61. See also van Os and Dykstra, J. Pharm. Chim. 25 (1937), 437, 485.
7
Arch. Pharm. 268 (1930), 520.
8
Ibid. 276 (1938), 482.
9
Ber. 72B (1939), 773. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 4974.
Hydroxypeucedanin
C 16 H 14 O 6 Mol. Weight 286.27
H 2 CX \c o
\
H,C OTT C C CO
C OH CH=CII C C CH
H2C
\ CH/ \ /
CH
Hydroxypeucedanin was isolated from the extracted oil of
Occurrence.
masterwort by Butcnandt and Marten, 1 who assigned to it provisionally the
structure pictured above.
Isolation.the usual methods of isolating coumarin derivatives (see "Introduc-

By
tion" to the section on "Lactones").
Identification. Hydroxypeucedanin yields a hydrate m. 136, an acetate m. 139, a
benzoate m. 172-172.5, and a phcnylurethane m. 174.
Properties. -M. 142.

boiling with 10 per cent sulfuric acid, or by heating the compound in
By
vacuo to 250, hydroxypeucedanin is isomerized to isohydroxypeucedanin m.
148.
Use. Hydroxypeucedanin is not used in our industries.
1
Liebigs Ann. 495 (1932), 205.
Ostruthin

6-Geranyl-7-hydroxycoumarin
HO C'O) (2)CO
Y
CH2 CH
CHs
~^'/S^
u ||
According to Spath and Klager, the roots of masterwort

1
Occurrence.
(Peucedanum ostruthium Koch), extracted with benzene, yield about 1.4
per cent of ostruthin. These authors also established the constitution of
this lactone, modifying the formulas originally suggested by Butenandt and
Marten. 2
Isolation. Through the usual methods of isolating coumarin derivatives. (See

"Introduction" to this section.)
The methyl ether melts at 55; the acetyl derivative melts at 80.
3
Properties. Contrary to earlier findings, Spath and Klager reported the
melting point of ostruthin as 1 19.
Use. Ostruthin is not used in the perfume or flavor industries.
1
Ber. 67B (1934), 859. See also LieUgs Ann. 496 (1932), 202.
2
Liebigs Ann. 496 (1932), 187.
3
Bcr. 67B (1934), 8G3.
7-Methoxy-5-Geranoxycoumarin
C 2 oH2 40 4 Mol. Weight 328.39
H
^C
A X
HaCO C'^
C'w C (2) CO
C
HQ<
C< 6 >
C
.C <3 >CH
>C
H 3
= C-CH -CHrCH = 2
I XIHs
CH
!H 3
According to Caldwell and Jones, relatively large quantities

1
Occurrence.
(2.0-2.5 per cent) of this compound occur in expressed lime oil.
Isolation. Removing 85% of the filtered lime oil by distillation in vacuo, Caldwell
and Jones 2
obtained a residual pale brown oil with a bluish fluorescence from which
solid material separated on standing at in methyl alcoholic solution. Fractional
crystallization of this solid effected no appreciable purification, but chromatographic
analysis on alumina from benzene solution resulted in a sharp separation into three
fractions consisting of limettin, isopimpinellin, and 7-methoxy-5-geranoxycoumarin.
Identification. By melting point determination and by spectrochemical means.
7-Methoxy-5-geranoxycoumarin melts at 86-87.

Properties.
Ozonolysis of 7-methoxy-5-geranoxycoumarin gave acetone and levulinic
aldehyde in good yields, indicating the presence of a geranyl residue in the
molecule, and on treatment with acetic acid containing a little sulfuric acid,
a phenolic compound Ci H 8 O4, m. 228-229 was produced.

3
According to Caldwell and Jones, the characteristic blue fluorescence of
expressed lime oil should not be attributed, as has usually been done, to the
presence of methyl anthranilate in the oil, but rather to 7-methoxy-5-geranoxy-
coumarin.
Use. 7-Methoxy-5-geranoxycoumarin, as such, is not used in our indus-
tries.
/. Chem. Soc. (1945), 540.

2
Ibid.
3
Ibid.
Umbelliprenin
C 24 H 3 oO3 Mol. Weight 366.48
Umbelliferonc farnesyl ether
Spath and Vierhapper

1
expressed the opinion that umbelliprenin is the
farnesyl ether of umbelliferone but attempts to establish the structure by
synthesis were unsuccessful.
2
Occurrence. Spath and Vierhapper isolated this ether from angelica seed
and named it
umbelliprenin. According to the same authors, 3 angelica seed
contains 0.04 per cent umbelliprenin.
Isolation. By the usual method of isolating coumarins and coumarin derivatives.

Properties.Umbelliprenin is optically inactive. Recrystallized from pe-

troleum ether, it melts at 61-63, according to Spath and Vierhapper. 4
Unlike bergamottin, umbelliprenin is not cleaved at the ether union by
mere heating with glacial acetic acid. On treatment with cold glacial acetic
acid and sulfuric acid, umbelliprenin yields the alkali soluble umbelliferone
and an alkali insoluble oil bi 100-115, of intense but not unpleasant odor.
Use. Umbelliprenin, as such, is not used in the perfume or flavor industries.
1
Ber. 71 (1938), 1667.
2
Ibid.
3
Monatsh. 72 (1938), 179.
4
Ber. 71 (1938), 1671.
Tangeretin
C 2 oH 2 oO 7 Mol. Weight 372.36
H.CO crfo
H
C (2iC
<3 >C
- OCH 3
Co
\
H
C <!2
H
_(
/
H
H
(4')C OCH 3
Nelson 1 isolated from expressed Florida tangerine oil a crys-

Occurrence.
talline substance which he named tangeretin. According to Goldsworthy and
Robinson, who succeeded in synthesizing this substance, it has the molecular
2
formula C2oH 2 oO 7 and is 3,5,6,7,4'-pentamethoxyflavone.
Isolation. Tangeretin separates from tangerine oil on long standing.

Identification. With concentrated hydrochloric acid, tangeretin forms an oxonium
salt (yellow needles).
Alkaline hydrolysis yields anisic acid and a tetramethylketophenol, viz.,
tangeretol,
the oxime of which, Ci 2 Hi 7 O 6 N, melts at 85-87 (Goldsworthy and Robinson 3).
Properties. M. 154.
Treatment with and ethyl alcohol gives an olive-green color.
ferric chloride
Soluble in benzene from which tangeretin can be precipitated on the addition
of Soluble in hot alcohol or hot ethyl acetate, crystallizing
petroleum ether.
from the solvents at room temperature. Insoluble in a 10 per cent solution
of sodium hydroxide.
Use. Tangeretin, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 56 (1934), 1392. Cf. Am. Perfumer 29 (1934), 347.
2
J. Chem. Soc. (1937), 46.
8
Ibid.
Bergaptol
CnH 6 4 Mol. Weight 202.16
5-Hydroxypsoralene. 5-IIydroxyfurano-2',3',6,7-coumarin.
CH
A'\^>\yw\
(4) "'""" "-
(s)CH
c
I
H
OH
This furo- (or furano-) coumarin derivative, parent substance
Occurrence.
of bergaptene, occurs in expressed bergamot oil. According to Caldwell and
1
Jones, expressed lime oil contains traces of bcrgaptol.
Isolation. Spilth and Socias

2
isolated bergaptol from bergamot oil by fractional
distillation or, in better yield, by treatment with alkali (see "Introduction" to lactones).
Identification. On methylation with diazomethane, bergaptol yields bergaptene
m. 190M91 .
(See below.)
According to Spath and Socias, bergaptol forms odorless crys-

3
Properties.
tals m. 280-282. Evaporating bergaptol slowly from a solution in ethyl
4
acetate, Spath and Kubiczck obtained needles m. 276-278 (in vacuo).
Use. Bergaptol is not used in our industries.
1
J. Chem. Soc. (1945), 540.
2
Ber. 67B (1934), 59.
3
4
Ber. 70B (1937), 1253.
Xanthotoxol
8-Hy droxypsoralene .
8-Hydroxy f urano-2',3 ', 6, 7-coumarin
T
^V^CO
(4)
HC-
H H
According to Spath and Vierhapper, the seed of angelica

1
Occurrence.
(Angelica archangelica L.) contains 0.02 per cent of xanthotoxol.
Spath and Vierhapper

2
Isolation. isolated xanthotoxol from a phenol fraction
bo.oe 170-180.
Identification and Properties. M. 249-251.

3
According to Spath and Pailer, xanthotoxol can be reduced to dihydro-
xanthotoxol m. 202 (in vacuo).
Noguti and Kawakami
4
isolated a compound CnHeO4 from Angelica
glabra Makino and reported it as xanthotoxol m. 145. This is probably the

methyl ether. (See "Xanthotoxin" below.)
Use. Xanthotoxol is not used in our industries.
1
Monatsh. 72 (1938), 179.
2
Ber. 70B (1937), 248.
3
Ber. 69B (1936), 767.
4
Xanthotoxin
12 II 8 4 Mol. Weight 216.18
8-Methoxypsoralene. 8-Methoxyfurano-2',3',6>7-coumarin
OCHa
X$X /&\C /S\

HC(s') (*>C (7)
HC^c*.
V H
yc
C
H
The constitution of xanthotoxin was established by Thorns. 1
Occurrence. This isomer of bergaptene occurs in the oil distilled from the
fruit peel of Fagara xanthoxyloides Lam. The yield of xanthotoxin is higher
2
if the peels are extracted with alcohol. Spath and Vierhapper found that
the seed of angelica (Angelica archangelica L.) contains 0.02 per cent xantho-
toxin.
Isolation. By extraction of the oil with aqueous potassium hydroxide, and regenera-
tion of the lactone, according to the usual principle applied for the isolation of cou-
marins and coumarin derivatives.
Identification. (1) By melting point determination.
Nitrating xanthotoxin with nitric acid in glacial acetic acid at 90, Thorns
3
(a)
obtained nitroxanthotoxin which after recrystallization from nitrobenzene or alcohol
melted at 233. Priess 4 used for the nitration 45 per cent nitric acid in the cold and
obtained nitroxanthotoxin m. 230.
prepared xanthotoxin dibromide by the action of bromine in chloroform
B
(b) Priess
solution. Recrystailized from xylene, the dibromide melted at 164 but was not very
stable.
6
According to Spath and Pailer, xanthotoxin melts at 146, di-
Properties.
7
hydroxanthotoxin at 163. Thorns reported that xanthotoxin forms prisms
from 80 per cent alcohol, needles from benzene and petroleum ether, m. 145-
8
146. According to Priess, xanthotoxin m. 145 is sparingly soluble in water,
ether, or petroleum ether, more soluble in acetone and glacial acetic acid;
readily soluble in boiling absolute alcohol.
Xanthotoxin only sparingly volatile with steam.
is
When treating the alcoholic solution of this lactone with potassium hy-
droxide, a yellow colored and water soluble salt is obtained from which xan-
thotoxin can be regenerated by neutralization of this solution.
9
Spath and collaborators reported on the ozonization of xanthotoxin.
10
Spath et al. succeeded in synthesizing xanthotoxin.
Use. Xanthotoxin is not used in the perfume or flavor industries.
1
Ber. 44 (1911), 3325. Thorns and Baetckc, ibid. 46 (1912), 2705.
2
Monatsh. 72 (1938), 179.
3
Ber. 44 (1911), 3327.
4
Ber. deut. pharm. ties. 21 (1910), 227. Chem. Zentr. II (1911), 94.
6
Ibid.
6
Ber. 69B (1936), 767.
7
Ber. 44 (1911), 3325.
8
Ber. deut. pharm. Ges. 21 (1910), 227. Chem. Zentr. II (1911), 94.
9
Ber. 73B (1940), 1361.
">#er. 69B (1936), 767, 1087.
Bergaptene
C 12 H 8 O 4 Mol. Weight 216.18
/ /
5-Methoxypsoralene. 5-Methoxyfurano-2 ,3 ,6,7-coumarin. Heraclin.
"Bergamot camphor"
This methoxylated furocoumarin (or in another sense coumarin-coumarone)

had been investigated by several earlier workers before its constitution was
established by Thorns and Baetcke. 1 Bergaptene is an isomer of xantho-
toxin. The
identity of heraclin with bergaptene has been proved by Spath
and Raschka. 2 Bergaptene is the methyl ether of bergaptol.
Expressed oil of bergamot contains about 5 per cent of ber-
Occurrence.
gaptene. It has also been observed in the seed of Seseli indicum by Spath,
Bose, Matzke and Guha, in the oil distilled from the leaves of Skimmia
8
laureola Hook, f., and in aSpath and Vierhapper

few other oils. 4
found
that the seed of angelica (Angelica archangelica L.) contains about 0.1 per
cent of bergaptene.
Isolation. Like all coumarin derivatives.

(See "Introduction" to Lactones.)
Identification. (1) By melting point determination.
(2) By the preparation of nitrobergaptene. Pomeranz 6 suggested the following
method:
Dissolve 2 g. of bergaptene in glacial acetic acid and add 50 cc. of strongly cooled
nitric acid (d 1.41). This mixture is allowed to stand for 20 min., when the light yellow
needles are recrystallized from glacial acetic acid. At 230 the crystals turn brown,
melting at 256 (with decomposition). They are insoluble in water, alcohol, or ether.
Properties. Bergaptene sublimes. Traces are soluble in hot water; readily

soluble in glacial acetic acid, chloroform, benzene and warm phenols (Pome-
6 7
ranz ). Soluble in 60 parts of hot absolute alcohol (Gutzeit ). Insoluble
in hot alkali carbonate solutions but soluble in hot aqueous or in hot alcoholic
8
potassium hydroxide (Pomeranz ).
The melting point of bergaptene was reported as 188-190 by Spath,
von Wessely and Kubiczek, 9 while Spath and Kubiczek 10 recorded m. 224.
At room temperature bergaptene is odorless and tasteless but on heating
it emits vapors of aromatic odor.
Use. Bergaptene, as such, is not used in the perfume or flavor industries.

1
Ber. 45 (1912), 3705.
2
Ber. 67 (1934), 62.
3
Ber. 72 (1939), 821.
4
Monatsh. 72 (1938), 179.
6
Ibid. 14 (1893), 29.
6
Ibid. 12 (1891), 380.
7
Chem. (1879), 905.
Jahresber. Fortschritte
8
Monatsh. 12 (1891), 380.
9
Ber. 70S(1937), 478.
10
Ibid., 1253.
W. N. Howell and A. Robertson, "A Synthesis of Bergaptene," J. Chem. $oc. (1937),

293.
E. Spath and collaborators, "Synthesis of Natural Coumarins," Ber. 70 (1937), 248
Isopimpinellin
Ci 3 HioO 5 Mol. Weight 246.21
5,8-Dimethoxyfurano-2',3',6,7-coumarin
OCH 3
XT (2)CO
(4') (3')
HC- SV
CL(6) a
XX <3 >CH
\<y N
Occurrence. Isopimpinellin has been identified in several members of the
family Umbellifcrac,v\z.,in Pimpinella saxifraga L.by von Wosscly and Kallab,

1
in Sescli indicam Wall, by Spath, Rose, Matzke and Guha, 2 and in Heracleum
3
sphondylium L. by Spath arid Simon. It has furthermore been found in
two members Luvunga scandens Ham. by Spath,
of the family Rutaceae, viz.,
4
Bose, Schmid, Dobrovolny and Mookerjec, and in expressed lime oil, Citrus
5
aurantifolia Swingle, by Caldwell and Jones.
Isolation. the usual methods of isolating coumarins and coumarin derivatives,

By
and by chromatographie analysis of the material deposited from expressed lime oil on
standing. (See "7-Methoxy-5-Geranoxy coumarin.")
Identification. By melting point determination and by spectrochemical data.
Properties.
7
Compound Caldwell and Jones fl
von Wesscly and Kallab
Isopimpinellin Yellow needles m. 147- Yellow needles m. 148-

148 151
Methoxy acid obtained by m. 157-158.5 Sintering slightly at 143,
fission of the lac tone ring strongly at 150, molten
at 162
Dihydrohydroxy acid ob- m. 139, sintering at 131 m. 141, sintering at 130
tained by sodium amal-
gam reduction of iso-
pimpinellin
Dihydroisopimpinellin ob- m. 93.5-94 m. 95.5
tained by heating the
above acid
8
According to Spath and Simon, isopimpinellin melts at 147-149; accord-
9
ing to Dodge, at 149.8.
Use. Isopimpinellin, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Monatsh. 59 (1932), 161. 76^., 541.
2 7
Ber. 72 (1939), 821. Monatsh. 59 (1932), 169, 170, 171.
8
Monatsh. 67 (1936), 344. 8 Ibid. 67 (1936), 344.
4
Ber. 73 (1940), 1361. Am. Perfumer 37, Dec. (1938), 34.
5
J. Chem. Soc. (1945), 540.
Imperatorin
Xanthotoxol isoamylene ether. 8-Hydroxypsoralene isoamylene ether
N,
HCV) (2')
c c
H H
The structural formula of imperatorin was established by Spath and
Holzen. 1
Occurrence. More than one hundred years ago, Osan assigned the name
imperatorin to the crude extract of masterwort (Imperatoria ostruthium) .
2
Spath and Vierhappcr found that the seeds of Angelica archangclica L. are
Noguti and Kawakami reported that An-
3
particularly rich in imperatorin.
gelica glabra Makino contains about 1.3 per cent of imperatorin.
Spath, Bose, Gruber and Guha proved that marmelosin isolated from the
4
fruit of Aegle marmelos is identical with imperatorin.
Isolation. Bythe usual method of isolating coumarins and coumarin derivatives

from essential oils or plant extracts.
According to Spath and Holzen, the hexahydroxy derivative of imperatorin melts
6
at 85.
Heating imperatorin in a 10% chloroform solution of perbenzoic acid, Noguti
and Kawakami 6 obtained hydroxyimperatorin Ci6Hi40B, m. 1 15. Spath and Holzen 7
had earlier reported the formation of the same hydroxyimperatorin.
Properties. Imperatorin melts at 102 (Spath and Holzen

8
), m. 102-
(Spath, Bose, Gruber and Guha ).
9
103
10
Spath and Kuffner studied the rearrangement of imperatorin to allo-im-
peratorin (8-hydroxy-5-isoamylene-psoralene) .
According to Spath and Holzen, imperatorin

11
almost completely isomer-
is
ized to aô-impcratorin on dry distillation even in a high vacuum; at some-

what higher pressures (0.5 mm.) the isomerization is complete. At 0.001
mm. pressure and 205-215 bath temperature, a/Zo-imperatorin sublimes. It
melts at 233. Similar observations were made by Noguti and Kawakami. 12
13
Spath and Holzen reported that imperatorin is not appreciably soluble
in aqueous potassium hydroxide but it dissolves with yellow color in cold
methyl alcoholic potassium hydroxide and does not separate on dilution with
water and evaporation of methyl alcohol in vacuo.
Noguti and Kawakami
14
found that 2 g. of imperatorin in 20 cc. of glacial
acetic acid on addition of 2 drops of concentrated sulfuric acid gave xantho-
toxol after standing for two days.
15
Spath and Kui'fner studied the lethal action of imperatorin and other
coumarin derivatives on fish.
16
Spath and collaborators succeeded in synthesizing imperatorin via xan-
thotoxol.
Use. Imperatorin, as such, is not used in the perfume or flavor industries.
. 66B
(1933), 1137.
2
Ber. 70S
(1937), 248. Monatsh. 72 (1938), 179.
3
*Ber. 70B (1937), 1021.
6
Ber. 66B (1933), 1141.
6
7
Ber. 68B (1935), 1125.
8
/fo'^.
9
70B (1937), 1021.
Ber.
10
Ber. 72B (1939), 1580.
11
Ber. 66B (1933), 1144.
12
13
Ber. 66B (1933), 1137.
14
15
Monatsh. 69 (1936), 108. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 761.
18
Ber. 70B (1937), 248, 478, 1253.
Isoimperatorin
Bergaptol isoamylene ether. 5-Hydroxypsoralene isoamylene ether
X CH 3
According to Spath and Kahovec, isoimperatorin occurs in

1
Occurrence.
the rhizomes of masterwort (Peucedanum ostruthium Koch syn. Imperatoria
ostruthium L.). These investigators also established the structural formula
of isoimperatorin as pictured above.
Isolation. By the usual methodcoumarin derivatives.

of isolating
Identification. By melting point determination. Also, with dimethyl sulfate and
sodium methylate an acid derivative CnHigOs, m. 117.5, is formed.
2
Properties. According to Spath and Kahovec, isoimperatorin melts at
109. It is not appreciably soluble in cold aqueous alkali solutions but dis-
solves in methyl alcoholic potassium hydroxide. On the addition of water
and evaporation of methyl alcohol, it remains in solution but precipitates
unchanged by the action of acids (including carbon dioxide). Treating iso-
imperatorin with an acetic acid sulfuric acid mixture, these same authors
obtained a phenol m. 277 (with decomposition), which on methylation
yielded bergaptene m. 188-189. When treated with dibenzoylperoxide,
isoimperatorin in chloroform solution gives oxypeucedanin m. 142-143, ac-
3
cording to Spath and Kahovec.
4
Spath and Dobrovolny succeeded in synthesizing isoimperatorin.
Use. Isoimperatorin, as such, is not used in the perfume or flavor in-
dustries.
l
Ber. 66B (1933), 1146.
2
Ibid.
3
Ibid. See also Spath and Holzen, Ber. 68B (1935), 1123.
4
Ber. 72 (1939), 52.
Bergamottin
C2iH 22 04 Mol. Weight 338,39
Bergaptol geranyl ether
H
HC(6')< Z >C(7) C (2)CO
H^J^^
I H
jCHa
OCH* CH==C ~ CH 2 CH a CII=C
T r*'-
CHa
Spath and Kainrath isolated this geranyl ether of bergaptol

l
Occurrence.
from expressed bergamot oil.
Von Soden and Rojahn 2 had earlier observed in bergamot oil a nonphe-
nolic substance which contained no methoxy group and which they called
"bergaptin" m. 59.5. This compound was probably bergamottin.

Isolation. See "Introduction" to lactones. Also according to the method of
Spath
3
by which coumarins and coumarin derivatives are isolated from plant extracts
and from volatile oils.
Identification.melting point determination.
By
Spath and Kainrath found that on distillation in a high vacuum bergamottin
4
decomposes; at 200-230 a crystalline phenol m. 275-278 (in vacuo) distills over

which was identified as bergaptol and which on methylation yielded bergaptene.
5
Properties. M. 59-61, according to Spath and Kainrath.
When heated with glacial acetic acid, bergamottin is split into bergaptol
CiiHeO^ m. 280, and geraniol.

Use. Bergamottin, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Ber. 70B (1937), 2272.
4
Ibid. 70B (1937), 2272.
2 6
Pharm. Ztg. 46 (1901), 778. Ibid.
3
Ber. 70A (1937), 83.
Angelicin
CnH 6 3 Mol. Weight 186.16
Furano-4',5',7,8-coumarin. Furo-4',5',7,8-coumarin
H
H
C O
o
a') <6Vto\Nx
/d)\"
en?)
H H
Occurrence.This parent substance of several natural furocoumarins (for
example, isobergaptene and pimpinellin) has been found by Spath and
l
Pesta 2 in oil of angelica root.

Originally the name angelicin had been assigned by Buchner
3
to a sub-
stance which, however, was later identified as sitosterol.
Isolation. See "Os thole."

melting point determination. According to Spath and Pesta,
4
Identification. By
angelicin on oxidation with alkaline hydrogenperoxidc yields furan-2,3-dicarboxylic
acid.
Angelicin combines with benzene in the presence of aluminum chloride, according

to Krishnaswarny and Seshadri, 5 to yield 8-(l,2-diphenylethyl) umbelliferorie, in. 205-
206. These authors recommended preparing the above derivative as follows:
Dissolve 0.2 g. of angelicin in 20 ml. of benzene, add 0.5 g. of powdered aluminum
chloride and shake the stoppered flask well for about 4 hr. at room temperature. Add
dilute hydrochloric acid and remove the excess benzene by steam distillation. On
repeated recrystallization of the solid residue from ethyl alcohol or acetone, the um-
belliferone is obtained.
Properties. M. 138-139.5.
On short standing in cold aqueous alkali solutions, angelicin is insoluble,
but on heating it dissolves and can be precipitated by acidification.
Use. Angelicin is not used in our industries.
1
See von Wessely and Nadlcr, Monatsh. 60 (1932), 141, 161.
2
Ber. 67B (1934), 853. See Spath and Vierhappcr, Monatsh. 72 (1938), 179.
*Liebigs Ann. 42 (1842), 226.
*Ber. 67B (1934), 179, 853.
6
Proc. Indian Acad. Sci. 16A (1942), 151. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 1430.
Pimpinellin
5,6-Dimethoxyfurano-4',5',7,8-coumarin
CH
O C(7> C (2)
^
CO
C (3)CH
H CO
3 C C
I
OCHs
Occurrence. Von Wessely and Kallab 1

found pimpinellin in the roots of
2
Pimpinclla saxifraga (5 kg. yielded 4-5 g.). Spath and Simon identified
pimpinellin in the roots of Ilcracleum sphondylium.
Isolation. By the usual methods of isolating coumarin derivatives.

Properties. M. 119 (von Wessely and Kallab

3
). M. 117-119 (Spath
4
and Simon ).
On reduction, pimpinellin yields a dihydroderivative m. 87-88.

Von Wessely and Dinjaski 5 investigated several polymerization products
of pimpinellin.
Joisand Manjunath 6 studied the absorption curves of pimpinellin, iso-
pimpinellin, and several other furanocoumarins.

7
Wasicky investigated the physiological action of pimpinellin, ostruthin,
and related compounds on animals.
8
Spath reported on the effects of natural coumarins, including pimpi-
nellin, on fish.
Use. Pimpinellin is not used in the perfume or flavor industries.
i
Monatsh. 59 (1932), 161.
z lbid. 67 (1936), 344.
8
I bid. 59 (1932), 168.
*Ibid. 67 (1936), 346.
6
Ibid. 64 (1934), 131.
8
Ber. 70B (1937), 434.
7
Pharm. Monatsh. 17 (1936), 165. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 453.
8
Monatsh. 69 (1936), 75.
Massoilactone
Lactone of 5-hydroxy-2-decenoic acid
CH 3 (CH 2 )4 CH CH 2 CH=CH C=O

O
1
Occurrence. According to Meijer, this lactone occurs in the essential oil
distilled from authentic Massoi bark Cryptocaria massoia, Lauraceae. Previ-
ously there had been considerable confusion regarding the origin of true Mas-
the controversy was settled by an exploration trip to
soi bark, until New
Guinea where authentic species of the true Massoi bark were obtained.
Shigchiro Abe isolated this lactone from the essential oil of Massoi
2
Isolation. (1)
bark by extracting the oil with a solution of potassium hydroxide, in which process the
lactone goes into solution. However, by this method the phenols, too, will be isolated.
(2) Meijer
3
obtained the lactone from Massoi oil by fractional distillation.
Properties. The fraction obtained had these properties:
b 24 170-174 c* D -93 0' and -97 0'

5 5
df" 0.9788 ng 1.4714
df 0.9859 nf? 1.4718
Catalytic hydrogenation of massoilactone with platinum oxide as a cata-

lyst in a medium of glacial acetic acid yields the dihydrolactone which, on
treatment with potassium bichromate and sulfuric acid, is oxidized to valeric,
caproic, succinic and glutaric acids, and a keto acid, viz., 5-keto-caprinic acid
m. 56.5.
Use. Massoilactone, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Rec. trav. chim. 69, No. 3 (1940), 191.
2
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 68 (1937), 246.
3
Rec. trav. chim. 69, No. 3 (1940), 194.
Exaltolide
Lactone of 15-hydroxypentadecanoic acid
CII 2 (CH 2 ) 13 C=0
Occurrence. This lactone was found by Kerschbaum *

in the oil derived
from angelica root (Archangelica officinalis syn. Angelica arckangelica) .
Isolation. was not possible to isolate exaltolide in pure form. The investigations
It
Kerschbaum, and Ciamician and Silber 3 showed the presence of an ether or lactone
2
of
of 1 5-hydroxypentadecanoic acid. Ruzicka and Stoll 4 succeeded in synthesizing
exaltolide through oxidation of cyclopentadecanone with persulfuric acid.
Identification. Through the 1 5-hydroxypentadecanoic acid m. 8l-82.
5
According to Stoll and Rouve*, and Ruzicka and
6
Properties. Stoll, exal-
tolide has these properties:
m. 30-32 5' 6
n 1.4633 6
bo.oe lir-112 05 n|J 1.4670 6
6
df 0.9383
5
df 0.9462
The odor of exaltolide is typical of amber and musk.

Use. Exaltolide is used in high-grade perfumes, to which it imparts a last-
ing and characteristic odor.
1
Ber. 60 (1927), 902.
2
Ibid.
*Ber. 29 (1896), 1811
*Helv. Chim. Ada 11 (1928), 1159.
5
Ibid. 17 (1934), 1283.
6
Ibid. 11 (1928), 1167.
Ambrettolide
Lactone of 16-hydroxy-7-hexadecenoic acid
CH 2 CH=CH
--- (CH 2 ) 5
- -
(CI1 2 ) 7
O ---
Occurrence. This lactone occurs in oil of ambrctte seed (Hibiscus abel-
moschus L.).
Isolation. Kerschbaum 1
from arnbrette seed oil by fraction-
isolated ambrettolide
ation, after the fatty acids had been removed through treatment of the oil with a cold
dilute sodium hydroxide solution. The fraction bio 140-180 was then carefully
treated with dilute alcoholic sodium hydroxide and extracted with ether which pro-
cedure yielded a mixture of ambrettolide and farnesol. The latter was removed with
phthalic anhydride while repeated fractionation of the residual mixture gave fairly
pure ambrettolide b w 185- 190, d 20 0.938.
Identification. Through ring-opening and by hydrolysis, ambrettolic acid m. 25
is formed.
Properties. a colorless viscid oil which in

Ambrettolide is 1 per cent alco-
holic solution shows a delicate yet pronounced odor of musk.
According to Stoll and Gardner, 2 the ambrettolide described by Kersch-
baum 3 was impure. Stoll and Gardner reported these properties for analyti-
cally pure ambrettolide:

bi 154-156
df 0.9580
nf? 1.4815
Use. Natural ambrettolide, as such, is not used in our industries, but the
synthetic product is offered on the market.
l
Ber. 60 (1927), 908.
*Helv. Chim. Ada 17 (1934), 1G09.
*Ber. 60 (1927), 902.
Charles Collaud, "Ambrettolide and Its Isomers. Synthesis of a lG-Hydroxy-6-

Hexadecenoic Acid and Its Lactone," Helv. Chim. Acta 25 (1942), 965. Chem. Ab-
37 (1943), 1097.
stracts
Charles Collaud, "Ambrettolide and Its Isomers. A - and A -Isoambrettolic Acids
5 6
and Lactones," Helv. Chim. Acta 26 (1943), 849. Chem. Abstracts 38 (1944), 1471.
Nepetalactone
CioHi 4 2 Mol. Weight 1GG.21
9
I
H
C CHa
/C 6 H 7 CH 3
a methylcyclopentane nucleus (see "Nepetalic Acid").
is
According to McElvain, Walters and Bright, nepetalactone

1
Occurrence.
comprises about 42 per cent of the alkali-insoluble portion (10 per cent) of
the volatile oil derived from catnip (Ncpeta cataria) .
Isolation andIdentification. The fraction b .3 G8-71 of the lower boiling neutral

components of volatile catnip oil is shaken
with 10% aqueous sodium hydroxide at
80 for 30 min., the hydrocarbons are removed by extraction with ether, the alkaline
extract is then acidified with 10% sulfuric acid to Congo red arid thoroughly extracted
with ether. On distillation, the combined ether extracts yield nepetalic acid which
can be characterized by the preparation of its semicarbazone m. 160-1G1 (see
"Nepetalic Acid").
2
Properties.According to McElvain et al., nepetalactone prepared from
nepetalic anhydride has these properties:
bo.i 67-70
ng* 1.4843
Use. Nepetalactone, as such, is not used in our industries, but nepetalac-

tone is the component of the oil, the odor of which makes the catnip plant
so attractive to certain species of the cat family that they become playfully
excited.
1
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 1828.
2
Ibid.
Alantolactone
'CH 2
/t r*\ I * JLi
,w, CHa HaC. C XT

V-/V,
\<4)/|\<5)/ \CHslCHa
/ \ /
CH 2 ( CH 2
CH:J
CHa
(12)
Alantolacionc Isoalantolactone
(Ilelonine) (Isohclcninc)
The work Hansen, and Ruzicka and van Melson indicates that the
1 2
of
isomcric alantolactones have the formulas pictured above, but later investi-
gations led Ruzicka, Pieth, Reichstein and Ehmann to the conclusion that
3
alantolactone is not a uniform substance and that the above structural for-
mulas apply only to certain constituents of the mixtures called alantolactone
and isoalantolactonc.
Occurrence. This lactone forms the main constituent of elecampane oil
(Inula hclenium). It has also been detected in microsublimation products of
Radix cnulac by Fischer and Ehrlich. 4
According to Ilansen by a method which, although causing considerable

6
Isolation.
losses, yet has been found to yield well-crystallized isomers. It involves distillation
of the alant-camphor in a high vacuum, treating the crystalline distillate in cold alcohol
with ammonia and filtering off the amides. The two amides are separated by frac-
tional crystallization from ethyl acetate and acetone and converted back to the lac-
tones by dry distillation in vacuo.
Alantolactone amide m. 205-206

Isoalantolactone amide m. 247
On warming with dilute alkali solution, the lactones form salts of the corresponding
hydroxy acids, viz., CnHô-OH-COOH. The acid derived from alantolactone melts
at 135-136, that from the isolactone at 143.
Identification. Alantolactone can be characterized by the preparation of several
crystalline derivatives :
(1) Monohydrochloride m. 117.

(2) Monohydrobromide m. 106.
(3) Dihydrochloride m. 127-134.
(4) Dihydrobromide m. 117.
Refluxing either alantolactone or isoalantolactone with selenium yields a
(5)
1,7-methyl-ethyl naphthalene (styphnate m. 125-126, picrate m. 101). Upon
oxidation with potassium ferricyanide and potassium hydroxide a 1,7-naphthalene-
dicarboxylic acid m. 294-296 is obtained.
(6) Reduction of either of these isomers by means of a platinum oxide catalyst
yields tetrahydroalantolactone m. 143-144, Q:D +15 12'. Partial hydrogenation
of the same gives different derivatives:
Dihydroalantolactone m. 134, a D -24 36'

Dihydroisoalantolactone m. 167.5-168, [affi +72 0'
Properties. Alantolactone forms colorless prismatic needles m. 76 and

possesses a faint odor and flavor. It sublimes even on slight warming. The
iso- form melts at 112.
Bredt and Posth 6 reported these properties for alantolactone:
b. 275 (with partial decomposition)

bio 192
For years alantolactone has been used as an efficient internal anti-

Use.
septicum and vermifuge. The commercial product is known under the name
"helenine" (alant-camphor) [cf. U. S. Dispensatory, 23rd Ed. (1943), 1406].
Ber. 64 (1931), 67, 943, 1904. J. prakt. Chem. 136 (1933), 185.
2
Helv. Chim. Acia 14 (1931), 397, 1095.
3
Ibid. 16 (1933), 268.
4
Mikrochemie, Festsch. von Hans Molisch (1936), 103.
6
64B (1931), 70.
Ber.
6
Liebigs Ann. 286 (1895), 349.
n-Butyl Phthalide
C 12 H 14 O 2 Mol. Weight 190.23
CH
IIC
/ \ C C
//
II >o
HC C CH
\/
CH CjHg
Occurrence. Naves l
identified this compound as an important constituent
of oil of lovage root (Levisticum officinale Koch).
Isolation. To
isolate the various lactone derivatives, the corresponding sodium
salts are extracted with ether, in a medium saturated with carbon dioxide. The first
fractions thus extracted are optically active (3 23') and
particularly rich in butyl
phthalide and its hydrogenated derivatives. As soon as the extraction slows up, the
acids are freed by acidification with sulfuric acid (Congo red) and gradually lactonized
by heating to 35-40 at reduced pressure, every step in the separation being assured
by a treatment with a solution of sodium carbonate. The last fractions lactonized

contain sedanonic anhydride.
The
fractions containing the butyl phthalide are converted into methyl esters.
After treatment with semicarbazide, they are then saponified and the salts digested
with potassium permanganate. The recovered acids are finally lactonized by
distillation.
Identification. The
resulting n-butyl phthalide can be identified by saponification
to o-[o!-hydroxyamyl]-benzoic acid m. 73, by preparation of the mononitro derivative
m. 54-55, and by comparison of these compounds with the corresponding synthetic
products.
2
Properties. According to Naves, synthetic n-butyl phthalide has these
properties:
b2 . 4 141
df 1.0672
nr? 1.52602
3
The natural n-butyl phthalide isolated by Naves from oil of lovage root
had a boiling point b2 . 5 138-142.
Use. Synthetic n-butyl phthalide offers interesting possibilities in flavor
work.
1
Helv. Chim. Ada 26 (1943), 1281.
2
Ibid., 1284.
3
Ibid., 1292.
n-Butylidene Phthalide
CTI O
HC
/ \C C
/
II >o
no c c
\CH
/ II
CH CH 2 CH 2 CHs
Occurrence. This compound was first reported as "Ligusticum lactone"
and derived from "Ligusticumic acid/' C^HieOa, by Kariyone, Kanno and
Sugino in the volatile oil distilled from a benzene extract of the fruit of
*
Ligusticum acutilobum Sieb. and Zucc. Shortly afterward, Kariyone and

Kotani 2 identified "Ligusticum lactone" with butylidene phthalide, while
Noguchi, Fujita and Kawanami isolated this compound from the volatile
3
oil obtained by steam distillation of the root of Ligusticum acutilobum.
More recently, Naves 4 identified butylidene phthalide as a main constitu-

ent of oil of lovage root (Levisticum officinale Koch).
Isolation. To isolate lactone compounds like butylidene phthalide, etc., the corre-
sponding sodium salts are extracted with ether, in a medium saturated with carbon
dioxide.
Naves 6 employed the following procedure for the isolation of n-butylidene phthalide:
*
"Transform 16 the medium fractions into methyl
g. of esters by treatment with a
mixture of 30 cc. of absolute methyl alcohol and 1.5 cc. of concentrated sulfuric acid.
Treat the ester mixture with 12 g. of triethyl borate at 120-130, and distill the reac-
tion product to b2.5 156. Treat the distillate with 250
a potassium permanganate cc. of
solution, and saponify the resulting neutral fraction for 1 hr. by refluxing with 60 cc.
oi2 N
alcoholic potassium hydroxide." The n-butylidene phthalides obtained after
lactonization will have the properties reported below.
Identification. The acid resulting from the treatment of 1 g. of lactone with 2 cc.
of a 25% potassium hydroxide solution at 40 is freed by the addition of sulfuric acid,
and refluxed for 3 hr. with 1.5 cc. of hydrazine hydrate in the presence of 10 cc. of
alcohol. After purification by dissolution in acetic ester and precipitation with pen-
tane, the n-butyl phthalazorie will melt at 156.
6
Properties. According to Naves, n-butylidene phthalide has these prop-
erties:
T 720 20
o. a4 nD
Natural b lp6 134 1.0966 1.5759
Synthetic b2 . 4 141 1.1028 1.5780
Use. Synthetic n-butylidene phthalide is used in flavor work.

1
J. Pharm. >Soc. Japan 56 (1936), 113.
4
Helv. Chim. Ada 26 (1943), 1281.
2
Ibid. 57 (1937), 183. *Ibi<L, 1292.
3 6
Ibid., 187, Ibid., 1285.
Sedanolide and "Cnidium Lactone"

Mol. Weight 194.26
CH 2 O CH O
H2 C
\C H C / HC
/ \ H /
C C
I >o I In >o
H2 C C Oil HoC
" C CH
\CH CH 2 -CH 2 .CH 2 .CII 3
\CH/ I
CH 2 -CH 2 .CII 2 -CH3

2
1 '
Sedanolide "Cnidium Lactone
A 2-Tetrahydro-tt-butyl phthalide
CH2
HC
/ \ H
C COOH
2
H2 C C C OH
\CH
CH2 CH2 CH2 C
Sedanolic Acid Ci2H2oO3
2
1-a-Hydroxy amyl-A -tetrahydrobenzoic acid
Occurrence. Sedanolide, the lactone of sedanolic acid (Ci 2 2 o03, m. 88- H

89), is one of the principal odoriferous substances of oil of celery seed; first
* See in this connection the
monograph on n-Butyl Phthalide, re isolation.
described by Ciamician and Silber. An isomeric lactone was later

1
isolated
2 3
by Sakai, and Murayama from the essential oil contained in the roots of
the Chinese drug "Hsiung-Ch'uang" (Cnidium officinale Makino). This
Ci2His02 compound was named "Cnidium Lactone."
Isolation. After first removing the free acids and phenols by sodium carbonate and
hydroxide, both sedanolide and "Cnidium lactone" upon saponification and acidifica-
tion yield hydroxy acids which serve as a means of isolation. However, the acid
derived from "Cnidium lactone" is reported to be much more unstable than sedanolic
2
acid, the l-a-hydroxy-amyl-A -tetrahydrobenzoic acid derived from sedanolide.
Nevertheless the lactoncs are in part regenerated by distillation under diminished
pressure. (See in this connection also the monograph on "Sedanonic Acid," regarding
isolation.)
4
Identification. Noguchi established the following series of reaction products that
may serve to identify both "Cnidium lactone" and sedanolide as well as to show the
relationship existing between these isomeric lactones:
Sedanolide
-H O 2
a-Di hydro
Sedanolic Acid
m. 126-127
Dihydro -61 32' (in ale.)
"Cnidium Lactone" CH 2
IIoC
/
\CII COOII
"Cnidium lactone"
(liquid) + H 2 ()
->
1.0302 II 2 C CH CIIO1I
MD20
-19
1.49274
18' \CH/ C 4 H9
nj? 2
MH 55.30 /^-Dihydro
Sedanolic Acid
m. 91
lid
113
I
lJn -26 14'
I -H o 2
/3-Dihydro Sedanolide
m. 51
wD 13
-16 8'
Noguchi and Kawanami report that heating either sedanolide or "Cnidium lactone"
6
for 3 hr. with palladiumized charcoal at 330-340 yields butyl phthalide, which upon
nitration gives 6-nitrobutyl phthalide m. 53-54.
6
Properties. Ciamician and Silber recorded these properties for sedanolide:
8 5
b 17 185 Hf>
-
-23 40'
4 5
'
d 24 . 5 1.03833 n^ 1.49234
7
Noguchi describes "Cnidium lactone" as follows:
b 15 177-178 []J? -71 53' (in chloroform)

5
b2 . 5 148-150 n{> 1.50545
5
di 1.0467
Use. Sedanolide or "Cnidium lactone," as such, are not used in our in-
dustries.
1
Ber. 30 (1897), 492, 500, 1419, 1424, 1427.
2
Mitt. Medic. Ges. Tokio, No. 6 (1916), 358; through J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 64 (1934), 171
(Abstracts in German).
3
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan No. 477 (1921), 951 (Abstracts in German p. 7). Chem. Abstracts
16 (1922), 1578.
6
6
Ber. 30 (1897), 500. Gazz. chim. ital. 28, I (1898), 478.
7
X. FURAN DERIVATIVES
Menthofuran
4,5,6,7-Tetrahydro-3,6-dimethylbenzofuran. 3,6-Dimethyl coumaronetetra-

hydride-(4,5,6,7)
H 2
_cH, >
Occurrence. Some l
years ago, Carles observed in the oil distilled from the
flower buds of peppermint a new constituent to which Wienhaus and Dewein 2
assigned the formula 3,6-dimethyl coumaronetctrahydride-(4,5,6,7) and
named it menthofuran. This compound seems to form gradually in the plant,
reaching a maximum (about 10 per cent of the oil) during the period of
fluorescence and slowly disappearing as the content of menthol increases.
Isolation. Carles 3
isolated menthofuran from anfrom fresh floweringoil distilled
peppermint by heating the fraction bio 70- 75 repeatedly over metallic sodium, by
converting the menthone into menthol, and by removing the menthol with phthalic
anhydride.
Through its properties and the formation
Identification. of an adduct with maleic
anhydride m. 138, according to Treibs.
4
Properties. Carles thus obtained an oil which admittedly still contained

as much as 6 per cent menthol; it had these properties:
b. 196 c* D +81 0' to +88 0'
b 20 95 njb 1.4807
d 15 0.965
5
These properties were in a large measure confirmed by Treibs who, at a
later date, obtained the same compound by heating cyclopulegone sulfonic
ester; it had these characteristics:
bis 80 aD +92 0'
dis 0.972 nD 1.4890
The odor of this product was menthol-like; the color, typical blue.
On exposure to air, menthofuran yields an acid m. 185-186, C 7 Hi O 2 .
699
700 FURAN DERIVATIVES
6
According to a patent of Treibs, menthofuran
Use. may be used in per
fumery; nevertheless it is seldom employed (if at all).
Parfumerie moderne 22 (1929), 615.
1
Z. angew. Chem. 47 (1934), 415.

8
Parfumerie moderne 22 (1929), 615.
4
Ber. 70B (1937), 85.
6
German Patent No. 696,775, Aug. 29, 1940.
P. Z. Bedoukian, "Occurrence of Menthofuran in Oil of Peppermint (Mentha

piperita vulgaris S.)," /. Am. Chem. Soc. 70 (1948), 621.
Perillene
/3-Isohexenyl-furan
HC
II
- C CH 2 CH 2 CII=C
II
-
\
CH 3
HC CH CH 3
\ /
Occurrence. Kondo and Yamaguchi isolated from oil of Perilla citriodora
1
a furfuran derivative CioHÔ, which they named perillene, a rather mislead-

ing designation as this term would indicate a hydrocarbon. By comparing
the reduction products of Elsholtzia ketone with dihydroperillene, Asana 2
demonstrated the formula originally suggested by the discoverers to be in-
correct. The structure of perillene pictured above was finally established by
Kondo and Suzuki. 3
4
Goto reported a relative of this furan derivative in oil of Perilla frutescens
Brit.
According to Kondo and Yamaguchi, the essential

5
Isolation. oil is freed of alde-
hydes by means of sodium and the furan derivative isolated from the low
bisulfite,
boiling fraction of neutral constituents by f ractionation.
Identification. Kondo and Suzuki 6 noted that the isolate yields an octahydro
derivative upon catalytic hydrogenation and cleavage of the furan ring with platinum
oxide in acetic acid at 35 Ib. of pressure. Oxidation of this derived primary alcohol
by chromic oxide in acetic acid leads to [(CHg^CHtCEWsCHtCzI^COOH], b 117 M
118, df 0.91058, which forms an anilide m. 68 and an amide m. 88.
According to Kondo and Yamaguchi, perillene has these

7
Properties.
properties:
b. 185-186 D
df 0.9017 nfj 1.47053
FURAN DERIVATIVES 701
These characteristics are in large measure confirmed by the work of other

authors.
Kondo and Suzuki 8 prepared hydrogenated perillenes and reported for the
5
dihydro derivative: b. 182, df 0.8852, ng 1.45762; for the hexahydro de-

7 1'
rivative: bio 86-87, df 0.87363, n^ 1.436226; for the octahydro deriva-
tive: b. 212-213, b 4 90-91, df 0.85568.
Perillene is a colorless liquid of agreeable odor; it gradually turns brown
on standing.
Perillene gives a pale yellow color only with ferric chloride and a cherry
red tint with sulfuric acid.
Use. Perillene is not used in our industries.
1
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 446 (1919), 263.
2
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 454 (1919), 999.
(1936), 2459. See Suzuki, J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 66 (1936), 841.
69B
3
Ber.
6
/. Pharm. Soc. Japan 446 (1919), 263.
6
Ber. 69B
(1936), 2464. Sec Suzuki, /. Pharm. Soc. Japan 66 (1936), 841.
7
/. Pharm. Soc. Japan 446 (1919), 263.
8
Ber. 69B (1936), 2463.
"Carlina Oxide"
Mol. Weight 182.21
Benzyl-2-furylacetylene
HC CH
CII 2 feC C CH
O
Semmler and collaborators showed that "carlina oxide" is not an oxide
1
but a furyl derivative. The above formula of "carlina oxide" was suggested
by Gilman, Van Ess and Burtner.
2
Occurrence. "Carlina oxide" is the main constituent of oil of carline this-
tle, derived from the roots of Carlina acaulis L.

Identification. On reduction with metallic sodium and alcohol, "carlina oxide"
Gilman, Van Ess and Burtner identified this
3
yields l-phenyl-3-a-furylpropane.
reduction product as a-(7-phenylpropyl)-a'-furyimercuric chloride CeHsCCI^)*'
C 4 H 2 OHgCl; m. 94-95.
Gildemeister and Hoffmann 4 reported that on treatment with potassium perman-
ganate "carlina oxide" is quantitatively oxidized to benzoic acid.
Properties. The following properties have been reported by Gildemeister

5
and Hoffmann:
boo
20 167-168 an
d}? 1.066 nD 1.586
702 FURAN DERIVATIVES
On ozonolysis "carlina oxide," according to Oilman, Van Ess and Burt-
6
ner, yields phenylacetic acid.
"Carlina oxide" was synthesized by Pfau, Pictet, Plattner and Susz, 7 and
by Paul. 8
Use. "Carlina oxide" is not used in our industries.
1
Ber. 39 (1906), 726; 42 (1909), 2355.
2
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 55 (1933), 3461.
4
6
Ibid.
/. Am. Chem.
Soc. 56 (1933), 3461.
7
Helv. Chim. Ada 18 (1935), 935.
8
Compt. rend. 202 (1936), 854.
Clausenan
Rao and Subramaniam 1

first found in the oil derived from the leaves
of Clausena willdcnowii (fam. Rutaccae) as main constituents three sub-
stances containing the furan ring, viz., a-clausenan CioIIÔ, di-a-clauscnan
C2oIl2 4 O 2 and 0-clausenan CioHi 4 0.
,
In a subsequent investigation these authors 2 isolated 7-clausenan from the

same botanical but originating from a different locality. However, in this
variety, the a- isomer was absent. The 7- compound has the odor of unripe
mangoes; its formula has been reported as CioHi 2 O.

a-Clausenan is a colorless liquid of lemon-like odor having these properties:
b 684 178
dlo 0.912
nj> 1 .4752
The a- compound yields an adduct with maleic anhydride m. 85 C
the hydrated dibasic acid derived therefrom melts at 98

Di-a-clausenan is a light yellow viscous liquid, apparently a polymeride of
a-clausenan, which readily oxidizes and shows the color reaction of Lieber-
mann. H 4 Fe(CN) 6 and H 3 Fe(CN) 6 can be used for the purification and es-
timation of a-clausenan.
Pure /3-clausenan has these properties:
b 50 96-97 M? +30'
dig 0.8805 ng* 1.4681
df 0.8768
The acetate derived therefrom has been reported as b 32 105, d|o 0.9481,
and nf? 1.4672.
FURAN DERIVATIVES 703
The y- isomer does not react with H4Fe(CN)e and yields a tetrahydro de-
rivative. It is described as follows:
b 50 103-104 [a]??
dig 0.9089 n?? 1.4739
1
Proc. Indian Acad. Sci. Al (1934), 189. Chem. Abstracts 29 (1935), 1209. Proc. Indian
Acad. Sci. A2 (1935), 574. Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 2563.
2
Proc. Indian Acad. Sci. 3A (1936), 31.
XL OXIDES
Linalool Monoxide
2,3-Epoxy-2,6-dimethyl-7-octen-6-ol. Epoxylinalool
H3 C
C - O
CH .
CII 2 -
OH
CH 2 C CH=CH2
Occurrence. Schimmel & Co. 1 first observed this monoxide in Mexican

linaloe oil where it probably is formed by aerial oxidation of linalool while
still in the tree. Naves 2 found that epoxylinalool occurs free or as ester in
oil of lavandin, free in oil of shiu, the content ranging from 0.5 to 4.2 per
cent. The structural formula of this oxide originally postulated by Schim-

mel & Co. was recently modified by Naves and Bachmann 3 who found it to
be 2,3-epoxy-2,6-dimethyl-7-octen-6-ol.
4
Isolation. According to Naves, the acetate of epoxylinalool is separated quanti-
tatively from the acetates of accompanying alcohols by the preparation of its hydro-
ferrocyanic acid complex Ci2H2oC>3,H4[Fe(CN)2].
Identification. determination of the physicochemical properties. After months
By
of standing with phenylisocyanate, natural linalool monoxide forms a phenylurethane
m. 59-60, from (1) petroleum ether and (2) alcohol. The acetate of this oxide:
b 4 60-65, and the benzoatc: b^
157-160.
Properties. Linalool monoxide is an oil possessing a musty odor reminis-

cent of both camphor and fenchyl alcohol. Schimmel & Co. 5
reported these
properties:
b. 193-194 dJi 0.9431-0.9442

b 6 -7 71-73.5 OD -5 25' to -5 46'
b4 G3-65 nf? 1.45191-1.45221
Naves and Bachmann 6

found the following properties for epoxylinalool:
b 3 .5 53-53.5 [] D -5 51'
df 0.9439 nf? 1.45225
Use. As such, this oxide is not used in our industries.

1
Ber. Schimmel &
Co., Oct. (1912), 80. Ibid. 1231.
2 Helv. Chim. Acta 28 (1945), 1231. 6
Ber. Schimmel &
Co., Oct. (1912), 80.
8
Ibid. 1227. Helv. Chim. Acta 28 (1945), 1227.
707
708 OXIDES
1,8-Cineole
("Eucalyptol")
Mol. Weight 154.24
l ; 8-Oxido-p-menthane. 1,8-Epoxy-p-men thane. "Cajuputol"
CH 3
HC
2 CH 2
HC
3 CH 3
Occurrence. 1,8-Cineole occurs in numerous essential oils, in fact Gana-

l
pathi has pointed out in his survey of natural products that cineole occurs
in 260 volatile oils being exceeded in numbers only by cx-pinene. In several
of these it forms the main constituent. Thus the oils from certain eucalyptus
species contain from 30-70 per cent 1,8-cineole; in one, the Eucalyptus poly-
bractea, a content of 92 per cent is reported by Berry and Swanson; 2 in caju-
put oil, about 40 per cent; niaouli oil, 35-60 per cent; laurel leaf oil, about 50
per cent. Cineole occurs also in oil of cardamom, ginger root, spike lavender,
rosemary, certain types of Ocimum, Artemesia and Alpina, and in many other
essential oils.
Isolation. 1,8-Cineole can be separated from essential oils by several methods:

(1) If the oil contains a high percentage of cineole, this anhydride may be isolated
by first fractionating the oil and by cooling the fraction b. 170-180 to a low tempera-
ture. Cineole can thus be obtained in crystalline and almost pure form.
(2) 1,8-Cineole forms addition compounds with halogen acids which can be decom-
posed by the action of water. With hydrogen chloride in ligroine solution, cineole
yields the addition compound (CioHisOVHCl. This addition compound is of limited
use, however, as it is soluble in several constituents of essential oils. The hydro-
bromide, CioHisO HBr, prepared from hydrogen bromide and cineole, is but sparingly
soluble in organics and thus serves to identify this oxide in mixtures. For the prepa-
ration of the hydrogen bromide compound Wallach et al. 8 recommended diluting the
fraction b. 175-180 of the essential oil in question with an equal volume of petroleum
ether, and saturating the solution at low temperature with dry hydrogen bromide.
The crystalline white precipitation of the addition compound CioHisO HBr is filtered
off under suction, and washed with petroleum ether. From this compound m. 56-57
cineole may be regenerated by the action of water.
The nature of these addition products has been studied by Muller * who found them
to be solvates CioHisO' -HX, not oxonium salts [CioHi 8 OH]X.
(3) With resorcinol, 1,8-cineole forms an addition compound
OXIDES 709
m. 80-85, from which cineole can be regenerated. This reaction may serve for the
separation of cineole from essential oils, provided the cineole content is sufficiently
high; otherwise, the oil must first be fractionated.
For this purpose, according to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 5 the cineole-containing
fraction is thoroughly mixed with the same or the double volume of a 50% resorcinol
solution. Occasionally the addition compound will form only after a few crystals of
cineole-resorcinol have been added. After formation, the crystalline mass is filtered
off on a suction filter, pressed between filter paper, and decomposed with alkali. The
cineole-resorcinol compound crystallizes in the form of needles which are readily soluble
in alcohol, ether and benzene, but only sparingly soluble in petroleum ether and water.
Cineole-resorcinol is considerably more stable than the crystalline addition compound
of cineole and phosphoric acid CioHisO -HaPO^ a complex much used in the past for
the determination of cineole in essential oils or mixtures, and still employed to isolate
this cineole where its 1,4-isomer is a contaminant. 6 Yet, cineole-resorcinol, too, de-
composes on exposure to air, and more readily in vacuo, with vaporization of cineole
so that only resorcinol remains. Decomposition of the cineole-resorcinol compound
takes place also on heating with water or with petroleum ether, even on washing of
the compound with water or with petroleum ether. According to Baeyer and Villiger, 7
cineole-resorcinol may be obtained dry and well crystallized by recrystallization of 1
part resorcinol from 10 parts cineole.
The compound (CioHisO^ CelleC^ possesses a melting point of 80-85 (Baeyer
and Villiger). Bellucci and Grassi 8 determined the melting point of CioHisO -CeHeC^
as 89.
The reaction of cineole with resorcinol can be used for the quantitative assay of
9
cineole.
(4) With forms an addition compound CioHisO-CyllsO, f.p. 56.3
o-cresol, cineole
(based on a pure o-cresol f.p. 30.95 and a cineole of f.p. 1.3) according to Berry and
Swanson, from which compound cineole can be regenerated.
10
This type of reaction with phenols forms the basis of several industrial methods for
the isolation of cineole. 11 12 13 14 The o-cresol compound in particular has been inves-
- ' '
17
tigated by Cocking, Allan, Penfold and Morrison, Berry, Reclaire and Spoelstra,
16 16 18 19
Reed, and Berry and Swanson as a method for the quantitative assay
20 21 22
Sissons,
of cineole. It is official in the British Pharmacopoeia of 1932.
For the details regarding the quantitative assay of cineole, see Vol. I, Chapter 4,
Identification. 1,8-Cineole can be characterized by a number of derivatives, chiefly
addition compounds formed with cineole and numerous chemicals:
(1) By the iodol derivative CioHisO -C^^N, m. 112. According to Hirschsohn
"
this compound is formed readily if a few drops of the oil in question are warmed with
a little iodol. In case large quantities of cineole are present the crystalline addition
compound will separate quickly. According to Earle, 24 a solution of 1 part of cineole
in 20 to 30 parts of phellandrene will require a half hour for the addition compound to
separate. After recrystallization from alcohol or benzene the compound melts at
112 (Bertram and Walbaum 25
).
(2) By compound of 1,8-cineole and hydrogen bromide CioHisO-HBr,

the addition
m. 56-57 (Wallach and Gildemeister).
(3) By the addition of aromatic hydroxy compounds to cineole.
Those of resorcinol have been previously mentioned in connection with
and o-cresol
isolation and continue to be used widely. Wasicky and Gmach 26 prefer the addition
complex with resorcinol for identification in histo- and micro-chemical methods. The
pure resorcinol CioHisO CeH 6 O2 solvate melts at 89 (Bellucci and Grassi). The
carefully prepared o-cresol complex has a f.p. 56.3 (Berry and Swanson). A melting
710 OXIDES
point of 57 on a product crystallized from petroleum ether has been reported by
Potter and Williams, 27 and Morgan and Pettet. 28 A
rather wide selection of these
addition products is offered in the summary of Miiller, and in publications of Dodge, 30
26
and Morgan and Pettet. 31

(4) On
oxidation with hot potassium permanganate 1,8-cineole gives a racemic
dibasic acid, viz., cineolic acid CioHieOB, m. 204-206 (Rupe and Ronus). 32 When
digested with acetic anhydride or distilled under reduced pressure, cineolic acid is
converted, according to Wallach, into an anhydride m. 77-78.
33
(5) A number of characteristic qualitative color reactions have been developed by

Ekkert. 34
Properties. 1,8-Cineole is a colorless, syrupy oil with an odor suggestive

of camphor, and a pungent taste. The following properties of the inactive
liquid from commercial production have been reported by Gildemeister and
Hoffmann: 35
m. 1.0-1.5 d}S 0.928-0.930
Cong.pt. +1 ng> 1.454-1.461
b 764 176-177
Sol. Soluble in 12 vol. of 50% alcohol, in 1.5 to
2 vol. of 70% alcohol. Sparingly solu-
ble in cold water, even less soluble in
warm water
36
Berry and Swanson indicated the following properties for carefully puri-
fied cineole:
f.p. +1.3 D
d}jj:i 0.9294 nf? 1.4575
quite stable and can be distilled over metallic sodium with-

1,8-Cineole is
out undergoing any change. As pointed out, cineole readily forms addition
compounds. It is not attacked by the ordinary reducing agents.
Use. used very widely in pharmaceutical preparations, applied
Cineole is
internally and locally. Internally, cineole serves as a stimulating expecto-

rant in cases of chronic bronchitis, etc. Locally, cineole is a mild anesthetic
and antiseptic in the treatment of inflammatory conditions. Cineole, fur-
thermore, is used in room sprays, lotions, and in all kinds of cosmetic prepa-
rations, etc.
1
Current Science 6 (1937), 19.
3
Liebigs Ann. 226 (1884), 294; 246 (1888), 280.
4
Riechstoff Ind. 4 (1929), 143, 158.
6
6
Rheinischc Kampfer Fabrik Ges. British Patent No. 317,757, Aug 21, 1928.
7
Ber. 36 (1902), 1209.
8
Gazz. chim. Hal. 43, No. 2 (1913), 725.
9
Gildemeister and Hoffmann, "Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 767.
OXIDES 711
10
11
Rheinische Kampfcr Fabrik Ges. German Patent No. 585,162, Sept. 29, 1933.
12
Newport Ind., U. S. Patent No. 2,090,620, Aug. 24, 1937.
13
Hercules Powder Co., U. S. Patent No. 2,315,986, April 6, 1943.
"Hercules Powder Co., U. S. Patent No. 2,353,319, July 11, 1944.
16
Pharm. J. 105 (1920), 81. Perfumery Essential Oil Record 11 (1920), 281; 15 (1924), 10;
18 (1927), 165, 254.
16
Chemist Druggist 107 (1927), 19, 515. Analyst 52 (1927), 276.
17
J. Proc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales 62 (1928), 72. Perfumery Essential Oil Record 19 (1928), 468.
18
Australasian J. Pharm. (1929), 203. Chem. Abstracts 23 (1929), 3302.
19
Ber. Afdeel. Handelsmuseum Ver. Koloniaal Inst., No. 54 (1930), 8. Chem. Abstracts 25
(1931), 2521.
20
Proc. Soc. Chem. 1ml., Victoria 32 (1932), 681.
21
22
Australian-New Zealand Assocn. Advancement Sci. Sydney Meeting, Aug. (1932), 15.
Perfumery Essential Oil Record 23 (1932), 371; 24 (1933), 224.
23
Pharm. Z. Russland 32 (1893), 49, 67. Cf. Gildemeistcr and Hoffmann, "Die Xtherischen
Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 665.
24
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 37 (1918), 274T.
26
Arch. Pharm. 235 (1897), 178.
Scientia Pharm. 6 (1934), 113.
27
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. 51 (1932), 59T.
28
64 (1935), 20T.
Ibid.
29
30
J. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 22 (1933), 20.
31
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 64 (1935), 22T.
32
Ber. 33 (1900), 3544. See also Rupc and Hirschmann, Helv. Chirn. Ada 16 (1933), 509.
33
Liebigs Ann. 268 (1890), 319.
34
Pharm. ZentralhallelS (1934), 145.
36
"Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. T, 663.
30
Tessaku Ikeda and Shosaburo Takeda, "A New Method for the Determination of
Linalool, Cineole and Terpineol," /. Chem. Soc. Japan 57 (1936), 442. Chem. Abstracts
30 (1936), 5907.
H. Rheinboldt and H. Stettiner, "The Power of Cineole to Combine with Organic
Iodides," Bol. faculdade filosofia, cienc. letras, Univ. Sao Paulo 14, Quimica, No. 1
(1942), 15. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 1474.
712 OXIDES
1,4-Cineole
1,4-Oxido-p-men thane. 1 ,4-Epoxy-p-men thane
CH3
C
H2 C
\
O
HoC CH 5
\C
CH
HC*
3U
f^LT
Olla
Occurrence. This oxide is not easily identified. Thus its occurrence in es-
sential oils was not established until Rao, Shintre and Simonsen 1 identified
it in oil of cubeb.
Isolation. By fractional distillation, separating the fraction bioo 109-112.

Identification. (1) On treatment with hydrogen chloride in glacial acetic acid
solution, 1,4-cineole yields terpinene dihydrochloride m. 52.
(2) When treated with hydrogen bromide in petroleum ether, 1,4-cineole gives no
precipitate, but is slowly converted into terpinene dihydrobromide m. 58-59.
(3) On
oxidation with potassium permanganate even in a hot solution, 1,4-cineole,
2
according to Wallach, only slowly yields among other products a sparingly soluble
acid m. 157, the constitution of which remains unknown.
Properties. The properties of 1,4-cineole differ considerably from those of

the 1,8-isomer. 1,4-Cineole possesses a camphoraceous odor; contrary to 1,8-
cineole, it does not congeal. Wallach and co-workers 2> 3
recorded these
properties:
b. 172-173 2 3
-
nj? 1.4479 2
2
d 18 0.9010 nD 1.4485 3
Use. 1,4-Cineole has not found any noteworthy use in the perfume and
flavor industries.
1
/. Soc. Chem. Ind. 47 (1928), 92T.
2
Liebigs Ann. 392 (1912), 62.
8
Ibid. 366 (1907), 204.
713
Mol. Weight 152.23
Occurrence.This oxide has not been found to occur in essential oils. It

is a by-product in the preparation of pinene nitrosochloride; it also forms on
heating piriol hydrate (sobrerol), etc.
Identification. (1) On treatment with bromine, pinol yields a crystalline dibromide,

viz., pinol dibromide m. 94.
(2) According to Wallach et al., pinol readily forms a bimolecular nitrosochloride
1
m. 116-120 (fast heating), which on storage passes into the monomolecular form
m. 131.
From the nitrosochloride several nitrolamines can be prepared, for example, the
nitrolpiperidine in. 154, or the nitrolbenzylamine m. 135-136.
Properties. Pinol is an oil possessing a pronounced camphoraceous odor.

Certain characteristics of the active as well as the inactive pinol have been
reported but the work still leaves much to be desired as regards complete de-
scription of samples examined. Wagner and Slawinski 2 gave a meager amount
of information on a product that was apparently the d- isomer (b752 183-184,
b22 77); while Dele"pine, Horeau and Grandperrin-Harispe
3
contributed a
few properties on a crude I- form ([]D 34 48', njf 1.473).
The following range of properties appears to describe the inactive pinol:
b. 183-184 1 20 0.9420 4
b, 4 7G-77 2 0.9530 *
1
1. 46949
4
1.47145
Use. Pinol is not used in our industries.
l
Liebigs Ann. 253
(1889), 261; 306 (1899), 278.
*Ber. 32 (1899), 2071; 27 (1894), 1644.
3
Ann. chim. [11], 18 (1943), 265.
4
Wallach, Liebigs Ann. 281 (1894), 148.
714 OXIDES
3
J-A -Caren-5,6-epoxide
Epoxycarene
3H 3
t/
C
\
HC C
3
)\ CII
/"'
CHa
Occurrence. The
modification of this oxide was identified by Penfold,
I-
Ramage and Simonsen 1 as main constituent in oil of Zicria smithii, in the

fraction bi 7 88-90.
Isolation. By fractional distillation, separating the fraction bi2 88-90, and remov-
ing traces of alcohol with 3,5-dinitrobenzoylchloride.
Identification. (1) The methods of identification are based on the conversion of the
epoxide into ketones by isomerization on heating. The semicarbazone which forms
in five days, after crystallization from methyl alcohol, melts at 192, [oêi 95 (in
pyridine, c
= 4.55). Repeated fractional crystallization gave one fraction in feathery
needles m. 192-194, [a]546i 70 (in pyridine, c = 3.46); another in well-formed
prisms m. 199.
(2) When
treated in the cold for five days with an aqueous solution of 2,4-dinitro-
3
phenylhydrazine sulfate, Z-A -caren-5,6-epoxide yields a 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone
mixture m. 145-147 which in alcoholic solution is separable into the sparingly soluble
a- isomer m. 192- 193 and the 0- product m. 165-166.
-A 3 -Caren-5,6-epoxide is a mobile oil of very pleasant odor.

Properties.
The afore-named authors reported these properties:
b 14 83-85 ng 1.4729
dif 0.9454 [R L ] D Obs. 44.63
H 5 46i -88 0' Calc. 43.03
Use. This oxide is not used in our industries.

1
J. Chem. Soc. (1939), 1496.
OXIDES 715
Ascaridole
Ci Hi 6 2 Mol. Weight 168.23
2-p-Menthene-l ,4-dioxide. l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-2-cyclohexene-l ,4-dioxide.

1 ,4-Peroxido-2-p-menthene
CH 3
C
H 2 C O CH
I I II
H2 C O CH
C
CII
Ascaridole, a powerful anthelmintic, is one of the most interesting com-

pounds occurring in essential oils.
Occurrence. Ascaridole the main constituent (65-70 per cent) of Ameri-
is
can wormseed oil (Chenopodium ambrosioidcs var. anthclminticum L.).
Isolation. By repeated fractional distillation of wormseed oil in vacuo, using the

fraction b$ 95-98. Paget likewise prepared a purified sample of this dioxide by
l
crystallization at 20.
Ascaridole does not yield any crystalline derivatives; it must, there-
Identification.
fore, be characterized by either of the following reactions :
(1) On oxidation with ferrous sulfate, ascaridole yields, aside from some isopropyl
alcohol, mainly a glycol which is not volatile with steam, viz., ascaridole glycol
CioHi 8 3 m. 62.5-64, b. 271-272, dig 1.0981, nf? 1.4796, [a] D
,
0. This glycol can
be characterized by its monobcnzoate m. 136-137, and by its dibenzoate m. 116.5-
117.5.
(2) On reduction with hydrogen, using palladium as catalyst, ascaridole yields,
according to Wallach, a terpinene-terpin (1,4-terpin) CioHi8(OH)2, m. 116-117.
2
This 1,4-terpin is optically inactive, and not identical with 1,8-terpin although they
have similar melting points. More recently Paget identified cis- 1,4-terpin by the
and prepared in 95% ethyl alcohol the mono-p-
catalytic hydrogenation of ascaridole
nitrobenzoate m. 117 and the di-p-nitrobenzoate m. 172 from this terpenic alcohol.
Quantitative Determination. Regarding the quantitative determination of

ascaridole, see Vol. I, Chapter 4, "The Examination and Analysis of Essen-
"
tial Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates. See also "Determination of Ascaridole
3
in Chenopodium by Cocking and Hymas.
Oil,"
Properties. Ascaridole is a somewhat viscid oil possessing a very peculiar,
most disagreeable odor and flavor.
716 OXIDES
The following properties have been reported
4
by Nelson, Schimmel & Co.,
6
6
and Paget:
m. 2 6
aD -414' 5
b 20 112-115 6
c$ +042' 4
b8 96-97 4
WD -2 18' 6
5 5
b4 -5 83 nf? 1.4769
4
dig 0.9985
6
d}| 1.0074
5
d}i 1.0079
Ascaridole cannot be distilled at atmospheric pressure; when heated to

130-150, it decomposes with explosive violence. When submitted to care-
ful heating to 150 an inert solvent, ascaridole is isomerized to ascaridole
in
glycol anhydride b 20 122-125, d 16 1.026, [] D -0 43'. From this anhy-

dride, ascaridole glycol can be prepared by hydration with dilute sulfuric
7
acid, according to Henry and Paget.
Ascaridole decomposed with explosive violence also by the action of sul-
is
furic, hydrochloric, nitric and phosphoric acids.

Use. Ascaridole is a powerful anthelmintic and serves in many medicinal
and veterinary preparations.
i/. Chem.Soc. (1938), 829.
2
Liebigs Ann. 392
(1912), 59.
Analyst 66 (1930), 180. Chem. Abstracts 24 (1930), 2833.
8
*/. Am. Chem. Soc. 33 (1911), 1406.

6
Ber. Schimmel &
Co., April (1908), 113. Chem. Zentr. I (1908), 1839.
6
J. Chem. Soc. (1938), 829.
7
J. Chem. Soc. 119 (1921), 1722.
A. Hal pern, "Ascaridole in Oil of Chenopodium," J. Amer. Pharm. Assocn. 37

(1948), 161.
Caryophyllene Oxide
Epoxy-dihydrocaryophyllene
Thestructural formula of caryophyllene oxide, like that of its parent sesqui-

terpene, caryophyllene, has not yet been fully established. In a recent pub-
l
lication Treibs suggested that in the synthesis of caryophyllene oxide the
oxygen attacks the cyclic double bond of the caryophyllene molecule. Treibs
2
readily prepared caryophyllene oxide in 80-85 per cent yield by oxidizing

caryophyllene with hydrogen peroxide, using pervanadic acid as a catalyzing
agent.
OXIDES 717
3
Occurrence. According to Treibs, caryophyllene oxide is of special inter-
estfrom the biological point of view, as it occurs in several essential oils
which contain caryophyllene. This sesquiterpene is probably the parent

substance of the oxide. By proper treatment (see below) the oxide can be
isolated in crystalline form from the sesquiterpene fraction of clove oil. The
4
crystalline sesquiterpene oxide isolated by Seidel, Miiller and Schinz a few
years ago, from undoubtedly identical with caryophyllene
oil of lavender, is
oxide. This compound probably occurs also in other essential oils which
contain caryophyllene. Analogous sesquiterpene oxides have not been ob-
served or isolated from, essential oils probably for the simple reason that
in,
no adequate characteristic derivatives are known.
suggested the following method for the isolation of natural

5
Isolation. Treibs
caryophyllene oxide from oil of cloves:
Eliminate the main portion of the hydrocarbons from kg. of the sesquiterpene
1
fraction, of clove oil, bg 100-170, by fractional distillation in vacuo, and by shaking

with methyl alcohol containing 2% water. From
the soluble portions separate the
alcohols via the boric esters, and then remove the ketones via the semicarbazones.
The portion that is separated from the semicarbazones by steam distillation is heated
with sodium and fractionated in a Widmer flask at a pressure of 7 mm. The fraction
b: 138-140 with solid caryophyllene oxide. After
will crystallize after inoculation
drying on a clay plate and recrystallization from methyl alcohol the caryophellene
oxide will melt at 64.
Identification. By determination of the physicochemical properties.
6
Properties. Treibs reported these properties of caryophyllene oxide:
m. 64 <$ -68 0'
df 0.9658 nf? 1.4958
The oxide is stable against oxidizing agents. It reacts readily with Grig-
nard's reagent.
7
Naves investigated a concentrated extract of clove buds (benzene as sol-
vent) for the presence of caryophyllene, and found that the extract did not
contain any caryophyllene, but epoxy-dihydrocaryophyllene (the caryophyl-
lene oxide of Treibs). Steam distilling the clove buds after they had been
extracted, Naves obtained a volatile oil, composed chiefly of caryophyllene.
The not a natural, biological product of the clove buds,
latter, therefore, is
but must have originated under the influence of boiling water.
The epoxy-dihydrocaryophyllene observed by Naves in the extract of
clove buds had these properties:
m. 63-64 [] D -70 2'
bi.s 114-117 njb 1.49564
df 0.966
Use. Caryophyllene oxide, as such, is not used in our industries.

718 OXIDES
1
Chem. Ber. 80, No. 1 (1947), 56.
*Ibid. Cf. Ber. 72 (1939), 1194. Z. angew. Chem. 62 (1939), 698.
3
Chem. Ber. 80, No. 1 (1947), 56.
4
Helv. Chim. Ada 27 (1944), 738.
6
Chem. Ber. 80, No. 1 (1947), 56.
6
Ibid.
7
Helv. Chim. Acta 31 (1948), 378.
Dicitronelloxide
C 2 oH 34 O Mol. Weight 290.47
Occurrence. This oxide was found by Spornitz 1

in the high boiling frac-
tions of Java citronclla oil.

Identification. On
passing a current of dry hydrogen chloride gas through an
ethereal solution of dicitronelloxide, a monohydrochloride m. 107.5 is obtained.
2
Properties. Dicitronelloxide is a viscid oil of faint odor. Spornitz re-
bi 2 182-183 aD -40'
dg 0.9199 nD 1.49179
Quite probably this compound is closely related to others of like properties

obtained by the action of dehydrating agents upon citronellal (or linalool)
[cf. Barbier and Leser,
3
Semmler and Jonas, 4 Ono and Takeda, 5 Kimura, 6
Meyer, and Horiuti, Otuki and Okuda ].
7 8
There are indications that this oxide is one of the ethers of pulegol.
Use. Dicitronelloxide, as such, has not attained any importance, but the
high boiling fractions of Java citronella oil containing this oxide are widely
used as fixatives in perfumes, cosmetics, soaps, and compounds serving for
the scenting of technical products.
1
Ber. 47 (1914), 2478.
2
Ibid.
*Compt. rend. 124 (1897), 1310.
4
Ber. 47 (1914), 2079.
6
Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan 2 (1927), 16. Chem. Zentr. I (1927), 2071.
6
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 63 (1932), 497. Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan 10 (1935), 330.
7
Deut. Parfiimerieztg. 17 (1931), 434. Chimie &
Industrie 27 (1932), 879.
8
XII. COMPOUNDS CONTAINING NITROGEN AND SULFUR
Introduction. Plant materials which contain substantial quantities of al-
buminous or related matter, on distillation, often yield nitrogenous or sul-
furous compounds. This holds true of fresh herbs, and particularly of seeds.
The more volatile compounds such as ammonia, trimethylamine, hydrocyanic
acid and hydrogen sulfide escape in vapor form during distillation. Small
quantities may dissolve in the distillation waters or, according to Gildemeis-
ter and Hoffmann, 1 may react with other constituents of the essential oil.
Development of ammonia takes place during the distillation, for example,
of pepper, cubebs, pimenta, etc., while bases of narcotic odor have been ob-
served in the case of caraway and other seeds of the family Umbelliferae.
Nitrogen-containing esters (methyl anthranilate, dimethyl anthranilate,
and damascenine) are described under "Esters. "
i
A. CYANIDES
Hydrocyanic Acid
CHN Mol. Weight 27.03
Prussic acid. Hydrogen cyanide. Formonitrile
H C=N
Occurrence. Hydrocyanic acid occurs in numerous plants. According to
1
Rosenthaler, this acid seems to play a considerable role in the synthesis or in
the degradation of albuminous matter. In volatile oils hydrocyanic acid is
frequently associated with benzaldehyde, as, for example, in bitter almond
oil or in the volatile oil derived from crushed peach or apricot kernels. In
these cases benzaldehyde and hydrocyanic acid exist in the plant material
originally not as such but in the form of a glucoside as, for instance, amygdalin,
accompanied by the enzyme emulsin. After reduction of the cell walls by
crushing, milling, etc., and on digestion with luke-warm water, the enzyme
can get in contact with the glucoside, splitting it into glucose, benzaldehyde,
and hydrocyanic acid
H
C2 oH27 NOn + 2H2 -> 2C 6 H 12 O 6 -f C 6 H 5 O=O + HCN
Many similar glucosides yielding hydrocyanic acid occur in nature for in-
stance, prunasin, sambunigrin, prulaurasin, gynocardin, laurocerasin, etc.
721
722 COMPOUNDS CONTAINING NITROGEN AND SULFUR
but space does not permit even citing the voluminous literature dealing with
this topic.
Isolation, Hydrocyanic acid can be isolated from an essential oil by fractional

distillation, a rather dangerous procedure because of the high toxicity of this gaseous
substance. In most cases it will, therefore, be sufficient merely to identify hydrocyanic
acid in a volatile oil.
Identification. There exist two well-known qualitative tests for the identification
of hydrocyanic acid:
(1) The Prussian Blue Test:
Thoroughly crush the plant material, macerate it with hike-warm water, acidify
with dilute sulfuric acid, and steam distill the mash for several hours. Shake a small
quantity of the distillate with a few drops of sodium hydroxide solution, add a few
drops of ferrous sulfato containing ferric oxide, again shake thoroughly and acidify
with dilute hydrochloric acid. After the precipitation of ferriferrous oxide (FesO-i)
has dissolved, a characteristic precipitate of Prussian Blue will be noticed, if the mix-
ture to be investigated contains hydrocyanic acid.
(2) The Sulfocyanate Test:
Add 3 drops of potassium hydroxide solution and 10 drops of yellow ammonium
sulfide solution to a few cc. of a dilute aqueous solution of the substance to be inves-
tigated. Evaporate to dryness on a water bath, dissolve the residue in 5 cc. of water,
filter to remove the sulfur, and add 1 drop of ferric chloride solution. blood red A
color will appear if hydrocyanic acid is present.
Thetechniques, however, for detection, identification, and analysis of hydrocyanic
acid are so varied and numerous that the worker should consult the literature in con-
nection with the demands of his specialized problem and the facilities of the labora-
tories rather than heed any generalized recommendation in this connection.
Properties. Hydrocyanic acid at room temperature

a gas of characteris- is
tic odor typical of bitter almonds. The acid is highly poisonous and should
be smelled only in extreme dilution. Miscible with water or alcohol, easily
soluble in ether. Hydrocyanic acid is a very weak acid which reddens litmus
paper only faintly. It burns with a violet flame.
2
Tromp, Coates, Hinkel and Angel, 3 and Peters 4 reported these properties
of hydrocyanic acid which have not been materially altered in the course of
numerous subsequent investigations.
m. - 14 to- 15 2
d 20 0.6874 4
3 4
b. 25.7 (corr.) nf? 1.2619
5
For further data see Beilstein, U. S. Dispensatory,
6
and International
Critical Tables.
Use. Because of its great toxicity, hydrocyanic acid cannot be used in
any proportion in perfumes or flavors.
*
Biochem. Z. 134 (1923), 215, 225.
2
Rec. trav. chim. 41 (1922), 286.
*J. Chem.Soc. (1928), 542.
4
Ann. phys. 86 (1928), 508.
[4],
6
"Handbuch der Organischen Chemie," Vol. II, p. 35.
6
24th Ed., 1942, 550.
CYANIDES 723
Allyl Cyanide
C4 H5N Mol. Weight 67.09
Vinyl acetonitrile. Crotonic acid nitrile
CH 2 =CH-CH2 -C=N
Traces of allyl cyanide, according to Gildemeister and Hoff-
Occurrence.
mann, always occur in mustard oils. The presence of larger quantities in a
1
synthetic mustard oil is probably the result of careless manufacturing and

due to the degradation of allyl mustard oil CH 2 =CII CH 2 N=C==S.
According to Will and Korner, treatment of
2
Identification. ally! cyanide with
alcoholic potassium hydroxide yields crotonic acid m. 72.
Properties. Will and Korner, 3 Rinne and Tollens, 4 and Bruylants 5

re-
ported these properties of allyl cyanide:
3 5
b. 119 -
(corr.)
4
dis 0.8351
5
1 .40602
Because of its low specific gravity, larger quantities of allyl cyanide in a

synthetic mustard oil can be recognized by a corresponding lowering of the
specific gravity.
Use. Allyl cyanide is used very little, if at all, in our industries.
i
"Die Xtherischon Die," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 672.
*Liebigs Ann. 125 (1863), 273.
3
Ibid., 272.
*Ibid. 159 (1871), 105.
6
Bull. soc. chim. Bdg. 31 (1922), 175. Chem. Abstracts 17 (1923), 1427.
Benzyl Cyanide
C8 H 7 N Mol. Weight 117.14
Phenylacetic acid nitrile. Phenacetonitrile
Occurrence.Benzyl cyanide occurs in oil of Lepidium sativum, according

to Hofmann, 1 and Gadamer; 2 probably also in oil of neroli bigarade.
Identification. (1) Hydrolysis of benzyl cyanide yields phenylacetic acid m. 76-
76.5, according to Hofmann.
3
4
(2) Weddige reported that partial hydrolysis of benzyl cyanide gives phenyl-
acetamide m. 154-155.
Properties. Benzyl cyanide is an oil for which Adams and Thai, 6 von
6 8
Schneider, Perkin,
7
and Walden reported^ these properties:
6 7
m. -24.0 (corr.) d|i 1.0154
b. 233-234 7
(corr.) d\l 1.0214 7
s
b 38 135-140 d| 1.0296 7
bio 115M20 05 no
5
1.52105 8
Use. Benzyl cyanide is used on a very small scale in the compounding of

certain floral scents.
7 (1874), 1293.
.
*Arch. Pharm. 237 (1899), 111.

*Ber. 7 (1874), 518, 1293.
4
J. prakt. Chern. [2], 7 (1873), 100.
6
"Organic Syntheses," Coll. Vol. I, 107 (Wiley, 1941).
6
Z. physik. Chem. 22 (1897), 233.
7
J. Chem. Soc. 69 (1896), 1206.
8
Z. physik. Chem. 69 (1907), 394.
Phenylethyl Cyanide
C9 H9 N Mol. Weight 131.17
Hydrocinnamic acid nitrile. Phenylpropionic acid nitrile
;H 2 -CH 2 -C==N
According to Hofmann
l
Occurrence. this nitrile is the principal constitu-
ent of the oil derived from Nasturtium officinale.

Identification. On
hydrolysis with dilute alkali, phenylethyl cyanide is converted
into phenylpropionic acid (hydrocinnamic acid) m. 47.
Properties. The
following properties have been reported by Hofmann,
2
and Grignard, Bellet and Courtot: 3

2
b. 261 (corr.)
3
b8 114-118
2
di 1.0014
AMINO AND IMINO COMPOUNDS 725
Use. Phenylethyl cyanide is used on a very small scale in the compound-

ing of certain floral scents.
1
Ber. 7 (1874), 520.
*Ibid.
3
Ann. chim. [9], 4 (1915), 43.
B. AMINO AND IMINO COMPOUNDS
Indole
C8 H 7 N Mol. Weight 117.14
1-Benzazole. Bonzopyrrole
CH*
/
1
<
*^'V>JLl
\ f*i TT f
V
1
H
(I)/"
NH
I II
(Indolenine formula)
Aside from the formula the desmotropic structure II should also be con-
I,
sidered. The reactive methylene group contained in II explains the behavior

of indole in many reactions.
1
Occurrence. Hesse an important, although minute
identified indole as
constituent of jasmine flower oil. Since then indole has been found also in
neroli bigarade oil, and in several other oils derived from flowers, such as
jonquil, wallflower, Robinia pscudacacia, Ilcvea brasiliensis Muell., Randia

formosana Jacq., sweet orange, lemon, lime, mandarin, grapefruit, and many
all-night blooming varieties of plants. Indole probably occurs in nature as
a complex compound which, according to Hesse, 2 readily decomposes on
steam distillation. Moreover, Sack 3 noted the occurrence of indole in cer-
tain photosensitive flowers, whereas Cerighelli 4 reported observations, prin-
cipally in connection with jasmine, to the effect that light often releases in-
dole, hence that the flowers but not the buds yield this nitrogenous compound;
furthermore that isolates by enfleurage give the highest percentage of yield in
indole.
A recent extensive review by van Order and Lindwall
5
relative to indole
also discloses the widespread occurrence of this compound in several natural
derivatives other than flower oils.
and Quantitative Determination. Indole is isolated conven-

Isolation, Identification
iently and determined quantitatively by the preparation of its picrate which crystallizes
in the form of long, lustrous, red needles, darkening at 160 and melting to a black
liquid at 176-177. Hesse recommended the following procedure:
8
Add about 10% of picric acid to the oil and heat the mixture to 50-60 until the
precipitate which is first formed on the addition of the picric acid dissolves. On cool-
ing, an abundant precipitate of indole picrate will separate. Add a large excess of
petroleum ether and remove by nitration the crystalline precipitate which consists of
indole picrate, and the larger quantity of uncombined picric acid. According to the
indole picrate content, the color is more or less red. Wash the crystalline precipitate
on the filter repeatedly with petroleum ether. Dissolve the crystals thus purified in
ammonia or soda solution with gentle heating. Cool the solution, extract it with ether,
remove the ether by distillation, and steam distill the residue of the ether solution.
The indole present in the flower oil is thereby obtained quantitatively and in an almost
pure state.
Numerous other useful methods of assay have been reported but most of these seem
to rely upon the Ehrlich reaction with p-dimethylamino benzaldehyde. This is the
basis of the technique of Seidelin, 7 the photoelectric method of Allsopp, 8 and that of
10
King, Flynn and Gowanloch, and of Jacobs and Pincus.
9
u
However, Herter and Foster prepared the insoluble blue complex of indole with
sodium jS-naphthoquinone-monosulfonate, the basis of a quantitative method for
identifying not only indole, but also for separating this nitrogen compound from
skatole.
Numerous colorimetric tests have been reported for indole. According to Frieber, 12
the sodium nitroprusside reaction is the most specific, being given only by the free
indole nucleus, while the Ehrlich reaction with p-dimethylamino benzaldehyde, the
vanillin, and the naphthoquinone reactions require the 3- carbon to be free, and the
Salkowski reaction only requires the 2- carbon to be free.
Several workers have considered the numerous color reactions of indole, among
them: Nelson, 13 Fellers and Clough, 14 Czapalla, 15 Salkowski, 16 Cambi et al., 17 and
Blumenthal. 18 From their comments it would appear that a modified Ehrlich test is
19
still preferred; according to Fellers and Clough, it is accurate to about 1 part of indole
per 25 millions of solution. These authors describe this test as follows:

Add Yi cc. of p-dimethylamino benzaldehyde solution to 5 cc. of a specially prepared
extract, followed by hydrochloric acid (6 parts concentrated acid to 2 parts of
1 cc. of
water). Place the test tube containing the mixed solutions in boiling water for 20 min.,
shake vigorously, place in ice water for half a minute and extract with chloroform
which will be colored red if indole is present.
A number of pigments and inorganic have been reported which possess a
salts
limited use either as means of isolation and/or characterization. Franklin 20 pre-
pared the Ca, Mg, Ag, Na, and K salts; Mingoia those of Sb; Saccardi arid Giuliani 22
21
salts of Hg. Salts of gold have been described by Saccardi, 23 and a Pd complex by
Saccardi and Delavigne. 24 Xanthydrol, according to Fearon, 25 forms a purple pigment
with indole that is specific for this compound.
Indole forms a number of derivatives that may serve for identification. The follow-
ing should be mentioned:
(1) Ill-Complex of indole and 4,6-dinitro-o-cresol, orange yellow needles, m. 119-
2
120 (Wain ).
(2) Indole, formaldehyde, and dimethylamine react to form gramine (/3-dimethyl-

amino methyl indole) in nearly quantitative yield (Kuhn and Stein 27 ), in. 134, picrate
m. 141.5. The corresponding /3-diethylamino methyl indole melts at 1 65, the picrate
at 124, and the /3-N-piperidyl methyl indole at 161.
(3) Trinitroxylene indole m. 126, yellow (Skraup and Eisemann
28
).
(4) Di-indyl m. 302-303 and monoisonitroso di-indyl m. 253 (Madelung ").

Dinitroso di-indyl m. 160-162, mononitroso di-indyl m. 121-122 (Schmitz-Dumont,
Hamann and Geller 30).
AMINO AND IMINO COMPOUNDS 727
Properties.Indole crystallizes in the form of white, lustrous leaflets which,

on exposure to air and light, soon darken. The odor is very powerful, per-
sistent, disagreeable, fecal, especially if the synthetic product is not sufficiently
purified. If pure and strongly diluted, indole has a flowery, heavy odor, no
longer disagreeable.
31 32 33
According to Tyson, Ciamician and Zatti, Kryuk, and Gluud, 34 indole
possesses these properties:
HI. 52-53 31,32,33,34

b 7 62.2 253-254 3 * (corr.)
b 27 142-144 31
31
bio 128
31
b5 121
Indolevolatile with steam, soluble in hot water, easily soluble in alcohol,

is
ether, chloroform or in hydrocarbons. Attention should be given to the fact

that indole solutions discolor by turning red.
Use. Indole is widely used, but in traces only, for the compounding of
floral bouquets such as jasmine, orange flower, gardenia, lilac, and in per-
fumes of heavy, oriental type.
>Bcr. 32 (1899), 2612.

*Ibid. 33 (1900), 1587; 34 (1901), 2929; 37 (1904), 1457.
'Pharm. Wcekblad 48 (1911), 306.
4
Compt. rend. 179 (1924), 1193.
6
Chem. Reviews 30 (1942), 69.
6
Ber. 32 (1899), 2612.
T
J. Ilyg. 11 (1911), 118.
8
Biochem. J. 36 (1941), 965.
9
* Science 102 (1945), 204.
" /. Biol. Chem. 2 (1907), 267.
u Centr. bald. Parasitenk. 87 (1921), 254. Chem. Abstracts 17 (1923), 1655.
"/. Biol. Chem. 24 (1916), 527.
"J. Bact. 10 (1925), 105.
16
Z. Fleisch-u. Milchhyg. 50 (1940), 110. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 4412.
16
Biochem. Z. 97 (1919), 123; 103 (1920), 185.
i?
Gazz. chim. ital. 61 (1931), 11.
18
Biochem. Z. 19 (1909), 521.
vj.Bacl. 10 (1925), 105.
20
/. Phys. Chem. 24 (1920), 81.
21
Gazz. chim. ital. 62 (1932), 343.
22
Chim. iruL agricolt. biol. 11 (1935), 219. Chem. Abstracts 29 (1935), 7080.
23
24
Gazz. chim. ital. 67 (1937), 611.
26
Analyst 69 (1944), 122. See also Arreguine, Rev. univ. nacl. Cdrdoba (Arg.) 31 (1944),
1710. Rev. asoc. bioquim. Argentina 12 (1945), 3. Chem. Abstracts 39 (1945), 3223.
26
Ann. Applied Biol. 29 (1942), 301.
27
Ber. 70 (1937), 567.
28
Liebigs Ann. 449 (1926), 12.
29
Ibid. 406 (1914), 58.
"Ibid. 604(1933), 8.
81
"Organic Syntheses," 23 (1943), 42, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
82
Gazz. chim. ital. 20 (1890), 86.
83
84
Ber. 48 (1915), 423.
Joseph Michelman, "Indole Derived from a New Source, Its Uses in Perfumery,"
Am. Perfumer 20 (1925), 141.
H. Stanley Redgrove, "Indole" (review), Perfumery Essential Oil Record 20 (1929),
161.
R. E. Duggan and L. W. Strasburger, "Indole in Shrimp," J. Assocn. Official Agr.
Chem. 29, No. 2, (1946), 177.
Skatole
C9 H9 N Mol. Weight 131.17
/3-Methylindole. 3-Methylindole
CH a
Occurrence. Walbaum l
identified skatole in civet, a glandular excretion of
the civet cat; it occurs also in the wood of Ccltis reticulosa, C. durandii, and,
according to Sack, in the wood of certain Ncctandra species. The presence
2
of skatole in human excrements as a degradation product of albuminous sub-

stances has been known for a long time.
Isolation. Through the picrate (see "Indole").

Identification. Skatole can be characterized by several methods.
(1) A pine splinter impregnated with an alcoholic solution of skatole on the addition
of concentrated hydrochloric acid will be colored deep red, then violet.
(2) With a solution of p-dimethylamino benzaldehyde, skatole develops a blue-
violet color, according to Blumenthal. 3
(3) Gnezda reports that skatole reacts with potassium ferrocyanide and
4
98%
sulfuric acid in the absence of moisture to give a violet colored solution.
(4) Skatole yields a hydrochloride 2C 9 H 9 N-HC1, m. 167-168 (uncorr.), accord-
5
ing to Wenzing.
(5) The picrate crystallizes from benzene in the form of dark red lustrous crystals
melting at 172-173 to a dark brown liquid. Mulliken suggested this method:
6
Suspend 0.05 g. of skatole in 5 cc. of boiling water, add 4 cc. of a saturated picric
acid solution and heat to boiling. Set aside until cooled, filter, and wash with 2 cc.
of water. Dissolve in 10 cc. of boiling water and allow to stand overnight. Wash the
precipitate with 1 cc. of water and dry on a porous plate for 15 min. at 100. Recrys-
taliize from benzene.
Oddo and Mingoia 7 prepared the picrate m. 170-171 from concentrated solutions
of the reactants in alcohol; these authors noted that this derivative is transformed, on
exposure to air, to a lemon yellow substance m. 216-217.
Properties. Skatole a substance of extremely disagreeable, fecal and

is
persistent odor. Skatole crystallizes in the form of white lustrous leaflets.

SULFIDES 729
8
According to Fischer, and Cornforth and Robinson, skatole has these prop-
9
erties:
9
m. 93
8
b 755 265-266
Quite readily volatile with steam, soluble in alcohol, ether, chloroform or

benzene. One thousand parts of water dissolve 0.45 part of skatole.
Use. used like indole, in very small amounts, as a modifier and
Skatole is
fixative of floral perfume compositions. However, the greatest of care has

to be taken in regard to proper dosage as the odor of skatole is even more
disagreeable and powerful than that of indole.
1
Ber. 33 (1900), 1903.
2
Pharm. Weekblad 48 (1911), 307.
3
Biochem. Z. 19 (1909), 525.
4
Rod. 244, 13. Chem. Zentr. I (1935), 3574. Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 6364.
*Liebigs Ann. 239 (1887), 240.
"Identification of Pure Organic Compounds," Vol. II (1916), 178, John Wiley & Sons,
New York.
7
Gazz. chim. 67 (1927), 484.
ital.
*Liebigs Ann. 236 (1886), 138.

9
J. Chem. Soc. (1942), 681.
C. SULFIDES
Introduction. Sulfides occur quite frequently in plants, probably in the

form of glucosides which are decomposed by the process of distillation.
The sulfur such a combination as hydrogen sulfide
may exist in S H, as H
a mercaptan R S-1I, or in oxidized form. In this latter condition it is iso-
lated quite often from a number of oils as the disulfide 11 S S readily R
formed by the action of atmospheric oxygen upon thioalcohols; sometimes
the isolation is made via the thioether R
S R, which results from the re-
duction of the disulfides. Although the disulfides, water insoluble liquids,
are of repugnant odor, the alkyl sulfides, likewise water insoluble liquids,
may in some cases possess a not unpleasant smell.
The chemistry of the rather elementary members of this series is so well
established that no need be given to them.
special attention
A number of well-known reaction products can be used for diagnostic tests
on this class of compounds. They are enumerated below:
(1) Sulfonium salts:
(a) Addition compounds with alkyl halides:
H3 C
S + CH 3 I - [(CH 3 ) 3 S]I
H3 C
(b) Addition compounds with metallic salts:
H3 C
S + HgI 2 -> (CH 3 ) 2 S.HgI 2
HC 3
These products crystallize well.

(2) Sulfones:
Strong oxidation (IIN0 3 or KMnO 4 ) of thioethers:
R
RoS -f 2[O] ->
\S
R
/ O
These derivatives are neutral, crystallize well and are very stable to re-
ducing agents.
(3) Sulfonic acids:
R-S-H + 3[0]-+R-S0 H 3
These acyclic crystalline compounds are converted through the acid chlo-
rides to nitrogen derivatives with definitive melting points.
Besides these crystalline complexes the worker should consider certain
colorimetric methods with these sulfur compounds. Both qualitative and
quantitative reactions of this type have been published.
Hydrogen sulfide, H 2 S, appears during distillation of certain seeds anise

or caraway, for example.
Dimethyl sulfide, occurs in American peppermint oil and must be

(CH 3 ) 2 S,
removed by rectification in order to improve the odor of the oil. Schimmel
& Co. 1 identified dimethyl sulfide in Algerian and Reunion geranium oil:
b. 37.3-37.5, f.p. -83.2, d 20 0.8449. 2[(CH 3 ) 2 S]-3HgCl 2 (cf. Faragher,

Morrell and Comay 2) m. 150-151. [(CH3 ) 2 S]-IIgI 2 m. 75. ,
Dimethyl sulfone m. 109 (Beilstein, Vol. I, p. 288).

Divinyl sulfide, (CH 2 =CH) 2 S, and its higher homologues form the main
constituent of oil of Allium ursinum. The physical properties observed on
3
this natural product by Semmler, 101, d 0.9125 are in poor agree-
i.e., b.
ment with the synthetic prepared later by Bales and Nickelson 4 who re-
5
ported b. 85-86, d} 0.9174. Semmler found that the HgCl 2 addition com-
pound melted at 91; the platinum chloride complex at 93.
SULFIDES 731
Diallyl disulfide, CH 2 =CH-CH2 -S-S-CH 2 .CH=CH 2 ,

b. 198-200, b 16
79-81, d 14 . 8 1.0237,
and
Allylpropyl disulfide, CH 2 =CII CH2 -
S S CII 2 CH 2 CH 3 ,
b 16 G6-69,
and
A compound, probably diallyl trisulfide, C 3 H 5 -S-S-S-C 3 H 5 ,
b J6 112-122,
dis 1.0845, occurs in oil of onion, garlic, asafoetida, etc. Zinc dust reduces
these products to the corresponding thioethers and oxidation prepares the
sulfones all of which are liquids. (Beilstein, Vol. I, p. 441.)
Dicrotyl sulfide, (CH 3 -CH=CH-Cir 2 ) 2 S, b 17 81, was identified by Ste-
vens 5 in the scent of the common skunk (Mephitis mephitis).
1
Schimmel & Co., April (1909),
Ber. 50.
2
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 51 (1929), 2774.
3
Liebigs Ann. 241 (1887), 101.
*J. Chem. Soc. 121 (1922), 2137.
5
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1945), 407.
3-Methylthiol Propyl Alcohol
7-Hydroxypropyl methyl sulfide

7-Methyl-mercapto propyl alcohol
C 4 H 10 OS Mol. Weight 106.19
CH3 -S-CH 2 -CH 2 -Cir 2 OH
Occurrence. Akabori and Kaneko l
isolated this sulfur-containing alcohol
from shoyu (soya) sauce.
Isolation. By distillation of soya sauce at reduced pressure, followed by ether

extraction of the distillate and refractionation, bis G3-87.
Identification. Through the mercuric chloride addition compound C4HioOS-2^
HgCl2 which crystallizes in prisms m. 128-128.5.
2 3
According to Kirner, and Bennett and Hock, synthetic
Properties.
7-methyl-mcrcapto propyl alcohol has these properties:
2
b 30 105-105.5 df (vac.) 1.030 3
3 2
b 24 102 dig 1.0314
b 17 93-94 2
n'L 1.4832 2
The aroma of 7-methyl-mercapto propyl alcohol is not agreeable

Use.
but when added to soya sauce (0.0005-0.002 per cent) it increases the charac-
teristic flavor of this sauce.
1
Proc. Imp. Acad. Tokyo 12 (1936), 131, Osaka Univ. (original in German). Chem. Ab-
stracts 31 (1937), 1355. Chem. Zentr. II (1936), 2391.
2
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 50 (1928), 2452.
3
,7. Chem. Soc. (1927), 2498.
Methyl p-Methylthiolpropionate
C 5 H 10 2S Mol. Weight 134.20
CH 3 S CH 2 CH 2 COOCH 3
This sulfur-containing ester was found by Haagen-Smit,
Occurrence.
Kirchner, Deasy and Prater as a volatile constituent in the higher boiling
l
fractions of the smooth Cayenne variety of Pineapple, Ananas sativus Lindl.

The sulfide is present in the winter and summer fruit pulp in approximately
equal quantities of 1 gram per thousand kilograms.
Isolation.Since it was impossible to purify the compound completely by distilla-
tion, a solid derivative was prepared by oxidation of the purest fraction bn 67-71
with an excess of a 50-50 mixture of 30% hydrogen peroxide and glacial acetic acid,
and ammonium molybdate as catalyst.
Identification. Oxidation thus yielded the corresponding sulfone CsHioSO^ white
needles m. 94-94.6.
Properties. bn 69.
Use. Nothing is known from the literature whether this sulfide is used in
the flavor industry.
'/. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1945), 1651.
Secondary Butyl-propenyl Bisulfide

C 7 H 14 S 2 Mol. Weight 162.31
HaC CH 2
CH-S-S-CH=CH-CH 3
C1I 3
Years ago, Semmler l

identified in the volatile oil distilled from asafoetida
as main constituent (about 45 per cent) a disulfide C 7 Hi4S 2 which had these
properties:
b9 83-84
d 15 0.9721
-12 30'
Morerecently Mannich and Fresenius

2
showed that this disulfide has the
structural formula pictured above. From they obtained the /-butyl mer-
it
captan b. 83-84, [a]?? 11 59', by several reductive methods. Dinitro-

chlorobenzene yielded with the mercap tides formed by fission: dinitrophenyl-
propenylthioether, CgH 8 O 4 N 2 S, m. 119-120, and secondary butyl dinitro-
phenylthioether, CioH 12 O 4 N 2 S, m. 65-66,
1
Arch. Pharm. 229 (1891), 1. Ber. 23 (1890), 3530; 24 (1891), 78.
*Arch. Pharm. 274 (1936), 461. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 1952.
SULFIDES 733
Allylsulfinyl-allyl Sulfide
*
Allicin
C 6 H 10 OS 2 Mol. Weight 162.27
/^TT otT
v^-Cl
OTJ
* *
^ Q OTT
Q *
0X3-2>
* * r^TT
V^xl r^tl
v^
vyJTl.2 v^Xj.2 Xl.2
II
o
Occurrence. This sulfur compound has been identified by Cavallito and
collaborators 1
as the antibacterial principle of garlic (Allium sativum) where
it occurs in bound form and is freed by enzymatic action.
Isolation.Extraction of fresh garlic with 95% ethyl alcohol, steam distillation

of the residue, and ether extraction of the distillate yields from 0.3 to 0.5% of allyl-
sulfinyl-allyl sulfide.
^
Properties. ,
d 20
1
1. 1
1 * rt
12
nf? 1.561
No between X224-440. The odor of this sulfur com-

selective absorption
pound is much more characteristic of garlic than is the odor of the allyl sul-
fides. The substance decomposes on distillation at ordinary pressure. On
hydrolysis, allyl disulfide and sulfur dioxide are formed. Bromine, potassium
permanganate, and sodium bisulfite also cause rapid inactivation.
Its reaction with cysteine suggests the mechanism
C 3 H5-S-S-C 3 H5 + 2 HSCH 2 -CH(NH )-COOH 2
2 C 3 H 5 .S-S'Cn2 -CTI(NH2)-COOH
by which the compound acts as an antibacterial agent. It may operate by
destroying SH groups essential to bacterial proliferation.
Use. As a and bactericidal agent in the pharmaceutical in-
bacteriostatic
dustries. The action of allicin is considerably more bacteriostatic than bac-
tericidal. It is about equally effective against Gram positive and Gram
negative organisms. By the cylinder-plate method against Staphylococcus

aureus, allicin shows an activity equivalent to about 15 Oxford penicillin units
per mg., which is approximately 1 per cent of the activity of penicillin; how-
ever, allicin is equally effective against the Gram negative organisms which
are practically unaffected by penicillin. The antibacterial activity is un-
affected by the presence of p-aminobenzoic acid.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1944), 1950, 1952; 67 (1945), 1032.
* The name allicin has now been dropped in view of its possible confusion with certain
well established medicinal products.
D. MUSTARD OILS
Introduction. The mus-

esters of isothiocyanic acid, generally classified as
tard oils, are characterized by their pungent odor, irritating to the mucous
membranes. The best-known member of this group is allyl mustard oil,
commonly called "mustard oil."
Allyl Isothiocyanate
C 4 H 5 NS Mol. Weight 99.15
Isothiocy anally I. Allyl mustard oil. "Mustard oil"
CH2 =CH CH2 N=C=S .
A study of the Raman spectra led Dadieu and Kohlrausch

l
to the conclu-
sion that allyl mustard oil has this constitution:
CH 2 ==CII-CH 2 N
S
Occurrence.Allylisothiocyanate is the principal constituent of the volatile

oil of mustard (Brassica nigra L. or B.
juncea L.). It has also been found in
Alliaria officinalis, species of Cardamine and Sisymbrium, and in several other
2
plants. According to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, allylisothiocyanate does
not occur in these plants as such but in the form of a glucoside, viz., sinigrin
(myronate of potassium) which in presence of water and a ferment, viz., myr-
osinase, is hydrolyzed to allylisothiocyanate, d-glucose, and potassium bi-
sulfate.
C 3 H 5 N=C(SC 6 H n 5 )OS0 3 K + H2 = C 3 H5 NCS + C 6 H 12 6 + KHS0 4

The formation of allylcyanide and carbon disulfide which are usually also
present in the natural volatile mustard oil, must be explained by side reac-
tions taking place during the hydrolysis of the glucoside At tem-
sinigrin.
peratures above 70, the ferment myrosinase is destroyed and its action
stopped. Schmidt 3 found that at traces of the isomeric allylthiocyanate
C 3 H 5 -S-CN are formed, aside from allylisothiocyanate.
Isolation. The mustard seeds are ground and freed as much as possible from fatty
oils through pressure. The material is mixed with water and left for some time to
ferment. After the fermentation reaction has been completed, the oil is distilled with
steam. For further purification fractional distillation can be carried out.
MUSTARD OILS 735
Identification. Allylisothiocyanate (allyl mustard oil) can be characterized by

several methods:
(1) By the preparation of allylthiourea (thiosinamine)
NH-C 3H 6
S=C
NH 2
This compound formed on treating allylisothiocyanate with an excess of aqueous

is
ammonia in the presence of some alcohol; after gentle warming (40) the reaction
accelerates and spontaneously nearly reaches the boiling point; m. 78.4 according to
Tornoe. 4
(2) By the preparation of the bornyl ester of allylthiocarbamic acid (from borneol
sodium and allylisothiocyanate, and by decomposition of the sodium compound with
dilute acid). Roshdestvensky 8 reported that this ester melts at 59-60.
(3) By the preparation of the l-phenyl-4-allylthiosemicarbazide m. 118, according
to Blanksma. 6
(4) Onshaking allylisothiocyanate with an aqueous solution of semicarbazide
hydrochloride and soda, Rosenthaler prepared allyl mustard oil semicarbazide
7
C 6 HioON 4 S, in. 195-196.
Quantitative Determination. Regarding the quantitative determination of

mustard oils, see Vol. I, Chapter 4, "The Examination and Analysis of Essen-
tial Oils, Synthetics, and Isolates," p. 303.
Properties.Allylisothiocyanate (allyl mustard oil) is a colorless liquid of
extremely pungent odor. It irritates the mucous membranes and excites the
lachrymatory glands, causing the flow of tears. Applied to the skin, allyl
mustard oil produces a burning sensation and causes blisters. The vapors
are very harmful to the respiratory organs.
8
According to Kopp, the natural allyl mustard oil has these properties:
9
Gildemeister and Hoffmann reported for the synthetic product:
b. 151-153 d 1.020-1.025
b5 30.2 nf? 1.527-1.531
These figures find ample confirmation later in the accurate determinations

by Timmermans and Hennaut-Roland of the International Bureau of
10
Physico-Chemical Standards, and in data of the International Critical
Tables. 11
f.p.
- 102.5 10
10
b. 152.05
10
30 1.00811
10
15 1.02356
10
1.03909
1.52481 n
- 25
Allyl mustard very sparingly soluble in water, soluble in 8 volumes of

oil is
70 per cent alcohol, miscible in all proportions with ether, petroleum ether,
chloroform, or benzene.
On aging, allyl mustard oil gradually turns yellow to reddish-brown. The
walls of the bottle will be coated with a yellow to orange colored compound
containing carbon, nitrogen, hydrogen, and sulfur. On prolonged contact
with water or heavy metals (copper, silver, tin, mercury), allylisothiocyanate
gradually decomposes, forming allyl cyanide b. 119. The heavy metals re-
act with the separating sulfur, forming sulfidcs. Ethyl alcohol, too, gradually
reacts with allylisothiocyanate, forming thereby (partially sulfuretted) allyl-
thiourethane
NH C H 5
3
C 3 II 5 N=C=S +CH 2 5 OII -> CMS

0-C 2 H 5
12
Biichi found that a 2 per cent alcoholic solution mustard oil,
of synthetic
after eight months of storing, contained only 0.2 per cent unchanged mustard
oil.
On
exposure to air and especially to light, allylisothiocyanate gradually
decomposes; it should therefore be stored in dark, well-filled bottles. A 15
per cent decomposition in the course of a month, with the development of
several toxic products, is reported by Ganassini. 13
Use. Allyl mustard oil (allylisothiocyanate) is widely used for the flavor-
ing of all kinds of food products, especially mustards and table sauces. It
also finds application in many pharmaceutical preparations plasters, for
example.
Great care should be exercised in smelling allylisothiocyanate. It should
be tested only when highly diluted.
1
Ber. 63 (1930), 268. See also Monatsh. 55 (1930), 75.
2
"Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 686. Cf. also Obst, Deul. Essigind. 34 (1930), 289.
3
Ber. 10 (1877), 187.
4
Ber. 21 (1888), 1288.
5
MUSTARD OILS 737
6
Pharm. Weekblad 61 (1914), 1383. Cf. Dixon, J. Chem. Soc. 67 (1890), 263.
7
Arch. Pharm. 266 (1927), 113.
8
Liebigs Ann. 98 (1856), 375.
9
10
/. chim. phys. 29 (1932), 564.
11
Vol. VII, 83.
12
Pharm. Ada Helv. 10 (1935), 90. Cf. Sido, Pharm. Ztg. 80 (1935), 619.
Arch. ist. biochim. ital. 3 (1931), 1. Chem. Abstracts 26 (1932), 2657.
G. Malcolm Dyson, "Odor and Constitution among the Mustard Oils. VI.
The Natural Mustard Oils," Perfumery Essential Oil Record 20 (1929), 42.
R. Meesemaecker and J. Boivin, "New Process of the Determination of Allyl Mus-
tard Oil in Powdered Black Mustard," J. pharm. chim. [8], 11 (1930), 478. Chem. Ab-
stracts 25 (1931), 771.
Wilhelm Schneider, Hellmuth Fischer and Walter Specht, "Sulfur Sugars and Their
Derivatives. Nature of the Sugar of Mustard Oil Glucosides," Ber. 63B (1930), 2787.
Hans Kaiser and Otto Leeb, "Estimation of Mustard Oil in Semen Sinapis via the
D. A.-B. 6," Suddeut. Apoth. Ztg. 73 (1933), 612. Chem. Abstracts 28 (1934), 256.
R. Gros and G. Pichon, "Determination of Allyl Mustard Oil in Mustard Flour,"
J. pharm. chim. 19 (1934), 249. Chem. Abstracts 28 (1934), 5179.
H. Kaiser and E. Fiirst, "Simple Volumetric Estimation of Mustard Oil in
Spiritus Sinapis," Apoth. Ztg. 50 (1935), 1734. Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 1177.
Joti S. Aggarwal, "Effect of Storage on Indian Vegetable Oils," J. Indian Chem. Soc.,
Ind. and News Ed. 5 (1942), 121. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 1885.
Propenyl Isothiocyanate
CH 3 CH=CII N=C=S
1
According to Pomeranz, small quantities of this compound occur in mus-
tard oil.
1
Liebigs Ann. 351 (1907), 360.
a-Secondary Butyl Isothiocyanate
Secondary Butyl Mustard Oil
C 5 H9 NS Mol. Weight 115.20

CH3 .CH2 -CH-N==C=S
CH 3
Occurrence. This compound is the principal constituent of oil of spoonwort
(Cochleria officinalis) it has also been found in the oils distilled from the herbs
;
Cochleria danica, Cardamine amara, and C. pratensis. According to Ter

Meulen, secondary butyl mustard oil occurs in these plants not as such but
1
in the form of a glucoside, viz., glucochlearin.
Isolation.Freed from its glucoside by enzymatic fermentation, then from the

medium by steam distillation, and finally purified by fractional distillation.
a-secondary butyl mustard oil and
2
Identification. (1) According to Blanksma,
phenylhydrazine form jS-phenyl-a-sec.-butylthiosemicarbazide m. 135.

(2) When heated with ammonia to 100, secondary butyl mustard oil yields an
optically active thiourea m. 133, according to Hofmann. 3
Mumm and Richter prepared a mono secondary butyl thiourea m. 131-133,
4
from a synthetic secondary butyl mustard oil.

(3) The secondary butyl phthalimidc obtained by Mumm
and Richter 6 by heating
this mustard oil with phthalic anhydride at 155, melted at 24.5-25.5.
Secondary butyl mustard oil is a

Properties. colorless, optically active
liquid possessing the typical odor of spoonwort oil. Hofmann 6
reported
these properties:
b. 159.5
di 2 0.944
In alcoholic solution this secondary butyl mustard oil gradually loses its
original pungency, due probably to the formation of a (partially sulfuretted)
thiourethane.
Use. The
natural secondary butyl mustard oil, which is not used in
our industries, must not be confused with synthetic isobutyl mustard oil
(CH3)2'CH-CH 2 -N=C=S, known commercially also as "oil of spoonwort"
which boils at 162 and yields a thiourea m. 93.5.
1
Rec. Iran. chim. 24 (1905), 444.
tPharm. Weekblad 61 (1914), 1383. Chem. Zenir. I (1915), 261.
3
Ber. 7 (1884), 513.
4
Ber. 73B (1940), 846, 857.
6
Ibid.
6
Ber. 7 (1884), 513.
y-Butenyl Isothiocyanate
CH 2 =CH CH2-
CII 2 .
N=C=S
"Crotonyl" Mustard Oil
C 4 H 7 -N=C=S
Crotonyl mustard oils occur as glucosides in rapeseed (Bras-

Occurrence.
sica napus) and in Chinese colza seed (Brassica campestris chinoleifera sp.
Viehoever). Ter Meulen named this glucoside fluconapin. Crotonyl mus-

1 2
tard oil has also been found in Brassica juncea Hook, et Thorns (from India)
MUSTARD OILS 739
by the Schimmel chemists. 3 All these isolates appear to be of the formula

C4H 7 N=C=S but meager data suggest isomeric forms among them.
Isolation. Crotonyl mustard oil can be obtained by steam distillation or better by

distillation under reduced pressure after the above-named seeds have been mashed
with crushed white mustard seed which is particularly rich in the ferment myrosinase.
Identification. On treatment with alcoholic ammonia, the crotonyl mustard oil
from Brassica juncea Hook., according to Schimmel & Co., 4 yields a thiourea crystal-
lizing in fine needles m. 69-70, whereas the crotonyl mustard oil from Brassica napus
forms a thiourea m. 64.
Properties. The crotonyl mustard oils corresponding to the derivatives

cited previously are colorless liquids, strongly refractive, possessing an odor
which resembles horse-radish and allyl mustard oil. Gildemeister and Hoff-
mann 5 (for that from Brassica napus), and Schimmel & Co. 6 (for that from
Brassica juncea Hook.) reported these properties:
6 5
b. 175-170 <* D
5 6
b. 174 (with slight nf? 1.5240
decomposition)
6
dlt 0.9941
1 5
d] 0.9933
Apparently the crotonyl mustard oils occurring naturally are not identical
with but isomeric with the synthetic crotonyl mustard oils prepared by Hof-
8
mann, Charon, and by von Braun and Schirmacher, which products boil
7 9
at 158-159 and, according to Charon, yield a thiourea m. 105. This mus-

tard oil is known to be CII 3 -CH=CH-CH 2 N=C=S. It seems possible
that the natural isolates are geometric isomers rather than metamers of the
synthetic compound.
Use. Natural crotonyl mustard oil has not found any worth-while use in
our industries because of its toxic properties.
1
J. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 10 (1921), 16.
2
Rec. trav. chim. 24 (1905), 444.
3
Ber. Schimmel &Co. Oct. (1910), 114.
4
Ibid.
6
"Die Xtherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 689; Vol. II, 762, 767.
7
Ber. 7 (1874), 514.
8
Ann. chim. phys. [7], 17 (1899), 262.
9
Ber. 66 (1923), 546.
Benzyl Isothiocyanate
Benzyl Mustard Oil

C 8 H7 NS Mol. Weight 149.21
Benzyl mustard oil originates through hydrolysis, caused by

Occurrence.
action of ferments on the glucoside glucotrapaeolin CyHjN^CXSCelliiOs)
OSOaK + xH 2 O, which, according to Gadamer, occurs in nasturtium (Tro-
1
paeolum majus) and probably also in the common cress (Lepidium sativum).
Isolation. Freed from the natural medium by enzymatic hydrolysis and subsequent
steam distillation; final purification by fractional distillation.
Identification. Benzyl mustard oil yields:
(1) With ammonia a thiourea m. 104 (Salkovsky )
2
(2) With phenylhydrazine a phenylberizylthiosemicarbazide m. 158 (Blanksma ).

3
Properties. Benzyl mustard oil is a liquid possessing a pungent odor of

cress.
For the natural product from Tropaeolum seeds Schneider, Clibbens, Hiill-
weck and Steibelt 4 observed bu 125. The compound has been described by
6 6 7
Hofmann, Behrend and Hennicke and Hawthorne as follows:
5 7
b. 243 df 1.1246
6 5
b 17 140-141 nj> 1.G049 7
b 12 124-125 4
Use. Natural benzyl mustard oil has not found any commercial use in our
industries.
1
Arch. Pharm. 237 (1899), 510. Ber. 32 (1899), 2338.
2
Ber. 24 (1891), 2726.
3
Pharm. Weekblad 51 (1914), 1383. Chem. Zentr. I (1915), 262.
Ber. 47 (1914), 1256.
6
Ber. 1 (1868), 201.
Liebigs Ann. 344 (1906), 24.
9
7
J. Chem. Soc. 89 (1906), 564.
MUSTARD OILS 741
p-Phenethyl Isothiocyanate
Phenylethyl mustard oil
CH 2 -CH2 'N=C=S
Occurrence.Phenylethyl mustard oil is the main constituent of the oil

contained in the root of Reseda odorata. It also occurs in the volatile oil of
Nasturtium officinale, Barbaraea praecox, Brassica rapa var. rapifera, and

Cochlearia armoracia L.
Isolation. By steam Prolonged heating converts the isocyanate into

distillation.
the corresponding nitrile. It is, therefore, necessary to grind the material thoroughly
before distilling, so as to facilitate a speedy oil recovery.
According to Bertram and Walbaum, phenylethyl mustard oil can
1
Identification.
be identified by the preparation of several derivatives :
(1) On warming with ammonia phenylethyl mustard oil forms the tliiourea:
HN 2
\
C=S
the crystals melting at 137. Treating the thiourea with silver nitrate and baryta
water, silver sulfide and phenylethyl urea m. 111-112 are obtained.
(2) On heating phenylethyl mustard oil with concentrated hydrochloric acid in a
sealed tube, the hydrochloride of phenylethyl amine is formed, the leaflets melting at
217. Phenylethyl amine and diethyl oxalate condense to diphenylethyl oxamide
m. 186.
Properties. Phenylethyl mustard oil is a liquid of typical horse-radish

odor. Gildemeister and Hoffmann, 2 and Bertram and Walbaum 3 reported
these properties:
b. 255-256 d}| 1.0997
nf? 1.59023
Regarding the synthesis of phenylethyl mustard oil and higher homologues,

see von Braun and Deutsch. 4
Use. Natural phenylethyl mustard oil has not found any use in our in-
dustries.
/. prakt. Chem. [2], 60 (1894), 555. 3

J. prakt. Chem. [2], 60 (1894), 655.
4
2
"Die Atherischen Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 690. Ber. 46 (1912), 2188.
4-Hydroxybenzyl Isothiocyanate
C 8 H 7 ONS Mol. Weight 165.21
p-Hydroxy benzyl mustard oil. Sinalbin mustard oil
CH 2 -N=C=S
H
Occurrence and Isolation. The glycoside sinalbin C3oH420i5N2S2, occurring in white
mustard seed, by the action of the ferment myrosinase yields p-hydroxybenzyl mustard
oil, glucose, and sinapine bisulfate. Sinalbin mustard oil is very sparingly volatile
with steam, but yields to solvent extraction particularly by alcohol. Details about the
techniques useful in obtaining sinalbin and its hydrolysis product are available in
articles by Bauer and Holle, 1 and Viehoever, Arno and Nelson. 2
Identification. Salkovsky 3 identified this natural mustard oil through the isolation
of the related p-hydroxybenzyl cyanide m. 69-70 obtained as a decomposition
product of the isothiocyanate.
Phenyl p-hydroxybenzyl thiourea m. 170-171 is formed by the action of aniline
on the ether solution of mustard oil and crystallizes from dilute alcohol in light yellow
needles. Soluble in sodium hydroxide solution, precipitated unchanged by acids.
Shaking of the alcoholic solution with water gives phenyl p-hydroxybenzylurca m.
140-142, needles from alcohol.
With phenylhydrazine in alcoholic solution, sinalbin mustard oil yields phenyl
p-hydroxybenzyl thiosernicarbazide. Colorless leaflets from aqueous alcohol m. 124;
soluble in sodium hydroxide solution (Klein 4 ).
Properties. This substance reported as a yellow oil, slightly soluble in

is
water but easily so in alcohol, ether and dilute alkali. It has a burning taste
and causes blisters on the skin.
Use. p-Hydroxybenzyl mustard oil, as such, is not used in our industries.
1
Pharm. Zentralhalle 78 (1937), 545.
2
Ber. 22 (1889), 2137.
4
"Handbuch dcr Pflanzenanalyse," Vol. Ill, 1081.
TERPENES, SESQUITERPENES, AND DERIVATIVES
OF UNKNOWN CONSTITUTION
Introduction. In the course of the numerous investigations on the composition of

essential oils carried out during the last hundred years, many terpenes, sesquiterpenes,
and derivatives have been observed, the constitution of which, however, could not be
elucidated. Thus, the literature contains countless references to fractions which have
been declared terpenes, sesquiterpenes, alcohols, esters, aldehydes, ketones, etc., but
in most cases the evidence is supported merely by physicochemical properties. It
would serve no practical or theoretical purpose to cite all these references and to enu-
merate or tabulate all fractions or compounds which have been insufficiently described
by the various workers. In many cases the investigators had unquestionably not even
succeeded in isolating the substances in pure form and often they had in their hands
mixtures of hydrocarbons or isomers. We must, therefore, restrict our description to
those compounds which seem sufficiently well defined to warrant discussing, and omit
the more obscure ones. However, the line cannot be drawn sharply at present, and
future work will doubtless bring more clarity into this complicated and confused field.
I. HYDROCARBONS
A. TERPENES
Chamene
According to Kafuku, Nozoe and Hata, the volatile oil derived from the fresh leaves
1
of the Formosa hinoki tree (Chamaecyparis obtusa Sieb. etZucc., var. Formosana Hayata
or Arisan-Hinoki, fain. Pinaceae) contains 20 to 30 per cent of a new terpene, viz.,
chamenc, which has these properties:
b. 168-170 ao +35 0'

5
b 50 86-88 nf> 1.4686
df 0.8228
Shaking chamene with sulfuric acid (1:3) at room temperature gave isochamene:
b 50 88-90 a% -0 16'
5
df 0.8222 nf) 1.4726
Unlike chamene, isochamene is fairly stable to atmospheric oxidation.

The investigated by Uchida
hinoki leaf oil 2
was derived from a species growing in
Japan and had a chemical composition somewhat different from the Formosa hinoki
leaf oil described above.
1
2
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. Japan, 31 Suppl. Vol. (1928), 159B. Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1929), 49.
Dacrydene
C 10Hi6 Mol. Weight 136.23
According to Baker and Smith, oil of Dacrydium franklini consists mainly of a so

1
far unknown terpene which they named dacrydene. It has these properties:
b. 165-166 (corr.) an +12 18'

2
d 22 0.8524 nf> 1.4749
Dacrydene forms a nitrosochloride m. 120-121.

1
"Research on the Pines of Australia," Sydney (1910), 397.
745
746 HYDROCARBONS
Evodene
This terpene was observed by Asahina and Kashiwaki l in the volatile oil derived
from the fruit of Evodia rutaecarpa and named evodene. The hydrocarbon, which
seems to be related to myrcene, had the following properties:
b20 67-68
df 0.7989
ng 1.4843
2
According to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, the designation evodene for this terpene
is inappropriate because in 1911 Semmler and Schossbcrger 3 assigned the name
evodene to a new sesqui terpene isolated from the oil of Xanthoxylum aubertia Corde-
moy. This monocyclic sesquiterpene had the following properties:
b9 119-123 D -580'
d 20 0.8781 nD 1.4990
1
Pharm. Soc. Japan (1915), 1293. Chem. Abstracts 10 (1916), 607.
J.
2
*Ber. 44 (1911), 2885.
Junene
Casparis and Freund observed in the volatile oil derived from Tyrolean and Italian
*
juniper berries a new terpene CioHie, viz., junene which is probably a cyclopentene
derivative and similar to, but not identical with the chamene of Kafuku and collab-
orators (see "Chamene").
Junene, which is a strong diuretic, has these properties:
b. 164-166 o$ + 19 36 to +20 6'
b8 53-55 'ng 1.4701
df 0.8242
Junene yields no crystalline products with bromine, nitrosyl chloride or hydrogen

iodide, but on treatment with hydrogen chloride in glacial acetic acid, junene gives
an addition product b 8 76-86, a?? -0 18'.
Reduction of junene yields dihydrojunene CioHis, b. 170, bs 58-61.
1
Pharm. Ada, Helv. 14 (1939), 1. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 849. Ber. Schimmel & Co.
(1940), 30.
Origanene = a-Thujene
From Cyprus origanum (probably Origanum majoranoides Willd.) Pickles

oil
1
isolated a hydrocarbon which he named origanene. The same hydrocarbon was

investigated by Henry and Paget.
2
Later Birch, and Birch and Earl 4 isolated large
3
SESQUITERPENES 747
quantities of origanene from Eucalyptus dives oil and proved that origanene is in
reality a mixture of d- and dZ-a-thujene.

1
/. Chem. Soc. 93 (1908), 862.
2
Ibid. (1931), 27.
3
4
Ibid. 72 (1938), 55.
Liquidene
Kafuku, Nonoe and Hata observed in the volatile oil derived from the leaves of
l
Liquidambar formosana Hance a new terpene, viz., liquidene which boiled at 170.
Liquidene seems to have one double bond.
1
d-Thumbelen
Sebereported the isolation of a di terpene "thumbelen" from Finns formosana

l
Hayata which, on oxidation, gave a substance C^HssOe, m. 131-132.

Later Akiyoshi 2 observed in the oil distilled from Japanese or Korean pine roots a
new monocyclic terpene which he also described as "d- thumbelen."
1
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 56 (1935), 1118.
2
Repts. Imp. Ind. Research Inst., Osaka, Japan [10], 17 (1937), 1. Chem. Abstracts 31
(1937), 8172.
B. SESQUITERPENES
(a) BICYCLIC.
The Costenes
Semmler and Feldstein from the fractions bii 100-130 and bn 130-150
1
isolated
of costus root oil (Saussurea lappa Clarke) two sesquiterpenes, viz., a-costene and /3-
costene, respectively, which had these properties:
a-Costene fi-Costene
b. bi2 122-126 bi 8 144-149

d. d 2 i 0.9014 d 22 0.8728
D -120' +6
nD 1.49807 1.4905
Mol. refr. Calc. 66.15 67.86
Found 66.37 67.65
a-Costene seems to be bicyclic and to contain two double bonds, while /3-costene
appears to be monocyclic and to contain three double bonds. The a- form yields a
liquid hydrochloride from which the parent sesquiterpene can be regenerated, whereas
the /?- form does not seem to give any crystalline derivative.
i
Ber. 47 (1914), 2433, 2692.
748 HYDROCARBONS
Kiganene
C 16 H 2 4 Mol. Weight 204.34
Kimura and Mizoshita l

found in the volatile oil distilled from the root of the
Japanese cedar (Cryptomeria japonica) a sesquiterpene CisH^, viz., kiganene, which
b 4 .5 108-114 [a] D -22 24'
df 0.9150 ng 1.5085
On
treatment with hydrogen chloride, kiganene yielded cadinene dihydrochloride
m. 117-118; whereas on dehydrogenation in the presence of palladium asbestos,
kiganene gave cadalene.
1
Mem. Coll. Sci. Kyoto Imp. Univ. Scr. A, 14 (1932), 273. Chem. Zentr. I (1933), 418.
Mitsubene
observed in the volatile oil distilled from Mitsuba-zeri [Cryptotaenia

Hirao l
japonica Hassk. (fam. Umbelliferae)] a new sesquiterpene Ci6H24 which he named

mitsubene and which had these properties:
9
bi6 142-143 [a]!)
1 -
+8 19'
df 0.9175 ng 1.50381
Mitsubene adds four atoms of bromine and is a sesquiterpene of the eudesmene type.
1
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. Japan 29 (192G), 48. Chem. Abstracts 20 (1926), 1070.
Didymocarpene
C 16 H 24 Mol. Weight 204.34
This apparently bicyclic sesquiterpene was isolated by Warsi and Siddiqui l from a
steam distilled fraction of an ethereal extract derived from the leaves of Didymocarpus
pedicellata and had these properties :
b3 136-137 [a]g -3 42' (in 1% absolute alcohol)

b 12 147-148 ng 1.4988
4
dl 0.8957
Blue nitroso fewnitrosite C 3 oH47N 5 05 m. 132-134.

1
/. Indian Chem. Soc. 16 (1939), 423.
SESQUITERPENES 749
Dysoxylonene
Penfold l found in the volatile oil derived from the wood of Dysoxylon fraseranum
Benth. (fam. Meliaceae) ("Australian mahogany" or "Australian rosewood") a sesqui-
terpene which he named dysoxylonene. It had these properties:
bio 136-137 af?

dJt 0.9236 nf? 1.5063
Dihydrochloride Ci 5 H 2 4Cl 2 m. 108-109.

Dysoxylonene belongs to the cadinene type. On distillation with sulfur, dysoxyl-
onene yielded cadalene which was identified by the preparation of its picrate m. 114-
115.
i
J. Proc. Royal Soc. N. S. Wales 61 (1927), 345.
Micranene
Kafuku, Ikeda and Hata isolated this sesquiterpene from the volatile oil of Lantana
l
camara L. Micranene was also found by Ikeda, Takeda, Nakama and Yokohara 2 in
the volatile oil of pha-chium, a species of camphor tree indigenous to Formosa. Shortly
afterward Sebe 3 proved that micranene is in reality (//-cadinene.
1
/. Chem. Soc. Japan 56 (1935), 1184. CJiem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 240.
Z
(1940), 1269. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1942), 4064.
3
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 61
(b) TRICYCLIC.
Cyperene
Kimura and Ohtani l found, in the volatile oil derived from the rhizomes of Cyperus
rotundus L. ("kobuschi"), a tricyclic sesquiterpene Ci 5 H24, viz., cyperene (yields as
high as 32 per cent have been reported), which had the following properties:
b7
dil 0.9372 n{? 1.50129
(See "Cyperol" and "Cyperone.")

i
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 48 (1928), 128. Chem. Zentr. I (1929), 250. Chem. Abstracts 23
(1929), 3301.
Sesquichamene
Kafuku and Nozoe observed l

in the volatile oil derived from hinoki leaves [Chamae-
cyparis obtusa Sieb. et Zucc., var. Formosana Hayata (fam. Pinaceae)] a new tricyclic
sesquiterpene, viz., sesquichamene, which had these properties:
bia 122.5-123.5 [a]g -89 51'

8
dl 0.9277 ng 1.5021
750 HYDROCARBONS
Sesquichamene forms a crystalline but unstable nitrosochloride m. 78-79 (with
decomposition).
1
Bull Chem. Soc. Japan 6 (1931), 111. Chem. Abstracts 26 (1931), 4542.
(c) UNKNOWN.
Araliene
l
Years ago Alpers observed in the volatile oil derived from the rhizomes of Aralia
nudicaulis L. ("wild sarsaparilla") a sesquiterpene which he named araliene. Crystal-
line derivatives could not be obtained. Later Schreiner 2 found that this terpene is in
reality only an impure caryophyllene.

1
Am. J. Pharm. 71 (1899), 370.
2
Cf. "The Sesquiterpenes," Madison (1904), 27, 32.
Betulene and Betulenene
Ci 5 H 24 and Ci 5 H 22 Mol. Weight 204.34 and 202.33
According to Treibs, birch bud oil contains a sesquiterpene mixture Ci6H 2 4, viz.,
1
betulene, which is closely related to a-, /3-, and 7-betulenol, three sesquiterpene alcohols
CisHÔ.
This mixture of sesquiterpenes
132-135 aD -11 30'
i6 0.911 no 1.502
can be separated with methyl alcohol into fractions of different solubilities and optical
rotations.
Treibs reported that the same oil also contains another sesquiterpene Ci6H 22 viz. ,
betulenene. Because of the presence of three double bonds, betulenene lends itself
readily to autoxidation and polymerization. After standing for two years it formed a
solid white polymer (Ci5H 22 ) x .
1
Ber. 71B (1938), 620.
Caparrapen
Tapia isolated from the essential the caparrapi balsam (Nectandra caparrapi)
1
oil of
a sesquiterpene alcohol, viz., caparrapiol, which on dehydration yielded a sesquiterpene
of the following properties :
b. 240-250 [a] D -2 13'
die 0.9019 nD 1.4953
Dihydrochloride m. 83.
1
Butt. soc. chim. [3], 19 (1898), 643.
SESQUITERPENES 751
Equinopanacene
Ci H6 24 Mol. Weight 204.34
Kariyone and Morotomi observed in the volatile oil of Echinopanax horridus Decne
l
et Planch, a sesquiterpene which they named equinopanacene and which had these
properties:
bis 135-138 [a]f> + 33 30'
dl 0.9051 nj? 1.50130
1
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan, No. 546 (1927), 671.
Galipene
Ci H6 24 Mol. Weight 204.34
Beckurts and Troeger l found in the volatile oil derived from the angustora bark
(Cusparia trifoliata Engl.) an optically inactive sesquiterpene which they named
galipene. It had these properties:
b. 255-260
d 0.912
nD 1.50513
On treatment with hydrogen chloride galipene formed a liquid product which readily
decomposed.
1
Arch. Pharm. 235 (1897), 518, 634; 236 (1898), 402, 408. See also Beckurts and Nehring,
ibid. 229 (1891), 612.
Ishwarene
Rao, Manjunath and Menon observed in the volatile oil distilled from the roots of
l
Aristolochia indica L. a mobile liquid sesquiterpene Ci5H 24 viz., ishwarene, which had ,
these properties:
io 130-132 [agj -42 22'
i.o 104-105 nf? 1.5035

0.9227
The monohydrochloride is liquid:
bi.o 128M30 []g - 18 42' (in alcohol)
d|g 1.0200 nL 1.5107
i
J. Indian Chem. Soc. 12 (1935), 496.
Lansene
Steam the wood of Lansium annamalayanum (Beed.), Jois, Manjunath and

distilling
Ramiah l
obtained 0.7 per cent of an oil possessing an odor of sandalwood. The oil
752 HYDROCARBONS
contained 90 per cent of a sesquiterpene Ci5H 2 4, viz., lansene, which had these prop-
erties :
b .6 98-101 [a]!? -82 9' (in ethyl alcohol)

d|g 0.8919 ng 1.4924
Monohydrochloride Dihydrochloride
b .4 103-105 bo.e 134-136
dig 0.9750 dig 1.024
OLD [a]?? -3 14' (in ethyl alcohol)
nf? 1.4985 n?, 1.4954
Aside from lansene, the oil also contained a sesquiterpene alcohol, viz., lansol.
i/. Mysore Univ. B, 1 (1941), 171. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 3319.
Libocedrene
Schorger observed in the volatile oil derived from the needles of the Calif ornian
l
Libocedrus decurrensTorrey, fam. Pinaceae ("incense cedar") a sesquiterpene which he

named libocedrene. It had these properties:
b. 260-280 af? +0 24'
d 20 0.9292 nf? 1.4994
Hydrochloride m. 132-133.
i
J. Ind. Eng. Chem. 8 (1916), 22.
Populene
C 15 H 24 Mol. Weight 204.34
Nakao found l
in the oil derived from the leaf buds of the Manchurian black poplar
(Populus nigra L.) a sesquiterpene which he named populene. It had these properties:
bg 121-122 aD +21 13'
diB 0.9135 nD 1.504
Hydrochloride m. 87.
Hydrobromide m. 117.
Dehydrogenation with sulfur yielded a hydrocarbon, the picrate of which melted at
115.
1
/. Pharm. Soc. Japan, No. 513 (1924). Chem. Zentr. I (1925), 974.
Torilene
Ci 5H 2 4 Mol. Weight 204.34
Kariyone and Majima found in the oil distilled from the fruit of Torilis anthriscus
l
Gmel. a sesquiterpene, viz., torilene. The sulfate of torilene Ci 5 H 24 -S04H 2 m. 145, ,
on boiling with 10 per cent alcoholic potassium hydroxide, yielded torilene hydrate
C 16H 260, m. 51-55.
1
/. Pharm. Soc. Japan 65 (1935), 887 (in German 168). Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 572.
Junipene
Mattsson l observed in the volatile oil derived from the bark of Juniperus communis
a sesquiterpene which he named junipene. It had these properties:
b 767 256.5-257 [a]g +41 3'
dijj 0.9401 nf? 1.50289
Hydrochloride m. 58.5.
Bidrag till kanncdom af Finlands natur och folk. Utgifna af Finska Vetenskaps-Socicteten.
1
H. 72. Nr. 1. Helsingfors (1913). Ber. Schimrnel & Co. (1924), 89.
Camerene
Kafuku, Ikeda and Fujita

l
from the volatile oil of Lantana camara L. a
isolated
sesquiterpene, viz., camerene, which had these properties:
b. 263 og +6 44'
b5 121-122 ng> 1.5000
df 0.9056
Camerene is unstable and changes into isocamerene, a sesquiterpene of the following

properties:
b. 253 aS -11 13'
b5 110-111 ng 1.4925
df 0.8942
Camerene is of the caryophyllene type, isocamerene of the cadinene type.
b 20 132 [a] M6 -270'

d 26 0.9112 M 57 9 -23 37'
n'g 1.50167
From the essential oil of the wood of Juniperus oxycedrus the same authors isolated
also an isomer of this sesquiterpene
m.
[a]64 6
- 103 30'
'
[a] 6 79 -89 12' (2.85% solution in benzene)
C. AROMATIC HYDROCARBONS
Sequoiene
Ci 3 H 10 *
Mol. Weight 166.21
Lunge and Steinkauler found this hydrocarbon belonging to the aromatic series in
l
the oil derived from needles of Sequoia gigantea. It forms leaf-like crystals with a
reddish fluorescence, m. 105, b. 290-300. With picric acid, sequoiene forms an
addition product crystallizing in the form of red needles.
Ber. 13 (1880), 1656; 14 (1881), 2202.

II. ALCOHOLS
A. TERPENE ALCOHOLS
Artemisol
CioH 18O Mol. Weight 154.24
Kinney, Jackson, DeMytt and Harris found in the volatile oil distilled from Utah
l
sage brush (Artemisia tridentata) a liquid terpene alcohol, isomeric with terpineol,
which they named artemisol. Hydrogenation showed that this sage alcohol has the
p-menthan-9-ol structure but the actual position of the double bond in artemisol has
not yet been established. Synthesis will have to be resorted to in order to prove com-
plete details of the structure of artemisol.
1
J. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 612.
Benihinol = d-Myrtenol
According to Kafuku and Ichikawa, the volatile oil derived from the wood of
1
Chamaecyparis formosensis Matsum contains a monocyclic unsaturated primary

terpene alcohol CioHieO, viz., benihinol. Later Sebe showed that benihinol is in
2
reality none other than d-myrtenol.

1
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 64 (1933), 1011.
Z
Benihiol = d-Dihydromyrtenol
According to Kafuku and Ichikawa, the volatile oil derived from the wood of
1
Chamaecyparis formosensis Matsum contains a bicyclic primary terpene alcohol

CioHisO, viz., benihiol. Later Sebe showed that benihiol is in reality a d-rotatory
2
dihydromyrtenol.
i/. Chem. Soc. Japan 64 (1933), 1011.
2
/. Chem. Soc. Japan 69 (1938), 1285. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 2127. See also J. Chem.
Soc. Japan 62 (1941), 22. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943), 4064.
Darwinol = d-Myrtenol
Years ago, Penfold l

Darwinia grandiflora a terpene alcohol which
observed in oil of
he named darwinol. The same alcohol was found in other volatile oils, viz., Boronia
dentigeroides Cheel (fam. Ruiaceae), Leptospermum lanigerum, and Eriostemon coxii.
More recently, Penfold, Ramage and Simonsen 2 proved that darwinol is in reality
d-myrtenol.
1
3
Ibid. 68 (1934), 36.
754
Uncineol
Mol. Weight 154.24
Baker and Smith found in the fractions boiling above 197 of cajuput oil (Melaleuca
l
uncinata) an alcohol which they named uncineol. The snow white crystals melted at
72.5. [a]g +36 59' (in absolute alcohol).
i/. Proc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales 41 (1907), 204.
B. SESQUITERPENE ALCOHOLS
(a) MONOCYCLIC.
Fokienol
Glichitch l
isolated from the Tonkin an
volatile oil of Fokienia hodginsii distilled in
easily dehydrated tertiary monocyclic sesquiterpene alcohol CisHÔ which had a
very strong tendency to isomerize and which Glichitch named fokienol. It is a fairly
viscous almost colorless oil with a faint balsamic odor. Fokienol has these properties :
b2 125-126 (corr.) [a] D +18 35'

3 5
d 23 0.9236 n|>
'
1.4975
Dehydrogenation with sulfur yielded mainly cadalene.

On dehydration, fokienol forms the corresponding monocyclic sesquiterpene, viz.,
fokieriene which is instantly and almost quantitatively isomerized to isofokienene,
CieH 2 4.
1
(b) BICYCLIC.
Amyrol
Ci5H 26 Mol. Weight 222.36
Years ago the sesquiterpene alcohols occurring in West Indian sandalwood oil were
called amyrols until Ruzicka, Capato and Huyser showed that the higher boiling
*
fractions of this oil consist of a mixture of several, mainly bicyclic sesquiterpene alcohols
CisHfoeO, in which one or several cadinols predominate.
i
Rec. trav chim. 47 (1928), 378.
Atractylol
Years ago Gadamer and Amenomiya l observed in the oil derived from the roots of
Atractylis ovata Thunb., a sesquiterpene alcohol C^HÔ,
m. 59
b. 290-292
b 162
nD 1.51029-1.51101
756 ALCOHOLS
which they named atractylol. More recently Ruzicka, Koolhaas and Wind showed
2
that atractylol is in reality a mixture of mainly eudesmol and other sesquiterpene

alcohols.
1
Arch. Pharm. 241 (1903), 25.
2
Helv. Chim. Ada 14 (1931), 1178.
Bulnesol
Wienhaus and Scholz from guaiac wood oil a simple, unsaturated, bicyclic,
!
isolated
tertiary sesquiterpene alcohol C^HÔ which they named bulnesol. This alcohol,
which is isomeric with guaiol, had these properties:
m. 69-70 dl 0.93S9
b4 136- 138 nl? 1.48915
1
Ber. Schimmel & Co., Jubilaums Ausgabe (1929), 269.
Cinnamonol, Foliol and Combanol

Treating the sesquiterpene fraction of cinnamon leaf oil with phthalic anhydride,
Glichitch 1 isolated three bicyclic sesquiterpene alcohols, C^HÔ, which he named
cinnamonol, foliol, and combanol.
Cinnamonol This primary alcohol b 2>6 130-135, dlJ 0.9753, o^1 -30 40', n|{
1.513 is a viscid yellow oil of agreeable, persistent odor.
Foliol. This secondary alcohol b2 5 133-135, d}g 0.9729, JJ -15 50', nj? 1.514
.
is an even more syrupy oil of similar but fainter odor.
Combanol.This tertiary alcohol bi. 6 115-116 d|};i 0.9687, ajj ~0, nf, 5 1.50702
,
1 -
is a very thick oil of wax-like character. Dehydration by warming with concentrated

formic acid yielded the corresponding sesquiterpene, viz., combanenc, bio 126- 127,
d}|;| 0.9207, a}? -28 20', nJJ 1.5106, a colorless oil with a faint odor reminiscent of
citronellal hydrate.
All three alcohols give oily phenylurethanes.
Parfums France 3
1
(1925), 124.
Costol
This bicyclic primary sesquiterpene alcohol containing two double bonds was found
by Semmler and Feldstein in the fraction b a 175 190 (d 2 i 1.0082, a D +33,
1
no 1.51962) of costus root oil (Saussnrea lappa Clarke). Being a primary alcohol,
costol readily reacts with phthalic anhydride and can be regenerated from the acid
phthalate.
Thus isolated and purified, costol has these properties:
bn 169-171 nD 1.5200
d 2i 0.9830 Mol. refr. Caic. 67.67
+130' Found 67.90
On
oxidation with chromic acid in glacial acetic acid solution, costol yields an alde-
hyde Ci 6 H220 which can be characterized by the preparation of a semicarbazone m.
217-218. This aldehyde, b 164M65 d 22 0.9541, D +24, n D 1.50645, should
,
theoretically have a density of about 0.99; therefore molecular rearrangements seem

to take place in the course of the oxidation.
Ontreatment with phosphorous trichloride, costol yields costyl chloride C^H^Cl,
bis 160-165 which, by reduction with sodium and alcohol, gives isocostene CisH^, a
sesquiterpene probably of caryophyllene type and containing two double bonds.
Isocostene has these properties:
bw 130-135 nD 1.50246
d2 i 0.9062 Mol. refr. Gale. 66.15
+ 31 0' Found 66.37
i
Ber. 47 (1914), 2433, 2687.
Cryptomeradol = Eudesmol
C 15 H 26 Mol. Weight 222.36
Wienhaus and Scholz l isolated from Japanese cedar wood oil (Cryptomeria japonica
Don.) a new sesquiterpene alcohol C^HÔ which they named cryptomeradol. Accord-
ing to later investigations by Ruzicka, Koolhaas and Wind, cryptomeradol is actually
2
eudesmol.
1
Ber. Schimmd <t* Co., Jubilaums Ausgabe (1929), 275.
*Hdv. Chim. Ada 14 (1931), 1178.
Kiganol
Ci 6 II 2 60 Mol. Weight 222.36
Kimura and Mizoshita l

found in the volatile oil distilled from the root of the
Japanese cedar (Cryptomeria japonica) a sesquiterpene alcohol Ci&HêO, viz., kiganol,
a yellow-green liquid which, on exposure to air, turned bluish-green. Kiganol had
these properties:
b9 145M50 MD -6 20'
df 0.9657 ng 1.5055
On
dehydrogenation with sulfur, kiganol yielded cadalene.
In regard to the physical properties, kiganol resembled the cryptomeriol of Kimura, 2
and the sesquiterpene alcohol isolated by Uchida 3 from the leaf oil of Cryptomeria
japonica Don.
The Kimura and Mizoshita do not conform with those of other authors,
findings of
viz., Wienhaus and Scholz,
4
and Sugii and Sengoku 6 who isolated from Japanese
cedar root oil cryptomeradol and machilol, respectively. Ruzicka, Koolhaas and
Wind 6 proved that cryptomeradol as well as machilol is identical with eudesmol.
1
/.
1
Ber. deut. pharm. Ges. 19 (1909), 369. Chem. Zentr. I (1910), 275.
*J. Am. Chem. Soc. 38 (1916), 687.
4
Ber. Schimmel &
Co., Jubilaums Ausgabe (1929), 267, 275.
5
/. Pharm. Soc. Japan 61 (1931), 21. Chem. Zentr. I (1931), 3233.
*Helv. Chim. Acta 14 (1931), 1178.
758 ALCOHOLS
Machilol = Eudesmol
This bicyclic tertiary sesquiterpene alcohol was found by Takagi l in the oil derived
from the wood of Machilus kusanoi Hayata (fam. Lauraceae). Sugii and Shindo 2
isolated machilol from the oil of the bark of Magnolia obovata Thunb. Sugii and
Sengoku reported the occurrence of machilol in Japanese cedarwood oil. Almost
3
simultaneously Ruzicka, Wind and Koolhaas showed that the machilol of Takagi,
4
and of Sugii and Shindo is in reality eudesmol, the j8- form predominating over the
a- form.
1
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan (1921), 565.
2 60 (1930), 709.
Ibid.
*Ibid. 61 (1931), 21 (abstracts in German).
*Helv. Chim. Ada 14 (1931), 1132, 1171.
Selinenol
Some years ago, Ruzicka and Stoll observed in celery seed oil sesquiterpene alcohols
l
Later, Ruzicka, Wind and Koolhaas came to the conclusion

2
of bicyclic nature.
that the seiinenoi CisHêO obtained from selinene CisH^ consists actually of mainly
a-eudesmol and some /3-eudesniol.
1
Helv. Chim. Ada 6 (1923), 852.
2 Ibid. 14 (1931), 1132.
Sesquigoyol
CiBH 26 Mol. Weight 222.36
observed in the wood turpentine oil from Pinus formosana Hayata a bicyclic
Sebe l
tertiary sesquiterpene alcohol CisHêO, viz., sesquigoyol. A few years later, the same
author isolated sesquigoyol from the oil of Pinus pentaphylla distilled in Formosa.
In the opinion of Sebe, 2 sesquigoyol is y-cadinol.
1
2
Taiwanol
Kaf uku and Kato l found in the volatile oil derived from the wood of the Formosa
taiwan cedar (Taiwania crypto merioides Hayata, fam. Coniferae) a sesquiterpene
alcohol CisHueO, viz., taiwanol, which had these properties:
b6 141-143 L -42 33'
df 0.9692 nj? 1.5045
On
treatment with hydrogen chloride, taiwanol yielded cadinene dihydrochloride
m. 117-118. In general, taiwanol resembled cadinol, but, contrary to cadinol,
taiwanol gave a phenylurethane m. 134-135.
1
Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan 6 (1931), 3. Chem. Abstracts 26 (1931), 3125. Ber. Schimmel & Co.
(1932), 63.
(c) TRICYCLIC.
Cyperol
Kimura and Ohtani found x

in the volatile oil derived from the rhizomes of Cyperus
rotundus L. ("kobuschi") a tricyclic tertiary sesquiterpene alcohol CisHÔ, viz.,
cyperol (yields as high as 49 per cent have been reported), which had these properties:
b8 147-150 [a]L -f29 30'

d|8 1.0055 ng 1.51066
Cyperol, as well as cyperene, seems to consist of two isomers. (See "Cypererie.")

1
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan 48 (1928), 128. Chem. Zentr. I (1929), 250. Chern. Abstracts 23
(1929), 3301.
Sesquicryptol
Ci 5 H 26 O Moi. Weight 222.36
Uchida and Murata 1 isolated from the essential oil (fraction b 2 170-180) of
Japanese sugi leaves (Cryptomeria japcrnica Don.) a new crystalline monocyclic, prob-
ably primary sesquiterpene alcohol CisHêO which they named sesquicryptol and
which, after repeated fractionation, had these properties:
#
m. 49-51 [a]g +22 43' (in a 10.92% chloroform solution)

b2 172 -174 nf? 1.4978
df 0.9031
Sesquicryptol yields a liquid tetrabromide, a liquid dihydrochloride, and a liquid

acetate.
On treatment with phosphorous pentoxide, sesquicryptol forms a liquid sesquiterpene
Ci5H 2 4,
b 76 250-255 D
df 0.9078 ng 1.4980
which gives a dibromide. This sesquiterpene seems to be of tricyclic nature and to

possess one double bond.
Tt should be noted in this connection that years ago Uchida 2 had isolated from the
leaf oil of Cryptomeria japonica a sesquiterpene alcohol CisHÔ of unknown constitu-
tion which possessed these properties:
5
b. 284-2S6 [a]k +16 46' (in 5% chloroform solution)
8
dlii 0.9623 ng- 1.5048
1
J. Soc. Chem. Ind. Japan 40, Suppl. Binding (1937), 159. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 6646.
2
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 38 (1916), 693.
760 ALCOHOLS
Shojunol
Ci 5H 26 Mol. Weight 222.36
Ono, Kimura and Imoto brown camphor oil a secondary, apparently

observed
l
in
saturated tricyclic sesquiterpene alcohol CisHÔ, viz., shojunol, which had these
properties:
m. 96 [a]f? +25
b. 273-278 n{? 1.5026
8
di 0.9643
Phenylurethane m. 134.5.
!/. Chem. Soc. Japan 57 (1936), 119. Chem. Abstracts 30 (1936), 4995.
(d) UNKNOWN.
Galipol
This sesquiterpene alcohol was described by Beckurts and Troeger l as the aromatic
principle of the volatile oil derived from the angustora bark (Cusparia trifoliata Engl.).
Galipol is unstable and loses water on warming. The above named authors reported
these properties of galipol :
b. 260-270 D
d 20 0.9270 n!? 1.50624
1
Arch. Pharm. 235 (1897), 527, 634; 236 (1898), 408. See also Beckurts and Nehring, ibid.
229 (1891), 612.
Ipomoeol and Saccharol

Taira and Masujima l observed in the unsaponifiable portions of fusel oils from sweet
potato and molasses a tertiary sesquiterpene alcohol CisHÔ which did not react
with phthalic anhydride. This alcohol, according to its origin from sweet potatoes
or molasses, was called ipomoeol and saccharol, respectively.
1
J. Agr. Chem. Soc. Japan 10 (1934), 232. Chem. Abstracts 28 (1934), 4171.
Ishwarol
Ci 6 H 2 <O Mol. Weight 220.34
l
Aristolochia indica L. a sesquiterpene alcohol CisHÔ, viz., ishwarol, which had these
properties :
bi.o 126-128 [a]g -7 17'
dig 0.9926 nf? 1.5098
1
Juniperol
prepared from juniper bark by steam distillation a solid sesquiterpene

l
Ramsey
alcohol Ci 5 H 2 4O which, on recrystallization from alcohol, melted at 107, d. 1.0116.
Somewhat later Mattsson 2 reported the following properties of this so-called Juniperol:
m. 106.8-107.2 (corr.) [afg + 17 49' (in alcohol)
djS 1.0460 to + '

18 24 ( in chloroform)
nD 1.519
Dehydration by warming with 60 per cent sulfuric acid yielded juniperene CisBta:
b. 251-253 []g -29 52'
dig 0.9331 nf? 1.50233
Some
years later, Hintikka challenged the findings of Mattsson as far as the pro-
3
posed constitution of juniperene is concerned.

1
Z. Kristallogr. 46 (1909), 281.
2
Bidrag till kiinnedom af înlands natur och folk. Utgifna af Finska Vctenskaps-So-
eietoten, H. 72, Nr. 1, Helsingfors (1913). Ber. Schimmel Co. (1924), 89. &
3
Ann. Accul. sclent. Fennicae, Ser. A, Vol. XX, No. 4, Helsinki (1923). Ber. Schimmel & Co.
(1924), 90.
Kuromatsuol
Akiyoshi observed in the oil distilled from Japanese or Korean pine roots a new
l
sesquiterpene alcohol, viz., kuromatsuol.

1
Repts. Imp. Ind. Research Inst., Osaka, Japan [10], 17 (1937), 1. Chem. Abstracts 31
(1937), 8172.
Maali Alcohol
According to Schimmel & derived from maali gum contains a

Co.,
1
the volatile oil
sesquiterpene alcohol C^HêO, m. 105, which yields a chromate m. 111.

1
Ber. Schimmel <fc Co., Oct. (1908), 79. Cf. Gildemeister and Hoffmann, "Die Xtherischen
Ole," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 503.
Macrocarpol
According to Briggs and Sutherland, the fraction bs 130-150 of the volatile oil
1
obtained by steam distillation of the leaves and terminal branchlets of Cupressus

macrocarpa contains a sesquiterpene alcohol CisêO, viz., macrocarpol which has
these properties:
m. 108
[a]g 4-25 24' (c
= 5.24 in ethereal alcohol)
Naphthylurethane m. 88-91.
3,5-Dinitrobenzyl ester m. 157-158.
762 ALCOHOLS
Matico Camphor
C 16H 2 60 Mol. Weight 222.36
According to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, this substance was formerly obtained

1
from the oil of matico leaves in the form of thick hexagonal prisms m. 94, [OJD
28 44' (in chloroform solution).
More recent work of Bohme 2 showed that matico camphor, when recrystallized
from 96 per cent alcohol, melts at 94 and sublimes in vacito (0.06 mm. at 70-80).
Its formula CiaH^sO points to a tricyclic system or to a bicyclic with a double bond,
a monocyclic with two double bonds, or an aliphatic with three double bonds, re-
spectively. Matico camphor is related to the azulene-forming sesquiterpene alcohols.
Whether this azulene is identical with the already known azulene is not yet proved.
"Die Athcrischen Die," 3d Ed., Vol. I, 499.

1
*Arch. Pharrn. 278 (1940), 377. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1941), 2673.
Luparenol
Chapman," on treating the fraction

1
b4 1 10-150 of hops oil with phthalic anhydride
isolated a sesquiterpene alcohol CisHÔ, viz., luparenol, which contains one ethylenic
linkage. Luparenol has these properties:
ba 125-128 [a]f? -3 42'
diJ! 0.9738 nj? 1.5023
Phenylurethane m. 157.
1
J. Chem. Soc. (1928), 1303; 67 (1895), 54.
Partheniol
C 15 H 26 Mol. Weight 222.36
According to Walter, this sesquiterpene alcohol occurs as cinnamatc in guayule

1
resin (Parthenium argcntatum Gray). The alcohol melts at 131, [a]o +88 42' (in
chloroform c = 1.566), the cinnamate at 125-126.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1944), 419.
Sagittol
C 15 H 26 Mol. Weight 222.36
Yanovsky and later White and Jenkins 2 observed in the volatile oil distilled from
l
the roots and rhizomes of Balsamorrhiza sagittata (Pursh) Nutt. a sesquiterpene alcohol
CisHÔ, viz., sagittol. It had these properties:
m. 77-78 (uncorr.)
+25 48' (95% ethyl alcohol, c = 2.080)
nD 1-520 (a)
\ observed on crystals
nD 1.640(7).
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1930), 3446. 2
Pharm. Arch. 13 (1942), 49.
Shairol
Ci 6 H 26 Moi. Weight 222.36
Kir'yalov
l
from the volatile oil of Ferula pyramidata (kar. et kir.) Eug. Kor.
isolated
(syn. F. paniculata LDB) a sesquiterpene alcohol CisHÔ, viz., shairol which had
these properties:
m. 91-93 dig 0.9899

8
bio 146-147 M! 3 -25 54'
1
Carotol
Ci 5 H 26 ,
Mol. Weight 222.36
Asahina and Tsukamoto 1

found, in the derived from the seeds and stems of
oil
carrots, Daucus
carota L., a sesquiterpene alcohol, CisI^cO, of mobile consistency,
which they named carotol. It had these properties:
bi.6 109 [a] D +27 54' and +28 2' (in alcohol)
5
d} 0.9646 n!5 1.4912
The apparently saturated and, on oxidation with potassium permanganate,

alcohol is
yields a sesquiterpene glycol, viz., dihydroxycarotol, CisIIÔa, m. 142, []D 2 25';

monobenzoate m. 83-83.5. When treated with bromine in glacial acetic acid, carotol
yields a dibromidc m. 58.5. On boiling of this dibromide with silver benzoate and on
saponification of the resulting product with alcoholic potassium hydroxide, daucol,
CisHÔo, m. 118.5, [O:]D 15 6', is obtained. The latter yields an acetyl derivative
m. 81.3.
1
J. Pharm. Soc. Japan, No. 525 (1925), 961. Ber. Schimmd & Co. (1927), 70.
Daucol
Ci 5 H 2 60 2 Mol. Weight 238.36
Richter l
found in the high boiling fraction of carrot seed oil, Daucus carota L., a
crystalline compound Ci5H 2 e0 2 which he believed to be a dihydroxysesquiterpene
alcohol, assigning to it the name daucol. When purified through its xanthogenate,
the alcohol had these properties:
m.
*
-17 9' to -17 28'
The presence of two atoms of oxygen points toward two hydroxyl groups but only
one group can be acetylized. The alcohol does not add bromine.
1
Arch. Pharm. 247 (1909), 391, 401. Sec also Deussen and Halm, Ber. 43 (1910), 523. Ber.
Schimmd & Co., April (1910), 73.
764 ALCOHOLS
Sesquibenihidiol
Mol. Weight 238.36
Katsura 1
H
isolated a sesquiterpenediol Ci 6 26 02, m. 120-130, bo.oi 125-130
D 36 1', from the volatile oil occurring in the root of Chamaecyparis formosensis
Matsum, and named it sesquibenihidiol. It gives a monoester of phthalic acid; hence

the conclusion may be drawn that one of the two OH groups is of primary nature,
and the other of tertiary nature. Other chemical evidence indicates that sesqui-
benihidiol is an a-glycol.
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 63 (1942), 1460, 1465, 1470, 1477. Chem. Abstracts 41 (1947), 3447.
Cryptomeriol
Years ago, Kimura 1
observed in the
derived from Japanese cedar wood (Crypto-
oil
meria japonica) a sesquiterpene alcohol of unknown constitution which he named
cryptomeriol and which had these properties :
bio 162M63
d 0.964
[] D -37 5'
Later, Kimura and Mizoshita 2

from Japanese cedar wood oil (province
isolated
Tosa, southern part of Shikoku Island) another sesquiterpene alcohol of unknown
constitution which possessed these properties:
b9 145-150 HD -6 20'
df 0.9657 ng 1.5055
Compare also "Cryptomeradol."

1
Ber. deut. pharm. Ges. 19 (1909), 369. Cf. Ber.Schimmel & Co. April (1910), 35.
2
Equinopanacol
Kariyone and Morotomi observed in the volatile oil of Echinopanax harridys Decne
l
et Planch, a new sesquiterpene alcohol which they named

equinopanacol and which
b,i 150-155 [a]{? +8 29'

d} 0.9022 ng 1.48568
1
Maroniol
Jeancard and Satie l found in the oil derived from Guiana sandalwood a
probably
tertiary alcohol which they named maroniol and which had these properties:
b 20 158-159
d 28 1.0378
a -60'
Soluble in 1.6 vol. of 70% alcohol; soluble in 6.5 vol. of 60% alcohol.
1
III. KETONES
Chrysantone
Mol. Weight 152.23
Takahashi 1
isolated from the volatile oil of Chrysanthemum lavandulaefolium
Makino var. typicum Makino a new ketone CioHieO, viz. chrysantone bio 75-76.
The ketone could be characterized by the preparation of its semicarbazone m. 185-
186, of the p-nitrophenylhydrazone m. 134-135, and of the 2,4-dinitrophenyl-
hydrazonem. 115~-116.
1
/. Chem. Soc. Japan 54 (1933), 843.
Luparone
Chapman l
isolated from the fraction b4 87-97 of hops oil a ketone CiaH 22 O, viz.,
luparone, which had these properties:
b3 74-76 []D -0 24'
dig 0.8861 nL 1.485
Semicarbazone m. 98.
i/. Chem. Soc. (1928), 1303; 67 (1895), 54.
Ishwarone
Ci 6 H O
l
Aristolochia indica L. a colorless sesquiterpene ketone CisH 22 O, viz., ishwarone, which

bi.o 118-120 a?> -46 28'

dig 1.0290 ng 1.5122
Semicarbazone m. 240.
p-Nitrophenylhydrazone m. 186.5.
2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone m. 167.5.
Isoxime in. 133.
1
J. Indian Chem. Soc. 12 (1935), 496.
765
IV. PHENOLS
Microl
Ci 3 Hi 8 O 2 Moi. Weight 206.27
This phenol was found by Ikeda l in the volatile oil of pha-chium or Cinnamomum
micranthum Hayata, a tree resembling camphor and growing in Formosa. Microl
has the following properties:
b4 133-13G
<1J 1.0113
n?, 1.5252
Phenylurethane m. 101.
Naphthyluretliane m. 116-117 .
1
J. Chem. Soc. Japan 61 (1930), 348. Ckem. Abstracts 25 (1931), 3438.
Luparol
Ci 6 H 2 6O 2 Mol. Weight 250.37
According to Chapman, the fraction b 4 110-150 of hops oil contains an optically

1
inactive phenol CieHêOz, viz., luparol, which has these properties:
b2 122-124 O
dig 0.9170
1.4942
J. Chem. Soc. (1928), 1303; 67 (1895), 54.
766
V. LACTONES
Costus Lactone
Costusolactone
Ci 5 H 2 oO 2 Mol. Weight 232.31
This bicyclic iactonc containing two double bonds was found by Semmler and
Feldstein 1% in the fraction b u 200-210 (d 2 i 1.0749, D +38, n D 1.53103) of costus
root oil (Saussurea lappa Clarke). The lactone seerns to be an isorner of alantolactone.
Costus lactone has these properties:
bi 3 205-211 nD 1.53043
d2 i 1.0891 Mol. refr. Calc. 65.91
OLD +28 0' Found (55.85
The methyl ester of the corresponding hydroxy acid, on boiling, yields the original
costus lactone.
On
hydrogenation with platinum and hydrogen, costus lactone is converted into
tetrahydrocostus lactone. (See "Dihydrocostus Lactone.")
1
Ber. 47 (1914), 2433, 2687.
Dihydrocostus Lactone
Dihydrocostusolactone
This bicyclic sesquiterpene derivative was found by Semmler and Feldstein in the l
fraction bn 190-200 (c! 2 i 1.0501, D +44, n D 1.52703) of costus root oil (Saussurea
lappa Clarke). It can be purified by converting the silver salt of the corresponding
hydroxy acid into the methyl ester which on distillation in vacuo yields the original
dihydrocostus lactone.
Thus purified, the lactone has these properties:
big 210-213 nD 1.52289

d 22 1.0776 Mol. refr. Calc. 66.31
+48 0' Found 66.31
On
hydrogenation with platinum and hydrogen, dihydrocostus lactone, as well as
costus lactone, yields the same tetrahydrocostus lactone Ci 6 H 24 O 2 bi 3 19S-202, ,
d 21 1.0451, +33, n D 1.50510, mol. refr. 66.71 (calc.), 66.99 (found).

D
Dihydrocostus lactone can be prepared by warming costus acid with 33 per cent
sulfuric acid (see "Costus Acid").
1
Ber. 47 (1914), 2433, 2687.
767
VI. MISCELLANEOUS COMPOUNDS
Tasmanol
Ci 3 H 2 20 3 Mol. Weight 226.31
Years ago Robinson and Smith 1 isolated from the volatile oil of Eucalyptus risdoni
Hook, f., and E. linearis A. Cunn. a substance b. 268-273, b 2 5 175, d 2 3 1.077, D
0, n|> 1.5269, which they thought to be a phenol, viz., tasmanol. Previously, Baker
and Smith 2 already had observed tasmanol in oil of E. linearis A. Cunn.
Years later, Trikojus and White 3 investigated oil of E. risdoni and found that
tasmanol is not a phenol, but probably an acid CiaHÔa with the structure of a
cyclohexene (or bridged cyclohexene) complex to which is attached a methyl ether
and a carboxyl group (perhaps in aliphatic side chain), viz., Ce^CsH^ÔCHs)-
(COOH).
1
2
Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania, Oct. (1912), 19.
3
Cubeb Camphor
According to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, cubeb on prolonged exposure to

1
oil of
air separates a laevorotatory compound (CisHÔ) which melts at 68-70 and boils
at 248 with cleavage of water.
1
Santal Camphor
Ci5H 24 O 2 Mol. Weight 236.34
The Schimmel chemists found 1

in the oil derived from South Australian sandalwood
(Santalum preissianum Miquel) a compound Ci 5 H 2 4O 2 which they named santal
camphor. It melted at 104-105.
i
Ber. Schimmel & Co., April (1891), 49; Oct. (1891), 34.
Dimyristyl Carbinol
(Ci 3 H 27 ) 2 CH OH Mol. Weight 396.72
According to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, the volatile oil derived from apples con-
1
tains dimyristyl carbinol which melts at 81.5-82. Acetyl compound m. 44-46.
i
Malol
C3oH 4 8O 3 Mol. Weight 456.68
According to Gildemeister and Hoffmann, apple oil contains malol CsoHtsOa which
1
melts on slow heating at 280-282 but at 284-285.on rapid heating. Diacetyl

compound m. 199-200.
1
768
THE PREPARATION OF DERIVATIVES OF
ESSENTIAL OIL CONSTITUENTS
by
FRANCES S. STERRETT, PH.D.
INTRODUCTORY NOTE
The monographs which comprise the preceding pages of this volume make frequent
mention of derivatives employed for the identification of essential oil constituents,
but without including, in every case, a detailed description of the methods by which
such derivatives are prepared in the laboratory.
It is felt, therefore, that a compilation of the most important of these procedures,
accompanied by a short explanation of the chemical reactions involved in them,
may be of help to many workers in the essential oil field. Advanced researchers will,
of course, be acquainted with these methods and reactions, which they will consider
fundamental; but students and newcomers to the industry, and particularly chemists
in remote producing regions where library facilities are limited, should derive con-
siderable benefit from the following chapter, "The Preparation of Derivatives of
Essential Oil Constituents."
Perhaps the chapter will also contribute to a broader understanding of the subject
among that large body of researchers who tend to regard the chemistry of essential
oils as a highly specialized study. With increased understanding should come wider
experimentation. Many an interesting problem awaits solution! The young aca-
demic worker should find the field a most fruitful one for investigation.
ERNEST GUENTHER
DARKELL ALTHAUSEN
THE PREPARATION OF DERIVATIVES OF
ESSENTIAL OIL CONSTITUENTS
Introduction. This chapterintended to serve as a guide in the preparation of

is
crystalline derivatives useful for the identification of essential oil constituents. It

may be considered a supplement to Part VII of Chapter 4 in Vol. I of this work ("A
Procedure for the Investigation of the Chemical Constituents of an Essential Oil").
It will also supplement previous sections of the present volume, since it contains a
more detailed discussion of the preparation of certain derivatives of essential oil
constituents. Not all such derivatives will be discussed here, however, but only
those which are sufficiently important to have been described repeatedly in the earlier
sections of this volume.
In the preparation of this chapter the author has consulted not only the mono-
graphs in the preceding section of this volume, but also the following books:
Mulliken, "A Method for the Identification of Pure Organic Compounds/ 1st
7
S.
Ed., John Wiley, New York (1904).
K. Bournot, "Die Terpene" from "Handbuch dcr biologischen Arbeitsmethoden,"
by E- Abderhalden. Urban and Schwarzeiibcrg, Berlin and Vienna (1929).
O. Kamm, "Qualitative Organic Analysis," 2nd Ed., John Wiley, New York (1932).
R. Shriner and R. Fuson, "The Systematic Identification of Organic Compounds,"
2nd Ed., John Wiley, New York (1940); 3rd Ed. (1948).
E. Huntress and S. Mulliken, "Identification of Pure Organic Compounds," John
Wiley, New York (1941).
Staff of Hopkin and Williams, "Organic Reagents for Organic Analysis," Chemical
Publishing Co., New York (194(3).
There are other standard works which deal with the identification of organic
many
compounds and with the fundamental reactions involved; of these hooks the following
should be mentioned here:
J. Ilouben, "Die Methoden der organischen Chemie," 3rd Ed., 4 Vols., G. Thicmc,
Leipzig (1925-1941); also Edwards Brothers, Inc., Ann Arbor, Michigan.
H. Meyer, "Analysen und Konstitutionsermittlung orgaiiischer Verbindungeri,"
6th Ed., J. Springer Verlag, Berlin (1939).
F. Wild, "Characterization of Organic Compounds/' Cambridge University Press
The Macmillan Company, New York.
(1947); also
S. M. McElvain, "The Characterization of Organic Compounds," The Macmillan
Company, New York (1947).

It should be noted, however, that none of the books mentioned above deals exclu-
sively with the identification of constituents occurring in essential oils.
This chapter will present certain basic information necessary to the preparation
of derivatives for the aliphatic, aromatic and terpenoid compounds found in essential
oils. It is intended to supplement, rather than to replace, the excellent books men-
tioned above.
The arrangement of the. constituents by chemical groups, employed in the pre-
ceding section on "The Constituents of Essential Oils," is also followed here, beginning
771
772 PREPARATION OF DERIVATIVES
with hydrocarbons and continuing with alcohols, aldehydes and ketones, phenols
and phenol ethers, acids, esters, lactones and anhydrides, and other constituents.
This chapter will deal primarily with the preparation of derivatives of organic
substances for the purpose of identification by melting point.
The methods of identification discussed are intended only for the qualitative deter-
mination of constituents. Certain derivatives may be useful also for the quantitative
determination of substances occurring in essential oils; for further details the reader
is referred to Chapter 4 in Vol. I.
Highly specialized identification methods, such as wave-length absorption, Raman

effect, other spectrophotometric methods, polarographic methods, chemical micro-
scopy might prove valuable for certain compounds, but will not be discussed in this
chapter.
Color tests, which may be satisfactory in special cases cannot, in general, be used
for the identification of compounds derived from natural products such as essential
oils, in which the presence of impurities often unavoidable may lead to erroneous
interpretations of results.
In general, before any derivative of an essential constituent can be prepared
oil
for identification purposes, the constituent must be separated from the oil and puri-
fied. Methods for separation are discussed in Part VII of Chapter 4 in Vol. I, and
in previous sections of the present volume (see "Isolation" under the individual'
substances).
The and isolation of certain derivatives by the chromatographic method
purification
may prove adequate and practical at times. This method has been employed with
azulene and coumarin derivatives, for example. No detailed discussion of it can be
given here, however.*
In general, the identity of the isolated compound can be tentatively established
on the basis of its physical properties (including odor) and of its method of isolation.
Final identification should be effected by preparing a derivative and characterizing
it by means of a mixed melting point determination with an authentic specimen. If
the essential oil chemist has no clue as to the identity of the compound, he may be
faced with a research problem.
It is generally advisable, therefore, in carrying out the preparation of a derivative
to use a substance which has been highly purified.
Many reactions for the preparation of derivatives will take place readily only with
chemically pure substances; crystallization, for example, may be greatly retarded,
or even inhibited entirely, by the presence of impurities.
Since many of the constituents which occur in essential oils may be present as
isomeric mixtures, it may be necessary to separate the isomers before undertaking
identification. Even a small amount of an isomer may act as an impurity during the
preparation of a derivative.
It should also be remembered that some compounds have more than one functional
group, each of which may form a characteristic derivative. The position and nature
of the functional groups within the compound will determine which functional group
of the compound will yield the derivative most desirable for identification purposes.
In the attempt to prepare derivatives from terpenoids the organic chemist is often
faced with great difficulties. Due to the complexity and peculiarity of the terpenoid
molecule anomalous reactions often occur. Therefore, before attempting to prepare
*
For general treatment of such method see: L. Zechmeister and L. Cholnoky, "Principles
and Practice of Chromatography," translated by A. L. Bacharach and F. A. Robinson,
John Wiley, New York (1941). H. H. Strain, "Chromatographic Adsorption Analysis,"
Intel-science Publishers, New York (1941). T. I. Williams, "Introduction to Chromatog-
raphy," Black ie and Son, London (1946).
PREPARATION OF DERIVATIVES 773
the derivative of a substance, a thorough study of the original literature pertaining to

the particular substance should be made. It is especially important for the researcher
in terpenoid chemistry to anticipate experimental difficulties possible impurities,
formation of hydrates or other combinations with solvents, polymers or other reaction
products which may be formed in small amounts, molecular rearrangements, dehy-
and isomerization.
dration,
An overwhelming number of derivatives of essential oil constituents has been
reported in the last fifty years. Even compounds present in oils in small quantities
have been identified through such derivatives. Since it has been impossible experi-
mentally to verify the methods described in chemical literature, the author has
all of
had to rely upon that literature for much of her material. It is usual in a discussion
of this kind to append tables of melting points of the various derivatives. The author
has decided against including such tables for two reasons: in the first place there are
frequently notable discrepancies in the melting points reported by various investiga-
tors for the same derivative; and, in the second place, there exist a large number of
isomers in essential such isomers yielding derivatives of different melting points.
oils,
(Cf., for example, the tables of isomers and melting points of menthol derivatives,
see p. 218.) Therefore, the reader will obtain a more objective picture if he consults
the detailed monographs in the preceding sections, where the most important deriva-
tives of individual constituents of essential oils are reported.
I. HYDROCARBONS
The saturated hydrocarbons found in essential oils are chiefly liquid and solid
paraffins (waxes), and certain cycloparaffins. The preparation of crystalline deriva-
tives of saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons is in most cases not feasible; therefore,
identification is best achieved by physical methods.
However, most of the hydrocarbons occurring in essential oils belong to those
*
ter penes which possess at one unsaturated linkage.
least
In general, the characterization of these unsaturated hydrocarbons is less difficult,
since the double bond affords a point of reactivity.
The methods of preparing derivatives, which are most important to the essential
oil chemist, will be discussed in the following order:
A. Oxidation
Dehydrogenation
1.
B. Addition Products
1. Addition of Water (Hydration)
2. Addition of Hydrogen (Hydrogenation)
3. Addition of Hydrogen Halide
4. Addition of Halogen (Halogenation)
5. Addition of Nitrogen-containing Compounds
(a) Nitrosohalides
(6) Nitrosates
(c) Nitrosites
(d) Nitrolamines and Similar Compounds
6. Addition of Maleic Anhydride
7. Addition of Sulfuric Acid (Sulfonation)
8. Addition of Picric Acid and Related Substances
(ft) Trinitrobenzene
(6) Trinitrotoluene (Trotylates)

(c) Trinitrophenol (Picric Acid)
(d) Trinitroresorcinol (Styphnic Acid)
A. OXIDATION
Hydrocarbons with an unsaturated linkage can, under certain mild experimental
conditions, be oxidized to form a hydroxy derivative. This hydroxy derivative may
be further oxidized to an aldehyde or ketone and, still further, to a carboxylic acid.
Aromadendrene, sabinene, phellandrene, and terpinene, for example, upon oxidation
may form glycols, ketones, or acids. Thujene, camphene, myrcene, carene may form
a mixture of acids.
In many cases profound degradation will occur unless oxidation is carried out
under carefully controlled conditions. Moreover, since the oxidation product may
be unstable, exposure to the destructive action of the oxidant may cause its further
oxidation. For example, in the preparation of a glycol, the oxidation process may
easily be carried too far and may yield an acid.
*
The term terpenes is used here in its broad sense and includes the sesquiterpenes and
diterpenes.
774
HYDROCARBONS 775
Another factor influencing oxidation, and one which may sometimes retard it, is
the insolubility of hydrocarbons in aqueous solution. It is, therefore, often advisable
to use solvents such as acetone instead of water.
One of the most common and most useful agents employed in organic oxidation is
potassium permanganate. It functions as an oxidizing agent of different strength
in alkaline, neutral, and acid solutions. When potassium permanganate is used in
aqueous solution, the solution becomes alkaline through the formation of potassium
hydroxide :
2KMn0 + H 4 2 -> 2MnO 2 + 2KOH + 3[0]
It is often essential towash the manganese dioxide thoroughly to extract any adher-
ing oxidation products. After removal of the manganese dioxide the acid may be
recovered by acidification. The separation of the acid by an insoluble salt (such as
the silver, lead or mercury salt) may be indicated in certain cases.
In a few cases, to expedite oxidation, the use of neutral potassium permanganate
solution is advisable. To neutralize the alkali formed, the chemist
introduce may
carbon dioxide, or he may employ magnesium sulfatc, which will form neutral potas-
sium sulfate and insoluble magnesium hydroxide.
The acid solution resulting from the addition of acetic acid or sulfuric acid to potas-
sium permanganate solution yields a powerful oxidizing agent and is rarely used for
the oxidation of essential oil constituents.
2KMn0 4 4- 3H 2 S0 4 -> 2MnS0 4 + K S02 4 -f 3H 2 + 5[0]
For an example of cautious permanganate oxidation, the reader is referred to the

discussion of "Terpinolene" (p. 30). The methods reported are those of Wallach, 1
and Briggs and Sutherland. 2 Another example of mild oxidation will be found on
page 36, a method employed by Wallach for oxidation of a-terpinene.
3
Two examples of oxidation in neutral solution are described on pages 58 and 17.
The first is the method of Thurber and Roll 4 employed in the oxidation of a-pinene;
the second is that of Wallach 5 applied to p-cymene.
Chromic acid and sodium or potassium dichromate are frequently employed as
oxidizing agents. The usual oxidation is carried out with dichromate in the presence
of sulfuric acid (see "Bisabolene," p. 86).
The Beckmann mixture is often mentioned in connection with the oxidation of
constituents of essential oils (see "a-Tcrpinene," p. 37 and "A - and A -Carene,"
3 4
pp. 51 and 52) this mixture consists of a solution of 60 parts of potassium dichromate,
;
80 parts of concentrated sulfuric acid, and 270 parts of water.
K Cr 2 2 7 + 4H 2 S0 4 -> K S0 +
2 4 Cr 2 (S0 4 ) 3 + 4H 2 + 3[0]
Chromic anhydride (CrO;0 dissolved in glacial acetic acid is sometimes used as an

oxidizing agent (see "Gurjunene," p. 120).
2Cr0 3 -> Cr 2 3 + 3[0]
Ozone used for the purpose of degradation, in which process the molecule splits
is
at the double-bond position. Such oxidation is especially important for the deter-
mination of molecular structure; for example, to establish the presence of methylene
and isopropylidene groups.
for oxidation, great care must be taken to prevent nitra-
If nitric acid is employed
tion. Even when dilute solutions of nitric acid are used, the products of oxidation
may contain nitro derivatives; for example, camphene with dilute nitric acid forms
a nitro derivative (see p. 67).
As can readily be seen from the above discussion, the variations in the technique
employed may yield such divergent end products that identification by oxidation of
a given compound may become a major problem. The author cannot, therefore,
sufficiently emphasize the importance of consulting the original literature
6
and fol-
lowing exactly the specific procedure therein outlined.
1. Dehydrogenation. Dehydrogenation can be used for identification purposes when
the dehydrogenated product is a solid, or when the latter forms derivatives more
readily than the substance being examined. For example, no crystalline derivatives
have been reported for isocadinene, which, however, upon dehydrogenation, yields
cadalene, from which it is possible to prepare crystalline derivatives. Vetivene,
calamene, zingiberene, and isozingiberene also form cadalene upon dehydrogenation
with sulfur (see p. 81). However, many other sesquiterpenes (for example, eudesmol
and selinene) form eudalene upon dehydrogenation. The difference in color which
results from the use of various dehydrogenating agents, that is, sulfur and selenium,
is often of value in the identification of azulenic compounds.
B. ADDITION PRODUCTS
Addition of Water (Hydration). When used in connection with the identifica-
1.
tion of organic compounds occurring in essential oils, hydration may generally be
considered as the addition of the elements of water to a double bond.
H
JLV (^ xl rt (^ il
||
+H 2
- |
R' C H R' C H
OH
The productsresulting from hydration alcohol.
Being alcohols, they offer a possibility of further identification by the formation
of characteristic derivatives of alcohols, such as urethanes. Certain hydration prod-
ucts are actually tertiary alcohols, but are nevertheless referred to as "hydrates,"
even though they contain no water of hydration in the molecule (for example, santene
hydrate, camphene hydrate). A typical example of a substance containing water
of hydration is terpin hydrate, in which a molecule of water is added to the glycolic
substance, terpin. If these hydration products, or so-called hydrates, have a well-
defined melting point, they may be used for identification purposes (for example, in
the case of the caryophyllenes and santalene).
Direct hydrations are carried out with solutions of acid. With certain compounds
mere shaking of the substance with a dilute acid solution will effect hydration; with
others it may be necessary to heat on the steam bath for several hours.
Some terpenes, however, are so unstable that, on being acted upon by acids, they
are converted into isomers without forming separable hydration products (phellan-
drene is such a terpene). Other terpenes form hydration products only under con-
trolled conditions. For example, if optically active limonene is treated in the cold
with acids, hydration to terpincol and terpin hydrate will frequently result. If heated
with mineral acids, it may be converted into terpinene and p-cymene (see p. 25).
The hydrates of santene and selinene are prepared indirectly from the hydrohalide
by the action of a solution of calcium hydroxide (see pp. 80 and 108).
In some cases it may be possible, by the action of acid, to obtain an isomer of the
HYDROCARBONS 777
hydration product: camphene, for example, when hydrated usually forms isoborneol
and some borneol; it forms camphene hydrate only as an intermediate product. For
the formation of camphene hydrate, see below. Similarly, hydration of cyclofenchene
will produce isofenchyl alcohol.
Some hydration products, being alcohols, may esterify with the acids used for the
hydration: a-fenchene, upon hydration with glacial acetic acid and sulfuric acid, yields
isofenchyl acetate (p. 71).
reported that cadinene is not altered when digested with a
7
Ruzicka and Stoll
10 per cent sulfuric acid solution in alcohol, but when treated with the Bertram-
Walbaum mixture is isomerized to isocadinene.
The Bertram-Walbaum reagent consists of a mixture of acetic acid and a small
amount of dilute sulfuric acid. For the hydration of camphene, Bertram and Wal-
baum 8 recommended the use of 250 parts of glacial acetic acid and 10 parts of
50 per cent sulfuric acid. The mixture is added to 100 parts of the hydrocarbon and
the whole solution then warmed for hydration purposes. Under these conditions
camphene will yield chiefly isobornyl acetate. The Bertram-Walbaum method is
often used for the hydration of terpenes such as santene (p. 80), caryophyllene (p. 102),
ocimene (p. 11), etc. (A more detailed procedure for this method will be found on
pp. 67and 102.)
Aschan 9 carried out hydration reactions with a mixture of equimolar amounts of
absolute ether and sulfuric acid monohydrate. He advanced the hypothesis that
the catalytic action of the diethyloxonium sulfate hi the mixture results in the forma-
tion of oxonium salts.
The experiment he carried out on camphene proceeded as follows:
About 1of sulfuric acid monohydrate was cooled in an ice mixture, then
mol
added dropwise, with stirring, to 1 mol of absolute ether. Ten per cent less than
the molar equivalent of the camphene was divided into three portions. Each por-
tion was then added separately to the mixture. After each such addition the tem-
perature was allowed to rise somewhat. The first portion was added to the cooled
mixture; the second portion was added at a somewhat higher temperature, but
below 20 the last portion was added at room temperature, and the mixture allowed
;
to stand for some time. The reaction mixture was then added gradually to a satu-
rated solution of sodium carbonate in contact with excess solute. Two layers
formed. The ether layer was separated and the water layer washed twice with
ether. The camphene hydrate was then steam distilled from the water layer.
10
Aschan also prepared camphene hydrate by the use of equimolar quantities of
sulfuric acid and ether. By the action of the Aschan reagent upon santene, dipentene,
and a-pinene, isomerization products were obtained (see Aschan n ).
Asahina and Tsukamoto (p. 102) used the Aschan reagent successfully for the
preparation of caryophyllene alcohols.
2. Addition of Hydrogen (Hydrogenation). Hydrogenation products will prove
useful for the identification of a compound if either the hydrogenated product itself
is a known solid with a well-defined melting point or if the hydrogenated product
readily yields a characteristic derivative which cannot be prepared from the original
compound under examination.
In some cases hydrogenation leads to molecular rearrangement and results in for-
mation of substances of different ring structure. /3-Pinene, for example, changes to
the isomeric a-pinene upon hydrogenation (see p. 63).
The experimental conditions required for hydrogenation vary greatly. In certain
cases, especially when a system of conjugated double bonds is present, the hydrogen
substance for example, /3-myrcene (p. 8) or zingiberene (p. 88). In most cases,
however, hydrogenation is more complicated, and special experimental conditions
are required. In many instances, hydrogenation can be easily effected in the presence
of such catalysts as nickel, nickel-containing alloys (such as Raney nickel), or various
types of platinum and palladium catalysts. When hydrogenation is slow, the use of
hydrogen under pressure may be indicated, but this will depend upon the nature of
the compound itself.
Hydrogenation is too complex a procedure to be discussed in more detail here. The
reader, therefore, should consult the original literature. A voluminous patent litera-
ture on the subject also exists.
3. Addition of Hydrogen Halide. Many terpenes form characteristic solid addi-
tion products with hydrogen halides. When such addition compounds have well-
defined melting points, they are particularly useful for the identification of certain
terpenes.
Many hydrogen halide addition products decompose easily, with regeneration of
the original terpene.This offers a convenient method for the isolation and purifica-
tion of numerous terpenes. Compounds which may be isolated in this way include
a-terpinene, cadinene, bisabolene, sylvestrene, santenc, and solinene. The hydrogen
halide addition product most frequently employed for the identification of terpenes
is the hydrochloride.
R C H R C II
II -f HC1 ->
R' C -H R' C II
Cl
Reactions involving the addition of hydrogen halides or halogens are almost always
exothermic and are, therefore, usually carried out at low temperature.
Not terpenes yield crystalline hydrogen chloride addition products (isocadinene
all
and a-caryophyllene, for example). This fact may be of value for distinguishing
certain isomeric forms, for example, isocadinene and cadinene (p. 96), and a-caryophyl-
lene and /3-caryophyllene (p. 103) .
In the terpene series the addition of hydrogen halides to double bonds is often
accompanied by rearrangement of the ring system; this is true in the cases of /3-phel-
landrene, zingiberene, carene, sabinene, bisabolene, sumbulene, and others.
The transformation and intramolecular rearrangement of terpenes, such as pinene
and camphene, were studied by Wallach and by Meerwein and van Emster, 12 and
more recently have been reviewed thoroughly by Hiickel. 13 On treatment with the
theoretical quantity (no excess) of hydrogen chloride, camphene will usually form
true camphene hydrochloride, whereas on treatment with an excess of hydrogen
chloride, it will be converted to isobornyl chloride, which product will be obtained
also if camphene hydrochloride is further treated with gaseous hydrogen chloride.
The parent hydrocarbon camphene) can be regenerated from camphene hydro-
(i.e.,
chloride, as well as from isobornyl chloride, if either one of these chlorides is treated
with alkali.
A method of preparing terpene hydrochloride addition products follows; it may
be employed
withjft-
and 7-caryophyllenes, camphene, a-terpinene, myrcene, zingi-
berene, bisabolene, sylvestrene, camphorene, santene, and selinene:
Dry hydrogen chloride gas is introduced at low temperature (usually at 0) into

a solution of hydrocarbon in absolute ether (usually 1:1 or 1:2). The hydrocarbon
HYDROCARBONS 779
is saturated with the hydrogen chloride, generally by using 2 mols of HC1 to 1 mol
of the hydrocarbon. The ether is then removed by evaporation, and the residue
recrystallized, or separated under suction, washed with cold alcohol, and recrystal-
lized from a suitable solvent, such as absolute alcohol.
Other solvents used in the preparation of hydrogen chloride addition products

include chloroform (suggested for bornylene, see p. 77), alcohol (recommended for
/3-phellandrene, p. 48), and acetic acid (see below).
It is important to carry out the reaction under absolutely anhydrous conditions,
since otherwise a molecular rearrangement may take place. For example, A 3-carene
can be converted into different addition products, depending upon whether it is
treated with anhydrous hydrogen chloride or with aqueous hydrochloric acid (see
p. 51). The true hydrochloride usually forms when dry hydrogen chloride gas is
employed.
Another procedure for the preparation of hydrogen halides consists in using glacial
acetic acid as solvent.
Theglacial acetic acid solution is saturated with the hydrogen halide. This
solution is added to a mixture of hydrocarbon in glacial acetic acid. The mixture
is then poured into ice water. The addition product will generally precipitate
immediately and can be separated and recrystallized.
This procedure can be followed not only in the preparation of the hydrogen chloride
compounds, but in the preparation of other hydrogen halide addition products
such as hydrogen bromides and hydrogen iodides. (See "Cadinene," p. 93.)
To regenerate the hydrocarbon from the addition product the following methods
(among others) have been suggested:
Heating of the addition product with aniline (see "a-Terpincne" Isolation,

(a)
p. 35). Ten grams of the terpene dihydrochloride are heated with 20 cc. of aniline
until the reaction starts. Then 20 cc. of glacial acetic acid are added and the mix-
ture steam distilled. The distillate, which contains considerable quantities of
aniline, is shaken with oxalic acid solution. The hydrocarbon is again driven off
from the acid solution by steam distillation, the distillate is shaken once more with
oxalic acid, and the process repeated until the distillate is absolutely free from
aniline. The hydrocarbon can then be separated, dried, and distilled over metallic
sodium.
Dipentene and santene have also been regenerated from their hydrochlorides with
aniline.
Other amines such as diethylaniline may be used in place of aniline as a regeneration
aênt (see sylvestrene, p. 32).
(b) Boiling of the addition product with sodium acetate in glacial acetic acid.
Bisabolene arid sylvestrene, for example, have thus been recovered. This method
often gives better results.
(c) Treating of the addition product with alkali. Potassium hydroxide in methyl
alcohol may be used (see "Selinene," p. 109) or a 10 per cent solution of potassium
;
hydroxide in ethyl alcohol (see "Camphorene," p. 127); or sodium alcoholate (see

"Cadinene," p. 92).
It should be remembered that hydrogen halide addition products may serve also
for the identification of compounds other than hydrocarbons, such as certain alcohols,
ketones, and acids. For the preparation of these products, the reader is referred to
the preceding sections of this volume in which the individual substances are
discussed.
4. Addition of Halogen (Halogenation). Halogen reaction products, often referred
to as halides, are useful for the identification of many hydrocarbons, as well as of
some oxygen-containing compounds, such as certain alcohols, phenols, ketones, alde-
hydes, and acids. In the present section chiefly the hydrocarbon halides will be
considered.
Two kinds of reaction may take place between a hydrocarbon and a halogen:
addition or substitution.
The always accompanied by the formation of halogen acid. Therefore, in
latter is
the usual laboratory procedure, an addition reaction is indicated by the decoloriza-
tion of the bromine solution, without the formation of hydrogen bromide.
Many hydrocarbons, especially those of the tcrpene series, form well-defined crys-
talline derivatives upon the addition of halogen for example,
myrcene, ocimene,
styrene, dipentene, limonene, terpinolene, terpinene, fenchene, longifolene, heerabo-
lene, and others. In the presence of certain so-called negative groups (phenyl, car-
bonyl, etc.), the addition reaction of bromine may be very slow.
Two examples of substances containing such negative groups are diphenylethylene
and cinnamic acid. In both of these the negative groups are bound to an ethylenic
bond.
It should be remembered that steric effects may also decrease the speed of reaction.
Of the halogens, iodine is used mainly for the quantitative determination of un-
saturation in organic compounds (see "Iodine Number," Vol. I, p. 305); whereas
bromine serves chiefly for the qualitative determination of unsaturation. Iodine,
bromine, and chlorine in many cases form addition products with essential oil con-
stituents arid may therefore be employed for the identification of the latter. Bromine
is more frequently used for this purpose than iodine and chlorine and will be discussed
more fully here.

Halides be of the mono- or poly- type, depending upon the experimental
may
conditions and the substances employed. Of these, the tetrabromides constitute the
most important group for the identification of terpenes (although it should not be
forgotten that a single compound may form several types of halides).
Wallach 14 suggested the following method for the preparation of tetrabromides:
One volume
of terpene is diluted with 4 volumes of ether and cooled in an ice
mixture; 0.7 volume of bromine are addled dropwise to the mixture, at low tem-
perature. After all the bromine has been added, the ether is evaporated. In the
case of pure terpenes which are capable of forming solid tetrabromides separa-
tion of crystals usually starts within a few minutes. The mixture is allowed to
stand 1 to 2 hr. The crystals are then separated, if necessary washed with cold
alcohol, and recrystallized from ether.
The use of alcohol as a solvent for the bromination of terpenes is recommended,

since bromine reacts much more readily with terpenes than with alcohols, so that
the alcohol does not interfere in the reaction. Furthermore, the tetrabromides formed
are almost insoluble in cold alcohol, which is at the same time a good solvent for the
oily impurities (by-products always formed along with the solid compound, in many
cases in large quantities) .
It should be emphasized here that an excessive formation of oily by-products con-

siderably retards the crystallization of the solid tetrabromides and, in some instances,
inhibits it entirely. It is also of importance to use completely anhydrous reagents,
which mayhelp to minimize the formation of oily products. Allowing the oily mass
to stand in the cold for a long time (sometimes for several weeks) may also induce
crystallization.
HYDROCARBONS 781
In certain cases the addition of bromine may take place very smoothly when the
terpene is diluted with ten times its weight of glacial acetic acid. Ethyl acetate is a
good solvent for recrystallization of the tetrabrornide.
In connection with the preparation of limonene tetrabrornide, page 24, Baeyer 15
obtained crystalline tetrabromides by brominating the terpene fraction in a solution
of equal parts of amyl alcohol and ether, then evaporating the ether slowly. God-
levski 16 recommended adding a mixture of the terpene and equal parts of amyl alcohol
and ether, dropwise, to an ice-cold solution of bromine in ether. The mixture must
be kept ice cold throughout the reaction. Gaponenkov n has recently stated that
the reaction is best carried out by reversing this order of addition, although using
the same solvents (p. 24). Berry 18 has also reported on the preparation and charac-
teristics of certain terpene tetrabromides.
For the preparation of the dibromide of styrcne, the following procedure has been
recommended (see p. 14):
To a solution of 48.5 mol) of freshly distilled styrene in 400 cc. of pure ether,
g. (1
add 126.8 g. of bromine dissolved in (300 cc. of ether. Place the solution of styrene
in an open beaker surrounded by ice water and keep in motion with a mechanical
stirrer. Regulate the rate of flow of the bromine in solution by the change in color,
from red to a very light yellow. The entire operation is most advantageously car-
ried out in direct sunlight. The crude product obtained by distilling off the ether
is purified by recrystallization from alcohol.
It is also possible that upon bromination, certain unstable terpenes isomerize in

the course of the reaction cyclofenchene, for example, when treated with bromine,
forms a-fenchene dibromide (see p. 74).
In the preparation of the chlorides, chlorinating agents such as phosphorus
pentachloride, and antimony trichloride, may be more effective than chlorine
itself.
Iodine can be employed for the preparation of addition compounds in a manner

similar to bromine. For the identification of constituents in essential oils, iodides,
however, are used only infrequently.
5. Addition of Nitrogen-containing Compounds. Many unsaturated hydrocarbons,
especially those of the terpene series, form crystalline addition products with nitroso-
halides and with the acids corresponding to the various oxides of nitrogen.
(a) Nitrosohalides. The nitrosochloride addition compounds are those most fre-
quently reported in literature. They are usually formed by the addition of nitroso-
chloride to a double bond :
H
+ NOC1 --
HC
2
Nitrosyl Pinene
Chloride Nitrosochloride
If the carbon atom attached to the nitroso group ( NO) is also attached to a hydro-
gen atom, transformation into the isomeric oxime may take place. In literature the
nitrosochlorides are frequently presented in the oxime form:
CHs CH 3
X
HC 2 CH ll,C C=NOH
4- NOC1 >
TT r* r*U
^t2
X!H
JtluO v
\ /
P\ /C
CH 3 TT^X'
Limonene Nitrosyl Limonene Nitrosochloride
Chloride (Oxime Form)
The nitrosochloride may exist in a bimolccular form; according to Simonsen,

19
the actual nature of the linkage between the two molecules has not been established.
Terpenes forming crystalline nitrosochlorides include limonene, dipentene, sylves-
trene, phellandrenc, carene, pinene, fenchene, santene, humulene, zingiberene,
cadinene, caryophyllene, santene, and also the alcohol terpineol.
Nitrosochloride addition products are formed by the action
of nitrosylchloride
(NOCl) a nascent state upon
in terpenes, generally in the presence of solvents such
as acetic acid or alcohol. For example: (1) hydrochloric acid may be added dropwise
to a well-cooled solution consisting of ethyl nitrite (or preferably amyl nitrite), glacial
acetic acid, and the terpene; or (2) a gaseous mixture of hydrogen chloride and nitrous
anhydride may be conducted into the well-cooled solution of the terpene and solvent.
After the addition product is formed, separation may best be effected by pouring
the solution into cold water.
Wallach (see p. 57) suggested the following method for the preparation of (opti-
cally inactive) a-pinene nitrosochloride :
A mixture consisting of 50 g. of the terpene, 50 g. of glacial acetic acid and 50 g.

of ethyl nitrite (or amyl nitrite) is cooled well. Fifteen cubic centimeters of hydro-
chloric acid (32-33 per cent) are added dropwise. The nitrosochloride addition
product soon separates form and
in crystalline may be obtained in a fairly pure
state upon filtering and washing with alcohol. From the filtrate more nitroso-
chloride may separate on standing in the cold.
Acetone may be particularly suitable as solvent for the recrystallization of nitro-

sochloride addition products.
*
The ethyl nitrite may be prepared as follows:
Two hundred and fifty grams of sodium nitrite are dissolved in 1 liter of water,
placed in a large distilling flask equipped with a well-cooled condenser, and 100 g.
*
Great care must be exercised in the preparation of this reagent, because of the possibility
of explosion. The reagent is best stored in a refrigerator.
HYDROCARBONS 783
of alcohol are added. To this solution a mixture of 200 g. of concentrated sulfuric

acid, 1.5 liters of water, and 100 g. of alcohol are added very slowly. The liberated
nitrous acid reacts immediately with the alcohol, forming volatile ethyl nitrite
(b. 88.7), which may be distilled off steadily as it forms. If the operation is properly
conducted, 100% of the alcohol employed is transformed into ethyl nitrite, which
may be used as reagent in the preparation of nitrosochlorides without further
purification.
Ethyl or amyl nitrite may be used as a reagent for the preparation of nitrosochlorides
of pinene or limonene. However, a preferable method, according to Rupe, 20 consists
in the introduction of a gaseous mixture of nitrous anhydride and hydrogen chloride
directly into the terpcne-containing solution. This latter method is said to give a
higher yield.
A crystalline mass sodium chloride and concentrated hydrochloric acid is placed
of
in a flask, and a saturated solution of sodium nitrite, and concentrated sulfuric acid
simultaneously are added dropwise. These solutions are best introduced into the
flask in a ratio of 2 volumes of sulfuric acid to 3 volumes of sodium nitrite; this ratio
should prevent formation of excess hydrogen chloride. It is best to pass the gas mix-
ture first through an empty gas-washing bottle and then through a gas-washing bottle
filled with calcium chloride, both bottles being well cooled in an ice arid salt mixture.
This gas mixture may then be introduced into the reaction flask containing a well-
cooled mixture of equal volumes of the terpene and ether, and half a volume of glacial
acetic acid. The first color of the solution should be light green, changing to bluish-
green; this serves as an indication that the proportion of gases is favorable to the
desired reaction. A
brownish color, on the other hand, indicates an excess of nitro-
gen oxides; a dark green indicates the presence of an excess of hydrogen chloride.
The latter should especially be avoided, since it will prevent formation of a solid nitro-
sochloride, and only a green oil will be obtained. In order to obtain good yields it is
advisable to keep the temperature low a condition most easily achieved when work-
ing with small quantities.
Ehestadt recommended a similar method for the preparation of terpene nitroso-
chlorides (see p. 57).
Several modifications of the above methods have been suggested. Ahlstrom and
Aschan (see p. 57) advised saturating a mixture of the terpene, glacial acetic acid,
and ethyl nitrite with dry hydrogen chloride gas.
Thurber and Thielke suggested using a mixture of hydrochloric acid in 90 per cent
methyl alcohol (5 N). Employing the amount of hydrochloric acid theoretically
necessary, this mixture is added to a solution of 40 cc. of a-pinene, 40 cc. of 90 per
cent methyl alcohol, and 40 cc. of ethyl nitrite. The separated nitrosochloride is
recrystallized from a mixture of chloroform and methyl alcohol (for further details,
see p. 56).
Similar procedures for the preparation of phellandrene nitrosochloride were recom-
mended by Francesconi and Sernagiotto, and by West 47 and 44).
(see pp.
In the case of a-pinene nitrosochloride, Ehestiidt, 21 modifying Wallach's procedure,
suggested adding \y% parts of the theoretically necessary quantity of 32 per cent
hydrochloric acid dropwise to a concentrated solution of sodium nitrite. The gases
generated are then conducted into a well-cooled ethereal solution of a-pinene (1:1).
In the case of pinene nitrosochloride, the addition product may be decomposed
and a-pinene regenerated. According to Wallach (p. 55), this may be accomplished
by boiling the nitrosochloride with aniline in alcoholic solution.
Certain nitrosochiorides such as those of limonene, dipentene, and terpineol
may be converted into oximes by the action of alkali, for example, on boiling with
alcoholic potassium hydroxide.
CHa CHs
HC
2 C = NOH HCr (?=NOH
KOH^
HaC CH 2 H*C .CH*
XJH CH
H (T
2
c
>
\CH 3 H CT
2
^
Limonene Nitrosochloride Carvoxime
( Oxime of Carvone )
(6) Nitrosates. Nitrosates are characteristic addition products containing N204

in the molecule. These compounds contain a NO
group (similar to the nitroso-
chiorides) and, in addition, a ON02
group attached to an adjacent carbon atom.
These addition products have been prepared among others from limonene, dipentene,
caryophyllene, A -carene, fenchene, zingiberene, humulene, curcumene, cadinene, and
3
also terpineol.
Wallach ** prepared these characteristic addition products by heating a solution
of equal volumes of the terpene and amyl nitrite with 0.5 volume of glacial acetic
acid and 1 volume of nitric acid (d 1.395) in the cold with shaking. After the addi-
tion of alcohol, the nitrosate will separate as an oil which often solidifies completely
only after being cooled to a very low temperature (solid CO2).
According to Wallach, the nitrosochiorides and nitrosates are useful for the identifi-
cation of unsaturated compounds only in so far as their lesser solubility permits the
separation of the terpcnic compounds in question. Generally, however, the nitro-

sates and nitrosochiorides are less suited for final identification, because many of
them possess melting points lying within a very close range; or melting points not
sufficiently sharp to constitute a means of exact determination. The latter is true
also of certain nitrosites (see "Phellandrene," p. 42). Consequently, it is important
to confirm the identity of a terpene derivative by a mixed melting point determina-
tion with an authentic specimen.
(c) Nitrosites. Nitrosites are characteristic addition products containing in Ôs
the molecule. These compounds contain a NO
group (similar to the nitrosochiorides)
and, in addition, a ONO group attached to an adjacent carbon atom (cf. "Nitro-
sates").
In the so-called pseudonitrosites the ONO group is probably present as a NO2
group.
The nitrosites of many terpenes are reported to exist in the oxime form (for exam-
23
ple, a-terpinene nitrosite, according to Wallach ) or sometimes in the bimolecular
24
form, according to Simonsen.
Occasionally the nitrosites are called nitrites, since they contain the oxynitroso
group ONO. They have been obtained from phellandrene, myrcene, terpinene,
bornylene, santene, zingiberene, humulene, orthodonene, caryophyllene, and others.
HYDROCARBONS 785
For the preparation of nitrosites, the introduction of nitrous acid directly into
solutions of the terpene and the solvent is sometimes recommended (see "Caryophyl-
lene," p. 102).
25
According to Bournot, the best procedure is the following:
The hydrocarbon is first dissolved in petroleum ether, and a concentrated aqueous

solution of sodium nitrite is added. Glacial acetic acid is introduced to form nitrous
acid and the whole mixture well cooled and shaken. The entire mixture is then
allowed to stand for several days in the cold.
The separated crystals decompose more or less readily, depending on the nature
of the substance employed. The
crystals are best separated in the cold and recrystal-
lized. It may, in some cases, be advisable to add a particular solvent to the mixture
right from the start, the solvent being chosen for its usefulness in maintaining, in
solution, all those substances which tend to inhibit crystallization.
In the case of phellandrene, the reaction proceeds most rapidly and smoothly in
the presence of petroleum ether at low temperatures. The reaction with terpinene is
somewhat slower and is best carried out in glacial acetic acid at comparatively
higher temperatures. It may be often necessary to seed the mixture to induce
crystallization.
Similar procedures have been reported for the preparation of a- and /3-phellandrene
nitrosites (see pp. 42 and 46) and for a-terpinene nitrosite (Wallach, 26 see p. 36).
Acetone, methyl alcohol, and ethyl acetate may be used as solvents for recrystalliza-
tion.
Certain nitrosites are photolytic and thermosensitive this is particularly true of
;
the caryophyllencs (see p. 101).

(d) Nitrolamines and Similar Compounds. Various organic bases, such as alkyl
or aryl amines, react with nitrosochlorides, nitrosites, and nitrosates to yield crys-
talline compounds which may serve for the identification of many terpenes and ter-
pene derivatives. Bases used for this reaction are mcthylaminc, ethylamine, propyl-
amine, amylamine, etc. Benzylamine, aniline, and piperidine, sometimes even
ammonia, may give good results. In this reaction, amines form nitrolamines; aniline
yields nitrolanilines; etc.
27
According to Wallach, the acid radical ( Cl; ONO; ON0 2) of the nitroso-
chloride, nitrosite, or nitrosate reacts with the organic base or ammonia:
CH 3 CHu
c ONO C NIL'
H H.C' C=NOH
NHa
CH .CH
^* C
in CII
CH 3 H C'
a
Terpinene Nitrosite Terpinene

(Oxime Form ) Nitrolamine
CH 3
^j CH3
i Cl C NHCcHs
C=NOH H*C X!=NOH
X
H
CH a HC2 CH
Limonene Nitrosochloridc Limonene Nitrolaniline
(Oxime Form)
Wallach recommends the following procedure:
One mol of the nitrosochloride or the nitrosate is covered with alcohol and 2 mols
of organic base are added and warmed slightly to dissolve the mixture. (A violent
reaction often results.) On completion of the reaction the mixture is diluted with
water and allowed to crystallize. After cooling, the compound usually precipitates
completely. The separated compound is again dissolved in a small amount of cold
glacial acetic acid, the solution is diluted with water, the product separated from non-
basic constituents by filtration, and the nitrol compound precipitated with ammonia.
A characteristic property of these nitrolamines is that, in the course of separation,

they are at first a sticky, spongy mass, becoming crystalline only after several hours
or sometimes days.
Some nitrosochlorides are rather unstable and the preparation of their more stable
nitrolamines may, therefore, be an advantage (see "A 3 -Carene," p. 50).
Certain nitrosites cannot be converted into their nitrolamines (see "Phellandrene,"
p. 43).
Nitro Compounds. These compounds possessing an N02 group are very rarely
prepared for the purpose of identifying hydrocarbons occurring in essential oils. The
same is true of nitroso compounds, other than those described above.
6. Addition of Maleic Anhydride. The addition reaction between a substance con-
taining an ethylenic bond and a substance possessing conjugated double bonds was
named by Diels 28 the "Diene Synthesis." Diels and Alder in numerous experiments
investigated possible variations of this synthesis.
The reagent most frequently employed for the substance containing an ethylenic
bond is maleic anhydride.
R R
CH-CO HC' CH-CO
CH-CO H-CO
Maleic H
Anhydride ?
R'
Maleic Anhydride
Addition Product
HYDROCARBONS 787
In addition to maleic anhydride, other substances possessing ethylenic components

are often used in this type of reaction for example, acrolein, crotonaldehyde, and
acetylene derivatives (such as acetylene dicarboxylic esters).
Many compounds occurring in essential oils possess conjugated double bonds and
may therefore be identified by their reaction products resulting from the diene syn-
thesis. These addition products are usually solids, with well-defined melting points.
A significant characteristic of the diene synthesis consists in the fact that the two
reaction components combine without a catalyst, frequently even without a solvent.
Room temperature is often sufficient; only occasionally higher temperatures must
be used. The reactions usually proceed to completion vigorously.
Maleic anhydride addition products intended for the purpose of identification have
been reported for myrcene, ocimene, limonenc, terpinolene, terpinene, phellandrene,
carene, and caryophyllene, among others. In the case of phellandrene, under deter-
mined experimental conditions, maleic anhydride will react with a-phellandrene,
but not with /3-phellandrene, and thus serve as a useful reagent for distinguishing
between the two isomers (see p. 43).
The reagent, maleic anhydride, is a white crystalline solid; melting at 53- 54;
soluble in acetone, chloroform, and ether; very slightly soluble in alcohol; and spar-
ingly soluble in petroleum ether.
Goodway and West (see p. 43) recommended the preparation of the phellandrene
addition product as follows :
Ten grams of a-phellandrene are refluxed with 5 g. of maleic anhydride in 20 cc.

of ether for 30 min. The adduct is recrystallized from methyl alcohol.
Ethyl acetate has been recommended as a good solvent for the terpinolene adduct
(P- 31).
In many instances the addition product resulting from diene synthesis may be con-
verted into more than one compound useful for the identification of a particular
substance. Thus, the adduct of maleic anhydride may be converted into the corre-
sponding dicarboxylic acid or into a salt of this acid. For example, the barium salt
of such an acid has been mentioned in connection with the isolation of a-terpinene.
This acid salt may be decomposed by heating and the a-terpinene recovered (see
p. 35).
The use of the diene synthesis for the preparation of derivatives of compounds
occurring in essential oils is comparatively recent and offers good possibilities for
further application to substances not yet investigated.
7. Addition of Sulfuric Acid (Sulfonation). The addition of sulfuric acid to hydro-
carbons often results in the introduction of the sulfomc group, SOsII.
Sulfonic acids arc not to be confused with the esters of sulfuric acid (for example,
alkyl sulfuric acid, ROS0 2 OH). In ethyl sulfuric acid, also called ethyl hydrogen
sulfate or ethyl acid sulfate (C^HsO-SlÔII), the H
8O 3 group is linked to the
oxygen and not to the carbon.
The preparation of sulfonic acids does not always proceed smoothly and appears
to be limited to certain hydrocarbons.
Experimental conditions and the nature of the reaction compound will determine
the number of SOsHgroups, which can be added to a substance. The possibility
of the formation of isomeric mixtures and the difficulties connected with their separa-
tion should not be overlooked.
As sulfonation agents, concentrated sulfuric acid or fuming sulfuric acid are most
frequently used; acid sulfates, sulfite and acid sulfites, chlorosulfonic acids, and
N-pyridinium sulfonic acid may also occasionally be employed.
Certain sulfonic acids are comparatively easily obtained by the action of concen-
trated sulfuric acid. If the sulfonic acids can be prepared with relative ease and
have well-defined melting points, they may be useful for the identification of hydro-
carbons.
Many sulfonic acids are crystalline solids, often hygroscopic and easily soluble in
water. They are strong acids, forming metallic salts, wlu'ch usually crystallize well.
Their alkali salts are readily soluble in water. This offers a possibility of separating
the sulfonic acids, as alkaline salts, from other water insoluble substances; subsequent
acidification will then regenerate the desired sulfonic acid.
It must be kept in mind that under the influence of strong acids, such as sulfuric
acid, not all compounds form the desired sulfonic acid; they may instead be con-
verted into other compounds, isomerized, or polymerized, etc.
Sulfonic acids as identification products have been reported in connection with
myrcene and cymene, among others.
It is also possible to identify the prepared sulfonic acid further by the preparation
of sulfonamides (R-SCVNHo) (see "/;-Cymenc," p. 17). Aryl sulfonarnides, particu-
larly, are sparingly soluble, crystallize well, and may be used to great advantage for the
identification of sulfonic acids. Forpurpose the sulfonic acid in question is first
this
converted into the more stable suljouyl chloride (R-SCVCl) for example, by the
action of phosphorpcntachloride or phosphoroxychloridc on the aryl sulfonic acid
which on treatment with ammonia yields the desired aryl sulfonamide.
8. Addition of Picric Acid and Related Substances. Many aromatic hydrocarbons,
particularly members of the condensed ring system, may be readily identified by the
addition compounds formed with trinitrobenzene; the picrates, formed with trinitro-
phenol (picric acid); the sty ph nates, formed with trinitrorcsorcmol (styphnic acid);
arid the trotylates, formed with trinitrotoluene.
CI!a H
NO* OaN, NO* N02 N0 2

\ \
OH
NO* NO* NO* N0 2
1,3,6-Trinitro- 2,4,6-Trinitro- 2,4,6-Trinitro- 2,4,6-Trinitro-

benzene toluene phenol resorcinol
( Picric Acid ) ( Styphnic Acid )
(a) Trinitrobenzene is a pale yellow crystalline solid, melting at

Trinitrobenzene.
121, easily soluble in hot alcohol, but relatively insoluble in water.
It forms addition products with many aromatic hydrocarbons, phenols, certain
amines, hetcrocyclic compounds, and aromatic ethers.
Generally speaking, the derivatives crystallize readily and possess a brilliant
color.
The majority of addition compounds are cquimolecular, but in several instances
2 mols of the reagent combine with only one of the substance (for example, stilbene,
o-dianisidine, dibcnzyl, etc.). In some cases 3 mols of the reagent may combine with
two of the substance (for example, fluorene). Some compounds may combine with
either 1 or 2 mols of trinitrobenzene.
H YD ROCA RBONS 789
The following general procedure is recommended for substances yielding deriva-

tives stable in hot alcohol:
A
mixture of equimolar quantities of substance and reagent is dissolved in hot
alcohol, acetic acid, or benzene; upon cooling crystallization occurs. The crystals
are separated and recrystallized and then dried in air.
(b) Trinitrotoluene (Trotylatefi). a pale yellow crystalline solid.

Trinitrotoluene is
Its melting point is 82. Trinitrotoluene may also be used as a reagent to form addi-
tion products with hydrocarbons. These addition products, known as trotylates, can
be prepared in the same way as the trinitrobenzene addition products. Both types
have been reported for some compounds in the azulene scries. Trinitrotoluene addi-
tion products, although they would appear to be as useful as those formed with trinitro-
benzene, have not received as much attention in chemical literature.
(c) Trinitro phenol (Picric Acid). Picric acid is a bright yellow crystalline sub-
stance, melting at 122, soluble in water (1 in 70 cold, 1 in 15 hot) and in cold alcohol
(1 in 20).
It forms addition products with a large number of aromatic hydrocarbons, phenols,
aromatic ethers, amines, alkaloids, and heterocyclic compounds. Such addition
products are easily and rapidly prepared, and hence are especially to be recommended
for identification purposes.
The picratc can be prepared by mixing hot solutions of the two components in a
single solvent (usually alcohol, acetic acid, acetone, or water) and cooling until the
crystalline derivative separates. Benzene, ether, or chloroform may sometimes be
employed when the pierate unstable to hydroxylic, solvents. Some of the lower
is
aromatic hydrocarbons may yield pi crates only when the reagent is refluxed with
the hydrocarbon. In certain cases, the addition products are very unstable and, if
the hydrocarbon under examination is easily volatile, it may evaporate when a melting-
point determination is attempted, leaving the pure picric acid in. 122.
For the large majority of derivatives, 1 mol of the original substance will combine
with 1 mol of picric acid. The addition product should be recrystallized from the
original solvent until it has a constant melting point. This can generally be accom-
plished after one recrystallization.
Tritration of the weakly acidic; pierate solution may be of help in determining the
molecular weight of the unknown component (assuming an equimolar composition).
For certain substances, purification by means of the pierate is possible. The pierate
may be decomposed by treatment with warm dilute sodium hydroxide or ammonia
to regenerate the original compound.
(d) Trinitroresorcinol (Styphmc Acid). Styphnic acid is a yellow, crystalline solid,
melting at about 176. It yields addition compounds with aromatic hydrocarbons
(and alkaloids) in much the same manner as does picric acid. The compounds formed
do not crystallize quite as readily as the picrates and are usually obtained in lesser
yield. Nevertheless, they are useful derivates, particularly since reliable reagents
for hydrocarbons are few in number. This reagent will also form addition products
with certain amines and heterocyclic compounds.
Almost all derivatives are equimolar. No stable derivatives are formed by the
simple homologues of benzene.
For a general procedure the following may be useful :
A mixture
of 1.23 g. of the reagent and 0.02 mol of the hydrocarbon is dissolved
in 5-10 cc. of acetic acid by heat. Upon cooling, the addition compound crystal-
lizes. The derivative is filtered off, washed first with acetic acid, then with alcohol,
and finally dried in air.
After the melting point has been determined, it is best to recrystallize the deriva-
tive from acetic acid and to make another melting point determination.
With certain compounds it may be advisable to employ benzene as a solvent, since
otherwise dissociation will occur. For naphthalene, azulenes, eudalene, and cadalene
derivatives, alcohol may be employed.
Various other reagents have been found useful for the characterization of unsatu-
rated hydrocarbons; these include:
Naphtho- and anthraquinones

29
Nitro compounds and antimony trihalides 30
Antimony trichloride 31 32 33 - -
Sulfur, hydrogen sulfide and mercaptans

34
Thiol compounds *
1
LiebigsAnn. 368 (1909), 10, 13.
,7. Org. Chem. 7 (1942), 397.
2
3
Liebigs Ann. 362 (1908), 297. See also Henry and Paget, J. Chem. Soc. 123 (1923), 1878.
4
Ind. Eng. Chem. 19 (1927), 739.
Liebigs Ann. 264 (1891), 10.
6
6
The tables of oxidizing agents and products by J. Houben, "Die Methoden der organ-
ischen Chcmie," 2d Ed., Vol. II (1931), 210, may prove of great value in this connection.
Detailed procedures for specific oxidation are included in this work.
7
Helv. Chim. Ada 1 (1924), 92.
*
J. prakt. Chem. [2], 49 (1894), 1.
9
Medd. Vetenskapsakad. Nobclinst. 5 (1919), No. 8. Ber. Schimmel & Co. (1919), 130.
w Ibid.
11
Ibid.
12
Ber. 53 (1920), 1821; 65 (1922), 2521.
13
Nachr. Akad. Wiss. Gottingen Math, physik. Klasse (1941), 59. Chem. Abstracts 37 (1943),
3074.
"Terpcne und Campher," 2d Ed. (1914),
14
59.
16
Ber. 27 (1894), 448.
uChem.Ztg.2* (1898), 827.
17
Chem. (U.S.S.R.) 7 (1937), 994. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 5340.
J. Gen.
18
Australian Chem. Inst. J. and Proc. 14 (1947), 376. Chem. Abstracts 42 (1948), 2246.
" "The Terpenes," 2d Ed., Vol. I
(1947), 162.
*>Helv. Chim. Acta 4 (1921), 149.
21
Ber. Schimmel cfc Co., April (1910), 165. See p. 57 of this work.
Liebigs Ann. 245 (1888), 258.
22
Ibid. 356 (1907), 223.

24
"The Terpenes," 2d Ed., Vol. I (1947), 198, 207.
26
"Die Terpene," from "Handbuch der biologischen Arbeitsmethoden," by E. Abderhal-
den. Urban and Schwarzenberg, Berlin and Vienna (1929), 965.
Liebigs Ann. 287 (1895), 384; 313 (1900), 346; 350 (1906), 176; 356 (1907), 223.
26
27
Ibid. 241 (1887), 321; 252 (1889), 118; 270 (1892), 181.
**Angew. Chemie 42 (1929), 911.
29
Diels and Alder, Ber. 62 (1929), 2337. Chem. Abstracts 24 (1930), 847.
30
Shinomiya, Butt. Chem. Soc. Japan 15 (1940), 259. British Chem. Abstracts (1940), A,
I, 412.
31
Sabetay, Compt. rend. 197 (1933), 557.
32
Levine and Richman, Biochem. J. 27 (1933), 2051. Chem. Abstracts 28 (1934), 3392.
33
Delaby, Sabetay, and Janot, Compt. rend. 198 (1934), 276. Chem. Abstracts 28 (1934),
2321.
34
Jones and Reid, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 60 (1938), 2452.
36
Ipatieff, Pines and Friedman, ibid., 2731. Cf. Ipatieff and Friedman, ibid. 61 (1939), 71,
684.
II. ALCOHOLS
The derivatives most frequently employed for the identification of alcohols are
those which characterize the functional hydroxyl group OH(phenols also contain
the hydroxyl group and may be considered a special type of alcohol).
Many organic as well as inorganic esters are prepared primarily for the isolation
of the alcohols; if the esters are crystalline and have well-defined melting points they,
may also serve as derivatives for identification purposes. Among the esters most
frequently employed are the benzoates, phthalates, and borates.
For identification purposes, the urethanes are of great importance, the a-naphthyl-
urethanes and p-nitrophenylurethanes being reported most frequently in literature.
Some alcohols can also be identified by many of the procedures already described
for the identification of hydrocarbons: oxidation, hydrogenatioii, formation of reac-
tion products with compounds containing nitrogen (such as nitrosyl chloride), forma-
tion of reaction products with halogens, with hydrogen halicles, etc. However, only
those reaction products peculiar to the OH
group will be discussed here, and in the
following order:
1. Dehydration Products
2. Calcium Chloride Addition Products
3. Esters:
(a) Borates
(b) Phthalates (Nitrophthalate)
(c) Benzoates (7>Nitrobenzoate, 3,5-Dinitrobenzoate)
(d) Sulfonates and Sulfates
4. Urethanes:
Phenyl-, a-naphthyl-, p-nitrophenyl-, 2,4-dinitrophenylurethane, allophanate
(
=
carbamylurethane)
5. Xanthates ( = Xanthogenates)
1. Dehydration Products
In this section dehydration means the elimination of the elements of water from
an organic compound. Most tertiary alcohols are unstable and split off water when
reacted upon by the reagents generally employed
in the preparation of alcohol deriva-
tives. Dehydration products (usually hydrocarbons) will result, which may be useful
for the identification of an alcohol, if the dehydration product can readily be identi-
fied. For an excellent example of this technique the reader is referred to the work
of Ipatieff and Pines. 1
Dehydration methods are generally based upon catalytic decomposition of tertiary
alcohols with gentle heating. Catalysts which induce dehydration include most acids
:
(sulfuric, formic, acetic, phthalic, etc.) and certain acid anhydrides (acetic, phthaiic,
phosphorous pentoxide, etc.), iodine, zinc chloride, magnesium chloride, and potassium
bisulfate.
Certain alcohols will dehydrate almost quantitatively under special experimental
conditions, a fact useful in their quantitative determination. (See Vol. I of this work,
p. 277. A similar procedure may generally prove satisfactory for qualitative tests.)
Dehydration as a means of identification is employed chiefly with tertiary alcohols,
791
such as hydrate, and cedrol, which dehydrate readily. Cer-
linalool, terpineol, terpin
tain secondary alcohols, however, may also dehydrate, for example, isoborneol and
isopulegol. Among the primary alcohols geraniol is a notable exception in that it
dehydrates readily with zinc chloride and similar catalysts.
2. Calcium Chloride Addition Products
Many primary alcohols among them ethyl alcohol, butyl alcohol, geraniol, benzyl
alcohol, and cinnamic alcohol form complex, crystalline salts when shaken with
powdered anhydrous calcium chloride in absolute ether or in benzene, or sometimes
in the absence of a solvent.
Calcium chloride addition products are employed largely for purposes of isolation
and purification. The original alcohol is easily regenerated by the addition of water
to the separated calcium chloride complex.
The geraniol addition product is the most important of those listed above, since
it affords a means of separating this alcohol from similar primary alcohols (such as
neroi and citronellol). A

procedure for the preparation of calcium chloride addition
products will be found in the monograph on "Geraniol" (p. 171). It should be remem-
bered that the separation of geraniol by this method is not quantitative; furthermore
the sample under examination should contain at least 25 per cent of geraniol.
3. Esters
In the present section only those esters which are most frequently used in essential
oil chemistry will be considered.
Esters of succinic, oxalic, and malonic acids (and others) are often employed to
identify certain alcohols, since they constitute characteristic derivatives.
In the preparation of esters of organic acids, acids as such arc only seldom used,
their anhydrides or chlorides being better suited to the purpose.
Primary and secondary alcohols react with acyl chlorides to form esters. Tertiary
alcohols, however, frequently do riot react in this way; instead they may dehydrate
to form hydrocarbons, halogen derivatives of hydrocarbons, or complex mixtures of
the ester and dehydration products.
As a general rule primary, secondary, and tertiary alcohols differ greatly in respect
to the speed with which they react to form esters. The extent of the esterification
accomplished in a given time, under standard conditions, may therefore often be of
considerable value in differentiating between these various groups of alcohols. Pro-
cedures based on the rates of esterification have been used for many years in the
essential oil field.
With acid anhydrides, primary alcohols react more quickly than secondary alcohols,
and the latter react more quickly than tertiary alcohols.
On the other hand, with halogen acids, primary alcohols react only slowly upon
re fluxing for example, with 48 per cent hydrogen bromide whereas secondary
alcohols react fairly rapidly with the same reagent. Certain tertiary alcohols, how-
ever, react very quickly with halogen acids (hydrogen bromide, for example) to give
a good yield of alkyl halides. 2
In working with certain alcohols it may prove desirable to prepare special esters,
which, however, cannot easily be formed. In such cases it may be necessary to resort
to a method seldom employed for identification purposes the so-called ester exchange,
illustrated in the following equation:
HCOOR + R'COOCH 3 -> IICOOR' + HCOOCH 3

The alcohol may be with an organic acid of low molecular weight
first esterified,
(such as acetic or formic acid) at room temperature, so that dehydration of the alcohol
does not take place. After the ester (formic ester, for example) is separated, it is
allowed to react with an equimolar amount of methyl ester of the carboxylic acid,
which will furnish the acid component of the desired ester. Verley 3 has reported on
this exchange of reactive groupings which may be taken advantage of for sensitive
primary, secondary, and tertiary alcohols. Difficulties are sometimes encountered,
especially with tertiary terpene alcohols.
Certain esters borates, acid phthalates, and benzoates, for example are formed
not only with pure alcohols, but in fractions rich in alcohols. They are, therefore,
especially useful for the isolation and purification (as well as identification) of alcohols.
Such esters are generally high boiling, and lower boiling impurities in mixtures con-
taining them caneasily be distilled off in vcwuo. Esters thus isolated may be purified
and subsequently hydrolyzed to yield the pure alcohol.
(a) Borates (Boric Esters). Primary and secondary alcohols can readily be con-
verted into the esters of boric acid. This reaction offers the possibility of separating
these alcohols from essential oils or other mixtures.
Since tertiary alcohols do not react with boric acid to any appreciable extent under
the standard experimental conditions, and since primary alcohols esterify more rapidly
than secondary alcohols, the preparation of borates offers a further possibility of
separating the three groups of alcohols. The borates may frequently be purified by
recrystallization before regeneration of the alcohol.
One of the chief advantages in the use of borates for the separation of alcohols lies
in the fact that boric; acid or boric anhydride is weakly acidic and, in the presence of
sensitive substances, causes comparatively little molecular rearrangement or decompo-
sition.
The procedure has been employed successfully in industry; the patent literature
4
describes a number of methods.

If the borates are solids and can be further purified by recrystallization, they may
serve as useful derivatives in the identification of alcohols. In many cases the alcohol
may be obtained in a pure state by hydrolysis of the reorystallizcd borate.
For the formation of bortitcs of those alcohols which are subject to dehydration,
Kaufmann 6 suggested carrying out alcoholysis so that an exchange of the alcohol
radical is effected. To obtain the desired crystalline borate Kaufmann treated the
alcohol with a low boiling borate (ethyl or butyl) thus effecting an alcohol inter-
change.
6
Schmidt suggested the following procedure :
The amount of boric anhydride, calculated to be necessary for the formation of

the tricster, is added to the alcohol, and the mixture is heated to about 80-100
in a suitable distilling flask. The water formed by
the reaction is distilled off,
under slightly reduced pressure (this water can be measured to estimate the com-
pletion of the reaction) The borate is finally recrystallized from a suitable solvent.
.
A slightly different method has been foundto be practical for the preparation of
certain borates. The reaction should be carried out by refluxing the reaction mixture
in a water insoluble solvent, such as benzene, toluene, or xylcne. The solvent is chosen
for its boiling point,which should be within the range of the temperature at which
the borate forms most favorably. The water formed during the reaction can be
carried over with the solvent into a water trap. It often proves effective to add acetic
anhydride in catalytic amounts to the reaction mixture.
When mixed anhydride, in a calculated amount, is employed to form the borate,
the same procedure as that outlined above may be followed. The mixed anhydride
is prepared by combining 1 part by weight of boric acid with 5 parts by weight of
acetic anhydride:
B(OH) 3 + 3(CH 3 -CO) 2
--
B(OOC-CH 3) 3
7
reports that arsenous acid [As(OH) 3 ], arsenous anhydride (As20 3 ), or
Zeitschel
the mixed anhydride with acetic acid [As(OOC-CH 3 ) 3 ], may be used in the same
manner as the boric acid reagents discussed above. Antimonous acid [Sb(OH) 3 ] or
phosphorous acid [P(O1I) 3 and their anhydrides and mixed anhydrides may also be
]
employed in the same way. For all mixed anhydrides the acetic anhydride may be
replaced by other organic anhydrides, such as propionic, butyric, valeric, benzoic,
or phthalic anhydride. However, with the use of arsenous, antimonous, and phos-
phorous acid reagents, the reaction proceeds at somewhat higher temperatures. In
this respect boric acid offers an advantage.
(b) Phthalates (Phthalic Acid Esters). Phthalic acid esters are very often pre-
pared not only for the identification of certain alcohols, but for their isolation and
purification. Phthalic acid esters are prepared by treating alcohols (or fractions rich
in alcohols) with phthalic anhydride, by which procedure the monoester (i.e., the
acid ester) formed.
is
In many, but not all cases, the preparation of phthalic acid esters has been used
frequently for the separation of primary, secondary, and tertiary alcohols occurring
in essential oils. Primary alcohols form acid phthalates quantitatively, even at steam-
bath temperatures in dilute benzene solutions, and may be separated, as sodium
salts of the phthalic acid esters, from the secondary and tertiary alcohols. Secondary
alcohols react less readily, and it is usually necessary to heat the mixture of anhydride
and alcohol to a temperature of 120-130 without solvents. Tertiary alcohols,
under such conditions, are not reactive.
Phthalic acid esters have been prepared for a great number of aliphatic, aromatic,
and terpene alcohols.
It is possible to prepare the silver salt from the acid phthalate; such salts may be used
for identification purposes (for example, of 3-hexenol, bupleurol, geraniol, citronellol) .
Pickard and Kenyon prepared the monoester of a number of secondary alcohols,

8
and converted the pure acid phthalates into their alkaloidal salts (for example, strych-
nine, cinchonidine and brucine salts) a method which proved suitable for the identi-
fication of certain alcohols (2-heptenol, 3-octanol, 2-hcndecanol, thujyl alcohol,
santalol, etc.).
For the purpose of separating primary and secondary alcohols from essential oils,
Elze 9
recommended the method described below.
The reagentphthalic anhydride is a white crystalline solid, melting at 129-131.
It is only slightly soluble in cold water; more soluble in hot water, forming phthalic
acid; soluble in alcohol; but less soluble in ether.
Equal parts by weight of the alcohol, of benzene, and of phthalic anhydride are
refluxed for \% After cooling, the excess phthalic acid is precipitated with
hr.
petroleum ether and separated; the solvent is then distilled off and the residue
treated with sodium or potassium carbonate solution. Two layers will form, of
which the lower one is discarded. The upper layer is then dissolved in large amounts
of water. This solution is extracted with ether to separate unreacted impurities
that have not combined with phthalic anhydride. The aqueous solution is then
acidified with 20% sulfuric acid and the phthalic acid monoester precipitated with
sodium chloride ("salted out")- The ester may now be extracted with ether, and
after the ether is evaporated the acid phthalate may be recrystallized.
Saponification of the phthalic acid ester with alkali (for example, alcoholic potas-
sium hydroxide) will regenerate the pure alcohol, which can be separated by adding
ALCOHOLS 795
water and extracting with ether. The ether layer should be washed * until neutral,
preferably with tartaric acid solution and then with water. After the ether is evapo-
rated the primary alcohol can be distilled for purification purposes.
Secondary alcohols should be heated for 1H hr. with phthalic anhydride without a
solvent on an oil bath at 125, then separated as above.
10
Goggans and Copenhaver prepared a series of monoalkyi phthalates from normal
aliphatic alcohols and suggested heating the anhydride with the alcohol for 30 min.
to 2 hr. at 105-110. The amount of anhydride and the time of heating were in-
creased as the molecular weight of the alcohol increased.
The reaction mass of the lower boiling alcohols, after heating, must be treated dif-
ferently from the reaction mass of the higher boiling alcohols. The variation of
procedure is based upon the difference in solubility between low boiling alcohol
sodium phthalates and high boiling alcohol sodium phthalates, in aqueous solution.
For the lower boiling alcohols the following procedure has been developed by Gog-
n
gans and Copenhaver:
The reaction mass is treated with benzene, the excess anhydride is filtered off
and the mixture neutralized with dilute sodium carbonate, leaving the solution
slightly acid. The aqueous layer is extracted with benzene to remove unreacted
alcohol and possible diesters. The esters are precipitated as crystalline solids from
the water solution by dilute hydrochloric acid, and recrystallized from a mixture
of petroleum ether and 10% benzene.
For the higher boiling alcohols the following procedure has been suggested by Gog-
12
gans and Copenhaver:
The reaction mass treated with ether and filtered to remove excess anhydride.
is
After evaporation of the ether, the residue is warmed with water to 60-65 for
45 min. to hydrolyze any remaining anhydride. The dried residue is dissolved in
a small amount of chloroform and filtered to remove any phthalic acid; the chloro-
form is evaporated in vacuo, and the ester recrystallized from petroleum ether.
The preparationof phthalic acid esters for identification of certain tertiary alcohols
has been reported, but the yields of reaction products are very small.
It should be pointed out here that phthalic anhydride will react also with com-
pounds other than alcohols amines, phenols, and hydrocarbons.

viz.,
The melting points of phthalic acid esters are sometimes too low to serve con-
veniently as means of identifying alcohols. For this reason 3-nitro phthalic acid esters,
generally possessing higher melting points, are often preferable.
The reagent, 3-nitrophthalic anhydride, is a yellow crystalline solid, melting at
163-1G-1. It readily reacts with alcohols (especially aliphatic), forming monoesters
in the same manner as phthalic anhydride.
According to Nicolet and Sachs
13 be carried
the preparation of these esters may
out as follows:
A quantity of the anhydride is treated with half its weight of alcohol and heated
on a water bath for 10 min. The product is then dissolved in hot water, allowed
to crystallize, filtered, dried, and recrystallized.
The phthalic monoesters possess a further advantage over other alcohol deriva-
tives, viz., being acids they may be titrated with standard alkali to determine the
molecular weight equivalent of the alcohol. The determination of molecular weight
equivalent may be of special advantage where the melting points of the alcohol acid
phthalates lie too closely together to be of use in identification.
*
For water soluble esters, see the procedure of Goggans and Copenhaver (see below).
One disadvantage connected with these derivatives should be noted, however: in
the case of certain 3-nitrophthalates, two isomeric esters whose separation may be
difficult can be formed.
Theuse of other substituted phthalic anhydrides has been suggested. Fessler and
Shriner,
14
for example, reported on derivatives of tertiary alcohols obtained by
reacting tertiary alkoxy magnesium bromides with tetrachlorophthalic anhydride.
The solid esters resulting from this reaction may be characterized by their neutral
equivalents and their decomposition points.
(c) Benzoates (Benzole Esters). Esters of benzoic acid are often prepared for the
separation and purification of an alcohol; they are occasionally used also for identifi-
cation purposes.
In the preparation of benzoates (benzoylation) benzoic anhydride or benzoyl chlo-
ride may be employed to form esters of bonzoic acid, which are usually high boiling.
Of the two reagents, benzoic anhydride reacts more slowly. used in the prepara-
If
tion of alcohol derivatives, application of heat for several hours in the presence of
sodium benzoate may be necessary. For this reason, benzoyl chloride is to be pre-
ferred as a reagent.
The reaction of organic compounds with benzoyl chloride has been studied by
Schotten,
16
and by Baumann; 16 the method of benzoylation based on their work is
stillvery widely used.
Benzoyl chloride possesses an advantage over certain other acyl chlorides, which
may serve for the preparation of derivatives, in that it decomposes only very slowly
in cold water. The fact that the OH group of the alcohol reacts much more rapidly
with this acyl chloride than does the OH group of the water permits preparation
of esters even in aqueous solution. The benzoyl esters formed are insoluble in water.
Esterification with benzoyl chloride may be effected under various experimental
conditions. Usually it is carried out in an alkaline medium, for example, in the
presence of sodium carbonate, pyridine, quiriolinc, dimethyl aniline. In certain
instances derivatives may be prepared more effectively by refluxing the alcohol with
benzoyl chloride itself.
Generally only primary and secondary alcohols react with benzoyl chloride (or
substituted benzoyl chlorides) to form benzoates. Tertiary alcohols are usually con-
verted in large part to the corresponding chlorides. However, it may be possible to
prepare esters from the tertiary alcohols (as well as from primary and secondary alco-
hols) by the reaction of the appropriate benzoyl chloride with the alcohol in the pres-
ence of absolute pyridine.
It is possible to prepare other benzoates, such as p-nitrobenzoates or 3,5-dinitro-
benzoates. These latter are often preferable to other benzoates because of the readi-
ness with which they crystallize.
Benzoyl chloride is an almost colorless liquid, which fumes in moist air.
p-Nitrobenzoyl chloride is a pale yellow crystalline powder with a melting point of
72-73. It slowly hydrolyzes in moist air to p-nitrobenzoic acid; it is readily soluble
inbenzene and carbon tetrachloride and somewhat less soluble in petroleum ether.
3,5-Dinitrobenzoyl chloride is a white crystalline solid, melting at 08-69, which
hydrolyzes in moist air to dinitrobcnzoic acid and hydrogen chloride; it is soluble in
nonpolar solvents without decomposition.
Phenols and certain amines also react with benzoyl chloride.
The preparation of benzoates or p-nitrobenzoates may be carried out as follows :
Dissolve the alcohol (or phenol) in a small amount of pyridine, and add an equiva-
lent, or a slightly larger quantity, of benzoyl chloride or p-nitrobenzoyl chloride.
ALCOHOLS 797
After refluxing for a short time, cool the solution, and add water. Allow the solid
ester to settle, then filter off and wash, first with a little cold dilute sodium hydroxide
or sodium carbonate and then with water. Recrystallize the ester from a suitable
solvent, such as petroleum ether or ethyl alcohol.
For the preparation of alkyl p-nitrobenzoates, compare also Armstrong and Copen-
17
havcr.
Dinitrobenzoates are readily formed and, as alcohol derivatives, are often recom-
mended even though their melting points are occasionally somewhat low. These
esters form addition products upon reaction with a-nuphthylamine possessing
well-defined melting points, usually higher than those of the original esters, and there-
fore are of additional value in characterizing an alcohol.
A slightly different method for the preparation of dinitrobenzoatcs has been recom-
mended by Hopkin and Williams: 18
Dissolve 1 g. of dinitrobenzoyl chloride in 10 cc. of benzene, and add to this solu-

tion the equivalent amount of alcohol to be tested. Then add a few cubic centi-
meters of anhydrous pyridine. Boil the mixture gently for a few minutes and allow
it to cool. (In the case of tertiary alcohols it is often necessary to reflux for 30 min.)
Add ether in excess to the cooled solution, and wash the ethereal solution first with
dilute acid, then with dilute alkali, and finally wash neutral with water. Evaporate
the dried ethereal solution to dryncss, and recrystallize the solid from petroleum
ether or benzene or a similar suitable solvent.
For the preparation of the a-naphthylamine addition product add an excess of the
a-iuiphthylamine dissolved in ether to the ethereal solution of the dinitrobenzoate,
and recrystallize the resulting solid, for example, from ethyl alcohol.
All benzoatcs (p-nitro- or dinitro-) may be saponified with alkali, and in many
cases the original alcohol can be separated in the pure state.
(d) Sulfonates and Sulfates. In special cases it may be advisable to prepare cer-
tain sulfonates or sulfates for the identification of an alcohol.
The p-tolaene sulfonates have been prepared from certain alcohols for example,
benzyl alcohol (see p. 290) with p-toluene sulfonyl chloride as reagent. The p-toluene
sulfonates, however, are more frequently employed for the identification of phenols
and, therefore, will be discussed under "Phenols" (see p. 824).
Bair and Suter 19 have converted a number of alcohols into their corresponding
alkyl hydrogen sulfates and have suggested further characterizing these sulfates by
their S-benzylthiuronium derivatives. S-benzylthiuronium chloride forms derivatives,
which are of value for the identification of many acids and acid suits (especially sul-
and sulfates).
fonic acids
Although these derivatives are usually employed for the characterization of certain
acids (see p. 839), they will be discussed here, since they have been mentioned fre-
quently in the monographs on the individual alcohols.
The reaction involved has been represented by Bair and Sutcr as follows:
110II + ClSOsII -> RO-S() 3 H + IIC1
RO-S0 3 II + C6H 5 -CH 2 -SC(NTI 2 ),C1 - RO-S-HMNI^CS-Cl^-CelU + HCl

S-benzylthiuronium chloride
(The reagent may be prepared in nearly quantitative yield by the reaction of benzoyl
chloride with thiourea.)
Benzylisothiourea hydrochloride,
NH 2
C S CH 2 -C 6 H 5
\
NH-HC1
or S-benzylthiuronium chloride is a white crystalline compound exhibiting dimorphism;
the two forms, melting at 150-151 and at 17f>-177, both yield the same derivatives.
The alcohol under investigation is easily converted into the alkyl hydrogen sulfate
by the action of chlorosulfonic acid upon the alcohol in dioxane solution. If hydrogen
chloride not immediately evolved, the mixture should be warmed with shaking for
is
several minutes. Then water and a saturated aqueous solution of S-benzylthiuronium

chloride (or a 15 per cent alcoholic solution) are added to the mixture. If crystals
do not form after a few minutes the solution should be cooled in an ice bath. The
solid derivative is then separated and recrystallized from dilute alcohol.
4. Urethanes
Alcohols and phenols react with certain N-substituted isocyanatcs to form esters
of carbamic acid, also referred to as carbamates, or more commonly as urethanes.
Among the many derivatives of primary and secondary alcohols the carbamates or
urethanes constitute the derivatives most often prepared; they can also be prepared
for many tertiary alcohols.
The urethanes most frequently reported in literature are the a-naphthyi-, p-nitro-
phenyl-, and phenylurethanes.
ArN=C=0 + ROH -> ArNH COOR

Traces of moisture interfere with the above reaction. The reaction is also sensitive
to ammonia and amines. The presence of water, for example, as an impurity in the
alcohol, often makes it difficult to obtain urethanes. Water hydrolyzes the isocyanates,
yielding arylamines, which combine with the excess reagent to produce di- substituted
ureas :
ArN=C=O + H 2 O -* ArNH COOH

- ArNH 2 CO 2
-
+
ArN=C=0 + ArNH 2
- ArNH CO NHAr
Diarylurca
The ureas have a higher melting point and are less soluble than the corresponding
urethanes and, present even in small amounts, may make the isolation and purifica-
tion of the urethanes a matter of considerable difficulty. For this reason, the prepara-
tion of urethanes is most useful for those alcohols which are insoluble in water and,
hence, easily obtained in anhydrous condition.
Urethanes can be prepared from certain tertiary alcohols only with difficulty, since
the reaction between isocyanates and tertiary alcohols generally causes dehydration
with the result that a hydrocarbon is formed, and the liberated water combines with
the isocyanate to form diarylurea. These by-products often interfere seriously with
the separation of the formed urethane. Traces of water interfere less with the reaction
when a-naphthylisocyanate is used than when phenylisocyanate is employed. Primary
alcohols react with a-naphthylurethane without heating. Secondary alcohols generally
require heating. In this case, however, if traces of water are present in the alcohol,
ALCOHOLS 799
too much di-a-naphthylurea may form. Urethanes of tertiary alcohol cannot be

obtained readily if at all.
For those phenylurethanes and a-naphthylurethanes which can be prepared only
with difficulty, Schimmel & Co., 20 for example, suggested that the reaction mixture
be allowed to stand for several days so that the reaction might go to completion. In
some instances, even this may not be sufficient, and it may be necessary to apply heat
after the mixture has been allowed to stand for some time; for example, a mixture of
linalool and a-naphthylisocyanate had to be heated even after standing for 5 to 6 days.
The preparation of a-naphthylurethanes is similar to that of the phenylurethanes.
a-Naphthylisocyanate (a-naphthylcarbimide) is a colorless liquid, boiling at 153
at 18 mm. The fact that a-naphthylisocyanate is less irritant and is more stable
toward water than phenylisocyanate makes the use of a-naphthylisocyanate more
desirable as a reagent.
Phenylisocyanate (phenylcarbimide) is a colorless liquid boiling at 160- 163.
Its vapor, even at normal temperatures, is irritant and lachrymatory. The liquid
reacts very readily with water and must be protected from atmospheric moisture.
Even with protection, however, it may contain crystals of diphenylurea (carbanilide),
the product of reaction with water. When this substance forms as impurity, it can
be separated in the ordinary course of preparing phenylisocyanate derivatives (see
below) .
The preparation of a-naphthyl- or phenylurethanes may be carried out as follows:
The dry alcohol is mixed

a dry test tube with slightly less than an equimolar
in
quantity of the reagent. With many

alcohols the reaction is spontaneous, and the
mixture becomes warm; but in all cases the reaction should be completed by heat-
ing gently on a steam bath for a few minutes. On cooling, the derivative solidifies
and may be recrystallized from petroleum ether or carbon tetrachloride. Any
traces of diphenylurea present may easily be removed by filtration from petroleum
ether.
The phenylurethanes are also known as carbanilates (and phenyicarbamates) It .
is recommended that reactions with a-naphthylisocyanate and certain alcohols, such

as cinnamyl alcohol, menthol, and borneol be carried out in boiling petroleum ether
(100~120). 21
a-Naphthylurethanes generally crystallize well from petroleum ether.
7?-Nitrophcnylisocyanate (p-nitrophenylcarbimide) is a yellow crystalline sub-
stance melting at 56-57; it is soluble in carbon tetrachloride, benzene, and other
nonpolar solvents. The reagent reacts readily with atmospheric moisture, yielding
a very insoluble di-p-nitrophenylurea. For this reason it must be stored in well-
closed containers. It has none of the lachrymatory properties of phenylisocyanate.
For the preparation of p-nitrophenylurethanes it is recommended that the isocyanate
be mixed with an excess of the alcohol in benzene, carbon tetrachloride, or petroleum
ether. The reaction will usually be spontaneous. After slight heating, the warm
solution is filtered and allowed to crystallize. The urethane may be recrystallized
from these solvents or from 50 per cent ethyl alcohol.
For the preparation of p-nitrophenylurethane, compare also Shriner and Cox, 28
and Home and Shriner. 23
A number of N-substituted isocyanates have been employed as reagents for alco-
hols by different authors: o- and m-nitrophenylisocyanate and 3,5-dinitrophenyliso-
cyanate (Hoeke ) ; p-methoxyphenylisocyanate (anisylisocyanate) and 3,4-dimeth-
24
oxyphenylisocyanate (Brunner and Wohrl *) 4-iodo-diphenyl-4'-isocyanate (Kawai

;
and Tamura 26 ); p-xenylisocyanate (CaHs-CeHrNÔO) (van Gelderen 27 ); p-(tri-

phenylmethyl)phenyl and 2-fluorenylisocyanates (Witten and Reid ).
28
The reagent diphenylcarbamyl used generally with phenols, but occa-
chloride is
sionally also with alcohols, to form diphenylurethanes. (These derivatives will be

discussed under "Phenols," p. 824.)
Urethanes are also produced by treating the alcohol with acid azides:
Ar-CON 3 + ROH - Ar-NH-COOR + N 2
For example, p-nitrophenylurethane may be prepared by treating the alcohol with

p-nitrobenzazide. p-Nitrobenzazide NOg-CcH^-CONa is a solid melting at 69.
The urethane prepared by mixing p-nitrobenzazide with the alcohol in dry petro-
is
leum ether and refluxing it in dry petroleum ether for 2 hr. (see Shriiier and Fuson ). 2<J
The solution is then allowed to cool, and the solid urethane is separated and recrystal-
iized from petroleum ether, benzene, or ethyl acetate. A similar method may be
employed for the preparation of urethanes from other substituted benzazides.
Sah and Kak-Yuen Tao 30 used p-bromobenzazidc as a reagent. Chang, C. C. Wang
and C. H. Wang 31 suggested other azides, i.e., o-nitro-, m-nitro-, o-chloro-, m-chloro-,
p-chloro-, o-bromo-, w-bromo-, and p-bromobenzoyl azides, as reagents.
The preparation of the 2,4-dinitrophenylwethanes of many alcohols has been reported
by van Ginkel.
32
For this purpose instead of the isocyanate usually employed for
the preparation of urethanes he used N-(2,4-dinitrophcnyl)-N'-methyl-nitrourea.
This reagent, when reacted with an alcohol, forms the 2,4-dinitrophenylurethane:
O*N < V-N-C-N^ + ROH

zr: :./ xx
NO*
N- (2, 4-dinitropheny I) -N - methy 1-nitrourea
/CH 3
NH-COOR + HN
N0 2
2,4-Dinitrophenylurethane
/CH-j
In this reaction the group N\X splits off to form methylnitramine. The
N() 2
N-(2,4-dinitrophenyl)-N'-methyl-nitrourea upon boiling with water forms diriitro-
aniline and methylnitramine.
N-(2,4-dinitrophenyl)-N'-mcthyl-nitrourca is a yellow-white crystalline solid which
decomposes at a temperature from 76-98, depending on the rate of heating. It is
slightly soluble in ether, petroleum ether, and more soluble in chloroform and carbon
tetrachloride. The reagent is odorless and does not fume in air like the phenyliso-
cyanates, nor is it hygroscopic. It is, however, sensitive to light and high temperature.
For the preparation of N-(2,4-dinitrophenyl)-N /-methyl-nitrourea, the reader is
referred to the above cited work of van Ginkel.
N-(2,4-dinitrophenyl)-N'-methyl-nitrourea yields 2,4-dinitrophenylurethanes with
primary, secondary, and many tertiary alcohols, the yields ranging from 53 to 85
per cent.
ALCOHOLS 801
This urethane is prepared as follows:

The alcohol in some
excess is boiled gently with N-(2,4-dinitrophenyl)-N'-
methyl-nitrourea in benzene solution for several hours. Upon cooling, the urethane
usually crystallizes partially. Some of the benzene is evaporated and the urethane
precipitated by the addition of petroleum ether. The 2,4-dinitrophenylurethane
is recrystallized from petroleum ether or ethyl alcohol. Methylnitramine and
2,4-dinitroaniline may form as by-products during the reaction. Methylnitramine
dissolves easily in water, ether, alcohol, and many other solvents, but not in petro-
leum ethers. Upon boiling with petroleum ether it can be separated by filtration.
The formation of dinitroaniline will depend on the amount of water present in the
alcohol; but the dinitroaniline will also be separated upon nitration after boiling with
petroleum ether. Hence, if only traces of water are present it is not necessary to
dry the alcohol or solvent (for example, benzene) before preparing the derivative.
Another by-product, which may be formed after boiling the reagent in benzene for
a long time, is 2,4-dinitrophenyl methylurethanc (m. 125-126) :
NH-COOCHs
NO* NO 2
Because of the possible formation of this by-product the reagent cannot be used to
prove the presence of methyl alcohol. Generally, however, the 2,4-dinitrourethanes
arc easily prepared by the method described above (van Ginkel).
Allophanates are carbamylcarbamates or carbamylurethanes having the following
formula :
^ NH*
C^
^ :;II-COOR
in which R represents the alcohol radical.
Behal 33 has prepared these derivatives from a number of alcohols occurring in
essential oils. Primary, secondary, and some tertiary alcohols (and phenols) form
allophanates.
Allophanates can also be used for purposes of isolation and purification. After
the allophanate has been separated from other substances and purified by crystalliza-
tion, it may be saponified, which results usually in the formation of the original alco-
hol, carbon dioxide and urea. The allophanates of certain tertiary alcohols hydrolyze
upon boiling with water alone. To obtain allophanates a current of cyanic acid gas
(HOCN), formed by decomposing cyanuric acid, is passed into the cooled alcohol
(or a solution rich in alcohol). The reaction usually generates heat, and the crystal-
line allophanate precipitates. Apparently, in the course of the reaction dicyanic
acid is formed, which, at the moment of formation, combines with the alcohol to yield
the allophanate (carbamylurethane) :
(HOCN) 2 + UOH -> H 2 N- CO -Nil -COOK

The precipitated crystals are separated and washed with ether to remove unchanged
alcohol. The separated allophanate may contain small amounts of urethane and
cyanuric acid as impurities. These can be separated by recrystallization. The crude
crystals are dried until the odor of cyanic acid disappears, and then recrystallized.
(Absolute ethyl alcohol, benzene, or acetone are best for this purpose.)
Most allophanates are odorless and colorless, and only sparingly soluble in cold
ether. They are somewhat more soluble in cold ethyl alcohol.
Allophanates have been prepared for the identification of 3-hexenol, 2,6-nonadien-
l-ol, geraniol, nerol, lavandulol, citronellol, isopulegol, menthol, santalol, fusanol,
eudesmol, and cinnamic alcohol, among many others. Linalool and terpineol do
not form allophanates.
5. Xanthates (Xanthogenates)
Xanthates are ester-salts of dithiocarboxylic acid. They are often useful in the
identification of primary, secondary, and certain tertiary alcohols. One advantage
of their use lies in the fact that they are reaction products of reagents which can be
found in almost every laboratory, carbon disulfide and potassium hydroxide.
viz., The
reaction proceeds according to the following equation :
ROII -f CS* -f KOII - >- CS + H*0
Xanthate
M for the preparation of characteristic
Tschugaev employed the xnnthate reaction
According to Whitmore and Liebcr
**
derivatives of certain terpene alcohols. the
alkali xanthates are prepared as follows:
Add equimolar quantity of pulverized potassium hydroxide to 1.5 equimolar

1.0
quantity of the purified alcohol. Heat the mixture with stirring until the alkali is
dissolved. After cooling, an equal volume of dry ether is added; then 1.5 equimolar
quantity of carbon disulfide is gradually added in small amounts with vigorous
stirring. The xanthate is usually formed immediately as a yellow precipitate.
After all carbon disulfide has been added, two additional volumes of ether are added
and the derivative separated and washed with dry ether. The xanthate is recrys-
tallized from ethyl alcohol or acetone. The xanthate may be precipitated by addi-
tion of dry ether.
For further identification, Whitmore and Licber suggested titrating the alkali
xanthate with standard iodine solution:
2ROCSSK +I 2
-+ 2KI + (ROCSS) 2
Xanthates primary and secondary alcohols are stable in aqueous solution, but
of
decompose slightly with evolution of hydrogen sulfide on prolonged boiling. The
tertiary xanthates decompose rapidly on boiling in aqueous solution:
+ H*0 >
R
R
\COH
' + KHS + COS
SK
COS + H 2 > C0 2 + HS
2
Tschugaev suggested the preparation of xanthic esters for the differentiation of

primary, secondary, and tertiary alcohols. He converted the sodium xanthates into
methyl esters of xanthic acid by using methyl iodide as reagent.
Distillation of the methyl xanthates results in their breakdown to unsaturated
hydrocarbons, methyl mercaptan and carbon oxysulfide. This work is mentioned
ALCOHOLS 803
here, since Tschugaev's method may afford a further means of identifying certain
alcohols by means of their hydrocarbon derivatives.
Various other reagents have been found useful for the characterization of alcohols;
these include:
38
2,4,6-Trinitrobenzoyl chloride
37
l-Nitroanthraquinone-2-carboxylic acid
Pseudo-saccharin chloride (also for phenols) 38
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1944), 1120.
2
See Kamm, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 42 (1920), 299.
3
Bull. soc. chim. [41, 41 (1927), 788.
4
Anton Dcppe Sohne and Zeitschel, German Patent No. 444,640 (August 12, 1924),
No. 448,419 (December 14, 1924); British Patent No. 252,570 (June 3, 1926). Kauf-
mann, French Patent No. 702,154 (August 6, 1930).
6
French Patent No. 702,154 (August 6, 1930).
6
Chem. Ztg. 62 (1928), 898.
7
Anton Deppe Sohne and Zeitschel, German Patent No. 444,640 (August 12, 1924),
No. 448,419 (December 14, 1924); British Patent No. 252,570 (June 3, 1926).
*J. Chem. Soc. 91 (1907), 2058; 99 (1911), 58; 103 (1913), 1937.
9
j. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 2909.
11
Ibid.
" Ibid. 47 (1925), 2348. Cf. also G. M.

Dickinson, L. H. Croason and J. E. Copenhaver,
"Identification of Alcohols by 3-Nitrophthalie Anhydride," ibid., 69 (1937), 1094.
"Ibid. 58 (1936), 1384.
'5
Ber. 17 (1884), 2544.
16
Ibid. 19 (1886), 3218.
17
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 65 (1943), 2252.
is
"Organic Reagents for Organic Analysis," Chemical Publishing Co., New York (1946),
48. Cf. also Rcichstein, Helv. Chim. Ada 9 (1926), 799.
19
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 1978.
20
21
Staff of Hopkin and Williams, "Organic Reagents for Organic Analysis," Chemical
Publishing Co., New York (1946), 62.
22
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1931), 1601.
23
Ibid., 3186.
24
Rec. trav. chim. 64 (1935), 505. Re o-Nitrophenylisocyanato, see also van Hoogstraten,
26
Monatsh. 63 (1933), 377.
26
/. Chem. Soc. Japan 52 (1931), 77.
27
Rec. trav. chim. 62 (1933), 969.
28
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 69 (1947), 2470.
29
"The Systematic Identification of Organic Compounds," 3d. Ed., John Wiley, New York
(1948), 164.
30
Rec. trav. chim. 68 (1939), 12.
31
/. Chinese Chem. Soc. 13 (1946), 22.
32
Rec. trav. chim. 61 (1942), 149.
83
Bull. soc. chim. [4|, 26 (1919), 479.
34
Ber. 32 (1899), 3332.
36
Ind. Eng. Chem., Anal Ed. 7 (1935), 127. Cf. Sharpe, /. Assocn. Official Agr. Chem. 26
(1942), 495.
86
Chang and Kao, J. Chinese Chem. Soc. 3 (1935), 256.
87
Sah and Ma, /. Chinese Chem. Soc. 1 (1933), 51. Chem. Abstracts 27 (1933), 5737.
38
Meadoe and Reid, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1943), 457.
III. ALDEHYDES AND KETONES
The derivatives of aldehydes and ketones most useful for identification purposes
are those reactioh products typical of the carbonyl group.
As the molecular weight of the radicals attached to the carbonyl group increases,
the reactivity generally decreases, particularly if the compounds belong to the same
homologous series.
The aldehydes characterized by a hydrogen atom attached to the carbonyl group
usually show a greater reactivity than the ketones, a fact which may be taken advan-
tage of in distinguishing between aldehydes and ketones.
There are many reactions which are typical of carbonyl compounds. The reagent
employed for these reactions usually contains active hydrogen, which reacts with the
oxygen of the carbonyl group. Some of these typical reactions are addition reactions,
such as the cyanhydrin reaction (which takes place upon the addition of hydrocyanic
acid), the bisulfite addition reaction, the ammonia reaction (addition of ammonia
usually to aldehydes), the Grignard reaction, and the aldol condensation.
Many of these reactions are of great importance for the preparation of synthetic
compounds. Certain other condensation reactions (often accompanied by elimina-
tion of the elements of water) for example, hydroxylamine, hydrazirie, and hydrazide
reactions are of general interest for the identification of aldehydes and ketones and
will be discussed here in the following order:
A. Reactions and Reaction Products of Help in the Differentiation of Aldehydes

from Ketones, as well as in the Identification of Aldehydes
1. Oxidation
2. Condensation
(a) Some General Reactions of Aldehydes

(b) Dimcdonc Reaction
(c) Docbner Reaction
(d) Cyanoacetic Acid Reaction
B. Reactions arid Reaction Products of Help in the Identification of Aldehydes
and Ketones
1. Reactions Typical Only of Aldehydes and Certain Ketones (Methyl
Ketones and Ketomethylene Compounds)
(a) Reactions of Ketomethylene Compounds with Benzaldehyde
(b) Reactions with Sodium Bisulfite (or Sodium Sulfite)
2. Reactions Characteristic of Both Aldehydes and Ketones
(a) Reactions with Hydroxylamine (Oximation)
(b) Reactions with Hydrazine Compounds
1. Hydrazine and Substituted Hydrazincs
2.Hydrazides (== Acyl Hydrazine)
3. Hydrazides with Quaternary Ammonium Function (Girard
Type Reagents)
4. Semicarbazides (= Carbamyl Hydrazines) and Substituted
Semicarbazides
(c) Reactions with Sodium (or Potassium) Cyanide and Ammonium
Carbonate (to Form Hydantoin Derivatives)
804
A.REACTIONS AND REACTION PRODUCTS OF HELP IN THE
DIFFERENTIATION OF ALDEHYDES FROM KETONES, AS WELL AS
IN THE IDENTIFICATION OF ALDEHYDES
1. Oxidation. The hydrogen of the aldehyde group is very readily oxidized to a
hydroxyl group, forming an acid. Ketones are oxidized only with difficulty; in the
aliphatic series the molecule is split at the carbonyi group position, so that two acids
are generally formed. In special cases these acids constitute useful identification
products. This difference in the ease of oxidation offers, therefore, a means of differ-
entiation between aldehydes and ketones.
Many salts of heavy metals act as mild oxidizing agents on aldehydes, a fact taken
advantage of in several tests ussd to differentiate aldehydes from ketones (Tollen's
reagent and Fehling's solution). Another well-known and very sensitive test (the
Fuehsin test) is based upon a color reaction with Schiff s reagent.
Many aldehydes are oxidized by mere exposure to atmospheric oxygen. Oxidation
may yield a solid acid, especially in the case of aromatic aldehydes. The acids may
then be characterized by determination of the melting point, neutralization equiva-
lent, etc. For further details about oxidation, the reader is referred to the section on
"Hydrocarbons/' p. 774.
2. Condensation.
(a) Some General Reactions of Aldehydes. Aldehydes tend to polymerize more
readily than ketones. To prevent polymerization, care must, therefore, be exercised
in the separation of aldehydes and in the preparation of derivatives.
Condensation reactions are generally carried out in an alkaline medium. Many
of these reactions (such as aldol condensation and the Cannizzaro reaction) have
been described in literature. Although these reactions are of importance primarily for
synthesis, they may serve for the identification of aldehydes and ketones in special cases.
(6) Dimedone Reaction. One reaction often used to distinguish certain aldehydes
from ketones is the condensation reaction with dimedone (5,5-dimethyl-cyclohexane-
1,3-dione). Aldehydes combine with dimedone according to the equation;
JCO CO
R ILC' CH*
OC (CHu) 2 5 Alcohol
R
CO CO
cr H
(-H-0)
OH O ,U(CH3)2 Absolute Alcohol or
CH 2 Anhydrous Acid
R
CO A CO
HC
2 H C
Ha XJHa
Since ketones will not react with dimedone under the same experimental condi-
tions, the reagent may be regarded as specific for aldehydes. The condensation
products are usually crystalline compounds which may serve as identification prod-
ucts for many aldehydes. The dimedone derivatives are soluble in dilute alkali. If
these reaction products are further treated with dehydration agents (for example,
acetic anhydride or sulfuric acid), a further derivative is formed having a condensed
ring structure, such as the one shown in the last formula of the above equation. These
'
latter products which Vorlander l named 'anhydrides" are also useful for identifica-
tion purposes.
One advantage with dimedone as a reagent lies in the fact that it
in connection
provides two derivatives from every aldehyde, and since dimedone does not react
with ketones it may be of special value where mixtures are concerned.
The reagent dimedone is a white crystalline substance melting at 147; sparingly
soluble in cold water, but considerably more soluble in hot water. It is relatively
soluble in alcohol.
For the preparation of dimedone derivatives, the following procedure may be used :
The aldehyde added to a solution containing 2 mol equivalents of dimedone

is
in 50% alcohol. The mixtureis warmed and allowed to stand at room temperature
for some time (2-3 hr.), until the derivative precipitates in the form of glistening
crystals. The crystals are then separated and recrystallized from a suitable solvent,
such as dilute alcohol. If undiluted or absolute alcohol is used for the reaction or
recrystallization, the above-mentioned ring closure may take place.
Warming the derivatives with mineral or acetic acid, or acetic anhydride will usu-
ally cause the so-called "anhydride" to form.
(c) Doebner Reaction. Doebner developed a reaction, specific for aldehydes,
which may be of use in distinguishing aldehydes from ketones. His method is espe-
cially useful for the preparation of derivatives of aldehydes occurring in essential oils.
In Doebner's method, aldehydes are made to react with /8-naphthylamine and pyruvic
acid in ether or alcohol solution, yielding the so-called "a-alkyl (or aryl)-/3-naphtho-
cinchoninic acids."
Doebner reported the following reaction [see also Bcilstein 22 (101-111)]:
iNHa -R
R-CHO + OIIj-CO-OOOH- 2H.O
Pyruvir Acid
COOH
/3-Napthylamine "a -Alky 1 (or aryl)-/?-naphtho-

cmchoninic acid"
-
(2- Alky 1- (6, 6) benzoquinoline-4-carboxylic
acid
or 2-Alkyl-(5,6)-benzocmchoninic acid)
The melting points of these "/3-naphthocinchoninic acid" derivatives are generally

very high, ranging from 200-300. When heated above their melting points, these
derivatives readily split off carbon dioxide and yield organic bases, the so-called
"a-alkyl (or aryl)-/3-naphthoquinoline."
ALDEHYDES AND KETONES 807
R
-C0
/WE
COOH
These quinoline bases serve as additional identification products for the alde-
may
hydes, since they are easily prepared and possess well-defined, but much lower, melt-
ing points (usually 50-100).
For many "/3-naphthoeinchoninic acid" derivatives, Doebner has prepared the
silver salt of the acid, and a gold or platinum chloride addition product of the base.
An additional advantage in the use of these derivatives lies in the fact that they can
be employed to deter mine the molecular weight equivalent of the aldehyde under
investigation.
If pyruvic acid is reacted with /3-naphthylarnine in the absence of aldehydes,
"a-methyl-/3-naphthocinchoninic acid," m. 310, is formed (Doebner). Upon heating,
this acid can be converted into the corresponding a-methyl quinoline m. 82.
In the presence of aldehydes, however, this reaction does not take place; instead
of the methyl group, the organic radical of the aldehyde is attached in the a-position.
The reaction takes place readily even in the cold, especially in ethereal solution.
Doebner 2 recommended the following method :
Pyruvic acid (1 mol equivalent) and slightly more than an equimolar quantity
of the aldehyde (or the oil fraction rich in aldehyde) are dissolved in absolute alco-
hol, and a solution of /3-naphthylaminc (1 mol equivalent) in absolute alcohol is
added. The mixture is then refluxed for about 3 hr. On cooling, the "ex-substituted
/3-naphthocinchoriinic acid" usually crystallizes.
In a few cases, these crystals do not form readily. It is then advisable to dissolve
the "jS-naphthocinchoninic acid" in ammonia and to filter it, removing impurities
and by-products. The ammoniacal filtrate is then neutralized with acid (for example,
acetic acid) to precipitate the "a-substituted j8-naphthocinchoninic acid," which
can then be separated and recrystallized. The separated crystals are best washed
with a small amount of ether and recrystallized from alcohol, ether, or water.
They can also be easily recrystallized as hydrochlorides from a hot solution of
alcohol and concentrated hydrochloric acid. These products are usually light yellow
to orange in color, and upon boiling with water, or upon heating to about 120, lose
the hydrogen chloride molecule.
Doebner prepared "/3-naphthocinchoninic acid" and "/3-naphthoquinoline" deriva-
tives for the following aldehydes: citronellal, propion-, acet-, isopropyl-, isobutyl-,
isovaleric-, hept-, allyl-, croton- and tiglic aldehyde, citral, furfural, anisaldehyde,
vanillin, pipcronal, and cuminal.
(d) Cyanoacetic Acid Reaction. Tiemann 3 has investigated the reaction between
certain aldehydes (citral and citronellal, for example) and cyanoacetic acid.
CN
/
R-CHO + R-CH=C; +
\ COOH COOH
condensation products are easily crystallized and have well-defined melting
If these
points, they may serve for the identification of the aldehyde. (For more details, see
pp. 330 and 339.)
B. REACTIONS AND REACTION PRODUCTS OF HELP IN THE IDENTIFI-

CATION OF ALDEHYDES AND KETONES
Reactions Typical Only of Aldehydes and Certain Ketones (Methyl Ketones
1.
and Ketomethylene Compounds). Ketones possessing a methylene group adjacent
to the carbonyl group (ketomethylene compounds) show an increased reactivity. (Methyl
ketones can be considered a special type of ketomethylene compound.) The hydrogen
of the carbon adjacent to the carbonyl group has an increased mobility and such a
ketone can change into the enolic form, which is very active in many reactions oxida-
tion, condensation, halogenation, etc.
OH
R'CU^-C R'^=^ R-CH C R'
Ketomethylene Enolic Form

Compound
The hydrogen of the OH group in the enolic form may be replaced by sodium when
ketomethylene compounds are treated with alkalies (sodium cthylatc, for example).
Such compounds are of considerable importance in the preparation of synthetic com-
pounds.
(a) Reactions of Ketomethylene Compounds with Benzaldehyde. Compounds con-
taining a ketomethylene group ( CII-2 C often form crystalline 1 condensation

)
products with benzaldchyde. These reaction products may be useful as derivatives

to characterize the original ketone.
The number mols of benzaldehydc necessary for the reaction will depend upon
of
whether the ketomethylene compound has one or two methylene groups adjacent to the
carbonyl group (R-CH 2 -CO-R' or R-CH 2 -CO-CH 2 -R').
For the preparation of these derivatives, the following procedure may be employed :
The ketomethylene compound is added to slightly more than the equimolar
quantity of benzaldchyde and is dissolved in a small quantity of absolute alcohol.

For 1 g. of ketomethylene compound it may be necessary to use about 10 cc. of
absolute alcohol. Then 0.5 cc. of 20% sodium hydroxide solution is added, and the
mixture allowed to stand for 1 hr. or longer at room temperature. Arylidene de-
rivatives usually crystallize readily if the wall of the reaction vessel is scratched
lightly with a glass rod. The crystalline precipitate is then separated by filtiation,
best washed with cold alcohol, and recrystallized from a suitable solvent such as
absolute alcohol.
(6) Reactions with Sodium Bisulfite (or Sodium Sulfite). The formation of sodium
bisulfite addition products is very important for the quantitative determination of
many aldehydes and ketones (see Vol. I, pp. 279 ff.). As crystalline derivatives for
qualitative test and identification by melting point, sodium bisulfite addition products
are not satisfactory. However, for the isolation and purification of aldehydes and
certain ketones, the crystalline addition products are often useful. They arc formed
readily in mixtures rich in aldehydes or certain ketones, and the original carbonyl
compound may often be regenerated from them.
If an aldehyde (or ketone) contains an ethylenic linkage in addition to the carbonyl
group for example, citral, citronellal, cinnamic aldehyde and carvone 2 mols of
sodium bisulfite may be added to the compound. Regeneration from this type of
addition compound is not always possible (for example, citral, see p. 328); further-
more regeneration, if at all possible, may not be quantitative.
The sodium bisulfite addition product may be prepared as follows:
The aldehyde (or ketone), if shaken with an equal volume

liquid, is vigorously
of a concentrated solution (about 40%) of sodium bisulfite. If the substance to
be tested is a solid, a solution should be employed (for example, in ether). The
reaction frequently evolves heat; it is often necessary, however, to apply heat in
order to accelerate the reaction. The sodium bisulfite addition product solidifies
either at once or after being coolod and shaken. If, instead of sodium bisulfite,
a saturated aqueous solution of sodium sulfite (about 30%) is used for the forma-
tion of the addition product, the sodium hydroxide formed by the reaction should
be neutralized at once for example, with dilute acetic acid; the sodium bisulfite
addition product formed may then be separated and further purified by recrystal-
lization.
Many sodium bisulfite addition products are quite soluble in water and are there-
fore difficult to separate as crystalline compounds.
The regeneration of the aldehyde (or ketone) from the purified sodium bisulfite
addition product may be effected quite easily by treatment with aqueous solution of
acids,such as oxalic or dilute sulfuric acid, or with alkalies, preferably with alkali
carbonate. Usually, regeneration with alkali is to be preferred, since the addition
of acid liberates free S(>2.
In some cases, however, regeneration with acid will be more advantageous; for
example, for aldehydes sensitive to alkali, or for phenolic aldehydes.
2. Reactions Characteristic of Both Aldehydes and Ketones. Primary amines,
possessing active hydrogen, react readily with aldehydes or ketones. Certain amines
which form crystalline compounds with aldehydes or ketones are, therefore, very
useful reagents in the preparation of derivatives for identification purposes.
() Reactions with Hydroxylamine (Oximation) The inter-reaction of aldehydes
.
or ketones with hydroxylamine yields oximes which are employed to characterize

many carbonyl compounds. Often, however, these derivatives possess rather low
melting points and may be so readily soluble as to be difficult to purify. As a general
rule, aldehydes readily form oximes in quantitative yields; ketones, however, react
more slowly. This is especially true of numerous terpenic ketones, particularly pino-
carvonc and carvopinone which do not form quantitatively. The reaction between
carbonyl compounds and hydroxylamine is reversible, and care must be taken to
avoid unnecessary contact with strongly acidic solutions.
Since the oximes belong to the "older" group of derivatives, they have been described
quite thoroughly in literature.
Oximation has become important for the quantitative determination of carbonyl
compounds (see Vol. I, p. 286).
The following procedure may be employed for a carbonyl compound:
One gram of aldehyde is dissolved in 5 cc. of alcohol and mixed with a solution
of 1 g. of hydroxylamine hydrochloridc and 2 g. of sodium acetate in 3 cc. of water.
A little more alcohol may be added, if necessary, to complete solution of the alde-
hyde. The mixture is allowed to stand for % to 1 hr. On cooling, the oxime usu-
ally crystallizes.
With aliphatic aldehydes best to use sodium acetate as buffering agent. With
it is
aromatic aldehydes it is advantageous to employ an excess of sodium hydroxide,

but the latter will need subsequent neutralization to precipitate the oxime.
Ketoximes are not formed as readily as aldoximes and long standing or refluxing
isgenerally required.
When an excess of hydroxylamine hydrochloride is necessary as with certain
aromatic aldehydes or ke tones the best solvent is alcohol. The oxime may be sepa-
rated from the reaction mixture by neutralization of any excess soda, and dilution
of the alcoholic liquids with water. The more soluble oximcs may be extracted with
ether from the aqueous solution. Alcohol, and dilute alcohol, among others, are
solvents suitable for recrystallization.
Shriner and Fuson 4 suggest the use of 5 cc. pyridine and 5 cc. absolute alcohol for
1 g. of aldehyde or ketone and 1 g. of hydroxylamine hydrochloride. The solvents
are removed by evaporation and the residue triturated thoroughly with 5 cc. of cold
water. The oxime is then filtered off and
recrystallized.
On oximation stereoisomeric oximes may form; in such cases careful purification
must be resorted to so that the desired oxime will be obtained. (Cf. also: "Stereo-
isomerism of Alicyclic Oximes," W. Huckel and M. Sachs, Liebigs Ann. 498 (1932),
166. Chem. Abstracts 27 (1933), 72. "Relative Proportions of Stereoisomeric Oximes
Formed in the Oximation of Unsymmetricai Ketones," W. E. Bachmann and
M. X. Barton, J. Org. Chem. 3 (1938), 300.) With certain carbonyl compounds it
may be necessary to use an exactly calculated amount of hydroxylamine. Even
when this is done, however, an additional hydroxylamine molecule may sometimes
be added to the oxime (=NOH-NH20H), and a hydroxylamino-oxime (occasionally
referred to, especially in German literature, as "oxamine-oxime") may be formed.
Such products have been reported for carvotanacetone, santolinenone, piperitone,
verbenone, carvone, pulegone, etc. According to some investigators, certain ketones,
for example, pulegone (see p. 401), will produce different compounds when reacted
with hydroxylamine, depending upon experimental conditions.
The separated oxime can often be reconverted to the original aldehyde or ketone.
This fact may prove useful for the isolation and purification of certain ketones, espe-
cially for those which do not form sodium bisulfite addition products.
The regeneration of the carbonyl compound from the oxime can be accomplished
by heating the oxime with dilute acid, such as sulfuric acid, and separating the ketone,
either by distillation or extraction.
Isolation by means of oximation has been reported for the ketones, such as men-
thone, pinocamphone, and jasmone.
(b) Reactions with Hydrazine Compounds. Hydrazine (diamine, H^N-NH^) con-
denses with aldehydes and ketones. Hydrazine itself is very rarely used as a reagent ;
more often substituted hydrazines are employed. All hydrazine reagents react in
the same manner:
R C=0 + HjN-NH-R -* R C=N-NH-R + H 2
H (or R') H (or R')
There are a great variety of substituted hydrazine reagents. They are alike in
that they possess one amino group of which the active hydrogens react with the car-
bonyl groups. The difference between them lies in the fact that a variety of organic
radicals can be substituted for the hydrogen of the other amino group. The nature
of the substituted group will determine the properties of the compounds formed by
the reaction of aldehydes and ketones with substituted hydrazine reagents.
The following types of hydrazine compounds will form derivatives which may be
useful for the identification of carbonyl compounds:
R HN NH 2 Substituted hydrazine
R CO UN NII2 Hydrazide = acyl hydrazine
R'
\
R" N CH-CO-HN-NH 2 Hydrazide with quaternary ammonium function (the
/
R'" X R
Girard type reagents) (X stands for halogen or an
acid radical)
H N-CO-HN-NH
2 2 Semicarbazide = carbamyl hydrazine (hydrazine car-
43 2 l
boxylaminc)
R HN CO HN NH 2 4-Substituted semicarbazidc
II2N CO CO HN NH Semioxamazide = oxalic amide hydrazide)

543 21 2 (
R HN CO CO HN NH 2 5-Substituted semioxamazidc
H N-C-HN-NH
2 2 1-Aminoguanidine (= guanylhydrazine)
NH
The semicarbazide derivatives are generally not considered substituted hydra-
zones they are referred to as semicarbazones.
The scmioxamazide derivatives are known as semioxamazones.
1. Hydrazine and Substituted Hydrazines. Among the most useful derivatives
serving for the identification of aldehydes and ketones are the hydrazones; the sub-
stituted hydrazincs most commonly employed as reagents being phcnyl-, p-nitro-
phenyl-, and 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine.
Since the phenylhyclrazones frequently possess very low melting points and are
advisable to prepare, in their stead, the p-nitro-, or still
difficult to crystallize, it is
better, the 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazones which usually exhibit well-defined melting

points. In fact, the latter are now generally preferred for the identification of carbonyl
compounds.
For the preparation phenylhydrazinc hydrochloride can be
of phenylhydrazones^
employed as a reagent. This is a white, or pale yellow, crystalline powder, which
turns brown, and becomes unfit for use, if exposed to air and light. It is soluble in
water and alcohol.
Phcnylhydrazoncs may be prepared as follows:
The aldehyde or ketone should be dissolved in a little alcohol and added to an

excess of phenylhydrazine solution. prepared by dissolving 1 g. of phcnyl-
(This is
hydrazine hydrochloride and 1.5 g. of sodium acetate in 10 cc. of water.) The

reaction mixture is warmed on a steam bath for about 30 min. More alcohol is
added, if necessary, to dissolve the aldehyde or ketone. The phenylhydrazones
on cooling often separate first as oils. Purification may be effected by recrystal-
Hzation from a suitable solvent, such as alcohol, dilute alcohol, benzene, petroleum
ether, or water.
The often employed as a reagent for the prepara-

liquid phenylhydrazine, as such, is
tion of phenylhydrazones; but the hydrochloride is more stable and more convenient
to handle. When phenylhydrazine is used as reagent, the addition of a few drops of
a solution in 30 to 50 per cent aqueous acetic acid is frequently employed, the acid
acting as a catalyst.
In many aldehyde or ketone can be regenerated from its phenyl-
cases, the original
hydrazone by heating with dilute acids. This method, therefore, may be advan-
tageous in special cases, for the separation and purification of certain carbonyl com-
pounds.
The reaction with phenylhydrazine may also serve for the quantitative determina-
tion of aldehydes and ketones (see Vol. I, p. 284).
Some substances require a considerable departure from the usual procedure for the
preparation of phenylhydrazones in such cases, the use of another reagent is advis-
;
able. Many phenylhydrazones, with loss of ammonia, tend to transform into indole
derivatives, and it is therefore necessary to determine their melting points without
delay.
a-Hydroxy aldehydes and a-hydroxy kctoncs react with 2 mols of phenylhydrazine
*
yielding osazones; thus the a-hydroxy group is oxidized and condenses with the
second molecule of phenylhydrazine. a-Diketones react normally, yielding mono-
and di-hydrazones (osazones), while /3-diketones yield pyrazoles.
p-Nitrophenylhydrazoiies are prepared with p-nitrophenylhydrazinc, an orange
crystalline solid molting at 157; it decomposes slowly if exposed for a long time at
room temperature, but may safely be stored in a refrigerator for an indefinite period
of time. It is sparingly soluble in cold water but easily soluble in hot water. It
represents a convenient reagent for aldehydes and ketones and forms derivatives of
which the melting points are generally well defined, at a range considerably above
room temperature.
p-Nitrophcnylhydrazones may be prepared as follows:
Equimolar amounts of the aldehyde (or ketone) and p-nitrophenylhydrazine

are dissolved in glacial acetic acid and refluxed for 15 to #0 inin. The derivative
usually crystallizes out on cooling, or upon careful dilution with water. The crystals
are then separated and reorystallized from a suitable solvent, such as alcohol, acetic
acid, or nitrobenzene.
are prepared with 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine, a red

crystalline solid molting at 195-196. It is very sparingly soluble in water, and
only slightly soluble in cold organic solvents. The derivatives formed are usually
high melting and are obtained in good yield. Under standard conditions the reaction
may also prove
advantageous for the quantitative estimation of carbonyl compounds
by gravimetric methods.
According to Shriner and Fuson, 6 the preparation of 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazones
may be carried out as follows:
"A solution of 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine is prepared in the following fashion.
To 0.4 g. of 2,4-dinitrophenylhydraziiie in a 25-ml. Erlenmeyer flask is added 2 ml.
of concentrated sulfuric acid. Water (3 ml.) is added dropwise, with swirling or
stirring until solution is complete. To this warm solution is added 10 nil. of 95%
ethanol .
A solution of the carbonyl compound in ethanol is prepared by dissolving 0.5 g.

of the compound in 20 ml. of 95% ethanol. The freshly prepared 2,4-dinitrophenyl-
hydrazine solution is added, and the resulting mixture is allowed to stand at room
temperature. Crystallization of the 2,4-dinitrophcnylhydrazone usually occurs
within 5 to 10 minutes. If no precipitate is formed, the mixture is allowed to stand
overnight."
The dinitrophenylhydrazone usually separates on cooling; only in exceptional
cases is it necessary to reflux the reaction mixture for a few minutes. The crystals
*
This reaction is especially important for the identification of the sugar compounds.
are then separated, washed with a small amount of absolute alcohol, and recrystal-
lized from a suitable solvent, such as alcohol, glacial acetic acid, ethyl acetate,
xylene, or nitrobenzene.
Allen has reported a slightly different method of preparing 2,4-dinitrophenyl-

6
hydrazones :
Five cc. of a saturated solution of 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine in alcohol (1 g. in

100 cc.) are added to a solution of a few drops of the carbonyl compound in alcohol,
and the mixture is carefully heated to boiling. A few drops of concentrated hydro-
chloric add are then added slowly. The color of the solution usually changes imme-
diately to yellow or orange. The mixture is then boiled for about 2 min., and water
added drop by drop until cloudiness or crystallization begins. The dinitrophenyl-
hydrazones of certain ketones crystallize slowly from alcohol, but separate as oils
on addition of water. The dinitrophenylhydrazone is filtered when the solution
is cold and may be rccrystallized from a suitable solvent alcohol, ethyl acetate
and alcohol, or chloroform.
Many other substituted hydrazines have been suggested as reagents for aldehydes
and ketones by different investigators:
p-Bromophenylhydrazine hydrochloride (Biltz and Sieden )

7
s
p-Chlorophenylhydrazinc hydrochloride (Sah et al. )
1-Methylphenylhydrazine (Stevens and Ward, and Neuberg )
9 10
1-Benzyl-l-phenylhydrazine (van Ekenstein and Lobry de Bruyn, and Hofmann

11 12
)
cww/w-Diphenylhydrazine hydrochloride (Fischer, 13 and Maurenbrecher ")

Carboxy methylhydrazine (Anchel and Schoenheimer 15 )
Carboxy phenylhydrazine (Veibel, Blaaberg, and Stevns 16 )
17
o-Carboxy phenylhydrazine (Veibel ct al. )
w-Carboxy phenylhydrazine (Willstiitter et al. 18 )
p-Carboxy phenylhydrazine (Anchel and Schoenheimer, 19 and Veibel et al. )
20
a-Naphthylhydrazine hydrochloride and /3-naphthylhydrazine hydrochloride

2l
(Fischer )
Amiiioguanidine ( = guanylhydrazine) (Baeyer 22 )

23
Nitroguanylhydrazine (Whitmore et al. )
o-Nitrophenylhydrazine and w-nitrophenylhydrazine (Bischler,
24
and van Eken-
stein and Blanksma 25
)
Phenylhydrazine-p-sulfonic acid (Biltz, Mau6 and Sieden

26
)
0-Tolylhydrazine hydrochloride (Sah and 27

) Ma
r/i-Tolylhydrazine hydrochloride (Sah and Tseu *)
p-Tolylhydrazine hydrochloride (Sah and Lei 29 )
3Q
2,4,6-Trinitrophenylhydrazine (Purgotti )
p-Xenylhydrazine (Miiller 31 )
32
p-Thiocyanophenylhydrazine hydrochloride (Horii )
2. Hydrazides (= Acyl Hydrazine). Ilydrazides are acyl hydrazines of the gen-

eral formula 11 CO Nil 2 NH .
The p-iodobenzhydrazide is a very useful reagent for the preparation of derivatives

for aldehydes and ketones occurring in essential oils.
R C=0 + HsN-NII-OC-CfiHÎ -> R C=N-NH-OC-C H 6 4 -I +H 2
H (or R') H (or R')

p-Iodobenzhydrazide is a crystalline substance melting at 168-169, soluble in
alcohol, but only slightly soluble in water. (This reagent can be prepared from
p-iodobenzoic methyl ester and hydrazine hydrate.) The hydrazones derived from
this reagent are easily formed and generally possess high melting points. The p-iodo-
33
benzhydrazones may be prepared as suggested by Sah and Hsli:
About 0.3 g. of p-iodobenzhydrazide and a slight molecular excess of the carbonyl
compound to be tested are dissolved in 5 to 10 cc. of 95% alcohol. Two drops of
glacial acetic acid, which act as a catalyst, are added. The mixture is then refluxed
for 10 to 15 min. After cooling, the p-iodobenzhydrazones usually crystallize out.
If this is not the case, some of the solvent may be evaporated. The crystals are
separated and recrystallized from a suitable solvent, such as methyl alcohol, 50%
or 95% ethyl alcohol, benzene, or petroleum ether.
Numerous other hydrazides have been used successfully as reagents for carbonyl
compounds, many of them having been investigated by Sah and co-workers :
34
o-Bromobenzhydrazide (Sah et al. )
35
m-Bromobenzhydrazidc (Sah et al. )
36
p-Bromobenzhydrazide (Sah et al. )
o-Chlorobenzhydrazide (Sun and Sah )
37
w-Chlorobcnzhydrazide (Sah and Wu ^

p-Chlorobenzhydrazidc (Shih and Sah )
39
o-Nitrobenzhydrazide (Sah and Kao, and Sah and Yin

40 41
)
m-Nitrobenzhydrazide (Strain, and Sah and Kao )

42 43
44
p-Nitrobenzhydrazide (Chen )
45
o-, m-, and p-Nitrobenzcne sulfonhydrazide (Witte )
3,5-Dinitrobenzhydrazide (Sah and Ma )

4C
47
/3-Naphthydrazide (Sah )
Oxanilhydrazide (Sah arid Han )
48
Z-Menthydrazide (Woodward, Kohman and Harris

49
)
3. Hydrazides with Quaternary Ammonium Function (Girard Type Reagents).

The purpose of introducing a radical of quaternary ammonium function into the
hydrazide reagent is to render the resulting carbonyl derivatives water soluble, and
thus to facilitate their separation from other, water insoluble compounds. Reaction
products of carbonyl compounds with hydrazides containing an acidic radical
carboxylic or sulfonic radicals, for example are more readily soluble in water than
hydrazones resulting from other substituted hydrazide derivatives.
Girard and Sandulesco 50 have investigated quaternary ammonium salts of hydra-
zides and have successfully employed them for the preparation of water soluble
hydrazones from carbonyl compounds. These hydrazides with quaternary ammonium
function contain a pentavalent nitrogen. This nitrogen is not directly attached to the
carbonyl group.
The following general formula can be written for these quaternary ammonium
salts of hydrazides :
R'
H N NH CO CH N R"
2
- -
Il\
R X R'"
R may also stand for hydrogen; R', R", and R'" and N may be part of a ring closure,
as in the case of pyridine (Girard's Reagent P). This ring closure may also include
the carbon atom adjacent to the ammonium group (reagent of Allen and Gates, see
below).
. r
R C=O + H 2 N-NH-CO.CH-N R" > R C = N-NH -CO-CH.N R" 4- H..O
I I
l\ I I
l\ R w
H(orR') R X R'" H(orR') R X
Aldehyde or Girard Type Reagent Hydrazone with Quaternary
Ketone Ammonium Function
The two reagents recommended by Girard and Sandulesco are the following two
substituted acetohydrazides:
(CH 3 )3-N-CH 2 -C()-NH'NH 2

Cl
Trimethyl ammonium acetohydrazide chloride (Girard
1
s Reagent T).
Pyridmium ,-icotohydrazide chloride (Girard' s Reagent P),
With aldehydes and many ketones, these two reagents form hydrazones rapidly
and quantitatively. The hydrazones are soluble in water and alcohol but only very
sparingly so in ether and other nonhydroxylic organic solvents. An aqueous solution
containing these aldehyde or ketone derivatives can, therefore, be subjected to extrac-
tion with organic solvents, to separate water insoluble noncarbonyl compounds.
The ketones can usually be regenerated and recovered from the water soluble deriva-
tives without much difficulty. The hydrazones formed with Reagents T and P are,
as a rule, crystalline solids, which may be used for the identification of carbonyl com-
pounds. They are hygroscopic, however, and possess no advantage over the reagents
more commonly used. Their preparation for the purpose of isolation and purification
of ketonic compounds is nevertheless very advantageous and has some industrial
61
application. Patent literature is available.
This interesting method permits the removal of large and small quantities (even
traces) of carbonyl compounds from various natural products such as essential oils
52
(Petit and Tallard, and Sandulesco and Sabatay 53 ).
The ketonic hydrazones formed with either of these reagents can be quantitatively
hydrolyzcd by dilute mineral acid, whereas the aldehydic hydrazones are essentially
nonhydrolyzable under the same conditions. With this method, therefore, ketones
can be separated not only from noncarbonyl compounds, but from aldehydes as well.
Girard and Sandulesco observed that the rate of hydrazone formation is a function
of the structure of the ketone and arranged various types in the following approxi-
mate order of decreasing reactivity:
methylalkyl > alicyclic > methylaryl > diaryl
An accumulation of substituents adjacent to the carbonyl group also reduces the

reactivity greatly (for example, dimethyl camphor does not react with Reagent T
to form the desired product).
By taking advantage of this difference in reactivity, it may be possible not only to
separate aldehydes from ketones but also to separate certain groups of ketones from
one another.
The Reagent T can be prepared by treating hydrazine hydrate with betaine esters.
(CH)s-N + C1CH 2 -COOC 2 H 5 -

Cl
Betaine Ester
(CH 3 )3-N-CH 2 -COOC 2 H 6 + H N-NH

2 2 ->
Cl
(CH 3 )s'N'CHs'CO-NH-NH 2 + C 2 H 5 OH
Cl
Reagent T
If trimetliylamine is replaced by pyridine, Reagent P is formed. Reagent T is

hygroscopic, and an old sample should be recrystallized (from absolute alcohol) before
use. Girard 64 reported on a detailed method of preparation.
Reagent T is a solid which melts with decomposition (above 175). It is sparingly
soluble in cold absolute alcohol (1:150); somewhat more soluble in methyl alcohol;
very soluble in acetic acid, glycerine, glycol, etc., but almost insoluble in nonhydroxylic
solvents.
Reagent P requires no special handling and may be kept for long periods without
deterioration.
Reagent T is economical to use than Reagent P, but the former is pref-
perhaps less
erable: (1) for isolation purposes, because it is more soluble than Reagent P; and
(2) for identification purposes, because it permits the precipitation of crystalline addi-
tion products with certain reagents, such as mercuric iodide, from a solution con-
taining the hydrazone of Reagent T.
The following method may be generally applied:
The carbonyl compound (or solution containing the carbonyl compound) is dis-
solved in absolute alcohol; 10% (by weight of the amount of absolute alcohol used)
of glacial acetic acid is added. Then a slight excess of the calculated amount of
the reagent is added. The solution is refluxed for 1-1 j> hr. After cooling, the
mixture is poured into an ice-water mixture, which contains enough sodium car-
bonate to neutralize nine-tenths of the acetic acid. The final concentration of the
alcohol should not exceed 10%. This will result in the best practical pH and
alcohol concentration. The solution can then be thoroughly extracted with non-
hydroxylic solvents to free it from noncarbonyl compounds. For this purpose,
the best solvent is ether, which does not dissolve the reaction product (hydrazone).
For regeneration of the ketone, the solution is brought approximately to nor-
mality with a mineral acid (hydrochloric or sulfuric). After standing at room
temperature for some time (1 to 4 hr.), the ketone may be recovered by ether
extraction.
With certain ketones usually those of high molecular weight formation of an

emulsion may take place during the extraction. Occasionally stubborn emulsions,
difficult to work with, are encountered. For these cases Girard and Sandulesco sug-
gested the use of Reagent T (which is soluble in ethylene glycol and insoluble in ether)
and the following method :
The carbonyl compound is first dissolved and reacted in the manner described
above. To the reaction mixture is added a quantity of glycol equal to the volume
of the absolute alcohol used. The alcohol is then distilled off completely in vacua,
and the remaining glycol solution extracted with absolute ether, to separate the
noncarbonyl compounds. It is not necessary to neutralize this mixture since in

the nonaqueous state hydrolysis cannot take place. After the ether has extracted
all impurities, the original ketone may be regenerated by addition of a large volume
of water, and acidification to approximate normality with sulfuric acid, following
the same procedure as described before.
If the separation of a crystalline derivative for identification purposes is desired,

it may be best to prepare a crystalline salt from the hydrazone of Reagent T. Hydra-
zones derived from Reagent T have the property of forming highly insoluble salts
with certain inorganic compounds, such as mercuric iodide. These salts may be
useful for the identification of carbonyl compounds, even when the latter occur only
in small quantity. Girard and Sandulesco were able, by this means, to detect cin-
namaldchyde in a concentration of only 30 gammas per milliliter. The following
method was employed :
Ten the aqueous reaction mixture containing the water soluble hydrazone
cc. of
(see above) are freed completely from ether, then 1 cc. of mercuric iodide solution
(5 g. mercuric, iodide and 10 g. of potassium iodide to 500 cc. of water) is added.
If this is not sufficient to precipitate all the hydrazone in solution, more mercuric
iodide solution should be added. It is necessary, however, to use a very pure
Reagent T for the preparation of these crystalline hydrazone salts.
55
Hughes suggested a similar procedure for the quantitative determination of
ketosteroids. Ledercr 66 reported on the formation of azines from aromatic aldehydes
in the presence of Girard and Sandulesco Reagents T and P.
Allen and Gates 57 employed a reagent similar to Cirard's reagents. With it they
prepared certain water soluble hydrazones, which they found to be more suitable
for identification purposes than those obtained with Girard 's reagent. The reagent
that these investigators used successfully is the quaternary salt of nicotinic hydrazide
with methyl- jo-toluene sulfatc: the N-methyl-(3-carbohydrazide pyridinium p-toluene
sulfonate (the hydrazide of 3-carboxy-l-methyl pyridinium p-toluene sulfonate)
r-CO-NII-NHa
CHa
This reagent permits the preparation of derivatives possessing well-defined (usually
high) melting points. These derivatives are soluble in water but almost insoluble in
organic nonhydroxylic solvents.
The reagent may be used to separate carbonyl compounds from mixtures; the
aldehydes as well as the ketones may be recovered from the water soluble hydrazones.
The regeneration requires only short acid hydrolysis.
The reagent can be prepared by reacting ethyl nicotinate with methyl-p-toluene
sulfonate and then with hydrazine hydrate in absolute alcohol. This reagent may be
obtained in the stable form m. 155-157 or in the metastable form m. 130-131.
The derivatives of cither form possess identical melting points.
The following procedure may be employed for the preparation of these derivatives:
A
mixture of 3.2 g. (0.01 mol) of reagent, 0.01 mol of the carbonyl compound,
and 15 cc. of absolute alcohol are refluxed for 15 min. On cooling, the derivative
that crystallizes is filtered off and
recrystallized to constant melting point from a
suitable solvent, such as absolute alcohol or alcohol-ether (1:1).
The regeneration of the aldehyde or ketone by acid hydrolysis may be carried
out by adding dilute sulfuric acid to the hydrazone, heating to about 60 for 15 min.,
and extracting the carbonyl compound from the cooled solution with ether. The
car bony 1 compound may be further purified by distillation.
4. Semicarbazides ( = Carbamyl Hydrazines) and Substituted Semicarbazides.

Semicarbazones are often useful for the identification of aldehydes and ketones. They
are prepared by the reaction of these carbonyl compounds with semicarbazide hydro-
chloride (H2N-CO-NH-NH2-HC1). This reagent is a white crystalline compound
m. 173-175, readily soluble in water, but practically insoluble in alcohol.
R_ C=0 + H 2 N-NH-CO-NII 2 - R C=N-NII-CO-NH 8 +H 2
I I
H (or RO H (or R')
Preparation of the semicarbazones may be carried out as follows:
To an aqueous solution of the semicarbazide hydrochloride is added a molar

equivalent of sodium acetate. To the solution is then added slightly less than the
equimolar amount of the aldehyde or ketone. It may also be necessary to add
alcohol to produce a clear solution. The semicarbazone usually crystallizes after
standing for a few minutes at room temperature, although sometimes a longer
period may be necessary. With certain ketones, heating may be required. For
final purification, the semicarbazone should then be recrystallized from a suitable
solvent, such as water, alcohol, or acetone.
Hopper &8 devised a method wherein the sodium acetate is conveniently replaced
by pyridinc in the following manner:
The aldehyde or ketone is dissolved in pyridine and an aqueous solution of semi-
carbazide hydrochloride added. The semicarbazone generally crystallizes readily
from the aqueous pyridine solution.
A simpler method of preparing semicarbazones is recommended by Haagen-Smit :

f<9
Rub together the required amount of semicarbazide hydrochloride and sodium

acetate with some alcohol. The sodium chloride will precipitate and can be filtered
off. After addition of the carbonyl compound the semicarbazone which forms may
be separated with no interference from the sodium chloride.
The original aldehyde or ketone can usually be recovered by heating with dilute
acid (oxalic, sulfuric, etc.). For this reason semicarbazones may also be used for
isolation purposes.
Substituted semicarbazones, although frequently employed, offer no significant

advantage over semicarbazones except that they are usually higher melting. Thus,
the 4-phenylsemicarbazones are frequently used for identification of carbonyl com-
pounds occurring in essential oils. These derivatives crystallize well and have sharply
defined melting points.
The reagent 4-phenylsemicarbazide is a white crystalline substance melting at
120-123.
The 4-phenylsemicarbazones may be prepared as follows:
A
solution of 0.5 g. of the 4-phenylsemicarbazide in 5 cc. of alcohol is acidified
with a few drops of acetic acid. To it is added a solution containing the molecular
equivalent of the aldehyde or ketone in 5 cc. of alcohol. The mixture is heated
for a few minutes in a water bath and filtered while hot. On cooling, the
phenyl-
semicarbazone crystallizes; dilution with water may sometimes be
necessary. The
crystals are then separated and recrystallized from either alcohol or dilute alcohol.
Thiosemicarbazones are another type of semicarbazones useful for identifi-

cation of
carbonyl compounds. The reagent employed is thiosemicarbazide
(H 2 N-NH-CS-NH 2 ), a white crystalline substance m. 181-183 sparingly soluble ,
in cold water, more readily soluble in hot

water, and only slightly soluble in alcohol.
R C=0 + H N-NH-CS-NH - R C=N

2 2 Nil CS NII 2
-
+ II 2 O
H (or R') H (or R')
The thiosemicarbazones may be prepared as follows:
A strong solution of thiosemicarbazide in water is mixed with the aldehyde or

ketone dissolved in alcohol. The mixture is then heated. On cooling, the thiosemi-
carbazone crystallizes. After the crystals are separated, they can be recrystallized
from dilute alcohol or water.
Thiosemicarbazones have the distinctive property of forming insoluble compounds

of the type
R C==N N=C N1I 2
H (or R') SM
where Mis a monovalent metal. The metal may be silver, copper, or mercury.
For the separation of carbonyl compounds from mixtures, the precipitation of the
silver compounds has been proposed
by Neuberg and Niemann. 60 The fact that the
amount of silver can readily be determined permits the collection of additional infor-
mation about the molecular weight equivalent of the carbonyl compounds under
investigation.
For the preparation of the silver
compound, an alcoholic solution of the thiosemi-
carbazone (freed of thiosemicarbazide by nitration) is treated with silver nitrate
solution. The amorphous precipitate is then filtered, washed, and dried in a vacuum
desiccator protected from light.
The aldehyde or ketone may be regenerated by treatment of the thiosemicarbazone
or its silver compound with mineral acid.
In the preparation of semicarbazones and thiosemicarbazones it is
possible that a
semicarbazido-semicarbazone or a thiosemicarbazido-thiosemicarbazone may be
formed in a greater amount than the monosemicarbazonc. A typical example is the
reaction with umbellulone investigated by Gillam and West. 61
Among other substituted semicarbazides and similar reagents serving for the char-
acterization of carbonyl compounds the following have been
suggested :
4-Substituted semicarbazides. (R. Barr6 and L. Pichd. Can. J. Research 19B

(1941), 158. Chem. Abstracts 35 (1941), 7380. Can. J. Research 20B (1942), 17.
Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 2530.)
o-, m-, and p-Tolyl scmicarbazide. (P. P. T. Sah et al. Science Repts. Natl. Tsing
Hua Univ. 2 (1933), Chem. Abstracts 27 (1933), 4222. J. Chinese Chem. Hoc.
1.
2 (1934), 167. Chem. Abstracts 29 (1935), 465. J. Chinese Chem. tioc. 3
(1935),
246. Chem. Abstracts 29 (1935), 7298. J. Chinese Chem. Soc. 4 (1936), 187.
Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 655.)
2,4-Dinitrophenyl semicarbazide. (J. L. McVeigh and J. D. Rose. J. Chem. Soc.
(1945), 713. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 554.)
Dinitrophcnyl semicarbazide. (P. P. T. Sah and P. C. Tao. J. Chinese Chem. Soc. 4
Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 4267.)
(193G), 506.
a-Naphthyl semicarbazide. (P. P. T. Sah and S. H. Chiang. J. Chinese Chem.
Soc. 4 (1936), 496. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 4266.)
/3-Naphthyi semicarbazide. (P. P. T. Sah and P. C. Tao. J. Chinese Chem. Soc. 4
(1936), 501.)
p-Xenyl semicarbazide. (P. P. T. Sah and I. S. Kao. Rec. trav. chim. 58 (1939),
459. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 5773.)
Semioxamazide. (L. G. Kadcliffe. Perfumery Essential Oil Record 10 (1919), 39.
Cf. also F. J. Wilson and E. C. Pickering, J. Chem. Soc. 123 (1923), 394; 125
(1924), 1152.)
5-Phenylsemioxamazide. (P. P. T. Sah and W.-P. Han. Science Repts. Nail. Tsing
HIM Univ. 3 (1936), 469. Chem. Abstracts 31 (1937), 3825.
(c) Reactions with Sodium (or Potassium] Cyanide and Ammonium Carbonate (to
Form Hydantoin Derivatives). Hcnze and Speer prepared hydantoins from carbonyl
62
compounds for identification purposes, using readily available and inexpensive re-
agents. The reaction is carried out with a dilute alcoholic solution of sodium (or
potassium) cyanide and ammonium
carbonate, which, on warming with carbonyl
compounds, generally yield solid hydantoins with well-defined melting points:
H (or R')
I
R C=O + KCN + (NH C0 4) 2 3 -> K C CO + KOJI +H 2 () + NH 3
H (or R') HN NH
\CO/
These hydantoins may be prepared as follows :
In 50 cc. of 50% alcohol 0.02 mol

of the carbonyl compound is dissolved, and
9.1 g. (0.08 mol) of ammonium carbonate and 2.6 g. (0.04 mol) of potassium cyanate
added. This mixture is warmed in a flask equipped with a condenser at a tempera-
ture of 58-60 for about 2 hr.; the solution is then concentrated to about two-
thirds of the initial volume and chilled in an ice bath. The hydantoins will then
usually separate.
In general the hydantoins are very pure even when separated from the reaction
mixture. They may be recrystallized, however, from aqueous alcohol solutions. In
special cases, the hydantoins do not separate from the reaction mixture: for example,
hydantoin derivatives of low molecular weight carbonyl compounds, which are quite
soluble in water. In such cases, acidification with hydrochloric acid, to induce crys-
tallization, is recommended. Great care must be taken, however, since hydrogen
cyanide may be set free!
1
Z. anal. Chem. 77 (1929), 241, 321. Z. angew. Chem. 42 (1929), 46. Cf. Neuberg, ibid.,
48; Mayer, ibid.
2
Ber. 27 (1894), 352.
3
31 (1898), 3329.
Ibid.
4
"The Systematic Identification of Organic Compounds," 3d Ed., John Wiley, Now York
(1948), 202.
6
"The Systematic Identification of Organic Compounds," 3d Ed., John Wiley, New York
(1948), 171.
8
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 52 (1930), 2955.
7
Liebigs Ann. 324 (1902), 315.
8
Sri. Rept. Nail Tsing Hua Univ. 2 (1933), 8.
9
.7.Chem. Soc. 125 (1924), 1328.
10
Bcr. 36 (1902), 959, 2626.
11
Rec. trav. chim. 15 (1896), 225.
^Liebigs Ann. 366 (1909), 277.
13
190 (1878), 175.
Ibid.
"Ber. 39 (1906), 3584.
j. Biol Chcm. 114 (1936), 544.
Nord. Kemikerm^de 6 (1939), 223. Chcm. Abstracts 38 (1944), 5752.
17
Ibid.
Liebigs Ann. 418 (1919), 127.
18
19
J. Biol. Chcm. 114 (1936), 539.
Nord. Kcmikcrmjdc 5 (1939), 233. Chem. Abstracts 38 (1944), 5752. Veibel, Ada Chem.
Scmid. 1 (1947), 54. Chem. Abstracts 42 (1948), 1234. Veibel, Blaaberg, and Stevns,
Dansk Tid. Farm. 14 (1940), 184. Chem. Abstracts 36 (1942), 2495.
Liebigs Ann. 232 (1886), 237. Loi, Sah and Kao, Science Repts. Natl. Tsing Hua Univ.
21
Ser. A, 2 (1934), 335. Chcm. Abstracts 29 (1935), 465.

22
Bcr. 27 (1894), 1919.
.7. Am. Chcm. Soc. 57 (1937), 706.
23
24
Z*rr.22 (1889), 2801.
25
Rec. trav. chim. 24 (1905), 36, 37.
2ft
Bcr. 35 (1902), 2004.
* Sci. Rept. Natl. Tsing Hua Univ. 1 (1932), 261.
Ibid. 3 (1936), 403, 409.
Ibid. 2 (1933), 1.
3
6te. c/um. rtnZ. 24, [1] (1894), 113. Bredereck and Frit/sche, Bcr. 70B (1937), 802.
31
#<>r. 27 (1894), 3106.
(1935), 880. #r//is/t Chcm. Abstracts Sect, A, II (1937), 411.

32
J. P/iorm. *S'oc. Japan 55
33
Rcc. trav. chim. 59 (1940), 349.
Sci. Rept. Natl. Tsing Hua Univ. 3 (1936), 555.
35
/. Chinese Chcm. Soc. 4 (1936), 69.
*Sri. Rept. Natl. Tsing Hua Univ. 3 (1935), 279.
37
Ibid. 2 (1934), 359.
38
Ibid. 3 (1936), 443.
30
Ibid. 2 (1934), 352.
4
7&w*. 3 (1936), 461.
*l
Rcc. trav. chim. 59 (1940), 241.
42
.7. Am. Chem. Soc. 57 (1935), 758. Meng and Sah, Sconce Repts. Natl. Tsing Hua Univ.
Ser. A, 2 (1934), 347. Chem. Abstracts 29 (1935), 465.
*S'c?. Kept. Natl. Tsing Una Univ. 3 (1936), 461. Meng and Sah, Science Repts. Natl.
43
Tnng Hua Univ. Ser. A, 2 (1934), 347. Chem. Abstracts 29 (1935), 465.
44
J. Chinme Chcm. Soc. 3 (1935), 251.
46
Rec. trav. chim. 61 (1932), 302. Cameron and Siorric, J. Chem. Soc. (1934), 1330. Davies,
Storrie and Tucker, ibid. (1931), 624.
46
Chem. Soc. 2 (1934), 40.
J. Chinese
47
4 (1936), 63.
Ibid.
48
Sci. Rept. Natl. Tsing Hua Univ. 3 (1936), 469.
49
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 63 (1941), 120.
w llelv. Chim. Ada 19 (1936), 1095.
61
Girard and Sandulesco, French Patent No. 767,464, July 18, 1934.
52
Rev. chim. ind. 48 (1939), 226.
63
Riechstoff Ind. Kosmet. 12 (1937), 161. Ind. Parfumerie 3 (1948), 75.
64
"Organic Syntheses," Coll. Vol. II, John Wiley, New York, p. 85.
66
J. Biol. Chem. 140 (1941), 21.
66
Bull. soc. chim. (1946), 172. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 6083.
57
J. Org. Chem. 6 (1941), 596.
68
J. Roy. Tech. Coll. Glasgow 2 (1929), 52.
69
Private communication by Dr. A. J. Haagen-Smit, California Institute of Technology,
Pasadena, Calif.
Ber. 35 (1902), 2049.
61
/. Chem. Soc. (1945), 95.
62
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 522.
IV. PHENOLS AND PHENOL ETHERS
With a few exceptions, phenols are very weak acids. Nevertheless, they are suffi-
ciently acidic to be dissolved by aqueous sodium hydroxide, forming phenolates.
This fact offers a convenient method for their isolation from water insoluble sub-
stances. The phenol can be easily regenerated from the water soluble phenolate by
acidification.
Phenols are weaker in their acidic property than carbonic acid. They do not dis-
solve in sodium carbonate solution, and can be regenerated, by the action of carbon
dioxide, from an aqueous alkali solution. By this reaction phenols may be distin-
guished from carboxylic acids.
The phenol ethers are very stable neutral compounds, sparingly soluble in water,
and usually indifferent toward alkalies. When phenol ethers are heated with hydro-
bromic or hydroiodic acid they are generally cleaved, and the phenol may be regen-
erated. Phenol ethers do not undergo the reactions typical for phenols, for which
reason their identification is accomplished either through their conversion into phenols
or through the reaction products typical for aromatic ethers. Phenol ethers can be
identified by means of the crystalline derivatives which result from reactions such as
bromination, nitration, or oxidation.
Another reagent often employed for the characterization of phenol ethers is chloro-
1
sulfonic acid.
Chlorosulfonic acid reacts readily with phenol ethers at low temperature, yielding
sulfonyl chlorides, which when heated with ammonia or ammonium carbonate yield
sulfonamides. The latter are easily purified and may serve well as derivatives charac-
the phenol ether used in the reaction:
teristic for
2C1SO 3 H > ROX^ V-S0 2 C1 + HC1 + H SO 4 2
-S0 2 C1 + (NH 4) 2 CO, > ROXC >~SO NH + NH

2 2 4
C1 + CO + H O
2 2
Sulfonyl Chloride Sulfonamide
Chlorosulfonic acid as a reagent has the disadvantage of being very corrosive, for
which reason other reagents are often to be preferred.
Many phenols and phenol ethers form characteristic solid reaction products with
well-defined melting points when reacted upon by picric acid 2 or 1 ,3,5-trinitrobenzene.
Both reactions and reaction products have been discussed in the monograph on
"Hydrocarbons," p. 788. Characteristic addition products may also be formed with
mercuric acetate. These derivatives may serve for the purpose of identification (Man-
chot et al. 3 ).
Certain phenols can be identified readily by products resulting from reactions
which serve also for the preparation of derivatives of many other groups of com-
pounds: for example, nitration, reaction with inaleic anhydride and particularly
bromination. The reaction between phenols and bromine is a substitution reaction
(see p. 780) in the course of which hydrobromic acid is evolved. The phenol group
increases the velocity of the bromine substitution. The resulting crystalline bromides
823
are usually sparingly soluble and therefore easily separable. For many phenols the
bromides prove to be characteristic derivatives useful for identification purposes.
The well-knowncolor test, based on the reaction of phenols with ferric chloride in
dilute aqueous solution, is often employed to indicate the presence of phenols. The
resulting iron compounds are in most cases highly colored. Enol compounds, as well
as certain a-hydroxy acids, and some aliphatic acids, may also give a positive color
test, however.
The
phenolic group undergoes many reactions analogous to those of the alcohol
group, yielding the same type of reaction products useful for identification purposes.
Such are reactions with acetic anhydride (used mostly in quantitative determination),
4
benzoyl chloride, p-nitrobenzoyl chloride, 3,5-dinitrobenzoyl chloride, phenyliso-
6
cyanate, p-iodophenylisocyanate, a-naphthylisocyanate. Several of the common
phenols may be condensed with phthalic anhydride, to produce phthaleins.
As with tertiary alcohols, the reactions with phenols often take place more readily
in the presence of an organic base such as pyridine.
Diphenylurethanes (Diphenylcarbamates). Diphenylcarbamyl chloride can also

be employed as reagent in the preparation of phenol, as well as alcohol, derivatives
(see p. 797), but it seems to be more reactive toward the phenolic group than toward
the alcoholic group. In the presence of pyridine, phenols and diphenylcarbamyl
chloride form diphenylurethanes (also referred to as diphenylcarbamyl esters, or
diphenylcarbamates) :
CoH^ Ô CoHo
+ ArOH > N-COOAr + HC1
'Cl CcH/
Diphenylcarbamyl Diphenylurethane
Chloride
Diphenylcarbamyl chloride is a white to pale yellow crystalline solid, melting at

85-86. It is soluble in alcohol, with which it will react on standing, to form diphenyl-
urethanes.
The preparation of diphenylurethanes may be carried out as follows:
About phenol is dissolved in 5 cc. of pyridine. Slightly less than 1 mol

1 g. of
equivalent of diphenylcarbamyl chloride is added. The mixture is refluxed for

about 30 min. and then poured into cold water. The crystals, which sometimes
consist of a resinous mass, are then separated from the water and recrystallized
from a suitable solvent, such as alcohol, petroleum ether, carbon tetrachloride, or
benzene.
^-Toluene Sulfonic Esters (^-Toluene Sulfonates). Another reagent employed

for the preparation of derivatives of phenols, and in special cases of alcohols (see
p. 797) p-toluenesulfonyl chloride.
is
p-Toluenesulfonyl chloride is a white crystalline powder, melting at GG-G7, spar-

ingly soluble in water, soluble in alcohol and ether, very soluble in benzene. Hopkin
and Williams 6 suggested the following procedure for the preparation of p-toluene
sulf onic esters (p-toluene sulf onates) :
Two grams of the phenol are suspended or dissolved in 5 cc. of pyridine, and 4 g.
of p-toluenesulfonyl chloride are added. The mixture is heated on a water bath
for about 15 min., then poured into 50 cc. of cold water and stirred until a solid
crystalline mass is formed. The crystals are washed with cold dilute sodium hydrox-
ide and cold water, and recrystallized from ethyl alcohol or methyl alcohol.
Aryl Oxyacetic Acids. An excellent reagent for obtaining characteristic derivatives

from phenols is chloroacetic acid. It reacts with phenols yielding aryl oxyacetic acids,
which have well-defined melting points.
ArONa + C1CH -COOH 2 -> ArOCH 2 -COOH + NaCl

Chloroacetic Aryl Oxyacetic
Acid Acid
The aryl oxyacetic acids are easily prepared and have the advantage of being acids,
which can be dissolved in dilute alcohol and titrated with standard alkali, thus making
it possible to establish the molecular weight equivalent of the phenol being investi-
gated. According to Koelsch, the aryl oxyacetic acids may be prepared as follows:
7
To a mixture of 1 g. of phenol and 3.5 cc. of 33%

sodium hydroxide is added a
solution of 2.5 cc. of 50%
chloroacetic acid. If necessary a little water is added to
dissolve the sodium phenolate. The vessel containing the solution is stoppered
loosely and heated gently for 1 hr. on a water bath.
After cooling, the solution is
acidified with mineral acid (for example, hydrochloric acid), and extracted with
ether. The ether layer is then washed once with water, and the aryl oxyacetic acid
removed from the ether solution by further extracting the ether layer with sodium
carbonate solution (25 cc. portions of 5% aqueous Na 2 COa solution). The sodium
carbonate extract, containing the sodium salt of the aryl oxyacetic acid, is then
acidified, yielding the free acid, which can be recrystallized from water.
/KNitrobenzyl Ethers. p-Nitrobenzyl chloride, p-nitrobenzyl bromide, and p-nitro-

benzyl iodide have been suggested as reagents to form characteristic derivatives of
phenols. Of these reagents />-nitrobenzyl bromide is to be preferred because of its
greater reactivity and its solubility in alcohol. p-Nitrobenzyl bromide with most
phenols yields characteristic crystalline ethers having well-defined melting points
valuable for the characterization of phenols.
ArONa + BrCH C H N02 6 4 2

- ArOCH 2 C 6 H 4 N0 2 + NaBr
(This reagent is also useful for the characterization of many carboxylic acids, the
reaction yielding p-nitrobenzyl esters, see p. 828.)
According to Reid, and Lyman and Reid the following procedure may be em-
8
ployed :
A mixture of 1 g. of the phenol in 1 cc. of 20% sodium hydroxide and 1 g. of

reagent in 25 cc. of alcohol is refluxed for 1 hr. Five to 10 cc. of water are then
added to dissolve any alkali bromide. Enough alkali is added to make the solution
alkaline to litmus. After cooling the p-nitrobenzyl ether is separated and recrystal-
lized from alcohol or a dilute alcohol solution.
A numberof other reagents have been found to yield derivatives useful for the
identification of phenols. Some of these reagents are:
9
/3-Naphthylisocyanate
10
p-Xenylisocyanate
p-Chlorobenzazide
n
12
p-Bromobenzazide
13
p-Nitrobenzazide
14
3,5-Dinitrobenzazide
15
3,5-Dinitro-4-methylbenzazide
16
2,4-Dinitrochlorobenzene
Benzene sulfonyl chloride 17
18
Aryl p-bromobenzene sulfonates
826 , PREPARATION OF DERIVATIVES
o-Nitro, m-nitro-, o-chloro-, w-chloro-, p-chloro-, o-bromo-, w-bromo- and p-bromo-
19
benzoylazide
o-Nitrobcnzazide 20
1
Huntress and Garten, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 62 (1940), 603.
2
Cf. Baril and Megrdichian, ibid. 58 (1936), 1415.
*Liebigs Ann. 399 (1913), 123; 417 (1918), 93; 420 (1920), 170; 421 (1920), 316, 330.
4
Brown and Kremer, J. Am. Pharm. Assocn. 11 (1922), 607. Phillips and Keenan, J. Am.
Chem. Soc. 53 (1931), 1924.
McKinley, Nickels, and Sidhu, Ind. Eng Chem. Anal. Ed. 16 (1944), 304.
6
6
"Organic Reagents for Organic Analysis," by Staff of Hopkin and Williams Research
Laboratory, New York, Chemical Publishing Co. (1946).
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 53 (1931), 304.
8
Ibid. 39 (1917), 304; 42 (1920), 615.
9
Sah, Rec. trav. chim. 58 (1939), 453.
10
Morgan and Pcttet, /. Chem. Soc. (1931), 1125. Van Gelderen, Rec. trav. chim. 62 (1933),
979.
Kao, Fang, and Sah, Science Rcpts. Nail. Tsing Hua Univ. [A], 3 (1935), 109. Chem.
ll
Abstracts 29 (1935), 6173.

12
Sah and Cheng, Rec. trav. chim. 58 (1939), 591. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 6746.
13
Sah and Chiao, Rec. trav. chim. 68 (1939), 595. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 6746.
14
Sah and Ma, /. Chinese Chem. Soc. 2 (1934), 229. Chem. Abstracts 29 (1935), 749.
15
Sah, Rec. trav. chim. 58 (1939), 582. Chem. Abstracts 33 (1939), 6746.
16
Best and Nicholson, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 67 (1935), 7368.
17
Georgescu, Ber. 24 (1891), 416.
Sekera, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 66 (1933), 421.
18
19
Sah, Chiao, Chang, Wang, and Wang, /. Chinese Chem. Soc. 13 (1946), 22. Chem. Ab-
stracts 42 (1948), 148.
20
Sah and Yin, Rec. trav. chim. 69 (1940), 238. Chem. Abstracts 34 (1940), 5786.
V. ACIDS
Most organic acids are relatively weak acids; however, they are strong enough to
displace the very weak carbonic acid from its salts (differing in this respect from
phenols, see p. 823) :
2R-COOH + Na C0 32 -> 2R-COONa + CO 2 + H 2 O
R-COOH + NaHCOa -> R-COONa -f CO 2 + H 2 O
In the identification of organic acids the determination of the neutralization equiva-

lent is generally of great help in establishing the molecular weight equivalent of an
acid. The neutralization equivalent is the quantity of the compound (expressed in
grams) required for the neutralization of 1 liter of normal alkali solution. For mono-
basic acids it is identical with the number representing the molecular weight; for poly-
basic acids it is the simple submultiple of this number:
XT
.
r ..
*,
= 1000 X s
Neutralization equivalent
a XN
s = weight of sample of the acid in grams;
a = volume of alkali in ce., used for neutralization;
N = normality of alkali.
The neutralization equivalent should not be confused with the acid number. (The
acid number is the quantity of potassium hydroxide, expressed in milligrams, required
to neutralize the acids in 1 g. of the sample.) (See Vol. I of this work, p. 264.)
Many salts of acids are well-crystallized solids, which may be useful for identifica-
tion purposes (for example, calcium, barium, lead, zinc, mercury, and silver salts).
The silver salts are often prepared, since they afford a means of identifying the acid
by its melting point; they may also be employed to establish the molecular weight
equivalent of the acid by gravimetric or volumetric determination of the amount of
silver present in the salt.
The alkali salts are often prepared to isolate acids from other nonacidic substances
present. Alkali salts are usually water soluble and may be separated from other non-
soluble substances by extraction of the latter with organic solvents, for example, ether.
The acids can then be regenerated from the aqueous layer by acidification with mineral
acid.
Many acids may be identified by means of their bromides, nitrosites, nitrosochlorides,
maleic anhydride addition products, reduction products, or other derivatives resulting
from reactions which take place also with substances other than acids.
Some acids form easily identifiable degradation products which may be useful for
the characterization of the acids. Such degradation products may be a hydrocarbon
resulting from decarboxylation, or an anhydride resulting from dehydration.
Many acids form solid esters (see p. 792) which serve well as identification products.
If the lower aliphatic esters are solids they may be useful for characterizing an acid.
In most cases, however, it is necessary to prepare such esters as p-nitrobenzyl, phenacyl,
827
p-chlorophenacyl, p-bromophenacyl, or p-phenylphenacyl esters. These are best pre-
pared by reacting the salt of the acids with the corresponding halide:
R-COONa + C1CH 2 -C 6H 'NO2 - R-COOCH 2 -C 6 ll4-NO 2 + NaCl

4
p-Nitrobenzyl p-Nitrobenzyl
Chloride Eatei
R-COONa + BrCH 2 -COAr - R COOCH 2 COAr + NaBr -
^-Substituted
Phenacyl Ester
(Ar stands for the phenyl group or the p-substituted phenyl group)
The preparation of esters from alkali salts has the particular advantage that it does
not require an anhydrous sample of the acid.
For the preparation of p-nitrobenzyl esters from p-nitrobenzyl chloride, see
"Phenols," p. 825.
The preparation of all phenacyl esters and substituted phcnacyl esters is similar.
Some of the reagents used for the preparation of phenacyl esters are:
V-CO CH 2 Br X <f V- CO CH 2
-
Br
Phenacyl Bromide (X stands for halogen)

p-Chloro-, p-Bromo-, or
p-Iodophenacyl Bromide
S CO-CH 2 -Br
p-Phenylphcnacyl Bromide
Most phenacyl halides have lachrymatory properties. p-Bromophenaeyl bromide

may possess a certain advantage as a reagent in that it has better keeping qualities.
The following general procedure may be employed for the preparation of all these
phenacyl esters:
The sodium prepared by neutralizing the aqueous solution of

salt of the acid is
the acid (1 g. in 5 cc.) carefully with a 10% sodium hydroxide solution, until the
solution is just acid to litmus. To the sodium salt in water, an alcoholic solution
of the phenacyl bromide (or substitute phenacyl halide) (1 g. in 10 cc. of alcohol)
is added. If the solution is not clear on heating, it will be necessary to add more
alcohol. The mixture is then boiled for 1 hr., if a monobasic acid is being examined;
for 2 hr., if the compound is dibasic; or for 3 hr., if tribasic. On cooling, the ester
usually precipitates, and can be separated and recrystallized from alcohol or dilute
alcohol.
Acyl chlorides (acid chlorides) may be useful in special cases as identification prod-
ucts. They may be prepared from acids by the action of phosphorus pentachloride
or thionyl chloride.
The acyl chlorides, however, are often converted into the generally water insoluble
amides, which frequently prove more satisfactory as derivatives.
The amides may be prepared by heating 1 g. of the acid with 5 cc. of thionyl chlo-
ride for 15 to 30 min. The reaction mixture is then poured into 15 cc. of a well-cooled,
concentrated solution of ammonia. The precipitated amide can usually be recrystal-
lized from dilute alcohol or water.
ACIDS 829
Amides such as anilides, p-bromoanilides, p-toluidides are often prepared as charac-

teristic derivatives for the identification of acids.
R-COOH + C 6H 5 -NH2 -> R-CO-HN-C 6 H 5 4- H 2

Aniline Anilide
For the preparation of the anilides or toluidides,be advisable to convert the

it may
acid into the corresponding acyl chloride and then react it with aniline, p-bromo-
aniline, or toluidine.
R-COC1 + C H -NH
6 5 2 -> R-CO-HN-C 6 H 5 + HC1
Aoyl Aniline Anilide
Chloride
The following general procedure may be employed for the preparation of anilides
or toluidides:
One gram of the acid or its sodium salt is placed into a small flask, mixed with
the equimolar amount of thionyl chloride, and heated under a reflux condenser
for about 30 min. After the mixture is cooled, more than the mol equivalent of
the amine (1 to 2 g. of aniline, p-toluidine, or bromoaniline) is cautiously added,
and the mixture is heated for about a half hour. In many instances it will be advisa-
ble to add a solvent such as benzene before heating (about 30 cc. for each g. of acyl
chloride). The
derivatives are usually soluble in benzene. If benzene has been
added as a solvent, the benzene solution after boiling and allowing to cool to room
temperature may be decanted into a separatory funnel and washed with water,
dilute acid (to remove excess amine), then dilute alkali (to remove excess acid),
and washed neutral with water. The benzene solution is dried and filtered and
the solvent evaporated. The crystals are then recrystallized from dilute ethyl or
methyl alcohol, or petroleum ether containing some benzene.
Benzylisothiourea hydrochloride (S-benzyl thiuronium chloride) is sometimes a very

useful reagent for the preparation of derivatives of carboxylic acids (see "Alcohols,"
p. 797).
Dewey and Sperry 1
suggested the use of p-chlorobenzyl isothiourea hydrochloride
(p-chlorobenzyl pseudothiuronium chloride) as a reagent to prepare p-chlorobenzyl
isothiuronium salts of the organic acids, which are generally characteristic derivatives.
According to Dewey and Shasky 2 the identification of organic acids through the
use of p-bromobenzyl isothiourea hydrobromide (p-bromobenzyl pseudothiuronium
bromide, m. 213) offers an advantage over the use of the p-chlorobenzyl isothiourea
hydrochioride in that its salts do not readily undergo hydrolytic decomposition.
NH
C
.
SCHs-CcHiBr + R-COONa - >- C-SCHs-CoI^Br

2
+ NaBr
NII-HBr NH-HOOC-R
According to Dewey and Shasky the p-bromobenzyl isothiuronium compounds
can be obtained by adding a hot alcoholic solution of the reagent to an aqueous solu-
tion of the sodium or potassium salt of the acid. The p-bromobenzyl isothiuronium
compounds generally precipitate at once in a pure state. The crystals may be recrys-
tallized from a suitable solvent (alcohol, for example).
The high molecular weight of the reagent and the low solubility of the derivative
make it possible to obtain a large yield of the derivative from small amounts of the
acid. The melting points of these derivatives are often too close to be of value where
a mixture of acids is present.
Many acids may also be identified bytheir reaction with benzylamiiie to yield
N-substituted benzylamides. This reaction is characteristic for the acyl group; esters
will therefore give the same reaction (see "Esters," p. 832).
Many other reagents have been suggested by various investigators; among them
are:
3
o-Bromo-p-toluidine
3
2,4,6-Tribromoaniline
3
/3-Naphthylanrine
3
l-Bromo-2-naphthylamirie
4
a-Naphthylamine
5
pp'-Diaminodiphenylurethane
6
o-Phenyienediamine
p-Chlorophenacyl bromide
7
8
p-Bromophenacyl bromide
8
p-Iodophenacyl bromide
p-Phenylphenacyl bromide
9
1
J. Am. Chem.
Soc. 61 (1939), 3251.
9
63 (1941), 3526.
Ibid.
Robertson, J. Chem. Soc. 116 (1919), 1210.
3
4
Robertson, ibid. 93 (1908), 1033.
6
Ralston and McCorkle, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 61 (1939), 1604.
6
Seka and Miiller, Monatsh. 57 (1931), 97. Pool, Harwood and Ralston, /. Am. Chem.
Soc. 69 (1937), 178.
7
Judcfind and Reid, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 42 (1920), 1043.
8
Judefind and Reid, ibid. Hann, Reid and Jamieson, ibid. 52 (1930), 818. Cf. Powell,
ibid. 63 (1931), 1172.
9
Drake and Bronitsky, ibid. 62 (1930), 3715.
VI. ESTERS
When acted upon by alkali, esters usually are easily converted into the correspond-
ing alcohols and alkali salts of the acids. This hydrolysis is called sapo?iification:
R-COOR' + NaOH -> R-COONa + R'OH

Certain esters can be identified easily by saponifying the ester and by identifying
the corresponding acid and alcohol separately.
For the quantitative determination of esters by saponification see Vol. I of this
work, p. 265.
Like the neutralization equivalent of an acid, the saponification equivalent of an
ester may afford an additional means of determining its molecular weight equivalent.
The saponification equivalent of an ester is the quantity (expressed in grains) of the
compound required for the neutralization of 1 liter of normal alkali solution. (The
saponification equivalent should not be confused with the ester number and the
saponification number. The ester number is the quantity of potassium hydroxide,
expressed in milligrams, required to saponify the ester in 1 g. of the sample. The
saponification number is the sum of the ester number and the acid number.)
G .... -
i . = 100 X s
oaponmcation equivalent
a XN
s = weight of sample in grams;
a = volume of alkali in cc., used for saponification;
N = normality of alkali.
Esters can undergo alcoholysis and ammonolysis as well as hydrolysis. The alco-
holysis is also known as ester interchange (see p. 792). It takes place extremely slowly
in the absence of a catalyst, but rather rapidly, when even traces of certain sub-
stances sodium alcoholate, for example are present. However, the reaction
reaches a certain equilibrium and therefore does not go to completion.
R-COOR + R"OH
7
^ R-COOR" + R'OII
To effect completion, special experimental conditions are required; for instance, the
presence of a very large excess of the alcohol (R"OH) or the removal of one of the
newly formed compounds, for example, the alcohol (R'OH), is necessary. Ester
interchange is useful for the identification of an ester only in very special cases. It
may prove of value, for example, where a "new" ester has more characteristic prop-
erties than the original ester, i.e., when the new ester is a solid with well-defined
melting point, or can be more easily identified than the original ester.
Ammonolysis (reaction with ammonia) does not appear to be a practical means
of identification. However, aminolysis (the reaction with amines) has proved very
valuable in the direct identification of the acyl group of esters. The "indirect" method
of identifying the ester by its saponification products (i.e., isolating the acid or acid
salt of the ester and converting the former into a characteristic derivative) is often
time-consuming and may be unsuccessful. Recently several methods have been
developed whereby the acyl group of an ester (or acid) can be identified directly.
To obtain a derivative directly from an ester, Koelsch and Tenenbaum * and
Hardy 2 have recommended adding the ester to the bromomagnesiuni salt of an aryl-
831
Buehler and Mackenzie 3 identi-
amine thus yielding the corresponding arylamide.
fied many esters by direct aminolysis with benzylamine, forming N-substituted
benzylamides :
R-COOR' +CH6 6 -CH2-NH2 - R'CO-NH-CHa-CeHe + R'OH

Benzylamine N-Subst ituted
Benzylamide
Dermer and King have experimented with several

4
of the
high boilingcommon
organic bases as reagents for aminolysis of esters. For this
purpose they investigated
benzylamine, dibenzylamine, cyclohexylamine, dicyclohexylamine, ethylenediamine,
and phenyl hydrazine. The value of the latter as reagent for identification of organic
acids was
also investigated by Stempel and Schaffel. 6
Benzylamine proved to be the best reagent. Dermer and King have developed a
method which permits identification of many esters as well as free acids. The acyl
compounds are converted into crystalline N-substituted benzylamides by refluxing
the ester (or acid) to be tested with benzylamine, using a salt (ammonium chloride)
as a catalyst.
This method proved effective in the identification of aromatic, hydroxy, alkoxy,
polybasic acids and their respective esters.
Esters of keto acids or polynitro aromatic acids or halogenated aliphatic acids do
not, in this reaction, yield satisfactory derivatives.
The esters of higher alcohols sometimes react very slowly, and it may be necessary
to submit them to a longer period of heating than is necessary with other esters, or
to subject them to a preliminary methanolysis in order to produce methyl esters,
which have a comparatively high reactivity.
The following general method for the identification of the acyl group has been sug-
gested by Dermer and King:
One cc. (or 1 g.) of the ester (or acid) is added

to 3 cc. of benzylamine together
with 0.1 g. of ammonium chloride. The mixture is refluxed for an hour. On cool-
ing, the crystalline amide usually precipitates. If this is not the case acidification
with hydrochloric acid will often induce crystallization. If too much unreacted
ester remains, keeping the amide in solution, the ester may be removed by boiling
with water. The separated crystals are washed with water to remove excess amine,
then washed with petroleum ether to remove other organic impurities, and finally
recrystallized from a suitable solvent for example, aqueous acetone or alcohol.
1
J. Am. Chem. Soc. 65 (1933), 3049.
2
Chem. Soc.
.7. (1936), 398.
<7. Am. Chem.
3
Soc. 59 (1937), 421.
4
J. Org. Chem. 8 (1943), 168.
6
/. Am. Chem. Soc. 64 (1942), 470.
VII. LACTONES AND ANHYDRIDES
No have been developed for the identification of lactones and anhy-
specific tests
drides. These compounds generally can be hydrolyzed, however, and the resulting
acid (or acid salt) may be further identified by its characteristic derivatives. A
saponification equivalent can be determined for many members of the lactone and
anhydride groups, and the molecular weight equivalent of the substance under exami-
nation thus established. The saponification of lactones generally requires heating;
a somewhat stronger solution of alkali than is used for esters must generally be em-
ployed.
Many lactones can be identified by the reaction products resulting from bromina-
tion, hydrogen halide addition, nitration, sodium bisulfite addition, etc. The reader
is referred to the individual monographs on the Lactones, Coumarins and Coumarons
for more detailed information concerning separation and identification.
VIII. OTHER CONSTITUENTS

Oxides, furan derivatives, cyanides, amino and imino compounds, and sulfides
will not be discussed here in detail, since compounds of these types rarely occur in
essential oils, or only in comparatively small amounts.
The reader is referred to the discussion of individual compounds in the preceding
monographs, or to other, more detailed, literature.
833
INDEX
(Numbers in italics indicate principal entries)
Acetaldehyde, 808, 309, 332, 807 Alcoholysis, 793, 831

Aceteugenol, 518 Aldehydes, SOS, 804
Acetic acid, 201, 375, 377, 378, 379, 407, 559, aliphatic, 305
661, 565, 618, 620, 621, 623, 624, 626, saturated, 307
628, 630, 632, 794 terpene, S26
"Acetic ether/' 618 unsaturated, 318
Acetone, 170, 176, 259, 332, 341, 373, 382, aromatic, 350
384, 403, 458, 480 heterocyclic, 367
Acetophenone, 4? 4 terpene, cyclic, 342
p-Acetylanisole, 1+78 Aldol condensation, 804
Acetylbenzene, 1ft'4 Aldoximes, 810
Acetyleugenol, 100, 518 Alkali salts, 827
2-Acetyl-l-isopropylcyclopropanecarboxylic Alkali xanthates, 802
acid, 441 2-Alkyl-(5,6)-benzocinchoniriic acid, 806
l-Acetyl-2-methoxy-4-allylbenzene, 518 2-Alkyl-(5,6)-benzoquinoline-4-t*arboxylic
o-Acetylphenol, 477 acid 806
p-Acetyltoluene, 476, 800 a-Alkyl (or aryl)-j8-naphthocinchoninic acid,
Acid azides, 774, 827 806
Acid chlorides, 828 tt-Alkyl (or aryl)-/3-naphthoquinoline, 806
Acid number, 827 Allicin, 733
Acids, 557 Allophanates, 801
aliphatic, 560 Allylaldehyde, 807
dibasic, 592 p-Allylanisole, 506
hydroxy, 593 Allyl cyanide, 723, 734, 736
saturated, 560 4-Allylguaiacol, 516
unsaturated, 583 Allyl isothiocyanate, 734
aromatic, 596 Allyl mustard oil, 723, 734
fatty, 559 ;>-Allylphenol f 505
miscellaneous, 606 Allylpropyl disulfide, 731
of doubtful constitution, 612 Allylpyrocatechol, 513, 528
Acyl chlorides, 792, 828, 829 Allylpyrocatecholmethylene ether, 526
Acyl hydrazine, 811, 813 Allylsulfonyl allyl sulfide, 733
Agropyrene, 16 Allyltetramethoxybenzene, 541
Alant-camphor, 691, 692 Allyl thiocyanate, 734
Alantolactone, 691, 767 Allylthjourea, 735
Alcohols, 139, 754 Ally Ithioure thane, 736
Alcohols dehydration, 791 Allyltrimethoxybenzene, 540
aliphatic, 141 4- Ally Ive rat role, 519
saturated, 141 Ambrettolic acid, 595, 689
terpene, 166 Ambrettolide, 595, 662, 689
unsaturated, 158 Amides, 828
aromatic, 290 p-Aminobenzoic acid, 733
miscellaneous, 299 o-Aminobeiizoic acid methyl ether, 651
sesauiterpene, 258, 755, 760 Amino compounds, 725, 833
aliphatic, 258 tt-Aminoguanidine, 811, 813
bicyclic, 263, 755 Aminolysis, 831
monocyclic, 261, 755 Ammonia, 721, 804
tricvclic, 280, 759 Ammonolysis, 831
of doubtful constitution, 281 n-Amyl alcohol, 146
terpene. 754 Amyl ethyl ketone, 376
bicyclic, 229 n-Amyl methyl carbinol, 150
cyclic, 184 n-Amyl methyl ketone, 375
monocyclic, 184 Amyl nitrite, 782
tricyclic, 257 /-n-Amylvinylcarbinol, 161
835
836 INDEX
Amyrol, 755 Benihiol, 754
Androl, 165 Benzaldehyde, 291, 351, 355, 721, 808
Androstenol, 800 Benzazides, substituted, 800
Anethole, 358, 507, 508 1-Benzazole, 725
Anethole glycol, 511 Benzene sulfonyl chloride, 825
Anethole glycol ethers, 511 Benzoates preparation, 796
Angelica acid, 584 Benzoic acid, 290, 291, 292, 293, 351, 354,
Angelic acid, 584, 585 355, 475, 596, 636, 639
Angelicin, 660, 662, 686 Benzoic acid benzyl ester, 639
Angustione, 4$4, 485 Benzoic acid ethyl ester, 637
Anhydrides, 613, 833 Benzoic acid methyl ester, 633
Anihdes, 829 Benzoic anhydride, 794
Aniline, 829 Benzoic esters, 796
p-Anisaldehyde, 358, 509, 510, 511, 513,
807 Benzopvrrole, 725
Anise camphor/' 508 Benzoylation, 796
Anisic acid, 480, 510, 511 824
Benzoyl chlorides, 796,
p-Anisic acid, 358, 359, 360, 507, 509, 600 Benzylacetaldehyde, 356
Anisketone, 479, 511 Benzyl acetate, 635
Anisoin, 510 Benzyl alcohol, 290, 635, 639, 649, 792
Anisylisocyanate, 799 Benzylamine, 830, 832
p-Anisyl methyl ketone, 478 Benzyl benzoate, 639
p-Anol, 512 Benzylcarbinol, 292
p-Anol prenyl ether, 512 Benzyl cinnamate, 649
Anthranilic acid methyl ester, 651, 653 Benzyl cyanide, 723
Anthraquinone, 790 Benzyl-2-furylacetylene, 701
Antimonous acid, 794 Benzyl isothiocyanate, 740
Antimony trichloride, 781, 790 Benzyl isothiourea hydrochloride, 798, 829
Antimony trihalides, 790 Benzyl mustard oil, 740
Apiolaldehyde, 538 1-Benzyl-l-phenylhydrazine, 813
Apjole, 537 S-Benzylthiuronium chloride, 797, 798, 829
Apiolic acid, 538 S-Benzylthiuronium derivatives, 797
Araliene, 750 "Bergamot camphor/' 680
Aromadendrene, 110, 129, 774 Bergamottin, 676, 685
Aromadendrene glycol, 111 Bergaptene, 660, 662, 666, 673, 679, 680, 685
Arsenous acid, 794 "Bergaptin," 685
Arsenous anhydride, 794 Bergaptol, 660, 678, 685, 686
Artemisal, 318 Bergaptol geranyl ether, 685
Artemisia ketone, 386 Bergaptol isoamylene ether, 684
Artemisol, 754 Bertram-Walbaum mixture, 777
Aryl p4)romobenzene sulfonates, 825 Betel phenol, 514
Aryl oxvacetic acid, 825 Betulene, 264, 750
Aryl sulfonic acid, 788 Betulenene, 264, 750
Asarorialdehyde, 366 Betulenenol, 264, 750
Asarone, 535 Betulenolic acid, 264
Asaronic acid, 536, 537 Betulenols, 264
Asarylaldehyde, 366, 536 Betulol, 264
Ascarjdole,
715 Biacetyl, 379
Ascarjdole glycol, 716 Bisabolene, 84, 88, 96, 449, 775, 778
Ascaridole glycol anhydride, 716 l,r-Bismenthone, 397
Aschan method, 777 Boiling point, 1
Atlantone, 448 Borates preparation, 793

Atractylol, 755 Boric acid, 793, 794
"Autepine," 358 Boric anhydride, 793
Auraptene, 659, 672 Boric esters, 793
Auraptene hydrate, 674 "Borneo-camphor," 239, 429
cis-Auraptenic acid, 673 Borneol, 49, 55. 66, 67, 69, 77, 79, 230, 238,
Australol, 499 239, 246, 247, 429, 430, 432, 434, 627,
Ayapanin, 667 .
628, 777, 799
Azones, 817 Borneol esters, 430
Azulenes, 127, 128, 263, 279, 281, 457, 762, Borneol-isoborneol series, 239
789, 790 Bornyl acetate, 240, 242, 561, 628
Bornyl alcohol, 239
Baeckeol, 545 Bornyl chloride, 66, 70
Beckmann mixture, 775 Bornylene, 77, 779, 784
Benihinol, 754 Bornyl formate, 627
INDEX 837
Bornyl isovalerate, 631 Camerene, 753

Bornyval, 631 Camphane, 79, 434
"Bourbonal," 364 2-Camphanol, 239
"Brevifolin," 543 Camphene, 66, 240, 246, 247, 430, 436, 630,
Bromides preparation, 824 774, 777, 778
Bromination, 823 Camphene glycol, 69
Bromine, 780 Camphene hydrate, 69, 241, 247, 776, 777
Bromine substitution, 823 Camphene hydrochloride, 778
p-Bromoanilides, 829 Camphenic acid, 69
-Bromobenzazide, 800, 825 Camphenilol, 437
Bromobenzhydrazides, 814 Camphenilone, 67, 69, 436
Bromobenzoylazide, 800, 826 Camphenylic acid, 69
p-Bromobenzyl isothiourea hydrobromide, a-Campholonic acid, 58
829 Camphor, 55, 240, 242, 243, 246, 418, 429,
p-Bromobenzyl pseudothiuronium bromide, 430, 445
829 Camphor-carvone, 415
l-Bromo-2-naphthylamine, 830 Camphorene, 8, 125, 186, 778, 779
Bromonorpinic acid, 78 a-Camphprene tetrahydrochloride, 8
p-Bromophenacyl bromide, 828 Camphoric acid, 434, 606
p-Bromophenacyl esters preparation, 828 Camphor oil, sesquiterpene, 96
p-Bromophenylhydrazine hydrochloride, Camphor oil, sesquiterpene alcohols, 271
813 Camphoronic acid, 434
o-Bromo-p-toluidine, 830 Cannizzaro reaction, 805
Brucine salts, 794 Caparrapen, 750
Buchucamphor, Caparrapiol, 750
Bulnesol, 756 n-Capric acid, 156, 316, 325, 571, 574, 575
Bupleurol, 166, 794 Capric aldehyde, 316
Butanal, 305, 310 n-Caproaldchyde, 305, 312
Butanoic acid, 563 n-Caproic acid, 148, 149, 312, 376, 569, 688
w-Butanol, 144 Caproic aldehyde, 312
7-Butenyl isothiocyanate, 738 n-Caprylaldehyde, 306, 314
n-Butyl alcohol, 144, 792 n-Caprylic acid, 314, 324, 571, 572, 575
n-Butylidene phthalide, 609, 693 Caprylic aldehyde, 314
Butyl isothiocyanate, a-secondary, 737 Carbamates preparation, 798
J-Butyl mercaptan, 732 Carbamic acid esters, 798
Butyl mustard oil, secondary, 737 Carbamylcarbamates, 801
n-Butyl phthalide, 692 695 Carbamyl hydrazine, 811, 818
Butyl-propenyl disulfide, secondary, 732 Carbamylurethanes preparation, 801
n-Butyraldehyde, 144, 305, 310 Carbanilates, 799
n-Butyric acid, 144, 310, 559, 561, 663, 565, Carbanilide, 799
572, 625 Carbon disulfide 734
Butyric anhydride, 794 Carboxy methylhydrazine, 813
3-Carboxy-l-methyl-pyridinium p-toluene
Cadalene, 81, 82, 94, 96, 112, 122, 124, 268, sulfonate hydrazide, 817
271, 272, 275, 276, 280, 281, 748, 749, Carboxy phenylhydrazine, 813
755, 757, 776, 779, 790 Carene, 774, 778, 782, 787
Cadalene picrate, 82 A 2-Carene, 51
Cadalene styphnate, 82 A 3-Carene, 32, 49, 775, 779, 784, 786
Cadinene, 81, 87, 91, 96, 98, 271, 272, 273, A 4-Carene, 32, 51, 775
3
275, 282, 749, 753, 777, 778, 782, 784 J-A -Caren-5,6-epoxide, 714
Cadinene dihydrochloride, 91. 92, 97, 122, "Carlina oxide," 701
287 Carone, 44?
Cadinene hydrochloride, 97 Caronic acid, 51, 448
Cadinol, 273, 276, 755, 758 Carotene, 458
"Cajuputol," 708 Carotol, 703
Calamene, 81, 112, 280, 776 Carvacrol, 17, 415, 499, 501, 503
Calamenene, 283 Carvacromenthol, 505
Calamenenol, 282 Carvenone, 199, 411
"Calameone," 279 Carveol, 25, 203
Calameonic acid, 280 Carvestrene, 32
Calamol, 640 Carvol, 41
Calamonic acid, 540 Carvomenthol, 213, 411, 414
Calcium chloride addition products prepa- Carvomenthone, 394, 407
ration, 792 Carvone, 25, 205, 206, 394, 395, 408, 409,
Callitrol, 587 ^#,809,810
838 INDEX
Carvopinone, 447, 809 Citral, 168, 169, 170, 172, 173, 176, 324, 326,
Carvotanacetone, 43, 406, 428, 810 334, 337, 338, 339, 381, 382, 458, 807,
Carvoxime. 784 809
Caryophyllene, 99, 264, 716, 717, 750, 757, Citral-enol acetate, 333
776, 778, 782, 784, 785, 787 Citraptenc, 669
Caryophyllene alcohol, 102, 123, 777 Citronellal, 181, 182, 208, 209, 330, 332, 836,
Caryophyllene oxide, 100, 716 382, 587, 718, 807, 809
Caryophyllenic acid, 104, 105 Citronellic acid, 182, 341, 586
Cedar camphor, 284 Citronellol, 171, 172, 178, 332, 341, 623, 624,
Cedranone. 117 625 794, 802
Cedrenal, 117 Citronellyl acetate, 624
Cedrene, 116, 283, 284, 285 Citronellyl butyrate, 625
Cedrene dicarboxylic acid, 117 CitroneUyl formate, 183, 623
Cedrene dicarboxylic acid anhydride, 117 Citroptene, 669
Cedrene-glycol, 116, 117 Civet, 490
Cedrene keto acid, 117 Civetol, 491
Cedrenene, 283, 284 Civetone, 300,490
Cedrenol, 117, 283 Clausenan, 702
Cedrenone, see Cedrone Clovene, 123
Cedrol, 116, 284, 792 Clovenic acid, 123
Cedrone, 117, 120 "Cnidium lac tone,"
694
Chamazulene, 128, 131, 132 Color tests, 772, 824
Chamene, 745 Combanene, 756
Chavibetol, 514 Combanol, 756
Chavicol, 505 Condensation reactions, 805
Chavicol methyl ether, 506 Congealing point, 1
Chlorides preparation, 781 Copaene, 92, 122
Chlorine, 780 Copaene ketonic acid, 122
Chloroacetic acid, 825^ Costene, 747
Chlorobenzazides preparation, 800 Costol, 612, 756
p-Chlorobenzazide, 825 Costus acid, 612, 767
Chlorobenzhydrazides, 814 Costusic acid, 612
Chlorobenzoylazide, 826 Costus lactone, 767
p-Chlorobenzyl isothiourea hydrochloride,
'
Costusolactone, 767
829 o-Coumaric acid, 661
p-Chlorobenzyl pseudothiuronium chloride, p-Coumaric acid methyl ether, 604
829 Coumarin, 657 659, 660, 662, 664, 666, 668
p-Chlorophenacyl bromide, 828, 830 Coumarin isolation, 668
p-Chlorophenacyl esters, 828 Coumarin glucosides, 662
p-Chlorophenylhydrazine hydrochloride, Coumarinic acid, 660, 661, 664, 668
813 Coumarone, 657, 659, 660
Chlorosulfonic acid, 798, 823 "Crataegon," 478
Chromatographic method, 772 Crithmene, 40
Chromic acid, 775 Crotonaldehyde, 807
Chromic anhydride, 775 Crotonic acid, 723
Chrysantone, 765 Crotonic acid nitrile, 723
Cinchonidine, 794 "Crotonyl" mustard oil, 738
Cineolc, 34, 43, 191 Croweacin, 533
1,4-Cineole, 202, 718 Z-Cryptal, 388
1.8-Cineole, 708, 712 Cryptol, 299
Cineolic acid, 710 Cryptomeradol, 757, 764
Cineol-resorcinole, 709 Cryptomerene, 125 (see also Diterpene
Cinnamaldehyde, 854, 817 table)
"Cinnamein," 639 Cryptomeriol, 764
Cinnamic acid, 14, 355, 598, 645, 647, 649, Cryptone, 299, 388
650; 780 Cryptotaenene, 12
Cinnamic acid benzyl ester, 649 Cubeb camphor, 287, 768
Cinnamic acid cinnamyl ester, 650 Cubebol, 287
Cinnamic acid ethyl ester, 647 Cucumber alcohol, 164
Cinnamic acid methyl ester, 644 352
Cumaldehyde,
Cinnamic alcohol, 295, 650, 792, 801 p-Cumenol, 499
Cinnamic aldehyde, 354, 809 Cumic acid, 353
Cinnamonol, 756 Cumic alcohol, 297
Cinnamyl alcohol, 294, 295, 799 Cuminal, 352, 807
Cinnamyl cinnamate, 296, 650 Cuminaldehyde, 39, 344, 352
INDEX 839
Cuminic alcohol, 297 o-Dianisidine, 788

Cuminic aldehyde, 352 Djarylurea, 798
Cuminyl alcohol, 297 Diasarone, 537
Cupressene, 125 (see also Diterpene table) Dibenzyl, 788
Curcumenes, 89, 784 Dibenzylamine, 832
Curcumone, 450, 451 1,4-Dichloro-p-menthane, 34
Cyanacetic acid, 330 Dicitronelloxide, 125, 718
Cyanhydrin reaction, 804 Di-d-clausenan, 702
Cyanic acid gas, 801 Dicrotyl sulfide, 731
Cyanides, 721, 833 Dicyclohexylamme, 832
Cyanoacetic acid reaction, 807 Didymocarpene, 748
Cyanuric acid, 801 Diels and Alder reaction, 786
0-Cyclocitral, 349 "Diene synthesis/' 786
Cyclocitrylideneacetone, 1+58 Diethylaniline, 779
Cyclofenchene, 74, 777, 781 Di-hydrazones, 812
a-Cyclogeranic acid, 590 Dihydroambrettolic acid, 595
Cyclogeraniol, 173 Dihydro-7-atlantol, 449
Cyclogeranyl acetate, 622 Dihydroauraptene, 673
Cycloheptadecanone, 491, 492 Dihydroauraptenic acid, 673
9-Cycloheptadecenone, 490 "pihydrocalameone," 280
Cyclohexane, 18 Dihydrocarveol, 34, 205, 414
Cyclohexylamine, 832 Dihydrocarvone, 205, 206, 408, 454
Cyclononadecanone, 492 Dihydrocarvone hydrobromide, 448
Cyclopentadecanone, 493, 689 Dihydrocarvylamine, 43
Cyclopulegone sulfonic ester, 699 Dihydrocarvylxanthogenamide, 206
Cyclotridecanone, 492 Dihydrocaryophyllene nitrosate, 102
Cymbopol, 273 Djhydrocivetol, 492, 493
Cymerie, 45, 788 Dihydrocivetone, 492
p-Cymene, 16, 19, 25, 28, 35, 37, 38, 41, 52, Dihydro "cnidium lactono," 695
197, 231, 332, 334, 428, 775, 776, 788 Dihydrocostus lactone, 612, 76V
1,2,4-Cymenesulfonic acid, 17 Dihydrocostusolactone, 767
1,3,4-Cymenesulfonic acid, 17 Dihydrocoumarin, 661
"Cymol," 16 Dihydrocumaldehyde, 46
Cyperene, 749, 759 Dihydrocumin alcohol, 47
Cyperol, 759 Dihydrocuminaldehyde, 39, 342
Cyperone, 453 Dihydrocuminic acid, 185
Cypress camphor, 284 Djhydrocuminic aldehyde, 185
Dihydrocuminylamine, 46
Dacrydene, 745 Dihydrofarnesene, 84
Damascenjc acid, 655 Dihydro-7-ionone, 465
Damascenine, 654 Dihydro-irane, 467
Darwinol, 754 Djhydro-irone, 467
Daucol, 763 Dihydroisopimpinellin, 682
Decanal, 306, 816, 324 Djhydrojasmone, 487
Decanoic acid, 574 Dihydro junene, 746
1-Decanol, 156 Dihydromatsutake alcohol, 153
Decarboxylation, 827 Dihydromyrcene, 8, 11
n-2-Decen-l-al, 324 d-Dihydromyrtenol, 754
n-1-Decenaldehyde, 324 Dihydroperillene, 700
Decenoic acid, 324 A 1 2-Dihydrpperillyl alcohol, 345
'
n-Decyl alcohol, 156 Dihydrosabinene, 53

n-Decylaldehyde, 306, 316 a-Dihydrosedanolic acid, 695
n-1-Decylenic aldehyde, 324 Dihydrosedanolide, 695
n-Decylic acid, 574 Dihydroscsquicitronellene, 83
Dehydration of alcohols, 791 Dihydroteresantalic acid, 113
Dehydroangustione, 4&4, 486 Dihydro-a-terpineol, 186
Dehydrogenation, 776 Dihydroxanthotoxol, 679
Dehydrogeranic acid, 589 l,2-pihydroxy-4-allyl-benzene, 513
Dehydro-turmerone, 450 p-Dihydroxybenzene, 549
Diacetyl, 373, 379 Dihydroxycarotol,
763
Diallyl disulfide, 731 2,4-Dihydroxycinnamic acid, 667
Djaliyl trisulfide, 731 aja'-Dihydroxy-o-methyl-a'-isopropyl-
Diamine, 810 adipic acid, 36
gp'-Diaminodiphenylurethane, 830 a,S-Dihydroxy-a-methyl-S-isopropyladipic
ianethole, 510 acid, 197, 199
840 INDEX
Dihydrozingiberene, 88 2,6-Dimethyl-2,5,7-octatriene, 10
^,f -Dimethyl- A acid, 589
a<y -octatrienoic
Di-indyl, 726
Di-isoeugenol, 522 2,6-Dimethyl-2,5,7-octatrien-4-one, 385
Dikctomonocarboxylic acid, 449 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-l-al, 336
0-Diketones, 812 3,7-Dimethyl-7-octen-l-al, 336
Dillapiolaldehyde, 539 2,6-Dimethyl-l-octen-8-ol, 178
Dillapiole, 539 2,6-Dimethyl-2-octen-8-ol, 179
Dillapiolic acid, 539 2,6-Dimethyl-7-octen-4-one, 383
Dimcdone reaction, 805, 806 Dimethyl sulfide, 730
l,2-Dimethoxy-4-allylbenzene, 519 Dimethyl tetracyclocivetol, 301
3,4-Djmethoxybenzaldehyde, 863 Dimethyl tetracycloheptadecenol, 301
1,4-Dimethoxybenzene, 551 Djmyrcene, 9
3,4-Dimethoxybenzoic acfd, 519, 602 Dimyristyl carbinol, 768
Dimethoxycoumaric acid, 670 Dinitroaniline, 800
5,7-Dimethoxycoumarin, 669 3,5-Dinitrobenzazide, 825
5,6-Dimethoxyfurano-4',5',7,8-coumarin, Dinitrobenzoates preparation, 797
687 3,5-Dinitrobenzhydrazide, 814
5,8-Dimethoxyfurano-2',3',6,7-coumariri, p-Dinitrobenzoates, 796
682 3, 5-Dinitrobenzoates preparation, 796
3,4-Djmethoxyphenyl acetic acid, 519 3,5-Dinitrobenzoyl chloride, 824
3,4-Djmethoxyphenylisocyanate, 799 2,4-Dinitrochlorobenzene, 825
l,3-Di-p-methoxyphenyl-2-methylpropane, 3,5-Dinitro-4-methylbenzazide, 825
510 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine, 811, 812
1 ,2-Dimethoxy-4-propenylbenzene, 523 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazones prepara-
4,4'-Dimethoxystilbene, 510 tion, 812
Di-p-methoxystilbene 510?
3,5-Dinitrophenylisocyanate, 799
r
ciVa,/3-Dimethylacryhc acid, 585 ^V-(2,4-Dinitrophenyl;-A' '-methyl-nitrourea,

rans-a,/3-Diinethylacrylic acid, 584 800
0,i8-Dimethylacrylic acid, 583 2,4-Dinitrophenyl methylurethane, 801
7,7-Dimethylallyl alcohol, 512 Dinitrophenyl semicarbazide, 819, 820
Dimethyl anthranilate, 653 Di-p-nitrophenylurea, 799
Dimethyl camphor, 815 p-Dinitrophenylurethanes preparation,
3,6-Dimethyl-coumaronetetrahydride- 799
(4,5,6,7) 699 2, 4-Dinitrophenylure thanes preparation,
5,5-Dimethyl-cyclohexanc-l,3-dione, 805 800, 801
Dimethylglyoxal, 379 Diosphenol, 399, 542
2,6-Djmethyl-l,5-heptadjene, 590 Dipcntene, 25, 27, 34, 38, 45, 49, 169, 191,
2,6-Dimethyl-l,5-heptadiene-l-carboxylic 201, 777, 779, 780, 782, 784
acid, 589 Dipentene dihydrochloride, 25, 33, 49, 51, 52
2, 6-Dime thyl- 1 6-heptadiene-l -carboxylic
, Diphellandrene, 48
acid, 589 Diphenylcarbamates preparation, 824
a^
/3,r-Dimethyl-A -heptatriene, 590 Diphenylcarbamyl chloride, 800, 824
2,6-Dimethyl-l,3,5-heptatriene-l-carboxylic as^m-Diphenylhydrazirie hydrochloride, 813
acid, 589 Diphenylurea, 799
2,3-Djmethyl-2-hepten-6-one, 468 Diphenylurethanes preparation, 800, 824
l,4-Dimethyl-7-jsopropyl azulene, 131 Diterpenes, 125
2,4-Dimethyl-7-isopropyl azulene, 136 Diterpene table, facing p. 126
4,8-Dimethyl-2-isopropyl azulene, 131 Dithiocarboxylic acid, 802
l,6-Dimethyl-4-isopropylidene-6-hydroxy- Dithymoquinone, 555
naphthalene, 277 Divinyl sulfide, 730
1 ,5-Dimethyl-3-isopropylnaphthalene, 457 Dodecanal, 317, 324
1 6-Dime thyl-4-isopropylnaphthalene, 81
,
n-Dodecanoic acid, 576
rf-l,l-Dimethyl-2-7-ketobutylcyclopropane- n-2-Dodecen-l-al, 324, 325
3-carboxylic acid, 52 n-1-Dodecenaldehyde, 325
Dimethyl ketone, 373 n-Dodecylaldehyde 817
?
2, 6-Dime thyl-5-methylol-2,6-heptadiene, n-1-Dodecylenic aldehyde, 325

177 n-Dodecylic acid, 576
3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-l-al, 326, 327 Doebner reaction, 806
3,7-Dimethyl-2,7-octadien-l-al, 326, 327 Doremol, 387
2,6-Dimethyl-l,6-octadien-8-ol, 171, 174 Doremone, 887
2,6-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-8-ol, 171, 174 Dysoxylonene, 749
3,7-Dimethyl-l,6-octadien-3-ol, 167
3,7-Dimethyl-l,7-octadien-3-ol, 167 Elemazulene, 128
2,6-Dimethyl-4-octanone, 385 Elemicin, 584
2,6-Dimethyl-l,5,7-octatriene, 10 Elemol, 128, 262, 273
INDEX 841
Emulsin, 721 a-Fenchene, 71, 256, 777

Enanthal, 305 a-Fenchene dibromide, 781
Enanthaldehyde, 813 l8-Fenchene, 72
Enanthic acid, 570 7-Fenchene, 73
Epoxycarene, 714 5-Fenchene, 73
Epoxydihydrocaryophyllene, 716 Fenchol, 238, 251
2L3-Epoxy-2,6-dimethyl-7-octen-6-ol, 707 Fenchone, 251, 254, 418
Epoxylinalool, 707 Fenchyl alcohol, 70, 71, 73, 251
1,4-Epoxy-p-menthane, 712 d-Fenchylamine, 71
1,8-Epoxy-p-menthane, 708 Fenchyl chloride, 71
Equinopanacene, 751 Fenchylene, 73
Equinopanacol, 764 Feniculin, 512
Eremophilone, Jfil Ferric chloride, 824
Erythritol, 40 Fluconapin, 738
"Esdragol," 506 Fluorene, 788
Ester exchange, 792 2-Fluorenylisocyanate, 799
Ester number, 831 Fokienol, 756
Esters, 616, 792, 831 Foliol,756
aliphatic, 618 Formaldehyde, 305, 307, 417
aromatic, 636 Formic acid, 559, 560, 563, 564, 565, 621,
terpene, 620 625, 627
Esters containing nitrogen, 661 Formonitrile, 721
Estragole, 606 Freezing point, 1
Ethane- 1,2-dicarboxylic acid, 692 2-Furaldehyde, 367
Ethanol, 142 Furan derivatives, 697, 833
p-Ethoxyphenol, 552 Furan-2,3-dicarboxylic acid, 686
Ethyl acetate, 618 Furanocoumarins, 668
Ethyl alcohol, 148, 559, 618, 638, 642, 647, Furano-4',5',7,8-coumarin, 686
792 Furfural, 367, 373, 807
Ethyl n-amylcarbinol, 152 a-Furfuraldehyde, 367
Ethyl n-amyl ketone, 876 Furfurylaldehyde, 367
Ethyl benzoate, 637 Furo-4',5',7,8-eoumarin, 686
Ethyl cinnamate, 647 /3-Furyl-isopentyl-ketone, 4&3
Ethyl citronellate, 181 Fusanol, 269, 802
Ethylenediaminc, 832
Ethyl nitrite, 782 Galipene, 751
Ethyl salicylate, 642 Galipol, 760
"Ethylvanillin," 364 Gaultherin, 640
"Eucalyptol," 70S Geranial, 326, 334
Eucazulene, 135 Geranic acid, 332, 589
Eudalene, 81, 82, 108, 114, 263, 268, 272, Geranic acid nitrile, 162
274, 282, 457, 776, 790 Geraniol, 34, 163, 168, 169, 170, 171, 174,
Eudalene picrate, 82 175, 176, 177, 180, 182, 183, 273, 332,
Eudalene styphnate, 82 621, 686, 792, 794, 802
Eudalinol, 457 Geranyl acetate, 177, 333, 334, 561, 621,
Eudesmene, 82, 109, 111, 748 627
Eudesmol, 81, 108, 109, 111, 272, 274, 756, Geranyl formate, 621
757, 758, 776, 802 6-Geranyl-7-hydroxycoumarin, 675
Eudesmyl acetate, 274 Girard type reagents, 811, 814, 815, 816
"Eugenic acid," 616 Globulol, 286
Eugenine, 669 Glucochlearin, 738
Eugenol, 100, 616, 518, 519, 520, 521, Glucotrapaeolin, 740
544 Glutaric acid, 688
Eugenol acetate, 618 Glycols, 774
Eugenol methyl ether, 619 Grignard reaction, 804
Eugenone, 544 Guaiazulene, 128, 129, 134, 279, 288
Evodene. 746 S-Guaiazulene, 111, 128, 131, 134, 135
Exaltolide, 494, 594, 688 Se-Guaiazulene, 128, 134, 136
Exaltone, 492, 493 Guaiene, 111, 130, 134, 279
Guaiol, 128, 129, 130, 134, 278, 756
Faraesal, 258, 260 Guanylhydrazine, 811, 813
Farnesenes, 84, 259 Gurjunazulene, 135
Farnesol, 128, 268 Gurjunenes, 119, 775
2-Fenchanol, 261 Gurjunene ketone, 120
Fenchenes, 70, 780, 782, 784 Gynocardin, 721
842 INDEX
Halides, 780 Hydrodiherniarin, 667
Halogen acids,792 Hydrogenation, 777
Halogenation, 780 Hydrogen bromides preparation, 779
Heerabolene, 124, 780 Hydrogen cyanide, 721
Helenine, 691, 692 Hydrogen halides preparation, 778
Heliotropin, 365, 530 Hydrogen iodides preparation, 779
Hendecanoic acid, 575 Hydrogen sulfide, 721, 729, 730, 790
2-Hendecanol, 156, 794 Hydrolysis, 831
10-Hendecen-2-ol, 166 Hydroqujnol, 549
w-Heptaldehyde, 305, 813, 807 Hydroquinone, 549
Heptanal, 305, 313 Hydroqujnone dimethyl ether, 551
n-Heptane, 7 Hydroquinone monoethyl ether, 552
Heptanoic acid, 313, 570, 572 Hydroquinone monomethyl ether, 551
2-Heptanol, 150, 375, 794 o-yroxyaceophenone,
-Hydroxyacetop
n-Heptoic acid, 570 a-Hydroxy aldehydes, 812
sec-Heptyl alcohol, 150 p-Hydroxyallylbenzene, 505
n-Heptylic acid, 377, 569, 570, 571, 575 l-Hydroxy-4-allylbenzene, 505
2
n-Heptyl methyl ketone, 376 1-a-Hydroxy amyl-A -tetrahydrobenzoic
Heraclin, 680 694
acid,
Hermann, 007 o-[a-Hydroxyamyl]-benzoic acid, 693
n-Hexadecanoic acid, 579 2-Hydroxyanisaldehyde, 363
Hexadecylic acid, 579 p-Hydroxyanisole, 479. 551
Hexahydroagropyrene, 16 0-Hydroxybenzaldehyde, 357
Hexahydrozingiberene, 88 o-Hydroxybenzoic acid, 599
Hexanal, 305, 306, 312 4-Hydroxybenzyl isothiocyanate, 742
Hexanoic acid, 569, 572 p-Hydroxybenzyl mustard oil, 742
1-Hexanol, 148 2-Hydroxycamphane, 239
2-Hexen-l-al, 819 8-Hydroxycarvotanacetonc, 58
a,j8-Hexenic acid, 586 Hydroxychavicol, 513
2-Hexenoic acid, 320 o-Hydroxycinnamic acid, 659
3-Hexenol, 794, 802 m-Hydroxycinnamic acid, 660, 661
a,0-Hexenol, 158 tfrans-Hydroxycinnamic acid, 660, 661
0,7-Hexenol, 158 o-Hydroxycinnamic acid lactone, 664
3-Hexen-l-ol, 158 164, 320, 322 Hydroxycoumarins, 662
/rans-3-Hexen-l-ol, 319 5-Hydroxycoumarin, 667
n-Hexyl alcohol, 148 7-Hydroxycoumarin, 666
a,/3-Hexylenaldehyde, 319 p-Hydroxycumene, 499
tt-Hexylic acid, 569 2-Hydroxy-p-cymene, 503
Homoanisic acid, 507 3-Hydroxy-p-cymene, 500
m-Homocaroriic acid, 51 5-Hydroxy-2-decenoic acid lactone, 688
Homocaryophyllenic acid, 264 Hydroxydihydroeremophilone, 451
Homoterpcnyl methyl ketone, 192 2-Hydroxy-4,6-dimethoxyacetophenono, 543
d7-Homothujadicarboxylic acid, 76 2-Hydroxy-4,6-dimethoxychalcone, 544
Homoveratric acid, 519 2-Hydroxy-4,6-dimethoxy-3-methyl-iso-
Humulene, 107, 782, 784 butyrophenone, 545
Hydantoin derivatives, 820 Hydroxyeremophilone, 451
Hydrates, 776 S-Hydroxyfurano-^S'^J-coumarm, 678
Hydration, 776 S-Hydroxyfurano^'S'^^-coumarin, 678
Hydrazide, 811, 814 16-Hydroxy-7-hexaaecerioic acid, 595
Hydrazines, 810 16-Hydroxy-7-hexadecenoic acid lactone,
Hydrazine carboxylamine, 811 689
Hydrazones, 811, 815 Hydroxyhydrocarvone, 63
Hydrocarbons, 5, 7^5, 774 Hydroxyimperatorin. 683
Hydrocarbons addition products, 776 8-Hydroxy-5-isoamylene-psoralene, 683
Hydrocarbons dehydrogenation, 776 a-Hydroxy-isobutyric acid, 565
Hydrocarbons oxidation, 774 l-Hydroxy-4-isopropylbenzene; 499
Hydrocarbons, aliphatic, 7 p-Hydroxyisopropylbenzoic acid, 17
aromatic, 12, 753 a-Hvdroxy ke tones, 812
Hydrochlorides preparation, 778 Hydroxylamine, 809
Hydrocinnamaldehyde, 356 Hydroxylamine hydrochloride, 810
Hydrocinnamic acid, 295, 356, 724 Hydroxylamino-oxime, 810
Hydrocinnamic acid nit rile, 724 c?V8-Hydroxy-p-menthane 1 86
,
Hydrocinnamyl alcohol, 294 2-Hydroxy-4-methoxyacetophenone, 525

Hydrocoumarinic acid, 661 l-Hydroxy-2-methoxy-4-allylbenzerie, 516
Hydrocyanic acid, 373, 721 2-Hydroxy-4-methoxybenzaldehyde, 363
INDEX 843
4-Hydroxy-3-methoxybenzaldehyde, 361 Isobomyl-Z-menthylcarbamate, 245

l-Hydroxy-2-methoxy-4-propenylbenzene, Isobutyl alcohol, 145
521 Isobutylaldehyde, 807
Hydroxymyristic acid, 593 Isobutyric acid, 145, 564
15-Hydroxypentadecanoic acid, 594 Isocadmene, 92, 94, 95, 776, 777, 778
15-Hydroxypentadecanoic acid lac tone, 688 Isocalamol, 541
15-Hydroxypentadecylic acid, 594 Isocamerene, 753
"Hydroxypeonol," 543 Isocamphoric acid, 606, 607
Hydroxypeucedanin, 674 Isocamphoronic acid, 434, 437
p-Hydroxyphenetol, 552 Isocarvomenthol, 215
7-Hydroxypropyl methyl sulfide, 731 Isocedrene dicarboxylic anhydride, 117
5-Hydroxypsoralene, 678 Isocedrenol, 117
5-Hydroxypsoralene isoamylene ether, 684 Isochamene, 745
8-Hydroxypsoralene, 678 Isochavibetol, 515
8-Hydroxypsoralene isoamylene ether, 683 Isocitral, 26, 333, 334
Hydroxyterpenylic acid, 414 Isocostene, 757
4-Hydroxy-2,6,6-trimethyl-l-tetrahydro- Isocroweacin, 534
benzaldehyde, 348 Isocyanates, 798
Hypnone, Isodlprene, 49
Isoelemicin, 534, 535
Imino compounds, 725, 833 Isocugenol, 521, 524
Imperatorin, 660, 666, 683 Isoeugenol methyl ether, 523, 524
aZ/0-Imperatorin, 683 Isofenchene, 73
Indolc, 725, 728 Isofenchol, 255, 422
Iodides preparation, 781 Isofenchone, 421
Iodine, 780 Isofenchyl acetate, 71, 777
p-Iodobenzhydrazide, 814 Isofenchyl alcohol, 71, 72, 74, 255, 421, 422,
p-Iodobenzhydrazones preparation, 814 777
4-Iodo-diphenyl-4'-isocyanate, 799 Isofenchyl chloride, 71, 72
lodoform, 143, 374 Isofenchylxanthates, 71, 74
p-Iodophenacyl bromide, 828, 830 Isofokienene, 755
p-Iodophenylisocyanate, 824 Iso-a-gurjunene, 120
lonone ring, 484 Isohelenine, 691
lonones, 335, 458, 495 /3-Isohexeriyl-furan, 700
lonones separation, 4^2 Isohydroxycuminic acid, 504
a-Ionone, 4^8, 4^0 Isohydroxypeucedanin, 674
-Ionone, 458, 461 Isoimperatorin, 660, 684
i/'-Ionone, 459 Isolimonene, 29
pseudo-Ionone, 459 Isomenthol, 216, 218, 221, 222, 399, 417
Ipomoeol, 760 Isomenthonc, 216, 3<K), 391, 423
Irene, 472 Isomyristicin, 532
Irol, 472 Isophyllocladene, see Diterpene table
Irones, 466, 495 Isopimpinellin, 660, 676, 682, 687
Irone, natural, 469 Isopjnene, 72
or-Irone, JflO Isopinocampheol, 442
0-Ironc, 471 Isopinocamphone, 442, 443
7-1 rone, 4?0 Isopiperitenone, ^/7
Ishwarene, 751 Isoprene, 7, 128, 386
Ishwarol, 760 4-Isopropenyl-l-cyclohexenaldehyde, 342
Ishwarone, 765 4-Isopropenyl-l-cyclohexenecarbinol, 184
Isoalantolactone, 691 2-Isopropenyl-5-methyl-4-hexen-l-ol, 1 77
Isoamyl alcohol, 147, 643 Isopropyi acetic acid, 566
Isoamyl salicylate, 643 Isopropylaldehyde, 807
"Isoanethole," 510 p-Isopropylbenzaldehyde, 352
Isoapiotej 538 p-Isopropylbenzyl alcohol, 297
Isoartemisia ketone, 386 IsopropylcarbinoL 145
Isoauraptene, 672, 674 4-Isopropyl-l-cyclohcxenaldehyde, 344
Isobergaptene, 686 4-Isopropyl-2-cyclohexen-l-ol, 299
Isobetel phenol, 515 4-Isopropyl-2-cyclohexen-l-one, 48, 388^
Isoborneol, 66, 67, 69, 239, 240, 241, 243, l-Isopropyl-l,2-cyclopropanedicarboxylic
245, 247, 430, 434, 630, 777, 792 acid, 440, 441
Isoborneol esters, 430 Isopropylglutaric acid, 389, 407
Isobornyl acetate, 246, 630 Isopropylideneacetic acid, 583
Isobornyl acid phthalates, 245 4-Isopropyl-l-methylene-2-cyclohexene,
Isobornyl chloride, 66, 67, 778 p-Isopropylphenol,
844 INDEX
Isopulegol, 182, 208, 340, 792, 802 S-Ledum azulene, 281
Isopulegol acetate, 341 Se-Ledum azulene, 281
Isopulegol formate, 338 Ledum camphor, 280
Isopulegone, 404 Leptospermol, 488
Isosafrole, 528,529 Leptospermone, 488
Isothiocyanallyl, 734 Levulinic aldehyde, 676
Isothujone, 249, 423, 424, 428 Libocedrene, 752
Isothujyl alcohol, 249 "Ligusticumic acid," 609, 693
Isovalcraldehyde, 305, 311, 807 "Ligusticum lactone," 609, 693
Isovaleric acid, 312, 384, 449, 566, 634 Limene, 84
Isozingiberene, 81, 87, 91, 261, 776 Limettin, 659, 662, 669, 673, 676
Isozingiberene dihydrochloride, 87, 91, 262 rfcimonene, 20, 22, 27, 776, 780, 782, 784, 787
dZ-Limonene, 27
Jasmone, 486 Limonene nitrolaniline, 786
Junene, 746 Limonene nitrosochloride, 782, 784, 786
Junipene, 753 Limonene tetrabromide, 781
Juniperene, 761 Limonetrite, 25
Juniperic acid, 595 Linalool, 34, 167, 168, 169, 171, 172, 173,
Juniperol, 761 189, 620, 707, 718, 792, 799, 802
Linalool dioxide, 170
Kaurene, 125 (see also Diterpene table) Linaloolene, 8
Kessazulene, 135, 288 Linalool monoxide, 170, 707
Kesso glycol, 288, 289 Linalyl acetate, 168, 177, 334, 561, 620, 627
Kesso glvcol diacetate, 288, 289 Linoleic acid, 592
Kessyl acetate, 289 Linolenic acid, 592
Kcssyl alcohol, 135, 888 Liquidene, 7^7
Kessyl alcohol acetate, 288 Longifolene, 121, 780
d-Ketocaprinic acid, 688 Luparenol, 762
5-Ketocarane, 447 Luparol, 766
2-Ketodecylic acid, 166 Luparone, 765
Ketomethylcne compounds, 807 Lusitanicoside, 505, 506
Ketones, 371, 765, 774, 804
aliphatic, 373 Maali alcohol, 761
saturated, 373 Machilol, 757, 755
unsaturated, 381 Macrocarpol, 761
aromatic, 474 Maleic anhydride reactions, 786, 787,
large ring, 4$9 823
miscellaneous, 4s0 Malol, 768
sesquiterpene, 448 Malonic acid esters, 792
terpenc, bicyclic, 418 Marmelosin, 683
cyclic, 388 Maroniol, 764
monocyclic, 388 Massoilactone, 688
Ketones of doubtful constitution, 494 Matico camphor, 762
J-Ketonic acid, 225
Matsutake-alcohol, 161
3-Keto-sabinane, 423 Melilotic acid, 661
Ketoximes, 810 Melting point, 1
Kiganene, 748 l,8(9)-p-Menthadien-7-al, 342
Kiganol, 757 Menthadienes, 19
Kuromatsuol, 761 l,8(9)-m-Menthadiene, 32
6,8(9)-w-Mcnthadiene, 32
Lactarazulene, 128 p-Menthadienes, 20
Lactic acid, 565
l(7),2-p-Menthadiene, Jfl
Lactones, 657, 659, 767, 833 1,3-p-Menthadiene, 35
Laevulimc acid, 170, 176 1(7), 3-p-Menthadiene, 39
Lanceol, 270 1,4-p-Menthadiene, 40
Lansene, 751 l,4(8)-p-Menthadiene, 30
Lansol, 752 1,5-p-Menthadiene, 41
Lauraldehyde, S17 l,8(9)-p-Menthadiene, 22
Laurie acid, 317, 570
2,8(9)-p-Menthadiene, 29
Laurocerasin, 721 l,8(9)-p-Menthadien-7-ol, 184
Lavandulol, 111, 177, 802 6,8(9)-p-Menthadien-2-ol, 203
"Leaf alcohol," 168
l,4(8)-p-Menthadien-3-one, 416
"Leaf aldehyde," 306, 319
l,8(9)-p-Menthadien-3-one, 417
Ledene, 281 6,8(9)-p-Menthadien-2-one, 412
Ledol, 129, 280 m-Menthane, 18, 19
INDEX 845
o-Menthane, 18,19 p-Methoxybenzaldehyde, 358

p-Menthane, 18, 19 o-Methoxybenzoic acid, 360
p-Menthane-l,4-diol, 202 p-Methoxybenzoic acid, 360, 479, 509, 600
p-Menthane-l,8-diol, 200 o-Methoxycinnamaldehyde, 360
p-Menthane-l,2,4,5-tetrol, 40 p-Methoxycinnamaldehyde, 359
p-Menthane-l,2,4,8-tetrol, 30 p-Methoxycinnamic acid, 360, 604
p-Menthane-l,2,4-triol, 199 7-Methoxycoumarin, 667
p-Menthane-l,2,8-triol, 192 7-Methoxy-8-(7,7-dimethylallyl)coumarin,
671
p-Menthane-l,3,4-trjol, 197 /
p-Menthane-l,4,8-triol, 195 5-Methoxyfurano-2 ,3',6,7-coumarin, 680

p-Menthane-2 8,9-triol, 207 S-Methoxyfurano^^ê^-coumarin, 679
2-p-Menthanol, 213 7-Methoxy-5-geranoxycoumarin, 670, 675,
3-p-Menthanol, 216, 226 682
8-p-Menthanol, 186 l-Methoxy-2-hydroxy-4-allylbenzene, 514
p-Menthan-2-one, 894 3-Methoxy-2-inethyl-aminobenzoic acid
p-Menthan-3-onc, 390 methyl ester, 654
p-Menthan-2-one-8,9-diol, 409 S-Methoxy-AT-methylanthranilic acid
l-p-Menthen-7-al, 344 methyl ester, 654 /
Menthenes, 19 7-Methoxy-8-(3'-methylbutanyl-2 )-
A3-Menthene, 20 coumarin, 671
l-p-Menthene-4,6-diol, 231 2-Methoxy-3,4-methylenedioxypropenyl-
8(10)-p-Menthene-l,2-diol, 25 benzene, 534
2-p-Menthene-l,4-dioxide, 715 2,4,5-Methoxynitrobenzene, 367
l-p-Menthen-3-ol, 211 p-Methoxyphenol, 551
l-p-Menthen-4-ol, 198 4-Methoxyphenylacetic acid, 480, 507
l-p-Menthen-8-ol, 188 p-Methoxyphenylacetoin, 511
3-p-Menthen-l-ol, 197 p-Methoxyphenylacetone, 479, 511
4(8)-p-Menthen-l-ol, 195 p-Mcthoxyphenylglyoxylic acid, 479, 509
4(8)-p-Menthen-3-ol, 207 p-Methoxyphenylisooyanate, 799
8(9)-p-Menthen4-ol, 193 p-Methoxypropenylbenzene, 508
8(9)-p-Menthen-2-ol, 205 2-Methoxy-4-propenylphcnol, 521
8(9)-p-Menthen-3-ol, 208 5-Methoxypsoralene, 680
l-Menthen-3-one, 197 8-Methoxypsoralene, 679
3(8)-w-Menthen-2-one, 410 4-Methoxysalicylaldehyde, 363
3(8)-ra-Menthen-4-one, 410 p-Methylacetophenone, 476, 482
1 (7)-p-Menthen-2-one, 4 1 t-l-Methyl-4-acetyl-l-cyclohexene, 482
l-p-Menthen-3-one, 211, 396 /S-Methykdipic acid, 225, 340, 341, 392, 403,
3-p-Menthen-2-one, l+ll 481
4(8)-p-Menthen3-one, 400 Methyl alcohol, 141, 373 559, 636, 640
;
6-p-Menthen-2-one, 406 0-Methylaminobenzoic acid methyl ester,

8(9)-p-Menthen-2-one, 408 653
8(9)-p-Menthen-3-one, 404 Methyl n-amyl ketone, 375
Mcnthofuran, 699 Methyl anthranilate, 65 1
Menthol, 20, 208, 209, 213, 216, 403, 416, n-Methylanthranilic acid methyl ester, 651,
445, 632, 634, 699, 799, 802 653
d-Menthol, 218 Methyl benzoate, 636
WMenthol, 210, 220, 224, 226 3-Methylbutanal, 311
<fl-Menthol, 222, 398, 399 a-Methylbutanoic acid, 567
Menthol-isomenthol series, 248 jS-Methylbutanoic acid, 566
Menthone, 216, 225, 340, 390, 408, 416, 423, 3-Methylbutanol, 147
699 2-Methyl-n-butyraldehyde, 311
Z-Menthydrazide, 814 a-Methyl-n-butyric acid, 567
Menthyl acetate, 632 /3-Methyl-n-butyric acid,
566
Menthyl isovalerate, 634 Methyl chavicol, 506
Meranzin, 672 Methyl cinnamate, 644
Mercaptan, 729, 790 aVa-Methylcrotonic 585
acid,
Mercuric acetate, 823 <ran$-a-Methylcrotonic acid, 584
Mercuric iodide, 817 /3-Methylcrotonic acid, 583
Me tane thole, 510 j8-Methylcumaric acid, 360
Metastyrene, 15 l-Methyl-3-cyclohexanone, 403, 480
Methacrolein, 318 l-Methyl-l-cyclohexen-3-one, 416
Methacrylic acid, 683 3-Methyl-l-cyclopentadecanone, 489
Methanol, 141 1
,2-Methylenedjoxy-4-allylbenzene, 526
p-Methoxyacetophenone, 4?8 3,4-Methylenedioxybenzaldehyde, 365
p-Methoxyallylbenzene, 506 3,4-Methylenedioxybenzoic acid, 601
846 INDEX
l,2-Methylenedioxy-3,6-dimethoxy-4-allyl- l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexane, 19
benzene, 537 l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexane-l,4-diol,
l,2-Methylenedioxy-5,6-dimethoxy-4-allyl- 202
bcnzenc, 539 l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexane-l,8-diol,
l,2-Methylenedioxy-6-methoxy-4-allyl- 200^
benzene, 531 Methyl-isopropylcyclohexanol, 18
l,2-Methylenedioxy-6-methoxy-4-propenyl- l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexan-2-ol, 213
benzene, 532 l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexan-3-ol, 216.
l,2-Methylenedioxy-4-propenylbenzene, 529 226
l-Methylene-4-isopropylcyclohexan-2-one, l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexan-2-one, 394
410 l-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexan-3-one, 890
l-Methylene-4-jsopropyl-2-cyclohexene, 46 l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-2-cyclohexene-l,4-di-
l-Methylene-4-isopropyl-3-cyclohexene, 39 oxide, 715
Methyleugenol, 519 l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-l-cyclohexen-3-ol, 21 1
Methyl ethyl acetic acid, 567 l-Methyl-4-jsopropyl-l-cyclohexen-4-ol, 198
0,0-Methyl ethyl propyl alcohol, 148 l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-l -cyelohexen-8-ol, 188
Methylfenchyl xanthates, 71 l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-3-cyclohexcn-l-ol, 197
Methyl geranate, 590 l-Methyl-4-isopropy 1- 1 -cy clohexen-3-one,
5-Methyl-geraniol, 468 396

Methyl heptenol, 161 l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-3-cyclohexen-2-one,
o-Methyl heptenol, 161 411
0-Methyl heptenol, 161 l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-6-cyclohexen-2-one,
2-Methyl-l-hepten-6-ol, 161 406
2-Methyl-2-hepten-6-ol, 161 2-Methyl-5-isopropyl-l ,4-hydroquinone, 553
Methyl heptenone, 162, 163, 170, 332, 335, l-Methyl-4-isopropylidenccyclohexan-l-ol.
337, 381 195
0-Methyl heptenone, 173 l-Methyl-4-isopropylidenecyclohexan-3-ol,
2-Methyl-l-hepten-6-one, 3S1 207
2-Methyl-2-hepten-6-onc, 381 l-Methyl-3-isopropylidenecyclohexan-
Methyl heptenone carboxylic acid, 332 2-one, 410
Methyl n-heptylcarbinol, 154, 377 l-Methyl-3-isopropylidenecyclohexan-
Methyl n-heptyl ketone, 378
154, 376, 377, 4-one, 410
4-Methyl-5-hydroxy-7-inethoxycoumarin, l-Methyl-4-isopropylideneoyclohexan-
669 3-one, 400
/3-Methylindole, 728 l-Methyl-4-isopropylidene-l-cyclohexene,
3-Methylindole, 728 30
Methyl-ionone, 495 l-Methyl-4-isopropylidenc-cyclohexen-3-ol f
6-Methyl-a-ionone, 466 334

6-Methyl-0-ionone, 466 l-Methyl-4-isopropylidene-l-cyclohexen-
6-Methyl- T -ionone, 466 3-one, 416
Methyl isobutyl ketone, 384 l-Methyl-7-isopropylnaphthalene, 81
)3-Methyl-6-isobutyryl-n-valeric acid, 392 2-Methyl-5-isopropylphenol, 503
Methylisoeugenol, 523 3-Methyl-6-isopropylphenol, 500
1 93 Methyl ketones, 808
l-Methyl-4-jsopropenylcyclohexan-l -ol,
l-Methyl-4-isopropenylcyclohexan-2-ol 2057 7-Methyl-mercapto propyl alcohol, 731
l-Methyl-4-jsopropenylcyclohexan-3-ol,
208 2-Methyl-6-methenyl-2,7-octadien-4-one,
l-Methyl-4-isopropenylcyclohexan-2-one, 385
408 4-Methyl-5-methoxy-7-hydroxycoumarin,
l-Methyl-4-isopropenylcyclohexan-3-one, 669
404 2-Methyl-6-methylene-2,7-octadiene, 8
l-Methyl-3-isopropenyl-l-cyclohexene, 82 2-Methyl-6-methylene-7-octen-4-one, 884
l-Methyl-3-Lsopropenyl-6-cyclohexene, 32 2-Methyl-6-methylenoctan-8-ol(?), 166
l-Methyl-4-isopropenyl-l-cyclohexene, 22 Methyl-j3-methylthiolpropionatc, 732
l-Methyl-4-jsoproijenyl-2-cyclohexcne,
29 a-Methyl-j3-naphthocinchoninic acid, 807
l-Methyl-4-isopropenyl-6-cyclohexen-2-ol, Methylnitramine, 800
203 2-Methyl-2,4,8-nonatricne, 12
l-Methyl-4-isopropenyl-l-cyclohexen-3-onc, 2-Methyl-2,6,8-nonatriene, 12
417 Methyl 7Z-nonylcarbinol, 156
l-Methyl-4-isopropenyl-6-cyclohexen-2-one, Methyl n-nonyl ketone, 157, 377
412 Methyl pentanoic acid, 569
l-Methyl-4-isopropylbenzene, 16 3-Methyl-l-pentanol, 148
2-Methyl-5-isopropyl-l 4-benzoquinone, 554
, 3-Methyl-2-[2'-penten-yl]-2-cyclopenten-
l-Methyl-4-jsopropyl-l ,3-cyclohexad jene, 85 1-one, 486
l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-l ,4-cyclohexadjene, 40 1-Methylphenylhydrazine, 813
l-Methyl-4-isopropyl-l ,5-cyclohexadiene, 41 Methyl pnenyl ketone, 4^4
INDEX 847
Methylphloroglucinol dimethyl ether, 546 "Neopinocampheol," 238

Methylphloroisobutyrophenone dimethyl Nepetalactorie, 690
ether, 545 Nepetalic acid, 607, 613, 690
Methylpinocamphylxanthate, 55 Nepetalic anhydride, 608, 613, 690
a-Methylpropanoic acid, 564 Nepotic acid, 608
2-Methylpropanol, 145 Nepetonic acid, 608
a-Methylquinoline, 807 Neral, 326, 327, 334
Methyl salicylate, 617, 640 Nerol, 168, 169, 171, 172, 174, 623, 803
Mcthylsuccinic acid, 392 Nerolidol, 96, 260
p-Methyl-3-tetrahydroacctophenone, 4& Neryl acetate, 622
3-Methylthiol propyl ether, 731 Neutralization equivalent, 827
Methyl-p-tolyl carbinol, 477 Nickel as catalyst, 778
2-Methyl-6-(p-tolyl)-l-heptene, 89 "Niobe," oil of, 636
2-Methyl-6-(p-tolyl)-2-heptcne, 89 Nitration, 823
Methyl-p-tolyl ketone, 476 Nitric acid, 775
Methyl-p-tolyl pinacone, 477 Nitrites, 784
Methylumbellifcrone, 659, 667 1 -N itroanthraquinone-2-carboxylic acid,
Methyl n-undecyl ketone, 378 803
"Methylvanillin," 363 Nitrobcnzazide, 800, 825, 826
Mcthylxanthates, 802 Nitrobenzene sulfonhydrazide, 814
Micranene, 749 Nitrobenzhydrazides, 814
Microl, 766 p-Nitrobcnzoates preparation, 796
Microscopy, chemical, 772 Nitrobenzoylazide. 826
Mirene, 125 (see also Diterpene table) p-Nitrobenzoyl chloride, 824
Mitsubene, 748 7>-Nitrobenzyl bromide, 825
Mixed anhydride, 793 p-Nitrobenzyl chloride, 825, 828
Moslene, 40 p-Nitrobcnzyl esters, 827, 828
Muscone, 300, 489 7>-Nitrobenzyl ethers, 825
Musk, 489 p-Nitrobenzyl iodide, 825
Muskrat, 492, 493 Nitro compounds, 786, 790
"Mustard oil," 734 Nitrogen-containing compounds, 719
Mustard oils, 734 Nitroguanylhydrazine, 813
Myrcenal, 9 Nit rolamines preparation, 785
Myrcene, 780, 784, 787, 788 Nitro-a-phellandrcne, 43
/3-Myrcene, #,11, 774, 778 Nitro-/S-phellandrene, 46
Myrcenic acid, 9 p-Nitrophenylcarbamide, 799
Myrcenol, 9 p-Nitrophenylhydrazine, 811, 812, 813
Myrcenone, 385 p-Nitrophenylhydrazones preparation, 812
Myristic acid, 559, 577, 578, 580 Nitrophenylisocyanatcs, 799
Myristicin, 531 p-Nitrophenylure thanes preparation, 798,
Myristicinaldehyde, 532 800
Myristicinic acid, 532 3-Nitrophthalates, 796
Myronate of potassium, 734 3-Nitrophthalic acid esters, 795
Myrosinase, 734 3-Nitrophthalic anhydride, 795
Myrtcnal, 234, 346, 347 Nitrosates preparation, 784
Myrtenol, 63, 233, 347 Nitrosites preparation, 784
d-Myrtenol, 754 Nitrosocarene, 50
Nitrosochlorides preparation, 781, 782
Naphthalene, 12, 790 Nitrosohalides preparation, 781
1,7-Naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 692 Nitrosylchloride, 781, 782
0-Naphthocinchoninic acid, 806, 807 2,6-Nonadienal, 322
/3-Naphthoquinoline, 807 a-e-Nonadien aldehyde, 322
a-Naphthoquinone, 790 2,6-Nonadien-l-ol, 164, 802
/3-Naphthydrazide, 814 Nonanal, 306, 315
Naphthylamine, 330, 806, 830 Nonane, 7
tt-Naphthylamine addition products, 797 Nonanoic acid, 573
Naphthylhydrazine hydrochloride, 813 1-Nonanol, 153, 165
Naphthylisocyanate, 798, 799, 824, 825 2-Nonanol, 154
Naphthyl semicarbazide, 820 2-Nonanone, 376
a-Naphthy lure thanes preparation, 798, 799 n-Nonyl alcohol, 153
Neocarvomenthol, 215 n-Nonylaldehyde, 154, 306, 315
"Nepdihydrocarveol," 206 n-Nonylic acid, 154, 573
Neoisocarvomenthol, 215 Nopinene, 62
Ncoisomenthol, 216, 221, 222 Nopinic acid. 63
Neomenthol, 210, 219, 221, 222, 226 T-Norborneol, 229
848 INDEX
Norcamphene, 79 "Parsley camphor," 537
7r-Norcamphor, 438 Partheniol, 762
Norcaryophyllenic acid, 104, 105 Patchoulene 288
Norcedrene, 116 Patchouly alcohol, 287
Norcedrene dicarboxylic acid, 117 Patchouly camphor, 287
Norcedrene keto acid, 117 Pelargonaldehyde, 306, 315
7r-Norisoborne6l, 229 Pelargonic acid, 154, 315 378, 571, 573
Normuscol, 492, 493 3, 5, 6, 7, 4'-Pentame thoxy flavone, 677
Normuscone, 493 Pentanal, 305
Nortricycloekasantalal, 350 l~Pentanol, 146
Nortricycloekasantalic acid, 350 Peonol, 525
Nortricycloekasantalol, 350 Perilla ketorie, 483
Perillaldehyde, 185, 342, 346
Ocimene, 9, 10, 780, 787 Perillenc, 700
aWo-Ocimene, 11 Perillic acid, 343
Ocimenol, 11 Perillyl alcohol, 184

Ocimenonc, 3S5 Perillyl formate, 185
Octadecanal, 318 l,4-Peroxido-2-p-inenthene, 715
n-Octadecanoic acid, 581 Phellandral, 47, 844
n-Octadecyl aldehyde, 318 Phellandrene, 34, 399, 774, 776, 782, 784,
n-Octadecylic acid, 5SI 785, 787
Octanal, 306, 314, 324 Phellandrene nitrosochloride, 783
Octanoic acid, 571 o-Phcllandrenc, 20, 41, 47
1-Octanol, 151 a-Phellandrene nitrosite, 784
3-Octanol, 152, 794 ^Phellandrene, 20, 46, 778, 779, 787
3-Octanone, 376 /3-Phellandrene nitrosite, 785
l-Octen-3-ol, 161 Phellandric acid, 345
ri-Octoic acid, 324 Phenacetonitrile, 723
n-Octyl alcohol, 151 Phenacyl bromide, 828
n-Octyl aldehyde, 151, 306, 314 Phenacyl esters, 827, 828
Octylene, 7 Phenacyl halides, 828
Oenanthic acid, 570 /3-Phenethyl isothiocyanate, 741
Olefins, 7 Phenol ethers, 497, 499, 823
Oleic acid, 580, 582, 591 Phenols, 497, 499, 766, 803, 823
Olibanol, 236 Phenylacetaldehyde 293, 353
Optical rotation, 2 Phenylacetamide 724
Origanene, 75, 746 Phenylacetic acid, 292, 293, 597, 702, 724
"Origanol," 198 Phenylacetic acid nitrile, 723
Orthodene, 78 /3-Phenylacrolein, 354
Orthodonene, 99, 784 7-Phenylallyl alcohol, 295
Osazones, 812 Pheiiylcarbamates preparation, 799
Osthenole, 672 Phenylcarbamide, 799
Osthenolc methyl ether, 671 Phenylcarbinol, 290
Osthole, 659, 671, 672, 674 o-Phcnylenediamine, 830
Ostruthin, 659, 666, 675, 687 2-Phenylethanol, 292
Oxalic acid, 201, 384 Phenylethyl alcohol, 292
Oxalic acid esters, 792 Phenylethyl cyanide, 724
Oxalic amide hydrazide, 811 Phenylethylene, 14
Oxamine-oxime, 810 Phenylethyl mustard oil, 741
Oxanilhydrazide, 814 l-Phenyl-3-a-furylpropane, 701
Oxidation, 774, 805 /3-Phenylglyceric acid, 646
Oxides, 705, 833 n-Phenylhexane, 16
1,4-Oxjdo-p-menthane, 712 Phenylhydrazine, 811, 832
1,8-Oxido-p-menthane, 708 Phenylhydrazine hydrochloride, 811
2
1,4 Oxido-A -p-menthene, 37 Phenylhydrazine-p-sulfonic acid, 813
Oxjmation, 809 Phenylhydrazones preparation, 81 1
Oxime transformation, 782, 784 Phenylisocyanate 799, 824
Oximes preparation, 809 p-Phenylphenacyl bromide, 828, 830
Oxypeucedanin, 685 p-Phenylphenacyl esters, 828
Ozone, 775 3-Phenyl-l-propanol, 294
3-Phenyl-2-prppen-l-ol, 295
Palladium as catalyst, 778 jS-Phenylpropionaldehyde. 356
Palmitic acid, 559, 577, 579, 582 Phenylpropionic acid, 724
Paraffins, 7 Phenylpropionic acid nitrile, 724
Parmone, 495 Phenylpropyl alcohol, 294
INDEX 849
7-Phenyl-tt-propyl alcohol, 294 /3-Propylacrylic acid, 586

4-Phenylsemjcarbazide, 818 p-7i-Propylphenol. 513
4-Phenylsemicarbazones preparation, 818 Protocatechualdenyde dimethyl ether, 363
Phenylsemioxamazide, 820 Protocatechualdehyde-3-ethyl ether, 364
Phenylurothanes preparation, 798, 799 Protocatechualdehyde-3-methyl ether, 361
Phloracetophenone dimethyl ether, 543 Prulaurasin, 721
Phosphorous acid, 794 Prunasin, 721
Phosphorus pentachloride, 781 Prussic acid, 721
"Photoanethole," 510 Pseudo-jonone, 459
Phthalates, 794, 795 Pseudo-irone 468
?
Phthalic acid esters, 794, 795 Pseudonitrosites, 784

Phthalic anhydride, 794, 795, 824 Pseudo-saccharin chloride, 803
Phthalic monoesters, 795 Pulegol, 207, 403, 718
Phyllocladene, 125 (see also Diterpene Pulegone, 400, 404, 405, 416, 480, 810
table) Pyrazoles, 812
Picrates preparation, 788, 789 Pyridinium acetohydrazide chloride, 815
Picric acid, 788, 789, 823 Pyruvic acid, 330, 806
Picrocrocin, 348, 349
Pjmpinellin, 660, 686, 687 Quarternary ammonium salts of hydrazides,
Pinacone. 397 814, 815
3-Pinanol, 237 Quinones, 547
Pinene, 27, 34, 43, 430, 781, 782
Pinene nitrosochloride, 781, 782, 783 Raman effect, 772
<*-Pinene, 49, 54, 62, 70, 444, 708, 775, 777, Raney nickel as catalyst, 778
783 Refractive index, 2
0-Pinene, 49, 62, 70, 232, 233, 347, 777 Regeneration of acids from alkali salts, 827
Pjnocamphcol, 237, 442 Regeneration of alcohols from allophanates,
Pinocamphone, 44 801
Pinocarveol, 231 Regeneration of alcohols from benzole esters,
Pinocarvone, 63, 232, 233, 446, 809 797
Pinpl,
713 Regeneration of alcohols from boric esters,
/3-Pinolene, 74 793
Pinol hydrate, 58, 713 Regeneration of alcohols from phthalic acid
Pinonene, 51 esters, 794
Pinonic acid, 58 Regeneration of aldehydes and ketones from
Pinononic acid, 446 hydrazones (Allen and Gates), 817, 818
Piperjtenone, 416, 417 Regeneration of aldehydes and ketones from
Piperitenone hydrazone, 52 oximes, 810
Piperitol, 20, 211, 396 Regeneration of aldehydes and ketones from
Piperitone, 197, 211, 212, 806, 411, 810 phenylhydrazones, 812
Piperonal, 365, 527, 807 Regeneration of aldehydes and ketones from
Piperonalacetone, 365 sodium bisulfite addition products, 809
Piperonylacetic acid, 527 Regeneration of aldehydes and ketones from
Pipcronylic acid, 365, 366, 527, 530, 601 thiosemicarbazones, 819
Platinum as catalyst, 778 Regeneration of hydrocarbons from hydro-
Podocarprene, 125 (see also Diterpene table) gen halides, 778, 779
Polarographic methods, 772 Regeneration of hydrocarbons from nitroso-
Polymerization, 805 chlorides, 783
Polymyrcene, 9 Regeneration of hydrocarbons from picric
Populene, 752 esters, 789
Potassium dichromate oxidation with, 775 Regeneration of ketones from hydrazones
Potassium permanganate oxidation with, (Girard and Sandulesco), 815, 816
775 Regeneration of phenols from phenolates,
"Prenol," 512 823
Propanol, 305 Rhodinal, 336
p-Propenylanisole, 508 Rhodinic acid, 586
4-Propenylguaiacol, 521 Rhodinol, 178
Propenyl isothiocyanate, 737 Rhodinolic acid, 586
p-Propenylphenol, 512 Rimuerie, 125 (see also Diterpene table)
Propenylpvrocatecholmethylene ether, 529
4-Propenylveratrole, 523 Sabina glycerol, 231
Propionaldehyde, 305, 309, 807 Sabinaketone, 64
Propionic acid, 559, 561, 562, 565 Sabinane, 53
Propionic anhydride, 794 Sabinene, 34 64, 202, 774, 778
/3-Propylacrolein, 306, 319 d-Sabinene glycol, 64
850 INDEX
Sabinenic acid, 64 Sesquiterpenes of unknown constitution,
Sabinol, 230 743, 750
Saccharol, 760 Shairol, 763
Safranal, 848 "Shojunol," 272 760
Safrole, 526, 529 Silver compounds, 819
Sagitol, 762 Silver salts, 827
Salicylaldehyde, 857 Sinalbin, 742
Salicylic acid, 357, 599, 640, 642, 643 Sinalbin mustard oil, 742
Salicylic acid ethyl ester, 642 Sinapine bisulfate, 742
Salicylic acid isoamy ester, 643 Sinigrin, 734
Salicylic acid methyl ester, 640 Sitosterol, 686
"Salvene," 53 Skatole, 491, 728
Sambunigrin, 721 Sobrerol, 58, 63, 713
Santalal, 267 Sodium bisulfite reaction products, 808
Santalaldehyde, 267 Sodium dichromate oxidation with, 775
Santal camphor, 768 Sodium sulfite reaction products, 808
Santalene, 112, 776 Specific gravity, 1
a-Santalene, 113, 114, 115 Specific optical rotation, 1
0-Santalene, 113, 115 Spectrophotometric methods, 772

Santalenic acid, 269 Stearaldehyde, 318
Santalic acid, 61 1 Stearic acid, 318, 577, 579, 580, 581
Santalol, 266, 270, 794, 802 Stearic aldehyde, 31 8
a-Santalol, 266 Strychnine, 794
0-Santalol, 266, 267, 268, 612 Styph nates preparation, 788
Santalone, 494 Styphnic acid, 788, 789
Santcne, 79, 777, 778, 779, 782, 784 "Styracine," 296, 650
Santene hydrate, 80, 229, 776 Styrerie, 14, 780
Santenic acid, 230 Styrene dibromide, 781
Santenol, 80, 229 Styrol, 14
Santenone, 229. 438 Styrolene, 14
Santenone alcohol, 229 Substituted acetohydrazides, 815
Santolinenones, 409, 810 W-Substituted bcnzylamides, 830, 832
Saponification, 831 Substituted hydrazine, 811, 813
Saponification equivalent, 831 a-Substituted-/3-naphthocinchoninic acids
Saponification number,
831 preparation, 807
Scnotten-Baumann reaction, 796 p-Substitutcd phenacyl esters preparation,
Sclareol, 125 (see also Diterpene table) 828
Scdanolie acid, 694 Substituted Semicarbazide,, 811, 818, 819
Sedanolide, 694 Substituted semicarbazones preparation,
Sedanonic acid, 609, 695 818
Sedanonic anhydride, 609, 693 5-Substituted semioxamazides, 81 1
Selinelol, 274 Succinic acid, 592, 688
Selinene, 81, 108, 274, 758, 776, 778, 779 Succinic acid esters, 792
Selinene hydrate, 776 Sulfates, 797
Selinenol, 108, 758 Sulfides, 729, 833
Semicarbazide, 811, 818 Sulfonamides, 788, 823
Semicarbazide hydrochloride, 818 Sulfonates, 797
Semicarbazido-semicarbazone, 819 Sulfonation, 787
Semicarbazones preparation, 818 Sulfones, 730
Semioxamazidc, 811, 820 Sulfonic acids, 730, 797
Senecioic acid, 583 Sulfonyl chloride, 788. 823
Sequoiene, 753 Sulfur, 790
Sesquibenihene, 98 Sulfur-containing compounds, 719
Sesquibenihidiol, 764 Sulfuric acid esters, 787
Sesquibenihiol, 263 Sumbulene, 97, 778
Sesquicamphenol, 271 Sylvcstrene, 32, 49, 778, 779, 782
Sesquichamene, 749 Sylvestrene dihydrochloride, 51, 52
Sesquicitronellene, 83, 259
Sesquicryptol, 759 Tagetenones, 885
Sesquigoyol, 758 Tagetone, 384
Sesquiterpenes, 81, 128, 747 Taiwanol, 768
aliphatic, 83 Tanacetane, 53
bicyclic, 91, 747 Tanacetyl alcohol, 248
monocyclic, 84 Tangeretin, 677
tricyclic, 112, 749 Tangeretol, 677
INDEX 851
Tasmanol, 768 p-Thiocyanophenylhydrazinehydrochloride,

Terephthalic acid, 18, 86, 476 813
Teresantalic acid, 118, 114 Thioether, 729, 730
Teresantalol, 257 Thiol compounds, 790
Terpene hpmologues, lower, 79 Thiosemicarbazide, 819
Terpene nitrosochlorides, 783 Thiosemicarbazido-thiosemicarbazone, 819
Terpenes, bicyclic, 4& Thiosemicarbazones preparation, 819
cyclic, 18 Thiosinamine, 735
mono-cyclic, 18 Thiourethanes preparation, 738
olefinic, 7 d-a-Thujadicarboxylic acid, 75, 428
Terpenes of unknown constitution, 748, 745 d-/3-Thujadicarboxylic acid, 75
Terpin, 28, 187, 191, 200 Thujake tonic acid, 75, 427
m-Terpin, 201 Thujane, 53
frans-Terpin, 200, 201 Thujene, 34, 774
1,4-Terpin, 65, 196, 202, 715 a-Thujene, 53, 75, 202, 249, 250, 746
1,8-Terpin, 200, 715 0-Thujene, 53, 76
Terpinene, 25, 28, 31, 84, 45, 65, 169, 191, Thujone, 248, 423
774, 776, 780, 784, 787 a-Thujone, 249, 250
a-Terpinene, 20, 24, 35, 39, 65, 775, 778, 787 Thujone series, 248
/3-Terpinene, 20, 39 Thujyl alcohol, 248, 426, 794
7-Terpinene, 20, 35, 39, 40 d-Thumbelen, 747
Terpinene dihalogcnides, 65, 76 "Thyme camphor," 500
Terpinene dihydrochloride, 35, 48 "Thymene," 17, 40, 41
Terpinene nitrolamine, 785 Thymohydroquinone, 553, 554
Terpinene nitrosite, 785 Thymol, 17, 399, 416, 417, 499, 500, 504
a-Terpinene nitrosite, 784 Thymoquinhy drone, 554
Terpinene-terpin, 34, 196, 202 Thymoquinol, 553
Tcrpinenol, 34, 196 Thymoquinone, 501, 504, 554
Terpinenol-(l), 197 Tiglic acid, 585
Terpinenol-(4), 198 Tiglic aldehyde, 807
Terpinen-1-ol, 196, 197, 202 a-Tolualdehyde, 353
Terpinen-4-ol, 65, 196, 198, 202 p-Toluene sulfonates, 797, 824
Terpineol, 20, 25, 34, 55, 169, 187, 201, 625, p-Toluene sulfonic esters, 824
776, 782, 784, 792, 802 p-Toluenesulfonyl chloride, 824
a-Terpineol, 187, 188, 626 p-Toluic acid, 18, 476, 483
/3-Terpineol, 187, 193 p-Toluidides, 829
T-Terpineol, 187, 195, 196 p-Tolylhydrazine hydrochloride, 813
Terpin hydrate, 25, 28, 34, 169, 173, 176, Tolyl semicarbazide, 819
187, 189, 201, 776, 792 Torilene, 752
m-Terpin hydrate, 201 Torilene hydrate, 752
Terpinolene, 20, 24, 30, 191, 195, 775, 780, Torreyene, 275
787 Torreyol, 275, 277
Terpinyl acetate, 626 Totarene, 125 (see also Diterpene table)
Terpinyl formate, 625 2,4,6-Tribromaniline, 830
Tetrabromides preparation, 780 Tricycloekasantalol, 267
1,2,4,8-Tetrabromo-p-menthane, 30 Tridecan-dicarboxylic acid, 594
Tetrachlorophthalic anhydride, 796 2-Tridecanone, 378
w-Tetradecanoic acid, 578 l,2,6-Trimethoxy-4-allylbenzene, 534
n-Tetradecyclic acid, 578 2,4,5-Trimethoxybenzaldehyde, 366
Tetrahydroalantolactone, 692 Trimethoxybenzoic acid, 536
A 2-Tetrahydro-n-butylidene phthalide, 609 3,4,5-Trimethoxybenzoic acid, 603
A2-Tetrahydro-n-butyl phthalide, 694 2, 4, 6-Trimethoxybenzoylacetone, 544
Tetrahydrocalamene, 112 l,2,5-Trimethoxy-4-propenylbenzene, 535
Tetrahydrocarveol, 213 l,2,6-Trimethoxy-4-propenylbenzene, 535
Tetrahydrocarvone, 394, 407, 505 Trimethylammonium acetohydrazide chlo-
Tetrahydrocostus lactone, 767 ride, 815
Tetrahydrocumaldehyde, 47
3,7,7-Trimethyl-bicyclo-[2,2,l]-hcptan-3-ol,
Tetrahydrocuminylamine, 46 72
4, 5, 6, 7-Tetrahy dro-3, 6-dimethylbenzofuran,
699 2,6,6-Trimethyl-l ,3-cyclohexadien-l-al, 348
1 1 ,2-Trimethyl-5-cyclohexanone, 467
Tetrahydrofeniculin, 513 ,
Tetrahydroirone, 467 1,1, 2-Trimethyl-5-cy clohexanone-

l,2,3,6-Tetramethoxy-4-allylbenzene, 541 6-carboxylic acid, 467
Tetramethoxybenzoic acid, 541 4-[2,6,6-Trimethyl-l-cyclohexen-l-yl]-
Thioalcohols, 729 3-buten-2-one, 458
852 INDEX
4-[2,6,6-Trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-l-yl]- Undecyl methyl ketone, 378
3-buten-2-one, 458 Ureas, 798
1
3,7, l-Trimethyl-1,6, 10-dodccatrien-3-ol, Urethanes preparation, 798, 800
3,7,ll-Trimethyl-l,6,ll-dodecatrien-3-ol, n-Valeraldehyde, 146, 305, 310

260 Valeric acid, 146, 375, 559, 564, 572
3,7,ll-Trimethyl-2,6,10-dodecatrien-l-ol, Valerophenone-o-carboxylic acid, 609, 610
258 Vanillin, 361. 363, 523, 807
3,7,ll-Trimcthyl-2,6,ll-dodecatricn-l-ol, Vanillin methyl ether, 363
258 Veratraldehyde, 363
Trimethylgallic acid, 534, 603 Veratric acid, 519, 520, 602
2,5,5-Trimethyl-l ,6-heptadicn-4-onc, 386 Verbanone, 445
2,5,5-Trimethyl-2,6-heptadien-4-one, 386 Verbenol, 236, 444, 445
2,5,5-Trimethylheptan-4-one, 387 Verbenone, 236, 237, 444, 810
1,2,6-Trimethylnaphthalene, 472 Verdazulene, 128
/3,|8,7-Trimethyl-pimelic acid, 467 Vetivalene, 457
Trinitrobenzene, 788, 823 Vetivazulcne, 128, 129, 131, 134, 457
2,4,6-Trinitrobenzoyl chloride, 803 Vetivene 124, 776
Trinitrophenol, 788, 789 Vetivenol, 281
2,4,6-Trinitrophenylhydrazme, 813 Vetivenol acetate, 282
Trinitroresorcinol, 788, 789 Vetiveral, 282
Trinitrotoluene, 788, 789 Vetiverol, 281
i>-(Triphenylmethyl)phenylisocyanate, 799 Vetiverol acetate, 282
Trotylates, 788 789 Vetiverone, 454
Tschugaev method, 802 Vetivone, 129, 454
"Tumeronc," 450 Vinyl acetonitrile, 723
Turmerone, 4&0 Vinylbenzene, 14
ar-Turmerone, 450 "Violet leaf alcohol," 164
"Violet leaf aldehyde," 164, 388
Umbelliferone, 659, 666, 677
Umbelliferone farnesyl ether, 676 Wave-length absorption, 772
673
Umbelliferone-4-heptyl ether,
Umbelliferone methyl ether, 667 Xanthates preparation, 802
Umbelliprenin, 676 Xanthic esters preparation, 802
Umbellularic acid, 440, 441 Xanthogenates preparation, 802
Umbellulone, 440, 819 Xanthotoxin, 660, 679
Umbellulonic acid, 441 Xanthotoxol, 678, 684
Uncineol, 755 Xanthotoxol isoamylene ether, 683
ra-Undecane, 7 Xanthoxylin, 543
Undecanoic acid,575 p-Xenylhydrazine, 813
Undecan-2-ol, 156 p-Xenylisocyanate, 799, 825
2-Undecanone, 377 p-Xenyl semicarbazide, 820
1-Undecene-l-carboxylic acid, 325, 326
l-Undecen-10-ol, 166 Zingiberene, 81, 87, 261, 776, 778, 782, 784
Undecyl alcohols, secondary, 156 Zingiberene dihydrochloride, 262
n-Undecylic acid, 379, 575 Zingiberol, 861

Ernest Guenther - Essential Oils Vol II PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ernest Guenther - Essential Oils Vol II PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ernest Guenther - Essential Oils Vol II PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are some methods mentioned for identifying esters?

What are some methods mentioned for identifying esters?

What reaction allows for the direct identification of the acyl group of esters?

What reaction allows for the direct identification of the acyl group of esters?

68074 >

OSMANIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARY

ERNEST GUENTHER, Pn.D,

D. VAN NOSTRAND COMPANY, INC.

TORONTO NEW YORK LONDON

CoPYKHJMT, 1919, I5Y

D. VAN NOSTKANI) COMPANY, INC.

Published simultaneously in Canada by

All Ifii/htx Iff nerved

Thin hook, or any parts thereof, tnai/ not he,

r<- />roilncc<l in amj form irithoitt trrittcn pcr-

I'KINTKI) IN THE UNITKD STATIC OF AMKRICA

to MR. FREDERICK II. LEOMIAKDT,

Fritzschc Brothers, Inc.,

whose vision and generosity made Ihis

DARRELL ALTHAUSEN, Ph.D.

FRANCES S. STERRETT, Ph.D.

frequent reference will be made to the monographs contained in this volume.

so far, either only partially elucidated or entirely unknown.

V. PHENOLS AND PHENOL ETHERS 499

VI. QU1NONES 549

VIII. ESTERS PAGE

IX. LACTONES, COUMARINS, AND COUMARONES 659

X. FURAN DERIVATIVES 699

XI. OXIDES 707

XII. COMPOUNDS CONTAINING NITROGEN AND SULFUR

TERPENES, SESQUITERPENES, AND DERIVATIVES OF

III. KETONES 765

IV. PHENOLS 766

VI. MISCELLANEOUS COMPOUNDS 768

II. ALCOHOLS 791

III. ALDEHYDES AND KETONES 804

VI. ESTERS 831

VII. LACTONES AND ANHYDRIDES 833

The treatises on essential oils published by Semmler in 1907, Wallach in

1914, Parry in 1919, Simonsen in 1931,* and Gildemeister and Hoffmann in

chemist, have been added.

OLD Optical rotation of a compound in a 10-cm. tube and in sodium

[]D Specific optical rotation.* In many instances the literature and

symbol as originally reported.

adopted the following scheme of arrangement:

structural formula for a compound is included. This may be followed by a

Quantitative methods of assaying the more important constituents of essen-

(a) Paraffins. The lowest member group C n H2n +2 identi-

123-124, d 0.7275, n D 1.4060. Octylene probably

been observed as a decomposition product of natural rubber and turpentine

ArthurVogel, "Physical Properties and Chemical Constitution. Aliphatic Hydro-

carbons," /. Chem. Soc. (1946), 133. Chem. Abstracts 40 (1946), 3390.

tetrabromodihydromyrcene m. 88. For the hydrogenation of /3-myrcene with hydro-

(2) By heating to 250-260 in a sealed tube, myrcene is converted into a diter-

Adduct 34- 35 "

Dicarboxylic acid 122-123 12 13 -

Dicarboxylic acid anhydride 206-207 12

Myrcene, in general, is considerably more stable than its isomer ocimene.

polymerides form nitrosites, the latter melting at 163.